This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
University of Virginia Library
AG5 .M38 1920 V.3
ALD The Children's643
encyclopedia;

po
CX 002 147
 Aldermenu .
1916
ZZ

B
-20
in
+
1
 AG
5
.M38
1920
319283
V. 3
THE CHILDREN'S
ENCYCLOPÆDIA

EDITED BY

ARTHUR MEE

VOLUME THREE

Integral parts of THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆMA

are copyrighted in the United States of America,
and all rights of reproduction are reserved

LONDON
THE EDUCATIONAL BOOK CO. , LTD.
192- ?
 aa maamaa.

ONE OF THE MOST BEAUTIFUL CHILDREN PICTURES EVER PAINTED , BY RUBENS

 CONTENTS OF THIS VOLUME
This is a short guide onlyto the principal contents of this volume. It is not possible to
give the titles ofall the Poems and Rhymes, Legends, Problems,
in the Wonder Book , and many other things that come into the colour pages, questions
volume ; but in all
cases are given the pages where these parts of our book begin . The full list of these
things come into the big index to the whole work at the end of the encyclopædia.

THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH PAGE THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ALL COUNTRIES PAGE
The Most Important Elements 1387 Australia, the Great South Land .. 1355
1419 New Zealand, the Beautiful Dominion 1453
The Making of the Elements India , the Pearl of the East 1545
The World Inside an Atom 1553
1665 How India Became an Empire 1695
The Making of Compounds The British Empire in Africa 1765
Three Kinds of Compounds 1797
1869 Outposts of the British Empire 1875
Changes Always Going On
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES CHILD'S BOOK OF EN AND WOMEN
1327 The Great Men of Greece 1 301
Samuel and the Great Change 1467
The First King of Israel 1477 Writers of the Fairy Books
1480 The Men of the Crusades 1585
David the Shepherd King . 1593 The Men Who Mapped the Skies .. 1655
The Psalms of King David 1725
The Reign of King Solomon 1671 The Great Story -tellers
1733 Men of the Great Rebellion • 1887
The End of Solomon's Glory
Elijah and King Abab 1882
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE The Princess's Golden Ball 1317
The Red Cells of the Blood 1383 Gog and Magog 1318
The White Cells of the Blood 1461 Earl's Daughter and Beggarman. 1322
1579 The Fire Goblins 1324
The Heart, the Living Pump 1633 The King of the Golden River 1443 , 1526
Life and the Lungs.. 1787 The Fairy's Revenge 1450
Fresh Air and Healthy Lives
The Skin and Its Uses 1909 The Minstrel Queen of Spain 1450
The Choice of Marpessa .. 1450
The Babes in the Wood 1523
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER The Hungry Fox and the Kitten .. 1525
Where Do Thoughts Come From ? .. 1365 The Proud King of Kamera 1525
Why Can't We See in the Dark ? and 1433 Love Laughs at Locksmiths 1525
What Gives Steam Its Power ? Other 1569 The Forbidden Room 1685
Does the Moon Pull the Sea ? Questions 1675 Lady Anne Grimston 1687
What Makes a Motor -car Go ? 1771 Brave William Tell 1688
What Makes the Rainbow ? .. 1859 Little Stories About Flowers 1691
See index for full list of questions 1692
The Ugly Duckling ,
Guy Fawkes and His Plot . . 1791
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE Jack the Giant Killer 1794
The Great Snake Family 1373 Little Pixies of Land's End 1796
Birds That Cannot Fy 1423 Bank of England Crossing -sweeper 1796
Birds That Serve Us 1513 Bird -Girl with Golden Wings 1796
The Birds of the Ocean 1625 The Lords of the Grey and White Castles .. 1897
1737 Cupid and Psyche 1902
The Birds of Beauty 1839
Nature's Winged Huntsmen The Wishing Table .. 1904
The Treasure of Rhampsinitus 1906
CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS Punch and Judy 1907
The Grass of the Field 1331 Fables of Æsop :
1409 The Lion and the Deer 1451
A Walk by the Seashore
1535 The Fox and the Ass 1451
The Story of the Clock 1451
The Flags of All Nations 1639 The Wasps in the Honey - pot
1749 The Fat and the Lean Fowls 1451
How the Maps are Made The Wolf and the Lamb 1793
The Life of a Sponge 1752
1825 The Snake and the File .. 1793
Footpaths in the Air
The Horse and Groom 1793
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY Tales of Holiday Places :
The Fool on the Stool at Folkestone 1320
How Horatius Kept the Bridge 1395
Old Scarborough .. 1320
The Grandmother's Tale 1485 Hanging the Mayor at Bodmin 1320
The Spanish Armada 1559 The Fairies of the Willey How 1321
The Pet Lamb 1703 The Mermaid of Lizard Head 1321
The Leak in the Dyke 1781 1321
Goblin Market 1849 Robin Round Cap Well ..
The Snake's Parlour 1321
The Goblin Builders of Rochdale 1321
See index for full list of poeins and nursery rhymes
111
 PAGE
CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS PAGE Drawing :
Measuring Things from a Distance 1406
Gulliver's Travels : Putting on a Graduated Wash .. 1502
Gulliver in Lilliput 1 309
Gulliver in the Land of Brobdingnag 1314 Making Simple Patterns with Flowers .. 1622
Scott's Waverley Novels : 1491 Making Circles and Filling Them In 1714
The Right Way to Use Colour .. 1810
1494 1936
Waverley The Way to Draw a Door
1599
Rob Roy 1603
Guy Mannering 1645
THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
Ivanhoe Modeltown :
1649 Completing Modeltown Farm 1351
The Antiqtuary othian ..
The Hear ofMidl 1757 Making Modeltown Railway Station 1611
1760 Finishing Modeltown Railway Station 1817
Old Mortality
The Swiss Family Robinson .. 1915 How to Be Your Own Magician :
The Disappearing Sixpence 1347
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS How the Conjurer Makes His Money 1508
The Gentle Life of Elizabeth Fry .. 1297 The Magician's Jacket 1615
The Vanishing Pillar Trick 1721
The Bird That Napoleon Set Free 1298 1926
The Daughter of Sir Thomas More 1298 The Wandering Halfpenny
A Heroine of the Southern Seas 1475 A Little Garden Month by Month :
The Mother of the Gracchi 1470 What to Do in the Middle of September 1350
A Sacrifice of the Civil War 1476 What to Do at the End of September 1509
Kate Barlass of the Broken Arm .. 1557 What to Do in the Middle of October 1610
1558 What to Do at the End of October 1816
The Climb for the Eaglets .. 64
1558 What to Do in the Middle of November 1930
The Tallow Dip and the Black Salt
A Look That Helped a Fallen Friend 1558 How to Make Our Own Toy Zoo :
Sister Dora and the Toilers of Walsall 1653 The Horse .
1008
The Queen Who Gave Up Her Boy 1654 Problems :
The Boy Who Would Not Fight Freedom 1654 How the Ladies Cut the Carpet .. 1348
The Race from Marathon .. 1803 Little Problems 1349, 1512 , 1616 , 1724
The Men of the Birkenhead 1804 How the Frogs Jumped 1609, 1724
The Swiss Guards Who Did Their Duty .. 1804 What is Wrong in these Pictures ? 1716, 1824
Tales of the Indian Mutiny 1913 What to Do With a Box of Matches 1723 , 1824
The Slave Who Saved His Master 1914
How Did They Lay the Railways ? 1823, 1927
How Was Robinson Crusoe's Table Made ? 1929
CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS Making a Set of Doll's Furniture :
Reading : The Drawing- room and Bedroom 1717
The Different kinds of Pronouns 1401 The Dining-room and the Kitchen 1814
More Pronouns and Verbs 1497 Miscellaneous :
Some More About Verbs .. 1617 The King of the Cucumbers 1 344
The Verb and Its Moods 1709 How Things are Fastened Together 1 345
The Different Kinds of Moods 1805 A Simple Hockey Scarf for Girls 1 348
What an Adverb Is 1931 How to Make Perfume from Flowers 1505
Simple Kites and How to Make Them 1506
Writing :
1402
Embroidering a Pocket -handkerchief 1507
Capital M , N , S , L , and D More Kinds of Wood Joints 1510
Tom and Nora Learn to Write Figures .. 1499 Making a Toy to Measure the Wind 1607
Tom 'and Nora Learn to Write with Ink 1619
Flower -pots Made from Old Tin Cans 1720
ATomNew Way of Writing Figures ..
and Nora Use Smaller Crutches
1710
1806 How to Prepare a Jar of Pot-pourri 1722
Tom and Nora Write Their Letters .. 1932 A Match -box Chest of Drawers , . 1723
An Owl and a Frog Made from Circles 1724
Arithmetic : A Simple Flying Machine 1813
Multiplying Big Figures Together 1403 A Railway Train Built up from Squares 1824
Subtracting Several Numbers at Once .. 1500 Making a Beautiful Tablecloth .. 1921
How Numbers are Divided 1620 How to Frame a Picture .. 1923
How to Divide Big Numbers 1711 What to Do with a Piece of Paper 1925
How to Do Long Division 1807 How to Make a Lavender Bottle 1925
More About Long Division 1934 1927
Measuring the Height of a Tree ..
Music : The Game of Football 1928
The Beautiful Land of Sound 1405
The “ Sleepy Arm " Game of the Fairies 1501
1621
COLOURED PLATES
Two New Games of the Fairies .. Flags of All Nations 1641-44
The Resting Game of the Fairies 1712 The Wonderful Colours of Birds 1741
A First Little Exercise 1808 The Eggs of our Best - Known Birds 1744
The Spaces Between the Notes : 1935 The Old Woman Tossed in a Basket 1857
[ 1938 The Rainbow 1858
French :
For full list of special plates and pages in colour see index
Picture Stories 1408 , 1504, 1624 , 1715 , 1812 ,

PAS
IV
 A The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS

Elizabeth Fry visiting the prisoners in Newgate Prison

THE GENTLE LIFE OF ELIZABETH FRY

And How She Reformed the Prisons
ERHAPS you have
PERHAPS
never visited a
prison . It is strange
o to hear the great gate close
behind you , and to find your
self standing inside of the high
spiked walls which prevent
criminals from making their
escape into liberty . If you have
known this experience, you will
understand how pitiful are those
words in the Church Litany : “ That
it may please Thee to have pity upon
)
all prisoners and captives.' It is
terrible to be a prisoner.
But it was worse, infinitely worse,
to be a prisoner a hundred years ago ;
and for poor women it was so horrible
that no language can describe
their sufferings. Women, innocent or
guilty, those who had been tried by
the judge, and those who still were
awaiting their trial, women of educa-
tion and gentleness, and women so low
CONTINUED FROM 1200 the difficulty of be
coming serious and
good. When some
one asked her about the crime
of a certain prisoner, Mrs. Fry
would answer, “ I never ask
the crimes, for we have all
come short.” It was not of
the crimes she thought , but of the
soul ; she looked into the eyes of
prisoners, not into their records.
This noble lady had heard about
the prisoners in Newgate, and asked
permission to visit them . The first
time she went among them the turn
key accompanied her ; the second
time she went alone. The governor
told her of the danger, and advised
her to leave her watch behind, say
ing that he himself would not dare
to go alone into that seething yard
of crime and sin. But Elizabeth Fry
went alone, and she won the hearts
of the women prisoners by sheer
oOo

that they were lower than animals , kindness and sympathy. For the
all were thrown together into one first time they looked into the eyes of
prison, among desperate and evil men. a good person, who believed that they
And all this was changed by one could be good. That helped them.
noble -hearted woman. She set herself to start a school
In those days there lived a Quaker among these terrible prisoners. The
lady named Elizabeth Fry, who was officials scoffed at the idea, and told
deeply religious, and lived her reli- her it would be a failure. The school
gion by trying to help others. She became a great success. Then she set
believed that bad people would her heart upon giving the prisoners
become good if they were helped interesting employment. Again, the
She herself had once been vain and officials said the idea was impossible.
fond of frivolity. She had known But the industry also became a great

A 1297
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDSure.com
success . Remember that even the angel of the prisons. By her aid all
kindest people in the world will always the prisons of the world became kinder
tell you that every scheme for the lifting and better places. There is not now a
up of fallen people is useless -- and it single woman in gaol who ought not
would be useles ; in their hands. It was to bless the name of Elizabeth Fry.
because Elizabeth Fry knew that her Her idea was that a person who does
schemes would not fail that she carried wrong should be handled in such a way
them to victory. She had faith. She that he does not become worse, but
knew that God is on the side of good, better. Prisons are not for punishment,
and that evil must yield to righteousness. but for improvement. She wanted to
This good woman was the daughter teach the worst person in prison that ,
of a rich man and the wife of aa rich man . if he wished, be could become better.
She might have lived a life of idle Prison is a terrible punishment. To be
enjoyment . She might have sent sub- locked up like aa wild beast is a frightful
scriptions to help good works, and her- indignity. But even in prisons , which
self remained in the comfort of her are necessary - the Spirit of Christ can
home. But every morning when she enter, and the most degraded criminal
woke, her thoughts were : can learn to forget his sufferings in the
Of the hearts that daily break, love and mercy of a Saviour who
Of the tears that hourly fall. understands all his difficulties.
She cared for the vilest ; she sought the Elizabeth Fry proved this, and began
most hopeless. So we find her praying a great work. Our prisons are better ;
on the deck of convict ships, reading but we ought to make prison a place
the Bible in gaol , sitting all night in the which saves everybody who enters it .
condemned cell of a poor woman to be That is what Elizabeth Fry intended ;
hanged on the morrow. She was the that is what you must accomplish .

THE BIRD THAT NAPOLEON SET FREE

THEREisone trivial sceneinthelife
shows of rible hour of panicandsuspense,a. little
of his humanity.
Beaten by the great Duke of Welling-
ton , that master Englishman who
gained a hundred fights, nor ever lost
an English gun,” Napoleon had ridden ,
haggard and helpless, into Paris . Early
in those terrible hours he closeted
hurriedly with a friend named Gour-
gand, and discussed with him what could
be done . Should he surrender to the
English, or make his escape to America ?
While the two men argued in this ter-
excited Gourgand caught it in his hand.
An omen of good fortune ! ” he cried .
Napoleon looked at the poor, fright
ened bird captive in the hand ofa man ,
and said , “ Let it go free . There are
enough unhappy beings in the world ."
It was a touch of mercy. The mighty
conqueror, who had hurled, without a
tear, legions of men to destruction,
could not bear in his terror to look upon
the frightened bright eye of a little bird.
" Let it go free ! Let it go free ! ”

THE DAUGHTER OF SIR THOMAS MORE

NE of the crimes that will be re-
ONE
membered against King Henry VIII .
as long as the world lasts is the murder
of his greatest subject and the noblest
Englishman of that age , Sir Thomas
More. And men chiefly remember this
crime, perhaps, because they were told
in childhood the story of Sir Thomas
More's daughter, the beautiful and
heroic Margaret Roper.
Sir Thomas More was the son of a
judge, Sir John More, and while his
father was yet living, the son was close to him, but none was so faithful
1298
made Lord Chancellor. So he became his
father's chief. But such was the noble
nature of this man , that when on his
way to Court he encountered his father,
he would kneel down before him and
ask his blessing.
He was one of the greatest scholars
of that day, and his stately house at
Chelsea was always crowded with
distinguished people anxious to hear
his bright and wise conversation. His
children and their chiidren were ever
 ta

THE FAITHFUL DAUGHTER OF SIR THOMAS MORE CHEERED THE LAST HOURS OF HER FATHER
to him , so gentle and helpful in trial, She parted from him only to return ,
as the lovely Margaret , wife of William once more flinging her arms impulsively
Roper. about him, and kissing him with such
And when evil times fell , and for an agony of affection that even the
conscience' sake Sir Thomas More was soldiers wept . And when she got home
thrown into prison, it was Margaret who she received a letter from her father
proved his chief comfort . His wife did written in charcoal :
not understand him . “ I never liked your manner better
Why do you live in this filthy than when you kissed me last ; for I
prison with rats and mice,” said am most pleased when daughterly love
she, " when you might sit at the and dear charity have no leisure to
King's right side and enjoy yourself at look to worldly courtesy.”
home ? " The head of this splendid man was
To which the great man replied with set on a pole on London Bridge, but it
a smile : soon vanished. No one knows how,
" I pray thee, good Mrs. Alice, tell but Margaret Roper obtained it in some
me one thing — is not this house as near way, and the news soon got whispered
heaven as my own ? " that she was the thief.
Margaret understood him better, and Then was this gracious lady sum
cheered him in his disposition to defy moned to attend before the King's
the King. But her heart was near council , and there, unaffrighted , she
breaking . After his trial, when he had owned that the head was in her pos
been condemned to death, this daughter session . So noble was her manner in
broke through the soldiers surrounding making this declaration that no man
him , flung her arms about his neck , and dare punish her, and she was allowed
cried : to keep the sacred relic . It was ever
" Oh, my father !—oh, my father ! ” with her , and when she died it was
And he laid his hand on her head and buried in her arms .
blessed her. The next Golden Deeds are on page 1475 .
12,9
 LLLL
NEG LLLLLLLL
SLELA E NS
PILLOLILLOS T H
A
O
D F
A Y S N
G H L D E
IN
TR
G
O
OE CE
F EEKERS
TH
G RIEN
E AT
TH

2
cen
a,the
ste
i,the nretre
dow
Gre .of sits
rig
the
psnng
omiht
ece
Cmen
gre the o
;
Pyt
and n ir
at
hag orass
geo .,rRo in
,pal Dem
areeac ocr
eprmet
me
hin
ace
e's
nde itu
esery
gnts
ede ath
s
tArc is Pop
the
of
wal
the
on U.
hel
his
in elohim
met
ls
erswrne
ade
Both
.Aa, Rap Alc
by a
,
Xen
to nd
nd
ain
rce ibi
hae
ted
sil
oph
ho
ens aus
lons
PEpi ,toAth
tal “tal
pSch
Soc
"T,of
ofareyrr
he
kskin
ool
cur
rateg
us
es
Ahis,t, Thi left
the
pic ris
O.dis tur
nht pus
stiples
cip
ir
arig,abo
Dio the
Ari ond
and ve
ith
sto
gen es
rig
the l,ste
t,the ies
w,Pla
ps
onht to tle
.Her O aclitus
 SMAKE
The Child's Book of
PEARE MEN E WOMEN MIL
TON

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

THERE were three peoples in ancient times who in one way or another
THERE
did much to shape the history of the nations that lived after them .
These three were the Hebrews, of whom we read in the Bible ; the Romans,

RUBENS
about whom we have read already ; and the Greeks, about whom we read
in these pages . Indeed , there are some people who declare that if anyone
says or thinks of anything very wise or very beautiful, we shall find that
there was some Greek who said or thought of the very same thing more
than 2,000 years ago . Moreover, it is remarkable that nearly all of the
greatest of the Greeks belonged to one city, Athens, so that, out of the eleven
men about whom we have to read here, six were Athenians, and the eleven
number among them not only some very great statesmen , and one of the
greatest of all soldiers, but also three of the wisest men who ever lived .

NAP
OLE
THE GREAT MEN OF GREECE WEL
ON .
LIN
picall
We with
will begin CONTINUED FROM 1257
“ Cresus , the
Solon , King ." But Solon
the Athenian . For
said , “ Tillus, the
it was he who set the Athenian ; for he lived
State of Athens in order, so honourably, and begat noble
that after his time it was
sons and fair daughters ; and
difficult for the rich people , at the last he fell in battle
CRO or people proud of their high gloriously, having given victory DAR
birth, to oppress those who were to his country .” Then, Crosus WIN

poor and humbly born. When he
was a young man he travelled much ;
and, returning to Athens, he soon
won fame by persuading his country-
men not to submit to their enemies,
asking, “ And the next ? " Solon
made answer, “ Cleobis and Biton,
whose mother prayed the gods to
grant the best of all gifts to her
sons for the utter love and tender

and by leading them successfully in
battle. Then , when there was great
discontent and trouble between the
rich and the poor, both asked Solon
to make new laws which would be
fair to both , and he made them
promise that they would not change
his laws for ten years without his
leave . And when he had made the
new laws he went away, knowing
that if he stayed many would ask
him to change the laws again ; but
BE
ness they had shown to her ; and
on the morrow the twain were found
dead. For he is happiest who dies
most happily ; and no man may
be counted happy until he is dead .”
But of Solon's own dying we know
only that he was full of years and
honour .
But we may be assured that he
would have accounted happy Leo
nidas, the Spartan, who comes into
our talk for one most glorious deed .
STONE
SVING

that after ten years they would have For when the King of Persia made
learnt that the laws were good, and war upon the Greeks , and marched
Hd33

would not wish to change them . And against them , as men say, with the
so it fell out .
The story is told how he showed his
greatest
he must army
make that everinto
his way wasGreece
seen ,
wisdom when he came in his travels through a mountain pass which is
to the Court of Cræsus, the King of called Thermopylæ . And here,
Lydia, who was one of the mightiest because the way is so narrow that
CLAD
kings, and the richest in the world . but four men could march into it
ISTO
NE Croesus, having shown Solon his together, the Greeks could have held RUS
KIN
great riches, asked him who he jim at bay with an advance guard
thought was the happiest of men, of but a fe :v thousand men, till all
counting that he would answer , their forces should be gathered ;

JULIUS CASAR os SHERBERT SPENCER

1301
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN --XX
Te
and at the head of these was set should do battle with the Persians by
sea ; for if they beat them on the sea,
t rta
theBuSpa n kin
when , s
it gwa as,. after the then the Persians,being so far from their
nidnd
Leofou
Greeks had already beaten back an own country , would find themselves
attack , that there was another way , so in danger by land also . The Greeks
that a Persian host might pass behind of the south , which is called Pelopon
them and attack in great numbers, nesus, thinking their own land secure ,
then Leonidas sent back most of his were not eager to fight by sea, but
sure of win
army , seeing that thoseerwh o medde at Theng tocles was SO
Thermopylæ must be ov whelabo . ni mis
, that when some of the Greeks
talked of sailing away, he sent a mes
NS AT THER PYLÆ
sage to the Persians bidding them
BuBAC
t heK THE PERSIAee
, with thr hu ndred MO
men of send ships and block up the way of
ta and seven hundred from Thespiæ ,
Sparlv ed d in
escape, prrdetending that he had goodr
reso that they woul rema and die will towa them . So when the othe
at the post . And when one said that Greeks found there was no other way ,
ir
ey went out to battle against the they made readyhtfor a seatle
if thia fight.
Pers ns the very sun would be hidden Then was foug the bat of Salamis,
from them by the flights of the Persian which was won chiefly by the skill and
arrows , answer was made , “ The better , valour of the Athenian fleet, led by
Themistocles . And the battle of Sa
(
for so we shall fight in the shade .”
Then Leonidas would wait no longer lamis really decided the war, though
behind the ramparts that had been afterwards there was another great
built ; but he and his men, having battle by land , in which also the Greeks
made ready as if they were going to were victorious . But in later days
some festival, marched out in battle Themistocles quarrelled with the Athe
array and charged across the open nians, and betook himself to the King
of Persia , making pretence of friendli
upon the myriads of the Persians , and ness ; and he died in Persia , having
slew lasma
the nythe
t of thoirusa
ownnds of er
numb emd bef
thha ore.
fallen taken poison, men said , to kill himself.
POWEREUDOFAPEREDES
So that the fame of Leonidas and his ATHENS BECOMESTHE
three hundred Spartans tand the seven After Themistocles had gone from
ageds, The
the dre
hun likespi trumpe
a ans has -cal
runl, gto acr ds
deeoss Athens, the guidance of the affairs of
of valour from that day until now . the city came, before very long , into the
Yet it was not Leonidas , the Spartan , hands of a great statesman named
Pericles . Now he, like Themistocles ,
Theomistoc
wh rth,rew
oveles AtheniPer
the the ; nsfor
ansia , but
the saw that the greatness and the power of
numbers that Leonidas had slain at Athens depended on the strength of her
Thermopylæ was but a tiny part of the fleet ; and he made it his aim to set
Persian king's army which set forth Athens at the head of the sea-going
against the Greeks. Now , they would states , so that all should be, not exactly
have had a hard task to fight their her subjects, but united in a league of
way across the narrow isthmus of which she was the acknowledged chief.
Corinth into the south of Greece , but Under his guidance Athens increased
Athens lay an easy prey for them . not in power only, but in wealth
and beauty and knowledge. For the
THEMIS TOCLESD MAK ES A niENS ONG greatest of sculptors , Phidias, and great
WINS ATH STR
BA TT LE- poets such as Sophocles lived at Athens ,
is veryANcle
ThBY ver Athe an , Th em is
tocles , however , had seen that his city and it became the most beautiful city
might become very powerful if she in the world ; and the wisest of the men
had a great fleet ; and by his counsel and women of the time were the friends
the Athenians had built many ships, of Pericles. There are many people who
and had become the most skilful sailors think that of all Greek statesmen he
of all the Greeks. And now the men was the greatest , and certainly there was
of Athens went to their ships, having none who did more for the good of his
set their women and children on an own city of Athens. 'And yet not
island hard by ; and it was now the Pericles nor any other thought of trying
counsel of Themistocles that they to unite the Greeks into one great
TUTTUU

YATZYCETTU 1302
ERRETTIINTENSIVELY
Canina hranan TELITALLONILAILLECONTENTWRUAILERGJISE . SEEmnt

THE CONQUESTS OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT

TURINYRTTIMETRU

Alexander, the son of King Philip of Macedon, succeeded to his father's kingdom when quite a young man.
He led a small army of the Greeksagainst the vast host of Persians under Darius, and won three great victories.
This picture shows the final victory at Arbela over an army which is said to have numbered a million men

UNDE
INSTRUMERRETETE
KRYTTERKUATRE

After the battle of Arbela, Alexander entered Babylon, the most famouscity of the Old World, and met with no
resistance. He was always very considerate of the religion of the nation he conquered, and on entering Babylon,
as seen in this picture, he offered the customary sacrifices, and commanded the temple of Bel to be rebuilt.
to DOMU veron
1303
1
 « THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN :
nation , which could act in harmony ;
but all the cities remained separate , so
that there were endless strifes and
rivalries between city and city.
Of all these rivalries the greatest was
between Athens and Sparta . For Sparta
thought to set herself over all theGreeks;
but Athens, with Pericles guiding her,
would not suffer Sparta to rule after
this fashion, and gave aid to other
cities which would not obey the Spar-
when Epaminondaswaswarring against
Sparta , there was a great battle at
Martinea, and the Spartans wererouted .
In the hour of victory Epaminondas
received a mortal wound, and, in their
grief at the loss of their loved chief,
his men had no care to pursue the foe ;
nor was any left after him to carry on
his work as a statesman or even as a
soldier, so that the strifes and rivalries
of the Greek states continued. 1

tans, and
hour there
of the death war,
was of Pericles, in the
so thatand for THE COMING OF KING PHILIP OF MACEDON
AND HOW HE TRIED TO RULE GREECE
some while after, it seemed as though While the Greek states continued
Athens might become the leader of to waste themselves in their rivalries,
all the Greeks. But after him there there was being built up northward,
was none who could see so clearly and in Macedon, a powerful kingdom,
rule so wisely as he ; and Athens was which was Greek, too, although it
worsted, through striving to make a had been less civilised than the rest
wider empire than she was fit for. of Greece . The building up of the
Thus the Spartans won the chief power of Macedon was for the most
power, so that nearly all the states of part the work of the crafty King
part
Greece had to bow to their will, though Philip, and soon men began to see that
they were not altogether subject to her. Philip meant to make Macedon the head
And then it was not Athens, but a of all the Greek peoples. Moreover, to
neighbour state called Thebes, which some it seemed that Philip would not
set Sparta at defiance, and for aa short be content with that, but intended really
time became the most powerful of the to make himself master of the whole
Greek states. land . Therefore the great orator De
FRIENDS WHOOFSAVED GREECE mosthenes
THERMO THE tried hard tomake the people
of Athens oppose the plans of Philip.
This was due mainly to two men Now , this Demosthenes was one of
—Pelopidas and Epaminondas—who the most wonderful orators in the
were very dear friends ; but most world , so that to this day people study
of all to Epaminondas. Pelopidas his speeches in order to learn how to
was a man of great wealth, very gener: speak so as to persuade multitudes of
ous, a very daring soldier, and well people. It is said that he made himself
beloved. But Epaminondas was poor. so good a speaker that he could speak
Yet , of the two, Epaminondas did quite distinctly with pebbles in his
more ; for, in the first place, he did not mouth, and could recite poetry aloud
care about his own greatness at all; and , though he was running uphill ; and
in the second place, he did not seek to he studied very hard so as to learn the
make Thebes great only for the sake best possible way of expressing what
of Thebes, but that his city might ever he wished to say.
deserve well of all the Greeks. And he POEMOSTHENES
HOWDRIVEN THE ORATOR WAS
trained himself in body and mind , so EXILE
that there was nothing he could not do Now , Demosthenes could not make
well, whether to persuade men by the Athenians strong enough to resist
speech, or to fight valiantly himself, or Philip ; still , he spent the best part of
to train an army and lead it in war. his life in trying to encourage the
And when the Thebans chose him , with Athenians and to persuade other Greek
his friend Pelopidas, to lead them , he states to help them . The speeches
gave defiance to Sparta, whose soldiers which he made against Philip are called
6
were thought to be invincible, and by the “ Philippic Orations,” and so when
his skill as a general he overthrew them other people make speeches of the
CULLA

at the battle of Leuctra, though their same kind they are called “ Philippics."
LEAA

numbers were the greater. And the After Philip was dead , and when
Thebans won freedom for other states his son Alexander the Great was in
from the tyranny of Sparta. But at last, Asia, the Regent of Macedon caused
Document DOOZTCOOLZ DURUORDRE
1304
 aananaananaananaatanammanamanasramaanaananaananaananaanaa
THE LAST HOURS OF TWO GREAT . MEN

Socrates was theman of thought, one of the wisest teachers among the Greeks. He was a very ugly old man,
but won many friendsand followers. He taught that the greatest thing in the world was knowledge, and that
the most important kind of knowledge was for a man to know himself. The Athenians, however, did not like
his influence over the young men, so they condemned him to poison himself by drinking hemlock, as seen here.
-யாயமயமானயானை

Alexander the Greatwasthe manof action and energy. During ten years he led a mighty army and conquered
Persia, Egypt, and Phænicia, and even marched on to India, where he defeated a brave king named Porus
No king had ever before ruled over so vast an empire as Alexander, who is said to have sighed for other
worlds to conquer. When only thirty -three years old, however, he died of fever, and his empire fell to pieces.
HOTTE DOO
1305
 IRO -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Demosthenes to be sent away from
Athens ; but afterwards the Athenians
revolted and Demosthenes came back .
The Macedonians had him driven out
again , but when his enemies went in
pursuit of him he knew that he would
be put to death, and so he chose rather
to die by taking poison himself.
CONQUEROR OF ALL THE KNOWN WORLD
During the last twelve years of the
life of Demosthenes, Alexander the
Great , the son of Philip of Macedon,
made himself one of the most famous
conquerors of all time, though he was
only thirty -three years old when he died.
For he had already learned war-like
skill from Philip ; and Philip , when he
had made Macedon the chief of the
Greek states, had already planned that a great many books ; but Socrates
the Greeks should send an army to make
war on the great kingdom or empire
of Persia, although the Persian king's
dominions reached all the way from the
borders of India to the Mediterranean
Sea, and even Egypt belonged to him ;
and the Greeks could only send a very
small army against his great one.
Still, when Alexander was only twenty-
9 laugh at ; and , besides that, Plato
three, he led his army into Asia Minor,
which was the western part of the
dominions of King Darius of Persia ,
and there he routed the Persians at
the battle of the Granicus. Then
Darius met him with another great
army at Issus, and was routed again.
After that, Alexander decided first to
conquer the western lands completely,
and he overthrew the cities of Phænicia,
which is just on the north of the
Holy Land , and then Egypt made
submission . Then he marched again
against Darius, and overthrew him
utterly at Arbela ; and soon after that
Darius was murdered.
DEATS SONQUERSBREAK
THECONQUEROR AND
But when Alexander had conquered " who were usually good -looking, found
the whole Persian Empire he was still
not satisfied , but marched on into India ,
and there he overthrew a brave Indian
king who was called Porus ; so that no
king in the world before Alexander had
ever been the lord of so vast an empire.
All this Alexander did in ten years. But
he had no chance of doing more, for very
soon after he died of a fever, and the
generals of his army divided the
great empire up among themselves.
Tror DUI TEXT BOX TEZ TOUR DU UN
1306
uscate
Between the time of Pericles and the
time cf Alexander there lived three
of the very wisest among all men. The
first was Socrates, who was born just at
the time when Pericles was becoming
well known in Athens ; and the next
Was Plato ; and the third was
Aristotle. They were all philosophers,
which means, in the first place, lovers of
wisdom ; and that is a name given to
people who care more about knowing
what is true and good than about
worldly success , and try to help other
people how to think, which is a
very much more difficult thing than
scme people suppose.
PLATO AND SOCRATES, THE LEADERS OF
Now , both Plato and Aristotle wrote
wrote no . books at all. However, we
know a good deal about him ; because,
for one thing, a man named Xenophon ,
who admired him very much , wrote a
book about him ; and, for another thing,
there was a great dramatist at Athens
who used to laugh at him , and bring
him into his plays for other people to
has shown us still more clearly what
kind of man he was ; for Plato wrote
a great many of his books in the form
of " dialogues,” or conversations, in
which Socrates is supposed to be talk
ing to other people.
And though we may be pretty sure
that, when Plato wanted to teach people
something, he often pretended that it
was Socrates from whom he had learned
it , though he had really thought of it
himself, still, we know from that the
kind of way in which Socrates must
have been in the habit of talking, and
that he was not only wise and good,
but witty as well , and that his friends
loved him deeply .
It was a curious thing that the Greeks,
it difficult to believe that anyone could
be both wise and ugly ; but Socrates
was quite ugly. Still, he was strong
and sturdy, and when he had to go to
fight in the Athenian armies he was a
good soldier. But there was one very odd
thing about him , which was that now
and then he would suddenly fall into
a trance, and stop quite still , un
conscious of anything that was going
on about him ; and then the trance
DOLOR SIT
DO TEOOTUX UTVUOY TO OUTUOTO
 Casinca modern . TTERY CELEBRATE MIR teine GLOC ALERT

TWO OF THE WISEST -MEN OF GREECE

ETI

Plato and Aristotle, whom we see here walking down the steps of the famous School of Athens, were the most
famous philosophers of the Old World . Plato, a disciple of Socrates, is pointing upwards to heaven, indicating
that his teaching treated more of the poetical and spiritual, while Aristotle, the pupil of Plato, is pointing to the
earth, indicating that his teaching dealt with Nature and the understanding of the world . The word on the
book in Plato's hand means “ I reverence," and that on Aristotle's means Ethics ” or “ Morals," about
which he taught. Both philosophers used to lecture to their followers in a school outside Athens, and
Raphael, oneof the world's great painters, has painted them here coming together from this school.
1307
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
would come to an end, and he would to look at things in Plato's way and
go on just as if nothing had happened. sometimes in Aristotle's way — but none
Now , Socrates thought that the most can help doing it in the same sort of
important thing in the world to geć is way as one or the other of them-it is
knowledge and the most important sometimes said that all philosophers are
kind of knowledge is to know yourself, either Patonists or Aristotelians, even
because the better you know yourself, though they may not think so them
the more you see how little you really selves. For Plato thought in the way
know, and how much of what you think that poets think, and Aristotle thought
you know may be quite wrong. in the way that men of science think.
HOWOSOCRA TES WAS CONDEMNED TO DIE
MAKING
It is a curious thing that Aristotle
did so much to teach men how to set
And by always asking people why they about finding out the way in which
thoughtthis or that, he setthem think . Nature works, that a time came
ing and trying to see the reason of hundreds of years later - when people
things. But people who had no good began to think it was really wicked to
reason for what they thought got say that Aristotle could have ever made
annoyed , and when they found young a mistake. And, on the other hand,
men beginning to say that things were many people have found that, though
wrong which they had been in the habit they were Christians, they understood
of calling right, they said that Socrates their own religion all the better when
was corrupting the young Athenians. they had studied the teachings of Plato,
So Socrates was brought before the though he died more than three hundred
judges for misleading people
people—-- just
just years before Jesus was born.
as at the time of the Reformation THEANCIENT
ST
LAST
LA OF THE MEN WITH THE
people used to be tried and punished SPIRIT OF GREECE
for teaching what was called heresy ; After those days the Greek states
and he was condemned to death , and seemed to lose their power of giving the
was made to drink hemlock. But his world men of the greatest kind ; they
friends were allowed to see him when seemed to be depressed by the leader
he took the poison ; and all the time he ship of Macedon ; and a long time
was dying he talked cheerfully to them , afterwards they were swallowed up in
having no fear of death ; and his talk the great Roman Empire . But there is
was chiefly intended to help them to one man who lived not very long before
feel sure, as he was himself, that we that happened whose name deserves to
have souls which are immortal, and do be remembered . This was Philopamen ,
not die when our bodies die . who was afterwards called “ the last
AND of the Greeks,” which meant that he
ARISTOTLE, THE PUPIL OF PLATO was the last of the men of importance
Plato was one of the young men who who showed the old Greek spirit of
were disciples of Socrates, and he went fearless courage and high -minded
on teaching people afterwards what he patriotism. He tried to persuade the
had learned from Socrates, and a good different cities of Greece that they
deal more which he saw must be true ought to think of each other not as
if what he had learned from Socrates rivals, but as one nation .
were true. The books that he wrote are Philopæemen was famous for daring
very wise, but are written in such a and skilful leadership in time of war,
delightful way that anyone who can and was honest and free from self
understand them loves them-though seeking. Once, when he arrived at an
sometimes they are very difficult indeed inn, the inn -keeper's wife thought that
to understand,because the things he tried he was Philopomen's servant, and set
to explain still puzzle very wise people. him to lay the table and wash the dishes,
After Plato came Aristotle, who until her husband came in and recognised
was a pupil of Plato's, tutor to him . In the end he was thrown from
Alexander the Great. He, too, wrote his horse, taken prisoner, cast into a dun
many books ; but he did not look at geon underground, and poisoned ; and in
things quite in the same way as Plato, this way died “ the last of the Greeks.”
and because people who love knowledge The next stories of men and women
for its own sake are sometimes inclined begin on page 1467 .
DUTY
1308
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
FEW years after “ Robinson Crusoe" was published , one of the greatest
A satirical stories in our language appeared. This was “ Travels into Several
Remote Nations of the World ," the author of which called himself “ Lemuel
Gulliver.” The first part appeared in 1726. It was written just like a book of
real travel, but its purpose was to satirise the England of that time, to laugh
at its follies. The story is extraordinary, and people liked it because it was so
unusual. It has been a favourite with young folk for many generations, as the
adventures it describes are so quaintly impossible that they are interesting quite
apart from their inner meaning. The author was the Rev. Jonathan Swift, Dean
of St. Patrick's, Dublin . In our description we shall use the original words as
often as possible, to show the style of the writing. Lilliput is meant for England,
and the war with Blefuscu about the eggs is meant to ridicule the stupid reasons
nations had for making war, even so near our own time as the reign of George I.

GULLIVER IN LILLIPUT
How He Became a Captive of the Little People
EMUEL GULLIVER within his depth, and
L tells us that his CONTINUED FROM 1237 so reached the shore.
father had a small We may let Gul
estate in Nottingham liver tell his own story
shire, and that he was the as nearly as possible in the
BOEK
third of five sons. He was original words whenever we can ;
bound apprentice to an and so we shall hear how he
eminent surgeon in London , fared after he succeeded in
and his father now and then getting safe, though exhausted,
sending him small sums of money, to the land.
he laid them out in learning naviga- “ I lay down on the grass and slept .
tion, as he believed that some day when I awaked I was unable to stir.
he would travel, and this knowledge My arms and legs were fastened to
would be useful to bim . He did the ground ; my hair was tied down
become surgeon successively in two in the same manner . I felt several
ships, and made several voyages to ligatures and bindings across my
the East and West Indies. His His body. I could only look upwards.
hours of leisure on these voyages were The sun began to grow hot , and the
spent in reading the best authors ; light offended my eyes. I heard a
and, when he was ashore, in observ- confused noise about me. In a little
ing the manners of the people, as while I felt something alive moving
well as learning their language. on my left leg, and, advancing gently
Gulliver afterwa ds accepted an forward over my breast, it came almost
offer from Captain Prichard, master of up to my chin . Bending my eyes
the Antelope, who was making a downwards as much as I could, I
voyage to the South Sea, and set perceived it to be a human creature
sail from Bristol, May 4th, 1699. not six inches high, with a bow and
They were driven by a storm to the arrow in his hands, and a quiver at
north -west of Van Diemen's Land, his back .
where they were tossed on a rock . “ In the meantime, I felt at least
Six of the crew, of whom Gulliver was forty more of the same kind follow
one, launched a lifeboat and got into ing the first. I roared so loudly that
it , but in about half an hour it was they all ran back in a fright ; and some
upset. What became of his com of them (I was afterwards told) were
panions he did not know, but he swam hurt with the falls they got by leaping
as fortune directed him ; and when he from my sides upon the ground.
was almost gone he found himself However, they soon returned. I lay
AMUDD BELAINE
1300
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKSULAR XILOXANEIX
all this while in great uneasiness . At of meat, which had been provided and
length, struggling to get loose, I broke sent thither by the King's orders, upon
the strings, and wrenched out the pegs the first intelligence he received of me.
that fastened my left arm to the ground. “ I observed there was the flesh of
There was a great shout In an instant several animals, but could not dis
I felt about a hundred arrows discharged tinguish them by the taste . There were
on my left hand, which pricked me like shoulders, legs, and loins, shaped like
so many needles... Besides, they shot those of mutton, and very well dressed ,
another flight into the air, as we do but smaller than the wings of a lark.
bombs in Europe, some of which fell GUULLIVER DRINKS AT ONE DRAUGHT NO
LLESS THAN 108 LILLIPUTIAN GALLONS !
on my face, which I immediately covered
with my left hand. I then thought it “ I ate them by two or three at a
the most prudent method to lie still. mouthful , and took three loaves at
“ When the people observed that I a time, about the bigness of musket
was quiet, they discharged no more bullets. They supplied me as fast as
arrows ; but by the noise I heard I they could, showing a thousand marks
knew their numbers had increased ; of wonder and astonishment at my
and about four yards from me, over bulk and appetite. I then made
against my right ear, I heard a knocking another sign that I wanted drink.
for above an hour. Turning my head as ' They found by my eating that aa small
66

well as the pegs and strings would per- quantity would not suffice me ; and,
mit me, I saw a stage erected, about a being a most ingenious people, they
foot and aa half from the ground, capable slung up with great dexterity one of
of holding four of the inhabitants, their largest hogsheads, then rolled it
with two or three ladders to mount it , towards my hand, and beat out the top.
whence one of them , who seemed to be I drank it off at a draught , which I
a person of quality, made me a long might well do, for it did not hold half
speech, whereof I understood not one a pint (though 108 Lilliputian gallons),
syllable. and tasted like a small wine of Bur

How THE LILLIPUTIANS FED THE MAN- gundy, but much more delicious. They
MOUNTAIN brought me a second hogshead, which
“ But, before he began, he cried out I drank in the same manner, and made
three times, whereupon about fifty of signs for more but they had none to
the inhabitants cut the strings that give me.”
fastened the left side of my head , After this, Gulliver tells us that he
which gave me the liberty of turning it went to sleep , and slept for about eight
to the right, and of observing the hours, the Lilliputians having dabbed
person and gesture of him that was to his face and hands with an ointment
speak. He appeared to be of middle age, which removed all smart of their arrows.
and taller than any of the other three FIFTEEN HUNDRED HORSES DRAW THE
who attended him . He acted every MAN - MOUNTAIN TO THE CAPITAL
part as an orator, and I could observe By the Emperor's orders the
many periods of threatenings, and others physicians had mingled a sleeping potion
of promises, pity, and kindness. in the wine given to Gulliver , who
" I answered in a few words, but in supplies an entertaining description of
the most submissive manner, lifting the way in which he was conveyed to
up my left hand, and both my eyes to the Lilliputian capital on an engine
the sun, as calling him for aa witness ; contrived by a small army of engineers
and, being almost famished with hunger, and carpenters, and drawn by fifteen
I put my finger frequently on mymouth hundred of the Emperor's largest
to signify that I wanted food. The horses. There was outside the capital
Hurgo ( for so they call a great lord, an ancient temple, the largest in the
as I afterwards learnt) understood me kingdom . The great gate was about
very well. He descended from the four feet high and two feet wide, and
stage, and commanded that several through this he managed to creep. To
ladders should be applied to my sides, the portal of this temple he was for a
on which above an hundred of the in- time chained by his left leg.
habitants mounted and walked towards Some hundred thousand of the in
my mouth , laden with baskets full habitants came out to view him, and
UCUCUZIXEDOUT
1310
 ZGA XZOGELIG OG TAKZE TEEZERITORIUGIL Y A AXLOCA CROCODILEX

GULLIVER · BOUND AND GULLIVER FREE

ORDITO
SI

Gulliver had been driven ashore from a wreck on to the coast of a strange land, which turned out to be
Lilliput. As he lay asleep, the Lilliputians, none of whom was bigger than one of Gulliver's fingers, found him
and secured him to the earth with numerous ropes and pegs. But when he awoke and began towrench himself
free, he shook many of the little people off him like Aies, and they had to attack him with whole regiments
of archers to make him lie quiet before they conveyed him, with infinite labour, to the capital of Lilliput

Com

ை
வக

UVUVAS

It was no easy matter for Gulliver to accept the king's invitation to inspect the royal palace, as he could not step
over thehouses and walls without knocking some of them down. But at length, by making a stool out of some
of the trees he found growing in the royal park, he was able to step across without damaging the buildings
ET

though in order to look into the rooms in the upper storeys be had to lie down in the great square of the palace.
UN

The queen came out on her balcony, and, smiling very graciously upon him, gave him her hand to kiss
******** 131 I WEWE on www.semproniumBURYBURTURINY
 NADOOOOO
THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS.COM
his guards numbered ten thousand . He and alleys, which I could not enter,
continued to lie on the ground of the are from twelve to eighteen inches.
temple for about a fortnight, when the The town is capable of holding five
Emperor caused a bed to be made for hundred thousand souls. The houses
him , six hundred beds of the common are from three to five storeys, the
measure being used for this purpose. shops and markets well provided.
An Imperial proclamation was issued. The Emperor's palace is in the centre
obliging all the villages nine hundred of the city. It is enclosed by a wall
yards round the city to provide the two feet high, and twenty feet distant
prisoner with food and drink, payment from the buildings.
for which was to be made from the ULLIVER CANNOT WALK IN THE PALACE
Imperial treasury. The allowance stipu- С" FOR FEAR OF KNOCKING IT DOWN
lated for was sufficient for the support “ The outward court is a square of forty
of one thousand seven hundred and feet , and includes two other courts ; in
twenty- eight Lilliputians. the inmost are the Royal apartments.
An establishment of six hundred The buildings of the outer were at least
domestics was also arranged for him . five feet high, and it was impossible for
Further, three hundred tailors were me to stride over them without infinite
appointed to make him a suit of clothes damage to the pile, though the walls
after the fashion of the country. The were strongly built of hewn stone, and
land appeared, he says, like aa continued four inches thick .
garden , and the enclosed fields, which “ At the same time the Emperor had a
were generally forty feet square , re- great desire that I should see the magni
sembled so many beds of flowers. ficence of his palace ; but this I wasnot
Proclamations were issued directing able to do until three days after, which
all who had beheld the Man -Mountain , I spent in cutting down with my knife
as he was called in the language of the some of the largest trees in the Royal
country, to return home and not pre- park about a hundred yards distant
sume again to come within fifty yards from the city . Of these trees I made
of his house without licence from the two stools, each about three feet high,
Court, “ whereby the ecretaries of and strong en righ to bear my weight.
State got considerable fees .” “ The people having received notice a
IVER AT THE ROYAL PALACE OF second time, I went again through the
GULLLILLIPUT
city to the palace, with my two stools
One day the Emperor desired Gulliver in my hands. When I came to the side
to stand up like the Colossus,with his legs of the outer court I stood upon one stool,
apart , marched his troops under him . and took the other in my hand. This
The troops so engaged numbered three I lifted over the roof, and gently set it
thousand foot and a thousand horse. down on the space between the first and
At last , upon certain conditions, second court, which was eight feet wide.
Gulliver was given his liberty, and was I then stepped over the buildings very
allowed to see the capital. The people conveniently from one stool to the other,
had notice by proclamation of his and drew up the first after me with a
design to visit the town, which was hooked stick .
surrounded by a wall two feet and a " НЕ EMPRESS OF LILLIPUT IS VERY
half high, and at least eleven inches GRACIOUS TO GULLIVER
broad, and flanked with strong towers “ By this contrivance I got into the
ten feet apart. inmost court, and, lying down upon my
" I stepped over the great western gate side, I applied my face to the windows
(he tells us ), and passed very gently, and of the middle storeys, which were left
sideling, through the two principal open on purpose, and discovered the
streets, only in my short waistcoat, for most splendid apartments that can be
fear of damaging the roots and eaves imagined. There I saw the Empress
with the skirts of my coat . The garret and the young princes in their several
windows and tops of houses were so lodgings, with their chief attendants
crowded with spectators that I thought about them . Her Imperial Majesty was
in all my travels I had not seen a pleased to smile very graciously upon
more populous place. The two great me, and gave me out of the window her
streets are five feet wide. The lanes hand to kiss ."
QUEIXOU DZIR
1312
 WOOLLI
P
Rp

mm
THE ARMY OF LILLIPUT MARCHES PAST

One of the most curious incidents in Gulliver's sojourn among the Lilliputians was when the Emperor of Lilliput
had the happy idea of making Gulliver stand up like the great Colossuis statue with his legs apart , and marched
the royal army of 300,000 foot and 1,000 horse between the gigantic legs of the captive Man- Mountain.
trong EXIMIZE DOENTES TEXYYTTTTTTTTTTTTTT manurtnnnnnnuuthuuemurmur
1313
B
 LEGO THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
But a little while after Gulliver found Gulliver, having expressed his readi.
that there were two struggling parties ness to defend the person and state of
in the Empire of Lilliput, under the the Emperor of Lilliput against all
names of Tramecksan and Slamecksan, invaders, captured the feet of Blefuscu
from the high and low heels on their by the simple plan of swimming out to
shoes, by which they distinguished them- meet it and fastening cords to each boat ,
selves. In addition, there was a threat wherewith , after cutting their cables, he,
of invasion from the Island of Blefuscu , " with great ease drew fifty of the
the other great empire of the universe . enemy's largest men of war into the
The long-standing trouble between these Royal port of Lilliput . They attacked
two mighty empires arose out of the him with their arrows all the while ,
following incident . of course, but he did not mind that,
The grandfather of the Emperor as he wore a pair of spectacles to
of Lilliput, when a boy, as he was protect his eyes.
going to eat an egg, broke it at the But because Gulliver protested
larger end, according to the ancient against the Emperor's revengeful design
practice, and cut one of his fingers. for reducing the whole of the rival empire
Whereupon the Emperor, his father, into a province and destroying the Big
published an edict commanding all his Endian exiles, he fell into disfavour.
subjects, upon great penalties, to break Being informed of a design to accuse
the smaller end of their eggs . This led him of high treason , he made his
to rebellion and civil discord, which escape to Blefuscu, whence, by a lucky
were fomented and encouraged by the accident, he secured the meansofreach
Emperor of Blefuscu, at whose court the ing his own country again , and returned
Big- Endian exiles found much favour. to England on April 13th, 1702 .
GULLIVER IN THE LAND OF BROBDINGNAG
And What Befell Him Among the Giants
L IKE Robinson Crusoe, Gulliver had to the inhabitants only as a footpath
a passion for travel . On the 20th of through a field of barley ! Here he
June following his return from Lilliput, walked for some time, but could see little
he again sailed, this time for Surat, in on either side , it being now near harvest,
the Adventure . About a year later and the corn rising at least forty feet .
this vessel was driven in an eastward “ I was an hour (he goes on to say)
direction , past the Molucca Islands. walking to the end of this field, which
The ship being in need of water, the was fenced up with a hedge of at least
captain sent a party ashore in the long- 120 feet high, and the trees so lofty
boat, Gulliver being of the number. that I could make no computation of
When they came to land, Gulliver wan- their altitude .
dered about a mile away from the sea . “ I was endeavouring to find some gap
Returning to the creek , he saw the in the hedge, when I discovered one of
men already in the boat, and rowing for the inhabitants in the next field advanc
life to the ship. He was about to holloa ing towards the stile, of the same size
after them , when he observed a huge with him whom I saw in the sea pursuing
creature walking after them in the sea . our boat . He appeared as tall as an
But the men having the start , escaped . ordinary spire -steeple, and took about
“ This,” he says, “ I was afterwards ten yards at every stride . I was struck
told, for I durst not stay to see the with the utmost fear and astonishment,
issue of that adventure, but ran as fast and ran to hide myself in the corn,
as I could the way I first went, and then looking back into the next field . I
climbed up a steep hill, which gave me heard him call in a voice many degrees
some prospect of the country.” louder than a speaking-trumpet ; but
He found it fully cultivated ; but what the noise was so high in the air that at
first surprised him was the length of first I certainly thought it was thunder.
the grass, which in those grounds that Whereupon seven monsters like himself
seemed to be kept for hay was about came towards him with reaping -hooks
twenty feet high . He cameupon a high in their hands, each hook about the
road, so he imagined, though it served largeness of six scythes. "
DO TITUITINI112221UUID ILUX ITILTI TULEZIONE
1314
 mmmnaumumanumu GULLIVER'S TRAVELS காயயையயயயாய

Whilst Gulliver was lamenting his Gulliver was received well in the
tolly and wilfulness in attempting a farmer's family, and made a pet of by
second voyage against the advice ofall the farmer's daughter. Then the
his friends and relations, and had hiddenfarmer was advised to exhibit him for
in a ridge for fear , one of the reapers money. Finally, he was sold to the
approached so near as to make him Queen of the land , and had much dis
apprehend that with the next step he course with the King, when he had
should be squashed to death under foot mastered the language of the country.
or cut in two with the reaping-hook. A sort of box was made for him by an
He screamed as loudly as he could. ingenious carpenter, and this was kept
GIANT WHO FOUND in the palace. All this time the farmer's
TREMENDOUS
THEGULLIVER AMONG THE CORN
daughter had charge of him.
“ Whereupon (says he) , the huge After going through many adventures,
creature trod short, and, looking round he was in his box one day when it was
about him for some time , at last espied caught up by a great bird, and carried
me as I lay on the ground. He con out to sea, where it fell in the water.
sidered awhile with the caution of one The box was seen by the captain of a
who endeavours to lay hold on a small, ship. Thus it was that Gulliver was
dangerous animal in such a manner that released and returned to England in
it shall not be able either to scratch or June, 1706.
bite him. At length he ventured to But here we see the consequences of
take me up behind by the middle having grown familiar with people and
between his forefinger and thumb, and things totally different from our own
brought me within three yards of his countrymen and their ways, for on his
eyes, that he might behold my shape way home the littleness of the houses , the
more perfectly. trees, the cattle, and the people made
“ I guessed his meaning, and my good him begin to think himself in Lilliput !
fortune gave me so much presence of GULLIVER FELT WHEN HE GOT
mind that I resolved not to struggle in HowHOME AFTER HIS ADVENTURES
the least , as he held me in the air about " I was afraid of trampling on every
sixty feet from the ground, for fear I traveller I met (he confesses), and often
should slip through his fingers. All I called aloud to have them stand out of
ventured was to raise my eyes towards the way, so that I had like to have
the sun, and place my hands together gotten one or two broken heads for my
in a supplicating posture, and to speak impertinence. When I came to my own
some words in an humble, melancholy house, one of the servants opening the
tone, suitable to the condition I then was door, I bent down to go in -like a goos
in . For II apprehended every moment under a gate -- for fear of striking my
that he would dash me against the head. My wife ran out to embrace me,
ground. But my good star would have but I stooped lower than her knees,
it that he appeared pleased with my thinking she could otherwise never reach
voice and gestures, and began to look my mouth . In short , I behaved myself
upon me as a curiosity, much wondering so unaccountably that they all concluded
to hear me pronounce articulate words, that I had lost my wits. În a little time,
although he could not understand them . I and my family and friends came to a
GULLIVER IS EXHIBITED AS A CURIOSITY tested
right understanding ; but my wife pro
that I should never go to sea
“ In the meantime I was not able to any more, although my evil destiny so
forbear groaning and shedding tears, and ordered that she had not power to
turning my head towards my sides, hinder me."
letting him know, as well as I could, Gulliver in his later travels went to
how cruelly I was hurt by the pressure Laputa, a flying island inhabited by
of his thumb and finger. He seemed to philosophers and astronomers, and to
apprehend my meaning, for, lifting up the country of the Houyhnhnms, in
the lappet of his coat, he put me gently which horses were the representatives
into it, and immediately ran along of civilisation , and men , under the name
with me to his master, who was a of Yahoos, were degraded beings of the
substantial farmer, and the same lowest type .
1 )
person I had first seen in the field .” The next stories of books begin on 1491 .
KOTUZ MUOLIURE
1315
OSLLEKELWEIUO CELICA LA MIRARTIGIANATO RICO GIRLS LSIUM

THE FROG THAT HELPED THE PRINCESS

Alcun

1T PEDDIE

THE FROG DIVES DOWN INTO THE WATER AND RESCUES THE PRINCESS'S BALL
Desen

ALIQUINIENIE
THE PRINCESS CARRIED THE FROG TO BED & FOUND TWO LITTLE GOBLINS ON THE PILLOW
IRRITUTET U TERETETTET
1316 Durumu TRUE LOUI
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
THE PRINCESS'S GOLDEN BALL
The Story of the Frog that Became a Prince
DONDO
the frog :
ONE fine evening
NE a
princess
said to
Well , if you will
CONTINUED FROM 1212
young
went into a wood, and
sat down by the side of a
cool spring of water. She had a
golden ball in her hand , which
was her favourite plaything, and
she amused herself with tossing it into
the air and catching it again as it fell.
After a time she threw it up so high
that when she stretched out her hand
to catch it the ball bounded away and
rolled along upon the ground , till at
last it fell into the spring. The princess
looked into the spring after her ball,
but it was very deep , so deep that she
could not see the bottom of it . Then
she began to lament her loss, and said :
Alas ! if I could only get my
ball again , I would give all my fine
clothes and jewels, and everything
that I have in the world ."
Whilst she was speaking a frog put
its head out of the water and said :
“ Princess, why do you weep
)
bitterly ? "
“ Alas ! she said , “ what can you
do for me, you nasty frog ? My
golden ball has fallen into the spring.
The frog said :
“ I do not want your pearls and
jewels and fine clothes ; but if you
will love me and let me live with
you, and eat from your little golden
plate, I will bring you your ball again . '
“ What nonsense this silly frog
is talking ! ” thought the princess.
“ He can never get out of the well .
However, he may be able to get my
ball for me, and therefore I will
promise him what he asks.” So she
1317
ki
( 6
bring me my ball , I
promise to do all you
require ."
Then the frog put his head down ,
and dived deep under the water ;
and after a little while he came up
again with the ball in his mouth, and
threw it on the ground.
As soon as the young princess saw
her ball, she ran to pick it up, and was
So overjoyed to have it in her hand
again that she hardly thanked the o
frog, but ran home with it as fast as
she could. The frog called after her :
Stay, princess, and take me with
you as you promised ."
But she did not stop to hear a word.
The next day, just as the princess
had sat down to dinner, she heard a
strange noise, tap-tap, as if somebody
was coming up the marble staircase ;
and very soon afterwards something
knocked gently at the door, and said :
“ Open the door, my princess dear,
Open the door to thy true love here !
And mind the words that we two
have said
By the fountain cool in the green
wood shade."
Then the princess ran to the door
and opened it , and there she saw
the frog, whom she had quite for
gotten . She was terribly frightened,
and, shutting the dooras fast as she
could, came back to her seat . The
king, her father, asked her what had
frightened her.
There is a nasty frog," said she,
at the door, who ed my ball out
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES मद 12.καιπάει καιιτεΙατιιμι .
aruna

of the spring this morning. I promised at the door ; and when she opened it
him that he should live with me here , the frog came in and slept upon her
thinking that he could never get out pillow as before till the morning broke ;
of the spring ; but there he is at the and the third night he did the same.
door, and wants to come in ! ” But when the princess awoke on the
While she was speaking the frog following morning she was astonished to
knocked again at the door. see , instead of the frog, a handsome
The king said to the young princess : prince, standing at the head of her
“ As you have made a promise, you bed , and gazing on her with the most
must keep it ; so go and let him in .” beautiful eyes that ever were seen .
She did so, and the frog hopped into He told her that he had been en
the room , and came up close to the table . chanted by a wicked fairy, who had
Pray lift me upon a chair," said he to changed him into the form of a frog, in
the princess, and let me sit next to which he was to remain till some princess
you . should take him out of the spring and let
As soon as she had done this, the him sleep upon her bed for three nights.
frog said : " Put your plate closer to me , “ You,” said the prince , “ have
that I may eat out of it.” broken this cruel charm , and now I
This she did and when he had eaten have nothing to wish for but that you
as much as he could he said : “ Now I should go with me into my father's
am tired. Carry me upstairs, and put kingdom , where I will marry you, and
me on your little bed.” love you as long as you live.”
The princess took him up in her hand The young princess, you may be sure ,
and carried him to bed . On the pillow was not long in giving her consent ; and
were two little gobli - s, who vanished as as they spoke a splendid carriage drove
they appeared, so that the princess put up, with eight beautiful horses decked
the frog upon the pillow of her little bed, with plumes of feathers and golden
where he slept all night long. As soon harness, and behind rode the prince's
as it was light he jumped up, hopped servant , the faithful Henry, who had
downstairs, and went out of the house. bewailed the misfortune of his dear
" Now ," thought the princess, " he is master so long and bitterly that his heart
gone, and I shall be troubled with him had well-nigh burst .
no more . Then all set out, full of joy, for the
But she was mistaken , for when night prince's kingdom , where they arrived
came again she heard the same tapping safely, and lived happily for many years.
GOG AND MAGOG
The Two Giant Brothers Who Watch Over London
N the gallery beneath the western angry when the Britons settled on the
window of the Guildhall of London banks of the Thames and began to
stand two great giants, whose names build the city of London .
are Gog and Magog. " What do these men want with
Gog is clothed in a rude fashion, and houses ? ” said Gog . Why don't they
he carries a morning star , which is a live in caves as we do ? Let us kill
great iron ball covered with spikes, and them , and destroy their new city.”
fastened by a chain to a long pole. " No," said Magog. “ Let us make
Magog, on the other hand, is arrayed friends with them , and learn how to
like an ancient Roman soldier, and he build, and till and weave . I am sure
carries a halbert, which is a kind of it is more pleasant to live in aa house and
battleaxe with a spear at the top. wear clothes than it is to live in a cave
Gog and Magog are brothers, and the and wear skins .''
reason why they are dressed and armed But the other giants would not listen
in a different way is very curious. to Magog. They looked on the Britons
When the ancient Britons came to as intruders and enemies to be driven
Exigland the country was peopled by away or killed . They attacked them and
a race of savage giants who lived in drove them into London, and then they
clark . damp caves and dressed in the resolved to capture the city the next
skins of animals. They were very morning and slay all the inhabitants.
1318
 TEZEILAL AEUOLLELE

But, on the advice of

Magog, the Britons dug a
wide, deep trench outside
London in the night , and
fixed rows and rows of sharp
stakes at the bottom of the
trench , and covered it with
light hurdles. In the morn
ing they went out and fought
the giants, and then they
pretended to be defeated.
and ran back lightly across
the hurdles. Their great ,
clumsy enemies came lum
bering after them , and the
hurdles gave way, and down
fell all the giants into the
trench upon the rows and
rows of sharp stakes.
Only Gog escaped, and
Magog said to him :
" Will you live with me in
the Guildhall , or will you
fight to the death ? ”
“ I will fight to the
death ! ” cried Gog ; and ,
whirling his morning star, THE GIANT GOG AT THE GUILDHALL , LONDON
he rushed upon his brother.
But Magog was armed with a halbert use , and with this he struck Gog down
which the Britons had made for his and vanquished him. The Britons
TURN

a lifted up the wounded giant

and carried him to the Guild
W h hall, and laid him on a soft
feather bed and tended him
until he was healed ; and
Gog was so touched by
their kindness that he re
solved to remain with Magog
in the Guildhall and guard
it from danger.
Now , eve ry Christmas
every
night , when the clock strikes
twelve , and the Guildhall is
dark and silent , Gog and
Magog come out for dinner,
and all the rest of the year
they stand in the gallery
beneath the western window
of the Guildhall and watch
over the welfare of the people
of London .
Any day you may go and
see them - two fierce-looking,
gigantic , dark , carved figures,
one on each side of the win
dow, so tall that you have to
strain your neck to look up at
them , and many people won
THE GIANT . MAGOG AT THE GUILDHALL, LONDON der how they came there .
CREDIT COMMITTEET ruma
1319
 4. Tui XITXU.arcaman TU COOKIKKER

TALES OF HOLIDAY PLACES

THE FOOL ON THE STOOL AT it was Scardeburgh ,”, which means
FOLKESTONE
a fortress on a rock . Led by Harald
"OLKESTONE is another of the places
FOLK Hardrada and Tostig , two daring pirates,
which we consider new , for it is only
>
they attacked the town in 106h , and
since the railway reached it that the town because they could not capture it by
has become important as a place for other means, they set fire to it . They
holidays. But it was a place of note burned all they could , and robbed and
in the time of the Romans, and “ Cæsar's murdered right and left . Scarborough
Camp ” is among the most interesting was so ruined that,when William theCon
spots to -day. queror had his Domesday Book written,
It was important again at a later day, the town was not even mentioned in it .
for St. Eanswith founded a great Later, a great castle was built, and
nunnery there in the seventh century. many battles were fought in or near
Her father was Eadbald, King of Kent, the town. During these dark days ,
a fierce heathen king who, before he George Fox, the famous Quaker, was
died, became a Christian . His daughter imprisoned in the castle. He was
was a splendid woman, and did much shamefully ill - treated . One loaf of
for the good of the land by spreading bread had to last him three weeks ;
the blessings of Christianity abroad. he had no fire in his cell , and the roof
The building was destroyed by the was so leaky that he was compelled
Danes, but in 1885 , over 1,100 years after to bale out the rain which came through,
her death, the body of St. Eanswith was like a sailor in a half -swamped boat.
found in its leaden coffin, and is now When the King finally learned that
buried in the church named after her. the good Quaker was not a rebel, he
Once when Queen Elizabeth was released him , but not before Fox had
passing near Folkestone, the mayor borne great suffering.
of the town went out to greet her on Scarborough's mineral springs were
behalf of the people of “ Folksteen , discovered by a lady. About a hundred
as it was called then . years after they had been discovered,
“ Most gracious Queen , the land round about suddenly sank,
llelcome to Folksteen ," the walls of the wells themselves rose
he began, addressing her from a stool. up in the air, and the water disappeared.
But the Queen stopped him . The cliff was cracked and broken in all
Most gracious fool directions. A great plot of land , with
Get off that stool, ”
cattle feeding on it , went down seventeen
she said . That was a rude thing to say yards, and parts of the broken cliff
to a mayor. But in the old days they were forced into the sea . Then things
did notalways treat mayors as settled down again . There were no
mayors liked to be treated . more risings or fallings, and the water
OLD SCARBOROUGH gradually came back to the wells.
As everyone who goes toScarborough HANGING THE MAYOR AT BODMIN
is aware, there are really
, withtwo
its towns. WHE his
: Perkin
rebel Warbeck hadmarched
streets and stairways, its oll red -tiled the Mayor of Bodmin , the capital of the
houses where the fishermen live as their county, received a message from the
ancestors lived hundreds of years ago. King. The mayor was told to prepare
Then there is the newer and fashionable a scaffold on which to hang a man who
Scarborough, where fine roads and was supposed to have been connected
great houses make " the English with the rebellion . The scaffold was
Naples," as it is called, the handsomest prepared.
seaside town in the North of England. Is it strong enough to carry the
But even old Scarborough is new man ? asked the King's messenger.
compared with the Scarborough whose “ Without doubt it is ,” was the
name is forgotten . The Romans built answer .
it , but it was the hardy Norsemen who · Then up with you, Master Mayor,
called it Scarborough. Their word for for it is meant for you !" said the officer.
YYYYYUSUUTTO EXOXYTYT PYYTTELY TUTTO 7 TRYITI POZY
1320
 TALES OF HOLIDAY
UNTEERS SEEKEDERIKUTUKULELE
THE FAIRIES OF THE WILLEY HOW
THEWilley How is a greatmound lying
between Wold Norton and Brid-
lington, in Yorkshire. A farmer was
returning late at night to Wold Norton,
and as he passed the Willey How he
heard the sound of singing and merri-
ment . A door was open in the mound,
and he walked in and saw lords and
ladies sitting at a feast . A serving man
poured out a cup of wine, and handed
it to the farmer.
Now , if you drinkfairy wine you fall
into the power of the fairies , and they
never allow you to come back to the
world of men . The farmer knew this,
and he poured the wine on the floor,
and rushed out of the Willey How with
the feasters pursued him .
the he ,got
But cup andsafely away, and gave the
fairy cup to the King of England .
THE MERMAID OF LIZARD HEAD
ONE summer evening a Cornish
farmer of the name of Lutey was
walking by Lizard Head, and he heard
a womancrying. On the shore he found
a beautiful mermaid, with long golden
hair and green eyes , crying because she
had got strandedon the rocks, and could
not get back to the sea. So Lutey
stooped down and took the mermaid in
his arms , and carried her to the water.
On the way she talked to him so sweetly
that he was about to dive into the sea
with her, when his dog barked behind
him. He turned and saw the smoke
rising from the chimney of his farm ,,
and the madness left him .
“ Farewell , my sweet , for nine years ,"
said the mermaid , as she swam away.
outAndfishing
nine inyears afterwards
a boat, Lutey was
and though the In the reign of William the Con
weather was calm a great wave bore
the mermaid over to the boat .
" My timehas come," said Lutey. He
plunged into the sea, swam a little way
with the mermaid , and sank down with
her, never to rise again .
ROBIN ROUND CAP WELL
'HERE was a farmer in Holderness
THERE
whose house was haunted by a little
elf called Robin Round Cap . It plagued
the poor fariner nearly out of his life ,
and one day he put all his furniture and
goods on a cart, and set out to find a
quieter place to live in . As he drove
down the road he met a friend , who
said : " Hallo ! Are youmoving,then ? "
1321
PLACES LITTLE TULEE LE
And before the farmer could reply
a voice from the cart said “ Yes. ”
And there was Robin Round Cap,
sitting on one of the chairs. The
farmer saw he would gain nothing by
leaving his farm , so he returned , and got
a wise man to entice Robin Round Cap
into a closed-up well by his house , now
called Robin Round Cap Well. There the
mischievous little imp is still imprisoned .
THE SNAKE'S PARLOUR
N the old days women used to do
their washing in a very pleasant
fashion . They assembled together and
took their linen to a running stream , and
there they scrubbed and gossiped merrily
in the open air. Some women were once
doing their washing in this manner by a
rocky pool in the River Wye, when a
girl saw a great, deadly snake glide out
from the stones. On reaching one of
the rocks the snake put something be
hind it and went away, and the girl
crept up to see what it had hidden .
Finding there the poison fangs of the
snake, in the shape of two little horns,
she ran off with them .. When the snake
returned , it searched vainly behind the
rock , and began to hiss and rage. It
hissed louder and louder, and lashed its
tail , and then , seeing nothing else to
attack , it reared up and began to fight
the rock . In its fury it struck the stone
so hard with its head that it broke its
skull and died . And the women were
delighted to see that the deadly thing
had killed itself, and that they could now
do their washing in peace and safety.
THE GOBLIN BUILDERS OF
ROCHDALE
queror, Jamel the Saxon resolved to
build a church to St. Chadde on the
bank of the River Roach . Piles of
timber and stones were brought, and the
foundations were laid ; but during the
night the goblins, striding twenty paces
at a step , carried the stones and timber
to the hill-top over the river. In the
morning the people set to work to bring
the stones and timber back , ready to lay
the foundations once more , but when the
time came to begin the things had dis
appeared, and were again found on the
hill. Thinking it useless to build by the
river bank, they built the church on the
hill , where it now stands , with one
hundred and twenty -four steps up to it .
 TEORIERCOOLIEELELEK CELALEEELLEEKLILLE CECELTELIKE

EARL'S DAUGHTER AND BEGGARMAN

How Guy of Warwick Went Out into the World & Came Home Again
In the early days of Britain the favourite lands, crossing many stormy seas , and
attendant of Rohand, the Earl of scarcely a day passed but he was in the
Warwick, was very ill . The doctors midst of some fierce and terrible adven
had given him all the valuable herbs ture, which almost passed one's powers
they could think of, but still he wasted to believe. As the years Aed away his
and pined away . fame increased, till the whole world
At last he murmured very faintly : seerned to be full of the deeds of Sir Guy.
"“ Felice ! If Felice were brought to After many adventures, and covered
me, I yet might live." with glory , he returned to Warwick, and .
The doctors, bending down, caught presenting himself before Felice, asked
the words faintly, and said one to the her if he had yet won her love .
other : “ Felice ? Felix ? There is no But Felice answered in strange voice .
such herb ." And the poor boy an- Yes, he had won her love ; he had done
swered : No herb is Felice, but a flower great deeds ; he was, in all men's eyes ,
-the fairest flower that grows.” the bravest knight in Christendom ;
The boy's name was Guy, and the yet would she not marry him. And this
name he murmured was the name of was her reason. Marriage would put an
the great earl's beautiful daughter. end to his glory. He was too young
One day, when he was better and was yet to turn away from joustings and
able to move about the garden , he saw tournaments ; he must seek glory in his
Felice approaching . She had heard youth , and only when his arms began
that Guy was dying of love for her, to weaken take his ease in the idleness
and she had had a strange dream , in of a lady's love. Glory, glory ! More
which Heaven declared that the life of and ever more glory !
this poor page was a precious one. So So Guy rode away once more, and
she spoke kind , strong words to him . once again the earth rang with his deeds.
Why kneel there weeping like a girl ? He defended the weak ; he punished
Get up, and show ifthere is the making tyrants ; he overthrew the cruel. Then
of a man in you ! The swan mates not he returned again, and this time Felice
with the swallow , and I will never wed yielded to him, and the most beautiful
beneath me. Show yourself my peer. maiden in Britain was married to the
For I could love a brave and valiant most valiant knight in Christendom .
knight before whose spear man bowed But now a strange thing happened .
as to a king, nor would I ask his They had been married, this happy
parentage ; prouder far to know that pair, forty days. It seemed as if for
my children took their nobility from a ever after life must be to them one long
self-made nobleman. But a weeping, and beautifulsummer festival of loveand
love -sick page ! No ! Show me some- happiness. But it chanced that Sir Guy,
thing that you do that I can love." sitting one sunset at a window in his
Her words filled the heart of the page tower, began to meditate upon his past
with a strange and glorious strength. life in foreign lands . He had killed
His eyes shone, his voice rang clear. He many men ; he had taken many king
told the beautiful girl that love for her doms ; he had laid waste many lands.
should make him the greatest knight in Why ? Why had he fought and killed
the world . And Felice answered : and striven ? Why ? For a woman's
“ I will watch and wait.” love ! The thought shocked him. All
Then Guy got speedily well of his sick. his life he had been seeking earthly
ness, and the great Earl of Warwick, glory for the sake of a woman's love.
rejoicing in his favourite's recovery, Not once ,not once in allhis crowded life,
dubbed him a knight, and provided had he done a single deed purely for God .
him with a proud horse royally capari- He rose up , determined to serve his
soned, with rich armour,with spear and God . Felice clung to him with tears.
sword and shield . Thus accoutred the She who had sent him forth on perilous
now cried to him not to leave
bright-faced boy rode away from War. quests But
wick to do great deeds , and make a name her. Sir Guy would not listen .
for himself. He travelled into strange “ Not yet one single deed for God
TIN THÌ
TETTUURITY
1322
 Ser Un more EARL'S DAUGHTER AND BEGGARMAN CALCI

above ! ” was his lament . And he clad Then thought Sir Guy : ““ She is
himself in a palmer's dress , and, with a serving God . Who am I to come
gold ring of his wife's upon his hand, between her and God ? I will go
set out on a pilgrimage of penance to away .'
the Holy Land. Yet so great was his love for her that
Once more did adventures, many and he could not bear to go very far from
great, fall to Sir Guy, even in his pil- her dwelling. So he betook himselfto
grim's dress ; but he let no man know a hermit's cell near by, and there for
that it was the terrible Guy of Warwick, many years, in fasting and prayer,,
letting them think that the power of devoted all his thoughts to the great
God was made manifest in a poor pilgrim . God who had made the heavens and
Afterwards, humble in heart and at the earth , and delighted his eyes in
peace with God, still wearing his pil- beholding the pure and holy life of his
grim's dress , he returned to Warwick. Felice from afar off. At last , grown old
He was so changed in appearance that and grey, and feeling himself to be
no one knew him; and when he dying, he sent the ring of Felice to
humbly presented himself at his own the castle by a herdsman, bidding
door, begging for alms, he was received him give it to the Lady Felice herself .
INTERIORRAL
TULENTER

In the old days, when men gave up their lives to some great cause and went out into the world doing noble
deeds, they would vow before the sacred altar to be true and faithful. This famous picture, painted by
John Pettie, R.A., shows a brave knight's vigil all night at the altar, taking a vow to live nobly and right.
by his own wife as no more than an “ Where got you this token ? ” cried
ordinary pilgrim, and entertained by Felice, very white.
her unawares. Sir Guy was more " From a poor beggarman that lives
amazed to find that the proud and in yonder cell," answered the herdsman .
beautiful Felice welcomed him with a A beggarman ! Nay ! From a
sweet and gracious humility , that she kingly man ! ” cried Felice. “ He who
insisted on bathing his feet herself , and gave you this ring is Guy of Warwick ,
waiting upon him as he sat at table . he and no other !
Then he learned that , because her own Then swiftly she flew to the hermit's
husband was a pilgrim in the Holy Land , cell , and lovingly she took the dying
this great lady, ever since the hour of his pilgrim in her arms, and softly they wept
departure, had spent all her days in doing together. Husband and wife were united
human kindnesses . How sweetly she at last. Close to each other they clung ,
spoke of Sir Guy ; how tenderly she and happy were their hearts in the
listened to the poor ; how graciously higher love which consecrates all mortal
she comforted the sad and sorrowful ; affection . And , under the roof of a
how lovingly she gave herself to the hermit's cell , the splendid soul of Guy
pleasure of children at her gate ! of Warwick rose to his God .
UUTUUDZI Inr:marTTII IITTYTOTEUTUNUTZI URED
1323
 LouiatXIIKETOriktttadintre ELKE

THE FIRE GOBLINS

A TALE OF THE LONG AGO FOR A WINTER'S NIGHT
ANY years ago the world was full her eyes were like the sky when the
MA of curious little people, called moon is very bright ; her hair hung
fairies and goblins. like soft , white moon-clouds around her ;
The fairies danced in the fields on and her dress was sunset colour.
moonlight nights. They never did " I am the fairy Ignis,” she said,
any harm , and often helped people in as Hephtus stood trembling, afraid
trouble, and were especially kind and to move lest she should disappear.
good to children . They cared for little “ I know all about you, and I have some
wounded creatures in the woods, mended work for you to do. Will you do it ? "
(

the broken wings of birds and insects, “ I am so weak and useless,” he

and lifted the heads of the flowers when answered timidly. “ There are a

heavy storms had dashed them to the
ground. The goblins lived inside the hill-
tops, and worked underground, where
they dug great caverns. They seemed
to take pleasure in playing ill-natured
tricks on anyone who wandered alore
on the hills after sunset, teasing any
small and helpless thing they might find,
and they were always greedy and selfish.
They spent all their time gathering
sunbeams on the mountains, and car-
ried them down into the caverns, where
they stored them for dark and sunless
days. When a goblin had filled a
avern ne would lie down to sleep in
it , and his sleep would last as long
as the sunbeams were left undisturbed.
Sometimes they would steal little boys,
and carry them underground, where
they made them press down and pile
together the sunbeams. These children
were never allowed to go above ground
lest they should tell of the wonders they
had seen . They soon forgot all about
their old life, and, after they had fed on
goblin food seven years , became goblins
too. In those days men and women who
lived in the world were often very cold,
when the sun did not shine, for they
had no fires to warm them as we have.
Now, there lived in the wild forests of
a great country a boy named Hephtus,
who was not strong and well like most
children , and he wou ten creep out
into the sunshine, and lie there.
great many boys much stronger than
I am ; still, I will try very hard, Fairy
Ignis, if you will let me.'
That's all I want," the fairy re
plied. “ You are the boy I need, not
the strongest, nor the best runner,
but one who cares about things and
tries to understand them. You love
the sunshine. Will you go and bring
sunbeams to men ? ' These sunbeams
lie buried in the earth, and I will teach
you how to find them .”
" Thank you !" he cried , springing to
wards her in his delight. “ Tell me how ."
“ Listen , then ! You must go alone
on to the mountains where the goblins
live, and they will carry you down to
their caverns below. There they will
chain you to the walls, and make you
work day and night. Now , remember,
you must not eat the food they give you.
Take this phial, and when you are
hungry swallow a few drops. I shall
watch over you , and when you have
seen and learnt all you can I will help
you to escape. You will be a man
when you come back . Will you live
ten years down there to help me ? ”
Hephtus looked at the sunlight ; he
heard the birds singing again after the
winter ; a little rabbit frollicked close by ;
and a squirrel, tempted by the sunshine,
had come out to nibble some fresh young
hoots . Не would see none of these
things. Then he looked again at the fairy.
66

The sunlight was his playfellow and I will do what you tell me,” he
friend, and when the winter came he said , “ if you will help me . "
would try to think of how he could lay ' Lose no time," she answered, giving
up a store of sunshine as the squirrel him a small bottle. The next minute
laid up nuts. One spring day Hephtus he found himself alone at the foot of a
was in the wood, puzzling over his plan, mountain . While climbing he saw
when, looking up, he saw a tiny fairy goblins darting about catching sunbeams,
slide down a streak of sunlight to his but he went bravely on, until he was
feet . She had a crown on her head that surrounded, taken prisoner, and carried
sent out light like the rays of a star ; into darkness .
TTYYTTU TIRDIT TYYTY ! vrti uzrYTI
1324
 nem rem mum
annamma Emmanu

HEPHTUS MEETS THE FAIRY IN THE WOOD

TTYNYT

" I AM THE FAIRY IGNIS," SHE SAID. AS HEPHIUS STOOD TREMBLING

AND AFRAID TO MOVE .
ORTERITETETU 20DUELT TERTUTURUXELKEILE UCZY nurucuzTTERITIUUED
1325
 GILTOLLA AIR
THE
LXALLAS
CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES.* LEZA EILUILTOX

Here he was set to work day and away ; while Hephtus, for the first time,
night, chained and watched at first, felt sorry he had given his promise to
but careful never to eat the enchanted the fairy . As he stood hesitating, his
food they gave him . Sometimes he was hand touched the fairy bottle he carried,
unchained and allowed to wander alone and, taking out the cork, he swallowed a
through the long passages. They ran few drops, then turned and ran along
in every direction from a large central the dark passages that led up above,
hall , and opened out on all sides into shutting his ears to the tempting sounds,
caverns, some newly hollowed, some and thinking of the message he had to
half filled, and some closed up, where take to the earth people.
the tired fire goblins, having finished At last he found himself outside on
their work, had buried themselves. the mountain , and , overcome with the
At last his master came to him one light, he threw himself down on the
day, and said : “ Hephtus, you have ground. When he dared to open his
worked well lately, and earned your eyes again, he saw that it was a beautiful
reward ; before long I shall have mine. summer's morning.
For fifty years I have laboured fitting As he went through the villages, the
up my sleeping chamber, and I shall children shouted after him because of
rest in it when the winter comes . When his strange dress and his long hair ; even
you have sealed up my cavern , carry the the men said he was mad , and would
key to the central hall on the night not listen to him. At last he came to
when they hold their yearly feast, and &
the palace of the king. The king's
lay it before the king, saying, My councillors tried to drive him away ; but
master bids me claim my reward . Then the king was good and wise, and
the king will give you a goblet of rich listened to all that Hephtus said . When
goblin wine to drink, and confer on you Hephtus had told him all, he said :
the rights of goblinship, to choose and I will go with you, and see if what
hold a cavern of your own, and the goblin you say is true. A hundred soldiers
power of catching sunbeams and chang- shall come, and a hundred men with
ing them into crystals. He will also pickaxes ; and you shall show them
give you a proper dress to wear. This where to dig, and if you have spoken
►)
is all you need, and all I can do for you . falsely you shall die ."
Promise me that you will wrap me com- “ I am content," answered Hephtus,
fortably up and close my cavern tight.” with a deep sigh . So the king and
“ I promise," answered Heplitus; Hephtus, and all the soldiers, with the
and soon after, when the fairy came to men the king had chosen, came to the
see him , she said : “ Will you take my mountains, and there the king waited
message to the earth people ? Remem- many months while they dug deep down
ber, they won't believe what you tell into the earth . And when they had found
them ; they will mock at you and ill-treat the coal, Hephtus showed them how to
you . That is what they do to anyone who build cages, and how to make the fierce
dares to try and teach them ; and even little goblins work.
when they have your gift you will find And the goblins still make beautiful
no gratitude, and get no thanks. Will caverns inside their cages. You can
you still go ? " " I will go,” he answered . see them if you look through the bars
So the winter came; and Hephtus of the grate ; and when the caverns
tucked his goblin master cosily up in his are red and hot they go to sleep .
bed , and knew that he would be free as If you put your finger on the bars of
soon as he had given up the key of the their cage, the goblins will often bite
cavern to the goblin king. He stood you ; but they are very pretty, and
outside the goblins' hall, and heard the tempt little children to play with them .
shouts of laughter and feasting. But the goblins are dreadfully afraid
Come with me, and dance .” cried a of water, and if you throw some water
little brown -haired girl. into their cage they will spit and hiss
66

“ I'm late to -night,” he said , keeping at you as they die, for water kills them .
in the shadow . I'm not ready yet ; But they are useful, and grown -ups can
but when I come I'll dance with you. keep them in order. If they are lazy,
Only take this key for me to the king." we wake them up with the poker.
The girl took the key and hurried The next stories begin on page 1443.
CEILINU
1326 TOIDUDETIXIDO
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

Hannah prays in the Temple

SAMUEL & THE GREAT CHANGE

CONTINUED FROM 1263
In the days of Sama
son, the High
Priest of Israel was a man
named Eli , who sat upon the
great throne in the gateway of
the Tabernacle , meditating on
the mysteries of God and man, and
watching the people as they came to
worship on the feast days. It chanced
one day that this old man on his
seat took offence at a woman
kneeling in prayer before the sanc-
tuary, imagining from the earnestness
with which she prayed that she had
come straight from the riot and
revelry of the holiday festivities .
He spoke harshly to her, and the
woman, whose name was Hannah,
lifted up her face and told him the
real truth . She prayed thus earnestly
because, more than anything else
in the world , she desired a son. The
old priest , touched by her sincerity,
and ashamed of his own suspicions,
bade her be comforted , for God
would surely answer a prayer so
earnest and pure .
Then Hannah vowed thatiſ indeed mystery was in thenight, bade the boy
her prayer were answered she would return to his couch , and when the
***2
the service of the
080 Tabernacle . While
the little lad Samuel grew up
in the solemn atmosphere of this
place of worship, the sons of Eli
lived outside in the world , and
were given up to riot and sin . The
people hated these young men , and
scorned them as the sons of the High
Priest,, who surely should have
Priest
been better than themselves ; but
Eli rebuked them not , and re
strained them not .
One night , as the old priest lay in
bed , the child Samuel came to his side,
and asked if Eli had called him . It
was just beginning to grow light , and
Eli, between waking and slumber,
looked with surprise at the little boyat
his side. No, he told him ; he had not
called the boy ; let him go back to bed.
But a second time Samuel came , for
distinctly he had heard a voice call VA
him by name ; but again Eli sent him
back . Then a third time the same
thing happened ; and now the old
priest, roused to perceive that some

give her son to the service of God.
Her prayer was answered. The good
woman remembered her vow ; and as
soon as she was able she brought the
infant, whom she had named Samuel,
to the old priest , and gave him up to
voice called him again, to reply ,
“ Speak , Lord, for Thy servant
heareth .”
The mysterious message that Samuel
heard in the grey light of dawn was
dreadful , and he hid it from the old

1327
 LAULULLA
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
COLLA

priest. The voice had declared that Only thus could they escape destruc
the sons of Eli were to die , that ruin tion. The bracing message of the great
was to overtake his family, and that prophet had its effect. Israel listened,
he was to be left desolate upon the awoke from the stupor of idolatry,
earth . Eli commanded the child to threw off the madness of superstition ,
tell him what he had heard ; and and, destroying their miserable images
when at last Samuel confessed, the and idols, went up against their enemies
poor old priest who ruled the people, like aa nation of men,and in the strength
but could not rule his own sons, who of God's righteousness destroyed those
rebuked the sins of a nation, but would wicked heathen .
not correct the wickedness of his own It was the one great victory ob
children, bowed his head and sighed, tained by Israel under Samuel . Peace
" It is the Lord. Let Him do what followed . The sons of Samuel became
seemeth Him good ." loose in their conduct ; the old prophet
brooded upon the past records of the
, nation
AND ELI FALLS DEAD FROM HIS THRONE ; schools arose for thinking out
Times of horror occurred . The the ancient traditions of the race.
enemies of Israel arose on all sides. Then the people, seeing their enemies
The frightened Israelites carried the growing strong once more, came to
sacred Ark in the midst of their armyas the old prophet and made a strange
a talisman ; but superstition availed request. They asked him to give them
them nothing a king. They would have a monarch
The sons of Eli were slain in a general over them , like other nations ; a

rout , the Ark was captured ; and Eli, warrior able to lead the army of Israel
hearing the terrible news, fell dead against their enemies.
from his seat. SRAEL DEMANDS A KING AND LOSES
ISATHE CHIEF GLORY OF THE NATION
It was in this long time of ruin and
devastation that Samuel grew from Such a request was terrible to the old
childhood to youth, and from youth prophet. A king
Israel's pride thatover
theyIsrael ! Was
had for Kingit the
not
to manhood . His strange and lonely
life was spent in study of the Law, Invisibleand Eternal God of Righteous
ness ? Was it not their scorn that
and in meditation on the mysteries heathen people bowed before an earthly
of God. The older he grew the more
clearly he saw the truth of things. Was Israel toGod
ruler ? Was to be displaced ?
serve a
man -king ?
He sawthat
power that isthe
notworld is ruled
shifting tem-a Why, the glory of Israel lay in this :
and by
porary like man's power, but eternal. that alone among the peoples of the
He saw that this Eternal Power was world they worshipped one God, and
bowed the knee to none save this
working to make men always better, and Invisible and Eternal Power.
nobler, and healthier, and stronger ; he How should Israel prosper under a
saw that this Eternal Power that wanted
men to be healthy and good could only man -king, a little lord-king, when they
by obeying His laws ; could
be served
since He was a spirit invisible, and, King , who made the whole earth and
only be worshipped spiritually in the crowded the heavens with stars ? What
invisible silences of the soul. an exchange ! The Maker of heaven
and earth , the Almighty and Ever
SAMEEPLBELNVERSYESS
PEOPLE AND THESSAGE
NEW TOETHE lasting Creator of all things, given up
for a poor little creature, subject to
All through the distress and apparent the law of death, and touched in all
ruin of Israel, Samuel lived in commu- things like common men , liable to
nion with the unseen God ; and the sickness and pain, hunger and thirst,
heart- broken nation began slowly to heat and cold , a mortal of flesh and
reverence him , and to hope that he blood, a brother of the meanest beggar
might prove their deliverer . in the streets, one like unto the least
One day he declared his message to of human beings !
the people. TheyThey must give up But Israel persisted in the demand.
worshipping idols. They must turn to They wanted to be like other people .
the Invisible God of Righteousness. All the nations had a king ; they, too ,
1328
 LU

HANNAH DELIVERS SAM UEL

SAMUEL TO ELI
CELLERIE

ode

Hannah had vowed that if God would give her a son she would give him to His service. Her prayer
was answered . The good woman remembered her vow, and as soon as she was able she brought the
infant, whom she had named Samuel, to the old priest, Eli, and gave him up to the service of the Tabernacls.
This beautiful picture is from the painting by Mr. F. W. W. Topham
TUOTTEE EURLOITTI LOCOMODUEITTILIITTUTTI
1329
с
 1
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES ARGU
would have a king. Thus came to pass fields , called Israel to arms. The
one of the greatest national changes ever battle ended in a victory for Israel , and
made in the history of the world. You Saul became the hero of the nation .
must stop for one moment to consider Then did the old Samuel feel that now
it . Alone among all the nations on the he might relinquish the government,
earth, the Israelites adored as their and he called the people together and
King an invisible Power, whom they uttered his farewell. “ Behold, here I
called “ The Eternal.” Almost all the am : witness against me before the
English names for this power in the Old . Lord , and before His annointed .
Testament, such as “ God ," and Whose ox have I taken , or whose ass
“ Lord,” meant to the Israelites “ The have . I taken , or whom have I de
Eternal One.” They felt that the earth frauded ? Whom have I oppressed ,
had been made by some Power
who was eternal. Because this
One Eternal Power was the
greatest, they worshipped it .
They served under the great
and majestic Eternal Power,
who made for righteousness.
This Eternal One was their
King. But now the great change
was to be made ; the Israelites
were to become as other people ;
they clamoured for a visible
king who would lead them into
battle against their enemies.
In making this tremendous
change, the nation of Israel
lost the greatest of its glories,
the glory to which all modern
nations look back with wonder
ment and admiration .
And now we continue our
story. Samuel was on a

journey when he came across

two wayfaring men . One of
them was of great stature , and
very handsome to look upon ;
his name was Saul, and he
was in search of his father's
asses, which had strayed . The
other man was this Saul's SAMUEL HEARS A VOICE AND COMES TO ELI
servant . Samuel felt, as he One night, as the old priest lay in bed, the child Samuel came to
looked upon Saul, that this was his side , and asked if Eli had called him . Eli sent him back to bed,
the man chosen by God to be but a second and a third time the voice came , and Eli told Samuel
to say ,
the king demanded by Israel. if it came again , “ Speak, Lord , for Thy servant heareth ."
He spoke to Saul, and persuaded the or of whose hand have I received any
young man to spend the night with him . bribe to blind mine eyes therewith ? ”
On the morrow he went a little way with It was the striking claim of a righteous
Saul, and then , taking a phial of oil. ruler. The people gratefully acknow
poured the contents upon Saul's head ledged his services. He had ruled with
as a sign that he was annointed ” to honesty and righteousness. Then , to the
be king . Eternal God , Samuel ascribed the
Then, when Saul was chosen before justice of his rule, and counselled Israel
a great assembly.of thepeople, Samuel to fear the Eternal Power and serve
reminded the nation of their duty to Him in truth .
God , and counselled them to follow So Saul became King of Israel , and
righteousness. A war broke out, and the prophet retired from his labours.
Saul, who was still working in the The next Bible Stories begin on page 1477 .
TUTTI
1330
 The Child's Book of Blues
Familiar Things
THE GRASS
GRASS is one of the
commonest of all
CONTINUED FROM 1108
things. It is also a
thing of beauty and wonder ; but
it is so common that we seldom
pause to admire its beauty or to
think of the wonder of its structure
and habits . We ought to do all this,
for grass is one of the most important
things that exist on this earth . It is
almost as needful to us as air and
water. Many millions of people in the
Far East live chiefly on the seeds of
a grass called rice ; and even in this
country we should do ill without
grasses, for our bread and cakes are
made from the powdered seeds of a
grass called wheat.
It is true that we do not eat the
common green grass of the fields , but
sheep and cattle do ; and but for the
grass we should have neither beef nor
mutton - neither milk , nor butter, nor
cheese . Although we treat it roughly ,
even treading it under our feet, the
grass is worth more to us than all the
lilies and roses in our gardens.
Wherever there is a little patch of
bare earth, whether in town or country,
it will not be left long before grass
springs up, and covers it with a green
carpet . It is always striving to fill up
the beds and borders of the garden ;
and if the roadman did not take care,
the grasses would spread from the
fields and cover the roads. There are
over 3,000 kinds growing in different
parts of the world , and over
a hundred kinds in this country .
R a
OF THE FIELD
If you were walking
through a meadow of
tall , flowering grasses
just before the reapers come to
cut it for hay , and if you were to
gather as many kinds as you could
see, you would be surprised at their
number. In the spring you may have
walked through the same meadow , and ,
looking around, you might have said
that there is only one sort ofgrass ; but
you could not say that when the tall
flowering stems sway in the breeze .
At first the grass sends up only its
long, narrow leaves, which are rolled
up lengthwise, so that they can push
their way between the broader leaves
of any other plants that may be grow
ing there, and so reach up to the light.
Many of them have underground
shoots, which are quite as sharply
pointed, to enable them to force their
way, however closely the earth may
be crowded by the roots of bigger
plants. And so they spread on all
sides. The leaves may be eaten off
by cattle or mowed down by man , but
the grass-plant is not hurt, as other
plants would be.
In summer it sends up its jointed,
He
tubular stem , which is wrapped around
by the lower half of each leaf, and the
other half spreads out widely to catch
the air and sunshine for its food . At the
top ofthe stem the brush of flower -buds
appears, and as it opens the flowers
in smaller clusters spread widely on
hair- like branches. They are so well
balanced , and the slender stem is so
P_2
1331
 REUDELLE
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS

RUTUIT
one
perfectly formed , that it is seldom on others. In most kinds you will find
gets broken down by the wind, though there are three stamens, but in vernal
if we walk through the long grass in grass two only.
the hayfield , we do much damage to it . The anthers hang out below the
It is not easy to describe the flowers stigmas, and are so lightly poised that
of the grasses . They are so different the softest breath of air shakes them ,
from the flowers of the garden that we do and away goes the pollen to get caught
not talk of their sepals and petals, for on the hairy stigmas of a flower-spike
they have none. Instead, they have a a little further down the field . The
number of stiff, chaff -like scales to pro- stigmas of a grass- flower are not ripe
tect the stamens and pistil. These scales, until the flower's pollen has been scat
when found wrapped around a grass tered . The fat pistil gets hard after the

**********
seed or a grain of wheat, you would call stigmas have caught some flying pollen

ARTRITY
husks, but in flower-books they are grains from another flower , and inside
64
spoken of as glumes ” and “ paleæ .” of it there is found , a little later, a ripe
Let us suppose that you have gone seed . The stigmas are hairy, so that
into the field and found a stem of the they can easily catch the pollen as it
sweet-scented vernal grass, which you blows along. At the time the grasses
will know by comparing it with the are in flower there is so much of this
photograph on page 1342. This is quite pollen floating in the air that we draw
a common kind of grass, and the one it in as we breathe, and some people
which gives the delightful fragrance to who have delicate nostrils and throats
new -mown hay. Its flower -spike is one suffer from hay -fever because of the
of the simplest, and you will have little irritation the dust-like pollen sets up .
trouble in getting one flower apart from The awns on the inner glumes are
the others. Let us have a sheet of note- believed to prevent the seeds being
paper laid on the table before we begin, eaten by birds and other animals, their
and as we pull off each scale, we will sharp points pricking the lips or tongues.
lay it on the paper in the order in which In some cases also they assist the grasses
it stood on the flower. The pistil ends to spread from place to place by sticking
in two long, hairy branches, and these the seeds to the fur and feathers of the
will enable us to see that we are picking wild creatures . If you have been playing
off only one flower. in the hayfield, you will find scores of
Theouter scale is larger than any of them stickingin yourclothes.
the others, and the next one is not The stems of the grasses are made up
much smaller. These two are known as of jointed lengths. The joints are
the outer glumes. Next come two which swollen and solid , but between them the
are hairy , divided at the tip , and have round stems are nearly always hollow .
a long, stiff bristle standing out behind Their outer skin is made up of a coating
the notch . These are known as the of very thin flint , which makes them so
barren glumes, and the bristles are strong to bear the flowering branches
called awns . That makes four. The without breaking in the wind. If you
fifth is the flowering glume, and the sixth look at a bamboo cane, you will under
is the pale - smallest of all . These have stand the structure of the smaller grass
blunt points ; they are not notched , and stems-for bamboo is only a giant grass.
they have no awns. The leaves of grass sometimes have
There now stand revealed to us two their edges set with fine teeth , so fine
stamens, and in between these stands the that we need a magnifying - glass to see
fat little pistil, ending in the two long, them ; but if you draw the grass-blade
hairy branches or stigmas. The stamens between your fingers these teeth will
consist each of a long, slender stalk , on cut you as badly as a sharp razor would .
which is delicately balanced the large The hundreds of millions of grass -blades
anther, which bursts and scatters the in a field are always giving out oxygen
pollen powder on the breeze. Different to purify the air, and when any moist
kinds of grass differ slightly in the size , air passes over them , their smooth, cold
and shape of these parts and in the way surfaces cause it to condense , and so
the flowers are arranged ; butif you learn keep the earth moist and fruitful .
these details of one kind, you will have The photographs in the following
Little trouble in understanding the pages show us some familiar grasses .
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTYETTY de

1332
 ALLKLARERA AGEUKA EP I

THE MOST FAMILIAR WILD GRASSES

GEMITTITYTTTTTTI
DIE ERTED

FIBROUS - ROOTED WHEAT, OR COUCH GRASS CREEPING WHEAT OR COUCH GRASS

GROWING IN WOODS, IN JULY GROWING IN WASTE PLACES , IN JULY AND AUGUST
Though we may find couch grass in the woods, it is no use to look for it in the same place year after year,
for, if left to itself, it soon dies down. Sometimes it is called " spear grass The picture shows why.
1333
 !

FLOATING FOXTAIL COMMON SEA-REED, OR MARRAM

GROWING IN MARSHY PLACES, FROM JUNE GROWING IN LOOSE SAND BY THE SEA, ABOUT JULY
Floating foxtail is a kind of brother of meadow foxtail ; but it is not useful, merely curious, because it
grows wild in such very wet places. The sea-reed is very useful because it prevents the storms from
washing the sands in which it grows away, and thus prevents the sea from encroaching upon the land.
‫יוז‬: ‫בצומצידיפודבדואי‬ ‫מצטייר‬
1334
2 EGILS. LA LLE.UUA CRUISE

YELLOW OAT GRASS CRESTED DOGSTAIL

GROWING IN PASTURES AND MEADOWS, IN JUNE AND JULY , GROWING IN MEADOWS, FROM JUNE
Yellow oat grass is so called on account of its bright yellow flowers, which stand up boldly when all other grasses
are stunted. It is a great favourite with sheep and cattle. Crested dogstail is nearly always to be found
where chalk abounds. That is why readers who live in Kent, for example, will find a lot of it on the downs.
OTETT METZ
1335
nu

US
CE LCAILLA LES
BEAU JEULES DE LACLEAU LULURELVU LALECTUEL
rm

QUELLTEXT
22

SEA - LYME GRASS

GROWING IN MEADOWS AND PASTURES , FROM MAY TO AUGUST GROWING BY THE SEA , IN JULY
SOFT BROME
Soft brome is a very greedy grass . That is to say , it devours all the nourishment there is in the soil, and leaves
any other grasses which may be about to starve and die. Sea -lyme grass is very much like sea-reed , shown
on page 1334 , and even grown - up people , who should know better , frequently mistake one for the other.

TOXXry
Y YYTTYYTYIZYT
TYY
1336
 maranam:
wanaIVELLBIU.LULELE L.co. - U tauanma Kumaranemum 13

WALL BARLEY BARREN BROME

GROWING IN WASTE PLACES , FROM JULY GROWING IN WASTE PLACES, IN JUNE
We can generally find wall barley in country lanes huddling up at the foot of walls, but not very often growing
out boldly in the fields. Its bristly spikes are quite sharp. Barren brome is so called because it grows in
barren places where few other things will thrive. Barren brome has over seventy members of its family.
1337
 IDO
saucas LLEGUE
N14

I
LUIGIDIUL .
OTETYT
YYTTET

CREEPING SOFT GRASS

GROWS IN SHEN Y R
ADDE PLACES , IN JUL Y & AUGUST GROWING IN WOODS , FROM JULY ONWARDS
SL SE FAL OME BR
Some people say that false brome does not really belong to the brome family at all, and that is why they
call it " false ," It is really, however , entitled to a place among the bromes . The roots of creeping soft grass
spread or creep underground very quickly , and this gives it its name. Cattle do not care for this grass .

YRTTEXTU
TTERIT 1338
 )

)
MEADOW BARLEY FLOATING SWEET GRASS
GROWING IN DAMP MEADOWS. IN JULY & AUGUST GROWING IN DITCHES AND BY RIVERS, FROM JUNE
Meadow barley is very like wall barley, except that it grows in meadows instead of hiding away at the foot
of walls. Not only does Aoating sweet grass love the river-banks, but it often grows right up out of the water
itself, sometimes bending over and Aoating on its surface , and it is commonly found in ditches from June onwards.
*** 1339
in. Ona LEXUELLA OLI TEL KOD
LUCKLE IZTOLIU radu DER LLOGUE

PERENNIAL RYE GRASS ROUGH COCKSFOOT

GROWING IN MEADOWS AND PASTURES, FROM JUNE ONWARDS
Rye grass is more frequently to be met with than any other grass in the country. It was also the first grass to
be gathered and cultivated. Cocksfoot is a very tall - growing grass. That is the reason why hares and rabbits
are so fond of it, for not only do they eat it, but it is high enough for them to hide in when danger threatens.
Omrumu YRITMETTENT porrIITTYNYT YRITY
1340
 WOOD MEADOW GRASS ANNUAL MEADOW GRASS
GROWING IN WOODS, IN JULY GROWING ALMOST ANYWHERE , FROM MARCH
Wood meadow grass is a valuable one from the farmer's point of view, as it grows so quickly after the cattle
have nibbled it down. Annual meadow grass is the first grass to appear in fresh ground, such as when
a railway embankment has been cut. The seed is carried by the wind, and quickly germinates.
TIL
1 341
 ONTOLOITTERT

PURPLE MOLINIA SWEET - SCENTED VERNAL GRASS

GROWING ON WET MOORS, IN AUGUST GROWING IN MEADOWS AND PASTURES, FROM WAY
Purple molinia gets its name from the dull purple colour of its flowers. Sweet vernal is a lovely grass with
yellow flowers. That delightful scent of new -mown hay is due in a great measure to the fragrance of this
grass. The sweeter the scent of the hay, the greater the proportion of sweet vernal grass in its composition.
Turm
1 342
 LE SLEELUKESUSILAELA

MEADOW SOFT GRASS REED CANARY GRASS

GROWING IN MEADOWS, FROM JUNE GROWING BY STREAMS AND PONDS, IN JULY
Meadow soft grass has smaller seeds than the majority of grasses. So sniall are they that, by weigh ng and
then counting a small number, it is calculated that it would take nearly two millions of them to weigh a pound.
The photographs on these pages are by Henry Irving
THE NEXT PAMILIAR THINGS BEGIN ON PAGE 1409
mm
1343
 THE KING OF THE CUCUMBERS

WRZE

The King of the Cucumbers is a person of dignity. A large brass-headed furniture tack takes the place of an
eyeglass in one eye, while the other is represented by a black carpet tack . His body is upheld by small rounded
sticks, and his arms are wooden , too. The mouth, nose, and white of the eye are made by cutting away the peel.
1344
 THINGS TO MAKE
( THINGS TO DO
HOW THINGS ARE FASTENED TOGETHER
MAKING SIMPLE JOINTS
In the workshops and
factories of the world CONTINUED FROM 1288
many things are made,
because Nature provides
materials only for man's service. Man
has to shape Nature's products to his needs.
Materials are of vegetable, mineral, and
animal origin. They include wood, metals,
ivory, horn, bone, shell , and other sub.
stances. These have to be cut, or brought
in some way into the shapes required for
1 3
use . Therefore, when more than one
piece is wanted in the making of an article,
jointing is necessary.
A boy soon learns that all joints are not
made alike. He sees his father glue a
broken corner of a chair or table. His
mother mends a broken basin with secco
tine. The carpenter makes joints in which
projections fit into recesses. He also uses
screws and nails. The parts of an engine
are united with screw -bolts. The parts of
型 mentioned are present. And the lad working
7 8
a steel bridge are fastened with steel rivets.
There are more than a hundred different
ways of making joints. And for every one
there is a good reason why that one joint
should be used rather than any other in a
particular case . Here we will consider
some of the simple ways of joining wood-
work.
If you take a piece of board or, say, the
cover of a box, you are aware at once that
the direction in which the fibre, or the grain ,
“ 西
1345
IN WOOD
runs is very important.
You can perhaps bend and
split it in the direction of
its width, but not at all
so easily in that of its length. The length is
that in which the tree grows in height,
and the fibres run in that direction. It is
easy to split them apart, but not easy to
snap them off crosswise unless the piece
of wood is very slender. This is the first
great difference which must never be
forgotten when joints have to be made.
You know, too, that sometimes a piece of
board will shrink into a smaller width , or
it may crack. But it will never become
shorter lengthways, or crack in this direc
tion. This fact, also, must be remembered .
Further, some woods are much harder
than others. In some the fibres are straight,
in others they are curly. But, in all , the
differences due to direction of grain just
O
9 10
at home, as well as the carpenter and cabinet
maker, has to employ joints in such a way
that they will hold firmly and are suitable to
the kind of work, and to see that the grain of
the wood is arranged in the strongest direc
tion so that it will not shrink and crack .
GLUED JOINts. Glue is one of the com
mon cements, made from animal gelatine.
It is applied hot to the surfaces of wood
joints, and when cold it holds so securely
that the timber will often split before the glue
 THINGS TO MAKE
will part. But the joint must bemade along
the direction of the fibres, not across them ,
and only a thin film of glue must remain, as
too much glue spoils the joint.
Glue makes a secure joint, because it runs
into and occupies the minute vessels, as well
as covers the surfaces in contact. If timber
were like glass, glue could not unite it
strongly . Neither will it hold well on the
ends of fibres, or what is called end grain .
13
You could not, for instance, trust glue alone
to secure the corners of a box. Not only
would the “ hold ” of the glue on the end
grain be weak, but the glued surface would
be too small to be strong. In some cases,
thereiore, a glued joint is as strong as there
is any need for, while in others it is almost
useless.
Nailing . Nailing is a strong and quick
means of holding pieces of wood together.
It is rather a rough way, because the
heads of the nails show, and this, in
cabinet - work , would spoil the appear
ance of otherwise neatly finished
articles. Wire nails are used a great
16
deal now , and are made in many
different sizes and degrees of fineness.
Screws are generally used in work that
may have to be taken apart again
and that cannot be treated roughly.
The only way to get nailed work apart is
to prise it with a chisel or screwdriver, or, in
the case of a box , a hammer can be used to
knock it apart. Nails in wood should always
be placed so that , it any cutting is to be
done with chisels , gouges , or saws, there
shall be no risk of damage to the cutting
edges through coming into contact with a
hidden nail.
CORNER JOINTS. Pictures 1 to 16 show
joints suitable
for boxes and
box-like struc
tures . The
simplest joint
is in picture 1:
In it the end
17
pieces are
nailed between
the sides. If
the box is
longer one
way than the
other, the sides go the longest way. Plain
joints of this kind are used a great deal,
but only for rough work . Sometimes sides
are rebated, as shown in picture 2. This pre-
vents the ends from being knocked inwards,
for nails alone are not sufficient to keep the
parts exactly in position .
A better way is to form tongues on the ends
fitting into grooves, as shown in picture 3.
1346
AND THINGS TO DO
A stronger way still is shown in picture 4 ;
but thesides then have to project beyond the
end pieces, and there are notmany cases where
this can be allowed. Another improvement
is shown in picture 5, where the ends fit into
V -shaped grooves. This holds the parts }
together without nails. The ends, of course,
have to be slid in sideways. Generally, such
a joint is glued only, but it is troublesome to
make, and is not often used. Picture 6 shows
14 15
a rough but strong method, often used in
making packing- cases. Cleats, or strengthen
ing pieces, are nailed across the end pieces,
thus strengthening them , and also increasing
the joint surface, so that the box could not so
easily be knocked “ out of square " by rough
usage as some of the others might. Pictures
7, 8, 9, and 10 show corner joints that are
seldom used for entire boxes. The grain of
the wood in these may run either way,
In all the other examples it should
only run the way shown. Pictures
7 and 8 are rebated joints, with a bead
formed outside to improve the appear
ance and to make the line of thejoint
unnoticeable. Picture 9 has what is
called an ovolo moulding at its corner,
and 10 has both the outside and inside
corners rounded . If its inside corner
were square, it would not be necessary
to fit in the piece as shown.
MITRES . Mitres are the joints used for
neat, high -class box-work. The mitre, which
in its simplest form is shown in picture 11 ,
is the neatest possible joint, but there is
no way of holding the parts together very
strongly. The ends of all the pieces arecut
to an angle of 45 degrees, and they then
fit together as shown, with all the end grain
hidden. Such joints are glued, but the glue
does not hold
well on grain
cut at such an
angle. Some
times fine nails
are used as
18
well , but more
generally saw
cuts are made
( as shown )
after the pieces
have been
glued together
and the glue has hardened. Into these
sawcuts thin slips of wood or keys are glued,
so making it difficult to pull the joint apart.
Stronger joints are made by means of
stopped mitres, as in picture iź, used when
the sides are of different thickness from the
ends ; or, if they are of equal thickness,
lipped mitres, as in picture 13 , are strong .
In these two last cases there are square
DOUDOTI TITOOOO
 HOW THINGS ARE FASTENED TOGETHER
shoulders fitting, in addition to the por the mitred one. But you may also have
tions which are cut at an angle. dovetails which are not visible,termed secret
Dovetails. The strongest corner- joints dovetails. They do not go right through,
are made by cutting the joints so that they but only a part of the way into the sides, and
interlock . The simplest joint of there are several ways in which
this class is not really a dovetail , they may be fitted.
but is called a lock corner, Pictures 17 and 18 show
and is seen in picture 14. the separate parts of joints like
These corners are cut by ma those in 15 and 16. That at 17
chinery, and are used chiefly 19 HR is a dovetailed joint, and is
for light and small boxes for the strongest way to join two
packing things in. They are pieces of wood . That at 18
glued only, and are very strong, is called a lap dovetail . It is
but the appearance of locked secret only when viewed from
corners is not considered good one face. It is used chiefly
enough for them to be used for for drawers. Picture 19 is a
anything but cheap boxes. In dovetailed secret dovetail , which, when together,
joints, seen in pictures 15 and 16, the inter- appears on the outside as a mitred joint.
locking portions are wedge-shaped instead of Secret dovetails are often made to appear
parallel, like lock corners, and therefore on the outside the same as 13. Secret dovetails
there is only one direction in which they can are, of course, more troublesome to cut, and
be put together or drawn apart. These, are not so strong as plain dovetails, but, for
also, are usually only glued. the sake of neat appearance, they are pre
You will observe that the ends of the dove- ferred in high-class cabinet-work .
tails have rather an unsightly appearance, Strict accuracy in cutting is necessary for
and that the joint is not so neat, in fact , as all dovetails, so that their fit may be perfect.
THE DISAPPEARING SIXPENCE
This is a capitaltrick. Twothings onlyare waxed corner, and pressing this down a little,
wanted for it - a handkerchief spread so as to make it adhere. This done, we ask
outupon the table, and a sixpence laid in the someone to make sure, by feeling through
middle of it. The corners of the handker- the handkerchief, that the coin is still there.
chief are folded down over the coin , and any- Each person who does so presses the wax a
one is permitted to feel that it is still there. little closer.
And yet, at the conjurer's command, it passes Now comes the exciting moment. “ Now ,
through handkerchief and table, and is found ladies and gentlemen ," you say, " I am go
on the floor beneath. The handkerchief is ing tomake the sixpence pass right through
shaken out, and proves to be empty. This the table, and be found upon the floor. If
trick is good enough to make quite a reputa- you will all be very quiet, perhaps you
tion for the youthful wizard, and yet it is will hear it fall.” They won't , but they
simplicity itself - when you know it ! may as well imagine that they do so.
In the first place we We blow upon the
must have two six centre of the handker
pences, in appearance as chief, saying , “ Presto !
nearly alike as possible, Pass ! ” Then , hooking
and one of these we take the first and second fin
an opportunity to drop gers of each hand inside
quietly beforehand under the nearer opening of
the table at which we the handkerchief , as
propose to perform the shown in the picture,
trick. The only other we draw the two corners
thing required is a little smartly apart, one in
pellet of beeswax, the each hand , and shake it
size of a peppercorn . out. The coin, adhering
This we must knead be to the handkerchief, is
tween the fingers till it is drawn into the right
fairly soft, and then press, hand. “ Look under the
till needed in another table, and see whether it
sense, against the hinder part of our lowest has gone through," you say, and while
vest button . general attention occupied by looking for
To perform the trick , take the wax off the and picking up the other coin, you will have
and press
button, chief it against one corner of the ample opportunity to get rid of the one in the
which you are going to use. hand.
handker
Then lay the handkerchief on the table Of course we are not bound to make the
squarely in front of you, with the waxed coin pass “ through the table .” If we prefer
corner nearest to the right hand. Lay the it, we may order it to pass under a candle
sixpence on the centre of the handkerchief, stick, into a vase on themantelpiece, or even
or, better still , let somebody else do this, to into somebody's breast-pocket. All that is
prove that there is “ no deception .” Then needful is to place the duplicate sixpence
fold down the corners of the handkerchief where we intend that it shall be found, and
one by one over the coin, beginning with the alter the command accordingly.
1347
Partene LEGBOCOR FORTUNATELLALECSU

HOW THE LADIES CUT THE CARPET

THESE drawings show four ways in which the on a side containing six of these parts. This
Japanese ladies might cut up their carpet square measures 6 feet by 6 feet, or 36 square
according to theproblem stated on page 1281. feet; the small square in the opposite corner
In the first three drawings the carpet is measures 3 feet by 3 feet, or 9 square feet ; and
divided into four pieces , and of the two remaining parts each
these one sister has a large whole 6 feet by 3 feet, or 18 square feet
square ; another, two parts each ; altogether 81 square feet.
А
(marked A , A in the drawing) A boy or girl who understands
which together make a whole Euclid , Bk . I. Theorem 43, and
square ; and the third sister has Bk. II. Theorem 4, will readily
a small whole square. If you see how these two odd pieces of
take a thin piece of paper, you 1

N
carpet together make a square ,
cantrace the lines in the drawings, and how , in the other two ways
and cut out the pieces. In the of cutting the carpet, the whole
second drawing there are a large squares can be made.
whole square, a small whole But if the carpet is to be divided
4
square, and two parts ( A , A) 5 3 up into three squares of equal
which , put together, make a com size, it is necessary to cut it in
plete square. In the third draw the way shown in the fourth
ing you will again find that the two drawing, so that the first sister
parts A, A make a whole square. gets a square like the one num
Now, supposing the carpet to measure bered I ; the second sister a square made of
9 feet square, draw a square and divide the pieces shaped like 4 and 5 ; the third sister a
sides each into nine parts. Make a square square made of pieces shaped like 2, 3, and 6.
A SIMPLE HOCKEY SCARF FOR GIRLS
CROCHET work is easily learned and quickly rows, backwards and forwards , first the
done, and with it one can make a great treble, then the half- treble. This makes a
number of useful things. Wool , cotton , or distinct stripe in the pattern.
silk thread can be used of innumerable shades, To make the stitches, tie a little loop
thicknesses, in the end of
and kinds. the wool.
The hooks Take the
are of steel hook in the
for the thin right hand,
cotton or silk hold the end
threads;bone of wool in
for wool and the left, and
the stouter place the
cotton . The hook through
size of the the loop.
hook should Twist the
be chosen wool once
to suit the 1. Chain stitch 2. Treble stitch round the
thread in use. hook and
The materials required for the hockey scarf draw it through the loop, thus making
are : 4 ozs, of white Berlin wool, costing is.; another loop through the first. We thus
i oz. of coloured Berlin wool, 3d. ; 1 bone hook make 40 chain stitches.
( size 9 ) , 2d. Twisting the
First we think wool round the
about crochet hook to make
stitches . As a another stitch
matter of fact is called an
there is only “ over." So
one, because all “ making an
crochet consists over" is taking
of loops made up wool on the
by means of the hook by twisting
hook connected it round once.
by being drawn Treble stitches
one through the are worked into
other. The vari the row of chain
ations of this already done.
looping are
3. Half -treble stitch Keep the hook
called stitches. in the last chain
For the scarf we must learn three : 1, chain ; ( No. 40) , make an over, insert hook in 39th
2 , treble ; and 3 , half -treble. The chain is chain , taking up two threads. Make an over,
used as a foundation for the others. The pull it through the 39th chain ; make another
other two stitches are used in alternate over, pull it through two stitches on the
mmmmmm
1348
 are
CONSUCECODICE A SIMPLE HOCKEY SCARF FOR GIRLS
hook. Make an over, pull it through the
two remaining stitches, and the " treble ” is
complete.
Then do the same again into the next chain.
When you have done 40 treble, make one
chain (this is to keep the edge
even ), and go back with the
next stitch , called “ half -tre
ble." Keep the hook in the
chain , make an over, insert
hook in top treble of preced
ing row , taking up one thread
only (that is, the one on the
side nearest to you ) . As you
work, make an over, draw it
through the one thread , make
another over, and draw it
through all three.
We must not forget to take
up one thread of the preceding
row when doing half-trebles
and two threads when doing
trebles, or we shall alter the
pattern .
Do a little piece like picture 3,
which shows the half-treble.
4. The scarfcomplete, showing
It will help you to get your colouredborderandwhite
stitches even , and teach you
how tightly to hold the thread. Woollen
crochet should always be loosely done. The
wool is easily stained , and wears threadbare.
Occasionally count the number of trebles in a
row to see whether there are still 40. It is very
easy to miss one, or to make one too many.
Wool is sold divided into i oz. skeins, so
LITTLE PROBLEMS
HESE problems are continued from
THESE
page 1288. The answers appear in
that part of our book beginning on
page 1505 .
HOW MANY KNIVES AND PENS ?
84. “ You may giveme three dozen pens
and five dozen knives , " said Uncle William
when he was purchasing prizes for the boys
at a Sunday-school picnic. Each knife cost
twice as much as each pen . If he had bought
three dozen knives and five dozen pens he
would have saved six shillings .
What were the prices of the pens and the
knives ?
WHAT IS THE WORTH OF TIME ?
85. An express train travels from Man
chester to London at 40 miles an hour
including stops. An excursion train runs
from Manchester to London at 30 miles an
hour including stops. The fare by the
express train is one farthing per mile higher
than the fare by the excursion train .
Reckoning the value of his time , a com-
mercial traveller decides that it costs him as
much to travel by the excursion train as it
does to travel by the ordinary train.
What is his time worth ?
WHAT IS THE WORD ?
86. There is a word of six letters , the
meaning of which is made exactly opposite
by changing the places of the two middle
letters . What is the word ?
TUOTO
UU
ACUEIL GILDI
the Alb. will wind up nicely into four balls.
Crochet three balls and about a quarter of
the fourth into the scarf, and save the
remainder for the edging and fringe.
Next comes the border, which is a band of
colour about 2 inches wide at
each end. Make it in the
same way as the rest, carefully
joining the two wools with a
tiny knot.
After the colour — which , by
the way, may be your club
colour-make another four
rows of white, and then pro
ceed to the fringe.
This is the easiest task of
all , and this is how it should
be done.
One has only to cut enough
pieces of wool of equal length
and knot them , two together,
in between each treble of the
last row. The best way to get
the pieces even is to wind the
wool round a piece of card
board eighty times, and then cut
the leaves
fringe. them offallthe
along pieces
one side.
for This
the
fringe ready to be threaded through in pairs
and knotted once in the centre .
An ordinary postcard makes a good gauge
upon which to wind the wool ; it leaves
the fringe a very suitable length - about
3/2 inches. Make the fringe of the white
wool, of course, and not of the coloured .
FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
WHAT WAS THE SUM ?
87. Harry's sleeve had rubbed against his
slate as he returned from school, with the
result that many of the figures in his long
division sum had become rubbed out.
Putting a x to represent a place where a
figure had become rubbed out, the sum was
like this :
215) x 7 x 9 x ( 1 x x
X X X
x 5 x 9
X 5 X 5
x 4 x
X X X
He remembered that the sum ended without
a remainder, and , being a clever boy , he filled
in all the figures that had been rubbed out.
How did he do it ?
HOW MANY MILES PER DAY ?
88. Hicks walked 117 miles, beginning on
Sunday morning and finishing on Monday
evening of the following week. He walked
each day one mile further than the day before.
How many miles did he walk each day ?
HOW MANY MARBLES HAD FRED ?
89. “ How many marbles have you ?"
asked Fred's mother. “ Well,"> said Fred ,
" if you add one- quarter to one -third of the
number, you will have ten more than half of
the number."
How many marbles had Fred ?
CERITTELUT TOUT
1349
 A A LIDO ACCADEIADAWAM
A LITTLE GARDEN
WHAT TO DO IN THE
Oursummer work in our littlegardenplots
is rapidly drawing to a close ; but the
autumn is a very busy time for all keen
gardeners. In fact, the autumn work is even
more important than the spring work, and
many of our spring flowers have to be planted
at this season .
Just at present, however, our gardens are,
or they ought to be, bright and beautiful, and
so full of plants that there is little or no room
for planting or sowing. For all that, we must
not be idle. Very likely you put away your
pots in the spring when you planted out your
geraniums, fuchsias, and other flowers that
you keep in the house through the winter.
Now , you must make it a rule never to plant
anything in a dirty or green pot. It is quite
easy to get rid of the green mossy growth - a
scrubbing-brush and some water will soon do
the work - but before using the pots they
must be perfectly dry. When new pots are
bought they should be soaked in water and
allowed to dry before being used.
In some of them the old geraniums and
other plants may be potted up when we begin
to fear frosts ; but long before this is
necessary , and, indeed, at once, we may pot
up some bulbs to power very early in the
spring if we have
a window in the
house , or a corner
of the conserva
tory in which to
place them .
If we have six
pots in which to
grow bulbs, we
may put in the
crocks-- never A bed of violets
plant without
ihese at the bottom of the pots, or the
plants will not thrive -- and for soil we may
take about equal parts of leaf-mould, loam ,
and silver sand - rather less of the sand-
and mix all carefully together. The pots
may be filled , and the bulbs planted.
A capital selection of bulbs would be one
pot each of Roman hyacinths, petticoat hoop
daffodils , snowdrops, crocuses, tulips, and
KOTIT
UT
hyacinths of a larger and finer variety than
the early flowering Roman hyacinths
One of these larger hyacinths is enough for
the pot, while three or four tulips, six
crocuses, six snowdrops, four daffodils, or
four or five Roman hyacinths are enough for
a five -inch pot. If yet another pot were to
be added it should be a pot of freesias, which ,
beside producing beautiful pale flowers, are
also sweetly scented. Once the bulbs are
safely and firmly potted we must keep them
for some weeks in the dark . Either they must
go down into a dark cellar, or we may invert
another pot on each , place them on ashes,
and cover them with ashes or dead leaves .
The reason for this darkness is wonderfully
interesting. The bulbs, after being planted,
have to grow in two directions, downwards
from the base of the bulb in the form of roots ,
1350
IKONA tanan ERED
MONTH BY MONTH
MIDDLE OF SEPTEMBER
and upwards from the point of the bulb to
form leaves. Now , as the roots find the
nourishment of the soil and convey it to all
parts of the plant , it will be quite clear that it
is necessary to have root growth before top
growth , so that this top growth , when it
appears, shall be sufficiently nourished . The
darkness encourages this root growth, and
therefore, until the roots have been formed,
say, in five weeks, we keep the pots containing
the bulbs away from the daylight.
Freesias do not require this period of dark
ness, and are better without it.
All the pots need not be planted at the
same time. The tulips and hyacinths, for
instance, may be left until October, though
the Roman hyacinths should be put in now ,
in order to flower in the winter.
You already know all about the summer
treatment of your violets, and we will suppose
that someone is going to give you the entire
care of a frame of double violets for the
winter. It will be a very interesting hobby,
and a success if you only take the trouble to
find out what the little plants need for their
weliare. The time has come to put them in
the frames, for there will be a better chance
of success if they are established thus early
before winter.
A frame six feet
by four feet is ex
cellent, and, if pos
sible , it should be
in a warm , shel
tered position that
gets as much of
the sunshine as it
can ; that is to say ,
it should face the
south . You can till
it nearly full of soil. But it may be that there
is a difficulty in getting this amount of soil. In
that case collect some dry dead leaves and
more than half fill the frame with these. Now
get into the frame and tread them down as
firmly as possible , and on the top of them put
quite a foot of soil .A good plan to know the
depth of the soil you have put in is to mark on
one of the outside boards the depth of the
leaves. You can then tell the amount of soil . H
It is one of the most important points of
growing violets in frames successfully to have
the plants almost touching the glass when
the lights are put into place. The frame is a
good deal deeper on one side than the other,
and, of course, the soil must follow the same
line of slope. Make the soil firm and let
everything settle down for a few days. After
that you may lift your violet plants and get
them into place. Plant so that they do not
touch by some four inches or so, or a little less.
M'atering greatly helps in settling them . “But
for the present there is no need to put on the
glass lights . If the dews should be excep
tionally heavy they may be drawn on at night,
but on no account must they be ciosed down
--a piece of wood or brick should tip them
up . Violets want air to flourish well.
 COMPLETING
We have alreadymadethe farmhouse and
the dairy, also the houses for the cows,
horses, pigs, and hens. The only important
farm building that remains to be made is the
barn, which is a very necessary part of the
farmsteading. Crops may be stored in it
and the many different kinds of farm imple-
ments and machinery. Then, having made
the barn , we shall make and fit up the various
walls upon a large board, which will repre-
sent the ground upon which the farm stands,
and we shall arrange upon this cardboard
ground the many buildings we have erected
in convenient positions for the work of the
farmer and his servants.
First, then, we shall make
the barn . Its plan is given
third - scale in picture 1. We
use scale -rule C to take the
measurements from the pic
ture, and the full-sized rule
to make the drawing upon
the card. As we fold up
the card , after we have cut
it out, it will appear as
shown in picture 2 . Now
we draw and cut out the
plan given in picture 3,3 which
is actual size. We must ob
serve that we bend the dotted
lines which
have the
circles from
the back
and not
from the SIDE
front of the
card , so
that we
must cut
the card
half through upon the back .
Then we make the gable
strut, the plan of which , also
full size, is given in picture 4 ,
and glue it in the under side
of the gable when bent over
as shown in picture 5. The 1. Plan of barn : one-third scale
gable should now be glued
to the roof of the barn as
seen in picture 5, and the
completed barn, with its wide
swinging door, is seen in
picture 6.
We now give attention to
what is perhaps the most
interesting part of our farm
work - making the ground
plan of the farm itself, with
places for all the buildings 2. Folding up the barn
that we have already made.
We must have a sheet of
strawboard , say, about 24
inches by 15 inches. Then
the plan given in pic
ture 7 must be drawn
upon this strawboard.
The picture is one
third scale , so that
we use scale -rule C 3. Part of barn roof : actual size
MODELTOWN FARM
to take our measurements , and our full -sized
rule to draw the lines on the card. The lines
in the picture are all solid black lines, but in
this case we do not cut out the card at these
lines. In fact, we shall not cut the card at
all , but merely have the whole sheet of straw
board its full size. Then at a later time we
may put other articles outside the farm
proper, in the ground around the farm which
the outer part of the strawboard will re
present.
Having drawn the plan in picture 7 on our
strawboard, we can glue down the houses in
their proper places—the farmhouse, dairy
and dairy shed , barn, cow
house , calf-house, hen -house,
piggery, stable, and the two
dog -kennels. We have the
walls to fill in , and two more
FRONT ROOF sheds to make before the en
closure is complete.
The corner between the
farmhouse and the barn will
BACK ROOF
be filled in to look like pic
ture 8, which shows a cart
shed and a gate. The plan
of this part is given half-scale
in picture 9, and in taking
BACK WALL the sizes from the picture, scale
rule B is used . When this
has been cut
out, it is
folded up
and glued to
the straw
BARN SIDE board so as
to make the
corner as
shown in
picture 8.
We must get
FRONT WALL a twig, and, having cut it to
the right length, glue it into
position as seen in the picture,
so that it will do duty as a
pillar or prop for the end
of the shed-at the wall end
of it.
Use rule C The next corner for our
attention is that between the
stable and the cow -shed ,
which , when finished, will
look like picture 10, with a
corner shed having a wall
along part of its front. To
make this, the plan in pic
ture II , which is half-scale,
must be drawn on card , using
scale-rule B , and then cut
out. By making two pinholes
through the centres of the
crosses we find where to glue
the front wall inside. Folded
up and glued into position to
the wall of the stable
at one end , and to the
wall of the cow -shed
at the other end , the
result will be as shown
in picture 1o.
1351
 BANKROTUN
CERCA LOOD TELEZETORILOZUKLEOZOTERUTAMA KELUARGA
KATALOKWORK

CORN
HAY STACK
STACK

4. Gable strut : actual size

2

PIGGERY KEMEL CORNER SHED

STABLE

5. Gable window
HEN
HOUSE
COW
SHED

CALF
SHED
6. Barn complete

BARN
FRONT

DAIRY

FARM HOUSE CART

DAIRY SHED
WALL

SHEO
KENNEL
TERLESERTIN

7. Ground plan of farm : one- third scale. Use rule C

WALL
END
TETT

ROOF
WALL
SIDE

8. First corner of
farmyard
ROOF

ROOF

FACE

SHED

..........
OF

SIDLL
E
9 .....
WA
-

9. Plan of first corner : half -scale 10. Second corner of farmyard

.

Use rule B
NIKAD

11. Plan of second corner

12. Plan offarm wall : half -scale. Use rule B half- scale . Use rule B
bort to UTZUOTTEET TRIDUUT
1352
 DOUCHE LAZIO ETA ZELTUIELELTATT I SLICE ILai siune EEUUTOS

13. Fourth side of farmyard

15. Short wall

actual size

ZECI
ME
17. Plan of corn -rick : half-scale. Use rule B

16. Corn -rick

14. Plan of gate and

wall : actual size

20. Top of rick 18. Rick bent up

19 .
Roof
o rick
l.alf-scale

21. Hay -stack

23. Roof ofhay- stack : one

third scale. Use rule C
a

22. Plan ofhay -stack : one -third scale. Use rule C 24. Hay-stack before it is covered
MOMETRO
1353
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO.CO.
The dairy, the calf-shed, the hen-house,
and the piggery are already in position . A
wall will extend from the dairy to the piggery,
and thus enclose the farmyard on that side.
The plan of this wall is given half -scale in
picture 12. The end with the folded slip will
be glued to the dairy, and the other end to
the side wall of the piggery. Observe that
the back of the dairy projects a little from the
face of the wall outside. There remains only
the fourth side of the farmyard to be finished,
that between the piggery and the stable.
This part is seen finished in picture 13: The
plan of the larger portion is given in pic-
ture 14, which is made actual size, so that in
drawing it we use the full-sized scale-rule,
both to take the sizes from the picture and to
make the drawing on the card. This part is
glued to the end of the piggery and to the
back of the kennel , as seen in picture 13 .
Finally, the plan given in picture 15 is drawn
full size, cut out, and glued to the back corner
of the stable, and this part also is complete.
TAR
Modeltown Farm made as described in these pages
Upon that part of the farm ground close to
the farmsteading, we frequently see on a real
farm stacks of hay and of corn. We will
take the corn- rick first. It is seen finished in
picture 16. Picture 17 gives a plan of the body
of the corn- rick . It is half-scale, so that we
make our drawing by using scale -rule B.
The plan is cut out and half cut at the
dotted lines. Then the card is bent up , and
it will be as shown in picture 18. The easiest
way to make the sides stand erect in their
proper positions is to take a strip of paper
and gure it on intsidethewalls ; Some postage-
stamp edging vil do nicely for the purpose.
To make the top of the rick, compasses
are necessary ;. : The legs. of the compasses
are set 24 inches apart,anda circle is dravin.
This is.making a drawig oj the plan shown
in picture 19 , which is half-scale. Complete
the drawing by making the two black lines
leading from the edge , and the one chain line
leading from the centre to the edge. Cut out
at the black lines, and fold over until the
THE NEXT THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO BEGIN ON PAGE 1505
.chain line is close to the solid black line that
goes from the centre to the edge of the circle.
LAILLE
Now we glue the slip that goes under one 1
edge, and hold it until it is firm , and have 1
a lid - shaped top, as seen in picture 20.
This we glue to the sides of the rick which
we have already made. Now we cut pieces
of straw—the thinner the better - into very
short lengths, and , after covering the sides of
the rick with glue, we sprinkle on the pieces
of straw . We cut some longer pieces of
straw , say, about one inch long, and split them
if they are rather thick. Glue a band of
straws on to the top right around the rim ,
projecting well over the rim , and about three
quarters of an inch up the top . Glue on
another band higher up, projecting over the
first band, and then a third band in the same
way. Finally, take about a dozen thin straws
and tie them into a tight little bundle close to
one end , spread the other end, and place i
them upon the pinnacle of the rick and fix
them with glue. We ought now to have a
MANTAN MELI
very realistic representation of a corn -rick
as seen in picture 16.
Lastly we make the hay-stack, a picture of
which is given in picture 21. Its plan is given
one-third scale in picture 22 , so that we use
scale - rule C for taking the measurements.
Having drawn and cut out the card , we fold it
up as usual, either gluing the edges to each
other or using gummed paper inside the
stack. The top or cover is given in plan in
picture 23, and this also is one-third scale, so
that again we use scale-rule C. When we
have cut out the card and bent the roof, we
find that the ends at the top take the form in
picture 24. We glue these parts into the form
there shown, and finally glue the top to the
sides. Then we cut into very small portions
some sweet hay, glue the sides of the stack ,
and sprinkle the chopped hay over the
card . We thatch the top like the corn - rick ,
and so complete Modeltown Farm .
The next part of Modeltown is in that part
of our book beginning on page 1607.
UTDOLICMI
DITO
1354
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

"HERE is only one nation in the world that has a whole continent to itself.
de as
can possibly be, for it is exactly on the other side of the earth . England's
midday is Australia's midnight ; England's summer is Australia's winter. We
read here the story of the way in which this great wild country, still the home
of black savage races when our great- grandfathers were born, has become a
white nation . It is a great, strange land - a land of fruitful areas and pathless
deserts, of tremendous mountains and enormous forests, and if there were not
trains and telegraphs and newspapers and all signs of civilisation there,
we might think sometimes that Australia was still at the beginning of time.
For here live still the oldest animals in the world, birds with hairs instead
of feathers, jackasses that laugh, swans that are black, and foxes that fly.

AUSTRALIA, THE GREAT SOUTH LAND

over the whole of this
Tº visit
where .there
Australia,
is the vast territory.
CONTINUED FROM 1248

only peoplein the world We must go back

inhabiting a whole con to the times of the
tinent , we must travel Stuarts for our first
half round the globe, for Wostorn Queensland glimpse of it . A Spanish
this part of the British AUSTRAL
Aus tralia Australia IA
sailor, Torres , seems to
Empire is as far away No.S Wales
have been one of the first
‫سس‬

from the Motherland as explorers, and he left his

Victorias
it can be , on the other name in thestraits between
side of the great earth Tamanta
at the north of Australia and
ball on which we live. the island of New Guinea .
When we in Britain and our The Dutch came next with many
friends in Canada are fast asleep expeditions all through the seventeenth

at night, the Australians are in the
midst of their brilliant day. When
we are keeping Christmas in mid-
winter with frost and snow , the Aus-
tralians are keeping it in midsummer,
with a festival ofbright flowers and
hot sunshine. When they look up to
the beautiful night-sky over their
heads, they see quite different stars
from those we know so well in our
northern half of the world — the Pole
Star and those of the Plough. It is
the stars of the Southern Cross that
flame so brightly over the land that
has taken them for her emblem .
What a huge, solid mass of land
Australia looks on the map ! Some-
times it is called the largest island
o
in the world ; sometimes the smallest
continent . It is twenty -five times
larger than the British Isles , and
almost as large as all Europe. Let us
see how it has come to pass that the
Union Jack , together with the stars
of the brilliant Southern Cross, floats
OO
century, and for 150 years what was
known of the island -continent was
called New Holland. But neither
Spaniards nor Dutch made colonies
in the lands they found in this part
of the world . Tasman , the explorer
after whom Tasmania is named, did
not even land in Tasmania , the island
O
nearly as large as Scotland, that lies
about 200 miles south of Australia .
About fifty years after Tasman,
William Dampier, an Englishman,
explored the west coast, leaving his
name in Dampier Land, but he gave
such a poor account of the dry and
sandy coasts, and the barbarous
natives he saw there, that for a long
time no one cared to face the long
voyage round Cape Horn or the Cape
of Good Hope with so little reward
at the end of it .
These first dwellers in Australia,
owing to very poor food , were stunted
and stupid . They generally lived a
wandering life, sleeping in holes in the

BUG
1355
 cream
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES.
. MG ZX
ground. They were considered the American colonies ; but, when these
ugliest and most uncivilised of all the
native races. It is slow and difficult
work to try to improve the blacks ,
who seem to be slowly dying out as a
race ; they have never been numerous
nor of much account.
Now, before Wolfe made his famous
attack upon Quebec, a young sailor-
officer was sent to sound the St.
Lawrence and make charts to guide the
ships which were carrying the troops.
AUSTRALAA'S
SHAPTERIORBOTANY
THE SAD BEGAN STORY
BAY
So well was this work done that later
he was sent by George the Third to
the far distant and almost unknown
South Pacific to find new lands for
England there. This was the great
explorer Captain Cook, who was gifted
with untold energy and perseverance. sheep, cows, horses-not even rabbits ;
He approached " New Holland ”” from and no corn , nor vegetables, nor fruits,
the Pacific, and on board was a friend
who had gone out with him to study
anything new they might meet with
in birds, animals and plants.
They called the east coast which they
explored New South Wales, and the
spot where they landed they called
Botany Bay, because of the rich harvest
of flowers
all sorts Bay
of Botany ! Those plants.
andwords,whic h
bring a picture of brilliant flowers to
our mind, are the heading of a very
sad chapter of Australian history.
Eight years after New South Wales had
been claimed for Great Britain , a very
different party from that composed of
the gallant captain, the enthusiastic
botanist, and their bronzed and daring
sailors landed near Botany Bay.
OW 700 PRISONERS FLEW THE UNION JACK
Hºw ON THE BIRTHDAY OF AUSTRALIA
It was on January 26, 1788-now
kept with rejoicing as the birthday of
Australia — that 700 prisoners, convicted
of ill- doing at home, stood, with those
in charge of them , around a flag-
staff which had been hastily rai ed, and
cheered as the Union Jack was run up
to the top, to float out on the breeze.
Then the Governor made a speech ,
hoping they would make the most of
their chance to lead a new and better
life in a new country. Till this time,
convicts like these, who had broken the
law in Enzlan i and were punished in
those days by being sent out of the land,
were transported over the sea to the
1356
colonies declared their independence,
the discoveries of Captain Cook were
used as 'settlements for the poor
miserable people. This first convict
settlement in Australia is always spoken
of as Botany Bay, but the Governor
of the new little colony settled on the
magnificent harbour of Port Jackson,
a little further north, on the shores of
which has grown up , in about 100
years, the splendid city of Sydney.
The little fleet of sailing ships bringing
these first convict settlers had called
on their way, during a long, dreary,
cramped voyage of many months, at
the Cape of Good Hope , to take in food
and animals with which to stock their
farms on arrival ; for as yet there were
no domestic animals in Australia ; no
such as white people are accustomed
to live upon . There was not a single
animal from which to obtain milk, nor
a single plant of which to make bread.
At first there was much suffering from
want of food and other necessaries,
but by degrees farmers came out to
settle, and things began to improve .
THEERONBLED BEGINNING& THEWEALTH
BLUE
For a long time the colony did not
grow quickly, for, besides the food
difficulty, the presence of so many
thieves and other idle characters was
a great hindrance. Then , again , the
great blaze of war which finished the
mighty duel between France and England
gave men plenty to do and to think
about nearer home. The few who did
go to Australia slowly settled the fertile
and well-watered east -coast lands, and
then the beautiful island of Tasmania
across Bass Straits, for a rough and
steep mountain range with great cliffs
2,000 feet high in parts shut them
away from the wide uplands and
deserts beyond them in the interior.
Then there came a change. A kind
of sheep, famous for its splendid woolly
coat, was brought to the colony at the
beginning of the nineteenth century,
and throve wonderfully. Then a way
was forced through the rugged passes
of the Blue Mountains, opening up vast
grassy lands stretching away and away
to the west. These sheep runs are
often called the truew . alth of Australia.
ro TYROTEXITtorn
 aamanam
ULLANARAKU
LABANANCI

మ nammanamamsarammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmanam CUIDA
WA
2(KIASI
GA

THE LAND OF WHEAT AND GOLD

3

LIEPIRINA

A GOLD- MINE IN NEW SOUTH WALES AND THE TO THAT HAS GROWN UP AROUND IT

TEAMS OF HORSES PLOUGHING THE WONDERFUL WHEAT LANDS OF NEW SUUTH WALES

REAPING IN THE GREAT WHEAT-FIELDS OF NEW SOUTH WALES

Gold and wool and fruit are the chief things which make Australia rich. Science enables the gold- miner to
get every scrap of gold out of the rock he quarries, mostly in the highlands of the south -east and west. It
enables the farmer to cultivate his land in the best possible way and to raise the most bountiful crops of wheat
and maize. Science and honest toil make Australia one of the world's greatest storehouses of natural riches.
DISSEMITIL IT TIITTY LITIUITTITUITITYTTTTTTTTNITY TYYYYY
MmmmMTITUTT DETAILIUXTTT
1357
 in CEOLOON
- THE
DECOTECA
CHILD'S
Next, at the end of the war, after
Waterloo, many soldiers wanted em-
ployment, as did also the “ hands "
that were thrown out of work by the
introduction of the rapid and tireless
iron and steel fingers of machinery.
THHE
EOF SHEEP RUNS FROM WHICH MOST
THE WORLD'S WOOL COMES
And so men came out to Australia.
They became shepherds, living a rough
life in huts while tending large flocks,
roaming over the open country ; or
they bought or rented land of their
own and were called “ squatters.”
These now live in comfortable bunga-
lows called “ stations,” and are often
helped by the “ blacks, ” who make
good stock -men . The sheep thrive
because the climate is mild , and there
is plenty of room for them to wander
about and to find the tufts of wild
grasses and shrubs which suit them well.
There are millions and millions of
sheep now in Australia, which supply the
greater part of the wool used in the
world . Shorn from the sheep's back,
the fleeces are tightly packed and
brought down to Sydney and other fruit, or keep sheepon the lands theyhad
discovered in their hunt for gold, and the
great ports to be carried over the seas
to keep busy those mills and workers land proved good for these purposes.
we saw in the bustling, smoky towns
of South Yorkshire. Yet it is only
little over one hundred years since the
first fleecy sheep were taken to
Australia !
Some men's fancy led them to farm-
ing and gardening , especially on the
strip of well-watered coast land on the
east slope of the mountains.
Great Dividing Range, which runs down
the east side of Australia, is something
like the Pennines, which part Lanca-
shire and Yorkshire. Both influence colonies, and the most thickly peopled in
the climate of the country to east
and west, and both hold untold wealth
in their rough sides. In the Pennines
it is chiefly coal ; in the Dividing
Range it is chiefly gold, and it was
gold that made the next great change in
Australia .
WHAT HAPPENED WHEN A SHEPHERD
PICKED UP A LUMP OF GOLD
A shepherd picked up a lump of
gold while looking after his flocks,
and brought it into Melbourne, a small
village at that time, when Queen
Victoria was a girl. There is nothing
that excites people more than to hear
that gold can be found in any par-
CU ZZY
BOOK OF COUNTRIES
ticular spot ; and as it becamemore
and more certain that gold was plentiful
in Australia, men rushed with spades
and pickaxes from every part of the
world. Clerks threw down their pens ;
students and teachers threw down their
books ; sailors left their ships ; police
men left their beats ; lawyers, doctors,
merchants - all caught the “ gold fever
and sought for the precious metal which
was to be found in the gravel of the
beds of streams and in the mountain
2)
slopes of the Australian Alps, as the
southernmost part of the Great Dividing
Range is called, some 60 or 70 miles
behind Melbourne. This city of Mel.
bourne grew suddenly very rich , for in
ten years £ 100,000,000 worth of gold
rewarded the “ diggers.”
Now , all these diggers needed food
and shelter and clothes, so the farmers
got good prices for their meat, vege
tables and flour, and a trade sprang
up bringing manufactured things from
England. Then, again, when the first
richness of the finds abated ,many of the
diggers settled down to farm and grow
VICTORIA STATE,
,AUSTRALIA'S SMALLEST
WHERE
There was no question about the
colonies growing now , and by degrees
the states took shape as we see them
to-day, starting from the large, original
colony of New South Wales.
The gold colony, Victoria, about
This the size of Great Britain , was cut off
from New South Wales in 1851 .
Although the smallest, it is one of the
richest and most important of the
Australia . Besides the gold which is still
mined in it, Port Philip receives and
sends away great quantities of wool
from the pastures of rich grass which
cover about three -quarters of the
province, and the fertile soil and mild
climate are good for growing all sorts of
corn , fruits and vegetables . Its
capital, Melbourne, is so fine with its
wide streets , splendid buildings, its great
trade, needing miles of busy wharves,
that it is often called “ Marvellous
Melbourne." Tramcars, omnibuses, han
soms, motors carry passengers about
as in England, and there is as great
interest in cricket and football as in
1359
 THE NATURAL WEALTH OF AUSTRALIA

ONE OF THE WONDERFUL ORCHARDS OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA WITH A VINEYARD BEYOND

ELEEUE

THE ENORMOUS LOGS CUT FROM THE GREAT FORESTS OF AUSTRALIA LYING AT THE SAW-MILL
ALLORCED
TUE

PREPARING WOOL TO BE SENT FROM AUSTRALIA INTO ALL PARTS OF THE WORLD
The wealth of the world is all in the soil. Men have only to develop it. Here by their labour they have
created vast orchards and fruitful vineyards. They have cut timber which the steam-saws make into boards
for building houses. They have bred sheep which yield abundant wool, that is packed up and sent away
from the seaports to England and other parts of the world, to make warm clothes for us in winter.
1359
 JLD EL ZAXO -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
ORALS

any northern town at home. Crowded lands are wide stretches of downs
pleasure boats steam about the bay, where enormous numbers of sheep are
beautiful tree ferns grow in the valleys fed . Passing on to the long westward
close by, and delicious fruits are to be slope the country becomes drier, and
had fora few pence a pound in the shops. often great difficulty is found in getting
NEWSOUTHWALES,
HAVE
AND PROSPERITY
HOW SQUATTERS ofenough waterDeep
cattle. for the flocks
wells andtoherds
have be
New South Wales threw off a northern bored, often without success, and after
colony called Queensland in 1859, but great expense. The part of Queens
the land it has kept under its old name land that is subject to the greatest
is six times as large as England. The want of water is called the Never -Never
chief industry of New South Wales is Country. The Editor of this book has
still wool.The squatter, who also rears heard of a little Australian reader who
great herds of cattle, has two great had never seen rain when she was nine
difficulties to face . One is that there years old !
is often very little rain for months Brisbane, the chief city, depends on
together, and the food for the flocks coal, found in its neighbourhood, and
and herds dies down - all but the on wool . Queensland is rich in gold,
shrubs which grow on the desert lands, copper and silver, and also sends away
and sometimes the poor animals die in much timber.
thousands for want of water when the TH AUS
SOUOF TRALIA , THE WONDERLAND
VAST DESERTS AND SPACES
springs and rivers are all dried up.
The other difficulty is rabbits. It As we look at the map, we realise
was a sad day when these little creatures the vast deserts that take up the centre
were brought to Australia. They have and west of the island- continent. The
increased so enormously that they often province of South Australia, as large
completely spoil a squatter's run by as France , Germany, Austria and
eating up all the grass needed by the Italy, put together, which is really a
sheep.. Great efforts are being made great slice of the middle of Australia
to get rid of them . from north to south , has most of this
New South Wales grows much fruit , desert land. Many explorers have lost
such as oranges and peaches ; also their lives trying to find out its vast
fine wheat and vegetables. At each unknown centre . It was not till 1861
side of its splendid capital, Sydney, that anyone succeeded in getting right
are coal-mines ; here is another New- across. A few years later, a splendid
castle, black with coal-dust ! There piece of work was done along this rocky
are other valuable mines , too , yielding and sandy track. Telegraph poles,
gold, silver, copper, tin and lead. telegraph wire, provisions, and all
Sydney is built all along the bays necessaries were carried from Adelaide
and promontories that make up the on the south to Port Darwin on the
magnificent harbour. It is the fourth north . Wells had often to be dug for
port of the Empire, as only London, water, and after two years of hard work
Liverpool and Hull have a greater and endurance a line of telegraph
trade. Large ships can come up to was completed over 2,000 miles long.
any of the wharves right in the heart of Yet more than half of this distance had
the city, and busy little ferry - boats been travelled only once before by
dart about from various points, carrying white men .
passengers and goods. Thus Australia was connected with
UEENSLAND, AND THE NEVER - NEVER the rest of the world, for the messages
QUE COUNTRY WHERE RAIN IS SELDOM SEEN flash from Port Darwin to Java, thence
Queensland is about eight times as to India and the West. And so it is
large as Great Britain , and reaches that we can read in our morning
right away to the north of Australia , newspaper the account of yesterday's
The short slope towards the Pacific is doings in the far southern hemisphere,
hot and damp, and produces things whether they have to do with business
which grow in this sort of climate about wool or gold, or with a concert
such as cotton and sugar and rich or a cricket match .
fruits Higher up the slope is grown There are no railways at present
wheat, and above that in the high- crossing Australia as they cross
TOTTI DUTXURRUTIUOTE SEX TOYOTPIXIR XATIRLITAT
1360
 THE BEGINNINGS OF A TOWN

CLEARING A FOREST TO MAKE WAY FOR A TOWN IN AUSTRALIA

DIGGING A HUGE TANK TO SUPPLY A NEW TOWN WITH WATER

OXEN MOVING A HOUSE WHICH HAS BEEN DIVIDED INTO TWO PARTS
This is the beginning of what may become a great city in Australia . First, strong men cut down the trees
to give room for dwellings. Then others sink wells and make great tanks to hold the water. Others prepare
sites for the houses, the wooden frames of which, ready made and roofed, are brought on trolleys by oxen.
1361
E
 LUDO ALCOR uma
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES- omkommandRu .
Canada, though there are many lines
connecting the various towns and ports
round the coasts with those of the
mines and industries further inland .
LONELY PART OF AUSTRALIA WHERE
A TRAINS 00 ONCE A FORTNIGHT
From Adelaide , for instance, the
train runs northward about 700 miles,
but only once a fortnight to the last
station on the line. When the bishop
of this central part of Australia wanted
to visit the settlers at the telegraph
stations, which are about 150 miles
apart from north to south , he had to
ride or drive all the way, except the
last 700 miles of train journey.
The climate of the settled south part
of South Australia is like that of South
Europe , and the same fruits grow in
both , such as grapes, oranges, lemons,
olives. A great deal of wheat, too, is
sent away to Great Britain . Further
north there are large flocks of sheep,
and very valuable copper -mines .
Adelaide, the capital of South
Australia, has fine parks and gardens,
and behind it are lovely valleys, in
which many kinds of fruits and vege
tables are grown.
The richest silver -mine in the world
lies in the bare desert country 350 miles
beyond Adelaide. It is an astonishing
sight to those who visit the spot.
Scarcely forty years ago, Broken Hill
was a lonely sheep station . Thousands
of people crowded to it when silver
was found , and now it is a large town .
The huge engines for getting the ore
out of the mines stand up against the
sky. The furnaces and machinery give
off incessant heat , amidst great noise , as
they turn out tons and tons of silver
and lead ready to go by rail to the sea-
coasts . Then there is all the return
traffic of fuel, food, and other neces-
saries, many of them brought from the
other side of the world .
THE LARGEST
WESTERN AUSTRALIA,
STATE , AND THE ISLAND OF TASMANIA
Western Australia is the largest of
the Australian states ; eleven times
as large as Great Britain. A great
deal of it is desert, like South Australia,
and much is still unexplored. There
are large forests ; wheat and fruit are
grown in parts, and there is country
suitable for sheep and cattle. Gold
forms the chief riches of West Aus-
tralia at present . Great quantities are
1362
found at places where water has to
be brought in pipes nver 300 miles .
Perth is the capital.
Tasmania, about the size of Scotland,
is a beautiful island within a day's
journey of Melbourne. Its narrow ,
fertile valleys are good for agriculture
and fruit-growing , Tasmanian apples
and pears being especially famous.
From the sheep -farming comes very
good wool. There is no trouble about
want of rain in Tasmania, and the
climate is so cool and pleasant that
many Australians - especially from
Queensland - come here to spend the
summer . One of the most valuable
tin -mines in the world is in Tasmania ;
there are also coal, gold and silver
mines. Hobart is the chief town.
When we look at the divisions of
Australia on the map, ruled off by the
lines of latitude and longitude , we are
reminded of Canada . As is the case with
Canada , these large states with their
straight boundaries are united, with Tas
mania, under one common government.
W AUSTRALIA BECAME ONE NATION
Hºw
ON THE FIRST DAY OF THIS CENTURY
This federation took place on the
first day of the twentieth century, and
formed the great Commonwealth of
Australia, which has, like Canada,
a central Parliament, elected by itself
to settle its own affairs, and a Governor
General sent from home to represent
the king
But how unlike are Canada and
Australia in other ways ! The north
lands of Canada push up into the frozen
waters of the wild Arctic Ocean ; the
north peninsulas of Australia reach up to
the warm waters, infested with sharks,
of the hottest part of the world .
In Australia there is no mighty river
like the St. Lawrence, with its chain of
lakes as large as inland seas, by which
travel and commerce reach into the
heart of the
rivers and lakescountry. Many
in Australia dryofupthe
in
summer, the Murray River with those
that join it being the chief excep
tion. Many of the lakes, also, are salt ;
and so it comes to pass that most of the
centre of the continent far away from
moist sea-breezes—is a pathless stony
desert , on which neither men nor
animals can live. As we have seen , it
is on the rim or edge of Australia,
especially on the east and south -east,
 THE TOWN ,, THE HOMESTEAD, & THE SCHOOL

ONE OF THE MANY TOWNS THAT HAVE SPRUNG UP IN THE VAST SPACES OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

A NEAR VIEW OF A HOMESTEAD IN NEW SOUTH WALES

SCHOOL -CHILDREN LEARNING GARDENING IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA

While the farmer labours on the land, other men toil in the gold -mines. They all help to increase the wealth
of the country. Towns spring up about the gold-mines, and near places where there are many farms. We
see pretty homesteads growing up, and near them is the school, where the children are taught to carry on the
work which their parents have so well begun. Here some of the schoolboys are carrying boxes of mould.
D290T2T
1363
 SO BUGLAS
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
that we find most of the work and wealth Then think of the energy and hard
for which the country is so famous. work needed to start the mines and keep
We have seen, too, how far the fertile them going, often in hot parts of the
valleys and grassy slopes of the Great country, and the anxieties and toil
Dividing Range of mountains, together connected with farming, especially in
with the precious metals held in this the early days, when there were many
rich storehouse of Mother Earth's, have difficulties, now smoothed away by new
all helped to make Australia what it is. machinery, and by easy ways of carry
BIRDS
WHERE BWANS ARE BLACK AND FOXES FLY ing and packing and travelling.
Though so much has been started and
No one knows how long before the accomplished in little over 100 years,
white people came the poor savage every year sees some fresh outlet for
blacks wandered over the broad the energies of Australians. The peaches
continent , hunting the strange native that could neither be eaten nor sold, but
animals, finding water, when all other had to be carried off in buckets to feed
water failed, at the roots of the desert the pigs, because there were so many,
plants, and living in holes in the ground. are now tinned to feed human beings
Strange-looking animals and plants thousands of miles away. The grapes
they are ! There is the kangaroo, quite are made into wine, currants, and
different from all other animals, with raisins ; many fruits that would other
its powerful hind legs and tail, and a wise die are packed and sent oversea
pouch for its little ones. The water- in cold chambers, just as quantities
mole, with a bill like a duck , is equally of beef and mutton are sent home,
curious ; also the emu bird , which frozen hard in perfectly good condition.
walks instead of flies. The kiwi Manufactures of various kinds are
wears hair instead of feathers ; the starting, and only want a larger number
laughing jackass and the brilliant of people to work them . In the four
parrotsand cockatoos laugh or screech largest towns of Australia there are less
instead of sing. To crown all , the than one and a half million inhabitants,
swans are black and the foxes fly ! and in the whole of the settled part of
The native plants and trees seem the continent there are not as many
equally strange to us. Most of them people as there are in London alone.
shed their bark instead of their leaves ; THOUSAND MILES HOME AGAIN
and many turn only the narrow edge TENAFTER SIX WEEKS AT SEA

of their leaves to the sun .
lyptus or gum tree grows to a great
height, and gives a valuable medicine.
Splendid timber comes from Queensland
and other provinces, from great forests,
very dull and grey-looking, lit up here
and there with the vivid colours of the
Aying parrots and other gay birds.
Many of the wilder parts of the country
are covered for miles and miles with
useless and dangerous plants, such as
spinifex or porcupine grass and other
prickly scrub. All these
heritage of the " blacks."
THEAUSTRALIA
GREAT ENERGY THAT HAS
A GREAT NATION
In the short space of time since the
white nation came to settle in the
island -continent, nearly every known
plant that is good for food has been
introduced, and finds some part of the
country to suit it. Think of the work
of the pioneers in getting the land ready
in choosing crops, in bringing to perfec- voyage of over 10,000 miles.
tion all the produce of this wonderland .
MUTU
UK TOUT
1364
The euca And now, having had a glimpse of
what there is to see in Australia, shall
we return home by the Empire route
called the " All Red Route,” because
the whole of it is marked in the British
colour, red, on the map - which has done
so much towards linking up Australia
with Canada and Canada with Britain ?
We can take the steamer at Sydney,
and make our way through the beautiful
islands of the wide Pacific, gradually
losing sight of the stars of the Southern
were the Cross as we travel north . In about
twenty-one days we shall slow down at
MADE Vancouver, the terminus of the Cana
dian Pacific Railway. About ten days
more will bring us across the Dominion
and the Atlantic Ocean to Liverpool.
There are many other routes if we
prefer to go all the way by sea - through
the SuezCanal or round the Cape of
Good Hope or Cape Horn ; but it will
take six or seven weeks to complete the
The next story of countries begins on 1453.
 The Child's Book of
040 WONDER
QUESTIONS FOR THE WISE MAN
'HE editor has received thousands of questions, and has selected a very large
THEnumber for the Wise Man to answer. Boys and girls should remember
to write clearly, not to crowd their questions together, and to put their name , age,
and address on each postcard. If any readers who have sent in questions without
their age send in further questions at any time with their age on the postcard,
that will set their mistake right. It should be remembered that many boys and
girls ask the same questions, and that the successful questioners will be those who
ask the greatest number of good questions. Any boy or girl may ask any number
of questions, and any number of questions may be asked on one postcard. It does
not matter whether readers have left school or not ; they can all ask questions ;
but this scheme is for boys and girls only, and not for men and women .
Questions will be answered according to the thoughtfulness they show.
WHERE DO THOUGHTS COME FROM ?
Thisofisquestions,
thequestion When you ask where
THIS and CONTINUED FROM 1272
your thoughts go in
there is no real answer your sleep, it is, per
toit except only just so much haps, as if you had asked
as will prevent us from believing “ Where does the music go when
false answers to it . We know cer the violin or the organ is not being
tainly that the thoughts depend on played upon ? " When we are
the brain . If we are to do our duty I asleep the brain , or rather the
to ourselves , we must regard the highest part of the brain, is not
brain as the place where the real self acting. It remains alive, of course, and

or
lives. We must not poison it, we has the needs of a living thing. It

must not abuse it by depriving it of
due rest , which we call sleep, and we
should even think of every one of the
other parts of our body as no more than
its servants . The brain is the house of
thought, but it is not thought itself,
and though there is no harm in say-
ing for convenience that the brain
thinks, yet that will not do as an
answer to our question.
There is a something which thinks,
a something which knows. We can-
not feel it, or see it,or cut it up, for
it lies underneath all that we can see
and cut up. The word substance
means standing underneath - under-
neath the deepest that we can see .
And so when you ask where the
thoughts come from , I can only reply
that they come from the thinking sub-
stance — the Something that thinks.
WHERE DO OUR THOUGHTS 60 WHEN
WE SLEEP ?
Perhaps we should think of the brain
as the instrument of the Something
that thinks , as the violin is the
instrument of the violinist . This , at
any rate, is a beautiful idea which
was expressed by a great Greek more
than two thousand years ago.
Sve
requires pure blood, which is one
reason why we should sleep in pure air,
but it is resting as the violin rests in its
case ; so no thought comes from it .
We are never wholly asleep, how
ever ; part of our bodies is always
working, and even part of the brain.
Sometimes we can be sure that
though the Self we know is asleep,
yet part of the Self which we do not
know so well is not asleep, for men
have awakened with the answer to
questions which they could not answer
the night before. Many cases like
this show that sometimes a certain
amount of thinking goes on in our
brains, even when we are asleep - or
when, at any rate, the greater part
of us is as eep.
WHAT MAKES US THINK ?
In the first place, we think be
cause it is our nature to think. We
are thinking beings, and this it is
which distinguishes us from all other
creatures. We have brains so made
that they are capable of being
thought with, but we are very apt not
to use our powers—just as the owner
of a violin may leave it long in its case .

1365
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
It has been said that “ men think scarcely think at all , but that some of
very little and very seldom .” Many of the higher animals - such , for instance ,
ụs are too much taken up with the, as dogs --- do, beyond a doubt, act some
business of life. We stop asking ques- times in a way which can only possibly
tions, though when we were children mean that they have somehow " put two
we used to ask many . This is a very and two together " in their minds, and
great pity. We think when we are to do that is to think. The answer, then ,
interested . There must be something is that some animals, at any rate, are
to start us moving. When we grow up capable, though only in a very small
and have to earn our living we often cease degree, of doing what we should
to be interested in many things that certainly call thinking if they were
really do matter, and simply stop think- men and not animals in whom we saw
ing about them ; but it is a pity we do the results of it .
not think about the best things. WHY CANNOT ANIMALS TALK ?
CAN WE THINK ABOUT THINGS THAT DO The answer to this question also
NOT INTEREST US ?
depends on what is really meant. We
No. We simply cannot think of know that many animals can express
things that do not interest us ; it is something of what they feel to each
interest that starts us thinking. And other , and to us . The different cries
so everyone who studies the human of a baby are a kind of talk ; so are the
mind likes to see a child who IS differences in the sounds a dog makes.
interested, wants to know , and thinks But as we usually mean the word
over things by himself sometimes. It “ talk ," animals cannot talk. Even
is that, and not the look of him , which if they imitate our words, their talk is
proves that heis a human being and not meaningless to them . The answer to
just a nice little pet animal. the question why this is so is that the
The grown-up people who are wise and brains of animals, even the cleverest ,
who discover new truth are those who do and such as may have lived all
not stop thinking when they grow up- their lives in human company, and
and this is because they have not lost so have been educated as much as may
their interest in things. It will not do be, are so vastly inferior to our brains
to say that we cannot help being in- that animals have not mind enough to
terested or not interested , for every- enable them purposely to use special
thing is interesting if we will only give sounds with special meanings.
it a chance. We have only to begin to The throat , voice-box , tongue, and
think about ourselves, or the world in mouth of an animal are, in their way,
which we live, to find that the more we just as good as ours. Indeed, a dog's
think the more interesting the things we voice takes longer to tire than most
think about become, and the more we men's voices. It is the nature of the
want to go on thinking. brain of the dog that prevents him from
CAN ANIMALS THINK ? talking. To talk as human beings talk
The answer to this question depends requires at least a little , though perhaps
entirely on what we mean by the word not always very much, of the special
“ think .” We should not say think powers which the human mind alone
when we mean feel, and we should not has, and which , so far as the wonderful
use the word thoughts to mean feelings , brain is concerned, are connected with
as nearly everyone does. To think the great size and marvellous structure
is really to put one thing and another of one of its parts , with which no animal
together in our minds, so as to make a has anything worthy to compare.
link between them , and when the two WHAT IS A THOUGHT ?
things are linked together like this, that We should always make a point of
is a thought. To feel that you want using the word thought in the strict
your dinner is not to think, but to say way to mean the putting together
to yourself “ I am hungry ” is a thought, of two ideas. “ Tom is good ” is a
because you have put together in your thought. It puts together the idea of
mind your idea of yourself, and the idea Tom and the idea of goodness. We
you have of that feeling which we call say that there is a relation between
hunger. So , if we use the word properly Tom and the state of goodness. - “ Tom
the answer must be that animals can is not good ” is another thought ,
NOTIKUULUTUUUUUUUUU

1366
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
asserting another kind of relation be-
tween Tom and goodness. So it has
been said that thinking is relationing.
If the relationing corresponds to the
relation of the facts, then the thinking
is true ; if not, it is false . Of course,
we cannot help asking ourselves what
it is that does this relationing or
thinking, whether rightly or wrongly
we all do it in both ways. Some
people would say that it is your brain
that thinks, but I will say that it is
your brain by which you think.
DO WE THINK IN WORDS ?
This question fits in with what we
have been saying. We can think very
simple thoughts, but they must really
be very simple indeed, without the use
of words, and to that extent animals
may think, and sometimes do. They
think without words just as far as we
can . But this is almost nothing. Prac
tically, all our thinking is done in words.
What we must try to remember is that
words are good servants but bad
masters. Too many people allow words
to lead them astray. Instead of words
being instruments for their minds to
think with , they are chains in which
their minds are bound. Every word
has a meaning - that is to say , it stands
for something, and words are are not
worth anything in themselves , except,
perhaps, that some of them make
beautiful sounds .
CAN WE THINK WITHOUT WORDS ?
There are other kinds of what is
really thinking, where the things which
are put together or related are not
words, but something else. Some men,
for instance , in doing what is called
algebra , can think without using words
at all. They can find out , for instance ,
what this means : A + B X A - B.
Somebody has actually written to the
editor of this book asking him to have
it written in figures as well as in words !
Or, instead of thinking in words or figures,
they can think in lines and angles and
curves , and find out all sorts of won-
derful things in this way. Euclid
could think in this way about as well
as anyone who ever lived. Other men
can think in sounds. One of the
greatest musicians who ever lived,
Beethoven, wrote some of the most
marvellous music in the world, which
will be listened to as long as men have
ears, long after he had become stone-
1367
XXXIX
deaf. He put the ideas of the sounds
together in his head. He could think
in notes as easily as you and I can
think in words .
WILL THE SUN EVER COOL DOWN LIKE
THE EARTH ?
There can be no doubt that the
answer to this question is yes. The
sun, the earth , and the moon are all
made of the same stuff, and they are all
cooling down according to the same
laws . The moon, no doubt, is much
the coldest of these three, but that is
because it is the smallest, and small
things cool down much more quickly
than large things, because small things,
in proportion to the stuff that is in
them, have such a large surface to lose
their heat by. The earth is bigger than
the moon , and therefore not yet so
cold . The great planet Jupiter is very
cold.
much bigger than the earth, and is still
so hot that it probably makes a little
light of its own besides what it reflects
from the sun . The sun is very much
bigger even than Jupiter, and so has
not cooled down anything like so much.
But if we study the sun, and compare
it with other stars, we can be sure that
the sun is cooling, and one day it must
become cold.
WILL OUR WORLD EVER BURN OUT
LIKE THE MOON ?
There can be no doubt about the
answer to this question, though no one
can tell how long it will take before the
answer is fulfilled . Our earth must
become like the moon . There will be
certain differences, because the earth is
much larger than the moon . The
moon has been too small to hold to
itself the gases outside it . It has no
air or atmosphere. The earth is able
to keep its atmosphere because it is
bigger, and so the power of its attrac
tion is much greater . Such reasons as
this will always make a difference
between the earth and the moon .
Another difference is that, in con
sequence of the rapid cooling of the
moon , the changes on its surface have
been more violent than those on the
earth . The biggest volcano on the
earth is nothing compared with those
of the moon . But all these points
of difference do not affect the fact
that our earth is bound some day ,
though after a far longer time than
men lately thought, to become cold
and lifeless like the moon .
anura ORO LLEUSERCEDETERGELEKETEER EZELELA

HOW HALF A SHIP CAME HOME

In the old days, when a ship was wrecked, that was the end of it. But here is the larger half of the great
ocean steamship Suevic, afloat after being broken in two. She was wrecked in March , 1907 , on
Lizard Point, Cornwall, and could not float off. She was broken near the middle. Divers went to work
in the water under her, and cut away the broken part, and guns were fired at the deck to free the ship
from her shattered front part. Then the powerful steam -tugs towed her to Southampton, 170 miles away.

At Southampton the part of the ship which had been saved was taken into a dock . The water was run out of
the dock so that men could work, preparing to join on a new front part to the steamer. The new
part, called the bow, was built at Belfast, then towed over to Southampton, the voyage lasting a weels
1368
 LOCO ELLOTAAL Zancare ca ceas
mundian

AND HOW IT WENT BACK WHOLE AGAIN

The clever workmen brought the new part into the dock The work is being finished here. The decks have been
to join it to the old part , and built the two together, joined, the steel frame of the ship has been fastened
like a builder adding a new room to a house. together, and only a few steel plates have to be fixed.

When the work was finished , nobody could have told that the Suevic was not a new ship. Yet it had been to
the bottom of the sea , had been raised and cut in two, and one half had been towed for 54 hours through stormy
seas from the Lizard to Southampton , as seen in the picture above, while the other part had been
brought from Belfast.
The photographs in these pages are by Stephen Cribb , Southsoa .
memuonnaTwo
1369
 ALEXA
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
S.
WILL THE EARTH EVER BE COOL RIGHT be red hot , and then
THROUGH ?
This question is just so put that we
may begin to understand what a very
before
the earth gets cuoled rightbethroug
long time indeed it must h,
as it is bound to do some day. If
we want to cool our tea we put i
in a saucer, partly because the cold
saucer takes some of the heat out
of it , but especially because it spreads
the tea out , and so exposes it . In the
same way, when we go bathing on a
sunny day, we find the shallow pools
on the way to the water much warmer
than the water itself. Heat can get in
and get out when things are exposed.
But if we take a thing like a hot bottle,
and wrap it up in a thick layer of
blankets , it will be hot for many hours.
Now , there never were better blankets
than those which the fire inside the
earth is packed in . The air is a
blanket very many miles thick. The
crust of the earth, too, is a blanket.
Also these blankets are being warmed
from outside by means of the sun , and
what with these facts and the fact
that new heat is being made by radium ,
we can begin to understand that it will
be many long ages before the earth is
cooled right through Yet so it must
be some day. A thing may be very
slow and yet very sure .
WHAT MAKES THE SUN ALWAYS HOT ?
The
answers we have just been
reading tell us that “ always ” is too
big a word to use of the sun's heat,
even though the sun has always been
hot ever since there have been men to
look at it, and long before. The sun
will not be always hot, nor has it been
always hot. Long ages ago , before
the earth and the sun were anything
like what they are now , there was not
nearly so much heat. The heat was
gradually formed , it seems, as the great
mass of cloud or nebula from which
earth and sun were made shrank .
The central part of this cloud, the part
which we now call the sun , has had a
wonderful history, then , and we can
see stars in various parts of the sky
which show different stages of what
has been the sun's history. It is
almost certain that the sun was once
much hotter than it is now ; probably
white hot , like the whitest of the stars .
It is now yellow hot ; it will some day
LITE EKSERIT ULTETTU ERU
1370
IZOLAEXUELLA CURTLEEX
gradually become
dull and dark until the light goes out
of it altogether. But this will be so
many ages away that we cannot
possibly imagine the length of them .
WHY DO WOMEN WEAR WEDDING - RINGS ?
A wedding-ring is a useful and sensible
thing which anyone should be proud
to wear, but we should scarcely guess
how it came to be used . Most of the
people who study the customs of long
ago are agreed that the wedding-ring
really had its origin in the days when
men used to own their wives. In those
terrible times, which foolish people
call the good old days, men used their
brutal strength to make women their
slaves. Now , it is customary to put a
chain upon a slave, to put something
round him to show that he is yours.
After a time , as men got a little better,
instead of actually putting anything
like a chain on their wives, or a ring
round the neck or body, they invented
something which would have the same
meaning without being really bad.
Anything that stands for something
else, like this, is called a symbol ; and
we now believe that the wedding
ring began as a symbol, meaning that
the wife was the husband's property.
It would astonish us to learn how many
of our other customs arose in this way.
For instance, when people are first
married, they often go away for a time,
which is called the honeymoon . There
is no doubt that this really remains
from the time when the husband stole
his wife away from her family, and
took her away with him . So bad things
can become harmless, as well as good
things become bad. However they came
into use, these things and customs are
certainly useful now , so that everyone
can see at a glance that a woman is
someone's wife, and may treat her with
the special respect that is due to a
wife and mother.
WHY IS IT BAD TO SLEEP WITH FLOWERS
IN THE ROOM ?
The reason is a very good one . While
you are breathing in the night, you
are spoiling the air in your room , and
if the air were not changed during the
night it would hurt you . But the
flowers are doing just the same thing ;
they also are breathing, though very
much less than you are, and so they
help to spoil the air for themselves and
 CONTACTALLAX
«THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER-LILIITTLEZ MERMAN

for you. Also, cut flowers are slowly the earth should have burnt up, as
dying, and as they die they are changed, you say. Well, the answer is that the
and things are given off from them earth did burn up almost entirely, so
which are probably not good for you. far as the outside of it is concerned.
Neither cut flowers nor living, plants All the sea is burnt ; all the water
are good to sleep with, for both of everywhere has been made by the
them in the dark do nothing but help burning up of hydrogen, and most of
to poison the air in the room . I do not this happened long ago, when the earth
say that this is very important. I was cooling down from a ball of fire.
would much rather you slept with your Not only are seas and oceans burnt ,
window open, and had a few flowers but the land is burnt also . We cannot
in the room, than with the window shut burn clay and rocks and stones, for
and no flowers ; but still, it is worth the very good reason that these are
remembering the results of the burning up, or com
SHOULD WE HAVE PLANTS bining with oxygen, which went on as
IN A SICK .
ROOM ? the earth was cooling down from its
The last question is about sleeping hottest state ages ago. Apart from
with flowers. Now, that means living things which have been made by life,
with plants in the darkness. Well, such as coal, there is very little indeed
the answer to that when one is well of the surface of the earth that is not
is just the same as the answer to it already burnt ; and it was burnt just
in the case of a sick -room . Indeed, in the way that this question suggests.
we should be more particular when HOW DOES A PIGEON FIND ITS WAY ?
someone is ill . But this present ques- This is a deeply interesting question
tion asks nothing about sleeping. It which has long been a puzzle, and men
is a general
time . '
questionsoabout
The answer, all time
far as the the stand
have made all sorts ofcanguesses
how pigeons to under
find their way
when the room is dark is concerned, is, home even over long distances, when
of course, the answer to the last question, they have been carried away in a closed
but the case is utterly different for the box through which they could not see.
daytime. Most people think now that the bird
The point is not whether one is finds its way simply by seeing. It
sleeping or awake, but whether the has wonderful eyes. As it flies high
room has or has not sunlight in it. in the air it can see for very great
As long as there is sunlight, it is very distances. As a rule it flies about until
good to have plants, and especially it sees something it knows, and then
with plenty of green leaves, in a sick- it makes for that. Sometimes the
room . They are beautiful, and that pigeons fail ; and young pigeons are not
is good. Most wallpapers with patterns so clever as old ones, probably because
on them are almost enough to drive an they do not remember so well—for you
invalid crazy ; but when the eye falls understand, of course, that the pigeon
on green leaves it is always soothed and must remember in order to find its way
cheered . But a more important reason home, and so we know that the pigeon
is that the daylight acts through the has memory, as we have. It used to
green stuff of the plant so as actually be thoughtthat the pigeon had a special
to make fresh oxygen in the air of the sense , which was called a sense of direc
room by breaking up the carbonic tion ; and there may be something in
acid gas which the ill person breathes this, at any rate, in the case of other
out from his lungs. Plants in the creatures. But most people now believe
daytime help to ventilate a sick -room , that the pigeon's sightand place -memory
or any other room . are sufficient for it . We have to realise
WHY DID NOT THE EARTH BURN UP WHEN the enormous distances that it can see
IT WAS A BALL OF FIRE ? when it flies high enough, and also
We know that burning is the thing that that it does not require to see its home ,
happens when anything is combined but merely any place that it remembers.
with oxygen . We know , too, that An old pigeon has often fown a good
many things when they are made hot deal round its home, in all directions,
will burn in this way. If these laws and if it can recognise any point on
were true long ago, as they are now , these occasions, that is enough for it .
DOULOTOURIUO OULUOOTT DOET
1371
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
WHAT IS AN ELEMENTS
This is a question which is answered
in all the books on chemistry. They
say that an element is made up of laughed, and said , “ I do not believe
atoms of a particular
be changed kind
or broken up or which cannot question is that the sun does not put
put together,
whether with each other or with atoms the fire out when it shines through the
of some other element, so as to make
atoms of any other kind. This is what
has been believed during the whole
hundred years since atoms were really
discovered by the Englishman John
Dalton . When we come to inquire of
any given thing, then , whether it is an
element or not, we have to find out
what its atomsare like , whetherthey
are all alike, what their size is, and so
on .
To study an element is to study
the atoms that make it up.
IS RADIUM AN ELEMENT ?
The answer to this is that radium is
an element if anything is, but that ,
as we see on page 1393, the atoms of
radium do not answerto what until light of thefire will seem to turn
now we thought atoms to be . They
can and do break up, forming other
atoms. Yet radium is an element for
these reasons : it consists of atoms that
are all of one kind - unlike a compound
which is made of atoms of two or more
kinds ; these atoms can be weighed, and
we know that they weigh about 225 times
as much as an atom of hydrogen ; and,
like other elements, radium can be
shown to give out a special light which ,
when we study it , ray by ray, is evi
dently the light given out by an element,
and is different from the light given out
by any other thing, just as the atom of
radium is different from any other atom .
Radium , then , is an element
much as oxygen or gold is, but it is now
necessary for us to change our ideas
of an element simply by refusing to
say in future that an element is made
up of atoms which cannot be changed .
They can be changed, though not by
us , for we cannot control them or break
them up as we can break up the mole
cules of a compound into their atoms ;
but we can watch the change. Atoms,
however, really exist , and so do elements,
just because atoms are of differenť
kinds. This is all true, and we were
never surer of it than to -day . It is
no less true because we have just learned
that atoms themselves are not simple,
unchangeable things, as men have be-
lieved for about a century past .
DOUCEMENTY ULURY
HOW DOES THE SUN PUT OUT FIRE
WHEN SHINING THROUGH THE WINDOW ?
At this question the Wise Man simply
a word of it ! " The answer to this
window , and there is no reason why it
should do so . The reason for this
belief is quite simple. If we light a
match in the open air on a bright ,
sunshiny day,we can sometimes scarcely
see whether it is lit or not .
Now, suppose we had lit that match
in the dark , and then took it out intothe
sunshine, it would look as if the sun had
nearly put the match out ; but really
it is only that the light of the match
cannot make so much impression on our
eye when it has the light of the sun to
compete with ; and so with the fire
and the sun. Go into a dark room
where there is a fire, and then turn on
a brilliant light in the room ; the
pale and poor.
That is all that happens when the sun
seems to put out the fire. It is true
that the brightness of the fire depends
upon its getting a good supply of air ;
and it might be that the sunlight in a
room made the air warmer and lighter,
so that the fire was not fed with quite
such a good draught. But I think the
explanation given is really all that we
need to answer this question.
WHY DOES GLASS NOT BREAK
IN COLD WATER AND BOILED ?
IF PUT
Perhaps if you think for yourself,
and remember some of the questions
as we have answered already, you may be
able to answer this for yourself. Almost
everything gets bigger, or expands,
when it is made hot ; and it gets
smaller, or shrinks, or contracts, when it
is made cool. If, then , we take a thing
all in one piece, and do not heat every
part of it to the same extent at the
same time - something will have to
go . That is what happens when a
tumbler is cracked in the way we all
know ; but if the tumbler is put into
water, and then the water is boiled, all
the parts of the glass expand equally as
it gets hotter. The whole glass becomes
bigger, but there is no strain between
its inside and its outside, and so there
is no reason why it should break.
The next questions begin on page 1433.
1372
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
SOLOMON Some
confessed thatoneof
which thethings thathecould men
not understandwasthe
learned , but the mystery of the snake still remains. Those snakes that are
poisonous can , in a few minutes, kill a man or a horse, or almost any other living
creature. We can cure a man who has been riddled with bullets, or who has had
the most serious illness, but one sharp bite from a poisonous serpent serves to
defeat the skill of the cleverest doctors. There are nearly 2,000 different sorts of
snakes, but in this story it will be sufficient to divide them into two classes_those
that kill by poisoning, and those that kill by crushing. Of the poisonous ones,
the worst are the cobras and the vipers. Each of these can cause death . Here
we read about the habits of many of these terrible reptiles, of the places in which
they live, of the food they eat, and of the way in which they do their deadly work.

THE GREAT SNAKE FAMILY

'HE serpent does but strong muscle.
THE not sting. Bees CONTINUED FROM 1229
It is on the ends of
and wasps and scor these ribs , hidden
pions sting The though they are, that
poisonous snake bites, and the the serpent rests. When it
poison is squirted through holes wishes to go forward, it moves
in its fangs into the wound its ribs in such a way that
which these fangs cause. Snakes they cause its scales to stick
do not eat oxen and oth animals to rough ground , or the bark of a tree.
of that huge size. When moving along It rows along the ground, the rib
the ground they do not move in points making the scales act as oars.
arched curves as many of the school. Therefore, it must have a rough sur
books show. They glide along flat on face upon which to travel . On smooth
the ground, but withthe body curving ice or glass the biggest snake would
in zigzags, like a twisted arrow. be helpless.
The snake's spinal column is The most wonderful feat of the
made up of a long chain of bones, snake is surely its tree -climbing. It
which fit into each other on the ball goes up a great tree-trunk just as if
and - socket plan . Ribs join on to it had feet . Some snakes have the
these bones, and work, of course, as remnants of feet, like little spurs.
the various parts of the backbone Others possess in their bodies the
work . There may be as many as 300 remnants of bones which once be
to 400 bones in the backbone of the longed to limbs for walking. But,
big snake, and ribs for nearly all of though the spur-like limbs may help
them . Now, these bones move with the snake which has them , most of
wonderful ease and suppleness, but the reptiles depend for their climbing
they can move only from side to side. only upon the action of their ribs.
If the backbone could twist in all They rob nests of eggs and eat the
directions, there would be no safety for birds. They hang head downwards
the spinal column of the snake. The to snap any young deer or dog that
snake can twist from left to right , may pass. A venomous snake will
and
it can raise the front portion not hesitate to kill a human being.
of its body, not easily, but surely, Those faithful natives who carried
into an upright position. the dead body of Dr. Livingstone
How does the snake move ? Every down to the coast , at Zanzibar,
pair of ribsacts as asort of foot. The had in the party a little native girl
whole of the snake's body forms one named Losi. While she was carrying
long foot. Each pair of ribs joins on water one of these fearful snakes
to a strong scale under the body of dashed at her, struck her on the leg
the snake,and controls it by a slender and caused a bad wound. In ten
BE
1373
 THE CHILD'S
ELECEL LLEIDOTELIER DEERE BOOK OF NATURE MILE

UR
minutes the poor little girl was dead. The tongue is forked at the end, and
The party stopped there and buried shoots in and out, quivering and
her ; then went sadly on their way . darting in the most threatening way.
A day or two later they were over- The tongue is supposed to be the
taken by an Arab, who told them that , serpent's sting ; but it is nothing of the
while passing the same spot with sort. If it serves any part in the attack ,
another party, one of his friends had it is simply to alarm the victim , and
been struck by what they believed to render him less able to defend himself.
be the same snake. The man thus THBOWE RRHE FAPOISON
TERRIBLE THE COBFLOWS
NGS OF THAT RA
attacked died almost at once .While
his comrades were looking out for a The cobra , when it launches itself
place in which to bury him , they found upon its enemy , opens its mouth . In
>

the freshly -made grave of little Losi, the upper jaw there are two teeth ,
and they buried the man beside her. and two only . These , when the mouth
SNAKE AS LONG AS SIX MEN, WHICH is closed , lie fat , like the baleen in the
THEHIDES IN THE BRANCHES OF TREES closed mouth of the whale. But the
There are many kinds of tree- climbing moment the mouth opens the two
snakes. The giant boa-constrictors and fangs stand up. They are fixed into
pythons are expert climbers. The the bone of the upper jaw , and are
python is supposed to be the biggest controlled by that jaw's movements.
of all snakes, but it is not . The biggest When the mouth opens, the same
is a member of the family called the action which sets up the teeth presses
anaconda, a fearful creature, chiefly upon muscles which squeeze the poison
found in Brazil and Peru . gland. This causes the poison to flow
We have a specimen of it in the out of the gland. The only way of
British Museum, measuring 29 feet , but escape for it is by way of the canal
full-grown anacondas reach a length of running through each tooth .
33 feet , and some are said to measure When, therefore, the cobra strikes, his
40 feet or more. These giants climb sharp, erected teeth cause a wound in
trees. More frequently they are to be the flesh, and at the same moment the
found in rivers, or lurking in still poison which is being squeezed through
pools, resting on rocks, looking like the tooth enters the wound .. The
fallen trees, but eagerly awaiting their poison enters the blood of the victim,
prey . Out of the water they are not so and is carried into his system .
agile as most snakes, but in the trees Paralysis, suffocation, agony, and death
they are active and deadly . Big ones follow .
are said to seize human beings . A marvellous thing is that this
It is curious that the snakes which poison, so terrible when pumped in
have most and best teeth do not kill by through a wound, is quite harmless
biting, while those which have fewest if swallowed . But there must be no
teeth do kill by biting. The boas and wound on lips or tongue , for should
pythons kill by winding themselves in it enter there death would be certain .
dreadful folds round their victims. OW A SNAKE POISONED A RAT THROUGH
The cobras and vipers kill by a bite, HOYTWO TINY PINHOLES
which opens the way for the injection Nothing else can better make us
of the horrible poison. How can the understand what cobra poison will do
cobra so quickly kill its victim ? than a couple of incidents at our own
First of all it must approach. It Zoo in London . Some years ago one
has keen sense of smell, which enables of the keepers, who was foolishly
it to detect the presence of an enemy. taking liberties with an Indian cobra ,
Next , it has the power of rapid move- was bitten by it . The bite of a cobra
ment, and of making a tremendous which has been for some time in cap
blow with its head . Its aim is sure ; tivity is not nearly as deadly as the
its bite certain . When about to bite of a cobra which is at liberty ; but
strike, it raises its head , and inflates this man was dead in an hour. The
a curious hood at the back . Its next is a more extraordinary case. Here
tongue shoots forth from an opening the victim was Frank Buckland ,
in its upper lip, through which it issues one of the most daring of naturalists.
from a protecting tube in the mouth . While at the Zoo he saw a cobra bite a
1374
கைமாைமயாள maaraanaமாமல maamaamaa யாய mmmmnatura லை •12

A SNAKE THAT CAN SWALLOW

SWALLOW A SHEEP

Boa -constrictors are the family of giant snakes, and this is a boa-constrictor proper. It has no poison fangs.
Seizing its prey with its teeth, it coils itself round it and crushes it to death. Then it eats the animal whole.
The boa is one of the largest snakes, but not so large as the python. It has aa kind of hook like a spine instead
of a hind limb, for no snakes have real feet or arms, and do not need them. It is an expert climber of trees.

O S
T IM
*3
*
The python is one of the boa-constrictor family. It can easily swallow a half- grown sheep. The female
python lays her eggs in a pile. She coils herself round them and does not move away for two months, when
the eggs are hatched. Ordinarily, the blood of the snake is cold, but when hatching her eggs the python's
blood is warm . If you touch an English snake, you will be surprised to find that it feels warm, not cold.
DOLLZONE ona
1375
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
rat . The rat received one bite , and skin away from the place at which it
seemed instantly to know that its end joins the under part of the thumb
was at hand. It retired to a corner nail . It was that nail which he had
with its eyes widely expanded, its mouth used to scrape the skin of the rat where
open , and vainly trying to prevent the snake's ' fangs had entered. And
itself from falling. Then it sank down through that tiny crack in the skin of
on to the floor of the cage-dead, three his hand the dreadful poison had
minutes after being bitten. entered , and nearly caused his death .
Now, Buckland determined to have The poison had been in the body of the
that rat , and to see what the effect of rat , yet , passing by the small opening
the bite had been . He managed to get into the hand of the man, the least
it out of the cage, and to examine it. drop of it all but killed him.
RY YEAR
There was not a sign of aa wound outside, EVEPEOPLE SNAKES KILL ENOUGH
TO MAKE A 000D- SIZED TOWN
theherattook
so his knife
. Then andinbegan
he saw to skin
the animal 's There are several sorts of cobras.
side two tiny holes, like small needle- India has two sorts, Java and Borneo
pricks . Only ten minutes had passed have another sort , and Africa has three
since the rat's death , but the flesh round or four sorts. The giant cobra of India
about the wound had gone bad as if measures as much as 13 feet in length.
The ordinary cobra averages about
the rat had been
Buckland dead. at the skin
longaway
scraped 6 feet in length , though specimens have
where he thought the snake's teeth had been killed more than 74 feet long.
entered, using his thumb -nail for the The Egyptian asp, of which we read in
purpose. Suddenly he felt a terrible the Bible, is a cobra, which has spread
pain, as though somebody had struck far over Africa.
him a heavy blow on the head and neck. The death-rate from snake-bite in
At the same time he felt an acute pain British India alone varies from 18,000 to
in the chest, as if a red-hot iron had 22,000 a year, to say nothing of thou
been run in, and a weight pressed upon sands of cattle killed in the same way.
his heart and lungs. A cobra cannot eat a horse or a cow ,
OW THE SNAKE'S POISON FROM A RAT'S but it can give it a bite sufficient to
HOWODNE NEAREY KILLED AMAN cause its death . The death -rate does
Buckland knew that he had been not go down . In 1905 the number of
poisoned by the venom injected by the persons killed by snakes in India was
cobra into the rat . 21,797, but in 1906 rose to 22,854.
He said to a friend who was with him, Thousands of snakes are killed every
Keep me going ; take me to a year , but not nearly as many as there
chemist's shop.” Poor Buckland be should be . For a long time the British
came almost unconscious ; but , with Government paid a reward for every
his friend's help , he managed to reach snake killed in India. In 1880 over a
the chemist's, and to take down a quarter of a million were killed, and the
bottle of hartshorn . Of this he drank a number went on growing, until in 1889
large quantity in a tumbler, with a the number slain was nearly 600,000 in
little water added . It badly burnt the course of the year. INDIAN
TRICK OF THE
his mouth and lips, but as he felt im WICKED
mediate relief he did not mind that . THESNAKE - CHARMER
It saved his life . For weeks after- But wicked natives managed to keep
wards he was very ill, but in time he poisonous snakes in order that they
got better .It was only a mild attack of might breed, so enabling the men to
the poison which he had had to bear. kill a certain number and claim the
Of course it remains to be told reward for them .
how he managed to get poisoned at all. That brings us to an interesting fea
He had not touched the snake , and the ture of Indian life. In many parts of
poison is harmless unless it enters the world natives worship snakes.
through a break in the skin. And that They worship anything thatis terrible,
is just what had happened here. Be- believing that if evil is powerful , we
fore going to the Zoo, Buckland, in must be polite to it . They put up
cleaning his nails with a sharp instru- temples to cholera in some parts. Well,
ment , had forced a tiny part of the as many people worship serpents in
AUTOT YOUR ORDERT RUN
XXXTO mit
MOT IYOTBURTIS
1376
 manaamara
Ama
0mmXSIDORAMILIEU LAITILAISIMULIZA LG ELECOLOGICILLOU

m
SNAKES THAT CAN KILL MEN INSTANTLY
merTRANTWERPERTINENTORINI
NOVIERER

ma
non
The Indian cobra squeezes poison through holes in Like its relative in India , the African cobra has

ho
its two upper teeth into the flesh of its victim , only two teeth in its upper jaw, but each of these
and causes almost instant death to man or animal. makes a wound, and then injects the deadliest poison.
MUNGRYW

os

The anaconda is the giant boa -constrictor. There is one in the British Museum measuring 29 feet, but in
the wilds the anaconda is said to reach 40 feet. It lives chiefly in water , and is not active on land, but it
climbs trees with extraordinary speed and sureness. It is said to attack human beings when very hungry .
MITTYY ET DIT OUT TOIMITI TXITmn TIITTU TITTIPOTIWIUUUTTT
1377
F
 MOBILUSsono THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE com UOL EXTRA

India , naturally they dare not have some, as we have seen, which are very
them killed . Clever, wicked men pre- large are not poisonous. But there are
tend to charm the deadly cobra. They deadly ones among the lesser snakes.
say that by playing musical instruments The coral snakes are some of the
they can charm a snake from its home . handsomest of these. They live in
What they really do is to produce a America , Australia , Asia, and Africa,
snake from their own garments, where and though avoiding the homes of men,
they have secretly hidden it , and say they do not hesitate to poison any man
that that is the wild one . They do not whom they meet.
kill any of the snakes they show . " HE SNAKE THAT CREEPS INTO HOUSES
THEIN INDIA
Declaring that they have a charm which
prevents the snake from killing them, There is a rather similar snake ,
they say that the charm would depart called the long - glanded snake, which
( 6

from them if they killed a cobra . “ I ought to be even more terrible, for in
will take this one away from you and this the poison gland is not confined
release it in another jungle, far away,' to the mouth , but actually runs from
they say. They do exercise some sort the back of the head, along each side
of control over their own snakes, but of the body for a third of its length.
it is the result of shameful cruelty. Happily, its total length is not much
When they catch a cobra they throw more than two feet . Closely related
a cloth to it. The snake fixes its hooked is the family of craits, which includes
teeth in this, and before it can draw eight species of poisonous wretches,
them out the native gives a sharp tug among them the banded adder of India,
at the cloth, and breaks off the poison which is also called the king snake.
fangs. The snake itself often breaks The latter, though much to be feared
these, but they grow again very rapidly. it can kill and eat a cobra - keeps clear
of men. The ordinary crait, however,
THAN SNAKE
D KILLEDTHAT KEEPERNEW FANGS
it GREW
s is the one which, next to the cobra,
Now, while the snake is defenceless, takes most lives in India. It creeps
the native takes aa red -hot iron and burns into houses, and the moment it is
out the gland in which the poison is disturbed it gives its fatal bite.
stored. After a burn such as this, New Zealand has no snakes, but
flesh cannot grow again,so the poison Australia has enough and to spare.
cannot again collect. With the poison One of the most common is the horrid
gone, though the teeth may grow, and death adder. Although it feeds on
though the snake will again and again frogs and young birds, it will savagely
bite its master, it cannot hurt him. attack a man, and its name sufficiently
This is the explanation of the so-called tells its character. Many snakes live
snake -charming of which we read. entirely, or nearly all their lives, in
Of course, the Indians always pre- the water. Most of them prefer the
tend that their snakes are deadly. fresh water of rivers, but others live
They are the cleverest jugglers in the in the sea. These are all poisonous,
world, and can play all manner of and woe betide the poor Hindu who
tricks which the innocent do not detect. ventures into the sea where they are
But sometimes they do not quite clear seen to swarm . Their food is fish ,
out the poison from the snake's mouth, but they will attack human beings.
and there comes a day when he is able HE ONLY SNAKE THAT WE NEED FEAR
to give a bite which kills the cruel THEIN GREAT BRITAIN

pretender. This mistake once led to a Now we cometo our only poisonous
death at the Zoo . Some snakes were English snake. We have buttwo sorts
brought there by a man who pretended of snakes which may be called common
that they were armless, that he had here. The smooth snake is very rarely
mastered them. But after he had gone seen, but the ringed snake, called also
away the poison fangs grew again, and the grass snake, is common in certain
the poison gland was in full working parts. It is quite harmless, though it
order, and caused the death of one may attain a length of from 3 feet to
of the keepers of the snakes. As we 4 feet . It eats frogs, mice, young birds,,
all know , however, it is not only the and other little animals, and small fish .
largest snakes which are poisonous; As it eats fish, it is plain that the grass
1378
 BROOCOO CONTROLS
DASILOX PEILIOArecacom

SNAKES THAT CLIMB TREES & HIDE IN SAND

The most handsome snakes are frequently the most This ringed snake or grass snake is an English
venomous. This is true of the coral snake, seen here, reptile. It is quite harmless, eating only insects,
which is one of the most beautiful, but very deadly . frogs, birds and eggs. It is a marvellous tree-climber.
WYWRONY
TERRY

This horned viper is common in Egypt and other parts The puff-adder, here shown, can fill itself with air and
of Africa. Burying itself in sand, it leaves only its look horrible. Savage huntsmen in Africa use its
head visible, ready to bite. Its venom is deadly poison. poison for to tip arrows for killing men or animals.

'l he rattlesnake is the most terrible of the viper family. The banded sea-snake, seen here, lives chiefly in the
At the end of its tail is a bunch of horny rings, and it is the sea and tidal waters round the coasts from India to
curious rattling of these that gives the snake its name. China. It has a broad tail , which enables it to swim fast..
1379
WAMETALEN

COQUE SCELLIUPATE
"THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE.
snake must take to the water. It does. another will go . It curls itself up in the
DUXERTATU

It is an excellent swimmer, and likes a footprint of aa camel , and waits for some
LUNILDA
WILL

great deal of water. Most snakes do. other animal to pass, ready to shoot out
They would die without water, unless and inflict aa fatal wound . Bad as these
they could go to sleep. This does not are, we have yet to come to the most
apply , however, to the cobra , which can dreaded of vipers, the rattlesnake.
fast like a toad, and go for a long time THE MYSTERY OF THE RATTLESNAKE'S
without drinking. But let us go back WONDERFUL TAIL
to our English poison snake, the viper. The rattlesnake is the head of a family
In England and Scotland, where it is of what are called pit-vipers. Not be
iairly common, it likes dry heaths and cause they live in pits, but because they
waste places , hiding under stones and have a deep mark or pit on the head, do
brushwood. Sometimes quite large ones they have this name. Some live in Asia ,
are found, but , generally speaking, our but the most deadly are those of North
viper does not exceed a length of about America. The rattlesnake is not among
24 inches. It eats frogs and birds, the biggest of snakes, for it does not
killing them with its poison, then exceed 4 feet in length . Even so it is
swallowing them whole. The viper will a fearful creature. One bite will para
not attack us if we do not first interfere lyse a man . Its natural food consists
with it . But we may touch it by of rabbits, rats, mice, frogs, and prairie
accident ; then it will strike with its marmots. We have read about the
fangs, and the result is a wound which rattlesnake making its home with these
causes great pain and swelling, followed little creatures .
often by a serious illness. The danger The most curious part about this
is that the viper may be taken for the snake is its rattle. This, in an old
harmless green snake. Once a boy, who snake, consists of about twenty round
caught a snake which had been robbing rings of a quill -like growth, loosely
a nest , carried it home, and played with formed at the end of the tail . What
it while it was sleepy, believing it to be purpose it serves nobody can say:
harmless . Suddenly it bit him, and for Under excitement the rattle is raised
weeks afterwards he suffered greatly. and shaken . Animals know the sound
THE LITTLE WILD BUSHMEN OF and are afraid of it . Whether it is
Hºw
AFRICA POISON THEIR ARROWS meant to terrify the prey of the rattle
It makes us fear the viper more snake and make them helpless, as the
to know to what a deadly family it roar of the lion is meant to frighten
belongs. The sand - viper of Europe. the deer, or whether it is meant to
the chain -viper of India, which kills drive away creatures with which it is
human beings and destroys cattle by too lazy to do battle, or whether it
biting them in the nose, and the horrible is the way of the rattlesnake for com
puff-adder of Africa , the ugly monster municating with his fellows--we do
which, when angry, fills itself with air not know . If a rattler shakes his tail ,
so that it swells visibly — these are some all his relatives in the neighbourhood
of our viper's relatives . shake theirs in answer .
The puff-adder is interesting from the LESNAKES THAT CAME TOGETHER
fact that it is its poison which the little RATTTO SLEEP THROUGH THE WINTER
wild bushmen of Africa use for their Pigs have done a great deal towards
arrows . They are very small arrows, keeping down the numbers of rattle
so small that they would not kill a deer . snakes . They do not seem to mind its
But when they prick the flesh they bite, nor the bite of the deadly cobra.
startle the deer,which ,feeling the wound , Though bitten two or three times , p gs
runs away . By running, it causes the munch away and enjoy the snake like
blood to spread the poison over its body. the greatest dainty. But in days which
It soon falls dead . The hunters eat the living men can remember, rattlesnakes
flesh , and are not hurt by the poison. swarmed in certain parts of America.
Snakes have not much brain, but one They used to collect in enormous
of them , the horned viper of Egypt, a numbers, and, coiled in masses, thou
savage -looking snake , which has two sands of them would thus sleep the
short, sharp horns, has sense enough to winter away. It is said that , in order
know that, where a caravan has been , thus to meet, some of the snakes
TYTUTUR TEXTIZU NURU
1380
MASCHILLOINTES
LUCULE மாயயையா

SNAKES THAT MEET FOR A WINTER'S SLEEP.

The viper is the only poisonous snake in the British Isles. The average length of the full-grown ones is
24 inches, though larger ones are sometimes found. The bite of the viper causes serious illness. If the fangs
touch the victim's neck, the wound may cause death by suffocation. In winter vipers gather together in numbers.

TDOOR
RIWma
MURALLARI

On3

The ringed snake, seen in this picture, was once common in England, but though it is stil numerous in other
parts of Europe, it is seldom seen here now. It is harmless to men. It neither poisons nor crushes. It loves the
water,where it catches frogs and other small water animals. These it seizes by the leg, then swallows them whole.
TITUTTET NYTYTUT Oro
1381
 DILLUADALE THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
would have to travel twenty or thirty up, and by great exertions got thr
miles. It was a case of returning to man away, but not until they had broken
their birthplace, and they went as off the snake's teeth in the man's
surely as birds which migrate . hand and so released him.
THE That gives us an idea of the power
IN SNAKE
TWO WATHES MOUTH THAT WORKS and ferocity of these monsters. Having
All snakes ve some features in once seized their victim, they fling their
common . They have not movabe great coils round him , and by the most
eyelids like lizards . They all change terrible power crush him , bones and all.
their skins frequently in the course of A bear may hug, but it cannot hug
cou
like
the year. They all have a skin cover a great python can crush . Of rse ,
ing to the eye to protect that organ they reach a great size . The Indian
from injury by thorns. But the most python grows to 30 feet, and the
striking thing is the way in which West African python to 25 feet, and
their mouths are formed . The lower their bodies are as thick as the thickest
jaw, instead of being one bone as ours part ofa man's leg.
is, consists of two halves joined The boa family includes the python ,
together at the chin by a tough muscle . the anaconda , and the boa - constrictor
The effect of that is that the snake, proper . They all climb trees and can
when eating , can grip with one side of hang head downwards by the aid of
its mouth , while the other is opened tails, which , like those of the American
and moved forward . monkeys, have gripping power. They
These snakes have no poison fangs. show the rudiments of what once were 1

When they strike an animal with hind legs . They are less feared than the
their teeth they must hold. They poisonous snakes, because they will not ,
cannot afford to let go. Their teeth, as a rule, attack men unless very hungry .
of which they have three or four rows , One at the Zoo swallowed a rug, when
all curve towards the throat, so that waking after a long fast .
there is no escape, once an animal is THE SNAKE THAT ATE ITS BED- FELLOW
IN THE NIGHT
seized. But, holding with one half of
the jaw, the snake can , by moving This reminds us that once the boa
first one side of the jaw, then the other, strikes its teeth into anything it must
draw the animal down its throat. go on eating. There was an extra
The power of their jaws, throat and ordinary example of this in 1894 at
body to stretch is wonderful. No snake the Zoo. In a cage together were two
can masticate its food ; it must swallow boa-constrictors, one II feet long and
it whole. When the meal happens to be the other a little over 9 feet long. The
a sheep, or a small deer, or a big dog, we keeper put in a couple of pigeons over
can understand that the stretch must be night, and before he went away he saw
considerable. We do not know quite the larger snake take one.
what the python can swallow . One is In the morning there remained only
said to have been found dead with a the larger snake, looking enormously
full- g‘own goat inside it, its death swollen . The 9- feet snake had dis
having been caused by the animal's horns. appeared ; its mate had eaten it. This
On the other hand, it is said to be is the explanation : The larger snake,
impossible for the boa to swallow any- having eaten its own pigeon, saw the
thing bigger than a half - grown sheep . second pigeon sticking in the mouth of
OW A BOA - CONSTRICTOR TRIED TO the smaller snake. It made a grab,
CRUSH AND EAT THE MAN WHO FED IT but caught the head of the snake as well.
That the boa -constrictor will try to Its teeth became fixed, and it could i
eat we have seen in London . not get the other snake out of its mouth .
men
Once when a man was about to feed a So it quietly settled down to make a
hungry boa with a chicken, the reptile, meal of its bed-fellow, and when morn
in darting for the fowl, missed it , and ing came there were two snakes in one.
by mistake caught his hand. In an For 28 days the snake ate no more .
instant the terrible creature wound Then it woke up, and, as if to show that
itself round his arm and neck and threw its appetite wa; in no way injured, it ate
him down helpless. He could not a plump pigeon .
move, but two other keepers rushed The next stories of animals are on 1423.
E LUX TRERE SOLELY RUDOLEUX LET TEL . Unuttet
1382
 The Child's Book of
: Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
JE have been studying living cells that swim in water, and here we read
WE about living cells that swim in our blood , and can live in a drop of
blood apart from us for days. They help to make the blood the most wonderful
fluid in the world . They give us our colour — we cannot blush without them or
without the iron which makes them red. These cells are made inside our bones,
and they carry the air we breathe from the lungs to every part of the body for its
life. Then each cell, having given up its burden of oxygen, returns to the lungs
for another load, and so on it goes, round and round, until in a few weeks it is worn
out and dies, and a new cell from the bones takes its place. In a single drop of
blood there are more of these cells than there are people in the whole of Scotland.

THE RED CELLS OF THE BLOOD

We ha ve been CONTINUED FROM 1203 the gases — are abso
talking about lutely necessary for
000
living cells, which life. But here, since
are
the units of all living we have been lately talking
creatures, just as atoms are about cells, we may begin with
the units of the elements of them. On the whole, we may
matter. We have read of say that these cells are of
some of the simplest of these two kinds , known as the red
living cells, those which are complete cells and white cells.
creatures in themselves , such as mi- The red cells are much the more
crobes , the amæba found in ponds , numerous and the easiest to under
and so on. stand . In a volume of blood the size
This prepares us now to study the of about two pins' heads, there should
most wonderful fluid in the world- be millions of these red cells . That
the red blood which is found in the will give us some idea of their tiny
bodies of all the higher animals, and size . We could also count the
which we know so well in ourselves. number by taking a very small drop
Though we think of the blood as a of b'ood, dropping it into a little
fluid , it is really crammed with living well made in a glass plate, and
cells, red and white, upon the health covering it up and looking through
the microscope. We know exactly
of which our own health depends.
In any case , we cannot know too how deep the well is, and the floor
much about the blood . Its health is of it is ruled in both directions with
our health. The number and life of tiny lines of which we know the
the cells in it are urgent matters for distance apart .
us . We eat in srder to keep its fluid So if we count the number of cells
part of proper composition, so that we see in each of these squares, we can
it shall be ablehment
to supply the right reckon the richnes of the blood in
kind of nouris to every part of cells. This takes a svery long time and
our body — from the brain -cells down is very difficult to do, especially as the
to the cells that make our nails. blood has to be diluted first ; but it
The gaseous part of the blood is a is very well worth doing, both for the
matter of life and death for us. We red cells and the white cells , because
breathe in order that its composition their number changes very much in
shall be kept right-in order that the different states of health, and very
poisonous gases produced by the body often the doctor knows how to treat
and carried by the blood shall be got rid
a patient just because he is able to
of ; and in order that the life-giving watch these changes in the number
gas, oxygen , shall be supplied to it in of cells in the blood .
proper quantity. All these three parts All the colour of the blood is due to
of the blood - the cells, the fluid , and the red cells . When we look at a single

1383
 OLA KELELE
« THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE .
TOURNOI

'cell by itself, however, it is not really tissues in the whole body. The cells in
red, but yellow . It is the great number this red bone-marrow , as it is called,
of them seen together that makes the have the amazing power of making the
blood look red. red cells, which the blood picks up as
When you prick your finger, the it pours through the bones , and which
drop of blood should be of a rich keep it always freshly supplied with
red colour, but in people who are cells ; unless, indeed , the red bone
living unhealthy lives or who are not marrow falls ill, as it sometimes does.
quite well the blood is often too pale, I think there is nothing, perhaps, which
and these people suffer in many ways upsets the red bone-marrow socertainly
in consequence . as having to breathe impure gases
OUR BLOOD RED, brought to it by the blood because we
AND THE WAY MAKE
THECELLSTHAT IN WHICH THEY WORK have been breathing foul air.
Breathing bad air is one of the chief As the blood flows in our bodies, the
causes of this paleness, for the bad gases red cells are whirled along with it , but
in the air are poisons to the red cells, and they do not move of themselves ; they
kill many of them , so that their numbers are very passive things, as different as
may fall to perhaps much less than half can be from the white cells . They do
of what they should be. Also the number not change their shape ; indeed , they
of cells may be quite up to the mark , seem to have an elastic covering which
but they may not contain the right quan prevents them from doing so. They
tity of the yellow or red stuff which it never eat up a microbe or an enemy in
is their business to carry about. The the blood. Sometimes we do see microbes
red cells are round and fat, and rather in them , but that is because the microbes
thinner towards the middle than towards have killed the cells, not because the
the edge. When a thing is scooped out cells have eaten the microbes.
in the middle, it is said to be concave, and
when it is scooped out on both sides it THETHELITTLE CARRIERS OF HÆMOGLOBIN,
COLOURING MATTER IN OUR BLOOD
is said to be bi -concave ; if it is rather What, then, is the use of the red cells
flat it is called a disc. So we say that which exist in such billions and billions
red blood- cells are circular bi- concave in our blood ? The answer is that their
discs. Indeed, in shape they are rather use is simply as vehicles, as carriers of
like the glasses which short-sighted the precious colouring matter they con
people have to wear in spectacles. tain . This yellow or red matter has a long
When the blood is healthy the red name, but it is so important that we must
cells are all of the same size and shape. try to learn it .
We cannot see any nucleus in them . Its name is hæmoglobin — the first
But each cell had a nucleus when it was half of this word is simply the Greek for
younger. When they are grown up, so blood . Hæmoglobin is probably the most
to say, they lose their nucleus ; they remarkable chemical compound in the
cannot divide into two, as many cells whole world. It is believed also to be
do, and they only live a short time in much the most complicated. Indeed , the
the blood--perhaps aa few days or weeks. various compounds that we get when we
Then they are broken down and dis- split it up are themselves quite ascom
any other compounds we
posed of. This is going on all the time, plicated as have
and all the time new red cells are being know . We learned in another part
poured into the blood . of this book that such a compound as
THE LIVING PILLARS OF OUR BODY AND water consists of molecules, each of which
THE WONDER THAT WORKS INSIDE THEM is made of three atoms. It is probable
They are made inside our bones . that there are at least a thousand atoms
This is one of the astonishing things in every molecule of hæmoglobin . They
which many people find it hard to are mostly atoms of carbon, hydrogen,
believe ; they think of bones as hard, nitrogen , and oxygen , but one of them
dead things which exist merely for the and it is absolutely necessary --is an
same reason as the pillars of a building. atom of the metal iron .
But these are living pillars, and the So hæmoglobin follows the rule that
inside of them is filled with stuff called the compounds of iron are usually
marrow , which is not only alive, but coloured . It is interesting to remember
one of the most alive and most active that, just as iron is necessary for the
UZOU TYTTITUZU DEMEULUKUTEXT
1384

-THE RED CELLS OF THE BLOOD..LETILKER
most important coloured compound
in the animal body, so iron is always
found in the most important coloured
compound in the vegetable body.
THE PRON THATMAKES BLOOD RED AND
That is to say, iron is one of the
things that help to make colour in the
world — not only the red in our blood ,
but the green colouring matter of leaves .
It may be, then, that very humble
forms of life can exist without iron, but
at any rate we are certain that iron is
necessary for all the life of higher
animals and plants. This tells us some-
thing about our food, too. The red
cells, we learned, die , and are broken up
after a time , and their iron is lost . Iron
is therefore a necessary part of our food ;
we should die without it . And perhaps
it is interesting to know that the foods
which contain iron, and from which we
get it , include the best of all our foods,
such as milk , eggs, bread , meat , pota-
toes, peas, rice , and oatmeal . The wines
which are supposed to be rich in iron , WHAT GOES TO THE LUNGS WHEN WE
and used to be ordered for this purpose ,
contain extremely little --nothing like so
much as is found in these common foods ;
and when anyone's blood is poor in iron ,
milk is worth all the wine in the world
for him .
But we have not yet said why this oxygen . Now, no one knows the exact
hæmoglobin should be so important.
We know that it is important, since our
bones are filled with material for making
it, and since the blood is crammed with
cells to carry it , and since we fall ill at
once if the amount of it in our blood
falls below the proper quantity.
HEMOGLOBIN . CARRIES THE OXYGEN TO
It must have some great use, then , and
it certainly has, for it is this hæmoglobin
that carries the oxygen, which we get
from the air when we breathe, to every
part of the body. We have learned that
every living cell must breathe or die ;
every living cell of the body must get
oxygen or die, and the only way in globin. We remember that when oxygen
which it can get this oxygen is through
the blood, and the only way in which
the blood can supply it is by means
of this hæmoglobin . Now, what we
have already learned will help us to
understand what hæmoglobin does.
We must understand, in the first
place, that the blood is always circulat-
ing through the body, and in the course
1385
TEXT
of doing so it passes through the lungs .
Every few minutes — some say four
minutes — every red cell in the blood
passes through the lungs, and after
doing so it goes to various parts of the
body, and so on, again and again, until
its life is ended and a younger cell takes
its place. The whole meaning of its
passing through the lungs is that there
it finds oxygen . Perhaps it also finds
many foul gases which injure it . But
that is not its fault , but ours. It is to
get oxgyen that it goes to the lungs,
and if we there expose it to poisons
which we have breathed by our foolish
ness, so much the worse for the red cell,
and for us, whom it is trying to serve .
Now, the special point to note is this :
that the fluid part of the blood, and the
white cells of the blood , cannot take up,
as they pass through the lungs, anything
like sufficient oxygen for the needs of
the body. It is only the red cells that
can do this, and it is only because of the
hæmoglobin in them that they can do it
Sometimes there are plenty of them ,
but they do not contain enough hæmo
globin , and then we suffer. Each
molecule of hæmoglobin has the power
of combining with itself a molecule of
composition of hæmoglobin, but let us, for
convenience, give it a name of its own,
Hb. We cannot call it H , because we
know that that stands for hydrogen .
Now, a molecule of oxygen will be repre
sented by O2 . Well, when blood passes
through the lungs, all the Hb of the red
cells combines with the 02 in the lungs ,
and makes a compound which we can call
HbO2. This is simply hæmoglobin and
oxygen , and the long name for it is oxy
hæmoglobin . In contrast with this, we
sometimes call hæmoglobin, when it is
not combined with a molecule of oxygen ,
or when that molecule of oxygen has
been taken away from it , reduced hæmo
is taken from anything, that thing is
BOC
said to be reduced .
DA
What comes to the lungs, then , is
reduced or simple hæmoglobin - Hb ;
what leaves the lungs is HbO2 . This
makes a remarkable difference of colour
in the blood , for HbO2 has a bright and
cheerful red colour—the colour of life,
as it has been called ; while Hb itself
 manuarmannium
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE were
has a much darker and more sullen the other hand, wherever it is required .
colour. We can see the difference That is the whole duty and purpose of
at once in anyone who has a choking these countless red cells in our blood.
fit, for his skin becomes dark and purple. If we are to be well and strong, and
All the blood in it is full of Hb instead of useful and happy , we must have a
HbO2 , because he is not getting air sufficient supply of red cells in our
into his lungs. When he gets right blood, and they must contain sufficient
again the healthy colour will return, hæmoglobin. So we must avoid anything
owing to the air getting into his lungs, that poisons them, or that poisons the
and the blood in his skin has plenty of bone-marrow which makes them , and
HbO2 in it instead of having only Hb . so prevents it from supplying them to
LO AND ATSEETHETHE
OOK BACK OF YOUR HAND the blood quickly enough. I think that
BLOOD RUNNING bad air is much the most important of
If you look at the back of your hand poisons we are at all likely to meet in
or at the front of your wrist you will this country. But in great areas of the
see little blue lines. These are veins, world much the most serious poison of the
and the blood in them is running up living creature
red blood cells is the tiny
the arm . You can tell that it is doing which causes the disease malaria. Certain
so, for if you hang your arm down and kinds of mosquitoes carry this creature,
run your finger firmly along one of these
veins, say, on the back of your hand , and, when they bite us, pass it into the
blood, where it kills many of the red cells.
running your finger downwards towards We are beginning to abolish this disease
the fingers, the blue line disappears. by killing the mosquitoes that carry it .
Then, if you take your finger off, you Y IT IS THAT MEN Die IF THEY
can see the blood run upwards and fill WH SWALLOW POISON
the vein again . The vein looks bluish The action of many poisons is due to the
through the skin because the colouring fact that they interfere with the work
matter in the red cells of the blood is of done by hæmoglobin. Prussic acid, for
the dark instance,
kind ; it is unites with
Hb, not the hæmo
H b ( 2; globin in
and this the blood
blood is so that it
rushing can
back up
your arm
2 longer
take up
no

as fast as oxygen ,
it can in a n da
order to person
get to the poisoned
Tungs , These pictures show us what the red cells of the blood are like,very much with prus.
where it enlarged. The tiniest drop ofblood appears like this under the microscope,with sic acid
will find more of these cells than there are people in London. As they die the red therefore
fresh oxy: cells move and string themselves together like beads, as in the second picture. dies of a
gen which you are breathing in to get kind of suffocation . The blood passing
ready for it at this moment ; and there through his lungs cannot pick up the
the Hb will be made into HbO2, and the oxygen in them . Alcohol also has a very
dark blood will turn bright again. This interesting action on the red cells. Some.
bright blood returns to the heart, how or other it makes the union of hæmo
and is pumped by it to every part of globin with oxygen much more stable
the body, where its business is to give than it usually
usuallyis.
is. The consequence is
up its oxygen so that the HbO2 is that it is not reduced by the tissues of
reduced to Hb again, which is sent back the body as quickly as should be. They
to the lungs for more oxygen , and so on . are thusnot burnt up so well, and this is
The most wonderful thing about hæmo. one of the reasons why people who take
globin , then , is its power of picking up too much alcohol are apt to get stout .
oxygen very easily, on the onehand, and No one knows why alcohol does this.
of giving it away again very easily, on The next part of this is on page 1461 .
count
1386 Time
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
"HE world is made of about eighty kinds ofmatter which we call elements . We
THEinust be quite clear in our minds about what an element is. An element is
something which is all made of one kind of atoms. Hydrogen and oxygen are
elements, but water, which is formed by hydrogen and oxyge:1, is not an element,
because it is made by hydrogen and oxygen and can be broken up into them . No
chemist can break up an element into anything else ; though we are just learning
now that even the atoms of the elements may be changed by forces within them
selves. So that the elements are the very foundations of the world, the things from
which all other things are made. And, though there are about eighty oftheseelements,
there are two chief things we must remember about them : a few of the elements are
much more important than all the others put together, and the whole of the elements
are related to one another. Here we read about some of the chief elements ; wiiere
they are found, what they do, and how they help each other in the work of the wor!d.
THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENTS
everybody may have
WEe we
all know coal ;
have all seen
CONTINUED FROM 1216
as many as they please. oo
0.0

diamonds and char Beautiful things can-

coal; and we have all used what not be too common. Already
is stupidly called a lead pencil. chemists can make very , very
A wonderful and most important tiny diamonds.
element it is that makes all If you make a diamond very
these very different things. It hot, in the absence of air it
is nothing like as abundant in the swells up and makes a black stuff,
world as any of the three gases we which charco
is al . If air is present, X

have talked about, but it is no less
important , because it gives rise to a
countless number of compounds. It
is also, like each of those three gases, a
necessary part of all living creatures.
This element is called carbon,
from the Latin word for charcoal,
which is carbo . Nothing could be
more different, to look at, than any
of those gaseous elements we have
talked about. We know carbon in
many forms, but usually think of it
as a black powder, like charcoal.
Sometimes, however , it occurs as a
heap of tiny crystals, and that is
what makes the “ lead ” of lead
pencils. The name is very stupid,
because lead is another element, and
has nothing to do with lead pencils.
Carbon also occurs as larger crystals
of a different shape, called diamonds.
These are rare, hard, and bright, and
therefore valuable ; but they are not
worth the life and money which are
spent in digging them out of the earth,
and therefore we must hope that the
chemists will soon learn how to make
diamonds, so that all this life and
money may be saved, and so that
it burns and makes common carbonic
acid gas. At ordinary temperatures
carbon, then , unlike these other ele OON
ments we have been talking about , 00 :
oo
is not a gas, but a solid. It is, so o
so
oo
to say, frozen . When it is made
intensely hot , we find evidence that it
becomes a gas. It seems, as it were,
to jump the liquid stage, so that no
one has ever seen liquid carbon. It 0
is twelve times as heavy as hydrogen .
We usually represent it in chemistry
by a capital C ; so that you now
know what the capitals H , O , N , C
mean . Water is made of H and O,
ammonia of N and H, and a gas
called marsh-gas or firedamp, much
feared by miners, is made of C and H.
It was a great Frenchman , Lavoisier,
who showed that diamonds were made
of carbon. He belonged to the class of
people against whom the nation rose
during the French Revolution, and they
cut off his head , saying " The Republic
has no need of chemists.” The Re
public knows better now , and honours
its great thinkers and men of science.
One of the interesting ways in which
we find carbon is from charcoal. It is

1387
 CGXLROIXXELE KLEERLEN WEG
THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH.
usually made from wood by charring
it, and in some parts of the world wood
charcoal is used as fuel. It goes into
gunpowder also, and at one time was
much used for getting rid of bad smells,
since it has a wonderful power of storing
up gases in itself.
But, in whatever form we find carbon ,
we can never think of it as a metal ,
though it is solid , and may often be very
hard. Though the diamond is vastly
different from charcoal , yet neither
the one nor the other , nor any other
form of carbon, is in the least like gold
or silver or lead, or many other solid
elements which we call metals. We
may learn , then, that the solid elements
may be divided into groups , as , indeed ,
all the elements may, and we shall think
of carbon as the best representative of
the solid elements which are not metals.
There is no need for us here to mention
all the various elements . Most of them
are quite unimportant except to the
chemist. But we must have some idea
of the different kinds of substance
which we find among the elements-
for instance , a gas like oxygen, a solid
like carbon , and a solid of such a very
different kind as gold. There are also
a very few liquid elements, of which
the most remarkable is mercury .
SOLID ELEMENTS
SOME OF THE CHIEF
METALS
Among the solid elements that are
not metals, we must mention one or
two on account of their importance.
Perhaps, after carbon, sulphur is
the most important of these non
metallic elements. Like carbon , it is
a solid, by which we mean that it is
important, forfound
a solid at ordinary temperatures. Of issalts
course, we believe that any element that are
might possibly exist either as a solid
or as a liquid or as a gas , according to
the conditions it is put into . We must
not forget this, for we are apt to say
that such and such a thing is gas or
a liquid or a solid , though all we mean
is that it is most commonly met with
in that state . Sulphur, then, though
it is a solid , can easily be made
WIENTUT
liquid, and can also be quite easily
un
made into a gas . This element
bon
is yellow . You have very likely seen
it as a yellow powder. Like carbon, it
has none of the appearance of aa metal;
and, also like carbon, it does not melt
in water. Yet , again , we find it in many
TUDUTTERIT
ROTORUYOR
1388
different forms, just as we saw with
carbon . The difference between the
“ lead ” of pencil and the diamond
is that the carbon forms crystals of
different shapes in the two cases. In
the same way sulphur forms different
crystals in different cases, and looks
different accordingly. This element has
a special importance because it is very
commonly, if not always, found in
living matter. It is used by doctors,
by makers of matches , and for other
purposes. Most of it is obtained from
places like Sicily, where quantities of
it are found either on the surface or
not far from the surface .
WO ATOMS YGEN AND ONE ATOM
TWO
OF SULPHUR MAKE A MOLECULE OF GAS
Both carbon and sulphur can be
oxidised, or combined with oxygen , and
in each case the result is a gas. In order
to make this gas, which is , of course,
a compound, two atoms of oxygen
unite with one of carbon to make a
molecule of the gas, and the same is true
in the case of sulphur. Now , since S
stands for sulphur in chemistry, we
can easily represent the two gases
which are made by the oxidation , or
burning, of carbon and sulphur; the
one will be CO2 , and the other SO2 .
These oxides, as they are called, are
very much the most important com
pounds into which carbon and sulphur
enter. The first of them is called
carbonic acid gas, which , as we know , is
present in the atmosphere, and is a
product of breathing, while it is part
of the food of green plants. The cor
responding oxide of sulphur is not so
important as carbonic acid , but it
it goes to make
various
in the soil and in
the sea, and are used by vegetable life.
HOW THE SAMEWAY OF THE SAME STUFF
Before we go on to the metals or the
metallic elements, there is a little group
of elements that we must mention ,
since they stand quite in a class by them
selves. You may know the names of
two of them , at any rate. They are
called fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and
iodine. The first two are gases, the third
a liquid , and the fourth a solid, but not
a metal. Bromine and iodine are got
from the ashes of seaweed, which gets
them from sea water. The interesting
thing about these four elements is that,
VIDUE UOMIODOU LOCUTOE
 THE MOST IMPORTANT
though they are very different from
each other in many ways, yet no one
can study them without seeing that
they must be relations of each other,
and so they are. They are almost the
best instance we know that teaches us
how the elements can be sorted out into
groups, and the lesson which these four
elements teach us has , in the last few
years, been seen to be one of the most
important lessons in the world. It is
that , though we talk about oxygen and
iodine and gold as elements, yet they
are not utterly different from each
other ; and if we could only see them
close enough, we should find that , at
bottom , not merely are they related to
each other in groups, but they are all
made on the same principles, and of
one and the same stuff.
We shall come back to this great
discovery afterwards. Meanwhile, we
must remember that , though we speak
of elements, yet these elements are
related to each other in groups, and
that their relation means something.
ELEMENTS THAT MAKE UP
THECOUNTLESS NUMBER OF SALTS
The four elements we have just named,
which are so strikingly related to each
other, are called halogens, which really
means salt-makers . They all form com-
pounds very like common salt, and they
can turn each other out of their com-
pounds in a regular order and very chemistry of salt and its relation to life
strikingly. The number of salts that
these salt-making elements can form is
almost numberless. The standard and
type of them all, however, is the com-
monest and most important salt in the
world , which we all know very well, and
which most of us just call salt.
Like all salts, common salt is a com
pound. Its molecule—the smallest part
a compound that can exist's
really a very simple one, for it merely
consists of one atom of the salt - maker
chlorine, and one atom of a metal called
sodium . In chemistry, we represent
sodium by Na, which are the first two
letters of its Latin name ; and chlorine
we represent by Cl ;we cannot use C by
itself , for that has been already taken
by carbon . Common ' salt , then ,
called by chemists sodium chloride, and
it is represented like this, NaCl, which
tells us its composi ion , the most im-
( >
portant thing about it . It is the com-
monest and most important salt in
ELEMENTS coco
the world . There are enormous quan
tities of it in the sea, and in various
parts of the world it is found as
what we call rock-salt , which has been
formed in past ages by the drying up
of bygone seas. Some of the salt we use
to -day is obtained by the drying up of
sea -water, by which we mean that the
water passes into the air in the form of
a gas , and the salt which was melted in
it is left behind . Salt is found in every
living creature, animal or vegetable.
It is absolutely necessary for all life
a food which we cannot do without .
IS ONE OF THE COMMONEST
SALT
NECESSITIES OF LIFE
It is very important to know how
much of this sodium chloride, or com
mon salt, is found naturally in various
foods. Milk contains enough of it ,
meat also contains enough of it, but
other foods do not . So, practically, we
have to add salt to our food, and this
is true all over the world . A tax on
salt is therefore a tax on a necessary of
life. Some of us think that the tax on
А salt in India is aa cruel and wicked thing,
though it is a very sure way of getting
money, since people must have salt or
die. But not only is salt a necessary
food for us, as for all living things, but
it is also specially valuable as a pre
servative of other kinds of food, such
as fish . Those who understand the
are inclined to think that it is almost the
last thing in the world out of which a
government should make money.
There was a time when all the
elements were divided into two groups
the metals and the non -metals. We
group the elements differently nowadays.
SIX
THWHAT USEFUL
A METAL is METALS, AND
We know that there are some ele
ments which are not quite metals,
and yet are very nearly metals, and
we know that mercury is a metal ,
though it is not even solid. But still
it is worth while to group together a
number of the elements as metals, and
this number now is something like sixty.
In ancient times six metals only were
is known-iron , copper , tin , lead, gold ,
and silver. These are still the most
widely used metals, though many others
have now been found.
Their names are sufficient to give us
quite an idea of what a metal is. In
ODOXILAMI
CZYTYYTYVYmUutmer
1389
 CECOTECA
un LED OTBam
THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
general, metals are solid and opaque,
which means that they do not let the
light through them ; they are heavy, and
have a particular sheen or metallic
lustre . There are exceptions to all of
these characters , as, for instance,
ar
cum
mercury, which is liquid , and the metal
sodium, which we have just been talking many thousands of years before the
about, which is not heavy, but light. birth of Christ , and it was not the kind
THE DISCOVERY OF METALS CHANGES of thing which, once learnt , would be
THE HISTORY OF MEN
Of course , when only six metals were
known, gold was the most costly of
them — the noble metal . But now we
know many metals which are far rarer
and far more valuable than gold. Many
of these can be used for special purposes
for which neither gold nor any of the
common metals is of any use.
So the science of preparing metals is
a very important one nowadays, and
we now realise that the history of our
knowledge of the metals, how to pre- ment, and we may call it a special
pare them and how to use them , is a
part of the history of mankind. We
know now there was a time when men
were unable to use any of the metals.
They had to make their axes and
weapons of stone. After this Stone
Age, which men have passed through
at various times in all parts of the
world, there came the ages when men
learnt how to make weapons of metals,
bronze or iron . Far more can be done
with metals and tools made of metal
than with any that can be made of
stone. Thus the discovery how to get
iron out of iron ore, as it is called, has
always meant, when it was made in any
part of the world, a new stage in human
history there.
RON IS BY FAR THE MOST VALUABLE
IRON
OF ALL THE METALS
Though the metals are all more
or less like each other, yet they are
different in many ways. Some can be
hammered flat , some can be drawn into
ong wires , some will stand great strain , :
and so on ; but of all the many metals
by far the most valuable, in the real
sense of valuable, is one of the com-
monest and one of the first to be known
-namely, iron. This, of course, is an
element, and has its own symbol or
letter. We do not call it I , however,
because that stands for iodine, but we
call iron Fe , from its Latin name, fer-
rum . This element is valuable, because
it serves man in so many ways. For-
1390
потоки
tunately, it is very common, though
not much of it is to be found free . It is
usually found burnt, combined with
oxygen ; and the way in which to get
the iron by itself is to take the oxygen
from it by means of carbon .
Men certainly knew how to do this
forgotten, so vastly superior to any
thing that was known byfore were the
weapons and tools which could be made
of this element . In some parts of the
world bronze was used for a period
before iron was discovered, so that there
was a Stone Age, a Bronze Age, and an
Iron Age -bronze being aa mixture of tin
and copper . Long years after this,
there is no doubt that people will
describe the age in which we live as the
Steel Age. Now, steel is not an ele
kind of iron, but we can do things with
steel which could never be done with
iron ; and perhaps steel is as great an
advance upon iron as iron was upon
bronze or stone .
THE WONDERFUL THING CALLED
How
STEEL IS GOT FROM THE IRON
Nearly all the iron we find is more or
less impure, and it all contains a quan
tity of carbon , as well as many other
elements. If we turn out all these
other elements except the carbon , if
we allow just the right amount of carbon
to stay in the iron, and if, in so doing ,
we comply with a great number of con
ditions as to cooling, and so forth , then
we get that wonderful thing-steel ,
which we think of as iron with some
carbon in it . It has all the virtues of
iron, and far more ; it is stronger and
less brittle ; it can take a wonderfully
delicate edge, and it will stand an
amazing strain, whether used for build
ings or bridges or ships or motor -cars.
Now , since steel is so much more
wonderful and useful than iron , it
seems a very poor explanation of its
properties to say that it is just iron
with a little carbon in it . Those who
are studying steel now take special
pains to find out what it is that makes
it so useful , or what it is that makes
the difference between the steel which
lasts and stands strain and the steel
which snaps and wrecks a train or lets a
bridge crash That is not merely a
ZEROTEXNOLI
 -THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENTS nong namun

questions of iron with a little carbon in
it ; it is a question of the way in which
the steel forms crystals as it cools and
becomes solid .
We think of salt and snow and some
of the medicines we have to take as
crystals. Very few of us have ever
thought that all the metals are made of
crystals , too, but this is really so. Of
course the crystals are very small , and
very tightly and beautifully fitted to
each other, but a lump of gold or a bar
of iron is made of crystals just as cer-
tainly as a ball of snow or a piece of ice.
THANOITTEELCRYSTALS THAT
THEIR AMAZ ING STRENGTH
It is the crystalline structure of iron
that makes it so useful, it is the par-
ticular crystalline structure of iron
containing carbon , in the form of steel,
that makes steel the wonderful thing it
is, and it isa question ofcrystalline acid and hydrochloric acid. Either of
structure that decides whether there these will make short work of most
shall be an accident or not in any of the
millions of cases in which steel is used
every day. If we examine steel under
the microscope—which
— has only lately
been used for the study of metals — we
can now learn the difference between
the kind of steel that you could trust
your life to and the kind of steel that
would betray you if you trusted it . In
the good steel the crystals are beauti-
fully and regularly arranged , holding
on to each other on all sides, nor is
there any place where some of the
carbon has got by itself in between the
crystals . This is just enough to tell us
of the kind of study now being carried
on in various parts of the world, especi- when very special methods are used
ally in the University of Sheffield . we still fail to oxidise gold. If we make
Gold and silver are very nice and silver exceedingly hot, however, and
useful metals in their way , but if all the
gold and silver in the world were to
vanish at this moment we should soon
get along just as well without them .
mean that the use of them is not a real
use, like the use of iron, or, at least , the
real use they have is only very slight.
HY GOLD AND SILVER ARE CALLED
WHY
THE NOBLE METALS
For some purposes we want to have
something that is very thin , and this is
one of the real uses of gold , for it can
be beaten out into thinner leaves than
anything else . We say that it is
malleable , a word which comes from the
Jatin, and simply means hammer -able.
Gold and silver are called noble metals,
TUTTOmer UTZIET
not so much because they are rare or
beautiful as because they do not rust.
Most metals , when exposed to the air,
begin to get rusted or burnt. If there
is only a small amount of water in the
air, this rusting goes on very quickly.
Steel , of course, rusts. You must have
noticed that with a pocket- knife.
Now, gold and silver do not rust .
They can be exposed to the air, but
they do not get burnt, or oxidised , by it .
Weknow that silver things will tarnish
in a room, but that is because they are
attacked by the sulphur of the air.
They do not rust . This is one
reason why gold and silver are called
noble metals , and another reason is
that it is difficult to melt them .
Almost the only thing that will melt
gold , for instance, is a mixture of two
very strong and violent acids-nitric
metals, but neither of them alone can
touch gold ; only a mixture of them
can do so ; and so this mixture was
long ago called aqua regia , meaning
the royal water, because it was able to
melt the royal or noble metal-gold.
YOU PUT THE OTHER END IN THE FIRE
Though they cannot be attacked by
the air or by most other things, gold and
silver are very soft, and when they are
used to make coins various other metals
have to be added to them , or they would
very soon rub away.
We have seen that gold cannot be
oxidised in the ordinary way. Even
expose it to air or to oxygen at a very
high pressure, it can be oxidised .
One of the features of the metals in
I general is that they conduct heat
very well. That is why one end of
the poker becomes hot when the other
is put in the fire, iron being a good
conductor of heat. This means, of
course , that metals are the worst
things we could use to make clothing
of ; they would make what we should
call cold clothing, because it would con
duct heat away from our bodies quickly.
Metals are also the best conductors
of electricity. No one has yet ex
plained what it is in a metal that
makes it conduct heat or electricity so
1391
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
well, but it is at least very interesting found free in Nature. Like the others,
to remember that , as a rule, the things it is a very good conductor of electricity.
which conduct heat best are also the It is a very useful metal, not only
things which conduct electricity best . because it conducts electricity so well ,
Some day we shall probably learn that but also because can be spread on
it is one and the same thing - perhaps glass so as to make mirrors. " We call
the way in which the atoms of these this silvering the mirrors. But mercury,
things lie together - that explains their or quicksilver, though it looks like
conducting of heat and electricity. liquid silver, is not silver at all, but a
Electricity, about which we shall read perfectly distinct element. When mer
later, is every year being used for more cury is heated, it expands — that is to
purposes. It is the best of all means say, it occupies more space — in a very
by which power can be carried from regular way, and so it is used in ther
the place where it is obtained-as, mometers for measuring the tempera
for instance , by burning coal—to the ture . In somewhat the same way it
place where it is wanted to be used. is used in barometers for measuring
COPPER USED ALL OVER THE
IS the pressure of the air.
WHY WORLD TO CARRY ELECTRICITY Unlike the three other elements of this
Hence we yearly have more and more group, mercury is also a valuable medi
need for things that will carry or cine. In some kinds of illness—some of
conduct electricity, things that it will them not serious , and others as grave as
run through as if it were water run- illness can be—mercury is not merely
ning through a pipe. This is one of the best medicine, but the only one
the great reasons why we use the worth mentioning. I had almost said
metals nowadays. The three metals that it saves as many lives every year
which conduct electricity best are gold, as are destroyed by men's hunger for
silver, and copper, and as copper is very silver and gold , but I am afraid that
much the cheapest of the three, it is would be an exaggeration. At any rate,
now used all over the world for carrying if we were allowed to keep only one
electricity. Like silver and gold, a of this remarkable group of four metals
certain amount of copper can be found we should certainly choose mercury,
free in the earth , and it is free copper and if we were allowed to keep two
that we require ; but it must be very it would be mercury and copper.
pure , for if it has any traces of other WONDERFUL GROUP OF GASES AND
elements in it , it does not conduct A WHAT THEY TEACH US
electricity anything like so well . So all There is no need to say anything now
the copper which is used for conducting about the other metallic elements,
electricity has to be specially prepared, though we shall have something to say
and this is done by splitting up com- about some of their compounds after
pounds of copper, dissolved in water, wards ; nor need we say anything
by passing an electric current through about other elements that are not
them , just as we saw that we could metals, such as arsenic and phosphorus.
split up water itself by passing an We must pass on to some wonderful
electric current through it. A great elements that we have not known very
advantage of copper is that, like silver long, which will prepare us to learn
and gold , it is not burnt or rusted or how all elements are related to each
oxidised at ordinary temperatures . other, and actually made out of a
ERCURY , WATER single kind of stuff .
MEBOLPER, THE ONLY LIQUID Metal First of all , there is a wonderful
Just a word must be said here group of gases which exist in the
about mercury . It should always be air in very small quantities, and have
thought of together with copper, only been found in the last few years,
silver, and gold , for with these three though everyone thought that the
elements it forms a group of four, composition of the air was completely
which are all related to each other and known. These gases are not important
somewhat like each other. Mercury is, in themselves ; they play no direct
however, peculiar, because it is liquid- part in our lives ; they only exist in
the only liquid metal there is. Small tiny quantities ; and they seem to do
quantities of it , as of the others, are nothing in the air or anywhere else .
rum WOLAETIT UXXXI TRUL
1392
 SERCON
-THE MOST IMPORTANT
But they are enormously important
on account of what they teach us,
and their relation to other elements .
The first of them, argon , was found
fifteen years ago, and since then it has
been found that what was called argon
did mainly consist of a true element
to which that name is still given ,
but also contained very small quantities
of four other elements which are now
known as helium , neon , krypton , and
xenon . . Helium was already known as
existing in the sun, and also in a rare
mineral, but no one guessed that it was
contained in the air .
THEINTFIVE GAP OFELEMENTSTHAT FIT
MISSING
O THE
These five elements form a true group ,
quite as definite as the group of four
metals about which we have just been
speaking. They have certain common
properties which show their relation
and distinguish them from all the other
elements. More than this, long before
their discovery all the known elements
had been fitted into a table which
showed that they were related in certain
groups, and that these groups were
related to each other. In this table there
was one very conspicuous gap ; one
of the groups that should have existed in
it did not exist at all, it seemed. These
five new elements are the missing group ,
and fit exactly into the vacant space
in the table . If there were nothing
more to say about them than this, their
discovery would still be a great event
in the history of knowledge. But ,
indeed , there is much more to say about
them, for we have lately learned where
they come from . The first of the series,
helium , is the lightest but one of all
the elements. We have learned that it
is made by the breaking up of one of
the heaviest of the elements. Last
year we learned that other members
of the series are similarly made, and breaking up into smaller atoms, several
there is now no doubt that what we call
the elements are not merely related to
each other, but that they can be actually
transformed into one another.
We must first see what atoms have been
HOWUTHEIDEAS
ELEME
OFNT RADOM HAS CHANGED
recognised as the offspring, so to speak,
For a moment , then , we must leave
this little group, and must look at the
heavy element, as different from any
of them as can be, although it is, never-
theless, their parent . On page 705 of this
book we have already had something
1393
ELEMENTS
to say about the wonderful element
radium, since we have lately learned
that it is a producer of heat , that it is
distributed throughout the crust of the
earth, and therefore helps to keep the
earth warm . Nothing more important
could be said about any element , as the
warmth of the earth is necessary for
life, and as the duration of that warmth
must decide the duration of life upon
the earth .
But radium is really of equal im
portance to the world of ideas. " It gives
us not only heat , but new truths, the
greatest of which is that the elements
must nov be looked upon almost as
we look
and plants, different
uponand not askinds of animals
things which
have been what they are
now and
different from each other since the
beginning of time. We have little doubt
now that radium itself is formed by
the breaking
element calledup of the atoms
uranium . of another
WHAT
THE THE WORLD
BREAKI NG MAY
LEARN FROM
UP OF ATOMS
But radium shows this breaking -up
process in its own atoms much more
distinctly than does uranium or any
other element we know ; and it is this
breaking up that gives radium its
astonishing properties ,such as the pro
duction of heat and of electricity, and
also of various kinds of wave -motions
in the ether which are very similar to
the wave-motion we call light .
It was this production of heat and
electricity, of X -rays and of various
other kinds of rays, which first excited
our interest in radium . But now we
are learning that these things are only
the accidental results , so to speak ,
of the real and essential thing which
is always happening in radium , and to
which they are all due. This essential
thing is that the atoms of radium are
of which have now been recognised. Yet
radium is a true element and not a com
pound, for all the atoms making it are
of one kind , as we read on page 1372.
of the radium atom, and then we must
try to understand the quite tremendous
meaning of this discovery, one of the
most important that has been made
since the dawn of human knowledge .
The next story of the earth is on page 1419.
THE BRIDGE THAT LED TO ROME

And Fathers mixed with Cominons, And smote upon the planks above,
Seized hatchet , bar , and crow , And loosed the props below .

‫يو‬

in

inn
y

But friends and foes in dumb surprise,
With parted lips and straining eyes,
Stood gazing where he sank ;
And when above the surges
pro OCTORANT
1394
They saw his crest appear.
All Rome sent forth a raptur ous cry
And even the ranks of Tuscany
Could scarce forbear to cheer .
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
MACAULAY'S “ LAYS OF ANCIENT ROME "

A
Ancient Rome, ” published in 1842, are the most celebrated of his poetical
writings. They tell us stirring stories of the early days of Rome as they might have
been told by a poet living between three and four hundred years before Christ. These
stories are not entirely true ; they are partly true, however, and we call them legends.
There was a real Horatius, whose second name was Cocles, which meant that he
had only one eye ; but no doubt his power is exaggerated in the legend here told.
Etruria was an ancient kingdom in Italy , north of Rome ; Lars Porsena ,
King of Etruria, declared war against Rome because that city had expelled its
king, whose family came from Etruria ; and Sextus, who accompanied Porsena,
was the eldest son of the expelled King Tarquin . Rome was now a republic.
HOW HORATIUS KEPT THE BRIDGE
They held
LARS Porsena of
Clusium ce
en
CONTINUED FROM 1378 standing
a council

By the Nine Gods Before the RiverGate ; '

he swore Short time was there, ye well
That the great house of Tarquin may guess ,
Should suffer wrong no more. For musing or debate.
By the Nine Gods heswore it, Out spake the Consul roundly :
6

And named a trysting day , The bridge must straight go

And bade his messengers ride forth down ;
East and west and south and north , For, since Janiculum is lost,
To summon his array. Nought else can save the town.”
Just then a scout came flying,
All wild with haste and fear ;
And now hath every city “ To arms ! to arms ! Sir Consul:
Sent up her tale of men ; Lars Porsena is here."
The foot are fourscore thousand , On the low hills to westward
The horse are thousands ten : The Consul fixed his eye ,
Before the gates of Sutrium And saw the swarthy storm of dust
Is met the great array : Rise fast along the sky.
A proud manwas Lars Porsena And nearer fast and nearer
Upon the trysting day. Doth the red whirlwind come ;
And louder still and still more loud,
From underneath that rolling cloud
But by the yellow Tiber Is heard the trumpet's war- note proud ,
B

Was tumult and affright : The trampling and the hum .

From all the spacious champaign And plainly and more plainly
To Rome men took their flight. Now through the gloom appears,
A mile around the city, Far to left and far to right,
The throng stopped up the ways ; In broken gleams of dark-blue light,
A fearful sight it was to sce The long array of helmets bright,
Through two long nights and days. The long array of spears.
And plainly and more plainly,
Above that glimmering line,
To eastward and to westward Now might ye see the banners
Have spread the Tuscan bands ; Of twelve fair cities snine ;
Nor house, nor fence, nor dovecote But the banner of proud Clusium
In Crustumerium stands. Was highest of them all,
Verbenna down to Ostia The terror of the Umbrian,
Hath wasted all the plain ; The terror of the Gaul .
Astur hath stormed Janiculum ,
And the stout guards are slain. And plainly and more plainly
Now might the burghers know,
By port and vest , by lorse and crest,
I wis ( think ) , in all the Senate, Each warlike Lucumo.
There was no heart so bold , There Cilnius of Arretium
But sore it ached and fast it beat , On his fleet roan was seen ;
When that ill news was told. And Astur of the fourfold shield ,
Forthwith up rose the Consul, Girt with the brand none else may wield,
Up rose the Fathers all ; Tolumnius with the belt of gold ,
In haste they girded up their gown And dark Verbenna from the hold
And hied them to the wall. By reedy Thrasymene.

S : 42
1395
 -THE CHILD'S
Fast by the royal standard ,
O'erlooking all the war,
Lars Porsena of Clusium
Sat in his ivory car.
By the right wheel rode Mamilius
Prince of the Latian name ;
And by the left false Sextus,
That wrought the deed of shame.
But when the face of Sextus
Was seen among the foes,
A yell that rent the firmament
From all the town arose .
On the house-tops was no woman
But spat towards him and hissed,
No child but screamed out curses,
And shook his little fist.
But the Consul's brow was sad ,
And the Consul's speech was low ,
And darkly looked he at the wall,
And darkly at the foe.
" Their van will be upon us
Before the bridge goes down ;
And if they once may win the bridge,
What hope to save the town ?
Then out spake brave Horatius,
The Captain of the Gate :
" To every man upon this earth
Death cometh soon or late .
And how can man die better
Than facing fearful odds,
For the ashes of his fathers ,
And the temples of his Gods ?
" Hew down the bridge, Sir Consul ,
With all the speedye may ;
I , with two more to help me,
Will hold the foe in play.
In yon straight path a thousand
May well be stopped by three.
Now who will stand on either hand ,
And keep the bridge with me ?
Then out spake Spurius Lartius;
A Ramnian proud was he :
Lo, I will stand at thy right hand ,
And keep the bridge with thee."
And out spake strong Herminius ;
Of Titian blood was he :
“ I will abide on thy left side ,
And keep the bridge with thee."
>
" Horatius," quoth the Consul,
As thou sayest, so let it be.”
And straight against that great array
Forth went the dauntless Three.
For Romans in Rome's quarrel
Spared neither land nor gold,
Nor son nor wife , nor limb nor life,
In the brave days of old.
Then none was for a party,
Then all were for the State ;
Then the great man helped the poor,
And the poor man loved the great,
Then landswere fairly portioned,
Then spoils were fairly sold ;
The Romans were like brothers
In the brave days of old.
1395
BOOK OF POETRY
Now Roman is to Roman
More hateful than a foe,
And the Tribunes beard the high,
And the Fathers grind the low .
As we wax hot in faction,
In battle we wax cold :
Wherefore men fight not as they fought
In the brave days of old
Now while the Three were tightening
Their harness on their backs
The Consul was the foremost man
To take in hand an axe :
And Fathers mixed with Commons,
Seized hatchet, bar, and crow,
And smote upon the planks above,
And loosed the props below.
Meanwhile the Tuscan army,
Right glorious to behold ,
Came flashing back the noonday light,
Rank behind rank, like surges bright
Of a broad sea of gold .
Four hundred trumpets sounded
A peal of warlike glee,
As that great host, with measured tread ,
And spears advanced, and ensigns spread ,
Rolled slowly towards the bridge's head ,
Where stood the dauntless Three .
The Three stood calm and silent ,
And looked upon the foes,
And a great shout of laughter
From all the vanguard rose :
And forth three chiefs came spurring
Before that deep array:
To earth they sprang, their swords they
drew,
And lifted high their shields and flew
To win the narrow way ;
Aunus from green Tifernum
Lord of the Hill of Vines ;
And Seius, whose eight hundred slaves
Sicken in Ilva's mines ;
And Picus, long to Clusium
Vassal in peace and war,
Who led to fight his Umbrian powers
From that grey crag where, girt with
towers,
The fortress of Nequinum lowers
O’er the pale waves of Nar.
Stout Lartius hurled down Aunus
Into the stream beneath ;
Herminius struck at Seius ,
And clove him to the teeth ;
At Picus brave Horatius
Darte one fiery thrust ;
And the proud Umbrian's gilded arms
Clashed in the bloody dust.
Then Ocnus of Falerii
Rushed on the Roman Three ;
And Lausulus of Urgo
The rover of the sea ;
And Aruns of Volsinium ,
Who slew the great wild boar,
The great wild boar that had his den
Amidst the reeds of Cosa's fen,
And wasted fields and slaughtered men,
Along Albinia's shore.
LOTTO
 -HOW HORATIUS KEPT THE BRIDGE-
Herminius smote down Aruns ;
Lartius laid Ocnus low ;
Right to the heart of Lausulus
Horatius sent a blow.
" Lie there,” he cried , “ fell pirate !
( 0
No more, aghast and pale ,
From Ostia's walls the crowd shall
mark
The track of thy destroying bark .
No more Campania's hinds shall fly
To woods and caverns when they spy
Thy thrice accursed sail.”
And now no sound of laughter
Was heard among the foes.
A wild and wrathful clamour
From all the vanguard rose.
Six spears' lengths from the entrance
Halted that deep array,
And for the space no man came forth
To win the narrow way.
But hark ! the cry is Astur :
And lo ! the ranks divide :
And the great Lord of Luna
Comeswith his stately stride.
Upon his ample shoulders
Clangs loud the fourfold shield ,
And in his hand he shakes the brand
Which none but he can wield .
He smiled on those bold Romans
A smile serene and high ;
He eyed the flinching Tuscans,
And scorn was in his eye.
Quoth he, “ The she-wolf's litter
Stand savagely at bay ;
But will ye dare to follow ,
If Astur clears the way ? "
Then , whirling up his broadsword
With both hands to the height,
He rushed against Horatius,
And smote with all his might.
With shield and blade Horatius
Right deftly turned the blow.
The blow, though turned , came yet
too nigh ;
It missed his helm, but gashed his
thigh ;
The Tuscans raised a joyful cry
To see the red blood flow .
He reeled , and on Herminius
He leaned one breathing-space ;
Then , like a wild cat mad with
wounds,
Sprang right at Astur's face ;
Through teeth , and skull, and helmet
So fierce a thrust he sped ,
The good sword stood a hand
breadth out
Behind the Tuscan's head.
And the great Lord of Luna
Fell at that deadly stroke,
As falls on Mount Alvernus
A thunder-smitten oak.
Far o'er the crashing forest
The giant arms lie spread ;
And the pale augurs, muttering low ,
Gaze on the blasted head .
On Astur's throat Horatius
Right firmly pressed his heel,
And thrice and four times tugged
amain ,
Ere he wrenched out the steel.
1397
atmananatanamantamma
“ And see," he cried , “ the welcome,
Fair guests, that waits you here !
What noble Lucumo comes next
To taste our Roman cheer ? »
But at his haughty challenge
A sullen murmur ran,
Mingled of wrath , and shame, and dread ,
Along that glittering van.
There lacked not men of prowess ,
Nor men of lordly race ;
For all Etruria's noblest
Were round the fatal place.
But all Etruria's noblest
Felt their hearts sink to see
On the earth the bloody corpses,
In the path the dauntless Three :
And , from the ghastly entrance
Where those bold Romans stood ,
All shrank, like boys who unaware,
Ranging the woods to start a hare,
Come to the mouth of the dark lair
Where, growling low, a fierce old bear
Lies amidst bones and blood .
Was none who would be foremost
To lead such dire attack :
But those behind cried “ Forward 1 "
And those before cried “ Back ! ”
And backward now and forward
Wavers the deep array ;
And on the tossing sea of steel,
To and fro the standards reel ;
And the victorious trumpet-peal
Dies fitfully away .
Yet one man for one moment
Stood out before the crowd ;
Well known was he to all the Three,
And they gave him greeting loud,
Now welcome, welcome, Sextus !
Now welcometo thy home !
Why dost thou stay, and turn away ?
Here lies the road to Rome. ”
Thrice looked he at the city,
Thrice looked he at the dead ;
And thrice came on in fury,
And thrice turned back in dread :
And, white with fear and hatred ,
Scowled at the narrow way,
Where, wallowing in the pool of blood ,
The bravest Tuscans lay.
But meanwhile axe and lever
Have manfully been plied ;
And now the bridge hangs tottering
Above the boiling tide.
9)
“Come back, come back , Horatius I
Loud cried the Fathers all .
Back , Lartius ! back, Herminius !
Back, ere the ruin fall ! ”
Back darted Spurius Lartius ;
Herminius darted back :
And, as they passed , beneath their feet,
They felt the timbers crack.
But when they turned their faces,
And on the farther shore
Saw brave Horatius stand alone,
They would have crossed once more .
But with a crash like thunder
Fell every loosened beam ,
And, like a dam , the mighty wreck
Lay right athwart thestream .
 -THE CHILD'S
And a long shout of triumph
Rose from the walls of Rome.
As to the highest turret -tops
Was splashed the yellow foam .
And, like a horse unbroken
When first he feels the rein ,
'The furious river struggled hard ,
And tossed his tawny mane,
And burst the curb and bounded ,
Rejoicing to be free,
And whirling down, in fierce career,
Battlement, and plank, and pier,
Rushed headlong to the sea .
Alone stood brave Horatius,
But constant still in mind ;
Thrice thirty thousand foes before,
And the broad flood behind.
“ Down with him ! ” cried false Sextus,
With a smile on his pale face.
“ Now yield thee,” cried Lars Porsena,
“ Now yield thee to our grace . "
Round turned he, as not deigning
Those craven ranks to see ;
Nought spake he to Lars Porsena,
To Sextus nought spake he ;
But he saw on Palatinus
The white porch of his home ;
And he spake to the noble river
That rolls by the towers of Rome.
“ Oh , Tiber ! Father Tiber !
To whom the Romans pray,
A Roman's life, a Roman's arms,
Take thou in charge this day ! '
So he spake, and speaking sheathed
The good sword by his side,
And with the harness on his back
Plunged headlong in the tide.
No sound of joy or sorrow
Was heard from either bank ;
But friends and foes in dumb surprise,
With parted lips and straining eyes,
Stood gazing where he sank ;
And when above the surges
They saw his crest appear,
All Rome sent forth a rapturous cry ,
And even the ranks of Tuscany
Could scarce forbear to cheer.
But fiercely ran the current,
Swollen high by months of rain :
And fast his blood was flowing ;
And he was sore in pain .
And heavy with his armour,
And spent with changing blows :
1398
BOOK OF POETRY
And oft they thought him sinking,
But still again he rose .
Never, I ween, did swimmer ,
In such an evil case ,
Struggle through such a raging flood
Safe to the landing -place ;
But his limbs were borne up bravely
By the brave heart within ,
And our good Father Tiber
Bore bravely up his chin .
Curse on him !" quoth false Sextus ;
6
“ Will not the villain drown ?
But for this stay, ere close of day
We should have sacked the town ! ”
" Heaven help him !” quoth Lars
Porsena,
“And bring him safe to shore ;
For such a gallant feat of arms
Was never seen before. "
9)
And now he feels the bottom ,
Now on dry earth he stands ;
Now round him throng the Fathers
To press his gory hands ;
And now , with shouts and clapping,
And noise of weeping loud,
He enters through the River Gate,
Borne by the joyous crowd .
They gave him of the corn -land,
That was of public right,
As much as two strong oxen
Could plough from morn till night ;
And they made a molten image,
And set it up on high,
And there it stands unto this day
To witness if I lie.
It stands in the Comitium ,
Plain for all folk to see ;
Horatius in his harness,
Haltinġ upon one knee :
And underneath is written ,
In letters all of gold ,
How valiantly he kept the bridge
In the brave daysof old.
When the goodman mends his armour,
And trims his helmet's plume ;
When the goodwife's shuttle merrily
Goes flashing through the loom ;
With weeping and with laughter
Still is the story told ,
How well Horatius kept the bridge
In the brave days of old.
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
 LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
OOD little boys should never say
Goo >
ST. SWITHIN’sDay , if thou dostrain,
1 " I will," and " Give me these " ;
Oh, no ! that never is the way,
But " Mother, if you please .
And “ If you please,” to Sister Ann
Good boys to say are ready ;
And “ Yes, sir ," to a gentleman ,
And " Yes, ma'am ," to a lady.
For forty days it will remain ;
St. Swithin's Day, if thou be fair,
For forty days ' twill rain nae mair.
F Candlemas Day be bright and fair,
Winter will have another flight;
Ifon Candlemas Dayitbeshower and rain,
Winter is gone and will not come again .

THE OLD WOMAN TOSSED UP IN A BLANKET

There was an old wo-man toss'd up in a blank - et, Nine - ty-nine times as

22

high as the moon ; What she did there I could not help ask ing,

迁
For in each hand she car - ried a broom. “ Old wo-man, old wo-man, old
R2

wo -man , ” I cried, Whith -er, ah ! whith-er, ah ! whith -er so high ? ” “ To

ਹੈ ।
sweep the cob -webs from the sky, And you may fol-low me, if you can fly.”

COLLIDE LOOK

1399
The Little Cock; Sparrow

on a
A LITTLE cock sparrow sat
green tree,
And he chirruped, he chirruped , so merry
was he ;
A naughty boy came with his wee bow
and arrow ,
Determined to shoot this little cock
sparrow .
“ This little cock sparrow shall make me
a stew ,
And his giblets shall make me a little
pie, too ; ”
“ Oh, no ! " said the sparrow, " I won't
make a stew , ' '
So he flapped his wings and away he
flew .
学

THE NEXT VERSES AND RHYMES BEGIN ON PAGE 1485

TT DET INTXO
1460
 The Child's Book of
2 SCHOOL LESSONS

பாபாபாபாபாசாக

TO READING CHA
THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF PRONOUNS
We lesson
left off our last CONTINUED FROM 1296
lion. We will be very
polite , and call the
•

at the
point where the Pro lion a person , so that
nouns HE, SHE, IT were invited out if ever we meet him out in the
to tea , and, I am sorry to say, street we can tell him that we
behaved rather rudely. But these always treated him with great
are not the only Pronouns , so they respect, and then , perhaps, he will
need not get conceited . not hurt us.
Now, suppose mother takes you one Now, there is a different Pronoun
afternoon to the ZOO to see the for each of the three persons : I is
animals there ; and suppose you are the Pronoun used by the person
in the place speaking
where the when he is
LIONS are spea king
kept ; and about himself;
suppose it is YOU is the
just feeding Pronoun of
time, and you the person
are watching spoken to ;
one great lion and HE is
eating his the Pronoun
dinner ; and of the per
suppose you son spoken
turned to about . And
mother and these are

said, “ Oh, I called the

say, mother, First Person ,
don't YOU
think HE is
1 the Second
Person , and
a beauty ? " CRUS
PLANO
the Third
What would Person . So we
· you have been doing ? You would can draw up a little plan like this :
have been using a sentence with three PRONOUNS
different Pronouns in it . When you Ist Person 2nd Person 3rd Person
are talking about yourself, you say I ; I YOU HE
when you are talking to your mother, But we learned before, on page 647 ,
you say YOU ; and when you point that there were two kinds of people
to the lion and talk about him, you and animals — males and females ; so
say HE. And these are three different when we talk about a male person
persons: (1) yourself, (2) mother, (3) the or animal we say HE , but when we9

. 1401
 CERRURGIE
- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS - azute
talk about a female we say SHE. If And if you were talking about two
you were telling me a story about a lions, or three men, or four tables, you
girl, you would not say HE, but SHE ; would say THEY , wouldn't you ? So
and you would not begin a history our plan grows bigger still :
lesson about King John by saying, Ist Person
“ Now, as to King John, SHE was a Singular Plural
very bad man.” Everybody would I WE
laugh at you if you did, and no wonder . 2nd Person
Once more, if you were talking about a Singular Plural
thing instead of a person , you would YOU YOU
say IT ; you would say, “ I don't like 3rd Person
this pen; IT won't write.” You would Singular Plural
not say , SHE won't write.” So our HE , SHE , IT THEY
plan can now grow a little bigger :
Ist Person 2nd Person 3rd Person We sometimes use THOU for the
I YOU HE, SHE, IT Singular of the Second Person, but not
But suppose there were two of you, often , except in our prayers to God .
you and your brother, and you had Here are some of the Pronouns in a
been to the circus ; what would you funny rhyme :
say when father asked you, “ Well, ))
I like my porridge very hot ,
how did you both enjoy yourselves ? But YOU prefer yours cold ;
You would not say, “ I enjoyed it HE is a baby in a cot,
very much ,” for that would not mean But SHE is very old.
both of you ; so you would have to
(
IT eats its breakfast on its head,
say, “ WE enjoyed it very much .” > )
But THEY like theirs best in bed .

WRITING PSS

S L AND D
CAPITAL M, N, S,
“ WE
E are now going to see how to " Nearly right ! " exclaimed his
66
make N and M , your letter and mother. Now watch me write M,
mine, Nora ; but these are carital and see where yours is different.”
letters," said her mother at the next
writing lesson. “ There are two ways
of making them ; we will learn the
usual one first . There is N.
you think of your letter, Nora ? "
What do M M M M
Tom saw at once that all three of the
pot- hooks were of different heights,,
none alike ; and Nora said it re
minded her of a staircase, and that it
N N N N
would be easy to distinguish her own
letter from her mother's, because the
Nora noticed that the first pot-hook M was grown up and bigger than N.
was twice the height of little n, but the “ Another time you shall learn the
second pot-hook ending in the pot- other capital N and M ; but to-day
hanger was not so high as the first.. capital S is waiting its turn. Here it
Her mother said now Nora would be is," said the mother, as she wrote it .
able to write her name quite the right
way , beginning with a capital N.
66
Perhaps M makes its capital in the
same way.
Tom .
Does it, mother ? ” asked II IS
I S
Nora and Tom looked at it , and
" See if you can make one, ” was the noticed how very like a little s it was,
reply. really s with a big loop at the top.
( 6

Tom took his pencil, looked at N, That loop," said their mother,
made a little m, and then wrote a small “ reminds us of the loop of string
m very big, like n in three parts instead they tie on to parcels in the shops to
of two. He made the last two pot-hooks help us carry them . S begins the
the same height as one another. word swing. That will remind us.
1402
 -WRITING n.com

“ Tom swings them on his fore have parts like it. The down -stroke
finger, when he carries them for us,” ends like the lower loop of L, and the
said Nora . “ So you will remember pencil touches the line again or the
capital S, Tom .” other side of it ; it then gozs right
When the children had written S, up and round, passes the top of the
they were shown another capital letter. down -stroke, makes a half-circle round
to the left, and ends near the down
stroke . Look well at the letter before
L LL LL
L copying it.”
Tom and Nora found D wanted more
Mother, I thought you were going care to write nicely than any letter
to make S again ," said Nora ; " but you they had yet made , but they perse
did not begin the long up-stroke quite vered till their D's were good andeven ,
so far down as with S.” and then they were shown how to
“ But the L ends quite differently," write the remaining capital letter, Q.
replied her mother. Instead of the “ Here is 2 ," said their mother, as
down -stroke turning round to the left she wrote it like this :
and ending in a dot, it makes a loop,
and the pencil comes down to touch
the line again on the other side of the
down-stroke, and turns up at the end ;
so, you see, L has two loops. I has
22 2 2
2 22
“ It starts with a big curved down
one loop, but L has two loops.' stroke, reaching below the upper line,
The next letter to be written was D. turns up and round to the right, and
the down-stroke ends exactly like
L's. It is only the upper part that is
D D DD
DD“ D needs care in making,” the
new to us, and the letter is very much
like a giant 2, with a loop. ”
In our next lesson we shall learn some
-

children were warned. “ Other letters thing quite new-how to make figures.
ARITHMETIC

MULTIPLYING BIG FIGURES TOGETHER

N our last lesson we saw how to find the Twice 4 are 8, and, writing the 8 a
value of ten times a given number. place further to the left than the 4 is,
We have only to move each figure from we get the 8 under the 2 of the multiplier.
its own place into the next place on the Then, twice 3 are 6.
left . This leaves us with no figure for The result, then, is 6 hundreds,
the unit's place, so that we must put a 8 tens ; and to show that these figures
o into it. Thus, the number 34, when are hundreds and tens, we must put
multiplied by 10, gave us 340. o in the unit's place.
Now, it is clear that if we take 10 Now that we understand why we
times 34, and add to it another 10 times do this, we may just as well write the
34, we shall then have 20 times 34. In o in the unit's place first, and then
other words, to find 20 times a given multiply the number by 2, setting
number, we must not only moveeach down the figures of the result to left
figure from its own place to the next of the o.
place on the left, but we must also How much is 20 times 1728 ?
double each figure. As before, write the multi
Thus, to arrange our work 1728 plier, 20, so that its unit's
34 on paper, we place the multi 20 figure, o, comes under the
20 plier, 20, under the 34, so that right-hand figure of the 1728.
its unit's figure, o, comes under 34560 Then, first, put o in the
680 the right-hand figure of the 34. unit's place ; next, twice 8,
Then, since we have to double 16, put down 6, carry I ; twice 2 , 4, and
the 34, and write the figures of the result 1 , 5. put down 5 ; twice 7, 14, put down
one place further to the left, we say, 4, carry 1 ; twice 1, 2 , and 1, 3.
1403
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
It is evident that we multiply by underneath the 4 of our multiplier.
30, 40, 50, and so on, in the same way. Now, the o in the unit's place is only put
For example, to find 70 times 234, we there to show that the 4 we have just
have this : written stands for 4 tens, so that if we
234 had any other way of knowing they were
Put o in the unit's place . 4 tens, we need not write the o . But
70
Multiply 234 by 7. we do know the 4 stands for tens, because
16380 it is written under the ten's place of the
multiplier, and therefore we may just
This leads us to the multiplication by as well leave out the o. Again, when we
100. If we followed the same rule, we multiply by 3, wesay 3 times 6 (meaning
should first have o in the unit's place, 6 units) make 18—that is, a ten and
and then 10 times the number on the 8 units, so the 8, being written in the
left of this o .But to get 10 times the unit's place, comes under the 3 of the
number we simply have to write a o multiplier. Therefore, in both lines of
after it . Thus, our answer consists of our multiplication , we see that we write
the given number with the two o's the first figure of our resu i under the figure
after it. we multiply by. The sum , then, is
So, to multiply a number by 100, worked as follows :
write oo after it .
Another way of seeing the same thing 4 sixes, 24 ; put down 4
is this. Take the number 34 as an 126 under the 4 we multiply by,
example. We want each figure to be 43 carry 2 . 4 twos , 8, and 2,
100 times its present value . Therefore, 10 ; put down o, carry i .
4 units become 4 hundreds, and 3 tens 504 4 ones, 4, and I , 5. Next,
become 3 thousands ; so we must have 378 3 sixes, 18 ; put down 8
a 3 in the thousand's place , a 4 in the under the 3 we multiply by,
hundred's place, and fill in the tens and 5418 carry 1 . 3 twos, 6, and 1 , 7.
units with o's. 3 ones , 3 .
We now come to the method of multi
plying by any other number consisting Add together, 504(0) and 378, giving
of two figures. 5418.
Suppose we have to find the value of
43 times 126 To multiply by a number of more
It is quite evident that if we first write than two figures, we proceed in exactly
126 forty times, and add, and then write the same way — that is, we multiply the
it three times and add, we shall, by given number by each figure of the
adding these two results together, multipli :r, and at each multiplication
obtain forty -three times 126. That is write the first figure of the result under
what we actually do, the work being the figure we multiply by.
arranged in the following way : Multiply 3542 by 237.
126
Write the mul
3542
Multiply 3542 by 200, by
tiplier , 43 , with 237
30, and by 7, making 237
43 its unit's figure, 3, times the number. To
multiply by 200 we multiply
5040 = 40 times 126 under
hand the right:
figure of 7084
10626 by 2 and write the first
378 3 times 126 126. Then , mul figure of the result under
24794 the 2 . In multiplying by 30
5418 = 43 times 126 tiplying 126 by and 7 the process is he
40, in the way 839454
we have already learned, we get 5040. same as in the last example.
Next, multiplying 126 by 3, we get 378. The sum of the results is 839454.
On adding together 5040 and 378, we
get 5418 , which is 43 times 126.
Let us look carefully at one or two ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES ON PAGE 1292.
things in the working of the sum . In I. 1524 plants. 2. 2056 lines.
multiplying by 40, we first put a o in 3. 418 pennies.
the unit's place. Then we say 4 sixes 4. Sixty - four thousand eight hundred
are 24 , and we write down the 4 in the and eighty -one.
ten's place, and therefore this 4 comes 5. 1701 marbles.
1404
 2. MUSIC Coon
THE BEAUTIFUL LAND OF SOUND
Wehave had such happy times with in the beauty of the story which the
our little fairies, and have been so fairies have taught us.
pleased with the kind goblins, that I am Once upon a time there was a very
sure we are quite ready to go a little great man, who knew the wonderful
farther, and find out how wecan make language ofthe music fairies so well that
their beautiful secrets our own . his name will never die. He wrote deep,
We must learn to know all the dif- glorious music, which one dayyou and I
ferent ways of touching the notes, and will enjoy. His name was Beethoven,
many other things besides. We must and if we want to understand and to
know what to do when we want to hear learn from him, we must know what it
soft, singing voices. If we would hear is to listen to the songs in the trees, to
the wings of the wind—for fairies and hear the fairy music in the rippling
goblins love the great storm spirit—we stream , and to see the wee folk flying

ThomasMETBANK
THE BEAUTIFUL LAND OF SOUND BEHIND THE STONE WALL
must learn the secret of quite a different by inthe fleeting white clouds. The
way of approaching the notes . When great Beethoven loved country rambles ;
an artist paints a picture, he does not he was always happy when he was with
try to manage with one brush; he has dear Mother Nature, and she taught
need of many. There are the large, him songs. The fairies are keeping
bold effects which need big brushes ; these wonderful songs for us — songs
there are the dainty little details re- that will never die .
quiring the lightest treatment, such as Many of these beautiful themes came
no big brush could ever give. to him while he sat under a tree , and he
So it is with our magic kingdom, scribbled them down then and there, so
the piano ; if only we take the trouble that his wonder dreams should be shared
to find the right brushes the secrets by all the children of earth. He has
will come to us, and, when we play, given us stories of lightning and thun
those who listen will lose themselves der ; sometimes his music shows us the
1405
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
story of the sunset, or he takes us into We must learn how to make the piano
the quiet, and we feel he is telling us of sing. We must never touch a note
peaceful summer skies. Yes, he has without listening to it.
left us every sort of song that mortal Why are we talking like this before
ear can hear, and if we want to conjure doing one single exercise ? Well, this
up these stories for ourselves, if we want wonderful world of music is an en
the piano fairies to help us, we have chanted land, and its many gates can
much to learn. be opened even by us, although it is
There are many little cxercises which possible for them to remain fastlocked.
will do great things for us, if we learn It all depends on whether we know the
them carefully ; and if we begin to right keys .
wonder why such funny things are We shall have to think very much
necessary, we must remember how about our fingers, a great deal about our
many beautiful stories are waiting for hand, and our arm will need much
us, if only we have the patience to thought, too ; but all that is only the
learn how to discover all they have means to the end. We are like tra.
to say: vellers in a new country, and we come
Quite the best, and yet the most to a high stone wall. Some people think
difficult thing of all, is to play a simple only of the stones, but we have heard
melody. The piano must really sing. that there is a glorious treasure inside,
Through all the interesting workwe are and we areeager to find it as quickly as
going to do together, that one idea must possible. See, between the stones there
be our king ofthoughts — the piano must is a chink, which shows a glimpse of the
sing. Wemust listen very carefully to light within. So, while we work away
each tone to be quite sure that we are at the stones—that is, while we do our
treating all the fairies equally well. We exercises with all our will and best
have a king of thoughts, and now endeavour-let us never forget that the
we have found the queen, and as we object of our working is to get through
want to remember both of them , we the chink into the treasure-house where
must say them over again to ourselves. so much beauty is waiting for us.
DRAWING AB 1

MEASURING THINGS FROM A DISTANCE 1

He box we drew some

THE time ago was children, and people standing on heights
placed in front of us—just opposite, see more than those on the level ground.
and below the eye. Let us see if we So we see that our drawings must be
can draw it in another position - a little of objects as we see them ourselves.
to the left , and still below the eye . The sketches of the boxes on this page
When we drew the flat sheet of paper, will help us to draw some from our own
and learned how to draw the book, view , but nobody else's drawing will
we found that the side- lines slanted show quite the same view as ours ; so
away from us towards the point im- we must make our own drawing, and
mediately opposite us, and as far not copy other people's.. 1
away as we could see when we looked Shall we put our box a little on the
straight in front of us. right-hand side, so that we see the top
We can understand a little better and one side ? We will draw it in black
about these lines if we look at a straight and white chalk on brown paper, be
road leading away from us, or at ginning with the side nearest to us.
straight railway lines. The road seems If the box is square, the side will not
to get narrower in the distance, and look quite square, for shapes alter if 1
the railway lines to run closer together. they are moved sideways from the 1

Standing at one end of a room, and eye, as they do, too, when moved
looking at the opposite end, we see nearer or further in an opposite direc
the floor lines slanting up, and the tion. But we must be careful not to
ceiling lines down towards our own exaggerate this alteration of shape ;
eye-level. Tall men and women see and to prevent our doing this, there is 9
more than short ones, or than little way of measuring lines at a distance
1406
 -DRAWIN Gammamu
which is very useful . It is always in proportion to its height , or how
rather difficult to learn new ways ; but big one thing is in proportion to
after a little practice we shall find that another. We shall be able by-and-by
this one is quite worth the trouble. to get the proper proportion of big
int

How to hold the pencil for the top line How to hold the pencil for the side line
We shall want a long pencil-or a things at a distance, like ships or
ruler even. We must sit quite straight, buildings. People who cannot use this
and hold the pencil at arm's length , sort of measurement sometimes draw
and keep one eye tightly shut. The pen- cows as big as churches, and men and
cil must be held in a women as big as the
horizontal position, houses in the same
one end hiding one top picture.
corner of the box from One thing we have
our view . With the to remember, though,
forefinger of the other is that we do not
hand we mark where measure the actual size
the other corner is, on of anything in this
the pencil. Let us rest way -- only the pro
a little now , taking portion of one part to
care not to lose the another. We choose
measurement we have for ourselves how big
made on the pencil to draw the things
we can hold it at that according to the size
place with the right we want our picture
hand till we are ready to be .
to shut one eye again . Now we will try to
Now , still keeping The right-hand view of a box
draw the box, using
the fingers of the right all the things we have
hand on the first learned to help us.
measurement , and Lines furthest from
holding the pencil up the eye slant most, so
right at arm's length the lowest lines slant
againstone ofthe edges up the most . Those
of the front side of the further to the right or
box, we can find out if left slant more than
the top or the side edge those nearer . The top
seems longer, by seeing of the box would look
if the part wemeasured narrower than the
in the horizontal posi bottom if we could see
tion of the pencil is both , because it is
bigger or smaller than higher, and therefore
the part we measured nearer the eye-level.
when we held it up In putting in shading
Here is a left - hand view of another box must not show
right. This way of we
measuring seems rather tiresome at the chalk outline, because we do not see
first, but all artists find they must use it it in the real box. The outlines of objects
to get the proportion of things — that is, have no black lines round them . They are
how wide or how narrow anything is shown by difference of light and shade.
1407
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
First line : French . Second line : English words. Third line : As we say it in English .

Il est dix heures et demie. Quelqu'un frappe à la porte. La bonne l'ouvre.

It is ten hours and half. Someone knocks at the door. The maid it opens.
It is half-past ten o'clock. Someone knocks at the door. The maid opens it.
C'est le facteur . Il a apporté un télégramme à Papa. Papa le lit vite .
This is the postman. He has brought a telegram to Papa . Papa it reads quickly.
It is the postman. He has brought Papa a telegram . Papa reads it quickly.
Papa dit qu'il doit aller à Londres pour affaire pendant quelque temps.
Papa says that he must to go to London for business during some time.
Papa says that he must go to London on business for a little while.

Maman et la bonne cherchent une valise Elles le remplissent d'habits .

Mamma and the nurse look for a portmanteau. They it fill with clothes.
Mamma and Nurse look for a portmanteau . They fill it with clothes .
Elles ferment le portemanteau et elles tournent la clef. Papa entre .
They shut the portmanteau and they turn the key. Papa enters.
They shut the portmanteau and turn the key. Papa comes in.
Il veut mettre un livre dans le portemanteau pour le lire en route.
He wishes to put a book into the portmanteau for it to read in route .
He wants to put a book in his portmanteau to read on the way.
“ Où est la clef ? ” demande Papa. Nous ne pouvons pas la trouver.
" Where is the key ? " demands Papa. We (not ) are able not it to find.
“ Where is the key ? ” asks Papa.. We cannot find it.

I1 faut qu'il arrive à temps pour le train , et il se fait tard ,

It is necessary that he arrives at time for the train, and it itself makes late .
He must be in time for the train , and it is getting late .
la table, sur le plancher,
Nous cherchons sur the et sous le sofa. Elle est perdue.
We search on table, on the floor, and under the sofa. It is lost.
We search on the table, on the floor, and under the sofa . It is lost.
)
' La méchante ! 1"
( 6
Puis la bonne crie : La clef est dans la bouche de Bébé !
Then the nurse cries : “ The naughty one ! ” The key is in the mouth of Baby !
Then Nurse cries : " Naughty child ! ” The key is in Baby's mouth !
THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS BEGIN ON PAGE 1497
1408
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
A WALK BY
NE of the reasons
ONE for the existence
CONTINUED FROM 1343
of such things as rail
way lines, steam engines, express
trains, guards, porters, and navvies,
is the very simple but important
fact that children who live in
cities must be carried, with their buckets
and spades, at least once a year to
dig castles in the sands of the seashore.
Thousands and thousands of pounds
are spent in this manner. And if
there were no buckets and spades, and
no sand at the seaside , hundreds of
guards and porters would be thrown
out of work, and far fewer trains would
go screeching and thundering across
the green fields. So , you see , children
are good for trade as well as good
for nothing, as your nurse sometimes
tells you.
But then there are other things to
do at the seaside in addition to castle
digging. Castle digging is, of course,
the chief reason for the existence of
the sand, and it is splendid - par-
ticularly when half a dozen diggers are
at work , and the castle has terraces
and turrets, with a deep moat running
all round it and a bridge across it,
and no end of sea - grass and tangled
seaweed hanging over the parapets,
like moss and lichen . But there are
other things as well. There is padd-
ling, for instance, a daring sport ,
something like fox-hunting, but one
which the dear doctors say gives
children so many illnesses. And there
is also the joy of listening to niggers,
and going for rides on shaggy donkeys,
whose saddles are worn into holes ,
showing the padding, and who smell
H 1409
THE SEASHORE
like hot blankets and
a bootmaker's apron .
And there are cocoa
nut shies, and conjuring, and
throwing stones at a tin bucket on
papa's walking -stick, and cricket ;
and there is even kicking off our
sand shoes and running barefoot races
on the smooth -ribbed sand .
And there is - going for a walk
with our eyes open .
Suppose you were taken one year
not to Eastbourne, or Broadstairs, or
Yarmouth , or Scarborough, or Ilfra
combe , or Margate, but to a little old
rickety fishing village, with no espla
nade, no pier, no band, no niggers, no
donkeys, no nothing - would it be very
dull ? Suppose, too, that instead of
broad, smooth , yellow Sands, the
waves came breaking with a rattle
and a roar on miles of shingle -miles
and miles of stones !—would it be verv
dull ? Well, it all depends on whether
you keep your eyes open or shut, and
whether you want to cram your brain
with observation, or keep it only for
the multiplication table and geo
graphy.
For a walk along the sands or
along the shingle can be full of interest
son
every yard of the way. To begin with ,
it is by the side of the sea that we can
best feel the tremendous wonder of
creation . The sea is older than any
thing else on the earth ; it has always
been there, and—just think of it
from the very beginning it has always
been moving. Motion is a marvellous
miracle . The motion of the sea, which
you look at with your eyes, and the
noise of it , which fills your ears, existed
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGSmuman
thousands and thousands of years
before there was any animal walk-
ing about the earth, and wondering
where in the name of fortune it came
from. Stop and think about the deep
boom of the ocean and the roar of the
waves on shore and rock , going on for
thousands of years before there was
even a mouse or a grasshopper on the
green earth . How grand, but how
lonely it must have been !
Then think about the sands.
up a handful near the cliffs, and it
runs through your fingers like powder ;
go near to the waves, where it is wet,
and you will see in it tiny
grains of various colours.
The sands have been
smashed and powdered by
the sea. Once they were
shells and stones ; the sea
has ground them into dust.
Every year the stones on a
beach grow smaller and
smaller. If you make a
hole in shingle, and thrust
your arm down as far as
it will go, you will some
times find rough sand.
Then, whether you walk
on smooth yellow sand, or
trudge heavily over shingle ,
you will find no end of
things which are most
interesting to pick up and
examine . There is the
starfish , that little five
fingered, red-brown fellow ,
who lies dead or dying in A very
hundreds all round the seashoreis the egg-shellofaskate, most teasing riddle in the
coast ; turn him over on looking like a tiny handbarrow. world, very hard to solve .
Generally the young skate is
his back, and if he is alive hatched
before the shell is found.
you will find that he can
turn himself over as cleverly as
gymnast, for he has any number of
tentacles on his under -side, which he
uses when he goes for a walk over the
rocks in search of a seaside breakfast .
He feeds, let me tell you , on dead fish ,
and things that no respectable live fish
would look at for a moment , so he is
useful to keep the sea clean .
Then there is the jellyfish, which floats
in the waves and has to go wherever
they choose to send him , for he has
got no legs, no fins, no tentacles to
speak of, andis really hardly a live
thing at all. But it is just because he
is such a helpless dead -alive old fellow
that he is interesting. He reminds us
of the very beginning of life. He is life
at its lowest. He just goes about like
a man in a dream , only bothering to
keep all his pores open to drink water ;
and if you catch him , and lay him on
the sands, the sun will soon drink him
clean up, and leave nothing to tell he
has ever been at all, except a streak of
silvery -whitish slime. And yet he is
ever so much more alive than the
Take finest pair of patent-leather boots in a
London shop -window or the grandest
statue in the British Museum , He
rides out a storm like a man - o '-war.
It is only when wecompare
him with a milkman , or a
boy spinning a peg -top and
picking it up in his hand,
that we see how very, very
little alive he really is.
Shells are wonderfully
interesting things. Have
you noticed that the shell
of a whelk has its opening
always on the right side ?
I know a man who is ex
tremely happy because he
once dug up in a crag-pit
the shell of a whelk , much
older than the human race ,
which has its opening on
the left side . How did that
happen ? Or why should a
shell almost always have
its opening on the right
side ? Why is it ? Have
you ever thought about
on
that ? Nature is the
Sometimes you will find
one of these whelk -shells
a inhabited by a funny little crab-like
creature, who can be dragged out a
great way, but will never leave go
with his tail. He'll give you his head
cheerfully, but never, never will he
give up his tail to you or the Czar of
Russia. He's most particular about
his tail , and always leaves it behind
him when he is pulled out of doors .
This is the hermit crab, and he is the
cuckoo of the seashore ; for the lazy
fellow never thinks of making his own
shell ; he says : “ Why should ,I, when
there are so many far better shells than
ever I could make close at hand ? "
And he just pops into the cast - off -
TOIMITUKSET
1410
 CEIRO cure
-A WALK BY THE SEASHORE
shell of some other creature , or looking anemone. “ Fee-fi- fo- fum , I
even eats that creature out of house smell the blood of a shrimpyman !
and home, and adds insult to injury by and lo and behold , just as the baby
occupying the house and home himself shrimp darts across the top of the
after the dinner. anemone, and touches the trembling
If I were to begin to tell you about tentacles, “ Snap ! ” cries that deceitful
crabs there would be no end to it ; so creature , and holds the baby shrimp as
I must only say , that if you want to tight as a nut in the crackers . It is all
make an alderman jealous, carry home over with the shrimp. His mother will
two or three green crabs in a bucket never see him again . He will never wag
of water, and then show the alderman his tail and wink his eye at baby lob
how these brave sters . He will never
fellows fight and grow up to be
tussle over every caught by a respect
piece of meat you able fisherman in a
drop into the water. kind net, and eaten
Crabs have magni by a dear little boy
ficent appetites. with bread and
Nothing, you see, butter and water
can ever really be cress at five o'clock
to them “ a good tea . No ; he has
blow out." I believe grown into one body
a crab would knock with a beautiful
his own mother over, and innocent
or dance on his baby looking anemone.
sister, to get at a There are hun
piece of lean beef or dreds of things to
a slice of Canterbury be looked at in
lamb—and this , if pools. If you lie
you please , after he on the rocks , and
has just had a dinner keep quite still,
big enough for aa looking down into
troop of horse . the clear water,
Crabs ought to be you will see many
called sea -hogs. little fish , such as
The sea anemone the blenny, and the
is not so fierce -look fur- bearded rock
ing as the crab , but ling, and bright
she - they are coloured wrasses,
beautiful enough ! besides no end of
to be called shes queer crabs, shrimps,
is hardly as nice in The seaweed was perhaps the first thing that grew in and anemones. It
her behaviour as the sea .
This is the seaweed known as bladder- is splendid work to
we could wish. Look wrack,seewhich floats ashore easily because the knobs observe
on it
all this
we are really little vessels of air . mysterious life
at them in a rocky
pool, lying so gracefully and innocently going on in one tiny pool, and to dream
on the silver sand, with beautiful soft of what these creatures think , and to
green sea-grass on each side of them . wonder what becomes of them—for they
No wonder we call them anemones ; really are alive—when they die .
they are the flowers of the sea. But And it is also most interesting to
look. A poor little baby shrimp — who make a collection of creatures and sea
has forgotten what his mother told weed, and carry them home in a bucket
him about keeping safe at home - darts or satchel, and examine them care
out for a scamper across the pool. If fully under a big magnifying glass.
we had very powerful eyes, we should You will be amazed to find how much
probably see the anemone trembling all extraordinary thought and power has
over with delight like jelly would on the gone to the creation of the very
dining-room table when someone kicks tiniest thing that you can find on
the leg . “ Ha, ha ! ” says the innocent- the seashore.
mun EXTUZIDIUUTINU LET
MY
1411
WIGILI Danmmoremmanomenem mmm mm

WHAT ARE THE WILD WAVES ' SAYING ?

The sea is always moving . It has never been still since the world was made, and it cannot be still so long as
the earth keeps its place in the heavens . As we stand on the shore and watch the waves, we know that the
sight which we see has been seen by men since they first came into the world. Old -time continents have
vanished in the waves, and new continents have been built up on what was once the floor of the sea.

Time and tide wait for no man. When the tide comes in , we must leave the shore to the sea. When the tide
goes out, we have the sands, newly washed and clean, to ourselves again . The sea , with the flow and ebb of
its tide, washes the shores ofthe whole earth ; and the air that comes in to us over its waves makes us strong
and healthy. The sea is rough in these pictures, but underneath the waters are calm and still. The waves
at sea do not " travel , " but move only forward and back again , and they are only on the surface, not below.
ITTYY TTTTTTT UITYTYY URZYYTITTTTTTTT marron
1412
wony
Ardan
DILBIURZEG ZELENINGKATAN KELAATTEEON ENGINEERING

WHAT THE TIDE LEAVES BEHIND

It is pleasant to sit down after a romp, and rest and think of the wonders of the pools and rocks, and to see such
a vast stretch of seaweed as this gaining new life by coming into the sunshine for a few hours. Without the change
from air to water and from water to air some of the seaweeds could not live. Some kinds live fifty fathoms deep.

Wehave all seen the long, thin ridges of sand on the beach , the marks made by the water. They are made by
the movement of the waves, which are all controlled by Nature's laws . These ripples of sand are very interesting to
look at. and scientists who have studied them have come to believe that, perhaps , the Goodwin Sands, on which so
..

many ships have been wrecked , are only huge ripples," which may, perhaps, be removed by the skill of engineers .
சாணகபணாவைபாணாானமயயா Iran யபாமாவாப MIயாவைபார்
1113
 START

LIVING THINGS CAST UP BY - THE SEA

**
Such creatures as these arecast up every day by the sea, and we do not think, perhaps,as we look at them ,
that these little things have life. Of course they have. The starfishes left by the tide will be all right whenthe
next tide comes in. The little bundles on the right are eggs, which will soonturn into numerous young whelks.

This poor jellyfish ought to have said good-bye to the sea before being cast up by the tide. Unless it can be
continually taking in sea-water, the jellyfish must die. Exposed to the air, the water that it contains dries
up, and the whole jellyfish disappears, leaving only a silvery mark on the ground where it was stranded.
SEXXXXX DEUXIEDURREZKO TERRAZZERZEZ
1414
 THE SAND BUILDERS OF THE BEACH

ald
Can this be a strong castle which aa scowling baron has built to keep children from the shore ? No ; it is a
beautiful work made of sand, over which the smallest child could hop, and will soon be washed away.

Bold barons may build castles ; but so,at the seaside,may little maids. Here are plenty of them all together,
each one full of fairies and mermaids and the other wonderful creatures which live in a little girl's fancy.
TTTTTTTTTTTT

Here we have what looks like a fine strong bridge, with buttresses and parapets, built to carry trains across
a river. But, if we look at the spade behind, we see that the bridge is of sand, and quite a tiny structure.
LE
w

1415
 22

THE HERMIT CRAB IN HIS SHELL

The whelk is one of the terrors of the smaller shellfish , upon which he lives. He has 300 teeth, as sharp and
hard as files. With these he cuts through the shell andeats the fish inside. But the whelk has a master in
DODATKI

the hermit crab, which steals his home and lives in it. In this picture we see together a whelk and a crab.
UITZI
OUXXE
DOULDT
XIUDOU
pomoTUITETIN

The hermit crab has his claws in shells, but he has only a soft skin covering for his tail, whichany lobster or
ITEM

big crab would bite off. So he creeps into the shell of the whelk, and wherever he goes he drags the shell
aboutwith him . He is a fierce little crab, and fights in safety while his tail is protected by the shell of the whelk.

The crab and the sea-urchin are two of the wonders of sea life. The crab sheds his shell every year. It
manages, in aa marvellous manner , to withdraw its great claws through the tiny holes of its shell. The sea
urchin is a wonder of a different sort. As its egg-like body grows, so its hard , prickly shell grows too, just as if
it were a soft plant. It is called a sea-urchin because it is like a hedgehog, by some country folk called an“ urchin."
.6

TTTTTTTTTTT OTTSTORTURI DI
1416
 TUETTIILIAnnorum reminder

COMMON OBJECTS OF THE SEASHORE

mem

The first picture shows a sea-urchin,or sea-hedgehog,with hundreds of little jointed spines for legs. When it
dies they get broken off, and you see the plates of the shell armour beneath. The third picture shows the little
spots where the spines joined on . Hold the shell towards the light and you will see tiny holes, a big mouth, and
what strong jawbones! The sea -cucumber,unlike thesea-urchin, is soft. It tries to make a shell under its coat.
HUOLELENILS
MADRAL

The large snail-like shellsare whelks ', and the shellfish that live in them are good to eat. The shells like
Chinese hats, which little girls use for dolls' hats, are limpet-shells. A limpet can only defend itself by sticking
so fast to a rock that you cannot tug it off. Just try ; the harder you pull, the faster it will stick to the rock .
The wee fluted shells are cowries, which some native races in West Africa and South Asia use for money.

The first picture shows a jellyfish ,with its arms and stings out, floating lazily along in thewater. It wraps
them round its food , and pushes it into its mouth underneath. The middle picture shows the tube-worms,
which make tubes of shell or sand live in the big shells or rocks. They breathe through the tufts .
The last picture is a sea -anemone which chose to live on a whelk - shell, and is ready for the next shrimp.
The photographs on these pages are by Prof. B. H. Bentley, Messrs. Valentine, and others.
CONTENT IS DIENOXWITTY
1417 xror TTITUOTTE MOTNOmron
 CHILDHOOD'S ANCIENT FIELD OF PLAY
YOU

Nowhere else can young people have such fun as at the seaside, with sand, and water, and seaweed , spades
and pails, and treasures all their own. Still we are able to say of the little child , as a poet said long ago :
Shoreward she hies, her wooden spade in hand, Where little edgeless tools make easy way
Straight down to childhood's ancient field of play, A right no cruel Act shall e'er gainsay,
To claim her right of common in the land No greed dispute the freedom of the sand.
A cruel decision in the law courts , at this very moment of writing, does wish to " dispute the freedom of the
sand ," but the people of England would never tolerate so cruel a crime against the children of the whole nation.
THE NEXT PICTURES OF FAMILIAR THINGS BEGIN ON PAGE 1535
ROMOLECULUXOCORROZKOUD. EKK
OUR GROOT
1418
 The Child's Story of hi
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

We know something aboutthe elements and the atomsofwhichthey

, aremade;
says, but must be made of something simpler still. In these pages we learn that
atoms were not made out of nothing once for all, but are changing from age to
age, some slowly and others quite quickly . We can see big atoms breaking up
into smaller ones , and into tiny particles which are really electric, and are called
electrons. These electrons are so small that there are great numbers in a single atom .
They are the real units out of which atoms are made, and the discovery of them ,
within the last twelve years, is one of the greatest in the whole history of science.
They are a new kind of atoms, atoms of electricity, and though we call them electrons,
theyare really entitled to be called atoms, for they cannot be divided or cut, whereas
men have just discovered that the things we do call atoms can be cut and divided.

THE MAKING OF THE ELEMENTS

E have seen that whilst oxygen and
WEseveral , at least ,
CONTINUED FROM 1393
hydrogen , which form
of the elements have water , are good ex
a history which we can trace . amples of elements. We have 93
We can actually watch some of said that an element is made of
them being made before our eyes atoms all of the same kind, while
-elements with small atoms , a compound is made by the union
made by the breaking up of the of atoms of different elements ,
large atoms of other elements. We are two or more .
quite certain that , of the elements we That is all true, and no one disputes
know , helium , argon , neon, and radium it . But we have now learned the further
are now being made in the earth from truth that the elements themselves are
other elements—the first three from made of atoms which are not simple,
radium , and radium from uranium . but are themselves compounded of 10
Oo
Having learned this , we have also
simpler things . The word atom means 00

reason to suspect that many other the thing that cannot be cut. It
eleinents are so being made. The is a very ancient word , going back
astronomers who devote themselves hundreds of years before the birth
especially to the study of the light of Christ. Little more than a century
given out by the heavenly bodies ago, a great Englishman, John Dalton,
OV
assure us that they find evidence of gave the word a new importance by 0

the same kind of thing going on in
other worlds than ours . Apart from
all this positive evidence -- for some
of it is now really positive and as
certain as that coal will burn - we
have the work which was begun by
a great Russian chemist many years
ago, showing us that the elements we
know can all be arranged in groups
according to a law which can only
mean one thing -- that they are related
to each other in the closest way.
We have, therefore, to recognise
something which at first may confuse
us a little, and has, indeed , confused
a great many people. We have already
his study of the way in which com
pounds like water are made, and
showed that the atoms which the
Greeks dreamed and guessed about
must really exist. Everyone now
agrees that there can be no doubt
as to that. But since Dalton's time
almost everyone has thought that an
atom is what its name implies — a
thing which cannot be cut or divided.
This would mean , of course, that
the element - being made of atoms
was really an element ; while if an
atom could be divided , let us say,
into two different parts, then the
element would really be , after all , a >

talked about the difference between sort of compound. It is not so long

an element and a compound , water ago since some of the greatest chemists
Pop
being the best example of a compound, then living were quite certain that all

Sym
1419
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
atoms are simple things which cannot
be divided up, or analysed , as we say,
any farther. They were very definite
and much too positive in what they
said about atoms. They told us that
all matter everywhere, on the earth
and in heavens, is made of
the
these seventy -five or eighty different
kinds of atoms; that these atoms can
neither be made nor destroyed ; that
they are the everlasting stones of which
the world is made ; that they have
existed unbroken and unworn since
first they were minted by the hand of
God ; and that they go on exisiting
without change or wear for ever .
HE MAKER AND SUSTAINER OF ALL
THINGS IN THE WORLD
This was, after all, just the same idea
Trum
of the way in which God works as men
used to hold about the different kinds
of animals and plants. They thought of
God as a sort of great manufacturer or
watchmaker, instead of thinking of
Him as the Being to whom all the
changes and life and movement of the
world are due now , and have always
been due. He did not make the world
once upon a day, but He is ever and
11ow making and changing and sustain-
ing the world . It is He who works when
radium gives birth to helium or neon .
Not until you have grown up and
thought long about these wonderful
questions can you see how immeasurably
grander and more worthy of Him and
of us is this idea of God and the way He
works, than the idea that once He made
the world as a man makes a clock , and
that ever since He has been sitting in the
clouds looking at it . If He is not
everywhere He is nowhere ; but He is
.LU
everywhere. Some will say, perhaps, that
these are not questions which should
come into our story of the earth . But
the most splendid and valuable thing
about our knowledge of the earth to-
day is that, while helping us in our
ordinary life, it does lead us to a higher
and wider and nobler idea of God .
E REAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ONE
Now let us look more closely at the
atom . We are quite sure now that atoms
are themselves compound things,and the
question, of course , is : what are they
made of ? For instance , are the atoms
of oxygen made of parts which are
peculiar to atoms of oxygen, and quite
YURIUturum Ty NYITOTT BOYUT METU
1420
maar
different from the parts which make
up an atom of gold or an atom of
hydrogen ? If this were so, as it might
be , then , even though we had found out
the parts of which atoms are made, yet
we should still have to accept the idea
that all matter is made up of seventy
five or eighty different kinds, the brick
we call a hydrogen atom being made
up of smaller bricks or bricklets which
were hydrogen bricklets and quite
different from those making up any
other kind of atom . Well, that is not
what we find . On the contrary , we
find that the parts which make up one
kind of atom are exactly the same as
the parts which make up a different kind
of atom ; only the number of these parts
and the way in which they are arranged
vary in different kinds of atoms, and
that is what makes them different.
If we look first at the large atoms
which have been most studied, especially
the atoms of radium , we find that , as
they break up - owing to reasons which
we do not yet understand they produce ,
among other things, smaller atoms.
WE ARE FINDING OUT WHAT AN
Hºw
ATOM IS MADE OF
Now , that tells us a great deal about
the relation between one kind of atom
and another , but it does not tell us what
an atom is really made of. However,
there is something else produced when
the radium atom breaks up, and it is
this something else which has rightly
attracted more attention and interest ,
during the last twelve years or so, than
any other thing in the whole of Nature.
This thing, or rather these things—for
they exist in countless numbers-do not
belong only to the atom ofradium, though
they are more easily studied in radium ,
because it produces them quickly.
We are now learning that whenever
and wherever we look for these things
in the right way, we find them ; not
radium atoms only, but atoms in general
produce them . The great ti groupagof
metals, we learned some me o,
produce them in abundance . They are
much more easily detected in some cases
than in others, but as the years go on
there remains little doubt that these
things are being produced, slowly or
quickly, by all kinds of matter every.
where . Indeed , we may now go a step
farther, and say that matter is mainly,
iſ not entirely, made of them. Only
X DOUDER VOORBERTBODO
 DELOR
-THE MAKING OF THE
thirty years ago it would have seemed
absurd to ask what atoms are made of,
and still more absurd to try to answer
it . But now we can rightly ask this
question , and have gone far towards
answering it .
We have already seen that atoms are
not permanent things, after all ; but
that, like everything else in the world,
they change. It is in the course of this
change, as we watch it , that we learn
what atoms are made of. Whatever
the kind of atom we study, whether
radium , or some metal, or a gas, we
find that in the course of its change
it gives out from itself certain things
which are all just like each other, and
which are just the same , whatever kind
of atom they come from . These things
do not make up the whole atom, but
they constitute a most important and
essential part of it , and we cannot
know too much about them .
MUST NOT LET THE GREAT MUDDLE
WeOF WORDS MISLEAD US
But if we are to understand them ,
we must look at one or two words , for
many of the words we use nowadays
have rather muddled meanings. At a
future time we shall have to study heat,
and there we shall learn that this simple
)
word, “ heat," is used for two quite
different things, though only the very
wisest of those who study it have yet
noticed how their word is deceiving them .
Sitting opposite the fire, we feel it hot.
Now, we know that it is because the fire
is sending out certain waves, really
just the same as light waves, but in-
visible to the eye, though ſelt by the skin .
These are heat waves or rays, or radiant
heat . They have no matter in them
any more than light has, but, like light ,
are waves in the ether. But when we
take a hot piece of matter , like a stone
that has been lying ; it feelswesay
that there is heat in init thesun, warm
WHATHIS WETHAT RUNSTELEGRAM
WHEN IT
to our fingers ; and the heat in it is due
to the radiant heat that has struck it .
But the heat of this stone is utterly
different, though it feels the same to
us, from the heat rays of sunshine .
It is a state of to-and-fro movement
of the atoms which make up the stone-
a to-and-fro movement of matter.
Yet at present, because only few have
thought about this, and because the
effect on our skin much the same in
both cases, we apply one and the same
1421
ELEMENTS GELIKOG KRUS URALLER ART
word , heat , to two wholly different
things — a wave in the ether and a to
and- fro motion of the atoms of matter .
THINGS OF WHICH ATOMS ARE MADE
THEARE A KIND OF ELECTRICITY
Now, we have begun with this instance
because it is a very striking one which
anyone can understand , and because it
is exactly the same as the use of another
well- known word, electricity ; and we
are about to learn that the things which
come out of breaking-up atoms, and of
which atoms are made, are a kind of
electricity. But we shall get into a sad
muddle if we are not careful as to what
we mean by that word . It has long been
one of the most important words in
science, but within the last ten years
it has become a thousand times more
important than ever before . If we use
it wrongly, or do not know what we
really mean by it , we shall make count
less mistakes .
Long years ago it was found that if
we rub a piece of amber — the beautiful
yellow stuff of which the stems of pipes
are often made—it will attract light
things to it ; and the force which acts
in this way was called electricity, from
electron, the Greek name for amber.
That was merely a curiosity for a long
time, but then electric forceswere found
elsewhere, and now we are all more or
less familiar with the electric current .
“ Current " means running, and elec
tricity is something which runs or moves.
In the case of the amber attracting a
piece of light wood , it is something
that moves across the air between the
amber and the wood . When we light
our houses by means of the electric
current, it is something that runs or
moves along a wire . This something
also runs along much longer wires when
we send telegrams.
THROUGHSPACE
?
Lately we have learned that wires are
not necessary , but that whatever it is
which runs will run through space with
out any wires at all . Every day now
electric currents are being sent from
this country to America , and from
America to us . What is it , then , that
runs or moves ?
It is exactly like light - a wave in the
ether. It is not conveyed by the air
in wireless telegraphy, but by the ether
which is everywhere, though we cannot
TOTEUTUYOXDUODU
 - THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
see it . Its waves are bigger waves
than those of visible light , just as the
sound waves made by a low note
of the piano are bigger waves than
those made by a high note. But
electric waves are of exactly the same
kind as light waves : they move in
the same ether ; they move at exactly
the same rate ; they follow exactly
the same laws in all respects.
THEATWOLKINDS OF WAVES THAT WE
CALL ELECTRICITY
We think there is a great difference be-
tween the two kinds of waves because we
can see the one sort and not the other .
But that is merely due to the limitations
of our eyes ; indeed , it is due to just the
turun
same reason
that prevents us from
seeing the rays of radiant heat. Now ,
electric waves, heat waves, and light
waves are all known to be essentially
one and the same thing, just as the
lowest note and the highest note on the
piano, though they are so different, are
both sound . We understand that be-
cause we have one sense , the ear ,
which tells us of both notes .
Now , we saw that the word heat is
applied both to radiant heat or heat
waves, and also to a particular state of
the atoms of matter in which they are
swinging to and fro in anything - a state
which gives our skins much the same
impression as radiant heat does . We
Kuna
must now learn that the word electricity
is also used, at present, for two quite
different things. This makes grave con-
fusion, and leads to many mistakes. It
cannot be defended , and it is a great
pity that we should have to put up with
this confusion . It will not always be so ,
but at present people are very careless
about words, and we must just make
the best of this muddle. Let us remem-
ber that electricity, like heat, means
two quite different things. Now we
shall see the importance of all this.
ELECTRONS THE WONDERFUL THINGS
THAT COME OUT OF ATOMS
The name given to the things which
come out of atoms, and which make
up atoms , is electrons. They are
described as particles or atoms of
electricity , and this last phrase, which
will probably be more and more used ,
is the best example I know of the way
in which words are apt to be mudrlled .
Just think for a moment. The waves
of wireless telegraphy are waves of
1422
electricity, just like waves of light .
Now , a wave is not a thing exactly,
but a state of something else. A wave
of the sea is not one of the things that
make the sea , but is a state of the sea.
It is absurd to talk of an atom of a wave
of any kind , and no one can talk of
atoms of light . On the other hand,
for a hundred years we have been
using the word atom to mean the small
units that make up the elements of
matter ; and now we are asked to
use the same word in order to describe
different things inside these atoms !
So we see that words are being used
in two meanings. When we say that
electrons are atoms of electricity, we
mean that they are tiny particles of
something which is not in the least
like the electric waves that go across
the Atlantic , any more than the heat
of a stone is like the waves of radiant
heat. But there is the best of all
reasons in the world for calling these
things atoms, if only we had not, when
we knew less than we do now , used up
this word for something else . Atom
means a thing that cannot be cut, or
divided , or split up. The chemical atoms,
like an atom of oxygen or gold, were
thought to answer to this description .
SIMPLEST
THEWHICH FORM OF THE MATTER OF
THE WORLD IS MADE
We know now that they do not.
But this new kind of atoms, which are
usually called electrons, and which
go to make up what we have been call
ing atoms for so many years , are really
worthy of the name. They are entitled
to be called atoms, for they are really
atomic ; they are simple ; they cannot
be divided ; they have no different
parts in them ; they answer exactly to
what the word atom suggests.
Let us now look at some of their pro
perties, meanwhile trying to remember
that we are at last studying the matter
of which the earth and the heavenly
bodies are made, in its very simplest
form . Wherever matter is, there these
electrons are ; they are in this page before
us , in the air we breathe , in the sun
and the stars. They are the true units,
the real atoms of matter, and help us to
understand the meaning of Tennyson ,
when he said that there must be one
element " of which all the various things
we call elements are made .
The next story of the Earth begins on 1553.
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
THE STORY OF THE BIRDS
E come now, in our story of Animal Life, to the great family of birds.
WE Nature's richest gift to the animal world was the gift of flight to the
reptiles which became birds. The hideous monsters that first began to fly, with
great toothed beaks and scaly, tufted tails, have all perished. Some Aying
animals remain still, sailing on outstretched rafts of muscle ; and there are fish
in the ocean which, leaping from the waves, sail far and fast by the aid
of wing - like fins. But true flight belongs only to the birds and the bats.
The bats skulk through the air at nights as if ashamed of their strange
performance ; but the birds fill the air with life and song from early
morning till the sun goes down, as if to show that nowhere beneath the
clouds is there a place where Nature's children may not flourish and be happy.

BIRDS THAT CANNOT FLY

ALTHOUGH we our continued into strong
selves cannot fly, CONTINUED FROM 1382 tendons which pass
we are able, in a through a hole in each
general way, to understand shoulder -joint, and are fixed
what happens when a bird flies. to the upper side of the wings,
The wings of the bird displace so that these may be raised
the air with every beat they when the downward stroke has
make. They force the air down been made .
wards and backwards. But every time All these muscles work in turn to
the air resists before giving way ; it enable a bird to change the position
resists all the time that it is being of its wings so that it may catch
pressed by the wings, and that resis- the breeze, and sail or hover ; or, of
tance of the air enables the bird to rise . course , to turn in a new direction.
It is the resistance of the water to When the wings are forced down , all
our strokes that enables us to the feathers are spread out flat to
swim ; it is the resistance of the water prevent the air from passing between
to the screw -propeller that causes them ; but when the wings are being
the big ship to be driven through raised, the feathers open out to let
the waves ; and it is the resistance of the air pass through , so preventing
the air to the bird's wings when the bird from being tired by too great
pressed down that causes the bird to an effort to force up its wings against
rise in the air and to go forward . the pressure of the air. Thus we see
In order that the bird may exert this that the action of a bird's wings is
downward and forward pressure it has controlled by the most wonderful
enormous muscles. The muscles of the and perfect living machinery.
flying birds are far bigger, considering There are other aids to flying which
their size, than the finest muscle of a a bird possesses. It has an oil-gland
giant man . The strongest muscle of the from which it draws oil to lubricate
bird is that which pulls the wings down. its feathers. This is specially valu
That is the flesh on the breast of the able to sea birds, which must have
bird. It is attached to a breast-bone their feathers water-tight ; but it is
shaped like the keel of a ship. But of service to the birds of the air also,
when the wings have come down for the oil upon their feathers makes
they have to be drawn up again ready them less porous, and causes them
for the next stroke. This drawing up to offer a greater resistanceto the
of the wings is done by two smaller air when they are making the im
muscles hidden in the flesh of the portant downward - forwardstroke.
breast. The great muscle of the Another important thing is the sys
breast is also attached to the under tem of air-vessels, or air -sacs , with
side of the wings, to draw them down which a bird is provided . The bird
and to cause the bird to rise and go has huge lungs, but beyond these run
forward . The smaller muscles are the air- sacs, some birds having them

1423
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE«ZQIE QUEEN
continued right into their bones. It animal . Be that as it may, there is
was at one timesupposed that these sacs little doubt that the moa, the ostrich,
were filled with gas, to make the bird the cassowary, the apteryx , the rhea,
light, as gas makes aa balloon light. That the emu, and the penguin all started
is not the fact . These air-sacs do help fairly like theother birds, and had their
to make the bird lighter, but not chance with them . But early in their
through gas . The air in them is warmed history we find the old story repeated.
by the great heat of the bird's body, Most birds had to fly to pursue their
and as hot air is lighter than cold air, food, or to escape flesh -eating enemies.
so the presence of a quantity of warmed They had a hard life of it then, and,
air in the body of the bird must help making the best of it , they gradually
to sustain it in its flight. developed wings and learned to fly.
S THATDISAPPEARIN
B'RDSLOWLY CANNOT FLY , AND ARE The birds which do not fly descend from
G birds which found pleasanter quarters,
Seeing how great is the perfection where food was abundant on the ground ,
to which flying birds .have attained , so and where there were no savage beasts
that they can fly from country to to kill them. Although they had learned
country in the course of a single night, to fly, they had now no need to do so.
and race the fastest ships and trains, They neglected the use of their wings.
we may wonder that all birds do not Slowly, in the course of long ages, the
fly. Some, however, forgot how to fly wings lost their power to raise them
so long ago that there is now very little above the ground . The wings got
remommy

evidence of their ever having flown . smaller and smaller, until to-day, in
mom

The greatest of all birds, the moa ,
which lived chiefly in New Zealand, but
also to some extent in Australia , had
no wings at all. There are no moas
left alive now. They were hunted by
the natives until not one moa sur
vived. They were plentiful up to the
middle of the eighteenth century, and
some natives of New Zealand , who were
in England fifty years ago, told stories
of their grandfathers having hunted the
giant bird. There were some small
varieties of moas , but the giants of the
family were fourteen to sixteen feet
ULO
the case of the ostrich, they serve only
to balance the bird as it runs, in the
same way that hands serve to balance
us when we walk and run .
RUNS LIKE AN
PSERICH,
THEEXPRESS WHICH
TRAIN INSTEAD OF FLYING
When we think of this we must remem
ber that the wings of all birds, big or
little , flying or flightless, are only hands
which have been changed into wings.
They had arms, and wrists, and hands,
and fingers, just as we have. But these
changed and became covered with
feathers, to form the wonderful instru

high - taller than the tallest elephant, ments which carry the flying birds up
COLLZ
ILLOR
TELO

and as tall as a good - sized giraffe . into the clouds.

AU

They had enormously thick legs and The most famous of the birds which
toes, the bones being like those of an do not fly now alive is the ostrich , because
elephant. But they are all gone, and it is the biggest, and gives the best
the other birds which cannot fly are in feathers. It differs from the other big
danger of following them into extinction. birds because these have three toes
Madagascar's great bird, the æpyornis, indeed , one has four - while the ostrich
which laid an egg a yard in length and has only two toes . Its home is in
two feet six inches round , which could Africa and Arabia , but it used to live
hold more than two gallons, is , like in India, and the egg of one has been
the moa, as dead as the dodo. discovered , very, very old, in Southern
W THE FLIGHTLESS BIRDS LOST THE
HOWSE OF THEIR WINGS Russia. The height of the ostrich is
between six and eight feet , the neck
It is probable that all the great being long and flexible. When wild,
flightless birds of our day descended it shuns men, and prefers the company
from birds which could fly, though of giraffes and zebras and deer. As
there are in the wing of the ostrich it has lost the power of its wings, it
the slender claws of a limb which has developed the power of its legs.
suggest that the ostrich's wings were , These are very thick and strong.
once upon a time, not wings at all , When it begins to run, it races away
but the supports of a four- footed like an express train , at the rate of
YTTEUTTECTOR
1424
 COSTULER LES LLCA LES

SOME BIRDS THAT FORGOT HOW TO FLY

TETET
E
LTERECELARUS

UTOMO
um

A living specimen of any of these birds would be worth a fortune. The huge bird is the extinct moa . It was
taller than an elephant. The bird wiich looks like an emu is the extinct æpyornis. Its egg would hold two
gallons. The penguin -like bird is the great auk . There is not now one living in all the world . The d odos lived
and died in Mauritius, where sailors ate them. They were the biggest pigeons in the world , larger than a swan .
The solitaire looks like a tiny -winged goose, but was a pigeon . All these birds forgot how to fly , and perished .
Timmmm
MYTETIT
1425
 THE CHILD'S
sixty miles an hour. Of course , it
cannot keep this up, but even when its
first freshness has worn off it can outrun
a good horse, unless the man upon the
horse's back knows how to hunt it .
HE SILLY STORIES OF THE OSTRICH TOLD
TH IN THE SCHOOL BOOKS
: The ostrich does not run straight ,
but in curves, so the hunter, by taking would take a fever and die.
short cuts, can get up to it . Then the
ostrich , if it be a male , will fight . Its
feet are its weapons. You may judge
how strong are its feet and legs when
you know that the ostrich can carry
two men on its back . It strikes for-
ward with its feet , and can inflict a
terrible injury . This shows us how
unreal are the stories in the school books
of the ostrich running away and burying
its head in the sand as soon as it sees
an enemy , believing that because it
cannot see neither can it be seen . The
ostrich does no such thing ; nor does it
leave its eggs to be hatched by the sun .
Stupid the ostrich may be, but it
makes a very good parent. Three or
four hens lay their eggs together in a
rough nest, which is made simply by a
hollow in the sand . The ostrich's
egg is very big, but the male ostrich is a
big bird, and can cover sixteen of them.
If there be more than that , he simply
pushes them out of the nest , and fre-
quently more wasted eggs are found
lying about the nest than have been
hatched . The hatching lasts forty- two
days. The birds do not leave the eggs in
the sand . The male sits on them through
out the night, and the hen sits on them
during the day . Sometimes the hen may
cover the eggs over with sand, and leave
them in the sunshine for a few hours
during the day, but this rarely happens.
S
HEN THE YOUNG OSTRICHE COME OUT
WHE
OF THE EGGS AND BEGIN TO EAT STONES
The birds have sense enough to know
that if left unprotected the eggs would
be fried or boiled by the sun , so they
use sand as a shield when leaving them .
When the chicks are hatched, they eat
nothing but a few stones for the first
two or three days. When they are able
to run about, the father bird guards
them affectionately.
Many ostriches are tamed and kept
on ostrich farms, in South Africa and
in the South of France. The big
ostriches are wanted for their feathers.
At certain periods of the year the
TEUTUMUT GETTY
1426
BOOK OF NATURE
birds are collected together, and
taken one by one into big yards to
have some of their feathers removed.
Eighteen or twenty long white feathers
are cut from each wing ; then eight or
nine fancy feathers, and a few long
black ones, and some short feathers.
The bird suffers no pain . If it did , it
Nor are
more feathers removed than the ostrich
can spare , for in that case the bird
would be cold , and die. The business of
the ostrich farmer is to keep his birds in
good health , and it pays him to be kind .
Ostriches are to be seen in nearly all
the zoological gardens. There they
eat the most extraordinary things.
One ostrich , which died , was found to
have swallo wed many large stones,
seven nails, a scarf -pin, an envelope,
thirteen copper coins , a silver coin ,
fourteen beads, two small keys, a part
of a handkerchief, a silver medal , and
a small metal cross . This one did not
die from what it had eaten , but one
which swallowed part of a parasol did .
IE RHEA BIRD, WHICH STOLE PART OF A
THERAILWAY
IN SOUTH AMERICA
A bird which much resembles the
ostrich is the rhea . It has three toes ,
but is so like the other bird that it is
called the South American ostrich . It
lives only in South America . In
nothing else does it more resemble the
ostrich than in its appetite . It will eat
almost anything which can be picked
up . When a railway was being built
in the wilds of South America , there
was quite a famine of steel nuts and
bolts ; the rheas used to creep up to
the works and steal all that they could
find . Of course , in such a big place as
South America, the rheas are not all
alike. Some lay quite small eggs; others
lay large eggs . Some have horny crests
to the head, like the cassowary .
When the families of the rheas are
being made up, they have battles, like the
giraffes. The young males are driven
away, then the old ones fight among
themselves for the females which
they desire to possess. They twist
their long necks together, and bite as
hard as they can , kicking and stamping
all the while, as they prance round in a
circle . When an ostrich kicks an ostrich ,
or when a rhea kicks a rhea , not much
damage is done. Use and nature have
made them ready for such treatment.
XEY
 come Oro romanoMONG

THE OSTRICH , WHICH CAN RACE A HORSE

MIXTE
TEXTY
ATTENTRU
EN
NOK

Side

Ostriches gained their present shape when there were no enemies from which they could not escape by running.
They never learned to Ay. They can run faster than a horse ; but their wings are small, and serve only to balance
the body as they race over the ground. The ostrich has at the end of its wing -bones two slender claws, which
are believed to be remnants of front limbs which its ancestor had when it existed as a four -legged animal.
TITUDOM
MITT
1427
 CELOTECTIE - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURELINE TIC
The kicks of these birds do most
damage to different types of creatures .
When the battles are over, and all is
peace, in
holes, the
like female rheasby
those made layostriches.
their eggs In
a single nest all the eggs of the party are
laid, or as many as the male bird per-
mits. If the male bird be good -tem-
pered, scores of eggs will be deposited.
In one instance, over a hundred eggs
were found in the same nest . Of
course , not nearly all these can be
hatched in one nest , so generally the
male rhea drives away the hens before
they have finished laying. Then he
sits on the eggs till they are hatched .
When hatched , the young rheas are
often in peril from eagles and other big
birds of prey, which swoop down to
carry them off . But the male rhea is a
watchful as well as loving father. As
soon as he sees a bird of prey appear in
the sky, he crouches down and utters
a snorting cry. The young ones rush
to him for protection , and he shelters
them under his wings .
JOOX
HE CASSOWARY THAT CAME FROM THE
THE
FOREST AND FOUGHT TWO BLOODHOUNDS
A near relation of the rhea and ostrich
tramm
is the cassowary , a flightless bird five
feet high . Upon its head is a crest of
horn, and at the sides of the face are
coloured wattles,which make its appear-
ance, so far as the head is concerned,
more attractive than that of the
ostrich. It has, however, not the rich
plumage of the ostrich , but feathers
which are more like hair. Upon its
ELALALLICELLI
stumpy wings are five spiny quills, and
the cassowary strikes with these when
it fights. But its strong, three- toed
feet are its chief weapons .
G OLLA
Not long ago, a gentleman was resting
in the middle of the day near a forest
C
EC
in New Guinea, when a cassowary
stalked forth . Two big bloodhounds
which he had with him immediately
attacked the bird, but it was not in the
least afraid of the powerful brutes.
It struck out left and right with its
terrible feet , and soon stretched one of
the hounds dead upon the ground.
The other hound tore open the Hesh of
the cassowary's breast , but the bird
continued to fight , and would have
killed the dog, too, had not the man at
iast succeeded in putting an end to the
fight. Being a kind man, the traveller
stitched up thewound of the cassowary,
1428
gave it a good meal, and let it go. It
went quietly back to the forcst as if
none the worse for its battle .
H °WIRDISE,ATTEND
FATHER, AND MOTHER EMU
TO THEIR LITTLE
Australia has a cassowary called the
emu, which, though its body resembles
that of the other, has no helmet and
no coloured wattles. But it has a
feathered neck and head, which these
other big birds have not . It is about
six feet high when full grown. The
male emu has only one mate. She lays
about forty eggs in the course of the
summer, but the male bird does not
wait until all these have been laid . He
makes a nest and sits on it as soon as
ready . The
the first batch of eggs is ready.
hen continues to lay, and then she sits
on the rest . Meanwhile, the male emu
has hatched the first batch , and is able
to look after the little ones while the
mother bird hatches the rest. In spite
of their many eggs, the rheas and
cassowaries are getting very scarce .
A cruel man with a rifle can , in the
course of a day, shoot many parent
birds and their broods .
The nearest resemblance remaining
to us to -day of the great moa is the
apteryx, or kiwi , shown on page 1431 ,
It is a bird which has no tail , and
scarcely any wings, but has thick legs
and four-toed feet , with which it can
kick with great force. The stout claws
on three of the tocs make these
weapons still more powerful.
KIWI BIRD, THE DODO , AND THE
THEGREAT AUK
This bird never grows to more than
three feet in height, and it is not a quarter
the size of the moa. It differs in this
respect, too — it has a long, thick beak. Its
a
nostrils are not at the base of the beak ,
as is the case with other birds, but just
near the tip . This is to enable it to
smell its food. It lives upon worms and
grubs, and insects and berries ; and ,
though it comes out only in the dark,
its presence can be detected by the
sniffing noise it makes in seeking its
food . The apteryx lays an enormous egg.
The dodo and the great auk were
flightless birds, which became extinct in
comparatively modern times. There
were thousands of dodos in Mauritius
until the Dutch settled there . The dodo
wasa pigeon, as big as a turkey, but could
not escape when enemies attacked it ,
TIRTYYTY
 THE COUSINS OF THE OSTRICH

The cassowary lives in Australia and New Guinea. Its The emu is a kind of cassowary . Its neck is
glossy feathers are like hair, and its head is crowned feathered , not bare like the cassowary's. The
with a helmet. The male is smaller than the female. female emu is bigger and fiercer than the male.
LUCCO
LODIE
NA

South America's ostrich is called the rhea. It has three toes ; the African ostrich has only two. Tie rhea has
no tail, but has larger wings than the ostrich. Its feathers are used for making bruses. Those of the ostrich
are more valuable, and the ostrich is carefully reared by ostrich farmers for the sake of its feathers These big
birds have strange appetites, and eat all sorts of things from screws to broken bottles and seem none is : worse.
DOLOROTI DIETOTURII DOMNULUI
1429
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
owing to the smallness and weakness of who make then into various
its wings. It was good for food, so the of dress for women to wear.
settlers ate the big birds, while their
dogs and pigs destroyed the little ones
and their eggs. To -day, even the skin
and feathers of a dodo would be worth
a fortune . A complete specimen of the
great auk would be nearly as valuable.
The great auk was a birdwhich lost its
power to fly and developed wings that
could be used as paddles in the sea .
There were millions of great auks in
various parts of the world , but men
killed them all, and to -dayan auk's empty
eggshell is worth hundreds of pounds.
We shall probably see another of the
flightless birds disappear as these others
have done. The penguin, the curious sea which can swim but not fly, and the
New Zealand wood-hen, another of the
bird which marches upright, with little
paddles for wings , is slain in hundreds
of thousands. Happily, we can still
see these at the Zoo , and study their
ways, and from them form an idea of
what the great auk was like . There is
no doubt that once upon a time they
could fly as well as any other sea bird.
THE COMICAL
NOS TO PENGUIN , WHICH
SWIM WITH USES ITS
But ages and ages of neglect to use the
power to fly brought the usual result.
The form and purpose of the wing
became changed. Instead of long
feathers for flying, the penguin's wing
now has only short, scaly feathers . It
cannot be moved and doubled, as can
that of a flying bird .
The penguin can walk on land, slowly,
and with stately step , which gives it the
most comically grave appearance ; but
to swim is its easiest way. Once on
the water it stretche ; out its legs
behind it, and works its wings, one
after another, as a man in his canoe
works his paddle. The penguin would
never have forgotten how to fly had it
had enemies in the beginning as it has
now , men who can go in ships to the
lonely islands where it breeds.
Through long ages of safety it has
become a stupid bird, and fearlessly
lets a man approach. When he gets
up to it , it may give him a peck severe
enough to make him glad to put on
leggings ; but what is a peck on the
leg to a man who has a gun or a stick
with which he can knock down as
many birds as he wants ? He gets
oil from the body of the bird, and sells
the plumes about its neck to furriers,
1430
articles
In some parts of the world the
penguin is protected by law, but in
others cruel men kill it at such a rate
that soon the penguin colonies will be
desolated , as are the haunts of the moa ,
the dodo , and that other great wingless,
dodo-like bird, the solitaire.
HY THE FLIGHTLESS BIRDS CAN
YFLY NEVER
WH AGAIN
If birds could live through millions
of years of persecution, doubtless
ostriches and their cousins, and the
penguins, and the kakapo , or owl
parrot , of New Zealand , which can
climb but not fly, and the steamer- duck ,
flightless birds — doubtless all these
would develop into flying birds. But
there is no chance of that now. The
flightless birds have lost that keel - like
bone in the breast which all the flying
birds have . It takes too long for aa bird
or an animal now to make so great a
bodily change as this, and men's habi
tations spread so rapidly about the
earth that the place of these great wild
birds will soon know them no more.
Long, long ago , these birds chose the
easy life where no enemies were , and
now , poor
penalty withthings, they are paying the
their lives .
It is very sad, for there are other birds
which are slowly losing their flying
powers. The hoatzin, a strange South
American bird , which lives always in
trees overhanging water, has been so
long without occasion to fly that it
can now only flutter a little way.
THE WONDERFUL
HOATZINPOWER
BIRDS OF THE LITTLE
It is interesting because, when a chick,
the hoatzin still has claws on its wings,
like the first reptile birds had millions
of years ago. With these, the tiny
young ones can climb up the sides of the
nest so as to receive the food which
their parents bring.
When the wings grow long enough
for the little one to futter alone, the
claws disappear. Should the baby
hoatzin by any accident fall into the
water, it dives and swims from danger
in a marvellous way . So far as is
known, the adult hoatzin cannot swim .
It is rather a helpless bird when it grows
up-all through living too easy a life.
The next stories of Birds are on page 1513
 อรรค
Tru
CATED Carung auranama on COTO

ชาย
WYTYYTYRREL
ROUXY
TERRIER
BIRDS THAT RUN , SWIM , OR CLIMB

Thekiwi, or apteryx, cannot fly, but it kicks with The black wood-hen , or weka rail, of New Zealand,
surprising power. Its home is New Zealand. It comes cannot fly, but can run fast along the ground. It hates
out only at night, and digs up food with its long beak . the sight ofred, and will fight wildly if it sees this colour.

Ki
Thewing of the penguin has become simply a Aipper or paddle, and the bird cannot fly. When on lard penguins
walk upright and clumsily. They suffer dreadfully from the hunters, who want them to boil down for oil. They
leave the sea for the land to laytheir eggs, and are then slain in thousands.They are most at home in water,

The hoatzin flies with difficulty. The young ones have The kakapo, or owl-parrot, long led such an easy life
claws on their wings before the feathers come, and they in New Zealand that it ceased to fly. Now it must
can climb. They can swim and dive, too, but not climb trees like four -footed animals, and come out early
when they grow up. It is a living fossil among birds, at night for its food. Its colour is greenish and brown.
The photographs in these pages are by Lewis Medland and others
வைகாக oooo DOMODORO
1431
 THE WONDER OF DRIPPING WATER

This is the inside of a cave on Margaret River in Western Australia. Thousands and thousands of beautiful
white columns hang down from the roof, long and short, ending in perfect star shapes. They are called
stalactites. Seen against the dark cavern , they look like a shower of stone meteors ; but they are
really formed by water dripping from the roof, drying up and leaving mineral matter behind.

This is another view inside a cave in Western Australia, which looks almost like a draper's shop . When the
cave is lit up with electricity it is seen to be hung with pure white stalactites in the form of alabaster columns,
showing light through their edges any of them gli like gems, and others form into shapes like folded
Jace -edged shawls, rugs, tents, and other wonderful things. You might fancy some of them were icicles.
TUTTE
1432
 The Child's Book of
sys WONDER

WHY CAN'T WE SEE IN THE DARK ?
'HE dark " is the
“ THEa bsence of CONTINUED TROM 1372
light . Now , what is
the name for the absence
of sound ? What do we call
the state of things when we hear
no sound ? You know very well
that the answer is silence . Let
us remember after this always to du
thi: k of darkness and silence as if
they were a pair of things. Dark-
ness is the absence of light, and
silence is the absence of sound.
But there is more to say. There
may be a wave motion in the ether,
but it is hardly proper to call that
light until someone sees it . There
may be a wave movement in the
air, but it is hardly proper to call
that sound unless someone hears it .
Seeing and hearing, then, depend ,
first of all, on there being something
outside of us—a particular kind of
wave ; and, secondly , on our being
able to feel that something.
order to see , it must be there.
That is why we cannot see in
the dark - because there is no light,
and it is only light that we see.
But, also , the seeing eye is neces-
sary . A table in a dark room
is there, though we cannot see
it . There is no light, and so we
66
see nothing. When we do see
the table ."as we say, we really see, and other animals that have eyes
the light coming from it, and the like it, are able to see very much
for of the li :ht tells us the table
Ayone
is there. A blind man
cannot see , even in
the light . The great
English poet , Milton , in
his poem on Samson, makes
Samson say, when he had lost
his sight :
“ Oh,blazdark, dark,
e of noo n ! " dark amid the
That famous line will help us to
understand what darkness may de
pend on - either the absence of light,
orthe absence of the power to see light .
WHY CAN TIGERS AND CATS SEE IN
THE DARK ?
We must know that nobody at all
can see if it is perfectly dark — that
is to say, if there is no light at all
coming from anywhere ; but when
we usually speak of being in the
dark , we mean that there is so little
light that we see hardly anything.
That is because our eyes are so
made that they canrot alter them
selves to suit the conditions of
very dim light ; but same animals
can make the pupil of the eye so
wide as to get the benefit of whatever
rays of light are about. This is the
case with cats, and if you watch the
cat's eye when it is in the dark, you
will see that the pupil appears much
enlarged. This allows all the light
possible to enter the eye, and the cat.
better in dim light than you or I can .

1433

-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
WHAT IS QUICKSILVER ?
Quicksilver is a very good and ex-
pressive name for one of the elements.
Now, silver is an element, and quick
silver is not silver, but it has a silvery
appearance. When we say quick now
adays we think simply of something
moving, but the real meaning ofquick compared withany other liquid is that
is alive, and quicksilver really means
live silver. It is so called because it
seems to move almost of itself. One
form in indropson
oftheRoman names for it was “ living forms
silver,” which is exactly the same as our
popular name for it . The strict chemi
cal name for it means water- silver, but
the name by which it is generally
known is mercury, which was the name
the Greeks gave to the messenger of the
gods. We have said that quicksilver, drop of wateris brokenup,and the
or mercury, is an element , and we know
now what that means. It is not a kind
of silver, nor a mixture of water and
silver,
belongsnor anything
to the groupelse but itself. like
of themetals, It
gold and silver, lead , iron , and so on ,
but it is unlike all other metals in being
liquid at ordinary temperatures. Of
course, other metals, gold and iron and
what not, can be made liquid, but that
is only when they are intensely hot .
That is all we need say about mercury
now , except that it is very heavy, so
that even iron and lead, heavy though
they be, can float upon it .
WHY DOES QUICKSILVER RUN AWAY WHEN
we TOUCH IT?
These questions have been asked always of very much the same tem
and wondered about ever since mercury , perature of hotness, the air outside
or quicksilver, was discovered , more
than 2,000 years ago. There is no other
element, and no compound, which
behaves in the same curious way as
mercury - which almost seems alive .
The reason is that here we have some-
thing which is liquid, and has the pro-
perties of a liquid , yet is exceedingly
heavy, while the tiny particles of it
have a very great attraction for each
other. The reason we cannot pick up
quicksilver is that it is a liquid. We
should not expect to be able to pick it
up any more than to pick up water, only
it looks so different from any other
liquid we know that we can scarcely
believe it is a liquid , and so we expect
to be able to pick it up. Being a liquid ,
it runs, as water runs, and that is what
happens when it is touched . We can
only begin to understand the curious
DONDUTTORONY
1434
CAROUSA
way in which mercury behaves if we
first remember that it is a liquid, and
that it must do what other liquids do . 1
WHY DOES QUICKSILVER ROLL UP INTO
LITTLE BALLS ?
The special peculiarity of mercury as
very powerful attraction for each other .
We see this same attraction when water
drops, but while water will
some surfaces , it willnot
on others . If we put a drop of water
on a piece of blotting-paper, the attrac
tion of the surface of the paper for the
atoms of water is greater than their
attraction for each other, and so the
water wets the paper. But though a
drop of mercury is a true liquid , just
like a drop of water, it will not wet the
paper. Even if it is split up it simply
splits up into smaller balls or drops.
This is because the atoms of the mercury
have a very much greater attraction for
each other than they have for the sur
face of the paper, so they keep to them
selves, and , as they are all pulling
towards each other, they naturally
make round balls .
WHY DO WE NOT SEE OUR BREATH ON
A WARM DAY ?
We know that our breath is warmer
than the air outside ; but though the
breath coming out of our bodies is
. Sometimes the air
varies very much
outside is so warm that it does nothing
in particular to that gaseous water
or water in the form of a gas — which
is always in our breath ; and so we
see nothing. But on a cold day this
gaseous water, as it leaves .our bodies,
is suddenly turned so cold that it
forms a little cloud, made, like other
clouds, of drops of water . That is
what we see when we say that we see
our breath . It is the water in our
breath that has been turned liquid by
the cold . There is just as much water
in our breath on a warm day , but then
it remains in the form of a gas as it
comes from our bodies. But if we
take a piece of cold glass, even no a
warm day , and breathe on it , we get
a little cloud of water forming on the
( 6
glass, and that is “ seeing your breath .”
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
WHY DOES A DUCK NEVER GET WET ? lives on the land — but they are never
There are really several reasons . For
deal
very active unless there is a goodwhen
one thing, the plumage or the feathers of moisture to be had. In fact ,
which cover the body of the duck are the ground gets dried up, and it gets
very thick and very smooth . The
very hot, the frogs disappear down
feathers are so thick that the water on crevices into the dampest and coolest
which the duck is floating does not corners they can find , and as long as the
come in contact with the air underneath nice dry weather lasts one does not
the feathers, so that the skin of the come across many frogs in their country
duck is kept quite dry and quite warm .
walks ; but if there is a spell of wet
But this would not be enough by weather, such as the frog delights in,
itself. There is a structure calleda gland, hemay be seen jumping about over the
a

which has an opening on the back of the wet grass, and the wetter it is the better
duck near the tail . The business of he likes it. His activity, like that
of
quitegland
this a lotisoftooilmake oil, or grease,
is produced from and
it. many other animals, is directed chiefly
to the search for food , and it so happens
This oil is used by the duck to smear that the particular kind of food the
over its feathers to make them ex frog likes is also more abundant in wet
tremely smooth and slippery, just as weather. As a matter of fact , although
oil is used to lubricate bicycle.
a Now, the young frog or tadpole lives on
it is a very curious thing that oil and vegetables, theadult frog lives on in
water will not mix , and so the duck sects and worms and such small animals,
like any other bird which lives in the which, however, must be moving about
water - having covered its feathers with if theyare to excite his interest. As
a thin layer of this oil , prevents the this happens generally after a storm , so
water from wetting the feathers, and so we see the frogs especially at that time.
keeps its skin and feathers dry . Thus, WHERE ARE A FROG'S EARS ?
as a matter of fact, the water does not
affect the duck at all , and this gives One might well ask where the ears
rise to a common saying. If anything are , when we cannot see them . But
happens to a person, we must remember that an ear is simply
takes no notice of it , it and that
is said heisperson
like a something by means of which the
duck , because he is no more affected than animal can hear, and not necessarily
the duck is by the water on its back . anything that we can see. As a matter
WHY DOES A GLOW - WORM GLOW ? of fact, what we call ears are merely
A glow -worm is not a worm at all , outside flaps of skin which, when they
but is the female of a kind of beetle seen are large, serve the purpose of collecting
the sounds in the air around . The real
during the summer months up to the
close of August, on warm banks and hearing is all done inside the skull, and
hedgerow's and in woods and pastures. in the case of the frogs, as in the case
As soon as the evening's dusk begins, of birds and lizards, there is a little
this beautiful insect begins to show a hole some distance behind each eye,
most exquisite yellowish -green light, and not far from the angle of the mouth.
caused by what are called luminous The frog is entirely without any outside
organs placed over the tail end. The ear at all. Inside this hole is the
object of this light is not very certain, internal ear, and in the frog there is a
but most of the wise men who study middle ear, too , for the purpose of con
living creatures suppose that the female ducting the sound to a special nerve,
shows the light for the purpose of which takes it to the brain , where the
attracting the males, which do not shine real hearing is done.
in this way Whether this is the real HOW DOES A PEACOCK KNOW WHEN IT
IS GOING TO RAIN ?
reason or not we cannot be quite sure, not very
It is does
but the glow -worm is only one of many animal knoweasy
and to sayitwhat
what does any
not
animals which show light by means of
what is called phosphorescence. know . But if it is true that the peacock
WHY DO WORMS OR FROGS SWARM ON A can tell when there is going to be wet
COUNTRY ROAD AFTER A STORM ? weather, we can only say that know .
Frogs are what are called amphibious ledge of that kind possessed by a
animals — that is to say, they live part of animal is due to what we have learned
their lives on the water, and part of their to call instinct. Of course, you know :
1435
 LEGALNzaneXIN LILLA
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
that all birds, except those which live
partly in the water, have a great dislike
for getting their feathers wet ; and in
the case of the peacock, which has such
a gorgeous array of plumage, it is quite
obvious that a severe wetting would be
most disagreeable. A peacock wet
through would be a pitiable sight . Now,
the more important it is for an animal
to be spared disagreeable experiences,
the more we find that the instinct to
avoid them is present in the animal ;
and so in a bird like the peacock , which
has a great display of fine feathers,
the instinct to foretell wet weather
has been highly developed.
WHY ARE SOME PEOPLE COLOUR - BLIND ?
We must understand that colour is
caused by waves of light of different
lengths, which can be taken up by
certain structures in the eye, just as
sound is caused by other waves taken
up by the structures of the ear . Now,
in that part of the eye which we call
the retina, certain parts can be affected
only by slow waves of light, which cause
a red colour ; other parts only by
medium waves of light, which cause a
green or yellow colour ; while still other
parts are affected by the fastest waves
of all, which give us the idea of blue
and violet. In people who are what we
call colour- blind, there is some defect
in these structures in the retina, so
that certain definite waves are not
appreciated by the eye, but only other
waves . This means that some colours
only may be seen, and such a person ,
therefore, is very apt to call a green
thing red, and so on , because they can
only see red waves, not the green ones.
WHY HAVE WE FINGER -NAILS ?
We must always remember, when
we ask what is the use of some part of
our bodies, that all the higher animals
are made on the same plan , and what
is not of much use to one animal may
be extremely useful to another. Now,
you may think that our finger and toe
nails are not of much use to us, but it
is easy to see that they are very useful
to those animals which have to scratch
in earth or in sand , or have to defend
themselves with their claws, which are
their nails .
But finger -nails have a great use
even for us, because by means of
them our finger -tips are made very layers.
1436
1
much firmer, and in that way we can
grasp objects better. They also enable 1
us to pick up small objects much more
easily than we could without them .
Finger -nails are really parts of the horny
part of the skin, modified in a special way . T
WHAT IS THE USE OF OUR HAIR ?
Here again, as with finger-nails, is
a part of our bodies which does not
seem of any very great use to us, but
which is very important to animals.
Hair is Nature's way of protecting
the body from cold and wet , and so
we find that dwellers in coldest climes
have a good deal of hair, especially in
the case of savages. If we look at
pictures of very ancient times, we see
that the people are represented as being
very hairy ; and, indeed, it must have
been very important to them to be
protected in thisway in the days before
clothes were made. Nowadays, in what 1
we call civilised countries, we wear
such a lot of different kinds of clothes
that it does not matter to us whether
we are hairy or not . If you remember
that hair, wool , fur, and bristles are all
the same structure, you will realise that
to most animals their hair is very useful .
WHAT IS IT THAT MAKES US HUNGRY ?
We have had many questions about
animals which we have answered by
saying that animals know things by
instinct, and now we come to one or
two questions about human beings
which we know very much in the same
way . No one needs to tell us when we
are hungry. We know quite well with
out being told. It is one of the few
instincts that human beings have.
Even a baby knows when it is hungry .
It is a fortunate thing that the cells
of which our bodies are made have this
power of making their wants known
to us . As soon as there is too little
food in the body, it means that the
blood has not enough nourishment in it .
There is a sinking feeling in the pit of
the stomach , and it is this feeling which
we call hunger. This is one of the few
things that a human being knows
without having to learn it .
WHY ARE SOME PEOPLE DARK AND
SOME FAIR ?
If we examine with a microscope the
structure of the skin in animals or
human beings, we find that it is made
up of numbers of cells arranged in
Among these cells are found
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
** colouring matters, or pigments, as the WHY DO NOT _SOLDIERS WEAR ARMOUR
NOW WHEN THEY GO TO WAR ?
artists call them ; and it is the quantity
of this colouring matter present in any Soldiers do not wear armour in these
individual which causes the complexion days because they can fight better
to be called fair or dark . In very fair without it . Even if they wore it , the
people there is very little pigment . armour would hardly protect them as
In very dark people, with brown eyes it protected men long ago, because
now can pierce armour as easily
and black hair, there is a great deal of bullets
as a stone pierces a window. Men wore
pigment ; while others with not very
much pigment are neither very fair armour long ago because guns had with not
then been made. Then men fought
nor very dark . This pigment goes on swords and spears and arrows and
being produced for many years ; but
when it ceases, the hair becomes grey, battle-axes. Against these, good armour
because it is no longer coloured. would protect a man . It was almost
We see this usually in dark people . impossible to kill an armoured knight
IN
in battle . He wore a steel helmet and
WHAT MAKES PEOPLE WALK THEIR
SLEEP ? a steel coat ; his legs and feet were
There are two parts of our mind encased in steel . The front part of his
which control all our movements and he'met could be raised , but on going
actions. One part has to do with all into battle he lowered this, and was
those things which we know we are completely protected. If by any chance
doing ; while the other part does he did not lower this vizor, as it was
things without our knowing anything called, there was a danger of his having
about it . an arrow or a spear thrust into his eye.
If we come to think of it , we do quite a The common soldiers did not have
lot of things without being very conscious complete armour like the knight's
of them . For instance , we do not think armour, so they were killed . What the
about breathing, although we are always knight feared was that he would be
doing it . We do not think about our stunned by a blow on the head from a
heart beating, although it never stops as battle-axe,
- and be taken prisoner. If
long as we live , and there are some that happened, he might be killed after
things which we can learn to do so well he had fallen , and so he used to wear a
as to be able to do them without think- rich, flowing robe over his armour, to
ing at all. Walking is one of these show that he was a man of wealth who
things. When we were little babies we could pay ransom if his life were spared.
could not walk . Gradually, however , we But when gunpowder was used to
learned to walk , and in time we got so fire bullets , the armoured knight and
accustomed to walk as to be able to the unprotected soldier were placed upon
move about quite well without any the same footing - a bullet would kill
great effort of mind. Now, acts of this either of them . So the use of armour
kind are sometimes done by people in was abandoned. The battle chargers of
their sleep, and they can do them just which we read were great cart-horses ;
as well asleep as awake, because the when armour was abandoned, swifter,
mind has got so used to looking after lighter horses were used, so that cavalry
such acts that it does not require the could move more quickly, while foot
person to be conscious when doing these soldiers could march farther and faster.
things. WHAT GIVES US EARACHE ?
So some people are found to walk in Headache and earache and tooth
their sleep . Tnis is really learse one ache are caused by a great number of
part of the mind is wide awake when the different things, most of which act
other is asleep. The curious thing about upon some special nerves, or upon
walking in sleep is that , just because some part of the brain , causing a
the walker is asleep and not conscious, change in these structures which gives
le can walk over dangerous spots rise to a feeling of more or less intense
which would probably cause him to fall , pain . Sometimes the nerve swells up ,
through nervousness, if he were wide and if it is in a tight place , like the nerve
awake. But as he is not awake, and not of a tooth , there is no room for it to
conscious, he generally walks safely,, swell very much , and the result is that
and remembers nothing about the pain is very severe .
ROZTOKZXTREME
1437
 count
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER O

WHY IS A ROAD HIGHER IN THE MIDDLE

THE SIDES ?
believe in his work , Parliament
THAN AT
If a road were not made higher in the examined his plans, and decided that
middle than at the sides the rain would they were good. McAdam's generous
not drain away into the gutters,but work for other people made him quite
wouldlie in puddles all over theroad, poor. He travelled over 30,000 miles of
splashing everything and everybody roads in Great Britain in pursuit of his
that passed. But the road is not so investigations, and had spent out of his
own pocket over £5,000. Parliament
Suppose road asis you
themiddle
high in the feet think.
72 may wide, presented him with ( 10,000 and thanked
for his work .
the centre of it will be only six inches him
It was due to him that the splendid
higher than the sides. That is the
way in which the perfect road is con roads about our country and all over
ys
structed. If a road has too great a Europe were made. Until the railwa
for carts
is bad and ; it causes were built , his roads were the only
traffic to
all theit horses
slope, be kept paths by which commerce could travel
on land . And now, when we hear of a
in the centre, and so ruts are worn

andthe road destroyed by the unequal macadamised road, it

themanafter whom letis us remember
named .
wear and tear which one line of route
has to bear. WHERE DO BATS GO IN THE DAYTIME ?
Bats are nocturnal creatures. That
The Romans made magniticent high
ways. Some of them are stillgoodafter is to say, they sleep during the day
2,000 years of traffic. But after the and are active at night. So are many
Romans left us, their splendid roads other animals. Nearly all the wild
were neglected. They overgrown
were neverwith deer are , and the lions and tigers and
re leopards.
paired ; they became These larger creatures can
weeds . The parts of the country see by day, but the bats cannot . They
which they had not paved had no are as blind in the sunlight as a dor
proper roads, but only horse - tracks, mouse. Therefore, as they would be
which were so boggy and bad that they helpless if a cat or a big bird were
could not be used in winter . In the to see them by day; they hide away in
thirteenth century a law had to be dark places. In all the church towers ,
passedall
compel the people in corners and underground passages,
to cut in little openings under the roofsof
down treesling
and shrubs for a distance
of 200 feet from all roads running houses — there the bats hang by day.
between market towns, so that robbers There is an enormous cave in Ken
tucky in which millions of bats are to
should not hide and waylay travellers. be found, sheltering while the sun is
WHO MADE OUR GREAT ROADS ? shining. They cling to the rock and
The man who made our good roads to each other in such thick clusters
was John Loudon McAdam , who was that forty bats were once counted in
born at Ayr, in September, 1756 , and a space of a few inches. The Egyptian
died in Dumfriesshire, in November, Pyramids swarm with bats . Inside
1836. He spent his youth in America, all is dark as the darkest night , even
where he became rich ; but on return- on the brightest day, and travellers are
ing to Scotland he gave much of astonished to find bats dashing about
his time to experiments with roads. their heads . Dazzled and frightened
After many trials he found that the by the candles, they fly about in
best roads were to be made of hin great alarm and beat against the face,
layers of broken hard stones, all , as as a moth beats against the globe of
far as possible, of the same size, and the lighted gas. Some plants are like
none weighing more than six ounces. the bats — they sleep by day and open
He was appointed to provide food for and blossom " by night. Even the
our warships at Falmouth, but while beautiful lily gives off its richest scent
there he continued his experiments when midnight is at hand.
in road-making at his own cost, and IS IT CRUEL TO USE A BEARING - REIN ?
he was appointed to look after the If, when setting out for a long walk ,
roads about Bristol. His roads were you had a piece of steel fixed in ycur
now
talked about, and though he mouth and straps attached to it so that
had many enemies who did not your head was fastened , preventing
ZIMITED UNIT Criter
14,38
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER

you from moving it, you would under arched-necked, spirited studs of great
stand at once why it is cruel to use the value, whereas, perhaps, so far as money
bearing -rein . Abearing -rein is notnot goes, they are worth next to nothing.
the pair of reins with which we drive; There are proper ways and means of
it has nothing to do with driving . It making all horses, good or bad , look
is a short rein tightly hooked on to that well—by feeding and grooming. But
part of the harness called the saddle , torture is not one of the ways, and
and its sole purpose is to make the whenever you see a horse with a bearing
horse arch its neck and “ look proud .” , rein you may know at once that its
Fancy thinking that a horse looks owner is either ignorant, or cruel, or a
proud when youcan see it is in such snob, or a brute. And a horse with a
misery that it cannot be still when bearing-rein, when it tosses its head
standing, or run freely when moving ! and paws the ground and foams at the
Some horses have naturally arched mouth , is not showing spirit ; it is
necks ; others have not . It is the showing that it is in agony.
nature of a horse, when drawing a HOW DOES IVY CLING TO THE WALLP
load, to stretch out its neck . This gives The ivy is a plant which has the climb
it more power to pull the weight behind ing habit. It has not strong branches
it . By using the horrid bearing-rein which can stand by themselves, and so,
men deprive the poor animal of free if it is to spread out its leaves to the air

THE CRUEL MAN'S HORSE THE GENTLE MAN'S HORSE

This horse ha a bearing - rein . When you see a This horse has no bearing -rein . horse like this,
horse like this, it is in pain, and is being cruelly treated. whose reins are free, can move easily and naturally .
motion, and make its work doubly and to the sun, it must hold on to
hard . All the time it is tugging and something. There are thousands of
straining to get its head free, but the plants which do this instead of forming
cruel rein pulls the bit , hurts the horse's stout branches as trees do. Some of
mouth, and keeps its neck arched and them climb by thorns ; the thorns of the
confined, and, after its owner has rose, for instance, are made for climb
enjoyed a beautiful drive, the tortured ing. Some of them hold on in other
animal returns to its stable foaming from ways, as the ivy does, for it has no
its exertions under cruel conditions. thorns. The creepers that hold on the
WHY DO PEOPLE USE THE BEARING - REIN ? best have actual little suckers , which
Poor people who have to groom and give them a splendid hold of even quite
feed their horses, and so understand a smooth wall. Ivy holds on mainly by
them , do not use the bearing -rein . taking advantage of little irregularities
Only ignorant people and snobs use it. in the surface. If a wall is well built,
Sometimes people let their coachmen ivy prolongs its existence by protecting
decide for them , and if the coachman is it from the weather ; but if a wall is
ignorant and stupid, thinking only about very badly built , ivy does it injury by
" looks " and nothing about a horse's creeping in between the bricks. So it
feelings, he may use the bearing-rein. is best to build a wall well, so that we
The snobs use the bearing-rein to · can make it beautiful with ivy, and
make their horses appear prancing, preserve it by the same means.
DITUZIONE
1439
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
WHY DOES A MATCH GO OUT WHEN WE
BLOW IT ?
When a match or a fire burns , it
makes a certain amount of heat. Now ,
it needs heat in order that it shall
burn at all , and that is why we have
to put a match to a fire. Once it has
started burning it will keep itself hot
enough to go on burning as long as there
is stuff to burn and air to burn it with .
Now , we can blow a match out
because we blow away the heat in
the hot gases which are just going to
burn , and the whole thing becomes so
cold that it will burn no longer , any
more than the match would before
was struck . Any fire , the heat of which
is in the gases it makes , can be blown out
in the same way if we have a big enough
wind to do it You must have seen the
wind blow out a fire at a picnic. But
the wind cannot blow out a coal fire ,
because much of the heat which keeps
the fire going is in the glowing coal
itsell, and the wind cannot blow that
away. We can make a match burn
more quickly by blowing on it gently
enough . so as not to blow its heat
away altogether, but so as to keep up
a brisker supply of air than if we
were not blowing at all .
WHY DOES THE TEA RISE TO THE TOP OF
A LUMP OF SUGAR DIPPED IN IT ?
This question really has to do with
the same subject as the last . Water,
and watery things like tea, behave in
just the opposite way to quicksilver,
When they get a surface on which they
can spread themselves, they do so , but
quicksilver keeps to itself. You would
not get quicksilver to run up into a
lump of sugar. We must ihink of the
sugar as if it were a lot of little tubes all
put together, and then it is easy to show ,
by a simple experiment, what happens.
If we take a thin glass tube and dip its poison fang when it bites the animals
it into water, the water will spread on which it feeds, and so it has a very
itself out on the inside surface of the
tube, and will rise a little higher in the
tube than outside, and where the water
stops it will have a cup -shaped surface,
because the water all round , where it is
next the glass, creeps up the glass a
little. It is just this that happens when
tea runs up a lump of sugar.
But mercury acts in exactly the
opposite way ; it is not attracted by a
surface, but pushed back, and the pic-
ture shows the difference between the
case of water and the case of mercury
TOUTE MOUNTEX L1
1440
LUDA DEL
when a thin tube is pushed in to them.
The picture shows that the mercury is
pushed back by the tube, and that the
surface of the mercury is shaped like
a cup upside down, because all round
the edge of it it holds itself back from
the glass, just in the opposite way to
the water, which creeps up the glass.
DO ANIMALS KNOW WHEN THEY ARE
BEING TREATED KINDLY ?
Not even the wisest man can tell you
how much animals know and how much
they do not know , and it is still more
difficult to say how much they can
appreciate ; but what we do know is
that all the animals that man makes
use of, or lives much with , can feel pain
very readily, and are capable of great
suffering. Whether they know they are
feeling it is a different matter, much too
deep a question for us here. But the
most important point about this subject
is this — that whether animals appre
ciate kindness intelligently or not, it
makes a very great difference to the
human being who treats his animals
well. No one who is cruel or unkind
to animals will be kind to his fellow
creatures, and therefore we should al
ways try and treat animals as kindly
as one of ourselves, so that we may
grow kind to all living things.
CAN A POISONOUS SNAKE BITE IF IT
LIKES, WITHOUT POISONING ?
Some can and some cannot . The
way that poisonous snakes use their
fangs to inject poison is one of the most
wonderful things in Nature, and in the
case of some of them -- for instance, the
common adder or viper, which live; all
over Great Britain—this poison fang
and its venom is only used as a means
of self-defence, or for getting food.
But the adder as a rule does not use
curious arrangement, by means of which
these fangs are laid flat back in the
roof of the mouth out of the way of the
ordinary teeth which are used for feeding.
Thus the adder can use one or other
sets of teeth just as it likes when it
wishes to kill its foe, and it can tuck
its fangs securely out of the way and
use its ordinary teeth when it wishes to
swallow a mouse . In some of the other
poisonous snakes the fangs are fixed ,
and cannot be used in this way.
The next Questions are on page 1569.
TIEL DEDOR TEE MILLEGIES RECETG MOLECA TORILCCALTCOINA

THE FIRE BURNING INSIDE THE EARTH

rematur
II.
rumu

The earth , being a great ball, has a core, just as an apple has a core ; but the core of the earth is made up of
vast quantities of burning materials and gases. This central fire, just like any other fire, must find a chimney,
and there are many mountains in the world through which the fire forces its way. We call them volcanoes, and
they are the chimneys of the central fire. But it is not always smoke they pour out, as Vesuvius, the great
volcano of Italy, is pouring out smoke in this fine phɔto ; underground rivers sometimes burst into the burning
materials at the bottom of the volcanoes, and so canse great explosions of the most disastrous kind. At times
volcanoes burst with great violence, and Vesuvius has destroyed whole cities, one of them , Pompeii, overwhelmed
just after the birth of Jesus Christ, having been dug out of the earth , so that to-day we see it as on page 119.
கணையாயாயாயாயால mam
1441 mumUTUMWOmar ELODIEUXUDODUODE

5 .
THE LITTLE GENTLEMAN AT THE WINDOW

" I want fire and shelter," said the old gentleman , " and there's your great fire there blazing , crackling,
and dancing on the walls with nobody to feel it. Let me in. I say : I only want to warm myself."

1442
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
JOHN RUSKIN'S FAIRY STORY
OHN RUSKIN was one of the wisest and cleverest men who ever lived. He was
JOAaNwriter of beautiful books, an artist, and a teacher. He had a great passion
for truth and gentleness, and a great hate of anything unjust and false. We read
in another part of our book of the life of John Ruskin , and of what he believed and
taught. But once during his life John Ruskin did an odd thing :: he wrote a fairy
tale to please a girl friend who had come to stay at his home. It seemed to her
that so wise a man could not write a simple fairy tale, but Mr. Ruskin's fairy tale,
which he sat down to write on one day and finished on the second day, is one
of the finest tales in the world, and shows us how much truth and wisdom can be
put into a simple story. The story begins in these pages and ends on page 1534.
It is not quite all given here, but the little left out does not make any difference.

THE KING OF THE GOLDEN RIVER

secluded
a and
IN mountainous part
of Styria there was, in
old time, a valley of
the most surprising and luxuriant
fertility. It was surrounded on all
sides by steep and rocky mountains,
rising into peaks, which were always
covered with snow, and from which a
number of torrents descended in con-
stant cataracts . One of these fell
DC
small, dull eyes, which
CONTINUED FROM 1326
were always half shut,
( so that you couldn't
see into them , and
always fancied they saw very far
into you ,
They lived by farming the Trea
sure Valley, and very good farmers
they were. They killed everything
that did not pay for its eating. They
shot the blackbirds, because they

westward, over the face of a crag so
high that when the sun had ser to
everything else , and all below was
darkness, his beams still shone upon
this waterfall, so that it looked like a
shower of gold . It was therefore called,
by the people of the neighbourhood,
the Golden River .
It was strange that none of these
streams fell into the valley itself.
They all descended on the other side
of the mountains, and wound away
through broad plains and by populous
cities . But the clouds were drawn so
constantly to the snowy hills, and rested
so softly in the circular hollow , that
in time of drought and heat, when all
the country round was burnt up,
there was still rain in the little valley ;
and its crops were so heavy, and its
hay so high , and its apples so red ,
and its grapes so blue , and its wine so
rich, and its honey so sweet, that it
was a marvel to everyone who beheld it ,
and was commonly called the Treasure
Valley.
The whole of this little valley be-
longed to three brothers,called Schwartz,
Hans and Gluck. Schwartz and Hans,
the two elder brothers, were very ugly
men , with overhanging eyebrows and
pecked the fruit ; and killed the hedge
hogs, lest they should suck the cows ;
they poisoned the crickets for eating
the crumbs in the kitchen ; and
smothered the cicadas, which used to
sing all summer in the lime-trees. They
worked their servants without any
wages, till they would not work any
more, and then quarrelled with them ,
and turned them out of doors without
paying them .
It would have been very odd if,
with such a farm and such a system of
farming, they hadn't got very rich ;
and very rich they did get. They
generally contrived to keep their corn
by them till it was very dear , and
then sell it for twice its value ; they
had heaps of gold lying about on
their floors , yet it was never known
that they had given so much as a
penny or a crust in charity ; they
were of so cruel and grinding a temper
as to receive, from all those with whom
they had any dealings , the nick
name of the “ Black Brothers.”
The youngest brother, Gluck, 'was
as completely opposed , in both appear
ance and character, to his seniors as
could possibly be imagined or desired .
He was not above twelve years old ,

1443
 -THE CHILD'S
fair, blue -eyed, and kind in temper to
> be in the least afraid of the conse
every living thing. He did not, of of
course , agree particularly well with
his brothers, or rather they did not
agree with him . He was usually
appointed to the honourable office of
turnspit, when there was anything to
roast , which was not often ; at other
times he used to clean the shoes,
the floors, and sometimes the plates,
occasionally getting what was left on
them , by way of encouragement , and
a wholesome quantity of dry blows, by
way of education .
Things went on in this manner for a
long time . At last came a very wet
summer, and everything went wrong
in the country around . The hay had
hardly been got in, when the haystacks
were floated bodily down to the sea
by a flood ; the vines were cut to pieces
with the hail ; the corn was all killed
by a black blight ; only in the Treasure
Valley, as usual, all was safe. As it
had rain when there was rain nowhere
else , so it had sun when there was sun
nowhere else .
It was drawing towards winter, and
very cold weather, when one day the
two elder brothers had gone
with their usual warning to little Gluck ,
who was left to mind the roast, that
he was to let nobody in , and give
nothing out . Gluck
Gluck sat down quite
close to the fire, for it was raining
very hard , and the kitchen walls were
by no means dry or comfortable
looking. He turned and turned, and
the roast got nice and brown .
“ What a pity," thought Gluck ,
my brothers never ask anybody to
dinner ! I'm sure , when they've got
VITIT
such a nice piece of mutton as this,
and nobody else has got so much as a
piece of dry bread, it would do their
hearts good to have somebody to eat
it with them .”
Just as he spoke there came a double
knock at the house door, yet heavy
and dull, as though the knocker had
been tied up --more like a puff than a
knock .
“ It must be the wind ," said Gluck ;
nobody else would venture to knock
double knocks at our door.”
No ; it wasn't the wind : there it
came again very hard , and , what was
particularly astounding, the knocker
seemed be in a hurry, and not to
KurmurutrumYEREZITTIT
BOOK OF STORIES шинзаарагцааланса
quences . Gluck went to the window,
opened it , and put his head out to see
who was standing there in the rain.
It was the most extraordinary -look
ing little gentleman he had ever seen
in his life. He had a very large nose,
slightly brass -coloured ; his cheeks were
very round, and very red , and might
have warranted a supposition that he
had been blowing a fire for the last
eight-and - forty hours ; his eyes twinkled
merrily through long silky eyelashes,
his moustaches curled twice round like
a corkscrew on each side of his mouth ,
and his hair, of a curious mixed pepper
and -salt colour, descended far over his
shoulders. He was about four feet six
in height, and wore a pointed cap of
nearly the same height, decorated with
a black feather some three feet long :
Gluck was so perfectly paralysed by
the singular appearance of his visitor ,
that he remained fixed without uttering
a word until the old gentleman turned
round to look after his fly-away cloak .
In so doing he caught sight of Gluck's
little yellow head jammed in the
window .
out,
67
“ Hollo ! ” said the little gentleman,
that's not the way to answer the door ;
I'm wet , let me in ."
To do the little gentleman justice,
he was wet. His feather hung down
between his legs like a beaten puppy's
tail, dripping like an umbrella ; and
from the ends of his moustaches the
water was running into his waistcoat
pockets, and out again like a mill
stream .
" I beg pardon , sir, " said Gluck , " I'm
very sorry, but I really can't."
Can't what ? said the old gentle
man .
“ I can't let you in , sir-I can't
indeed ; my brothers would beat me
to death, sir, if I thought of such a
thing. What do you want, sir ? ”
“ Want ? " said the old gentleman
petulantly. “ I want fire and shelter ;
and there's your great fire there blazing,
crackling, and dancing on the walls,
with nobody to feel it. Let me in , I
say ; I only want to warm myself.”
Gluck had had his head , by this time ,
so long out of the window, that he
began to feel it was really unpleasantly
cold , and when he turned, and saw the
beautiful fire rustling and roaring, and
TE mm EXTREMITIDO DIREKTOORTEXTO
1444
ALSO A BUONG asamuna . VIEL STELLELAUDELLEEN EULEEL LLELLILUZ

THE OLD GENTLEMAN WENT ON DRIP , DRIP, DRIPPING

2
05

Sisany

20 1 )
TWITEITIETTYYDO

The old gentleman went on drip , drip , dripping among the cinders, ak ran like a gutter. “ Mayn't
I take your cloak ? ” said Gluck. “ No, I'm all right, thank you,” said the old gentleman rather gruffly.
XXLEXImmor romanu un பபபபாயாயமாபயாலயமயாயவாரை
1445
 throwing long, bright tongues up the chimney, as if it were
licking its chops at the savoury smell of the leg of mutton,
his heart melted within him that it should be burning
away for nothing.
He does look very wet,” said little Gluck ; “ I'll just
let him in for a quarter of an hour.”
Round he went to the door, and opened it ; and as the
little gentleman walked in , there came a gust of wind
through the house that made the old chimneys totter.
“ That's a good boy,” said the little gentleman. “ Never
mind your brothers. I'll talk to them ."
“ Pray, sir, don't do any such thing," said Gluck. " I can't
let you stay till they come ; they'd be the death of me.”
" Dear me," said the old gentleman , " I'm very sorry to
hear that. How long may I stay ?
" Only till the mutton's done, sir," replied Gluck, " and
it's very brown .”
Then the old gentleman walked into the kitchen , and sat
himself down on the hob, with the top of his cap accom
modated up the chimney, for it was a great deal too high
for the roof .
“ You'll soon dry there, sir,” said Gluck, and sat down
again to turn the mutton . But the old gentleman did not
25 dry there , but wenton drip, drip, dripping among the cinders,
and the fire fizzed , and spluttered , and began to look very
black and uncomfortable : never was such a cloak ; every
fold in it ran like a gutter.
Ning

“ I beg your pardon , sir," said Gluck at length , after

watching the water spreading in long, quicksilver-like streams
over the floor for a quarter of an hour ; " mayn't I take your
cloak ? "
“ No, thank you,” said the old gentleman.
Your cap, sir ? '
No, I am all right , thank you ," said the old gentleman
rather gruffly .
66

But , sir, I'm very sorry,” said Gluck hesitatingly ;

" but really, sir, you're putting the fire out."
“ It'll take longer to do the mutton , then , ” replied his
Visitor drily .
Gluck was very much puzzled by the behaviour of his
guest ; it was such a strange mixture of coolness and humility .
He turned away at the string meditatively for another five
minutes.
" That mutton looks very nice ," said the old gentleman
at length. “ Can't you give me a little bit ? ”
“ Impossible, sir,” said Gluck.
20

Y TUOTTEET TOITEZELEIZUZELOITTELU CITID UTILITZE

1446 TYTITUZINDU.ULULLARIZUIZIKUULIDURUNLERIES
 " I'm very hungry ,” continued the old gentleman. “ I've
had nothing to eat yesterday , nor to -day. They surely
couldn't miss a bit from the knuckle.”
He spoke in so very melancholy a tone that it quite
melted Gluck's heart . " They promised me one slice
to-day, sir, " said he ; “ I can give you that, but not
a bit more.”
" That's a good boy,” said the old gentleman again.
Then Gluck warmed a plate, and sharpened a knife.
“ I don't care if I do get beaten for it,” thought he.
Just as he had cut a large slice out of the mutton, there
came a tremendous rap at the door. The old gentleman
jumped off the hob, as if it had suddenly become in
conveniently warm . Gluck fitted the slice into the mutton
again , with desperate efforts at exactitude, and ran to
open the door.
)
“ What did you keep us waiting in the rain for ? ” said
Schwartz, as he walked in , throwing his umbrella in
Gluck's face. " Ay ! what for, indeed, you little vagabond ? ”
said Hans, giving Gluck a box on the ear.
“ Bless my soul! ” said Schwartz, when he opened the door.
" Amen ,” said the little gentleman, who had taken his
cap off, and was standing in the middle of the kitchen ,
bowing with the utmost possible velocity.
" Who's that ? ” said Schwartz, catching up a rolling -pin ,
and turning to Gluck with a fierce frown.
“ I don't know ,indeed , brother ," said Gluck, in great terror.
“ How did he get in ? ” roared Schwartz . 6
“ My dear brother,” said Gluck deprecatingly, “ he was
so very wet ! ”
The rolling -pin was descending on Gluck's head ; but,
at the instant , the old gentleman interposed his conical
cap, on which it crashed with a shock that shook the
water out of it all over the room . What was very odd ,
the rolling-pin no sooner touched the cap than it flew out
of Schwartz's hand , spinning like a straw in a high wind,
and fell into the corner at the further end of the room .
“ Who are you , sir ? ” demanded Schwartz, turning
upon him.
" What's your business ? ” snarled Hans.
“ I'm a poor old man, sir,” the little gentleman began very
modestly, " and I saw your fire through the window , and
begged shelter for a quarter of an hour.”
"Have the goodness to walk out again , then," said
Schwartz. “ We've quite enough water in our kitchen,
without making it a drying-house .”
Bomontorimost
1447 ITT UT TULLUTOCOFUELLO
 LEEC. LICCUamumunor THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
“ It is a cold day to turn an old man there they lay, all three. Then the
>

out in . Look at my grey hairs .” old gentleman spun himself round,

“ Ay!” said Hans,“ there are enough and replied with perfect coolness :
of them to keep you warm . Walk ! ” " Gentlemen , I wish you a very
“" I'm very hungry,, sir ; couldn't you good morning. At twelve o'clock
spareme a bit of bread before I go ? " to-night I'll call again ; after such a
“ Bread , indeed ! ” said Schwartz. refusal of hospitality as I have just
“ Do you suppose we've nothing to do experienced , you will not be surprised
if that visit is the last I ever pay you .”
with our bread, but to give it to such
red -nosed fellows as you ? ” “ If ever I catch you here again ,"
“ Why don't you sell your feather ? " muttered Schwartz , coming, half
said Hans sneeringly . “ Outwith you ! ' frightened, out of the corner—but ,
“ A little bit,” said the old gentleman. before he could finish his sentence,
“ Be off ! ” said Schwartz . the old gentleman had shut the house

SERIEELELA

SCHWARTZ AND HANS, THE TWO ELDER BROTHERS, ATE AS MUCH MUTTON AS THEY COULD
' Pray, gentlemen .” door behind him with a great bang ;
" Off, and be hanged ! " cried Hans, and there drove past the window , at
seizing him by the collar. But he had the same instant , a wreath of ragged
no sooner touched the old gentleman's cloud, that whirled and rolled away
collar than away he went after the down the valley in all manner of shapes,
rolling-pin , till he fell into the corner melting away at last in a gush of rain .
on the top of it . Then Schwartz was " A very pretty business, indeed, Mr.
6
very angry and ran at the old gentle- Gluck ! ” said Schwartz. Dish the
man to turn him out ; but he also had mutton , sir. If ever I catch you at
hardly touched him , when away he such a trick again - Bless me, why,
went after Hans and the rolling-pin , the mutton's been cut ! '
and hit his head against the wall as “ You promised meone slice, brother,
he tumbled into the corner. And so you know ," said Gluck .
TXIKIT LUTUT UDLEYTTELY
1448
 Kino
Oh, and you were cutting it hot, I suppose, and
going to catch all the gravy. It'll be long before
I promise you it again. Leave the room , sir."
Gluck left the room melancholy enough . The brothers
ate as much mutton as they could , locked the rest in the
cupboard, and proceeded to get very drunk after dinner.
Such a night as it was ! Howling wind , and rushing
rain , without intermission . The brothers had just sense
enough left to put up all the shutters, and double bar
the door, before they went to bed . As the clock
struck twelve, they were both awakened by a
tremendous crash . Their door burst open with a
violence that shook the house from top to bottom .
“ What's that ? ” cried Schwartz , starting up.
" Only I," said the little gentleman.
The brothers stared into the darkness . The room
was full of water , and they could see in the midst of it
an enormous foam globe , spinning round, and bobbing
up and down like a cork , on which reclined the little
old gentleman , cap and .
all. There was plenty of
room for it now , for the roof was off.
“ Sorry to incommode you," said their visitor
ironically . “ I'm afraid your beds are dampish .
Perhaps you had better go to your brother's room .
I've left the ceiling on there."
They required no second admonition , but rushed into
Gluck's room , wet through , and in an agony of terror. KO
“ You'll find my card on the kitchen table ,” the old
gentleman called after them . " Remember, the last visit."
“ Pray Heaven it may be ! ” said Schwartz , shudder
ing And the foam globe disappeared .
Dawn came at last , and the two brothers looked out
of Gluck's little window in the morning . The Treasure
Valley was one mass of ruin and desolation . The flood
had swept away trees, crops and cattle , and left in their
stead a waste of red sand and grey mud . The two
brothers crept, shivering and horror-struck, into the
kitchen . The water had gutted the whole first floor
corn, money, almost every movable thing had been
away
wasleftonlyasmall a
white card on the kitchen
- FD DET
table. On it,, in large,
breezy, long-legged letters,
were engraved the words :
Pero ¿ QUE
THE NEXT PART OF THIS STORY BEINS ON PAGE 15

=
1449
 PLARLED LED TRADCLOURE I Emu EXECUCA na WALL

THE FAIRY'S REVENGE

old shepherd was playing on a
ANN flute was struck by his wonderful beauty,
one morning as he watched and invited him into her palace . The
his sheep on the marshlands outside shepherd saw that he had won the
Rome , and he played so sweetly that a queen's heart, and he resolved to
lovely fairy came and listened to him .
66
marry her and become King of Italy,
Will you marry me , and come and and let the fairy go. So when he and
play to me in my castle under the the queen were alone together, he
earth ? ” she said . knelt down and took her hand, saying :
“ Yes, yes, lovely lady !” said the “ Marry me, dearest, and I will help
shepherd. She put a ring on his finger, you to govern Italy."
and he at once became a handsome But as soon as he spoke he turned
youth dressed in princely robes. into an old , ugly, and ragged shepherd.
“ But I must first go to Rome and “ What is this horrible beggar doing
bid farewell to my friends and relatives,” here ? ” cried the queen . " Whip him
he said . out of the palace."
The fairy gave him a golden coach And this was done . The miserable
and twelve white horses, and as he rode sliepherd went back to the marshlands to
in state to Rome he met the young find the fairy, but she never came to him
and unmarried Queen of Italy . She again, and so he remained a shepherd.
THE MINSTREL QUEEN OF SPAIN
A LONG time ago the fierce Moors (6

Sire , you must marry again , " he

invaded Spain, and defeated the said . “ Your queen has joined our
Spaniards and captured their king. The enemies .'
lovely Queen of Spain at once dressed A feast was held, and the cunning
herself in boy's clothes and went to the Minister put his daughter next to the
tent of the Moorish chieftain , and sang king, and she made love to him . But
to him as he sat feasting. the king turned sadly away from her,
“ What a divine voice ! ” said the and said to the singer :
Moor. “ Boy, you shall have a royal " Boy, sing me something merry ."
footstool ! And the singer sang :
He forced the King of Spain down “ Down the hills and along the plain ,
on the ground, and the singer put her Lute in hand went the Queen of Spain ,
feet softly on his neck. When the Dressed in the clothes of a boy she went
singing was done, the Moor cried : And sang in the Moorish chieftain's tent.
He gave her a footstool fair and strong,
Boy, you sing like an angel ! Ask And she won the footstool with a song.”
what you will , and I will grant it.”
“ Let me take this young king back The King of Spain then recognised
to his people ," said the singer. his wife . He took her tenderly in his
Her request was granted, so she led arms, and had the cunning Minister
the king into the northern mountains, punished. In the end the Moors were
and there they met the Spanish Minister. defeated and driven out of Spain.
THE CHOICE OF MARPESSA
MARPESSA was the loveliest of all the him ; but Marpessa said , “ No, Apollo !
You are immortal , and will re
princesses of ancient Greece , and
she was wooed by Idas, a noble young main ever young and happy. But
hero, and Apollo, the radiant “ god of Idas will grow old as I grow old ,
the sun . ” Idas was thebolder lover, and and share my troubles, and che rish
one day he carried Marpessa away in and comfort me."
his chariot ; but Apollo then came So she married Idas , and they lived
down from the sky and stopped him , as happily together in their old age
and Marpessa then had to choose as they did in the flower of their youth ;
between the man and the god . Apollo and they had many tall, handsome
was more beautiful than Idas, and he children to love and help them in
felt sure that Marpessa would marry the decline of their life .
nuo CUZI
1450 ITUIUTICO
 TOTOXICANOSmnmn

THE FABLES OF PESOP THE SLAVE

THE LION AND THE DEER THE WASPS IN THE HONEY - POT

A nearly caught by the dogs that he

rushed into a cave in the hill - side in
order to hide .
No sooner, however, had he entered
TTTTTTTE
A MANoneday hung a jar in his
garden containing a little honey.
There were a great many wasps about
at the time, and nearly every one
crawled into the jar to get the honey.

than he saw a huge lion crouched at the There they got their legs and wings
RYVIN

farther end of the cave. The lion sprang
upon the unfortunate deer and killed him .
Just before he died the deer said :
How unlucky I am ! I came into
this cave to escape from the dogs and
have fallen into the jaws of the lion .”
Don't jump out of the frying-pan into
the fire.
THE FOX AND THE ASS
ANand, one dayhimself
ass dressing found ain lion's skin, ONCEupon
it , he went
tity of fowls
about the fields and woods frightening
all the other animals almost out of
their lives .
Presently he met a fox. and , wanting
to ten him, too, he not only
DOMENT
so sticky and smeared with the honey
that they were all stuck together, and
only a few of them succeeded in getting
out and flying away . All the rest
stayed in the jar, and in a short time
died .
If we get into bad habits it is very
difficult to get out of them .
THE FAT AND THE LEAN FOWLS
a timethere
were aquan
living together, in a
yard . Some of them were very fine and
fat, while otherswere thin and ill-looking.
The fat ones were often making fun of
the lean ones, calling them starvelings
and skeletons and other names.

rushed at him very fiercely, but he One day the cook was ordered to dress
tried to imitate the roaring of the lion.
66
several fowls for dinner , and to be sure
Sir,” said the fox , “ if you had only that she took the best in the yard.
held your tongue I might have taken The result was that the fat fowls were
you for a lion as the others did ; but caught and cooked , while the thin ones
now that I hear you bray like a donkey, were left ; so that in the end the fat
I know quite well who you are.' fowls wished that they had been thinner.
Our characters are often shown by Never despise people who are not so well
what we say as well as by what we do. off as yourself, who may be better than you.
THE NEXT STORIES BEGIN ON PAGE 1523
berament ZTOTOLIU
1451
FINDING THE OTHER SIDE OF THE WORLD

On page 294 we read about the wonderful adventures of Captain James Cook. In this picture we see this famous
navigator on his little ship, the " Endeavour, " sailing round the mountainous shores of New Zealand. It was
during his first voyage, which lasted from the year 1768 to 1771, that Captain Cook found New Zealand. He
sailed right round New Zealand, being the first man to do so, and brought home to England a description of
the wonderful island, which is very similar to the United Kingdom in size and climate. Not content with his dis
coveries on his first voyage, Cook made two more voyages to this part of the world, and cruised about discovering
many of the islands in Oceania. In his last voyage Captain Cook discovered the Sandwich Islands and other
groups, but he was unfortunately killed by the natives when
.
trying to land at Hawaii on February 14, 1779.
TITUUT
1452
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES
NEW ZEALAND, THE BEAUTIFUL DOMINION
The brown - skinned
aan
WHEN Captain
Cook sailed CONTINUED FROM
children of those
away in his little ship,
‫رو‬
the " Endeavour, in
1768, by order of George
the Third, to make dis
coveries for England in the
Southern Seas, he rounded
Cape Horn , and found his
wav to some islands in the SOUTH
midst of the great Pacific 16 LAND
Ocean . They are called the
Society Islands now, and be
long to France. They are so Teemast
beautiful that they are often
called an earthly paradise . If we could
but see with our eyes what those dots
in the map of the Pacific stand for !
Islands are always pretty, even in a
park lake, or off a broken shore. But
in this far-away blue ocean , under
the golden sunshine,in the clear, wildering work -the little ship " En
balmy air, it is like fairyland, which- deavour had to go on and find her
ever way we look . If we look down
into the crystal water, there are the
bright-coloured sea creatures darting
about, and splendid shells lying on
the dazzling white beaches. Some of
the islands are so low that they are
scarcely raised above the water ; on
these grow feathery -topped palm
o
trees, tall ferns, and brilliant flowers
and shrubs, through which one can see
peeps of the pale-green water of the
lake-harbours hidden inside the ring-
shaped island . On the higher, larger
islands - none larger than Yorkshire-
grow sugar-canes, tobacco , fruits, and
beautiful trees clothe the hill-sides .
est
1364
islands enjoy bathing
in the delicious warm
sea . They can swim before
NORIH they can run, and they
TÍNH
NE
dive fearlessly through the
rolling waves, playing the
prettiest water games as nim ·
bly as if they were seals or
dolphins. In Captain Cook's
time the tribes of people who
lived in the various islands
o
were very fierce and warlike ;
оо
but since his day many mis
sionaries have gone cut to teach them
to be more gentle, and to give up their
old wild ways and their cruel religion .
Delightful as these islands were
and there are so many that Captain
Cook found “ discovering ” quite be
way to the land named , a hundred
years before by the Dutch Sailor
Tasman , New Zealand .
Many centuries before that a brown
skinned, wavy -haired sailor chief had
run his long canoe aground and beheld
with delight the white cliffs and trees
Island..
of the North Island “ Ao -tea -roa ! ”
he exclaimed, meaning ihe “ Long o
Bright World ,” as he and his bold
seamen leaped ashore. They had been
driven from their homes in far distant
islands of the Pacific by stress of war,
and to this day, though far away , the
dwellers in the eastern islands of
Polynesia, and the Maori people found
GATIE
1453

THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIEŠare
amore
by Europeans settled in New Zealand , we find them listening, on a beautiful
still have in common the same old
legends and customs, and speak much
the same language. Captain Cook
spent six months on his survey of open -air festival is Christmas in New
the “ Long Bright World ." He dis- Zealand, with abundance of flowers
Turms
covered that there are two large islands,
Om
parted by the straits now called after
him , and a smaller one to the south-
the North , South, and Stewart Islands.
WHERE WE SHOULD COME OUT IF WE
FALL THROUGH THE EARTH
Altogether the islands are nearly the
size of the United Kingdom , and ifwecan
DODOMA
imagine a line driven straight through
the earth, it would come out the other
side near the islands of New Zealand .
If you look on the map you can see the
more exact spot marked as Antipodes
Islands , where the feet of people
walking-if there were any people
there -- would be exactly opposite ours,
though 7,000 miles apart.
Captain Cook describes in his journal
how handsome and fine-looking were
the Maoris ; how curiously they
tatooed their faces in patterns ; how
they wear feather cloaks and green
stone ornaments. He mentions, too ,
their warlike disposition , though ' on
the whole he seems to have got on
very well with them , and they promised
>
when he went away not to disturb the
two posts he had set up to carry the
Union Jack
In the British Museum are many
cases full of the works of the Maoris,
as the descendants of the bold Poly-
nesian explorers call themselves, and
very beautiful and clever are the carv-
ings and polished tools.
OW WE CAN HAVE TWO SUMMERS IN
Hºw ONE YEAR BY GOING TO NEW ZEALAND
But the “ Endeavour " had once more
to go on her way . Leaving Cape
Farewell, as they named it , on the
north point of the South Island, and
sailing away over a thousand miles to
the north - west , the explorers arrived at
length on the east coast of New Holland,
now Australia, where they found a
very different race of natives, the
Blacks, perhaps the lowest in the scale
of human beings.
For some years after this explora-
tion of Captain Cook , the Maoris
remained undisturbed, but for the
visits of whalers and traders, and
adventurers. On Christmas Day , 1814,
1454
LCEA
bay in the North Island, to their first
sermon from a Christian missionary
Samuel Marsden . A lovely summer
and sunshine, for the seasons there are
exactly opposed to ours in the northern
hemisphere, and if we leave Vancouver
in the delicious spring days, we arrive
twenty -one days later in time for
golden autumn in New Zealand. Or
if we want two summers in a year,
we can leave home after our own, and,
going by the longer all- sea route, can
still be in time , six or eight weeks later,
to enjoy another just beginning this
other side of the world .
About thirty years after Marsden
came, settlements began in earnest. Soon
after Queen Victoria came to the throne,
New Zealand was proclaimed part of
the British dominions. A great Scotch
settlement soon followed, on the east
side of the South Island , and round
Dunedin—the old name for Edinburgh
--- most of the names came from Scot .
land . It is said that the children even
now speak with a Scotch accent in this
land settled by their grandparents.
HE OLD BATTLEFIELDS HIDDEN UNDER
THEFIELDS OF GOLDEN CORN
An English church settlement was
made to the north of Dunedin , in the
Canterbury plains, with its capital,
Christchurch , and visitors say that no
where in this Britain of the South
does it seem so homelike and so English
as amongst these grassy hills and well
watered valleys.
There were, unhappily , wars lasting
many years with the Maoris, chiefly
connected with the possession and selling
of the land. British gun-boats were
seen on the peaceful creek, the sound of
the bugle echoed over the valleys, and
red coats showed up against the green
hills . Battlefields to- day lie hidden
under fields of corn , for now all is peace
fully arranged, and the brave and
skilful Maoris have in fifty years settled
down to the civilisation of the strangers.
They own land which they farm or let ;
they have flocks and herds, are educated
and hold important positions in the
country. They have a most ardent
love of their own land, and, indeed,
they well may have , for it is one of the
most beautiful and fertile in the world .
SEREN
namEELKOPOLSKIE cum monumevnommen wir Emma

MOUNTAINS OF SNOW AND RIVERS OF ICE

New Zealand's climate is among the best for invalids, and there are many mountains to climb. Here we see Mount
Sefton, in that part of New Zealand called Mackenzie. It crowns with rugged glory a scene of perfect beauty.
GETTI

If New Zealand has fire and steam in the depths of his soil, she has ice on the summits of her mountains From
the Francis Joseph glacier great volumes of water f w, carrying life and fertility to the plains and valleys below.
-மகாயாகம் MODUITTO
1455
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES .
This love is shared, too, by the British boiling springs, all bubbling up from
who have made their homes there, and the heated ground and rocks below.
they are proud to hold together as a Sometimes they burst out with such
nation of New Zealanders. force that they rise up like a great foun
The climate is partly the reason for tain , over 100 feet high ; in other
this ; it is so healthy and enjoyable , places there are clouds of steam from
with no fogs or depressing damp, but smaller jets, among which Maori villages
with plenty of wind and sunshine, and are built . The native women need
so the people are strong and capable of light no fires ; the food cooks in the
working hard and making the most of steaming holes ; the children bathe in
Nature's gifts . the pools that are only pleasantly warm .
UCKLAND, THE MOST BEAUTIFUL CITY Tourists and invalids go to these springs,
A OF THE DOMINION OF NEW ZEALAND and many ailments are cured there, and
How wonderful these gifts are we greatly do travellers enjoy the wonder
can see by passing through the provinces ful scenery, and the dancing and singing
that make up the do ninion ! of the Maori girls.
We will start in Auckland, the northern It sounds adventurous to boat on a
province of the North Island . Its boiling lake, but this is what many
capital, Auckland, the largest and most hundreds of travellers do every summer
beautiful city of New Zealand, stands on what is called the most wonderful
on a narrow isthmus only a few miles lake in the world - Rotomahana, which
across , with a harbour on each side ; is Maori for “ Warm Lake.” Near
it is often called the Corinth of the this lake the country was overwhelmed
South , after the famous town in Greece. about twenty years ago by immense
North of this isthmus is a narrow showers of mud and ash ; much of the
peninsula, the land of the wonderful rocks and earth is coloured by the
kauri- tree. One can take train from substances thrown up by the springs,
Auckland to the Wairoa River, and and the rich green of the ferns and mosses
thence by steamer for 120 miles along and leafy shrubs - like those in the
the greatest inland waterway of New hottest hothouses at home - make a
Zealand. The banks of this river fairyland of beauty , seen through the
are alive with the hum of saw -mills, gauzy steam veil.
1
where great saws slice huge logs into H
RIC GLO RIES
OF RIV ER
AND FOR EST
planks with extraordinary rapidity. THEAND NEW ZEALAND'S BUSY CAPITAL
There is a fall on this river like aa small South of the province of Auckland
Niagara, and the great tree -trunks lie the provinces of Taranaki, Hawkes
come crashing down over the edge. Bay, and Wellington . Taranaki is the
The kauri -trees give a sort of gum , like native name for the beautiful mountain
amber, very valuable for making var- Egmont, seen by Captain Cook as he
nish , and further north still are men passed, and it gives its name to the
prodding the ground with long rods to province. A hundred miles out at sea
find the gum that dropped from the sailor can see the beautifully -shaped
trees that disappeared long ages ago . cone of snow , lifted high above the
WHERE BOILING FOUNTAINS PLAY AND green trees and small hills at its base !
BOAT
It rises “ lofty and lone ” from the
Many Maoris live in this part of fertile plain, and is a favourite resort .
the island, celebrated for its warm , What lovely days can be spent on
hild climate, fit for growing grapes the rivers of this neighbourhood , one
and oranges and lemons, besides the of which is a magnificent water-road
tropical products grown in the distant into the heart of the North Island !
islands from which the Maoris came Starting from the upper part in the early
centuries ago. The southern part of morning, we pass through groves of the
Auckland is taken up with the Hot splendid golden blossoms of the New
Spring Land. In England we like Zealand laburnum , and other lovely
spring water because it is so deliciously flowers. Over high cliffs of rock , made
cold. Here in New Zealand in this won bright with feathery ferns and many
derful tableland, rising into volcanic coloured mosses, dash waterfalls, like
mountains, with many lakes between, threads of spun glass. When the river - bed
there are thousands and thousands of narrows and forms rapids, the canoes
tar XXX TOTOYUN ZIERNITAT
1456
"3
DE BIED
ZAUD . NIELSR. EITULLES
INTL . Dcc.uu.dio 120 U.EDULEE LIU
1

PEOPLE AT THE OTHER SIDE OF THE WORLD

NATIVE MUSICIANS OF HAWAII, IN THE SANDWICH ISLANDS A MAN OF SOLOMON ISLANDS

A SOLOMON ISLANDER A YOUNG LADY OF TONGA A MAORI CHIEF

LEO

A NATIVE OF FIJI A GROUP OF WELL- TO - DO YOUNG LADIES OF TAHITI

These are types of the people who live in the many islands of Oceania, of which New Zealand is the head and
centre. Most of them are British citizens. They were all savages, and many of them were cannibals, until
missionaries carried the Gospel to them, and educated them in the ways of gentleness, peace, and civilisation,
The photographs on these pages are by Messrs. Underwood & Underwood ( London), Mr. N. P. Edwards (Littlehampton ), and others.
TIJODITEKTUR RULUT METROTTUU TIMOR
1457
 Auram com man
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES.couri GETXO22

shoot over them with great and excit . in Manitoba, for great quantities of
ing speed. Where the river runs deeply wheat and oats are grown.
and slowly, the reflections of the cliffs THE HE SPLENDID FARMS THAT SEND OUT
and the rich glories of the forest are like WOOL, MEAT , & GRAIN ACROSS THE SEAS
beautiful pictures , about which we can Besides this, there are splendid farms
weave fairy stories to our heart's content . for dairy produce, and thousands and
The city of Wellington is the capital thousands of sheep flourish , giving great
of New Zealand, and has its harbour, quantities of valuable wool, and pro
the busiest harbour in the dominion, viding, since the introduction of freezing
on Cook's Strait. It has fine public chambers, the Canterbury mutton and
buildings, in one of which the New lamb, which helps to feed so many of
Zealand Parliament sits for six months the people on the other side of the
of the year. Women as well as men, world. Christchurch, the capital of this
Maoris as well as others, have a vote in province, is a beautiful garden city of
choosing their members of Parliament ; broad streets and open spaces. In
there are four Maori members. It may Otago are the famous lakes and fjords,
well be said of New Zealand that the and from this province are also sent
great body of the people control the away large quantities of wool, meat,
affairs ofthe nation . They already have and grain . Dunedin , a handsome city ,
their old age pensions; their railways, with many churches, is the capital of
telegraph and telephone lines are owned Otago province. Little more than twenty
and worked by the State for the im- years ago the first cargo of frozen meat
provement and good of the country, not was despatched from this colony, and
for private profit. In these and many this trade has grown enormously.
other ways young New Zealand is ahead In Southland and Stewart Island,
of the old Mother Country. Many lines called the “ last and loneliest," from its
XO
CULER
LEI

of steamers run from Wellington to position beyond South Island, is also

various ports; a daily steam ferry runs much grand and beautiful scenery.
to Lyttelton, the chief port of the More ice -capped peaks, large glaciers,
South Island, near Christchurch . and great granite precipices, 5,000 feet
high , are found at Milford Sound , and
AND MILES OF GLITTERING MOUNTAINS there are falls, one of the wonders of
There are six provinces in South Is- the world, nearly 2,000 feet high, like
land - Nelson and Marlborough on the a silver ribbon hanging over the rough
north, Westland and Canterbury in the mountain wall. Here and there are
middle, Otago and Southland on the dark , woody valleys, and deep sea creeks
south . Between Westland and Canter- running far inland , with palm- trees and
bury runs the beautiful range of the ferns waving over sandy beaches.
Southern Alps, over 300 miles, long,
a
POWOLNTO
even WHERE MEN.COAND GOLD THE EARTH
more beautiful than the one we know A great deal of gold is found in New
and love so well in Europe. The highest Zealand, both in the Auckland province
mountain , Mount Cook, which the and in the river- beds of Otago and
Maoris called “ the Light of Heaven , " Westland. The chief coal-mines are on
is nearly the height of Mont Blanc. the west of South Island and in the
The great ice rivers, or glaciers, are Auckland province. As the years come
among the most magnificent in the there are many more valuable minerals
world . From them great avalanches be worked in New Zealand, chief
constantly fall with thundering noise , among them being iron . The green
and miles of glittering white peaks stone found on the west coast of South
against the blue sky contrast in flower- Island was very much prized by the
time with carpet
the dazzling colours of the old Maoris, and the curious weapons and
beautiful of flowers on the ornaments they made of it are still
lower mountain slopes. seen in the museums of the large towns.
On the east side of the range lies the As in Canada, there is great value
great Canterbury plain, one of the in the water - power stored in the rivers
richest districts in the country. Here and waterfalls of the country ; and it
grain stores are found at the stations is thought that manufactures will
on the railway line, like the elevators increase rapidly in New Zealand , such
1458
1
 meareenammவானமாம aaaaaaaw யயயயயயயயயாய

HAPPY HOMES IN THE SOUTHERN SEAS

A HOME IN THE ENGLISH ISLAND

OF SANTA CRUZ NATIVE HOUSES IN BISMARCK ISLAND

A HOUSE BUILT ON STILTS IN NEW HEBRIDES A THATCHED HOUSE IN THE FIJI ISLANDS

A HOUSE IN NEW CALEDONIA A HOUSE BUILT LOW TO AVOID HURRICANES IN SANTA CRUZ
The British flag Aies over many strange people and many kinds of dwelling-places. These are some of the
homes of British citizens in the islands forming part of the great Polynesian group, helping to make up what
we call Oceania, in the Southern Seas. Nearly all these islands belong to Great Britain, thongh France and
Germany own some. No solid houses are needed, for the climate is very hot ; nor is it necessary to work hard .
MOLDTIMO DO
1459
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
as that of making up woollens, owing
to the cheap production of electricity,
as happened in England last century
through the use of coal in making steam.
Now, since the beginning of this
century the limits of the dominion of
New Zealand have been carried out to
include the Cook and other South
Pacific islands. In this “ Brighter
Britain ," so near in size to its Mother-
land, there are scarcely as many
inhabitants as in Glasgow or Liverpool ;
and the population of the four largest
towns put together-Auckland, Welling-
ton , Christchurch, and Dunedin - is very
little greater than the population of
the port of Hull, on the Humber.
But we have not yet seen all that
goes to make up the possessions of
Britain in the southern hemisphere,
called Australasia, though Australia
and New Zealand are far the most
important parts of it .
te GREAT BARRIER REEF THAT RUNS
THELORE
When Captain Cook sailed away
from Botany Bay, and the lovely
flowers that so delighted his naturalist
friend, the little ship “ Endeavour ”
made her way safely for over a thousand
miles northwards along the coast , known
for many years afterwards as New
South Wales. Suddenly she struck on
a hidden, sharp rock, and made a great
hole in her side. It was hastily patched
up with sail-cloth and tow, and the
voyage was continued to a point now
called Cookstown, in Queensland.
This was the manner of the discovery
of the Great Barrier Reef, which runs
along the east coast of Australia, ten
to fifteen miles from the shore, acting
as a natural breakwater for the harbours
of that coast, and making a still and
safe passage for shipping when the
breakers of a not very peaceful Pacific
dash in clouds of white foam upon the
line of jagged rocks, now just below,
now just above, the level of the sea.
How little could Captain Cook fore-
see the never -ending lines of ships laden
with wool and gold and food that were to
steam northward in the years to come,
to pass through the Torres Straits
on their way to the Motherland !
North of the Torres Straits lies the
large island of New Guinea . It is
divided among Germany, Holland, and
Great Britain . Great Britain's piece
MIROUETTER
1.460
is as large as Great Britain itself.
There are many missionaries there
teaching and civilising the natives.
The climate is very hot , and in it grow
best such products as tobacco, rice,
sugar, tea, and coffee. There are valu
able trees, too, amongst them the
cocoanut, the sago palm, sandalwood ,
and ebony. There are pearl fisheries
on the coasts , as on the warm shores
of Australia and the Pacific Islands.
THHEERISING
TWO GREAT CURVES OF ISLANDS
FROM THE FLOOR OF THE OCEAN
If we could drain away the water
from the ocean as we can from a pond,
we should see that the floor of the
Pacific , the deepest and largest ocean
in the world , rises to the east of
Australia in two great curves. New
Guinea and Norfolk Island are on the
curve nearest the island continent .
There is a school in Norfolk Island, to
which children from other islands come.
On the outer curve are the Fiji
Islands. The native chiefs and people
here put themselves under British rule
some years ago . Missionaries have
taught them, and trade is increasing with
Britain , Australia , and New Zealand .
Most tropical plants grow well in Fiji,
such as sugar, fruits, and cocoanuts ;
and still farther beyond lie great groups
of islands known as the islands of Poly
nesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia. These
islands, with Australia, New Zealand,
and the rest , make up Australasia.
W FAR - AWAY ISLANDS ARE LINKED
HºwBY CABLES AND STEAMSHIPS
Fifty years ago, the journey to the
Fiji Islands was indeed a long and
trying one . First it took months to
get to Australia , and then weeks in
another and smaller ship to the islands .
Now all Australasia and Oceania - as
the groups of islands are called — is
drawn near together and to the rest
of the world by electric cables and
swift steamships. From the north of
Auckland a cable runs to Norfolk
Island, Fiji and Fanning Island , to
Vancouver and British North America,
across the Pacific. There is also a line
from New Zealand to Sydney. We travel
from Auckland to England in a month,
changing ships at Sydney or Fiji , then
to Vancouver, and by the Canadian
Pacific to the Atlantic . Steamers to
London take about six weeks.
The next story of Countries is on page 1545.
Zaxonorotan .MTE
 The Child's Book of .
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E have read the story of the red cells that carry the air from the lungs to
WE every part of the body, and in these pages we learn about cells more
wonderful still, more intensely alive and active, which protect us from our
enemies about the scavenger cells, which clear away dirt and waste matter,
and the soldier cells, which fight and kill dangerous microbes whenever and
wherever they enter the body. It is in these white cells that there lies what
was long ago called the “ healing power of Nature." Also we learn here
abɔut the gases in the blood, and especially about the carbonic acid gas, which
is carried by a special salt from every part of the body to the lungs, and then
got rid of. In five minutes, if this were not being done, we should die
poisoned by this gas which we must make, and must get rid of, if we are to live.
We learn here also about the food in the blood, and the things in it that
carry messages, and others that help the white soldier cells to kill the evil microbes.

THE WHITE CELLS OF THE BLOOD

Tow we must pass
Nowto the other CONTINUED FROM 1386
kind of cells in the
blood — the white
cells, about which a little has
already been said, since many
of them really look very like
the pond ameba . These are
very few in the blood compared
with the red cells . A volume of
blood equal to two pins' heads,
which should contain some four or
five millions of the red cells , should
contain only about eight thousand of
the white cells — that is , when we
are well . In many kinds of illness,
however, the number of white cells
greatly increases ; perhaps five or
even ten times . Doctors used to
think that this was one of the bad
things about the illness , but now
because
we know better. It happens because
the white cells are specially useful
in illness , and is one of the ways in
which the healing power of Nature
shows itself .
These white cells vary a good deal,
unlike the red cells , which are all
of the same pattern. They vary in
size, in the way they stain with
various colouring matters, and so on .
Probably all these different kinds
represent different stages in the his-
tory of their lives. They have no
elastic coat , but can and do change
white cells . Then
many curious things
began to be noticed.
White cells were seen
with microbes inside them,
and at first it was thought
that the microbes had invaded
the cell and were killing it ;
but then white cells were found
with little specks of coal- dust in
them, which the cells must have
picked up for themselves. Then we
learned how to keep a drop of blood
warm under the microscope, so that
we could watch the white cells even
for hours at a time , and it was found
that those which had microbes in
them did not die , but after a time
the microbes disappeared , and the
white cells went on living.
Then we found that we could
actually see the white cells picking
up microbes or specks of any foreign
matter in the blood, and dealing with
them just as the amaba deals with
anything that it is feeding on. Nor
was this all. By studying the blood
vessels of a living tissue under the
microscope, we discovered that the
white cells have a way of passing
through the walls of the blood
vessels, and wandering about in the
tissues of the body generally. This
is now usually called their emigration.
Now, suppose there has been a little
9

their shape readily. damage done to your finger ; perhaps

For many years it was a great some dirt and some microbes have
puzzle to find out any use for these got into the wound. We find that

RA Do
1461
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
the white cells of the blood make diseases is due to these little white
their way through the blood -vessels in cells . When we get better from in
the neighbourhood of the damage, not flammation of the lungs, or scarlet
in ones, but in thousands. They can fever, or measles , whooping-- cough,
be watched doing so , and we find that chicken -pox, and so on , it is not the
it may take perhaps as long as half an doctor who has made us well , but it is
hour for a single cell to make its way ourselves, acting mainly through our
through . There they gather round the white blood -cells . What the doctor
place of damage. can do and does is simply to put us
in the best possible conditions so that
THETO LITTLE
SAVE
WHITE SOLDIERS THAT DIE
YOUR LIFE we may be able to cure ourselves.
Meanwhile, if it is at all a serious Long ages ago great men wrote and
damage, in some wonderful way the spoke about the healing power of
whole body seems to be told of the fact , Nature . The Latin phrase for that
and the various organs which make is worth mentioning, for it has to be
these white blood - cells are urged into learned some time . It is vis medicatrix
unusual activity . If, now , we count naturæ . Vis means power or force ,
the white cells in a drop of blood any- and medicatrix means healing. Every
where, taken from any part, we may day that we study the body in health
find them greatly increased . The cells or in disease , whether the body of
which emigrate from the place where man , or the bodies of the lower
the damage is attack the microbes, animals, or the bodies of plants, we
and in nearly every case are victorious, learn more and more to respect and
killing them and eating them up . understand this healing power of
It is by this means that we recover Nature . If we come to think of it ,
from such a damage. If you have ever life has always, since it began upon
had a poisoned finger, it was the white the rth , had enemies to fight against
cells of your blood that enabled you to --changes of temperature, blows by
recover ; it was they who killed the the wind and blows of water, accidents
attacking microbes which had got into of a thousand kinds, the attacks of
your finger, They die in tens of other kinds of life , things that were
thousands when they do this, and the poisonous to life , and so on .
creamy sort of stuff which we some 1E GREAT WONDER OF THE WAY IN
times call “ matter," which the doctor THEWHICH NATURE HEALS US

sometimes has to let out of a poisoned Therefore , from the very first, it
finger , is largely made up of the dead has been necessary for living creatures
bodies of these little soldiers which have to learn how to recover from injury.
died to save the body they belong to. If every injury were to leave damage
that remained , life could not have gone
ONE OF THEMOST WONRERFULLIFE
STORIES on . Throughout the ages this power
The white cells, then , which were so of recovery must have been increasing,
long a puzzle, now provide us with and perhaps, on the whole , it is greater
one of the most wonderful stories that in man than in any other creature.
can be read in the whole book of life . We know the existence of disease and
They are the defensive army of the death and accident, and we see the
body against living enemies from out- evidence of much injury that cannot
side, as also against foreign particles be repaired around us ; but we ought
that are not alive. They have often not to forget how much injury , how
been described as the scavengers of the many accidents, how many risks of
body, or as its police . So far as we can poisoning, are made right by this
judge at present , during a considerable healing power of Nature . When that
part of our lives they have very little great phrase was invented, men did
to do, but they always have to be in not in the least understand how this
readiness, like soldiers or police or the healing power worked. They had
fire -brigade, because at any moment scarcely examined the body at all ;
something may happen which needs they merely saw that living creatures
their attention . It seems quite clear in general had something within them
that our recovery from all infectious that could often protect and save them .
ZOTTN
1462
 PU Drums OLARA-THE WHITE CELLS OF THE BLOODmm

But now we can point to the white posed to be useful, paralyse the white
cells of the blood, and can say that here , cells so that they cannot do their work .
in visible form , is the healing power of This is one of the chief reasons why
Nature about which our ancestorsspoke. most doctors are nowadays giving much
We can take a drop of blood from a less medicine than they used to give .
patient who is recovering from an in- They are learning to trust more to the
fectious disease, and can see the white healing power of the body itself, and
cells eatingup the microbes in that drop they will not take the responsibility of
of blood - can practically see what is giving things which simply interfere
happening in his blood at that moment . with that healing power, and perhaps
This is far from being the only means do nothing else . One of the things
by which the body protects itself, but which has the most marked action in
it is perhaps the most wonderful. his respect is alcohol . In the presence
THE WONDERFUL THINGS THAT HAPPEN of only tiny quantities of this substance,
the white cells cease to move , and will
Another thing which the story of take no notice of microbes which, if the
these white cells teaches us is the alcohol were not present, they would
wonderful unity of the body. The eat up at once. This explains why
least little injury — a little dirt or the both men and animals who have been
given alcohol do not recover from
trapping of a finger-nail — and the whole infectious
body seems to know at once. Thę diseases so often as those who
spleen, which is far away inside the have had no alcohol.
body, tiny little glands lying under the Besides the red cells and the white
skin of the neck and in the armpit-all cells, there are other tiny little bodies
these are made aware, SO to say, in the blood, though we should almost
probably by means of chemical messen- think that there could be no room for
gers sent them from the injured part , them . They are very tiny , round, and
and at once they begin to double or transparent, and are called the blood
treble their activities and produce plates ; they are much more numerous
millions of white cells—all because the than the white cells, but much less
tip of a finger is in trouble. numerous than the red . At present
This is one of the great services of we do not know their use .
the blood , in addition to all the other THEOUR
GASE S THAT
BLOOD
HELP TO MAKE UP

services it performs. It not only carries

oxygen and food, and the soldiers-or
should we call them the sailors ?-of
the body, but it is a great carrier of
messages and messengers. Nothing
happens in any part of the body without
producing chemical changes, and the
compounds which are the results of
these changes get into the blood, and
are carried by the blood -stream ; then ,
whenever they come to another part of
the body which has some business with
them , the appropriate result happens.
We may hope that some day nations
may be as beautifully and unselfishly
ordered as the human body is.
W ALCOHOL DESTROYS THE POWER
We have lately learned that the white
cells are much affected by many things
in the course of our lives besides the
occurrence of damage or danger. Large
numbers of them enter the blood when
we digest a meal . We do not yet know
why. But we have learned that a great
many drugs, many of which were sup-
MENTIODOOTTORIO DO
1463
That is all we need say about the
solid part of the blood. We still have
the liquid part and the gaseous part to
study. There is much less to say about
the gaseous part , but we shall take that
first because it goes with what we have
said about the duties of the red cells.
The most important gas in the blood
is, of course, oxygen . Of this very litt ) :
is found in the blood in the veins which
is going to the lungs , but much in the
blood that is coming from the Jungs.
Nearly the whole of it occurs , however,
not as a gas, in which state it would take
up far too much room , but combined
with Hb to form HbO2 . as we have seen .
A very little oxygen is simply dissolved
in the fluid part of the blood.
A good deal of nitrogen is always
dissolved in the fluid part of the blood,
to which it has gained entry from the
air through the lungs. It serves no
purpose, and does nothing of any kind .
Without compounds of nitrogen in our
food we should die , but it is only certain
 Xarxa ECODE
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
kinds of humble plants that can take creatures that have blood and in the
simple nitrogen and combine it. The body fuid of those creatures which have
whole animal world , including our- no blood. The particular salt which
selves, is dependent for its nitrogen carries the carbonic acid within itself,
compounds upon them . from the tissues to the lungs - or, at
When we breathe chloroform or any rate , carries much the greater part
laughing-gas in order to avoid pain , of it — is called sodium carbonate, and
these gases are, of course, to be found though we may not have heard the name
in the blood . Also, when we breathe before, yet we have all heard of washing
impure air, the various gases occurring soda, and that is really the same thing.
in it are to be found in the blood . Now, sodium carbonate itself is a com
HE GAS THAT IS ALWAYS BEING MADE pound of the metal sodium and carbonic
THEIN OUR BODIES acid , but there is another salt which is
These, however, are exceptions. There very nearly the same, only it contains
is one other most important gas which two doses,so to speak, of carbonic acid
is always found in the blood, and instead of one in each of its molecules.
corresponds, so to say, with the oxygen This salt is called sodium bi-carbonate,
about which we have been talking . bi simply meaning two. Now, we also
This gas is carbonic acid, the molecule know sodium bi-carbonate quite well,
of which consists of one atom of carbon for it is none other than what we call
and two ofoxygen , so that we write for baking soda . Outside the body, when
it CO2 . This is a constant and con- we study these two salts, we can observe
tinuous product of our bodies , just as that, under certain conditions, the
it is the product of the burning of a fire. simple carbonate will take up carbonic
If a fire does not get rid of its carbonic acid and become bi-carbonate ; and in
acid, it will be choked, and the same is other conditions the bi-carbonate will
true of ourselves . There are thus two give up half its carbonic acid, and
great differences, and not one, between become the simple carbonate.
the blood that runs to the fingers and w THE BODY GETS RID
OF THE
the blood that runs back from them . Hº POISONOUS GAS THAT IT MAKES
The blood that runs to the fingers is rich These two processes are going on cease
in oxygen, as we have seen , but contains lessly in our blood, and are necessary for
scarcely any carbonic acid ; the blood our lives ; but it seems that they go on
that comes back in the veins is poor in much more easily and quickly in our
oxyger , but rich in carbonic acid, which blood than outside , partly because of
it is carrying to the lungs, where we get the warmth of the body, and probably
rid of quantities of it every time we also because of some power the body has
breathe out . There is such a quantity of making chemical changes within
of this carbonic acid gas to be carried itself quick and easy, though they may
back from the tissues to the lungs that be slow and difficult outside.
it could not be packed away in the blood And now we can picture what hap
in its gaseous form , and so, just as the pens when pure blood goes to nourish
oxygen has to be combined with some- any part of the body. Dissolved in the
thing and packed away in HbO2, which fluid part of it is a quantity of sodium
is really a solid , so the carbonic acid has carbonate. Now, the part of the body
to be combined with something to which it goes is living, which means
WHYMOMENT
NONE OF US CAN LIVE FOR A burning, and has made a lot of carbonic
WITHOUT SALT acid which it must get rid of. This
It seems, however, that neither the passes into the blood and combines with
red blood- ce ls , nor the white, nor the the sodium carbonate which it finds
blood-plates, have anything to do with there, so as to form sodium bi-carbonate ,
this . It is mainly done by one of the and that is carried back in the veins,by
precious salts which are always to be which at last it reaches the lungs - it
found dissolved in the fluid part of the probably gets there even from the feet
blood . There is a large number of in about two minutes — and there the
these salts , all of which are necessary to sodium bi-carbonate is broken up again
our lives, and therefore necessary parts and loses the extra dose of carbonic acid
of our food . Most, if not all of them , which it got from the body, and we
are similarly found in the blood of all breathe that out , and so are rid of it.
1.164
 summa maramuTHE WHITE CELLS OF THE BLOOD

This, we see , leaves sodium carbonate but if we had to call any one of them
again in the blood, ready to go to the more important than the others, it
tissues again , and take up another dose would be the sodium carbonate, or bi
of carbonic acid just as it did before . carbonate, about which we have been
And so it goes round and round again, speaking. This, however, is not the
like the hæmoglobin and the oxygen. most abundant of the salts in blood.
The greatest difference is really that in Common salt , or sodium chloride,
the one case something which they want which we all know so well, is the most
is being taken to the tissues, whilst in abundant salt in the blood, and gives
the other case something they must be blood its salt taste, just as it gives
rid of is being taken away from them . tears their salt taste ; the tears, of
REAL MACHINERY THAT WORKS course, have got their salt from the
THE
WHEN WE BREATHE blood. We are far from understanding
But now we are able to look at these yet what the sodium chloride in the
two things as the two balanced halves blood is really necessary for. Certainly
of one process , and that process is we know some useful things it does ,
breathing, the first necessity of all life. but probably there is a great deal more
Everything that we call breathing - that we do not yet know . It helps
moving our chest and taking in air, and to keep certain parts of the blood and
so on-is really only the beginning of the body fluid , for some of the things
one half of it — that is to say, getting necessary to the blood and the body
the oxygen ; and the end of the other will turn stiff and solid if the salt is
half of it-that is to say, getting rid taken from them. Also , the common
of the carbonic acid . The real breath- salt in the blood is of great importance
ing is what the living cells of the body in the digestion of food, for as it passes
do themselves, aided by the ever- through the walls of the stomach
moving blood , which brings them the certain wonderful little cells that
oxygen aïd takes away the carbonic line the stomach act upon this common
acid . salt , or sodium chloride, and produce
We know that when a flame burns in from it an acid, called hydrochloric acid,
a good draught it burns quickly and which they pour into the stomach when
brightly. Now , what does the draught ever we take any food, and which is
do ? It simply blows oxygen to the fuel, very important in digestion.
and then blows away the carbonic acid THE BLOOD HELPS THE BODY TO
that is produced when it burns. If we Hºw
UXOLDALELLULLLLLLL

GET RID OF WHAT IT DOES NOT WANT

come to think of it , that is exactly the But the sodium chloride of the blood
VLLLLLLLQUE

same as what happens while the blood is probably more important than we
GELAXI

moves in our body ; and just as a fire understand yet . As for the other
LLLLL
MAI
CELL
LULUI
LL

burns brightest in a good draught, so salts , we scarcely know at all why they
our bodies burn best and in the most should be necessary, though they cer
healthy way when the blood moves tainly are .
quickly through them .
Sometimes the The rest of the fluid part of the blood
blood moves too slowly, and becomes is the most astonishing mixture of
almost stagnant in one part or another wonderful things in the whole world .
of the body. This simply means that Only quite lately have we begun to
that part cannot breathe, and so it falls learn how wonderful it is. Every
ill. And if the blood be prevented speck of food that is to be of any use to
altogether from going to any part of the us must be carried by the blood ; and
body, in a very short time it will die. this alone means that it contains a
Perhaps we are beginning to learn how large number of compounds of very
wonderful the blood is . different kinds - various kinds of fat ,
NO OFMANTHEQUITE KNOWS THE BUSINESS sugar, and especially the precious food
SALT IN OUR BLOOD stuffs which proteids.
we call
Now, there still remains the fluid Then , again , all the substances which
part of the blood to study, and this are produced by the life of the tissues
is equally necessary for our lives. We and have to be got rid of are
have already learned one thing about poured into and contained in the fluid
it—that it contains various salts dis- part of the blood. We must not
solved in it. They all are necessary, imagine that carbonic acid is the only
KUOLIUOUX LU MrNODOTDOUDOUTORIT
1465
M
 no CORRERIES -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
product of the life of the tissues, though carried about by it for that purpose .
it is the most important one. There Perhaps we shall begin to thin's ,
are many others, probably amounting then, that a drop of blood is, on the
to scores, all of which have to be got whole, the most wonderful thing in
rid of by the various organs which, the world. I do not think it would be
besides the lungs, exist for this purpose, possible to get anything so complicated
especially the kidneys and the skin. in so little space as a drop of blood .
Nor is this all . As we have learned But though the blood serves the brain ,
during the present century, the blood as it does the rest of the body, and
also contains, in addition to the white though in a very few seconds the brain
cells, various Auid substances which stops acting if it does not get fresh
are poisonous to microbes. This is blood, the brain is really more wonderful
one of the reasons why we are ever still, and a speck of it containing the
healthy at all - why, though we fre- nerve-cells is a thousand times further
quently breathe microbes, though we beyond our understanding even than
take millions of them in our food, and the blood is, for it is those nerve- cells
though many of there would be injurious with which we think, and that is the
to us if they could , we lead what would mystery of mysteries.
have long ago been called a “ charmed We must now learn about the heart,
life.” These protective substances are and the way in which it drives the
partly produced by the white cells of blood. This great discovery was made
the blood, by an
and are English -
partly man, and
given to it is fair to
it by the say that
tissues of all real
the body. k now
The y ledge of
exist in the work
the blood ing of
of the the body
lower dat es
animals from that
as they The first these pictures shows how blood
of -vesselslook through microscope.
a time . This
do in our They arefilledwith blood and its cells, most ofthem red cells,roundandregular, is one of
own . Then but some of them white cells, large and jelly-like. In the second picture we seesome those
the blood of thesoldier-cells-- the large white cells of the blood -makingora two
standmicrobes.
against great dis
contains aa number of microbes, shown dark. One cell has eaten one
coveries
large number of special compounds that open the door to whole realms of
madeby the body itself for its own use. Nature. Somediscoveries are like this :
Those parts of the body which produce they explain any number of things that
special chemical substances are called could not be explained befcre. They show
glands. Many glands have little tubes the way to still further knowledge, and
running from them , into which they give us the means of getting there. The
send what they produce; for instance , discovery of the living cell, the discovery
the glands that produce the saliva of gravitation , the discovery of the earth's
that comes into our mouths when we eat . motion round the sun , and the discovery
But several other glands have no tubes of the circulation of the blood-all
of this kind atall. They exist in order these belong to this class of mighty
to make contributions to the blood for keys to Nature's plan ; and when we
the good of the whole body, and as go on to learn many new things about
the blood passes through them it the body, and about life in general,, we
simply takes up these contributions, have to remember that though we now
and carries them where they will be see further even than William Harvey,
useful. Then there are also, as we about whom we must learn in the next
know, substances in the blood which part, it is because we are, as it were,
simply act as messengers between one standing on his shoulders.
part of the body and another, and are The next part of this is on page 1579.
1466
 SMAKE
The Child's Book of
MIL
PEARE MEN & WOMEN TON

HOW THE FAIRY TALES WERE TOLD

[ N o!den times people were more superstitious than they are to-day, and
IN readier to believe in unnatural and supernatural beings, so that accidents,
misfortunes, and “ lucky " events were supposed to have been brought about

RUBENS
by spirits or by creatures who had the power of making themselves visible

night
or invisible as they chose. Such creatures were the fairies, the brownies,
the goblins, and the gnomes . Of course, there was no end to what these fairy
folk could do, and in lonely country places everybody would have some tale
about them which he thought to be true. Thus was created what we call folk
lore, or the simple stories told by the countryfolk of all lands. Out of this
folklore many fairy tales have come, and no one knows who told them first, as
they existed for long centuries before people wrote stories down and signed
them with their names. Even famous tellers of fairy tales have often been
content merely to relate some of these old stories, and not to invent new ones.

ON
WRITERS OF THE FAIRY BOOKS
n that marvellous
IN city which is CONTINUED FROM 1308
itself a fairy story,
Venice, whose grand
old palaces and magnificent
churches seem to rise up amid
the shallow salt waters by the
CRO
MW
Adriatic Sea as iſ at the touch
ELL
of some great magician's wand,
there lived in the early years of
the sixteenth century a man named
Giovanni Francesco Straparola.
We know very little about this
Straparola, except that he was a
writer of stories . In those days
Venice was the wonder of the
world, and all sorts of clever men
were drawn to the town because
of its riches, and the splendid
company to be found there.
Straparola was a clever Italian
who had gone there doubtless be-
cause it was a famous place for
printing books ; and there , formany
years,in some unknown house by the
side of some old canal this man with
the strange -sounding name wrote
his stories and got them printed in
that lovely cityof the sea.
All the stories that he wrote can-
not be called fairy tales ; but as
he drew very largely from folklore,
most of them are pure fairy stories.
It was a later writer who wrote the
CLAD
story of “ Puss in Boots,” yet
STO Straparola had told the tale before
him , though his Puss wore no boots.
Towards the end of the seven-
teenth century, and in the carly years
JULIUS CAESAR
WEL
LIN
GTON
of the eighteenth ,
“ the pleasant land
of France " was
noted for its writers
of fairy tales. It was then
that ' Blue Beard, Little Red
Riding Hood,” “ The Sleeping
Beauty,” Mother Goose , ' DAB
WIN
" Beauty and the Beast," and many
another of our old favourites first
took the form in which we know
them to -day. The two great writers
of fairy stories at that time were a
Parisian named Charles Perrault ,
and a French countess, Madame
D’Aulnoy. And now we see how
grateful we should be for many of
our happiest hours to that forgotten
Straparola, when we are told that
both Perrault and the countess got
most of their ideas from his writings.
He must have been a kindly old
gentleman , this Monsieur Perrault
who was busy with the affairs of
State, being the official in charge of
the Royal buildings, and a member
of the great French Academy-to
have found time and delight in
telling his own children these
charming stories, and then writing
them down for the children of all
the world. He was nearly seventy
years of age when his principal
book of fairy stories appeared , 0
and in dedicating it to one of
the young princes of France , he RUS
KIN
made believe the stories were told by
one of his own children , which was
only a pretty device for commending
HERBERI SPENCCAS

1467
 « THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN- z.sex

them to other young folk ; for Perrault, one would expect to be fond of telling
though a very learned scholar, was not fairy tales. As a matter of fact, they were
ashamed to set the fashion of writing sober, industrious scholars whose whole
fairy stories , which now became very lives were devoted to literary studies
popular with the ladies and gentlemen of and teaching, both of them becoming
leisure. The proper title of his book professors at the university of Berlin.
66
Stories or Tales of Past Times ," Grave and learned gentlemen they were,
but it had another and better title, whose greatest concern was to produce
( 6

“ Tales of Mother Goose .” books of a kind that only students read ,

THETALE
GRAND LADY WHO WROTE THE and yet they quite unconsciously made
OF CINDERELLA themselves famous for ever by collecting
One of the many grand ladies who the old German fairy stories into a book,
lived in France at the same time as which has been translated into all the
Perrault and amused themselves by principal languages of the world , and
writing stories was Madame D'Aulnoy: has made the name of the brothers
Every time that Christmas comes round Grimm as well known in England and
and they are playing pantomimes at America as it was in native land .
the theatres, her stories, like those of They went out together, these two
Perrault, are used throughout our land industrious scholars, among the country
for this form of entertainment. “ The people of Germany, and induced them
The Yellow Dwarf," to tell such stories as they knew of the
White Cat,” “ The
“ The Fair One with the Golden Locks," fairies. What a charming occupation,
“ Cinderella,” and many another nursery and how delightful were the results !
favourite was shaped by her pen from HANS CHRISTIAN ANDERSEN, THE LONG
SON
the earliest tales of Straparola. There
were many other ladies who, about the The other name that stands beside
time of Madame D'Aulnoy and somewhat the Grimms in fame is that of Hans
later, practised this delightful art of Christian Andersen, the great Danish
weaving fairy tales, but none of them story -teller, who is really a much abler
calls for notice, and as they all borrowed writer than the Grimms. Hans Ander
from that little-known writer who plied sen was certainly one who knew the
his pen by the sparkling waters of fairies, as most of his wonderful stories
Venice, a hundred years before them , such as “ Little Klaus and Big Klaus,
our thanks for the pleasure of these old “ The Little Mermaid,” “ The Tinder
66

tales are perhaps more due to him . Box," “ The Wild Swans,” “ The Ugly
)

The names of the authors of whom we Duckling,” and “ The Snow Queen
have been reading may be unknown to were told to him not by the peasant- folk ,
all our readers, but we come now to but by the fairies of his own brain .
those whose names are familiar to We might almost say that while Hans
every one of us. Andersen knew the fairies, the Grimms,
THE BROTHERS GRIMM , WHO
WROTE and the others we have spoken about,
GERMAN FAIRY STORIES only knew the folk who knew the fairies.
What delight is associated with the A wonderful and a strange man he
otherwise forbidding name of Grimm ! was, this Hans Christian Andersen.
1)

“ Tom Thumb," " The Queen Bee,” The son of a poor cobbler, he was born
“ Hansel and Gretel,” * The Frog in the year 1805 in the ancient city
Prince," " Rumpel-stiltskin ," and ever of Odense , in Denmark. The poor
so many other stories that boys and girls cobbler was a iearned man in his way,
for nearly ahundred years now have been and used to read books at night with
reading with endless entertainment, were his son Hans,who was growingfather
up a long,
all written down by two brothers named lanky lad. But neither nor
his
Grimm , who lived in Germany during the mother were sufficiently strict about
first half of last century. Jacob Grimm his attending school, so that, as a boy,
was the elder of the two brothers, being his education was very irregular. He
Lorn at the town of Hanau on January 4, was perhaps more sensitive than most
1785 , while his brother Wilhelm was children, being of a nervous, highly
born on February 24 , 1786 . strung nature, and his mother found it
These two brothers were probably not necessary to arrange the first school
in the least like the sort of people he attended that he should never be
TITTYY
1168
 HANS ANDERSEN'S DREAM OF FAIRYLAND
Mint

ra
TVARKTISLAVA
raro

mas Martans
Hans Christian Andersen was the greatest of all the writers of fairy tales. His mind was like a wonderland
thronged with fairy folk, and in his stories he has told us what these little people of his dreams could do. Here we
see him seated in thoughtful mood, while many of the fairies to whom his pen has introduced us are busy in the air
about him . If we read his stories we shall know all these quaint little beings as though they were old friends.
Ooruvotion
1469
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
birched. One day when the mistress, after his name was known throughout
forgetting this , gave him a slight tap Europe he was so poor a man of busi
with the rod, he immediately took up his ness, and made so little money from his
books and slate and marched off home. stories, that he had grown into an old
His mother then sent him to another bachelor before he could have afforded
school , where, among the scholars, was to marry : So he never had any chil
a tiny girl who told Hans once that her dren of his own to listen to his fairy
ambition was to be a dairymaid at a tales, which have charmed the children
large country house. of all the world . Nor did he think so
WHAT HAPPENED WHEN HANS ANDERSEN much of these tales himself at first.
His ambition was to be a great dra
You shall be a dairymaid at my matist or novelist or poet. Some suc
castle when I am a gentleman ,” said cess he had in each of these branches of
the boy in jest , and he drew upon his the literary art , and indeed, for a time,
slate a rough picture of what his castle was very famous as a novelist .
was like. The little fairies of the brain His fairy stories were written at first to
were already at work prompting him please his own fancy or to entertain the
to tell strange stories about himself. children of friends in Copenhagen ; but,
So hewent on to assure the little scholar you see, it was fairy stories the world
that he was really of noble birth, but wanted him to write, and although his
that the fairies had changed him in novels and poems, as well as his plays,
his cradle. The girl was very matter- are seldom read by anyone now, the
of- fact, and she only replied to his world will never let the fairy tales of
fanciful tale by turning to some play. Hans Christian Andersen, the poor
mates and exclaiming, “ He is mad, cobbler's son , who died in 1875 , be
like his grandfather ." Alas, it was true forgotten .
this grandfather
his unhappy reception of -witted
was weak one of, his
and NAMAN
WHO
WEL HAWTHORNE, THE AMERICAN
earliest efforts to tell a fairy story must We have now to take a long imaginary
have filled the sensitive boy with dread. trip across the Atlantic Ocean to that
It would be quite a long story if we pleasant part of America which is called
were to follow the incidents of Hans New England, if we wish to visit the
Andersen's life, though everything con- old home of the next story-teller who
cerning this strange genius would be claims our attention - Nathaniel Haw
well worth telling. We can only, how- thorne. He, too, was born in an old
ever , mention a very few of the facts of fashioned town and lived among old
his life. His father died when the lad fashioned people; for Salem, in the State
was eleven , and even at that age he had of Massachusetts, some fifteen miles
made very poor use of his schooling, distant from the great town of Boston,
dreaming and idling his time away. was one of the old homes of the Puri
HANS ANDERSEN WENT OUT TO tans. It was there that Hawthorne was
HowMAKE A FORTUNE , AND WHAT HE DID born in the year 1804. His ancestors
It was not very long before he had a for generations had been seafaring folk ,
stepfather, and soon he had to think of and his own father never returned from
making his way in the world by going one of his long and dangerous voyages.
to Copenhagen , the capital of his Nathaniel seems to have been an
country. It was all because of having imaginative, sensitive boy, proud of his
appeared on the stage of the theatre at brave forefathers and his beautiful
Odense in a very tiny part in “ Cinder- mother. He entered into all sorts of
ella," and having written a boyish play boyish games, but meeting with an
which he thought good enough for the accident at bat and ball , he was crippled
stage , that long, dreamy Hans, the for a time, and during those days he
laughing-stock of all the lads of Odense, became a great reader. He was very
set off on the coach with a little bundle fond of “ TheFaërie” Queene " and “ The
packed by his mother and the sum of Pilgrim's Progress." " A
A little later he
thirty-seven shillings in his pocket to had another illness, and had to stay so
seek fame and fortune in Copenhagen ; long an invalid that he could only pass
but many a sad and hungry day he was to his time in book-reading. But his
'have before he was famous, and even accident and his illness were not )
1470
 -WRITERS OF THE FAIRY BOOKS- EKO. CELLEA ILIKE

altogether misfortunes if they stored writer of romance, Sir Walter Scott,

his young mind with so much of what took great delight in reading.
is best in English literature . When he But more interesting than Croker
himself came to write down stories of and a closer friend of the fairies—for
the people he had known and the life they must have come to her, as she could
of old Salem , the richness of his mind, not go to them—was a blind Irish lady
as the result of his early reading , was named Frances Browne, who wrote
seen in the beauty of his literary style. “ Granny's Wonderful Chair.” The
Nathaniel Hawthorne had written a fairy stories told from Granny's wonder
great many beautiful stories before he ful chair are full of delicious fancy and
began the book which should endear his bright with pictures of Nature. Yet it
name to all young people and entitles would not be too much to say that there
him to come into our little company of is nothing so wonderful about them as
those who knew the fairies . This is the fact that their gay and lively scenes
called “ The Wonder Book ," and it is could have been described by a poor
surely one of the most delightful series woman whose eyes hadneverlooked upon
of fairy stories ever written . the beauties of Nature. Frances Browne
THE STRANGE OLD LEGENDS OF GREECE was blind from infancy, but she must
OVER have had that “ inner vision " which
The author's own children were just enables its possessor to see into themys
tiny tots when he wrote “ The Gorgon's teries of life with the eyes of the soul.
Head," " The Three Golden Apples," A wonderful figure in every way
“ The Dragon's Teeth , and ten other was this poor Irish woman, and since
stories that every boy and girl must she had not the use of her eyes, she
read. They tell over again with a developed the use of other faculties.
wonderful freshness , and in a way that For example, while her brothers and
is . altogether unique, the strange old sisters were saying their lessons aloud for
legends of Greece. As soon as he wrote the next day at school , she would learn
these stories he read them to his own their lessons by heart , and to induce
children , and so keen were they to hear them to read to her, she began invent
and clever to remember, that they could ing stories from her own imagination.
)
repeat most of “ The Wonder Book BLIND IRISH LADY
WHO WROTE
by heart before it was printed . THE“ GRANNY'S WONDERFUL CHAIR "
For grown -up readers Nathaniel Haw When only seven years of age Frances
thorne wrote one of the greatest novels, Browne had composed a poem , but at
which he called “ The Scarlet Letter ," fifteen she was so impressed with the
and it is for this he is chiefly famous. wonderful music of Homer's “ Iliad ,”
He was for some years the American when that was read to her, that she had
Consul at Liverpool, and he died at the her own poor childish efforts destroyed,
town of Concord in the United States, and did not again attempt to compose
in the year 1864. poems until she was twenty- four. From
STORY-TELLERS OF IRELAND, A REAL that age onwards, she composed much
THEHOME OF FAIRIES charming verse and many stories ,
Ireland is a real home of fairies, the removing from her Irish home to
Irish people having had in the old days Edinburgh, where she became a busy
far more stories of “ the wee folk ," as contributor to the magazines .
the fairies are often called , than the “ Granny'sWonderful Chair ” she wrote
English. So it is surprising that there in 1856, after settling in London , and
are not many Irish story-tellers to it immediately became the favourite
mention in the present company. fairy -story book of the day. Her last
Perhaps Thomas Crofton Croker, who novel was written in 1887 , when she
was born in 1798, and died in 1854, was seventy-one years of age ; and the
is the most notable of those who, like life of Frances Browne, though one of
the brothers Grimm , collected and comparative poverty, was rich in the
recorded the folklore of his country. pleasures of the imagination and in the
He wrote a fascinating book called joy her fairy stories have brought, and
“ The Fairy Legends and Traditions still bring, to multitudes of readers.
of the South of Ireland ,” which we That fine novelist and splendid type
know that that great and famous of the Christian gentleman , Charles
1471
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Kingsley, might be included here, for stories for the amusement of the
did he not write “ The Water Babies,” children of his friends .
which he must have had from the Perhaps he was just a little “ moody,"
And John Ruskin also , for being sometimes rather a dull companion
fairies ?
he wrote “ The King of the Gold :n to grown -ups, and although he was
River ," a perfect fairy tale. But sixty -six years of age at the time of his
we shall have to speak of them death, on January 14, 1898, he had never
among the writers of the great books, been married. But though he was an
66 9
and so we pass to one who is surely old bachelor " for many years before
the greatest of all our modern ex- his death, he was a comparatively
plorers of fairyland - none other than young one when he wrote his immortal
the creator of “ Alice in Wonderland. ” story of “ Alice's Adventures in Wonder
HETOOK
THE CLEVER STORY- TELLER WHO FIRST
US ALL TO “ WONDERLAND "
land ,” first published in 1865. It is very
interesting to know how he came to
On the title - pages of his books we write this story. There really was a
know this most celebrated of modern little girl named Alice, one of many
fairy-story tellers as “ Lewis Carroll,” but little girls who were delighted when
in real life he had a very different and Lewis Carroll came to visit their parents,
much less attractive name - Charles as they had never any difficulty in
Lutwidge Dodgson . We will only think getting him to tell a story. The real
of him as Lewis Carroll , however , as it Alice was a daughter of Dean Liddell,
was under that name, just forty years and she herself has told us how the
ago , he became the favourite story- wonderful story was first begun.
teller for boys and girls. LEWIS CARROLL TOLD ALICEА
Everybody , of course , has read HºwSTORY ON THE RIVER BANK
" Alice in Wonderland ," and perhaps We cannot do better than let the
his other fairy books as well—“ Through words of the real Alice be heard again .
the Looking-Glass," " The Hunting of “ Most of Mr. Dodgson's stories," she
1)
the Snark,” and “ Sylvie and Bruno . says, “ were told to us on river expedi
It is quite unnecessary to recall the name tions to Nuneham or Godstow, near
of the many strange characters, such as Oxford. My eldest sister, now Mrs.
the Mad Hatter , Tweedledum and Skene , was Prima, I was Secunda,
Tweedledee, the White Rabbit, and all and Tertia was my sister Edith . I
that varied throng with which every believe the beginning of “ Alice ' was told
boy and girl loses no time in making one summer afternoon when the sun was
acquaintance. so burning that we had landed in the
But what sort of man was he from meadows down the river, deserting the
whose brain of teeming fancies these boat to take refuge in the only bit of
strange and delightful creatures came ? shade to be found, which was under a
Should we picture him as a jolly, new -made hayrick . Here from all three 6
middle -aged gentleman, leading á life came the old petition of ‘ Tell us a story,'
free from care, and happiest with his and so began the ever-delightful tale.
children round his knees, telling stories ? Sometimes, to tease us—and per
“ LEWIS CARROLL ” AND LITTLE Alice, haps being really tired—Mr. Dodgson
THE DEAN'S DAUGHTER
would stop suddenly and say, ' And
Such a picture would be curiously that's all till next time.' ' Ah, but it
incorrect, for Lewis Carrollwas in is next time ! ' would be the exclamation
certain ways as strange a character from all three, and after some persua
as some of his own fairy folk . In sion the story would start afresh .
the first place, he was, of all things Another day, perhaps, the story would
in the world , a mathematician , and begin in the boat , and Mr. Dodgson ,
lectured at Oxford University on that in the middle of telling a thrilling
sicence which is the terror of most young adventure, would pretend to go fast
scholars. Perhaps it was because he spent asleep, to our great dismay . "
so much time over difficult problems in Is not that a pretty story of how the
mathematics that he liked to clear gate was open that leads us into
and refresh his brain with humorous Wonderland ? Lewis Carroll himself
thoughts and happy fancies, which he has told us of that afternoon when
turned into the shape of fantastic little Alice Liddell and her sisters
OUDINER
1472
 సంయంయలయం ముందు

THE FIRST TELLING OF " ALICE IN WONDERLAND ”

da
you
cen
" Lewis Carroll" became famous chiefly because he had three little friends , one of whom w "ati s named Alice , who
were
land, always
when heasking him to
had gone for“ atell a story."
picnic up theOne daywith
river he began
his little make up. aThat
to friends storystory
of strange ava eningsin Wonder
was . ! anapp
the beginning of “ Alice
in Wonderland ," and years later, when he wrote it down and published it , it made his
Doops name known for ever .
ETUD
1473
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN . ALERIO

first induced him to begin describing It was not only to the little girls that
Wonderland, for at the beginning of his Lewis Carroll told his stories. Little
book we read of it in these lively verser • boys also were his friends, and one
All in the golden afternoon of these was named Greville Macdonald ,
Full leisurely we glide ; whom he almost convinced on one
For both our oars , with little skill , occasion that it would be an excellent
By little arms are plied ; thing to have a marble head , as he
While little hands make vain pretence
Our wanderings to guide. would not need to comb his hair !
Ah , cruel Three ! In such an hour, ,
WROTE “ BRER FOX " & " MR . TWO - LEGS"
Beneath such dreamy weather,
To beg a tale of breath too weak The father of this lad was a very
To stir the tiniest feather ! famous man , a great preacher, the
Yet what can one poor voice avail author of many fine novels, a poet.
Against three tongues together ? His name was George Macdonald . He,
Anon , to sudden silence won , too, was one who knew the fairies.
In fancy they pursue
The dream -child moving through a land Though he did not invent such strange
Of wonders wild and new , and comic characters as Lewis Carroll
In friendly chat with bird or beast , has imagined for us, yet he wrote many
And half believe it true .
books of fairy tales— “ At the Back
And ever , as the story drained of the North Wind," “ The Princess and
The wells of fancy dry, the Goblin ,” and many more . Only
And faintly strove that weary one
To put the subject by, four years ago his son Greville, who
“ The rest next time." It is next time ! ” is now a well -known physician and has
The happy voices cry . long known how impossible it is to have
Thus grew the tale of Wonderland ; a marble head, prepared a new edition of
Thus slowly, one by one , his father's famous fairy stories. George
Its quaint events were hammered out Macdonald was born in the north of
And now the tale is done ;
And home we steer, a happy crew , Scotland in 1824 and died in 1905 .
Beneath the setting sun . There are, of course, many other
HOREADLEWIS
W FOUND A GIRL fairy-story tellers. Joel Chandl
GIRL er Harris,
ING " CARROLL.
ALICE ” IN THE TRAIN the American writer, who was born in
We could go on to tell so many 1848 , and died on July 4 , 1908, told 64
stories about this dear friend of the those wonderful negro tales of Uncle
little girls that there would be no space Remus," in which Brer Fox and Brer
left for all the other people that must Rabbit and the Tar Baby have such
come into this book , and, indeed , a wonderful parts to play; and Carl Ewald,
large book has been written about his a Danish schoolmaster, born in 1856 and
life ; but one little story we must find died in 1908 , who wrote “ Mr. Two -Legs,"
room for. He was travelling in a and some seventy other fairy tales. When
railway carriage one day with a lady we have mentioned them , we have noticed
and her little daughter, neither of most of those who knew the fairies.
whom he knew . The girl was reading BEST OF ALL THE FAIRY PLAYS ,
his famous book, and he , who always THE“ PETER PAN "
pretended that Mr. Dodgson was no Though, after all , we may be asked,
relation of Mr. Lewis Carroll, began “ What about · Peter Pan ' ? "
talking to the little reader about Certainly, Mr. J. M. Barrie , the
“ Alice in Wonderland.” At this her writer of that most charming of all
mother joined in and said : the fairy plays, knows the little folk
* Isn't it sad about poor Mr. Lewis as well as any we have mentioned ; but,
Carroll ? He's gone mad , you know .” of course, he is famous for many other
" Indeed ,” said the astonished author, things than the writing of “ Peter Pan.”
“ I had never heard that." Let us hope the time will never come
Oh , I assure you , it is quite true ; when great authors may not think it
I have it on the best authority ! ” worth their while to tell any more stories
A few days later the little girl received of the fairies, for we may be sure there
a copy of “ Through the Looking -glass ” never will be a time when boys and
inscribe i with her name and the words: girls will not be ready to listen to them .
“ From the author, in memory of a The next stories of Men and Women
pleasant jourrey." begin on page 1585.
TITUTO TULO UDOUDOIR QOLIE LOCUDOTUOTTEUUHY DECOURI TOUTOUT

1474
 Songs
Run GOLDE
The Child's Book of
N DEEDS
A Volcano in the Southern Seas
A HEROINE OF THE
Far away in the CONTINUED FROM 1292
Pacific Ocean are
the Sandwich Isles , for
the most part formed of coral,
but with lofty volcanic moun
tains in their midst .
One of these is named Kilauea ,
• and is one of the largest and
most terrible volcanoes in the world.
Its enormous crater contains a lake of
liquid fire, from six to nine miles
round, and the smoke of it rises like a
cloud by day and night . The natives
оо
used to believe that amid the fire
there dwelt a fierce goddess named
Pe-le, whose bath was in the mighty
... crater, and whose hair was supposed
to be the glassy thread ; that covered
the hills. Everyone stood in awe of
Pe-le, but especially women .
The priests said that if a woman
climbed the mountain , picked berries
from the bushes and flung them into
the lake of fire, the goddess would
“ shake with her thunders, and shatter
her island.”
But a hundred years ago Christian
missionaries came to the island, and
gradually the people gave up their Jehovah the Almighty is my God.
faith in the fierce and savage deities
they had worshipped, and began to
serve the one true Maker of heaven
and earth . Only, the fear of Pe-le
was still upon them , and her flaming
mountain was the heathen stronghold .
Then it was that a brave Christian
woman, strong in faith and courage,
resolved to defy the goddess in her
1475
3
SOUTHERN SEAS
fastness, and break the
spell that bound the
people. Her name
was Kapiolani, and she was the
wife of Naihe, the public orator
of Hawaii . This was in 1825 .
One day she plucked a branch 3
of the sacred berries, which it was
sacrilege for a woman to touch , and
started to climb the mountain. It was a
toilsome and terrible ascent of two and a
half miles ; very dangerous, too when
she reached the slippery sheets of lava
and the slopes of crumbling cinders.
The enraged priests of Pe -le came
out of their sanctuary among the
crags, and tried to bar her way with
threats, but she heeded them not .
She pressed on to the summit, and
then clambered down the side of the
terrible crater, till she stood on the
brink of the boiling sea of fire.
Then she hurled into it the sacred
berries, with the words :
“ If I perish by the anger of Pe le ,
oOo
then dread is her power ; but behold ,
I defy her wrath ! I have broken her
orders ; I live and am safe, or
His was the breath that kindled these
flames ; His is the hand which re
strains their fury. Oh , ye people ,
behold how vain are the gods of
)
Hawaii, and serve the Lord !
Safely Kapiolani descended the
mountain , having broken the power of
superstition by her brave deed . and
won her cause of faith and freedom.
 RomaSanchez tartowanitarian RLER

THE MOTHER OF THE GRACCHI

ERE was once a very gracious and
THCHERE she was hostess to the other, and showed
handsome lady in Rome named Cor- nothing of the disdain she felt for the
nelia. She might have married a king, poor frivolous creature.
but she preferred to be the wife of a But presently the grand lady said to
Roman citizen . Her husband's name Cornelia : “ You must have jewels, too.
was Gracchus, and her two sons were Pray show me your most precious
called the Gracchi. She loved them de- things, for I love to look upon jewels. ”
Then Cornelia rose
votedly, educated
them in virtue and and went out of
manliness, and the chamber, and
trained them to be presently returned ,
noble citizens of leading in either
Rome. hand her two
One day there manly sons .
came to her home “ These ," said she,
a fashionable lady, “ are the only
who is thus des jewels of which I
>
cribed by old can boast .”
Robert Burton : Those sons grew
“ Some light house to be heroic men ,
wife belike , that and all Rome knew
was dressed like that the mother
a May lady, and, had made them
as most of our valiant and up
gentlewomen are, right . In her own
was more solicitous lifetime, a statue
of her head -tire was raised to Cor
than of her health , nelia , and on it was
that spent her time written : CORNELIA
between a comb MATER GRAC
CORNELIA SHOWING HER “ JEWELS "
and a glass, and had CHORUM , meaning
rather be fair than honest (as Cato said) , CORNELIA , MOTHER OF THE GRACCHI .
and have the commonwealth turned To be the mother of heroic men is a
topsy -turvy than her tires marred .” great destiny. The name of Cornelia
This fashionable companion lady will live for ever, and her famous
" did nought but brag of her fine sons are chiefly now remembered be
robes and jewels," and the noble Cor- cause they had so great and good a
nelia listened with patience, because mother, and did credit to her training.
A SACRIFICE OF THE CIVIL WAR
HERE is no greater form of heroism
THER habitants to be shot, saying that the city
than that of one man being willing was responsible for the lives of his men .
to die in the place of another, and most Now , one of these selected ten was
wonderful of all is the sacrifice when the father of a large family, and his
one man does not know well the man death would have caused great suffering
whose life he saves at the cost of his own . and hardship to his wife and children .
During the Civil War in the United A young man, not related to him in any
States, which was fougiit for the sake of way, came forward and insisted upon
securing freedom for the slaves in the being taken in his place, saying that his
Southern States , there was great con- life was less valuable than one on whose
sternation in the souther.7 city of life so many others depended. And so,
Palmyra, in Tennessee. This city had great as was the distress of the older
been occupied by an army of the North man , this generous offer was accepted,
in the summer of 1864 , and an officer of and not only spared a father to his
this army had been assassinated. The children , but showed how there is
general of the Northern army promptly self sacrifice even in barbarous times.
condemned ten of the principal in- The next Golden Deeds begin on page 1557.
TOUTLE DONE சாபனாமா கையாண
1476
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE
Jerusalem
THE FIRST KING OF ISRAEL
Thestory
THE of Saul is CONTINUED FROM 1330
most
one of the
interesting in human
biography. He was a man of
immense height , of singular
v
beauty, and a patriot who
loved his nation as a strong father
loves his little son . But with this
fire of patriotism and this nobility
of nature there was entangled a
mood of such sullen gloom that
occasionally it carried Saul to the
very verge of madness. At one
moment he was the happy, great-
hearted warrior ; at the next, the
sullen , melancholy victim of a dread .
ful mania . His face would now be
all sunshine and laughter ; and now ,
all blackness and scowling rage .
would surround himself with merry
friends and be the cheerfullest
company ; and then , in a moment ,
he would bury himself in solitude
and refuse to see even his son.
His story is one of almost incessant
warfare. The first great struggle, after
Samuel's retirement , was with the
Philistines. Saul was carefully pre-
paring for battle with these mighty
people, when his high - spirited son,
the dashing, light-hearted Jonathan ,
struck a sudden blow at a garrison of
the Philistines, and brought the whole
nation about the ears of Saul. Israel
was blown like dust before the whirl-
wind of the fury of the Philistines.
Even Saul fled . It looked as if a final
and crushing blow had fallen upon the
Hebrews . The Ph listines swept .
STORIES
undisputed over the
country. The terrified
Israelites hid in caves.
But Saul , with a remnant of
warriors, determined to make
one stroke for fre dom . He
sent for Samuel to offer the sacred
sacrifices, and when the days passed ,
and Samuel did not come, the
impatient king himself took the
sacred office and did what only the
high priest should have done. Samuel
HA
arrived and condemned the impetuous
Saul . For this sin , the crown was
to go out of Saul's family. Another
than Jonathan should sit upon the
throne of Israel .
The brave young Jonathan, know
ing nothing of what had taken place ,
and being impatient of his father's
delay, stole one day, with only his
armour-bearer at his side , upon a
host of Philistines, and suddenly slew
twenty of them . At that moment
occurred an earthquake. The Philis
tines, frightened by the portent , fled
for their lives. Saul's watchers saw
their flight . In a moment Saul was
at the head of his little band, and ,
like a host of avenging angels, they
fell upon the flying Philistines . Saul,
in the ecstasy of victory, swore an
nath that any man who tasted food
before the battle was ended should die.
Jonathan , knowing. nothing of
this curse, ate some honeycomb,
and Saul would have killed him but
for the people, who refused to let
the young prince who saved them die .
1477
 kamera ancora ...THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES-
Flushed by victory, Saul reorganised discovering this wicked act, chastised
his army , and attacked his enemies with the king with words of judgment , and
the greatest valour. Victory flew with humbled the mighty Saul to the dust .
him. Wherever he went ; the foes of It was after this that Saul became a
Israel scattered like chaff in the terrible victim of melancholy. During one of
wind of his sword . From being a weak his fits of insanity a boy was brought
and enfeebled people, Israel was now a before him whose name was David and
nation of warriors, and Saul's name this boy played upon the harp so
rang like a war-cry through all the sweetly that Saul became pacified, and
regions of the earth . made the boy his minstrel and armour
Samuel now came to him , and bearer.
declared it to be the will of Heaven that Now a strange thing happened . The
Saul should destroy the Amalekites. boy who gave peace tothetroubled king
The war was to be one of punishment . was the boy upon whom had come the
TITLUZE

Saul was not to seek territory or gold. spirit of God to the end that he should
ZITUZTIR

be king. Samuel had anointed this

MUTUOTTEET

boy, who was a shepherd in Bethlehem ,

tomu

as heir to Saul . The boy who minis

Dans
TU
DU

tered to the king was himself to be a

mightier king over Israel. More, he
was to be so great a poet that in every
nation under the sun his poems were to
comfort the sorrowful and give courage
to the sad of heart . And yet , like Saul ,
whom he calmed, he , too , was destined
to be troubled by an evil spirit .
THELEWANDHEM BOASTING GIANTBOY WHO

But now in these days David only

knew that he had been called from
tending his father's sheep to see the
wonderful old prophet of Israel , Samuel,
and that this venerable hero of the
nation , before a large company, had
poured oil upon his head and anointed
him the servant of God . David also
knew that he was different in spirit ,
that some change had come upon him,
and that he was safe in the care of the
Eternal God . He gave peace to the
warrior king of Israel , and returned to
his sheep. But when it was told to him
that a mighty giant of the Philistines,
GOLIATH DEFYING THE ISRAELITES named Goliath , had challenged any
He was to destroy utterly a wicked and man of Israel to fight with him , and that
abominable people. The punishment even Saul had held back, then David
was to teach a lesson to all nations. left his sheep and came down to do
Nothing was to be left of this nation , honour for Israel . He was inspired,
because it had sinned itself out of like a poet .
humanity , and was utterly abhorrent to With rage and indignation the huge
a God leading the nations towards Goliath saw advancing towards him ,
righteousness. Amalek was as danger- not an armed warrior, but a handsome,
ous to the progress of the human race dark -haired lad with · bright eyes, who
as the poisonous germs of disease are wore simple rustic clothes, and carried
to the body. Even the best of the in his hand only a sling for casting
sheep and oxen had to be slain. stones. The giant cursed the boy, and
Saul smote Amalek , but he drove before told him that his flesh should surely
him as wages of battle the flocks and feed the fowls. David took a stone
herds of this horrible people. Samuel, from his belt and fitted it into his sling.
DODUZZI UUT
Per
1478
 GEO COGEDOC
THE FIRST KING OF ISRAEL
With unerring aim he sent the stone very next day the terrible Philistines
flying, and it struck Goliath on the fore- routed Israel at Mount Gilboa . Jona
EGYEZTETETYKSEXUELY

head, and brought him stumbling and
stunned to the earth . Then David
leapt upon the prostrate giant, and with
his own sword hewed off his head.
This was the beginning of David's
fame . He now became a warrior of
LOS
than was destroyed in the midst of the
battle, and Saul, bleeding from his
wounds and utterly broken in spirit, fell
upon his own sword and destroyed him
self. David, when he heard of this
desolation , did not rejoice that his

Israel, and heand Jonathan, the king's oppressor was dead, but uttered one
son , were like brothers. But the of the most beautiful lamentations in
troubled spirit of the king began to the world :
suspect David and to be jealous of him . The beauty of Israel is slain upon thy high
The people praised David ; the king places ; how are the mighty fallen !
heard it , and was bitter. Tell it not in Gath, publish it not in the
And now we come to a history small streets of Askelon ;
with the petty spites of
men. It is a story repeated
all down the ages. Even
the very greatest men are
liable to such a contemp
tible and sorry weakness
as that of jealousy. But
let us hurry over it here.
Saul , the jealous and half

XXO
maniacking, sought to
kill David , and drove
the destined heir of his
throne into the moun

MI
DO
tains. Full of rage and
madness , he massacred
everybody who showed
the smallest kindness to
the poor harried outlaw.
And David twice had
Saul in his power, but,

DOMOK
loving the poor demented
man , he hurt him not .
Samuel was dead , and O

Saul was still seeking to

destroy David , when
something occurred to
divert his thoughts from
spite. The Philistines
rose in force to destroy DAVID LEAPT UPON GOLIATH WITH HIS SWORD
Israel . Saul , in his terror,
sought out a witch at Endor , and Lest the daughters of the Philistines rejoice,
asked her to call up before him the lest the daughters of the uncircumcised
prophet Samuel. The witch, who de triumph .
TELUT

ceived people by pretending that Ye mountains of Gilboa , let there be no

ghosts appeared at her bidding, called
for Samuel to appear.
To her amaze
ment and terror, there arose before her
the vision of a real ghost, a spirit
from the other world.
The old prophet of Israel came, covered
with a mantle, and solemnly declared that
on the morrow Saul and his sons should
be with him in the land of the dead .
And the prophecy was true. On the
dew, neither let there be rain , upon you , nor
fields of offerings.
For there the shield of the mighty is vilely
cast away, the shield of Saul, as though he
had not been anointed with oil .
From the blood of the slain , from the fat
of the mighty, the bow of Jonathan turned not
back , and the sword of Saul returned not empty.
Saul and Jonathan were lovely and pleasant
in eir lives, an in their deaths they were
not divided :

1479
 Tunang -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
I QARA XOCA OU LEZA

Thy were swifter than eagles , they were How are the mighty fallen , and the wea.
stronger than lions. pons of war perished !
Ye daughters of Israel , weep over Saul, who
clothed you in scarlet, with other delights, Thus died Israel's first king, the
who put on ornaments of gold upon your mighty and wonderful Saul ; and thus
apparel . died the young prince Jonathan before
How are the mighty fallen in the midst of the crown of Israel had descended upon
the battle ! O Jonathan, thou wast slain in him . And now we come to the strange
thine high places . story of Israel's second king, the shep
I am distressed for thee, my brother herd boy David, whose words are known
Jonathan : very pleasant hast thou been unto in every language under the sun, and he
me : thy love to me was wonderful, passing story of whose life is one of humanity's
the love of women . most precious possessions.
DAVID THE SHEPHERD KING
THE BOY WHO LEFT HIS SHEEP AND REIGNED IN JERUSALEM
"He dark -haired ,bright-eyed boy who
THE that sacred symbol of God's blessing
had been fetched from tending on Israel - to house it in the capital city
his father's sheep, that the old , mighty of Jerusalem . And when it came he
prophet of the nation might look upon rejoiced, and made a poem to the glory
him, who had comforted the warrior of the Eternal God.
Saul by his singing, who had slain the Sing unto the Lord , all the earth ; show
Philistine giant with a sling, who had forth from day to day His salvation. Declare
become aninmate of the king's palace His glory among the heathen ; His mar
vellous works among all nations. For great
and the bosom friend of the king's son, is the Lord, and greatly to be praised ; He
was now himself a king. is also to be feared above all gods. For all
ow DAVID ROSE BY HARD FIGHTING the gods of the people are idols ; but the
HowTO BE KING OVER ALL ISRAEL Lord made the heavens.
The days of his childhood , when he lay David was a man who saw all the
upon the side of a hill, idly watching wonder and majesty and splendour
his father's flocks, while the sun moved contained in the name of God. He was
slowly round the heavens from east to carried away by the thought of the
west, and all things seemed to stand for Eternal Power who has made the earth
ever-- those far-off days had vanished and filled the heavens with shining
as though they had never been , and in worlds. He was possessed by the idea.
the midst of tumult, excitement, and
civil strife, David found himself a king. DAXAVID'S
IATD THEMIND WAS FILLED WITH WONDER
WONDERFUL WORKS OF GOD
But at first his right to reign was Some people use the word God with
disputed by the heirs of King Saul. out thinking what it means ; others
David had to fight for his crown. use it and try to explain what it means
The struggle was hard and fierce ; in words which are so difficult and
but victory followed his banners. He confusing that the brain rebels from
subdued all who questioned his right. the task of trying to understand God
In a brief time he was hing over all Israel , in words ; but David used the word
and had conquered the strong city of God in the simplest, and so in the
Jerusalem , and made it the capital of truest manner ; he used it to express
his kingdom . the Power whose works are visible to
This once shepherd boy, this fighter, the human eye. He pointed to the
this poet, this musician, this eager hills, to the ocean , to the forest , to the
seeker after the true meaning of life, flowers, to the green pastures ; he
this passionate adorer of the Ever- looked up to themoon riding in a
lasting Power who has made all glittering pageant through the sparkling
things, was one of those men to whose heaven ; he listened to the race of the
brains come unbidden , the grandest wind and the leaping roar of the thunder.
thoughts, and also the meanest. His “ His judgments,” said David, " are in
first idea , when he had made Jerusalem all the earth .” God , for him , was the
the city of David , was a grand and a Power who had made all things, and
poetical idea. He sent for the Ark, without whom nothing was made

1480
 LEGORICUI LELUTALI CELRAILEGE

DAVID THE SHEPHERD BOY AND SAUL THE KING

OREBREYTU
ETU
2X

This picture showsDavid playing the harp before Saul. Saul had strange fits of sadness and melancholy, and
when he found how sweetly David played, and how the music soothed him , he made the shepherd boy his minstrel.

For some time Saul was bitterly jealous of David and sought to kill him , but David still loved the king, whom
be one day had at his mercy. While Saul lay asleep in a cave, David crept up with his men, and entered. He
could have slain Saul, but merely cut off a piece of the king's robe to prove that he had no wish to harm him .
The top picture on this page is painted by Mr. Ernest Normand : the bottom picture and the picture on page 1478
are two of the famous paintings by James Tissot, and are the copyright of M. de Brunoff.
TUZZI TUZILLUMILUX.rart LIXIT LITE LIIDIDUTINIUUDIDrummoru
1481
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES LOGIJE .EZEN .

that is made . Man was the creature David married Bathsheba, and while
of this Creator. Only by studying the he longed for a son there came to him a
works of God, his Maker, could man be prophet named Nathan , who said to him :
happy and glad. “ There were two men in one city ;
Such was Israel's great poet- king the one rich , and the other poor. The
a man profoundly conscious that the rich man had exceeding many flocks
visible world has been made by an and herds ; but the poor man had
invisible Power, a man whose greatest nothing, save one little ewe lamb , which
happiness was to contemplate the he had brought up and nourished ;
majestic grandeur of the Creator's work and it grew up together with him , and
And yet there were moments when with his children ; it did eat of his
the basest and vilest ideas visited own meat , and drank of his own cup ,
David's brain , and he was swept away and lay in his bosom , and was unto
into actions so cruel and degrading that him as a daughter. And there came a
we can scarcely bear to think of them . traveller unto the rich man , and he
IT WE HONOUR DAVID spared to take of his own flock, and of
WHYN ' SPITE OF HIS FAILINGS his own herd, to dress for the way
But why is it that we still honour the faring man that was come unto him ;
name of this man, and read with but took the poor man's lamb, and
gratitude his songs ? Why don't we dressed it for the man that was come
despise him and call him a hypocrite ? to him .”
The answer to this question is the David started up with a burning
secret of David's charm . He confessed indignation :
his sins, he bitterly regretted them , " As God liveth ," he cried, " the
he never ceased to fight against them ; man that hath done this thing shall
and because he wanted to be better, surely die ."
he trusted in the forgiveness of God HE REPENTANCE
TH RING DAVID AND PUNISHMENT OF
when he might well have despaired
and abandoned himself to evil . “ The Then did the prophet, looking upon
greatest of all sins is to be conscious the king, utter the great judgment :
of none." David was no hypocrite. Thou art the man ."
He knew his faults, his wretchedness, David saw what was meant, and
his sinfulness. He named them in while the stern prophet pronounced
his songs, he confessed them to all the displeasure of God at an action so
nations and to all ages ; he exhibited base and cruel , he realised the horror
himself before the eyes of the whole of his crime.
world in his true colours . But he “ I have sinned against the Lord ,"
wanted to be better. He might have he exclaimed.
said, with a great English poet : “ The Lord also hath put away
All I could never be, thy sin ," answered the prophet.
All men ignored in me, The fact of David's repentance
This, I was worth to God . because it was sincere repentance-
STORY OF DAVID'S,EVIL
THEOSADNATHAN brought him once more into an under
AND standing of God's purpose , which is
HIM
This is the first story of David's salvation — that is to say , a state of
evil . Looking one day from his palace , health . While he sinned he was like
he saw a woman whose face so pleased a man diseased ; directly he repented,
him that he desired to make her his he was a man restored to health .
wife. He sent for her to his palace , and But punishment had to fall upon him .
discovered that she was Bathsheba, The child which came to him from his
the wife of a Hittite named Uriah. loved wife Bathsheba sickened and pined .
In order that he might marry her, he David fasted , and lav prone upon the
sent Uriah to Joab, the commander of earth in an agony. The father in his
his forces, and secretly told Joab to heart cried unto God. The son was dear
place Uriah in so prominent a place in to him ; he besought God to have mercy
the next battle that he would certainly and let the little one live.
be killed . This wicked and most base But the child died . Then at last
suggestion was acted upon, and Uriah David rose, bathed himself, put on fresh
fell dead before the enemies of David . clothing, and sat down to eat .
XXUURXURIERTLETTURE TOUSLY
1482 BLOXXTuren
 DAVID THE SHEPHERD KINGaarom mommacam amma

“ What thing is
this that thou hast strove with all
done ? ” asked the his might to be
obedient .
people about him . From this time
* Thou didst fast forward the life of
and weep for the David is one of
child, while it was incessant struggle
alive ; but when sorrow ,
with
the child was dead ,
trouble , and mis
thou didst rise and fortune . At one
eat bread .” fortune
And David said . moment
“ While the child
smiles upon him ,
and he is happy
was yet alive, I in the conscious .
fasted and wept ;
ness that God
for I said, who can
tell whether God cares for him ; at
will be gracious to the next , he is
me , that the child overwhelmed by
the waters of ad
may live ? But
now he is dead , versity , and his
wherefore should soul sinks almost
I fast ? Can I to the black and
muddy bottom of
Set
hring him back
again ? I shall go despair .
A favourite son
to hiin , but he of
shall not return to his , named
me. " Absalom, raised a
rebellion against
Here we see the
clear vision of David , and actu
this strange man . ally sought to
While the child destroy his own
father that he
lived ,
God's
he
not tell what was
could

purpose ;
but as soon as the
1 himself might be
come the
David reluctantly
king .

child was dead , allowed his troops

God's will was
to dispute the
made manifest . progress of Absa
To fight against lom'sarmy , but
bade the com
the will of the
Eternal was mad mander deal
ness . David's gently with the
genius lay in try young man . In
ing always to con this battle David's
form to the wishes army obtained the
or ideas of God . victory, and Absa
He wanted to be lom , escaping for
his life on a mule ,
TARIM

in tune with the

music of heaven . had his long hair
There were laws caught in the
governing the bough of a tree,
whole universe of and was twitched
God ; he wanted off the mule's back
to be in harmony and dangled in the
with those laws . air till Joab killed
Directly he knew him .
the will of God in When the mes
KING DAVID
any matter, he This beautiful painting of David , by Mr. Frederick Shields, is senger of Joab
UNUZDOLULULLLILU
published by permission of the Autotype Co. reached David ,
TULOU DU U U UREL
UUUUUUUUUUUU
VITTUU UUUUUU.Don .
1483
 un
om man
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
the king was sitting between the two the edge of the grave he was fired by
gates of the city. thevery thought of this Eternal Being.
“ Tidings, my lord the king !” cried “ Thine, O Lord , is the greatness, and
the messenger ; " for the Lord hath the power, and the glory, and the victory,
avenged thee this day of all them and the majesty ; for all that is in the
that rose up against thee.” heaven and in the earth is Thine." His
DS, MOURNS FOR THE LOSS of passing was an ecstasy — a going out
DAVIABSALOM , HIS ONLY SON from himself into the sublime glory of
David asked, “ Is the young man his vision .
Absalom safe ? ” And when he heard David is called “ the man after God's
that Absalom was dead, he went up into own heart." What does this mean ?
the chamber over the gate, and cried Does God look with pleasure on one
out, “ 0 , my son Absalom , my son, who sins often and greatly , simply
my son Absalom ! Would God I had because the sinner praises Him and
died for thee, O Absalom , my son , my calls Him grand names ? No. But
son ! ' David is the man after God's own
And now came war among the tribes heart.” That splendid title was earned
of Israel, and David's life drew to its by David because, though he fell many
close in an endless warfare , so that times, he always rose and tried to be a
peace seemed to have fled from the nobler being.
earth . He saw his land afflicted by the The whole history of the human race
scourge of the sword and bythe scourge is David's story. By the phrase “ the
of disease . Evil befell Israel, and man after God's own heart ” is meant
God appeared to veil His face . But that God's purpose with the human race
David besought God to have mercy, is one of progress and advance . The
and continued faithful in his worship . human race is struggling to be better.
When he was ol ma
an d n, a son STORY OF THE RACE IS THE STORY
of his named Adonijah rose ир
against him , and proclaimed himself Once the human race was savage ,
to be the King of Israel. But David scarcely different from the animals ;
declared that the son of Bathsheba, now it is civilised and marching forward
named Solomon, should be the King of to greater knowledge, greater power,
Israel, and Solomon was anointed king greater kindness. The human race
then and there . Then Adonijah re- falls backward again and again ; again

CIGITUR
turned , and made peace with Solomon. and again the pages of its history
The last act of David was to assemble are stained with grievous crimes ; but
all the people together, and to declare it does not go permanently backward
that his great wish had been to build into its savage state. It tries to go
a mighty temple to the honour and forward .
glory of the Lord , but that , because he So it was with David, and so he repre
had been a man of war and not of peace , sents for us the history of humanity .
God had not suffered him to accom- He committed sins , but he did not
plish this idea . Solomon , however , abandon himself to evil. He wrestled
should see this temple rise from the with faults , he gave battle to the evil
earth , and to Solomon he gave the disposition of his nature, and all through
plans of the building, with all the costly that terrific struggle he held fast to the
materials he had amassed for its magnificent idea that, overlooking this
splendour. mortal liie , there is a Power infinitely
GOES OUTINTO THE GLORY OF good, infinitely great, and infinitely
DAVID NEW LIFE kind, whose purpose is that goodness
And David , old and dying, spoke in and not evii shall triumph, and who one
his last breath of the glory of that day will make all things plain before
Eternal God whose might, majesty, and our eyes.
dominion had inspired all his songs. Because David represents the history
The old man , whose body had lost all of man's progress, because his story is
heat, and whose once bright eyes were the story of the human race, he is
dimmed by the mists of death , uttered called the man after God's own heart
once more the immortal strain of his “ the man who is trying to be better.
soul and spoke of God's power. On The next Bible Stories are on page 1593.
TEXTE UZYTETYT OTTIETY TXT
PUTTY
TIRURE
1184
 The Child's Book of
POETRY

THE GRANDMOTHER'S TALE

PEBborn
RE inJEAN DEBÉRANGER was the greatest song-writerofFrance. He was
1780 and died in 1857 , so that he lived through the most exciting periods
of French history. He had a very eventful life, but nothing prevented him from
writing his charming songs , full of wit and pathos. Béranger is often compared to the
Scottish poet Burns. He was a great admirer of Napoleon, whose praises he sounds
in this beautiful poem , which many of us will think worthy of a nobler theme.
IS fame shall never Then came for France
His
H pass away ! ‫کی ۔‬ CONTINUED FROM 1400 that dreadful day
Beside the cottage When foes swept over
hearth the hind all the land ;
No other theme shall list to find Undaunted he alone made stand ,
For many and many a distant day . As tho' to keep the world at bay !
When winter nights their gloom begin , One winter's night , as this might be,
And winter embers ruddy glow , I heard a knocking at the door ;
Round some old gossip closing in , I opened it ; great heavens ! ' twas he !
They'll beg a tale of long ago A couple in his wake—no more ;
For all,” they'll say , “4 he wrought us ill , Then sinking down upon a seat
His glorious name shall ne'er grow dim , Ay , ' twas upon this very chair,
The people love, yes , love him still, He gasped : ' Defeat ! Ah, God , defeat ! ' ”
So, grandmother, a tale of him , What, grandmother, he sat down there,
A tale of him ! ” He sat down there ? "
16

One day past here I saw him ride ,
A caravan of kings behind ;
The time I well can call to mind ,
I hadn't then been long a bride.
I gazed out from the open door ,
Slowly his charger came this way ;
A little hat, I think ; he wore ,
Yes, and his riding coat was grey.
I shook all over as quite near ,
6
Close to this very door he drew
'Good -day,' he cried, ' good-day, my dear! ' ”
“ What, grandmother, he spoke to you ,
He spoke to you ?
The following year I chanced to be
In Paris ; every street was gay,
He'd gone to Nôtre Dame to pray,
And passed again quite close to me !
The sun shone out in all its pride ,
With triumph every bosom swelled ;
Ah, what a glorious scene ! ' they cried ,
Never has France the like beheld ! '
A smile his features seemed to wear ,
As on the crowds his glance he threw ,
For he'd an heir, at last , an heir ! ”
Ah, grandmother, what times for you , 99
What times for you !
“ He called for food ; I quickly brought
The best I happened to have by ;
Then when his dripping clothes were dry,
He seemed to doze awhile, methought.
Seeing me weeping when he woke,
' Courage,' he cried , there's still a chance ;
I go to Paris , one bold stroke,
And Paris shall deliver France !!
He went ; the glass I'd seen him hold ,
The glass to which his lips he'd set ,
I've treasured since like gold , like gold !
(6
What, grandmother , you have it yet ,
You have it yet ?
' Tis there. But all , alas ! was o'er ;
He , whom the Pope himself had crown'd ,
The mighty hero world -renown'd ,
Died prisoner on a far -off shore.
For long we none believed the tale ,
They said that he would reappear,
Across the seas again would sail ,
To fill the universe with fear !
But when we found that he was dead ,
When all the shameful truth we knew ,
The bitter, bitter tears I shed ! ”
' Ah , grandmother , God comfort you,
God comfort you ! "

rose
1485

sumam THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
* ILECKI
THE ORPHAN BOY
This simple poem of a boy who had lost his father in the
battle of the Nile, and later , at his mother's death , realised
the full sadness of the word " orphan ," was written by
Mrs. Amelia Opie, an English lady who wrote many short
stories and poems in the earlier years of the last century.
Stay, lady, stay ! for mercy's sake,
And hear a helpless orphan's tale !
Ah ! sure my looks must pity wake
' Tis want that makes my cheek so pale.
Yet I was once a mother's pride,
And my brave father's hope and joy ;
But in the Nile's proud fight he died ,
And I am now an orphan boy.
Poor , foolish child - how pleased was I
When news of Nelson's victory came,
Along the crowded streets to fly,
And see the lighted windows flame !
To force me home my mother sought,
She could not bear to see my joy ;
For with my father's life 'twas bought,
And made me a poor orphan boy !
The people's shouts were long and loud ,
My mother, shuddering, closed her ears ;
Rejoice ! rejoice ! ” still cried the crowd ;
My mother answered with her tears .
66
Why are you crying so ? " said I ,
“ While others laugh and shout with joy.”
She kissed me--and with such a sigh !
She called me her poor orphan boy .
“ What is an orphan boy ? ” I cried,
As in her face I looked , and smiled ;
My mother, through her tears , replied,
You'll know too soon , ill - fated child ! "
And now they've tolled my mother's knell,
And I'm no more a parent's joy ;
O lady, I have learned too well
What ' tis to be an orphan boy !
THE FAIRIES OF CALDON - LOW
This poem , by Mary Howitt, sets forth an old legend which
tells us of wonderful things seen on a midsummer night on
the top of a hill which is supposed to be a favourite haunt
of the fairies. As boys and girls cannot get out at midnight
lo see these things, they have to dream about them instead ,
and that is why fairies continue to live ; they will live
just as long as boys and girls have fancy and imagination.
DAndwhere have you been , my Mary,
ANND where have you been from me ? "
I've been to the top of Caldon - Low ,
The midsummer nigot to see ! ”
And what did you see , my Mary ,
All up on the Caldon -Low ?
' I saw the glad sunshine come down,
And I saw the merry winds blow .'
66
And what did you hear, my Mary, 9
All up on the Caldon -Hill ?
• I heard the drops of the water made,
And I heard the green corn fill."
Oh , tell me all, my Mary
All --all that ever you know ;
For you must have seen the fairies 99
Last night on the Caldon -Low !
" Then take me on your knee , mother,
And listen , mother of mine :
A hundred fairies danced last night,
And the harpers they were nine.
And the harp - strings rang so merrily
To their dancing feet so small ;
But, oh ! the sound of their talking
Was merrier far than all ! "
OSOBXDOMOXOX.BORODOTTITUDE
1486
ZULTZAILE
66
And what were the words, my Mary ,
44
That you did hear them say ?
I'll tell you all , my mother,
But let me have my way.
And some they played with the water,
And rolled it down the hill ;
' And this , ' they said , ' shall speedily turn
The poor old miller's mill .
“ For there has been no water
Ever since the first of May ;
And a busy man will the miller be
At the dawning of the day !
" Oh ! the miller, how he will laugh ,
When he sees the mill-dam rise !
The jolly old miller, how he will laugh,
Till the tears fill both his eyes !
" And some they seized the little winds,
That sounded over the hill ,
And each put a horn into his mouth ,
And blew both sharp and shrill :
' And there ,' said they, ' the merry winds go
Away froin every horn ;
And these shall clear the mildew dank
From the blind old widow's corn .
' Oh, the poor blind widow
Though she has been blind so long,
She'll be merry enough when the mildew's
gone ,
And the corn stands stiff and strong !'
" And some they brought the brown linseed
And flung it down the Low :
' And this ,' said they, by the sunrise
In the weaver's croft shall grow !
" Oh, the poor lame weaver !
How he will laugh outright
When he sees his dwindling flax-field
All full of flowersby night ! '
Ind then outspoke a brownie,
With a long beard on his chin :
I have spun up all the tow ,' said he,
4
And I want some more to spin .
“ ' I've spun a piece of hempen cloth
And I want to spin another
A little sheet for Mary's bed ,
And an apron for her mother ! '
" And with that I could not help but laugh ,
And I laughed out loud and free ;
And then on the top of Caldon -Low
There was no one left but me.
And all on the top of Caldon - Low
The mists were cold and grey ,
And nothing I saw but the mossy stones
That round about me lay .
64
But as I came down from the hill-top,
I heard , afar below ,
How busy the jolly miller was,
And how merry the wheels did go !
& 6
And I peeped into the widow's field ,
And, sure enough , was seen
The vellow ears of the mildew corn
All standing stiff and green.
" And down the weaver's croft I stole,
To see if the flax were high ;
But I saw the weaver at his gate
With the good news in his eye !
Now , this is all I heard , mother,
And all that I did see ;
So , prithee, make my bed , mother,
For I'm tired as I can be !
RRECTORXUSUNE BOLEZER TORTURI DULU OXU
 4 CEKETOILECLAILLEUcas
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
LITTLE SOPHY BY THE SEASIDE .
Charles Tennyson Turner, who wrote this charming sonnet,
or poein of fourteen lines, was the elder brother of the great
Lord Tennyson , and took the name of Turner when he in .
herited the fortune of a relative . He wrote many sonnets.
Young Sophy leadsalife without alloy No man sees them come or go.
Of pain ; she dances in the stormy air ; But an angel may be, who guards some baby,
While her pink sash and length of golden hair
With answering motion time her step of joy .
Now turns she through that seaward gate of
heaven ,
That opens on the sward above the cliff,
Glancing a moment at each barque and skiff ,
Along the roughening waters homeward drive..
Shoreward she hies , her wooden spade in hand ,
Straight down to childhood's 'ancient field
of play ,
To claim her right of common in the land
Where little edgeless tools make easy way
A right no cruel Act shall e'er gainsay,
No greed dispute the freedom of the sand
THE SUN
In the CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH We are
all about the wonders of the big ball on which we live,
and how it is daylight in some places while it is dark in
others. In the following verses Thomas Miller expresses
this fact in simple words that can easily be remembered.
SOMEWHERE
when
it is always
morning
light,
For ' tis here,
In some far distant land 'tis night ,
And the bright moon shines there.
When you're undressed and going to bed ,
They are just rising there ,
And morning on the hills doth spread
When it is evening here.
And other distant lands there be,
Where it is always night ;
For weeks and weeks they never see
The sun , nor have they light.
For it is dark both night and day ,
But what's as wondrous quite ,
The darkness it doth pass away ,
And then for weeks 'tis light.
Yes , while you sleep the sun shines bright,
The sky is blue and clear ;
For weeks and weeks there is no night,
But always daylight there.
BABYLAND
babies
The poems about the imaginary land where theordinary
live before they come to stay in the homes of
folk are endless in number and fancy. Miss Ella Wheeler
Wilcox , the American writer, describes a lovely and
bewitching Babyland in this poem . She is true to the old,
old story that the stork knows the way to Babyland, and
that it alone can bring away the tiny inhabitants of the
happy valley to the country cottage or the city mansion .
HaveTheyourealm
heardwhere
of thetheValley of Babyland ?
dear little darlings
stav,
Till the kind storks go , as all men know ,
And , oh , so tenderly bring them away ;
The paths are winding, and past all finding
By all save the storks , who understand
The gates and the highways, and the intricate
byways
That lead to Babyland.
All over the Valley of Babyland
Sweet flowers bloom in the soft green moss ;
And under the ferns fair, and under the plants
there ,
Lie little heads like spools of floss .
With a soothing number the river of slumber
Flows o'er a bedway of silver sand ;
And angels are keeping watch o'er the sleeping
Babes of Babyland.
POETRY
The path to the Valley of Babyland
Only the kingly , kind storks know ;
If they fly over mountains, or wade through
fountains,
Or a fairy perhaps , with her magic wand,
Brings them straightway to the wonderful
gateway
That leads to Babyland.
And there in the Valley of Babyland,
Under the mosses and leaves and ferns,
Like an unfledged starling , they find the
darling
For whom the heart of a mother yearns ;
And they lift him lightly , and snug him
tightly
In feathers soft as a lady's hand ;
And off with a rockaway step they walk
away
Out of Babyland.
told
As they go from the Valley of Babyland
Forth into the world of great unrest ,
Sometimes in weeping he wakes from sleeping,
Before he reaches the mother's breast.
Ah , how she blesses him , how she caresses
him !
Bonniest bird in the bright home band ,
That o'er land and water the kind stork
brought her
From far -off Babyland .
THE NIGHTINGALE AND THE
GLOW-WORM
William Cowper, like all gentle and tender natures, not
only hated to see any cruelty by mankind to dumb creatures ,
but was sorry to contemplate ine cruelty of these creatures
to each other, though they are really never cruel, and
seldom kill except for food . In this poem he imagines a
glow- worm giving a nightingale a good reason why he
should leave him alone. Certainly, if a glow -worm could
think and speak he might have done as the poet describes.
A NIGHTINGALE that all day long
Had cheer'd the village with his song,
Nor yet at eve his note suspended,
Nor yet when eventide was ended ,
Began to feel , as well he might,
The keen demands of appetite ;
When looking eagerly around,
He spied far off, upon the ground,
A something shining in the dark ,
And knew the Glow.worm by his spark ;
So , stooping down from hawthorn top ,
He thought to put him in his crop .
The worm , aware of his intent,
Harangued him thus, right eloquent :
“ Did you admire my lamp, " quoth he,
“ As much as I your minstrelsy ,
You would abhor to do me wrong ,
As much as I to spoil your song :
For ' twas the self-same Power Divine
Taught you to sing, and me to shine ;
That you with music, I with light,
Might beautify and cheer the night.''
The songster heard this short oration),
And , warbling out his approbation ,
Released him, as my story tells ,
And found a supper somewhere else.
1487
 2DTEGEZTE ZETEK Icon ********* RAILER TammII E2 SOLO CICLOSEIG

LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE

brings the snow ,

J ANUARY
Makes our feet and fingers glow .
FEBRUARY brings the rain ,
Thaws the frozen lake again .
March brings breezes loud and shrill ,
Stirs the dancing daffodil.
April brings the primrose sweet,
Scatters daisies at our feet.

May brings Aocks of pretty lambs,

Rorsione Skipping by their fleecy dams.
J UNE brings tulips, lilies, roses,
Fills the children's hands with posies.
Нот July brings cooling showers,
HOT
Apricots and gillyflowers.
August brings the sheaves of corn ,
Then the harvest home is borne.

WARM September brings the fruit,

Sportsmen then begin to shoot.
RESH October brings the pheasant,
FR
Then to gather nuts is pleasant. ,
Duli November brings the blast,
Then the leaves are whirling fast.
Chill December brings the sleet, Og
Blazing fire and Christmas treat.
1485
 aanmaaraar கா aurattaamaanusarumaaraam

A FROG HE WOULD A-WOOING GO

fii
8 进
A frog he would a WOO ing go Heigh o ! says

6.

Ro - ly ; Wheth - er his moth-er would let him or no , With a

lo
ro - ly - po- ly, gam -mon and spin - ach, Heigh -o ! says An -thon -y Ro ly .

So off he set in his coat and hat,

Heigho ! says Roly.
And on the way he met a rat,
With a roly -poly, gammonand spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
*
" Please, Mr. Frog, will you give us a song ?”
Heigho ! says Roly .
“ But let itbe something that's not very long ,"
With a roly - poly, gammon and spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.

" Please , Mr. Rat, will you go with me ?"
Heigho ! says Roly.
" Good Mrs. Mousie for to see ? "
With a roly -poly, gammon and spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
But while they were making aa terrible din,
Heigho ! says Roly.
The cat and herkittens came tumbling in ,
With a roly -poly, gammon and spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.

When they came to the door of Mousie's hole, The cat she seized Mr. Rat by the crown,
BUKU
SORTE
arc

Heigho ! says Roly. Heigho ! says Roly .

RE

They gave a loud knock , and they gave a
loud call ,
With a roly-poly, gammon and spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
* Please, Mrs. Mouse, are you within ? "
Heigho ! says Roly.
" Oh, yes; dear sirs, I am sitting to spin ,”
With aa roly -poly, gammon and spinach,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
The kittens they pulled Mrs. Mousie down,
With a roly-poly, gammon and spinach,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
This put Mr. Frog in a terrible fright
Heigho ! says Roly.
He took up his hat and he wished them
good -night,
With a roly -poly, gammon and spinach ,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.

“ Please, Mrs. Mouse, will you give us some But as Froggie was crossing over aa brook ,
beer ? " Heigho ! says Roly.
Heigho ! says Roly : A lily-white duck came and swallowed
“ For Froggie and I are fond of good cheer, ” him up ,
With a roly -poly, gammon and spinach , With a roly -poly, gammon and spinach,
Heigho ! says Anthony Roly. Heigho ! says Anthony Roly.
THE NEXT VERSES AND NURSERY kHYMES BEGIN ON PAGE 1559
GUEUX
1489
 CONOCE

“ PRINCE CHARLIE ” THE YOUNG PRETENDER

Charles Edward Stuart,the grandson of James II . of England, was familiarly known to nis followers as
" Bonnie Prince Charlie, " while his enemies called him “ the Young Pretender ." His father before him had
attempted to regain the British throne, from which his grandfather had been driven, and the young man himself,
in the year 1745, came over from his refuge in France to place himself at the head of his faithful followers in
Scotland and to descend upon England in a final effort for his lost throne. Edward Waverley was an English
officer who joined the cause, the unhappy story of which is told in Sir Walter Scott's great romance of
" Waverley ." This fine painting of Bonnie Prince Charlie and two of his followers is the work of John Pettie , R.A.
Photographed by Caswall Smith
OUTI DOTTI LOItune DU TOIT OOK
1490
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE TALES OF SIR WALTER SCOTT
"HERE does not exist in English literature any series of books by one man
THEthat can compare in quantity or in quality with the Waverley Novels,
written by Sir Walter Scott between the years 1814 and 1831. These wonderful
tales of the past would fill no fewer than 10,000 closely -printed pages, and the
period of history covered by them is more than 700 years. Clearly, then, it is
impossible to re-tell here all the stories in the Waverley Novels. A complete
edition usually contains twenty -five volumes, and there are in all thirty -two
stories. A number of the novels that can best be re-told in a little space
will be dealt with in these pages ; but, in addition to that, we must have
some general idea of the whole series, and so we may begin by looking
at the whole of this wonderful library before we turn to the particular books.

THE WAVERLEY NOVELS

ALTHOUGHSirWalters CONTINUED FROM 1315
Scott's novels
cover a period of more
than 700 years of European
history, we are not to suppose
that he wrote them in the order
of time. As a matter of fact , the
very first of his stories described
the life of only sixty years before his
own day. It was called “ Waverley :
or 'Tis Sixty Years Since," and dealt
with the Jacobite rising of 1745. The
story that goes furthest back into
history was one of the last two he
wrote in the year 1831. It is called
“ Count Robert of Paris,” and deals
with the First Crusade of the eleventh
century, the scene being laid chiefly
in and around the wonderful city of
Constantinople .
We must always bear in mind when
we are thinking about the Waverley
Novels that , though most of them
are founded upon fact, they do not
derive their chief interest from being
historical , but from being told with
so much spirit and romantic force
that we are enthralled by the swift
and straightforward movement of the
story, and never stop to ask ourselves
whether it is all true history or
largely the invention of the wizard
story-teller.
Perhaps it will be best , though it
is certainly unusual, to take our
quick glance through the Waverlev
Novels,not in the order in which the
author wrote them , nor yet in the
order we ourselves need read them ,
but in their historical order, as though
you they were all chapters
in one long tale of
seven hundred years.
Count Robert of Paris," as
we have already heard, is a tale
of the First Crusade, of the year
1098. The story itself, or rather
what is called the " plot,” is
not very remarkable , but the adven
tures of the count and the other
leaders of the Crusade , among whom
was the famous Peter the Hermit , are
full of healthy excitement, and give
us a fine picture of those distant
times when men lived only to fight,
most of the Crusaders even being
more anxious for the fighting than
for the avowed object of the Crusade,
which was the delivering of the sup
posed sepulchre of Christ from the
hands of the Mohammedans .
66
The next novel in point of time is
The Betrothed,” the scene of which
is laid chiefly in Wales about the year
1187. This was the time of the Third
Crusade , and, indeed, the novel was
written as one of the “ Tales of the
Crusaders.” Its interest , however,
centres in Wales, the heroine being
Eveline, the daughter of Sir Ray
mond , a Norman lord . She is " the
betrothed,” for she undertakes to wait
three long years to become the wife
of Sir Hugo de Lacy , who has gone
away to fight with the Crusaders .
But before he can return Eveline is
captured by a Welsh prince, who had
previously sought to marry her, but
had been defeated by Sir Hugo when
attacking Sir Raymond's castle. Sir

ELECT AMHR BMHLDRIBUTEHU

1491
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKSmaxmadara
Hugo's nephew , Sir Damian , rescues
however, and after many adventures,
her , and is almost killed himself. when Henry might have a knighthood
Eveline nurses him , and they fall inif he cared to accept it , the “ Fair Maid ”
love with each other. When Sir Hugo becomes the wife of the armourer.
returns from the Crusade and finds These were the days when many
that his nephew loves his his own
own Scotsmen went abroad to fight for
“ betrothed ,” he generously stands foreign kings and princes in the wars
aside and allows them to marry . which were always raging on the Con
6
tinent . " Quentin Durward,” which is
HEROES,AND
”
HEROINES OF " THE TALIS one of the best of the novels, is the tale
“ The Talisman , which is one of the of a young Scotsman of that name who
finest of Sir Walter's stories, deals with finds his fortune as one of the Scottish
the same period of history and the battles guards of Louis XI . of France , and ends
of the Crusaders in Assyria during the by marrying a countess in the year 1468.
year 1191. The great hero of the story Just six years later is the period
is Richard I., or Richard the Lion- described in®“ Anne of Geierstein ,” in
Heart , and his noble enemy is the Sul- the scenes of which we travel to Switzer
tan Saladin . The " talisman " is just a land, Germany, and France, and learn
little red purse which Saladin carries much about the secret Tribunal of
in his bosom , and which , when he comes Westphalia, presided over by the “ Black
disguised as a physician into the camp Monk ," the father of Anne . Two
of the English king , he uses to cure English gentlemen , the Earl of Oxford
Richard of a fever. There is , of course , and his son , Sir Arthur de Vere, are tra
a love story in the book as well, and velling, disguised as merchants. 'earing
endless adventures. The heroine, the a letter to the Duke of Burgundy, and
Lady Edith , a kinswoman of Richard, it would have gone ill with them had it
marries Sir Kenneth , the heir to the not happened that Anne had met Sir
Scottish throne, and Saladin presents Arthur and fallen in love with him
her with his talisman . ” before . So her father acquitted them ,
" Ivanhoe ” is a splendid romance of and later on Sir Arthur married Anne .
the
life inperiod of theprevious
England, novel.laterThis
just three years thanis THREE STORIES OF THE DAYS OF THE
one of the books we shall read further on . We are at home in Melrose , on the
Next comes “ Castle Dangerous," Tweed, and the neighbourhood which
which is a romance of “ The Perilous Sir Walter loved so much, in the story
& 6

Castle of Douglas,” so called because it of " The Monastery,” and the year is
was three times taken from the English 1550. The Abbot is also a story of
in the years 1306 nd 1307. This story Scotland in the year 1557, and both of
was the last which the great novelist these are largely concerned with the
wrote, when he was broken in health Reformation, neither being so interest
and fortune and had not many more ing as most of the other novels, though
months to live . Mary Queen of Scots is splendidly
НЕ STORIES OF " THE FAIR MAID OF described in “ The Abbot." Kenil
THEPERTH " AND “ THE BLACK MONK " worth ” is a third story of Reformation
But “ The Fair Maid of Perth ” takes times , the period being 1575, and it is
us nearly another century onward in infinitely more interesting than either
history, as the period is 1402 , though a of the other two. Nothing could be
descendant of the Douglas has an im- finer than its animated descriptions of
portant part to play in the story. Kenilworth Castle and the fête given
Henry IV. now rules in England, and there by the Earl of Leicester in honour
Robert III . in Scotland . There are two of Queen Elizabeth, whose character is
love stories in the book , but the one finely described . Leicester has secretly
that interests us most is, of course, married Amy, the daughter of Sir Hugh
that of the “ Fair Maid ," whose name Robsart, but cannot let this be known
is Catharine Glover. to the queen . Amy's end is mysterious.
On St. Valentine'sDay Catharine kisses The story is full of exciting incidents
Henry Smith , the armourer, while he and characters so well described that
is asleep, and afterwards he proposes to we seem to have seen them in real life,
marry her, but she refuses. In the end, and are never likely to forget them .
EDOLUXDOUTORTTUTTO TORTUK out TOUCZTEXTU
XXXTYKUR BOTTITUTORITI I
1492
 -THE WAVERLEY NOVELS TUBXOA NOAG CIKGU KE

We arrive at the beginning of the befell Lucy Ashton , because she yielde 1
seventeenth century, during the reign to the pressure of her parents and
of King James I. , in “ The Fortunes of married Hayston of Bucklaw , while her
Nigel," which tells the extraordinary true lover, the last Lord of Ravenswood,
adventures of a young Scottish noble. was hastening home to her from the
man who comes to London to get the wars in the Netherlands.
king to restore his estates , and how he “ The Pirate ” gives us a truly roman
succeeds, after many disappointments , tic picture of the wild scenery and the
in establishing his " fortunes," while primitive life of the Shetland Islands
in " A Legend of Montrose we have at the beginning of the eighteenth
passed over forty years, and find our century ; while The Black Dwarf ”
selves in Scotland during that terrible is a romance of about the same
time when the Civil War was raging in period, the scene being laid in the
England and the Earl of Montrose was Lowlands of Scotland . “ The Black
fighting for King Charles in the North Dwarf” is a mysterious person who
against the Covenanters, who were led is consulted by Isabella Vere, the
by the Marquis of Argyll. This story daughter of a Jacobite leader, who
contains one of the novelist's finest would force her to marry his friend,
characters, in the person of Sir Sir Frederick Langley . The Black
Dugald Dalgetty. Dwarf helps her, for he is really Sir
Edward Mauley, and has power over
THE
IN AND DAYS OF THE “ MERRY MONARCH ' the unscrupulous Sir Frederick. He
THE DAY CAVALIERS
appears just as the wedding is about to
King Charles I. is beheaded, and the take place, and forbids it. Isabella
Commonwealth has been declared by later marries_her own true love, the
the year 1652 , with which “ Wood- young squire Earnscliff.
stock " deals.
Though,notis oneofSir
Walter's best works,this a spirited STIRRING STORIESOF THE WILD SCOTTISH
HIGHLANDS
and entertaining romance , which is " Rob Roy," that splendid story of a
chiefly concerned with the adventures Highland chief, brings us to the year
of Charles II., ending with the death of 1715 , and, of course, we must read of it
Cromwell and the king's entry into further on as well as of “ The Heart of
London . Peveril of the Peak ” carries Midlothian ” and “ Waverley," both of
66

us some twenty years later and well which also refer to the first half of the 0

into the reign of " the merrymonarch ,” eighteenth century. Next comes “ Red
the period being 1678. It is a story gauntlet,”" the story of a conspiracy
of Cavalier and Roundhead, the formed by Sir Edward Hugh Red
daughter of one who had been a gauntlet in the year 1763 on behalf of 66
supporter of the Commonwealth , the Young Pretender . Guy Man
Major Bridgenorth, falling in love with nering,” which introduces us to many
Julian Peveril, a Cavalier. It is a very memorable characters, though the hero
long story, and contains the enormous himself is not one of these, brings
number of 108 characters . The hero us to the second half of the eighteenth
and heroine marry in the end, of century, with which period the story
course . “ The Peak " is another name of “ The Surgeon's Daughter " is
for Derbyshire, in which many of the also concerned. This describes the
incidents happen . remarkable adventures of Menie Gray
in India, and her return to her native
THE MOST TRAGIC
STORIES OF ALL SIR WALTER country.
We are just at the closing years of the
The time of “ Old Mortality is eighteenth century in the stirring ro
exactly the same as the previous story, mance of “ The Antiquary ,” which we
but the scene has changed to Scotland shall deal with at greater length , and 6
and Holland. Of this we shall read at last of all there is “ St. Ronan's Well,”
greater length. The Bride of Lam- which brings us into the earlier years of
mermoor," perhaps the greatest, and the nineteenth century. This is not a
certainly the most tragic , of all the very successful work compared with
Waverley Novels , comes next in point some of the other fine stories among
of time . It tells of the sad fate that the long list of the Waverley Novels .
TYYYYYYYYYY
LIMW UEUXULIULUI UUTUU
1493
 LEIATE rum nec

THE STORY OF A HIGHLAND REBELLION

BEING THE ROMANCE OF “ WAVERLEY "
'HE Second Jacobite Rebellion was
THE gained leave of absence for a few weeks.
almost confined to the Scottish High- He desired to see the country, but his
lands, and broke out on the landing on first object was to visit his uncle's friend
Scottish soil of Charles Edward Stuart, at Tully - V'eolan, a typical old Scottish
grandson of James II . of England, called manor house. Here he received a cordial
by his adherents “ the Young Cheva- welcome from the baron and his
lier," and also “ Bonnie Prince Charlie ,” daughter Rose , a sweet girl of about
and by the English “ the Young Pre- Waverley's own age. Her hair was of
tender . ” It was the object of the rising pale gold ; her skin like the snow of
to place this young man on the English her own mountains in whiteness. “ Yet
throne, which was then occupied by she had not a pallid or pensive cast of
George II . countenance ; her features, as well as
THWAYOUNG
VERLEDAYS
Y OF THE HERO, EDWARD her temper, had a lively expression ;
her complexion, t ough not florid, wa
Edward Waverley, the hero of Scott's so pure as to seem transparent, and the
first novel , was the son of Richard slightest emotion se t her whole blood
Waverley, an ambitious politician who at once to her face and neck. Her form ,
looked to the Whigs, the supporters of though under the common size, was
the king , for political advancement, and remarkably elegant, and her motions
nephew of Sir Everard Waverley, of were light , easy , and unembarrassed .”
Waverley -Honour, a wealthy bachelor It fell to the lot of Rose Bradwardine
who regarded Edward as his heir. to perform the duties of hostess and
Sir Everard had no particular love guide combined. Thus the two were
for the House of Hanover, to which constantly in one another's company.
King George. belonged so that as
Edward lived partly with his father,and TELGENGLISHLASSGENTLEMAN AND THE

partly with his uncle - his mother being She rode with him in the vicinity of
dead - he came in his early years under Tully -Veolan , and listened with delight
the influences of the two great opposing as he talked of the books he knew and
political forces of the time. loved . But while those who saw them
Sir Everard and his sister, Mistress together so frequently bethought them
Rachel, became somewhat alarmed at that the baron was arranging a match
their nephew's habits of desultory read between his daughter and the wealthy
ing and love of solitude, which his young Englishman , Rose's father shut
father did nothing to counteract. Mistress his eyes to possibilities in this direction .
Rachel suggested that the boy should If he had thought of an alliance,
travel on the Continent with his tutor. Edward's indifference would have
YOUNGSICAPTAIN WAVERLEY'S FATEFUL offered a bar to the project. His mind
MISSION TO THE HIGHLANDS was still full of the influence of the
Richard Waverley saw no objection old romances he had read in the library
to this plan . But Richard's political at Waverley -Honour. His imagination
friends thought otherwise, and the still led him into mental adventures in
result was that the lad was offered, which female forms of exquisite grace
and accepted, a captaincy in a dragoon and beauty mingled. Rose Bradwardine,
regiment, then quartered at Dundee, beautiful and amiable though she was,
whither he set forth, carrying, among had not precisely the sort of merit or
other things, a fateful letter of intro- beauty which captivates a romantic
duction from his uncle to the Baron of imagination in early youth. She was
Bradwardine at his Perthshire seat of too frank , too confiding, too kind.
Tully - Veolan , on the borders of the “ Was it possible to bow , to tremble,
Highlands. The baron was an old and to adore before the timid yet playful
friend of Sir Everard's, and had borne little girl, who now asked Edward to
arms on behalf of the Stuarts. mend her pen , now to construe a stanza
After being initiated into his military in Tasso, and now to spell a very, very
duties at Dundee, young Waverley long word in his version of it ? ” No ;
***UXRX ORTITUYETTIR KITETYT DIT our UNER TEXTIYE ZULDU
1494
 LLAWQUETTUNG THE WAVERLEY NOVELS

but , for all that, time at Tully -Veolan composition of the various garrisons
passed so agreeably that Waverley andregimentsquartered north ofthe Tay.
applied for and obtained an extension His feelings were further played upon
ofhis leave of absence. The permission by the robber's mysterious language.
was accompanied by a hint from his Donald Bean Lean spoke as if Waverley
commanding officer, Colonel Gardiner, had a secret message for him , and
to the effect that he should not spend regarded it as a grievance that he was
too much of his leisure in the company not thought worthy of confidence
of those who, estimable as they might be equally with the Baron of Bradwardine
in a general sense, were not supposed to be and Vich Ian Vohr.
friendly to the Government or the king, A MONG THE FOLLOWERS OF « BONNIE
PRINCE CHARLIE "
to whose service he had been sworn .
About this time it happened that The meaning of all this Waverley
Tully - Veolan was raided by one Donald was not to learn until later. Mean
Bean Lean , a Highland cateran ,or robber, while he was hospitably entertained,
who carried off the baron's milch cows. and the only disconcerting incident
Raids of this kind were of frequent was the disappearance of his seal .
occurrence on the Highland border, and This was taken from him while he slept,
a local chieftain, Fergus MacIvor, Vich and the outlaw used it as a sign of his
Ian Vohr, received from many Lowland authority to the recruits Waverley had
gentlemen what was known as " pro- taken with him to Dundee from Waver
tection money ,” as a surety against the ley-Honour, whom Donald Bean Lean
attention oftheserobbers. Between this urged to desert and to join the forces
chieftain and the baron there had been of Charles Edward, Bonnie Prince
a quarrel. Rose's father suddenly dis- Charlie," whenever they heard of the
covered that he had unknowingly, landing of this personage in Scotland.
through an agent, paid " protection After his visit to the secret hold of
money ” to Vich Ian Vohr. Thereupon Donald Bean Lean, Waverley was
he had promptly stopped the payment . escorted to Glennaquoich, the home of
Vich Ian Vohr. He was received very
HIGHLANDCAME TO THE HAUNT OF cordially by this chieftain and his
HOWTHEWAVERLEX
But after Donald Lean's
Bean sister Flora . Flora MacIvor bore a
escapade, Vich Ian Vohr, who held the striking resemblance to her brother.
baron in great respect, sent to the She had the same antique and regular
master of Tully-Veolan, offering aid in correctness of profile, the same dark
the recovery of the missing cattle. This eyes, eyelashes and eyebrows, the
message was brought to Tully-Veolan sameclearness of complexion. But the
by a kinsman of the chief's, Evan Dhu haughty and somewhat stern regularity
MacCombich . From the last-named, of Fergus's features was beautifully
Waverley heard accounts of Highland softened in those of Flora . Her voice
ways and customs that stirred his lovewas soft and sweet , yet in urging any
of adventure. When , therefore, Evan favourite topic it possessed the tones
Dhu offered to conduct him to the which impress awe and conviction .
stronghold of Donald Bean Lean and CHARMING HEROINE WHO STOOD
the home of Vich Ian Vohr, he decided THEFAST FOR THE JACOBITES
to accept the invitation . Flora MacIvor was most devotedly
Waverley's journey in the company attached to the exiled Stuarts. To
of Evan Dhu, and the latter's wild- contribute to the restoration of their
looking companions,
companions, through wild family to the throne, " she was pre
mountain scenery, was one well calcu- pared to do all, to suffer all , to sacrifice
lated to appeal to his love of the all.” And Flora was as accomplished
romantic, particularly that part of it as she was beautiful .
which took him at night- time in silence At first there was nothing at Glenna
over the waters of an unknown lake to quoich to tempt Waverley to take up the
the robber's fastness. cause which Vich Ian Vohr and his sister
On meeting Donald Bean Lean , had at heart ; that is to say, he was not
Waverley was astonished, even alarmed, directly asked to throw in his lot with
to find a person of this description so the cause . But one day hetook part
accurately informed of the strength and in a hunting expedition . This was
DOTTXDUXITUTIKLIDTER ETTERKUT URITY
1495
 - THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
organised as a kind of prelude to definite Flora used her influence to make
action by the Jacobites. Waverley Waverley think more intimately of her
met with an accident which delayed friend, Rose Bradwardine, ignorant of
his return to Dundee . But Donald her own brother's attachment to the
Bean Lean had gone there, and while baron's daughter. Between love and
Waverley was at Glennaquoich , the war, Waverleywascarried almost breath
Jacobite was tempting the men of his lessly along in the train of the rebellion .
regiment to join him , and intercepting He took part in the victory of the
letters sent to Waverley by Colonel Highlanders at Preston-Pans, and in
Gardiner, first of all advising, and then this battle saved the life of his uncle's
commanding, his return to duty. friend, Colonel Talbot .
H ° WSCOANTTIENGLISH
SH REBELSSOLDIER JOINED THE There was another incident of the
vattle which made a grave impression
At last despatches reached Waverley. on Waverley's mind . This was the 1

They contained matters of very deep death of Colonel Gardiner The

interest . His father wrote complain- colonel, sorely wounded , was main
ing bitterly of bad treatment at the taining a desperate and unavailing
hands of the Government . There was resistance against a strong body of the
a long -delayed letter from Colonel Highlanders when Waverley saw him .
Gardiner commanding his return to ' HE DEATH OF WAVERLEY'S COLONEL ON
Dundee within three days. Then his THETHE FIELD OF PRESTON - PANS
uncle and aunt wrote asking him to “ To save this good and brave man
resign his commission rather than became the instant object of his most
render himself subject to such treat- anxious exertions. But he could only
ment as that which had been meted witness his fall . Ere Edward could make
out to his father. From a newspaper his way among the Highlanders, who,
put into his hands by Vich Ian Vohr, furious and eager for spoil, now thronged
Waverley next learned that he had upon each other, he saw his former
been deprived of his commission . commander brought from his horse by
Regarding himself now asa man greatly the blow of a scythe, and beheld him re
wronged , one who had been publiclyceive, while on the ground, more wounds
disgraced without a hearing, Waverley than would have let out twenty lives."
threw in his lot with the Highlanders. After the battle of Preston - Pans
By this time Vich Ian Vohr had ob- Waverley marched with the rebels into
served, with no little satisfaction , the England. He was with them in their
growing attachment of Waverley to enforced return, till the disaster at
Flora . He saw, indeed, no bar to their Clifton, where Vich Ian Vohr was taken
union save the relations between Waver- prisoner. Then he was separated from
ley's father and the Government, and his them . Unflinchingly loyal to the
guest's commission in the king's army. cause he had espoused, Vich Ian Vohr
These obstacles were now removed . inet his death within the grim walls of
WYERLEY, MEETS THE PRETENDER TO Carlisle Castle . Brokenlamenting
THE BRITISH
at last in
that
spirit, Flora MacIvor,
On her part, if she entertained any she had urged her brother on to his
feeling other than friendship for terrible end, sought refuge in the con
Waverley, Flora MacIvor did not show vent of the Scottish Benedictine nuns
it . And, strongly attached as she was in Paris. Waverley was pardoned and
to the cause of the Stuarts, she appre- his life was saved largely through the 1

ciated the risk involved by the rebels, affectionate devotion of Rose Brad
and bade Waverley consult his reason- wardine, whose kindness to the outlaw's
not his resentment nor his feelings in daughter was the means of bringing to
regard to herself — before he decided to light Donald Bean Lean's treacherous
join them . But the resentment, or use of Waverley's letters and signet .
the feelings, or both, gained the day. A wiser and an infinitely stronger
Thus, it happened that Waverley man for his adventures, Waverley
was introduced by Vich Ian Vohr to married Rose Bradwardine , and became
the Young Chevalier . And the personal master of Waverley -Honour.
charm of this unfortunate young man The next stories of Famous Books begin 1
completed his conversion. Meanwhile, on page 1599.
OURTEEKYTULATED EXTITUTXITYCUTIVITY
ur rutruuntimurinn
1496
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS

COMME

aby READING CRAB

MORE PRONOUNS
IT is quite a long time
since we had any CONTINUED FROM 1408
proper sentences to
read . We were so busy
learning about HE , SHE, IT, and all cause they show that the persons
the other little words, that we forgot
to have a real reading lesson . We
shall be surprised to find how we have
been getting on with our reading all
the time, though we forgot all about
it in our last lesson . Here are some
words that we shall be able to read
quite by ourselves :
The BLACK PEN is MINE.
The LARGER of the two BOOKS
is THINE .
This PRETTY GARDEN is HIS .
That WATCH is HERS .
Do you see that HOUSE ? It is
OURS.
Is the BROWN DRESS YOURS ?
I like our DOLLS better than
THEIRS .
When you have read all those
through , look back for a minute at
the last word in each of the sen
tences . What do you notice about
these last words ? That they save us
the trouble of using a whole lot of
other words : one little word does
instead of several . In the first sen
tence, if we could not use the little
word MINE, we should have to say :
The black pen is the pen belonging to
me ; and in the second : The larger
of the two books is the book be-
longing to thee, and so on. So be-
cause these words MINE, THINE,
HIS, HERS, OURS, YOURS, THEIRS
stand “ for nouns,” they must be
PRO-NOUNS, just like our old friends
AND VERBS
HE, SHE, IT. Only
the pronouns we have
just been learning are
called Pos- ses -sive, be .
possess, or have certain things. The
pronouns that we learned in our last
lesson were Per - son -al.
Now, suppose I shut my two hands
tight, and held them out to you and
said : “ Now , which of my two hands
will you have ? ” And suppose you
had been watching very sharply and
seen me slip a piece of chocolate into
this hand, and a little stone into that
hand, you would answer, like a shot,
THIS . And, do you know, when you
said THIS you were really and truly
using a pronoun. Yes, and a new
sort of pronoun, too . You never
thought you were doing that, did
you ? And because THIS and THAT
are used when we wish to point out
something ( though we are taught it
is rude to point), they are called
Pointing -out pronouns, or (if we wish
to sound very clever) De-mon -stra
tive, which just means “ pointing out.”
Have you read any of “ Alice in
Wonderland ," or " Alice Through the
Looking-glass " ? If so , you will know
something about Tweedle-dum and
Tweedle-dee. Here is more about them :
YOU have heard of Tweedle -dum ,
YOU have heard of Tweedle-dee ,
WE are both so much alike, that
YOU can't tell HIM from ME ;
How handy IT would be if one were
thin and one were fat,
For then you'd say at once : Why,
THIS is THIS, and THAT . THAT

1497
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
It is really very awkward when WE were a bird ? ” for you to answer
both begin to dress, “6 Table ." And how everyone would
Our clothes are so alike that we get in laugh if, when you were asked u“ What
id
a dreadful mess ; are you sitting on ? ” yo sa
When I say Tweedle -dum , my dear, Swim .” These two kirds of names
I'm sure this coat is MINE ,” are quite different, you see, and they
HE always answers “ Tweedle -dee, how must not be muddled up.
can my coat be THINE ? ” Now, we learned that the first kind of
Now weare coming to something new. words was called NOUNS, and we had
We will begin by asking ourselves a few better learn for this lesson that this
questions, and trying to read the answers. other kind is called VERBS. Every
How do babies move about before word that tells us something about
they are able to walk ? CRAWL what a noun is or does is a VERB . I
think you will understand it quite well 1
if we read a few more sentences together.
Cinderella LOSES her shoe .
Here LOSES tells us what Cinderella
What do they do when they have did, and so it is a verb. Cinderella,
grown a little bigger ? WALK being the nameof a person, is a noun .
St. George KILLED the Dragon .
In this sentence KILLED tells us
what St. George did, and so it is a verb.
In the next sentences, I am sure you
can all pick out the verbs if you try :
What do you do when you want to Mary HAD a little lamb.
get home from school quickly ? RUN Who KILLED Cock Robin ?
Tom , Tom , the Piper's son,
STOLE a pig, and away he RAN .
A stitch in time SAVES nine .
A soft answer TURNETH away wrath.
TheWANT
Lord IS my shepherd : I shall not
How would you travel if you were a .
bird ? FLY God IS love.
We LOVE Him because He first
LOVED us.

y There is just one other thing that I

must tell you, and that is, there must
be a verb in every sentence. If you
And what do the little fishes do when try to make a sentence without a verb,
(
they are asked out to tea ? SWIM you may “ try, try, and try again ,
but you won't succeed. Even in
sentences with only one word in them, 1
we find that word is a verb ; such as
HARK , LOOK , COME .
And what do you do when you play Now try to find all the verbs in this
hopscotch ? HOP rhyme :
Hark, the clock strikes one, two, three,
We must give the dolls their tea.
Hark , the clock strikes four, five, six,
Nurse is calling Reg and Trix ;
Now it's striking seven and eight,
Now, if you look at all those words Hurry up, or we'll be late. 1
1
that are printed in big letters, you By the time the clock strikes nine,
will see that they all mean doing You're in your bed, I in mine.
something.” They are not names of But when the big hall-clock strikes ten,
persons or things, like man or table. I'm not awake to hear it then.
How silly it would be, when you were Eleven ends the big folks' day,
asked How would you travel if you At twelve the fairies start their play.
20

1498
 . WRITING
TOM AND NORA LEARN
BEFORE writing anything new, let
us see how you remember all
the capital letters, writing them in the
order of the alphabet," said Tom and
Nora's mother at their next lesson.
When they had written all the letters
like that, they took two pairs of nail-
scissors, cut the paper into squares
with a letter on each , and asked each
other the names of the letters.
“ There is something very different
to learn to -day - we are going to make
figures. It is quite as necessary to
make good figures as letters,” said the
children's mother. " You can make
I and o already."
Tom and Nora had learned how to
count, so they watched their mother
write these figures :
23 :28BB
TO WRITE FIGURES
Then Tom and Nora took their pencils
and copied rows of their mother's
figures. They were puzzled to know
where 8 started, but were told it
should begin near the top at the right
and curve up and round to the left,
then down and round to the right to
form the lower circle to join the
beginning, and ought not to start the
other way, for that would be like
trying to wind a skein of wool from
the wrong end. Nora smiled, for she
had tried to do that very thing the
day before.
When all the figures were nicely made,
the children were shown how to put
I before each figure to make the numbers
10 to 19, using the figures they already
knew, just like this :

2 3
3 4 5 70 II 72 73
67
G 77 8 ( 9 74 75 76 77 T
“ So many people make bad figures,
and then mistake them for each other ;
but much trouble might be saved by
78
making figures clear and plain without
flourishes. Before beginning to write,
let us talk about these figures. Tell me
TO
what you see.” " Make the I quite distinct ; never
Tom noticed the figures were all be join it on to the next figure ; and never
tween the lines except 7 and 9, which had start making it with a little stroke
strokes for tails below the line. Nora before it, forthen it might be mistaken
saw that 3 and 5 had their lower parts for a bad 7. The numbers from 20
quite alike, but 3 had a smaller curve to 29 are written with 2 before.
for the upper part, while 5 started with
a short down - stroke and had a cross
stroke from the top of that to the right.
Both decided that7 must be quite easy
to make-just a line to the right and a
20 21 22
down that 9 like o
ashort
upside down.”
4 ?
а
strokeandatailtotheright
look ofit. 23 24 25 26
“ Like a short 7 with a stroke
through,” said Nora. “ Four is almost
as easy as 7."
“ 6 is a curly tail," said Tom , " and
8 is like two little circles Where does
27 28 29
“ In the same way we may use 3
it begin and end ? " for the thirties, 4 for the forties, 5 for
Nora said 2 reminded her of capital the fifties, 6 for the sixties, 7 for the
Q, but was ever so much smaller. seventies, 8 for the eighties, and 9
1499
 com THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL
for the nineties . All the other numbers
are formed with the ten figures you
already know .”
For several days Tom and Nora
practised making figures, and their
mother gave them each a box of small
square pieces of blank card, on every
one of which they wrote a small letter,
a capital letter, or a figure, and played the shortest time.
at putting them together to make little
words. At this time they were learning
to spell short words, and so when
their friends came to tea they brought
out the boxes of their own letters, made
ARITHMETICO
SUBTRACTING SEVERAL
N this lesson it will be well to go back
for a while, and learn a little more
about subtraction .
In Lesson 9 we saw how to subtract
one number from another. Let us see
whether it is not just as simple to take
away several numbers at once from the
other number.
The method we used for subtracting
347 from 635 was this. We placed 347
under 635, so that units were
635 under units, tens under tens,
347 and so on. Then we found
what must be added to 347 so
288 as to make 635. First , we
made 7 up to the next num-
ber ending in 5 — that is, 15, saying
7 and 8 make 15, and writing 8
in the answer. Next , the I of the 15
(which is I ten ) makes the 347 into
357 ; so we went on, 5 and 8 make 13 .
Put 8 in the ten's place of theanswer,
and carry the 1 of the 13. This i is
I hundred, and we therefore had 4
hundreds in the lower number , which
required 2 more to make 6.
Now, by using this same method, we
can easily take away several numbers
at once from a given number. We have
only to add the several numbers to-
gether, and make the total up to the
other given number . An example will
make this clear.
Take away the sum of 349, 17, 1241 ,
and 406 from 5927.
Write the numbers down exactly as
for an addition sum--that is, place all
the unit's figures in a column, so that
tens come under tens, and so on. Put
the number 5927, from which the
1500
LESSONS
words with the letters,, and gave them
to each other to find out the words they
spelled. The one who made the most
right words won the game. With the
figures they made each other little
sums to do, and sometimes they had a
writing competition to see who could
make the best and neatest letters in
Their motherwas so pleased with their
progress that she said they were ready
to write words and little sentences, and
that they should start to do so at
the next lesson , and use pen and ink .
NUMBERS AT ONCE
others are to be taken, first ; separate
it from those below by drawing a line
under it. Next, add together
5927 the unit's figures of the num
bers which come below this
349 line. Say, 6 and 1, 7 ; and 7,
17 14 ; and 9, 23 ; or, what is
1241 better still, say only, 6, 7, 14,
406 23 . Now , having found the
total, 23, we have simply to
3914 say how much must be added
to 23 to make it up to the next
number above 23 which ends in a 7
(since the unit's figure of our top line is
a 7 ). This number is, of course, 27, and
we know that 4 must be added to 23 to
make 27. We write 4 in the answer, and
carry the 2 (tens) of the 27 to the next
column.
We now repeat the process with the
ten's column, saying 2 , 6, 7, II, and 1
make 12 . Put I in the answer, and
carry the I of the 12 to the next column .
Next , for the hundred's column , we have
I, 5 ,7, 10, and 9 make 19. Put down 9
in the answer and carry 1. Finally,
1 , 2, and 8 make 5. Put down 3 .
We see, then , that when the given
numbers are subtracted from 5927 we
have 3914 left. We can test whether
our answer is right by adding together
all the numbers except the 5927. If the
working is correct the answer, 3914 ,
and the four numbers 406, 1241, 17,
and 349 will make the number 5927.
This perhaps sounds rather difficult,
but it only appears so because the
explanation is long. The process is
quite as easy as an ordinary addition
sum . In the following example no
 ARITHMETIC

more has been written down than we 850 its unit's figures, exactly as
actually say to ourselves in working the we do for multiplication . In
sum . 133 fact, we are simply going to
How much is left after 528, I102, 5 multiply 133 by 5 , and make
347, and 129 have been taken away the result up to 850. Thus,
from 3016 ? 185 we say, five 3's, 15 ; and 5
3016 Say, 9, 16, 18, 26 ; and 0 make 20. Carry 2. Five 3's,
make 26. Carry 2. 4, 8, 10 ; 15 ; and 2, 17 ; and 8 make 25 .
and 1 make II . Carry 1. Carry 2. Five I's, 5 , and 2, 7 ; and 1
528
I102
2, 5 , 6, II ; and 9 make make 8. So, the result is 185 .
20 . Carry 2. 2, 3 ; and o The following examples are to be
347 make 3.
129 worked in the way we have shown :
As we come to each figure in 1. Take the sum of 782, 6031, 13, and
910
heavy type we write it in the 519 from 8207.
answer .
that all the numbers 2. Find the remainder when 3912,
to Itbe may
takenhappen
away are the same. In that 4608, 353, 97, and 1029 are taken from
ten thousand.
case we can use our multiplication table.
How many marbles will be left out of 3. Add together 129, 1008, 36, 508,
850 after 5 boys have each had 133 ? and take the result from 3021 .
Instead of writing 133 five times, 4. Subtract 77 times 154 from 2540.
we write it once, and place a 5 under 5. Subtract 8 times 643 from 5162 .
elegalogPJMUSICCWoeg
THE “SLEEPY ARM ” GAME OF THE FAIRIES
TO-DAY we are really going to think fingers are rounded, that the back of
about the best way of getting the the hand is quite level, and that we
piano fairies to talk to us . They are have a horizontal line from the elbow
very particular little people, and it is to the fingers. This must be our posi
quite right to be particular, for there is tion when we play the piano. The little
always a right way and a wrong way girl in the picture on page 1405 is not
of doing things, and we must be careful sitting in at all the right way.
always to find the right way. The fairies know that all this is so
If we approach important, they are
the fairies' king very anxious for
dom-in other us not to forget,
words, the piano so we will make
-in the proper ourselves very safe
way, their voices and sure by saying
will sound really it all over again .
beautiful ; but if 1. Our seat must
we hit the notes be immediately op
instead of loving posite the middle of
them we shall get the pianoforte.
very little beauty 2. We must sit
from them . far enough away
First of all, we from the piano to
must find our seat , allow our elbows to
and we must place How we should sit to play the piano
be well in front of
it so that when we our body.
sit on it we shall be immediately oppo- 3. Our fingers must be nicely curved,
site the middle of the piano, and the so that we touch the notes with the
seat must be far enough away to allow little fleshy tops which Nature has
our elbows to be in front of our body. given to us.
Now we will put our hands on the notes, 4. We must have the back of our hand
but we will not press them down just quite level, and a nice horizontal line
yet. We have to be so sure that our from the elbow to the fingers.
1501
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
If we think of all this, and watch our-
selves very carefully, the fairies will
be very pleased Even now they are
anxious for us to feel quite happy, and
not at all tired, so they say that if our
legs are not quite long enough to reach
the ground, we must have a footstool
for our feet. Do you not think they are
very thoughtful little people ?
They have something else they want
us to do to-day, as well ; they say we
must have a very loose arm , and a very
loose wrist. When we want to walk
we do not make our legs as stiff as a
board, do we ? We just let them
move easily, and that is how we
must walk on the piano, only we shall
use hands and arms, instead of feet
and legs .
Here is a little game which the fairies
want us to play. They have a funny
name
for it, they call it “ The
Sleepy Arm ." We can come away
from the piano, and sit down anywhere
we like for a change. We let our hand
rest quite easily on our lap, then we
throw it up above our head and keep
it there while we count 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 .
Directly we have said “. four," we
pretend we go fast to sleep, and our so happy, for he taught himself how to
arm will drop. It must be quite limp,
just like it would be if we were asleep .
Its own weight makes it fall, like a ball
drops to the ground after we have thrown
it up into the air.
Shall we see how easily we can make
our arm playat being asleep before our
next little talk ? Wewill play this game
ever so many times each day, for the
» DRAWING
PUTTING ON A GRADUATED WASH
INN ways
our painting lessons we have al. paper, this need not happen if we are
pinned our drawings on our careful to damp all the surface equally,
boards. If our paper has been thin, and not too much ; but when we want
or if we have
soaked it too
much, we have
sometimes
found it
crinkled on
the surface,
which , of
course , spoils
а wash.
flat
When we are
colouring only small things,
and are using cartridge
1502
OF SCHOOL LESSONS
more often we play it the more free
will our arm become.
The fairies think we ought to have a
story as well as a game, so here it is :
In the ever so long ago, there lived a
little boy who loved the music fairies
with a great and wondrous love. He
had a toy which was his great delight - a
wee orchestra of trumpets, horns, drums,
and Jews’ -harps. The father was not
quite so fond of the music fairies, and
tried to make his little boy forget all
about them ; but this was quite im
possible, for when music was forbidden
our poor little friend wasvery, very sad.
But there was a kind somebody
who knew how the little one was fretting
to hear the music fairies tell their sweet
stories, and this kind someone managed
to smuggle a clavichord into a garret
in the top of the house. A clavichoro.
of course, was a musical instrument,
which came before the pianoforte.
There was one very funny thing about
it. The lower notes which on our piano
are white were black, and the upper
notes which on our piano are black
were white . It seems a funny instru
ment to us, but it made our little friend
play. He used to go to the churches
and hear beautiful music, and then he
would come back and run away to his
little garret, where his beloved clavi
chord lived , and persevere till he could
make the fairies sing sweet songs to him .
This little boy was George Frederick
Handel, one of the greatest composers
this world has ever seen .
to colour big
things very
nicely, we can
try another
sort of paper,
and fix it to
the board in
a better way.
We will get
a sheet of
water - colour
paper, which costs fivepence.
It is a big piece, so we will
 -DRAWING வைண

only use half of it to -day. Now, we surface of the paper and blot it in the
shall want some Stickphast Paste, or usual way ; then we must take a brush
some very strong gum , with a brush quite full of blue paint, just wet
or a sponge. We enough to work
must take our paper easily , and paint one
and thoroughly soak row along the top
it in cold water of the first oblong .
the bath is the best For the next row
place to do this. we must dip the
Then we must lay brush in clean water
it on the board, and first, and then in the
after squeezing the paint, and repeat
sponge well, press this to the bottom .
out some of the This fresh water,
water in the paper mixed with the
all over with it till colour, will make it
it lies quite flat. paler each time, till
Then we lift up the at the bottom row
edges and
paste it is quite light - as
the board about an if Oxford blue were
inch underneath the at the top and Cam
paper all the way bridge at the bot
round, then press tom. This is called
the paper down and putting on a gradu
leave it. ated wash . We
We have only This is a wash with one colour
learned something
made our flat washes about it on page 213.
in one colour all over, so far, even We try this again on the other
when we changed primary colours into oblong , choosing a mixed colour
secondary and tertiary colours. Now, green or violet - mixing plenty, because
we are going to put different shades of we cannot match the colour again .
the same colour on one part of our On the two other oblongs we will use
paper , and two colours together on the two separate colours . We can take
other part. We will first rule some ob- two colours from the sunset sky
long shapes on cobalt blue to
the paper. An light red, begin
oblong , of ning with the
course, has two blue as before ;
sides longer than but half - way
the other two. down we wash
We make the the brush and
short sides three take a little
inches, the long light red, mixed
sides five inches. with plenty of
We rule four water to make it
oblongs, two paler, and paint
with short sides across next to
at the top and the blue. The
tottom , and two blue edge will
with long sides melt intothe first
at the top and red edge, and as
bottom, in the we go down
position inwhich wards the red
we see them on shows by itself
page 1502. We till it grows
will paint our Sea and sky made with Indigo and Cobalt almost white on
first obiung in blue to match the sky : " he bottom line. We will do the
but we cannot put in any clouds yet . same thing with two other colours
We must just slightly damp the on the oblong that is left.
1503
 LITTLE PICTURE -STORIES IN FRENCH
First line : French . Second line : English words. Third line : As we say it in English.
Aujourd'hui nous irons à Versailles, où demeurait une fois une belle reine.
To-day we shall go to Versailles, where dwelt a time a beautiful queen .
To -day we are going to Versailles, where a beautiful queen once lived .
Nous arrivons à deux heures, et allons en voiture au palais, un édifice splendide.
We arrive at two hours, and go in carriage to the palace,an edifice splendid.
We arrive at two o'clock , and drive tothe palace, a fine building.
Nous traversons les chambres et regardons les beaux ameublements.
We traverse
the rooms and regard the beautiful furniture.
We walk through the rooms and look at the beautiful furniture.

Il y
у abeaucoup de tableaux sur les murs. J'aime les tableaux de batailles.
It there has much of pictures upon the walls. I like the pictures of battles.
There are many pictures on the walls. I like the battle pictures.
Nous voyons de drôles de lits. Ils ont un petit escalier sur le côté.
We see some droll of beds. They have a little staircase upon the side.
We see some funny beds. They have a little staircase by the side.
Les lits sont si hauts qu'on doit monter deux marches pour se coucher.
The beds are so high that one must to mount two stairs for oneself to go to bed .
The beds are so high that one has to go up two steps to go to bed .
Nous quittons le grand palais, et nous entrons dans Le Petit Trianon .
We quit the great palace, and we entei into the little palace.
We leave the big palace, and we go into Le Petit Trianon .

La reine et ses amis demeuraient ici quelquefois dans de petites maisons.

The queen and her friends dwelt here sometimes in some little houses.
Sometimes the queen and her friends lived here in little houses.
Jeannette arrache un peu de lierre de la muraille et le met à sa robe.
Jenny plucks a little ivy from the wall and it puts at her dress.
Jenny plucks a little bit of ivy from the wall and puts it in her dress.
Nous n'oublirons jamais le jardin de la malheureuse reine, Marie Antoinette.
We (not) shall forget never the garden of the unhappy queen, Marie Antoinette.
We shall never forget the garden of the unhappy queen , Marie Antoinette.
THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS BEGIN ON PAGE 1617

1504
 THINGS TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO
HOW TO MAKE PERFUME FROM FLOWERS
E all know that scent
Wis
and we have often wanted
CONTINUED FROM 1354
to try to produce some
for ourselves. Perhaps wehave shaken a
few petals up in a bottle with some water,
and then have been disappointed that the
liquid did not possess the same fragrance
as the perfume which we put on our hand-
kerchiefs. Our failure was simply due to the
fact that we did not set about the matter
in the right way, and if we follow a process
which is much after the lines on which
the real scent-producers work, we shall
meet with more success .
In the first place, it is necessary that we
should gather the petals of roses, violets, or
other blooms soon after they are open, and
when they are quite dry. In order to make
certain that there is no moisture on the
blooms, it is a good plan to spread them
out on a tray for a few minutes. While
they are drying we may start the next stage
in the process of the perfume making:
We shall need some of the best Lucca oil
for this purpose, and it is well to use that
which is sold for table purposes, as the
commoner sorts are not so pure.
Now get a sheet of wadding, and out
of this cut some pieces of the material
which shall be of a size to slip into a
three-pound glass jam - jar. It is easy to
round them off with a pair of scissors so
that they fit into the jar quite easily.
The next step is to get a good - sized
pie -dish, and into the bottom of this put
some of the pieces of wadding, and then
pour on a quantity of the oil. See that
thebits of cotton -wool become thoroughly
soaked with the oil , and when you have
got ready about eight or a dozen pieces in
this way , it is time to fetch the petals which
we left on the tray. Now get your jam - jar
and be sure that this is quite clean, and at
the same time ask cook to let you have a
small handful of salt. When you have
all the things around you , you may start
the next stage in the making of the scent.
First of all sprinkle a thin layer of salt on
the bottom of the jar, then cover this over
with petals, and on the top of the petals
place one of your pieces of wadding which
has been soaked in oil. Then put
1505
some more salt, another
layer of petals, and one
more piece of wadding,
and so on until the jar
is quite full. It is now necessary to make
sure that the jar is perfectly air-tight, and
the best way to bring this about is to tie
a cover of grease-proof paper very tightly
round the opening. Perhaps it will be as
well to put the paper in two thicknesses,
so as to be quite certain that no air can
come in .
At this point thejar should be removed
to a warm place, if possible where it will
get plenty of sunshine. Remember that
the more the sun shines on the petals the
more likely will you be to get the best
of the fragrance from the flowers.
The jar of petals must now be left as it
is for at least a fortnight. At the end of
fourteen days the cover may be taken off
the jar containing the flowers. The thing
to do next is to press the oil from the layers
of wadding, and this will be found to smell
like the best scent, according to the kind
of flowers which have been treated. If
roses have been used, the perfume will
smell of these flowers, and so on. It is
rather difficult to get all the oil out of
the contents of the jar, and the easiest
way, is to use a big spoon , putting this
inside and then pressing the layers as
hard as we can . If, after doing this, we
tip the jar up, the oil will trickle down
into a bottle or anything, we may have
underneath . It will be found that this
scent will keep almost for any time if kept
in a well-stoppered bottle. A few drops
placed on a handkerchief will give a
splendid fragrance that will last a good
deal longer than many of the cheap scents
which are purchased.
After we have learned how to make the
simple scents by the use of one kind of
flower, it is interesting to try to prepare
some combination perfume. As a matter of
fact, nearly all the shop scents are produced
by blending several scents together . A
very pleasant perfume may be obtained, if
whentreating the rose leaves we scatter a
few lavender blossoms on each layer ;
whilst in the same way rosemary leaves
and violets will give us quite a fresh scent.
 CLOSELU COSECCO ALEXIS

SIMPLE KITES AND HOW TO MAKE THEM

HERE are many different kinds of kites. aside till the backbone of the kite is ready,
THI Some are very simple, and these · We require for the backbone a length of
we shall see how to make in this article . wood that will be strong and light. A piece
Others are made to resemble ships, of thin cane will do nicely if it is rather stiff.
dragons, and other things, and for the But a long slip of wood - say, from 24 to
way to make these readers must consult 30 inches long - will do aboutas well. We
the index. thin and smooth this slip, and then tie it to
The ordinary kite is made the notch in the centre of the
with materials,
very simplecosts and half-hoop , so as to leave 1 inch
its manufacture very little sticking up beyond the top of
indeed. First, we require the the half-hoop. Picture 3 shows
half of a hoop. The size of the the kite at a later stage, but
hoop depends upon the sizeof shows also the position of the
kite we are going to make, or, hoop and the backbone. Now
rather, the size of kite that we 1. Testing the top tie a thin , strong string to one
shall have willAdepend upon the size of hoop end of the half-hoop, or top, as weshall now
call it, at one of the end notches, pass the
that we use . hoop from a butter -cask will
do very well for a small kite, and any grocer string once round the backbone, and the
will be glad to give us one if other end tie to the notch in the
we ask him , without expecting opposite end ofthe top. Balance
any payment for it. We do not the whole by placing one end of
use the whole hoop, but only the backbone on one forefinger,
a piece a little smaller than half and the other end of the back
of it. We choose the best part 2. Top with notches bone on the forefinger of the
for this purpose , and cut away other hand. We can then see if
the remainder. Then we thin the half-hoop the top swings heavier at one side than at
with a pocket-knife, taking care not to the other. If one side is heavier, we move
take off enough to weaken it much. We the backbone along the string a little bit,
must thin until we
it equally find from
all round, the swing
and we that it is
should test right in the
it to see middle be
that we tween the
have not two ends
made it of the top .
lighter at Picture 6
one side shows how
than at we test the
another . balance.
The way to Having
test it is done this,
simple. we join
Take a each end
piece of of the top
string and with string
3. Frame of 5. Strut in
put it kite 4. Cutting the paper position
to the bot
round the tom end of
outside of the half-hoop, then cut it_off to the backbone, where we put a notch or a
the exact length of the half-hoop. Double hole to receive the string: The kite now
the string then , and again put it round the looks like picture 3. All the strings should
half-hoop as far as it will go from be fairly tight.
one end . Make a notch with the We now get a large sheet of thin,
penknife where the end
doubled string comes of the strong paper. A sheet of a large
. Then newspaper would do, but imitation
balance the half-hoop on the edge parchment paper, if we can get it,
of the knife -blade at this point, is stronger and better. The paper
as seen in picture i . If the half must be large enough to cover the
hoop hangs evenly, and does not entire kite from top to bottom and
hang down at one end more than 6. Testing the balance from side to side. If the only
at the other, it is all right ; but, if paper we can get is in too small
one end hangs down more than the other, sheets, we can make one sheet large enough
we must shave a little more wood from the by pasting two or more pieces together at
heavier end , so as to make it the same weight their edges.
as the other end. When we have got the We place the kite on the top of the paper,
half-hoop thinned properly and balanced, we on a table or on the floor, and, with a pencil,
make a notch at each side of each end, close draw a line round the kite, about 1 inch out
to the end , as seen in picture 2, and put it side the hoop top, and 2 inch outside the
1506
 SIMPLE KITES AND HOW TO MAKE
string sides , as seen in picture 4. Paste or
gum the edges of the paper, and fold it over,
and stick it down. Turn it over carefully,
and stick on two or three patches on the
back, thereby sticking the backbone to the
covering paper and strengthening it. The
kite is made ,and
wemay prepare
to fly it.
Tie a string at
the back from
side to side,
from one end of
7.
the top to the
other end of the
top. Take a
piece of wood
about 4 inches
long, and, hav
ing cut a notch in each end of
it, fit it between thi: string and
the backbone with one end on
each . From the back, the kite
will now look like picture 5.
Tie a string from top to
bottom of the backbone in
front. This is the bridle . It
must be slack, so that the kite
will fly properly.
Tie another piece of string 8. Square kite
to the lower end of the back
bone and let it hang loose
say , about 5 yards long. This
is the tail. Make some loops in the tail
right down, 2 feet apart, and put in tufts of
paper, and then pull the loops tight. These
tufts are streamers, and make the kite look
well when we fly it.
The kite is now ready for the field. We
take it out when the wind is fairly strong.
THEM
We should have a ball of string, or more
than one ball, wound upon a stick. Tie the
end of this string to the bridle so that the kite
hangs horizontal when suspended, and tie a
piece of turf to the end of the tail. One boy
takes the kite by the bottom end, leaving the
tail lying free.
Another ' boy
takes the ball of
string to which
the kite is tied,
and goes away
about 10 yards
Flying the kite
in the direction
from which the
wind is blowing :
Both stand and
wait for a breeze.
Then , as the boy
with the kite cries " Go ! ” he
throws the kite violently for
ward into the air, and his friend
runs his best. Then, if it has
all been properly done, the
kite soars aloft steadily in the
wind , and the string can be let
out carefully and gradually. If
the kite does not rise, the tail
may be too heavy, and some
of the turf must be taken off.
ye
If it wobbles, or rushes from
side to side, the tail may be
too light, and a heavier piece
of turf must be put on the tail.
That is , perhaps, the simplest form of kite.
A square kite is another very simple shape,
and is shown in picture 8. From this picture,
and from the description of how to make the
kite we have seen , we can make a square
kite without further instructions.

EMBROIDERING A POCKET- HANDKERCHIEF

HANDKERCHIEFS may be spoiltbyunsightly
marking, and it certainly is a pity to ruin
a beautiful white cambric one by blotched
initials in ink . Let us see how the marking
may be embroidery
plainly, and yet artistically
done in ..
We can buy a dainty hemstitched
handkerchief for 64 d ., and all we
shall then require will be a pair of
hoops, costing 6d., a reel of Chad
wick's Moravian embroidery cotton ,
2 %2d ., and , if we cannot draw our
selves, a Briggs transfer design for
the corner of a handkerchief (some
small design such as shamrocks or
forget-me-nots is most suitable )
and some initials. These would
cost ad .
We shall, perhaps, find it
easier to start with initials
instead of a monogram , which
is, of course, two or more
letters twined together.
We will start by pinning the
pattern across one corner of the
handkerchief,, taking care that
the shiny side is lying on the
cambric . This we must press
with a moderately hot iron.
We then remove the paper and pin the initials
inside the circle of shamrocks that we have
ironed on to the corner.
To embroider handkerchiefs successfully
we take the two small wooden
hoops, which fit tightly over one
another, stretching the design over
the smaller one and fastening the
larger over the handkerchief, so
that now the cambric looks like the
top of a drum or a tambourine.
Working on hoops will keep us
from puckering the work ,and until
wehave had a little practice this is
Satin stitch difficult to avoid.
When these preparations are
made, we can begin the actual
work . First we cut a short
thread from our reel, and we
find that each thread is divided
into several strands. Let us
thread our needle with four of
these strands to do the padding.
We pad the flowers and letters
to raise them up and to make
them firm .
Suppose we are going to work
shamrocks round our initials .
Padding the leaves These are three small leaves of
1507
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
about the same size joined together on one to the top, and then from the top of the left
stem , and a line or vein runs down the centre hand side to the bottom, so that these stitches
of each leaf. Our first work will be to pad go the reverse way to those of the padding.
the leaves by taking a tiny stitch at the We put them very close together so that
bottom of the right none of the padding
hand half of the leaf, shows through , with
and with the cotton the line down the
lying across the leaf middle clear.
making another When we have
small stitch at the finished the leaves,
top, again leaving we can work the
the cotton on the stalks over and over
upper side of the the blue line with
work , and crossing tiny stitches, and as
over the first stitch . near togetherand as
And so we go on even as possible.
crossing the stitches At last we can

on the right side, begin the initials.

weaving the needle Pad the thick parts
in and out till the of these letters care
half-leaf is padded fully, taking only two
thickly in themiddle strands of cotton in
and thinly at the the needle. We must
sides. The line for The finished corner on the embroidering frame pad , too , with small
the vein must be left stitches, and weave
distinct. We can then pad the other half of them over one another so as to keep them
the leaf in the same way. Now we must smooth. Then we work them over from left
begin to work over the padding with satin to right with satin stitch, using two strands
stitch, very evenly, beginning at the bottom of cotton and placing each stitch close to the
of the right-hand side of the leaf, and working other. Work the full-stop with tiny satin stitch .
HOW THE CONJURER MAKES HIS MONEY
EVERY boy hasaliking forbrightsixpences, as shown in picture 2. These are, in fact,
so I am going to tell you a way ofmaking mere shells, fitting one over the other in
them for yourselves, not imitation coins, but regular order. The cover ( B) has no speciality.
real good money. The only drawback about To prepare for the trick you must, in the
the process is that each sixpence you make first place, provide yourself with three
costs the same amount sixpenny-pieces, the
to produce, but you А B newer and the brighter
need not tell your the better. One of
friends that. these you place on A,
To coin money, of 1. The conjurer's mint and cover it with c.
course, you need a You place another six
die . '' The die, in this case, is in two parts, pence on c, and cover it with D ; and , lastly,
as illustrated in picture i - a sort of little place the third coin on D, and cover it with E.
anvil ( A) and a cover (B) , the one fitting does
5 So arranged, the whole looks exactly as A
DDDDD

over the other. With this are used three in our first picture.
blanks " of bright metal, supposed to be To show the trick, you lay the first of
silver, but in reality tin . To show your blanks on E, and cover it with B.
the trick , you put one of these on After stamping it as already described,
A, which is just large enough to B you lift off B, pressing its sides lightly.
receive it, and cover it with B. You The effect of this is that E comes away
stamp it by bringing down one end of inside B, carrying off the blank between
your magic wand smartly upon it. If E them , and leaving the uppermost
you don't happen to have a magic sixpence exposed. The process is
wand, a ruler or even a lead pencil will repeated for each sixpence.
do just as well. You now lift off the D The little apparatus, which is klown
upper die, when the blank is found to as the Magic Mint, and is sold at is. , is
be transformed into a bright sixpence. C so neatly made that, when duly pre
You take this off, putanother blank on pared with the needful sixpences, you
the little anvil , cover it, and stampit as need have no fear, unless you are
before. When the upper die is lifted, A exceptionally clumsy, of lifting off
the second blank has been coined into more than the proper shell or shells.
a sixpence. Once more the process is 2. The anvil A hint may be given to the grown -up
repeated , and a third sixpence is the reader. Apart from its attraction for
result. The secret lies in the construction of
the little anvil (A ). This looks like a solid
the juvenile performer, this will be found an
admirable trick for exhibition by good
bit of brass, but it isn't. Instead of being natured uncles or other relatives, the six
all in one piece, as it appears to be, it pences being in this case presented to the
consists of four distinct parts ( A, C, D, E ) , spectators, proof positive of no deception."
1508
 A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH
WHAT TO DO AT THE
SEPTEMBER is a terrible month for weeds,
therefore the hoe must be used so
frequently that they never attain to their
flowering and seeding stage. Really, weeds
are very little trouble if they are attended to
while quite small. We must remember that
not only are weeds unsightly when growing
among our flowers, but also that they are
depriving our garden plants of a portion of
the goodness and nutriment of the soil.
If possible, we should begin our autumn
planting about this time. To find room for
it we may uproot any annualplants that have
finished Áowering. Even if left, they would
die before the winter, so that if their beauty
is gone, they are better taken away, for they,
too, are using up the goodness of the soil.
Probably you sowed the seeds of wall-
flowers, pink and white daisies, and perhaps
forget-me-nots, and now have a quantity of
young plants that, during the summer, you
have been growing in some spare piece of
ground, or even in boxes. All of these may
be planted in your little plots as soon as you
can find room for them, and they will make
the plots bright and
beautiful next spring.
The polyanthuses, too ,
if these were removed
to make more room for
your summer - flower
-
ing plants, and have
been kept growing in
some cool, moist spot,
may all be brought
back at the present
time, and replanted
in the little gardens.
At this season you
will scarcely need to
water your plots atall,
for beside the rainfall there are heavy dews
night and morning, and these give quite suffi-
cient moisture at this season , but pot-plants
will need regular attention, though even they
will require less water than 'was necessary a
few weeks ago. The chief thing to aim at now,
so far as the appearance of the little garden
goes, when everything is getting rank and
overgrown, is neatness - plants may need an
extra tie to keep them from overhangingand
invading others. Edges should be kept clean
and very tidy, and plants may even need re-
ducing somewhat to keep them within bounds.
There is a very delightful bit of autumn
gardening that awaits us now, nothing less
important than the planting of the bulbs out
of doors. ( Here in England we are often
tempted to put the work off until November
is half through, and even later than that ; but
in Holland, the great land of bulbs, they do
the work quite early. We can easily see the
wisdom of thus taking time by the forelock,
as the good old saying has it. If we take
up a bulb that has been in the ground ever
since it flowered in the early spring - a snow-
drop, let us say — and examineit at the end of
August,we shall see that already it has made
voor
1509
BY MONTH
END OF SEPTEMBER
quite a considerable quantity of roots ; it is
growing quietly and slowly through the long
months that lie ahead of it before it is due to
flower. If you shorten this period of quiet
growth by many weeks, you cannot expect
sturdy plants.
There is another point also to consider.
The bulbs we buy at this scason have been
removed from the soil for a long time already,
and it is well known that some varieties
deteriorate if kept out of the ground more
than a certain time. With all these things in
favour of early planting, we find the wisdom
of “ taking time by the forelock ."
In these days nearly every kind of bulb is
much cheaper than it was some years ago,
and it would seem that every season they
grow cheaper . It may help you if I show
what five shillings will procure in bulbs for
autumn planting during the next few weeks.
One hundred crocuses, mixed colours, for
ninepence. Fifty pheasant's eye narcissi for
one shilling and threepence. One dozen fine
double daffodils for eightpence. One hundred
Spanish irises for sevenpence, mixed colours.
One dozen alliums ,
yellow flowers, for
threepence. One dozen
fine mixed parrot tulips
for sevenpence ; and
one hundred French
ranunculi for one
shilling, mixed.
There ! with numbers
such as these, who
would not save up
pocket-money to have
a fine show of bulbous
plants ?
The French ranun
culi may as well be
bought with the other bulbs, but in most soils
it is wiser not to plant them until February.
As soon as the space can be found for them
the other bulbs may be planted, but the
ground should be dug over first. It is a very
bad method to use a pointed stick , or, indeed,
a stick at all, with which to make the holes
for the bulbs to lie in. A trowel or little fork
should be used, because, in the case of the
stick, there may be left a space between the
base of the bulb and the bottom of the hole,
and this is not at all to be desired - the base
of the bulb must be quite firm on the soil.
Some people take the precaution of putting
a little sand in the hole for the bulb to lie on ,
but, except in very cold , wet soil , it is un
necessary for the hardy bulbs mentioned
above. It is not difficult to determine how
to place the bulb ; the flatter end should lie
downwards. There is an interesting method
of growing bulbs, and especially hyacinth
bulbs, in water. Single varieties should be
chosen, and the water in the hyacinth glasses
should be rain -water , just touching the bulb.
Charcoal should be added to the water to keep
it sweet, changed fromtime to time, and filled
up as it diminishes, and placed in the dark .
PODUKORDER
 DES

MORE KINDS OF WOOD JOINTS

The joints which haveso farbeen described secured also by driving pins or wood pegs
on page 1345 are not suitable for every through from one face. Sometimes these are
kind of woodwork . Others are wanted for used without glue. It is chiefly large joints
thin or shallow articles , and in rough carpentry that are
these we are now going to show pinned . This is the old method,
how to make. adopted before such things as
MORTISES AND TENONS . nails, screws, or bolts had
Think of the joints of a common been invented. The usual way
door as shown in picture 20. now is to glue and wedge
You can see, if you look at its tenons into their mortises as in
edge, that projecting parts on picture 22, where the mortise
the rails or cross bars come is cut tapering to allow for the
right through the upright wedges. The tenon is glued ,
pieces. The projections are and pulled, or cramped tightly
tenons and the holes are up to its shoulder in the mor
mortises. You see that the tise, and then the wedges are
object sought is not only to dipped in glue and driven in
make a very strong fitting of from the outside. Wedges
the corners , but also to secure may go either at the edges of
the strongest directions of the the tenon as in picture 23 , or
grain . For just suppose that 20 PANEL into sawcuts in it as in pic
a door were cut out of a very ture 24
wide board, or glued in two STUB TENONS. Tenons may
widths of board , you know go right through as in pictures
that it would curve and 20, 21 , 22, or a portion of the
shrink and crack in the warm way only as in 25, being in
house. It might be stiffened the latter case termed stub or
with cleats or stump tenons. These
strengthening p.eces joints are used gene
as back doors are, and
as shown in picture 31 ,
but of course
would be too unsightly
that
G rally away from ends
when the strength of
the structure does not
depend on them , but
for the rooms. It on other joints.
is made by framing
together with mortise
and tenon joints, and this
3 21 22
END TENONS. An
end tenon seldom
goes through as in picture 26.
gives long grain both up and Such a fitting is neither strong
down and across the door ; nor neat. The tenon is reduced
so it will retain its shape and in width as in pictures20 and 27.
dimensions for a hundred TONGUED Joints. The method
years . Many other articles of fitting the panels into the
besides doors may be made door as in picture 20 is one
by the aid of this very use wi which is used very much . A
ful joint. You will notice 23 24 framed and panelled structure is
that the central portions of a door are the neatest and strongest which can
filled in with panels of thin wood. be made. You can see examples in
They are not nailed , or tenoned, or the furniture in your house, in the
glued, but fitted into grooves in the chiffonniers,sideboards,and cabinets,
bars ; consequently they are free to but it is too costly for some cheaper
shrink, without splitting. Moulding's classes of work . If the carpenter
are generally fitted comes to build a little
round the panels only office in one corner of
because they look nicer your father's ware
than plain edges. The house, or to divide one
corners of the mould bedroom into two
ings are fitted with smaller ones, he does
mitred joints, and they 25 not generally, frame
are fastened in with the partitions like
glue or nails . a door. He uses
There are numerous matchboarding as
differences in the shown on end
forms of tenons , vary in picture 28.
ing with their position Here narrow
and the dimensions of 26 27
boards are laid
the wood . They are edge to edge, and
fitted not only at corners, but away from ends, all the edges fit each other by tonguedjoints.
and the tenon may go right through, or only The boards are thus kept nicely level by the
a portion of the way. tongues fitting into the grooves, and the whole
The tenon in picture 21 is glued , and like one great broad piece of wood. Yet
1510
 mec MORE KINDS OF WOOD TOINTS
rum
they do not shrink or crack , because each You see at once a resemblance to the tenon
piece is very narrow .
The tongues and grooves are made in and ymort
awa too . The
isemuc h woo nd dow
roud, doesn not
andel whe cut
glue d
various shapes, but the most common is the properly , it makes a joint as strong as solid
plain form shown. In
this the tongue is planed wood. A well-madechair
on one edge of the
board , and the groove is KELIZE is good for a generation.
ploug hed out of the other. 28
joining 'all slender parts,
Sometimes both edges and are often used instead
are
groo
ved , and the of tongues for edge joints,
tongue is a separate strip as in picture 32 . They
of wood fitting half -way into are not quite so good as
each . This is the usual
a tongue, but
because they are hidused
are
way when tongued joints den,
are planed by hand. In while a tongue shows at
picture 29 the pieces are the ends of the boards .
separated , but the tongue FISHED JOINTS.
is in the lower Some
gro
Sometimes such a joi ntoveis. times you may want to join
glued , and sometimes put two pieces together by their
ends , as you joint up your
toge
withouther
29
fishing-rod. You know how
t it.
Partitions easily these
and floor joints work
boards
loose. So
are
not glued, they would
but smaller in large
work gene pieces of
rally is. Edge timber un
glued joints less they
are were made
often
made plain with much
30
without tongues, but are 31 care , The
much stronger with them. carpenter
makes them as strong as
Another example of solid pieces, by means of
tonguing is shown in what he calls fished
picture 30. Its object here
incr joints. He may abut the
is not to ease the
width of the wood by ends simply to touch each
other, or lap them slop
joining edge to edge, but ing, which is called scarf
to prevent a broadpiece ing, or notch them, which
from warping , by fitting is called joggling . But in
cleats to its ends . Draw
32 nearly every case he
ing -boards are usually made like this. aid of pieces of wood or iron bolted along
secur jointonbyboth
thethejoints the
Another way both to prevent warping and to the sides. These cover es
hold boards edge to edge is to screw or nail sides , and bolts go right through them and
cleats across one face
as in picture 31. It is the pieces which they
the crossing of grain in unite. The effect is just
these two last examples
that strengthens the as though you mended
broad surface. The a broken stick by
method shown in 31 is laying strips on each
33 side , and bound them
tightly with string.

34
a much stron ger 35
way than that in There are at least
30 is neater.
30 , but DOW twenty different
THE ELLED which
ways in
JOINT. If yo these joints are
happen to have ua varied in shape ,
broken chair in the but all have a
house, one of family resemblance
38
those with the light looking curved backs, Picture 33 is a plain lap ; 34 to lapillu
is athe withstracov
tioner
s,
you will see another kind of joint. A round ing plates or fish plates ; 35 is a scarfed and
pin on one part fits a hole in the other. keyed joint, and 36 a fished and joggled joint.

1511
 LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
THTHEEpage
SE problems are continued from
1349 , and the answers below
refer to the problems on that page.
WHAT IS THE QUESTION ?
90 . “ There is one question to which you
must always answer ' Yes ' if your answer is
correct, " said Harold.
What is the question ?
WHAT DID THE HANDKERCHIEFS COST ?
91. A draper sold ladies' handkerchiefs at
4 % d . each or three for a shilling. One day
he saw his assistant sell a lady one handker-
chief, and he said , “ Why did you not sell
the lady three handkerchiefs ? " Because ,”
said the assistant , “ you have the same
profit on one as you have on three.”
What did the handkerchiefs cost the
draper ?
HOW MUCH LUGGAGE ALLOWED ?
92. “ I shall have to pay 6s. 3d . on excess
luggage,” said Brown, waiting for the train
with his friend Smith . “ Let me take some
of it for you,” said Smith, and he took
120 lb. of it. Smith was charged rod. excess,
and Brown for his share paid is. 3d. excess .
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 1349
84. Three dozen pens and five dozen knives
would be the same price as 13 dozen pens,
seeing that the knives were double the price
of the pens . Three dozen knives and five
dozen pens would be the same price as it
dozen pens. The difference in price between
13 dozen pens and u dozen pens was 6s. , so
that two dozen pens cost os. , or one pen cost
3d . , and a knife cost 6d. , or twice the price of
a pen. The sum may be proved. Three dozen
pens at 35. a dozen and five dozen knives at
6s. a dozen come to 395. ; three dozen knives
at 6s. and five dozen pens at 3s. would have
cost 335. , and the difference is 6s.
85. The express train takes one hour to
travel 40 miles, and the excursion train takes
one hour and 20 minutes to travel 40 miles.
By the express train the fare is 4 d . per
mile more, or rod. for 40 miles, and the saving
in time is 20 minutes. The traveller finds
that the saving in time is just equal to the
extra charge, so that his time is worth jod.
for each 20 minutes, or 2s. 6d . per hour.
86. The word “ united ,” which is “ untied ”
with the two middle letters changed.
87. Harry began at the end and found that
3 is the only figure which when multiplied
into 215 gives 4 in the second figure, so that
the third figure in the quotient was 3. As
the first figure in the quotient is 1 , the line
below the dividend is 215. The sum stands :
215) x 7 x 95 ( 1 x 3
2 1 5
х5х9
х5х5
6 45
645
The first figure in the dividend must be a 3 ,
because when 2 is subtracted from it some-
THE NEXT THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO ARE ON PAGE 1607
Dormant
1512
How much luggage was allowed free, and
what was the total weight of luggage ?
HOW MUCH COAL DID BLACK BUY ?
93. Said Mr. Black : “ By ordering coal
direct from the pit, I get 21 cwt. for a ton,
and on my last order, when coal was 255.
a ton , I saved 155."
How much coal did he buy ?
HOW MANY PASSENGERS ?
94. “ I will take you for ninepence each ,"
said the boatman at the ferry. “ Wil yo l u
take two more and make iteightpence each ? ”
asked a passenger . “ Yes," answered the
boatman ; “ I shall make sixpence more
if I do. "
How many passengers were taken
altogether ?
WHAT TIME WAS IT ?
95. The clock on the church tower takes
the same time to make three strokes as the
town-hall clock takes to make two strokes.
“ As I came home,” said Jones, “ they began
to strike the hour at the same instant, and the
last stroke of the church clock came exactly
at the last stroke but two of the town clock .'
What time was it ?
thing remains. This gives the first re
mainder as 15x9 . Obviously the middle
figure in the quotient must be 7, and the
secondmultiple in the sum must therefore be
1505. The figure below the o is 6, so that
the figure above it must also be 6, and the
middle figure in the dividend must be i .
Thus the entire sum is now like this :
215 )37195 ( 173
215
1569
1505
645
645
88. Hicks walked for nine days, and as
he walked 117 miles altogether his average
was 13 miles. As his increase was regular
each day, he must have walked the exact
average on the middle day-namely, the fifth
day. Thus on the 6th, 7th, 8th , and oth
days he must have walked 14, 15, 16, and
17 miles, and on the 4th , 3rd , 2nd, and ist
days he must have walked 12, II , 1o, and
9 miles. By adding these figures together
we get 117 miles , which shows that the
answer is correct .
89. One - quarter added to one - third is
seven - tweliths, and the difference between
seven -twelfths and half, which is six -twelfths,
is one-twelfth of the whole. But Fred said
that this difference was ten marbles, so
that the total number of marbles must
have been 120, or twelve times ten marbles.
We can prove the answer by adding one
quarter and one-third , which make 70,
and this number is ten more than half
the number of marbles.
 The Child's Book of
NATURE
BIRDS THAT SERVE US
EEING that men jungles of India and
SEEING
have. tamed Africa. There CONTINUED FROM 1431
horses and cattle ,
elephants, camels, and many
other wild animals for our
service , it is not wonderful
that they should have tamed
birds also , to live about our
homes. Fowls and ducks and geese
are so common that any farmyard
would seem strange without them .
Yet they come from birds which
once were as wild as the eagle.
Except for one or two varieties
of fowls, the Brahmas and Cochins
for example, we can point to the
wild birds of the woods and jungles
of India , Ceylon and elsewhere and
say : “ These wild birds are de-
scended from exactly the same
families of birds from which our
tame fowls came.”
We can trace the parentage of
ducks and geese in the same way,
and that of the majestic swan ,
which remains still like
beautiful wild creatures from which
it descended . Pheasants and par-
tridges, which are now reared by
hand , become wild when they grow
up ; and many other birds which
W help to feed us, though they owe
their power to live to the efforts of
man to preserve them , are as wild
as the wildest birds that haunt the
P 1513
are
dozens of breeds of
fowls, and the number keeps
on growing. Anybody with
skill and patience can create
new varieties. We could take
the biggest fowls, the Cochins
cr the Malays, and get a race
of tiny bantams from them . The
smallest eggs of the big birds are
taken for hatching, and the smallest
eggs from the hens from that brood
are kept. Always the smallest birds
and their smallest eggs are kept, so
that in time the size of the great
bird dwindles down to the tiny
bantam , which may become like the
Japanese midgets, weighing no more
than a pound each.
The size and habits of a bird can
be changed by methods of selection .
Birds which lay many eggs may be
mated with birds of great size. The
result will be a breed of fowls which
the grow large and lay many eggs. Birds
may be wanted chiefly for the
amount of flesh they have. That
class of fowls can be obtained in
the same way . Then there are
birds wanted only for their eggs.
Those are taken which lay most and
are readiest to leave the hatching of
the eggs to other birds. Quite new
varieties can be obtained in this way.
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
It is supposed that the Romans first
brought fowls to this country ; but
although the fowls have been so long
tamed , they would soon run wild if
neglected. It often happens that a hen
will stray away from the others and
lay her eggs secretly in a rough nest
of her own making in a hedge -bottom .
She will return day after day until
the nest is full of eggs. Then she
will sit on them for three weeksuntil the
chickens hatch , and return in triumph
with her little ones to the farmyard.
HE BEST CHICKENS ARE THOSE RAISED
THE BY THE MOTHER BIRD IN SECRET
It is a curious thing that, much
as we know about poultry -raising, we
cannot by the best -known means get
healthier chicks than those which the
mother bird herself hatches in secret .
But many eggs are hatched without
the help of the birds. They are put
into a case called an incubator. This
is kept warm day and night , and the
mere heat of the incubator causes the
eggs to hatch ; thus little chickens come tridges, quails and turkeys all belong
into the world and grow up and lay
eggs without ever having known or
seen their parents.
The habits and food of all are prac-
tically the same . Early the morning
in the
Early in
they like a feed of warm barley -meal.
During the day they eat corn , green
stuff, insects and worms, and much
grit . The grit is necessary to enable
them to grind up the hard corn which
they eat, for, of course, they have to
bolt their food, as they have no teeth.
Their flesh is one of the most valuable
forms of food we have, but their eggs
are even more important. Eggs are
required not only to be eaten as food, appearance from her husband . When
but to help in making scores of other men seek the birds, the male pheasant,
things that we eat . We have a great
number of fowls in this country, but
OTTO
not nearly enough . We have to rely
upon other countries for eggs and
poultry. For eggs alone we pay other
countries over £7,000,000 a year.
SAVAGE INSTINCT IN FOWLS AND
IN
Some fowls are very savage , Malays
and game fowls especially. The game
birds used to be bred in great numbers
in this country and kept solely for
fighting Rich men had cockpits built
at their houses, and there were public
dens for cock -fighting. Men would match
their birds against other men's birds,
1514
and then they would wager large sums
on the result. The birds would fight
death . It was
to the death. was a shamefully
cruel sport, and happily it is now
forbidden by law. Even to-day, how
ever, it is secretly practised in the North
of England , in some parts of which
it is rare to find any but game birds
in the poultry runs of the miners and
other people in humble circumstances.
The fighting instinct in fowls is very
strong. They fight fiercely if strange
fowls are put into their runs. A hen
with chickens will peck strange chickens
to death ; and chickens, if little ones
like themselves are put in with them , will
do their best to kill the strangers.
Instinct tells them that if strangers
come into their home , the strangers are
robbers who must be driven away.
There does not seem much resem
blance between the common fowl of the
farmyard and the most magnificent of
birds, the golden pheasant; but fowls,
pheasants, grouse, guinea-fowls, par
to the same order. Still, there is no
fear of our mistaking, say, a pheasant
for a fowl .
THE FAMILY OF THE PHEASANTS, WHICH
THIHAVE BEEN IN ENGLAND 1,000 YEARS
The pheasants are the handsomest
wild birds we have of that type.
The male bird is a beauty, with a
splendid tail eighteen inches long,
with a sheeny neck , and head of brown
and green edged with yellow and a
shimmer of green, blue, and deep
orange. The female is not so gaily
dressed , nor has she so long a tail . It
is as well for her that she is of different
with his gorgeous feathers, has at once
to fly, and so may be shot. The more
soberly feathered hen sits close in the
undergrowth , and matches so well
with it that often she escapes notice.
Should her mate be killed, she will
join the family of another male, each
of which has several wives .
We have had pheasants in this
country for about a thousand years,
and our stock has been repeatedly
added to from other countries. Thus,
we may find the gold and silver pheasants
here in England, far from China, in
which they first had the ome. seems
almost too good to be true that we can
 -BIRDS THAT SERVE US tournamenanumnu.
have these magnificent birds here ; we with fiery bronze-red, while their hiens
should expect to find them in tropical are black , with a gloss of purple and
countries, but not in our trying climate. steel--blue. In Central and Eastern Asia
But they flourish here splendidly. we have eared pheasants, so called from
They may be seen in many private parks the fact that the covers of the ears
as well as in the Zoo. grow out into long white tufts of feathers .
Some naturalists believe the phenix, The tails of these birds are long and
which the ancients thought visited like a drooping fan , and resemble in
Egypt only once every 500 years, texture the tail of the peacock.
was really a golden pheasant. It was Strangest of all , perhaps, is the Amherst
supposed that the phænix burnt itself pheasant, a near relative of the
on an altar, and that a young phænix golden pheasant, which has a sort of
arose from the ashes of the old one. cape of feathers reaching from its beak
What makes people think that the right down to the root of its neck.
phænix was really the golden pheasant It has an extraordinarily long tail,
is the description of it as “ the golden- which
haired bird . " The golden pheasant's
sweeps like a feathery snake
after it. The habits of all the
feathers do look like pheasants are much
golden hair. The bird is alike, no matter where
a glowing mass of gold they live. Those in
and crimson . If such England lay many eggs
a bird were seldom seen , in rough nests on the
it is quite possible that ground. Keepers collect
the ancients would believe them and put the eggs
it to be the golden-haired under common hens ,
bird of their legend. which hatch them . The
The golden pheasant baby pheasants grow up
has a rival for beauty like chickens , and are
in the silver pheasant, fed by their keepers till
but it is more gentle they are able to fly away
than the latter. The from the coops into the
silver pheasant, which woods , there to mate ,
thrives when brought to roost in the trees at
here, proves quite the night, and to go in the day
fiercest of the pheasant to the keeper when they
family, and though it is hear his call with their
smaller than our strong food. In the end, if their
common pheasant of owner is a cruel, lazy
England, it will drive sportsman , too idle to
away all other pheasants The cock that crowsin themorn is busy hunt his game , they are
but its own family . We alldaylong finding food for thebens driven by dogs to what
and chicks. He is alwaysready to fight is calleda battue. They
might expect the blood
pheasants of Western China to be have to fly over places where many men
the best fighters of the family, for lie concealed with guns , and after all
they have no fewer than four pairs their careful rearing and feeding they are
of spurs on their coral-red legs ; but mercilessly shot down , so that men may
the silver pheasant can master them boast of the numbers they have killed .
all. Now we must pass to the grouse ,
The number of varieties in pheasants which include the grouse proper, the
is surprising There is one called capercailzie, the blackcock, the ptar
the tragopan , which is a scarlet migan, the red grouse , the ruffled grouse ,
beauty , with fleshy horns above the the quails and the partridges. The grouse
eyes . Then there is a little family common in England and Scotland is the
of pheasants called the monals, which red grouse . It is a fine, handsome bird,
are gorgeously coloured and have mainly reddish -brown, with lighter
a crest of plumes on the head. The colours and black and white inter
two kinds last named live in the moun- mixed. The birds nest among the
tain forests of Asia . Two sorts of fire- heather, and eat young shoots of heather
backed pheasants have backs covered and other growths, seeds and so forth .
mm2UnrUDIT YYYYYI2mm rremmo TITOITTIILO
1515
 EXCEREIXAMARELO sermormonun menzerenrur commanam

THE BEAUTIFUL FAMILY OF PHEASANTS

There are five species of eared pheasants. Long tufts The tragopan, or horned pheasant, is another beautiful
of white feathers grow up from the ears, and so give bird. When courting, it dances and bows, and struts
them their name. They have loose, hairy plumage. and shakes the fleshy horns which are over its eyes.

The golden pheasant is not a big bird, but he is the most beautiful of all his family . It is supposed that the bird
called by the ancients the phenix was really a golden pheasant. These splendid birds can live in our climate.

The silver pheasant looks like feathered moonlight. The Amherstpheasant has a cape of feathers covering
He is a beauty, but too savage to live with common the back of the head and the neck, and a very long
pheasants. He can master all the other varieties. tail. Its home is in the mountains of Tibet and China.
r.

The peacock pheasant is a bird of rainbow colours with The ordinary British pheasant is one of our most
a tailcoveredwith eye-like spots. It livesin the bamboo spiendid native birds. Its eggs are often hatched by
jungles and the wooded ravines of India and Burmah . poultry ; and the pheasants are tame till they grow up.
1916
BIRDS THAT ARE CRUELLY SHOT FOR SPORT

Quails were numerous in Egypt in the time of the The ptarmigan has three different dresses a year. In
Israelites. They still are so, and during their yearly winter it is as white as the snow, which it loves, but
migrations descend in swarms to cover the land. it has dark plumage in summer and grey in autumn.

Partridges are divided into six species. Most of them nest on the ground, but some of them make their
homes in trees. Thousands are cruelly shot every year.

of the thirty species of grouse, the red grouse is the The golden plover is the handsomest of the plover
true British bird, and is found nowhere but here. It family . It visits England, but wanders also over Russia
changes its plumage as the seasons change. and Norway, and in winter as far as South Africa .

The ruffed grouse of North America have a frill of Black - game is a species of grouse. The male bird is
feathers on each side of the neck . They make a great called the black -cock ; the female is called thegrey -hen.
drumming sound with their wings in calling their mates. Much of their food consists of buds, leaves, and fruit.
சாாாயணமகயாகாாபா myrurXZ
SONU
1517 2
 nu
THE
cercegUXELLEC ILAL
CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE SEXLETTER INTERACAXCO

Although they are wild birds, they owe their tails , and stalk and prance in the
their existence to man, who protects most comical way to attract the atten
them , so that they may multiply and tion of the female birds whose admiration
flourish ; but man is not so wise as they wish to win . The black-cock calls
Nature . He kills all the birds of prey his lady friends with a noise like the
which would kill the weak and ailing sharpening of a scythe . The grouse so
grouse , and the result is that the weak rapidly beatsthe air with his wings, that
and ailing live and spread their diseases the noise is called drumming. The
among the others, causing an enormous capercailzie woos his love by the aid of his
number of deaths among the birds. voice, and fights savagely with other
HE GROUSE , WHICH MEN SHOOT IN THOU male birds who dispute his choice.
THESANDS EVERY YEAR The partridge is the most plentiful
Still, in a season in which grouse have of game birds in this country. It is well
been healthy, men with guns shoot a for it that it multiplies so rapidly, for
million of these birds in England and sportsmen shoot it in swarms every
Scotland. The ptarmiganoccurs only shooting season. It is a birdthatwe are
a

bound to admire for the love which it

here and there in Scotland, not in Eng
land . It loves colder lands than ours.
In Scotland, as the climate is not very
severe
its , the bird
feathers as does not elsewhere.
it does always change
În growth : and suppose a dog approaches ,
cold climates its feathers become per
front of the dog's
fectly white in winter, changinglater slowly, just ahead of him ,as if she had
in the year to colours more suited to
hide it among the undergrowth and
heather in which it loves to seek food .
The biggest of all the grouse is the
capercailzie , the males, when fully grown ,
being almost the size of a turkey. Like
the ptarmigan , its legs and feet are
feathered . Its habits are like those of
the pheasant and grouse . At one time
there were great numbers of ptarmigan
in Ireland and Scotland, but it was so
persecuted that the whole race was
killed in these islands. Of late years
Scottish noblemen have brought others
over from Sweden and elsewhere, and
now the ptarmigan is to be found again
in the forests of Scotland . Like the
pheasant, it can be reared on private roundthe head ofa man whom they fear,
estates, provided that it has a free
run to a pine forest .
HOW THEMALE BIRDS STALK AND PRANCE
TO
The handsome black-cock and his
mate, the grey -hen , are both called
heath - fowl. The male has feathers of a
glossy blue-black , but there is a bar
of white on his wings, and he is further
distinguished by a red patch over the
eye and a remarkable tail which curves
outwards in two half circles .
All the male birds we have been
reading of have finer feathers than the
females. The reason is that the hens
love the males which have the hand-
somest appearance. The males spread
1518
shows for its little ones , and the skill with
which it draws away their enemies.
The nest lies in the grass or under
out flutters the mother partridge, just in
. nose She flutters
a broken wing. The dog follows her,
thinking that he is going to make an
easy catch . But she keeps always a
little ahead until she has drawn him
far enough away from her babies. Then
she rises and sails away like the wind .
HºwDOESTHEGREAT
GREEDHARM
FOR TOPLOVERS' EGGS
THE FARMER
In this trick the partridge has a close
imitator in the plover, a bird which
is to be found everywhere. Our
most common variety is the golden
plover, a handsome bird, which makes
a nest on the ground, and, when the
little ones are hatched, makes the most
frantic effortsto save them from an
enemy. The birds will fly round and
and he quite expects them to peck at his
eyes. They will drop to the ground and
run . Anything which can draw him
from the nest , these clever ,
away
loving birds do. Their nests are cruelly
robbed so that greedy rich people may
have plovers' eggs on their tables.
The robbing of plovers' nests does
great damage to the country. The plover
is one of the best friends the farmer has.
It eats only the insects which harm the
crops. By robbing the birds of their
eggs a man may gain a few shillings,
but in the end the pest of insects which
the young birds would have eaten may
cost him more pounds than he has
gained shillings. It serves him right.
 03
A GROUP OF TURKEYS, DUCKS , AND GEESE

CODEODOODUTT
Our turkeys came from Mexico, but have long The barnacle-goose was believed by old-time sailors to
been tamed. The wild turkeys fly well, and swim be hatched from barnacles, so they gave it the name
any river which they want to cross when tired. by which it is still called. It avoids men very cleverly.

Eider-ducks line their nests withbeautiful white Crested and common guinea -fowls are found in Africa
down plucked from their own bodies. This is more than in England. They thrive here, and are
collected to make bedding for men and women . valued as food, but a guinea -fowl is a noisy nuisance.

The sheldrake loves sandy places near the sea . Here The brush-turkey scratches up greatmounds of vege
it finds holes made by rabbits, and in these it lays tation , and in these places its eggs. The heat of the
its eggs. It is called , therefore, the burrow -duck . vegetation hatches them without trouble to the bird.
The photographs on these pages are by Charles and William Reid, Lewis Medland, W. P. Dando, and others.
1519
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK
The smallest of the partridges is the
quail. These birds are strange little
things, looking at a distance like fat ,
bobtailed thrushes. But they are great
fliers, and men, knowing how they fly
across Europe during the spring, catch
them by scores of thousands in nets.
Some come to England and Ireland ,
and in summer they have been found as
far north as the Orkneys and Shetlands.
They multiply rapidly, and in Egypt
they still , as in the days of Moses,
appear in such flocks at night as to
almost cover the land .
PIT TO BUDSA
THEA TURKEY
HOWDIGS EGGS AND
LAY HERMOUNDS
Everybody knows what the turkey is
like , because so many are reared in this
country, especially in Norfolk and surprising when we remember that there
Cambridgeshire. The birds of Norfolk
are black; those of Cambridge are more
of a bronze colour, and in that resemble
the wild birds of Mexico and North
America, from which all our tame tur-
keys have descended . Turkeys, when in
captivity, do not show much desire
to ' Ay , but the wild ones do. They
butwith
fly great
come forcewhile
down suddenlythey at it,. THE& DUCK
are tired
when
When they find a broad river in the way ,
many of them , falling weary, drop into
the water and swim .
The most curious turkey is the brush-
turkey, or talegalla, which is one of a
family called mound -birds. It has very
long claws, and uses these to build great
mounds of decayed vegetable matter.
It scratches up all it can find, grasping
the substance with its claws and throw-
ing it backwards towards a point
behind. Sometimes these mounds reach
the size of several cartloads of rubbish .
This mass of matter gradually becomes
very hot. Then the mother bird digs
holes in it , and in each hole lays an egg.
The heat hatches the egg, and all that the
hen has to do is to wait and see that the
chicks are all right when hatched .
The funny thing is that the little ones,
as soon as they are born , can dry their ing. Nothing is too unpleasant for the
wings like amoth and fly for safety to the
nearest tree. If they could not do this
they would be gobbled up by animals.
" HE GUINEA - FOWLS THAT GABBLE , GAB-
THE
BLE , GABBLE AT NIGHT, & THE DUCKS
When we hear a number of birds
making a great gabble, gabble, gabble
all night, we may be sure that we are
in the neighbourhood of guinea- fowls .
XUTYUMU TYT ATTITUTE
1520
OF NATURE
The bird was first discovered in Eastern
Africa, and from there it has been
taken and tamed in many parts of the
world. It runs wild very soon, but
when looked after is as tame as ordinary
poultry.
Of ducks, to which we must now pass,
there are a great many varieties. All
the tame ones are descended from the
common wild duck, or mallard. To see
these handsome creatures flying swiftly
through the air, one would never think
that the great white Aylesbury duck is
a member of their family. We should
not look for an Aylesbury duck in a
tree, but it is not uncommon for the
wild duck to make its nest in that
fashion . This, however, is the less
are ducks, called the whistling teal ,
which always make their homes in trees.
They find their food in vegetable matter
such as grows about marshes and ponds,
but their nests are always in trees.
When the young are hatched, the parent
birds carry them down in their claws
or on their backs.
THAT ALMOSTANKTHWS
THE THATEATS GIVES EIDERDOWN
A near relative of the tree duck is the
sheldrake, which, from its habit of
making its way into rabbit-burrows,
where it lays and hatches its eggs, is
called the burrowing duck. In some
places the natives make burrows for the
birds, and by taking an egg or so from
each nest reap a good harvest with
out seriously robbing the bird . The
sheldrake, in these cases, will lay as
many as thirty eggs before getting the
number required for the nest. These are
neat, handsome ducks ; but now we come
to one which is a silly -looking bird, the
shoveller duck, so called from its large
beak .
A few come to England in the winter,
but in colder lands they are to be
found in swarms. Their beaks are for
shovelling up all manner of stuff for feed
shoveller duck to cat , and that remark
applies, of course, to no small extent
to the tame duck . But here, as in the
case of the pig , it is what we call a dirty
feeder because man has made it so .
If it had plenty of clean food and water,
it would eat and drink nothing but clean
food and water. When reared in dirty
places, the duck must eat dirty food.
 SLUD JUULI TECCLETATION azo ACTURES

BIRDS THAT LIVE ON INLAND WATERS

Astronomers prophesy that new stars will be discovered, and the new stars do appear. Poets dreamed and sang
of black swans, and were laughed at. But when Australia was explored, lo ! black swans were there. The
bird is heavy and prefers swimming, but when it has to change its quarters it flies with great power.

There are scores of species of geese. Those which we see about the farmyard ponds descend from the grey lag
goose. The common geese do not Ay , but the wild ones do, far and fast. In quiet places the wild ones feed by
day, but when in danger they become purely night-birds, and lie silent and in hiding while the sun is up.
weer

Swans are the most majestic of our inland water-birds. They swim with grace,and they fly with strength and
skill. The wild ones come inland for the summer to hatch their young, but then they fly away and no man can
follow them , as day and night they wing their way to their distant winter quarters. Their call-note is very loud.
ETTI CITY நாடாமானாயா TY
1521
 ILOILO CILIWA
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NA SURE.
Although its flesh is not much good We ought all to be thankful that it is
for food, the eider-duck is one of the a crime to kill swans without legal right .
most valuable birds. It is a big bird , They are so beautiful, and do such little
living in cold climates. The ducks harm , that nobody could wish to hurt
assemble in enormous numbers at their them except those wretched people who
breeding-places, and the mother bird never see a bird without wanting to
strips her breast of the beautiful down to kill it . Big as they are, swans fly with
make the nest warm for her little ones. great power. This accounts for their
Men collect this down to make into suddenly appearing where no swans
pillows, quilts , and many other things. were ever seen before .
If her nest be robbed, the mother bird A pair of swans dropped down from
will again pluck down from herself, and the skies one day into the horse-pond
the male bird will add his stock , though at a lovely little village in Hertfordshire.
this is not so fine as the female's. Each The pond is at the side of the main
nest yields about a quarter of a pound road , over which carts and motors in
of the finest down , which helps to keep hundreds pass every day. But there
us warm in our beds on winter nights. the swans stayed, as if they had always
The eider-duck is a sort of goose, but lived there. They built a great nest,
not of the kind which we know in this and the mother bird laid her eggs and
country . Our geese come from the hatched the little ones. Then , when
wild grey lag -goose, a strong flying these had grown up, without any warn
bird, which migrates from ing the birds flew away ,
place to place. Most of and have never been seen
the wild geese which there since .
come to this country are Nobody knows whence
visitors from colder cli they came, nor whither
mates . They are all they went. The curious
splendid fliers; and the thing is that there are
skill with
which the swans in a narrow stream
barnacle - goose avoids not very far away from
men shows that the bird this pond . But the stran
is not nearly so silly as gers never called on the
we all pretend to think it . stream swans, and the
The name which this stream swans never paid
bird bears is the result The cormorant is the only bird that a visit to the pond .
of one of men's silly catches fish for men. It is trained All these are among the
mistakes. They thought to do this in China, but once it was birds which serve us as
that this goose grew out trained for the work in this country. food or clothing, even the
of the common barnacle -shell, so they swan being eaten , and its soft feathers
called it the barnacle -goose. used for the purposes for which swans
The most aristocratic member of the down is famous. But there is one bird
family to which the ducks and geese which serves man by hunting for him .
belong is the swan, the most majestic This is the cormorant, a curious bird with
bird that sails the waters. The real a neck as supple as a swan's, but with
English swans are white, but here and a wonderful beak. The Chinese train
there we see black swans, brought from this bird to fish for them . They take
Australia , the land of so many strange two or three of the birds out on a

animals and birds . For ages poets
dreamed of black swans, but nobody
believed that there could be such a
thing until these birds were found in
Australia . The general features of swans
do not much vary. We have the white
swan , the black swan , and the white
swan wich a black neck, each a distinct
species, yet not greatly differing in
form . Some of them are supposed to
have no voice, others whistle, while
others have a voice like a trumpet.
ZITTI ULTTUUTTI
1522
raft into a river, and the birds , the
moment they see a fish, plunge in and
catch it .
When they are being trained , the
comorants have a ring fastened round
their necks so that they cannot swallow
the fish , which they give to their
masters. Then they have a good feed
themselves. When thoroughly trained ,
they do not need a ring on their necks,
but take the fish to their masters freely.
The next stories of Birds are on page 1625.
ITTTTTTTOremettre or comer
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
THE BABES
Once upon a time
two childre
n lived CONTINUED FROM 1451
in a big house on the
borders of а wood.
Their parents, who loved them very
dearly, were rich enough to buy
them all the lovely things they
longed for, and all day long they
played in a beautiful garden , learning
the songs of the birds and the secrets
of the flowers. But one sad day their
father and mother left them for a
happier home in the skies , and the sister
and brother were left alone .
The boy did his best to comfort his
little sister ; but they were sad days,
and, though they did not know it then ,
days that were sadder still were soon
to come .
children had an uncle whom they
Thenever
had seen . He lived far away
across the seas ; but as soon as he
learned of the death of his brother,
the children's father, he hurried to
their home . He knew that now their
father was dead the children would
have all his money, and the uncle also
knew that if he could get rid of the
children all this money would be his.
UU
And the more he thought about
this money the more he longed for it .
And then a dreadful thought came
into his head . He determined to kill
the little innocent children and take
their money.
So he hired two robbörs , and paid
them to take the children to a lonely
spot in the wood and there kill them .
One morning, when the sun shone
brightly and all the birds were gay,
WW
IN THE WOOD
the robbers crept into
DO the garden where the
children were playing
and took them away .
The robbers were big , rough men ,
and the children were afraid ; but
they were told that their uncle
had sent them , and they dared not
disobey. The men led them out of
the garden into the wood , and on and
on till they came to a deserted spot .
They had come a long way, and the
children were glad to rest . They sat
down on the trunk of a tree while
the robbers moved away and carried
on a conversation in a low voice.
But presently they began to quarrel ;
their voices became loud and angry,
and the children heard words that
made them tremble with fear .
“ I've been paid to kill them , and I
shall earn my money ," one of them
was saying, over and over again .
But the other robber seemed more
kindly.
“ Why kill them ? ” he said. " Let
us lose them , and perhaps someone
may find them and give them shelter."
The little girl crept closer to her
brother.
“ They want to kill us,” she said, in a
terrified whisper.
But before the boy could answer
the kindly robber came forward and
spoke to them .
Stay here while we go to find food
and shelter for the night," he said in
a gruff voice .
Then they went away, and the chil
dren were left all alone in the wood .
1523
 TEL . ZUK ZU ZED TO OUTLOCOS CAILLOU IDEERELERVE

40

Vamospy་༥)
TOO WEARY TO GO ANY FARTHER , THE CHILDREN SAT DOWN UNDER A FRIENDLY OAK
They dare not return to their wicked from sight. Too weary and frightened
uncle, and they had no other home ; to go any farther, the children sat down
so they wandered on , hand in hand, under a friendly oak , and fell asleep
hoping to find shelter. in one another's arms.
The forest was very beautiful, and The birds of the forest peeped down
for a time they were happy among the from their nests above ; the shy
wild flowers and ferns; but soon the squirrels with their long tails glanced
sun went down , the birds hushed their wonderingly at them , and the gentle
songs, and a great stillness came over wind shook the leaves so that they fell,
all. Still the children toiled bravely on , making a cloak of crimson and gold to
tired, and hungry, and sad . cover them .
Presently the trees grew so thickly And when morning came a beautiful
together that they could scarcely find angel flew down and carried them
their way, and at last the darkness of away to their father and mother in
night came on and hid even the trees the glorious world above.
1524
 mAITELIMummoAZONA WELLA

THE HUNGRY FOX AND THE KITTEN

A VERYhungryfoxwas
moonlit night about aprowling one kitten,
farmhouse, Round jumping intothe
and round rattledtop,bucket
the rope.
and he met a little kitten . wheel , and down went the kitten into
" You're not much of a meal for a the water . Happily , she had gone
66
starving creature," he said . But in down before , and she knew what to do ,
these hard times something is always and , getting out of the bucket, she clung
better than nothing ." on to the rope just above the water.
“ Oh, don't eat me ! " said the kitten . Can't you bring up one of the
9

" I know where the farmer keeps his cheeses ? ” said the fox .
cheeses . Come with me and see. No, they are too heavy," said the
She led him into the farmyard , where kitten . “ You must come down."
there was a deep well with two buckets. Now , the two buckets were connected ,
“ Now , look in here , and you will see so that when one went down the other
the cheeses,” she said . came up. As the fox was much heavier
The fox peered down the well , and than his little companion, his bucket
saw the moon reflected in the water . went down and the water drowned him ,
“ This is the way down ,” said the while the kitten came up and escaped.
THE PROUD KING OF KAMERA
)
*He negro King of Kamera, in Africa , " Permit me," said Boukabar, " to
THE was a proud, stern man, and his men give this poor man something to eat.”
feared him , and instantly carried out Taking some food in both hands, he
his slightest wishes . But one day, tottered past the king, and his stick
when he was boasting that all men were slipped from under his arm and got en
his servants , a wise old negro, called tangled in his dress , and nearly tripped
Boukabar, reproached him , saying : him up . And he cried to the king :
“ All men are servants of one another." “ Please pick up the stick , or I shall
“ So I am your servant, am I ? ” fall.”
66
The king picked it up without
said the king, in great anger. · Then thinking, and Boukabar then laughed
prove it . Force me to work for you merrily, and exclaimed : " You see ,
before sunset, and I will give you a all good men are servants of one another.
hundred cows. Fail , and I will kill you , I am waiting on the beggar, and you
and so show you that I am your master.” are waiting on me. But I do not wantthe
“ Very well," said Boukabar. COWS . Give them to this poor man .
Being a very old man , he had to use a The king did so, and took Boukabar
stick in walking, and just as he took it up as his chief counsellor, and Boukabar
to go out, a beggar came to the door. showed him how to rule his people well .
LOVE LAUGHS AT LOCKSMITHS
This was the device which the hand- marquis got inside and played beautiful
THI some young Marquis of Hautmont airs on a flute , while his servant drew
engraved on his shield when he came to it about the streets . Everybody began
Paris . Being as bold as he was hand- to talk about the mechanical nightin
some , he began to make love to Princess gale ; the king came to see it, and
Marguerite, the king's daughter, and Princess Marguerite asked for it to be
the king was annoyed at his boldness. brought to her. The king, thinking that
“ They are loud words which you have the music was produced by machinery,
taken for your device ,” said he, “ but are had the bird carried into the tower ,
they true ? I will lock the princess up and the marquis then jumped out and
in a tower. If you can enter it within kissed the princess's hand , saying :
64

a month, you can marry her. If you Love laughs at locksmiths, you see,
fail, you must lose your life.” sire . " And the king was forced to
The marquis pretended to be dis- acknowledge that this was true ; and
comfited .But he secretly ordered as he saw that the marquis and the
some woodcarvers to make a great princess were in love with one another,
hollow wooden nightingale. When the he allowed them to marry , and pre
bird was finished and painted, the sented them with a really royal dowry.
ZIDORO

1525
 THE KING OF THE GOLDEN RIVER
ID
This is the second chapter of the fairy story by John Ruskin, which began on page 1443
SOUTH -WEST WIND
SOUTH-WEST WIND, Esquire,wasas
good as his word. He entered the
Treasure Valley no more ; and , what
was worse, he had so much influence
with his relations , the West Winds in
general , and used it so effectually, that
they all adopted a similar line of con-
duct.
So no rain fell in the valley from
one year's end to another. Though
everything remained green and flourish-
ing in the plains below , the inheritance
of the three brothers was a desert . All
their money was gone , and they had
nothing left but some curious old-
fashioned pieces of gold plate.
Suppose we turn goldsmiths ? "
said Schwartz to Hans. “ It is a good
knave's trade . We can put a great
deal of copper into the gold without
anyone's finding it out. "
The thought was agreed to be a very
good one ; they hired a furnace, and
turned goldsmiths. But two slight
circumstances affected their trade-the
first, that people did not approve of
the coppered gold ; the second, that
the two elder brothers, whenever they
had sold anything, used to leave little
Gluck to mind the furnace, and go and
drink out the money in the ale -house
next door .
So they melted all their gold without
making money enough to buy more ,
and were at last reduced to one large
drinking -mug, which an uncle of his
had given to little Gluck, and which
he was very fond of, and would not
have parted with for the world, though
he never drank anything out of it but
milk -and -water. The mug was a very
odd mug to look at. The handle was
numrin TITTIDITT TETT XXX
1526
LEAVES THE VALLEY
formed of two wreaths of flowing golden
hair, so finely spun that it looked more
like silk than metal ; and these wreaths
descended into, and mixed with, a
beard and whiskers of the same exqui
site workmanship, which surrounded
and decorated a very fierce little face,
of the reddest gold imaginable, right
in the front of the mug, with a pair of
eyes in it which seemed to command its
whole circumference. When it came to
the mug's turn to be made into spoons,
it half broke poor little Gluck's heart ;
but the brothers only laughed at him ,
tossed the mug into the melting -pot,
and staggered out to the ale -house ,
leaving him to pour the gold into bars
when it was all ready.
When they were gone, Gluck took a
farewell look at his old friend in the
melting-pot. He sauntered to the
window , and saw the rocks of the
mountain - tops all crimson and purple
with the sunset ; and the river, brighter
than all, fell, in a waving column of
pure gold, from precipice to precipice,
with the double arch of a broad purple
rainbow stretched across it.
“ Ah , " said Gluck aloud, after he
had looked at it for a while , “ if that
river were really all gold, what a nice
thing it would be ! "
(
" No, it wouldn't, Gluck ," said a clear
voice, close at his ear.
(6
Bless me, what's that ? ”exclaimed
Gluck, jumping up:
There was nobody there.
He looked into all the corners and
cupboards , and then began turning
round and round as fast as he could 1
in the middle of the room , thinking
there was somebody behind him ,
 THE KING OF
when the same voice struck again on
his ear .
It was singing now very merrily, stopping, apparently with the quite
“ Lala - lira -la ” ; no words, only a soft of ascertaining if he
melody, like aa kettle on the boil. correctly put together, while Gluck
All at once it struck Gluck that it
sounded louder near the furnace . He
ran to the opening, and looked in .
Yes, he saw right ; it seemed to be
coming , not only out of the furnace ,
but out of the pot. He uncovered it ,
and ran back in a great fright , for the
pot was certainly singing ! He stood
in the farthest corner of the room , with
his hands up and his mouth open, for
a minute or two, when the singing
stopped , and the voice became clear.
66
Hallo ! ” said the voice .
Gluck made no answer .
Hallo ! Gluck, my boy," said the
pot again .
Gluck summoned all his energies,
walked straight up to the crucible ,
drew it out of the furnace, and looked
in. The gold was all melted , and its
surface as smooth and polished as a
river ; but instead of reflecting little
Gluck's head as he looked in , he saw ,
meeting his glance from beneath the
gold , the red nose and sharp eyes of
his old friend the mug , a thousand times
redder and sharper than ever he had
seen them in his life.
“ Come, Gluck, my boy,” said the
voice out of the pot again, I'm
right ; pour me out."
But Gluck was too much astonished
to do anything of the kind .
“ Pour me out, I say,” said the voice
rather gruffly.
Still Gluck couldn't move.
“ Will you pour me out ? " said the
voice passionately. “ I'm too hot."
By a violent effort Gluck recovered
the use of his limbs, took hold of the
crucible , and sloped it so as to pour out
the gold. But instead of a liquid
stream , there came out, first, a pair of
pretty little yellow legs, then some
coat-tails, then a pair of arms, and,
finally, the well -known head of his
friend the mug ; all which articles,
uniting as they rolled out , stood up
energetically on the floor, in the shape
of a little golden dwarf, about a foot
and a half high .
.
“ That's right ! ” said the dwarf,
stretching out first his legs, and then
his arms,and then shaking his head up
THE GOLDEN kuum
RIVER னகயபாம்
and down and as far round as it
would go for five minutes without
view were
stood contemplating him in speechless
amazement.
He was dressed in aa slashed doublet of
spun gold , so fine in its texture that
the colours gleamed over it as if on a
surface of mother -of-pearl ; and over
this brilliant doublet his hair and
beard fell full half-way to the ground
in waving curls.
The dwarf turned his small , sharp
eyes full on Gluck, and stared at him
deliberately for a minute or two. This
gave time for Gluck to collect his thoughts
a little , and , seeing no great reason to
view his visitor with dread , he ventured
on a question .
66
Pray, sir," said Gluck, were you
my mug ?
On which the little man turned
sharply round , walked straight up to
Gluck , and drew himself up to his full
height.
66
I am the King of what you mortals
call the Golden River. The shape you
saw me in was owing to the malice of
a stronger king , from whose enchant
ments you have freed me . What I
have seen of you and your conduct
to your wicked brothers renders me
all willing to serve you ; therefore attend
to what I tell you . Whoever shall
climb to the top of that mountain
from which you see the Golden River
issue , and shall cast into the stream at
its source three drops of holy water,
for him , and for him only , the river
shall turn to gold . But no one failing
in his first can succeed in a second
attempt ; and if anyone shall cast
unholy water into the river it will
overwhelm him , and he will become a
black stone."
So saying, the King of the Golden
River turned away and deliberately
walked into the centre of the hottest
flame of the furnace. His figure be
came red , white, transparent, dazzling,
a blaze of intense light- rose , trembled,
and disappeared . The King of the
Golden River had evaporated .
“ Oh ! ” cried poor Gluck , running
to look up the chimney after him.
Oh, dear, dear , dear me ! My mug !
my mug ! my mug ! "
YIRTO annum
1527
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
CHAPTER III .
THE QUEST OF HANS , AND THE BLACK
STONE
The King of the Golden River had
hardly made his extraordinary exit
before Hans and Schwartz came roar-
ing into the house, very savagely drunk.
The discovery of the total loss of
their last piece of plate had the effect
of sobering them just enough to enable
them to stand over Gluck beating him
very steadily for a quarter of an hour ;
at the expiration of which period they
dropped into a couple of chairs, and
requested to know what he had got to
say for himself. Gluck told them his
story, of which, of course, they did
not believe a word . They beat him
again till their arms were tired , and
staggered to bed . In the morning,
however, the two brothers , after
wrangling a long time on the knotty
question which of them should try his
fortune first, drew their swords and
began fighting. The noise of the fray
alarmed the neighbours, who sent for
the constable.
Hans, on hearing this, contrived to
escape, and hid himself ; but Schwartz
was taken before magistrate,
the
fined for breaking the peace, and,
having drunk out his last penny the
evening before, was thrown into prison
till he should pay.
When Hans heard this he was much
delighted, and determined to set out
immediately for the Golden River.
How to get the holy water was the
question. He went to the priest , but
the priest could not give any holy
water to so abandoned a character.
So Hans stole a cupful, and returned
home in triumph .
Next morning he got up before the my lips with it.”
sun rose , put the holy water into a
strong flask , and two bottles of wine
and some meat in a basket, slung
them over his back , took his staff in his
hand , and set off for the mountains. dog, apparently in the last agony of
It was, indeed, a morning that might death from thirst. Its tongue was out,
have made anyone happy, even with no its jaws dry, and a swarm of black ants
Golden River to seek for. Level lines of were crawling about its lips and throat.
dewy mist lay stretched along the
valley, out of which rose the massy
mountains.
The Golden River was now nearly
in shadow ; all but the uppermost jets
of spray, which rose like slow smoke
above the undulating line of the
1528
OF STORIES
cataract , and floated away in feeble
wreaths upon the morning wind.
On this object , and on this alone ,
Hans' eyes and thoughts were fixed ;
forgetting the distance he had to
traverse, he set off at an imprudent
rate of walking, which greatly exhausted
him before he had scaled the first range
of the green and low hills. He was ,
moreover, surprised, on surmounting
them , to find that a large glacier, of
whose existence he had been absolutely
ignorant, lay between him and the source
of the Golden River.
He entered on it with the boldness of
a practised mountaineer ; yet he thought
he had never traversed so strange or so
dangerous a glacier in his life. The ice
was excessively slippery, and out of all
its chasms came wild sounds of gushing
water. The ice crashed and yawned
into fresh chasins at his feet , and
tottering spires nodded around him and
fell thundering across his path ; and it
was with terror that he leaped the last
chasm , and flung himself, exhausted
and shuddering, on the firm turf of
the mountain .
His way now lay straight up a ridge
of bare red rocks, without a blade of
grass to ease the foot , or a projecting
angle to afford an inch of shade from
the south sun . It was past noon , and
the rays beat intensely upon the steep
path , while the whole atmosphere was
motionless and penetrated with heat.
Intense thirst was soon added to the
bodily fatigue with which Hans was now
afflicted ; glance after glance he cast on
the flask of water which hung at his
belt .
“ Three drops are enough ," at last
thought he ; "' I may, at least , cool
He opened the flask , and was raising
it to his lips when his eye fell on an
object lying on the rock beside him ;
he thought it moved . It was a small
Its eve moved to the bottle which Hans
held in his hand . He raised it , drank ,
spurned the animal with his foot , and
passed on. And he did not know how
it was, but he thought that a strange
shadow had suddenly come across the
blue sky.
 TERTUTURIER
manurmasreerEE
HANS SAW A GREY-HAIRED OLD MAN EXTENDED ON THE ROCKS. “ WATER ! ” HE CRIED FEEBLY
The path became steeper and more
rugged every moment; and the high hill
air, instead of refreshing him , seemed to
throw him into a fever. The noise of
the hill cataracts sounded like mockery
in his ears ; they were all distant, and
1 his thirst increased every moment .
Another hour passed, and he again
looked down to the flask at his side; it
was half empty ; but there was much
more than three drops in it. He stopped
to open it , and again , as he did so,
something moved in the path above
him . It was a fair child, stretched
nearly lifeless on the rock, its breast
heaving with thirst , its eyes closed , and
its lips parched and burning . Hans
eyed it deliberately, drank , and passed
on. And a dark, grey cloud came over
the sun, and long, snake -like shadows
crept up along the mountain sides.
Hans struggled on . The sun was
sinking, but its descent seemed to bring
no coolness ; the leaden weight of the
dead air pressed upon his brow and
heart , but the goal was now near . He
saw the cataract of the Golden River
springing down from the hillside,
scarcely five hundred feet above him .
He paused for a moment to breathe ,
and sprang on to complete his task.
1529
2
At this instant a faint cry fell on his
He turned , and saw a grey -haired
old man extended on the rocks. His
eyes were sunk , his features deadly
pale, and gathered into an expression of
despair.
Water ! ” He stretched his arms
to Hans, and cried feebly : “ Water !
I am dying !
“ I have none,” replied Hans. “ Thou
hast had thy share of life . ”
He strode over the prostrate body,
and darted on. And a flash of blue
lightning rose out of the East , shaped
like a sword ; it shook thrice over the
whole heaven, and left it dark with one
heavy, impenetrable shade. The sun
was setting ; it plunged towards the
horizon like a red-hot ball.
The roar of the Golden River rose on
Hans' ear. He stood at the brink of
the chasm through which it ran . Its
waves were filled with the red glory of
the sunset ; they shook their crests like
tongues of fire, and flashes of bloody light
gleamed along their foam. Their sound
came mightier and mightier on his
senses ; his brain grew giddy with the
prolonged thunder. Shuddering, he drew
the flask from his girdle, and hurled
it into the centre of the torrent .
 2000
-THE CHILD'S
LESBOHRLORA
BOOK OF
As he did so, an icy chill shot through
his limbs ; he staggered, shrieked , and
fell. The waters closed over his cry.
And the moaning of the river rose
wildly into the night, as it gushed over
THE BLACK STONE .
CHAPTER IV .
THE QUEST OF SCHWARTZ AND WHAT
BEFELL HIM .
Poor little Gluck waited very anxi-
ously alone in the house for Hans'
return . Finding he did not come back,
he was terribly frightened , and went
LITTLE GLUCK , FRIGHTENED, WENT AND TOLD SCHWARTZ IN PRISON ALL THAT HAD HAPPENED
and told Schwartz in the prison all that
had happened. Schwartz was pleased ,
and said that Hans must certainly have
been turned into a black stone , and he
should have all the gold to himself.
But Gluck was very sorry, and cried
all night . When he got up in the
morning, there was no bread in the
house, nor any money ; so Gluck went
and hired himself to another goldsmith,
and he worked so hard, and so neatly,
and so long every day, that he soon got
money enough together to pay his
brother's fine, and he gave it all to
Schwartz, and Schwartz got out of
numm
1530
STORIEScamera
prison.
prison . Then Schwartz was quite
pleased, and said he should have some
of the gold of the river. But Gluck
only begged he would go and see what
had become of Hans .
Now when Schwartz had heard that
Hans had stolen the holy water, he
thought to himself that such a proceed
ing might not be considered altogether
correct by the King of the Golden
River, and determined to manage mat .
ters better. So he took some more of
Gluck's money, and went to a bad priest ,
who gave him some holy water very
readily for it . Then Schwartz was sure
it was all quite right. So Schwartz got
up early in the morning before the sun
rose, and took some bread and wine in
a basket , and put his holy water in a
flask , and set off for the mountains.
Like his brother, he was much sur
prised at the sight of the glacier, and
had great difficulty in crossing it even
after leaving his basket behind him.
The day was cloudless, but not bright ;
there was a heavy purple haze hanging
over the sky, and the hills looked lowering
and gloomy. And as Schwartz climbed
the steep rock path , the thirst came
 ROUTEGIA
-THE KING OF THE GOLDEN RIVER
upon him until he lifted his flask to his CHAPTER V.
lips to drink . Then he saw the fair child GLUCK REACHES THE GOLDEN RIVER .
lying near him on the rocks, and it When Gluck found that Schwartz
cried to him, and moaned for water. did not come back, he was very sorry,
“ Water, indeed ! ” said Schwartz. and did not know what to do . He
“ I haven't half enough for myself,” and had no money, and was obliged to go
passed on. And as he went he thought and hire himself again to the gold
the sunbeams grew more dim , and he smith , who worked him very hard,
saw a low bank of black cloud rising and gave him very little money:
out of the West ; and, when he had So , after a month or two, Gluck grew
climbed for another hour, the thirst tired, and made up his mind to go and
overcame him again , and he would try his fortune with the Golden River.
66
have drunk . Then he saw the old man The little king looked very kind ,”
lying before him on the path, and thought he. “ I don't think he will
heard him cry out turn
me into a
for water. black stone."
“ Water, indeed !" So he went to
said Schwartz. “ I the priest , and the
haven't half enough priest gave him
for myself. ” And some holy water
on he went. as soon as he asked
Then, again , the for it. Then Gluck
light seemed to fade took some bread in
from before his eyes, his basket, and the
and he looked up, bottle of water, and
and, behold , a mist , set off very early
of the colour of for the mountains .
blood, had come If the glacier
over the sun ; and had occasioned a
the bank of black great deal of
cloud had risen very fatigue to his
high, and its edges brothers, it was
were tossing and twenty times worse
tumbling like the for him , who was
waves of the angry neither so strong
sea. And they cast nor so practised on
long shadows, which the mountains. He
flickered over had several very
Schwartz's path. bad falls, lost his
A sudden horror basket and bread ,
came over Schwartz, and was very much
he knew not why ; frightened at the
but the thirst for strange noises under
gold prevailed over THE PRIEST GIVES GLUCK SOME HOLY WATER the ice. He lay a
his fear, and he long time to rest
rushed on. And when Schwartz stood on the grass after he had got over,
by the brink of the Golden River, its and began to climb the hill just in
wavés were black like thunder-clouds, the hottest part of the day. When
but their foam was like fire ; and the he had climbed for an hour, he got
roar of the waters below and the dreadfully thirsty , and was going to
thunder above met as he cast the flask like his brothers when he saw an
drink
into the stream . old man coming down the path above
And, as he did so,the lightning glared him , looking very feeble, and leaning
in his eyes, and the earth gave way on a staff.
beneath him, and the waters closed “ My son,” said the old man, “ I am
over his cry. And the moaning of the faint with thirst , give me some of that
river rose wildly into the night, as it water ."
gushed over the Then Gluck looked at him, and when
TWO BLACK STONES . he saw that he was pale and weary, he
1531
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES

gave him thewater ; " Only pray don't all kinds of sweet flowers growing on
drink it all ! ” said Gluck . But the old the rocks, bright green moss, with pale
man drank a great deal, and gave him pink starry flowers, and soft belled
back the bottle two-thirds empty. gentians, more blue than the sky at its
Then he bade him good speed , and Gluck deepest, and pure white transparent
went on again merrily. And the path lilies. And crimson and purple butter
became easier to his feet, and two or flies darted hither and thither, and the
three blades of grass appeared upon it, sky sent down such a pure light that
and some grasshoppers began singing Gluck had never felt so happy in his life.
on the bank beside it ; and Gluck Yet, when he had climbed for another
momo

thought he had never heard such merry hour, his thirst became intolerable again,
Yo

singing and when he looked at his bottle he

Then he went on for another hour, saw that there were only five or six
and the thirst increased on him so that drops left in it, and he could not venture
BULLOLELEDELELEEDDA
BLUE

GLUCK PUT THE BOTTLE TO THE CHILD'S LIPS AND IT DRANK IT ALL BUT A FEW DROPS
he thought he should be forced to drink .
But, as he raised the flask , he saw a little
child lying panting by the roadside,
and it cried out piteously for water,
Then Gluck struggled with himself, and
determined to bear the thirst a little
longer ; and he put the bottle to the
child's lips, and it drank it all but a
few drops.
Then it smiled on him , and got up,
and rąn down the hill ; and Gluck
looked after it till it became as small as
a little star, and then turned and began
climbing again . And then there were
1532
to drink. And, as he was hanging the
flask to his belt again , he saw a little dog
lying on the rocks gasping for breath
just as Hans had seen it on the day of
his ascent. And Gluck stopped and
looked at it, and then at the Golden
River, not five hundred yards above
him ; and he thought of the dwarf's
words, “ that no one could succeed
except in his first attempt " ; and he
tried to pass the dog, but it whined
piteously , and Gluck stopped again.
“ Poor beastie ," said Gluck, " it'll be
dead when I come down again if I
 POZITII
ROCCEXUA
THE DWARF FADES AWAY IN THE MIST

mawa
LTELE.
care
Cca
mai

As he spoke, the figure of the dwarf became indistinct. The playing colours of his robe formed themselves into
a mist of dewy light : he stood for an instant veiled with them as with the belt of a broad rainbow. The colours
grew faint, the mist rose into the air ; the monarch had evaporated. Then Gluck cast the three drops into the stream.
1533
 CELKOU CELE zaman
THE CHILD'S
don't help it.” Then he looked closer
and closer at it , and its eye turned on
him so mournfully that he could not
stand it. “ Confound the King and his
gold , too ! ” said Gluck ; and he opened
his flask , and poured all the water into
the dog's mouth .
The dog sprang up and stood on its
hind legs. Its tail disappeared ; its ears pool, into which the waters descended
became long, longer, silky golden ; its with a musical noise.
nose became very red ; its eyes became
very twinkling. In three seconds the
dog was gone, and before Gluck stood
his old acquaintance the King of the
Golden River .
" Thank you ," said the monarch ;
" but don't be frightened, it's all right."
For Gluck showed manifest symptoms
of consternation at this unlooked for
reply to his last observation . “ Why
didn't you come before,” continued the
dwarf, " instead of sending me those
rascally brothers of yours for me to
have the trouble of turning into stones ?
Very hard stones they make, too !"
“ Oh, dear me ! ” said Gluck , “ have
you really been so cruel ? "
“ Cruel!” said the dwarf. “ They
poured unholy water into my stream ; plants grew , and climbed among the
do you suppose I'm going to allow moistening
moistening soil. Young flowers opened
that ? "
“ Why,” said Gluck , “ I am sure, sir,
your Majesty, I mean - they got the
water out of the church font . ' '
Very probably,” replied the dwarf ;
“ but," and his countenance grew stern
as he spoke, " the water which has been
refused to the cry of the weary and
dying is unholy, though it had been
blessed by every saint in heaven ; and
the water which is found in the vessel
of mercy is holy, though it had been
defiled with corpses.”
So saying, the dwarf stooped and
plucked a lily that grew at his feet.
On its white leaves there hung three
drops of clear dew. And the dwarf
shook them into the flask which Gluck
held in his hand . “ Cast these into
the river,” he said, “ and descend
on the other side of the mountains
into the Treasure Valley. And so
good speed ! "
As he spoke, the figure of the dwarf
became indistinct. The playing colours
of his robe formed themselves into a
mist of dewy light: he stood for an
instant veiled with them as with the
belt of a broad rainbow . The colours
BOOK OF STORIES
grew faint , the mist rose into the air ;
the monarch had evaporated .
And Gluck climbed to the brink of
the Golden River, and its waves were
as clear as crystal and as brilliant as the
sun . And, when he cast the three drops
of dew into the stream , there opened,
where they fell , a small circular whirl
Gluck stood watching it for some
time, very much disappointed , because
not only the river was not turned
into gold, bu its waters seemed much
diminished in quantity. Yet he obeyed
his friend the dwarf, and descended
the other side of the mountains,
towards the Treasure Valley ; and , as
he went, he thought he heard the noise
of water working its way under the
ground . And , when he came in sight
of the Treasure Valley, behold, a river,
like the Golden River, was springing
from a new cleft of the rocks above it,
and was flowing in innumerable streams
among the dry heaps of red sand .
And as Gluck gazed, fresh grass sprang
beside the new streams, and creeping
suddenly along the river sides, as stars
leap outwhen twilightis deepening, and
thickets of myrtle and tendrils of vine
cast lengthening shadows over the valley
as they grew . And thus the Treasure
Valley became a garden again, and the
inheritance, which had been lost by
cruelty, was regained by love.
And Gluck went and dwelt in the
valley , and the poor were never driven
from his door ; so that his barns became
full of corn , and his house of treasure.
And, for him , the river had, according
to the dwarf's promise, become a River
of Gold .
And , to this day, the inhabitants of
the valley point out the place where the
three drops of holy dew were cast into
the stream , and trace the course of the
Golden River under the ground, until it
emerges in the Treasure Valley.
VOTUUDET
And at the top of the cataract of
the Golden River are still to be seen
two black stones, round which the
waters howl mournfully every day
at sunset ; and these stones are still
called by the people of the valley
THE BLACK BROTH RS .
The next Stories begin on page 1685.
1534
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
The things inside a watch
THE STORY OF
ALFRED CONTINUED FROM 1418
one ofTHE
the GREAT,
noblest
kings who ever ruled
a
over England , never saw
clock . He used to allow himself
eight hours for work , eight hours
for pleasure , and eight hours for
sleep. When he wanted to fix the
time like this , he had to have candles
made which took a certain time to
burn away, and so told him how the
hours were passing.
Even that was better than many
men were able to do. They knew how
long a year was, because it takes the
earth a year to go round the sun .
They knew how long a month was ,
because it takes a month for the moon
to go round the earth . They knew
how long the day and the night were,
because it takes just a day and a
night , all but a few odd minutes, for
the earth to turn once round . But
all sorts of things had to be used
before clocks were made to tell how
an hour passed , and some of these
ways of telling time are shown in
pictures in the following pages.
But there is nothing so simple and
so good as a clock, which tells us the
time at a glance as soon as we have
learned to understand it .
There are many different sorts of
clocks . Some will go for years , once
they have been wound up. Others
will go for eight days ; others need
winding up every day. But , no mat-
ter how often they need winding up,
and no matter how they are made to
go, the thing they have to do is the
PICS
1535
THE CLOCK
same in all . A certain
number of wheels have
to be made to go round
so regularly that it will always
take them a certain time to do their
work. When you wind up what is
called a grandfather's clock , you
wind strings on to a sort of barrel .
At the end of the strings heavy
weights are fixed . These weights hang
down and are always pulling. The
pulling makes the wheels go round,
just as the pulling of a horse makes
the cart go . The wheels have cogs,
or teeth , and fit into the cogs of
other wheels , and all have to go round
at the same time, though not all as
fast as one another . Some wheels
have a lot of teeth, others have not
so many. So while one wheel turns
round in sixty seconds , or one minute ,
another wheel takes sixty minutes , or
one hour, in which to turn round .
All this twisting and turning is simply
to make the hands work round and
round over the face .
There are many parts always at
work. There is the pendulum swing
ing , and there is the part which pre
vents the clock from doing its work too
quickly or too slowly. If the clock
goes too quickly, or gains time, as we
say, we unwind a little screw at the
bottom of the pendulum . This lets
the weight at the end of the pendulum
slip down a little, and causes the pen
dulum to swing more slowly. If the
clock loses time, we wind the screw
up a little . This makes the pendulum
shorter, and causes it to swing a little
EDOT
 ora
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
faster . Some clocks have no pendu. not even a clock . Once a man was
lum . They work with a spring. Then , saved from a cruel death by a mistake
instead of altering the pendulum , we made by a clock. A sentinel, who was
have to move a little pointer. If we supposed to keep awake all night at
push it to the right , that makes the the king's palace, was said to have
spring tighter, and makes the watch fallen asleep while on duty, at twelve
or clock go a little faster. If we o'clock at night. Now , if they had been
push the pointer to the left , it makes the able to prove that he had been asleep ,
spring looser, and so causes the watch that poor soldier would have been
to go more slowly. But whether it be a shot , so he was very anxious to show
clock with heavy weights , or a clock that he was awake .
with a big strong spring, or ever so “ I can prove that I was not asleep ,"
tiny a watch with a little spring just the man said . “ I heard Great Tom of
like a thread of steel , the work done is Westminster strike thirteen .”
always the same . The long hand has At first they thought that this was a
to hop, little by little, round the face stupid story, because clocks do not strike
of the clock, from minute to minute . more than twelve ; but when inquiries
The hour hand goes from hour to hour. were made it was found that what the
THE CLOCK THAT RINGS А BELL TO man said was true . The clock had got
TELL TIME IN THE DARK something the matter with it that night ,
Some clocks not only tell the time and it struck thirteen instead of
with their hands, but strike the hour. twelve . That little mistake of the
When the long minute hand points clock saved the soldier's life.
to the figure twelve , and the short hour Great Tom of Westminster was the
hand points to one , a little hammer clock which Edward I. put up over
at the back of the clock gives one the old Houses of Parliament. For
blow on a bell which is fixed at the 400 years it rang out the hours of day
top of the clock . This tells us that it and night. It has gone now, and since
is one o'clock, without our having to 1858 Big Ben has reigned in its stead.
look . Some clocks strike as each BEN TELEGRAPHS HIS TIME TO
quarter of an hour passes ; others play BGGREENWICH TWICE A DAY
a tune at the end of each hour. Big Ben has had a smooth career
Clocks and watches can be made to for many years, but it was not always so.
do very wonderful things . One watch , The first Big Ben weighed 16 tons.
called the repeater watch, can be made Soon after it had been hung in its place ,
to tell you what time it is even when it cracked . The hammer was too heavy
you are in the dark . You have simply for it ; the jarring had smashed it.
to press a knob , and a little bell rings That was taken down and the new one
out the number of the hour, and the made, two years after the other.
number of the quarter-hours that have The same thing happened again.
passed since that hour was reached. The second Big Ben cracked, and for a
Then there is the alarum clock, which long time the bell hung silent . At last
rings a bell at the hour for which you they twisted Big Ben round in his tower ,
have set it . so as to make the hammer strike a part
E CLOCK THAT SAVED A MAN'S LIFE which had not been cracked. Then they
THEBY MAKING A MISTAKE
got a smaller hammer, and for the last
So through day and night, week thirty years Big Ben has been ringing
after week , year after year, the faithful old days out and new days in, none the
clock goes on telling us the time . worse for the split in his side . The
Some clocks last hundreds of years . clock and its bells cost £22,000. Twice
The editor of this book has heard a a day its works set going a machine
tune played in Holland by a clock which telegraphs Big Ben's time to
which was ticking when Napoleon was Greenwich to see that it corresponds
alive , and another in an old church in with the time there. So that day and
England which has lasted more than night Big Ben is right. It can be seen !
three hundred years . Both these clocks from far and near when the sun is up,
still tell the time as correctly as if they and at night the lights behind its face
had been made only a ago . shine through the dials to tell the dark
But nothing is perfect in this world , city what the hour is.
1536
oomer
SERVIET
X
wiwmoticantantvercas 42
HOW THE WHEELS
D
B 9
A
This picture of the inside of a clock shows us how the
wheels go round. It is not the pendulum that makes
the clock go ; it is either a weight or a spring.
this grandfather's clock it is a weight. The weight
is on a cord which passes round a broad wheel, called
a barrel, marked A in the picture. The heavy weight
pulls the cord downwards, and the cord , being wound
round the barrel, pulls the barrel round. The edge of
this barrel has teeth which work into the teeth of
another wheel, marked B, so that both wheels go
round. This second wheel causes the top wheel,
marked C, to go round, and so all the wheels are set
to work . But if that were all, the wheels would run
round tou quickly, and they must be made to run
slowly and regularly. At the top is a curved piece of
metal with a catch at each end ; it is called the escape-
ment, and is marked D. This swings to and fro, and
every time it swings, it catches the top wheel and
prevents it from going round more than one tooth.
od
toscadutincorect een
GO ROUND
大
12
IL
B 2
3
8 4
7 5
6
This picture shows how the wheels make the hands
go round. The three wheels shown in front of the
In clock , marked B, E, and F, are really behind the face.
B, E, and F are necessary for the hands. Wheel F
goes round once every hour, and as the minute hand is
fixed to it, the wheel carries the minute hand round
with it. Now wheel F touches wheel E with its
edge, making it go round also. E is a double wheel,
having near the centre a small wheel fixed to it with
only six teeth ; it is really on the other side of wheel E,
but is shown in the picture in front for clearness. Each
tooth in it fits into a tooth in wheel B, thus making that
wheel go round. As wheel E goes round once in an
hour, the six teeth in its centre carry round one -twelfth
of wheel B, which has seventy -two teeth. The hour
hand is fixed to wheel B , so while F is going once round,
it makes wheel E drive B one - twelfth of its journey .
Thus wheel F, with the minute hand, turns twelve
times while wheel B, with the hour hand , turns once .
1537
 CULO TORIEM Caminoiminuarema IXIE JIZER

HOW MEN FIRST TOLD THE TIME

This was one of the first ways in which At night men marked a candle in dere is a simpler method of telling
men told the time, fixing a stick up- equal sections in black and white, so the time by night. A hemp rope is
right in the ground and marking the that each section was burned in a knotted in regular spaces, and set
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTYY

spot reached by the shadow. This given time. Alfred the Great is said light to at the bottom, smouldering
moves round the stick, becoming to have invented this way of slowly and regularly . In Korea
shorter before noon and longer after. measuring the passing of time. people still tell time in this way.

Here is a time-recorder. Every time This is an hour-glass, like an egg- When a master and man wished to
a section of rope or candle is burnt boiler used in kitchens. One end is keep a record of time for wages,
through, or an hour-glass turned, filled with sand, which pours through two sticks were used. The servant
the owner cuts a notch on a stick a small hole into the bottom bulb. It brought his part of the stick, and the
to mark the hours of vigil passed. was once used to measure sermons ! farmer compared it with his own .
MUUT LOCTITUUTUNZ11 DOTTO0 IIXIZY
TUTTIVO Comercio LIMIT 0
1538
TODOCA GXICO MOTO TOXO TOGEL ancamaccommercromat CODICATEDOC

HOW MEN MEASURED TIME BY THE SUN

Timewasmeasured for ages and ages by placing a small dish or a round This is a tiny rushlight holder. Arushlight
basin in water and boring a hole in the bottom ofit, the water flowing in, was used before candles were made. It
and gradually sinking it. This would always happen in the same period burns regularly, and was used by the poor
of time, so that men knew the time when the dish or water-clock sank. for a long timeafter candles were invented.

Thereare very few people who have not seen a sun -dial,either on a house, or on a pedestal in a park . The dial
is marked, and the time is told by the shade of the pointer falling on the different numbers. One of the toys given
away with THE CHILDREN'S ENCYCLOPÆDIA, and the article on page 1285, explain how we can make one.

This is a kind of movable sun-dial , which can be held up so that This is a primitive watch . It was always held
the sunlight shine's through a tiny hole in the straight piece of in one position, and the sun, shining through
metal, and lights up one of the figures engraved inside of the the little hole, fell upon one of the numbers en
circle, which is placed at a right angle to the straight piece. graved on the inside of the circle, as shown here.
DUIUOLDU
1539
Marum
RIYETT
BEHIND THE GREAT FACE OF BIG BEN

ULERTURACELETU
R.

At the top of 360 steps in the Clock Tower at Westminster, Big Ben has marked time for London for fifty years.
It is not possible to understand the size of the clock as we stand on the ground. It has four daces, each 23 feet
across-nine or ten times as wide as a door. The minute hands are 14 feet long ; they would reach higher than
an ordinary room. The pendulum weighs nearly 450 lb. The figures on the face are each two feet long, and
the minute spaces are a foot square. If you will look closely at your watch , you will see the minute hand move
in little jumps ; the minute hand of Big Ben jumps half a foot every time it moves. It is not easy to believe these
figures, but that is because our eyes deceive us when we look up to a great height, and Big Ben stands so high
that if thirty tall men stood on one another's shoulders the top man would only just touch the middle of its face.
U PONUDUTUKUTUT DUIDDODD MOODUD DOCTOR
1540
ZVON

DomMILUTIE
CreamDD12
Cod CORD COLEG

Connya
THE BIG BELL OF BIG BEN

TEEN
Big Ben is the great bell which strikes the hours at the Houses of Parliament. It is made of copper and tin,
and is nearly 8 feet high and 9 } feet wide at the bottom . But Big Ben is not the largest bell in London. The
largest is Great Paul, at St. Paul's Cathedral. Great Paul weighs 171 tons, and its hammer weighs 180 lb.

Anconan.

이0 다
o
2
MACEN THE TEAPOTEC
A

Big Ben needs a workshop all his own. The great bell, from which the clock takes its name, hangs by
1,600 feet of chain from an oak beam bound in iron plates. It weighs 13 } tons, and the hammer with which
the hours are struck weighs about 450 lb. There is a great noise in the room when the bell is about to
strike, and the machine shown in the bottom picture has to be wound up three times a week to give
Big Ben the power to strike the hours. It takes two men about five hours to wind up Big Ben for striking.
1541
 CUELA ELLO

HOW TO TELL TIME BY THE CLOCK

Thethese
clock-face has a isringof
large figures a ring largefigures
oftiny marks ; from
these1 mark
to 12 ;the
these mark the
minutes. Onehours.
of the Outside
hands is
longer than the other; the long hand marks the minutes and the short hand marks the hours.
When the short hand points to i and the long hand is exactly at the top of the clock -face
over 12, it is i o'clock. When the short hand points exactly to one of the large figures,
the long hand is always at the top , and it is exactly the hour,
But if the short hand is a little past one of the large figures it is some minutes past the
hour, and we know exactly how many minutes it is by counting the tiny marks on the
outer ring. There are five of these marks between each of the large figures, so that when
the long hand is at 2 it is 10 minutes -- twice 5 minutes past the hour.
The minute hand goes round the clock once in an hour ; the short hand goes from one
large figure to the next in an hour. When the long hand is a quarter of the way round, it
is a quarter-past the hour to which the short hand points ; when the long hand is hali-way
round, it is half-past the hour. Here is aa full and simple explanation of the face of a clock.
Che face of a clock is divided into
THE the clock by the long hand is an hour.
12 clear wide spaces and 60 narrow If we had only to think of minutes,
ones, and each widespace stands for two that would be quite enough ; but as we
things. It takes the long hand 5 minutes reckon time in hours and days, and as
to cross one wide space, and the short there are 24 hours in a day, we must
hand one hour to cross the same space . have some means of counting hours, as
A minute is 60 seconds, and an hour we'l as minutes, by the clock . So the
is 60 minutes . The clock begins with clock is marked off into hours, as well
the minutes, and the face of the clock is as minutes, and the hours are marked
marked off with tiny lines into 60 in a very clever way.
narrow spaces . The large hand marks We do not count 24 hours, but only
the minutes, and takes exactly one 12 , because twice 12 are 24 , and it is
minute to cross one of these narrow simple to count 12 hours before the
spaces . So that this hand takes exactly middle of the day, and 12 after. The
one hour, or 60 minutes, to pass all the clock, therefore, has 12 hours marked,
narrow spaces round the clock. and goes round from 1 to 12 , when it
But it would never do to have 60 begins again at 1. We call the first part
small spaces and to leave us to guess of the day A.M. , which means before
the exact space which the long hand noon, and the second part P.M., which
touched . Put 60 matches in a row on means after noon ; and whenever the
the table , touch one near the middle, clock points to 3 , or to 4, we know
and ask somebody to tell you the whether it is before or after middle day.
number of the match you touch, and The cleverness of the way in which
you will see that a great deal of slow the clock marks the hours is this .
counting is necessary to get the proper We know that the 60 minute marks
number. It would never do to have to are marked off into 12 divisions, and
spend so long in finding out the time. there must therefore be 12 dividing
So the wise clockmakers mark off walls to separate them . Now , as the
60 narrow spaces into 12 divisions, clock needs 12 signs to mark the hours,
each division having 5 narrow spaces . the figures from 1 to 12 are used to
When we have to count with our eyes, mark off the 12 divisions, and to mark
as we do with the clock , it is hard to the 12 hours as well .
pick out one in 60 , but it is easy to So that, instead of needing two clock
pick out one in 5 , and we have now faces, one for minutes and one for
12 simple divisions, each with 5 spaces . hours, one face serves for both . While
It takes the long hand 5 minutes to the long hand marks the minutes at
cross one of these divisions, 10 minutes the narrow spaces, the short hand
to cross two of them, and 60 minutes, marks the hours at the 12 big figures
or 12 times 5 , to cross them all . When between the spaces.
the long hand has crossed all these Let us see how this works . We set
divisions, therefore, we know
know that the clock, let us say, at noon, which is
60 minutes, or one hour, has gone. 12 o'clock . Both hands point exactly
That is simple. The long hand crosses to 12. In 5 minutes the long hand has
one narrow space in i minute , two in 2crossed the first space, and is opposite
minutes, 60 in 60 minutes. Once round the first dividing wall, which is the big
1542
 ULEX SOLA
THE STORY OF THE CLOCK XEITOKELAX

figure I. That is 5 minutes past 1. In 10 minutes the long hand has crossed
thesecond space, and is opposite the second dividing wall, which is the big figure 2.
That is 10 minutes past 1 . So the long hand creeps round , in this way :
II 12 12 12
2 10 2 no 10 10 10

3 3 9 3
8 4 8 4 8 8 8
5
6 6
12 o'clock 5 minutes past 12 10 ninutes past 12 quarter -past 12 20 minutes past 12 25 minutes past 12

11 12 12 11 12 12 11 12 12
710 10 10 2 10

27 3 3 9 3 9 3 3

+
18 4 8 8 4 8 4 8
6 6 5
half- past 12 2 minutes to I 20 minutes to 1 quarter to 1 10 minutes to ) 5 minutes to 1

We can easily count the divisions because the big figures tell us. Thus, when
the long hand points to the big figure 4, we know that it has crossed 44 divisions,
and, as 4 times 5 is 20, we know that 20 minutes have gone. If the long hand
points to the big figure 6 , we know it has crossed 6 divisions ; and 6 times 5 are
30, so that 30 minutes have gone , or half an hour.
All this time, of course, the short hand of the clock is moving also, very
slowly, and by the time the long hand has gone right round to 12 again , the
short hand has travelled to the big figure 1 , and it is therefore I o'clock. When
the long hand has gone right round twice, the short hand has crossed 2 divisions,
and points to the big figure 2 ; and it is therefore 2 o'clock.
Remember that the big figures mark the hours only, not the minutes, so that
when the long hand points to the big figure 2 we must not think it is 2 minutes
past something. It is two spaces past — that is, 2 times 5 minutes . We are only
to count the big 2 as 2 when the short hand points to it .
An exact hour is marked when the long hand is at the beginning of its round,
opposite 12 , and the short hand points to a big figure. The hours are shown here :
11 12 1
2 3

2
.

10 2 10 2 10 10 10 10
8

3
9 9 3 9 3 9 3
8 8 4 8 8 8 8
6 7 6 5 7 6 5. 1. 6 5 6

12 o'clock I oclock 2 o'clock 3 o'clock 4 o'clock o'clock

1 2 1
11 1 11 11 11 142 142 II IR
10 10 10 2 10 2 10 10
19 3 9 3 19 3 9 3 3
C2
8

8 8 4 8 8 4
7 6 5 5 7 5 7 6 6 5
6
6 o'clock 7 o'clock 8 o'clock 9 o'clock 10 o'clock 11 oclock

When the long hand is on the right side of the circle, we say that it is so
many minutes past the hour. But when the long hand begins to go up the left
side, we say it is so many minutes to the next hour. You can say that it is
40 minutes past 2 ; but it is much easier to say that it is 20 minutes to 3 , and
both these mean quite the same.
So as long as the long hand is to the right of the clock-face , we say that it is
past the hour ; when the long hand is to the left of the clock- face, we think of
the next hour, and say that it is so many minutes to it. For the first half-hour
we read forward, for the second half-hour we read backward.
Some clocks are marked in plain figures, but most are marked in the fig res
the Romans use ), called Roman numerals. Here is a table of them , from 1 to 12 :
I = I II = 2 III = 3 IV = 4 V = 5 VI = 6 VII = 7 VIII = 8 IX = 9 X = 10 XI = II XII = 12.
THE NEXT FAMILIAR THINGS BEGIN ON PAGE 1639
DUO UNAOULDER LOUCLUDED
1543
 HOW INDIA LIES BETWEEN MOUNTAIN & SEA
RUSSIAN PAMIRS Н 1 NA
URKESTA
TUTTO

Khyber Poo SRINAGAR

PESAWAR
B т
run

j
All
MULTAN Su
tle ' SIMLA

r Jum r
Riv

Ri
ve River MEER / T

Ga r
nRiav
e

ng
BolanPo DELHI Mt Everest

in
e
s
st Desert putra
Grea
t River Brahma
ains
MYIT

AGRA
ba

Rajputana
TUTTO

SELLELUILLE
STORLEKLERIA
DAR JILING
Ch r
am

LUCKNOW
e
Riv

nd
CAWNPORE
AJMERE River Gone

ILLUIKEN
BE
HAIDARABAD JODHPUR BENARES

CON
UNA
ALLAHABAD

KLECA
o a U ai ns
dhy
a n
unt
tek Vin Mo
j ar
Gu River Nerbudda
BARODA Riv Maha
er d
sin
Fro gzo
or
SURAT
NAGPUR Hmon Kon e &
From England da g g
River Godavery h on st
CUTTACK
G' aoitc a
BOMBAYE U
POO
T G Co Sin Aus
NA gap tra
To ore & lia
GOLCOND
HAIDARABAD BAY
Mala

e ny
o ahpy Colo River Krishna
AT lCt
AASULIPATAM
GOA
bar

Coast

Β Ε Ν 6 Α ι
l
nde

BANGALORE
Andaman Island
Isigtas
oma
Coa

MADRAS From Australia & Canada.

Cor
st

Laccative Islands
VTT

eng TANJOR
lan
rre

iv d
03

Cape Comoria
Nicobar
Islands
7
NO

COLOMBO

Maldive Islands

I N D : AN о с E A N

India, for hundreds of years, lived a life peculiarly its own, cut off from the rest of Asia by the highest mountains
in the world . The only ways of reaching this wonderful country are over the mountains or by the sea , and the
wild storms of the Indian Ocean prevented thesmall ships of the earliest sea rovers from reaching it. So that
India remained an almost unknown land to the West untilthe ships of the European nations rounded the Cape of
Good Hope. There are but few openings in the mountains ofthe north -west, such as the Khyber and Bolan Passes.
1544
 The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES
Camers carrying themerchandise of India over a bridge of boats
INDIA, THE PEARL OF THE EAST
FAR away in the CONTINUED FROM 1460
East, on the south
side of the continent of Asia ,
lies the vast country called
India, full of people who are very
unlike our own countrymen
people who talk strange
a world, Mount Everest , is on the
language, and wear
strange
clothes, and live in strange houses,
and have strange manners and cus-
toms, and strange religions ; people
who are not all like each other, as
o English and Scots and Irish are alike ,
but just as different as we are from
Spaniards, or Italians, or Germans.
Yet they all have a kind of like-
ness, just as all the European peoples
have a kind of likeness ; they are
different from each other, but not
so different as they all are from
Europeans. For India is a very large
country, as large as Germany and
Austria and France and Spain all
rolled into one ; so large that there
are about eight times as many people
in it as there are in our own country
-nearly 300 millions of people ! And
it is the business of a few thousands
of our own people to rule over all
those millions ; to give them good
laws , and to make sure that the laws
are obeyed ; to prevent the strong
from injuring the weak, and the cun-
ning from injuring the simple ; to give
justice to all with an even hand.
India is not only a very big country,
but mountains and rivers and plains,
the geographical features, are what
JIKA
R 1545
we call on a very big
scale — as if we looked
at the things to which we
are accustomed through a
powerful magnifying glass. The
highest mountain in the whole
Indian frontier ; it is very nearly
seven times as high as the highest
mountain in our own islands, Ben
Nevis, and nearly twice as high as
the biggest in Europe, Mont Blanc.
The two biggest rivers, the Indus
and the Ganges, are not quite so large
as the Volga or the Danube, but are
both seven times as long as our own
Thames. And in like manner, the
biggest kinds of wild animals live in
India - elephants, which man has
tamed for his own service ; lions,
though they are few now ; great
leopards and tigers, the strongest
and most beautiful and most cruel
of all the cousins of our tame cats ; o
and fierce wild cattle, with mighty
horns , which the tiger himself is often
afraid to fight ; and crocodiles in the
rivers , which will drag down men and
cattle if they catch them ; and snakes,
large and small , including the most
terrible of all , the deadly cobra, for
whose bite there is no cure . Again,
in like manner, the Indian sun
scorches with a heat we can hardly
imagine in England, and rain falls
in rushing torrents such as we
never see in the biggest thunder
storms that burst on our own country.
 Con ULSTILQXLEGO
- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES -
Now let us look at the whole of this
big country, with the map appearing on
the opposite page, and notice theimport-
ant things about its formation, its bound-
aries, its mountains, its rivers and plains.
INDIA IS HEMMED IN BI 1HE
HOM MOUNTAINS AND THE SEA
First of all you see that the southern
half of India is a triangle or wedge ,
pushed out into the Indian Ocean , so
that it is bounded on the south -west
and on the north -east by the sea . This
part we call the Peninsula. And then
you see that a huge chain of mountains
curves ' n a rather crooked sort of way
from the top left-hand or western corner
of the Peninsula northwards, and then
eastwards till it comes down to the top
right -hand corner ; so that on the north-
west , and north and north - east, India
is bounded by mountains.
You cannot get at India at all ,
unless you come to it by sea or make
your way through the mountains .
And those mountains are so high and THE SOUTHERNTHEHALF
so difficult to get through, that there
are really only two passes by which
armies have been able to get into India,
and both of these are on the north-
west side. So that if those passes are
so well guarded that an enemycannot
force his way through , an invader
cannot get into India unless he comes
across the sea . There, you see , is a
very good reason why the peoples who
inhabit India grew up apart from other
nations, SO as to be unlike them ,
keeping their own manners and customs;
for in ancient times, fleets of ships
could not make long sea voyages as
they do now , and the coast of the
Peninsula was too far away from other
lands for anyone to think of invading
India by sea . Sea and mountains were
a barrier between th Empire of India
and the rest of the world .
HALE OF INDIA WHICH
THE NORTHERNHINDUSTAN
The next thing to notice is that the
wedge broadens out a great deal at the
top, and just below the place where it
broadens is a river which rises a little
east of the middle of the country, and
flows very nearly due west, till it falls
into the western sea . This river is
called the Nerbudda, and it divides
India into a northern half, which is
called Hindustan , and a southern
half, which is called the Deccan .
TIMU YOYOYU UNIT 2X1
1546
rranxa
Now, in Hindustan are two very
big rivers . On the west , flowing almost
from north to south along the foot of the
barrier-mountains, is the Indus ; and
several other rivers join together and
flow into the Indus when it is about
half way on its journey to the coast .
The land through which these rivers
flow , down to where they all join the
Indus, is called the Punjab , which
means the Land of the Five Rivers .
The other great river, which flows from
west to east , is called the Ganges, and
some people , when they talk of Hindu
stan , mean just that great low-lying
plain watered by the Ganges and
the rivers which areits tributaries.
The plain , or basin , of the Ganges is
the most fertile part of India . But
between the lower part of the Indus
on the west and the Ganges on the
east , there is a great deal of country
where there are no rivers at all , and
very much of this is desert .
OF INDIA WHICH
DECCAN
In the Deccan there is nothing like
the great plain of the Ganges, or even
the Punjab. Most of it is high table
land ; steep on the west side, where
the mountains are called the Western
Ghats, and there is only a narrow
strip of low land lying between the hills
and the coast ; but shelving down on
the eastern side , so that here and there
are wide plains which form the district
called the Carnatic. One of the great
rivers of the Deccan is called the
Godavery ; it is famous for some very
wonderful waterfalls . Right in the
heart of the Deccan there is a place
called Golconda , which was once the
capital of a mighty kingdom . In those
regions great store of gems was found,
and these were brought to the jewellers
of Golconda, so that the wealth of
Golconda became a proverb.
India is a very hot country . Some
times in winter, up among the high
barrier-mountains — which are hardly
in India-it is quite cold. All other
places , even the coolest , are much
warmer than England ; and in all the
great plains where the rivers flow , and
still more in those plains where there
are no rivers, it is always hot . In the
hot season the heat is so trying that
many Europeans become ill if they stay
long , so that English people have
 JEUNESSE FEELarad an LABRALECANTES QUE

THE HOME - LIFE OF THE PEOPLE OF INDIA

In India most of the people earn their living by growing rice, wheat, and other crops. They are their own
millers, and here we see some friends who have gathered together outside one of their thatched huts to grind
some rice by placing it into a stone jar and pounding it with short poles. While doing this they can talk to
one another and look after their children playing round them . Life among these people is very quiet and
peaceful, unlike that of our own people, who spend their lives in mills, factories, and workshops, amid the
ceaseless whir of machinery. The Indians weave beautiful shawls and carpets, and hammer and carve out
beautiful brass pots and tables such as we all know and use in our homes. Their needs are few and simple.
The photograph is by Underwood & Underwood , London.
Dort
1547
 CALZUZAKE
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
taken to going up to “ the hills ” in the
hot weather , or atleast , to sending their safety on that part of the coast.
wives and children to the hills if they
have to stay behind themselves ; and it
is hardly safe to go out of doors , except
early in the morning and late in the
evening. For that reason , too, there
are very few places where it is possible
for English children to grow up strong
and healthy ; so that when Englishmen
in India marry, they know that sooner
or later they will have to send their
children home to be brought up in Eng .
land , and that their wives will often have
to choose between being parted from
their children and being parted from
their husbands .
There are many great cities in India , of
which the largest is Calcutta. In old
times , and until quite a short time ago,
the British people who were at the
head of the Government in India used
to live at Calcutta ; but now they
generally live at Simla , which is in the
hills , because Simla is healthy, and Cal- lected round them , that the people of the
cutta is terribly hot . court might buy their goods, and that
THE GREAT RIVERS OF INDIA AND THE they might be protected against robbers
GREAT PORTS ON THEIR BANKS
Long before the Ganges reaches the
sea , it divides into a number of rivers,
one of which is called the Hoogl .
The names of places in India are rather
puzzling, because there are different
ways of spelling them ; but they are
spelt here so that you can read them
just as if they were English words,
and then you will pronounce them
as English people usually pronounce
them ; only you must remember gene-
rally to sound the letter a either the
same way as in call --for instance, in
Bengal ; or as in can't — for instance ,
in Punjab.
Ships can sail up the Hoogli, and
so a place on the banks of the Hoogli
became a port , which grew into Calcutta,
as our port on the Thames grew into
London . The second great port of
India is on the west, at Bombay, which
was given to our King Charles II . by
the Portuguese as part of the dowry
of his bride, Catharine of Braganza.
The third is Karachi , on the Indus. There
are other harbours on the west coast , but
none so large ; and on the east no good
ones at all, though ships can get fair
shelter off Madras. When the gales,
( 6
which are called “ monsoons, ” blow , as
they do regularly at certain seasons
z JITU NUCZNURITE
1548
of the year, fleets cannot remain in
Most of our great towns in England
and Scotland have grown large either
because they were ports to which foreign
merchants came with their goods and
from which English merchants sent their
ships, or because there are big “ works
there for manufacturing something , like
steel or cotton or pottery ; and most of
our people make their living by working
at some industry or other of this kind,
or by buying and selling the goods that
are manufactured .
HOW THEOREA UP AND BUSY CITIES OF
INDIA
But in India , most of the people make
their living by tilling the soil, which
grows rice or wheat or millet. There the
big cities grew up because emperors
and kings found they were convenient
places to build their palaces in , as they
could be well fortified ; and as the kings
lived there with their courts, men col
or the raids of enemies . And other
cities grew up on spots which were held
sacred, as sometimes in England towns
grew more quickly where there was a
famous cathedral or abbey. So that
the largest towns, except the few ports ,
were generally at one time either the
capital of a kingdom , or places to which
people went on pilgrimages, or strong
fortresses.
In India there are very few manu
factures such as we have , which bring
together great numbers of men to work
in factories, and the big cities are there
fore few . You can travel immense dis
tances without seeing one at all , and
in other places where, in ancient times,
great cities have stood , are the ruins of
buildings that were once magnificent .
DEELHI
LH I AND THE PEACOCK THRONE , AND
AGRA WITH THE WONDERFUL TOMB
Of the old cities, the most famous of
all is Delhi , because for many centuries
the mightiest monarchs in all India
reigned there — even for centuries before
the great Moguls made themselves lords
of India. There, in old times, was the
wondrous peacock throne, gleaming with
precious stones, said to have been worth
millions of pounds. A conqueror came
and carried it away, an the jewels
were scattered . But the most beautiful
ALL
WORLD
IN
SCENES
LIVING
REMARK
MOST
ONE
THE
OF

-the
world
the
anywhere
seen
be
to
sights
remarkable
most
of
one
us
shows
photograph
striking
This
the
from
overflowing
water
in
people
crowd
immense
an
of
bathing
,ichat
Ganges
River
Tgreat
India
aNorthern
sacred
is
water
the
that
believe
it,bpeople
in
bathe
pilgrims
thousands
of
.hundreds
them
to
come
will
good
somenelieving
nd
he
 LECA CLIEN TEICA ELALCER LE
• THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES ITUOLIA.
buildings in India are at a much
younger city -- Agra. There are people
who think that the Mohammedan
mosque, or temple, called the Pearl
Mosque, or the Moti Musjid , and a fine
tomb called the Taj Mahal, are the
most beautiful buildings in the world .
The Taj, which is, perhaps, the most
famous bui'ding in India, wasbuilt by different parts of the country and among
one of the Moguls named Shah Jehan,
as a memorial to the wife he loved ,
who lies buried under its dome with
Shah Jehan beside her . Here also
Shah Jehan built the White Palace,
which is one of the fairest palaces in
the whole of the world .
TH1EEIN KIND OF PEOPLE YOU
A WALK IN INDIA
WOULD MEET
Now think of this—that if you tra-
velled all over India and saw all the peo
ple there, not so many as one in every
thousand would be white. That is to
say, all , the natives have brown skins-
some dark brown, some light brown , but
all brown ; and there are a thousand
natives for every European . Out of them .
all, very few indeed are Christians ; the
religion of nearly three -quarters of them
is Hindooism , and nearly one-quarter
are Mohammedans, or, as they are often
called , Mussulmans.
The Mussulmans believe in the teach
ing of Mahomet, who, they think, was a
prophet sent by God. A great many of
the Mussulmans - most of them , per-
haps - belong to races which have fought
their way over India as conquering
armies some time or other during the
last thousand years . Some of these are
Moguls, or Turcomans ; more are
Afghans, or Pathans. (Remember to
pronounce the two a's in each of
those words just as you pronounce the
a in pass ; and also to pronounce
t and h in Pathans separately, as
in at home, not together, as in the. )
GREAT
THEMUSSULMAN DIVISION BETWEEN
AND THE HINDOO
THE
These Mussulmans think of them
selves as soldiers, descended from a race
of victorious soldiers, who have been
rulers of the country in the past , and
there is a great division between them
and the Hindoos, whom they look upon
as infidels. Hindoos and Mussulmans
keep separate ; they do not marry each
other, and in many parts of the country ,
even under British rule, they can hardly
be kept from fighting each other.
1550
-- LEIDUAL
Most of the people in India, however,
are Hindoos, just as most people in
Europe are Christians ; but there are
differences in the religion of Hindoos,
just as there are among Christians .
According to the Hindoo religion, there
are an immense number of gods, and
different gods are held in honour in
different classes of people, who believe
that they are under the protection of
this or that particular god. Some of
these gods are worshipped with strange
rites, and some used to be worshipped
with rites that were even horrible,
until they were forbidden by the
British . Men and women used to
torture themselves hideously, thinking
to please the gods thereby. English
people used to believe that at the
festival of one of these gods called
Juggernaut — which was only one of
his many titles , and meant Lord of the
World — the Hindoos threw themselves
down before the great car on which the
idol was dragged from one temple to
another, thinking that if they were
crushed to death under the car they
would win happiness in the life here.
after ; but that was not really true .
TERRI BLE THINGS THATHAPPENEDIN THE
PAST
Perhaps it wasbelieved because people
really did die from their exertions in
dragging the car. But the “ car of
Juggernaut ” has become a proverb.
Great temples, or shrines, were built
long ago in honour of some of these
gods, which have in them wonderful
carvings and idols or images.
Less than a hundred years ago, there
was a practice among the Hindoos
which seems to us very shocking.
When a man died, his body was burned ;
but the custom was for the widow , if
she wished to be praised and to be
remembered for her virtue, to burn
herself alive on her husband's funeral
Pyre. And because this was sup
posed to bring some great good to
the husband in the life to come , the
widows were often forced to do this by
the dead man's kinsfolk. This was
called “ suttie . ' It is never done now,
however, because the British stopped
it about eighty years ago.
The most remarkable and important
custom among the Hindoos is what is
called caste . In ancient times, there
 CUS

THE WONDER AND BEAUTY OF INDIA

Nowhere in the world are there such splendid and wonderful buildings as in the East, and the temples and tombs
of India are the things that impress all travellers. Not only did the old rulers of India build themselves glorious
palaces to live in during their lives, but they built stately tombs for themselves to lie in . The beautiful build
ings in this picture are the tombs of the kings of Golconda. The bodies are placed directly under the domes.

This beautiful tomb with the stately approach, often called the most glorious building in the world, is the famous
Taj Mahal at Agra , built by the Mogul Emperor Shah Jehan, as a memorial to his wife. He lies buried beside her.
பாசானாகானசவபயான SOTTLAITTEETTI TITTITTTTT Toro TTYMOTION
1551
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
XXEL *LUXUDA ZEUKALALEUK 12 UTILAEILGEMEILECE O

were four divisions among them , each are really no better than heathens
of which kept separate from the others , and idolaters . But the Hindoos think
and married wives who belonged to that the Mussulmans and the Chris
their own division , or caste ; and the tians, being of no caste, are certainly
children were of the parents' caste. The no better than their own lowest caste .
priests and teachers, belongedto one HºwEMPIRE
caste, who were called Brahmins ; and THE BRITISH RULE OVER THE VAST
OF INDIA
the soldiers to another. These , and Now, all these Hindoos and Mussul
also the third caste, were parts of a race mans are ruled over by the British.
which conquered most of India ; but In about half the country, all the people
the fourth caste were considered as who look after the Government are
base - born , because they belonged to British , except that a few natives are
the conquered peoples ; and the con- allowed some share in the work. In
querors imagined that they themselves these parts of India there are a number
were not only superior in this world, of regiments of soldiers from our own
but would be superior also in the next islands, and nearly twice as many
life. Among themselves they supposed regiments of native soldiers ; but in
that the Brahmins were superior to all these native regiments all the officers
the others, and the warriors to the third are British. If you have relations in
caste. If a man broke certain laws, the Indian Civil Service, that generally
however, even if he were not really to means that they are in charge of a
blame, he was degraded from his own bigor small district in these parts.
caste and became no better than one of The other half of India is made up of
the base-born ; therefore it was held to a number of native states, ruled over by
be a very terrible thing to lose caste. their own native princes, who generally
have the title of Rajah or Maharajah;
INTO WHICH THE PEOPLE ARE SPLIT UP
and these princes have their own
But afterwards, each of these great armies, though they are not allowed
castes broke up into a number of smaller to have enough soldiers to become
castes, which are just as particular about dangerous. A British officer, who may
not marrying into other castes. High- be either a soldier or a member of the
caste people will not touch food that Civil Service , lives near the court of
is cooked by people of ' low caste ; each of these princes ; sometimes he
and if people eat certain kinds of food, is called the Resident, and sometimes
or if they cross the sea , or if they do the Agent . It is his business to see
many other things which seem to us that the native princes govern properly,
not to matter at all , they lose their though he does not interfere unless they
caste, and can only save themselves by govern really badly ; and it is his business
suffering certain punishments. There also to give advice, and to keep the
is nothing the Hindoo fears so much as Viceroy of India and his Council
doing anything which will cause him informed about everything of import
to lose caste , and there has often been ance that is going on .
trouble because of Europeans forgetting THE NATIVE BRITISH
HE NAHE PRINCESFLAG
WHO ARE LOYAL
how much they think about it, and
making rules for soldiers or giving orders For at the head of the whole Govern
to servants against the caste rules. ment of India is the Viceroy, or Gov.
There are some animals, too, which ernor -General, and his Council ; and
the Hindoos look upon as sacred . when the Viceroy says that a native
The most sacred of all is the cow , so prince must do this or must not do
that to kill or injure a cow is a terrible that, the prince must obey . How it
sin in the eyes of a Hindoo. But the came about that these native states
Mussulmans think it sin to hold animals were built up ; how the British first
sacred , or to pay honour to images and became rulers of one bit of India 150
idols, for the Mohammedans worship the years ago ; how they had to go on bring
true God, as the Christians do ; but ing one province after another under
because Christians believe that Christ their own rule , and finally to require the
is the Son of God, and that Mahomet was obedience of all the native states—the
simply a great leader of men , the Moham- story of all this we have now to read.
medans think that Christians and Jews The next story of India begins on 1695.
TOILETVE OD
1552
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

ANN these
atom , we know , is built out of tiny bricks of electricity called electrons. In
pages we learn how ting the electrons are — far tinier than the atoms
of the elements, though these are infinitely tinier than anything we can see . The
atom , then , is a building ; but it is a building that is in motion all the time, for its
bricks are never still. These bricks, or electrons, really move inside the atom ,
probably like the planets moving in the solar system . The atom is a little world,
countless billions of which make up the big world we know --whilst that big
world is perhaps only an atom in a world bigger still. In the atom-world there
must be some central power which keeps it all together, as the sun keeps every
.

thing together in the world we call the solar system. We know almost nothing
about this power as yet ; but we learn here what is known about the electrons
which it holds together to make the atom, how they move, and what they are made of.

THE WORLD INSIDE AN ATOM

J
E have learned would be something
WE
E
CONTINUED FROM 1422
something of the like the size of the
wonderful little bits of actual atoms in an
electricity called electrons that actual drop of water.
fly about in the atoms ; and we Well , when Lord Kelvin
may now think for a minute made this calculation — which
or two about the size of these . was not a matter of mere
They are so small that we can guessing, but depended upon
only give ourselves some faint idea many things, such as the changes in
of their size by a comparison. Evi colour of a soap -bubble as it gets
dently we must begin by trying to thinner—he was thinking of atoms
get some idea of the size of the as the simplest and smallest possible
ordinary atoms of matter. That great units of matter. But now we are to
genius, Lord Kelvin, the greatest think of atoms as themselves made
student of these subjects since of things which are smaller still ; and
Newton, devoted some time and the question is, How much smaller ?
trouble to this subject. His opinion Let us imagine that we could take a
was expressed in some such way as single atom of average size and make o

this : A drop of water, we know, is it as large as some great hall or

made up of molecules of water, each
of them consisting of three atoms.
Doubtless an oxygen atom is much
bigger than a hydrogen atom ; but ,
in the question we are talking about,
we need not trouble about that .
church-I mean a very large hall, or
a cathedral, rather than an ordinary
church . Now , according to the old
view , an atom magnified like that
would look like one great , simple ,
Let solid crystal , sharply defined , nowhere>

us try to suppose, then, that a single worn , having no parts, and in

drop ofwaterwere magnified so enor
mously as to be the size of the earth .
Then the atoms that make it up
would appear probably somewhere
between the size of small shot and a
cricket-ball . Perhaps it might help us
a little to look at the matter in the
opposite direction . Imagine this great
earth of ours, twenty -five thousand
miles round, made of, let us say, one
great heap of marbles ; and then
think of that whole earth shrinking
down into the size of a drop of water,
and try to imagine how small those
marbles would have to be . Yet that
capable of being divided up.
But , according to the new view,
the atom would be much more like
a great hall, for there would be
plenty of space in it that was not
filled; it would be roomy , so to say.
But in it there would be contained
various things which made it up.
These would be flying about inside
it , probably round and round, in a
quite orderly way, somewhat as the
planets fly round the sun in the
solar system. And the size of these
things—which we have learned to call
electrons — would be about the size

1553
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF
of a full-stop on this page if the atom
were magnified to be the size of a large
hall . Now, the size of a full -stop,
compared with the size of a great hall
is, of course, the tiniest of tiny things ;
and yet we have learned that the
atom is really so small that if a drop
of water were magnified to the size
of the whole earth , the atoms would
only be about the size of marbles.
LOOK.ATHA
AND KUW.STOP
WHAT IT ON
IS THIS PAGE earth and the other planets flying round
This is the best that we can do in
order to give us some little idea of the
tiny size of an electron ; and we may
remind ourselves here that , so far as all
the evidence goes, this size is a constant,
fixed, and universal thing, true of all
electrons, whatever atom they come
from , and whether that atom be found
on earth or in the sun or anywhere else.
These ideas are so big, though the
things with which they deal are so small,
that we can scarcely realise them . Let
us, then, just look at the full -stop
which ended the last sentence , and try
to see with the mind's eye what it is
really made of. It is a small and neat
round blot of black ink on the page.
This ink is made of various things-
some put in to make it sticky , some
put in to make it black , and so on . But
we may describe it as a solution of
certain salts of the wonderful metal
iron , about which we have read some-
thing already. It is one of the peculi-
arities of the salts of iron that they are
nearly all richly coloured. The amount
of salt in the blot of ink we call a
full- stop is not very much , but it must
contain certainly millions of millions of
atoms—some of them of iron , and
others of the various elements making
up the particular salts of iron and other
things in the ink .
FULL - STOP HAS MORE PARTS THAN
A THERE ARE PEOPLE ON THE EARTH
If as many more atoms were added to
the blot as there are human beings on
the whole earth - say, sixteen hundred
millions — even that number would not
nearly be sufficient to make the blot
look any larger to our eyes. Yet each of
those atoms, tiny though it must be, is
itself, compared with the things in it , a
great inomy space in which they fly
about ; and the size of those things or
electrons compared with it is like the size
oſa ſull-stop compared with a great hall.
TORINO
1554
THE EARTH ACCUELLELUTCH
These ways of trying to express the
size of electrons are much more valuable
than we might think . It is not merely
that they give us some little idea of
what the sizes really are . They do far
more than that . We can use these
pictures to give us some idea of what
the structure of the atom really is .
We said that if the atom were the
size of a great hall, the electrons would
fly about in it - perhaps rather like the
the sun . Now, some of the greatest
thinkers at the present day have made
us see that this is something more than
a mere fancy picture. They are de
liberately asking us to think of the atom
as if it were a sort of solar system .
The solar system , we know , is roomy.
I mean that , though there are several
planets in it , yet there is abundance of
room between them . Even at times
when the earth is nearest to her nearest
neighbour, Mars, there are tens of
millions of miles between them . Another
way of saying this would be that , com
pared with the size of the whole solar
system , the planets which help to make
it up are very tiny, so that there is
abundance of room between them .
HE WONDERFUL MOVEMENT GOING ON
THEFOR EVER INSIDE AN ATOM
Now, the same is true of the electrons
in the atom . Though the atom itself
is so tiny, yet the electrons are so
much tinier that, compared with their
own size, there is as much room between
them as they circle round within the
atom as there is between the planets
as they circle round within the solar
system .
For there is every reason to believe
that the electrons do move round within
the atom . We have no right to say
that they move round in regular circles,
nor in regular ellipses, as the planets
do in the solar system ; but we know
for certain that they are always moving,
and that they move in a regular,
orderly, systematic way . We are sure,
indeed , that, just as we may speak of a
solar system , so we must now speak of
an atomic system ; and every atom is an
atomic system . We shall begin to see
how great this discovery is if we re
member that for thousands of years
we have been told that we should look
upon matter as gross, brute, dead,
inert, passive, inactive. We are now
 KO ? OK .Tam wasto THE WORLD INSIDE AN ATOM nirra ப MENTALa

learning that the atoms making up say—though in so saying we must

matter, which we were told is inert and not fancy that we fully understand what
dead , are the scene of tremendous we are talking about — that electricity
forces of ceaseless and wonderful may exist in two kinds . We are not
activity, not one whit less wonderful here talking about electric waves at all ;
than the solar system itself, for wonder- they are utterly different, and some
fulness is not a matter of size . day when we have more sense they
Now, what is it that keeps the solar will have a special name. These two
system together and makes a system of kinds are contrasted with each other,
it ? We know very well that it is the and for convenience we call one kind
attraction of the sun. The system has a positive, and the other negative.
centre from which it is controlled , and THE TWO KINDSOF
by which it is kept in order . If the sun THE ELECTRICITY THAT
were to vanish , all the planets , instead Now, the reason for distinguishing
of flying round it, would begin to move these two kinds, and for giving them
in straight lines, and soon there would these names, lies in their relation to
be no system at all , nor anything like it . each other. Positive and negative elec
Even if the sun were only to lose its tricity attract each other , but two
power of attraction , the planets would negative electricities or two positive
immediately fly away, and there would electricities will repel each other. Now ,
be an end of the solar system . all the electrons we have been talking
Now let us consider the case of the about - these tiny but wonderful things
atom . The electrons in it are moving which fly about in the atomic system as
with great speed and power ; they are the planets do in the solar system - are
all of the same kind, and a notable fact of the kind called negative . They are
about them is that their tendency is often described as negative electrons.
Similar kinds of electricity repel each
not to attract but to repel each other.
THE THING THAT KEEPSOFTHE ELECTRONS other, and when we find a number of
electric particles or atoms all negative ,
An electron tends to push away, and living together in the same atom , we
to be pushed away from , any other may be quite certain that, if only we
electron . Yet large numbers of these could find it , there must be some
little bodies exist in the atom , though positive electricity in the atom which
the tendency of each is to fly away is holding them all together ; and that
from all the others. Further than this, is the case.
they are in motion, and the tendency We must think of the atom as if it
of everything which is in motion is to had in the centre a “ sun ” made of
go on moving in a straight line for ever. positive electricity — the bond which
Yet , at any given time, most of them holds the atom together ; and then
remain within the atomic system , just around this , within its sphere of
as the earth remains within the solar influence ,” as we say, there are a number
system . It is the central attraction of of electrons or particles of negative
the sun which prevents the earth from electricity in ceaseless movement within
flying away. Must we not, then, argue the atom, but controlled by the core ,
that the existence of the atom would be or centre, of positive electricity.
impossible if there were not some central N ELECTRON COULD GO ROUND THE
attraction preventing the electrons from A WORLD IN A MOMENT
flying away, so powerful that the elec- This, then, is the system that makes
trons can all keep together, even though the atom, and the parallel between an
their tendency is to repel each other ? atom and the solar system is not only
There is no doubt as to this. Just as beautiful and interesting, but there is
the solar system would be impossible general agreement that it is also the most
without the sun , so the existence of an helpful and instructive way of looking at
atom would be impossible without the the atom that we can imagine at present.
presence of some force within it which Of course, we must ask ourselves
held together and controlled all the what these positive and negative elec
electrons that go to compose it. And tricities that we talk about really are,
here we come upon something new and that is the question of questions
and must use two new words. We for this branch of science to - day.
XI UUTIOTIC
OKRUTTUITE
1555
 wenn DraUXEXXELLE
THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH amanna

About positive electricity we know But we must not leave this part of
scarcely anything, but in various ways our story without trying to under
it has been possible, especially during stand what it real y means, which is
the last eight years, to learn a great that big and little are only ways of
deal about negative electricity. We talking, and really do not mean very
know that the electrons move out of much. Anything that is bigger than
the atom at a rate of about 30,000 miles ourselves we call big, and anything
a second, which means that it moves so that is smaller we call small ; or any
fast that it could travel round the thing that we can see without trouble
earth in a single moment ; we know we call big, and anything too small to
that because they are electric they see with our unaided eyes we call small.
put the electric
peculiar air around
state ; them
we caninto
weigha BIG WORLDSWITHIN
AND LITTLE WORLDS AND
them, in a sense, and we can study But this is making us and our eyes
the force with which they repel each the measure of all things, and we have
other. no right to do that. Really there are
We are also beginning to get some worlds within worlds.
notion of the numbers of them that exist There is the familiar world that we see
in atoms of various kinds - comparatively around us. The earth is in the middle of
few in a small atom like that of hydro- it, as we think, and everything that is in
gen, but vastly larger numbers in a big the sky goes round it . But really no
atom like that of radium. We shall thing goes round it but the little moon,
not quote here the numbers that have and our world is only a part of a system
been suggested, but may merely say with the sun as its centre . This solar
that they run to several hundreds in system , then, is another world outside
the case of the hydrogen atom , and our world, but the solar system itself
tens of thousands in the case of atoms is only a part of the world of stars .
like those of mercury or radium. This Or, instead of looking outwards,
subject, however, is being worked at look inwards. We have invented an
hard just now, and it will be wiser if instrument called the microscope, and
we are not too sure at present. have found a world of little living
WAY IN WHICH WE ARE BEGINNING things which no one had dreamed of,
THE
TO FIND OUT ABOUT THE EARTH yet quite as lively and real and wonder
It is specially interesting to learn ful a world as the one we all know.
that the study of electrons helps us to Then, by the aid of chemistry, we can
understandwhy it isthat certain kinds pierce to aworld smaller still, though
of atoms exist and not other kinds ; just as wonderful. We pick up the
why there are about eighty elements bodies of living things , and water and
and not, say, 80,000 ; why the elements stones and dust , and we find them all
run in groups; why iodine is like made of atoms. We thought that that
fluorine in many respects, though they was the smallest world that could be.
are so different in others, and so on. E KNOW LESS ABOUT AN ATOM THAN

Thirty years ago there was nothing WeWE KNOW ABOUT A STAR
to be said except simply that there But each atom is a world of its own .
were so many elements with such and We actually know less about the wonders
such properties. No one could say why of the world or system we call an atom,
there should be these elements and not about its balance and history and
others ; nor why oxygen should have structure, than we do about the world
the properties of oxygen and gold the or system we call the solar system.
properties of gold . These are great We think that we have found in elec
questions which we must be able to tricity the real first stuff out of which
answer if ever we are to understand matter is made. But electricity is, per
fully the story of the earth ; and they haps, only a part of a still deeper world ,
are now beginning to be answered by the world of ether, which lies beyond.
the new discoveries regarding the nature Yet some people say that when science
of matter. Thirty years ago we thought begins to dissect and analyse Nature,
that in finding the atom we had all the wonder and beauty of things
finished . Now we see that in finding is destroyed. How little they know !
the atom we have only just begun. The next story of the Earth is on page 1665.
1556
 The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS
35
KATE BARLASS OF THE BROKEN ARM
ING JAMES the CONTINUED FROM 1476
First of Scotland
was a good king ; but
when he came to the throne ,
nearly 500 years ago, the country
was in such disorder that he had
‫ל‬ to be very stern and severe to
keep the powerful nobles from
wrong -doing : therefore manyof them
were full of hatred towards him.
Then certain of these, headed by
Sir Robert Grahame, conspired to-
gether tc, slay the king.
Now, it happened that the king
went one winter to the town of
O O Perth to hold high festival, with
his queen and some of her ladies,
and abode in the Abbey of Perth , while
his followers were scattered over the
city ; and here the traitors got
their chance of catching him un-
guarded . To make matters easier, some
servants were bribed to remove the
bolts and bars from the doors. And so
it befell one night , when all the king's
men had gone from the abbey, and he
was sitting unarmed with the queen
and her ladies, that aa great clatter of
weapons was heard without. There-
upon he guessed that his foes had
gathered to murder him , nor could
he fight them , being himself un-
armed . But , as he knew that there
was a vault under the chamber where
he was, he wrenched up boards from
the floor, and leaped down; and the
ladies quickly put back the boards
and covered them just before the
traitors rushed into the room . And
they, not finding him , searched for
ICA i
1557
C
him high and low .
Then the king and
the ladies in the
chamber, seeing that the danger
was passed, began to move the
boards, so that James might come
out again . And, even at that
moment, they heard the clatter
and clash of arms again. For one
of the traitors had bethought himself
of that vault , and they were hurrying
back . What chance of escape was
there for the king ? There would be no
time to cover all up before the con
spirators brokein ; and on the doorwas
no lock or bolt to stay them-only the
iron rings where the bolt should be.
Quick as thought, one of the queen's
maidens, named Katherine Douglas,
sprang to the door and thrust her arm
through the rings on the door, crying
out that the men must not enter, since
there were none in the room but ladies
who were disrobing. But the fierce
men outside paid no heed to that , and
beat upon the door ; and how should
a maiden's frail arm suffice for aa bolt
against their battering ? Alas, poor
Katherine's arm was snapped , and the
wicked men burst in, and, seeing where
the floor had been disturbed , leaped
down and slew the king.
For that brave deed of hers, all o
in vain though it was, the name of
Katherine Douglas was repeated in
story and song through the land, and
men called her Kate Barlass — the maid
who barred the door with her tender
arm , that so, if it were possible, she
might save the good king's life .
合。 ©
 THE CLIMB FOR THE EAGLETS
OME as the nest of the eagle is called, was
Some
veryyearsago a poor
dangeronsly ill in peasant lay on
a small hut a high crag which was supposed
in the mountain valleys of Switzerland . to be inaccessible , and no one ventured
He was greatly in need of medicine , but to attempt to reach it .
the cost of it was far more than he or his When William and Louis, the two
family could afford . young sons of the sick peasant , heard of
There happened at the time to be an the traveller's offer, however, they roped
English traveller staying at a neigh- themselves together, scaled the high crag
bouring hotel who was very anxious to after risking their lives for three long
secure some eaglets. Eaglets were very hours, captured the birds, and took them
rare in the neighbouring districts, and to the traveller , who gave them the
he accordingly offered a large sum of reward . They then hurried off to get the
money for a couple. But theonly eyrie, medicine, which saved their father's life .
THE TALLOW DIP AND THE “ BLACK SALT "
ATHER more than two hundred had got half-way down the stairs again
RATHyears since, Lady Edgeworth , the there was Biddy coming behind her
wife of Sir John Edgeworth, lived at a with no candle .
place called Castle Lissard. Now, in “ Biddy," said Lady Edgeworth ,
those days, there was much disturbance where's the candle ? ”
in Ireland and little law ; and though “ Sure, and I left it,” says Biddy,
there were guests staying at Castle sticking in the barrel of black salt."
Lissard they knew that the house might Now , even the kind of wax candle that
be attacked , so that a barrel of gun we use would have been dangerous
powder was always kept in a loft . enough, but the old tallow candles shed
One evening there was an alarm . sparks much more easily. If a spark
The men got their guns, and Lady from that candle reached the “ black
Edgeworth hurried up to the loft to salt," there would be a fearful explosion ;
bring down some powder, for in those half the house would be blown down ,
days there were no cartridges , but you and many lives lost . Straight into the
had to drop the powder into the barrel danger sped Lady Edgeworth. She
of the musket and ram the bullet down darted upstairs to where the candle
with a ramrod . She took with her a stood spluttering and flaring, lifted it
young servant to carry the light , which with firm fingers, and carried it out of
was nothing better than a spluttering the room . Neither she nor anyone else
tallow candle , without a candlestick , got any hurt, so her golden deed was by
as was common enough at that time. no means in vain. The heroine herself
But Biddy the maid knew nothing about lived to be ninety years old and was the
gunpowder, and when Lady Edgeworth ancestress of Marie Edgeworth.
A LOOK THAT HELPED A FALLEN FRIEND
ANY deeds of kindness and love are
MA London to answer the questions of the
associated with the prison. Here judge with reference to his debts. A
is a story of one very simple little act former friend of his saw in the morning
of love which helped a poor, disgraced paper that his case would be settled on
prisoner to bear up against despair the following day at the Law Courts, so
through the weary years he had to he went and stood in the passage leading
spend in the solitude of a prison. to the Bankruptcy Court.
A well-educated Englishman had dis- As the prisoner, escorted by two prison
graced his fair name and been sen- warders, passed through, with eyes
tenced to a long term of imprisonment, ashamed and cast down, this friend just
and knew that all his former com- silently raised his hat to him . The un
panions would never speak to him again happy prisoner saw and never forgot that
when he came out of gaol . After he had act. He felt that there was one friend
been in prison for a few months he had who had not decided to ignore him for the
to appear at the Bankruptcy Court in future, which had seemed so hopeless.
BEGIN ON PAGE 1653
THE NEXT GOLDEN DEEDS
TURMINT ETLEZETT
1558
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
LORD MACAULAY'S UNFINISHED POEM
'E have already read on page 1395 one of the finest of Lord Macaulay's
WE “ Lays of Ancient Rome,” and we can remember the splendid martial
strain of his poetry. In the following fragment of what would have been
a long and thrilling poem had he lived to complete it, he celebrates in the
same spirited style an episode in the history of our own land quite as worthy
to be remembered in poetry as any of the great events of ancient Rome.
The phrase in the twenty -second line about “ treading the gay Lilies
down refers to the lilies which are the royal emblem of France, and
66
semper eadem ,” in the thirtieth line, is the Latin for “ ever the same. "

THE SPANISH ARMADA A

ATTEND all ye who list
to hear our noble CONTINUED FROM 1489
Ho ! strike the flag - staff
deep, Sir Knight ; ho !
England's praise ; scatter flowers, fair maids :
I tell of the thrice famous deeds Ho ! gunners, fire a loud salute :
she wrought in ancient days , ho ! gallants , draw your blades ;
When that great fleet invincible against Thou sun, shine on her joyously - ye
her bore in vain breezes waft her wide ;
The richest spoils of Mexico , the stoutest Ou glorious SEMPER EADEM - the
hearts of Spain . banner of our pride.
The freshening breeze of eve unfurld
It was about the lovely close of a warm that banner's massy fold ,
summer day , The parting gleam of sunshine kiss'd that
There came a gallant merchant- ship full sail haughty scroll of gold ;
to Plymouth Bay ; Night sank upon the dusky beach , and on
Her crew hath seen Castile's black fleet the purple sea
beyond Aurigny's isle , Such night in England ne'er had been , nor
At earliest twilight , on the waves lie heav- e'er again shall be.
ing many a mile ; From Eddystone to Berwick bounds, from
At sunrise she escaped their van, by God's Lyon to Milford Bay,
especial grace ; That time of slumber was as bright and
And the tall Pinta, till the noon , nad held busy as the day ;
her close in chase. For swiit to east and swift to west the
Forthwith a guard at every gun was placed ghastly war- flame spread ;
along the wall ; High on Saint Michael's Mount it shone
The beacon blazed upon the roof of Edge- it shone on Beachy Head.
cumbe's lofty hall ; Far on the deep the Spaniard saw, along
Many a light fishing -bark put out to pry cach southern shire,
along the coast ; Cape beyond cape , in endless range , those
And with loose rein and bloody spur rode twinkling points of fire ;
inland many a post . The fisher left his skiff to rock on Tamar's
With his white hair unbonnet'd the stout glittering waves ,
old sheriff comes ; The rugged miners pour’d to war from
Behind himi march the halberdiers, before Mendip's sunless caves.
him sound the drums. O'er Longleat's towers , o'er Cranbourne's
His yeomen , round the market -cross, make oaks , the fiery herald fiew ;
clear an ample space, He roused the shepherds of Stonehenge,
For there behoves him to set up the the rangers of Beaulieu .
standard of her Grace. Right sharp and quick the bells all night
And haughtily the trumpets peal, and gaily rang out from Bristol town,
dance the bells , And ere the day three hundred horse had
As slow upon the labouring wind the royal met on Clifton Down ;
blazon swells . The sentinel on Whitehall-gate look'd forth
into the night,
Look how the Lion of the sea lifts up his And saw , o'erhanging Richmond Hill , the
ancient crown ,
streak of blood - red light.
And underneath his deadly paw treacls the
gay Lilies down . Then bugle's note and cannon's roar the
death- like silence broke,
So stalk'd he when he turn'd to flight on And with one start , and with one cry , the
that famed Picard field
royal city woke.
Bohemia's plume, and Genoa's bow , and At once on all her stately gates arose the
Cæsar's eagle shield : answering fires ;
So glared 'he when at Agincourt in wrath At once the wild alarum clash'd from all
he turn'd to bay , her reeling spires ;
And crush'd and torn beneath his claws the From all the batteries of the Tower peal'
princely hunters lay . loud the voice of fear ;

tes
1559
 ANCELAX aru -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY XOXOP DO KO KOTLOC.cat

Aud all the thousand masts of Thames sent TO A MOUNTAIN DAISY

back a louder cheer ; This beautiful poem , by the great Scottish poet Robert Burns,
Aud from the furthest wards was heard the contains a few words of his native tongue which English boys
rush of hurrying feet , and girls may not understand. These are maun ( must ) , stour
And the broad streams of pikes and flags ( dust), wa's (walls), bield (shelter ), and histie stibble ( dry stub .
ble ). Few ofthe other words vary much from ordinary English.
rush'd down each roaring street .
And broader still became the blaze, and louder Wee,Thou's
modest, crimson-tippéd flower,
met me in an evil hour ;
still the din ,
As fast from every village round the horse For I maun crush amang the stour
came spurring in ; Thy slender stem ;
And eastward straight , from wild Blackheath , To spare thee now is past my power,
the warlike errand went , Thou bonnie gem .
And roused in many an ancient hall the Alas ! it's no thy neebor sweet,
gallant squires of Kent. The bonnie lark , companion meet ,
Southward, from Surrey's pleasant hills flew
those bright couriers forth ; Bending thee 'mang the dewy weet
High on bleak Hampstead's swarthy moor Wi' spreckled breast,
they started for the North . When upward springing, blythe, to greet
And on , and on , without a pause, untired they The purpling east.
bounded still,
All night from tower to tower they sprang ; Cauld blew the bitter-biting north
they sprang from hill to bill ; Upon thy early humble birth ;
Till the proud Peak unfurl'd the flag o'er Yet cheerfullyAmid glinted
thou the forth
storm ;
Darwin's rocky dales,
Till like volcanoes flared to heaven the Scarce rear'd above the parent earth
stormy hills of Wales , Thy tender form .
Till twelve fair counties saw the blaze on
Malvern's lonely height, The flaunting flowers our gardens yield
Till streamed in crimson on the wind the High sheltering woods and wa's maun
Wrekin's crest of light, shield ,
Till broad and fierce the star came forth on But thou beneath the random bield
O ' clod or stane
Ely's stately fane,
And tower and hamlet rose in arms o'er all Adorns the histie stibble field ,
the boundless plain ; Unseen, alane.
Till Belvoir's lordly terraces the sign to
Lincoln sent, There, in thy scanty mantle clad ,
And Lincoln sped the message on o'er the Thy snawy bosom sunward spread ,
wide vale of Trent ; Thou lifts thy unassuming head
Till Skiddaw saw the fire that burnd on In humble guise ;
Gaunt's embattled pile , But now the share uptears thy bed ,
And the red glare on Skiddaw roused the And low thou lies !
burghers of Carlisle.
HUNTING SONG AT SEA
The author of this very famous hunting song is unknown , There is a fine sense of the swift movement of a great ship
but he was certainly a true poet and a lover ofthechase, for his across the salt sea in this poem by Allan Cunningham , a Scot.
lively verses breathe the very spirit of England's time hon. rish author who lived from 1784 to 1842, spending the halt
oured| sport. The song is evidently ofthetime of Henry VIII. of his life in London, where he wrote a great deal about art.
HE hunt is up, the hunt is up,
THE wet sheet and a flowing sea,
And it is well nigh day : A A wind that follows fast ,
And Harry our king is gone hunting And fills the white and rustling sail
To bring his deer to bay. And bends the gallant mast ;
The east is bright with morning light, And bends the gallant mast, my boys,
And darkness it is fled ; While like the eagle free ,
And the merry horn wakes up the morn Away the good ship flies, and leaves
To leave his idle bed . Old England on the lee.
Behold the skies with golden dyes
Are glowing all around ; O, for a soft and gentle wind i
I heard a fair one cry ; .

The grass is green, and so are the treen

All laughing at the sound. But give to me the snorting breeze
And white waves heaving high ;
The horses snort to be at sport, And white waves heaving high, my boys
The dogs are running free, The good ship tight and free
The woods rejoice at the merry noise The world of waters is our home,
Of hey tantara tee ree ! And merry men are we.
The sun is glad to see us clad There's tempest in yon hornéd moon,
All in our lusty green ,
And smiles in the sky as he riseth high And lightning in yon cloud ;
To see and to be seen .
But hark the music, mariners !
The wind is piping loud ;
Awake all men , I say again, The wind is piping loud , my boys
Be merry as you may ; The lightning flashes free
For Harry our king is gone hunting, While the hollow oak our palace is,
To bring his deer to bay. Our heritage the sea.
DONDYDD nummXZEMY man Timurunum
1560
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRYan
Umar ILE

THE REAPER TO THE CUCKOO

This is one of the most beautiful of the many poems by
William Wordsworth . It shows how the imagination of the
poet may be strangely stirred by so simple an incident as
a woman reaping in the field and singing while she works.
BEHOLD her, single in the field,
Yon solitary Highland lass !
Reaping and singing by herself ;
Stop here , or gently pass !
Alone she cuts and binds the grain ,
And sings a melancholy strain ;
Of listen ! for the vale profound
Is overflowing with the sound .
No nightingale did ever chaunt
More welcome notes to weary bands
Of travellers in some shady haunt
Among Arabian sands :
No sweeter voice was ever heard
In spring -time from the cuckoo -bird ,
Breaking the silence of the seas
Among the farthest Hebrides.
Will no one tell me what she sings ?
Perhaps the plaintive numbers How
For old, unhappy, far -off things,
And battles long ago :
Or is it somemore humble lay,
Familiar matter of to- ilay ?
Some natural sorrow , loss , or pain ,
That has been , and may be again ?
Whate'er the theme, the maiden sang,
As if her song could have no ending ;
I saw her singing at her work ,
And o'er the sickle bending.
I listen’d till I had my fill;
And as I mounted up the hill
The music in my heart I bore
Long after it was heard no more.
BEFORE BATTLE
Charles Dilain was a celebrated solig -writer wno lived from
1745 10 1814 He was chiefly famous for his songs of the sea ,
subas " Poor Jack " and " Tom Bowling ." The following
has the ring of victory in its vigorous and confident verse .
THHeA signal to engage shall be
whistle and a hollo ;
Be one and all but firm , like me ,
And conquest soon will follow !
jou, Gunnel, keep your helm in hand --
Thus, thus, boys ! steady , steady
Till right a -head you see the land
Then soon as we are ready,
-The signal to engage shall be
A whistle and a hollo ;
Be one and all but firm , like me ,
And conquest soon will follow !
Keep , boys, a good look out, d'ye hear ?
* Tis for Old England's honour ;
Just as you brought your lower tier
Broadside to bear upon her ,
– The signal to engage shall be
A whistle and a hollo ;
Be one and all but firm , like me ,
And conquest soon will follow !
All hands then , lads, the ship to clear,
Load all your guns and mortars ;
Silent as death th ' attack prepare.
And, when you're all at quarters,
- The signal to engage shall be
A whistle and a hollo ;
Be one and all but firm , like me,
And conquest soon will follow !
CEBOOontrocorum
S
One of the most beautiful poemsever written about the sweet .
Tviced bird that comes with each returning spring was com .
posedly a young Scottish student named Michael Bruce,
who died in 1767, though it has sometimes been claimed for
another pret. The sixth verse is one of the finest in our poetry:
HALL, beauteous stranger of the grove !
Thou messenger of spring !
Now Heaven repairs thy rural seat ,
And woods thy welcome sing.
What time the daisy decks the green ,
Thy certain voice we hear ;
Hast thou a star to guide thy path ,
Or mark the rolling year ?
Delightful visitant, with thee
I hail the time of flowers ,
And hear the sound of music sweet
From birds among the bowers.
The schoolboy, wandering through the wood
To pull the primrose gay,
Starts, the new voice of spring to hear ,
And imitates thy lay.
What time the pea puts on the bloom
Thou fliest thy vocal vale ,
An annual guest in other lands,
Another Spring to hail.
Sweet bird ! thy bower is ever gicei ,
Thy sky is ever clear ;
Thou hast no sorrow in thy song ,
No winter in thy year !
O could I fly, I'd fly with thee !
We'd make, with joyful wing,
Our annual visit o'er the globe,
Companions of the spring.
THE ECHOING GREEN
William Blake was the author of this little poetical picture
of country life, and he wrote many other simple pieces of a
similar kind, which appear in the CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY.
The sun does arise
And make happy the skies ;
The merry bells ring
To welcome the spring.
The skylark and thrush ,
The birds of the bush ,
Sing louder around
To the bells' cheerful sound ;
While our sports shall be seen
On the echoing gicen .
Old John , with white hair,
Does laugh away care,
Sitting under the oak ,
Among the old folk .
They laugh at our play,
And soon they all say :
“ Such , such were the joy's
When we all --- girls and boys-
In our youth time were seen
On the echoing green .”
Till the little ones , weary ,
No more can be merry ;
The sun does descend,
And our sports have an end .
Round the laps of their mothers
Many sisters and brothers,
Like birds in their nest ,
Are ready for rest ,
And sport no more seen
On the darkening green .
nominum DOMU MONTE
1561
THE-WALRUS AND THE CARPENTER . BY LEWIS-CARROLL

TheShining
sun waswith
shiningon thesea,
all his might ;
He did his very best to make
The billows smooth and bright
And this was odd , because it was
The middle of the night.
The moon was shining sulkily,
Because she thought the sun
Had got no business to be there
After the day was done
“ It's very rude of him ," she said ,
“ To come and spoil the fun ! ”
The sea was wet as wet could be,
The sands were dry as dry .
You could not see a cloud because
UNES
No cloud was in the sky ;
No birds were flying overiead
There were no birds to fly.
The Walrus and the Carpenter
Were walking close at hand ;
They wept like anything to see
Such quantities of sand :
“ If this were only cleared away , ”..
They said , “ it would be grand ! ”

ES
0

“ If seven maids with seven mops

Swept it for half a year ,
Do you suppose ,'' the Walrus said ,
04
" That they could get it clear ? '
I doubt it," said the Carpenter,
And shed a bitter tear .

O Oysters, come and walk with us ! ”

The Walrus did beseech .
A pleasant walk , a pleasant talk ,
Along the briny beach :
We cannot do with more than four,
To give a hand to each .”
The eldest Oyster looked at him ,
But never a word he said :
The eldest Oyster winked his eye ,
And shook his heavy head
Meaning to say he did not choose
To leave his oyster-bed .
But four voung Oysters hurried up ,
All eager for the trcat :
Their coats were brushed , their faces
washed ,
Their shoes were clean and neat
And this was odd , because , you know,
They hadn't any feet.
Four other Oysters followed them .
And yet another four ;
o
And thick and fast they came at last ,
And more , and more , and more
All hopping through the frothy waves,
And scrambling to the shore.

BUYNSIDER
SO

1562
 It was so kind of you to come !
And you are
a
very nice ! ”
The Carpenter said nothing but
“ Cut me another slice .
I wish you were not quite so deaf
I've had to ask you twice ! ”

" It seems a shame,” the Walrus

said ,
To play them such a trick ,
After we've brought them out so far ,
And made them trot so quick ! ”
The Carpenter said nothing but
“ The butter's spread too thick ! ”
I weep for you,” the Walrus said :
“ I deeply sympathise .”
With sobs and tears he sorted out
Those of the largest size ,
Holding his pocket-handkerchief
Before his streaming eyes.
“ O Oysters,” said the Carpenter,
16
You've had a pleasant run !
Shall we be trotting home again ? ”
But answer came there none
And this was scarcely odd, because
They'd caten every one.

10
The Walrus and the Carpenter
Walked on a mile or so ,
ul
And then they rested on a rock
Conveniently low :
And all the little Oysters stood
And waited in a row .
The time has come,” the Walrus said ,
“ To talk of many things :
Of Shoes — and ships and sealing
wax

Of cabbages — and kings

And why the sea is boiling hot 1 )

And whether pigs have wings."

But wait a bit," the Oysters cried ,
“ Before we have our chat ;
For some of us are out of breath ,
And all of us are fat ! ”
“ No hurry ! " said the Carpenter.
They thanked him much for that. )
*
(
A loaf of bread,” the Walrus said ,
“ Is what we chiefly need :
Pepper and vinegar besides
Are very good indeed
Now , if you're ready, Oysters dear,
We can begin to feed .”
60
But not on us ! ” the Oysters cried ,
( 6
Turning a little blue
After such kindness , that would be
A dismal thing to do ! ”
The night is fine,” the Walrus said ,
Do you admire the view ?
SCBorxside .

1563
LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE

THERREEHADWASNOUGMT
A MAN , AND ME
, .
AND ROEBERS CAME TO ROB
Nim ;
HE GREPT UP TO TME
• CHIMNEY TOP ,
AMD TMEN. MET THOUGHT
THEY HAD NIMO ®

w
=
1
EF

SI
EN
BU

BUT ME SOT DOWN

T'O
ON
THER SIDE ,
ANDTHE
' N THEY COULD NOT
H. RAR FOURTEPIFENTEEMILDA
ESYS ,
in N
Am
IWD NEVER LOORED
BEWIRD MIM

1564
 Hom !

a
iit

HERE'S A POOR WIDOW FROM BABYLON

WITH SIX POOR CHILDREN ALL ALONE ;
ONE CAN BAKE AND ONE CAN BREW,
ONE CAN SHAPE ,AND ONE CAN SEW ,
ONE CAN SIT BY THE FIRE AND SPIN ,
ONE CAN BAKE A CAKE FOR A KING .
COME CHOOSE YOU East , .

COME CHOOSE YOU West,

COME CHOOSE YOU THE ONE
• THAT YOU LOVE THE BEST . .

1565
 WHEN GOOD KING ARTHUR
RULED THIS LAND

When good King Arthur ruled this land

He was a goodly king :
Hestole three pecks of barley meal,
To make a bag pudding.
A rare pudding the King did make,
And stuffed it well with plums ;
And in it put such lumps of fat,
As big as my two thumbs.
hi

Y
BARLE )
MEAL

PLUMS

The King and Queen did eat thereof,

And noblemen beside,
And what they could not eat that night,
The Queen next morning fried.

JM

1566
COCK A DOODLE DOO !
MY DAME HAS LOST HER SHOE

Cock a doodle doo !

My dame has lost her shoe ;
My master's lost his fiddling-stick ,
And don't know what to do.
Cock a doodle doo !
What is my dame to do ?
Till master finds his fiddling-stick ,
She'll dance without her shoe.

Cock a doodle doo !

My dame has lost her snoe,
And master's found his fiddling-stick
Sing doodle doodle doo !
Cock a doodle doo !
My dame will dance with you ,
While master fiddles his fiddling-stick
For dame and doodle doo,

consell
THE NEXT VERSES AND NURSERY RHYMES BEGIN ON PAGE 1703
1567
A CRACK IN THE EARTH A MILE DEEP

One of the most wonderful sights in the world is this great chasm in the earth in Colorado, made, perhaps, by
a great river carrying away the soft soil, and deepening its bed as it flowed along. This huge crack in the earth,
away in the centre of America , is in a huge district of desolate plains, called cañons, froin 7,000 to 10,000 feet
high, surrounded by high mountains and trenched by immense narrow gorges from 1,000 to 3,000 feet deep
The Grand Caion of Colorado, as this is called, stretches for two hundred miles, and is in some places
about ten miles wide and down at the bottom of it, in a trench over a mile deep, rushes a mighty river.
1568
 & The Child's Book of

This shows how steam drives an engine. The steam is made of little specks ol gas, which bombard
the iron plate of the piston -rod so hard and fast that the rod moves forward and turns the wheels.

WHAT GIVES STEAM ITS POWER ?

*HERE is an old
THER E
Scotch proverb CONTINUED FROM 1443
that “ mony a mickle maks A of lime, which the water
amuckle ," which means that
many little things put together
make much. The power of steam
is a case of this, for it can drive
great boats through the water and
it can tear up the greatest rocks.
Yet all its power is due to the coming
together of little units of power .
When we speak of steam , we mean
water -vapour - water in the form of
gas. This gas is formed under pressure,
and has power to expand. It is this
expansive power that does the work .
Afterwards the gas becomes cool and
condensed, so that we can see it, and
that is what we call steam . The power
of the gas is due to the tiny little mole-
cules of water ofwhich it ismade. Each
of these is flying about in all directions
trying to get loose, and so striking
against thesides of whatever hemsit in.
The force in one of these molecules is
very tiny, for the amount of stuff in the
molecules is so small. If you had a
hammer smaller than you could see, you
could not drive in a nail with it . But as
there are billions of these little hammers
in the gas, they are able
flying about
the work that “ steam ” does.
to do all
WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
HARD WATER AND SOFT WATER ?
The difference between these two
kinds of water is that the hard water
contains certain salts not found in soft
på water. These salts are
almost always salts
has picked up from the earth
as it passed through it . So we
understand that they are not found
in rain-water, which is therefore
soft . Hard water is very good to
drink, as a rule, but the only
objection to it is that it interferes
with the use of soap, so that the water
is not good for washing purposes.
When soap is used with hard water
a chemical change occurs, so that the
soap is turned into something which
does not dissolve in water ; whereas
soap used with soft water produces
something which dissolves in the water,
and forms a splendid lather, and so is
good for washing with. This makes a
great deal of difference to poor people,
or to anyone who washes clothes at
home, because soap used with hard
water will not lather and is very
nearly all wasted, and things cannot
be made clean . We can easily tell
whether water is hard or soft by
adding soap to it.
CAN WE MAKE HARD WATER SOFT ?
If we can get nothing but hard water
to wash with, it is necessary to find
out some way of making it soft, and
There are such ways. Very often the
salt which makes the water hard is
what is called bicarbonate of lime.
This exactly corresponds to the bicar
bonate of sodium , which is formed in

T 1569
 PODARIADO THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER хахархах
the blood, as we read in another part .
Water can carry this salt about , but it
cannot carry carbonate of lime, which ,
like carbonate of sodium , has only one
“ dose " of carbonic acid in it , and
not two .
So the curious thing is that we
can make this hard water soft by adding
lime to it. What happens is simply
that the new lime takes one-half of the
carbonic acid from the bicarbonate, so
as to form two lots of the single car
bonate . The water cannot hold this, so
it falls to the
the water is bottom , and after that
soft . Another way of
making such water soft is to boil it .
This drives off the second dose of
carbonic acid in the bicarbonate , and
the single carbonate that is left falls to
the bottom , and so the water is softened.
Occasionally
due to anotherthelime
hardness of water
salt which is
is not
changed when the water is boiled. This
kind of hardness is called permanent,
while the other is called temporary.
ARE DIAMONDS REALLY VALUABLE ?
The time will come when we are more
carefulthan at present how we use the people
reasons . Of course, if one had a lot of
word " valuable ." A great English
man, John Ruskin , reminded us that
“ valuable " comes from a word meaning
a a banknote for £ 5,000, and wear it round
to be strong and well, and we should only
use the word valuable really for things
that make us strong and well and happy neck ;' if it is inthe morning, people
for things that really serve our lives.
Properly speaking, then , common iron,
or still commoner air and water
without which we cannot live -- are a
million times more valuable than dia
monds . For the only real value in
diamonds is, first, that they are
good for cutting glass ; and, second ,
that they reflect light very brilliantly
from their surfaces, and SO are
pretty.
Of course,the biggest diamond in the
world is nothing like so beautiful as a
rosebud or a violet ; but, still, anything Some
diamonds
thatreflects light brilliantly and glitters find out howmany people love them
is rather pretty, especially to very small
children . So diamonds are not really
very valuable , but they are costly. everyone
They arecanonly
People think these two words mean
the same thing, but no one who thinks
so has yet begun to be wise or to know
what wisdom is. Wars are costly, but
not valuable ; air and light are not
costly, but they are more valuable than
all the jewels and gold in the world .
1570
WHY ARE DIAMONDS COSTLY ?
This is easily answered . First, dia
monds are costly because they are rare.
Any but the smallest diamonds are very
rare indeed . They are only found in
certain parts of the world , only very
few of them are found ere, and they
take a lot of finding. Of course, there
are many other rare things that are
quite valueless, just as diamonds are
almost valueless. But people do not
want these other things, and so they
are not costly. People do want dia
monds, and so they are costly. The
interesting question now is : Why do
people want these things ? Perhaps one
person in a hundred who buys diamonds
wants them because they are beautiful ;
he buys them for the samereason as he
buys a rose or looks at the moon , or
listens to beautiful singing. But many
people who buy them , buy them to
show that they have a lot of money.
WHY DO PEOPLE WEAR DIAMONDS ?
Some people wear diamonds because
diamonds are beautiful, and because
they like beautiful things, but other
wear them for less worthy
money, one could put it into the form of
one's neck. But people would say that
withvulgar.
was Only if you
it, you canwear them diamonds
buyround your
will still say you are vulgar; if it
is in the evening, they will say :
Look at those diamonds . What a
lot of money that woman must have !
Or sometimes they say : “ What a lot
of money she must be worth ! ” They
cannot say anything worse about her
than that , for if she is only worth money ,
she is worthless. That, then, is why
diamonds are costly, because they are
one of the best ways of showing to all
the world that you have a lot of money.
day, as
when
big we
as have learnt
cocoanuts to make
, we shall
because they are beautiful, as then
have them who likes them .
made of carbon , and
carbon itself is dirt cheap.
VALULU
WHAT MAKES GOLD MORE VALUABLE
THAN SILVER ?
This is another question where we
should use the word costly instead of
valuable, for I am not sure that gold is
really more valuable than silver. Silver
 - THE CHILD'S
is at least as beautiful . Silver, when it
has a little of something else added to it ,
wears better , certain forms of silver
are very valuable as medicine . Gold ,
on the other hand, is valuable for some
purposes, because it can be hammered
into very thin sheets. At any rate ,
there is no doubt that gold is more costly there as gold in the stuff of which the
than silver, and the reason is that it is earth was made, since it was believed
very much rarer. There is probably that atoms of gold, like atoms of any .
much less of it in the world.
If, one day, we should discover a
great mountain made of solid gold, then
gold would become much less costly
than silver ; and if the mountain were
very big, no doubt we should make
pennies of gold . That shows the differ
ence between cost and value, for if a
thing has real value, such as noble music
or wheat, then the discovery of more
of it is simply so much more real wealth
in the world. My loaf is worth no less
to me because you have a loaf too ; but
the more gold there is in the world, the
less can I do with the gold I have.
These things are quite simple -- any
child can understand them-and when
all grown -up people understand them
the earth will be a new place.
IS QOLD POISON ?
Gold is not poison to men's
bodies. If you were even to swallow
a sovereign it would no doubt
hurt you, but it would not poison
you . But gold may be — though
it need not be—a poison to men's
souls. It is the love of gold, just because
gold gives us the power of doing
things we like, that makes most wars,
for instance . It makes men cheat and
thieve and murder , and hate the good
and love the bad. There are four lines
of poetry, written by the greatest poet
of all time, which I wantto quote to
you. They are in a play by Shakespeare.
The man who speaks is very unhappy, they have no effect on those nerves.
and he has bought some poison in order
to kill himself. Though it is against the
law to sell poison, yet the man who has
it is very poor,and he has taken Romeo's
gold for it. Then Romeo says :
There is thy gold ; worse poison to men's
souls ,
Doing more murders in this loathsome
world ,
Than these poor compounds that thou
may'st not sell :
I sell thee poison, thou hast sold me none.
There are people who will say that
the answer to this question is
DEXT DOO motor
1571
BOOK OF WONDER
nonsense, but there are others, per
haps, who may think that it is worth
its weight not in gold, but in life.
HOW DOES GOLD COME INTO THE EARTH ?
Not so long ago people would have
said, in answering this question, that
the gold of the earth must have been
thing else, had always been as they are
now from the first.
But no one would now return that
answer to this question. We must
believe that the gold now found in the
earth has been formed there , probably
very long ago, by the breaking down of
some kind of atoms even larger and
heavier than those of gold. No one can
yet say what these atoms were, though
if the question had been asked about
some other elements instead of gold
such, for instance, as lead — the answer
would probably be that the lead now
found in the earth had been formed
from the breaking down of atoms of
radium . This question about the
history of gold and of many other
elements will probably be answered
before long.
WHAT MAKES SOME THINGS SMELL AND
OTHERS NOT ?
We say that we smell things at a
distance, but what we actually smell is
always something that enters the nose,
though it may have been carried from
a distance. So if anything is to have a
smell, first of all it must give off from
itself something or other which can
reach the nose ; and, secondly, that
something must have the power of influ
encing the nerves of smell. We cannot
smell pure air or water even if we sniff it
up the nose, because, though these things
touch the ends of the nerves of smell,
As a matter of fact , most things do
give off something from themselves,
even such things as metals ; and if we
put our nose very close, we may detect
some smell, just as we may in wood
or leather. But though many more
things than we think have some smell,
yet things vary very much. A little
speck of the stuff called musk will give
a powerful scent to a room for years
a fact which shows, among other things,
what an amazing number of atoms
there must be in the tiniest speck of
 Fan
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
anything, since, after long periods of
time, there seems to be just as much
musk there as ever, though it has been
filling the room with its scent all the time, which grow best in thc dark, and which
and this means that it has been giving off
atoms of itself to the air of the room.
WHY DO THINOS SMELL DIFFERENTLY ?
• Difference of smell depends upon the
difference in the way things are made,
and that is about all we can say.
Still, we can, to some extent , find that
there is some rule in the way things
smell . For instance, very often we
notice that numbers of plants belonging
to a particular family of plants have
odours with a family resemblance
between them. Then we notice that
there is a certain resemblance in the
smells of a great number of different
compounds, all of which contain the
element sulphur. This is aa very notable
thing to remember about sulphur, for
practically all its compounds have a that part of it which will be capable
disagreeable smell.
The compound of sulphur and
oxygen, which is the gas made when
sulphur is burnt, is very unpleasant ;
so is the compound of sulphur and
hydrogen , HS ,which corresponds to
the compound of oxygenandhydrogen, clever photographer knows that they
H , O . This sulphuretted hydrogen, as
it is called, smells exactly like rotten
eggs, for the verygood reason that it
is sulphuretted hydrogen which is
formed in rotteneggs and gives them right as if it werethe left ; and as our
their objectionable smell.
Similarly, many plants make com
pounds of sulphur which have the same
never seen the person before, you
sort of family smell. On the other notice nothing. You have never seen
hand, there are certain oils, produced
by plants , that are made of carbon and
hydrogen , and are all built up on the
same chemical plan . These , which we
often call essences, have a certain group
>
or family smell, though they differ
very much from each other. So smell ,
we see , is a sort of chemical sense ,
and things smell differently because
they differ chemically.
WHY DO TREES GROW UPWARD ?
The first thing to say in answering
this question is, that the whole tree
does not grow up. Part of the tree
grows downward, and that is the root .
Each grows to the place where it can
do the work for which it was made .
In the seed from which the tree grows,
there are certain cells which are meant
to form the part of the tree that is
1572
WONDER
to live in the air and the light . Wher
ever the light is, they grow towards it.
On the other hand, there are other cells
even seem to be affected by the gravi
tation of the earth , so that they grow
best towards the centre of the earth.
It is possible to play tricks with
the seed, as , for instance, to turn it
upside down ; but the rule is that the
plant will do its best, by curling round
as it grows, to ensure that the shoots
shall get into the air and the light, and
the roots shall grow downward . So the
tree - and this is true of nearly all
plants - has two parts : one that lives
in the air, and one that lives in the soil .
Neither part could live without the
other, and the tree is so made from the
first that the right part of it—that which
is capable of making leaves - must grow
upwards into the light and air ; while
of sucking up water and salts — and
also of holding firm - must grow down
wards into the earth .
WHY DOES A FACE IN A MIRROR SEEM
CROOKED TO A PERSON STANDINO BY ?
We think that the two sides of our
faces are just like each other, but every
are not. Ordinarily we notice nothing,
but when we see anyone's face reflected
in a mirror, then we see the left side of
his face as if it were the right , and the
eye is accustomed to the other thing,
his face looks crooked . If you had
would
your own face except in a mirror, and
if now it were possible for you to see
your face as everyone else sees it , your
face would look as crooked to you as
the faces of your friendslook when they
are seen in a mirror. Of course, if the
two sides of the face were exactly alike,
the face would look just the same,
whether seen in a mirror or directly.
ARE THINGS IN MID - AIR AFFECTED BY THE
MOVEMENT OF THE EARTH ?
Certainly they are ; the air goes
round with the earth, just as the
seas do , and everything that is swim
ming in it-birds, balloons, or any
thing else-goes round too, just as
the fishes do in the sea . If this were
not so, when we went up in a balloon,
the air would rush past us as it was
whirled round with the earth, at the
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
rate of hundreds of miles an hour. It But there are certain glands which
would be the highest wind we were ever are a thousand times more beautiful
in, and, as we looked down from the and wonderful than any other because
balloon, we should see the earth rolling they do not exist at all to serve the
past beneath us ; .. but , of course , body to which they belong, but they
that does not happen. Everything in exist for the sake of other people. They
the air shares its movement , and show that Nature is on the side of
moves with it, except in so far as it love, and I think they also show that
has some power of movement of its it is from mothers that love first
own , like an airship or that best of sprung . When the cow has a calf,
airships, a bird. the gland called the udder, which
WHY IS THE WORLD LIGHT WHEN THE SUN makes milk, becomes active, and
IS BEHIND DARK CLOUDS ?
It depends how dark the clouds are. has the wonderful power of transform
If the moon passes directly between ing the blood that passes through it
into milk for the young calf. The
us and the sun , the earth becomes as calf's mother eats grass, and turns it
dark as night because the moon is into blood ; and then the udder turns
quite opaque, which means that no the blood into milk , which is the best
light can pass through it at all. But food for calves, as indeed it is also the
when it is only clouds that are between best food for us . If we could see the
us and the sun, a good deal of light udder under the microscope , we should
always gets through them, so long as see the little cells near which the
they are real, clean, water clouds. blood runs, taking out of the blood
Browning, the great English poet, says : everything they need in order to make
sun
A will pierce milk, which passes directly into the
The thickest cloud earth ever stretched.
calf's stomach - pure, warm , and con
But sometimes in great cities, and taining everything the calf needs for
especially in London , we make un- its growth .
natural clouds ourselves, filled with WHY DOES A CAT ALWAYS FALL ON ITS
smoke and dirt - mostly tiny specks FEET ?
of coal which we have sent up the Of course , one answer to this question
chimney . These are the really dark is that its feet are the best part of it to
clouds, full of solid black dirt, and there fall on, but the real puzzle for us is how
are times when they make the face of does the cat manage to get its feet
London darker than it ever is during lowermost even though it be let fall
a summer night . The coal was made when it is held by its feet. It has been
by the sunlight of past ages, and we argued that the cat manages to turn
send it into the air to stop the sun- itself by the use of its tail . If that be so ,
light that has travelled such a long of course, Manx cats , which have no
way from the sun, so quickly and tails, ought not to be able to fall
surely to serve us. It has 93,000,000 on their feet, but they are able . So
miles to come, and just at the last half that that explanation will not do.
mile or so we stop it ; is this not All we can say is that somehow , by
foolish ? And we actually use past moving one part of its body on another,
sunlight to stop it with ! the cat controls its fall in order to fall
HOW DOES A COW MAKE ITS MILK ? most safely. It is so clever of the cat
There are certain parts of the body thatwe are not yet clever enough to find
which exist in order to produce things out how it does it. But we do know that
which the body needs. These are there was no need to call in the tail as
called glands, and they are the chemists an explanation , for men who jump
of the body. Some glands also exist from great heights or who dive from
in order to filter out from the blood great heights into water have a good
things which it does not want. Many deal of power in controlling their
glands in the skin do this. Other glands bodies as they fall, though every now
- like one just below and in front of and again they make a mistake, and one
the ear, which gets swollen when we of them is killed. We should not like to
have mumps — make the saliva that see such feats. And also I hope that
pours into our mouths when we eat, and you will not, after reading this answer,
helps us to soften and digest our food. make experiments on your pussy .
1573
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
WHY Have SHIPS A WATER -LINE ?
When any ship floats in the water,
the line that the surface of the water
makes along the ship's side is called the
water-line , and the height of this line
on the ship's side will depend on the
extent to which the ship is loaded .. Just
forty years ago, a man named Samuel
Plimsoll tried to pass a Bill dealing with
what used to be called “ coffin - ships,"
so called because they were unfit to go
to sea, far too heavily loaded for safety,
the cargo being heavily insured so that
if, as often happened , they went to the
bottom , though the crew lost their lives ,
the owner lost nothing. After a long
fight, mainly due to the resistance of
bad shipowners, Plimsoll got a law
made so that a line has to be put upon
a ship's side, and the ship may not be
loaded to such an extent as to put that
line beneath the water. It is usually
known as Plimsoll's line or mark, and
must already have saved thousands
and thousands of sailors' lives .
WHY DOES STEAM ALWAYS COME WHEN
WATER IS HOT ?
Water evaporates, as we say, at all
temperatures. Whether hot or cold, it
slowly leaks away into the air in the
form of a gas. As this remains a gas,
we do not see anything. But when
they arebehave
water is made hot, it very quickly which
heatedin. aFor instance, nearly
passes into the air as a gas. It passes so
quickly that the air cannot hold it
all , and it is so much hotter than the air,
that it is cooled in the air and turned
into drops of liquid water again.
is this little cloud of drops of wet water
in the air that we call steam . Water
vapour ought not to be called steam .
The gas, or vapour, only becomes steam
when it ceases to be a gas, and becomes
liquid water again.
Thus the name steam-engine is really a
verybad one.Steam is what we see escap-
ing from it, but steam - that is to say,
a cloud of drops of liquid water - would
never drive the engine, as every
engineer knows. The kind of thing
that does the work he wants is what he
calls “ dry steam . ” It is not steam at
all, but water vapour . When he first
lights his fire, he gets what he calls wet
steam - the engine is cold, and it turns
the water vapour, which comes from
the water as it gets hot , quickly back
into steam, or wet water , again ; and
it a poor business trying to run an
1574
OF WONDER
XXXXXXXXX.R
engine on “ wet steam .” But all steam
is really wet , and you see that we use
the word wrongly. It is not steam , but
water vapour that drives a -steam -engine ;
and the water vapour turns into steam
only when its work is done and when
it can do no more.
WHY DOES AN EGG GET HARD WHEN
BOILED, WHILE MOST THINGS SOFTEN ?
There are certain kinds of chemical
compounds with a special name which
really means “ like glue," and when
these things are heated up to a certain
point, they turn firm , or stiff. They
have very big molecules, each made of
a large number of atoms; but we do not
yet understand why they should behave
in this way. One of the best examples
of them is white of egg, or albumen.
Albumen means white -- England is
called Albion because of the white
cliffs at Dover. So when an egg is
heated only to the temperature of
boiling water -- which is not really very
high, for it is nothing compared with
the temperature of a flame - all the
albumen of the egg turns solid. The
same thing would happen to the albu
men of blood, which is very like white of
egg one of the reasons why eggs are
such good food . There are other things
curious way when
all salts are much more easily melted in
water when it is hot than when it is
cold ; but there is a salt of lime—the
salt made when lime is combined with
the acid found in lemons — which melts
readily in cold water, but unmelts and
appears again when the water is made
hot. We do not know why this happens.
WHAT MAKES THE AIR HEAVY ?
Heaviness is what we notice in any
kind of matter because the earth is pull
ing upon it. The more the amount
of matter, or stuff, in the thing, the
heavier it is, because the greater is the
earth's pull for it, and its pull for the
earth . The air is heavy because it is
matter, and all matter is heavy because
it is pulled upon by the earth. We
find it difficult to understand why the
air should be heavy, because we find
it difficult to understand that the air is
a thing. We sometimes talk about
" airy nothings." But the air is a
thing, as you would not doubt if you
saw liquid air, or solid or frozen air.
Papa UN BULUND
-THE CHILD'S BOOK
Therefore, it would be just as reason
able to ask what it is that makes a table
heavy as to ask what makes the air
heavy.
And one way of answering either ques-
tion would be that it is the earth that
makes things heavy, for if the earth
were not there to pull them , they would
not be heavy at all — or, rather, they
would have just a little heaviness in
them due to the pull of the far-away
sun . But the sun, though big, is so
far away, and the earth is so near,that
the heaviness of things, whether air, or
a table, or anything else , is almost
entirely due to the earth .
IF AIR WEIGHS 15 POUNDS TO A SQUARE
INCH , WHY DOES IT NOT PRESS US FLAT ?
There are two answers to this ques-
tion . First, many things have strength
enough in themselves to resist a pressure
of fifteen pounds to the square inch
without being pressed flat. A piece of
steel, for instance, will stand a vastly
greater pressure than that. Yet it is
true that a great many things, such as
our own bodies, for instance , could not
possibly stand a pressure of fifteen
pounds to the square inch were it not
for one thing.
This is that the pressure is on all
sides of us . Were it not so, our bodies
would certainly be pressed, if not
fiat, at least very much out of shape.
But the air is a gas — or mixture ofgases,
which comes to the same thing in this
case -- and one of the facts about a gas
is that its pressure is the same in all
directions. So, whilst our head is
pressed down, yet all the sides of the
body are pressed in and together, so that
we are not flattened out . Thus, so long
as the pressure is the same on all sides,
it is, ina sense, as if it were not there.
WHAT WOULD HAPPEN IF THE PRESSURE
OF THE AIR WERE REMOVED ?
Suppose that we find some way of
taking a part of the body — say, thearm
-and removing the pressure of the air
from it altogether, or, at any rate,
reducing it very much . Now we shall
have unequal pressure on the body, and
something is bound to happen. So it
certainly does.
Suppose that you had a pain in
your arm or in the small of your
back . Sometimes the best way of
relieving this pain is to take a
tumbler, drop a piece of something
Dwucun UITUUT
1575
OF WONDER
burning in it, and clap the tumbler
on to the skin . You must take care
not to burn the body, but that is
quite easily avoided if you clap the
tumbler on upwards instead of down
wards . Then the air inside the tumbler
is largely used up by the piece of
burning rag or whatever it is, and the
pressure inside the tumbler is very
much reduced .
So it is almost as if the little circle
of skin covered by the tumbler had the
atmospheric pressure taken away from
it , while all the rest of the body went
on as before . Now we see what the
atmospheric pressure can do. It is
pressing on all the body except just
that little circle of skin , and so it simply
squeezes a lot of the body fluids into
that part of skin , and it swells and swells
and rises into the tumbler, until it looks
very funny indeed. The air is pressing
on every part of the skin except one, and
that is the consequence. It does not
hurt at all, though it looks as if it should,
and it often relieves a deep -seated pain.
Then, if you slip something under the
edge of the tumbler so as to let the air
in , it drops off ; and now the air pressure
is equal on all parts of the skin, and the
swelling is smoothed out again. This way
of relieving pain is called dry cupping.
IP CLOUDS ARE SOFT, WHY DO THEY MAKE
A NOISE WHEN IT THUNDERS ?
It is not the clouds bumping against
each other that makes thunder . Cer
tainly clouds are much too soft to make
a noise when they do that. They are,
indeed, too soft to bump at all, but
simply mingle with each other. The
thunder is due to the disturbance of the
air when electricity passes from one
cloud to another, or from a cloud to the
earth. As it passes it makes the air near
it very hot , and so starts a wave in it
which we hear and call thunder.
WHY CANNOT WE HEAR WHEN we ARE
ASLEEP ?
We can hear when we are asleep - if
a sound is loud enough . It is only when
a man is unconscious through some
poison that the loudest sound will not
wake him . Only when we are asleep
we do not hear slight sounds. The
reason of this is that in sleep the part of
the brain which hears is much less
sensitive than usual ; and so , though
soft sounds reach our ears, and affect
the nerves that run from the ears to the
TRENEURO CLUZII romans
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
brain , the brain takes no notice of these cars would have no numbers on them .
messages. As to how much we require But since motor-cars often do damage,
to wake us, it all depends on the depth they have to be numbered both in
of our sleep. It has been proved that front and on the back, so that they may
during the earlier part of the night we be known again. It is not that anyone
require much louder sounds to wake us blames the motor- car, which is just a
than towards the morning. So it is the piece of machinery, and neither good
earlier part of our sleep that is best for nor bad ; but putting a number on the
us, and there is good sense in calling car comes really to the same thing as
this part of our sleep “ the beauty
)
putting a number on the man who owns
sleep.” Very often we do hear when we or drives it , so that if he does harm , and
are asleep, but instead of the whole does not care, we may be able to find
brain being awakened, only part of it him out . The fact that motor -cars
wakens, and so we have all sorts of have numbers can do no harm to
dreams that were really started by some honest people who have motor- cars, for
noise. It is possible to whisper into a they would act just the same whether
sleeper's ear and give him dreams in this the numbers were there or not . They
way, without waking him ; but this is are put to the expense of paying for
certainly not a good thing to do. them because some other people are
WHY IS IT THAT STREAMIS FLOW AND not honourable, and I am afraid that
RIVERS DO NOT ?
The answer to this is that rivers do very often happens to honest people.
WHAT MAKES OUR HEARTS BEAT ?
flow. Perhaps streams often flow more It would take a big book to do justice
quickly than rivers, because they may
be running more steeply towards the to this question . We know positively
sea . But the reason why you ask this that the heart can and does beat in an
question is that , as a rule , streams are independent
brain or the
way quite apart from the
rest of the body. If a frog
shallow, and the stones and so on in
their bed disturb the surface of the water. is killed, as, for instance, by cutting its
head off instantly --which is so quickly
But a river is deeper, and so the surface
of it seems smooth , and, unless we look that the frog has no time to feel any
very carefully, we think that it is still . pain — then , though the frog is dead, its
heart still beats, as we find if we open
If you throw upon it something that
will float you will find that it is the body. The heart can be completely
cut out of the body, and will lie beating
not still .
We must not be misled by the surface in your hand for a long time. So will
the heart of a bird or a rabbit . This
of things. There is a very good pro proves, of course, that what starts the
verb which really answers the question ; heart -beat is in the heart , even though
it is : “ Still waters run deep ." It is
we know the brain can make the heart
because the river is deep that we think beat faster or slower, or can even stop it.
it still. Of course, the real meaning of Whenvery examine the heart
this proverb is, that in studying people animal we carefully
, wefind thatof any
ithas
we can learn from streams and rivers.
a large number of nerve cells in it. If we
There are people who babble and sparkle cut aheart to pieces, any part which is cut
just as streams do, because they are
shallow ; and there are others who do not away from the nerve cells stops beating,
show much on the surface, but that may but any part which has nerve cells in it
ROUTE

be because they are deeper people, and will go on beating until, at last, the
heart dies from lack of food . But it is
have more in them . So, when you are
inclined to judge of such people on little very interesting that the heart will go
acquaintance, it is well to remember the on beating for so long. If we attach
proverb that "' Still waters run deep ." tubes to the heart in place of the blood
WHY DO MOTOR - CARS HAVE NUMBERS ON vessels, and send fluids through it con
THEM ? taining common salt and certain other
Motor -cars have numbers on them salts which help to nourish it, it will
because of a common failing in human beat for hours or even days - a most
nature . If we were all honourable and wonderful thing. In this way, without
kind , if it were impossible for any of us causing any pain to any animal -- for I am
to do harm without at once wishing to speaking only of a heart by itself, the
repair it as far as we could , then motor- animal it belonged to having been killed
1576
 ano
O nonnon
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
at once—we can study the action of
different things on the heart . And it
has thus lately been proved that sugar
is a valuable heart food, while alcohol
is no food to the heart at all .
COULD A BALLOON PASS OUT OF THE
RADIUS OF THE ORAVITY OF THE EARTH ?
Certainly a balloon could not pass gravitation ceased, the ball would rise
beyond the gravity of the earth, because
the balloon floats in the air , and, as it
goes up, the air becomes thinner and
thinner, until at last it is too thin to
support the balloon , and the balloon
can go no higher. If anything is to
pass beyond the gravity of the earth ,
and escape from the earth , it must have
some motion in itself sufficient to carry
it so far that the earth cannot pull it
back again .
Thismust have happened to the stuff
which makes the moon when it was
thrown off from the earth . It used to be
thought that some or all of the iron and
other meteorites which are sometimes
caught in the air—and which we call
shooting stars—might really have been
formed in the earth. This was thought
because these things were found to be
made of the same stuff as the earth , at
> There are really two questions here.
a time when we did not know that all
the universe is made of the same kinds
of stuff. It was supposed that vol-
canoes might have shot up stones and
so on with such force that they passed
right through the air, and left the earth
altogether, and then happened to be
caught by it again at some later date.
We do not think that now . It is
very probable, however, that certain
very light gases , which - because they
are light -- seem to exist mainly in the
upperlayers of the air, may escape from
the earth altogether, perhaps being
thrown off from the air asdrops are from
a twisting umbrella . That seems to be
the reason why the moon has no air,
since the moon is very small , and has
not strength of gravity enough to keep
a gaseous envelope, such as our air is .
WHAT WOULD HAPPEN IF GRAVITATION
CEASED ON THE EARTH ?
If gravitation ceased on the earth,
there would be an end of life as we know
it. Anything thrown into the air or
jumping into the air would illustrate
the first law of motion , which is that
any moving thing must go on moving
atline
a constant speed in the same straight
ever unless something stops
for
TUTTE NETRUKUTEUTOTEC
TOXXXmm
When aa ball is thrown in the air, it does
not seem to obey this law of motion, for
the good reason, that , as it rises the earth
is pulling upon it, and however strong
your throw is, the earth's pull, in the
long run, will stop the ball, and finally
bring it back again . If the earth's
out of sight , but even then its motion
would be slowly stopped by the resis
tance of the air. At last the ball would
stop rising altogether, but it would not
come back again , for there would be
nothing to make it do so. Even if you
threw a ball down on the ground, it
would bounce up, and you would never
see it again .
At present we do not know the cause
of gravitation. It is one of the great
secrets. But we may learn it some day,
and when we do , we may learn how to
control gravitation , or even abolish it
at will . This would be utterly different
from anything we do now . No balloon
does this, butmerelyprovides something
which “ tells against ” gravitation.
WHAT MAKES THE EARTH 00 ROUND THE
SUN ?
If we grant that the earth is moving at
all , the reason why it moves round the
sun , and not in a straight line, according
to the first law of motion , is that
though, so to speak, it always tries to
move in a straight line , the force of the
sun's gravitation always turns it in
towards the sun . But the other ques
tion is : What makes the earth go at all ?
The sun's gravitation is certainly not
the answer to this , for if the earth
became still the sun would pull it into
itself at once . There is some other
source of the earth's motion , which was
imparted to it or present in it when it
was formed , and which throughout all
the ages has not been done away by
friction - since, as it appears, there
is no friction as the earth swims through
the ether. If there were any , surely
by this time the earth would have been
slowed down much faster and would
have rushed into the sun .
This original motion with which the
earth began , and which it still has , must
have the same origin as the earth's
twisting motion on itself, the motion
through space, and the twisting motion
of the other
motion
planets, andknow
the sun
the twisting
it . of . We that a
TUZIYYUDATTUTTO
1577
 ILALDOUGLIO
-THE
LELLE
CHILD'S
twist and move in the same direction ,
just as our moon does , and the moons
of the other planets that have moons.
For the source of all this motion , we
must go back to the source of all motion
and all power— back to the Author of
all things. This is only to say, in other
words, what used to be said long ago
when it was thought that the solar
system was created as it now is , each
planet being “ launched in its orbit from
the hand of God .” Orbit comes from
the Latin word Orbita , meaning a path .
IF WE COULD DARKEN THE
SOON WOULD LIGHT REACH EARTH AGAIN ?
Another way of putting this question
would be , how long does light take to
travel from the sun to the earth ?
Of course , anyone who can do simple
arithmetic can answer this if he knows
at what rate light moves , and how far
the sun is from the earth .
of the movement of light through the
ether is well known , and it never changes.
It is slightly more than 186,000 miles
in every second. The sun's distance
from the earth varies a little , because the
earth does not move round the sun in a
circle , but in an ellipse . But we may
take the rough figure of 93,000,000 of
miles as the distance . Now, if we
divide this figure by the other, we get
an answer of about 490 , which is the
number of seconds it takes light to
travel from the sun to the earth .
answer, then, which anyone can easily
remember, is a little more than eight
minutes. If we compare
four and a half years, which about
represents the time that light takes to
reach us from the nearest star , it will
help us to imagine what a wonderful
distance the sun and his family are
from their nearest neighbour.
WHY CANNOT we FEEL THE
GOING ROUND ?
The answer to this is that we
going round with the earth, and, as
we are moved round with it at exactly
the same rate and in exactly the same
direction , we notice nothing. If you
were in a train and did not look out, and
the train moved at a constant speed
in a straight line, and gave no jolts at
all you would not know it was moving ;
but , if it suddenly went more quickly
or slowly, you would feel its motion .
So , if the earth vere suddenly to go
round very quickly -say, so as to
TXILETTYY MUUTTUITTEET
BOOK OF WONDER
make a day of six hours instead of
twenty - four - we might feel that it
was going round because our bodies
might be affected , as they are when
a train suddenly gives a jolt as you
get in , and you find yourself in
someone's lap.
The real lesson that we can learn
from this question is that the only
kind of movement which we can feel
is relative movement — that is to say,
movement of one thing as compared
with another. If the earth or a train
SUN , HOW moved more slowly or more quickly
than our bodies, then we should feel
the movement. If we could imagine
our body moving alone in space with
no stars for mile-posts, then we should
not know it was moving, for there
would be nothing to go by - nothing
to compare it with . We can feel
The rate relative motion just because there is
something to compare it with. That is
how we know the sun and earth are
moving - by comparing them with other
heavenly bodies.
WHY DO TWO SIDES OF A ROAD MEET IN
THE DISTANCE ?
Of course , we know that the sides of
the road do not really meet , but they
seem to meet . If an artist is showing
us a road going away from us in a
picture, he must really draw the two
sides of the road towards each other,
The so as to give the eye the same impres
sion that a real road does. This is a
part of the study which artists call
this with perspective - how things look when they
are seen along, which is what the word
means . Our eyes judge by the angle
between things. Let us suppose that
we use only one eye, to make it simpler ;
then , if you look at two dots , you
judge of the distance between them by
EARTH the width of the angle between the two
lines from them to your eye . Now
are suppose the same two dots , the same
distance apart , were much further
away from the eye, then the angle
between the lines is much narrower,
and, in co sequence, they seem much
nearer together. If we imagine that
the dots are taken on the sides of the
road, at different distances along, then
we shall see why the sides seein to
meet in the distance. They do not
really get nearer , but the angular
distance " between them gets smaler.
The next Questions are on page 1675 .
1578
 The Child's Book of .
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E find in the body of all the higher animals a wonderful pump, hollow ,
WE with tubes leading to and from it, which we call the heart. It is of
different kinds in different orders of animals, but in all main points the heart
of all the aniinals that have red blood is one and the same. We know that it
beats during life, for we can feel it beating in ourselves if we have been running
very hard, or if we are frightened ; and if we pick up a kitten or a bird we can
feel its heart beating under our fingers. It is a most astonishing thing, that,
though as much as this was known for many ages - thousands of years,
indeed - it was not until less than 300 years ago that we discovered what the
heart really does, and how the blood moves . William Harvey, the man who
made this discovery, was so great that we must learn something about him ,
and we can find his story in this book by turning to the index. Here we learn
what Harvey discovered about the working of the heart and all that we know of it .

THE HEART-THE LIVING PUMP -

'HE microscope was were therefore sup

CONTINUED FROM 1466
not invented in posed to carry air, and
the lifetime of William that is what the word
Harvey, who first means , as we should
found out what the heart does see if we spelt it a little differently
and how the blood moves . It -airteries. This air was sup
was therefore impossible for him posed to be the spirit or breath of
to see the tiny channels by which the body, the real source of life.
the blood passes between the large Then a great Roman, Galen, opened
vessels that leave the heart and the an artery in a living animal , and
large vessels that go back to the heart. found it full of blood . That made a
He died in 1657 , and four stage in our knowledge.
years later a great Italian, But many hundreds of years
the fortunate man who first had to pass before it pro
had a microscope to look gressed any further. Then
through , saw in the lungs of a great man , Servetus, who
the frog the tiny vessels lived in the sixteenth century,
which Harvey had to die and was burnt by Calvin for
without seeing, though they not accepting his views about
completed the proof of his religion , found how the blood
discovery. To -day any of passes through the lungs.
us may see, with very little But it was left to Harveyto
trouble the wonderful tubes find out how it circulates
that William Harvey would through the rest of the body.
have given so much to see This circulation of the blood
when he was making his is a central fact of the body's
great experiments. working, no matter whether
These little vessels are so we consider our own bodies
small that they are almost or those of animals ; and
like hairs, and so they are we must understand it . Let
called capillaries, from the This picture shows us the us begin by looking at the
Latin word for a hair. The exact position
and itstheexact ofsizetheinheart
large vessels which leave the tion
heart
rela- its woritself,
king. to understand
to rest ofthebody.
heart are called arteries , and This, as we have said,
those which carry the blood back to it is really a hollow pump. Its walls
are called veins. are made of muscle, and it is certainly
If we open an artery after death it the most important muscle in the
is found to contain no blood. Arteries body. Day and night it ceaselessly

22
1579
 AULLILLALLA
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
.beats so long as we are alive. If it stops and in a new -born baby it beats about
or falters for only a short time, we faint twice in every second. When we are hot
and fall tothe ground. Its work is harder and feverish it beats more quickly.
in human beings than in that of any other Now, if you put the fingers of one
creature, for the part of the body which hand on your wrist, you will feel some
always most urgently needs blood is thing beating there, too. This is usually
the brain, and in us, since we called the pulse. The picture
stand erect, the brain is above shows you where to find it. If
the heart instead of in front you lay the hand back down
of it , so that the blood has to wards you can feel the pulse
be pumped upwards by the on the inner side of the wrist.
heart. Also the heart has to This is a good place for feel.
beat so strongly as to send the ing the pulse, because a large
blood down our legs with such artery running down to the
force that it will come up them hand, as it passes over the
again through the veins. We wrist, lies just between aa
know how apt our feet are to piece of bone and the skin ,
get cold , and the principal so that it can be felt easily.
reason for this is that it is such If while you had one hand on
hard work for the blood to your heart you put the
return from them , and the cir thumb of the other on the
culation through them is there . This x shows the posi wrist of the first hand, you
fore apt to get too slow. It is tion of the pulse at the would find that the number
the warm blood that keeps the wrist. It is where the of beats in both cases was
the the samethat would also
, buttheyoubeat
very little heat for themselves. that wejustseeunder
arteryis
feet warm, since they produce skin it throb. notice at the
The heart lies in the upper half of the wrist always came a very short time
body, which we call the chest, and the after the beat of the heart itself. It is
chest is bounded by the long, thin bones the beating of the heart that makes the
which we call ribs. Some people have pulse, for it means that the heart is
a curious way of thinking that the chest sending a wave of blood through the
is only the front of the body, but of arteries, and since the blood takes a
course it is not . The chest, or box, is little time to travel , of course the beat
in the whole of the upper half at the wrist must be a little
of the trunk , and it has a back later than the beat at the heart
as well as a front. The things itself. If you put your two hands
that fill it are very simple to on the two wrists of a friend you
remember - a lung on each side, will find that his two pulses
and the heart between them . come at the same moment.
We usually think of the heart Now , we usually call the pulse
as on the left side of the body, at the wrist the pulse. But every
but, as a matter of fact , about time the heart beats it sends the
one-third of it lies on the right blood through all the arteries,
side, and two-thirds on the left . and there are several other
If you put your hand on the places where we can notice a
front of your chest - it is best pulse. If you put your hand
to use your right hand—then, on your neck, as if you were
with the tips of your fingers the blood back to the going to choke yourself-only
you can usually feelyour heart heart. The little things quite gently — you can feel a
beating, especially if you have like twohalves of aball pulse on each side, due to the
valves
are littlewhich
been running hard, or are pockets, like blood passirig up through the
stop the
frightened or angry. You feel blood Aowing back . great arteries of the neck on its
something coming up and way to the brain . If you put
bumping against your fingers about the tip of your finger on the side of your
Eo times a minute. From 70 to 80 cheek,just in front of your ear, where 1
is the rate in grown-up people ; it is you will find a little ridge of bone, which
rather slower in men than in women. is really your cheek -bone, you will feel
But if you happen to be a small child a pulse there, too. This artery is a
your heart beats much more quickly, branch of the great artery in the
1580
 THE
A 20 LIED LITE LEZEN
HEART_THE LIVING PUMP. CA CLICE . TEELLILUERCOLD

neck, and is carrying a small supply in them.. Now let us consider the veins,
of the blood to the scalp. But the These are tubes very like the arteries,
greater part of the blood in the arteries but very much thinner. They can
of the neck is going inside the skull to afford to be thinner, for the pressure of
the brain . blood inside them is not nearly so high
Lastly, you may find for yourself one as it is in the arteries. Many of the
other pulse which we have all noticed , veins lie on the surface of the body just
though perhaps we did not know what under the skin so that we can see them .
it meant. If you cross your legs and As we have said , the blood in them is
watch the crossed foot, you will see that running back to the heart. There is no
it gives a little jerk up and down. If at pulse in the veins, because, before the
the same time you feel the pulse at blood has reached them , it has had
your wrist , you will HOW THE HEART PUMPS THE BLOOD to pass through the
find that the two rates tiny tubes, which are
are the same, but your Capillaries of Lungs the communication be

Brftarohinme
Vei
foot always jerks a tween arteries and

n
little later than the veins , and there the
Brain

wrist pulse. Now, that pulse gets less notice

the

little kick is due to the RIGHT

AURICLE
able, so that the blood
fact that the great flows upwards quite
artery of the leg runs evenly through the
ry

LEFT
e
rt

down the middle of the AURICLE veins.

A

back of the knee in a The time may come

Vein
RIGHT
beautifully protected VENTRICLE to any one of us when
LEFT
fashion ; but when you VENTRICLE
there is an accident to
cross your legs you ourselves or to some
Artery

press that great artery one else . An artery or

against the hard bone a vein is cut , and the
of the other knee, and Capillaries person bleeds. Now ,
every time the artery Capillaries of of Liver
Stomach
the blood is very pre
swells with the pulse of cious, and no one can
blood in it , the result afford to lose it . There
is that the whole leg fore , our duty is to stop
gives a little kick. If bleeding whenever we
you look at the front see it . It may happen
of your body just below to anyone who has a
your chest, when you little bravery and a
have had a hot bath , little knowledge to save
you may very likely a life in this way. Here
see the biggest pulse in are the rules.
the whole body ; a sort Capillaries of Legs The first does not
of heave which is due depend upon any know
runs down from the picture shows how it sends our blood rush and isofasthe
to the great artery that The heart is really a hollow pump, and this ledge circulation ,
simple as can
ing through our body. Pure blood from the
heart along the front lungs flows into the left auricle, which pumps be. Let us suppose
of the spine, and among it into the left ventricle, from where it Aows that a stone has been
the branches of which up into ,thewhich
ventricle rightauricle,
sends itthenintointothethelungs.
right thr has, and
faceown beensomcut
eonand
e's
is the artery which
makes your foot kick when the legs is bleeding. There is a handkerchief at
are crossed. All these things, of course , hand, of course, and when that is dabbed
have been noticed for many ages, but on and taken away you can usually see
men always thought, though it is diffi- some point where the blood is oozing or
cult to understand now how they could spurting. Now , the rule, and the whole
have thought it , that the blood went rule, is to put your finger on that point
backwards and forwards to and fro on and to keep it there. This can be done
each side of the heart, instead of seeing in an instant, and directly it is done,
that it went round and round. no more blood can be lost until you
We have spoken about some of the take your finger away, and that is
great arteries in the body and the pulse exactly what you are not to do. It is
LEITETTU TIITTY TYYTTTTTTTTTT TOYYITOTOITZUECERTEZ
1581
 Vinamisulina
- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
something like the famous story of the
Dutch boy who stopped the leak in
the dyke where the water was coming
through by thrusting his little arm into it,
as told in the poem appearing on another
page. Once your finger is put on, there is
no immediate danger, and everyone has
time to think. A doctor can be brought,
or the wounded person can go to a
doctor ; but the first rule, which is worth
all the others put together, is simply to
put your finger on the bleeding point ,
and keep it there.
WHAT TO DO TO STOP BLEEDING WHEN
Now, the other rules depend upon
our knowledge of the circulation of the
blood . Let us take a very common
instance. There are quite large veins
on the surface of the leg , and some-
times these get very stretched and
swollen and weak. One of them may
even give way altogether, and the blood
may begin to ooze through the skin .
Where there is no help at hand, a
person may bleed to death in conse
quence of this little accident. Of course ,
anyone who knew the rule about putting
the finger on the bleeding point, and who
kept his head , would always save him-
self, but then most people do not learn
these little rules. They are busy learning
such a lot of grammar that they have not
much time to learn how to save lives.
But when that rule has been followed,
what else can be done ? What we do
will depend upon our knowledge of the
circulation. The blood in this broken
vein in the leg is flowing upwards
towards the heart. Therefore, we must
apply our pressure, let us say with a
handkerchief, below the bleeding point.
IE TWO PUMPS OF THE HEART AND THE
THE WORK THEY DO IN OUR BODIES
Veins have valves in them , which are
so arranged as to prevent the blood
from flowing back through them ; but
in a case such as we have described , it
is sometimes necessary to apply the
pressure both above and below the has to send its blood throughout the
bleeding point, for sometimes these entire body - brain and toes and all,
valves give way . Also, the valves in our and so its walls are exceedingly thick
veins are not arranged in the best way and its power is tremendous. It is
for a creature that walks erect ; they
are arranged in the way that would
be best for a creature walking on all its
four limbs. That is very interesting.
But now let us suppose that there has
been an accident, and someone is
1582
RECRETULLOLLA SELCELELELELE
bleeding in a different way. Let us sup
pose that the blood is brighter, and that
instead of oozing it comes in jets or
spurts. This means that an artery is
bleeding, and though in any case we
put our finger on the bleeding point,
the next thing to be done is different,
for the blood is coming from the centre,
and not going back towards it, so we
must apply our bandage above the bleed
ing point,on the side nearest the heart .
Now let us look at the heart and see
exactly how it does its work. What we
call the circulation of the blood is really
two circulations, and the two circles
meet in the heart . There is, of course ,
only one continuous stream, but as the
blood passes along this stream, it really
goes through two circles, one large and
one small. There is the circulation
through the lungs, the use of which we
know , and there is the circulation
through the body, the use of which we
also know . The heart, then , is really
two pumps. It has a left side and a
right; the left side gets the pure blood
from the lungs and sends it to the body ;
the right side gets the impure blood from
the body and sends it to the lungs .
IE WONDERFUL WAY IN WHICH OUR
THEHEARTS ARE MADE
The two sides are made on just the
same principle, and each consists of
two chambers. The upper one, which
is the smaller, is called an auricle . It
receives the blood, and then drives it
into the lower chamber, which is much
larger and stronger. The auricle has
only thin walls, for its work is not hard
it only has to send the blood a very
short distance through valves. But
the ventricles, as the larger chambers on
each side are called, are different. The
right ventricle has to send the impure
blood, which the right auricle has
received from the body, to the lungs,
and as this needs a good deal of force,
the right ventricle has a fairly thick
muscular coat . But the left ventricle
much the bulkiest part of the heart,
and the tip of the heart, which you feel
when you put your finger on your chest ,
is really the tip of the left ventricle.
The picture on page 1581 will help us
to understand the course of the blood .
 com o
THE HEART - THE LIVING PUMP
Let us imagine that we could watch it , but servants ; they are made of living
and let us take a drop of pure blood that cells, we know, which contract ; but
has just entered the left auricle . The they never do so of themselves. Every
auricle squeezes it , like a fist squeezing kind of muscular tissue in the body is
something in it , and drives it into the the servant of nerves , and does what it
left ventricle. When the ventricle is is told . It contracts only when a nerve
stretched and full, it replies by squeez orders it to do so .
ing and beating in the same way, and We find, then , in the heart itself
drives the blood through the largest a large number of nerve cells, and it is
artery in the body, called the aorta, so these that really start the heart's beat .
that it goes to nourish every part . They are very sensitive, and very quickly
THELWAS THROUGH
TIN WHICHYOUR
A DROPOF BLOOD affected by almost every possible in
fluence. For instance, heat affects them
Perhaps the drop of blood we are very much , and the heart beats more
watching stays in the aorta until the quickly when we are hot ; then all
openings of many of the first branches sorts of strange things in the blood
of it are passed, and runs down the affect them , such as alcohol, and the
branch which goes to the left leg, and gases which enter the blood when a
nourishes the life of the cells at the base man smokes, and many other poisons.
of a toe-nail, and then starts on its long Some make the heart beat more quickly,
journey back again through the veins. some more slowly, and smoking may
But now, of course , it is dark and often make it beat irregularly.
impure. It does not go straight to the But we must not think we have nearly
lungs, however, for the force with which finished describing the nervous govern
it was sent from the heart is now nearly ment of the heart and its beating. It
exhausted. Instead of going to the is far more wonderful than that. After
lungs, it goes back to the heart itself, all , the whole of the body really exists
and so completes the larger circle of the for the sake of the brain , and if the brain
circulation . It passes up in a great vein , could not control the heart, things would
which opens into the right auricle . soon go wrong. For instance, when we
When the auricle is full it contracts and are standing or sitting upright, the work
beats, and sends the blood into the right required in order to send enough blood
ventricle. This contracts in its turn , to the brain is harder than when we are
and sends the blood to the lungs. It lying flat . It is therefore recessary that
comes back from the lungs, pure and the heart should beat more quickly
bright, by vessels which open into the when we stand or sit than when we lie,
does. But this can only be
so itit does.
left auricle --— and that is where we began. . and so
We see, then , how the circulation con- done through the brain giving orders.
Weofmust
sists not suppose
two circles heartthe
the all
joined atthat . THERMOHEETS OF NERVES THAT RUN
BRAIN TO THE
purifying of the blood is done in the So we find that two sets of nerves
lungs. Many waste matters are filtered run from the brain to the heart. For
out of it as it passes through the skin convenience we may just call them two
and the kidneys; also, as it passes nerves . These control the nerve cells
through the body, it gets fresh food that belong to the heart itself. When an
material , so that , in some respects, the order is sent down through one of these
blood which comes back to the right nerves, the heart beats more strongly
auricle from the body is better than the and quickly. When an order is sent down
blood which left the left ventricle. Only it through the other , it beats less strongly
is much worse in respect of its gases, and and less quickly. From moment to
that is why it has to be sent to the lungs. moment throughout the whole of our
THETHELITTLE NERVECELLS THAT START lives,
HEART'S BEAT
the brain is thus able to control
the beating of the heart. We know
But we mus , ask ourselves how and exactly the cells that do this work.
why the heart is made to beat . We There is another most important fact
must think of it as a great muscle, very about the circulation which teaches us
complicated and very differentfrom any again how marvellously he brain con
other muscle in the body, but still reaiiy trols the body. If we examine the wall
a muscle. Now, muscles are not masters, of an artery, we find it very beautifully
1583 -
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE.makituisikia.com
and wonderfully made. It has a firm command of life. We can hardly think
outer coat , and a perfectly smooth inner of anything more wonderful than the
coat ; and between these two there are a circuiation of the blood , with its power
great number of elastic fibres, so that the of adapting itself from moment to
artery can be stretched when the heart moment to the needs of the body. The
sends a pulse of blood through it , and instances we have noticed are quite
then spring back to its former size . But good ones, but there is another which
there is also a great quantity of muscular is the most beautiful of all .
tissue in the wall of every artery. Every When we think, the brain requires
fibre of this muscular tissue in the more blood . Suppose, then , that we
arteries of the whole body is governed by take a man and lay him flat on aa
nerves, and acts on the orders which they delicately balanced table, and place him
send, and all these nerves spring from , so that the table lies quite flat and not
and carry messages from , a small group tilted up at either end. Then, when we
of cells in the brain lying quite close have got this right , let us give him a
to the cells that govern the heart . difficult sum to do in his head . No
HE NERVE MESSENGERS THAT CARRY THE
THE sooner has he begun to work it out than
BRAIN'S ORDERS THROUGH THE BODY the end of the table where his head is
Now , the extent to which the muscular begins to fall . The reason is that the
tissue of an artery is contracted decides blood has become heavier and weighs
its size , and this decides the amount of down that end of the table.
blood that will go to the part of the body LITTLE TUBE WALLS THAT LET THE
GASES PASS IN AND OUT OF THE BLOOD
which the artery supplies.. Hence,
there is not a single part of the body that Now, there is one other thing that we
has not its supply of blood regulated by must clearly understand about the
the brain . When we examine it further, circulation . We have got the idea of the
we find that, just as in the case of the blood streaming round in a system of
heart , there are two sets of nerves- closed tubes ; but , of course , if the walls
one to carry messages ordering the blood- of the tubes let nothing through them ,
vessels to contract, the other to carry the circulation would be of no use, and
messages ordering them to relax . we have already learned that they let
In almost every part of the body gases through them . The arteries
these changes are going on as they are themselves are too thick for this, and
needed . Usually a message is sent by so are the veins. It is the tiny tubes, or
the part of the body in question up capillaries, which consist of only a single
to the brain - perhaps a message for layer of very thin cells, that allow the
more blood, and perhaps a message for gases to pass in and out of the blood.
less blood . When we go out on a very That is what happens in the lungs.
cold day , the nose needs a large quantity But throughout all the rest of the body,
of blood in order to warm the cold air while carbonic acid is passing inwards
that passes through it on isway to the through the capillaries from the tissues,
lungs. It sends a message to the brain , all sorts of foodsupplies are soaking out
and the blood - vessels in the lining of the through the walls of the capillaries into
nose are all ordered to relax , so that the tissues for them to live on, while all
large quantities of warm blood rush sorts of poisonous things which the
quickly through the nose , and warm the tissues have been making soak back
air we breathe. Sometimes the message into the capillaries, and are carried
may be ofa different kind, and perhaps through the veins to the heart. Butthe
a

it may be impossible to see its use.. For opposite happens when the blood visits
instance, in the act of blushing, a mes- the kidneys, for thousands of capillaries
sage is sent from the brain to the in the kidneys are specially arranged
arteries which supply the face and neck , close to little tubes lined with special
so that they become relaxed, and a cells that have the power of picking out
flood of blood surges through the skin . all these waste products from the blood,
YOUR BODY MS ALLOYING MACHINE, UNDER and so getting rid of them . Thus, the
OF LIFE blood in the veins from the kidneys is
What we must remember, then , is that purer than the blood in the arteries
though the body is a machine, yet it is a going to the kidneys .
living machine, alive and under the The next part of this is on page 1633.
1584
 SMAKes
The Child's Book of
MIL
PEARE
O
MEN E WOMEN TON

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

"HIS is the story of some of the men who, 800 years ago, " took the Cross,"
THIS as the saying was, to fight against the Saracens in the Holy Land.
They were called Crusaders, partly because they wore the Cross on their
garments as a sign of their faith and of the vow which they had taken , and

BENS
partly because they were going to fight for the Cross against the Crescent,
which was the badge of the Mohammedans. They left their homes, having
taken a vow to strike a blow to win back from the Turks the Holy Sepulchre,
where the body of the Saviour had lain. And many men deemed it the part
of all true knights to take the Cross, and counted a death with sword in
hand against the infidel the best that a man could die. Now, when we see
in some old church a tomb bearing the effigy of a knight in armour, lying with
his legs crossed, we may know that he was one who went on Crusade,
because the crossing of the feet was taken as the sign of a Crusader.
NAP
OLE
ON THE MEN OF THE CRUSADES WEL
LIN
GTON

n the ancient days Now , of all the

IN men were wont CONTINUED FROM 1474
to go on pilgrim
ages ; that is to say,
they would take long journeys
in order to visit the holy
places of the world . By the
holy places we mean the spots
where holy men had lived or had
met with a martyr's death, or where
they had been buried. For this
custom there were many reasons.
First, when we go to such places it
helps us to think of those saints
and martyrs, and to strive to live
lives like theirs. But besides that ,
in those days everyone believed
that it was right to pray to the
saints and martyrs to intercede for
them before the throne of God ; and
they fancied that the saints would
listen more readily to prayers that
were offered in the places that had
been dedicated to their memory-
STEPHENS
sacred places, the
most holy were in
Palestine : the places
where the Saviour had stood ,
the spot where He had been
crucified, the spot where He DAR
had been laid in the tomb from WIN
which He had risen . Therefore , of
all pilgrimages, the pilgrimage to
the Holy Land was that most highly
valued ; because, also, Palestine was
distant, and_the journey was long
and hard. For hundreds of years
the Holy Land was a part of the
Roman , or Byzantine, Empire , SO
that its rulers were Christians .
But at last there arose amongthe
Arabs a certain Mahomet or Mo.
hammed, who preached a new reli
gion, calling himself the Prophet of
Allah , the Most High God , whose
doctrine was called Islam , and his
followers Mohammedans, or Moslems.

that is, set apart as belonging to them And the Moslems conquered Egypt
STPROONVINESG

for ever. Besides that, men were
taught that to go on such pilgrim-
ages was a virtuous act, by which
they could atone for sins of which
they had repented ; and the more
difficult the journey was, and the
more dangers and sufferings and
discomforts the pilgrims had to
endure on the way, the more com-
plete they imagined the atonement
would be ; also , the more sacred the
spot was to which pilgrimage was
made, the greater they imagined
would be the merit of visiting it .
and Palestine, and a great deal of
the western part of Asia which had
belonged to the Christian Byzantine
Empire, so that Palestine became a
part of what was called the Saracen
Empire.
Now, at the first, the Saracens did
not ill-treat the Christians, and the
pilgrims were allowed to visit the
Holy Land as before, though they RUS
had to make payment to the Saracen KIN
rulers. But presently the Turks ,
who had come into Western Asia
from the East , and had turned

PJULIUS CASAB ) HERBERT SPENCER

1585
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Mohammedans, became the most burned like fire. When he told them
powerful of all the races who dwelt in that now they might do a great work
the Saracen Empire ; and when they got for Christ by going to rescue His
the government of Palestine into their sepulchre from the heathen, winning
own hands,, they began to treat the thereby pardon for all their sins and
Christians with great cruelty, so that everlasting salvation, a passion of
it seemed likely enough that the pil. enthusiasm took hold of them . Then
grims who went to the holy places Urban summoned a great council of
would, in very deed, lose their lives bishops and princes and nobles to meet
and even become martyrs themselves. and make an end of their quarrels
THEMEN WHO CALLED UPON THE PEOPLE among themselves, and to take counsel
how the holy places might be won
Even before this, there had been back from the Turks ; so that a great
some to whom it seemed a shameful multitude gathered at Clermont, which
thing that the land where Jesus had was the place of meeting. And after
lived should be in the hands of un- the great people had taken counsel and
believers, although so long as they agreed together, Pope Urban went out
did not treat their Christian subjects and preached to the vast crowd, urging 1

harshly, and left the pilgrims in peace , them to take the Cross and to join the
the nations of the West were not Holy War ; and, when he had finished,
minded to go to war with them just all the people cried out as with one
to help the Emperor at Byzantium to voice : " It is the will of God ! It is
win back lands which he
had lost . But now there
came a change ; and first
the great Pope, Gregory
VII., tried to persuade the
peoples of Christendom to
unite in trying to restore a
Christian dominion in the
Holy Land .
Pope Gregory failed .
But after him there came a
Pope named Urban II . ,
who was exceedingly
zealous in the matter ; and
to his aid came a man
who was a most eloquent
and fervid preacher, who
was called Peter the Hermit .
This Peter had been himself
to the Holy Land, and
with his owneyes had seen
the cruelties that the Turks
inflicted on the pilgrims;
and he came back with his
heart hot within him , and
told the Pope what things
he had seen . And Urban
bade him go forth and
preach of these things.
So he went to the great
cities, riding upon an ass,
and carrying before him a
great crucifix ; and his
preaching stirred the hearts
of all who heard him ; and Pope Urban the Second is here rousing the people for the First Crusade.
great crowds gathered to He summoned acouncil of bishops, princes, andnobles at Clermont,and
preached to them and their followers, urging t ).em tojoin a Holy War. When
listen to his words , which he had finished they cried : " It isthewillof God ! It is the will of God !"
1586
 EXCELENTE LLEUuttura antea dictatauranter OTEK பன

might do what they

would by the way. And
they did so much ill that
wherever they went the
peoples rose up against
them in self-defence ;
and, of all that rabble,
not one out of every ten
ever reached even Asia
at all. But , being there ,
the Saracens found it no
hard task to destroy
them utterly, save a very
few , including Peter, who
escaped back to Byzan
tium , which was another
name for Constantinople .
However, the army which
the princes and nobles
were gathering fared in
different sort . In that
company were many
famous warriors ; Ray
mond of Toulouse, a
baron whose power was
greater than that of
many kings ; Tancred,
the flower of knighthood,
of whom in years to come
the famous Italian poet
Tasso sang ; Godfrey of
Bouillon , noblest of them
all , with his brothers
Baldwin and Eustace of
Richardthe Lion -Heartedwas the strongest knight and the most fearless Boulogne ; Bohemund of
fighter of his time. He led a large army to the Holy Land and captured Tarentum , a Norman
Acrefrom the Turks. Here we see him at the prow ofhisship, entering Joppa: knight, whose father,
He fought and won many victories over Saladin, the great Saracen chief.
Robert Guiscard , had
the will of God !” Now , many nobles carved himself a kingdom in southern
and many knights pledged themselves Italy ; Robert Duke of Normandy,
to join the army of Christendom which William the Conqueror's eldest son,
was to be gathered for the recovery of whose brother, William Rufus, was
the Holy Sepulchre , under the leader- king of England. So that he might
ship of Raymond, the great Count of have gold to equip his troops for the
Toulouse. But long before the army great enterprise, Robert gave his duke
could be ready , and much preparation dom to the “" Red King " in pledge,
was necessary, there was a host of receiving from him a sum of money.
eager people clamouring that Peter the
Hermit should lead them against the BY HIS BROTHER FOR TWENTY YEARS
Paynim without delay ; and, since they A very valiant knight was Duke
needs must have a soldier at their head Robert, but not over wise ; easily
as well as a hermit, they chose a outwitted by fierce William and his
knight who was called Walter the craftier younger brother who became
Penniless. our King Henry I. , by whom , in after
The Crusaders set forth, being years, he was taken prisoner in battle,
indeed, no more than a vast rabble of and held a captive in Cardiff Cas'le for
ignorant folk, without order or disci- twenty years until he died . Men said ,
pline, who deemed that since they were though it may not be true, that the king
journeying to the Holy Land, they had the luckless duke's eyes put out .
YAQUT LOUZ ZITTERUIT
1587
 LAXED BUCCINERALER ULL
ITO ALLA TEC Trim
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
The way to Asia lay through the thirst, the assault was renewed. All
lands of the Byzantine Empire, where one day they fought , and still the
the emperor ruled at Constantinople ; Saracens beat them back ; but again
and little liking had he for the great they attacked in the morning. Now
host which was marching, not to win while the battle raged, Godfrey saw
back his lost lands for him , but to on Mount Olivet a knight who waved
drive out the Turks and set up a new a glittering shield ; and he cried
Christian kingdom . But glad he was out “ Behold ! St. George is come
when the last of them had crossed the to aid us ! "At that inspiring word,
straits called the Bosphorus, and stood the Christians were filled with a new
on the soil of Asia . And then they strength, and rushed upon the Saracens ;
had a long way to march before them , and this time they carried the rampart .
and many fierce battles with the Turks The first on the top was Letold of
before they could reach Jerusalem . Tournay, and the third was Godfrey.
THE CRUSADERS FALL ON THEIR KNEES Then they swept the Turks before
them ; and Jerusalem was won.
Of these fights the fiercest was ihe Very fierce and cruel was the slaughter,
long struggle at the city of Antioch , and very few were they who sought to
which the Crusaders held it needful save the lives of the conquered, except
to seize . Yet the Crusaders were un- Tancred ; for men felt that they were
skilled in the art of sieges, and the right to slay and spare not, as in ancient
Turks held the city stoutly. The siege days the Israelites had slain the Canaan
lasted long ; and, throughout, the ites . But after the slaughter all went
boldest deeds were those of Godfrey of to pray, and to humble themselves at
Bouillon and the Norman Robert. the Holy Sepulchre ; and after that
At last, however, a traitor within the they did honour to the hermit, Peter,
gates made a plan to let in Bohemund who had first roused them to the great
of Tarentum with his knights ; and so enterprise, of whom thereafter we
the town was taken . But still the hear no more .
citadel held out,and new armiescame GODFREY BEEN KING OFJERUSALEM
BOUILLON , WHO MIGHT
to help the Turks ; so thatthe besiegers
of the citadel were themselves besieged And then, when the chiefs had taken
within the city. At last , however, the counsel together, they offered the crown
Christians sallied forth , and there was of the kingdom of Jerusalem to Godfrey
a great battle , which the Christians of Bouillon, the worthiest , though they
won ; and after that the citadel itself would have been willing to give it to
surrendered . There Bohemund re Duke Robert had he been willing to take
mained as lord . But the army of the it ; and many to whom others had no
Crusaders went on to Jerusalem itself. will to give it were willing to take it .
Now , when they came in sight of the But Godfrey himself would in no wise
Holy City, the Crusaders fell on their wear an earthly crown in that city,
knees, offering thanks that at length where the King of Heaven had worn the
they had been permitted to behold crown of thorns, and so he called himself
what they had longed for ; and so made only the Baron and Defender of the Holy
ready for the assault, since the city Sepulchre. Then Godfrey abode at
was very strong. Jerusalem , scattering the Saracens who
OW THE CRUSADERS SWEPT THE TURKS
HOY came against him ; and a year later he 1
1

BEFORE THEM AND WON JERUSALEM died , having just made good laws for
But on the first day, in spite of the the new kingdom . A wise man, valiant
fury of their attack , they were beaten and just , honourable, who feared God
back ; whereby they learned that valour but none other, was Godfrey of Bouillon .
alone, lacking skill , would never gain To other knights were given other
them an entry. Therefore, they built lordships, as Antioch to Bohemund, in
engines of war for the storming of strong whose absence Tancred ruled wisely
places, battering rams, and catapults and well, and Edessa to Baldwin , the
brother
for hurling great stones, as gunpowder was
had not at that time been invented .
of Godfrey; and this Baldwin
made king of Jerusalem when
At last,, after many days, during Godfrey died.. Baldwin reigned for 1

which they had suffered much from eighteen years ; and after him came
1588 ZITTYTEREMT
 COLOUR KIEK GEWELDXL.COM
THE MEN OF THE CRUSADES
another Baldwin, not his son, but a even won the city of Askelon . But
kinsman. These two Baldwins brought now evil days were in store ; for there
more lands and cities under their rose up in Egypt, which was ruled by
dominion , which was known as the the Saracens, a young man whom the
“ Latin Kingdom ” ; and one of these Christians called Saladin , who , being
cities was the famous Tyre. In those just appointed vizier, or chief minister,
days were founded the two great by the Sultan of Egypt , presently made
Orders of the Knights Templars and himself master not only of Egypt,
the Knights Hospitallers, or Knights but also of Syria. And all men agree
of St. John, who were vowed to fight in speaking the praises of this Saladin
as soldiers of the Cross , yet to remain as a wise and just ruler, and a very
poor and unwedded , like monks, valiant and courteous knight, for all
among whom were many very valiant he was no Christian , but a Moslem .
soldiers. After Baldwin II . came Fulk of "HE MERCY OF SALADIN , THE EMPEROR
Anjou, and after him his son Baldwin
III., in whose time the Turks won back And , indeed , not Saladin only, but
Edessa. other great leaders of the Saracens had
Now, many pilgrims had come to shown that they could match the best
Jerusalem , and many knights had of the Christians in true chivalry and
come to Palestine to fight on behalf of gentlehood . But while Saladin waxed
the Christian kingdom against the strong, Baldwin died , and two more
Paynim , as the infidels were called ; Baldwins after him . And one, Guy
and these, too, were called Crusaders, of Lusignan , became king of Jerusalem .
or champions of the Cross . But But now Saladin was minded to win
because of the fall of Edessa , back Palestine ; and he went up against
another great army was formed to the King of Jerusalem with a great
march against the Saracens ; and army and overthrew him at Tiberias,
this is called the Second Crusade . and took him prisoner. Then , one after
T. BERNARD, AND HOW HE STARTED THE
ST:SECOND CRUSADE another, the cities of Palestine sur
rendered to him , save Tyre, where
This time the man who roused the Conrad of Montferrat defied him , and
princes of Christendom to the war Jerusalem itself. But to Jerusalem
was Bernard of Clairvaux , who is he offered very generous terms if the
called St Bernard , a man learned and people would surrender ; and though at
eloquent , and of a fiery zeal. But first they would not, yet, after a short
though Conrad, the German emperor, while, when he promised to show the
and Louis VII ., the French king, took people mercy, and do nothing more,
part in this Crusade, and a vast host Jerusalem , too, surrendered .
with them , yet it came to no good end, And even so the mercy of Saladin
by reason of divided counsels, and, was far more generous than the
what was worse, of treachery. mercilessness of the Crusaders when
Being jealous of each other. some of
they won the Holy City, Jerusalem.
the great lords wilfully gave evil HE THIRD CRUSADE , IN WHICH PRINCES
advice, so that when the crusading THEAND KINOS MARCHED TO THE HOLY LAND
army came to battle with the Saracens But when the peoples of Western
they were defeated . But , as for Ber. Christendom heard that Jerusalem was
nard , he held that the army had been once more in the hands of the Turks, a
defeated because the Crusaders had third great Crusade was resolved on ,
not marched with a single eye to the wherein princes and kings took part ,
honour of God , and therefore God and chief of them Philip Augustus, the
had not given them the victory . young king of France, and Richard ,
this Bernard judged wisely. It the heir to the throne of England , who
may be that, if he himself had gone became King Richard I. while prepara
with the Crusaders to encourage them , a tion was yet being made ; and because
nobler spirit would have possessed them . Richard was the strongest knight and
Nevertheless, though this Crusade the most fearless fighter living, men
came to nought and Edessa was lost , called him " Richard Cæur- de-Lion, or
the young King Baldwin of Jerusalem Lion - Heart . Yet even more renowned
held his own against the Turks, and and mighty than the kings of England
on 3TIMOTORZY DULRITU DITUT XXIELIX
1589
 LUNI ALLOC LOG Izan
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
and France was the German Emperor rescuė, and turned back again. Yet ,
Frederick, who was called Barbarossa whenever he came to battle with the
because of his red beard. Saracens, he wrought such mighty
While the other kings and nobles were deeds of valour that he won from
settling their own quarrels, or making Saladin terms for a truce, hoping that
preparation for this third Crusade, he might yet return and do battle for
Barbarossa marched by land at the the Holy Sepulchre.
head of a mighty army past Constan HOW RICHARD WAS SLAIN BY AN ARROW ,
tinople into Asia, and it seemed likely & THE CRUSADERS WENT FORTH AGAIN
enough that Saladin would meet more Yet this , too, was denied him, for on
than his match . But Barbarossa died his way to England, travelling alone,
suddenly, whether he was drowned, as he fell into the hands of his enemy ,
some say, in crossing a river, or from a Leopold of Austria , and was held
sharp sickness caught from bathing prisoner for a long time before he was
therein ; and the most part of his army ransomed at a great price ; and not long
perished miserably, though a part afterwards he was slain by an arrow in
reached Antioch and conquered it again . some small war .
But now, while Richard Lion -Heart But men tell of the high honour in
still tarried in Sicily, Philip of France which he and the Sultan Saladin held
and most of the army came by sea to each other ; and how , for many a long
Palestine, and sat down to besiege the year, the Saracen mothers would frighten
fortress of Acre, where Richard presently their children when they were naughty
found them , more intent on a quarrel with the name of Richard Lion-Heart .
whether Conrad of Montferrat or Guy Now , less than a hundred years had
of Lusignan should be king of Jeru- passed since Godfrey of Bouillon and
salem than on war with the Saracens. the warriors of the First Crusade had won
HOWSRICHA RD THE LION.HEARTED HID back Jerusalem from the Turks and set
FACE BEFORE JERUSALEM up the Latin kingdom . Yet Saladin
Now, although the Christian kings had in truth overthrown the Latin
and nobles ranged themselves on the kingdom for good and all, though still
side of Guyor of Conrad, Philip the name of it was kept up. But still ,
supporting the one , and Richard the for a hundred years more, Crusades were
other, and though each of them sought undertaken from time to time, though,
to thwart his neighbour, and the whole because the princes of Western Christen
camp was full of feuds and jealousies , dom would never unite together loyally,
yet chiefly through the prowess of the Moslem still
Richard, Acre was captured. Never- Christendom neverheld Jerusalem , and
won it back .
there were bitter quarrels
theless , Ofthe men who went upon the fourth
between King Richard and the wily and fifth Crusades there is nothing good
French king , and also the Austrian to tell ; and as for the fifth , it was turned
Duke Leopold, whom Richard treated not against the Paynim at all, but against
with open scorn , for which he paid the Christian empire of Byzantium .
dearly enough later. But after the
fall of Acre, Philip andLeopold and THEHEHAMEBORLE MAND PUTIFUL TALE OF
CHILDREN'S CRUSADE
many others deemed that they had There is another story about the
fulfilled their vow as Crusaders, and Crusades which does not really belong
betook themselves home again ; but to our Book of Men and Women , for
Richard remained, being full of zeal to it tells of a multitude of children
win back Jerusalem. who were allowed to set out on a
Yet this was not to be ; for now the Crusade of their own . We must sup
Crusading army was but small , and the pose that their parents let them go, be.
hosts of Saladin outnumbered them lieving that God would work a miracle
many times. And so, though the King on their behalf . Yet the Bible does not
of England marched against Jerusalem , tell us that if people do a very foolish
he knew , before he reached it, that the thing, God will save them from the
attempt must be in vain . Therefore , consequences of their folly by a miracle .
when he came within sight of it , he At any rate, a vast number of children
hid his ice , as one unworthy to behold were suffered to gather together in
the Holy City, which he could not France, and to march down to the sea
1590
 COXm m m . mma Voornanan Senos sa

THE CAPTURE OF KING LOUIS OF FRANCE

TITUTTET

Louis IX. , one of the noblest French kings, led a large army to the Holy Land. Though they fought valiantly,
they were overwhelmed, and Louis himself was captured by the Saracens. This picture, painted on the walls
of the Panthéon in Paris, shows the king a prisoner, and he was only ransomed by the payment of thousands
of pounds. After his return to France he started on another Crusade , but died before reaching the Holy Land.
ZEROTRUDZIEM
UN BRITID பாயாயபபாபபபபமாயாயமான
1591
 -- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
MIALAALLEAGLLLLLEELCA 1 DICI

to travel to the Holy Land. But of
these thirty thousand children , ten
thousand had already strayed away
before ever they reached the sea ; and
whether any of them got home again,
no one knows . When the rest reached
the sea , the luckless children fancied
that God would drive the waters back,
so that they might journey on to
Palestine dry -shod, as the children of
Israel passed through the Red Sea.
Yet while they waited in that vain
hope, certain evil-minded folk saw
their plight , and said, “ We will take
you on our ships, as many as we can ,
not for money, but for the love of the
France, who is called Saint Louis ;
for he, having approved himself one of
the best of all kings in his own land,
and having won such repute for wisdom
and virtue that men came to him even
from other lands to judge between them
and pronounce what was just , now left
his kingdom in obedience to what he
deemed the Divine call.
Nevertheless, for all his singleness of
heart , he, too, was doomed to fail, for
there were folly and jealousy among the
leaders, and Louis himself lacked the
skill of a great general. And it so befell
that , at last, when the army was already
well-nigh broken in pieces, a great host

The Sultan Saladin was the great champion of the Saracens against Christianity. He was not only' a valiant
fighter, but a chivalrous and large-hearted man , and held King Richard Lion -Heart in such honour that, though
he defeated him , he asked him to come and see him and made a truce with him. This picture shows their meeting.
Holy Cross ; ” and so they took some of Saracens came upon them, and over
five thousand of these children aboard . threw them , though Louis himself and
Now they sailed away joyfully ; but many another fought valiantly. Louis
when they had crossed the sea, those himself was taken prisoner, and was
evil folk took them down to the slave- set free only for a very great ransom .
markets of the Turks , and sold them all . After him there is no other Crusader to
Nine Crusades are counted in all , and be noted unless it be Edward of England,
though great men were numbered of whom we read in another place.
among them , who took the Cross, such But of all the men who went on Crusade,
as the German Emperor Frederick II . , although Richard Lion-Heart won the
and in the last Crusade the English greatest renown for pure prowess in
Prince Edward, who became Edward battle , yet the names which claim
I. , yet it seems as if there was only one of highest honour are those of Godfrey
them who sought the Holy Land with of Bouillon and Louis of France.
a pure heart for the glory of God. The next stories of Men and Women begin
That one was Louis IX ., King of on page 1655 .
extes 1592
YS The Child's Book of
THE SONGS OF THE WORLD
WE
E have read the wonderful story of David . Now we are to listen to some
of his music—the music that has come down with man on the river
of Time ever since David first sang these songs ; the music that will flow on
till the river of Time empties itself into the great ocean of Eternity. It is itself
eternity. One of the greatest writers of all time, Thomas Carlyle, wrote these
words, which we do well to remember here : “ David's life and history, as written
in those Psalms of his, I consider to be the truest emblem ever given of a man's
moral progress and warfare here below . All earnest souls will discern in it the
faithful struggle of an earnest human soul towards what is good and best.
Struggle often baffled, sore baffled, down as into entire wreck ; yet a struggle never
ended ; ever with tears, repentances, time-unconquerable purpose, begun anew . "

THE PSALMS OF KING DAVID

The Hebrews tell CONTINUED FROM 1484
the story that
David had a harp
hung above his head , and
that the night wind , entering
the chamber where he slept,
touched the strings and made such
wonderful music that David awoke,
and , until the east was aflame with
dawn, uttered human language which
sang with the music. There is a
saying that the: e immortal Psalms
are the music of the heart of man
swept by the hand of his Creator. All
ages have recognised in them some-
thing that is divine.
Now , before we listen to these ex-
quisite and immortal words, think for a
moment what such fame means . Why
have all the ages sung these Psalms,
and why have all the generations loved
them ? It is because David said in
beautiful language what we all feel
The least of us, reading these Psalms,
feels as if thehand ofGod were sweeping
his own heart. They are so intimate,
so real, so true to the secret thoughts
of our own hearts. No man , not even
Shakespeare, has written so truthfully
of the human heart's yearning after
the power and the glory and the love
of God .
It is the sublime fame of David that
he put into words the deepest feelings
of the human heart . He is the singer
of humanity. He gave to the heart of
the saddest sinner, and to the lips of
the most unlettered beggar, language in
which they may address the Creator of
the world . When you grow a little
older, you must buy
84
and keep on the lower
shelf in your library a
book entitled " The Psalms
in Human Iile," written by Mr.
Rowland Protheroe . From this
affectionate and gentle book you
will learn in how marvellous a manner
the songs of this shepherd boy, who
became a king, have entered into the
history of the whole world, and into
the lives of humanity's greatest
ileroes . Mr. Protheroe calls the
Psalms " the breviary the
and
viaticum of humanity " ; that is to
say , they are the heart's prayer
book, and the soul's provision for the
great march on which we all are set
the march from birth to death.
There is scarcely an event in history
which has not been in some way
touched by the Psalms ; and when
you have read Mr. Protheroe's book,
you will find that in reading the
Psalms you are reminded at almost
every verse of some great hero or
some important occurrence. In every
country , he tells us, the language of
the Psalms has become part of the
daily life of nations, passing into their
proverbs, mingling with their conversa
tion . All of us, kings and beggars, have
been touched by the songs of David .
“ With a Psalm ,” says Mr. Protheroe ,
" we are baptised, and married, and
buried ; with a Psalm we begin , and
realise to the full, and end our earthly
existence.” Is it not a wonderful thing
that words uttered by the Shepherd
King of Israel , thousands of years ago,

1593
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
should now be said over every child who
is baptised, every man and woman who
is married, and over every mortal body
committed to the quiet of the grave ?
Christ died with the words of a
Psalm upon His lips : “ My God, my
God, why hast Thou forsaken me ? ”
HE FOUNDATIONS OF THE UNITED STATES
THE
WERE LAID TO THE MUSIC OF DAVID
" With the Psalms upon their
tongues,” says Mr. Protheroe , “ myriads
have died ; now in quiet sick -rooms,
surrounded by all who loved them best
in life ; now alone, and far from home
and kindred ; now hemmed in by
fierce enemies howling for their blood.
Thus in the Psalms there are pages
which are stained with the life -blood
of martyrs and wet with the tears of
saints ; others which are illuminated
by the victories of weak humanity and men by a grey-haired captain, of
over suffering and fear and temptation ;
others which glow with the brightness
of heroic constancy and almost super-
human courage .
The verse Save me from the lion's
mouth : for Thou hast heard me from
the horns of the unicorns," is the in-
spiration of our nation's royal arms,
the lion and the unicorn .Our national
anthem of " God Save the King " is
built upon the Psalms; and our kings
are all crowned with ceremonies taken
from the Psalms.
In one of his greatest speeches to
Parliament, Cromwell spoke of Psalm
46, and said : “ If Pope, and Spaniard,
and devil, and all, set themselves
against us — yet, in the name of the
Lord, we shall destroy them . The
Lord of Hosts is with us ; the God of
Jacob is our refuge.” The body of
John Hampden was borne to its grave
by his troopers, who chanted the goth
Psalm . * To the singing of the Psalms
the sails of the 'Mayflower ' were set
to catch the winds that waſted the
Pilgrim Fathers to the white sand-
banks of Cape Cod ; to their music
were laid the foundations of the United
States of America .”
W DAVID'S SONG GAVE HOPE TO
HOSSTRICKEN CITY
John Locke, the great philosopher,
died while his friend, Lady Masham ,, found their consolation and strength
was reading aloud to him , at his re-
quest, the Psalms of the day. Hum-
boldt, the great man of science, declared
that the 104th Psalm presents a picture
EXET
66
of the entire Universe : We are as
tonished to see, within the compass of
a poem of such small dimension , the
universe, the heavens, and the earth ,
thus drawn with a few grand strokes."
Livingstone parted from his family
after reading the 21st and 135th
Psalms. When Stanley discovered him ,
a living skeleton ,” the great traveller
wrote in his diary : “ Bless the Lord ,
O my soul, and all that is within me
bless His holy name. Amen ."
In 1842 grave news was brought to a
British garrison in India, which looked
as if destruction was about to fall
upon it . On the next Sunday all the
people and soldiers assembled in one
of the squares for Divine worship .
“ There was no chaplain , but the
Church service was read to the officers
slight, well-knit
- figure, whose clean,
strong voice made every word audible.
Instead of the Psalms appointed for
the day, he chose the 46th Psalm ,
6
' God is our refuge and strength ,' which ,
as he said, Luther was wont to use
in seasons of peculiar difficulty and
depression . ” That grey-haired captain
was Havelock, a name which to this
day is like magic in India .. He be
came
the hero of the Mutiny, the
darling of his nation.
IE COMFORT OF THE PSALMS TO MEN
THE CAME TIMES AND PLACES
Whether we look among the histories
of statesmen , soldiers, sailors, poets,
men of science and preachers, or study
the wide pages of the great movement
of the nations of the earth from servitude
and superstition to freedom and truth ,
we find at every turn some reference
to the eternal Psalms of David. “ To
weary travellers of every condition and
at every period of history, the Psalms
have been rivers of refreshment and
wells of consolation ; they alone have
known no limitations to a particular
age, country, or form of faith ."
It would take the whole of our book to
tell of every epoch and every heroic life
A consecrated by the Psalms of David.
Read them with the remembrance
that great men and noble women have
in these words, and that the music of
David is interwoven with the history
of the an race , as closely as the
threads that tell the story of a tapestry.
1594
 A SELECTION FROM THE PSALMS OF DAVID
The master-note of the Psalms is Happiness. To obtain happiness we must think. Praise
of God is not given by merely singing and praying, but chiefly by thought. We should think
about God, and get into the habit of thinking constantly about His power, His eternity, His
delight in beautiful things, His kindness and His love. Sit quite still , and with closed eyes
think that this wonderful world, with its rolling waters, its high mountains, its green pastures,
and its pageant of scented flowers, is the work of One who existed before the earth was made,
and will exist when you are iaid in the grave. David was the great thinker , He thought
about God, and God became real to him. If you do not think of God often and quietly and
for a long space at a time you will never know the chief happiness of existence, which is the
certainty that the great Creator cares for you and has prepared for you everlasting pleasures.
David's message to the world is : Think about God. We give here a selection from his Psalms.
PSALM 1. PSALM 24.
In this song David teaches the great lesson that only David was a lover of Nature . He knew the green earth
those people who think of God in all things can be like a book . He learned the great lesson , that those
happy ; and that sooner or later people who live as if who are not vain and frivolous and taken up with
there were no God will find out their dreadful mistake. riches and business can feel God's presence in the fresh
The good man is wise ; the godless man is foolish . ness of the dawn and the solemn majesty of the sunset.

BuBLESSED is the man that walketh,notin Theearth is

the counsel of the ungodly, nor standeth ; the
the Lord's,
world , and
and the
theyfulness
that
in the way of sinners , nor sitteth in the seat dwell therein .
of the scornful. 2. For he hath founded it upon the seas,
2. But his delightis in the law of the Lord ; and established it upon the floods.
and in his law doth he meditate day and 3. Who shall ascend into the hill of the
night . Lord ? or who shall stand in his holy place ?
3. And he shall be like a tree planted by 4. He that hath clean hands, and a pure
the rivers of water, that bringeth forth his heart ; who hath not liſted up his soul unto
fruit in his season ; his leaf also shall not vanity, nor sworn deceitfully .
wither ; and whatsoever he doeth shall 5. He shall receive the blessing from the
prosper. Lord , and righteousness from the God of his
4. The ungodly are not so : but are like the salvation.
chaff which the wind driveth away. 6. This is the generation of them that seek
5. Therefore the ungodly shall not stand in him , that seek thy face, O Jacob .
the judgment, nor sinners in the congregation 7. Lift up your heads, O ye gates ; and be
of the righteous. ye lift up, ye everlasting doors ; and the
King of glory shall come in .
6. For the Lord knoweth the way of the 8. Who is this King of glory ? The Lord
righteous : but the way of the ungodly shall strong and mighty, the Lord mighty in battle.
perish .
PSALM 23 .
9. Lift up your heads , O ye gates ; even
lift them up , ye everlasting doors ; and the
This is the perfect song of faith . We are all like sheep, and King of glory shall come in .
watching over us is a Shepherd, who knows our wants and will 10. Who is this King of glory ? The Lord
protect our weakness from the wolves. David had thought so of hosts, he is the King of glory .
much of God's kindness and the beauty of God's world, that he PSALM 27 .
felt certain God was leading him to even greater joy and peace.
**. I shall not want. ” Every man who loves the earth , and feels Here again is a noble utterance from a soul safe under God's
the beauty of God's work , knows that he will never want. overshadowing wings. David felt the nearness of God
because he felt the beauty of the earth and the power of the
universe. He was sure of God . In that faith he felt that
Thewant.
Lord is my shepherd ; I shall not nothing could hurt him . His last word is " wait . " If not in
2. He maketh me to lie down in green pas this world, then in the next , God will make all things plain.
tures : he leadeth me beside the still waters. The Lord is myI light ?andThe
myLord
salvation ;
is the
3. He restoreth my soul : he leadeth me strength of my life ; of whom shall I be
in the paths of righteousness for his name's afraid ?
sake . 2. When the wicked , even mine enemies
4. Yea , though I walk through the valley and my foes, came upon me to eat up my
of the shadow of death , I will fear no evil : flesh , they stumbled and fell .
for thou art with me ; thy rod and thy 3. Though an host should encamp against
staff they comfort me, my heart shall not fear : though war
5. Thou preparestme.a table before me in the should rise against me, in this will I be con
fident.
presence of mine enemies : thou anointest 4. One thing have I desired of the Lord ,
my head with oil ; my cup runneth over, that will I seek after ; that I may dwell in
6. Surely goodness and mercy shall follow the house of the Lord all the days of my
me all the days of my life : and I will dwell life , to behold the beauty of the Lord , and to
in the house of the Lord for ever . inquire in his temple.
X

1505
 CELLER LORE THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIESUn munt

5. For in the time of trouble he shall hide 15. The eyes of the Lord are upon the
me in his pavilion : in the secret of his righteous, and his ears are open unto their cry.
tabernacle shall he hide me ; he shall set me 16. The face of the Lord is against them
up upon a rock . that do evil , to cut off the remembrance of
6. And now shall mine head be lifted up them from the earth .
above mine enemies round about me : there- 17. The righteous cry , and the Lord heareth
fore will I offer in his tabernacle sacrifices of and delivereth them out of all their troubles.
joy ; I will sing, yea , I will sing praises unto 18. The Lord is nigh unto them that are
the Lord . of a broken heart ; and saveth such as be
7. Hear , O Lord , when I cry with my of a contrite spirit.
voice : have mercy also upon me, and 19. Many are the afflictions of the righteous :
answer me . but the Lord delivereth him out of them all .
8. When thou saidst, Seek ye my face ; 20. He keepeth all his bones : not one of
my heart said unto thee, Thy face , Lord , will them is broken .
I seek . 21. Evil shall slay the wicked : and they
9. Hide not thy face far from me ; put not that hate the righteous shall be desolate 1

thy servant away in anger : thou hast been 22. The Lord redeemeth the soul of his
my help ; leave me not, neither forsake me, servants : and none of them that trust in
O God of my salvation . him shall be desolate.
10. When my father and my mother forsake PSALM 46.
me, then the Lord will take me up.
11. Teach me thy way , O Lord, and lead This is one of the greatest songs of triumph. The man who
me in a plain path , because of mine enemies. believes in God is unconquerable by the world. No one can 1

hurt him : no sorrow can bow him down . In the midst of

12. Deliver me not over unto the will of
mine enemies : for false witnesses are risen disaster, he closes his eyes, folds his hands, and is still
up against me, and such as breathe out holding the thought of God's power and love, and knowing
that he is safe. “ Be still, and know that I am Gud . " Noisy
cruelty.
ILALALA
ILLULIZO

13. I had fainted , unless I had believed people never know the joy of drawing near to God by thought.
CELLE

OD
to seeliving
the thegoodness of the Lord in the land of Godsentis our refuge and .strength ,a very pre
14. Wait on the Lord : be of good courage , 2. Therefore will not we fear, though the
and he shall strengthen thine heart : wait , earth be removed , and though the mountains
I say , on the Lord . be carried into the midst of the sea .
3. Though the waters thereof roar and be
PSALM 34. troubled , though the mountains shake with
the swelling thereof.
Here is noble music : " O taste and see that the Lord is 4. There is a river , the streams whereof
gracious. " People do not think about God , or they would
shall make glad the city of God, the holy
know that thereis no happiness like thatwhich comes from place of the tabernacle of themost High.
realising the eternity and the power of the great , kind ,
gentle God . He is a fool who does not fear God. How can 5. God is in the midst of her ; she shall not
mortal man , who must die , do anything but feel reverence
be moved : God shall help her , and that
for a Being who is eternal and almighty ? To fear God right early.
6. The heathen raged , the kingdoms were
is to trust Him ; to trust Him is to be unafraid of death .
moved : he uttered his voice, the earth
WILL bless the Lord at all times :: his melted.
I praise shall continually be in my mouth . 7. The Lord of hosts is with us ; the God of
2. Mysoul shall make her boast in the Lord : Jacob is our refuge.
the humble shall hear thereof, and be glad. 8. Come , behold the works of the Lord ,
3. O magnify the Lord with me, and let us what desolations he hath made in the earth .
exalt his name together. 9. He maketh wars to cease unto the end
4 . I sought the Lord, and he heard me, and of the earth ; he breaketh the bow , and
delivered me from all my fears . cutteth the spear in sunder ; he burneth the
5. They looked unto him , and were chariot in the fire .
lightened : and their faces were not ashamed. 10. Be still , and know that I am God ; I
6. This poor man cried , and the Lord heard will be exalted among the heathen , I will
him , and saved him out of all his troubles. be exalted in the earth .
7. The angel of the Lord encampeth round 11. The Lord of hosts is with us ; the God
about them that fear him , and delivereth of Jacob is our refuge.
them .
8. O taste and see that the Lord is good : PSALM 90.
blessed is the man that trusteth in him . This mighty Psalm brings home to every sensible and
9. O fear the Lord , yethathisfear
saints : for eternity
thoughtfulandperson the shortness of man's life, and the
there is no want to them him . power of High God . Generations pass
10. The young lions do lack, and suffer away like waves moving to the shore. God remaineth .
TOT
BOETIT
TYYTY

hunger : but they that seek the Lord shall If anyone will but " number bis days ” - that is to say,
if he will think how every day of his life he is
not want any good thing .
11. Come, ye children , hearken unto me : but hurrying towards the mystery of death , surely he
I will teach you the fear of the Lord . will bow himself before a Power which exists for ever
12. What man is he that desireth life , and and ever and is onnipotent. Compare the grandest
loveth many days, that he may see good ? buildings of London with a single weed in the garden.
13. Keep thy tongue from evil, and thy Then think of the pageantof the stars, the march of the
worlds in space. Let the beauty of God be upon you.
lips from speaking guile.
14. Depart
peace, from evil,
and pursue it. and do good ; seek Lord, thou
in all hast been our dwelling place
generations.
1596
 BY THE WATERS OF BABYLON WE SAT DOWN & WEPT

SEARKI

This beautiful picture, painted by Herbert Schmalz, illustrates Psalm 137, on page 1599.
It is reproduced here by permission of Messrs. Landeker & Brown, the publishers.
COMITATTUTTO TUXIT VOITO pronunnuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu
1597
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
2. Before the mountains were brought forth , 9. He will not always chide ; neither will
or ever thou hadst formed the earth and the he keep his anger for ever.
world , even from everlasting to everlasting , 10. He hath not dealt with us after our
thou art God . sins , nor rewarded us according to our
3. Thou turnest man to destruction ; iniquities.
and sayest, Return , ye children of men . 11. For as the heaven is high above the
4. For a thousand years in thy sight are earth , so great is his mercy toward them that
but as yesterday when it is past, and as a fear him .
watch in the night. 12. As far as the east is from the west ,
5. Thou carriest them away as with aa flood ; so far hath he removed our transgressions
they are as a sleep ; in the morning they are from us.
like grass which groweth up. 13. Like as a father pitieth his children ,
6. In the morning it flourisheth , and so the Lord pitieth them that fear him .
groweth up ;in the evening it is cut down , 14. For he knoweth our frame ; he re
and withereth . membereth that we are dust.
7. For we are consumed by thine anger , 15. As for man , his days are as grass :
and by thy wrath are we troubled . as a flower of the field , so he flourisheth .
8. Thou hast set our inquities before thee, 16. For the wind passeth over it, and it is
our secret sins in the light of thy countenance gone ; and the place thereof shall know it
no more .
9. For all our days are passed away in thy
wrath ; we spend our years as a tale that is 17. But the mercy of the Lord is from
told . everlasting to everlasting upon them that
10. The days of our years are threescore fear him , and his righteousness unto children's
years and ten ; and if by reason of strength children ;
they be fourscore years, yet is their strength 18. To such as keep his covenant, and to
labour and sorrow ; for it is soon cut off, those that remember his commandments to
and we fly away. do them .
11. Who knoweth the power of thine anger ? 19. The Lord hath prepared his throne in the
even according to thy fear, so is thy wrath. heavens ; and his kingdom ruleth over all.
12. So teach us to number our days , that 20. Bless the Lord , ye his angels, that
we may apply our hearts unto wisdom excel in strength , that do his commandments,
13. Return, O Lord , how long ? and let hearkening unto the voice of his word .
it repent thee concerning thy servants . 21. Bless ye the Lord, all ye his hosts ; ye
14. O satisfy us early with thy mercy ; that ministers of his, that do his pleasure.
we may rejoice and be glad all our days. 22. Bless the Lord, all his works in all
15. Make us glad according to the days places of his dominion : bless the Lord, o
wherein thou hast afflicted us, and the years my soul.
wherein we have seen evil . PSALM 137
16. Let thy work appear unto thy servants , In this Psalm Israel is reminded of its unhappiness.
and thy glory unto their children . Sorrow and suffering are certain to follow forgetful.
17. And let the beauty of the Lord our God ness of God . When we forget God and fall into
be upon us ; and establish thou the work of sin, we are taken captive by our own foolishness,
our hands upon us ; yea, the work of our It is hard then to sing the happy songs of joy in God's
hands establish thou it . Fatherhood. We are prisoners. We are not free.

PSALM 103. y
BY the rivers of Babylon, there we sat
Here David is in his happiest mood. He is full of thankful. down ; yea , we wept, when we remem
bered Zion .
ness .The thought of God's greatness and kindness has taken
hold of him . He feels how small is man : how infinite and 2. We hanged our harps upon the willows
wonderful is the Creator. Man is safe because God is so in the midst thereof.
great. The thought of the mercy of God - that is, His 3. For there they that carried us away
kindness, made David so happy that he sang in his joy. captive required of us a song ; and they
Blessthe Lord, O mysoul : and all that that wasted us required of us mirth , saying,
is within me , bless his holy name . Sing us one of the songs of Zion.
4. How shall we sing the Lord's song in a
2. Bless the Lord , O my soul , and forget strange
not all his benefits : land ?
h es
3. Who forgivet all thine iniquiti ; who 5. If I forget thee , O Jerusalem , let my
healeth all thy diseases ; right hand forget her cunning.
4. Who redeemeth thy life from destruction ; 6. If I do not remember thee, let my tongue
who crowneth thee with loving -kindness and cleave to the roof of my mouth ; if I prefer
tender mercies ; not Jerusalem above my chief joy.
5. Who satisfieth thy mouth with good 7. Remember, O Lord , the children of
things ; so that thy youth is renewed like Edom in the day of Jerusalem ; who said ,
the eagle's. Rase it , rase it , even to the foundation there
6. The Lord executeth righteousness and of.
judgment for all thatknown
are oppressed. 8.90 daughter of Babylon, who art to be
7 made
He his ways unto destroyed ; happy shall he be, that rewardeth
Moses, his acts unto the children of Israel . thee as thou hast served us .
8. The Lord is merciful and gracious, slow 9. Happy shall he be, that taketh and
to anger, and plenteous in mercy. dasheth thy little ones against the stones.
THE NEXT BIBLE STORIES REGIN OX PAGE 1071
1598 COLCENERO DUODENOLOROEBALORE AUTODE DOUTORG
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE WAVERLEY NOVELS

Wehave already readthe first of these famousstories, Rob

Waverley;"andwe
Roy “ Guy
Mannering ." “ Rob Roy," as to its plot, is one of the least satisfactory of Sir Walter
Scott's novels. But it contains one of his most charming characters in Diana Vernon .
Like Flora Maclvor in “ Waverley ," she is an enthusiastic Jacobite. The other note
worthy characters in the story, apart from the hero, are Bailie Nicol Jarvie, the
kind -hearted but prejudiced and comfort-loving magistrate, and Andrew Fairservice,
the humorous Scots gardener, who becomes thehero's servant. “ Guy Mannering,”
one of the best of the novels, contains in the portrait of Colonel Mannering a picture
of the author himself; and in Dominie Sampson, a world-famous study of a man, who,
though ungainly in person, uncouth in speech, and full ofponderous and largely useless
learning , was so devoted to the family that befriended him as to win general regard.

DIANA VERNON'S SECRET

From the Story of “ Rob Roy ”
"RANCIS OSBALDI
FRA STONE , the hero
CONTINUED FROM 1496
of “ Rob Roy," is the
son of an English merchant.
Like Waverley, he becomes un
wittingly involved in Jacobite
intrigues. Escaping into Scotland,
he enters the country of Rob Roy,
the outlawed Highland chieftain—that
between Glasgow , Stirling, and Ben
Lomond-in search of documents on
which the credit of his father's firm panions at the Hall, but piqued by
depends. In this quest he is befriended jealous
by the outlaw, after whom the novel
is named. The story is written in the
first person , and is supposed to be told
by Francis Osbaldistone.
Rob Roy Macgregor Campbell was
result
originally a cattle -drover. As a result
of certain speculations, for which he
had borrowed money from the Duke
of Montrose, his lands were seized,
his property was plundered, and his wife
and children were turned adrift in mid-
winter. He then declared open war on
the duke . The year in which we meet
him in the pages of Scott's novel is
that of the first Jacobite rising of 1715 .
Frank Osbaldistone first met Diana
Vernon at the house of his uncle,
Sir Hildebrand, in the Cheviot Hills.
She was the niece of Sir Hildebrand,
who had six sons, among them Rash-
leigh. Soon after his arrival at his
uncle's seat , Frank Osbaldistone was
informed , to his chagrin , that by a
special family arrangement “ Die "
Vernon was to marry on of the sons
AUTOROUTEAU
1599
of Sir Hildebrand. Of
these Rashleigh was a
Richard III . in appear
ance— “ in all but his hump
back ." Of his brothers, Percival
was a drunkard ; Thorncliff, a
bully ; John, a boor ; Richard, a
gambler ; Wilfred, a fool ; Rash
leigh was the scholar. They ali met
with untimely deaths.
Contemptuous of his male com
suspicion of the proffered
friendliness of Die Vernon , Frank made
too free with the wine -cup, and, striking
the sneering Rashleigh, had drawn his
sword on Thorncliff, when the two
were separated by the others. Re
pentance came with the morning, when
all except Thorncliff and Rashleigh
endeavoured with clumsy kindness to
remove the painful impression of the
previous evening.
Invited by Die to the library, Frank
was cross-questioned at considerable
length as to what Rashleigh had said
about her . After trying by all the
means in his power to evade direct
questions, he was at length compelled
to admit that Rashleigh had told him
the arrangement by which she was to
marry Thorncliff.
“ But, besides all this ," pursued
Diana, “ Rashleigh said something of
himself with relation to me. Did he
not ? ”
" He certainly hinted that were it not
for the idea of supplanting his brother,
 LUKITUO
- THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
he would now , in consequence of his
9 romance of her situation ,” the narrator
change of profession ( he was to go into
an office instead of the Church ) be de-
sirous that the word Rashleigh should
fill up the blank in the dispensation
instead of the word Thorncliff .”
D'ANASHISE TOLD OF THE FALSENESS OF there was an expression of dignity in
RASHLEIGH
" Ay ? Indeed ? " she replied . “ Was
he so very condescending ? Too much
honour for his humble handmaid, Diana
Vernon. And she , I suppose , was to be
enraptured with joy could such a sub-
stitute be effected ? "
“ To confess the truth , he intimated
as much , and even further insinuated
“ What ? Let me hear it all ! ”
she exclaimed hastily .
“ That he had broken off your
mutual intimacy, lest it should have
given rise to an affection by which his
destination to the Church would not
permit him to profit.”
“ I am obliged to him for his consid-
eration ," replied Miss Vernon , every
feature of her fine countenance taxed
to express the most supreme degree of
scorn and contempt. She paused a
moment, and then said , with her usual
composure : “ There is but little that
I have heard from you which I did not
expect to hear, and which I ought not
to have expected ; because, barring
one circumstance, it is all very true.
But as there are some poisons so active
that a few drops, it is said, will infect
a whole fountain , so there is one false-
hood in Rashleigh's communication
powerful enough to corrupt the whole
well in which Truth herself is said to
have dwelt.. It is the leading and
foul falschood that, knowing Rashleigh
as I have reason too well to know him ,
any circumstance on earth could make
me think of sharing my lot with him .
HE ROMANTIC
THE POSITION OF THE WIN .
SOME DIANA VERNON
“ No," she continued, with a sort of
inward shuddering that seemed to
express involuntary horror, “ any lot
rather than that - the sot , the gambler,
the bully, the jockey, the insensate fool,
were a thousand times preferableto Rash-
leigh -- the convent, the gaol, the grave
shall be welcome before them all.”
“ There was a sad and melancholy
cadence in her voice, corresponding
with the strange and interesting
TRIBUY XUNTIVO OTROY
1600
MIGUU 2.4
goes on to say . “ So young, SO
beautiful, so untaught, SO much
left to herself, and deprived of all
the support and protection of female
friends, it is scarce metaphorical to
siy that my heart bled for her. Yet
her contempt of ceremony - of upright
feeling in her defiance of falsehood
of firm resolution in the manner in
which she contemplated the dangers
by which she was surrounded , which
blended my pity with the warmest
admiration . She seemed a princess
deserted by her subjects, and deprived
of her power, yet still scorning those
formal regulations of society which
are created for persons of an inferior
rank ; and , amid her difficulties , re
lying boldly and confidently on the
justice of Heaven , and the unshaken
constancy of her own mind. I offered
to express the mingled feelings of
sympathy and admiration with which
her unfortanate situation and her
high spirit combined to impress me,
but she imposed silence on me at once .”
ANCE OF
ROF ROMWORDS
THENEBRAVE A TRUE HERO.
“ I told you in jest , ” she said , " that
I disliked compliments - I now tell
you in earnest that I do not ask sym
pathy, and that I despise consolation.
What I have borne, I have borne .
What I am to bear I will sustain as I
may ; no word of commiseration can
make a burden feel one feather's weight
lighter to the slave who must carry
it. There is only one human being
who could have assisted me , and that
is he who has rather chosen to add to my
embarrassment, Rashleigh Osbaldistone.
“ Yes ! the time once was that I might
have learned to love that man , but what
should I have been in this world , and
the next, in body and soul, had I fallen
under the arts of this accomplished
villain ! He bears a charmed life ; you
cannot assail him without endangering
other lives, and wider destruction .
Had it been otherwise, in some hour of
justice he had hardly been safe, even
from this weak hand. I told you ," she
said , motioning me back to my seat ,
" that I needed no comforter. I now
tell you I need no avenger .
Rashleigh, soon after Miss" Vernon
had thus taken Frank into her
 CELLULUNTECEURETTER

DIANA VERNON AND THE MYSTERIOUS GLOVE

combo
DOM
en

MUUTTO
i

DOMENT
a

DO
F

TULILLEKALER.CIVA
LUCRANIU.
LILIA
tamam
ureLLINE
CUL
ELSA
ET
mei

In the romantic story of Diana Vernon, the charming heroine of Scott's stirring tale “ Rob Roy , " the manly young
hero, Francis Osbaldistone, who is in love with Diana, is greatly disturbed by finding in the library a strange
glove, which he knows must belong to someone who has visited Diana, and her explanation scarcely clears his mind
írom care ; but she has a good reason for keeping the secret of the glove, as we shall find when we read the story.
1601
 - THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
confidence, left to take up the posi-
tion in Mr. Osbaldistone's office which
Frank himself had abandoned . The
studies which Miss Vernon had begun
with Rashleigh, she now resumed with
Frank for her companion . Frank also
began to take some interest in a priest,
Father Vaughan , who appeared to
divide his time between Osbaldistone
Hallandabout half a dozenmansions THEROARDLANESEINE BIDSSHERSARAWEED
of Roman Catholic gentlemen in the
neighbourhood. About this priest there
was some mystery. He seemed to
enjoy the complete confidence of both
Diana and Rashleigh .
At the end of a few months' time,
during which he received no word from
his father, Frank learned from Miss
Vernon that Mr. Osbaldistone had
gone to Holland , leaving all his affairs
in the hands of Rashleigh. This news
was imparted in the library, and ac-
companied by the advice that Frank
should go to London and see his father's
confidential clerk. Whilst they were
talking Frank saw the tapestry shake
that covered the door of the secret
passage from Rashleigh's room, and
Diana asking him to leave her, he did
so with mingled feelings.
HE MYSTERY OF THE SECRET PASSAGE
THEBEHIND
THE TAPESTRY
Convinced that Miss Vernon was
secretly receiving a rival, Frank de- a charge of conspiracy, a charge which
cided to discover who the stranger was .
He convinced himself that he was
justified in doing this on theground
that it would be a service to Sir Hilde- supported.
brand , “ who was probably ignorant
of the intrigues carried on in his family ,"
and a still greater service to Miss
Vernon, “ whose frank simplicity of person who had been secreted at Osbaldi
character exposed her to so many
risks in maintaining a private corres-
pondence, perhaps with a person of
doubtful or dangerous character.”
Frank discovered a man's glove in the
library, and learned from Miss Vernon
that it belonged to one whom she
honoured, but was refused further
information on this point.
While his mind was still disturbed
with this discovery, Frank received a
letter informing him that his father
was in grave financial trouble, and that
Rashleigh had left London for Glasgow
with certain valuable papers. Owen ,
the confidential clerk , had been des-
patched to Glasgow to find Rashleigh,
1602
and Frank was asked to follow him .
It was necessary for Mr. Osbaldistone's
credit that the funds in Rashleigh's pos
session should be recovered by a certain
day, the 12th of September. On learn
ing this, Miss Vernon, in bidding Frank
farewell, put a packet into his hands,
instructing him what to do with it .
RECEIVES PACKET
“ Take this packet,” she said. “ Do
not open it until other and ordinary
means have failed . If you succeed by
your own exertions, I trust to your hon
our for destroying it without opening or
suffering it to be opened. But if not , you
may break the seal within ten days of
thefated day, and you will find directions
which may possibly be of service to
you. Adieu , Frank ; we never meet
more, but sometimes think of your
friend Die Vernon ."
Frank set out for Glasgow with Sir
Hildebrand's gardener, Andrew Fair
service, as his attendant. Very shortly
after his arrival in Glasgow he was
befriended by the fearless Rob Roy, to
whom , when he opened Die Vernon's
letter, he found that this epistle was
addressed. His next adventure was
an encounter with Rashleigh, from whom
he was separated by Rob Roy.
In the Highlands he was arrested on
his connection with Osbaldistone Hall
and the fact that he was found to have
been in communication with Rob Roy
But eventually all came
right. Frank recovered the missing
assets, and , what made equally for his
peace of mind, he found out that the
stone House was Die Vernon's own
father, a prominent Jacobite, who had
taken the name of “ Father Vaughan ”
as a disguise.
FRANCIS OSBALDISTONE COMES TO HIS
OWN , HAPPILY
At first Rashleigh had espoused the
Jacobite cause, but when he found that
his suit was rejected by Diana, he
went over to the other side, and his
treachery to Frank's father was followed
by even worse treachery to the Vernons .
He also behaved infamously to Rob Roy .
But punishment was meted out to him
in the end, and all ended happily with the
succession of Frank to the Osbaldistone
estates and his marriage to Diana.
 Kata TLDSTEEL

THE SMUGGLER'S REVENGE

Being the Romantic Tale of “ Guy Mannering ”
I was in the beginning of the month revenue vessel, and the smugglers only
IT of November, 19— when a young escaped by setting fire to their lugger,
English gentleman, who had just left the and taking to their boats, near a head
University of Oxford , made use of the land known as Warroch Point.
liberty afforded him to visit some parts of It happened that the Dominie and his
the North of England ; and curiosity young charge were walking in this direc
extended his tour into the county of tion when they were overtaken by
Dumfries. Losing his way one night, Kennedy. The child, seeing that
he found a hospitable welcome at the Kennedy was mounted , reminded him of
hands of Godfrey Bertram , the_laird a promised ride. The officer took the
of the impoverished estate of Ellan- boy with him, whilst the Dominie ,
gowan . The young Englishman was satisfied that his pupil was in safe hands,
Guy Mannering. His arrival happened returned to the house .
at the time of the birth of an heir to
the house of Ellangowa HOOW
W THE GIPSIES KIDNAPPED THE YOUNG
HEIR TO THE LANDS OF ELLANGOWAN
He stayed long enough to make the The next time Kennedy was seen,
acquaintance of his host's companion, he was lying dead at the foot of the
Dominie Sampson, " a poor, modest, cliff. At the summit of Warroch Point
humble scholar, who had won his way were signs of a struggle. But no sign
through the classics, but fallen to the was to be
of the heir of Ellangowangipsies
>
leeward in the voyage of life ” ; and found anywhere. The were
Meg Merrilees, a half-crazy woman, who arrested, but no evidence of their
was as devoted as the Dominie to the complicity in the outrage could be
house of Ellangowan, and who was discovered . That day a little sister to
regarded by the band of gipsies in the Harry Bertram was born , and the laird
locality as an extraordinary woman, was left a widower.
gifted with supernatural powers. Seventeen years later, Guy (now
EG MERRILEES DENOUNCES THE LAIRD Colonel ) Mannering, was once again in
the vicinity of Ellangowan. His wife
Another incident in Guy Mannering's had died in India, and his daughter,
stay at Ellangowan was his encounter Julia, was staying at the house of a
with one Dirk Hatteraick, a smuggler, friend in Westmorland. The colonel,
who appeared to be in league with Meg who had returned from the East full
Merrilees and the gipsies. About this of honours and a rich man , stopped at
time Godfrey Bertram was made a the village of Kippletringan, at the
Justice of the Peace, and one of the small but comfortable inn of the
first uses he made of the power thus Gordon Arms , which was kept by Mrs.
conferred upon him was to eject the MacCandlish . Here he learned that
gipsies from a spot called Derncleugh. creditors were in possession of the
This action broughtdown upon him the Ellangowan estate, which was about to
curse of Meg Merrilees, whose nephew be sold by auction. It appeared that one,
had been given up to the press-gang , but Gilbert Glossin, a man who had risen
who still preserved her devotion to by crooked means and whom the laird
the laird's son, little Harry Bertram , had befriended , was especially anxious
“ one of the most lovely children who to secure the property.
cver made a sword and a grenadier's THE
)
HE TRIUMPH OF A RASCAL AND THE
cap of rushes .” Harry's education was SAD END OF GODFREY BERTRAM
entrusted to the Dominie, and these two The colonel , after communicating
were always together. with the Sheriff-substitute MacMorlan,
When he had moved on the gipsies, attended the sale. His old host the
the laird set to work against the laird, now very feeble, was carried to
smugglers.. This work was taken up the green before the old castle, so as to be
with much energy by an excise officer, out of sight of the “ unco' spectacle
named Frank Kennedy. One day Dirk at the New Place. He was accompanied
Hatteraick's lugger was chased by a by his daughter, Lucy, and the
DOUDOIR ORTODO OKROUHOITT URBOOT OEM OUT
1603
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS-
Dominie. The son of a neighbouring
landlord , Charles Hazlewood , was also
in sympathetic attendance , especially
where Lucy was concerned . But all the
precautions did not serve to ward off an
encounter between the old laird and
Glossin .
THEL SADE END OF THE OLD LAIRD
ELLANGOWAN
This terrible result in the
had
sudden death of the laird , as a con-
sequence of which the sale was sus-
pended till Miss Bertram could con-
sult with her friends . During this
interval the colonel left the neigh-
bourhood to visit his own daughter,
and Lucy Bertram and the Dominie
found refuge in the household of
MacMorlan .
Owing to delay on the part of a mes-
senger of the colonel, there was no
bid against Glossin when the sale of El .
langowan took place, but people com-
mented on the fact that had the heir
but lived , the transfer would not have
been possible.
Colonel Mannering's journey to West-
morland was due to a letter he had
received from his daughter's guardian,
Mr. Arthur Mervyn . In this epistle
Mr. Mervyn alluded to Miss Manner-
ing's apparent romantic attachment
to some unknown musician, who
serenaded her from the lake below
Mervyn Hall. This nocturnal minstrel
was known to Miss Mannering by the a house for me, decently furnished , and
Tour
name of Brown . Brown had been a
cadet in the colonel's regiment in India .
His origin was obscure, but he was in
other respects a young man of great
promise. His attentions had been paid
to Miss Mannering whilst he was in
India . The colonel did not know this.
THE COLONEL FIGHTS A DUEL WITH HIS
THEDAUGHTER'S SWEETHEART
He did not know either that Brown
had been encouraged by Mrs. Manner
ing. Tales against him were brought
to the colonel, and one day this gallant
officer had called out the young man
to a duel. Brown had fallen, and , a
body of native marauders appearing
after the first shots had been fired ,
Brown was left on the ground for dead . an excellent disposition in action , but
Ever since it had been a source of grief
to the colonel that he had been so hasty.
At Mervyn Hall Miss Mannering
learned that Brown still lived. Her lot
was not regarded by herself as a happy
MERRYMA XXX TITUTETER
one. Her guardian was thoughtful and
kind, but she feared his wife. And the
colonel's relations to her may be
gleaned from the fact that she had been
separated from her girl friend on ac
count of an ungrammatical phrase in an
Italian exercise and three false notes
OF in a piece of music.
The colonel took a house- “ Wood
bourne ” -near Ellangowan, and de
cided that his daughter should live
with him there and have as a com
panion Lucy Bertram . As for the
Dominie, whose life seemed to depend
upon his remaining in attendance on
the daughter of his old patron , the
colonel decided that he should have the
task of arranging his large library. The
scene in which Colonel Mannering
communicated this intention to Julia
is very brightly described - Julia is
writing to the friend from whom she
had been separated .
MANNERING'S AMUSING INTER
COLLONEL
VIEW WITH HIS LIVELY DAUGHTER
“ I have now had an interview with
my father, as confidential as, I presume,
he means to allow me. He requested
me to -day, after breakfast, to walk
with him into the library : my knees,
Matilda, shook under me, and it is no
exaggeration to say I could scarce
follow him into the room . ' Julia,'
he said, 'my agent writes me from
Scotland, that he has been able to hire
with the necessary accommodation for
my family — it is within three miles of
that I designed to purchase.' Then
he made a pause, and seemed to expect
an answer .
Whatever place of residence suits
you , sir, must be perfectly agreeable
to me !
Umph ! I do not propose, how
ever, Julia , that you shall reside quite
alone in this house during the winter .'
5. Mr. and Mrs. Mervyn,' thought I
to myself.
Whatever company is agreeable
to you, sir— ' I answered aloud.
Oh , there is a little too much of
this universal spirit of submission ;
your constantly repeating the jargon
of it puts me in mind of the eternal
salaams of our black dependents in
the East. In short, Julia, I know you
have a relish for society, and I intend
ton TTXXTTOO EXTRATERRA UUTTUDES
1604
 DELL LUCE U mogmunun
THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
to invite a young person , the daughter
of a deceased friend, to spend a few
months with us . '
Not a governess ! ' exclaimed poor
I , my fears at that moment totally
getting the better of my prudence.
No, not a governess, Miss Manner-
ing,' replied the colonel somewhat
sternly, but a young lady from whose
excellent example, bred as she has been
in the school of adversity, I trust you
may learn the art to govern yourself.'
" Is this young lady a Scotch
woman, papa ??
“ ' Yes ' drily enough .
" Has she much or the accent, sir ? '
EXTTON
TYTT
MEG MERRILEES CURSED THE LAIRD OF ELLANGOWAN AS HE RODE BY
" Much ! ' answered my father
hastily. “ Do you think I care about
a's and aa's, and i's and ee's ? I tell
you , Julia, I am serious in the matter.
I have resolved that this young
lady shall be aa member of my family for
somemonths, and I expect you will pay
her that attention which is due to mis-
fortune and virtue. '
" Certainly, sir.'-After a pause.-
' Has she anyattendant ? Because, you
know, I must provide for her proper
accommodation if she is without one. '
" N -no - no - not properly an at-
tendant-- the chaplain who lived with
POIZERVIT
1605
her father is a very good sort of man ,
and I believe I shall make room for
him in the house . '
Chaplain , papa ? But will he read
us the Church of England service ? '
66
" The apparent simplicity with
which I asked this question got the
better of his gravity . Come, Julia,'
he said, ' you are a sad girl, but I gain
nothing by scolding you. Of these
two strangers the young lady is one
whom you cannot fail, I think , to love ;
the person whom , for want of a better
term , I called chaplain, is a very worthy
and somewhat ridiculous personage,who
will never find out you laugh at him,
if you don't laugh very loud indeed .'
“ ' Dear papa ! I am delighted with
ihat part of his character. But pray ,
is the house we are going to as pleasantly
situated as this ? '
“ Not, perhaps, as much to your taste
—there is no lake under the windows,
and you will be under the necessity of
having all your music within doors .
6
“ This ended the keen encounter
of our wits ; for you may believe,
Matilda , it quelled all my courage to
reply. "
Later, when the Mannerings, Miss
Bertram , and the were
Dominie
CIUTO
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS

together at Woodbourne, the colonel Stung by this treatment, Brown sprang

took an opportunity to ask his daughter
how she liked their guests .
“ Oh , " was the reply, “ Miss Ber- went off in the scuffle, Hazlewood was
tram of all things. But this is a most
original parson --why, dear sir, no
human being will be able to look at
him without laughing ."
“ While he is under my roof , Julia ,
everyone must learn to do so .”
“ But , papa, the very footmen
could not keep their gravity !
“Then let them stripand
off mylivery,”
laugh
said colonel
the , laugh at
their leisure . Mr. Sampson is a man
whom I esteem for his simplicity and
benevolence of character."
“ Oh, I am convinced of his generosity,
too ,” said this lively lady ; " he can-
not liſt a spoonful of soup to his mouth schemed tohave him carried off by the
without bestowing a share on everything smugglers,so that he, Glossin, might con
round .”
COLONEL MANNERING SAYS A GOOD WORD
FOR
“ Julia, you are incorrigible ; but,
remember, I expect your mirth on this
subject to be under such restraint
that it shall neither offend this worthy
man's feelings nor those of Miss Ber-
tram , who may be more apt to feel on
his account than he on his own . And
so, good night, my dear ; and recollect
that, though Mr. Sampson has certainly
not sacrificed to the graces, there are
many things in this world more truly
deserving of ridicule than either awk-
wardness of manners or simplicity of
character ."
The reader, like Miss Mannering,
will surely arrive at the same
clusion as Colonel Mannering.
Brown , unaware of the cause of the
colonel's dislike, found his way to the
vicinity of Woodbourne. After meeting
with Meg Merrilees, he encountered
Miss Mannering, Miss Bertram , and
Mr. Hazlewood, when these three were
out walking. On seeing him so
expectedly , Julia screamed.
Hazlewood mistook the scream
one of fright, and Brown's appear-
ance, owing to a midnight adventure, ing and Harry Bertram , and when Julia
was not of a kind to arouse confi-
dence at first sight.
Consequently young Hazlewood
raised a gun he was carrying and , point-
ing it at the man he regarded as a
smuggler, threatened to fire at
intruder if he did not move away .
at Hazlewood with the intention of
taking the gun from him . The weapon
wounded, and, the screams of the women
bringing assistance , Brown made his
escape from the scene .
LOST HEIR TO THE HOUSE OF
THEELLANGOWAN IS FOUND AT LAST
His case now seemed a hopeless one,
especially as evidence was found of
his relations with Meg Merrilees, and
the gipsies had attacked Colonel
Mannering's house. After a series of
other adventures he was arrested by
Gilbert Glossin, charged with an attack
on young Hazlewood. Glossin quickly
identified him with Harry Bertram ,
the missing heir of Ellangowan, and
tinue at Ellangowan . But others, Meg
Merrilees included, had discovered that
Brown and Bertram were one and the
same person, and eventually he was
restored to his own and his wrongs
were righted.
It appeared that when the smugglers
attacked and killed Frank Kennedy at
Warroch Point , the child's life was
saved at the intercession of Meg
Merrilees. But the boy was taken to
Holland . The re he found a pro
tector, and thence he made his way to
India, still ignorant of his parentage.
After Colonel Mannering's return to
England, Brown, as young Bertram
was called after his patron in Holland,
was given a captaincy. Glossin was
con- a party to the kidnapping at Warroch
Point, and Glossin all but succeeded
in getting rid of the heir to the estates
he had bought. But his ill deeds found
him out , and he died miserably—an
example of a man whose natural gifts,
rightly used, should have brought him
both riches and honour.
un W COLONEL MANNERING BECAME ONE
Mr. HOWOF THE HAPPIEST MEN ALIVE
as Misunderstandings were happily
cleared away between Colonel Manner
became the latter's wife, the colonel
was among the happiest of men . His
delight even rivalled that of the Dominie.
And with the announcement of a wed
ding between Charles Hazlewood and
the Lucy Bertram the story ends.
The next story of Famous Books is on 1645.
TRITTURE TXODY
1606
 THINGS TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO

an
STE

MAKING A TOY TO MEASURE THE WIND

ANY boycan make an wind will blow into the
interesting toy that CONTINUED FROM 1512 mouth of each in turn ,
will enable him to appre as the arms spin around.
ciate the force of the wind, The funnels should be
and even, to some extent, to tell the speed pushed in tightly, and string may be used
of the wind. The first things required are to tie them into place. Each funnel may
two pieces of wood 3 inches square and half be painted a different colour, and this will
an inch thick . Through the middle of these help to let us judge the speed at
make a hole about three-eighths of an inch which the wind blows them around.
in diameter. Now take Next we require a post erected in
four pieces of wood 15 the garden, so that the
inches long, 2 inches revolving speeder may be
wide, and half an inch mounted on top of it.
thick, as seen in picture 3. If there are any wooden
Near one end of each of these pieces clothes - posts in the
make a round hole I inch in garden itmay be mounted on top of one of
diameter. Now nail the two square them . Choose a post as far as possible
pieces to the edges of the four from any walls that would prevent the
long pieces in position 1. Speeder ready for mounting wind from having a free
shown in the picture 2 , course to reach the speeder .

2. Fixing arm to centrepiece
keeping the inside ends
of the long pieces a
little distance away
from the hole in the
middle of the square
pieces. Picture 2 shows
the first stage in this
operation . Care must be taken to make
the four pieces exactly at right angles,
and we may see if we have done so by
measuring the distances from tip to tip
of any two adjoining ones . These dis
tances should be all alike. We now
have something resembling somewhat
the top of a signpost at two cross -roads.
We can paint it any colour we like , so
that the wind -speeder , as we will call
it, may stand the weather, for it is to do
its work in the open air.
We now get four tin funnels or fillers,
4 or 6 inches diameter at 4. Speeder ready for work
the mouth , and into the
spout of each put a cork that will close the
end. These funnels we place in the round
holes which weremade near the tips of the
wooden arms. They must be put in all from
the sides, as seen in picture i , so that the
Oi
3. One of the four arnis
The next thing is to
get a washer - that is, a
small flat ring of iron
with a hole of, say;
half-inch size. Washers
are very cheap. We
shall also want a round
wire nail, not less than 5 inches long.
Now put the washer on top of the
wooden post, right in the middle, put
the speeder with its arms and funnels on
top of the washer, and drive the nail
down through the hole in the centre
of the speeder hrough the washer and
into the post until the head of the nail is
just about half an inch above the top of
the speeder. Now we can let the wind
do its work . It will send the speeder
merrily around when it blows briskly.
We can count how often the arms go
round in a minute, and the
different colours of the
funnel will enable us to count the revolutions
easily. If we find that one day the revolutions
are more per minute than on another day, we
can tell that the wind is stronger, and if the re
volutions are fewer the wind is not so strong.

Jöc
1607

GEOTELEK ULIM1LDTO ANODIZLE
THE HORSE FOR OUR TOY ZOO
Our horse is made of brown velveteen, legs
ing up from chin to throat. In stitching up the
, leave the bottoms open at the dotted line.
although good sateen looks very nice,
and both, being materials likely to fray, have
to be everywhere turned in at the raw edge.
The colour of the cotton should match that
of the material if possible .
The titting in of the nose -piece is the most
difficult part in making the horse ; but if
you put the point in the nose -piece on the
top of the horse's head, and stitch the edge
to the edge down past l'V to v and x , taking
no notice at all of the difference in shape, but
making the edges come together, with the
neatest possible work , it will not be difficult.
This is the first thing to do - fastening the
place to both sides of the face, and then join-
^^
EAR
EYE
NOSE
PIECE
do
Arood
UNDE HALF
PATTERNS FOR A HORSE
FOR OUR TOY ZOO
To be traced through tissue-paper
and cut out
AZXEVILLANILA
XEILU LLETTE ALLA
When the horse is finished , and the body
and thighs slufied , it is well, when sewing up
the under seam , to leave about an inch open
in a convenient place for adding a little more
wadding, if required, to the upper part of
the legs.
In the horse's legs we need four sticks of
wood , each about as thick as a slate pencil.
The bind legs take three and a quarter
inches, and the front legs two and three
quarter inches. Smooth off the sharp corners,
and pare the wood down a little at the hoof
end ." These ends must each be well covered
with Prout's glue, moulded to the shape of a
hoof, the bottoms being horse - shoe shape, and
made quite flat by being pressed while warm
on a moistened plate or slate, or anything
smooth and hard . The wooden legs must
then be poked into the ' trousers " les, which
are ready for them , and care taken that the
upper end is wel buried in the stufhing of the
body, or “ bones " will poke out in the
TAIL
UPPER HALF OF BODY
MY
OF BODY
<
EAR
1608 DYTI TYTTYYTT
 BANKA THE HORSE FOR OUR TOY ZOO
haunches, and make the horse look starved. the thigh part of the hind leg as plump as
The bottoms of the trousers must be possible, poking, tiny bits of wadding in
turned in, and sewn very tightly with double through the hole left in the under seam , until
thread just above the hoof, winding the wood cannot be seen anywhere,
the thread round several times before The horse's tail is about a square
fastening off. Push the extra piece inch of material turned in and folded
of stuff in the “ trouser " to the back and stitched to about the thickness of
part of the hoof, where it will form a pipe-stem round a bunch of brown
the fetlock. Then shape the leg by worsted or silk , from three to five
pulling the stuff very tightly round it inches long. The upper end is then
about three- quarters of an inch above rounded off, turned under and
the fetlock , and sewing it together on hemmed, single, into position as the
the inner side of the leg for about picture shows.
another three-quarters of an inch to The mane , of worsted or silk, is
make the thin part of the leg. Above B about two and a half inches long. It
this part let it come wider again, and is sewn on in double tufts, like the
for the front legs poke in from above The inner side of the lion's mane. The ears are made
enough wadding to make this wider horse's legs double and turned, like the cat's and
part look plump, and keep the wood from tiger's ears, but they are narrower and more
showing through the stuff. pointed. The openings are towards the face.
On the inner side, which is a good deal out The eyes are made of black beads, and the
of sight, the leg looks like the nose is marked in black
little sketch ( Ă ) shown here. worsted or silk along the
The stitches are made extra joins of the nose -piece,
large that you may easily giving a few extra stitches,
see where they should be. just like the sketch, to show
The hind leg has a little the large nostrils.
more work in it, because we If we are good at drawing,
have to make it poke out the pattern of the horse
where the big joint is. This given here should be en.
is allowed for in the cutting, larged from the copy to
but must be shown quite 534 inches from o on the
plainly by stitching in the chest to o at the tail ;
stuff close to the wood just while from xx on the top
here, leaving the corner The horse for our toy Zoo of the head to the bottom
bit sticking out. of the front leg should
There is another little sketch on this page be 578 inches, making all the other parts,
(B) which makes this quite clear. These of course, in proportion. If this is done
extra stitches are carried right through from the horse will be much more easily made
the inner to the outer side of the leg . Make and the effect better in every way.
HOW DID THE FROGS JUMP ON THE TUMBLERS ?
HAVE you seen little frogsjumpingabout neither upwards, downwards, crossways, nor
in the grass near a pond, or springing sideways. The dotted lines in the picture
away from under the show how the lines
leaves when you go sideways.
go to find straw JU !!! 则 A frog may not
berries in the straw jump on to a tumbler
berry bed ? How where another one is
easily they jump ! already seated , nor
See if you can find on to one which has
out how they jump already had a frog
on tumblers in this . seatedupon it. There
puzzle. are so many tumblers
Sixty -four tumblers to choose from that it
are arranged on a ku w F seems there must be
table in the form of many vacant seats for
a square, as shown
. the three frogs that
in the picture, eight
along each side and
: w Juul
want to jump ; but
remember that no
)QD:@.

the others in rows hou two frogs may jump

between
the of
Eighthave
tumblers
wote mu on to tumblers in the
same line.
frogs sitting on them. Кам
This problem of
Now , three of these the frogs is given in
frogs are going to Mr. Henry Dudeney's
jump on to other JAUH book of Canterbury
tumblers without
frogs on them , but
JU
so Puzzles.
The way the frogs
they must jump on to tumblers where they jumped is explained in that part of our
will still not be in a line with another frog , book beginning on page 1717.
DEDUCADOU
1609
Y
 A LITTLE
GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH
ama DOCG

WHAT TO DO IN THE MIDDLE OF OCTOBER

The subject of plantingy bulbs in the open approaching when we must put everything
ground has alread found a place in in order for the winter. The whole plot will
these articles, but it is possible that a good have to be dug over , but it will be most
many varieties could not be planted earlier important not to injure the hardy plants that
than the presenttime , as the little plot was will remain . Therefore, where there are many
full of summer and autumn flowers . . All this of these , it is safer to dig with a fork than
month bulb - planting in the open ground can with a spade , for, of course, a spade is much
take place ; yes, and even early in November in danger of cutting roots through if it comes
where necessary, but we must bear in mind across them . Annual plants may all be
pulled up and carted away as they cease
that the sooner it is done the better .
Eno ughof has alread y been said as tothin
thek
man ner planting . To-day we will flower
to We . t remember that many of our
mus
for a few moments of another , and , to some hardy perennial plants die down for the
of us, quite the most fascinating and interest- winter, their leaves and stems wither and
ing method of growing bulbs. It means, as die, but on no account must we conclude
it were , a garden of flowers in the house , for that the plant is dead ; the roots are very
we are going to consider the growing of all much alive, and in the spring beautiful fresh
kinds of bulbous plants in glass or china young growth will peep through the soil.
Nature has a wonderful way
of using all sorts of methods
bowls .
First of all we obtain our to enable her hardy plants to
bowls , and the prettier they pass the winter safely. Some,
are the better, though even like these hardy perennials,
pudding basins would do. In are, as it were , going to sleep ,
the bottom of the bowls some
and some , like the bulbous
plants — the snowdrops , and
bits of charcoal may be winter aconites, and others
placed ; charcoal keeps every:
thing sweet and healthy, and are waking up, for these take
it is a capital plan to have a their sleep during the hot
little always at hand , and even summer months. Some plants
to mix a little with potting remain fresh and green winter
soil when replanting any of and summer alike, like the
wallflowers, the beautiful
potto plan
ourBut ts. little dwarf gentian , and the
return to our bowls .
Uponnutthe
coco e andoal
fibrcharc l mixed ,
shelwe place Hyacinths grown in a bowl pinks and carnations. Just
as everything was made neat
tha
and t itthis
maycanbebeasbou ght, mixed together in and trim for the summer, so during the next
well to say
the right proportions, at the rate of seven few weeks must everything be made neat
pounds for a shilling, and charcoal at about and tidy for the winter. All dead leaves ,
threepence per pound . We bury the bulbs in stems , etc., should be cleared away , and
the fibre and keep it in the dark , just as was stakes taken up and stored , except where
described for bulbs planted in ordinary plants, like chrysanthsemums, need them still .
flower -pots in soil, and for about the same Now , if our garden were only made and
length of time , the reason being, as we shall planted in the spring , our hardy plants will
not need dividing , but if they have
remember, to encourage the been made two or three seasons
growth of the roots before top then probably some of them will be
all the better for it. Say we have
growth nsng
begieri . some large clumps of campanulas
The wat is an important --the beautiful blue or white bell
consideration , and we quote the
owinyg dire
ticularl
foll clearctio
andnseas asy bein
to fol par: Preparing the bowl with Aowers. We lift the whole clump ,
g low
“ Care should be taken that the charcoal and coconut fibre and take a sharp knife and cut it
into three or four portions, and
e isure
or fail
fibr nevisersure d toe . getIf dry,
to ensu
allowe the bowls are replant each one separately . The reason we
filled with water once a week , and then tilted, divide clumps that have grown to a large size
pouringeoff theing surpluslywater,t that will ensure is this : they throw up too many flowering
the fibr keep even mois throughout the stems for these to be well nourished and
bowl.” After the bowls are brought from produce a fine blossom , and , in consequence ,
towards the centre the plant grows poor.
veryr stron
thei g light
dark quar a fewshou
tersforthey days,ld but after
bekep thatm
t fro We should remember that it is good for the
they may be placed in some sunny spot close future welfare of a plant to replant it on a
to the window , and during the winter they different spot from that which it has been
should be kept free from frost. Narcissus occupying . If we do not need all the pieces
are very beautiful grown in this way ; so are we can make of a divided plant, we should
the delicate -looking little Roman hyacinths. replant the strong or outer portions of our
As the summer and autumn flowers fade campanula ; and ifwe have any seedling plants
in the garden a very busy time begins. Much not yet put into their flowering quarters,
Jepends upon the weather, butthe time is we should get them there without delay .

1610
 ELDAR

MAKING MODELTOWN RAILWAY STATION

We will give Modeltown arailwaystation.
However nice Modeltown may be to
live in, there are times when the people who
live in it need to visit other towns, and we
must provide them with easy and pleasant
means of travelling. Besides, we must have
a railway, by means of which to bring goods
to the shops and the people, also by which
the things to be made in Modeltown work-
shops, and grown on Modeltown farms, may
be carried to other towns to be sold.
Our station will be a big one and a good
one. It will have two platforms, with rails
between, and a bridge over the railway line
by which passengers may cross from one
platform to the other. Itwill have waiting-
rooms and platform
sheds for the con
venience of the pas
sengers , a house for
the station -master, a
booking -office, where
the booking clerk
issues the railway
on it. This is the part that we shall make
first. It is seen from the front in picture 2 .
Now we turn to the plans, remembering the
instructions given on page 218 as to the
meaning of the three different kinds of lines
in the plans. We use the card of scale-rules
given away with Part 2 of THE CHILDREN'S
ENCYCLOPÆDIA . Picture 3 is the plan of the
waiting -room . It is half-scale, so that in
making our drawing on the card we use
scale -rule B to take the sizes from the plan ,
and make the lines on the card with the full
sized rule .
Having drawn it to the proper size on our
card, we cut it out and fold it up. Aswe fold
it up, it will look like picture 4. Then we
glue the edge slips into their
proper places, as we now
le know so well how to do.
The plan of thechimney is
OB given actual size in picture 5,
so in making it we use only
the full -sized rule both for
taking the sizes from the
picture and for making the

1. The design for Modeltown railway station

tickets, parcel and porters' rooms, and the lines on the card, or we trace it as explained
other parts of a busy modern railway station. on page 217. Picture 3 has on the roof part a
Although the task of making the railway line indicating the position into which the
station will not be difficult - indeed, it will chimney is to be fixed and glued. The next
besimpler than someof the buildingsthat we plan,given in picture6, is the ticket-col
have already made - it will be rather long, lector's box. It is half-scale, so we use
and we cannot easily do it all in one lesson. scale -rule B in taking the measurements,
So we shall divide the work of making the making our lines with the full-sized rule.
railway station into After it has been drawn and cut out,
two parts, and make we glue it to the side of the waiting
one part now, com room , its place being indicated by the
pleting the work in dotted lines on the end wall in picture
the next part of THE 3, and also in picture 2.
CHILDREN'S ENCY The next part to be made is a
CLOPÆDIA . shelter for this plat
Picture I shows us form . It consists of
the completed rail a back wall, a side
way station we are and a roof, with two
about to make. Here pillars to supportthe
we see the platform roof. The finished
and the platform 2. The down platform at Modeltown railway station shelter is seen in
buildings, with the footbridge over the rail- picture 7. Its plan is shown half-scale in
way. The platform nearest us in the picture 8, so that in making it we again use
picture is the down platform . We see the scale-rule B to take the sizes from the plan .
back of the waiting and other rooms erected Two dotted lines
of the plan have very
in the
1611
 GELEELLI

od O
3. Plan of waiting- room : half - scale . Use rule B
5. Plan of chimney
actual size

4. Folding the waiting 6. Plan of collector's box

room half-scale . Use rule B 7. Platform shelter

9. Bending roof of platform shelter

10. Plan of wall part : half-scale . Use rule B

8. Plan of shelter : half- scale. Use rule B 11. Edge of platform

Lod
DIRTY
BERER

12. Plan of down platform : one - third - scale. Use rule C

1612

13. Plan of seat : half
scale . Use rule B 15. The completed footbridge
16. Plan of footway of bridge :: half-scale.
17. First part of bridge bent into shape
19. Plan of stair sides : half- scale.
22. Plan ofsupport : half-scale
21. Stair bent into shape
tiny circles at each end. These lines have to
be half cut through , not on the side of the
card on which the drawing is, but on the
opposite side of the card. The two larger
circles on the plan give the positions for the
tops of the two pillars which we will after-
wards make to support the roof. Now , we
must be a little careful in bending up the card
after we have drawn the plan in picture 8
upon it and cut it out. Picture 9 shows
exactly how it should be bent up, and if we
follow the picture closely we cannot well do
it wrongly. The part of the wall to the right
of picture 2 isthe next thing to be made. Its
plan is given half-scale in picture 1o, so that
we take our measurements with scale -rule B.
Observe the dotted line that has the two small
circles near the ends. At this line the card
ILARIA
UELS
7
‫ הוויר‬#
14. Seat completed
Use rule B
anno
18. Plan of stairway : half-scale. Use rule B
un
Use rule B 20. Plan of support: half - scale. Use rule B
Userule B 23. Bridge with one stairway fixed
must be cut half through, not on the side of
the card upon which the drawing is,but upon
the opposite side. We put aside all the pieces
which we have made, and turn to make the
platforni, upon which we shall erect and fix
these pieces afterwards.
The plan of the platform is given one -third
scale in picture 12. We therefore use scale
rule C to take our measurements from the
plan, and make the lines upon our card with
the full-sized rule. The dotted lines which
have the tiny circles near each end mean, as
usual , that the card is to be half cut, not on
the drawing side of the card, but upon the
opposite side of the card. The way to bend
the edges of the platform is shown in pic
ture 11. This method of bending the platform
makes it much stronger than it would be if
DODOR
1613
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
the edges were bent merely like a square and bend over the card on the opposite side,
corner . The doubled -over part right at the so as to make two right-hand ana two left
edgeof the front of the platform should be hand sides. In two of these side-pieces the
glued where the card touches the card. This upright dotted line must be half cut, and bent
will give it both strength and rigidity. so as to be glued to the side of the bridge
Now we glue the waiting -room , the ticket- proper ; but in the other two the upright
collector's box, the short portion of the wall dotted line must be left uncut and unbent, so
and the shelter into their proper as to be glued to the end of the
positions on the platform . We bridge proper. Now we build
can see from the lines in the up the two stairways, and they
plan in picture 12, and from will look as seen in picture 21.
picture 2 , where the different The folded slips at the bottom
parts shouldgo. edges of the side -pieces must be
The next thing is a seatto go glued to the surface of the
under the shelter. Its plan is stair itself. Now the stairs are
given half-scale in picture 13, glued to the top part of the
so that we take our measure bridge, the top of each stair
ments with scale -rule B. In going into the spacesleft, and
cutting out this, we remember seen in picture 17. Picture 23
to half cut and bend the dotted shows one stairway fixed to
line with the tiny circles, on the the top part, and the other
opposite side of the card from stairway is fixed in the same
the drawing, and then we bend way. This picture also shows
up and glue the seat into proper the square pieces that come at
form , as seen in picture 14. the top of the sets of pillars, and
The down platform is com we now proceed to make and
plete asseen in picture 2, except fix these square pieces. We
that we have not made and fixed make two drawings of picture 21 ,
the columns or pillars. As which is half-scale, so that we
there are a good many other take sizes with scale -rule B and
columns to be made and fixed, make our drawings with the
we shall delay making these full - sized rule. We cut out and
now, as it will be better to make bend up these two pieces, and
them all together. then fix them under the bridge
The footbridge, which enables at each end of the top part. The
passengers to cross from one pieces when folded up will be
platform to the other, is the oblong, so that they will extend
next part of our railway station along the underside of the

1
that we will make.

ways are alike.

The com
pleted bridge, shown apart from
the platforms, is seen in picture
15. It consists of the footway
across, and two stairways, and
is supported by four sets of
columns, the lower ends of which
rest on the platforms. Picture
16 is the plan of the top part,
or footway. It is half-scale, so
that we take our measurements
with scale - rule B, and make the
lines on the card with our full
sized rule. It is very easy to
make and bend up , and after
being bent up it will be as seen
in picture 17. The two stair
We make two
drawings of the plan in picture
18, which is half-scale, so that
we take our measurements with
scale- rule B, and make our lines
with the full-sized .rule. We
must observe the dotted lines
with the small circles, and know
that here the card must be cut
half through , and bent on the
opposite side from the drawing. 24. third
Then we make four drawings
Planscale.
ofup platform
of the plan in picture 19, which is the side
of the stairs, two sides to each stair, mak-
ing four sides in all. This, again , is half-
scale, so that we use scale -rule B for the
measurements. In two of these we half cut
bridge, a little beyond the length
occupied by the tops of the
stairs. Picture 22 is the plan of
the square pieces for under the
middle of each stair.

from the plans. Having cut

It is also
half-scale, so that in making the
two drawings we use scale -rule
B to take the measurements
these out, we fold them up and
glue them to the platforms in
the middle of the two stairs.
Picture 23 shows this piece fixed
to one of the stairs, and the
other piece is fixed to the other
stair in the same way .
columns, but we will not make
the columns now as we cannot
The
stair is complete except for the

fix them until both platforms are

made,
The up platform is longer
than the down platform , and
contains the principal station
offices, the station-master's
house , and parcel and porters'
rooms. Hence the work of
: ono- making it is more than thatof
Use rule C making the down platform . The
first part that we shall make will be the plat
form , the plan of which is given one-third
scale in picture 24. Thus we use scale -rule
Cto take the measurements from the picture,
and we make the lines in the drawing with
1614
 -MAKING MODELTOWN RAILWAY STATION
the full -sized rule . Here again we must
observe that the dotted lines with the
small circles near each end must be half
cut through and bent over, not on the side
where the drawing is, but on the opposite
side. If we turn back to picture 11, we
shall see how we bent up the first platform ,
and we must do the same with this one.
After putting the glue all along the front edge
inside, we shall find that if we press the two
edges with the wooden rule we use for
making the drawings it will help us to make
neat, strong work . After having drawn and
cut out the plan of this platform , and after
bending and gluing it, it is ready for the
buildings that are to be made and erected on
it. But we will leave these buildings until
next part, as we have done enough for one
time. But before leaving what we have done,
we will make the columns or pillars that will
be used to support the stairs on both
platforms, and the sheds in front of the
waiting -rooms.
We require eight long columns and eight
short columns to support the stairs, and two
columns for the shed on the down platform .
That means 20 columns altogether. In
making the chapel we saw how to make
THE MAGICIAN'S JACKET
It is always well for a conjurer to give his one end of it round one of his wrists, as seen
trick a name that is likely to deceive his
audience , and wemay impress our friends by
calling the trick we are about to
describe the magician's jacket.
The magician's jacket has
nothing magical about it at all . It
is only an ordinary jacket, such
as any boy wears. In this trick it
is not the conjurer who really
does the trick ; it is the member
of his audience whom he asks
to assist him, and who acts as
an accomplice quite without
knowing it. The trick is that
the conjurer asks any one of his
audience to tie his hands together
behind his back with a stout
piece of string, and after he has
had his hands securely tied he
takes off his jacket, and after 1.
wards shows that his hands are
securely tied , just
as they were be-
fore. This looks
impossible ;
we shall see how
it can be done
easily.
The conjurer
takes a piece of
string. It should
be rather hard
string – not the
soft, pliable kind
-but need
be too thick .
abouth
ld esbe.
shouinch
leng t 18
He then asks
2. Both wrists tied someone to tie
paper columns. If, therefore, we refer to
pictures 16 and 17 on page 980, and to the
instructions how to make the columns on
page 981, we shall find what we want. An
ordinary lead pencil will do to form the
columns on , but if we can get a round
penholder a little thinner than an ordinary
lead pencil, we shall be able to make a neater
job : a lead pencil is just a little too thick.
We can take from the stair and from the plat
form shed the lengths for the columns. This
will not be difficult, and it is much better
to do this than it is to have all the sizes
given us.
Having made the columns, we may fix
the twointo their proper places below the
down- platform shed. The picture plans are
marked with the places where they fit. Then
we may fix into position the stair that we
have made, putting the columns on the plat
forms at the places marked on the plans.
We must be careful to place them upright,
and to glue them into position so, otherwise
our station when finished would look not at
all neat.
Having done all this, we may put the work
aside for two weeks, when we will proceed
with the buildings on the up platform .
in picture 1. Then, putting his two hands
behind his back, he asks that his other wrist
may be tied with the other end
of the string in the same way,
leaving just a few inches between
the two wrists. It is while this
is being done that the conjurer
manages so that the friend who
is making the knot acts as an
unconscious accomplice. While
the second wrist is being tied , as
seen in picture 2, the conjurer
pulls the two wrists apart, so
that the stringbetween themis
quite tight. This causes the
friend , unknown to himself,
to tie a slip-knot, which, how
ever, does not look like a slip
knot. Now comes the anxious
One wrist tied
time. First, the conjurer asks
someone to fold his jacket back
from his shoulders,
as he cannot get
his hands to his
but own shoulders.
Then he stands
back a little dis
tance, so that the
audience may not
detect what he is
doing He puts
one finger of the
hand that was tied
first behind the
not knot of the second
The wrist , as seen in
pict 3,,, andwilla
littleure pull
enable him to
widen the loop 3. Slipping the hand
1615
 -THINGS TO MAKE AND
round the wrist, so as to be able to withdraw
the wrist from the loop. When he has done
this his two hands are no longer tied together,
but he must be careful not to let the audience
see this. He pulls off his jacket without
showing his hands, and, as the jacket falls
behind him , he niust be careful to replace his
free wrist in the free loop before showing
that he has succeeded in getting his jacket
off.
The best way for him to do this is to go down
on his knees with his jacket behind him , and
to do it while his hands are concealed by his
jacket. Then , when he has got his wrist in
the loop again, and has pulled up the loop
tight as it was before, he comes forward , with
LITTLE PROBLEMS FOR CLEVER PEOPLE
These problems arecontinuedfrom
page 1512 and the answers below
refer to the problems on that page.
HOW MUCH FOR A HORSE AND A COW ?
96. “ I have just sold nine horses and
seven cows for £ 300, ” said Farmer Giles.
" I suppose you got more for each horse
than you did for each cow ? " asked his friend.
“ Yes, I got double," replied the farmer.
What was the price of the animals ?
WHO WAS RIGHT ?
“ There is only one more wicket to
97 .
fall ," said a boy who was watching a cricket
match , as the ninth man was going in .
64
No," said another boy, “ there are two."
>)
You are both wrong , said a third boy ;
" there are three."
Which of the three boys was correct ?
HOW MUCH DID THE GROCER LOSE ?
'98. Said the grocer, “ One of my customers
has failed, and I have lost a good customer.
I used to sell him tea at 60 per cent. profit
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 1512
(
90. The question is “ What does y - e - s
spell ? "
91. The profit of three handkerchiefs sold
at 4d. each is the same as the profit of one
handkerchief sold at 4 /2d. Therefore the
profit of one at 4 /2d. must have been three
times the profit of one at 4d . , and the differ-
ence between 4d. and 4 /2d. must have been
equal to the profit of two at 4d. Thus the
profit of one at 4d. must have been Ad .,
and the handkerchiefs must have cost 374 d.
each.
92. If Brown had taken all the luggage he
would have paid 5s. more excess than he
did. Therefore 5s. would have been the
excess charge on 120 lb. , which is 5 d. per
pound. As Smith paid iod. excess upon a
total weight of 120 İb. , his excess weight, at
20. per pound , must have been 20 lb. , so
that 100 lb. was the weight allowed free. As
Brown paid is. 3d. excess for the share he
took himself, that share must have been
100 lb. plus the number of halfpennies in
13. 3d. , or 130 lb., so that the total weight of
luggage was 250 lb.
93. Brown saved 155. , which, with coal at
THE NEXT THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO BEGIN ON PAGE 1717
1616
THINGS TO DO
his jacket in one hand , and receives the
applause which he deserves. He asks the
friend who tied the knot, and anyone else
who cares, to examine it, and say if it is as
it was before. Then he asks someone to
cut the string from his wrists.
This is an entertaining trick, and practice
will enable any man or boy to hold his wrists
so that friend cannot help making a
sliding knot. But it should be practised a
few times before being shown in public.
Nothing is more damaging to the reputation
of a conjurer, whether professional or
amateur, than a clumsily performed trick,
and a little time spent in acquiring perfection
is always advisable.
on cost price. He is going to pay 12s. 6d.
in the pound."'.
How much did the grocer lose ?
WHAT WAS ITS PRICE ?
99. “ During sale week,” said the draper
to a customer , we will allow 20 per cent.
off the prices marked on the goods, but next
week after the sale is over we will allow only
5 per cent. discount. ” After the sale was
over the lady bought something, and paid
for it 3s. more thanit would have cost during
the sale.
What was the marked price ?
WHAT WAS THE PRICE OF BACON ?
100. “ You can take this piece of bacon and
50 eggs for 6s. 8d.,” said the provision dealer.
* I have only 35. 4d ., " said the boy. “ Well,
take half of the bacon and 25 eggs," replied
the man . “ No, " said the boy " I will take
the whole of the bacon and 10 eggs .' The
provision dealer agreed to this arrangement.
What was the price of the bacon ?
255. a ton , was the price of 12 cwt. of coal .
As he received I cwt. per ton more th
exact weight, he must have ordered 12 tons
and received 12 tons 12 cwt.
94. The boatman got is . 4d. from the two
extra passengers , but as his total profit was
only 6d. more by having the two extra
passengers, the reduction of id . each to the
other passengers must have come to iod.
altogether, so that there must have been ten
passengers in the original number or 12 in all.
95. If the church clock struck three in the
same time as the town-hall clock struck two,
the interval between the strokes of the town
hall clock must have been twice as long as
the intervals between the strokes of the
church clock. Thus the clocks would strike
together at all alternate strokes. As they
struck i together, the church clock would
strike 3 when the town -hall clock struck 2 ;
the town-hall clock would then have only one
more stroke to make to tell the hour. Then
the church clock would strike 5 as the town
hall clock struck 3, and the latter would have
two more strokes to make to tell the hour.
Thus the time was 5 o'clock.
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
40
LÉHO READING CIBLE
SOME MORE
ow do you think
Nowyou will always
CONTINUED FROM 1504
know a VERB when
you see one ? Verbs are among the
most important words in the world,
so we must always be very polite to
them, pay them a good deal of atten-
tion, and never letthem pass without
noticing them. They are something
like kings among words, because most
of the other words are less important,
and the verbs rule over them.
Now I want to ask you three ques-
tions, which you must answer.
1. What did you do yesterday ?
9 TIME: ( 1 ) The timethat is gone, PAST
( 教A
WE PLAYED CRICKET.
2. What are you doing to-day ?
WE ARE PLAYING BALL.
3. What are you going to do to-
morrow ?
WE SHALL PLAY TIP-CAT.
Com
1617
BISER
ABOUT VERBS
tie
The first answer
tells me something
that you did yester
day ; it is now PAST and gone, and
you are no longer playing cricket. You
have had supper, and been to bed, and
had breakfast since . The second answer
tells me what you are doing now at the
PRESENT moment ; you are so busy
at playing ball that you can hardly 18
stop to speak to me. And the third
answer tells me what you are going to
do to -morrow : you are looking forward
to it, it is still in the FUTURE, and
you are wishing that to-day would come
to an end and to-morrow begin , so
that you might start your game.
So you see there are three sorts of
time ; (2 ) the time that is here now, this
very second, PRESENT time ; (3)
the time that is coming, but has not
yet come, FUTURE time. Every verb
can be used in all these three ways.
Let us try some more verbs and see.
If it was dinner -time, and you were
busy eating your dinner, you could say :
“ I HAD a good breakfast this morn
ing ; I AM HAVING a good dinner
now; I SHALL HAVE a good tea
this evening.”.
And if a friend saw you in the street ,
but just as he was running up to you
a big waggon came between you so
that you could not see each other, you
66
could say : He SAW me just then ;
he SEES me not now ; he WILL SEE
me again in a minute . "
Take any verb you like (such as
WALK, LOVE, CALL) and try it for
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
yourselves ; turn it into each one of
these three times. But there is one more
thing to remember ; we do not talk
about the TIMES of a verb, but about
the TENSES of a verb. TENSE just
means TIME , but it sounds more e
learned . And so you must call I RUN
the present TENSE ; I RAN , the past
TENSE ; and I WILL RUN , the future
TENSE of the verb TO RUN .
Here are some verses about past,
present, and future for you to learn :
Don't fret about the thing that's past,
And be no longer sad ;
Your troubles cannot always last,
Nor times be always bad .
Don't waste your time and idly dream I PUT my toys on the shelf.
About some future fight :
But like a man that rows up - stream ,
Pull hard with all your might.
So do your duty here and now,
The present is your own ;
And what you've done, and when and
how ,
The future will make known .
We have seen that there are different
TIMES of doing a thing - Past, Present,
Future: and so we have learned about is suffering something, or,to use another
the TENSES of a verb . I think that
by this time you see quite clearly the
difference between having learned your
lessons already and intending to learn
them at the last moment just before
going to school. The one is PAST, the
other is FUTURE ; while if you are
learning them now,, that is PRESENT.
But there is another great difference
that we all feel as we grow up, and that
is the difference between doing some-
thing ourselves and having something
done to us. Cruel boys like teasing
cats and dogs, but they do not like to
be teased themselves. It is very nice
from our point of view to catch fish, but
it is not very nice for the fish to be
caught. Many of us enjoy kicking a
foot-ball about, but if the foot- ball
could feel, I do not suppose that it
would enjoy being kicked.
Now, when a boy kicks aa foot-ball, he
says , I KICK the ball,” but if the ( (
foot- ball could speak , it would say, “ I
AM KICKED ." And when the fisher-
man feels a fish on the end of his line ,
he can say, “ I CATCH a fish,” but the
poor fish calls out to his father and
mother, “ Oh, dear, I AM CAUGHT."
1618
And if ever you pull poor Pussy's tail,
you could say, " I PULL her tail," but
she very likely says, “ My tail IS
PULLED by this naughty boy ; I must
scratch him to make him polite .">
Do you see the difference ? I KICK,
I CATCH , I PULL, mean that the per
son is doing something ; while I AM
KICKED , I AM CAUGHT, MY TAIL
IS PULLED , mean that the person or
animal or thing is having something
done to him or it . Here are some more
sentences to think out :
The boy WHIPS his top.
The boy is WHIPPED by his father.
Baby NURSES her doll.
Baby is NURSED by her mother.
I AM PUT on the shelf by my big
brother .
It is always quite easy to see the
difference between these two kinds of
sentences. Just ask yourself, “ Is the
person doing something, or having
something done to him ? " If he is
doing something, then he is ACTIVE
6
(which just means “ doing " ) ; if he is
having something done to him , then he
word, he is PASSIVE (which just means
a- suffering
verb that” tells
). Souswhen we comeis across
the person doing
something, we say that this verb is in
the ACTIVE VÕICE ; and when we
come to a verb that tells us the person
is suffering something or having some
thing done to him, we say it is in the
PASSIVE VOICE . The word VOICE
is a very funny one to use here, isn't it ?
It generally means the tone in which a
person speaks ( as “ This giant has a
squeaky voice ” ) , but we must remem
ber that verbs have voices .
There's all the difference in the world ,
As clearly I can see,
Betweendoing a thing to somebody else
And having it done to me.
It's very great fun other people to
tease,
Though sometimes it causes them pain ;
But when they pay me back, all the
jolliness flees,
I humbly beg pardon , go down on my
knees,
And stammer, ' Oh, please , let me off
this once, please,
And I never will do it again.' '
OLDU
 WRITING 2:

TOM AND NORA LEARN TO WRITE WITH INK

EFORE the next writing lesson, Tom H was quite ready for it, and did not do
BEFORE
and Nora were taken by their mother anything really new.
to buy two little glass inkpots, two G does not manage to join e at all,”
pens, and some blotting paper. Then said Tom, as he looked at the word Get.
they set about making pen -wipers from When you can write quite fast, you
a piece of black cloth , cutting out four will want to join every letter ," said his
rounds for each, scalloping the edges, mother. “ But that will not do yet, for
and sewing them together in the middle we have to walk before we can run .”
with pearl buttons. Tom wanted very much to find a way
' Now some nibs from the inkstand to make G join on, and he tried several
drawer, and we have everything ready ways on a piece of scribbling paper ;
for writing with pen and ink," said the but every one looked so ugly or awkward
children's mother. “ You notice the that at last his mother came to his
inkpots are only three -quarters full, assistance.
because ink is a nasty thing to spill “ Do you remember ," she said ,
for it stains so. In putting the " there is another way of making capital
pen into it , we take care not to dash G ? This is it , and Tom will
the pen against the bottom of the pot, have no difficulty in joining
this G to e. You see it has
but just dip it in so that the ink covers
the nib. Watch how I do it , and see
how, when not using the pen , I rest it
on the rim of the pot, so that the nib
is out of the ink. Remember there is
a tail like small g, and ioins
on like it .”
Nora had noticed that she and Tom
were writing the capitals in the order
G
ink in the nib, and therefore the pen of the alphabet, so she was not surprised
cannot be flourished about like a pencil. ” when the first of the new words to be
Tom and Nora looked carefully at written was Kate, the name of the
the pencilled copy their mother had nursemaid.
already set, and then started to write K , L, M and N were quite easy to
each of the following words : join, and Tom and Nora had worked

Alt Beck Con Dog Egy

Jat Get Hape Iste facks
Slate Lift_Meal
Met faNail
it
While these words were being copied ,
the mother pointed out how, when it
so hard with their new pens, and only
made one smudge between them, that
could be easily done, the capital their mother said they should rest and
letter joined on to the small letter to watch her make M and N in another
follow . For instance, A, C, E, H and way, as she had once promised. This
J joined quite comfortably . D was is how she wrote these letters :
more difficult, because it joined on to o
in dog with a long curve, much longer
than the one which ended the single
capital letter. Nora turned up her old
MN
" This way of making M and N is not
copies of D to compare the two. so common as the way you already
H had also a long loop to make to get know, and the letters are unlike small
to the top of o, but then, as Tom said , m and n ,” she remarked.
1619
 ARITHMETIC

HOW NUMBERS ARE DIVIDED

UPPOSE we have 28 marbles, which
SUPPOSE more tens than the number of groups.
we wish to divide amongst 7 boys.We were therefore able to put a ten
How many marbles shall we be able to into each group, without breaking the
give to each boy ? bundles. Having done this, we had not
Clearly, if we give each boy one enough bundles left to put another into
marble, we use 7 of the marbles. If each group , so we had to break the
we give each boy a second marble, we remaining bundle and proceed to deal
use another 7, which makes two sevens. ones into each group.
We see, then , that the number of In the case of the 28 marbles there
marbles each boy will get simply were not enough tens for us to begin by
depends on the number of sevens in 28. putting a ten into each group. We had,
Now, our multiplication table tells us therefore, to begin at once dealing ones
that four sevens make 28. Thus each into each group.
boy will have 4 marbles. This same idea has to be carried out
Now, this process of dividing 28 in the division of any other number.
marbles amongst 7 boys is evidently Suppose the number 956 is to be divided
the same thing as finding out how many by 4. We first divide the hundreds
times we can take away 7 from 28. into 4 groups. The number contains 9
Thus, division is repeated subtraction . hundreds ; we can therefore put 2
We must next notice that , if we had hundreds into each group. We now
been told that 28 marbles are divided have i hundred left over. This hun
amongst a certain number of boys , and dred consists , we know , of 10 tens .
each boy got 4 marbles , then we can Putting these with the other 5 tens , we
find out the number of boys . For have 15 tens altogether. We next
we have only to think how many 4's proceed to divide these tens amongst
make 28. We know that seven 4's make the 4 groups. There will be 3 tens for
28, so there must be 7 boys . each group , and 3 other tens will
Either of the results we have just be left over. Finally, we take these
obtained could be got by actually 3 remaining tens and separate them into
counting out the 28 marbles. We used thirty units. These, with the 6 units
the multiplication table , but the table of our number 956, make 36 units
itself was formed by counting. In a altogether. Then , dividing 36 units
similar way, we will now try to divide into 4 groups, we get 9 units for each
52 pencils into 4 equal groups. group . Thus, each group now contains
Suppose we have the pencils ar- 2 hundreds, 3 tens, 9 units — that is,
ranged in tens. There will be 5 tens, 956 divided by 4 gives 239.
and 2 odd pencils. Now, to divide To do our work on paper, we shall
these into 4 groups, we can begin put arrange it like this . Write
ting one of the tens into each group. 4 )956 the 4, which is called the
This will leave us with a bundle of ten divisor, in front of the
239
and the two odd pencils. If we separate number to be divided, 956
this remaining bundle, we shall have (this number is called the
twelve loose pencils. We have now only dividend ), and separate it from the 956
to count out these pencils into the four by a bracket. Then say, 4 into 9,
groups : we use 4 every time we put a 2, and i over. Put down 2 in the
pencil to each group, and since there are hundred's place — that is, under the 9. )
three 4's in the 12 pencils, we shall be Remember that the I over ” is I
able to put 3 more pencils to each group. hundred, and we have only to put this
Each group now consists of a bundle I before the 5 to know that there are
of ten , and three odd pencils — that is, now 15 tens. Next , say 4 into 15 , 3 ,
13 pencils , or 52 divided by 4 gives 13 . and 3 over. Put down 3 under the 5 .
We have divided 28 into 4 equal The “ 3 over are 3 tens , which , written
parts, and 52 into 4 equal parts. Let before the 6 units, make 36 units.
us now examine the process carefully. Finally, 4 into 36,9. Put 9 under the 6.
In the case of the 52 pencils we had ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES IN PART 14.
5 bundles of 10—that is, there were ( 1) 862. ( 2) 1. (3) 1340. (4) 1462. (5) 18.
1620
 JMUSICON sage
TWO NEW GAMES OF THE FAIRIES
WEE arehave already discovered that there surface. So, keeping our finger just in the
a great many things to learn middle of the note, we are to move our
before we can get the piano fairies to wrist slightly up and then down again,
tell us all their beautiful stories . about an inch each way. This game is
9

We have been playing the game called called the “ Fairies' See-saw ," and the
“ The Sleepy Arm ," have wenot ? The great thing to remember is that we
fairies look very pleased when they see must keep our arm quite loose ; there
our arms getting quite loose , because must never be the slightest stiffness.
they know we are starting on the right These are the games the fairies want
way, and they will be able to make us to play with each hand alternately ,
known to us their lovely secrets. So that is, first one and then the other
we must go on every day playing this for quite ten or twelve lessons, for
particular game, for in fairyland, as in everything we are doing is important.
every other land, we learn and know One day a little girl said to her
that practice makes perfect." mother :
The fairies tell us three things. They “" . It seems stupid to have to take so
tell us that we shall have to use ( 1 ) our much trouble, because clever people do
arms, ( 2 ) our hands, and ( 3) our fingers ; everything quickly .”
but we must get them into such good She was a funny girl to have such a
working order that we have not to think queer idea , was she not ? Perhaps we
about them , because we shall want all can guess the fairies' answer to such a
our mind , all our ears, yes, every bit of thought. They told her a little story,
our intelligence , to think the lovely sounds and now they are whispering it to us.
we want to hear. Once upon a time there was a little
When we are walking or running we boy named Felix Mendelssohn Bar
think of the place to which we want to tholdy ; in the nowadays he is always
go , do we not ? We do not keep called Mendelssohn. The pianoforte
worrying about the way we should put fairies were very fond of him , and he
our feet on the ground . We have done was devoted to them . He knew how
it so often that the movement has much they had to tell him , and he
become automatic—that is , the feet worked hard to find out all they wanted
seem to move entirely of their own him to know .
accord. That is just what must happen The days did not seem long enough
with our arms , our hands, our fingers. for all he had to do, and he used to get
We must exercise them so well that at up early so that no moments should be
last we shall feel they are just doing lost. If you and I had been in his
what we want , without any effort, with- home in Berlin , we should have found
out any trouble. him hard at work at five o'clock in the
To-day the fairies send us two new morning. He took one holiday in the
games of play. In the first one we go week, and that was on Sunday, which
to the table, not the piano. We must sit he very much enjoyed. Yet, though
down just as we do when we are playing he worked so hard , he was very far from
the piano, extend our hand about three being stupid. He played at a big con
inches above the table, then , quite cert when he was only nine years old,
slowly, we shut the hand, just as if we and by the time he had reached eleven
were gathering up sweets, and as our years of age, he had written quite a lot
fingers thus sweep towards the palm of of music for himself and for all music
our hand, we shall slightly raise the lovers. If ever we go to the Royal
wrist joint ; then we will let the hand Library in Berlin we shall be able to
bound back again to its first position. see some of his manuscripts, and I think
Our second game takes us to the we shall find how very neat they are ,
piano. We let the soft little pad of our because Mendelssohn took great pains
middle finger just touch Fairy C's note. over everything he did. He grew up,
We must only touch it very lightly, became a great artist, and went on
because we do not want to put the note writing beautiful music for you and for
down ; we just want to rest on its me to know and to love .
1621
 DRAWING AD

MAKING SIMPLE PATTERNS WITH FLOWERS

IN making patterns,when weget our and their clothes. But these flowers are
idea from flowers or leaves, we always used in their very simplest forms; the
have to leave out some of the details delicate stamens and cut-leaf edges of
because they confuse the eye, and very the rose are not suitable for wood and
fine work is only stone - carvings ,
suitable for pat and the great
terns seen quite secret of good de
close and where signs is tosuit the
very rich ornament decoration to the
is necessary. Sim material it is
ple designs and worked in.
simple colours are Boys and girls
the most success who can carve and
ful, and until we embroider can be
can draw very gin to make pat
beautifully, we terns for them
must not attempt selves now , and
anything elaborate. we will see what
The best way to we can invent
get a good idea of with a rose or any
the shape of the other flower as
flower is to brush- į patterns, one for
work it in neutral carving, and
tint — that is, to another for needle
mix some brown, Seed -vessels and bud of the rose work . Suppose we
grey, or even black have a frame to
paint, and make the best copy we can carve, we must have a pattern running
of all the parts of the flowers. all round , as the rose stem suits this
We will choose to -day some flower or style . We must have bold work , and
leaf - any flower will do—but one with we want contrast in all designs. The
five petals is best, rose and its leaves
because it is so use will give us this.
ful for decorating Of course, we are
all sorts of spaces. not going to copy
English children the illustrations
love the rose here, but invent
specially because for ourselves.
it is England's For embroidery,
favourite flower. we can have finer
It has been painted work . It can be
on shields, carved worked in silks or
on the ceilings of fine linen , and
churches and pal these are delicate
aces, and it was materials and need
worn as a badge delicate designs.
by the Houses of We can go a little
York and Lancas closer to the rose
ter, so that it gave for this, and have
its name to the the pleasure of
Wars of the Roses. copying the colours
We hear often too , but must not
The rose drawn in neutral tint from mature
of the golden lilies try to put all the
of France, and, years before either the colours in . This would mean failure.
Britons or the French people existed, Besides, we are not copying the rose
the Egyptians used the lotus flower for itself, only making a pretty suitable pat.
decorating their temples, their pottery, tern for our work out of ideas the rose
1622
 RELDRAWIN GRANDE

has given us, so we shall not attempt to we be

give all the stamens or the veining of gin to
the leaves, but make our pattern flat carve
and simple . them .
When we have sketched out the idea We
we can draw one corner very nicely, can
and use tracing paper for the other make
corners. Tracing paper can always be covers for our sketch
used in designing when we want to books and blotters and
other books, by
36 painting on dif
ferent coloured
linens. For this,
the designs look
best all in one or
two colours, with
a strong dark
outline. If we
want the pattern
lighter than the The rose drawn
background, we boldly forcarving
must use Chinese
White. We can paint all the
patterns white first, and after
wards, when it is quite dry,
paint over it ; or we can mix
The lotus, rose, and lily the colour first, taking care to
mix enough.
repeat exactly what we have already In most of our hobbies we find
drawn ; but we must be very careful to the need for patterns, and if we can
fit the edges of the pattern together. paint our own designs, the pleasure
There is аa paper called transfer paper in our work will be increased
which can be bought
in three colours - red,
blue, and black .
When the drawing is
finished , this is placed
between it and the
material, and the
pattern traced with a
blunt -pointed pencil
or other instrument.
0
Blue or black is best
for wood , red for
light -coloured stuffs.
There is also sold a
white tracing cloth ,
which is useful for
dark, smooth ma
terials.
The cornflower is
another very useful
flower for designing,
the thistle and the
oak leaves are very
suitable for carving,
and we shall find it a
help to model our de
signs in clay before Pattern for needlework made from the rose and its leaves
1623
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
First line : French . Second line : English words. Third line : As we say it in English
Hier nos cousins ont donné une fête. Jeannette et moi nous étions invités.
கணமானவலை

Yesterday our cousins have given a fête. Jenny and I we were invited .
Yesterday our cousins gave a party. Jenny
J and I were invited.
Jeannette portait une robe de soie, et des souliers blancs. Elle était très belle.
Jenny carried a robe of silk, and some shoes white. She was very fine.
Jenny wore a silk frock and white shoes. She was very grand.
Nous sommes arrivés à la maison. Elle était illuminée du haut en bas.
We are arrived at the house. It was illuminated from the top in the bottom .
We arrived at the house. It was lit up from top to bottom.

Dans le salon nous avons trouvé quelqu'un que nous avons reconnu .
In the drawing -room Теге have found someone whom we have known .
In the drawing -room we found someone whom we knew.
C'était Annette. Je l'ai invitée à danser. Elle a mis la main dans la mienne.
This was Annette. I her have invited for to dance. She has put the hand into the mine:
It was Annette. I asked her to dance. She put her hand in mine .
La salle était decorée de fleurs. Ma cousine a donné une rose à Jeannette.
The room was decorated with flowers. My cousin has given a rose to Jenny.
The room was decorated with flowers. My cousin gave Jenny a rose .
A neuf heures nous sommes descendus pour le souper. J'avais faim.
Ormond

At nine hours we are descended for the supper. I had hunger.

At nine o'clock we went down to supper. I was hungry.
OBUTTUU
TODO
mem.

Les fraises étaient très bonnes , mais j'aime mieux les glaces.
The strawberries were very good, but I like best the ices.
The strawberries were very good, but I like ices best.
(6
Nous avons dansé le " Sir Roger de Coverley." Puis le bal était fini.
We have danced the “ Sir Roger of Coverley ." Then the ball was finished .
We danced " Sir Roger de Coverley ." Then the ball was over .
Nous avons dit : “ Bonsoir ," et nous sommes allés en voiture à la maison.
We have said : “ Good evening,” and we are gone in carriage to the house
(

We said : " Good -night," and drove home.

THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS REGIN ON PAGE 1709
COD DOO
1624
 The Child's Book of
NATURE

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US.

HE sea -birds are in some ways the most wonderful of all living creatures.
THESome of them can move as quickly on foot about the land as many of the
animals. They swim as lightly as corks in the deepest seas, in the fiercest storms.
They dive like fish . To crown all, they ily with an ease and grace and strength
which nothing else can match. They find their food where no land animal, no
matter how powerful, could live for more than a few moments. No matter into
what seas our ships go, there they find some sort of bird giving life and beauty
to the scene. The powers of these birds make man feel that Providence, when it
made him lord of the earth and the waters, was very mindful of the needs of the
inferior creatures. Here we read of some of the most wonderful of these birds.

THE BIRDS OF THE OCEAN

( f we all had to vote
IF for a king of the
sea -birds, we should
probably agree to
crown the albatross . It is not
the bravest of the sea- birds .
A sea -eagle will readily beat
it ; so will some of the vicious
gulls. But for the perfection of flight,
for the beauty of its appearance as
it sails the air, and for its unwearying
strength, the albatross must have the
first place. There are seven species of
it, one of them so dull in colour that
it is commonly called the sooty
albatross . The one most generally
known is the albatross which , from its
great flight , is called the wanderer.
It is about 4 feet long, but its out- make slight alterations in the position
spread wings measure from 10 feet of the wings to enable them to catch
to 17 feet from tip to tip . They are the wind and make it carry it in the
notgreat broad wings, like those of the
eagle, but narrow, though , of course,
very strong. With this great spread
of wings the albatross cannot easily
get a start on level ground. It likes
aa rock as aa starting-point, unless the
wind be blowing. In the latter case
the bird faces the wind, and rises
against it like a kite.
One day a traveller, walking over
an island where many albatrosses were
hatching their eggs, found that one
bird had dropped into a pit . This
pit was 60 feet across, and 30 feet
deep, but the bird could not fly out .
There was not room enough for its
great wings to raise it into the air, happens when it is pursued ,it throws
and the traveller, climbing down, had
no difficulty in catching it and return-
ing it to the high ground, where it
could fly. It is in the air that the
albatross appears at
CONTINUED FROM 1522
its best. On land,
where it is nesting
in thousands and
thousands, the bird seems as
dull as a penguin. But in the
air it is a king indeed. A few
flaps of its mighty wings send
it high into the air over the sea. There
it sails like a beautiful ship of feather
and muscle. It barely moves its wings
at all .
It seems to hang in the air,
and to float and glide without any
effort. Men have watched it for hours
and not seen it shift its wings.
Of course, it does move them, if ever
so slightly ; for if it makes the wind
carry it, as it is said to do , it must
direction it wishes to follow . But for
straightforward flying it is just as
much a master. Onehas been known
to follow a swift steamer for hundreds
and hundreds of miles, circling in great
flights round and round the vessel, on
the look-out for any food that might
be thrown overboard . The albatross
likes live fish , jelly-fish , and other
marine creatures ; but it is not dainty.
It will eat the flesh of a dead whale,
or anything too bad to be kept on
board a ship. In this way it acts as
an ocean scavenger. When it has fed ,
it swims, dazed , upon the water, and
may easily be caught, unless, as often
up its food so that it may fly off.
The nearest allies of the stately
albatross are the gulls and the petrels
and the auks. Indeed, the albatross is

‫ها‬
N

D
1629
 -THE CHILD'S
the greatest of all the petrels, although serving for a nest. When sitting on its
there is one, called the giant petrel, nest , it looks exactly like a chequered
which is not much smaller. The most
interesting of these birds of many
varieties are the smallest , the little
stormy petrels, or Mother Carey's
Chickens, as the sailors call them. They
are the tiniest of all web-footed birds, THELANTBETREL WAY IN ENEMIES
being no bigger than large swallows.
The nature of aa bird is often told in a
66
common name, and the name petrel
has a history. Petrel is another form
of Peter, and the bird gets this name
because it seems to walk upon the
water, as Peter the Apostle was per-
mitted to do . No matter how rough
the sea or boisterous the gale, there
the little bird is to be seen , far out at
sea, lightly tripping up and down the
waves .. It futters its fine wings only loves penguin eggs and young penguins,
just enough to give its feet the support and works havoc among wingless birds..
which they need to keep its light little
body afloat. Thus with swift , light feet
and fast -flapping wings it skims the
waves, greedily feeding upon the little
creatures which the stormy waves
bring to the top of the water, just
before and just after a storm . Those
are its most active times, and sailors,
noting this, think that the bird causes
the bad weather at sea .
THE PETRELSWHO
PUZZLED SE
MENHOMESSAND HABITS
OF SCIENCE
Even learned men do not know nearly
all that there is to be learned about the
petrels. It was always supposed that
the fork-tailed petrel of Canada never
left the vicinityof the Canadian coasts,
but suddenly one turned up in Kent .
Another man found the same breed of
birds in the Sandwich Islands, and
thought that they lived only there ;
but since then specimens have been
received at the British Museum from
four different parts of the world.
Another petrel variety which was
supposed never to leave Fiji has been
found in Wales .
The stormy petrel, like the shear
water , another of the same family of
birds, may be seen in large flocks far out
at sea, enjoying the stormy weather.
Most of the petrels skim the waters,
but the diver petrels go far down, and
dash among the fish which do not
come to the surface. The Cape pigeon
is really a petrel . Like most of the other
petrels, it lays its eggs on rocky cliffs,
bits of stone roughly gathered together
mit
BOOK OF NATURE
homing pigeon, but not when we see
that its feet are webbed . The beautiful
snowy petrel rests on rocky ledges on
the sides of dizzy precipices, content
with bits of rock and pebbles for a nest.
UNPLEASANTKEEPSOFF
The giant petrel, which weighs eight
‫رو‬
or nine pounds, makes a large nest of
stones, and, like the albatross, does an
unpleasant thing if attacked . It has
the power to withdraw food from its
stomach, and to scatter it over the man
who goes near. Even the young ones
when alarmed can squirt nasty oil
from their nostrils to a distance of
three or four yards. The giant petrel
But the giant petrel is less feared
by the penguins than the sheath-bills,
which have an uncommon share of the
trickery that many of the sea- birds
possess. They are not nearly the size
of thepenguins orthe cormorants, being
more like large white pigeons, yet they
are terrible worries to these large birds .
The sheath-bills make their nesting
places in the same rocky, frozen islands
where the penguins and shags or
cormorants make theirs. Now, as the
penguins or shags sit upon their nests,
a couple of sheath - bills will saunter
along, hunting together as wild animals
hunt. One of the robbers will walk in
front of the nest , and there engage the
attention of the sitting bird, causing it
to reach forward to attack the sheath
bill nearest her beak, and in so doing,
leaving her eggs uncovered at the back .
The sheath -bill in the rear will then
make a grab at the eggs with its sharp
bill . The two robbers then march on ,
and change places at the next nest , so
that both ,by taking turns, get their share.
HE PIRATE SKUA, WHICH STEALS THE
THE
FOOD OF OTHE BIRDS
A still more audacious foe is the skua.
The skuas are a form of gull, and the
third largest of the sea-birds. First there
is the albatross, which measures 4 feet
from beak to tail ; next comes the
giant petrel , which is 32 inches long and
5 feet across the wings; then comes the
skua, measuring 24 inches and more,
and with a splendid stretch of wing. It
is a family of six species, of which four
UZT00
1626
Komonozco
cro Roma mandampion

GREAT BIRDS THAT HUNT IN THE SEA

Though a goose-like bird on its nest, the albatross, Seen onthe rocks, the Capepetrel resembles a pigeon,
when flying, is the picture of strength and grace. but its feet are webbed and it swims like a sea -gull.

When winds lash the seas, tiny sea animals are washed Next in size to the albatross comes this giant petrel.
to the surface. The stormy petrel, seen here, feeds on Its nostrils form horny tubes along the upper surface
these, running and flying on the surface of the waves, of the beak. Its wings measure nearly six feet across.

The sheath- bills are birds that live on the land in
the great, cold Antarctic regions. They are clever,
cheely birds, and cunningly rob other birds' nests.
τπτττπττΙττστπειττε
1627
Skuas are scavengers. They eat decayed flesh, but
young penguins and other young birds too. Their webbed
feet, shown here, have claws, with which they ght.
DODOCOOond
 UgIXCCEDER
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE CRUDO

make their nesting-places in the frozen constant observation they have found
North, while the other two are far- out that when the farmer ploughs his
scattered over the warmer seas . land , these things, which form good
wherever they are , the same nature food for gulls, are turned up. So it is
rules them . Their proper food is fish, quite common to see a crowd of
but they eat also the flesh of whales splendid white gulls gracefully following
which have been killed ; they will eat the plough to pick up the living things
dead birds and animals ; they eat the which the plough brings to the surface .
eggs of other birds, and find young birds The smaller gulls are welcomed by the
quite to their liking. farmer, but the larger ones have such
Seeing that skuas like fish, it might shocking characters that they run the
be thought that they would prove risk of being shot .
பாமககணைககைய

expert fishers. But that is not so . B'RDS THAT MAKE ANIMALS BLIND AND
They are pirates who rob other birds THEN
of their gains. Although their feet are The small gulls are content with a
webbed, they have sharp claws, and diet of worms, and so forth , but the
use these to attack other birds. When a large ones are as bad as the bad ravens
small gull catches aa fish, the skua makes and the eagles. They eat rats and
a dart at it in the air, and attacks it mice , which is just as it should be ;
with such fury that the smallere bird but when they kill and eat useful birds,
is glad to drop its fish and flee. No then their visits become unwelcome.
sooner does the fish drop from the mouth Still worse is it when they attack
of the gull, than the skua descends like lambs and baby deer. They peck out
a hawk, and snaps it up before it can their victims' eyes, so preventing the
reach the water. Thus, where there poor creatures from seeing a way of
are many small gulls and terns on the escape, and causing them great agony.
look -out for fish , there, too, may many The large black - backed gull is the worst
skuas be expected, ready to steal the of the thieves and murderers. This
food from their smaller relations. is a bird measuring 28 inches from beak
HE BIRDS THAT EAT DEAD BIRDS, AND to tail , and that it is very powerful, the
THE
THE GULLS THAT FOLLOW THE PLOUGH fact that it can kill lambs and birds
They are the scavengers of the pen- is sufficient evidence .
guin rookeries. Many penguins are Many gulls have become regular
killed in the course of the year, and visitors to London . They are to be
their bodies left to become corrupt . seen flying along the Thames nearly
Skuas pounce down upon the dead all the year. They are very tame, and
birds and devour their bodies. They help , it has become the custom for people on
too, to get rid of the dead bodies of the Thames Embankment to feed the
animals on land and in the sea. Flesh gulls with fish and other forms of food.
and fish are food to them , and nothing The black - backed gulls, the black
else . The effect is, however, to prevent headed gulls, the herring gulls, and
dead bodies of beasts and birds from the kittiwake gulls are all to be
making the air corrupt. All things die seen in England, at the seaside, haunt
in time ; but no matter where death ing the rivers and marshes, or even in
occurs , there is some form of life to the fields far inland , in spring and
consume the remains, unless, indeed , autumn. Some of them , like the black
the body be sealed up in ice or mud . headed and black -backed gulls, make
It seems a merciful part of the plan of their nests among marshes, where they
Nature not to have the evidence of build with rushes and grasses high
death about, and the fierce birds with enough for the nest to be free of water.
hearty appetites are but her agents in THEANDGULL WITH A NEST OF SEAWEED,
carrying out part of the work . THE SEA - SWALLOW
Many of the sea -birds are never seen The kittiwake gull, so called because its
by people who do not make voyages cry sounds like “ kitti-wake,” builds its
across the ocean . That is not the case nest of seaweed on tiny ledges of rock
with the gulls. Some of these come far high up on cliffs overlooking the sea.
inland ; though their proper home is Gulls like ours, which nest here in the
the sea, yet they like grubs and worms spring , have their relatives abroad which
' and insects that live in the soil. By sit on their nests and hatch their eggs
en 20 TXE 1628
 ind
is his BIRDS THAT CATCH FISH AND KILL LAMBS
good
it is
id of
owing
things
urface.
by the
e such
un the

ND AND

with a
but the
i ravens
ats and
yuld be ;
ful birds, The black -headed gulls are generally to be seen off Black -backedgulls like sea-food, but are strong, savage
welcome. our coasts. They make their nests in the marshes. birds, and kill lambs by pecking out their eyes.
y attack
peck out
nting the
a way of
at agony.
the worst
ers. This
from beak
werful, the
and birds

ne regular
are to be
mes nearly
tame, and
people on
to feed the Herring gulls follow shoals of herrings, and, diving The kittiwake gulls spend their days on the sea,
ms of food. into the water, catch them as hawks catch their prey. and have their nests in the wildest, rockiest places
the black
gulls, and
all to be
USEALEDGE

aside, haunt
5, or even in
spring and
ke the black
gulls, make
GLOBE

, where they
s
grasse high
free of water.
EED
OF SEAW ,
e
ewd becaus its
e
k ,"b u i l d s its
edges of rock
king the sea
A

st here in the
The tern is the smallest of the gulls. It flies and The black tern is one of the common birds of Britain .
darts so swiftly that it is called the sea - swallow . It makes, in marshy places, a strong nest of loose
5 abroad which Its forked tail increases its likeness to a swallow . vegetation which can Aoat if water rises near it.
கB.க
The photogriphs onIthese pages are by Lewis Medland , W. P.க
AT Darde
கக . R. Lodge, and others LD
ch their eyes U
MM ை UT
O OR
ET
1629 னம DO UZ

Q
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
with snow and ice all around them .
COLLOU
One family of gulls we have not yet
LLOR
thought of. That is the tern , or sea-
swallow . The name sea -swallow gives us
a good idea of its looks. It has a
longer , straighter beak than the ordin-
ary gull, and the tail of most species is
long and forked , like that of the
true swallow , : Terns are even more
numerous than gulls, and are to be
found near the sea in all climates.
They fly with the darting speed and
skill of the land swallow , but, though
as eager as their namesakes to snap
up insects, they live chiefly on fish.
HOW
IT THESEASWALLOW'S
OF FOOD ENEMY ROBS
As we have noticed the long beak
of the tern , the beak of the skimmers
may help to keep their peculiarity in
mind . Their bills are long, but the
lower half is much longer than the
upper. The two halves work like a
pair of scissors, and the birds are
called scissor- bills. When flying low
over the water they keep the long
lower half of the beak in the water,
searching for food in this way as they
fly . As the tern is so numerous and
such a busy feeder, naturally it has
enemies. The most daring is, perhaps,
the famous frigate bird .
This is a bird which flies far out to
sea , not to fish , but to rob other birds
which have fished . It attacks the
terns and gannets, or solan geese, as
the skua attacks his victim , and
frightens the little sea -swallow or the
big gannet into throwing up at least
a share of the fish which it has caught.
Sometimes the frigate bird has been
seen to hide in trees on the cocoa -nut-
bearing islands, where many of these
birds make their homes, then sail out
at night to meet the home-coming
wanderers, and make them give up
their food . If the gannet proves at all
unwilling, the frigate bird takes him by
the tail and gives him a good shake,
which always has the desired result.
HANDSOME TROPIC BIRD WITH
THEIVORY FEATHERS, & THE LITTLE AUKS
A bird in many ways resembling the
gull and the frigate bird is the handsome
tropic bird, one of the loveliest of sea-
birds, with ivory feathers tinged with
pink, except at the tips of the wings,
where the feathers are black ; and guillemot needs not even this scanty
around the eyes, where again the guard. So long as the rock is high
DOLOERRONOLULU
1630
ZUTATU
Kamme
feathers are black . The tropic bird
has two elegant streaming feathers in
its tail , more like the feathers of a
pheasant than those of a bird which
passes its life seeking food in the
boundless ocean .
Sea-gulls are the descendants of the
birds from which our field friends the
plovers came. The plovers are older
than the gulls in the history of creation,
and it is pleasant to find both branches
of the family flourishing .
When we come to the auks we find a
different story. We have the razor- bills,
the guillemots, and the puffins still pros.
perous, but the chief of the auks,
the famous great auk, is no more. It
forgot how to fly, and men killed every
member of the race , though the bird
once throve in millions. The other
members of the family have kept their
wings for flying, and, as they nest far
from the man who can climb, they
are safe . In the old days great auks
were occasionally found nesting with
the razor -bills and guillemots . The
smaller birds did not seek such heights
then as they do now , in this country
at any rate, or the great auks could
not have reached their nesting-places.
Birds of different sorts still nest together,
while others have nothing in common .
THE GUILLEMOT'S EGG DOES NOT
WHYROLL OVER THE CLIFF
Thus, we find one station, or one line
of ledges or rocks, occupied by the
nests of the guillemots, another by the
razor - bills ; the puffins take a third
distinct series of rocks ; the kittiwakes
make the fourth part of the colony,
while the highest and most difficult
rocks of all are occupied by the herring
gulls. There seems much confusion
when the birds are arriving and
courting, and claiming their nests, but
in reality all is in order, and each
species of bird keeps together.
Although they live close together,
the razor-bill and the guillemot have
different methods of nesting. All that
the razor- bill does is to find a rock which
affords a rough protection for the one
egg that it lays. The egg is deposited
upon the bare hard rock , but there
must be a nook or cranny in the rock
to prevent the egg from rolling away
and crashing down over the cliff. The
wa

SOME BIRDS THAT CAN FLY AND DIVE

SESVALLOILO

Frigate birds Ay beautifully, but they are

a lazy The little auks make their nests in the frozen North, but
and rob other birds of the fish they have caught. take their little ones, when hatched, to warmer seas.

Guillemots, when grouped together at their nesting -places, look like penguins ; but the guillemots fly , penguins do
not. They live night and day at sea, but come to land in countless hosts to lay their eggs and rear their young.

The puffin has a great coloured beak , looking far the razor - bills always nest near the guillemots and
too big for its body. It is called the sea-parrot. puffins. They make their home in England all the year.

The great northern diver, when seeking fish for food , jannets, when fying, see fish in the sea, and plunge
can stay under water for eight minutes at a time. from a great height into the water to catch nem.
Though so alert at sea, the bird walks very badly. Their bodies have air -sacs to protect them from injury.
TOO TIZIMI
TOT 1631
 CLUBULANTEEL
-THE CHILD'S
LELO TLAK ELCZ
BOOK OF NATURE
enough above the heads of men , and
far enough from his haunts, the guille-
mot is satisfied. It deposits its egg
on the bare rock high up on a precipice,
and there seems no reason whatever
why the egg should not roll away and
smash .
But there is a very good reason . The
egg is long, very broad at one end,
and pointed and narrow at the other
end. When the egg is disturbed, it
does not roll away as a round egg
would. It simply rolls round in a little
circle . If it were not for this safe-
guard the guillemots would soon be-
come extinct. Every movement of the
bird would be sufficient to send an
ordinary-shaped egg to destruction , and
there would be no young guillemots.
B'RDS THAT LIVE AT SEA AND COME
TO LAND ONLY FOR NESTINO
Where we see guillemots we may
look for razor- bills. They are related ,
of course, but in appearance they are solan goose , or gannet . This is a bird
different. The razor-bill's beak is not a little larger than the diver, and re
so straight and slender as that of the sembling a graceful goose, with a long
guillemot , and it has not the cross and powerful bill. It breeds in swarms
grooves which that of the razor-bill
has. There are guillemots in which the
colour of the head and back and wings
is of smoky brown . . Others are black
instead of brown. The habits of all
are the same. They practically live
on the sea , coming to land only for
the nesting season , or when they are
driven from the sea by the violence of
the gales.
They eat fish, particularly young her.
rings and pilchards, and have so good
a life that they are to be seen in count .
less swarms off our rocky coasts, and
at the mouths of great rivers. Farther
away there are smaller guillemots.
The little auks breed only in the frozen
North , and visit our country only in
the winter- time . There is a tufted
pigmy auk , which has feathers on its
nose like a crest growing the wrong
way about - forwards, instead of back
over the head. Another little auk
has a horn - like knob above the nostrils,
possibly to act as a protection.
HE FUNNY LITTLE BIRDS WITH THE BIG
THE
BEAKS , AND THE HANDSOME DIVER
These descriptions ‘ sound comical ,
but the birds themselves are not nearly
so funny -looking as the puffins, or sea.
parrots . These have great horny ,
coloured bills, absurdly large for the
1632
small size of the bird's body. It looks
as if Nature had meant to make a
great bird , but , after making the beak
of one , altered her mind and made the
little bird grow on to the end of the
beak intended for the big bird. In
spite of their funny looks the puffins
have quite a good time. They fly,
swim, and dive beautifully.
But the most famous of all the diving
birds is that one called the great
northern diver. This is a very hand
some bird, measuring almost a yard
in length . It is the perfection of grace
in the water, and the finest diver in
feathers . It can remain under water
for eight minutes at a time, then
pop down again as soon as it has taken
a breath. It flies fast and straight
when making for the Arctic regions to
nest , yet its legs are so far back that it
can hardly walk.
But the champion high diver is the
which cannot be counted, upon the
Bass Rock in the Firth of Forth , and
is rather an enemy to the fishermen .
It eats so many herrings that the fisher
men say it drives the fish away .
AIR - CUSHIONS THAT PROTECT THE
THEGANNET WHEN IT DIVES INTO THE SLA
But , at any rate , the gannets act as a
signal to the men . The men watch the
gannet flying high in the air. Suddenly
they see it dash with amazing speed
from aloft right down into the water.
The gannet has air-sacs in its chest,
which act as a pneumatic cushion , and
prevent it from being hurt on making
these great dives. There used to be
still larger gannets with wings greater
even than those of the albatross .
Very few of the sea- birds can be eaten ,
so fully charged with fishy oil is their
flesh . Hence they are not often in
the same danger of extinction as the
poor penguins , thousands and thousands
of which are yearly killed and boiled
down for oil . If there were not savage
members of the sea -bird family, the
number of birds might become pos
sibly too numerous. Nature , however ,
settles the problem herself. Here, as in
every other branch of life , she sets her
safeguards against too great an increase .
The next stories of Birds begin on 1737.
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
VERY living thing must breathe, and now we come to study the lungs, the
E organs ofbreathing in ourselves and in all the higher animals. The real breath
ing or burning is done inside the living stuff called protoplasm , but the oxygen it
needs is taken in by the lungs. These lie in the chest on a living floor of muscle
which moves up and down as we breathe. The air enters the nose — or, when we
breathe wrongly or in a hurry, by the mouth - and is there warmed, filtered, and
moistened. Then it passes through the voice-box and into the tubes that lead
right into the substance of the lungs. So it reaches the air -cells, as they are
called, and there it comes near the blood which the heart has pumped to the
lungs to meet it. We breathe by sucking in the air, and if we are wise we
are careful never to wear any tight clothing over our breathing muscles, but
we allow them free play in their ceaseless work of sucking into our lungs
the air which our blood must carry to every part of the body for its life.

LIFE AND THE LUNGS

E have already carbon to form car
WE learned that CONTINUED FROM 1584
bonic acid gas, CO2,
everything must and combined with
breathe, and that hydrogen to form
one of the reasons why the blood water, H ,O . Thus we say that
circulates in us and in all the the breathing of protoplasm is
other animals that have blood inside its molecule, and since the
is to carry certain gases to word intra is Latin for within,
and from the lungs. We have also the proper way of stating this is to say
learned that the real breathing is not that the breathing, or oxidation , of
in the lungs at all, but in the tissues protoplasm is intra -molecular. It does
of the body, where burning goes on . not matter if you forget the word if
The proper name for breathing is re- you remember the fact. Now let us
spiration, and real breathing is called turn to the lungs.
internal respiration . We may say a We have seen that the heart lies in
word or two more about it before we the middle of the chest , and has one
consider the lungs and how lung on each side of it . We
they should be used . must now learn what makes
It has been found that the floor of the chest , for we
there is a great difference shall find that this is a living
between ordinary burning floor, and that, indeed, the
and the way in which pro lungs cannot be used without
toplasm or living matter its help . It is a flat sheet
breathes. In ordinary burn of muscle stretched right
ing, the oxygen just comes across the middle of the
to the outside of the coal , body. There are a few open
or whatever it is that ings in it , through which
burns, and is then com pass veins and arteries and
bined with it ; but living nerves, but otherwise it is a
protoplasm does not burn complete partition between
in this fashion. It takes the upper and lower halves
the oxygen brought to it of the trunk . It has a rather
by the blood right into itself, curious name, which , how
and probably does many ever, is used for many other
wonderful things with it, purposes ; it is diaphragm ,
producing all the time the pronounced di-a- fram , and
changes which are life, This pictureshows us the meaning across to fence ."
before at last it gives the and their exact size in rela. It is used for anything
oxygen out , combined with tion to the rest ofthebody. stretched across .

202.22
1633
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE- emmar
This diaphragm in our bodies has opening of the canal that has to do with
been described as flat, but really, as the food, whilst the nose is the opening
picture on page 1637 shows, it is dome- of the canal that has to do with
shaped. It is a living floor, for it is a air. Each opening is provided with
muscle. When it contracts it becomes suitable arrangements for its special
more nearly flat, for it presses down- purpose. The mouth contains teeth and
wards. This, of course , means that all the arrangements for tasting ; the
everything beneath it is pressed upon, nose contains little hairs for filtering the
and as this muscle acts every time we air ; it contains all the arrangements for
breathe properly, you will notice in smelling, and, as we have seen , it has a
yourself that when you take a long wonderful loose lining which can be
breath the lower part of your body flooded with blood so as to warm the air
bulges forwards. That is because the before it enters our lungs.
floor of the chest , which is also the WAY IN WHICH THE AIR IS FILTERED
roof of the lower part of the body. THE
AS IT COMES INTO OUR LUNGS
has moved downwards and become But this is not all. If we trace out
flatter, so that the abdomen , as the the passage ofthe air through the nose,
lower part of the trunk is called, has to we find that, instead of being straight
bulge forwards. and open, it is extraordinarily twisted
Upon this diaphragm , then, there and roundabout. You would not think
rest the heart in the middle, and the that this was an advantage , but it is a
two lungs. The part of each lung that great advantage. For one thing,it com
rests upon it is called its base ; it is the pels the air to pass over a great surface
widest and broadest which haswarm blood
part of the lung. If we underneath it , so that
3

look at the base of each the air is warmed, and

lung and then follow it means, also, that a
it upwards, we shall good deal of water
see that it becomes vapour — that is to
narrower and smaller , say, water in the form
until at last it ends of gas — can be added
almost in a These pictures show us what the glottis, or to the air if it does
point voice-box, looks like. The vocal cords, shown
which actually comes in white, tighten to close the box more, and not already contain
up near the neck loosen open
to the boxmore. When the box is enough. That is good ,
behind the collar- almostclosed the pitchofourvoice is high; for perfectly dry air
bone. It is important when it is opened wider our voice is lower. is very irritating to
to remember that the greatest bulk our lungs, and dries them up in a very
of the lung is its lower part, for unhealthyway. Lastly, this long, twisted,
there are two ways of breathing - one in-and-out passage for the air makes a
which fills the upper part of the lung splendid filter. A very large quantity of
with air and one which fills the lower all the dirt in the air, and of any microbes
part ; and we see, of course, that it that may be in it, is stopped by this
must be better to breathe in the way filter, so that the air which is allowed to
which fills the biggest and roomiest part pass on to the lungs is not only nicely
of the lung. Now let us begin at the warmed and moistened, but is greatly
very beginning of the act of breathing, purified. Experiments have been made
and see where the air goes. which show that when, by means of a
CHANNEL THROUGH WHICH THE tube passed into the mouth, we withdraw
THE AIR ENTERS INTO OUR BODIES the air which has been through the nose
There is a perfectly definite channel filter and is on its way to the lungs, no
for the air from the outside world to the microbes can be found in it — though it
lungs, and if we are wise we always may have had hosts of microbes in it
breathe by this channel. The opening when it entered the nose .
of it is the nose.
Now, this is very im- It follows, then, that it is the duty of
portant, for it so happens that we , every one of us to breathe throughthe
unlike some animals, can also breathe nose . Now, the passage of air is
through our mouths, and though there easier through the mouth than through
is no objection to doing this sometimes, the nose, just because the mouth does
we should know thatthe mouth is the not trouble to filter it ; hence, if you
TOTEUTE HOZZO
1634
 .BEBEREKLAMA EKLEDA LIFE AND THE LUNGS.com.ARTONRENKLERET
keep your mouth open , air is sure to govern these little folds , or vocal cords,
enter through it when you breathe. as they are called, and they swing
The rule , then , must be to keep the widely apart, so as to leave a large
mouth shut . It should be opened space through which the air can pass
when we have something to swallow, without making any sound.
and it should be opened when we have We all know what a choking fit is .
something to say. In this latter case What happens then is that something
air passes through the mouth , but it or other which has got into the voice
is passing not inwards but outwards. box has thrown this beautiful arrange
MOST IMPORTANT THING IN LIFE IS ment out of order, and the vocal cords,
A TO BREATHE THROUGH THE NOSE instead of separating to let us breathe,
There are few more important lessons are thrown together so that the air can
for health than this lesson that we scarcely force its way between them .
should breathe through the nose , and In doing this it sets them trembling or
not through the mouth , as a rule. vibrating-- just as it ought to do on
Every child should be taught this its way out when we speak or sing—and
lesson, and the way to learn it is to so makes those horrible little noises
learn to keep the mouth shut . It does which we all make at these times.
not take long before this becomes aa habit But though we feel very miserable
which we soon during a chok
cease to notice ing fit, we need
and need not not be afraid,
think about for as soon as
again. All over the brain finds
England there it is getting too
Air Fassages little oxygen
are unfortunate
children whom in the blood
their school brought to it , it
Tongue
masters think
stupid, who are
not as tall and
heavy as they
should be
their age, who
for
h Yolce Box

suffer from fre- These diagrams show the positions of the passages through
always orders
the vocal cords
to relax , and in
a

quent colds and which air and food enter our bodies. The air enters through quite easily. Of
sore throats, and ing
So on ,
because
the down to the purified
nose, andis in the
glottis and to thewhite
on three passages,
lungs. The left
moment

take a long;
deep breath
pass- course, this can
thenpicture
simply shows what happens when we choke. The epiglottis, the little not save us in
they trapdoor which drops and closes the windpipewhen we swallow, the rare cases
have something has not been quick enough, and a piece of food has been caught. where a lump of
we
find that we can

the matter with their noses, which
can easily be put right, but which ,
if it is not put right, prevents them
from breathing properly through their
noses as everyone should, and so goes
far to spoil their lives.
think there is anything in this book
more important than this rule that
food or something has got actually
stuck in the top of the voice-box, so
that the air cannot get past it . This is
the only serious kind ofchoking. I have
called it rare, and it is rare compared
I do not with ordinary choking fits, but it really
happens often , and kills many people.
OW

we should breathe through the nose. ? WE MAY

HºwCHOKING FIT
SAVE OURSELVES IN A

After passing through the nose filter,
the air streams into the throat at the
back of the mouth, and passes into the
voice- box, the front of which you can
feel in your neck. This voice-box has
two folds of tissue stretched across it
from each side, with a tiny chink
between them . Every time we breathe
in air, the brain sends an order through
certain nerves to the muscles which
சவாசனாலாகவமாயாகை
1635
If we have all learned at school
the simple things which really matter,
and cannot be forgotten, no one need
ever be killed in this way, so long as
anyone else is present . Indeed , one
could save oneself. The top of the
voice-box is so near to the mouth, after
all , that anyone can be saved by a
forefinger quickly and boldly passed
into the mouth so as to remove the
மாமனாலை
ULUDANU BOOM
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
obstacle . This needs no skill , but
only courage , and anyone who knows it
may, in such a case, save the life that
is dearest in the world to him or her.
Of course, little specks of food often
find their way, as they should not,
into the voice -box , but the result of
that is to make us cough violently,
which means sending up a great blast
of air from the lungs, and that blows
the obstacle away. It is very small
babies and very old people who are
most apt to be choked , for they cannot
cough strongly . Also there is a terrible
kind of sore throat called diphtheria ,
in which something is apt to form that
blocks up the opening of the voice -box,
and used to choke many children ;
but within the last twelve years there
has been found a wonderful medicine
which really cures this disease. When it
is used in time it probably never fails.
It is a curious thing about the body,
inthethroat,one
, for the
air and one for the food ,
the food passage lies be
hind. This means , of course ,
that everything we swallow
has to be made to jump across
the opening into the lungs This is what our lungs are gases have to pass as
call the windpipe, and its special name
does not matter. After it has passed
down some distance, it divides into
two tubes, one going to the right lung
and the other to the left . Each of these
in the substance of the lungs divides
up again and again like a tree. These
tubes are called the bronchi, a name
which we can all remember, as when they
fall ill we call the trouble bronchitis. As
they subdivide, of course the branches
get smaller and smaller, until at last
they become quite tiny , and then we find
that they end in a countless number
of little buds, as we might call them,
which are known as the air-cells .
THE LUNG IS WONDERFULLY MADE
HºwWITH A SURFACE OF 2,000 FEET
These are not what we have learned to
understand by the word cells, but little
hollow spaces lined with living cells and
containing air. Thus a little bit of
tissue from the lung will float, unlike
LI
any other tissue of the body,
for from the first breath that a
baby draws, the lungs become
filled with air, which never
wholly leaves it . The air-cells
are lined with smooth, flat, liv
ing cells, through which the
we

through the voice -box. We made of —whatweshould see breathe. They areexceedingly
find this very easy, because if theywere cutthrough.The thin , and immediately under
the act of swallowing is such veins and arteries,and the neath them runs a rich supply
a wonderful one, little though little ones are thecapillaries. of tubes containing the blood
most of us think about it . It depends which is to be purified. This means ,
upon the beautifully balanced use of then , that the gases have to pass through
scores of nerves and muscles. If we iwo layers of cells — the layer that
laugh or try to talk just when we are lines the “ air-cell," and the layer that
swallowing, of course we throw this forms the wall of the capillary or tube.
beautiful machinery out of order, and The structure of the lung is beautifully
instead of everything passing safely adapted for its purpose. Men have
over the opening that leads to the tried to measure the extent of surface
lungs, some of it is apt to get in . where the blood is exposed to the air in
THE TWO. TUBES THROUGH WHICH OUR the lungs, and they say that, in conse
BREATH GOES quence of the way in which the lung is
After passing through the voice- made, this surface would actually
box, the air flows down the windpipe. measure , if it were stretched out, 2,000
This is a large round tube which you square feet . Of course, it is evident that
can readily feel for yourself in your if the lung were simply a big hollow
own neck. Just below the big part of space it would only have two or three
the voice -box there is a sort of ring, square feet of surface, but as it is made
easily felt, which is really part of the rather like a sponge, the surface of it is
voice- box itself, and below that you can increased to this enormous extent so 1

feel the round tube running away down that there is space enough for the blood
into the chest . If you feel carefully to be purified.
with the tip of your finger, you will If we could see the lung of aa new-born
find that this round tube is made of a baby, we should find it pearly white in 1
number of little rings. This we usually colour, but tinted with pink by the
MOTII
1536
Turut MUIXET
 DECLIDEO
TELOR.aco DO SACO -LIFE AND THE LUNGS DURILEEUIL

blood ; if there were no blood in it , it dirt with which the air of cities is filled .
would be perfectly white. The lung of A great feature of the tissue of the
an Esquimau, if he has never breathed lung is that it is elastic. This is due to
coal-dust and smuts, is the same colour the fact that it contains a great quantity
as that of a new-born baby ; the lung of the special kind of tissue which we
of a coal-miner is quite black , owing to find in the body wherever elasticity is
the large quantity of black coal -dust wanted. This tissue looks yellow under
that he has been breathing. His nose the microscope, and is made up of tiny
cannot keep out everything, and all the threads which can be seen to curl up if
particles it fails to keep back, which get they are loosened out. The lung is
into the lung, stay there, except that rich in this elastic tissue, and this is
a few of them are picked up by the most important , since it has a great
white blood -cells, and may be coughed deal to do with the act of breathing.
up and so got rid of. The lung of an We are going to talk about that in a
ordinary city- dweller is slaty grey- moment, but here I may say that the
about half as dirty as the coai-miner's. act of breathing out costs us in health
HE LIVING QARS OF THE LUNGS THAT no trouble or effort at all , since it very
THEDRIVE THE DUST BACK largely depends upon the elastic recoil
It is one of the most important duties of the stretched lung itself.
of the lung to keep itself free, as far as A grown-up man breathes about fifteen
possible, from any foreign matter ; the or sixteen times in a minute ; a woman
air -passages must perhaps eighteen
be kept clear and times in a minute .
open and without Children breathe
obstruction . There much more often
is a beautiful than this. Breath
arrangement that ing has two parts
helps this. If we breathing in and
look through the breathing out . The
microscope at the
cells which line the
windpipe and the
bronchi , almost
down to where they
end in the air - cells,
we find that they
are lined with cells

ber of tiny little

things
oars

look
KR
riseand
kung

biophraga Diap
hron
first is called in
spiration , and the
second expiration,
and now we must
learn

breathing are very

of a particular kind . Here we see what happens when we breathe in and out. numerous ; indeed,
These have a num When we breathe in , the diaphragm lowers, the ribs in what is called
move forward, thus making room for thelungs forced
to expand as pure air rushes into them through the
like living windpipe. This is shown in the left picture. When we almost every
sticking out breathe out, the diaphragm goes back to its arched muscle of the trunk
from them ; they poisonou
rather
shape again,and
like
the ribs are lowered, while the is used, but in
s gases from the blood are driven out. ordinary
how
acts are performed.
The muscles of
these

breathing

eyelashes, and so are called after the
Latin word for eyelashes, which is cilia .
All these living oars, or cilia, lash in
the same direction, and that is upwards.
They do their best , then, to push
upwards as much as they can of the dust
and dirt we breathe, and then, when we
cough, we get rid of these. But the lung
ofthecoal-miner and thelung ofthe city. WHYLOTHES
dweller prove that , in spite of the nose
filter, and the white cells, and the power
to cough, and the cilia of the cells that
line the windpipe and bronchi , it is still
impossible for the lung to keep itself
clean if, day after day, we breathe the
1637
breath
ing we use simply the diaphragm and
the thin muscles between the ribs.
Much the most important of these is the
diaphragm , and it is important to give
the diaphragm free play in breathing.
If we wear tight clothes round the
waist , the diaphragm is interfered with,
and we can only breathe by using the ribs.
CLOTHES
HARMFUL
TOO TIGHT
TO WEAR OUR
Until lately this deceived the students
of the body , who used to say that boys
and girls and men breathe mainly by the
diaphragm , but that women breathe
mainly by the ribs. We know now that
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE - XXE
that is quite untrue. Everyone who how this wonderful centre works, and
is properly dressed breathes mainly by how it can modify our breathing. The
the diaphragm . It is only because nerve-cells that make it up are nourished
many women wear their clothes too tight by the blood, and they are very sensitive
that the movement of the diaphragm to the quality of the blood that reaches
is interfered with , and so they have them . Especially are they sensitive to
to breathe by their ribs. the presence of too much carbonic acid
When we breathe, then , an rder is in the blood . Nothing else excites them
sent to the diaphragm from the brain, so much . Directly this happens they
and it becomes flattened. This acts like send powerful orders to the breathing
what is called a suction pump. The muscles to breathe deeply and quickly,
amount of room in the chest is increased, and get rid of the excess of this poison.
and the air from the outside is sucked in . Now , since these nerve-cells act en
TWO
THEALWAYS MUSCLES THAT MUST BE tirely in accord with the quality of the
MOVING IF WE ARE TO LIVE
blood , there is a way of getting them to
We have already seen that, at the rest for a time, and this is known by
same moment , the brain , which governs everyone who performs diving feats.
the whole process, sends an order down Boys often try to see how many plates
to the voice-box, so that a wide opening they can pick off the floor of a swim
is made there between the vocal cords ming bath . Now,, the way to stay under
for the air to pass through. Inspiration, water as long as possible is to take a
then, is a muscular act , requiring effort, number of quick, long, deep breaths for a
and the muscles which perform it must little while just before you dive in . By
go on acting if we are to live. A person this means you get rid of a great deal
may lie in bed all his life, and may never of the carbonic acid in your blood, and
even move himself in bed. The muscles you can stay under water quite a long
of his neck and arms and legs and trunk time, until at last so much fresh carbonic
may all lie unemployed for years, but acid has passed into your blood from the
there are at least two muscles which tissues that your breathing centre will
must be in action if any of us is to live ; rest no longer , and you must breathe.
they are the heart and the diaphragm . WHATROTO DO WHEN YOU COUGH THE
WAY
Expiration, or breathing out , is quite
different. Except when we cough or We have already read something
sneeze, or speak or sing, or when there about sneezing, which is a particular
is some obstruction in the air- passages, kind of expiration, in the Childs' BOOK
expiration costs no effort at all , and no OF WONDER, on page 840. Speaking,
muscles are employed. What happens singing,, and coughing are all special
is simply elastic recoil — the recoil of the kinds of expiration , too. Hiccough, on
stretched lung and the recoil of the wall the other hand, is a special kind of
of the abdomen, which, as you know , inspiration. If you notice yourself
bulges forward when we breathe . So, next time you hiccough, you will see
without any effort, the air is forced out that it is just the opposite of cough
of the lung, and a new breath is taken in . ing. In coughing you breathe out, in
hiccoughing you breathe in. Hiccough
THEIS SMALL SPOT IN THE BRAIN WHICH
THE CENTRE OF OUR LIFE is due to something disturbing the
The whole of this wonderful process diaphragm ;; usually something in the
is entirely governed by a small spot in stomach. If it can be stopped at all ,
the brain, which we call the breathing there is one way of doing so which is
centre. It lies quite near the centres much better than any other. What
that govern the heart and blood -vessels. you should do is to breathe out as far as
The old name which was given to this you can , and hold your breath there
centre when it first was found was the until you feel bound to breathe in again .
vital point, because in a sense it is the Doing this three or four times will stop
centre of our life . If anything destroys the hiccoughing, if it is to be stopped at
it , we must die . Certain poisons act all, for it means that you are deliber
upon it , such as the poison in opium ; ately ordering your diaphragm not to
too large a dose of either opium or contract, but are making it rest, and
alcohol kills in this way by paralysing usually it will behave after you do this.
the breathing centre. We know now The next part of this is on page 1787 .
1638
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
THE WORLD'S FLAGS IN COLOUR
CHE flags of all nations are shown in these pages in their proper colours, with
THE their masts set in the capitals of the countries to which they belong, the
boundaries of countries being marked by a red line. We can thus see at a glance
the extent of the territory over which aparticular flag flies. But it is important to
remember that in painting and drawing these maps and flags, the artist has not
been able to draw all the countries on the same scale — that is to say , Germany is
shown about three times the size of Switzerland, whereas it is really about thirteen
times as big. Any boy or girl, however, can find out the exact size of any of these
countries from the little line at the bottom left -hand corner of each picture. This
represents 100 miles in each case, so that if the country is drawn ten times as long
as this line it is 1,000 miles in length. The flags shown are in nearly all cases
the national flags, but in some cases the merchant or trading flag is used.

THE FLAGS OF ALL NATIONS

SOMEWHERE in his CONTINUED FROM 1543 great seal with the
three lions , like those
pockets a man

carries a case contain of the flag, upon it.

ing cards bearing his name and
address. If he wishes to be known ,
he presents one of his cards to the
person whom he meets. That will
make him known to anybody who can
read. But years and years ago that card
would not have served this purpose .
Great lords and ladies could not read .
They wanted signs , just as little chil-
dren do to-day. When knights rode
forth to battle, they wore cloaks over
their armour, or carried pennons upon
their lances, bearing their devices.
Nations are recognised by their flags
just as the knights of old used to be.
To carry a sign as a means of identifica-
tion is a very old idea. The Israelites
had their sacred standards ; the Egyp-
tians had their fan-like arrangement of
feathers, borne on the top of spears,
showing pictures of their gods and
sacred animals. It was necessary that
these signs should be borne, so that
troops in battle would recognise the
flag of their friends, and rally to it
instead of fighting or running away.
As time went on , and our kings
conquered other peoples or married
queens from other royal families,
signs were added to our flag. For
a long time this country laid claim
to France . Our rulers called them
selves Kings of France as well as of
England, and our national flag bore
upon it the badge of France until
1801 . We had also the arms of
Hanover in the middle of the stan
dard . There were many changes in
it before it took the present form .
Now the Royal Standard is divided
into four quarters, and represents the
arms of Great Britain and Ireland .
In the first quarter we have the
three British lions of England. In the
second quarter we have the angry
looking fighting lion of Scotland. În
the third we have the harp of Ireland ;
and in the fourth we have the lions
of England repeated . Wales does
not appear as a separate country on
the flag, she is so much part of Eng
land . We had the arms of Ireland on
SA

When Englandfirstbecame a strong
military power, our soldiers went forth
to battle under many flags. Each great
nobleman who kept a fighting force had
his own standard , and there were as
many battle- flags as noblemen in our
armies. But with the time of Richard
Caur-de -Lion we had the beginning of
what is now our Royal Standard. We
know that he used the three lions for
the national flag, for there exists his
our flag long before the union of Ire
land with England, because Ireland
had been conquered by England, but
it was not until 1801 that the union
between the two countries took place.
The arms of Scotland were placed on
our Royal Standard when James VI . of
Scotland became James I. of England.
The Royal Standard is really the king's
flag. It can be flown only where he
is living and at a few fortresses .

tod
1639
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
The Union Jack is the flag which flies represent the two peoples as one united
over the whole empire on which the sun nation . The RussianImperial Standard
never sets. It is the famous red , white is a two-headed eagle upon a yellow
and blue under which every Briton is ground. This comes from the armsofthe
proud to live. It is made up of three Greek Empire, the Tsar Ivan III . marry
Aags. First of all there was the English ing, in 1472, a daughter of the ruler of the
flag - a red cross on a white ground, the Greek Empire , and adopting her arms.
banner of St. George, under which our Other Russian flagsrepresent St.Andrew ,
Crusaders used to fight Then there who is said to have taken Christianity
came the Scottish banner o: St. Andrew , to Russia, and our own St. George.
a white saltire — that is , a cross , the two France, like England, has the red ,
halves of which run from corner to white and blue for her banner. In olden
corner - on a blue ground ; then the times she had the fleur-de -lys. What
Irish banner of St. Patrick, this being that really was we do not know . Some
a red saltire on a white ground . Thus say it was a lily ; others say it was an
the Union flag with its groundwork of iris ; while others believe that it was the
blue, and its stripes of red and white head of a lance. Anyhow, it was no
running down and . across, and from longer used after the people of France
corner to corner, combine the three turned their king off the throne and had
flags of England , , Scotland and Ireland . Napoleon for their emperor. He had the
Every nation has its own flag, and each eagle for his war emblem, but the
one has aa history .. The flag of the
United States , when that country was an
simple red , white and blue banner is
to-day, as it has been for nearly a
English colony, was like that of Eng. century, the national banner of France.
land . When America became an inde- The Spanish Royal Standard tells
pendent state , they had to make a new stories . It bears the arms of coun
flag. There were then only thirteen tries which it no longer owns. It shows
states in the Union , so they set out on the arms of Austria , of parts of France,
their flag thirteen red or white stripes of Sicily, of Portugal, and of parts of
with thirteen white stars in the corner . Belgium . All these places were once
The thirteen stripes still remain, but as owned by Spain , and she retains the
the number of states has increased so colours in her flag as if they still were
stars have been added . hers.. The flag which has been longest
The German nation consisted , until unchanged is that of Denmark. The
1870, of many kingdoms and other little Danish king, 700 years ago , thought he
states . Then the countries united and saw a cross in the sky when fighting
made the King of Prussia the German against the heathen , and as hewas victori
Emperor. They had then to create a ous he adopted the cross for his banner.
national flag. In this, as in the German One of the youngest of important
Imperial Standard, the Prussian eagle national flags is that of Italy. The might
and colours of black and white figure and majesty of Rome passed away, and
largely. That is because Prussia is the the country became split up into miser
largest and most important kingdom in able little states, partly ruled by the
kings who did
Germany, and the black eagle has for Pope , partly by pettyEmmanuel
500 years been the emblem of the Hohen- great wrong , aided
Victor
zollerns, the royal family of Prussia. by Garibaldi and other bold volunteers,
The flag of Austria -Hungary looks managed to rid the country of its
curious with a patch of green in the enemies, and to make the Italians one
bottom The reason is this :
corner . nation . He was made king , and gave
The Austrians are one nation , the Hun- the country the flag of a united people.
garians are another. But one sovereign Greece, which gave to mankind
rules both countries . He is Emperor Alexander the Great, conqueror of the
of Austria, but he has to be crowned a world, fell, in later days , ( nder the rule
second time as King of Hungary. And to of the Turks, who for 500 years held
show that they are two countries, we have the country in bondage. In 1830 she
the colours of Austria and the patch of gained her freedom . Her first indepen
green for Hungary, declaring that the dent king was from the royal house of
two flags of the two nations have been Bavaria , and she adopted his colours.
placed together and made into one io The next Familiar Things begin on 749.
FUOCO
1640
 kos
OREA
BRITAN SAY
AN BERI

BISCAY
RAN GERMA
IRELAND

LONDON
I

' 1%
L
PORTUGA

BE
LG
THE HAGUE
MADRID DIZERLAND

IU
LISBONO SPAIN

M
BRUSSELS

ICELAND
TO DENMARK

ROME

TOCKHOLM

MANIA
DENMARK
Puso OPENHAGEN

CLGRADE
RUMANIA
SERVIAR G BUCHAREST
ATH BULGARIA
ANK
MONTENEGRO

TA 1641
 VIETA
RUSSI EMPIRE AUSTRIA -HUNGARY

(
CONSTANTINOPLE

RSIA M
CALCUL

IH

MALY
CHINESE SOUL
STATES
EMPIRE KOTEA P
LOKIO

D
y N
A
L
MAN E
W E
A
N Z

RAW AUSTRALIA
SA WELLINGTON
MENOURNE

1642
 NZ
00
WASHINGTON
Α Τ Ε

SOTTAWA

HAITU fils DOMINICAN

REPUBLIC
CUB
PORTAU PRINCE SAN DOMINGO HAVA
MEXICO
1

HONDURAS
TEGUCIGALPA
GUATEMALA COSTA RICA NICARAGUA
NEW GUATEM SAN JOSE MANAGUA
SAN SALVADOR
SALVADOR

CARCASSO
ANAMAS VENEZUELA
м
LA PAZ
BOLIVIA

BRAZIL
SANTIAGO

I
RIO DE JANEIRO
QUITO
ECUADOR

1643
 Am
er
PARAGUAY

ic
th
ASU

a
5
URUGUAY
NONTEVIDEO

CO EURIA NIS
OC
MOR MUSC

MOROCCO Flag of French

Colonial Governor
IU
]

west
CONGO . KERA
MONROVIA Africa
EGYPT
STATE
AR
Sol sh

ZIB

Annexed to
ih
ti

BELGIUM
W& IT
Bri

ZAN

o 200 East
Africa
CANDO
CAPE COLONY
ZANZIBAR
CRLE CAPE TOWN

1644
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
In these
“
pageswe.” read twomoreaof Scott's famous stories: Richard
Ivanhoe ”and
Lion, or Richard “ the Lion-hearted ." In “ Ivanhoe " we are, for the first time in
the Waverley Novels, entirely in England. “ The Antiquary ” is a story of life
not far from Edinburgh, on the southern shores of the Firth of Forth, in the last
ten years of the eighteenth century. In the character of the sturdy old Whig
antiquary , Jonathan Oldbuck , is reflected some of the author's own characteristics ;
and we are told that the novel was his favourite. The figure of old Edie Ochiltree,
the garrulous, kind- hearted, wandering beggar, or gaberlunzie man," has
always been a favourite with Scott's readers. A beggar in those days wore
a sort of uniform and had a licence to beg. An antiquary, of course,
means one who devutes himself to the study of records and relics of the past.

WHEN KNIGHTS WERE BOLD

Being the Stirring Tale of
THEperiod of thesa
story , to quote
CONTINUED FROM 1606
Scott's own words, is
that when Richard's return
had become an event rather
wished than hoped for by his
despairing subjects, who were in
ted to everysion.
species ofimesubord
the meant subjec
inate oppres
The nobles, whose power had become
exorbitant during the reign of
prudence of
Stephen scarce the
hadwhom
Henry II, .and reduce d in some
degree of subjection to the Crown,
had now resumed their ancient
licence in its utmost extent.”
The scene of the story is “ in that
pleasant district of merry England
which is watered by the River Don,'
where “ there extended in ancient
times a large forest , covering the
greater part of the beautiful hills and
valleys which lie between Sheffield
and the pleasant town of Doncaster.”
The forest was that of Sherwood or
Rotherwood, numerous remains of
which are still to be seen , and many
parts of which are named after Robin
Hood .
In romantic Sherwood, in the days
to which the novel refers, there dwelt
a brave old Saxon named Cedric of
Rotherwood . In his service were a
jester named Wamba and a swine-
herd named
the sun setting.
was Gurth upon one ofg ,the
One evenin as
rich grassy glades of the forest, these
two were surprised by a party of
horsemen . The travellers included a
Ivanhoe ”
monk, Prior Aymer
of Jorvaulx, and a
Norman knight , Sir
Brian de Bois- Guilbert , com
mander of the Order of the
Knights Templars. They were on
their way to Ashby -de-la -Zouch,
where a tournament was about to
take place . They sought the way to
Rotherwood, the residence of Cedric .
Wamba, not liking their appearance,
gave them directions which would
have taken them to Sheffield . But at
the cross-ways they found a palmer,
or pilgrim , lying on the ground asleep.
To settle the point whether they
should turn to the right or the left, as
to which the monk and the knight
were divided in opinion, they awoke
the sleeper, who conducted them to
Cedric's mansion .
Cedric was no lover of the Normans,
but he put hospitality before his
?
other feelings, and opened his doors
to the new -comers. When supper had
been served in the great hall , the
steward, suddenly raising his wand,
said aloud :
“ Forbear ! Place for the Lady
Rowena !
A door was opened behind the
banqueting -table, and the ward of
Cedric, followed by four female atten
dants , entered.
Formed in the best proportions
of her sex , Rowena was tall in stature.
Her complexion was exquisitely fair ;
her clear blue eyes seemed to com
mand as well as to beseech . Her

CRISTOBAUHEED
IB 1645
 BALL
THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
profuse hair, of a colour betwixt brown Nor was there one of the six that, for his
and flaxen , was braided with gems. years, had more renown in arms . Yet this
She wore a garment of pale sea- green will I say, and loudly, that were he in
silk, over which was a loose, flowing England, and durst repeat, in this week's
9

robe of crimson wool. Round her neck tournament, the challenge of St. John
hung a golden chain, and a veil of silk, de-Acre, I, mounted and armed as I
interwoven with gold , was disposed now am, would give him every advantage
about her head and shoulders ." of weapons and abide the result."
AROUND THE HOSPITABLE
CEDRIC THE SAXON
BOARD OF “ Your challenge would be soon
answered,” replied the Palmer , were
Cedric was endeavouring to draw the your antagonist near you. If Ivanhoe
Templar's undesirable attentions away ever returnsfrom Palestine, I will be his
from his ward, when some disturbance surety that he meet you ." As he said
was caused by the arrival of an old Jew, this, the Palmer placed on the table a
who called himself Isaac of York , and small ivory box containing a sacred
who pleaded for shelter for the night, as relic. In reply, the Templar took from
a storm had arisen. To the angerof the his neck a gold chain , exclaiming,“ Let
Normans, Cedric gave orders that the Prior Aymer hold my pledge and that of
Jew should be given a seat at the lower this nameless vagrant, in token that
end of the table. Here it would have when the Knight of Ivanhoe comes
gone hard with him but for the courtesy within the four shores of Britain , he
of the Palmer, who had entered with the underlies the challenge of Brian de Bois
Norman party, but whose face had Guilbert, which, if he answer not , I will
remained hidden behind his cowl. proclaimhirn as a coward on the walls
Wine having flown pretty freely, Sirof every Temple Court in Europe ."
of of
VANHOE DEFEATS THE HAUGHTY TEMPLAR
the Norman knights in the Holy Land. I'INTHEFOURNAMENTA
“ Were there none in the English The next morning, very early , the
army,”asked the Lady Rowena ," whose Palmer, who seemed to know exceedingly
names are worthy to be mentioned with well the ways of Cedric's dwelling, made
the Knights of the Temple and of St. his way to the cell where the Jew slept ,
John ? and bade him arise and escape, as the
Forgive me, lady,” replied Bois. Templar had threatened to kidnap him.
Guilbert. The English monarch did, The Palmer offered himself to conduct
Palestine
bring to second
indeed, warriors, a host of Isaac to a place of safety. Whispering
gallant only to those a word in the ear of Gurth , which greatly
whose breasts have been the unceasing astonished that individual, the Palmer
bulwark of that blessed land ." gained egress for himselt and the Jew.
“ Second to none , ” said the Palmei , When the two had arrived at a spot
who had stood near enough to hear, and beyond the domains of Bois-Guilbert's
9

had listened to this conversation with friends, Philip de Malvoisin and Reginald
marked impatience. It is impossible to Front-de-Bouf, the Jew astonished the
describe the bitter scowl of rage which Palmer by telling him that he had
rendered yet darker the swarthy coun- pierced his disguise — the Palmer was a
tenance of the Templar, as the Palmer knight - and induced him to accept a
repeated his statement, mentioning the letter that would secure him the loan of
names of Richard and of five others, horse and armour.
and adding that the name of the sixth, When the day arrived for the opening
“ of lesser renown and lower rank, of the tournament at Ashby -de -la
dwelt not in his memory . Zouch, Sir Brian and his companions
S'R BRIAN TELLSESFIVANHO
TO COMBAT
easilylistsvanquished
E'SDEEDS the against all
themthose who, entered
. Then after a
“ Sir Palmer,” said Sir Brian de Buis. pause, a solitary trumpet announced
Guilbert scornfully, “ this assumed for the entry of another champion . It was
getfulness comes too late to serve your none other than the knight who, disguised
purpose. I will myself tell the name of as a palmer, had caused the Templar so
the knight before whose lance fortune much annoyance in Cedric's banquet
and my horse's fault occasioned my ing hall. He entered the lists with his
falling - it was the Knight of Ivanhoe. vizor down , and carrying a shield which
1646
SCENES FROM THE
In the time of Richard I. , the Saxons had not quite
forgiven the Normans for conquering them. But
Cedric the Saxon was very hospitable, and even
Norman knights were welcome to his table , at which
the beautiful figure of his ward, the Lady Rowena,
was always to be seen in the place of honour. Cedric
is here leading Rowena into the banqueting - hall.
hos
0.00
The pilgrim was Cedric's own son in disguise, and
that was why the swineherd Gurth did what he asked.
At the table the pilgrim had challenged a boasting
Norman knight, Sir Brian, to meet in combat one
named Ivanhoe. At the tournament the encounter took
place, and the Norman was overthrown by Ivanhoe.
1647
TALE OF IVANHOE
CE Brock ,
Cedric's son had been sent away because he had fallen
in love with Rowena, whom Cedric meant to be the
wife of another. One day a pilgrim came to Cedric's
table, where some Norman knights were. A Jew
also arrived , and as the Normans meant to harm
him , at night the pilgrim whispered in the ear of
one of Cedric's men, who helped the Jew to escape.
The Lady Rowena had to award the wreath of victory
to the knight of Ivanhoe, who, when his helmet was
removed, was discovered to be none other than
Cedric's own son and her sweetheart. But the hero
had many other adventures to face before he married
the fair Rowena, as told in the romance of " Ivanhoe . "
20
 TO TUTODOCEL
-THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS
bore the legend “ Disinherited.” The
Templar was overthrown, and this was
the lot of his companions with the
exception of one,, whose horse, rearing
at a critical moment, placed him at a
disadvantage of which the Unknown
Knight refused to avail himself, where-
upon the Norman owned himself
vanquished by courtesy .
On the second day, in a fight, the
Unknown Knight was even more suc-
cessful , though he would have fallen
when engaged with Bois -Guilbert, had
not a knight in black armour ridden up
and felled Front -de- Bauf, when the
last-named was spurring to his friend's
assistance . At the moment when the
Unknown Knight, having removed his
helmet, was receiving from the trembling
hands of the Lady Rowena the chaplet
of honour , he fainted . It was then found
that he had been badly wounded.
Cedric , rushing forward , then discovered ,
what his ward had discovered before him ,
that the knight was none other than his
son , Wilfred, whom he had banished
because of his love for the Lady Rowena .
HE MYSTERIOUS BLACK KNIGHT WHO
THECAME TO IVANHOE'S ASSISTANCE
Cedric dearly loved his son , but desired
that his ward should marry another.
The son of Cedric and Ivanhoe were one
and the same . The Black Knight who
had come so opportunely to Ivanhoe's
aid in the lists was none other than
Richard, the crusading King of England,
whose younger brother, afterwards the
bad Kirg John, had tried to usurp his
throne during Richard's absence in the
East. Ivanhoe was carried from the
field by friends, his father having con
quered his first impulse to claim him .
While Cedric and his party were
returning to Rotherwood they came
upon Isaac and his daughter Rebecca .
With these two was an ambulance
containing an invalid, and they sought
protection on their journey, as their
men had taken flight and fled after
hearing that a band of outlaws was lying
in wait for the travellers in the forest.
At Lady Rowena's intercession Cedric
allowed the Jew to travel with him .
Some time afterwards Cedric's party
was attacked by a band of armed
men, and taken prisoners, only Wamba
escaping of the Black Knight's prowess, Ivanhoe
The armed band was com-
posed of the Templar and some of was at no loss to understand who it was
the followers of the usurper, John,, that was so valorously coming to their
1648
BOOKS
who had been at the tournament .
Wamba sought out Robin Hood, and
this doughty outlaw, with the Black
Knight, whose identity was as yet
unknown to Robin Hood , laid siege to
the Castle of Torquilstone, the fortress
of Front-de-Bauf, whither the captives
had been taken . They arrived just
in time to save the Jew from horrible
torture, the Lady Rowena from the
evil-hearted De Bracy, one of John's
adherents, and Rebecca from an evil
fate at the hands of Bois- Guilbert .
OBIN HOOD JOINS THE BLACK KNIGHT
Rº IN THE SIEGE OF THE CASTLE
During the siege Rebecca found her
way to the turret , where the wounded
Ivanhoe lay, and induced Ulrica, an
old woman with whom he had been
left in charge, to hand over the charge
to her.
The noise within the castle , occasioned
by the defensive preparations, had
now increased into tenfold bustle and
clamour. Ivanhoe, impatient of his
wounds, was all eagerness to see how
the battle went.
" If I could but drag myself," he
said,, “ to yonder window , that I might
see how this brave game is like to go
if I had but bow to shoot a shaft , or
battle- axe to strike were it but a single
blow for our deliverance ! It is in vain !
It is in vain ! I am alike nerveless and
weaponless ! ”
“ Thou wilt but injure thyself by
the attempt, noble knight," replied
his attendant. “ I myself will stand at
the lattice, and describe to you as I can
what passes without."
“ You must not - you shall not !
66
exclaimed Ivanhoe. “ Each lattice ,
each aperture, will be soon a mark
for the archers ; some random shaft
“ It shall be welcome," murmured
Rebecca, as with firm pace she ascended
two or three steps, which led to the
window of which they spoke.
Y
BRAVERTHE
THEREBECCA AND FORTITUDE OF
BEAUTIFUL JEWESS
In spite of Ivanhoe's appeals, this
brave maiden ( who had come to love
the knight) took an ancient shield for
protection, and kept him acquainted
with the tide of battle . When he heard
 DO ILALA amat DamnLDE
THE WAVERLEY NOVELS-W
aid. By the assistance of Ulrica , who ,
as an act of vengeance against Front-de-
Bæuf, had set fire to the castle, the
besiegers were successful ; and it was
in the arms of the Black Knight that
Ivanhoe was carried out of the burning
building.
But Rebecca was found by the
Templar, and carried off by him to
withstand a trial for witchcraft . Her
fearlessness at length conquered the base
heart of Bois- Guilbert , who begged and
was given her forgiveness . He even
meditated flight , but was induced by a
wily counsellor to maintain his position
at the Castle of Templestowe, where
it was arranged that Rebecca should be
burnt , unless a champion should ap-
pear on her behalf against him . At
the last moment a champion appeared.
It was Wilfred of Ivanhoe.
When the Templar saw him , he said :
“ I will not fight with thee at present.
Get thy wounds healed, purvey thee a
better horse " -Ivanhoe's horse was
exhausted with many miles of travel
“ and it may be I will hold it worth
THE LOST HEIR
Or the Strange Story of “ The Antiquary
day in the eighteenth century two
ONNEtravellers between Edinburgh and
Queensferry, delayed by the tardiness
of the diligence or coach, lost the tide,
and stopped for a snack at the Hawes
Inn . One was a young man , of genteel put twenty shillings in his pocket - a
appearance, named Lovel. He had
been a soldier. The other was a good-
looking man of about sixty, whose
hale complexion and firm step an-
nounced that years had not impaired
his strength or health . His name
was Jonathan Oldbuck (or Oldinbuck ),
of Monkbarns , one of a family that had
been established for several generations
in the vicinity of the thriving seaport
town of Fairport (supposed to be
Arbroath ).
Jonathan had no taste for commerce,
and had experienced an equal distaste
for the law when he succeeded to the
estate. His instructor had said of
(6
him that “ he never pays away a
shilling without looking anxiously after
the change, makes his sixpence go
farther than another lad's half -crown,
and will ponder over an old black-
1649
room
moment LEZI mengaman
my while to scourge out of thee this
boyish spirit of bravado .”
But Ivanhoe insisted , and his knight
hood supported his claim , though
Rebecca pleaded that he should not
“ perish alone."
In the result Ivanhoe, weak as he
was with illness, went down before the
well-aimed lance and vigorous steed of
the Templar. But Bois-Guilbert also
went down, though hardly touched , in
comparison, by Ivanhoe's lance. “ He
had died a victim to the violence of his
own contending passions." His death was
pronounced " the judgment of God."
Rebecca was pronounced free and
guiltless. At this moment Richard,
with a goodly company, galloped on
the scene. He had himself meant to
champion the Jewess. He dissolved the
Temple Chapterwhich had tried Rebecca .
Once more in power, the King, having
reconciled father and son , attended the
marriage of Ivanhoe and the Lady
Rowena in York Minster. Rebecca
and her father soon after left England
for Grenada , there to dwell in peace.
OF GLENALLAN
letter copy of the Acts of Parliament
for days, rather than go to the golf
or the change-house ; and yet he will
not bestow one of these days on a
little business of routine , that would
strange mixture of frugality and in
dustry, and negligent indolence. I
don't know what to make of him .”
Mr. Oldbuck's manner at once in
terested and oppressed his fellow
traveller. Mr. Lovel, indeed, thought
the old gentleman assumed an air of
superiority that went beyond what the
difference of age warranted . Both
had their destination at Fairport, and
though it was agreed that Mr. Lovel
should call upon Mr. Oldbuck , the
younger man delayed his visit till his
baggage arrived, and he could present
himself in a dress such as he thought
corresponded with the rank in society
he felt himself entitled to hold . It was
not long before Mr. Oldbuck introduced
his visitor to his “ den ” or retreat ,
where were amassed in extraordinary
confusion all his antiquarian treasures .
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS - a .

The laird was describing to his visitor and somewhat foolish Tory, who had
the evidences of an old Roman en- also acquired a taste for antiquities.
campment near his dwelling, when His daughter Isabel, and a son, now
they were surprised by the sudden absent on foreign and military service,
appearance of a man who, having formed Sir Arthur's whole surviving
heard what Mr. Oldbuck had said , family. With Jonathan Oldbuck lived
gave a very different description of what his sister, Griselda, and his niece, Mary
the antiquary had called the central MacIntyre. Invited to dinner at Monk .
(6
point , or " pretorium ”" of the " camp.”" barns, Lovel made the acquaintance of
DIE OCHILTREE OF THE BLUE -GOWN , these personages, except the baronet's
EDIOR THE LICENSED BEGGAR son, soon after his arrival at Fairport.
The new -comer -by name Edie A heated discussion sent the guests
Ochiltree — had the exterior appear home rather hurriedly, and the host
ance of a mendicant . A slouched hat was alarmed to learn that Sir Arthur
of hugemingled
dimensions and Miss Wardour had proceeded by
which with; ahislong white beard
grizzled hair;
way of the sands. This route had
an aged but strongly marked and been taken by the baronet and his
expressive countenance, hardened by daughter when they found that Lovel
ahead of them on the turnpike
climate and exposure to a right brick was
road which led to Knockwinnock .
dust complexion ; a long blue gown, As Sir Arthur and Miss Wardour
with a pewter badge on the right arm ;
two or three wallets or bags, slung paced along , enjoying the pleasant
across his shoulder, for holding the footing afforded by the cool, moist,
different kinds of meal , when he re hard sand, Miss Wardour could not
ceived his charity in kind from those help observing that the last tide had
who were but a degree richer than risen considerably above the usual
himself —all these marked at once a watermark . There was a sudden change
beggar by profession, and one of that in the weather. Then they saw the
privileged class of men who are called in figure of Edie Ochiltree advancing
Scotland the King's Bedesmen , or, through the haze to meet them . The
vulgarly, Blue-Gowns. mendicant told them their only chance
Not only did this individual cause of safety was to retrace their steps. '
confusion to Mr. Oldbuck . He sug- HºwweeTheARE LAND HER FATHER
LOVEL HELPED TO RESCUE HIS

gested to Mr. Lovel that he knew
enough of his movements to cause the
young man to be very liberal in the
way of alms- giving. Mr. Oldbuck , it
should be remarked , had arrived at
the conclusion that his young friend
was an actor . Mr. Oldbuck was con
siderably exercised in his mind by
Mr. Lovel's reticence about his own
affairs. And this feeling spread to
the Sheriff of Fairport , who had heard a
rumour that , because Lovel went on
lonely walks, and made free use of his
pencil , he was a French spy .
OW THE HERO OF THE STORY WAS
H MISTAKEN FOR A FRENCH SPY
Fears of aa French invasion were pretty
general at this period , but apparently
Mr. Lovel entirely removed the worthy
magistrate's suspicions, though the
sheriff kept the explanations, what
ever ihey were, to himself.
There was a rivalry of a kind be-
tween Mr. Oldbuck and his neighbour ,
Sir Arthur Wardour, an impecunious
EZT VIXIOUXUNDOVUT
1650
Despite all that Ochiltree could do,
they were in despair, when Lovel was
seen coming down the crags to the
rocks on which they had found tem
porary foothold. By Lovel's help the
baronet and his daughter were enabled
to reach to a high rock. The rescue
was finally effected by a party of
fishermen got together by Oldbuck,
who , when Sir Arthur and Miss Wardour
were safely in their carriage, took
Lovel home with him for the night.
The next day Oldbuck and Lovel
went to call upon Sir Arthur and Miss
Wardour at Knockwinnock Castle .
Lovel and Miss Wardour had met before;
indeed, Lovel entertained a tender
regard for the baronet's daughter ;
and she, in her turn, was troubled at
the thought that the circumstances of
the previous evening had made her
and her father so much the young man's
debtors ; also by the fact that Ochil
tree had before this seen them both
together. Miss Wardour bade Lovel
 a XICOTEROTONICLES -THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
dismiss his unfortunate attachment
from his mind, leave a country that
afforded no scope for his talents, and
resume the profession he seemed to
have abandoned. His plea was that
she should “ have patience with him
one little month , and if, in the course
of that space, he could not show
such reasons for continuing his resi-
dence at Fairport as even she should
approve of, he would bid adieu to its
vicinity, and, with the same breath,
to all his hopes of happiness.”
A GERMAN ADVENTURER TELLS STRANGE
STORIES OF HIDDEN TREASURE
We learn next that Lovel was thought
to be the son of a man of fortune,butthere
was some mystery about his birth, and
that Miss Wardour, who had first met
him at her aunt's house in Yorkshire, did
not, when she saw him at Mr. Oldbuck's,
choose to renew his acquaintance till
she should know that her father ap-
proved of her holding any intercourse
with him .
Another significant fact disclosed
at this juncture in the story is that
Sir Arthur Wardour was greatly
in need of money, and was basing
hopes of fortune upon certain dis-
coveries of one Dousterswivel, a German
adventurer who obtained money from willingly allowed Ochiltree to lead him
him under the promise of findinghidden
wealth by a divining rod . Douster-
swivel had come to both the baronet
and Mr. Oldbuck with strange tales of
appearances of old shafts and vestiges
of mining operations. Mr. Oldbuck was
misled to a small extent by some idea mendicant succeeded in giving the Ger
man a terrible fright, and in arousing
that the Phænicians had in former times
wrought copper in the spot Douster-
swivel pointed out, but Sir Arthur
had risked ruin in the enterprise.
HE HERO IS WRONGLY SUSPECTED OF
THEEIN OAN ADVENTURER
Invited with Oldbuck to join a small
party at the ruins of St. Ruth's Priory,
and afterwards to dine and spend the
evening at Knockwinnock Castle, Lovel
met Captain Hector MacIntyre, the
nephew of the antiquary, and at the
outset a distinct coolness arose between
these two, thenew -comer paying marked
attention to Miss Wardour. The cap-
tain , with some haughtiness, questioned
his sister Mary about the antecedents of
his uncle's new friend. He followed this
up by directly questioning Lovel about
the latter's regiment , and showed very
end
1651
una nmin mannun mubaru IEEE
plainly his doubt as to Lovel's replies,
stating that he had no recollection of his
name, though he knew the regiment
referred to and the names of the officers.
Dissatisfied with Lovel's replies to his
questions, the Hotspur-like Captain
MacIntyre suggests to him that his
further visits to Monkbarns “ must be
dropped as disagreeable to him .” Lovel's
reply to the captain's emissary was that
he should certainly visit Mr. Oldbuck
when it suited him. The rejoinder to
this was arequest from the captain that
unless Mr. Lovel wished to be an
nounced as a very dubious character he
would favour the captainwith a meeting
in the ruins of St. Ruth.” Lovel agreed
to the meeting — with pistols - and se
cured a companion in an honest sailor,
Lieutenant Taffril, whom he persuaded
that, situated as he was, he could not
discuss the subject of his family with
any propriety.
HOWHEL OVEL , FOUGHT A
DUEL
THE ANTIQUARY'S NEPHEW
WITH
The meeting took place, despite the
presence of Ochiltree , who did his best
to prevent it. MacIntyre fell, begged
Lovel's forgiveness, and bade him seek
safety in flight, and this appeal being
seconded by the mendicant, Lovel un
away into the recesses of the wood. At
midnight, in the ruins, Ochiltree and
Lovel witnessed an attempt by Douster
swivel to delude Sir Arthur with a
bogus discovery of buried treasure and
an equally bogus display of magic. The
the suspicions of the baronet on the
score of Dousterswivel's honesty. Lovel
next made his way to the seashore, and
then on board Lieutenant Taffril's brig.
Meanwhile, Captain MacIntyre was
being nursed at his uncle's house,
whither Sir Arthur came for the double
purpose of raising another loan and of
acquainting Mr. Oldbuck with Douster
swivel's “ find ” of gold and silver
coins in the ruins of St. Ruth. Sir
Arthur was accompanied by Douster
swivel, and Mr. Oldbuck stipulating
that all should visit the ruins together
and seek by digging what could be
found, the party set forth with picks
and shovels. They were met by Ochil
tree , who promptly recognised the
horn in which the coins had been
NIET*
 THE CHILD'S STORY
OD ZERGIEEE TUDar
OF FAMOUS BOOKS coz

“ discovered ” as an old snuff-box that Geraldin was a villain . It was only

had once belonged to him. The work after his mother's death that Lord
men , on the mendicant's advice, dug in Geraldin learned from old Elspeth, the
a certain place. A chest of silver treasure countess's former servant , the truth of
was disclosed. When Sir Arthur and the deception that had been practised
Mr. Oldbuck had gone away, the German upon him . In the meantime twenty
was induced by the mendicant to meet years had passed by. The new Earl of
him again for the purpose of unearthing Glenallan sought and secured the in
further treasure. The old mendicant , terest and help of Mr. Oldbuck in dis
who was also an old soldier, led the covering his child.
treasure- finder a sad dance. Douster- By this time the bailiff had come to
swivel had another awful fright, on Knockwinnock Castle. But his arrival
awaking from which his senses were was speedily followed by a message from
further tried by Sir Arthur's son,
witnessing the who, by the aid
midnight funeral of a friend, was
of the Countess able to enclose
of Glenallan . enough money
With the ad to release his
vent of the name father from a

of Glenallan into very humiliating

the story, the situation .
reader becomes The friend was
acquainted with none other than
a romance in the Lovel, by whose
early life of Mr. directions the
Oldbuck , and treasure un
with the secret earthed at the
of Mr. Lovel's ruins had been
birth . The old placed there , in
countess had order that Sir
been very jealous Arthur might be
of her position , benefited with
and fearing that out knowing at
her eldest son , whose hands.
Lord Geraldin , To Sir Arthur's
would marry a son Lovel was
Miss Neville , known as Major
who, for family Neville, a distin
reasons , had guished officer
been treated as
EDIE OCHILTREE THE BEGGAR
in the King's
her husband's This picture of the strange character who plays so prominent service. It
daughter, she a part in " Guy Mannering " shows how a licensed mendicant remains to be
suggested
son that
to this
the cloak
lookedandin aScotland less than twocenturies ago. Hewore a blue stated that
large badge, and carried a bag, into which he put the
Major Neville ,
relationship was meal that people gave him . Begging was then a regular trade. who had been
a true one. But before she had ap- educated at the expense of Lord Glen
proached him with this story he had allan's brother, and left his heir, was in
married Miss Neville secretly. The young reality the son of the earl. The restoration
wife had died tragically after giving of the son to the father was followed by
birth to a son , and the remainder of the the marriage of the former to Miss
days of her husband had been spent in Wardour .
sorrow and remorse . As for the son , he Thus the tale of true love, though it had
had disappeared , and no trace of him not run smoothly, ended in happiness,
had been found . to the great joy of old Edie Ochiltree ,
Mr. Oldbuck , who had been a suitor whose satisfaction was none the less that
for Miss Neville's hand, had done all he Dousterswivel was effectively unmasked.
could to shield her name from blame, The next stories of Famous Books be ; n
and had become convinced that Lord on page 1757
UZNE TERTUTIE EDITITTEMPLUNTEEL ரலை
1652
Gent
Ru a los
A The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS

SISTER DORA & THE TOILERS OF WALSALL

N the little village of CONTINUED FROM 1558
Hauxville, in York
shire, there was born in
the year 1832 a little girl who
was named Dora Pattison , but
who , when she grew to woman
hood, was lovingly called by the
hard - fisted toilers in the iron
0
foundries of Walsall “ Our Sister
Dora ,” a name that suited her well .
She was a bright, bonnie, merry
pleaded with him to
o
let her try to save it.
She did save it, too,
and the grateful man used
afterwards to walk eleven miles
every Sunday to ring the hos
pital bell with that arm , and
inquire about Sister Dora , when
she was lying ill herself. It was
Sister Dora who helped a poor little
burnt child to die so happily, that with

girl who much liked to get her own
way, and growing restless in the little
country village where her home was,
longed to go with Florence Nightin-
gale to nurse the wounded soldiers in
the Crimea. She was not then trained
for nursing, and her father would not
consent to her going, so she stayed at
home and taught the village children .
But she soon found her life -work in
nursing and caring for sick people.
She seemed to bear a charmed life, struggling with delirious patients and
to have strength more than human,
and her courage, self-sacrifice, and
devotion to all who needed her help
made her life one long golden deed .
In 1864 Sister Dora joined the
Sisterhood of the Good Samaritan at
Coatham , in Yorkshire, and the experi-
ence she thus gained in nursing poor
people and taking interest in their
needs was very helpful to her in her
future hospital work.
Where pain and misery were, there
was Sister Dora to help and cheer.
When a worker in a coal-mine met
with an accident and the surgeon at
her hospital wanted to cut off his
right arm , it was Sister Dora who
1653
BBS
almost her last breath she said she
would meet Sister Dora in heaven with
a bunch of flowers !
When small-pox broke out in the
town , Sister Dora spent her hours of
rest in nursing in their own homes those
who had none to care for them. For
six months she battled with disease and
death almost single -handed, herself
putting sufferers into the ambulances,
and taking them away to be nursed ,
mothering every sick child. And with
all her ceaseless work and untiring
energy , she was so strong, cheery,
merry , and full of fun , that she made
her patients want to get well ; as one
of them said , “ She'd make you laugh
if you were dying ." No one could be
gloomy or hopeless when looking on
her face, for it was aglow with the
beauty of a loving, unselfish spirit.
Far too soon Sister Dora had spent
all her strength for others ; yet true to
her noble nature she worked to the end,
keeping her own suffering hidden from
those around, and passing from one
bed to another with her scc thing touch,
her cheery word , and her loving smile.
A
 DUBULGADODXALEC

THE QUEEN WHO GAVE UP HER BOY

NEAEAR the beginning of the sixteenth their leader, the Prince of Condé, fell
century there was born at Fontaine- in the disastrous battle of Jarnac, in
bleau , in France, a little girl , Jeanne 1669, and hope seemed dead, the
d'Albert , heiress to the kingdom of faithful Queen of Navarre came to their
Navarre and niece to the French king, aid. She rode into the camp among
Francis I. She hardly knew her parents, the despondent soldiers, bringing with
but was brought up in the country by her two fine bright boys — her only son ,
her governess, and until she was nine Henry, aged about fifteen , and his
years of age did not realise that she cousin, the now fatherless Prince of
was kept a prisoner by her uncle, King Condé, a boy of twelve, whom she had
Francis, in a castle on the banks of the adopted. In stirring words she rallied
Loire. This theking did , that when she the little army to defend their religion,
was quite a child he might compel her and to avenge the death of their beloved
to marry a Protestant duke. Little Condé. Presenting the two boys, she
Protestant duke.
Jeanne was very unwilling to marry cried :
the duke the king chose, and was glad " Soldiers , I offer you everything I
when the Pope annulled the marriage, have - my kingdom, my treasures, my
and she was free to wed as she chose . life, and , more precious than all, my
During the peaceful years she spent children ."
at Pau , Jeanne studied and learned to These words were received in breath
love the religion of the Huguenots, the less silence, and then , as Prince Henry
persecuted Protestants of France, and galloped into their midst , the soldiers
her husband proving a worthless char- greeted him with cheers as their leader.
acter, she devoted herself to their cause. In clear ringing tones, he swore never
On the death of her old father, she be- to desert them .
came Queen of Navarre, and while dark Dark days were before the Hugue
clouds were gathering round the heads nots , and to them the sacrifice of the
of the Huguenots, she helped and Queen of Navarre seemed vain in the
encouraged them all she could . light of after events ; yet who shall say
The homeless and persecuted were that it was so, when her noble deed
ever welcome at her court, which grew revived the courage of the Huguenots
to be looked on as a haven of refuge by at a time of defeat, and helped to keep
the sorely troubled Huguenots. When alive the Protestant religion in France .
THE BOY WHO WOULD NOT FIGHT AGAINST FREEDOM
ERE is the story of a young Italian resist ; they could only do their best , at
HEREwho well deserves to be called a great risk to themselves, to give what
hero, thoughnoone even knows his name . aid they could to the bands of insur
In the middle of the last century, there
gents. If they were dragged off into the
was no kingdom of Italy as there is now.
Austrian ranks, they were obliged to fight
The southern part was the kingdom ofagainst their own countrymen to save
Naples, where the king was a foreigner,
their own lives.
and the government was very harsh . But there was a young lad among
Most of the northern half was under those who were thus forced to carry
the rule of the Austrian emperor ; and arms against the Italian patriots, and he
the Italians hated , as much as we should resolved that it was better to face death
do , to feel that they were held under a for- than to help in an evil cause . He could
eign yoke , and the peasants rose in arms not resist the Austrians, but even in
to win their freedom . They succeeded self -defence he would not fight against
after a long struggle ; and the first king the liberators. And so, when his first
of United Italy was Victor Emmanuel. battle was over, he was found slain by
Now, the Austrians sent troops into a bullet , with a smile on his face , holding
Italy to crush the rebels. But , besides the musket in his dead fingers.
the Austrian soldiers, they compelled But the musket had never been
many of the Italian peasants to join the loaded. He gave his life for Italy without
regiments which were engaged in pre- even fighting to save it, and a great
venting the people of Italy from winning poetess has given him immortality.
their liberty . The peasants could not The next Golden Deeds are on page 1803.
LIITUS UUTUUN TEXT
Unatorum
1654
 The Child's Book of
SMAKE
PEARE MEN & WOMEN apoi
MIL

RUBENS
BRAHE TEPLER

su
*

HALLEY BRADLEY AIRY

NAT
OLE
ON .

THE MEN WHO MAPPED THE SKIES

People often make CONTINUED FROM 1592
among the first ;
fun of “ star but India and China
gazers,” but they claim tohave begun ( )
would be very badly off the study of the skies
if it were not for the star-gazers. three thousand years before the DAR)
WIN
Our great Navy would be prac Wise Men of the East followed
tically useless. Without the the bright star to where Jesus
help of the astronomers we could was born in Bethlehem .
not steer at night , or out to sea. No doubt the Chinese astronomers
Our trains would run greater risks would have been glad if their sover
than they now do when travelling eigns had not been so interested in
at night. Our almanacs would soon astronomy. For the men who
be out of date and useless. All would studied the skies had to prophesy
be chance and risk, for we should the date when an eclipse of the sun
have no time-keepers, no guides. would take place, so that the people
Astronomy is the science which might get ready with gongs, and
tells us all that is known about the drums, and make noises, to frighten
heavenly bodies, and astronomers away the monster who, they be
are the men learned in the science . lieved, appeared in the sky to swal
We depend upon that science and low the sun. If the astronomers
upon the men learned in it for the failed to prophesy correctly, they
government of our everyday life. were killed .
LIVIN
STONEG

It is probably the oldest science of This shows us that the Chinese

STEPHE

all. It is certainly one of the most understanding of astronomy was

wonderful, and has the strangest ,
most interesting history .
The first astronomers were the
ancient shepherds who watched their
flocks by night in the fields, and
gazed up into the brilliant skies,
wondering what all the bright stars
meant . Ignorant as they were, they
made guesses at the meaning of the
stars . We do not know who began
the study . We know that the
Chaldeans and the Egyptians were
not very clear ; nobody's was in
those early days. The first man to
make an intelligent study of it was
Thales, one of the Seven Wise Men
of Greece . He was born in the year
640 B.C. and died in 556, and he gave
all his life to the examination of
the problems of Nature . He was RUS
the first to see that the sun and KIN
moon and stars were something
more than signals placed in the sky
to mark the operation of demons

PJULIUS CÆSAR HERBERT SPENCCAS

1655
 Dance
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
and gods, and he was the first to draw phere, is refracted — that is, turned
maps showing the position of the most aside from the path which it was pur
noticeable stars in the heavens. suing. So far so good.
About 400 years passed away before The mischief that Ptolemy did was to
another great thinker took up astronomy. declare that the earth exists as a fixed
This was Hipparchus, a Greek scholar, body in the midst of the universe,
who was doing his work about 150 years and that the heavens revolve round it
before the birth of Christ. once every twenty -four hours . For
H'PPARCHUS; GREATEST OF
THE All the next thirteen hundred years all
THE ANCIENT ASTRONOMERS the civilised world believed his theory
Hipparchus madea close study of the to be true . People believed, during all
heavens, and was able, in a rough-and- that time,that the sky was a great solid
ready way, to predict what would happen vault , turning round on a mighty axis
in the skies. This was different from the which fitted into fixed sockets, and that
prophesying of the magicians, of whom the stars were attached to the surface of
the Bible tells us. Theirs was fraud and the vault , by nails, or other wonderful
guess-work. Hipparchus prophesied fastenings.
because he had scientific knowledge. Not the whole of this belief lasted up
the
but the
Moreover, he first brought astronomy to the time of Copernicus,After
to the assistance of geography, and Ptolemaic system did.
made maps of the heavens, and of so Greeks, the Arabs took up astronomy.
much of the earth as was then known . the works of Ptolemy,
They found
This does not seem much to us to-day, seven hundred years after his death , and
but it was really wonderful so long ago , never questioned the theory. They
when very little was known of science, worked on in the belief that all was as
and when there were no scientific instru- Ptolemy had said , and their own ob
ments for measurements . Hipparchus servations were added to the store of
found out that the year as counted by known facts ; but they never came any
the sun was shorter than the year nearer to the real truth than Ptolemy
counted by the stars . This he learned himself had done long before.
by making measurements and com- COOPERNICUS,
P WHO SAT IN A TOWER
paring them with measurements taken AND WATCHED THE STARS
150 years earlier by Timocharis, The modern history of astronomy
another diligent student of the heavens. dawned with Nicholas Copernicus,, who
Hipparchus was the greatest of all was born in Poland in 1473 , and died in
the ancient astronomers, for hisob- 1543. He was one of the wonderful
servations enabled him to write with geniuses which poor homes often pro
skill about the sun and moon and the duce . It is believed that his parents were
planets, and to fix the time of their serfs or slaves. At any rate, they
movements with accuracy : Had were as poor as they could be. Luckily,
another such man soon arisen, as. Copernicus had an uncle who was a
tronomy would before long have be- bishop, and was able to befriend him .
come a great science . The boy was left fatherless when quite
OW PTOLEMY LED THE WORLD ASTRAY young, and this good uncle became a
Ноу FOR THIRTEEN HUNDRED YEARS second father to him , and had him
But nearly 300 years went by before educated as a doctor and a priest.
another famous star -gazer arose, and Copernicus, as soon as he could,
he did , perhaps, more harm than good. settled down as a canon at his uncle's
This was Ptolemy Claudius, an Egyp- cathedral, and devoted his days to
tian mathematician, who lived in the relieving the sick and suffering, to
second century after Christ. He care- preaching, and to the study of astro
fully studied the works of Hipparchus, nomy. He read all that he could of the
though nobody else seems to have pre- old writers on astronomy, and his clear
served a copy . In addition to this mind saw that there was something
study he did independent work . He wrong in the conclusions which Ptolemy
discovered important changes in the had reached . Night after night he
course of the moon, and he discovered would sit up in a tower and watch the
that light, coming from a distant silent stars ,pondering on their mystery.
star , on entering a thicker atmos- He saw that the sun does not go round
1656
 -THE MEN WHO MAPPED THE SKIES
the earth , but that the carth and the respect and gratitude . Now we

other planets go round the sun . But it cross again to the Continent, to make
was terrible to think such a thing in the acquaintance of a famous Dane ,
those days. The Church held that God named " Tycho Brahe , who was born
had made our earth the centre of the at Knudstorp, Sweden , when that town
universe, that ours was the greatest and belonged to Denmark, in 1546, and
most important planet in the universe, died at Prague in 1601 . Some boys
and that all the heavens obediently have to struggle against poverty when
attended, meekly whirling round and learning, but Brahe had to struggle
round us . If it were believed that the against riches. His parents were dis
earth was not the centre of the universe, tinguished people, and they hated the
then the Church said that the import- thought of their son studying for the love
ance of the earth disappeared, except of learning. Wishing him to be a
for the fact that it was the home of man. lawyer, they sent him to university after
The Church did not see that the fact university that he might study law.
of manthe,God's
upon highest
earth gave the creation, living
earth a crown TYCHO BRAHETTHE RIGHT YANG NSANE,
OF HEAVENS

ing glory such as, perhaps, no other But all the while his heart was in
planet possesses. They had agreed that the heavens. He had only a pair of
the earth was the centre of the universe, compasses in the way of scientific in
and it was held that only the sinful struments, but with these he set himself,
would dare dream anything else. when fourteen years of age , to study the
Copernicus wrote a book to prove his distance of the stars. In spite of hin
new theory. In many ways it was drances, he became famous as an astro
faulty, but it contained great and won nomer, and when he was thirty his
derful truths, and was the foundation work attracted the notice of the King
of modern astronomy. He knew the of Denmark, who gave him a pension,
danger he ran, and he feared to give his and built him the finest observatory
book to the world. For years he kept that the world had up to that time seen.
it by him . He was drawing near to This was on an island near Copenhagen,
death when he at last ventured, and he and was called by a name which meant
received the first printed copy of his the City of the Heavens.
work on the very day that he died. Here for twenty years Brahe worked
THAT COPERNICUS at the task he loved . Copernicus had
GREATONBOOK
THEPRINTED THE DAY HE DIED
been three years dead when Brahe was
The book at first reached the hands of born , but Brahe studied the great man's
only a few educated people, so the works, and improved upon them . He
Church did not much mind , and nothing did not believe that the ideas of Coper
was done concerning it for seventy nicus were quite right. It seemed im
years. Then the Church forbade people possible to him that the earth could be
to read it . the tiny globe which Copernicus's theory
Here we must say a word for the first made it appear. Great as was the mind
Englishman interested in astronomy. of Brahe , it was not great enough to
This was Robert Recorde, who was born receive that truth . He favoured the
at Tenby, Pembrokeshire, in 1510 , and belief of Ptolemy, that the sun went
died in 1558 in a London prison, where round the earth . The other planets , he
they sent poormen who owed money. He said, undoubtedly go round the sun , but
taught mathematics and medicine at he believed that they and the sun go
Oxford, but settled down in London , round the earth , which is fixed, and not
where he had the opportunity to make to be moved out of its place.
to OF TYCHO BRAHE AND
careless, so that he became imprisoned T'HOWORROWSCAME "WEHTHER
for debt . He is of interest to us because his great mistake .
That was But his
he was, as far as we know , the first man work was very valuable. He discovered
in England to agree with the new views new laws governing the motion of the
put forward by Copernicus, and he was moon ; he helped forward knowledge
the first Englishman ever to write on with regard to comets, and he worked
astronomy in English Therefore, we out , more accurately than anybody
must bear his memory in mind with else had done since the days of
1657
 DULULLDOSUERIEND
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Hipparchus , the position of some of the foundation of the new astronomy
the most important stars . studied on scientific lines .
Brahe had many sorrows to bear when All this time no man had ever seen
his friend the king died. His pension the sky through a telescope. The
was stopped, his splendid observatory great discoverers of the secrets of the
was broken up, and he had to go to heavens had had to do their work
Prague, where the Emperor Rudolf with unaided eyes. Galileo was the
became his friend. It was a good thing first man to turn a telescope towards
for the world, for there Brahe met a the sky. He did much more than that ,
youth who was to become even a as we shall see . His name was Galileo
greater astronomer than himself. Galilei . He was born at Pisa, Italy,
THE JOHN KEPLER AND HOW HE READ
BRAVE in February, 1564,and died at Arcetri,
near Florence, in 1642. His family had
This was John Kepler, the great in the past been distinguished, but his
German astronomer, who was born in mother and father were poor, and they
Würtemberg, in December,, 1571 , and were anxious that he should have a
died at Ratisbon in 1630. His parents good education as a doctor. They
were poor gentlefolk, who managed to did not want him to study mathematics,
give him a good education, but had no lest the knowledge should lead him
riches for him . He was educated at a away from the profession which they
monks' school, and when twenty-two wished him to follow. He was a very
was appointed to lecture on astronomy. clever boy, showing skill in mechanics ,
Up to then he had had no special love in modelling, and in music ; and he
for the science , but he had read the painted with such art that , had he been
writings of Copernicus , and believed in born earlier , he would certainly have
them . From this time forth he gave followed the calling of an artist . He
his life to the study of the skies . wished to be one, and on entering
He was always poor, and often, in Pisa University he saw that to be a
later life, had difficulty in getting money good artist he must learn something of
enough on which to live. But he was geometry. The study of this subject
too brave a soul to care about want . opened new fields of knowledge to him .
What
were he desired
the great bright in the: solar
know was
to bodies How H WIRSALMEO GAVE THE DOCTORS THE
FIRST MACHINE THEY EVER HAD
system kept in their position ? He He read of the experiments of Ar.
made many daring attempts to find the chimedes, and how that great man had
right answer. Some were well on the found out the quantity of base metal
way towards the discovery ; others in his king's crown. Galileo saw that
were wild and wide of the mark . He there was a simpler way than that of
wrote a book on what he had thought Archimedes, and he invented a balance
and done , and this brought him to the which would solve the problem more
notice of Brahe, who hadhim appointed quickly. He wrote an essay on it ,
assistant to himself. Brahe had only which so pleased a great man that
two years to live, but those years were Galileo was appointed to lecture on
precious in the history of astronomy. mathematics at Pisa, and to continue
He GREAT THINGS THAT KEPLER DID, further studies in the way that he had
TheAND THE COMING OF GALILEO IN ITALY begun . There was now no further talk
He taught Kepler all he could , of his being either aa doctor or an artist.
and at his death left him all his papers He was allowed to follow science all the
and instruments, and all the facts days of his life.
which he had worked out . Kepler But before all this he had done some
was appointed to the place which thing for the doctors which nobody
Brahe had held, and never rested until else had done . He noticed a great
he had worked out the answer to the lamp swinging in the cathedral at Pisa,
great questions which he had set him- and saw that, no matter how long or how
self. He discovered the laws which short its swings , its beats were regular.
enable us to tell the place of any planet This set him thinking, and he invented
in its orbit -- that is, its circular path the first pendulum , and used it to
through the skies — at any time past measure the human pulse, so that by
or present . Keper's Laws became its aid aa doctor could tell how fast the
1658
 -THE MEN WHO MAPPED THE SKIES Xxxcom

heart of a patient beat , and with what there is a picture on page 288. Now ,
strength or weakness. That was the according to Aristotle, the shot weighing
first mechanical contrivance ever made ten pounds should have reached the
to help the doctors in their treatment ground in one-tenth of the time occupied
of the human body. by the shot weighing one pound . But
While studying at Pisa, Galileo felt they both reached the ground together.
convinced that much of the teaching of Galileo rejoiced at this proof, but the
the day was wrong. People still believed followers of Aristotle were furious.
in Ptolemy's system of astronomy, They would not believe what their
but for other mechanical laws they eyes showed them . They could show
accepted what had been written by by the books of Aristotle, they said ,
Aristotle, a scholar who, born nearly that such a thing could not be. But
400 years before Christ , became the Galileo declared that, except for the
tutor of Alexander the Great. Aris- light article being a little more resisted
totle was a wonderful man, but not by the air than the heavy article, all
all that he said was right. One of his bodies fall at the same rate. This
THE TRIAL OF GALILEO, WHO WAS TORTURED FOR TELLING MEN THE TRUTH

Galileo, the first man to make a telescope and look through it, was the first man to announce that the earth
was a ball moving round the sun. The Church grew afraid of him and brought him before the terrible Inqui
sition . The cruel Inquisitors tortured him, and tried to make him say that he was wrong in what he taught.
After denying that the earth moved, we are told that he added under his breath, “ And yet it does move ."
beliefs was that , if two bodies of the declaration made everybody very angry,
same substance fall from the same and students and professors at the
height, the heavier body will reach the university became his enemies .
earth first ; that a body twice as heavy Soon there was another grievance
as another body must reach the earth against Galileo. A powerful man
in half the time of the lighter body. wished to dredge the mud out of Leg
For 1,900 years nobody had thought of horn harbour. The model of his
questioning this. Galileo was the first machine was shown to Galileo , who said
to do so . He saw that it was wrong, that it would be impossible to do the
and he said so . work with it . What he said was proved
He took two shots, one weighing ten to be true when the work was actually
pounds and the other weighing one tried ; but, in the meantime, his honesty
pound. He let them fall from the top of made his enemies so angry that he had
the leaning tower of Pisa, of which to flee from Pisa to Florence .
1659 OD ODER DOO

THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN
Here his lot was miserable . His
father died ; and Galileo now had his
mother, a brother, and two sisters
depending upon him . After two un-
happy years he was made professor
of mathematics at Padua . He was
now 27 years old , and remained at
Padua for eighteen busy years. He
did an enormous amount of work for
science, and people flocked from all
parts of Europe to hear his lectures.
HOFOUND LEO
GALITHAT WITH HIS TELESCOPE
ARISTOTLE WAS WRONG
He was poorly paid, and had to act
as tutor to pupils — many of whom be-
came famous men - in order that he
might have money enough for the
wants of himself and his family. At
the beginning of his career he had be-
lieved in Ptolemy's system and had
taught it to his pupils ; but , as he
learned more, he saw that Copernicus
was right ; and, though he knew that
to teach Copernicanism meant danger
to himself, he did teach it .
In 1609 he improved the telescope.
One had been made in Holland for use
on land, but Galileo made a better one ,
for seeing the sky.. We must not stay
here over the making of the telescope ,
of which we read in another part of
this book . The first thing that Galileo
cxamined with his telescope was the
moon . He saw that it was like our
earth , full of mountains and hollows.
The followers of Aristotle would not
believe this . The moon was perfectly
round and smooth , they said. But
greater wonders were to follow.
Galileo discovered , by the aid of his
glass, that the system of planets was
not quite what had been thought. He
found that there were lesser planets
revolving round Jupiter, just as other
planets revolve round the sun . This
excited the enemies of Galileo more
than ever . How could such things be,
they cried. One of them said : “ There
are only seven openings in the head - two
eyes , two ears , two nostrils, and one
mouth ; there are only seven metals, in the heavens, and wrote books of the
and seven days in the week, therefoie
there can be only seven planets.”
GREW AFRAID AND
HOWRIEDEOCHTOR THE SPREAP BA TRUTA
Galileo made them look through the
telescope, and there were the heavenly
bodies to be seen . “ Oh, well," they
said , “ they are not visible to the naked
1660
IZRAELADA
AND WOMEN
eye, so they cannot exercise any
influence on the earth ; and , being >>
useless, therefore they do not exist .
The discovery brought Galileo new
fame, and he was persuaded to go to
Florence at a much larger salary . He
discovered many other things in the
sky, and showed that, although the
earth goes round the sun, the sun itself
turns round also.
Now, in 1600, a great man, named
Giordano Bruno, who was born near
Naples about 1548, was burnt to death
for upholding the Copernican theory.
Galileo was not frightened by that. He
declared, as Bruno had declared, that
Copernicus was right. He declared, too,
that the stars and planets are mad of
the same substance as the earth ; that
the universe is not limited, but
unlimited in extent .
The Church now became alarmed .
It turned in 1611 to the works of
Copernicus, and declared that they
should not be read. The Inquisition, a
court with terrible powers, conducted
by officers of the Church , summoned
Galileo before it , and made him swear
to deny that the earth goes round the
sun . If he did not agree , he was to be
thrown into prison. He did agree, for
the Inquisition could torture him to
death if it chose .
GALILEO WAS TORTURED AND
HºwWROTE BOOKS TILL HE WAS BLIND
Sixteen years passed away, and then
Galileo continued his studies and wrote
a book defending and proving the Coper
nican system . For this he was again
called before the Inquisition . Dressed in
sackcloth , he was made to kneel and swear
that he would never again say or believe
that the earth moves round the sun.
He was now an old man , and he knew
that the torture awaited him if he
disobeyed. So once more he swore.
Then he was sent away as a prisoner,
but was afterwards given his liberty,
though spies watched him to the end of
his days. He worked at his discoveries
highest importance, till he became blind .
The man , who, more than any other,
was to teach us what the heavens show
us , was himself unable to see their
glories. He died when seventy -eight,
conquered, but not before he had given
the world a great heritage of knowledge
upon which much that we know of
 THE MEN WHO MAPPED THE SKIES
EnvELAS CLEARBETE

ROMITTU

natural science has been founded. he came to the conclusion that all
We see how man after man built upon things are drawn towards the centre of
the foundations laid by those who had the earth. Then , going a step further,
gone before. Copernicus and Kepler and he discovered that the planets are
Galileo prepared the way for Jeremiah drawn towardsthe sun in the same way.
Horrocks, “ the founder of English Little by little he discovered the law of
Astronomy," who observed the transit gravitation, which explains the move
of Venus, and Sir Isaac Newton , the ments of the heavenly bodies.
great Englishman , who was born at We get a great lesson in patience and
Woolsthorpe, Lincolnshire, in 1642 , and care from Newton. At the beginning
died in London in 1727. He was a dull he could not explain the movements of
boy at school, yet he beat all the other the moon and planets, because he had
THE FOUNDER OF ENGLISH ASTRONOMY WATCHING THE SHADOW OF A PLANET ON THE SUN
MOTU
MM

.
This picture , painted by Mr. Eyre Crowe, shows Jeremiah Horrocks, the founder of English Astronomy , ”
observing the transit of Venus. He darkened his room at the date - November 24, 1639 — which he had alone
predicted, and placed a tube out of the window pointing towards the sun. Then, by placing a board at the
opposite side so that the disc of the sun was thrown on it and moving it as the sun moved, he was enabled to
watch the shadow of Venus cross the disc of light. He was thus able to calculate the size of the planet . Though
he died at the early age of 23, he made other useful discoveries in astronomy, and concerning the ocean tides.
students at mechanics and mathematics, no figures upon which he could rely,
and in course of time he became famous giving the size of the earth. No matter
at Cambridge University . Galileo had what answer to his problem he wanted,
given the world the law of bodies falling that answer always came out incorrect ,
to the earth , but nobody had thought through the absence of the necessary
that such lawsmight affect the heavenly figures. Here hewas, on the eve of one of
bodies. One day Newton , when sitting the greatest discoveries in history, but
in his garden, saw an apple fall from a he put aside this work for seven whole
tree. “Why should that apple fall ? ” years. Then , in 1670 , a scholar named
he wondered. Why did it not float Picard produced reliable figures as to
away or rise into the air ? ” He thought the size of the earth. Newton took up
out the problem and worked at it until his work where he had left it , and
rusem XmE 1661
гс D
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
finished it in triumph. By this to take his degree, and spent eighteen
time men were beginning to realise months at St. Helena, making a map
the importance of astronomy, and it of 314 important stars which we on this
was proposed to King Charles II . of side of the world never see. Aiterwards
England that astronomers should find he became Astronomer Royal in succes
the longitude at sea, and so enable sion to Flamsteed, and did splendid
sailors to steer in safety and with know- work. He predicted the return of the
ledge of the course they were following. comet which is named after him.
John Flamsteed , who was born near MAN WHO MADE ISAAC NEWTON
Derby in 1646, and died in 1719, had THEPUBLISH HIS GREAT DISCOVERY
gained a reputation by his researches in The most important thing he did, how
astronomy, and he was consulted about ever, was to make Newton publish his
the proposal. He said that so little great book. But for Halley, Newton
was known of astronomy that the never would have published it, and the
proposal could not be carried out . So world might have waited a century for
in 1675 he was appointed the first the knowledge which that book, and
Astronomer Royal, and Greenwich that book alone, could give. Halley
Observatory was built solely that he was made a captain in the navy in
might make careful observations of the order that he might continue his study
stars, to enable sailors to find their way of the moon and stars, and the tides of
in safety across the seas. He did his the sea . He died in 1742.
work nobly, making maps of the stars James Bradley was Halley's succes
such as had never before been seen. sor. A native of Sherborne, Dorset , he
TO BUILD GREENWICH OBSERVATORY
was born in
birthplace in 1762.
1693 , His
andmost
diedimportant
near his
The observatory was begun in a very work was the discovery of what is called
A gate-house at the Tower the aberration of light. We know that
was pulled down to provide wood ; iron light travels to us from the stars,at the
and lead and bricks were taken from rate of 185,000 miles a second . What we
Tilbury Fort ; and £520, obtained see is not the star, but the light of the
from the sale of spoilt gunpowder , star. That light takes a definite time
provided the money necessary for to travel to us, and while it is on its
wages, and so forth . way here, the earth is spinning on its
Flamsteed had only £ 100 a year, and path through space ; and we see the
had to buy his own instruments. light of the stars, not in the place where
This makes his success all the more the star actually is , but where the star
wonderful , especially when we con- was some time before . This was the
sider that his health was so bad that first clear proof of the earth's actual
he could hardly do his work , let alone motion, and it was his discovery of this
teach the pupils, whose fees were that made Bradley famous.
necessary to
quarrelled, as enable him to
invalidsdo, withlive
his. best
He THE FIRST WATCH, TO HELP The Sailor
TO FIND AT SEA
friends, among whom were Newton and The next great Astronomer Royal was
Edmund Halley. The latter was a born Nevil Maskelyne, who wasborn in London
astronomer. He was a native of London, in 1732 , and died at Greenwich Observa
where he was born in 1656 , and before tory in 1811. He did more than any of
he was nineteen he had made such the others to find the longitude at sea.
progress in astronomy as to be able to In his time the first watch which would
say th if a star were displaced in the keep time at sea was made. That was
heavens he would at once detect it . a great thing. With the help of this
When he knew that Flamsteed was watch, which carried Greenwich time out
making a map of the stars to be seen to any part of the waters, mariners had
from our skies, Halley wished to make now only to observe the position of the
a catalogue of the stars seen in the heavenly bodies, and by comparing
southern skies , on the other side of the the time where they were with the time
world . His father, who was rich , and of the Greenwich watch, they knew
proud of his boy, gave him money and exactly where they were at sea.
consent , and young Halley rushed After Maskelyne came Sir George
away from Cambridge without waiting Biddell Airy. He was born at Alnwick ,
more per un
1662
SERTE ODIO ma conosconommen waar

SIR ISAAC NEWTON STUDYING SUNLIGHT

UM

This picture shows Sir Isaac Newton, the great scientist, experimenting with light. When in a garden he saw
an apple fall to the ground, and this set him wondering why it fell to the earth and not into the sky. This led
to his discovery of the great law of gravitation , by which we can explain the movements of the
earth and the other planets, and to many other wonderful discoveries concerning the laws of Nature.
con
1663 TUDODOMOTE mm
LUZZLEEXEELD
CXEEELELA
kumnun -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN RIO DO
ELECA
LELE

Northumberland, in 1801, and died him with it while he was at work ;

at Greenwich in 1892. He did an enor- she read books to him while he toiled .
mous amount of work in mapping She sang at concerts with success ,
the heavens and applying his knowledge but gave up music to assist her brother
to geography on land and sea . It was in astronomy. She used to sit up all
he who broughtthe science to the pitch night with him to watch the stars.
which it finally attained at Greenwich , She copied his papers, helped him with
so that it has been said by a great man , his star--maps,, kept the house,, did the
Professor Newcomb, that if all the needlework, and entertained company.
knowledge of this branch of astronomy She used to fill up her spare time with
were utterly lost, it could be entirely polishing mirrors for his telescopes.
replaced at Greenwich Observatory. Seldom has there been another such
WILLIAM . HERSCHEL AND HIS BRAVE woman as Caroline Herschel. She had
SISTER CAROLINE
her reward in time, for she herself
We must not overlook the Herschels, became a wonderful astronomer, and
the most brilliant family in English made splendid discoveries. All her life
astronomy, though they had nothing to was like a beautiful fairy story, right
do with the Greenwich Observatory. up to the end , when , er brother
The first was Sir William Herschel, dying, she gave all her little savings to
who was born a poor boy in Hanover, his son and family , and went back to
in 1738 , and was trained as a musician live, not very happily, with her other
to play in a band . When he came to relatives in Hanover. There she died,
England he studied mathematics and when ninety -seven years old, in 1848,
astronomy. He was too poor to buy honoured by all the great men of
a telescope , so he manufactured one Europe, and beloved and admired as
for himself. With this he made some few women have been .
famous discoveries, of which the greatest
E BOOK THAT MADE CAROLINE HER
was the planet Uranus . He was greatly TH SCHEL WEEP FOR JOY BEFORE SHE DIED
assisted by his sister, Caroline Herschel, The nephew to whom Car. line gave
one of the cleverest and most lovable part of her money was Sir John Frederick
women that ever lived. William Herschel, her favourite
Caroline's mother did not love her, brother's son , and a greater astronomer
but made her a drudge in her poor house, than his father . He carried on the work
and would not have her educated . which his father and aunt had begun.
Her father, who did love her, gave her He made a catalogue of all the stars
music lessons in secret . A little music seen in our skies , then he went to the
and a little knitting — those were her other side of the world and made a
only kinds of work , apart from scrub . catalogue of the stars seen there. It was
bing and cleaning, up to the time of her the greatest joy of his life that he was
father's death. Then she toiled to learn able to send a copy of the great book
dressmaking and other sorts of work, to Caroline Herschel just before she died.
sitting up late at night, after she had This was his most splendid work, and
done the housework . At last her the dear old lady wept with pride and
brother, William , who was very fond of pleasure at seeing what her nephew had
her, sent for her to England, and they done. She was the more happy from
lived at Bath , where he gave her singing the fact , that in the noble book there
lessons and taught her English and was the result of the work which she
arithmetic, and she was much happier. had begun under difficulties when cook
HOW CAROLINE HERSCHEL HELPED HER and observatory “ boy ” to her brother,
BROTHER TO BECOME FAMOUS and had continued when herself a
Caroline, on her part, learned to imitate world -famous astronomer.
the violin by humming with a gag To such men and wonen , struggling
between her teeth , so that she might often with poverty and difficulties tha we
perform at concerts and help the funds can hardly understand to -day, we owe
of the home . While her brother was our knowledge of the skies, of which men
måking the telescope, Caroline became can now make maps as clear and as certain
his cook and workshop “ boy.” She asthe maps we make of our own country.
helped him to polish the glasses, she The next stories of Men and Women
cooked his food, and actually fed begin on page 1725.
TUOULUULETUXIT ZITTIILITI
1694 DITUTIOUUOOU TOYON ATT
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
THE word " chemistry ” really means the study of what happens when things
THE are mixed or put together ; and the study of the making and unmaking of
compounds is all-important, for almost everything that happens on the earth and in
living creatures depends upon it. In these pages we learn some of the ways in
which the elements unite to make compounds, how these compounds are always
made according to a fixed rule, which is really one of the great proofs that the
elements are made of atoms , and how all the world over, and in our own bodies,
compounds are being made and unmade every moment of our lives. We come
now to what seems puzzling at first, but is really simple — the neat and useful
way chemists have invented for describing compounds, and the changes that
may happen when the chemist adds one to another. These formulas and equa
tions, as they are called, are a little difficult at first, but so were the letters of
the alphabet once, and almost everything else that is really worth knowing.
THE MAKING OF COMPOUNDS
TE have now said word to describe the
WE all that need be
CONTINUED FROM 1556
making of a com
said about most of pound is , of course,
the principal elements ; but the composition, and the word to
word chemistry really means describe the unmaking of it is
mixing, and it is greatly con decomposition. Almost every
cerned with what happens where these two processes are
when different elements are ceaselessly going on , and the
added to each other. If things did whole life and change of the earth
not happen when this was done, the depend upon them .
world would simply stay almost We can clearly describe a com
unchanged from moment to moment, pound, whether it be a very simple
nor could there be any life on it . So one like water or common salt, oi
the making and unmaking of com- whether it be the most complicated
pounds is really the greater part of compound in the world, like hæmo
the whole study of matter. globin , the red colouring matter of
What a compound is we already the blood . A mixture may contain
know, nor shall we confuse it with any proportion of the things that
a mere mixture. Sometimes, when make it up-a little of one or a little
the chemist—that is to say, the more , much of another or a little
mixer - mixes two elements, they less. It is a quite indefinite thing, but
simply remain mixed , and nothing a compound is never so. If it is really
happens. What is all- important is a compound it is a perfectly definite
that very often , when he mixes them thing .
or puts them together, they combine The proportions of nitrogen and
with each other and form compounds. oxygen in the air may vary to any
We have studied some compounds extent, for air is a mere mixture.
already, especially the most im- But the proportions of oxygen and
portant of them all , which is water . hydrogen in the compound water are
But the number of compounds that constant and exact, always and every
naturally exist in the world is far where. Any given compound always
beyond anyone's counting, whilst the contains the same elements in the
chemist can make a countless number same proportion , and it is this fact
more which do not exist at all in of definite composition that is the
Nature. Some of these which he mark of any compound. Water
makes are extremely valuable to us. always contains eight times as much
Therefore, we must learn all we can of oxygen by weight as of hydrogen.
about the making of compounds, and Already we have learned how to
also about the unmaking of them , understand this , for we know that to
which is equally important. The make a compound a certain number
.

1665
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF
of atoms, one or more , of an element
must combine with a certain number of
atoms of another element -as, for
instance , two of hydrogen to one of
oxygen to form a molecule of water .
There simply cannot be a compound
with two and a half atoms
hydrogen to one of oxygen .
IMPORTANT DISCOVERY
THECHOBORTASTERASHUNDRED YEARS AGÔ
are the five compounds, all in a row :
The history of our knowledge is that
this fact of the constant proportion of
elements in aa compound was discovered
first by the Manchester schoolmaster,
John Dalton, rather more than a hun-
dred years ago. It was from this fact
and others like it that he argued the
existence of atoms which behave as we
have seen that they behave.
We can understand the argument
best by looking again at water. We call
it H2O , and we know that that means
hydrogen two atoms, and oxygen one
atom . But in this case , as in hosts
of others, the two elements can form
more than one compound with each
other . There is , for instance, a com-
pound looking rather like water, but
really very different , which has two
atoms of oxygen to two of hydrogen
in each molecule, and therefore must
be written H,02.
We know that this is so because,
when we split this compound up, we
find that any given quantity of it always
contains twice as much oxygen as there
is in water . That can only mean
that the compound has the com-
position we have said — that it is
made of molecules each of which
contains twice as much oxygen as the
molecule of water. But we never find
any compound which contains one and
a half times or two and a half times as
much oxygen as in water. So long as
oxygen and hydrogen are made of
atoms that could never happen .
THE
IN ELEMENTS
FRACTIONS NEVER MIX TOGETHER
Nitrogen and oxygen supply still
better instances. They actually form
five compounds with each other. When
ve weigh out the amount of nitrogen
and oxygen in each of these , the pro-
portions are always very simple. One
of them always contains just twice as
much oxygen as another. Another of
them contains three doses of oxygen
to two of nitrogen , and another five
TU UZLABOTETO TITLE
THE EARTHCALLUALEX
of oxygen to two of nitrogen . But
you see it is always three or five or two ,
never nearly five or a little more than
three . Nowadays, then , we can say
exactly how these compounds are made.
It is simply a question of the number
of of atoms of the two elements in the
molecule of the compound. We need
not trouble about the names, but here
NO , NO, NO2, N2O3, N2O3.
One of these you may , perhaps,
know very well, and that is NO, for
this compound is laughing-gas, which
the dentist uses to kill - for a little
while ---our sense of pain .
This is the best instance I know to
show that when elements combine with
each other, they always must combine
in simple proportions ; and if they form
more compounds than one with each
other, then the various proportions are
simple multiples of each other. It is
either a case of two parts to one, or
of one part to one, or of three parts to
one, or of three parts to two , or some
thing of the sort ; but fractions never
never halves or quarters, or anything
at all but whole parts .
DISCOVERY THAT WILL MAKE JOHN
A DALTON'S NAME LAST FOR EVER
This great law , from which Dalton
learned the existence of atoms, and the
way in which compounds are made,
has been known all over the world
for a hundred years as the law of
multiple proportions. It can only have
one meaning --- namely , that compounds
are made of molecules with a definite
number of atoms of each compound .
Wherever you find a specimen of, shall
we say , N , O , there, if you split it up ,
you will find the exact proportions by
weight of nitrogen and oxygen , which
can only mean that this compound
must be made of molecules, every one
of which consists of exactly two atoms
of nitrogen and five of oxygen. If there
were no such things as atoms, the
elements could not behave in this way ;
therefore there must be atoms, and
there are . That was the great argument
and the great discovery which will
make the name of Dalton last as long
as time.
If we call the weight of the atom of
hydrogen one, then the atom of nitrogen
is fourteen, and the atom of oxygen
sixteen . So in thirty ounces of NO,
LEX EU TENTUDDIX DUMITEDYTTY
1666
 - THE MAKING OF COMPOUNDSumma

MULA
TUDI
LOG
you will always find exactly fourteen hydrogen. The hydrogen turns out the
ounces of nitrogen and sixteen of other element and takes its place with
oxygen ; and the proportions by weight the oxygen , forming the compound
in the other compounds you can easily water ; or , to take another instance,
reckon for yourself if you remember if we take an element like zinc, and add
the composition of the one you require . it to hydrochloric acid , it turns out the
WAAPISTEORMULA IS,AND HOW ITBRINGS hydrogen and takes its place , and we
have the new compound formed, zinc
Names like H,O, NO, CO., and so chloride — the chloride of zinc instead
on, are called formulas. Each of them of the chloride of hydrogen .
is the formula of the thing it describes . Then we can often make compounds
That is not a very difficult word, and it by simply heating other compounds.
is used every day in chemistry. After Often a very complicated compound will
this, we shall be able to talk about the break up, when it is heated, into two
formula of water, the formula of or more compounds that are less com
carbonic acid , or anything else we plicated ; or we may just drive away
please . When you look at a chemical a certain proportion of one of the
formula like HO,, and compare it elements in the compound, and so we may
with what you find when you decompose get something new. For instance, if we
water, and notice the proportions of heat the peculiar compound which has
hydrogen and oxygen in it , you find the formula H,O2, we drive away
that the formula exactly expresses to exactly half its oxygen , and that is one
anyone who understands it , in very little way of making our very old friend, the
space, the fact that in water everywhere compound water. Indeed, if you want
are eight parts of oxygen by weight to keep a specimen of H,02, you have
to one of hydrogen . An atom of to keep it cool and away from the light;
oxygen is sixteen times as heavy as nor must you let anything that likes
one of hydrogen . oxygen get near it, or that thing will
Now we must look at a few of the certainly help itself to half the oxygen
ways in which compounds may be of H,02, and leave only H,O behind .
made. The simplest we know quite well HOW COMPOUNDS PLAYTHE GAME OF
already. It is direct union of the EXCHANGING PARTNERS
elements that make the compound . One of the special uses of H , O ,
We know it in the case of burning or and of some other things like it , is
combustion ; and when we use these that they very readily give up oxy
words we usually mean that , in the course gen to almost any sort of unpleasant
of this direct union , some light is given stuff which we want to get rid of,
out . When hydrogen unites with oxygen perhaps because it has a bad smell , and
to form water, it gives a dim blue flame so change it into something harmless.
which is intensely hot . But compounds You will say that, after all , there is
may be made by burning with other plenty of oxygen in the air, and why
things besides oxygen . Hydrogen, for should it be necessary to use H , O , to
instance, burns with a pale green flame give oxygen to things ? The answer is
in the gas called chlorine, and produces that when oxygen leaves one of its
what we call hydrochloric acid , which compounds — and this is true of all the
has the formula HCl . Our study of the elements as well as oxygen - it is much
compound common salt , or NaCl, will more active and powerful than when
tell us exactly what HCI means . it is in its ordinary state . This has been
Then copper can similarly be burnt in explained already.
sulphur vapour, and so can iron. Yet another way of making com
THEOCURIOU S BEHAVIOUR OF SOME COM pounds is perhaps the commonest of
POUNDS IN all ; and we must understand it . It
Another very common way of form- has the rather long name of double
ing compounds is by making one decomposition, but is quite simple
element turn out another from a com- really. If we mix two compounds, it
pound , and take its place. For instance, often happens that they exchange
we can form the compound water by partners. That is all. Anyone who plays
acting upon the compound of some games knows what exchanging partners
element with oxygen by means of means ; and when that happens
bomo ROTTY rom monummer OUT
1667
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH ZWCASE LUZ NOXEL

in chemistry we call it double decom- Another thing is specially to be

position . Of this there are thousands noticed .As a rule , in a double de
of instances, as when we take the two composition, anything that is solid
pairs, one made of oxygen and mercury, that will not melt in water-is specially
and the other of chlorine and hydrogen. apt to be formed . If water is formed
They exchange partners, the mercury also, then this thing appears assomething
takes the chlorine, and the hydrogen suspended in the water. After a time
takes the oxygen , so that we have it settles to the bottom , and then , by
chloride of mercury and water. That pouring the water off or filtering, we
is a good instance of a double decom- can get the new thing by itself. So
position, and it teaches us something. it is the commonest thing in the world
1E PARTNERS THAT ARE FOND OF EACH for aa chemist to take two clear liquids
THEOTHER COME TOGETHER IN THE GAME each of which may be colourless,
For we may say in general that, perhaps - add one to the other, and then ,
whenever chemical changes like this in an instant , there may appear perhaps
occur, there is a certain bias, or tendency, a bright red or brilliant white cloud ,
in their direction . Some compounds are which is the new thing formed by the
strongly united, and others weakly double decomposition that occurred .
united; and the tendency always is to In the case we have mentioned the
form the compounds that are strongly chloride of mercury is white , but cannot
united . Do you not think that, in be dissolved in water. If we allow
exchanging partners in a game, the the water to evaporate, then we get the
people who are fondest of each other white salt by itself. It is an intensely
are very apt to get together ? If you poisonous but very valuable substance ,
have not noticed that , I am sure I have. and this is one of the ways of making
Now, that is the rule in chemical it by double decomposition .
FOR THE CHEMISTS FOUND IN LOOKING
changes, and especially in double WHAT
decomposition. If the chemist knows
what compounds are strong andknows
It very often happens, in double
what decomposition and in other cases, that a
compounds are weak, if he
which elements are specially fond of solid is produced in a fluid , and gradu
other elements, then hecan usually ally falls to thebottom ; and we havea
foretell what will happen when he special word for what happens then.
mixes two cninpounds. Of course , We all know what a precipice is. It
nothing may happen . The partners is a place where the land falls suddenly,
and if a man , or anything else, falls
in the two compounds may be so pleased over it we say that he was precipitated.
with each other, so to say, that they will Now , when a solid is formed in a fluid ,
not change. Indeed, a double decom and falls to the bottom , we always say
position will often go in one direction, but
cannot be persuaded to go backwards . that it is precipitated, although it
usually falls very slowly, and sometimes
HOWANDTWOCLEAR
MAKE
LIQUIDS
BRIGHT
MIX TOGETHER does not fall at all , but hangs in the
fuid ; and the solid which forms and
Now, in this instance we have given, usually falls is called a precipitate.
DENTITETOM

we notice that water is one of the
things that is made. We know that
water is one of the strongest com-
pounds in the world. . Oxygen and
hydrogen are never better pleased,
so to say, than when they are together
This is a case where three is com-
pany ” —three atoms. Thus, in
double decomposition , if there is any
chance of forming water, we may be
quite certain that water will be formed,
and that the other partners, whatever
they are , will probably have to join
company whether they are very fond
of each other or do not care at all .
TITUTI: TUOTTEITTIMET
It is a long and rather clumsy word,
but it was used many centuries ago by
the old founders of chemistry, when
they were looking for the thing which
should make us all young again , and
for the other thing which was to turn
everything it touched into gold. They
a did not find either of those things, but
they noticed a great many facts, and
named them , usually with rather fanci
ful names . One particular thing formed
in the way we have described is called
white precipitate. It is highly poison
ous, but very useful to apply to the skin
when little creatures that should not
UIT
1668
 amanet -THE MAKING OF COMPOUNDSAnnand
be there are living on it . It is poisonous
to them , and that is what we want .
ONUR
Then there is red precipitate, and so on .
LLLLLLLLLA
After this, we shall understand what we
DZELZ
ATEL
ATE
mean when we say that something is
precipitated. Nowadays chemists often
turn the same idea into English , and
say instead that in certain chemical quicklime; it has the formula CaO,
operations such and such a compound
is thrown down or out .
thrown
“ Thrown out ” rather expresses the
idea, as if the new compound were
thrown out by the water which
declined to hold and hide it , as it does
when it dissolves a lump of sugar.
HE SIGNS USED BY CHEMISTS TO SHOW
THEWHAT HAPPENS TO THE COMPOUNDS
Now, one of the special uses of
formulas in chemistry is that they allow
us to write , in a very short and neat
way, an account of what happens when
a chemical change goes on . This change
is called a reaction . We say that, for
instance , when hydrochloric acid is
added to carbonate of soda, there is
a reaction . Certain conditions must
For instance,
be present, of course .
scarcely any chemical reaction will
occur at the temperature of frozen air.
Many chemical reactions require much
heat to be used, and so on . These
things cannot be expressed in the way
we are now going to study, but that
way does express what happens, and it
TURBURUXLE
does so exactly .
We know that the sign means
equals, and we know that the sign +
means added . So if we write 2 + 3 = 5 ,
we call that an equation , for it states
TEXTO
that certain things added together are
equal to something else. Now , in rather
the same way, it is possible to write a
chemical equation ; and in the study of nothing . Now we know that nothing
chernistry all the world over these comes from nothing, and that nothing is
equations are used many times every
day. The sign = , when used in a
chemical equation , means that the
things on the left of it are turned into
the things written on the right of it
when the change comes about.
STORY OF GREAT HAPPENINGS TOLD
THEYSTaco , = cao + CO2
These equations may be very simple
or very complicated . Let us take a
very simple one to start with. We all
know what marble is, and we all know
what chalk is. These two things, and
many others, are made of carbonate of
lime. The Latin name for ne is
un muuttuu Ymmmmmmm
1669
UITLE
calcium , and the letters to express
calcium are Ca. ( We cannot use just C
alone, for we know that that stands for
carbon . ) Now, the formula of carbonate
of lime is CaCO3. If this is heated, it
is decomposed and split up into two
new compounds. One of them is called
which shows us that it is an oxide of
calcium ; the other substance that is
formed is our old friend carbonic acid ,
CO2. Now all this can be said in a line
of what we call a chemical equation :
CaCO = CaO + CO,
-
Now, the question in every case like
this is whether the equation is a real
one or a sham one, and that is easy to
(6
test . The “ equation ” 2 + 3 - 6 is a
sham one, for the very good reason that
there is more on one side of it than is
accounted for on the other side . In
every chemical equation , as in every
other kind of equation , we must be
sure that everything stated on one side
is fully accounted for, and no more, on
the other side. If that is so , the
equation is a real equation . It does not
follow that the change which the
equation describes happens, for some
thing quite different may happen . But
at least it might happen.
ING COIS
NOTHNOTHING MESMADE
FROM NOTHING, AND
INTO NOTHING
On the other hand , we know that if
there is something on one side of what
pretends to be an equation that is not
accounted for on the other side , then
certainly what that equation describes
does not happen . If it did, it would
mean either that some atoms came into
existence out of nothing , or that some
atoms were destroyed and made into
made into nothing. Everything must
be accounted for, where it has gone to,
and where it comes from . If we can
account for it , we may or may not be
right, but if we cannot do so, we are
certainly wrong .
So we must look at our equa
tion , and carefully count the atoms
of various kinds, on one side and on
the other, and we must see that they
exactly correspond , both in number
and in kind . It will not do if, in
place of an oxygen atom on one side,
there is a carbon atom on the other.
must as many each
Don XOBIT IT TO
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH......
of atom on one side of the equation
as on the other , or it is false . The true
test whether we understand a chemical
reaction is whether we can write a true
equation of it. As long as we fail to do
this, we do not understand the reaction.
Now will you please count the equation
given on previous page, and say whether
it is true or false ? You will find that
there is one calcium atom on each side ,
one carbon atom on each side, and three
oxygen atoms on each side. It is a true
equation ; it fully and truly describes A SIMPLE RULE THAT HELPS US
REMEMBER AND UNDERSTAND
what it is that happens when we heat
marble or chalk ; it accounts for all
the atoms that are engaged , and for
no more . Here is another equation :
CHO + HNO C3H-NO + H2O2
It does not in the least matter
whether these compounds exist , nor
whether you know their names. But
suppose they exist , I want to know
whether that reaction happens. Will
you please find out before you read
any further ?
I know the answer you have decided
upon ; but suppose, instead of H.0, at
the end of the equation , we wrote
simply H , 0 — that is to say, instead of
peroxide of hydrogen, simply water.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THEMAND THE
Now , is it possible that that reaction
might happen ? As a matter of fact,
the one of these two that can happen
does happen , and it is a simple reaction
compared with some , which would take
many lines of this book to write.
Now let us take an instance of an
equation that describes a double decom we have really six atoms of Na,
position, and we may as well take one three of C, and nine of O to account
that has been already mentioned. for on the other side of the equation.
All we need to know is that the
letters for mercury are Hg . The Latin
name
for mercury is hydrargyrum ,
which simply means water-silver, for
that is what it looks like . But we
cannot take H for mercury, since that
has been used up already for hydrogen,
so we take Hg. Here is the equation :
HgO + 2HCl = HgCl, + H.O.
This is the equation that describes
what happens when hydrochloric acid
is added to oxide of mercury. The just one other compound were required
oxygen and the chlorine change partners,
so that we get chloride of mercury and
oxide of hydrogen, which is water.
This equation , of course, you must
test . There is something new about
1670
it not seen in any equation we have
had yet, and this must be explained,
because it has to occur in almost all
chemical equations.. The big 2 in the
first half of the equation has not the
same meaning as the little 2's which we
are so familiar with in the case of
water . The big 2 means that in order
to make the equation true , we must take
two molecules of hydrochloric acid to
add to one molecule of oxide of mercury.
TO
That is so. We have to take the
quantities of these two substances
that the equation expresses if we want
to get a complete result that changes
the whole of both substances we
start with .
So, of course , it means
that the big 2 applies to the whole of
what is written after it , as if it were
written 2 ( HCI ) , or H.Cle. This means
that on the left- hand side of the equa
tion we have to reckon with two atoms
of hydrogen and two atoms of chlorine .
Remembering that, perhaps you will
now test the equation and see whether
it is a real one.
The simple rule to remember is that
the little figures written after a letter
mean so many atoms of what that
letter stands for. If there is no figure
after a letter, that means that it is
just one atom — we do not take the
trouble to write the figure 1 . But a
big figure written before the formula of
a compound means that we are taking
a molecule of that compound so many
times over, and so , if we write 3Na CO ,
CTISE WRITING DOWN EQUATIONS
PRAFOR
YOURSELF AND TESTING THEM
This is not really difficult, and it is
quite necessary to understand. You
can practise writing equations on a piece
of paper and testing them. Take any
letters you please , and imagine any kinds
of compounds. Let us imagine one :
12C HOg = 4C , H , O , + What ?
Suppose that this happened, and that
to complete the equation, what would
it be, and how many molecules of it
would you require ? After all, it is
only a new kind of sum .
The next story of the Earth begins on 1797
TIMET TROTT
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES

SOLOMON'S TEMPLE

THE REIGN OF KING SOLOMON

the beginning could decide which
АтT of his reign , CONTINUED FROM 1598
o
was the rightfu )
08
Solomon , the son of mother ? Solomon
David, had a strange dream . decided in a clever way. He
It appeared to him one night at said that as both claimed the
Gibeon that the voice of God childits body should be divided
sounded in his ears, telling him to into two halves , and that each mother
make choice of some gift which should have one half. Directly he
should surely be given to him. The had pronounced this judgment, the
young king, who felt how difficult difficult case solved itself ; for the
it was to govern a whole nation, false mother showed no grief, while
asked not for glory, nor riches, nor the true mother burst into bitter tears .
for a long life, but for wisdom . He Thus the popularity of Solomon
was young, modest, anxious to do spread among his people, and as he
right . So the reign of Solomon applied himself with diligence to learn
opened happily ; with such a kinging the wise proverbs of the ancients,
Israel might surely advance to the he soon became renowned for his deep
foremost place among the nations. sayings and his wise judgments.
Soon the whole kingdom was smiling In addition to all this, Solomon
and pleased over a decision of the set about the fulfilment of David's
king, applauding his wisdom and great and majestic dream , the build
praising his cunning. The decision ing of the Temple. He sent far away
came about in this manner . Two for the most beautiful materials and
women appeared before Solomon, the most skilful workmen ; 30,000
each claiming a single baby for her Israelites were set to cut down the VE
child. It was told to the king that necessary timber ; 80,000 slaves toiled
these two women lived in one house, in the quarries ; 70,000 Israelites
and that each of them had a baby, acted as porters. In the fourth year
and that during the night one of the of his reign the foundation was laid,
mothers, in her sleep, crushed her and in the eleventh this immense
baby, and discovering its death, labour came to a close, and the most
hastily took the dead baby to the gorgeous temple in the world burst
other mother's bed, laid it there, and upon the view of a delighted people.
returned to her own with the other's Solomon was a born builder. He
infant . The true mother declared felt the poetry of beautiful forms, and
this story to be true ; the false dreamed in stone. Perhaps the build
mother vehemently denied it . Who ing of the Temple fired him to attempt

1671
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
vther mighty creations in wood and impossible to him ; and he grew gradu
stone. The palace which he built ally to swell with pride and consider
for himself became one of the wonders himself not as the servant of the
of the world , and the story of its Lord , but as the rich and powerful
lordly pleasure-grounds passed like a master of Israel.
fairy - tale into all languages. He built His sin lay in this vanity, this ap
another palace for his wife, and a palling self-satisfaction of the rich man ;
house supported entirely on pillars of it showed itself in his yielding to the
sweet -smelling cedar wood. Not only wishes of his wives to set up altars to
this, but he showed himself a wise ruler, strange gods.
careful of his people's health and safety. Yet amidst all his wealth and magni
HE GREAT NATION THAT SPRUNG FROM ficence he found no pleasure in life .
THETHE CHILDREN OF THE WILDERNESS “ Vanity, vanity, all is vanity ! ” was
A spirit of enthusiasm spread through the cry of this envied king panoplied in
the whole nation . They gave them- splendour. He was sated . Life could
selves up to diligent labour ; their offer him nothing. He had ransacked
king made treaties with other countries . the earth for his delight , and his soul
Very soon caravans were spreading cried out within him for something else .
far and wide in the East, carrying the It would not be satisfied .
merchandise of the Israelites ; and Towards the end of this reign, which
travellers from other countries were had begun with such modest reverence
moving with admiration among the and had swelled into such bewildering
streets of Jerusalem. It was difficult magnificence, signs of a black tempest
for the rich, prosperous, and famous showed in the sky. Solomon, in search
Israelite , going up to Solomon's of wealth , power and magnificence,
gorgeous Temple, and pausing on its had laid heavy burdens on the people.
steps
king's topalace,
look at the dome of their
flashing in the sun,to THEOVISION OFA FALLING EMPIRE THAT
SOLOMON BEHELD WITH HIS DYING EYES
believe that their ancestors had wailed They were beginning to suffer more
and swooned under the lash of Pharaoh's andmore under his exactions. Here and
taskmasters. How great a change this there could be heard murmurous com
orderly and industrious people pre, plaints and angry questionings. And
sented from the horde of cowed and then suddenly enemies appeared, stirring
grumbling Hebrews whom Moses had uprevolt. War reared its head .Mutiny
led through the wilderness ! spread like a fire. To Jeroboam, an
So extraordinary were the tales able man who had been advanced to a
told throughout all the East of Solo- high post by Solomon himself, a prophet
mon's magnificence and his wisdom , appeared, Ahijah of Shiloh , who rent
that the famous Queen of Sheba de- his robe into twelve pieces, and, giving
termined to come for herself and see ten of them to Jeroboam , exclaimed :
the truth of the rumour . She came in
“ Take these ten pieces ; for thus saith
state, surrounded by queenly glory, with the Lord , the God of Israel, Behold
a very great train of camels that bore I will rend the kingdom out of the hand
spices and gold and precious stones, and of Solomon, and will give ten tribes to
she declared that not half of the glory thee." Solomon, hearing of this, for
of Solomon had been told . such news spread quickly , would have
SOLOMON IN ALL HIS GLORY
PROUD AND FORGETS GOD
BECOMES
put Jeroboam to death ; but death was
not for Jeroboam , but for Solomon .
Such was the great glory of this wise Jeroboam went to Egypt, and remained
and noble king. But as age crept upon there until death came to the tired
him , the vision which he had seen so and wearied Solomon , who, with his
clearly in his youth dimmed before his
eyes. He no longer felt thetremendous dying eyes, beheld not only the vanity
eyes. He no longer felt the tremendous of his life, but the ruin " threatening
responsibility of being king ; he no his empire.
longer realised the need for wisdom ; above ended the reign of Solomon , one
all things, his reverence for God grew of Thus
the wisest men of ancient times, and
cold and faint. He was surrounded
one of the most foolish.
by every kind of pomp and magnificence;
scarcely anything that he desired was The next Bible Stories begin on page 1733 .
DUTIE XXTTTTTT ZIU VZDUCU BOTTOTT
1672
URDUI
MENTORIZAM
GELBURNUNUMLAGRAM EIGNASALEGAS ELEUTELSA KERANA SE

THE WISDOM AND WONDER OF KING SOLOMON

NC
mem
TITRE
Men
mem

Solomon began his reign with a gieat desire to act rightly and wisely. At the very beginning he displayed
great wisdom in deciding who was the real mother of a child. At his command that the child should be cut into
two parts, the real mother showed great grief, and the false mother did not, so that justice was easily done.
ammwm
mirum
rem

Not oniy did Solomon's fame for wisdom spread far and wide, but the ſame of his capital , and the magnificence
of the Temple, palaces and great buildings he erected was carried throughout the earth ; so far that the
famous Queen of Sheba came with a large retinue to visit him and see for herself his wonderful works.
The top picture, by James Tissot, is reproduced by permission of M. de Brunoff, and the lower one, by Sir E. J. Poynter, by permisson
of Messrs. Raphael Tuck & Sons.
DETOXIT mom wa TR TOTTERYTYY
1673 DITTITUOTTEET TUOTTE DITURITY
 ManUXEEXPLOUDALOUER ULTRA
UITNODERNOom
B
HOW THE SEA MOVES BACKWARDS AND FORWARDS

What aa difference high tide and low tide make at the seaside ! At low tide we can play upon the beach ; at high
tide we cannot, because the waves wash over it. The tides are caused by the attraction of the moon and sun
upon the waters of the ocean, but specially by the moon, which is nearer to us than the sun is. The moon draws
the water like a magnet, and makes it get heaped up more on one side of the earth than on the other . But the
earth turns round every twenty -four hours, and so the heaped water, or tide, travels round it, leaving those places
on the shores dry which before were covered with the waters. This is how it is the tides are regular as clocks.
The photographs on this page are by Valentine and Sons, and that on page 1675 by Frith .
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm பணையாயாயாயாயமாக TOOTMm
1674
 94DRO The WONDER
Child's Book of Babe
Sites

DOES THE MOON PULL THE SEA ?

'HE moon does
THE pull
the sea, and it is CONTINUED FROM 1578
the pulling of the sea
by the moon that makes
the tides . In any great dock
or port or harbour we see how the
water rises and falls twice a day,
and we know that it is the tides,
as we call them , with their in
creasing ebb and flow , which bring
all this water to us and take it away
again without ever stopping. The
tides never stop because the earth never
stops turning, and it is the turning of
the earth that somehow makes the
tides. Plainly tides have something to
do with days, for they always corre-
spond. Long ages ago, even before
men knew that the earth turns, they all the time, this really means that a
saw , as they could not help seeing, mighty heaped wave of water travels
that the tides have something to do over all the oceans, day and night , in
with the moon . Nowadays we can
answer the questions about the tides
very completely.
HOW DOES THE MOON CAUSE THE Tides ?
Let us suppose for a moment that
the moon did not go round the earth ,
but simply moved through space with
it . Then the moon would appear to
rise and set , as it does now , only it
would rise and set at the same time
every day. And so, at the same time
every day , in any part of the world,
there would be tides , as there are now.
The only difference between this and
what actually happens is that the moon
is moving round the earth, while the
earth turns upon herself. This makes
the moon seem to rise and set , in any
place, about half an
hour or so later every
day; and the tides, we
find, always correspond .
The moon is made of matter,
and so is the water of the sea .
All matter everywhere pulls, and
is pulled towards, all other matter
everywhere. We call this gravi
tation . So far as the whole earth
is solid, the whole earth , and the
whole moon, are affected by this pull ;
but as part of the earth is ocean , so
to speak , and as water is not rigid, it
can be, and is, specially affected by
gravitation . The water opposite the
moon at any time is pulled up towards
the moon ; and as the earth is turning
response to the pull of the moon . If the
moon had oceans, there would be tides
there too, owing to the earth's pull ;
and as the earth is very much bigger
than the moon , these tides would be
enormous . But the moon has no
oceans, though possibly it has ocean
beds, long since dried up. All the moon
does is simply to pull the water towards
it as the earth twists and exposes new
parts of water to its action .
DOES THE SUN MAKE TIDES ?
The sun also makes tides on the
earth , just as the moon does,, and for
exactly the same reason ; but the power
of gravitation lessens very quickly as
the distance through which it acts
ncreases. Thus, though the sun is

1675
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
vastly bigger than the moon , it is so
far away compared with the moon
that its influence on the ocean is com-
paratively small ; but it can be shown .
DO THE SUN AND THE MOON PULL THE
EARTH AT THE SAME TIME ?
We have just said that the princi-
pal consequence of the real motion of
the moon round the earth is simply
that the moon seems to rise anywhere
at a different time every day or night,
and so the tide changes also every
day. But there is another consequence.
As the moon goes round the earth once
every month, there will always be
times when the moon and the sun
are on the same side of the earth , and
times when they are on opposite sides of
the earth ; while , in “ between times,"
the lines from the sun to the earth, and
from the moon to the earth , will be at
right angles, or nearly so, to each
other.
Now, when the sun and
are pulling on the same side of the
earth, they help each other ; and
the tides during a few days will be
very high and very low as the water
flows and ebbs. At another part of the
month , when moon and sun are
opposite sides of the earth , they pull
against each other. The moon wins
this tug -of-war, but it has to be content
with pulling the water towards itself
much less than at the other time,
because the sun's pull is now opposing,
and not helping themoon . At the other
times the tides will neither be very
marked nor very little marked , but
“ betwixt and between .” Watch the
tides anywhere day by day for a month,
and you will see all this for yourself.
WHY DOES THE TIDE COME IN
GO OUT ?
We should think of the shore as if
it were part of a saucer partly filled with
water ; then if the water is added to,
the “ tide ” will rise . To raise the level
of the water is to cover more of the
saucer, and vice versa . And so we shall
understand how the tide comes in and
goes out at very different rates, appa-
rently , in different places. In a dock ,
where the water is all heaped up and
deep , it needs the addition of much
water to make any difference that we
can notice ; the tide seems to rise
slowly. But where the shore is very
flat, then the added water - due
WONDER ELUCIRCLCEOLUCE
pull of the moon, as we know - spreads
itself out over a wide space, and we
say that the tide comes in quickly . If
you pour a tablespoonful of water into
a vase with very steep sides, you do not
cover much more of the sides of the
vase with it ; but if you pour the same
amount of water on a flat table , of
course it covers a lot of the table.
There are places where the shore is
so nearly flat that the tide comes in
much more quickly than a man can run
--comes in in a great tidal wave which
even a man on horseback may fail to
escape, so quickly does it run. On
page 388 of ihis book is a well -known
song called “ The Sands of Dee,” a
poem by Charles Kingsley, which tells
how a girl was drowned in this way.
WILL THE EARTH EVER LOSE THE MOON ,
AND WILL TIDES THEN CEASE ?
The answer to the first of these
questions is no, for there is a limit to
moon the distance that the moon can go
from the earth ; and astronomers believe
that when the moon reaches that
distance it will begin to come nearer
to the earth again . Indeed, they
believe that some day the moon must
on return to the earth which gave it
birth, and then , certainly, the tides
will greatly diminish , for the sun
alone will be left to produce them . The
sun -raised tides will remain , but very
different tides indeed from those which
the sun raised upon the earth ages ago
perhaps 60,000,000 years ago, as has
been estimated — when the solid crust
of the earth was not formed , and when
all the water of the earth was suspended
in the atmosphere, as some of it is
suspended even now, in the form of
AND water vapour. Those were tides indeed,
for there was no dry land then , and
the great tidal wave flowed without
end over the whole earth as it turned
and turned under the steady pull of
the sun . Not only so, but the moving
liquid of those tides was not mere
cool water, but flowing rock, like the
red -hot lava that flows out of volcanoes
sometimes.
WILL THE MOON EVER RACE THE EARTH
IN SPACE ?
The moon travels more slowly than
the earth , but it is calculated that some
day the moon will go round the earth
at the same rate as the earth twists on
the itself. If that ever happens, the tides
1076
HALLOWS
LACRALLALALALAL

THE WATER THAT COMES TO LONDON EVERY DAY

There is the sea being pulled by the moon, which draws it as a magnet draws steel, and sends up the water
rolling towards the shore. It will dash up against the rocks, and flow up the mouths of rivers and into docks, and
cause high tides in them, just as it does upon the beach where children play. Nothing can stop it in its course.

inir

It is a wonderful thing to remember, as we watch the tide creeping towards the beach , that boys and girls may
be watching the effect of the same tide many miles away in a great country. We can stand on the Embank
ment in London and watch the effect of the sea, which is sixty miles away. Here we see the Thames.
The tide has gone down, and we find that the water is very low and does not nearly fill the channel.

The tide turns. The sea forces its way up the bed of the Thames and hinders the river from flowing out.
The mud banks disappear ; the channel fills up . Boats and barges figat, and where there was mud before we
find at high tide 21 feet of water. The water has risen as high as a two- storey house, and millions of
gallons of water have come up from the sea to London to stay for a few hours and then go back again .
1677
ID
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
raised by the moon may cease, even twenty -four hours — that means one
though the earth does not lose the complete spin of the top on which we live.
moon . The two will move for a time ARE THERE TIDES OF FIRE ON THE SUN ?
together as if a solid bar of steel ran We have said that if the moon had
between them ; though, if such a bar of oceans they would show tides. Now,
steel were required, one big enough to the sun has no oceans of wet water, but
hold moon and earth together would it has oceans, or one continuous ocean
have to be so big that themoon would covering, of fiery gases ; and we know
not be big enough for the bar to be that the sun, like the earth , spins upon
attached to it. Another way of saying itself, and in the same direction as
what we have just said is that the day the earth. Thus, the surface of the
and the month will get to be of the sun is pulled out of shape as the sun
same length-after long ages in which spins by the pull of the earth, and per
the day gradually becomes longer and haps also of the other planets, especially
the month gradually shorter. such a great planet as Jupiter .
IS IT TRUE THAT THE DAY IS BECOMING When I say “ perhaps, " I mean
LONOER ?
only that perhaps there is a pull
When we study the tides closely , sufficient for us to notice. There must 1
and, indeed, many a big book might be a pull, for gravitation always acts
be written about them—we learn a between all portions of matter every:
most amazing fact about them . It where, only it is not always so marked
is that, as theearth spins, its movement that we can notice the results. These
is made slower by the friction of the earth -raised tides upon the sun may be
tides which the moon principally, and tremendous things, even more tre.
the sun to a slight extent, is always mendous than the sun-raised tides
moving over its surface. The tides upon the molten earth of long ago ;
act as a sort of brake upon the rotation, but in both cases no harm can come to
or spinning, of the earth, so that, year any living thing, as life cannot exist at
by year and age by age, the earth is all under such conditions.
now, and has long been , taking a little DOES THE SUN MAKE TIDES IN THE AIR ?
longer than it used to take to spin round When we are thinking of these tides
completely once. of gas upon the surface of the sun ,
In other words, the day — which is we must remember that our own
air, is
the time of one earth -spin - is really atmosphere, which we call isthetherefore
getting longer. Many estimates have itself made of matter, and
been made of the extent of this, and subject to the gravitational pull of
all are very doubtful; but it is pro- both moon and sun . Thus, there must
bable that in the course of a century be atmospheric tides as well as ocean
the day becomes nearly a second longer. tides, though we know very little
You will say that is not much ; but a cen- about them yet ; and these gaseous
tury is but a moment in the life of the tides, unlike those of the sun , may be
world, and even seconds mount up if of great importance to life, since they
you have an endless addition of them . affect the great envelope of gas which
WILL THE EARTH GO ON MOVING AT THE sustains all the life of the earth . We
SAME RATE FOR EVER ? are only at the beginning of our study
No ; we have just read that the day is of the weather yet ; and some day the
getting longer because the tides are slow- atmospheric tides may help us to
ing down the mighty top we call the explain many or some of its doings.
earth. If you rest your finger against a WHY WILL OIL NOT MIX WITH WATER ?
spinning top you will slow it down ; it When two lots of liquid, added to
will take longer to spin round ; and if gether,mix perfectly, it is because the
there were a bright light in one corner molecules that make up the one liquid
of the room , and if there were a living are just as ready to link on with the
and intelligent creature on the top, he molecules of the other liquid as with
would notice that his “ day ” became each other. The most perfect case
longer. This has nothing to do with is, of course , when the two liquids are
the lengthening and shortening of day- the same, as when water is added to
light at different times of the year ; water ; and the next most perfect case
we are talking about the real day of is where the liquids are very similar,
1678
 XLEO OCCORD
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
so far as the linkage of their molecules all sorts of microbes — for they are one
is concerned, as when water and alcohol and all poisonous to microbes.
are mixed. But when oil and water WHAT GOOD DOES SMELL DO FOR FLOWERS ?
are added to each other, we have two But we must remember that the
liquidsofwhich
kinds are madeThe
molecules. of very different
molecules of plant makesits volatile oil notreally
for us, but for the needs and purposes
water are very small, and those of of its own life. And so it is, in truth ,
oil are enormous — made of great num much more interesting to learn, if we
bers of atoms, instead of only three can, why the plant should make its oil,
apiece, as water is. And the large than to learn why we are glad to
molecules of oil find it very much more squeeze the poor dead plant and get
natural and easy to link with each other the oil out of it .
than with the molecules of water, and the Well, we first notice that, as a rule,
molecules of water find it very much more it is the flower that bears the scent ;
natural and easy to link with each other not the root or the stem, or even the
than with the molecules of oil, so that, leaves, but specially the flowers. We
as a visible result of these invisible
causes, the oil and the water keep apart . shall see the
remember whatmeaning of this,
the flower itself ifexists
we
WHERE DOES A FLOWER GET ITS SMELL for. The plant makes flowers because
FROM ?
The smell of flowers is due to special bythem it bears the seeds which ,when
kinds ofessences or oils which the plant they are made ready, and havefallen
makes within itself for its own purposes
. upon the earth , will give birth to a new
Some of these are very like each other, plant. Most commonly, it is the visits
and, indeed, there is perhaps a very of certain insects that prepare the seed
for its burial in the earth , where it will
general kind of family resemblance grow into a new plant. The insect has
between most of them, especially when visited another flower of the same kind
they are made by plants which belong ofplant, and bringsfrom that something
to the same family or order. Almost
all the plants which make these oils which it gives to the second plant, so as
seem to go to work on the same general toprepare the seeds .
principles, and the type of them is the Now, it is necessary that the insect
should somehow be attracted to the
oil which we usually call turpentine, and flowers. First, then, the plant makes
which is made by a special kind of plant. its flowers beautiful and easily seen , so
This oil is really a very complicated that the insect may notice them ; and,
compound of only two elements -
carbon and hydrogen. This classof secondly, it vesy often makes a fragrant
compounds is often called the volatile scent, so that the insect, which has a
very keen sense of smell,may be attracted
oils, for volatile simply means flying.
And this tells us that they very readily by that also. On the other hand, there
escape into the air , and move about in are often microbes about which may
it . Of course, if they did not do that ,
attack the precious flower ; but microbes
we should not be able to smell flowers are killed by these volatile oils.
by merely holding our noses near them . WHY ,DO NOT ALL FLOWERS SMELL ' NICE ?
We find in these volatile oils some of It is not insects, but the wind , that
the useful things that the plant world does the work of carrying the pollen , as
affords us. As they nearly all consist it is called, from one flower to another in
of carbon and hydrogen , and if they have the case of many plants, and these plants
oxygen in them , too, never have much , usually have very small and not at all
they could all be burnt ; but they are showy flowers, and very little scent, or
much too expensive to use for that none; they do not need to attract insects.
purpose, since, after all , the sweetest or The plants without smell , or the plants
strongest smelling plant only contains that do not smell nice, are generally
a very tiny quantity of the oil. The those that do not need the insects .
real uses of these oils are, first, to pro- Some flowers are very small and much
vide us with the pleasant scents that hidden, like the violet ; but they make
we know ; second, to keep off insects up for this by having a particularly
when they are troublesome in their desire strong and delicious scent to lead
to sting or bite us ; and, third, to kill insects to them,
1679
 CALCULATOR
“THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
HOW DOES A CAMERA TAKE A PICTURE ?
The pictures on page 1683 really show
us quite well how a camera takes a
picture. If we understand the eye, we
understand a camera . In both there is
a dark chamber (camera is simply
Italian for chamber), a lens, or lenses, picture, curved as a marble is curved ,
in front , and a sensitive screen , or cur
tain , or “ plate ,” or “ film , ” behind. All
the light allowed into the chamber must
come through the lens or lenses, and
they throw it-upside down, as the
pictures show — on to the screen or plate
behind. In the case of the eye , we
cannot quite explain how the screen is
able to register the lighi unat falls on
it, and we are still farther from even
guessing how the nerve running to the
brain is able to tell the brain what has
been happening on the screen .
But in the case of the camera the
thing is really quite simple. We merely
take a plate of glass, or nowadays often
a film of gelatine, and we place upon
the plate or film a thin and smooth
layer of some chemical compound which
light has the power of decomposing
for instance , a salt of silver. So where
the light
posed, andfallswhere
the the
layerlight
of saltis is decom
brightest
the decomposition is most complete.
WHAT HAPPENS INSIDE THE CAMERAP
A white thing, like a collar, sends
strong white light on to the film or plate,
and quite destroys the layer of salt it
finds there. Then we do something to
the film or plate , so that no light can do
any more to it , and when we look at it
we find dark places corresponding to
the brightest and lightest parts of the
thing we were photographing, and vice
versa. The lightfrom the thingwe photo .
graph -- that is to say, the thing - has
printed itself dark, and where there is experience, we think we see them right
nothing ” to photograph,white is left. side up ! In order to support this
As everything is the opposite, or nega- answer , it has been declared that a
tive, of what it really should be , we call person born blind , but having sight
this plate the negative. We then let
light shine through the negative on to
a sensitive piece of darkish paper, and
now the salt , where it remains, keeps
mor
NO
the light from the paper, and , where it
has been destroyed, the lightgets through
and bleaches the paper. So we get a
positive picture, in which light and dark
correspond to the light and dark of the
original. Photo means light, and graph
means writing. A photograph is a
thing that has been written by light.
1680
WHY DOES A CAMERA TAKE PICTURES
UPSIDE DOWN ?
The pictures on page 1682 will answer
this question for you, said the Wise Man.
When a ray of light passes through a
piece of glass, like that shown in the
it is bent towards the thickest part of
the lens, as the piece of glass is called ;
and if you look at the picture at the
bottom of the page you will see at once
that, in such a case, when the rays have
come through the lens, those which
were at the top will now be at the
bottom , and those which were at the
bottom will be at the top. In the
same way those which struck the lens
on the right will come out at the left ,
and those which struck the lens on the
left will come out on the right.
Now, the pictures on page 1683 show
us that our own eyes are just like a
camera in this respect. Like the camera,
they have a lens in front and a sensi
tive plate behind, only it is a plate
which never needs changing. The rays
of light have to follow the same rule
in the camera of the eye as they do
anywhere else, and so the images of
everything that we see are thrown upon
the screen , or curtain , or retina, of
the eye, as it is called , with the top at
the bottom and the bottom at the top ,
and with the right to the left and the
left to the right; and yet we do not
see things upside down !
WHY DO WE NOT SEE THINGS UPSIDE
DOWN ?
There are many people who can never
understand the answer to this question.
It is really a hard question, and many
silly answers have been given to it .
People have said that we do see things
upside down, but that, by custom and
given him by an operation when he was
grown up , would see things upside
down ! But the reply to that is that
such a person does not see things upside
down, but right side up . Only, like a
baby, and for the same reason, he
cannot judge the distance of things, and
at first he stretches out his hand for
things that are far away.
The real answer to this question that
has puzzled . so many people is that
the question is nonsense, and that is
 XERRALLEELELELALTELE
- THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER aammammaamaa
what we cannot understand until we a little magnifying glass, and discover
have thought about it for a long time. for yourself the two kinds of pictures
Seeing is an act of the mind ; and the of the same thing, very different from
mind is not a thing in space, like a each other, that can be seen through it .
chair, or your body. We seem to go on WHY DO WE SEE A BLACK SPOT IN
thinking that somewhere in the brain , THE SKY AFTER LOOKING AT THE SUN ?
where seeing is really done, there is a We said just now that the retina ,
kind of man standing upright and or screen , or curtain , or sensitive plate,
looking at the picture thrown on the at the back of the eye never needs
screen or retina of the eyes ; and, as changing You can see one picture
that is upside down , we wonder why after another, day after day, and year
he does not see it upside down . But we after year. But it is possible to work
have no right to think of the mind as if this screen too hard ; it is a living thing,
it were a person standing upright. Sup and it is just because it is alive that it
pose that the mind really were a person, is able to recover itself, and, so to
what right have we to say he is standing speak, make itself fresh again — if it
upright ? Suppose I were to say that has time — for every new picture ihat
he was ofstanding his head (which we see with it . A photographic plate
would, course , on
solve the difficulty, sees, as we may say, because certain
as then he would see the eye-picture chemical compounds that are upon it
right side up ), how could that be dis- are changed by the light. The retina
proved ? That, said the Wise Man , is of the eye sees in the same way, but
my own way of trying to explain this ; because it is alive it has the power
but if I said so I should be talking of making afresh from moment to
just as much nonsense as anyone who moment the particular kind of stuff
said that there was a person standing that the light acts upon .
upright in the brain . The being that But if you stare hard at any light so
sees is MIND ; how it sees , and what intense as the sun itself, then , at that
mind is, no one can tell us yet . spot of the retina where the light falls,
WHY DO THINGS LOOK BIGGER THROUGH all the reserve supply of this sensitive
A MAGNIFYING GLASS ? stuff is used up ; and now if you turn
The laws which explain this are your eyes somewhere else , that par
really the same as those which explained ticular spot is useless for the moment ;
the last question. If you take a mag it is blind, it sees nothing. But if it
nifying glass and hold it far away from sees nothing, whereas all the retina
your eye, you see a very small picture round it sees light, that gives us the
upside down of what is beyond it . notion that we see a black spot -- that
That is what happens in our own eyes, is to say, a spot from which no light
and that is what happens in a camera . comes . But in a second or two this
But if you take that same magnifying wonderful living screen recovers itself,
glass and hold it over this page, then , makes a fresh supply of the stuff light
instead of getting a small image upsidé acts upon , and the black spot disappears.
down, you get a large image of the HOW DID THE BLACK MEN GET BLACK ?
page right side up. Nobody knows the complete answer
The fact is that you have put your to a question like this, because the
eye in the way of the rays of light origin of the different races of mankind
coming through the glass before they is lost in very ancient history, long
have crossed , but as they are meeting before we have any definite records ;
each other. Your eye , then, imagines but we know that we find black people
that it sees the letters much larger than living in the hottest parts of the earth,
they are, because the rays as they come in many places where white men find
to it look as if they came along the it impossible to live. So that evidently
dotted lines in the picture . But you the black races have developed some
can understand that if you moved your power of resisting the climate in these
eye far away back from the magni- spots, and also the diseases peculiar
fying glass, so that the rays of light to those parts of the world ; a power of
had crossed before they reached it , resistance which the white man has not.
then everything would be quite As a result of this, it would come
different. I think you ought to get about that only those who were black
DITT monum
1681 NOEL
 SERECORDER

HOW A MAGNIFYING GLASS MAKES THINGS BIGGER

These pictures show us how a magnifying glass makes things appear larger than they really are . What

happens when we look at, say, a leaf, is that rays of light are thrown off by the leaf and brought together to our
eyes. When we use a magnifying glass the rays of light pass through the glass and bend - as a stick appears to
bend if you put it in water, or as the pair of compasses seems to bend in the
glass of water shown on this page. When the rays of light reach the eye,
the eye imagines that they have come in straight lines, and it appears to
the eye that the light comes in lines, as shown by the dots in this picture.
What we really see are rays of light. These rays, not being able to go
straight through a magnifying glass as if it were a piece of ordinary glass,
are bent in passing through the glass, and what happens then is as if the eye,
having collected all these rays to a point, throws them out again in straight
sloping lines, at the end of which we see the image, looking much bigger than
it really is. So that what we see through a magnifying glass is not the
actual leaf, but the rays of light thrown off by the leaf, first bent by the glass
and then straightened out again so as to appear to cover a much bigger space.
A curious thing happens if the rays of light are allowed to continue beyond
the eye instead of being focussed by the eye. We can do this with the aid of a
microscope, as shown in the bottom picture. In this case we see the leaf
upside down . This is because the rays of light meet, and then, as the rays
must go straight, the line of light coming from the top of the leaf goes down,
while the line coming from the bottom of the leaf goes up. In the top picture
the meeting, or focussing, of the lines of light takes place inside the eye, but
in the picture below we see the rays focussed through the glass instead of inside the eye, and we see them,
therefore, continuing until they are reflected in the looking- glass, where we see the enlarged picture
upside down. This helps us to understand what happens inside the eye, as explained on the next page.
UMTX
X

mmmmmmm mmm oxUDET ILONDOM on monarca DOLE

1682
ணணணணணண
ைணவனன
COLORED COOLER

HOW THE CAMERA TAKES YOUR PHOTOGRAPH

These pictures show us how a camera takes a picture, why it takes the picture upside down, and also how
the eye is like a camera in this way. The boat in this picture gives off rays of light, which strike in all
directions. Some of these rays go out towards the camera, and, as light always travels in straight lines, never
crooked ones, all the rays that can be seen from the lens of the camera travel
straight up or down towards the lens. Inside the lens they continue travelling
in the same direction, and at last they meet and cross, so that the lines of light
given off by the top of the boat strike the bottom of the photographic plate,
and the lines given off by the bottom of the boat strike the top of the plate.
The small picture on this page shows a way in which any boy or girl can
find out how the lines of light cross so as to make an image upside down.
Take a white cardboard box without the lid, and prick in one side a small
hole with a pin. Hold the box, say, under a gas-jet, so that the gas will
reflect through the hole. The hole will then act as a focus of the rays, which
will enter the box through the hole and cross, so that the inside of the
box, where they fall, will reflect the gas-jet, which will be upside down.
The bottom picture shows us that the eye acts in the same way as the camera,
but a very wonderful thing happens in the eye that no man quite understands.
When the photographer finds that his picture is upside down, he turns the plate
the other way and everything is right. But what wonderful thing is it that turns
the picture printed inside the eye the right way up ? The rays of light stamp
themselves upon the retina of the eye as seen in this picture, and the nerve
of the eye carries them to the brain . What happens there nobody knows, but
when the brain brings together these rays of light so as to make a clear picture, the picture is the right way
up. The picture is printed on the retina of the eye upside down, but our brain puts it right in the millionth
part of the twinkling of an eye, and this is, perhaps, as great a miracle as anything that ever happened.
WE
IT
E

OPT NER
IC VE

to the Brain

LENS

EYE
SOCKET

1683
ZELLELAX
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER ILLUAN LORELEC SUELE

could live and survive there, and in
course of time there would be nobody
except the black people in such places ,
a black race thus being produced by
Nature selecting the blackest people
as those best fitted to survive there.
The blackness is probably the result
of the continued exposure to the great
heat of the sun in the tropical countries.
Other people have thought that black
was the original colour of the human
race, and that the white races have arisen
from them . Whatever is the reason ,
the colour of the skin evidently results
from certain powers of human beings
to adapt themselves to the climates in
which they live.
WHERE DO FLIES GO IN THE WINTER ?
DIMM
ODKU
maggots, and from maggots into pupæ,
which are a surt of chrysalis. In
the chrysalis the body of the new fly
forms. Millions and millions of flies
lay eggs in the autumn . If all these
eggs hatched at once, nearly all the
flies would die during the winter.
Now, the first touch of cold causes the
living insect in the chrysalis to stop
growing, to become dormant like the
bear asleep in winter. A fruit -bud on
a tree, when a frost comes, goes to
sleep and does not open until warm
weather has set it growing again .
So it is with the chrysalis of the fly.
These pupæ or chrysalises, as we may
call them , lie in the ground, or in the
heart of barley or corn which has been

Most Aies live their lives in spring cut and stacked for the winter, and so
OD
mm

and summer , then die. Some of them
are fortunate enough to find a place
where they can hide and obtain warmth
to keep them alive. They hide in
quiet places about the house, in out-
buildings, in the fields and stables,
where we should never dream of look
ing for them . They do not feed.
They simply lie dormant, sleeping as a
squirrel in his nest , or a bear in his
SEXXXXX
are safe from the cold . The maggots from
the flies' eggs can bore and tunnel like
worms, and make their way to safety, so
that they can , in their chrysalis form ,
lie safe and snug all the winter.
WHERE DO NEXT YEAR'S FLIES COME FROM ?
No matter how long the winter lasts,
the chrysalis of the fly is safe . When
the warm spring weather comes, the fly

inside the chrysalis goes on growing

MX

den, or
cold a turtoise
days his shell,
away . inBut sleeps the again. At the right moment it bursts
an unexpected
OTLIT

warm day in winter comes . The fly openits brown horny case, and comes
out like a chicken from its shell . All
feels the extra warmth . It wakes
him , makes him hungry. and sends him that it has to do is to dry its wings ;
forth to seek food. The warm day then it can fly away full grown.
passes, and he may get back to safe Flies reach their full size before com
hiding; but most likely he will not. Prob ing out of their shell-like covering.
ably the cold will return and kill him . When you see small flies and big flies
Very few flies manage to getthrough together, you must not think that the
the winter. If they are not worn out and little ones are young and the big ones
ready to die at the end of the summer, old. They are different sorts of fies, but
full grown . They reach full size before
many of them are killedbya fungus theyarereleased from the cradle, in
which, floating in the air, settles on which they have passed the winter. It is
their bodies, drives roots into their because most of the old ones are dead,
insides, and destroys them . Those we
and the
see dead on the window -pane, swollen, that young ones still in their eggs,
we seldom see flies in winter.
with a little halo on the glass about As the weather gets colder, the flies
them , have been killed in this way.
DO FLIES LAY EGGS ? seem to get sleepier and sleepier, until
As nearly all the flies die this year, it is difficult to get them to move off
leaving few to struggle through the any object on which they have settled.
winter, it seems strange, ofcourse, They are not even ready to brush up
that next year we shall have as many their wings and clean themselves as they
flies as ever. The reason is that the did early in the summer , and easily
female fly lays an egg that changes tumble into the milk -jug. These are
into a chrysalis, and is kept in that signs that their little lives will soon be
form during the winter, until the warm ended , for winter is too severe for them .
weather of spring brings out the It is their children we shall see next spring.
young fly. The eggs turn at first into The next Questions are on page 1771 .
DYDZIEDOT
1684
 The Child's Book of
STORIES

THE FORBIDDEN ROOM

THERE was once a a It did not break, but
CONTINUED FROM 1534
magician who took 'on picking it up she
the form of a beggar found that it was
house to smeared with red, and , in
DU

and went from

house stealing all the prettiest of
the girls, none of whom ever
came back again .
One day he begged for scraps of
food at the door of a man who had
three very pretty daughters, and the
eldest one gave him a piece of bread.
When she was not looking he touched
her on the arm, and against her will
she found herself compelled to jump
into his basket . Then he took her to
his house in the middle of a thick
forest, where everything was magnifi-
cent , and she had all that she could
possibly desire.
After some days he told her that
he was going on ajourney, and handed brought away the remaining sister ;
to her the keys of the house, saying but this one was very cunning, and
that she could go into all the rooms when , in her turn , she received the
except one. If she entered that
room , she would die . At the same
time he gave her an egg, and told her
to be very careful not to lose it.
No sooner was he out of sight , than
she started to go all over the house,
and found the rooms filled with lovely
things. At last she came to the door
of the forbidden room , and, after hesi-
tating for a while, her curiosity got
the better of her, and she went in .
To her astonishment , she found there
a number of girls imprisoned by the
magician . They lay as if asleep , and,
frightened by their stillness, she fled
from the room and rushed away.
In her terror she dropped the egg
that she was holding in her hand .
spite of all her attempts, she could
not clean it .
A few hours later the man returned ,
and asked at once for the keys and
the egg. As soon as he saw the red
mark on the egg, he knew that she had
been into the forbidden room. Throw
ing her on the ground, he dragged her
back into the secret chamber, and
imprisoned her with the others.
He then set off again to the house
where he had begged, and this time
he captured the second daughter. She,
too, yielded to curiosity, and met
with the same fate as her sister.
The wizard then captured and
keys and the egg before the man
went out , she at once put away the
egg carefully in a cupboard. Then
she took thekey and went into the for
bidden room to see what it contained .
Here she was astonished to see the
floor covered with girls fast asleep,
among them hertwo sisters. But , being
wiser than the others , she took care of
the egg and kept it clean . When the
wizard came home, she ran to him
with the keys and the egg, and seeing
that the egg was clean , he excla med ,
“ You shall be my wife ; for you have
stood the test weil."
But the magicia i was now no longer
able to do as he liked , for his bride
had broken his power and was able to

Podar
IC85
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK
do with him whatever she would. So
she went into the forbidden room and
woke up the sleeping prisoners, who had
been held bound by the wizard's spell .
Then she said to him :
“ Before I marry you, you must carry
a basketful of gold to my parents.”
Taking a very large basket, she put her
two sisters into it and covered them over
with gold coins so that they could not
In her disguise, the magician's wife met thewedding guests, who said, " Fairy bird, from whence do you stray ? "
be seen. Next she told the man to
carry the basket, and be careful not to
s op anywhere on the road, as she would
certainly be watching him from her
little window . The man put the basket
on his shoulder and started ; but he
found it so heavy that he was ready to
drop with fatigue. So he sat down to
rest ; but instantly a voice from the
basket said, “ I am watching from my
little window .” Thinking it was his
future wife calling after him , he started
up and struggled on. Every time he
tried to rest, the same thing happened ,
and at last he reached the parents'
1686
OF STORIES
house, where he left his basket .
While hewas on hisjourney his intended
bride took a painted head and decorated
it with flowers, placing it at anupstairs
window , as if it were someone looking out.
Then she set free all the wizard's vic
tims, and sent out invitations to the
wedding. Next she covered herself with
feathers, so that she looked like some
queer bird , and no one could recognise
8C
07
Sabo
auritician
her. After this she started from the house
and met some of the guests, who said :
“ Fairy bird , from whence do you stray ?
“ I came from the fairy's home this day. '
And what has become of the young brille,
say ? "
“ She has garnished the house all in and out,
And now at the window she's looking out.'
When the wizard returned, he looked
up and saw the head at the window , and,
thinking it was his future wife, went
into the house . At once the friends of the
three sisters, who had come to revenge
their wrongs, locked the doors, and set
the house on fire. And that was the end
of the wizard and his forbidden room .
 SOU DLOUD

THE STORY OF LADY ANNE GRIMSTON

INNa great house in Hertfordshire marble -buried and forgotten . But
Lady Anne Grimston lay dying. not quite forgotten ; for one day,
She was a proud and obstinate many years after, the marble slab
woman , who had enjoyed her riches, over her grave was found to have
her lands and the society of her friendsmoved from its position. The builders
while she lived , and had cared nothing fixed it firmly in its place again, and
for the more important things which left it , thinking it quite secure.
do not pass away. And she died as Again the heavy marble slab tilted
she had lived, with none of the comfort slightly on one side, and in the middle
that comes to all good men and women was a crack, with a tiny bunch of leaves
when they leave their friends and pass bursting through. The crack was
out of this world . closed with cement and the slab put
She believed that when she had passed back again ; but again the slab was
away from her friends, when her houses, lifted up, the crack opened wider than
and riches, and lands were gone , she ever, and the thin trunk of a tree ap
herself, and the life that was in her, peared. They repaired the crumbling
would be gone , too, gone for ever, utterly tomb, and built around it tall iron

GREAT TREES GROWING OUT OF THE GRAVE OF LADY ANNE GRIMSTON IN TEWIN CHURCHYARD
destroyed. Her friends tried to point railings to hold the masonry together ;
out to her how terrible and impossible but the young tree made its way,
this was, how certain it was that she breaking the masonry in two, destroy
would live again , as the roses live ing the walls of the tomb , and tearing the
again. Just as the trees and flowers heavy iron railings out of the ground.
in the field live again after their long And to-day, growing right from the
sleep, so, said her friends to Lady heart of Lady Anne Grimston's grave ,
Anne Grimston, she, too, would live in Tewin churchyard, half an hour's ride
again , and the life that was in her from King's Cross Station, is one of
would never end. the biggest trees in England , four trees
But Lady Anne Grimston was proud growing from one root . The heavy iron
and unbelieving, and she said to her railings are fast through the trunk of
friends, “ I shall not live again. It is the tree and cannot be moved, the
as unlikely that I shall live again as marble masonry of the tomb is shattered
that a tree will grow out of my body.” to pieces, and to-day Lady Anne
Lady Anne Grimston died , and was Grimston's grave is a heap of broken
buried in a strong tomb made of stone and twisted iron bars.
1687 மாமா
 WXCEERTURALEELLURINTILLE EESUSEGELIOLIZIRALI
THE STORY OF BRAVE
KOTXES
THE MAN WHO FACED A TYRANT
'HERE
THE walked one fair day across the to any empty cloak or a pair of hose ? "
market square of Altdorf, in Switzer-
land, as fine a looking man as one could
wish to see . Tall and straight,broad and
shapely, with ruddy, bearded face and
proudly -held head , this man of the
mountains strode with clean, swinging
stride across the square, with a look of
bright happiness in his eyes , and a
cheerful word of greeting for his friends.
Many turned to say, " There goes William
Tell , the crossbowman of Bürglen ."
This man , who was said to be the finest
crossbowman in Switzerland , and the
best handler of a boat on the storm-
swept lake of Uri, lived quietly in a
mountain cottage, with a wife who
shared every thought of his heart, and
children for whom it was his pleasure
and delight to work. He hunted deer
in the mountains, and went a -fishing on
the lake . His children never lacked
good food and decent clothing. His
home was trim and neat . There was
no family in that district more firmly
established in peace and contentment.
Tell had sold the pack of deerskirs
which he had brought with him to
Altdorf. He was on his way now to
buy winter clothing of warm wool for
his children . He had money, enough
and to spare, and he was in a mood of
great happiness. In an hour or more
he would be singing a song on the road
to his mountain home. Suddenly he felt
his arm seized, and found himself in the
grip of an Austrian soldier . In another
instant he was surrounded . The soldier
who had seized his arm pointed to a
pole with ducal cap on the top. “" ItIt
is death not to bow to that cap, and
you know it ! ” said the soldier.
A silence fell upon the whole square.
People left off their trading and crowded
round the group . A thing greater
than trade was at stake now - a man's
freedom , a nation's liberty. William
Tell had flushed a deeper red . He
brought his eyes from the cap on the
pole to the soldier's face. ' I have
done nothing unlawful,” he said slowly.
“ You have insulted the majesty of
the Duke ! ” said the soldier.
66
William Tell kept a steady eye.
Why,” said he, “ should a man show
more reverence to an empty cap than
168
DURECIELD ALEX
WILLIAM TELL
At this there came from behind the
soldiers the figure of the Governor of
the district, the tyrant Gessler. It was
this Gessler who , set over the once
free Swiss by their conqueror and op
pressor, the Duke of Austria, had
trodder liberty under foot, had murdered
and imprisoned all who stood a ainst
him , and, as a last barbarity, had de
clared that everyone who did not do
homage to the badge of Austrian rule
set up on the pole in their market
place should die. William Tell faced
the Governor. He feared no man . No
one could break his proud spirit.
his mountain he had brooded upon the
shame of the slavery which enchained
his country, and had already spoken
with his friends of resistance. Never,
never, would he do homage to the
hated badge of the tyrant's mastery.
( 6
So you would make a jest of the
sign of majesty ? " asked theGovernor,
approaching him , while the soldiers
saluted . At that moment there came from
the crowd a child's cry of “ Father !
Father ! ” The crowd turned about,
opened out , and presently William Tell's
little son , who had come without leave
to the fair, was rushing to his father. The
Governor caught the boy's arm . “ Is
this the brave traitor's son ? ” he asked .
“ Hurt him not,” said Tell .
)
He is
iny firstborn ."
Oh , I won't hurt him !” answered
the terrible Gessler. “ If any harm
should come to him , it will not be by
me, but - by you .” A horrible smile
lighted his eyes.. ' Here," said he
to a soldier, take the boy and tie him
to the trunk of that linden - tree over
there, and place an apple on his head."
" What is this for ? ” demanded Tell.
" I am told ,that you are called the
crossbowman of Burglen ,” replied the
Governor, “ and I should like you to
give me an exhibition of your skill .
Your life is forfeit. But I am in a merciful
mood ; I will give you a chance of re
deeming it . Come, listen to me. If at
this distance you can shoot an arrow so
as to split the apple on the curls of your
firstborn, I will let you go free. If not
if you miss the apple, or kill your child
-I will execute you, here and now .”
ORIONOTECA WIELONGACERO ELCOTATORICITEITEEDILDOOI

THE MAN WHO MIGHT HAVE BEEN KING

William Tell, who is seen here with his little son , was arrested for refusing to bow to a tyrant set over the
Swiss people by their Austrian conquerors. He was offered his freedom if he would shoot an arrow at an apple
placed on the head of his little boy, which he did. Though arrested again, he escaped, killed the tyrant,
and freed the country. They would have made him king, but he went back to his home in the mountains.
U
1689
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES Wwwcas

Have you no mercy ? ” cried Tell, ' Oh ! So I run in danger of my

trembling with indignation. And do life ? said the Governor. But I will
you think I will attempt to save my keep the pledge I gave you. You shall
own life at the risk of my son's ? ” not die. I will give you your life. But
“ I am doing you a favour,” replied the rest of that life you will spend in the
Gessler . “ Think . By a lucky shot dungeons of my castle , and your bow
you may save your life, and go home! ” string will not then be a danger to me .'
Tell held out a hand which was At this Tell was seized again, and
trembling. “ How can a man who rushed by the soldiers through the
loves his son aim with a steady hand scowling mob to the quay, where the
an inch above his temples ? Ah, look Governor's ship was moored. But it
at the child ! My lord, look at him ! chanced that as the ship crossed the
He is no kin of yours ; you know lake of Uri a storm arose, savage and
nothing of the pretty ways by which wild, and it seemed as if everyone would
he has climbed into a father's heart, the be drowned. The Austrians could not
innocence
face !
of his eyes,thebeauty of his manage the vessel, and began to aban
Am I to risk that life ? " don hope of saving her. In their panic
Gessler laughed brutally . " Well, they remembered that Tell was reputed
you either shoot an arrow, or die . ” the best handler of ships in that part of
Then I will die ." the world, and spoke to the Governor.
“ And first your child shall have his Loose him, and let him take the
neck wrung before your eyes ! helm ," said Gessler. Tell got the vessel
A blinding passion of indignation to right herself,, and set her head for the
overswept the noble soul of the moun-
(
opposite coast. But he was now think
taineer. Give me the bow ," he said. ing, not of Gessler and the Austrian
One thing in mercy I ask . Let the soldiers, but of freedom-his own free
child's face be turned away from me . dom , and the freedom of Switzerland.
Let me not see his eyes fixed upon me.” He would get free , and save his country:
A way was cleared between father He brought the ship close to a rock
and son . A dense multitude stood on that jutted out from the coast, and then,
either side. The boy, with his face to as it shot past,he sprang suddenly upon
the tree, bound by ropes to its trunk, the rock, and left the Austrians to save
felt the apple weigh like lead upon his themselves. Swift of foot, he scaled the
head. A dreadful silence fell upon the rocks, climbed the cliff, and made his
market square. William Tell chose two way across the mountains to a place on
arrows . One he thrust in his girdle ; the road, which Gessler, if he saved him
one he fitted to his bow -string. Then self, would have to pass. Here he lay
for a moment he stood, a little bowed of concealed amongst the bushes, with an
shoulder, with his eyes downward ; he arrow fitted to his bow -string, his heart
was praying. You might have heard a set on delivering Switzerland from the
leat fall,, so still was the place. Then tyrant.. As he waited, darkness fell
Tell raised his head ; his eyes were among the mountains. Presently there
steady ; his hands had become still ; his came to him the tramp of feet. “ And
face was like iron . He brought the if I live to return to Altdorf," Gessler
crossbow to his shoulder and laid his eye was saying , “ I swear I will destroy the
to the feather of the shaft. Twang ! whole brood of this traitor Tell, mother
The arrow shot forward, and, as it and children, all in the same hour !
were at the same moment, buried itself “ You shall never return ! ” said Tell
deep in the tree. The apple fell in to himself. And, as the soldiers went
equal parts on either side of the boy's marching on, he let fly the arrow , and
head . A roar of heering went up to Gessler dropped dead in the dust.
heaven , and Gessler turned to Tell. William Tell inspired the rising of the
“ A good shot, traitor !” he said Swiss people , which led to the over
cruelly . But tell me, for what reason throw of the Austrians and made
did you take two arrows ? ” Switzerland a free country.
Téll laid his hands upon the arrow in They would have made him king, but
his girdle . “ If the first arrow had he shook his head, and went back to
hurt my child ,” he said, “ this one by his home among the mountains, which
now would be through your heart !" was more to him than many palaces.
1690
 LITTLE STORIES
Almost every flower has a story, just as almost every place has a legend. They
are “ made up , ” perhaps, as the legends are, but they are often very beautiful.
THE CORNFLOWER
UEEN LOUISA OF PRUSSIA was a
Q brave, beautiful lady. The great
Emperor Napoleon came and con-
quered her country, and oppressed her lying in the snow. He carried him to
people, and she struggled bravely
against him .
At last, however, her chief city,
Berlin , was captured by the enemy, and
she barely managed to escape with her
little children , and hid in a cornfield .
Her children were frightened , and began
to cry, and Queen Louisa was afraid
that someone might hear them . So
she took some of the blue cornflowers
and twined the blossoms into wreaths
and crowns for them , and in this way
made the children forget their sorrow.
One of her children was named
Wilhelm , and he afterwards conquered
Napoleon's nephew , and was made the
first German Emperor, and he took as
his emblem the blue cornflower. Now
all the German people wear it on
festival days, as the emblem of
German unity, and as a souvenir of
their brave Queen Louisa of Prussia .
THE ENCHANTED THORN
NE of the thorn - trees at Newland's
ONECorner, on the Surrey downs , is
enchanted . Some maidens who danced
around it one summer night were carried
off by the fairies and never seen again .
But a few years ago two shepherd lads
were sitting there, when the thorns
were white with blossom , and one of
them said :
།
་“ We'llnow see if this thorn is really
enchanted . I'll dance round it, and you
sit and watch what happens."
Instead of dancing in the ordinary
way about the tree, however, he danced
round it backwards . When he had done ,
the earth opened, and a green table
came up. On the table were delicate
dishes of meat and fish .
“ Don't touch it ; it is fairy food ! ”
said one of the shepherd boys.
But his daring companion feasted
to his heart's content, and the table
then sank into the earth . He is now
one of the richest farmers in England,
for the food was lucky food, but his rose of Jericho has ever since borne also
companion is still only a shepherd. the name of the Resurrection flower.
1691
ABOUT FLOWERS
THE CHRYSANTHEMUM
the Black Forest lived a peasant
INN named Hermann . Going home one
Christmas Eve, he saw a little boy
his wife and children , who, in their
pity, gladly shared with him their little
feast.
All night he remained in the hut ,
and in the morning the guest revealed
himself as the Christ-child , and vanished .
When Hermann next passed the place
where he found the Child, wonderful
flowers were growing out of the snow .
Gathering a handful, he gave them to
his wife , who called them chrysanthe
mums, meaning Christ-flowers, or, more
correctly, gold -flowers. Ever after this
on Christmas Eve a part of the feast in
Hermann's house was set aside for some
poor child, in memory of their guest.
THE ROSE OF JERICHO
He rose of Jericho is also known as
THEthe Resurrection flower, for it is
supposed to have the property of dying
and coming to life again . Its origin
is described in a very pretty legend.
When the infant Jesus fied from
Bethlehem with His mother Mary and
Joseph, to avoid the massacre of all the
young children by King Herod, the
party are said to have crossed the plains
of Jericho. When Mary alighted from
the ass on which she was riding, this
little flower sprang up at her feet to
greet the infant Saviour whom she
carried in her arms.
Flowers are said to have thus sprung
up at all the places where the Holy
Child rested .
All through the Saviour's life on
earth the little rose of Jericho con
tinued to flourish , but when He died
upon the Cross all these flowers withered
and died away at the same time. Three
days later, however, our Lord rose
again from the tomb, and at the same
time the roses of Jericho came to life,
and sprang up and blossomed all over
the plain as an emblem of the joy of the
earth because Christ was risen.
And because of these happenings, the
 CLEAR
meron nammmmm mm
DOLG
THE UGLY DUCKLING
OLEH
KLEAN
An old Mother Duck, who wasvery
AN
proud of her handsome family, was
very disappointed when another little
one was born who was so ugly that every-
body called him the Ugly Duckling.
' I never imagined,” she said to a
friend who came to visit her, " that
I should ever have such an ugly child .
Just look at the others, how pretty
they are and how gracefully they move !”
Soon the ducklings grew old enough
to have their first swimming lesson .
" Quack, quack ! ” cried the Mother
Duck, and out they all came, as fine a
brood of ducklings as any mother could
wish to see . And behind them came the
Ugly Duckling, alone and forlorn .
Do you not see your young
brother ? '' said the Mother Duck.
“ He can't be our brother, ” they
replied scornfully. “ He is so ugly
that we can't bear to look at him .”
But when they found that he took
to the water like a brave young duck
should, and beat them all at their
games and races, they were jealous of
him , and angry that one so inferior in
appearance should in any way excel .
One day the Mother Duck took her
children to visit some friends in a
neighbouring farmyard. They had not
been there long before the Ugly Duck-
ling found everybody staring at him ,
and one old duck even flew at him and
bit him on the neck .
“ You are not like the rest of us,"
he said . “ You are so big and ugly.
Why do you come here ?
" Let him alone,” said the Mother
Duck . “ He is not pretty like my
other children , but he is good -natured,
and he swims better than any of them .'
But when the mother's back was
turned , the Ugly Duckling had a bad
time of it. They all made fun of him,
and gave him sharp pecks.
66
They all hate me because I am
ugly ," sighed the Ugly Duckling, " and
it is through no fault of mine. I am
evidently not wanted. I will go away.”
1692
magamma anda
umma
And so when no one was looking he
stole away. On and on he went until
he came to a great moor, where he saw
a number of wild ducks who came to
have a look at the stranger .
" How do you do ? ” said the Ugly
Duckling politely.
But they stared at him for some time
without answering, and then one said :
How ugly you are ! ' And the .
they all began to laugh. But just at
that moment there came a sound
which terrified the poor duckling.
“ Pop, pop ! ” went a gun, and down
dropped the wild ducks one by one.
The smoke from the guns blew
across the water and choked him , and
as it faded away in the air the duckling
was terrified to see a huge dog dash
into the water and come swimming
towards him . He was too frightened to
move , but to his surprise the animal,
with a sniff, passed him and left him
trembling from head to foot with fright.
“ I am so ugly that even a dog can
not bear to look at me,” he thought ,
ard he shivered and dared not move
till the sun had gone down, lest other
strange dangers should come upon him .
When morning dawned fie caught
sight of a little cottage that lay close
by. Perhaps it might offer shelter for
the poor lost duckling , who felt so
helpless in a strange world .
He went up to the door and peeped
in . An old woman stood by the hearth ,
and near by crouched a cat and a hen.
“ Perhaps they will not notice how
ugly I am , and will let me stay, ” thought
the duckling And he crept in and
waited just inside the doorway.
The cat saw him first, and she began
to purr loudly, and the old woman
looked round .
The Ugly Duckling held his breath
for fear that she should turn him out .
But a smile spread over her face .
“ How very fortunate I am ," she
exclaimed , for now I shall have some
duck's eggs !
 -THE UGLY DUCKLING PROGLARO

But the duckling did not present her Duckling thought at last he was
with any eggs, and after a time the cat among friends. But in the afternoon,
and the henbegan to quarrel with him. when the children came home from
“ I don't know of what use you are
)
school, they ran towards him with cries
in the world ,” said the hen disdainfully. of joy, and the duckling, thinking they
“ You cannot lay eggs like I can ; you meant to do him harm , flew up, and
cannot even purr like the cat, and no- )
in his terror fluttered into the meal-tub,
vody could call you handsome.” scattering the meal far and wide. This
.. " . I think I had better go, before they made the farmer's wife so angry that
turn me away, ” sighed the poor duck- she picked up a stick to beat him . But
ling, “ but where to go I cannot think. ” luckily he saw her in time to escape.
And so he left the cottage and Once again the duckling was home
returned to the water,, feeling even · less, and all through the winter he suf
more lonely and helpless than before. fered from cold and hunger, until at last
That evening at came the beautiful
sunset there came spring, with soft ,
out of the bushes a gentle breezes and
flock of birds, so warm sunshine.
beautiful and so “This is good !"
white that the Ugly said the duckling;
Duckling gazed at “ It makes me feel
1)
them in astonish quite strong."
ment . They were And on he went
swans. It was the until he came to a
first time that he pond . The pond
had ever seen a was as smooth and
Swan , and he as clear as a mirror,
thought that he had and in passing the
never seen anything Ugly Duckling
so beautiful. They looked down at his
uttered strange cries reflection. He was
as they passed, and startled . Surely
for someminutesthe something was
duckling watched wrong ! He looked
them , admiring their again , and then he
beauty with sad, gazed all round, but
half-envious feeling. no creature was in
“ How glorious sight . What could it
to be so beautiful ! ” mean ? Instead of a
he thought. big, ugly duckling he
But by and by saw
a tall, graceful
came the winter, swan , as beautiful as
with the cold and the birds he had once
The old woman looked round and a smile spread over
the ice, and the poor her face. How very fortnnate I am !" sheexclaimed. seen. What had hap
duckling, cold and pened ? Could it be
often hungry, longed for the home that that he, the Ugly Duckling , had
he had left, for, bad as things had changed into a beautiful swan ?
seemed, they were far worse now . He looked up, and there he saw, glid
Sometimes the air was so cold that ing toward him , a number of these
he was obliged to keep swimming about beautiful creatures. They greeted him
to prevent the water from freezing. politely, and called him brother. " Come
Once he was so tired and stiff with with us,” they cried. “ You are such a
the cold that he could scarcely move, fine fellow, we would have you join us.
and then the pond froze around him , And then, lifting up his head, and
and he would have died if a farmer, quivering with excitement, the Ugly
who was passing, had not broken the Duckling, who no longer deserved his
ice with his stick , and rescued him. name, proudly followed the rest, with
The farmer took him home, and whom he lived happily ever after.
warmed and fed him , and the Ugly The next Stories begin on page 1791.

17
1693 1)
I E
THE OLD AND NEW RULERS OF INDIA

soo
la

This picture shows an English ambassador's first visit to a ruler of India . England first came to India by sea,
and it was at the time of the rise of England's great sea power that Elizabeth sent Sir John Mildenhall in 1599
to Akbar, the Great Mogul, to apply for trading privileges for a company to whom she wished to grant a charter .

This picture helps us to understand the vast change that has come over India. For 250 years British influence
grew in India, but the country was still under the sway of native rulers until near our own time. To -day the
King of England is Emperor of India , too ; and in India our King Edward is called Emperor Edward.
Many years ago, before he came to the throne, the King visited India as Prince of Wales, and this
picture shows his meeting with some of the native princes of India, who are now loyal to his crown.
1694 mmmmBRIXTER
 3:@ The Child's Book of
ALL COUNTRIES

Humayun Shah Jehan

Akbar Khar
TALVITE
HOW INDIA BECAME AN EMPIRE
Native Soldiers of India Aurungzebe

The story of India CONTINUED FROM 1552 the hilly country,

begins a long,
long time before the story
of England . For the first
person who wrote down anything
about England was Julius Cæsar,
and that was only about fifty
years before Christ was born
not quite two thousand years ago .
But we know something about the
people in India two thousand years
which was more diffi
cult to conquer than the
great plains, just as the
Britons in England were driven
into the hills of Wales by the
Angles and Saxons. The Aryans
made themselves lords of all
the rich lands of Hindustan, keeping
many of the old inhabitants as slaves,
hewers of wood and drawers of water,

оо
before that . It was before Moses led like the children of Gibeon. That is

оо
o

the children of Israel out of Egypt,
before even Abraham was born , that which we read on page 1550. Three of
a people who spoke an Aryan language
conquered the northern part of India.
Learned people have found out that
all the languages which are spoken
in Europe havegrown up by degrees
from one original language which
wasspoken ages ago by the ancestors
of all these peoples. All the languages
which have grown up from that one
are called Aryan ; so because the
people who conquered India more
than four thousand years ago spoke an
Aryan language , we know that they
came from the same stock as the
races of Europe.
Now, the races who peopled India
before talked quite a different kind
of language. When the Aryans came
how those four castes grew up of
these were the castes of the Aryan con
querors, which included the Brahmins ,
to whom belonged the priests and the
men of learning, the warriors, who
were called Rajpoots, and those
people who followed employments
which were held less honourable than
these. The fourth caste consisted
of the conquered people, who were
accounted altogether contemptible.
Moreover, by degrees the Aryans
made conquest of most part even of
the hill countries , yet not so completely
as in the great river basins of the
Indus and the Ganges ; so that instead
of making the people slives, they
became mixed with them . That is
why in the south there are far fewer o

into India through the mountain Brahmins or Rajpoots of pure blood

passes of the north -west , they did than in the country to the north .
not destroy these people utterly, but Because it was no easy matter for
made someof them servants or slaves ; invaders to make their way into India,
while the rest fled before them into great kingdoms grew up in Hindustan

ATE LIKECA
1695
 con ARRER
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
and in the Deccan, which had little even by the Greeks. In those days there
enough to do with the world beyond the arose in Hindustan a very great ruler
mountain barrier, their people knowing whose name was Asoka, whose fame
hardly anything of the great empires for justice and mercy was spread over
of Babylon and Assyria and Egypt. all India. He became lord of nearly all
Hindustan , and even far away south in
HOWCAME
THE DOWN
PERSIANS
UPON AND THE GREEKS the Deccan his name was revered .
Moreover, under his rule the doctrines
Long before Homer sang the tale of of the great teacher, whom men for the
the fall of Troy, long before Romulus most part call Buddha, but who had
raised the first earthen rampart of many names, were spread abroad, and
Rome, Indian singers were telling the many Buddhist temples arose . But of
great deeds of their heroes, and Indian Buddha himself, who lived long before
wereshaping the lawsofthe Asoka, we read in another place.
law - givers
Hindoos. This we know , because their Now, for nearly a thousand years
poems and their law books have come there is little more that need be told,
down to our own time, and learned men
study them even to this day.: Of their disciplesof Jesuswho made their wayto
law -givers, the most famous is Manu . India and preached the Gospel there ;
Now, itEmpire
Persian wouldwas
seematits
that mightiest,
when the yet there were butfew who believed.
And again the teaching of Buddhism
just before King Darius made war upon became corrupt, and theold religion took
the Greeks , the Persians made their
way into India , and caused the kings its place again, though this, too, had
become changed and corrupt. This
of the Punjab -- which means the land is the religion called Hindooism , which
of the Five Rivers that flow into the
is followed by three-fourths of the
— to pay
Indusofthe
tales tribute
Indians ; sotothat
came strange people of India even to this day.
the Greeks,
of which this at least was true — that HowINTO
MUSSULMAN CONQUERORS POURED
HINDUSTAN AND SET UP KINGDOMS
they would not eat flesh . But it was Then there came
not tillanother hundred and fifty years Mahomet had beguna change,
to teach for
thewhen
new
had passed that the Greeks themselves
were led by the mighty conqueror, faith which is called Islam , his successors
Alexander the Great, through the great set forth to compel all men either to
mountain passes . When they came subjects Mussulmans
become themselves, or the
of Mussulmans ; and before
into the Punjab, they were met in long some of the Arabs, or Saracens,
battle by the valiant Indian prince invaded India. However, it was not
who was called Porus ; though it till Mahomet had been dead for nearly
would seem that this was not his own four hundred years-a thousand years
name, but a title borne by all those after the birth of Christ -that Mussul
princes, just as all the kings of Egypt
were called Pharaoh . In that battle , man conquerors began to pour into
India at the head of great armies, and to
Porus was overthrown, so that Alexan set up kingdoms in Hindustan , where
der made himself lord of all the Punjab ; Mussulman kings, with armies of
but because Porus was a wise man and Mussulmans, ruled over Hindoo sub
valiant, Alexander made friendswith jects . The first of these was called
him , and gave him back his kingdom , Mahmud of Ghuzni, who conquered all
though he was still subject to the Greeks. the north of Hindustan with soldiers
HOW ALEXANDER'S. EMPIRE BROKE UP from Afghanistan beyond the moun
AND A GREAT RULER ROSE IN INDIA tains. And after this there were many
Some few of the Greeks abode in the Afghan and Pathan rulers, and Turks
Punjab, for some of their coins and their also, who reigned at Delhi , and others
carvings have been found there ; but who set up kingdoms in the south,
after the empire of Alexander was whom the Hindoos hated as foreign
divided, the veil fell again between conquerors ; but because the Mussul
the East and the West , and the nations mans were for the most part soldiers,
of India went their own way as before . they generally won the mastery.
Moreover, it was only the peoples At last , when Henry VIII . was King
of the Punjab that were ever reached of England, Hindustan was invaded
TITREX summer
1696
 Nucan.co
KONTO
omrum
room
ZU
US HOTELCRA anon

Venemmm
NATIVES OF INDIA AND THEIR RULERS

omener
A YOUNG RAJAH , OR PRINCE , OF INDIA A MAHARAJAH , OR GREAT PRINCE, OF INDIA

A MOHAMMEDAN AT PRAYERS A FARMER AND A WARRIOR

There are many kinds of people in India , and the hill peoples differ widely from the people of the lowlands. The
rulers lived in great magn ence and wielded great power before the British ruled the country. Their costumes,
and those of the people, are very picturesque, and from his dress people can tell a man's rank or occupation at sight.
1697
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIESummet
by Babar, founder of the Mogul And so it fell out that the lordship of
Empire. So valiant and daring a India passed away both from Hindoos
warrior was he, that with an army of and Mussulmans, who were somewhat
twelve thousand men he overthrew the akin in spite of all their differences, into
greatest kings of Hindustan, both the hands of the British , who were not
Mussulmans and Hindoos. akin at all in race or manners or religion,
T'HE FOUNDING OF THE MOGUL EMPIRE , though they were descended from the
AND THE GREAT KING AKBAR
same stock from which the Brahmins
After him , his son , Humayun, had and Rajpoots had sprung more than
troublous times , and was driven out of the four thousand years ago.
land, but had almost made himself king Just before Babar conquered Hindu
again when he died. But Humayun's stan, the Portuguese had found that
son Akbar was one of the most famous they could sail to India round the
and the greatest of allkings,for hewas not south of Africa ; and they got possession
only so great a warrior that he brought of some harbours on the Persian Gulf,
all Hindustan under his sway from the and on the coast of India, and in the
mountains on the west to the ocean on islands to the south - east, and set up
the east, but his rule also was exceedingly trading. Then, a hundred years later,
wise. He did not seek, as most kings King Philip of Spain made himself
did in India, to rule by the sword and King of Portugal ; and since he was at
oppress the people, but resolved to war with the English and the Dutch ,
extend equal justice to all , whether both of them became ready to try and
Hindoos or Mussulmans. He began to get all that trade of his into their own
reign two years before our Queen Eliza- hands. So just before Queen Elizabeth
beth, and his reign lasted for fifty years, died, the English and Dutch each set
so that he outlived her for aa little time ; up a company to trade with the Indies .
and when he died, he left a greater THE FACTORIES SICH BROUGHT ABOUT
empire, stronger and better ruled, than
India had known since the days of Asoka . Then the English persuaded first
In his days, and in those of his son one and then another of the native
Jehan Gir, there came to India travellers rulers, who were the subjects of the
from Europe, who brought home Great Mogul, to let them set up a
ELLOUXD

wonderful tales of the splendour of the trading station, which was called a
)

court of the Great Mogul. There even factory ,” at Surat , and at Madras,
came to Jehan Gir an ambassador from and at Calcutta. When Portugal got
our King James I., Sir Thomas Roe, free from Spain , King Charles II.
seeking his friendship. But Jehan Gir married a Portuguese princess, and the
brought little good to India, for he cared Portuguese gave him Bombay, which
only for his own pleasures, and not for they had got possession of in the old
the good of the people over whom he days. The French, too , following the
ruled . A much better emperor was his example of the English , got permission
son , Shah Jehan , who built the famous to set up factories at Pondicherry,
Taj Mahal as a memorial of the wife he which is not far from Madras, and at
loved, as we have read on page 1551 . Chandernagore, which is not far from
( OW THE RULE OF INDIA PASSED INTO Calcutta . All of which things befell
Hºw THE HANDS OF THE BRITISH while the Great Moguls were still mighty,
After him , his son Aurungzebe ruled before Aurungzebe died .
for nearly fifty years, and strove to Then , just when the Mogul Empire
bring all India under his sway, over- was breaking up into a number of pro
throwing the great kingdoms that were vinces, which were really independent
still in the Deccan ; yet thereby he kingdoms, there arose a great rivalry
wrought the ruin of the empire, since it between the British and the French ,
became too large to be held under con- each of them seeking to win favour with
trol; so it had to be divided into great the native princes, so that they might
provinces. And after his day the ruler of secure all the best of the trade, and
each province cared little enough for the shut the others out. As the disorder
Great Mogul at Delhi, but went each grew greater within the empire of the
his own way as if he had been an Moguls, and as it also seemed likely
independent king under no control. that reat Britain and France would
TITT ILLIULUUTTUUUUUUUUU
1698
ILALALUI DEZILLEDDICCIOTXILERGINOONDITEGICOTXOAEGI mu

A MOUNTAIN PASS THAT LEADS TO INDIA

IN

Demon

India is cut off from the rest of Asia by ranges of very high mountains. There are only one or two passes, or
gates, through which she can communicate with the surrounding nations. This is a picture of the Bolan Pass,
through which lies the route to Afghanistan , and it shows the British troops marching through to Kandahar.
mmmmmrmITXIAOMITTAUTUI τπτπιπππτιιπτειτιτααατττιατααατττταΙ . τιιατττατττιο11
1699
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
go to war with each other over quarrels captured Arcot, and then, with his
that they had in other parts of the few men, defended it so stoutly
world , a very clever Frenchman in against a great army that presently
India , whose name was François he put that army to utter rout.
Dupleix, thought that he might manage After that the British and their
to turn the British out altogether. allies got the best of it. Although
"HE FRENCHMAN WHO TRIED TO CONQUER
TH peace was again made in India, before
INDIA FOR FRANCE long yet another war broke out be
Nobody thought about conquering tween Great Britain and France, and
India, but Dupleix thought that if the this time the British beat the French
British were out of the way, the French so thoroughly that they had to promise
would be able to make themselves so not to keep soldiers in India any more.
useful to anyone they chose to help in So instead of the French getting rid
the quarrels that were likely to arise of the British, as Dupleix had hoped,
more and more frequently among the the British got rid of the French, and
native rulers, that they would soon be could carry out for themselves the
able to get very nearly anything they plans which Dupleix had meant the
might ask for. He was the more sure French to carry out for themselves.
of this, because he saw that French The French had taught the British how
troops could fight much better than to make themselves powerfulin India,
the native armies, and he guessed that if and the British had learned the lesson .
native soldiers were trained and com- Before the French had been quite
manded by French officers they would got rid of, another thing happened,
be nearly as good as French troops. which made the British masters of the
So when the expected war between very important province of Bengal.
Great Britain and France broke out , "НЕ
Dupleix attacked the British at Madras IN THE BLACK HOLE OF CALCUTTA
and captured it . Then the ruler of The ruler of Bengal , like the ruler of
that part of India, who was called the the Carnatic , was called the Nawab ; and
Nawab of the Carnatic , wanted to turn his name was Surajah Dowlah. He
the French out of Madras, and Dupleix was very silly and very cruel . Because
had the chance of showing that his he was offended with something that the
idea about training native troops under British people at Calcutta had done ,
French officers was right . He did it , he seized nearly a hundred and fifty
too , for a mere handful of men scattered of them , and shut them all up on a
quite a large army which the Nawab stifling hot night in a little room
sent against them . The French had with only a tiny window , ever since
to give Madras back after all, because called the Black Hole of Calcutta ; and
when the war came to an end both the result was that nearly all of them
sides gave back what they had taken ; were dead before morning . Of course
but then, as Dupleix had expected, the British at Madras determined to
native rulers began to quarrel, and one punish the Nawab of Bengal for his
side made haste to ask the French to crime ; and Clive was sent off by sea
help them . Then of course the British with a few troops, and some ships of our
took the other side in the quarrel . Navy which happened to be at hand .
CLERK WHO VE DRO THE FRENCH He very soon routed the Nawab's
THARMY E BUTOF INDIA soldiers, and took Calcutta again ; and
This time the fortune of war went then a number of the native chiefs who
against the French , for while the had resolved to get rid of Surajah
French and their allies seemed to be Dowlah asked Clive to help them .
getting the better of the allies of the Clive then marched against the
British, a daring young officer named Nawab with an army of three thousand
Robert Clive—who had joined the men , and the Nawab marched against
Army at the end of the last fighting him with fifty thousand . At the
having been only a clerk before that- famous battle of Plassey the thrce
was sent with a few hundred sepoys, or thousand routed the fifty thousand ;
native soldiers, and a very few British Surajah Dowlah was killed ; and then
volunteers to attack the enemy's all the native chiefs made submission
capital, which was called Arcot . Clive to Clive. Although he appointed a new
comme 1700
THE SPLENDOUR OF TRAVELLING IN INDIA

이이

IC
H
BALLLOT
LADELSE

The native rulers of India are the owners of the most wonderfuljewels in the world. Their clothes and property
are most magnificent. In this picture we see the Prince and Princess of Wales, during a visit to India, riding
on elephants decked with brilliant trappings. Many of the richly-coloured carpets in our houses come from India
*** 1701 **
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
Nawab , he had himself to become the
real ruler of Bengal, and after a little
while the Great Mogul agreed that
Bengal should belong to the British.
FIGHTS BETWEEN THE BRITISH AND
In this way, although the British had
not planned any such thing, they
suddenly found that their trading
company, with its few factories, had
become ruler of aa whole great province,
while the Nawab of another great
province, the Carnatic, had promised
them obedience. The two provinces
together were only a small part of India , under our rule ; though the princes whod
as if a foreign power had become
master of two or three of the biggest
English counties. But they were larger
provinces than any single native prince
ruled over-except , of course , the
Mogul, who was supposed to rule over
all of them , including the British. Then
the Government in England appointed
a governor - general for these new
dominions -Warren Hastings –who has
been very much blamed for some of his
doings, and was impeached for them in
F’arliament, becau e people di not
understand why he was obliged to act
as he did . Yet it was owing to him
that a good and strong government was
established at all .
Now , while the British were chiefly
anxious to secure what they had won,
and to establish a good government
in those provinces, the native rulers
made sure that they wanted to conquer
more ; besides which, two or three of
the native rulers were anxious to en-
large their own territories, and perhaps
to make themselves masters of all
India , now that the Mogul's real power
was so small ; therefore they would have
liked to turn the British out again .
It thus happened that three times
in the course of twenty years the great
southern state of Mysore defied the
British , and a little later the people of
Nepal, which is in the mountains along
the north side of India , where they edge
the plain of the Ganges, tried to take pos-
session of a part of the plain below them .
THEALLSPREAD OF BRITISH RULE OVER
INDIA , AND THE TERRIBLE MUTINY
So there was war with them , at the
end of which they, too , gave up a
part of their lands; but the people
there, who are called the Ghoorkas,
made friends with us , and now the
mm 1702
Ghoorka regiments in our Army are
some of the best regiments in the
world . Then a number of princes
of the race called Mahrattas made
war with us , and from some of them
also the greater part of their lands
were taken away. Last of all , the
Sikhs, who ruled in the Punjab -their
name is pronounced seek - invaded
our territories, and rose against us as
Mysore had done, and when the war was
over we took possession of the Punjab
ourselves. Then ali India within the
circle of the mountains and the sea was
had not forced us to war were allowe
to remain the lords of their own realms,
on condition that they did not rule
as tyrants, or try to stir up wars.
Fifty years ago there came a terrible
time, when the Sepoy regiments all
along the Ganges plain mutinied against
their officers and against the British
rule , the Mussulmans among them
seeking to restore the old dominion of
the Moguls. Where there were enough
regiments of British soldiers, the mutiny
was kept in check ; but where there
were many native regiments and few
white soldiers, defence was difficult .
1E PEACE THAT CAME AFTER THE MUTINY ,
THEAND THE NEW EMPIRE
At Cawnpore, the leader of the rebels,
Nana Sahib , promised to spare the
British if they surrendered : but he broke
his word and murdered them all. At
Lucknow , the garrison held out and
endured through a long siege, till
they were relieved , first by Havelock
and Outram , and then by fresh troops
from England led by Sir Colin Campbell.
Because there was a great rising of
mutineers at Delhi, where the Mogul
was, a British force besieged the city,
and took it after a time. But when
Sir Colin Campbell had arrived with his
fresh troops, it was not very long before
the revolt was crushed altogether.
After that the British nation said that
it was time to end the ruling of India by
a company of merchants ; so the Queen
of England ruled India . Finally, a little
more than thirty years ago , Queen
Victoria was given the title of Empress,
because the Moguls had been called
Emperors. Now the King of England is
also Emperor of India, with its many
millions of people.
The next story of Countries is on page 1765.
Tumor
 The Child's Book ofqe
POETRY
A CHILDREN'S POEM BY WORDSWORTH
IN the poetry of William Wordsworth there is much tender sentiment expressed in
IN simple words which the youngest reader could not fail to understand. His poetry
is at times not of a very high order, though he is capable of the best ; but it is always
redeemed by tender and just sentiment. That may be said of his poem “ The Pet
Lamb.” The poet says “ the dew was falling fast.” Now, the dew does not fall ; it
rises. But this is what we call “ poetic license.” As poetry is not the mere state
ment of fact, but the expression of the imagination, it must not be bound by the
same rules as the describing of a machine. The poet is allowed to use words that
suggest to the mind ideas and pictures which, though not strictly true, may be more
beautiful than fact, and all such departures from the mere fact are called “ poetic
"
license, ” meaning that the poet has taken this liberty for the sake of poetic eff.ct.

THE PET LAMB

co What is it thou wouldst
Thethe
dew was
stars falling
beganfast,
to ce CONTINUED FROM PAGE 1567 seek ? What is wanting
blink ; SD to thy heart ?
I heard a voice ; it said , “ Drink, Thy limbs, are they not strong ?
pretty creature, drink ! ” and beautiful thou art !
And looking o'er the hedge, before me I This grass is tender grass ; these flowers
espied they have no peers,
A snow - white mountain lamb, with a And that green corn all day is rustling in
maiden at its side. thy ears . 63

Nor sheep nor kine were near ; the lamb If the sun be shining hot, do but stretch a
was all alone, thy woollen chain ;
And by a slender cord was tether'd to a stone ; This beech is standing by, its covert thou 0

With one knee on the grass did the little canst gain ;
maiden kneel, For rain and mountain storms, the like thou
While to that mountain lamb she gave its need’st not fear,
evening meal. The rain and storm are things that scarcely
can come here .
The lamb , while from her hand he thus his
supper took, “ Rest. little young one, rest ; thou hast
Seem'd to feast with head and cars ; and his forgot the day
tail with pleasure shook : When my father found thee first in places far
“ Drink, pretty creature, drink ! ” she said in away ;
such a tone Many locks were on the hills, but thou werto
That I almost received her heart into my own . own'd by none . O

And thy mother from thy side for evermore o

' Twas little Barbara Lewthwaite, a child of was gone .
beauty rare ! " He took thee in his arms,and in pity brought
I watch'd them with delight ; they were a thee home ;
lovely pair. Ablesséd day for thee !— Then whither wouldste
Now with her empty can the maiden turn'd thou roam ?
away ; A faithful nurse thou hast ; the dam that diil 83
But ere ten yards were gone, her footsteps thee yean
did she stay. Upon the mountain -tops no kinder could have
been .
Right towards the lamb she look’d , and from
that shady place “ Thou know'st that twice a day I have
I unobserved could see the workings of her brought thee in this can
face ; Fresh water from the brook , asclearas everran ;
If nature to her tongue could measured And twice in the day, when the ground is wet
numbers bring, with dew ,
Thus, thought I , to her lamb that little maid I bring thee draughts of milk , warm milk it is
might sirg : and new .
6
What ails thee, young one-what ? Why “ Thy limbs will shortly be twice as stout as
pull so at thy cord ? they are now ,
Is it not well with thee - well both for bed Then I'll yoke thee to my cart like a pony in 00
.
and board ? the plough !
8 Thy plot of grass is soft, and green as grass My playmate thou shalt be ; and when the
can be ; wind is cold
Rest, little young one, rest ; what is't that Our hearth shall be thy bed, our house shall
aileth thee ? be thy fold .

ape YO
1703
 amma
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY :
" It will not , will not rest ! -Poor creature , Gazes his fill, and comes and comes again,
can it be That he may call it up when far away .
That ' tis thy mother's heart which is working She sits , inclining forward as to speak ,
so in thee ? Her lips half open , and her finger up ,
Things that I know not of belike to thee are
dear,
And dreams of things which thou canst neither
See nor hear.
(
Alas, the mountain -tops that look so green
and fair !
I've heard of fearful winds and darkness that
come there ;
The little brooks that seem all pastime ard
all play,
When they are angry, roar like lions for
their prey .
Here thou necd'st not dread the raven in
the sky ;
Night and day thou art safe -- our cottage is
hard by.
Why bleat so after me ? Why pull so at thy
chain ?
Sleep-and at break of day I will come to
thee again ! ”
As homeward through the lane I went with
lazy feet ,
This song to myself did I oftentimes repeat ;
And it seem'd, as I retraced the ballad line
by line,
That but half of it was hers, and one half of
it was mine.
Again , and once again , did I repeat the song :
Nay ,” said I , more than half to the damsel
must belong !
For she look'd with such a look , and she spake
with such a tone ,
That I almost received her heart into my own."
GINEVRA
This poem in blank verse by Samuel Rogers tells simply
one of the most dramatic stories that could be conceived.
The legend of the awſul chest is told of several English
houses, but is probably of Italian origin . Let us hope it
never was true . But the tale contains a warning to us to act
always with prudence , and exercise forethought, even in jest.
IF thou shouldst ever come by choice or
chance
To Modena , where still religiously
Among her ancient trophies is preserved
Bologna's bucket ( in its chain it hang ;
Within that reverend tower , the Guirlandine ),
Stop at a palace near the Reggio gate,
Dwelt in of old by one of the Orsini.
Its noble gardens, terrace above terrace,
And rich in fountains, statues, cypresses,
Will long detain thee ; thro ' their arched
walks ,
Dim at noonday , discovering many a glimpse
Of knights and dames, such as in old romance,
And lovers , such as in heroic song ,
Perhaps the two, for groves were their delight,
That in the springtime, as alone they sat,
Venturing together on a tale of love,
Read only part that day . A summer sun
Sets ere one half is seen ; but ere thou go,
Enter the house - prythee, forget it not-
And look a while upon a picture there.
' Tis of a lady in her earliest youth ,
The very last of that illustrious race ,
Done by Zampieri - but I care not whom .
He who observes it, ere he passes on,
1704
As tho' she said , “ Beware ! ” Her vest of
gold
Broider'd with flowers, and clasped from head
to foot,
An emerald stone in every golden clasp ;
And on her brow, fairer than alabaster,
A coronet of pearls. But then her face ,
So lovely , yet so arch , so full of mirth ,
The overflowings of an innocent heart
It haunts me still, tho' many a year has fied ,
Like some wild melody !
Alone it hangs
Over a mouldering heirloom , its companion,
An oaken chest, half eaten by the worm ,
But richly carved by Antony of Trent
With Scripture stories from the life of Christ ;
A chest that came from Venice, and had held
The ducal robes of some old ancestor .
That by the way—it may be true or false
But don't forget the picture ; and thou wilt
not
When thou hast heard the tale they told me
there .
She was an only child ; from infancy
The joy , the pride of an indulgent sire.
Her mother dying of the gift she gave
That precious gift - what else remained to
him ?
The young Ginevra was his all in life ,
Still as she grew , for ever in his sight ;
And.in her fifteenth year became a bride,
Marrying an only son, Francesco Doria ,
Her playmate from her birth , and her first
love.
Just as she looks there in her bridal dress,
She was all gentleness, all gaiety ,
Her pranks the favourite theme of every
tongue.
But now the day was come, the day , the hour ;
Now, frowning, smiling, for the hundredth
time,
The nurse, that ancient lady, preach'd de
corum ;
And , in the lustre of her youth , she gave
Her hand , with her heart in it , to Francesco .
Great was the joy , but at the bridal feast ,
When all sat down, the bride was wanting
there .
Nor was she to be found ! Her father cried ,
'Tis but to make a trial of our love ! ”
And filled his glass to all ; but his hand shook ,
And soon from guest to guest the panic
spread .
' Twas but that instant she had left Francesco ,
Laughing, and looking back, and fiying still ,
Her ivory tooth imprinted on his fuger.
But now , alas ! she was not to be found ;
Nor from that hour could anything be guessed ,
But that she was not !
Weary of his life,
Francesco flew to Venice , and forthwith
Flung it away in battle with the Turk .
Orsini lived ; and long might'st thou have
seen
An old man wandering as in quest of some
thing ,
Something he could not find - he knew not
what .
When he was gone, the house remain'd a v hile
Silent and tenantless—then went to strangers.
dreamITT
 - THE CHILD'S
Full fifty years were passed , and all foigot,
When on an idle day — a day of search
'Mid the old lumber in the gallery ,
That mouldering chest was noticed ; and
' twas said
By one as young , as thoughtless as Ginevra,
69
Why not remove it from its lurking -place ?
' Twas done as soon as said ; but on the way
It burst, it fell ; and lo ! a skeleton ,
With here and there a pearl, an emerald stone,
A golden clasp , clasping a shred of gold .
All else had perished1-save a nuptial ring ,
And a small seal, her mother's legacy,
Engraven with a name—the name of both-
Ginevra ."
There then had she found a grave !
Within that chest had she concealed herself,
Fluttering with joy, the happiest of the
happy ;
When a spring-lock that lay in ambush there
Fastened her down for ever !
THE QUEEN AND THE FLOWERS
Since the fourteenth century England has had a Poet
Laureate, priginally chosen from the poets of the day to
celebrate the great events in the history of the country,
but who is no longer under any such obligation. The
following poem , from “ Fortunatus, the Pessimist," is
written by the present Poet Laureate,Mr. Alfred Austin, who
here retells in simple tuneful verse an old and beautiful legend.
There wasaking in olden days
With black heart, scowling forehead.
The mighty trembled at his gaze,
And his sceptre was abhorréd.
Alike to burgher and to boor
His grasp was hard and greedy :
He had no pity for the poor,
Indulgence for the needy.
Beside him sat a gentle queen,
Compassionate and holy ,
Who fed the hungry, clad the mean,
And comforted the lowly.
BOOK OF POETRY
What gaudsare these ? ” he fumed and cried ,
And wherefore were they hidden ? ”
“ I disobeyed you ," she replied,
And trembled to be chidden.
Food was I taking where, ah, me !
A lonely leper cowers ;
But the Lord Jesus , as you see ,
Hath changed them into flowers."
The king dismounted from his horse,
First smelt pink, rose, and myrtle ,
Then knelt, and, smitten with remorse ,
Kissed her white hands and kirtle .
Henceforth he held no sumptuous state
In courtyard, hall, or stable ;
The poor were welcomed at his gate,
The hungry at his table.
When died his queen, and in the toinb
Was laid with pomp and wailing ,
Myrtle at once began to bloom ,
And climb round slab and railing.
And even when the snow lies white,
And frosty stars are shining,
Clove pinks about her grave are bright,
And round it roses twining.
TO THE CUCKOO
William Wordsworth's ode to the cuckoo may be compared
with that of Michael Bruce on page 1561. Perhaps the finest
idea in Wordsworth's poem is the fourth line of the first verse.
BLITHE new-comer ! I have heard ,
O I hear thee and rejoice :
O Cuckoo ! shall I call thee bird ,
Or but a wandering voice ?
While I am lying on the grass
Thy twofold shout I hear ;
From hill to hill it seems to pass,
At once far off and near.

Till with harsh words he her forbade Though babbling only to the vale
To visit , cheer, or aid them. or sunshine and of flowers,
Then meekly , though her heart was sail, Thou bringest unto me a tal
She listened, and obeyed them . Of visionary hours.
It happed , one day, in hovel rude Thrice welcome, darling of the Spring !
A leper lay a -dying ; Even yet thou art to me
And there was none to take him food , No bird , but an invisible thing
And none to soothe his sighing. A voice, a mystery.
Forgetting all , with bread and meat The same whom in my schoolboy days
She filled a little wallet, I listen'd to ; that cry
And , sallying out into the street, Which made me look a thousand ways
Made haste to reach his pallet. In bush , and tree, and sky.
When lo ! the king, with courtiers girt, To seek thee did I often rove
Came riding through the city. Through woods and on the green ;
The queen in terror raised her skirt , And thou wert still a hope, a love ;
To screen her work of pity. Still long'd for, never seen !
Seeing her shrink and bow her head, And I can listen to thee yet ;
His brow began to pucker : Can lie upon the plain
“ Ncw show me what it is,” he said , And listen , till I do beget
“ You hide below your tucker.” That golden time again.
She spoke not , but uncovered it ; O blessed bird ! the earth we pace
And look what it discloses ! Again appears to be
Not wheaten loaf and dainty bit, An unsubstantial fairy place
But myrtles, pinks, and roses. That is fit home for thee !
1705

a monXmCA
-THE CHILD'S
A CRADLE SONG
As we saw on page 1035 , so great a poet as Lord Tennyson
could devote his genius to the writing of a sweet little song
for mothers to sing by baby's cradle . Here is another
from hisbear
always pen in
, pure and simple as baby itself. We should
mind that a true poet does not despise
the little things although he can write of the greal ones .
WHAT does little birdie say
In her nest at peep of day ?
Let me says little birdie,
Mother, let me fly away.
Birdie, rest a little longer,
Till the little wings are stronger.
So she rests a little longer,
Then she flies away.
What does little baby say
In her bed at peep of day ?
Baby says, like little birdie,
Let me rise and fly away .
Baby, sleep a little longer,
Till the little limbs are stronger.
If she sleeps a little longer,
Baby too shall fly away .
THE TERRIBLE BALL
Mary Mapes Dodge was a clever American writer of
children's stories and poems. This is one of her humorous
story -poems, which behind its fun has a lesson for us
in reininding us that a little mischief may grow bigger
than we hall meant, and get beyond our control.
It is taken from her copyright book “ Rhymes and Jingles,'
luy permission of Messrs. Charles Scribner's Sons, New York.
GIVE IVE me your ear , good children all ,
I'm going to set up a terrible ball
A terrible ballthat began to grow
From only the least little speck of snow .
And, to make the lesson pointed and plain ,
I'll just remark that life , in the main,
Is , etcet'ra - you know ; and I hope you'll be
good
In future to show that you've understood
Three lovely, little artless boys,
All of them being mothers' joys.
One day decided , in innocent mirth,
To make a snowball as big as the earth .
What makes the story more touching still ,
The big -eyed schoolhouse on the hill
Was in session, under the cross Miss Stookey,
And these little boys were playing hookey ."
Hookey from Stookey, they worked with a
will,
The ball grew bigger - and bigger still .
Then, like a pumpkin fair and round,
They kept it rolling on the ground
Bigger, bigger, bigger, bigger,
Bigger, bigger, bigger, bigger !
Th : boys could hardly push it along,
It steadily grew so stout and strong.
Now , this mammoth ball, that began as a pill,
Was made, you must know , on top of a hill ;
This hill was so terribly steep and high ,
That even the coasters would pass it by ;
And, saving a road by the cattle made,
It sloped right down , at a fearful grade,
To the meadow , where stood a cottage red
Where these little children were born and bred .
“ Halloo ! " they cried , “ let's have some fun ,
There's Stookey's pig as sure as a gun ! ”
Hooray ! hooray 1 ” cried the children three,
Thus giving vent to their youthful glee.
BOZOTT
1706
NYIROVY
OUNCEDNUTIS
BOOK OF POETRY
When - what do you think ?—this ungrate
ful pill ,
That they'd made so big on top of the hill,
With an air that said , Now , I think I've
got 'em !"
Resolved to roll all the way to the bottom .
The ball was swift , the ball was big ,
Alas for Stookey's innocent pig !
Alas for lovers who walked what way,
They ne'er in their lives forgot the day !
Alas for the learned Professor Gath ,
Who happened to stroll in the snowball's path
And alas, alas, for those children three,
Who shouted and cheered in their pretty flee!
Rolling , growing, demolishing all,
On and on went the terrible ball ;
It leit the cattle down on their knees,
It crushed the fences and bent the trees ;
Even the haystacks went ker - tlop.
It wouldn't turn , and it wouldn't stop,
But still rolled on in steady motion ,
Making a bee-line for the ocean !
With laugh and shout and merry hoot,
Those children followed in glad pursuit.
“ Hooray ! hooray ! ” they cried again ,
And then gave chase with might and main ;
They gave it chase with main and might,
But the terrible ball rolled out of sight.
And now comes the saddest part of all .
(Oh, that cruel , wicked , terrible ball ! )
When at last the three little artless boys,
Tired of running and making a noise,
All resolved to go home to bed,
Where, oh ! where was that cottage red ?
Where, oh ! where ? As the terrible ball
Never a home had those children small.
Gone, clean gone ! with picket and paling
and all their joy was turned to wailing !
MORAL
Hence it is , and so we see
Thus and so , it seems to me,
As I'm sure you'll all agree ,
And ever after , better be .
SLEEP, BEAUTY BRIGHT
William Blake, the strange and mystic poet, as we have seen,
could write simple lays of country life, and here we have him
crooning a pretty little cradle song tender as a mother's, ex .
cept that in the last lines he has a sudden fear for the dangers
of life which the child , as it grows older, will have to face.
SLEEP, sleep, beauty bright,
Dreaming in the joys of night ;
Sleep , sleep ; in thy sleep
Little sorrows sit and weep.
Sweet babe, in thy face
Soit desires I can trace ,
Secret joys and secret smiles,
Little pretty infant wiles.
As thy softest limbs I feel ,
Smiles as of the morning steal
O'er thy cheek, and o'er thy breast
Where thy little heart doth rest.
Oh , the cunning wiles that creep
In thy little heart asleep !
When thy little heart doth wake,
Then the dreadful light shall break.
 com
aarammarammaram.
marcon un

LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE

ALUS

MY
EM was a pre tty girl,
Y
PEMMBut Fanny was a better ;
Pemmy look'd like any churl ,
When little Fanny let her.

Pemmy had a pretty nose,

But Fanny had a better ;
Pemmy oft would come to blows ,
But Fanny would not let her.
3

Pemmy had a pretty doll,

But Fanny had aa better ;
Pemmy chattered like a poll,
When little Fanny let her.

Pemmy had a pretty song,

But Fanny had a better ;
Pemmy would sing all day long,
But Fanny would not let her.

Pemmy loved a pretty lad,

And Fanny loved a better ;
And Pemmy wanted for to
wed,
But Fanny would not let her.

SBP

Ozonen
UTODOCOTIDOT
1707
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY

For every evilunder the sun, TE'ELL tale tit ,

LLYour
There is a remedy, or there is none. tongue shall be slit ;
If there be one, try and find it ; And all the dogs in the town
If there be none , never mind it. Shall have a little bit .

Cross patch,
Draw the latch ,
A SWARM ofbees in May
Is worth a load of hay ;
Sit by the fire and spin ; A swarm of bees in June
Take a cup: Is worth a silver spoon ;
And drink it up, A swarm of bees in July
Then call your neighbours in. Is not worth a fly.

“"CURLY LOCKS "”

Domotio

-
Cur · ly locks! cur - ly locks ! wilt thou be mine ? Thou shalt not wash
TOTO

3
om

254
n

dish - es, nor yet feed the swine ; But sit on a cush - ion, and

sew a fine seam , And feed up - on straw-ber - ries, sug - ar, and cream.
b

THERE was a little Rabbit sprig, BAT, bat, comeunder my hat,

Which , being little, was not big ;
He always walked upon his feet ,
; give you a slice of bacon ;
And I'll
And when I bake,
And never fasted when he eat. I'll give you a cake,
When from a place he ran away, If I am not mistaken.
He never at that place did stay ;
And when he ran , as I am told, Birch
Birch greengreen
andand holly,boys,
holly ,
He ne'er stood still for young or old ; If you get beaten, boys,
Tho' ne'er instructed by a cat, Twill be your own folly.
He knew a mouse was not a rat.
One day, as I am certified , OME when you're called,
COME
He took a whim and fairly died ; Do what you're bid,
And, as I'm told, by men of sense, Shut the door after you ,
He never has been walking since. Never be chid.
THE NEXT VERSES AND RHYMES ARE ON PAGE 1781

1708
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS
GESETERUGUESESPARRIS
SE READING CHILD
THE VERB AND
AND
As lesson
I write this CONTINUED FROM 1624
, I am sit.
ting by the sea, watch
ing lots of boys and girls digging on
the sands and paddling in the water.
If I were to say to you, “ I have just
had a bathe," I should be making a
statement about something that I have
just done. And if I were to ask you,
“ Have you had a bathe ? ” I should
be asking you a simple or direct ques
tion . But supposing I gave you an
order , and said , " Go and have a bathe, "
I should be no longer merely stating BAKEme acake as fast as you can ;
something, but I should be command
ing you to go and do something. So,
you see, there are at least two different
manners or ways of talking about
actions : (1 ) We can either make simple
statements, or ask simple questions
about them , as “The cow JUMPED over
the moon ,” “ The boy STOOD on the
burning deck,” “ Who KILLED Cock
Robin ? (2) We can tell people to go
and do them , as “ Polly, PUT the kettle
on ," " Zachariah , BLOW the fire."
Now, another word for manners or
ways is MOODS, and so we call these
two different MOODS of the verb. The
first is called the IN -DI-CA-TIVE
MOOD, because it indicates or points
out ; and the second is called the IM
PERA-TIVE MOOD, because it is
imperial (like an emperor) and gives
orders. Here are somemore examples I'll give you bread and barleycorns.”
of the Imperative Mood :
“ Little Boy Blue, COME, BLOW, on
your horn . "
IF 1709
TI
ITS MOODS
“ If at first you don't
succeed , TRY,
TRY again ."
' TELL me the old, old story, (im
perative )
For İ FORGET so soon . ” ( indicative)
“ CHARGE, Chester, CHARGE ! On
Stanley, on ,” (imperative)
WERE the last words of Marmion .
(indicative)
6
“ Pat-a -cake, Pat- a- cake, Baker's
man :
(imperative)
STICK it, and PRICK it , and MARK
it with B ( imperative)
And SEND it home for Baby and
me.” ( imperative)
“ BE thou faithful unto death (im
perative,
And I WILL GIVE thee a crown of
life.” ( indicative)
Now, 'do you think you can pick out
for yourselves the examples of these
two MOODS in the following sen
tences ? Try.
“ Suffer little children to come unto
Me, and forbid them not , for of such
is the Kingdom of Heaven ."
Heapon more wood, the wind is
chill.”
Snail, snail , put out your horns,
“Hold the fort, for I am coming."
' Try not the pass, the old man said : )
Dark lowers the tempest overhead.”
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
There are 6 imperatives and 6 indica-
tives in those sentences. Have you
found them all ?
Here are some lines that may help
you to remember these two moods :
If you order a person to bring you
some chalk ,
Or tell him to eat up his food ;
Or bid him be seated or go for a walk,
You use the Imperative mood.
WRITING
A NEW WAY OF WRITING FIGURES
"MO ER, we wrote words with four-
TH “ It doesn't join on, Tom . See ! "
teen capital letters last time,"
said Nora, when she and Tom next came
to their mother for a writing lesson .
“ Then there are twelve more," ob-
served Tom . " And we stopped at N ,
so cowe begin with 0.”
That's right , Tom ," said his mother.
“ Here are the words to be written now : ”
But when you are telling him what
you have done,
Or asking him what are his views,
Or stating the fact that twice two are
not one ,
The Indicative mood you will use.
If you learn these little verses you
will find that you will have no difficulty
in discovering the moods of any verbs
you come across from time to time.
2 వారిలో
VERBS
said his mother , as she wrote “ Take. "
Meanwhile Nora
had been thinking
about capital S,
and noticing how
the pen ran round
Take
the lower part of it after making
the loop on the up-stroke of the letter.

OnOx Poke Lucun Robe

Sink Twist Uncle
“ Q , R, and U join on nicely ,” said
Nora, as she looked at these words.
" T can't manage to join any better
than the first G, and, mother, don't
you think something might be done to
help O ? The other letters were so kind
to it before .”
" Suppose we try, Nora," was the
76
>
reply. But mind that pen.
knock it about so, the ink will drop
on the tablecloth. It is
lay pens down when they are not
being usd."
Tom wanted to see what he could do
for O , and this is what Nora and he
managed by making the knot continue
into the first part of the letter x :
xc Ox
Their mother pointed out that O
joins more easily on
to a looped letter like
1, in this word “ old " :
Tom liked what he
Old
called T-square T, and asked to have
a word beginning with that letter .
XUOmonmone
“ There is another way of making
capital S ,” said her mother. “ It is
very like printed S, and begins and
ends with aa dot . Tom will fetch a news
paper from the bookshelf,
and we shall be able to
see how curly both are."
" What a pretty letter !"
S
If you exclaimed Nora , who liked the curves
and the way the upper and lower parts
safer to were balanced. Tom hunted among the
printed S's in the newspaper, and
showed Nora how much they were like
the printed S they were writing.
" It joins on badly, like the other one,"
said Nora.
“ Now
there are V ,
W, X , Y, Sink
Ox and Z to write as capital letters,” the
children's mother said , as she gave them
the words to copy which we shall find
on the top of the next page.
“ V and W are the only capital letters
there that do not join ,” Nora remarked .
" It is possible to join them , but
awkward,” said her mother. “ There
are some words, like ' What, ' in which
1710
 Very Watk_md
h joins fairly well,
but when a vowei
follows it , it is
clearer to leave the
letters unjoined. We
must
Yeast bero
always remember, that directly
letters are at all difficult to recognise , the
writing is bad. So it is far better not
to try to join on certain capital letters
until you have thoroughly mastered the
use of your pens. X , Y, and 2 join
3 the numerals from I to IX . Forty is
on to any letter with ease.
“ You have not yet learned to write the
Roman numerals, so we will write them
now. They are easy because they seem
to be formed from capital letters.
“ Some of these are the same as letters,
though it is unlikely they really come to
five, five or V,
one after five, two
after five, three after
five, one before ten,
ten or X, one after
ten, two after ten, and so on till twenty
or two X's .
“ The numbers between twenty and
thirty, or XX and XXX (two tens
and three tens ), are made by adding
XL, or ten before fifty, as L standsfor
fifty. Sixty is ten after fifty, or LX.
Seventy is twenty after fifty , or LXX .
Eighty is thirty after fifty, or LXXX .
Ninety is ten before a hundred, or XC,
for one hundred is C (short for Latin
centum, meaning a hundred ). So, you

I II III IV Υ
V VI VII VIII IX X
XI XI XII XIV XV XVI XVII
XVIII XIX XX XXX XL L LX
us let. see , I or X be
fore another
tefrom,for LXX LXXX XCC
. V
instance is
probably X halved. But it is easy to
number means
take one or ten from it ; after it, add
think of the Roman numerals as letters one or ten to it . The Roman numerals
one or I , two ones or two I's, take it for granted, that everygirl and 1)
three ones or three I's, one before boy can do subtraction and addition . ”
ARITHMETIC
HOW TO DIVIDE BIG NUMBERS
N our last lesson we learned how to placing it before the 2, we get 52
divide the number 596 by 4. It is (hundred -thousands). Then say :
quite as simple to divide any other 9 into 52, 5 and 7 over .
number, even though it be a large 9 into 77, 8 and 5 over.
number, containing millions or hundreds 9 into 59, 6 and 5 over.
of millions, by any number from 2 to 9 into 55 , 6 and i over .
2. The multiplication table is all 9 into it , I and 2 over.
that is required, we shall find . 9 into 27, 3 .
Divide 5279517 by 9. Divide 43848 by 12.
Here there are 5 Here, again , there are
9 ) 5279517 millions, but since that 12 ) 43848 not enough ten -thousands
is less than the divisor, to give any ten -thousands
586613 9, it is clear, of course , 3654 in the answer, so we have
that we shall not have millions in our
6
to carry the 4, and get 43 (thousands)
answer . But we carry ” the 5, and before we can begin the division.
1711
 GOOD CONDS
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS.CARMERS
Say, 12 into 43, 3 and 7 over. things. The division gives us 15313
12 into 78, 6 and 6 over. of these large groups, so that 229695
12 into 64, 5 and 4 over. divided by 15 gives 15313.,
12 into 48, 4. In this way we are able to divide
We have, of course, noticed by this by any number which comes in our
time that the figure which we carry ,
66 1)
multiplication table. Thus, to divide
the figure which is over,” can never by 108, we divide by 9, and then divide
be as big as our divisor. For, in learn- the result by 12 ; because 9 times 12
ing what division was, we counted, make 108, so that the first division
let us suppose, the tens into each forms groups of 9, and the second
group until there were not enough tens division forms groups which each con
left to make another for each group . tain 12 groups of 9, or 108.
That is, the number over was In the above example, the two
always less than the divisor. numbers 3 and 5 , which when mul
When our divisor is greater than tiplied together make 15, are called
12, the idea used in the division is the factors of 15 . Similarly 12 and 9 are
same as before, though the process is factors of 108 . The process just
longer. For this reason , the method explained is, therefore, called division
we have been learning is called short by factors.
division ; while the method for numbers It should be noticed that many
greater than 12 is called long division. numbers have more than one set of
Still, there are many numbers greater factors . Thus, 4 times 9 make 36 ,
than 12 for which we can use short and 6 times 6 also make 36 . To
division. Suppose, for example, we divide a number by 36 we may use
have a number of things which we wish whichever set of factors we like .
to arrange in groups which each con- In our next lesson we shall learn
tain 15 things. We know that there long division, which has to be used
are 5 threes in 15. So, if we first in all cases where the divisor cannot be
arrange the things in groups of three, separated into factors.
and then form larger groups by taking EXAMPLES :
five of the groups of three, it is clear 1. Divide 184429 by 7.
that each of the larger groups will 2. Divide 2043646 by 11 .
contain five threes — that is, 15. 3. Divide 816408 by 8.
Divide 229695 by 15. 4. Fifty -nine thousand and forty
3 ) 229695 As explained above, apples are to be packed in baskets. If
we first divide 229695 each basket holds 72 apples, how many
5 ) 76565 by 3. This shows us will be required ?
15313 that 229695 things can 5. How many times can 132 be taken
be arranged in 76565 groups of three. away from 2997324 ?
We next divide 76565 by 5 — that is, we 6. A piece of ground contains 12096
form groups which each contain 5 of strawberry -plants, in 96 rows. How
the groups of three, or 15 of the given many plants are there in each row ??
LAJMUSIC
S CO Waga
THE RESTING GAME OF THE FAIRIES
'HE fairies have something new to
THE itself. We shall have five keys follow
tell us ; they say the white notes ing one another in order, like this :
and the black notes may also be called 1 2 3 4 5
keys ; and when we talk of the entire
number of black and white keys
together,, we are
are to call them the
keyboard.
To -day we are to put our right hand and we must remember that the
on the keys. The fingers are just to fairies want the back of our hand to
rest on the key surface, but we are not be quite level.
to press the notes down. Our fingers It is very easy to let the little-finger
must be curved , and just separated, so side of our hand slope downwards ;
that each one may have a key to but our fairy friends do not like this
CORO
1712
 MUSIC
at all ; so we must watch very care. fingers just touching their notes, the
fully. The first finger (we very often hand being quite loose, and then,
call it the thumb ) must be quite free ; without depressing the key, balance
we must not squeeze it against the the arm at the wrist, up and down ,
hand, and the fingers 2–3–4–5 must about an inch each way . " This will
rest in the middle of theirnotes. When show us if we are resting properly now
we are quite sure that the right hand our fingers are on the keys. You see,
is properly placed, we must let the we have four games to play every day,
left hand take its turn, and play exactly and we must never forget one of them.
the same game. The fingers must 1. The sleepy arm .
rest on the surface of five white keys : 2. Bending our fingers towards the
palm of our hand, and then letting them
spring back.
3. The fairies' see-saw.
5 4 3 2 1 4. The resting game and the see
saw together .
but, just as before, they are not to A man came into the world to show
press the notes down. Each finger us how beautifully the piano fairies
must be separated from the other,so could sing. His name was Chopin. He
that each one may have a key to itself ; played the piano exquisitely, and he
the back of the hand must be quite tried to teach other people to do so, too.

The keyboard of the piano

level, the first finger quite free, while Nothing made him more unhappy than
fingers 2-3-4-5 must occupy the to hear anyone hit the piano, or play at
middle of their notes . all roughly. He would say, Is
The fairies call this “ the resting that a dog barking ? " He was quite
game,” and they like each hand to sure that the piano fairies could not
play it in turn. Of course, while we make an unmusical sound unless they
are only thus resting on the surface of were approached wrongly , and treated
the keyboard, we cannot make the badly: A pupil once told him that she
fairies sing ; but it means that we are had learned more from listening to
getting ready to make the lovely tone singing than anything else. What do
we so want to hear. you think was his reply ?
You and I want to make the piano " That is right, all music ought to
sing, and that is why we are taking such be song ."
trouble with our arms, our hands, and Frederick William Faber, who wrote
our fingers. We must think of our someof our finest hymns, left us a beauti
fingers, our hand, our forearm (that is ful idea when he sang about music :
the part of our arm near the hand ) , There are sounds like flakes of snow falling,
and our upper arm as four tools ready In their silent and eddying rings ;
to do the different kinds of work we We tremble, they touch so lightly,
shall find necessary to make the fairies Like feathers from angels' wings.
tell all their secrets. To -day we are We must always remember that we
learning how to rest, so that fingers move the notes or keys for one purpose
and hands may be quite in their proper only—to obtain music. If we want the
position, and quite loose — that is, free fairy songs in all their beauty, we must
from any stiffness. The fairies give call forth the lovely tone-pictures they
us one very safe, sure rule : Whenever paint for us, by thinking, listening, and
we feel stif, we are wrong, and it is a feeling. We must think whatthe fairies
rule which we must always remember. want us to hear. We must listen for
When we are quite sure our hands the beginning of every sound , to know
are resting in their proper position on we have found the right one. We must
the keys, we will again play the " fairies' feel how much we have to do to set
see -saw game.” We must keep our the keys moving,
1713
 DRAWING AR

MAKING CIRCLES AND FILLING THEM IN

EVVERY
Ehearsboysooner
and girl who learns drawing after practising these till we are satis
or later the story of fied, we will go to the drawing -board
Giotto's famous 0. In Italy the saying again and try these curves with charcoal
Round as Giotto's O ” has become a on white paper, drawing from the elbow
proverb. Giotto was a famous Italian that is, resting the elbow on the table
artist, and when the Pope wanted a and keeping it there while we draw
certain piece of work done, and sent a and then from the wrist, resting the
message to ask Giotto for some of his arm on the table just between the
work that he might judge if he were wrist and elbow . The smallest circle
clever enough to do it for him, Giotto is made by resting the hand firmly on

1. How to divide a circle for five- 2. Outline of five -petalled flower 3. The finished five -petalled
petalled flower in a circle flower

took a piece of white paper, and with the table, drawing from the wrist, and
some red paint drew a circle so perfect making the curves just as large as
that everyone marvelled , and the Pope the fingers will let us.
needed no further proof of his skill. When we have made good circles,
Circles are very, very difficult to which we can only do with plenty of
draw, worse thanstraight lines, yet it practice, we will put in one of them the
is more natural for us to heraldic rose which came
draw a curve than a in our last lesson. It is
straight line. difficult to put a five
Our baby brothers and petalled flower into a circle
sisters always make scrib with freehand drawing, as
bles in the shape of circles all the petals must be
if we give them paper the same size. The best
and pencil, and if we way is shown in picture
stand at the blackboard I on this page .
we shall find it easier to The two diameters ,
draw big sweeping curves that is, the lines dividing
than to draw lines , the circles into quarters
4. Heraldic, or Tudor, rose
To - day we will practise are drawn as guides very
circles with white chalk on the black- faintly first; then the lines A and B
board or on sheets of brown paper just below the horizontal diameter.
pinned on the wall. Now it is easy to draw in the petals
The first curve is the biggest one, as we see them in picture 2. The
drawn from the shoulder, standing at division between two petals always
arm's length away from the board. comes under the centre of one of
The first half or two -thirds is easy ; the other petals, either the top or the
we draw outwards, not towards the bottom one.
chest at first ; then we reverse and There is a way by which we can
come back over the old line till the divide circles exactly into parts, but
two ends join. The next curve is this is done with compasses, and to
drawn from the elbow in the same way, know how to do it we must learn
but the circle is smaller, of course ; and geometrical drawing.
EOL
1714
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES IN FRENCH
First line : French . Second line : English words. Third line: As we say it in English .
Pauvre Jeannette elle est malade. C'est tout à fait ma faute. J'en suis bien faché.
Poor Jenny she is
il l. This is entirely my fault. I of it am well sorry.
Poor Jenny is ill. It is all my fault . I am very sorry.
Hier maman nous a conduits au Louvre pour voir les tableaux.
Yesterday mamma us has conducted to the Louvre for to see the pictures.
Yesterday mamma took us to the Louvre to see the pictures.
Les galeries sont très longues et glissantes. C'est bien la place pour glisser.
The galleries are very long and slippery. This is very the place for to slide.
The galleries are very long and slippery. It is just the place for sliding.

HINI

Jeannette et moi, nous avons glissé d'un bout à l'autre de la salle.

Jenny and I, we have slid from one end to the other of the room .
Jenny and I slid from one end of the room to the other.
Maman a crié : " Prenez garde ! ” Il était trop tard. Jeannette était tombée.
)
Mamma has cried : “ Take care ! ” It was too late . Jenny was fallen .
Mamma cried : “ Take care ! >”) It was too late. Jenny had fallen .
Elle n' a pas pu relever. Elle a crié : " Ma jambe! Ma jambe ! "
se
)
She (not) has not been able herself to raise. She has cried : “ My leg ! My leg ! ”
(
She could not get up. She cried : “ My leg ! My leg ! '
Un monsieur a dit à maman : “ La petite fille s'est - elle fait mal ? '
A gentleman has said to mamma: “The little girl herself is she made ill ? "
A gentleman said to mamma : “ Has the little girl hurt herself ? ”
RAININ

used
is

Je crains que la jambe ne soit cassée." Le monsieur a examiné la jambe.

“ I fear that the leg not be broken ." The gentleman has examined the leg.
(0
“ I am afraid that her leg is broken.” The gentleman examined the leg .
" Elle s'est foulé le pied. Elle ne doit pas marcher pendant quelque temps. 2

' She herself is sprained the foot. She (not) must not to walk during some time.”'
66
She has sprained her foot. She must not walk for some time."
Nous l'avons mise dans une voiture, et nous sommes retournés à la maison.
We her have put into a carriage, and we are returned to the house.
We put her into a carriage and returned home .
THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS BEGIN ON PAGE 1805
TADOUNLOD KOULUTT drbano
1715
 WHAT IS WRONG IN THESE PICTURES ?
கைகணைகணககானக

402 [ 16 GOLP
802 716 SILVER

IX IX
N
X
N
M DUMLU
SE
IW
SUN
VI
DIAL

POLE 8
STAR

OP
EN
N
O
ORT

Es

1892

10 11

.ch /

TelDomine, dir
To
TOOTLOTEL

igesnos
num

13 14 15
pum

SMUOMOUC

These pictures, like those on page 1180 , will help you to cultivate your power of observation - the power of seeing
with your mind and of understanding what you see. Something is wrong with each picture ; if you study
them you will see what it is. Theஊனையா
mistakes are pointed out in that part of our book
mu
beginning on page 1813.
1716
 THINGS TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO
MAKING A SET OF
THE DRAWING - ROOM AND BEDROOM
Tº suite
makeof acharming
doll's furni
CONTINUED FROM 1616
ture of any size to suit
the room it is for, one
only needs a coil or two of silk - covered
round hat-wire, which costs a penny the
coil of three yards, a scrap of coloured
satin or plush for the cushions, and a needle
and thread. A small pair of pliers is useful ,
especially the sort one can sometimes buy
at a penny a pair. They are not strong
enough for realtools, but they do very well
for this work, as they are without the file-
like roughness on the inner surface which
proper pliers have, and therefore would not
be so likely to rough up the silk covering
of the wire. But fingers can generally do
all the bending required.
The drawing-room set which we
going to make consists of two easy -chairs
(lady's and gentleman's ) , a settee, a gipsy
table, and six
small chairs in
black wire.
We will be
gin by making
a small chair.
Take one end
of the wire
and , having
measured
seven - eighths
of an inch,
bend it sharply The drawing -room set of furniture for the doll's house
back on itself
and secure it firmly at the end with double
cotton. Bend again at right angles and you
have one back leg of the chair and the back
of the seat, as in picture 1. Measure three-
quarters of an inch and bend downward for
the second back leg, which make double
like the first, and sew tightly at the top.
Now turn the corner, and give seven-
eighths of an inch to the side of the chair,
then bend down sharply for a front leg, which
should be a little shorter than the back
ones, as the back ones, when finished,
are curved slightly outward. The front
of the seat is wider than the back ; and
as this, too, should be curved, an inch
will not be too much for it.
B
DOLL'S FURNITURE
When we have done the
second front leg, and
TI
turned the cornerfor the
second side, we shall find
that we have come round to the starting
point. We must secure the wire at this
corner very tightly.
Now we bend the wire upwards for the
back of the chair. The back has a loop
in it, which will need to be very carefully
done, and secured at the crossing (see
picture 2). When the back is firmly
finished, we complete the framework of the
chair by passing one row of wire entirely
round the seat, and, leaving quarter of an
inch to spare before cutting off the wire, we
turn it round underneath the top of the
nearest leg, and sew it down neatly out of
are sight. It is here that pliers are useful. By
bending sharply backwards and forwards
a few times, you can break the wire with
them, and
leave only the
covering to be
cut with the
scissors, which
wire always
spoils. With
the pliers one
can nip the end
of the wire
neatly under,
instead of
hurting one's
fingers. The
chair-seat is simply a piece of cardboard
cut to the shape of the frame, covered with
plush or satin, and neatly tacked round on
to the wire, the stitches being kept on the
under side.
We should start to make an armchair
from a front leg, instead of a back one, so
that when the four legs and seat-frame are
complete we can start an arm shaped like
picture 3. It is firmly fixed to the top of
the back leg , at the part marked x, and
then the wire is carried upwards as before,
to make the back .
The back of the larger armchair has a
double curve in it like a figure of 8, as in
picture 4, and the bottom of the lower loop
1717
 BRANDNARTHINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO
ccommor
is sewn to the middle of the back bar of the
BOUIDOR
seat. When the back is done, make the second and make a double leg 2/2 inches long. Carry
arm to correspond exactly with the first, end-
ing it opposite to where the other began ; and
the second row of wire round the seat finishes
the armchair. The legs should measure the
same as the small chair, but the seat is
14 inches from back to front, 14 inches
across the back, and 138 inches across the
front. The arm is five-eighths of an inch high
where it joins the back , and the back itself is
148 inches high from the seat.
The settee is made on the same plan as the
r. o m8loroon 2 Х
Diagrams for making the drawing -room set of furniture for the doll's house
armchair, beginning at a front leg, but the
arm at each end is more ornamental, having
a turn in it, like picture 5. The back has
a circle in the middle, and is curved like
picture 6.
The seat of the settee is 24 inches long in
front, and rather less behind ; from back to
front about i inch. The circle is sewn to the
middle of the seat.
The lady's easy -chair has no arms. It is
much like a small chair, but has shorter
legs, and a larger and broader seat. The
back has one large loop, which reaches
the back of the seat and is sewn down to it.
00 12
ખે olt 15
18
Diagrams for making the bedroom set of furniture for the doll's house
Now for the gipsy table. Start as before,
the wire straight along for 14 inches ; make
a second leg, leave a second straight piece, 12
inches, then a third leg, and a third straight
piece, then join this to the top of the first leg.
We now have a triangle with three long legs.
Bend the straight piecesuntil the triangle be
comes a circle . Take the end of each leg
with the pliers and twist it hard, until it has
an ornamental twist for its whole length.
Then bend all the legs towards one another
under the table, crossing them in the middle,
gipsy fashion, and fasten them very strongly
together with needle and thread. The top of
the table is a round of cardboard, cut to fit,
and covered with black satin.
For our bedroom suite we shall require
white silk wire of two sizes and a skein of
white flourishing thread or a ball of any of the
silk substitutes .
The small chairs, made of the wire at three
yards a penny, are very simple - a plain
square back with two bars across it, like the
little sketch (7 ) on this page. The bars
are of twisted silk or thread , of which we
want a coarse kind . We have it double, and
0
9
13
10
11
18
17
1718
19
 LAVORO
-MAKING A SET OF DOLL'S FURNITURE
push the needle in underneath the back of fasten it to the ends and sides of the frame
the seat and up the back, where it will least
show, to the spot where we wish the first bar
to be. Then we carry the thread across to
the other side and back again. Next we pass
the thread round the bar thus formed, just
three or four times to form a twist, draw
it tight, and, sticking the needle in at the
opposite end of the bar again, we bring it
out about a quarter or three -eighths of an
inch higher up, where we want the second bar
to be. This wemake inthe same way. Ifit
is nicely done, it should be quite a little
ornamental twisted bar, like picture 8.
When this is done, pass theneedle down so
as to get the fastening off behind a back leg,
or somewhere where it will not be seen. The
chair-seat may be either white or coloured , in
silk , satin , or sateen of any sort you think
pretty, stretched over a piece of card, as in
the chairs already described .
The bedstead is made of thicker wire, at a
penny a yard. It will take nearly a yard and
a half. We start as for a chair, at the back
leg: The legs are three -quarters of an inch
high, the ends 294 inches long, and thesides
32 inches long.
When the legs and
sides are done, we
find ourselves
back at our start
ing -point, and,
having secured the
wire very firmly,
we beginthe head
of the bed, by
turning the wire
upwards and form
ing two curves
with a loop in the
middle, as in pic
ture 9. The top
of the loop, A,
where the wire
சாணாணாணாணாணாணாணாண
crosses, must have
one
some firm stitches The bedroom set of furniture for the doll's house
TTTT
with double cotton, and the bottom , B, must
be strongly fastened to the exact centre of
the framework between the back legs. This
loop should be about 1/2 inches high .
This done, carry a line of wire up the
end of the curve and about 14 inches
above it ; double back for half an inch, and
bend the doubled part at right angles as in
picture 10. This is the “ Italian " shaped top
on which to hang lace curtains. Then carry
a bar across, an inch above the top of the
back to the other side, make another half-inch
projection to correspond, and take the wire
downwards, along the other end of the
bed-head , as shown in picture 11 .
Carry a second line of wire along the side
of the bed and form the foot, like the head, but
half an inch shorter, and without the top ;
bring the wire up the other side of the bed,
and finish off underthe corner by a back leg.
The bars which fill head and foot are made
just like the chair-bars, three in each loop, at
equal distances, as in picture 12.
Lastly, cut an oblong piece of cardexactly
to fit the framework of the bed, cover it neatly
in white sateen , or some other material, and
மனபயமா
1719
2XL
work . We must take pains to make the
bedstead stand quite firmly , and must pull
and bend and coax it until it does this.
The baby's cot is shaped like picture 14 ,
with ad bag or net sewn all round it, like
picture 13. Make a stand for it like picture 15.
Starting at point a, with single wire, come
downwards to the foot. Having formed this,
we go upwards, twisting the two wires, to A
again, past A right up to x, turn back and
come down to a, yet again twisting the wire.
At A turn off and bend the loop B to c. Then
form the knob, D, and , coming downwards,
make the second foot the same size as the
first, tostand exactly opposite to it. Then go
up again, twisting the double wire to D, and
finish off there.
The loops at the ends of the cot are sewn to
the two standards at E and F, or just to clear
the loop B to c. The taller standard, which
should have an entire height of about 34
inches, must be bent at right angles about
three- quarters of an inch from the top, to form
a support for the curtains of lace edging
which shade the cot. A rocking-chairmakes
a charming little
addition to the
furnishing of our
bedroom . It is
made in the
thinner wire. Start
with the back legs,
which are aboutas
long as ordinary
chair-legs, and the
back of the seat a
fullinch wide. The
arm and rocker
come next. Hav
ing sewn well the
top of the second
back leg, turn
from it a big curve,
doubling the wire
and returning as
shown in picture 16, securing the wire at a,
and sewing the leg to the rocker at B. Then,
having formed the arm , turn sharply down to
meet the top of the back leg again at c, and
double back to , where it must be sewn
again. From D form the upper part of the
back, as in picture 17, stitching firmly at A.
When we reach B, and secure our wire, we
shall have to make the second arm and
rocker by turning back to c, being very careful
that these correspond exactly in size and
shape with the first.
We shall now find ourselves back again at
point B, in picture 17, from which we start
to make the lower part of the back , shown in
picture 18. Sew at A , B, C, and D, then all we
have to do is to carry the wire round to form
the seat on the inner side of the rockers, and
finish off just over the point where we began.
We must be careful to shape the cushions
to fit the seat-frame, tackingit round to show
the frame in front, then bend the front of the
seat slightly over, as in picture 19.
In the next part we learn how to make the
furniture for two more rooms — the dining
room and the kitchen.
manTurun
 LA
FORSE

FLOWER- POTS MADE FROM OLD TIN CANS

OLDtin cans after
dust-heap are usually thrown
they have into the
served the might
thing, as
uponwellwhich theywere
understand placed. why
the reason We
purpose for which they were originally in- holes are necessary in flower -pots. If there
tended. But there are many uses to which were no holes the water would not be able
they may be put, and we shall see in this to run away, and if the same water lies in the
article how they may tin it makes the earth
be utilised instead of in the pot sour, so that
being thrown out as the flowers languish
valueless. and die. Having
One of the most con made the holes, we
venient uses to which think now about the
they may be put is appearance of our
to serve as Aower flower- pots.
pots, either singly or We purchase some
arranged suitably . In asphalt - say , about
this article are several seven pounds — and
illustrations showing melt it over a fire,
old tin cans adapted using any old pot for
for flowers, and with a the purpose. We must
little explanation the see that the pot has
adaptation and orna no holes in it, or the
mentation are easy to asphalt may run out
understand. into the fire, and that
The tin cans most would make trouble .
suitable are round fruit It is well that the
tins of a capacity from asphalt should be as
two pounds upwards. thin as possible, there
They should also be fore we had better
deeper than they are have it boiling. When
wide, but although it has reached the
cans of this size and boiling stage we re
shape are the best for move it from the fire
the purpose, cans of and dip the tin cans
other shapes, such as in one by one. We
square and oblong, can may manage it all
be used if the others be right with just a stick
not available. for taking them out
For flower-pots the again , but we can tie a
tins should have the 1. Tin can Aower-pot, with pine- cone decoration string to one, thread
bottoms pierced , because a flower-pot made ing the string through one of the holes that
from a tin can must have means of drainage we have made in the bottom and taking care
just as well as an ordinary earthenware that the other end of the string is not allowed
Aower-pot. The usual hole in a flower-pot is to get right into the hot asphalt. We also 1
round and in the centre of the bottom . We want a box containing clean dry sand, and
may make the holes of our tin can flower-pots as we take the tins from the asphalt pot we
like this, but to make a number of small put them at once into the sand, rolling them
holes is much easier than to make one large over well and putting the sand inside also,
hole. By taking a sharp nail - say, a three or making certain
four inch wire nail - and a hammer, we can that every part
easily make a few holes in the bottoms of our of the surface
old tins. both inside and
We must outside has re
turn the ceived a proper
tins upside coating of sand .
down in The purpose of
m a king the asphalt is
these holes, not for orna
so that the ment only, or
ragged that it may
edges we cause the sand
make will to adhere to
be inside the tin. It gives
the tins , the tin cansa
and not out- coating through
side, where which water
they would cannot pene
be apt to trate , so that
or cans treated as
2. Cylindrical Aower -pot made with tear
tin cans
mark any- we have here 3. A simple tin can Aower-pot
கலைமாமவாகைமலைமைனா
1720
 -FLOWER -POTS MADE FROM OLD TIN CANS
described are not liable to rust, as virgin cork is simply placed around
they would be if used without the the can ,and a few thin wires tied around
asphalt coating. the whole body to keep it in place.
Other things may be used instead of Picture 2 shows a hanging flower
sand ; for instance, dry packing moss pot of a different shape. Here two
as used by florists or dead round tin cans have been
leaves may give a very " slid into each other after
good effect. If we wish having had a space cut
to use this, we put it out of the side of each .
on exactly as we have The bottoms of the two
described in the case of tins form the ends of the
the sand. When the cylindrical pot.
asphalt has become hard , For out-of-door flower
which it does very pots, for ferneries and
speedily, we find that we rockeries, and for flower
have a very presentable stands the tin can flower
Aower-pot, and one that pot can easilybe pressed
we can use exactly as we into service by anyone
would use an ordinary who has a little ingenuity,
brown earthenware and who has learned how
flower -pot. to prepare the simple
Nowlet us look at the flower - pots
-
we have
pictures. In picture 3 we described.
have a flower -pot made Before putting in the
exactly as we have earth, we should put
described , and picture i broken crockery in the
shows a hanging flower bottom of the tins, about
pot made in the same two inches deep. Then
way. In the latter case the earth is put on the top.
there are two festoons of If the pots are used in
pine - cones around the
-
a room , we should take
body, and these give it a
> them to the scullery or
very appropriate
tion.
decora
Picture 4 is
bath -room when we wish
a 4. Tin can flower-pot covered with virgin cork to water the flowers, and
similar hanging pot sur after watering them it is
rounded by virgin cork, which can be pur- well to allow them to drip for half an
chased cheaply from most seedsmen. The hour before replacing them in the room .
THE VANISHING PILLAR TRICK
Very simple materials are required for the it,and dropit into a convenientpocket.
performance of this very effective trick. You now announce that although the block
The pillar is a block of solid boxwood, a little is made of boxwood, which is one of the
over 2 inches in height and shaped as a in hardest woods known, you can , by the aid of
picture 1. With it is used, unknown to a little magic, compress it so as to
the company, a little cap, B, of the same reduce it to half its size, or even less.
material, and of such a size as to fit B Suiting the action to the word, you
closely, but not tightly, on the rounded bring the hands together, and make
top of A. Whether B is on or off, the A a pretence of squeezing vigorously.
appearance of the block is the same. Under cover of so doing, you insert
When you desire to show the trick , the tip of the little finger of the right
you secretly tuck B between the roots hand into the cap, which thenceforth
of the first and second fingers of the remains on it, thimble fashion . Still
right hand, convex side inwards. keeping up the squeezing movement,
Exhibiting A, you invite the company you say : “ It is getting smaller,
to assure themselves that it is just smaller, smaller. I have made it so
what it appears to be, a plain solid small that it has disappeared ." .
block of wood. When it is given back Opening the hands, you show that
to you, you take it in the right hand, 1. Pillar
cap
and they are empty: The boxwood cap is,
and in so doing slip the little cap over by artificial light, so nearly the colour
its upper end , and show both of the hand as to be practically
together , as being merely the invisible, and if the hand be kept
block which has just been ex in gentle motion the keenest eye
amined. You then take them in will not detect its presence.
the left hand , small end upper If the cap be found too loose
most, curling the thumb and fore a fit for the little finger, one of
finger round B, as seen in picture the other fingers may be used
2 , but leaving it still visible, so 2. Holding the cap instead. The first attempts of
that, to the eye of the spectator, the novice at practising the
the block as just seen is still in the hand. trick will quickly show him what suits him
Asa matter of fact, however, in withdrawing best in this particular. The block and cap
the right hand you carry off the block with can be purchased for a small sum.
OD
1721
 HOW TO PREPARE A JAR OF POT- POURRI
POT-POURRI – pronounced Po-pooree – iş
-
French for a medley or mixture,
T and
by pot-pourri we generally meanOIaM niixture
IT and
of herbs, flowers, and spices, all dried
made to give off a delightful perfume. US
People make it from plants in their gardens,
and keep it in old china pots or vases ; Kthe
UL
longer it keeps the better it
smells. When they want to
make the room smell sweet
they take off the lid , and
all the perfume comes out,
giving a faint odour of fresh
ness and country air.
We are going to see how
to make a jar of this delicious
pot-pourri. You will not be A book -muslin sachet
able to do it all at once.
Some of the ingredients will be ready to put
in the jar beforeyou are able to get the others,
The first thingto do is to gather, just before
they fall, about three dozen full-blown roses.
Pick all the petals off, and
spread them, separated, on
sheets of newspaper laid on
the grass. Let them dry in
the sun till they are quite
crisp and brown. Turn
them day by day, and do
not forget to take them
indoors at night. Shake
them about well and let
them remain exposed to
the sun till no moisture
pressing them between the thumb and fore
finger. Choose the best and dry those.
Beside the ordinary kind, there is the lemon
scented geranium. This is an important
addition , and if you can get anyone to
let you pluck a dozen or two leaves, you
will have secured a prize.
UD Any sweet-smelling herb
or plant can now be added
to the pot-pourri in small
quantities, provided that it
is carefully dried . This
drying is really the great
secret, for if ever such a
little moisture is left, mildew
will come and the pot-pourri
will not keep - nor will it
smell nice.
We must visit the chemist next and spend
a few pence. Get a couple of ounces of orris
root and twopennyworth of Tonquin beans,
Put them in apiece of muslin folded over two
or three times, and well
crush the beans and orris
root with a hammer. Mix
these well together with all
the other dried things, and,
last of all, put in three tea
spoonfuls of allspice , which
you can get from the kitchen.
'The last costs about a penny , 1
and the orris root twopence
or threepence.
Shakeeverythingtogether 1

remains — they may take a and crush it up as much as

week to dry thoroughly. possible with your hands. 1
Now for some of the Let it remain in the jar, and
other ingredients, which A silk bag of pot-pourri occasionally give it a gentle
you must get by taking stir. It is quite possible to
advantage of summer excursions and visits add to the pot-pourri from time to time. Any
to friends' gardens. delicate flower which retains its smell after
You willneed a good bunch of lavender, drying can be put in the jar. Violets, unfor
which must also be well dried . A good way tunately, lose all their scent, but there are
to do this is to tie it up in a many flowers which do not.
bundle, poke the heads in a You must experiment with a
paper bag, and hang it up by few to find out which to use.
the stalks on a wall in the sun . Besides the jar, there are
Then if any of the flowers drop other ways of preserving and
-as they will — they will be safe making use of pot-pourri. Put
in the bag. When the lavender into little muslin or silk sachets
is quite dry, strip the flowers and laid between linen it is
and some of the little leaves delightful. Each hat-box and
from the stalks, and put them chest of drawers might well
with the already dried rose contain a bagful. The bag
petals. You must have aa large itself is a small thing made
sprig of thyme, about twenty out of any odd scrap of brocade
large sage leaves, and some or silk , finished with a bow
rosemary. Each of or the initials of the owner.
these should be care The muslin sachet shown
fully dried and the in the picture on this page
leaves separated from is made of a seven - inch
the stalks. Rosemary A pot -pourri pot made of an old ginger-jar square ofbook -muslin , em
has such a delicate broidered with a spray of
perfume that a good handful of leaves will forget-me-nots, folded over corner to corner,
not be too much . anda fringe one inch wide,made by fraying the
Then you must find about fifty geranium edges. The silk bag is made from an odd scrap
leaves - good big ones - cut off without any of silk measuring about six inches by eight
stalks and divided into small pieces. Some inches, tied witha ribbon loop for hanging.
kinds are more strongly scented than others. A bag or sachet of pot-pourri is sometimes
You must smell them to find out, gently very welcome as a present.
1722
 WHAT TO DO WITH A BOX OF MATCHES
Theproblemsgivenbelowmay be per- 6. Arrange seventeen matches on the
formed either with matches or pins, table so as to make six squares as shown in
provided the matches or pins are all of the
same length . It will
be much safer if the
matches used are the
safety kind that strike
only on the box.
1. Take
matches and
eleven
them so as to make
nine of them.
place
This
2. Arrange fifteen matches so as to form
five squares of equal size as seen in the the illustration, and then by taking away five
matches leave three squares only .
7. Arrange twelve
matches on the table
so as to make four
squares as shown in
the picture, then after
removing four
matches place them so
as to make three
squares of the same
size as the first
squares.
picture, and then remove three matches so as 8. Arrange seventeen matches on the table
to leave only three of the squares. so as to form six squares as shown in the
3. Take
nine mat
ches and

|||||
place them
so as
make three
to

dozen of them.
4. Take three matches and
place them so as to make four
以 of them.
5. Place three matches in
such a position that they will make six.
picture, and then take away six matches
so as to leave only two squares remaining.
A MATCH -BOX CHEST OF DRAWERS
HALF A DOZEN empty match-boxes will back to front, and long enough to go right
make a dainty little chest of drawers to round it, with the ends just overlapping.
stand on a work -table. If you are not fond Lay this piece straight out on the table ,
of needlework, it will make a useful present. and paste the whole of it very carefully. Then
Besides the six empty boxes, which must put the top of the chest in the centre ; pull
all be of the same size, you will want a piece one piece tightly round the side to the middle
of coloured material , such of the bottom of the chest,
as silk, brocade, linen, or and press it firmly.
cloth , some paste and a Do exactly the same
brush . with the other piece,
Cut twelve little pieces making the end overlap
of material the same size o the piece already on. The
as the end of a box ; take two top drawers can be
each box out of its cover, for hooks -and -eyes, so
and, very neatly, paste one take one of each, and
of your little pieces over on one drawer sew a
each end of it. When hook , on the other an
they are all dry, put the eye, just in the centre.
boxes back into their The match - box finished One of the two middle
covers, and place them drawers might have linen
two by two above each other, with paste buttons, the other brass buttons, and the two
between. bottom drawers black and white pins.
Then cut a p.ece of material (which need Do not put on too much paste, and don't
not necessarily be the same colour as that let any get on to the front of the material ,
which you pasted over the ends of the boxes) and you will find that when it is quite dry
exactly the same width as the chest is from the paste does not show through at all.
1723
 THE WAY THAT THE FROGS JUMPED
Havethree
youfrogs
beenjumped,
able tofind out patiently
or are they how the themseats youmight with
the vacant tumblers, put the
piecesofpaperon
names of the
waiting on their tumblers for the word of frogs on them, so that you do not forget
command, as in the picture on page 1609 ? where they came from.
Of course the three frogs could easily jump Suppose we name the frogs Jack, Dorothy,
into the places of three others, but that is not Alfred, Ethel, Lionel, Alice, Percy, and Jessie.
allowed ; nor may a frog choose a seat which The three frogs who are going to jump are
has had a frog on it, for each frog could leave a Alfred, in the third row from the top, Ethel,
ticket behind with “ Reserved " on it. Then , who is seated on the tumbler at the end of the
too, they must jump each on to a tumbler fourth row , looking as if she were quite ready
where it will be out of line with any other for a jump, and Percy, about the middle of
frog, either up, down, sideways or crossways. the seventh row.
You will notice that there is a frog in each Alfred, Ethel, and Percy jump in this way :
row already, and so if three of them jump out Alfred, who is quite a young, sprightly froggy,
of their rows into other rows, the frogs lands on the second tumbler in theseventh
already in those rows must jump also. row down ; Ethel, who was badly wanting a
How can it be managed ? Well, there is little jump, gently lands on the eighth tumbler
nothing for it but trying each of the eight of the third row, the one just above hers ;
frogs in turn . Perhaps it will help if you give Percy, who is noted for his high jumps, lands
the frogs names, and when you have lifted on the fourth tumbler in the fourth row . That
them off the tumblers and are trying to find is the only way in which the frogs could jump.
AN OWL AND A FROG MADE FROM CIRCLES

80E 1110"0

399
These pictures show you how to get an evening'samusement out of a pencil, a sixpence, and a threepenny
bit. Beginning at theleft ofthetoprow , we see how tobuildupanowl from two circles made by drawinga
line round a sixpenceand a threepenny bit ; and the lower row ,beginning onthe right, showshowto make a frog.
THE ANSWERS TO THE PROBLEMS ON PAGE 1616
96. The price of one horse equalled the upon the article purchased was 35. , so we
price of two cows, so that nine horses and must find of what sum 3s. is 15 per cent.
seven cows would be the same price as Three shillings is 15 per cent. of 205., so that
25 cows. If 25 cows fetched £ 300, each cow the marked price was 2os. , which would have
was worth £12, and as each horse was worth been reduced to 16s. during the sale, but only
double, the price of each horse was £24. to 19s. after the sale was over.
97. The third boy was right. When the 100. Since the whole piece of bacon and
ninth man went in , the eighth man was still lo eggs cost as much as half the bacon and
batting, and the eighth , ninth, and tenth men 25 eggs, it is clear that half the bacon equals
had to go out. 15 eggs and the whole piece of bacon equals
98. Sixty per cent. of 12s. 6d. is 7s. 6d. , so 30 eggs. As 50 eggs were offered with the
that for tea that cost the grocer 125. 6d. he bacon for 6s. 8d ., the same sum would buy
received 125. 6d. plus 75. 6d ., which equals 80 eggs ( 30 + 50 ). Thus the eggs were one
205. The ba.krupt paid 12s. 6d. in the penny each, so that the 50 eggs offered
pound , so that tho dividend was the grocer's with the bacon represented 4s. 2d .
cost price. He the:efore lost nothing. Thus the price of the bacon may
99. The difference between 5 per cent. and be known by deducting 45. 2d. from
20 per cent. is 15 per cent The difference 6s. 8d ., and it was therefore 2s. 6d.
THE NEXT THING TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO ARE ON PAGE 1813

1724
 The Child's Book of MIL
SMAke
PEARL MEN & WOMEN 에

BENS
SMOLLETT STERNE

NA
OLE
ON

ME
THE
980 DEFOE

BUNYAN

EN and women
had been telling
stories long before
GREAT
SWIFT SFIELDING
STORY - TELLERS
Writers of the Seventeenth & Eighteenth Centuries
What sort of man
CONTINUED FRON 1664
was he, we may ask
RICHARDSON

GOLDSMITH

ourselves, who wrote

WEL
LIV
GTON

CRO any of the writers we are ' the wonderful “ Pilgrim's DAB
WIN
ELL going to hear about were born . Progress " ? When we turn to
But it was not until the begin his great book we find it
ning of the eighteenth century written with so much grace
that the art of telling a long of language and beauty of
story in the form of a novel began thought that we might suppose its
to be practised by English writers. author to be a scholar of wide ex
On page 1231we read about “ Robin- perience and culture did we not
son Crusoe,” which was first pub- know that his father was only a poor
lished in 1719, and this was really tinker, or mender of pots and pans,
the beginning of what we may call and that he himself had followed
modern story-writing. As we know, the same trade .
that immortal story was written by He must therefore have been what
Daniel Defoe ; but when he was a is sometimes called “ one of Nature's
youth of seventeen there was a rough gentlemen ,” for of education and
preaching man in gaol at Bedford, training in the gentle habits of life
who was occupying his time in writ- and thought he can have had none
ing a story ofa very different kind , at all . Indeed, we know for certain
SVING

that in his youth he was rough and

STONE

which has made his name even more

famous than that of the author of thoughtless, wasting his time like
Robinson Crusoe." most of the heedless village youths
This man was John Bunyan, and of his acquaintance. The descrip
we have read all about the wonderful tions of him , and his familiar por
story he wrote in the child'S STORY traits, show him to have been strong
OF FAMOUS BOOKS on page 1027. · and lusty, and not exactly the style
.

There were many story -writers before
John Bunyan who, like him , told
CLAD
their tales in the form of allegories;
STC
NE but we need not concern ourselves
with them . Bunyan is the first story-
teller born in the seventeenth cen-
tury to whom we reed pay attention .
PJULIUS CÆSAR Qas
I G
of man whose heart one would have
expected to be tender with love for
his fellow-men, his soul simple and
RUS
steadfast for truth and righteousness. KIN
Bunyan was born in the year 1628 ,
and sixteen years later he left his pots
and pans for a time to serve in the
( HERBERT SPENCEM
1725 D
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
army, returning in about a year to
his native town of Elstow , near Bedford,
where, soon after he was twenty years
of age, he married a poor girl about
whom we know very little, except that
she died in 1665 and left her sorrowing
husband with four little children .
IN BUNYAN, THE ROUGH PREACHER WHO
JOHOR
WROTE “ THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS "
Perhaps it is to this almost unknown
wife of his that something of his fame is
due, for if before his marriage he had
led a very rough life, soon after it he
began to sober himself and to think
deeply about religion. His wife had
brought him nothing in worldly goods,
but among her few poor possessions
were two religious books of the time,
the reading of which turned his thoughts
to better things, and may possibly have
given him the idea of his own later
writings .
Bunyan began to go to church
regularly, and soon felt himself com-
pelled to preach the Gospel that had
now brought so much peace to his
troubled mind. This was in the days of
the Puritans and the Commonwealth ;
but no sooner had the unworthy King
Charles II . come back to the throne
than preachers who did not belong to the
State Church were subjected to the
cruellest persecution, and in 1660
Bunyan was arrested and thrust into
the county gaol at Bedford for no
other offence than the crime of preach-
ing the simple truths of the Gospel.
For twelve long years was he kepi a
prisoner. Yet his time was not wasted,
for during those years he contrived to
write many religious works, and par-
ticularly one, called “ Grace Abound-
ing,” in which he tells us his inmost
thoughts in a way that no other English-
man has ever revealed himself.
THE TINKER'S SON BUILT UP HIS
How
FAME IN BEDFORD GAOL
When he was liberated , in 1672 , he
became a licensed preacher, and was
chosen as the pastor of the church to
which he had belonged. Three years later
he had to suffer imprisonment in the
town gaol of Bedford, but for six months
only , and it was now that he wrote the
first part of " The Pilgrim's Progress.”
No persecutions could destroy his
faith in the true Christian religion, the
preaching of which by tongue and pen
had been his one thought from the time
1726
that he had given up his rough life.
The fame of his great book in his own 1
day was immense, and when he died ,
in 1688, during a visit to London , the
tinker's son of Elstow had done more
than all King Charles's bishops to turn
the thoughts of the people to God.
Though he has been dead for two
centuries and a quarter, his voice still
speaks to us in " The Pilgrim's Pro
gress,” which has been translated into
more than eighty foreign languages.
Daniel Defoe, the author of the im
mortal “ Robinson Crusoe,” is another
example of the fact that humble birth is
no bar to the greatest achievements.
His father,, whose name was James Foe ,
was only a butcher in the parish of
St. Giles, Cripplegate, London, and
Daniel , who did not alter and dignify
his family name until he had reached
middle life , was intended to become a
minister of one of the Dissenting
churches, and at the age of fourteen he
went to Newington to study.
SCHOOLDAYS OF
THEWROTE THE MAN WHO
" ROBINSON CRUSOE ”
1
There he learnt Latin, Greek, French,
Spanish, and Italian, in addition to the
'isual religious studies, for he was an
extremely bright and receptive scholar.
But despite all these accomplishments he
very soon changed his mind, and instead
of going in for the ministry, decided to
become, of all things, a hosier. This was
when he was twenty- four years of age ,
and before he had begun to write .
It is rather difficult to imagine the
author of “ Robinson Crusoe in the
shop of a London hosier, supplying
customers with stockings. But he had
a soul above hosiery, this brilliant
scholar and fiery politician, who could
not well keep silent in those days when
so many public abuses had still to be
remedied . 1
That was the great age of the pam
phleteers, or writers who addressed the
public on questions of the day in small
pamphlets, which were sold in the
streets, as the newspapers with which
we are now so familiar had not then
been invented . So when Daniel Defoe
wanted to tell the public something
which was burning in his own mind
he wrote and printed a pamphlet, and 1
it so happened that one of these pam
phlets was considered to contain a libel
1
TUTO
 LELE O TORILOR
-THE GREAT STORY TELLERSwarunonarzem
on the Government of the day. It essays and satires were to be forgotten
certainly spoke very freely about the -as, indeed, most of them are likely to be
-

manner in which the Church of England some day—the name of Daniel Defoe
was conducted, and voiced the opinion would never grow dim , for the popu
of a great many people in England. larity of " Robinson Crusoe ” is bound
For the writing of this outspoken to keep it bright for ever. He was the
pamphlet Defoe was made to stand in first great story -teller who made use
the pillory, but the people , who sym- of the natural form known as the
pathised with him , made his intended novel, now so popular, and when he
punishment an honour by decorating died, in 1731 , he was buried in Bunhill
the pillory with garlands of flowers ; Fields, where, forty-three years before,
and, fortunately for him, the authorities John Bunyan had been laid to rest .
did not pro- BUNYAN WRITING HIS STORY IN PRISON In the course
ceed to the ex of time the old
treme measure tombstone over
of cropping his Defoe's grave
ears , which was became broken ,
a punishment and the letter
frequently in ing obliterated .
flicted at that It was a happy
time upon pris thought when ,
oners who were not so many
supposed too years ago , a
have offended London news
the Govern paper appealed
ment of the day. to the boys and
It was in the girls of Eng.
year 1702 that land to sub
he made his scribe for a new
memorable ap monument to
pearance in the the memory of
pillory, and the writer of
two years later the most de
we find him a lightful of all
prisoner in the stories a

Newgate Pri boy or girl may

son , where he read. As a re
had been sult of this, a
lodged by his handsome
political oppo Egyptian pillar
nents , who john Bunyan was a preacher in the time of Charies ii., when aii was erected in
were then in religious teachers who did notbelong to the State Church were
im
place of the
power . Being prisonment for daring to preach the Gospel, and Yates, mishen broken old
a man of imprisoned for six months in the town gaol at Bedford ,he wrote tombstone, for
boundless the first part of his most famous book, “ The Pilgrim's Progress. ” the boys and
energy, he did not sit idly in prison . He girls who had enjoyed reading " Robin
seems to have been allowed a certain son Crusoe " were only too delighted
amount of liberty, for during his stay in to take part in this humble service to
Newgate he actually began to publish a the memory ofits immortal author.
weekly paper, in which , in the most fear- Although all boys and girls love Daniel
Tess manner, he continued to attack the Defoe's famous story, it is doubtful
policy of the Government of the time, whether they would have loved the
and to support the Protestant cause man himself. He was so keen a fighter
in the face of all its enemies. with his pen , and so devoted to his
For about thirty years before his literary work , that he probably had very
death, which occurred on April 24, little time to make himself agreeable to
1731 , in the seventieth year of his age, his friends, and especially to the little
his pen was never idle in writing of some ones. But we are certain that few boys
kind. Even if all his histories and and girls could have loved Jonathan
OZI LIDI DODONTIEDOTTI DJETI
1727
 1
mammar THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
Swift , the next great story- teller to be Meeting her later when she had grown
born in our land after Daniel Defoe . into a graceful young woman , he fell in
We have already read about Swift's love with her . He wrote many letters
famous book , Gulliver's Travels,” on to her, and one of the books by which
page 1309. As we there read , he be ranks high as an author is his
was a great writer of satire. Now, to " Journal to Stella," in which his
be satirical one has always to be looking genuine love for the lady is most char
for the faults of others, and that is not mingly displayed.
the way that leads us to the love of our Many other books he wrote besides
fellow -men . Swift spoke very bitterly those familiar to us - histories, political
of most people, and, on the whole, was studies, poems. But while we cannot
not a very agreeable companion . But help admiring the great cleverness of
for all that he was a remarkable man, the man , or enjoying to the full the
full of imagination, a great writer, and, playfulness of his genius in such a work
in short , what we call “ a genius." as Gulliver's Travels,” we do not feel
OF JONATHAN SWIFT, WHO him to be so warm a human being as
THE ROTE GULLIVER'S TRAVELS good John Bunyan . It is sad to think
Jonathan Swift was born in the that his later years were clouded with
city of Dublin, on November 30, 1617, the fear of madness; that, ten years after
his parents being of good family, but his he had displayed so much mirth and
father died before Jonathan was born, playfulness in the story of Gulliver, he
and his mother was left very poor. began to be so gloomyin his own mind
He must have been a winning little that for the nine remaining years of his
boy, this fatherless Jonathan, for his life he was often a stranger to happiness.
nurse loved him so much that she took He died in 1745, and was buried in the
him away with her when she went to live Cathedral of St. Patrick's, Dublin .
at Whitehaven , and kept him for three
years . So well had she looked after SAMUEL
WHO RICHARDSON,THE LITTLE PRINTER
1
him and guided his infant mind that A quaint little figure was that of the
when he was again restored to his next great story - teller in those early
mother he was quite the cleverest little days to which we have here turned back.
boy one could imagine. Before he was He, too, was the son of very humble
five years old, we are told , he was able to parents, his father being only a common
read any chapter in the Bible. joiner in Derbyshire, where, in the year
As Jonathan's mother had relatives 1689, Samuel Richardson was born .
of rank and wealth , he was not without Boys and girls need not be expected
help when he needed it , and the lad was to read any of his stories until theyhave
sent to Dublin University at fourteen grown up, and even then there is no
years of age and later to Oxford. There particular reason why they should read
is nothing that one can say in favour of them at all . Still , Richardson bears
his university days. He seems to have one of the greatest names in the history
been , on the whole, a very bad student . of English literature.
When he was twenty -seven years of Richardson's stories were chiefly
age he became a clergyman in Ireland, written in the form of long -winded
UNERIIK

and except for some four years he con- letters supposed to be addressed by
tinued to discharge the duties of a one character to another. Nowadays
clergyman to the end of his life. our lives are much too varied and active
em

THECLOUDED to leave time for reading such very long

MADE WHOLEOF THE MAN WHO
and unexciting stories as he wrote, but
It was in April, 1713, that Swiſt was our great -great-grandfathers had more
appointed Dean of St. Patrick's, Dublin , leisure and fewer interesting books, so
and thirteen years later he wrote that they could find time to follow the
“ Gulliver's Travels. ” More than twenty slow and steady unfolding of his ap
years before that he had written two pallingly lengthy tales. Indeed , we
famous books— “ The Tale of a Tub ” may guess how interested they could
and “ The Battle of the Books. " be in his stories when we are told that
The romance of his life was connected in country villages people used to wait
with a lady called Stella ,” whom he anxiously for the arrival of the next part
had known as а very young girl . of his novels to find out what was to
XXXXXXXXX Ter
1728 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
com
Xtre
suomapman
THE AUTHOR OF " ROBINSON CRUSOE " IN THE PILLORY

Daniel Defoe, who wrote “Robinson Crusoe," was a strong Protestant, and a fearless advocate of the govern
ment of the country in the interests of the common people . He wrote many pamphlets attacking the Government
of his day, and for doing so he had to suffer imprisonment. On one occasion he was made to stand in the public
pillory, but the citizens of London admired him so much that when he was in the pillory they brought offerings of
flowers to him, and had to be kept away by soldiers, as we see in the above picture, painted by Eyre Crowe.
happen to the characters, and when the master might not have to pay for the
heroine of his dreary story, “ Pamela,” convenience of his apprentice.
was made to marry the rather unmanly An unambitious, steady, plodding,
hero , church bells were rung in some honest and industrious, and perhaps
villages as though Pamela had been a a very commonplace young man , was
real person ! this Samuel, but after fifteen years he
This is all very strange to usnow, for had some reward from the printer, as he
neither that story nor “ Clarissa,” married his master's daughter, having
which he took eight years to write, nor now become a printer on his own ac
“ Sir Charles Grandison
Grandison ,,” has the count in a court off Fleet Street, close
slightest attractions for people of our by the old church of St. Bride. Here
time. These famous books are only in- he continued for many years to carry
teresting as showing how the taste ofone on his business like any other printer
generation differs from that of another. of his time, living above his workshop,
Samuel Richardson had very little and thus spending mostof histime amid
education , and at the age of seventeen the smell of printers' ink. We can well
he was apprenticed to a London printer, believe that he was a kind and con
who made him work so hard that he had siderate master, and it is said he used
no leisure for reading or study. But to hide a half-crown among the types at
he was as industrious as he was honest, night so that the first man to arrive at
and he made up for the time of which the workshop in the morning might
his master robbed him by sitting up at have it as a reward !
night, when he ought to have been asleep, Richardson was not far short of fifty
to read any books he could secure. years old when he determined to make
The candles used for these midnight himself famous by writing a novel, and
studies he bought himself, so that his “ Pamela ” was the result of the little
TU DO DOMUT OUTUUDITT
1729
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
printer's resolution. He certainly suc- that he made his living. His wife died
ceeded in making himself famous , and, in 1743 , and he then married a servant,
being perhaps so newhat vain of his who made him a very good wife to the
literary powers — which at the early age end of his days. Poor man , he was not
of thirteen he had first exercised by long to enjoy the success of the great
writing love -letters for some ignorant books he wrote, nor the advantage of the
servant girls—the remainder of his comfortable salary he received from a
days were spent with much satisfaction legal appointment given to him in 1749.
in writing for the sentimental ļadies It was in that year that he wrote a
of his time, to whom the languish- very brilliant satire called " Mr. Jona
ing and tearful heroines of his novels than Wild the Great,” and in the same
seem to have been strangely attractive. year appeared his most celebrated
HE END OF ONE GREAT STORY-TELLER novel, The History of Tom Jones,"
THEAND THE BEGINNING OF ANOTHER which is one of the great masterpieces
The little printer of Salisbury Square, of English fiction . His third and last
though so few of us read his writings to- novel was “ Amelia ,” which appeared
day, certainly gave a great impetus to in 1751 . Al his stories are written
the art of fiction in England, and the with a fine vigorous feeling of life, and
careful and elaborate way in which he overflow with humour, a quality in
traced the natures of imaginary people which Richardson was utterly deficient.
was also imitated by writers on the In 1754 , while on a visit to Lisbon,
Continent, and chiefly in France, where where he had gone broken in health , he
to this day the works of Richardson are died , and there in the cemetery of the
in high repute. He died on July 4, British Factory — for in those days there
1761, and by his own request was buried were many such trading posts under our
in the church of St. Bride, near to which flag in foreign countries— one of the
so much of his life had been passed. greatest of English ' story -tellers and
When an author invents some un- earliest of our novelists was laid to rest .
quently happens
usual way that another
of telling a story, author
it fre LAURENCE ESTERNE AND TOBIAS SMOLLETT
BOOKS
will turn it into ridicule by writing what Laurence Sterne, like Jonathan
is called a parody of it. So it happened Swift , whom he resembled to some
1 )

with Richardson's Pamela ,” which an extent in character, was born in Ireland,

abler and far more gifted man than he, though his ancestors were English people
two years after its appearance, took as of good position in Church and State. 1

the idea of a very different sort of story, He was born on December 24, 1713 ,
called “ Joseph Andrews." and educated at Halifax Grammar 1

The writer of this was a born story School and Cambridge University, be
teller, a man of great force of character, coming a clergyman in the year 1738 .
the son of distinguished parents, and for a good many years his life was, no
well educated. His name was Henry doubt, that of the ordinary country vicar,
Fielding, and he was born in Somerset. except that, being at once satirical
shire on April 22 , 1707. and bitingly sarcastic in his speech ,
OW HENRY FIELDING WAS FORCED TO thin in appearance and consumptive in
A health , he was probably by no means so
Being fond of the pleasures of life, pleasant a companion as a country
and disinclined to work or to study vicar ought to be.
too closely, Fielding left the University When he was forty -six years of age
of Leyden , in Holland, and came to he published at York the first two
London when he was twenty. But he volumes of his great and amusing book,
6

soon found that his father was not able “ The Life and Opinions of Tristram
to allow him so much money as he had Shandy." Very soon the wit and
expected, and he had to exercise his humour with which the characters in
abilities by writing for the stage . this great work were drawn had made
After a while he married a beautiful the name of Sterne famous, and for
lady who had a small fortune ; but this years new volumes of the work con
he soon contrived to spend, and at tinued to appear, until it was completed
thirty-three he became a barrister, in the year 1767, just about two months
though it was chiefly by writing plays before its author breathed his last .
DTX DUUNTELETED ZUTIT OLYKOTTLIEUX DOLLUT AIZ
1730
 GRMADALETTE ET
EL
-THE GREAT STORY - TELLERSKO LOUEELLA LEI mas como

On the whole, Sterne was not a
pleasant kind of man to contemplate,
and although his books are full of
high spirits and laughter, it is not
always the healthiest laughter, nor
are his sentiments such as do credit
to a preacher of the Gospel, who
during his later years may be said
to have written under the shadow of
death . His other famous book is called
“ The Sentimental Journey Through
France and Italy ." It is very witty.
OLIVER GOLDSMITH AND THE FAMOUS STORY THAT PAID HIS DEBTS
DOLOREM
DUM
ULO
TUDOR
EU
in London , but he was still writing
away, and, marrying a wealthy lady
when he was twenty -six, he was for
a time able to exercise his pen more
for pleasure than for profit.
Later in life he had to become a
professional author and journalist, writ
ing histories, books of travel, trans
lating foreign stories
stories,, and editing
papers , but, above all, producing
three novels very similar in character
to those of Henry Fielding, and nearly

Oliver Goldsmith was so improvident that he was always in difficulties. Once his landlady had him arrested
for debt, and when his friend, the great Dr. Johnson, found him a prisoner in his lodgings, Goldsmith showed
him the manuscript of a story he had written , and reading this on the spot, Johnson was immediately charmed
with it. He took it out and managed to sell it at once to a bookseller for £60, which enabled Goldsmith to pay his
landlady and get rid of the bailiffs. The manuscript was the famous story known as " The Vicar ofWakefield."
Tobias Smollett was a Scotsman , always mentioned in company with
born near the “ Bonnie, bonnie banks them as the best examples of English
of Loch Lomond ” in March , 1721 , novels written before the time of
and educated at Glasgow College, his Sir Walter Scott. They are full of
people being of good estate. He was interesting and life-like characters, and
being trained for the medical profes- his sailors especially are the breeziest,
sion , but when he was vighteen he saltest sons of the sea to be ! ound in
had written a tragedy, and came up English story -books. The names of his
to London with this in his pocket, three famous books are ( 6
“ Roderick
though he did not find anybody who Random ," " Peregrine Pickle ," and
would buy it from him . So he went “ Humphrey Clinker, " the first being
to sea as assistant to a naval surgeon , written in 1748, and the last , which
and later tried to live by doctoring is also the best, in 1771 , in the
ULTICOLE RECENT COM mm NO மாகாணமணா
1731
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
September of which year Smollet died a paper which that busy writer was
at Leghorn , in Italy, where he was editing ; while other editors gave him
buried in the English cemetery . opportunities of doing better work.
Oliver Goldsmith, like two of the Goldsmith was now a busy author,
other writers we have heard about, and if he had had as much common
was also born in Ireland, but he came sense as he had genius he might have
of Irish ancestors . His birth took lived in luxury ; but it was not to be,
place on September 10, 1728, and he though he had many warm friends .
was in his twenty -first year when he For he was himself a lovable and gentle
managed, without any great credit to creature, despite his ugly face, pitted
himself, to take the degree of Bachelor with smallpox, his short and ungainly
of Arts at Dublin University. figure, and his stupidities of speech .
How W GOLDSMITH WANDERED THROUGH His great friend, the famous Dr. Samuel
EUROPE PLAYING ON HIS FLUTE
Johnson, said of him that “ No man
In Oliver it is to be feared we have was more foolish when he had not a
by no means a type of character that pen in his hand, or more wise when he
can be greatly admired, for he was had ” ; while Garrick, the great actor
always doing the wrong thing, and of the day, made a couplet about him :
disappointing all his best friends. Here lies poet Goldsmith , for shortness
Fortunately, perhaps, his effort to called Noll ,
become a clergyman was unsuccessful, Who wrote like an angel , but talked like
poor Poll.
and his determination to go to America
took him no farther than Cork ; while No other author whose unhappy lot
fifty pounds he got to enable him to it was to write so much to the order of
study law in London he lost by gambling publishers has written so well in so
at Dublin. When he was twenty -four many different ways. His famous
he went to Edinburgh to studymedicine, comedy, “ She Stoops to Conquer,"
and although everybody liked him, he is a perfect stage play; “ The Deserted
did nothing of note at the college. Village ” gives hìn no mean place as a
Next he went to the famous Univer- poet ; and “ The Vicar of Wakefield ,”
sity of Leyden, where Fielding had been his only work of fiction , is one of the
before him , and there again he lost most beautiful stories in our language .
what little money he had by gambling. HOWGOLDSMITH
. The SALE OF A STORY SAVED
FROM AN ANGRY LANDLADY
In those days it was the custom of 1

English gentlemen to make a tour of Yet so stupid was the writer of this
the chief towns of the Continent , and lovely story that it is said his friend
this Goldsmith attempted to do on foot Dr. Samuel Johnson on one occasion
and penniless, playing on his flute by found poor Goldsmith arrested by his 1

the wayside and in the villages to earn a
few pence. Surely the " grand tour "
had never been so meanly performed.
AUTHOR OF " THE VICAR OF WAKE .
THEFIELD " IN HIS DAYS OF POVERTY
In 1756 he struggled back to London ,
the owner of a few pence, a ragged suit
of clothes, and a dirty wig . He tried
unsuccessfully to make a living as a
physician, was at one time a reader of
proofs for Samuel Richardson , and also
acted as usher in a Peckham school.
Then he became what is known as a
hack -writer, or a poor scribbler at low
pay for any sort of publication that
would employ him . In short, he seemed
to be one of life's failures ; but a book
which he wrote about the education
of his time attracted some notice, and
when he was thirty -one years of age he
began to be employed by Smollett on
MUHONDURU ZOT
BITC unrun WOLIITDATO
1732
landlady for debt , and in his desk lay
the manuscript of this immortal story,
which the kindly doctor took out and
sold to a bookseller for sixty pounds,
and so enabled the impractical author
to pay off his debts to his landlady-and
to begin incurring new ones ; for when
he died in his lodgings at Brick Court ,
in the Temple, London, on April 4, 1774 ,
he was two thousand pounds in debt .
His story is indeed a sad one, as his
life might have been one of complete
happiness, for he was gifted beyond
most men of his time. But we shall
find as we read the stories of great men
of genius, whose writings are among
our greatest treasures , that they have
not always been able to order their
own lives wisely and well.
The next stories of Men and Women are on
page 1887 .
BETTUUNIKUT
 The Child's Book of
BIBLE STORIES
This fine painting of Israel in Slavery is by Sir Edward Poynter, and is reproduced here by permission of the Autotype Company
THE END OF SOLOMON'S GLORY
SOLOMONdiednearly
a thousand years
before the birth of Christ,
and the story of those thousand
years is one of disaster and
suffering. The death of Solomon
closed a period in the story of Israel ;
the birth of Christ opened a period
in the history of the whole world . Let
us look back for a brief moment at
the history of this strange people,
whose everlasting glory is that, first
of all nations, they believed in one
God, and that through them came
Jesus, the Light of the World .
At first we see these people in the
life of a single man, Abraham , who
knew what so few people on the
earth then knew—that there is one
everlasting, invisible, and perfect God.
Because he had this saving faith ,
through him all the nations of the
earth were to be blessed. He brought
up his children in this faith.
his descendants, Joseph, is sold into
captivity, and in heathen Egypt
becomes a powerful Minister of the
king. Famine overtakes his brothers ;
he sends for them, and they emigrate
to Egypt. In the course of time the
families of these twelve
become so rich and powerful that the
Egyptians hate and fear them . They
are reduced to a state of slavery, and
live in the utmost misery for many
years among their foreign tyrants.
UNA
CONTINUED FROM 1673
Then arises a patriot
among them , Moses,
who leads the twelve tribes
out of Egypt , and conducts them
into a country of their own,
Canaan . They are a miserable
nation at this time, broken by long
years of slavery, and contaminated by
the heathenish superstitions of the
Egyptians ; they are almost incapable
of rising to the grand idea of Abraham
—that there is only one God, a God of
Law, and that this one God is ( ver
lasting, invisible, and perfect. But
Moses gives them a wonderful code of
laws, which helps them to be clean in
their bodies and their habits, and
braces their moral character.
Among them are young and brave
men , and these , taking the sword,
drive out their enemies before them,
and establish themselves in the
promised land of Canaan. Prosperity
One of comes. In their prosperity they grow
luxurious and careless of the law.
They find it a trouble to think of a
God why is invisible , and they make
idols, marry heathen women , and dis
obey the laws framed for their health.
They become weak and diseased.
brethren Their enemies come up against them
and defeat them .
It occurs to them that all would be
well if they had a king like other
nations. Saul is anointed king, and
disper : es their enemies. The Israelites
1733
 UZA OU ALEEANNADA LUCA RESULTER
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES !

grow rich and prosperous again , and who would not suffer the least of His
once again they forget God . David laws to be disobeyed, meant the raising
succeeds Saul . The kingdom is troubled of a clean , healthy, and moral human
by rebellion . David puts down the race . It was a faith most important to
rebellion . He is convinced that there the bodies as well as the souls of men .
is but one God , and he makes songs for The health of humanity carried with it
the people, reminding them of the great the assurance of man's advance in know
and mighty things God has done for ledge . God was not only preparing the
them in the past . He conceives the idea soul of the world to receive the Spirit
of building a glorious temple to the of Christ , but the bodies of men to do
Creator of heaven and earth , giving the the work of civilisation and advance .
people something visible before their Do not suffer yourself to be frightened
eyes which will remind them of the at the sneer of ignorant men who say
invisible God . But he dies before he that the God of the Old Testament is a
can carry out his idea . cruel and revengeful Being, delighting
SOLOMON LIVED FOR HIS OWN GLORY in war and slaughter. All those people
Hºw
AND LOST HIS KINGDOM
whom the Israelites were inspired by
Solomon succeeds him . The Temple is their holy men to annihilate were far
built , but men are made slaves for the more dangerous to the future of
purpose, and, as the beautiful fabric humanity than the germs of deadly
rises like a dream to the glory of God , disease . Their sloth was a peril ; their
the builders bleed , and groan, and die. vices meant ruin . If Israel had been like
Solomon builds for his own satisfaction Amalek , the whole of the human race
as an artist , not for the sake of Israel's might have sunk to the state and con
religion. He lives for beautiful things, dition of animals. The heathen round
and cares little for humanity. He fills the advancing Israelites were diseases.
OF ASRAELE HELPED
Jerusalem
and
withpomp and splendour, Hºw. THE HISTORYHOS
forgets the infinitely greater
majesty of the lilies of the field. His When you grow older you will under
life is a madness . While his country stand why, in some cases, the Israelites
grows more lovely and powerful, his destroyed even the cattle of these dread
subjects groan more and more under the ful and horrible people. Learn what
oppression of his tax -collectors. At his is meant by the word “ evolution ," and
mmmmmmmmmmmm

death the kingdom is torn asunder.
Are we amazed that Israel should so
often forget God and fall a victim to
idols ? We must remind ourselves that
on every side of Israel there were
nations who laughed at the idea of an
invisible God who was strict about the
manner in which men fed and lived .
Israel's invisible God required a clean,
healthy, and careful people ; the self-
made gods of the heathen were said to
approve of every vice and every riotous
carelessness. The Israelites thought it
was better to believe in idols because
such a belief meant that they might do
as they pleased, and be quite careless
about their bodies or their souls. That
is why, in becoming idolaters, they baucheries of the heathen instead of
became unhealthy men , useless to God.
IT MATTERED TO THE WORLD THAT
Do we ask ourselves why it was so
important for Israel to believe in one
God ? It was chiefly important in those
far -off days because faith in one invisible
God, who was stern and severe , and
TITITE IUTERIILE TOONOTTI
1734
you will see that all through the history
of the Israelites God was “ evolving " a
physically healthy and a spiritually strong
people, capable of intellectual and moral
advance. The histo of Israel is real
history, and one of the greatest docu
ments of the science which teaches us
how the higher thing is evolved from
the lower. It is the history of Man against
1
Beast . The man who bathes his body,
strengthens his muscles, measures his
power against tempest at sea or famine
on land, ard sets himself steadily and
reverently to discover the majestic
secrets of Nature, could never have
appeared upon the earth if the human
race had followed the gods and de
the one God and the sane sanitation
of the Israelites.
This is a most important matter for
us to comprehend. Not only shall we
fail to understand the Bible without it ,
but without it the present history of
the human race will seem to us an
unintelligible riddle. Remember that

-THE END OF SOLOMON'S GLORY
the Bible has as much to do with the
body as with the soul . Remember
that the evolution of the Israelites is
the evolution of the human race .
From Moses to Newton , from David
to Shakespeare, from Elijah to Carlyle ,
the line runs clear. For the foundation of
every man's happiness on earth is Israel's
ancient faith in a God whose laws
cannot be broken without punishment,, including black people, came up against
and whose love lies in preparing a
healthy, a prudent , and a sane race for
an everlasting and spiritual advance.
ISRAEL AFTER THE DEATH OF SOLOMON
And now let us glance at what
happened to the Israelites after the
DAXL
death of Solomon .
He was succeeded on the throne by
his son Rehoboam . The nation, glad
that Solomon the oppressor was dead,
waited to see what the new king would
do to lighten their burdens. While
they waited, some of their more daring
reformers sent for Jeroboam , the wise
and skilful Minister of the late king,
who had escaped into Egypt from the
wrath of Solomon . Jeroboam came
out of Egypt , and at once put himself
at the head of the gathering mutiny.
He presented himself, with some of
the chief people, before Rehoboam , and
demanded reform . Rehoboam asked
time for consideration of the new
ideas
his oldpresented
counsellorstofirst,and
him . He went to
askedtheir
advice. They agreed that it would be
wise for him to lighten the burdens of
his people. Then he went to the young
men , who argued that if he gave way revolution
revolution ;; we see the twelve tribes
to the people they would demand
more and more from him till nothing
was left of his kingship. Rehoboam
thought that this was very clever
advice. He put on the stern manner
of an autocrat , and told the reformers
that whereas Solomon “ had
their yoke grievous, he would add to
it , and , whereas he had chastised them
with whips, he would chastise them
with scorpions."
HOW THE KINGDOM WAS TORN ASUNDER
AND RULED BY TWO BAD
It is not easy to bully a whole nation .
Rehoboam's bluster blew away before
the wrath of Israel like the froth of
waves in a north -east wind. Too late
he discovered his folly. Revolution
sprang forth . Before he knew what had
TYTURYIXTU UITROEK YRITTIITIZENTERTITELE
INFLLULAS SUELA QULLLEK
happened, he found himself ruling over
only four of the tribes of Israel, while
Jeroboam was king of the other eight .
The story of Israel is now the miser
able story of a house divided against
itself. The kingdom of Judah , reigned
over by Rehoboam , was at ceaseless
war with the kingdom of Israel , reigned
over by Jeroboam . Foreign enemies,
these warring factions, and misery and
desolation spread through the fair land of
Canaan . Both kings lived wicked lives.
God was almost forgotten. Heathen
practices and abominable vices took
the place ofspiritual worship and clean
living. It seemed as if the divided
house must fall ; as if the promise made
to Abraham must be broken ; as if the
whole people, chosen for the preserva
tion of the human race , must perish.
We need not concern ourselves with
these bickerings and wars . Our
interest lies with character, not with
battle. We pass over the reigns of
Rehoboam and Jeroboam , and over
the reigns of their successors , until
we come to the story of a man who
was not a king and not a mighty cap
tain , but whose history is one of the
most remarkable in the world , and
who, more than any other man at
that period, saved the human race
from a relapse into barbarism.
THEOPATIFUL SIGHT OF A WHOLE NATION
GOING RUIN
We are brought to a point where
this strange race of Israel is divided ;
we see the land of Canaan rent by
falling more and more into idolatry ;
we see ruin hanging on their coasts,
and vice running like a disease through
all their borders — how shall they be
saved ? We know the importance to
humanity of Israel's sanity, morality,
made and faith in one God. We know that
through this nation Europe was to
receive its ideas of cleanliness, conduct ,
and faith. And now we see them
idolatrous, fighting among themselves,
wicked , ignorant, pitiful, and mean .
KINGS
A whole nation , the sanest nation on
the earth, going to ruin ! How shall they
be saved ? What immense miracle can
avert their destruction ?
The answer is the story of one
solitary man .
The next Bible Stories begin on 1881 .
UKUTUT
1735
 ITDELALUILLALLA

STRANGE BIRDS WITH STRANGE FEATHERS

The waxwing has many of its feathers tipped with red

like sealing - wax .Like many other birds, the
waxwing does not get its fine feathers till full grown.

The common manakin is brilliantly coloured with a This bell-bird has a wonderful note ,like that of a silver
feather beard. It has a curiously laboured flight, and bell. When many are calling, the sound of note following
the beating of its wings sounds like a spinning -wheel. note is like the beating of many hammers on steelanvils. 1

The nightjar flies in the dark, The umbrella -bird, seen here, is the
swiftly and silently as a swallow . biggest of the chatterers, famous for
It is wrongly called the goat-sucker, its umbrella- like hood of gay feathers.

The cock -of-the-rock is also a chat- The quetzal is a Central American The banded cotinga is aa Brazilian
terer, a brilliant orange-red in colour, trogon. Its feathers keep their lovely bird which lives among the tree
and crested to the tip of the beak, colours even after the bird's death. tops, only descending to feed .
The photographs on these pages are by Lewis Morland W. P. Dando, Oliver Pike, R. B. Lodge, and others.
Zmmmmmm WHITE Tumeurtrommurnar
1736
 The Child's Book of
NATURE

The Home of the Weaver-birds

THE BIRDS OF BEAUTY

WHENWonderland
Alice was , inif CONTINUED FROM 1632
their nature to seek
safety by hiding .
she wanted suddenly Gradually they will
to grow tall or to make her become more and more like the
self smaller, all she had to do scene in which they live. If
was to eat a piece of cake or the change of seasons brings
mushroom , or drink something great changes in the character
from a bottle , and she at once of the foliage, the birds will be
became the right size. When we think able to change their feathers so that
of birds becoming brilliantly coloured , they will keep pace, in appearance,
or marked like the surroundings in with the altered looks of the things
which they live, we think of Alice. about their homes.
But , of course, the case in real life That is one way in which Nature
is different from that in the story- enables birds to flourish . But there
book . No bird ever says to itself. is another way . It is the way of the
" I will make my feathers the colour female bird to mate herself to the
of the rocks and sand in the desert, handsomest among her suitors, like
so that the hawks and eagles shall the princesses in the story-books ; so
not see me.” Nor does it make up that each generation of birds in this
its mind to wear rich and gorgeous way tends to become stronger and
plumage. The appearance of birds is more handsome . But the hens of
brought about by long ages of change, gorgeous bird families are, as a rule,
by the slow working of natural laws. neither gay nor splendid , so that they
Suppose we have a number of birds may sit on the nest and hatch the
living in a place where they have eggs without danger of being molested
many strong enemies. They cannot by their enemies .
escape by fighting, for they are no The most gorgeous birds in the
strong enough . They cannot escape world are the birds of paradise and
by flying, for their enemies fly faster. the humming-birds. The first of these
The probability is that they will be is , like the bower-birds, a distant
killed . But if some of the birds have cousin of our old friend the crow .
feathers which enable them to appear, Only a naturalist could discover this.
when hiding, like the rocks or sand , To anyone not acquainted with the
or like the trees or jungle , it is very science of natural history, it would
likely that those birds will escape. be hard to imagine a greater con
The birds which have not this trast than that between the crow and
advantage will be caught and killed , the bird of paradise. But then the
but the others will live, and the baby bird of paradise does not differ more
birds hatched from their eggs will be from the crow than one species of
like them. It will become part of bird of paradise differs from another

1737
 2.QoDuam
-THE
renan
CHILD'S BOOK
species. There are nearly fifty differ-
ent species of birds of paradise, and
many of them may claim to be among
the fairest of Nature's children . Not
only are they beautiful in colouring,
but the arrangement of the feathers
of some of them is really extraordinary .
HE GORGEOUS PLUMAGE OF THE BIRDS
THEOF PARADISE
There is one called the twelve-wired
bird of paradise . Its tail is short and
square, but there grow out twelve long,
wire -like feathers, or bristles, for they
are only the bare stems of feathers,
which curve round towards the sides
of the wings, and give the strangest cover the bird as with a cascade of
appearance to the bird . The chief glossy feathers.
colours in its magnificent plumage are When the male birds set out to win
purple -bronze on the head, green and mates they gather together in the trees
purple and black on the neck, bronze
green on the back and shoulders, and
emerald green to the edges of the
outer wing feathers, with brilliant
violet -purple to the rest of the wings
and tail, and rich yellow on the breast .
This bird is, including its two-inch
beak , a foot in length. The long beak
supplies the bird with food , which it
takes in the form of honey from
flowers .
There is a larger bird of paradise than
this—the long -tailed
tainous regions of Newone Guinea
of the, moun
which
MONOTONIJOXLIITTO
is over a yard in length . It is coloured
as richly as the other, but it adds a
fan -like arrangement of feathers which
rise from the sides of the breast, expand-
ing at their outer ends in brilliant blue
and green , while the tail feathers are of
a lovely opal blue. Underneath the
bird is white, and when it raises the long
feathers on its sides and breast into two
half -circles, it forms as extraordinary
and beautiful a sight as one could see.
1E KING OF THE GAY BIRDS AND ITS
THEWONDERFUL SPRAY OF FEATHERS
The gorget bird of paradise lives in
the same region , and is distinguished by
a long tail and a velvety arrangement
of plumes round the head and throat,
of copper colour and golden green .
The king of the gay birds is, however,
the great paradise bird - aa bird half the
size of the long-tailed one, but lovely
beyond description. The chief colour of
the body and wings is deep, rich brown,
varied by tints of black and purple and
violet. The top of the head and neck to the tips, where dainty webs of feather
are coloured like yellow plush , while appear. This bird has a gorgeous
1738
OF NATURELUCKY DULCE
from beneath the eyes and round the 1
lower part of the throat run feathers of
emerald green, from which spring deeper
green feathers in a band across the
forehead and chin . The beak is blue,
and the feet are pink.
The most wonderful feature of this
wonderful bird is a superb spray of
feathers which it erects to cover itself
and look its best . These feathers grow
out from under each wing, rise into the
air, and curve gracefully over in descend
ing plumes, as much as two feet in length.
The plumes are of a deep orange
colour, pale brown at the tip, and they
near the home, and dance and spread
their feathers in the vainest way. On one
of these trees , says Dr. Russel Wallace,
who has studied them in their native
home, a dozen or twenty magnificent
male birds in full plumage may be
seen together. They raise their wings,
stretch out their necks, elevate their
lovely plumes, and keep them con
tinually vibrating, so that the whole
tree is filled with waving plumes in
every variety of attitude and motion.
THEAND
BIRD WITH PLUMES LIKE FANS
A TAIL LIKE A RACKET
We have been speaking of this one as
the king of the birds of paradise , but the
one that the naturalists call the king of
paradise birds is only about six inches
in length, and is distinguished by two
fan -like plumes on the breast, and aa tail
of curved feathers shaped at the end
like a racket . Its feathers are green ,
purple, red and white.
Wilson's bird of paradise , another
member of this family, named after
its discoverer, is almost bare upon
the head, over which two narrow
tracts of feathers form a cross . The
rest of the head is bare , and the
skin a deep blue. From its tail grow
out two long feathers, which cross,
then curve completely, looking like
the handles of a pair of scissors.
As we have a twelve- wired bird of
paradise so we have also a six -plumed
one . The plumes are long, glistening,
wire-like growths, springing from the
back of the head, and bare all the way up
 WELCITELAH
-THE BIRDS OF BEAUTYmarca
ruffle, and a tuſt of silver feathers
upon the beak , which it can cause to lie
flat or stand up at will. No pen could
describe the glories of these birds. They
must be seen When the Zoo is fortu-
nate, it has one or two alive, but they
are hard to keep in captivity. We can
give them the proper sort of food, for
Mexico, and certain mountain slopes.
For beauty of plumage there is no bird
to surpass them . They are as gorgeous
as the birds of paradise, but notwith
the same stately grandeur, for the biggest
of them are small, and the tiniest only
two and a half inches from beak to tail.
Yet they are most wonderful flying birds.

" A MEETING OF PARROTS," PAINTED BY STACY MARKS, R.A.

they like fruit and insects and seeds, The conjurers rightly say that the
but we cannot give them their native quickness of the hand deceives the eye.
air, sunshine, and brilliant climate . Well, the humming-bird's quickness
We have seen in earlier stories how simply makes it impossible for the
birds and animals develop in a special human eye to follow it. It is like the
way in particular parts of the world. The flash of shooting stars. A famous man
wonderful little humming - birds inhabit who has often been near these birds in
only the hot parts of America, Brazil, their native forests has told us how
1739
 VELLANEO
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
very difficult it is to see them . While sipped such honey as the flower con
he was watching a flower he suddenly tains it raises its body again , with
saw something come between his eye and draws its beak , and then flies out back
the bloom . It was a humming-bird , wards, and darts away like a flash .
but it seemed like a grey blur as it Some of the humming-birds can turn
paused for an instant before the flower. right round in the air with a single
There was a look as of four black threads motion ; some seem to dance in the
suspending it in the air. This would be air, while they can all dart from side
the moving forks of the bird's tail . to side in a manner such as to make
There was a grey film as , like lightning, the swallow, which they most resemble,
the bird vibrated its wings ; then , with seem slow and commonplace.
a sharp twitter, it turned. There was a BIRDS & THEIR REMARKABLE POWERS
flash of emerald and sapphire light as
the sun was reflected by its plumage , When young, the humming - bird
and in an instant it had vanished . It might pass for aa strange sort of swallow,
all happened so quickly that the word for its beak is blunt and wide like that
remained unspoken on the watcher's of the young swallow. But as it grows
lips, the thought in his mind had older the beak gets longer and slenderer,
scarcely had time to change. Yet in until the full-grown bird has a bill
that time the bird had flown to the ready to dip into the smallest flower
flower ; it had thrust in its beak, shot to drink the honey which it stores .
out its long tongue, and sucked up the It does not depend wholly upon honey,
honey in the flower ; and it had gone though that is the chief part of its
food. It eats a great many insects.
to a new flower which would furnish the
next portion of its meal. In this respect it is a good friend to
THE HUMMING - BIRD HANGS IN THE man . But it has another value : by
How
AIR SIPPING HONEY FROM A FLOWER going from flower to flower as it does
Everybody who has seen the hum- it carries pollen from one to another,
ming-bird in its native wilds gives us and does for those flowers what bees
the same impression of its marvellous do for others, in making the plant
swiftness. No one can see its wings fruitful.
nove — they are vibrated too quickly. There are nearly five hundred species
And it is because of the rate at which of humming -birds, so it is hopeless for
they move that the bird makes the us to attempt any detailed description .
humming sound which gives it its name . The most remarkable part of their
It lives all day in the air. It is never frame, after their splendid wings, is
tired of flying, unless it be one of the the long beak with its tongue capable
few species which are more like other of being shot out like that of the
birds, and prefer, through weakness of chameleon . The tongue acts like a
wings, to take its food while perching. pump, and the beak is wonderfully
Most of the humming -birds feed when constructed to help .
flying. This is, of course, the habit of E HUMM
THFOREST ING HERMIT - BIRD OF THE
, & A GIANT EIGHT INCHES LONG
other birds - of the swallow and goat
sucker, for example -- but the humming- Among the most famous humming
bird has to hang in the air while sipping birds is the Jamaican , which has two
the honey from a flower. To do this ong feathers growing beyond its tail ,
it possesses wonderful wings for its size. far longer than the body of the bird .
Birds are supposed to be unable to The hermit, with its long beak and long
fly backwards,but the humming -bird tail , haunts the dark forest , eating
is an exception . It can fly backwards insects, instead of seeking honey in
for a little way. When it approaches the sunshine. The sword -bill is the
a flower it inserts its long beak, while longest-beaked of all the humming
its body is raised higher than the flower. birds. Although the bird itseií
As it puts in its beak it lets its body measures only four inches, the male
sink down in the air, as if it were hold- bird has a beak four inches in length ,
ing on to the flower by its beak . But while the female, still better provided,
it does not ; its splendid little wings are has a bill nearly twice the length of
working like steam -engines to keep her body. The giant humming - bird
it afloat in the air . When it has is eight or more inches in length , and
mornimum VITETTYTYYMITIRITTITUIT
1740
 THE WONDERFUL COLOURS OF BIRDS

les

Humming bird
3 inches long

Woodpecker
9 inches long

Macaw Kingfisher
3% feet long 7 inches long

Ноорое
12 inches long

Peacock
7 feet
long

Goldfinch Bird of Paradise

5 inches long I foot2 inches long

Golden
Pheasant
3 % feet
long

Blue Tit
456 inches long

Nature showered beauty upon the humbler creation as well as upon human beings. Some of the birds are as
gorgeous as the rainbow, and m ild scenes and commonplace areas radiant with their glory. Some
of the finest of the birds are shown here, and the figures under each name tell us their size in life,
the length given being in each case the length of the bird measured from point of beak to tip of tail.
IH 1741
THE HANDSOMEST BIRDS IN THE WORLD

The satin bower-bird, who is a member of the crow Java sparrows are common in English aviaries . They
family , is a great gardener and builder , and loves to have smart white feather collars in winter and spring .
make his home beautiful with flowers and gay feathers. The Java sparrow is a type of the weaver - bird.

The great bird of paradise is the biggest of its family ,

and has feathers like velvet as well as the wonderful
spreading tail. The colours in its plumage are gorgeous ,

The gorget bird ofparadise is lovely beyond description The humming -bird , one of the loveliest of living things,
with its colours of black , purple , copper , green and gold . Alies so rapidly that its wings hum like those of a bee.

The twelve -wired bird of paradise has a tail unlike Hundreds of sociable weaver -birds build nests together
any other bird's . The shafts are bare like wires . under one roof until the tree breaks under the weight.

1742
SOME BEAUTY BIRDS OF OTHER LANDS

Hornbills live in Africa and India. Kaffirs in time The toucan, which we see here, has an enormous bill ,
of drought kill a hornbill as an offering for rain. but this is honeycombed with air-cells to make it light.

The laughing jackass of Australia is, as we see here,

really a kingfisher. It loves to mimic the human voice.

The kaka parrot is a member of the kea family , Australia's beautiful lyre-bird is closely related to
but harmless. The kea proper kills sheep for food . our little English wren, though it looks so different.

The grey parrot of West Africa is aa wonderful mimic . Love-birds belong to the parrot family, and though
It can ate beasts , w a song, mock their home is in Africa, they thrive in English
street criers , and imitate the sound of machinery. homes, where they make amusing little companions.

1743
THE EGGS OF OUR BEST - KNOWN BIRDS

The names of these eggs are given on the opposite page

1744
 -THE BIRDS OF BEAUTY

has wings measuring five or six inches deep black. They are handsome, but
across . It hovers over a flower like the they interest us chiefly from their love
smaller ones , but moves more slowly, of beauty. They make their nest like
and seems to gain support from its ordinary birds, but they build avenues
tail, which , while the bird is tapping a of twigs and houses or bowers to
flower, opens and shuts like a fan. play in . Here the two sexes meet.
Of course the beauties of the hum- The male birds show themselves off
ming bird are well known . The racket- and the females are wooed and won by
tailed has two long feathers from the the best among them . But while
tail, and two, like those at the back the wooing is in progress the bower
of the six-plumed paradise bird's head , is a wonderful place. Sometimes it is
bare but glistening to the tip, where several feet high, made of twigs and
the feather elaborately
web g ows out ROBIN'S NEST BULLFINCH'S NEST
decorated .
in the shape of The gay
a racket. Then LANDRAIL feathers which
there are hum other birds
ming - birds have dropped,
WILLOH WREN
with gorgeous WOORHEN
pieces of
crests and STARLINC coloured cloth
ruffs , hum SKYLARK
GOLDEN EACLE REDPOU /CORMORANT) that they can
ming · birds pick up near
with balls of WOOD LARK !
men's homes,
white feathers KIMCFISHER LINNET bleached
round their HERON bones, even
SWALIOW
legs like pow bright ' tools,
der · puffs,
-

they take and

humming MISSEL-THRUSH CARRIOM -CROW KESTREL SPARROW HAWKSEAGULL build into the
birds with bower. But ,
Bi

“ boots ” of SONG -THRUSH

B3 prettiest of all ,
white feathers , REED -WARBLERS
CRESTED WREN they bite off
spangled hum- NICHTINGALE STONE CHAT
orchids and
ming - birds , CREAT TIT
ROOK WHINCHAT
other beauti
humming BLUE TIT
RAVEN BLACKBIRD ful flowers
birds with WACTAIL growing wild
snow - capped
-

MEADODHIMIT near them ,

COLDFINCH weave
heads, with and
JACKDAWY HANYFINCH LAPWING
long beaks, IMAGPIE HEDCESPARROW
them into the
with short decorations.
beakswith up (ROBIN BLACKCAP SPOTTED
The flowers
curving beaks, (NICHTJAR WREN ) FLYCATCHER fade , of course ,
YELLOW BUITINC TREE PIPIT
and beaks but the dead
bending down ones are taken
wards like the out each day
scimitar of an and thrown
Indian prince. CHAFFINCH'S MEST WYREN'S NEST behind the
We can never bower, while
THE NAMES OF THE BIRDS' EGGS ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE
say that we fresh flowers
have exhausted the beauties of bird- are put in their place. There are
land until we have seen these visions of different sorts of bower-birds, but
splendour in their own homes. The sun . in all the habit of building bowers is
birds resemble them and are often called the same. One of them , the Papuan
humming -birds, but they belong to a bird, makes a hut , two feet high, at the
different order. foot of a tree, roofs it with moss, and
We must turn back again for a builds a gallery round it .
moment to the crow family to make This combining of several birds to
the acquaintance of the bower -birds. build an assembly hall reminds us all
The males are a shining blue - black , of those remarkable birds , the weavers.
except on the wings, where they are They form a large family, some of
Exo XXX
1745
D7A
II
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
them very beautiful , like the whydah advances, and the cheeks, neck and
bird . The sociable weavers are even head are an unbroken black .
more ingenious builders than the bower- We have read already of some of the
birds. They collect vegetable fibres and loveliest birds, like the pheasants.
weave them round the branch of a tree. Now we come to another of the big
This forms the thatch, or roof of the beauties, the lyre-bird. It has a

dwelling. Underneath they make a strikingly beautiful tail , shaped like the
great number of nests, where as many musical instrument called the lyre.
as three hundred birds may have their Only the male bird has this, and not
homes, all under the same roof. There until he is four years old . The lyre
they dwell together in peace, each bird has a gift for imitating the songs
pair of birds having their own nest and and cries of other birds. In that he has
rearing their little ones. a decided advantage over our most fam
THEWEAVER
THE
-BIRDS ANDTHEIRNESTS, ous tailed domestic bird, the peacock.
Perhaps because it is a comparatively
In the following year they make new common bird in our parks and private
nests. These they join on to the layers gardens, we do not realise what a
of nests made in the previous year. supremely beautiful bird the peacock
To do so they have to make the roof is. No other bird has more perſectly
bigger , and in course of time, as layer coloured plumage, but in spite of
after layer of nests is added, the huge that the peacock is a disagreeable
structure looks like a thatched cottage. bird, with a hoarse screech fornear.
its call,
Finally it becomes so heavy that it which can be heard far and In
breaks the bough of the tree upon India, of which country it is a native,
which it is placed, and a fresh start on the cries of these birds, when assembled
another branch or tree has to be made. in hundreds in the woods, become
The Java sparrow , a favourite bird almost intolerable to one who dislikes
in our aviaries, which has grey wings, discordant sounds.
black headand tail, white cheeksand TWASTRABRINGSUP ITS YOUNG IN PRISON
pink beak, is a type of weaver -bird .
They are very sociable birds. In the It is well for him that he is such a
house at which this story is written beauty in appearance, or the, peacock
there is an aviary, where, among the would never be tolerated in private
birds, are two Java sparrows and two life. When the courting season is over,
doves . The Java sparrows have not his fine feathers disappear, and he slinks
built nests ; they always go to bed withaway until new ones grow. Then he
the doves. The doves roost high up comes out again in all his glory, proud
on a ledge of cork at the top of the as only a peacock knows how to be.
aviary . One Java sparrow , when even- With all their splendour, some of the
ing comes on , always perches itself on beauty birds, it must be admitted , are
the shoulders of one of the doves , to be regarded as a little freakish , and
while its mate takes its place on the some of them are not all that could
ledge of the cork, under the breast be desired in their ways. Among the
and between the legs of the second strange birds let us take first the hand
dove. There is no quarrelling about some but queer toucan and the hornbill.
positions unless the doves are late in The toucan is a bird with a huge beak
going to bed . Then the little birds like a small pelican's , but not soft like
chase their big bedf ellows about , hop that great fisherman's bag-net. It is
on to their shoulders and begin to notched like a saw, and as it is brightly
peck them gently , or pluck at their coloured it gives the bird the strangest
66

feathers, as if to say, Come, come, appearance. This beak is not so heavy

it's past our bedtime."
' HE LYRE - BIRD AND THE PEACOCK ,
THE THE
BIRDS WITH BEAUTIFUL TAILS
The Java sparrows are not as gor-
geous as their distant cousin , the whydah
bird, but they are still handsome and
very interesting. The white feathers on
their cheeks disappear as summer
TOOTEROCED XITO
1746
as it looks, for it contains air-sacs which
make it light . The hornbills share
this advantage . They have big bills,
with helmets of horn on the top, and
these are lightened in the same way .
The hornbills are famous for a curious
fact . When the female has laid her
eggs in a hollow tree, the male makes a
 -THE BIRDS OF
prisoner of her by plastering up the
entrance, leaving only a small slit
through which he can pass food for
her and the young ones. She seems to
assist in this . He does not let her and
the family come out until the young ones
are nearly full grown . The male bird,
who has to find the food, is worn almost
to a skeleton during this long time.
The king of the handsomeclimbers is
undoubtedly the parrot. We cannot
stay here to glance at the whole tribe ,
for, when we sort out the many forms of
parrots , macaws , love- birds, and cock-
atoos, there are more than 500 species
to deal with . The handsome little
parrakeet which is so often seen in
England has its home in Australia .
The grey parrot is a native of West
Africa. Macaws come mainly from the
warm parts of America and from
India . When wild the birds all eat
fruit and seeds . One species , however,
the kea, has become a flesh -eating bird.
THE STRANGESTORY OF HOW THE KEA
This is one of the few instances of a
bird's nature changing while actually
under the observation of man . No.
body knows for certain what has caused
it to change, but the kea has become a
deadly enemy of the sheep-farmer in
New Zealand. Its food had always been
insects and fruit. One day, in 1869,
a kea was found standing on the body
of a dead sheep , tearing away at the
wool. Such a thing had never before
been known to happen . Ever since
then the kea has been a bird of prey.
The change could not have come as
suddenly as that ; the attacks of the
kea must have been made before, but
it had never been observed. Now
two or three keas attack a sheep' to-
gether, and by means of their long,
cruel beaks they kill it . Then they
peck open its body to reach the rich
fat inside.
What could have brought about
such a change ? Some scientists be-
lieve that this may be the explanation :
There is a curious growth in New
Zealand which looks so much like a
mass of wool that it is called the
vegetable sheep. The kea , by pecking
away at this, was able to find grubs This has a fine crest upon its head , and
and insects which it liked. Then it
attaeked real sheep in mistake for the
vegetable sheep, and pecked away to
poden
1747
BEAUTYRALLER
find its customary food until it reached
food which it liked better. Since then
it has remained a flesh - eater, and is the
most deadly foe the sheep-farmer has.
THAT MOCKS
THEMANLAUGHING
IN THE
BIRD
AUSTRALIAN WILDS
А
While we are thinking of Austra
lasian birds, we must not forget the
laughing jackass. This is a bird which
could beat the parrot, or even the
famous Indian starling - called the
myna -- at laughing . Parrots and
mynas , as we all know , marvellously
imitate human speech . Although they
are very wise birds they do not under
stand what they are saying. The
mewing of a cat, which they imitate
perfectly, has no more meaning for them
than a song which they may learn to
sing. So the laughter of the laughing
jackass has no meaning for the bird .
Ít has a voice , and uses it in this way.
It follows a man in the wilds where there
are trees, and perches near him , chuck
ling and laughing all the night and
every time he shows himself in the open .
The laughing jackass is really a
kingfisher, belonging to a tribe of birds
which has many species. They live in
nearly every country. Most of them
eat fish, which they catch by darting
into the water ; others live on insects and
reptiles, and even rob nests of young.
THE
BEAWTIFULA KINGEISHER
THEBIRD NOTE AND
A BELL
The English kingfisher is a beautiful
bird, which at one time was very scarce,
owing to thoughtless women wearing its
plumage in their hats . It flies like a
swallow over the water, then , when
it sees a fish , dives down like a flash .
It can hang in the air like aa kestrel , and
can drop into the water with the swift
ness of a gannet . Some of the king
fishers are said to build their nests of
the bones of fish which they have
eaten. The kingfisher is one of the
handsomest and most interesting of all
English birds, and every bird -lover
rejoices to know that its numbers in
this country seem now to be on the
increase .
We find more strange beauties among
the family of birds called chatterers.
The most striking is the umbrella -bird.
though the sides of its neck are naked , it
possesses a lovely lappet composed of
loose feathers hanging from beneath the
Toen
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
throat . When it desires to callits mate,
it raises its crest , moves its lappet in
stately fashion , and pipes loudly. A plumage, and of far larger size.
more remarkable piping bird is known as
the bell-bird . There are four species
of this bird , of which the most famous
is a pure glossy white. Its call is like
the note, clear and melodious, of a
beautiful bell . Sometimes it utters only
one note, then rests . At other times
it utters several notes, which then
sound like a blacksmith playing on his
anvil with a hammer. When several
of the birds call and answer, the effect
is startling, but beautiful.
THEAND
STRA NGE SONG OF THE MANAKIN
THE WAYS OF THE HOOPOE
In the same family are the manakins,
marvellously -coloured little birds ; and
the cotingas, nearly related to the bell-
birds, but far morebrilliant in plumage.
The manakin has a strange little song,
which he utters when courting. He
dances, too, in the funniest way, as if
trying to show how much more agile he
is than his fellows . Two rivals meet
on the bough of a tree, sing their song
and leap into the air, each in turn,
always rising to the same height and
always descending upon the exact spot
from which they rose . But if they
discover that they are watched by
enemies, they disappear with remark-
able speed .
Here they have aa rival in the
hoopoe . It is a lovely bird , which
would regularly make its home in
England but for the guns of " sports-
men who think it manly to shoot
them . It is of a rich russet hue, with a
beautiful crest upon the head and with
wings marked out in black and white.
Its mortal enemy is the hawk . The
moment one approaches, the hoopoe
lays itself flat on the ground , lowers its
crest , and spreads out its wings, and
what looks like a little heap of rags
remains safe, unsuspected.
THREACOCK BLACK
HEADED -OF
NUN-THE -ROCK
, AND THE, THE
TINY TROGON
Returning to the chatterers, we must
notice the brilliantly- coloured cock -of-
the- rock , famous for the great crest
which hides its nostrils, and the re-
splendent orange plumage, for the sake
of which the unfortunate bird is merci-
jessly shot. The crest of the cock -of-the-
ock brings to hind he bird which is
in many respects like a cuckoo , the
rucu ET non
1748
plantain - eater. But it is far handsomer
than that bird , with its crest and gay
When
perched at the top of the high trees
in which it makes its home, it gambols
and plays and mews like a cat. There
is another bird , a little one, the black
headed nun , which mews, too , but like
a tiny kitten . Another gaudy crested
bird is the trogon , of which an American
species, called the quetzal, is distin
guished by a long streaming tail,which
seems to help rather than hinder its
strong and rapid flight.
All the birds considered in this story
so far are day birds, but we have one in
England which goes out to work with
the bats and owls . This is the goat
sucker. It has had that name for ages
and ages, because it flies with its hairy
beak wide open , and people believed
that it drank the milk of goats, but
really it lives on moths and insects.
Its mouth is always open so that it may
catch these as it flies. It is a friend ,
not an enemy, of the farmer, and a very
handsome friend, too, with its beautiful
mottled plumage.
S THAT
UTY BIRDHAT
BEAWOMAN'S DIE TO MAKE A
One member of this bird's family has
enormously long streamers in its tail,
while another has feathers which float
far out behind the flying bird, the web
of the feather growing from the tip half
way up, and leaving the upper half bare .
The proper name of this bird is the
nightjar.
The birds of which we have been
reading help to make the world more
lovely . The world would be a dull
place without the wonderful colour of
birds and flowers, and we ought to
hate everything that robs the world of
its beauty and makes it in any way a
less lovely place. A cruel fashion has
for many years encouraged women to
wear fine feathers that can only be had
by destroying beautiful birds, often with
great cruelty. But more and more these
fashions are dying out, and gentle
women are more and more refusing to
wear a hat made beautiful by such cruel
means. So that in the future the birds
of beauty will, let us hope, have fewer
enemies than they have had in the past ,
and will liveand flourishand help to make
the world a beautiful place to live in.
The next stories of Birds begin on 1839.
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS Les
LETTY'S GLOBE
When Letty had scarce pass'd her third glad year,
And her young , artless words began to flow
One day we gave the child a colour'd sphere
of the wide earth, that she might mark and know ,
By tint and outline, all its sea and land.
She patted all the world ; old empires peep'd
Between her baby fingers ; her soft hand
Waswelcome at allfrontiers. How sheleap'd,
And laugh'd , and prattled in her world -wide bliss :
But when we turn'd her sweet unlearnéd eye
On our own isle, she raised a joyous cry ,
" Oh ! yes, I see it, Letty's home is there !"
And, while she hid all England with a kiss,
Bright over Europe fell her golden hair.
C. Tennyson - Turner.

O HOW THE MAPS ARE MADE

As it ever struck smaller pictures. We
HASyou as a won
CONTINUED FROM 1644
make up maps of
derful fact how it counties , or even of
comes about that a picture of little districts and single towns,
the world , which is a round ball, so that men may spread these
can be drawn on a flat piece of pictures before them and know
paper ? Try to make a piece of exactly what the places are like
paper fit round a globe, and you in every detail . You have often seen
will see how impossible it is. a traveller wandering through a town
It is impossible to make a perfectly like London with a map in his hand.
true picture of the round earth on It is wonderful to think that he ,
a flat piece of paper . And let us say who is so small in the midst of even
at once that no map in the world, our streets, yet holds in his hand a
however beautifully it may be done, picture of the whole great city.
is really quite true. Every map is But a child may hold in his hands
wrong — just a little wrong ; but this a picture of the whole world . We
small amount of error does not have made our little tiny maps, bit
matter, because it is known. Error by bit , and then we have added these
is only dangerous where it is un- together, and the whole picture makes
known . Where it is known , we are up the picture of the earth , and a little
aware of it , and make allowance for child can hold it in its hands. If you
it. That is important to remember will take into your hands a school.
always. room globe, or a map of the two hemi
In a map we can see exactly what spheres, and think what these things
is the shape of a country, and which really mean, it will help you to
are the oceans that sweep against understand how interesting and also
its shores . But in such a picture as a how wonderful map-making is .
BE

map of Europe we should never see For you hold in your hands, which
how the land lies between London are very small and weak, the pic
and York , and so we go on splitting ture of the vast earth, which has
up the earth into smaller pictures millions of men and women living
still. We make maps of France, maps upon it , millions of animals, millions
of Germany, and maps of England. of trees, and which consists of
Here we can see the chief rivers of tremendous mountain ranges , enor
these countries, and their mountains mous oceans , and vast continents
or hills , and the names of their chief of land . Man has been able, you
towns. But we are not yet satisfied, see , to make so tiny a picture of
and so, we split up the earth into the earth that a child can hold it ,
TURE

too
1749
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGS
study it , and understand it . Now , same lines on his canvas or piece of
maps and globes are interesting things paper. When he has done this, he
to study and look at and wonder will be able to see precisely where the
about, but it is in the books written different details of the picture touch
concerning these maps and globes that the lines , and so he will be able to
we really learn how interesting is the make his own picture in that respect
an exact copy of the
other.
It is something
like this in drawing
a picture of the earth .
Men make a round
globe, and mark upon
it where the North
Pole should be and
where the South Pole
should be . After
that they draw a

number of lines from

the North Pole to the
South Pole down
wards and across the
globe. The lines that
This is a birdseye view of the part of London that lies round the Houses of run downwards they
a

Parliament. Even if we could take a picture of the whole of London from a call meridians of
balloon, it would be hard to find our way from it, so crowded is the great city. longitude , and the
world on which we live. And so we lines that run round the globe they call
are going to read about all the interest. parallels of latitude. There are 360 me
ing things man has discovered about the ridians, or degrees, of longitude, and the
different lands which make up the space between each at the Equator
earth . We shall then be able to look measures one degree, or 60 geographical
at a map and feel that
Parliame

we know what kind Eorigny

Downings
Strent

Boanor
of climate a country Saint office Irade
Μ

Homd!
et

India
ΗΤ
Ε
S

has, what kinds of

Jam NetScotland
wild animals wander hope şa
ment

Yarta

there , how the people Park

Government
Unics
earn food and clothes Walk
Birdcage G
12 WESTMINSTER
BRIDGESTA
nk

G ! eorge Si
Margaretss

for themselves in that

Bridge St. Westminster Bridge
ta

Fountain
part of the world , and
Emb

pital
YardtS

Ts! ho s's
Alber

what trees and flowers Gauth art

Hosma

METROPOLITANRAILWAY BroadSanctuary
and plants grow Hospital arppa
there ; we shall come 0
House
to know everything to ria eet Abbey
that is to be known Vic Str , of
R.

about this wonderful Dearls Parliafhent

Yand
earth on which we p are
live . Gre
Now let us start
and see how a pic . This is a map of the part of London shown above, with the streets made clear.
ture of the earth It is quite easy for anyone holding plans like this to find his way about. Though
can be made. Have you would only appear as a dot on this plan, you can hold in your handa map show
ing you the whole of a big city with the names of the streets and buildings on it.
you ever seen an

artist copying another artist's picture ? miles. Every tenth meridian is usually
If he wishes to be quite accurate shown on the globe. The parallels of
in his copy, he will draw a number latitude are drawn in a different way.
of lines up and down the picture he A line is first drawn right round the globe
is copying, and then lines across it , in the centre ; this is called the Equator.
and then he will draw exactly the Then eight lines are drawn above the
1750
 -HOW A MAP IS MADE
Equator, and eight below it , making Let us see if we can understand
seventeen in all . The degrees between Mercator's Projection . It is obtained
each of these lines is also counted by placing a cylinder of paper round
ten . The Equator line is marked a properly marked glass globe, and by
nought , and the lines then go 10, 20, means ofa light getting the shadows of
30 , 40, 50, 60 , 70, 80, up to the North the meridiansand parallels thrown upon
Pole, which is inarked go, REand 10 to the paper . These shadows are drawn,
80 in the same way down
PH
E
to the HEM or cylinder of paper is
and when the scroll
ER IS ISP
South Pole , T HE
M LAND HER stretched out ,
WA E
which is also we find that
marked go. the curved
So now you lines on the
see that the globe appear
globe is lined upon it in
and crossed all perfectly
over, like a straight lines,
bird -cage, or up and down ,
like that copy and from side
picture of to side . In
which we stead of
spokea mo Here are two views of the globe, showing the land and the troublesome
ment ago . It water. They are called hemispheres, which means half the curves , which
is , therefore, globe. The lines running down are called meridiansof longi- would sadly
easy enough tude; those that run round are called degrees of latitude. trouble a mar
to put in the different countries . All iner in shaping his vessel's course, we
that we require is the report of sailors, have on these maps straight , clean lines.
who come back from sailing about the It is true that these shadow lines are
world with tales of new lands . They not quite accurate , and that on a Mer
know exactly how the shape and cator's map certain countries appear
points of these new lands larger than they are. But the
touch and come away from shape of these countries is quite
the meridians of longitude accurate , and sailors need
and the parallels of latitude ; never make a mistake if they
and as soon as they tell us on go by this wonderful map.
which degrees of latitude and We must not suppose that
longitude such a place is the end of map-making has
situate, we can safely mark come . Even if Mercator's
it in on our globe . Projection lasts for hundreds
But what are we to do of years, the business of map
about maps ? People cannot making will still go on. For
put a globe in their pocket our business now lies in filling
when they go a journey, and , up the picture. There are many
nice enough asglobes are, they This picture shows us the parts of the earth about which
cannot be made big enough way the Mercator's projec- we know scarcely anything.
to give us all the details tionemap, of the world is Towns may exist of which no
. By placing
we want to know about the inside a glass globewith the manat present knows the name.
earth. So we have to try to lines of latitudeand longi- Hidden deep in the midst of
reproduce on a flat piece of tydemarked
the lines
on it,shadows
thrown
enormous continents, there
paper the picture of the earth on a scroll of paper round may be living atthe present mo
that we have painted on the the globe, and these lines ment races of men and women
globe. Perhaps you have are drawn on the paper. of whom we know nothing
heard the name Mercator. “ Mercator's people who never heard of the balloon, the
Projection ” is found in every good atlas. telephone, the motor-car, or the railway
Mercator's real name was Gerhard engine.
Kramer ; he was a German , and lived And so it is that the map-maker sits at
in the sixteenth century. To him , and home waiting for the explorer to return
an Englishman named Edward Wright, with wonder-tales of towns and lakes
we owe the wonderful maps which are and mountains, ready to add another
called " Mercator's Projection ." touch to his picture of the earth .
1751
 Eu.

THE LIFE OF A SPONGE

murtum

It is odd to think that the sponge we use in the bath was once alive, but so it is. The sponge lives in the
sea, breathing oxygen like a fish. Water is drawn into it through little pores, and the food the water contains
is devoured by cells, the water, which has no value, passing out by the big holes which we see in the sponge .
They are really canals, and in them worms and tiny shell-fish, and even small crabs, make their homes ."
சபை DOMUTDOODOOM
1752
annan.mannaramaanamaammannanoramanananaanamaam
manammanammanamam

Ammammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm 13 WHERE THE SPONGES COME FROM

ELEKTROTU
DOTTEEMME
Here is a sponge-fishing fleet being got ready in the harbour of Hydra , Greece, to sail for sponge- fishing. The
sponges live in warm , tideless seas off the coasts of Turkey and Greece, off Florida in America , and off the
Bahama Islands and West Indies. They make their homes upon rocks, or on the mud, or even upon other animals.

Thefleet has started, and here we get a view of the This is one of the sponge- fishing fleet, sailing before a
inside of one of the boats, and the fishermen at ease. favourable wind towards the home of the sponges.

This boathas reached the fishing -ground, and a diver is going down, in his diving-dress, to drag up the sponges
that lie from 40 to 60 feet below the surface of the water. The tube which we see to the left of the diver will
send down fresh air for him to breathe. He will uncoil the rope in his hand so that it may serve as a guide
to him in the water, and by jerking the rope he can signal to his comrades to pull him up with his sponges.
MONDO
1753
 SOLO UELQUERO
Ingmanna Wagmore Em

THE SPONGE-DIVERS AT WORK IN THE SEA

ALLOMILAMALLA
WEWELL
ALL
ALLE
SUL
CULO
Here we see the boats on the sea,and the divers in the water, stripping the spongesſrom the rocks. Themen
who wear diving-dress can stay under water for hours. The man who is diving from the boat on the left has no
diving -dress. He will not be able to stay in the water more than two or three minutes, or he would be very ill.

Here the sponges are being roughly cleaned after being brought ashore by the boats. There is a thin skin over
the sponge, and in all the pores and canals is a slimy, sticky substance, which is the life -matter of the sponge .
The skin has to be removed, and the sticky substance squeezed out to make the sponges clean and fit for sale.
PETITIE
UITTI
பயணணணணணணண
N

This is a scene in Florida , to which a sponge-fishing fleet has returned. The sponge-fishers build the enclosures
of timber in the water which we see here , so that in them they may store their newly-caught sponges. The
action of the water makes it more easy for the fishermen to remove the slime and skin of the sponges.
becom
1754
ணனையவை
* LTURORI ROKY.
•%

4.O
PREPARING SPONGES FOR THE BATH

Here are the sponges broughtin from the fishing-ground at sea by the two boats which wesee on the left and
right of the picture. They are big, good sponges which have been gathered by hand from the depths of the sea.
Some divers tear the sponges away with pronged forks, but this spoils the sponges, and they are sold at low prices.

The sponges,having been washed and cleaned,are put outto drain onwooden racks,and then sent from this place in
Florida to Europe . They are carried away by steamships, most of them coming to Europe. Sponges are
valuable not onlyThein photographs
the bathroom, but for use by doctors and nurses in treating patients in our hospitals.
in these pages
are supplied by Messrs. Cresswell Brothers & Schmidt, London .
THE NEXT PICTURES OF FAMILIAR THINGS BEGIN ON PAGE 1825
TDOOR con DD
1755
THE SAD AND BEAUTIFUL EFFIE DEANS

This painting by Sir John Millais shows the young and beautiful but unhappy Scotswoman, Effie Deans,
and her sweetheart, George Staunton, whose wife she became. Poor Effie was fated to undergo a terrible trial,
as an old sweetheart of Staunton's, out of jealousy, stole away theirchild, and Effie was accused of its death.
Her sister Jeanie walked from Edinburgh to London, and pleaded with the queen to have Effie pardoned for a
crime of which the poor woman was afterwards proved innocent. This story is told in " The Heart of Midlothian ."
1756
 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
THE
Midlothian” andScott's
“ Old Mortality. " The former is one of his great stories,
and the heroine, Jeanie Deans, is one of the finest characters in fiction. She is drawn
from real life. “ Old Mortality" was the name given to an old man who used to wander
about the graveyards in Scotland, keeping clean the inscriptions on the tombstones
of the Covenanters, thus showing his love for those who had fought the good fight
for religious liberty. The story named after him tells of the ruthless attempt made
by the Governments of Charles II. and James II. to force episcopacy, or the govern
ment of the Church by bishops, upon the people of Scotland, who hated that form
of religious control. The Covenanters were people pledged to a covenant, or
sacred bond, which bound them to stand together in opposition to the projects of the
king in 1638, and to oppose Popery and preserve the Reformed Church of Scotland.

A WOMAN'S HEROISM
Being the Story of “ The Heart of Midlothian
MARGAR ET MUR.
DOCKSON was
CONTINUED FROM 1652
88 kept her own lover,
Reuben Butler , a

the wife of a favourite Presbyterian minister,

servant of a clergyman
named Staunton, rector of
Willingham . She had a daughter ;
Mr. Staunton had a son . The
daughter was a beautiful but very
unsettled girl ; the rector's son was
equally foolish, and his father sent
him abroad .
George, as the young man was
named, resolved never to see his father
again . He led a life of wild adventure.
Arriving in Scotland, he became ac-
quainted with one Wilson, a smuggler.
He also became acquainted with Effie
Deans, the daughter of a Scottish
peasant. He planned to run away to
some retreat with Effie Deans.
About this time a friend tried to
bring about friendliness between father
and son . The father sent his son a
large sum of money, but wrote dis-
owning him for ever. Stung by this
letter, George Staunton joined Wilson
in a perilous smuggling adventure.
The two men were captured and con-
demned . By the self-sacrifice of
Wilson, however , Staunton escaped .
Meanwhile, Effie Deans was arrested
and condemned for causing the death
of their little child . As a matter of
fact , the infant had been stolen away
by Madge Wildfire, the daughter of
Margaret Murdockson. Convinced of
her half- sister's innocence, Jeanie
Deans, who, because of Effie's trouble,
MTB MID
1757
at a distance, decided to
UTTTTT walk to London to petition the
king (George II . ) for a pardon.
Jeanie, when she arrived in
London , was fortunate enough to
enlist the sympathy of the Duke of
Argyll, and by this nobleman's in
fluence was enabled to see the queen .
The description of this interview ,
which took place in one of the Royal
gardens at Richmond, is one of the
finest passages in the whole book.
The duke explained the singular law
under which Effie Deans had received
sentence of death, and detailed the
' affectionate exertions which Jeanie
had made on behalf of her sister, for
whose sake she was willing to sacrifice
all but truth and conscience.
Queen Caroline listened with atten
tion . She was rather fond, it must
be remembered, of an argument , and
soon found matter in what the duke
told her for raising objections to his
request.
It appears to me, my lord , ” she
replied, that this is a severe law .
But still, it is adopted upon good
grounds, I am bound to suppose, as
the law of the country, and the girl
has been convicted under it . The
very presumptions which the law
construes into a positive proof of
guilt exist in her case ; and all that
your Grace has said concerning the
WTHINE /
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
possibility of her innocence may be
a very good argument for annulling the
Act of Parliament, but cannot, while it
stands good, be admitted in favour of
any individual convicted upon the
statute . "
The duke saw and avoided the snare ,
for he was conscious that , by replying
to the argument , he must have been
inevitably led to a discussion , in the
course of which the queen was likely to
be hardened in her own opinion, until
she became obliged , out of mere respect
to consistency, to let the criminal suffer.
HER
SISTER BEFORE QUEEN CAROLINE
“ If your Majesty ," he said , “ would
condescend to hear my poor country-
woman herself, perhaps she may find an
advocate in your own heart , more able
than I am, to combat the doubts sug-
gested by your understanding."
The queen seemed to consent, and
the duke made a signal for Jeanie to
advance from the spot where she had
hitherto remained . Her Majesty could
not help smiling at the awe-struck
manner in which the quiet , demure
figure of the little Scotswoman ad-
vanced towards her, and yet more at the
first sound of her broad Northern
accent.
But Jeanie had a voice low and sweetly
toned, an admirable thing in woman , and
besought “ her leddyship to have pity
on a poor misguided young creature,
in tones so affecting that, like the notes
of some of her native songs, provincial
vulgarity was lost in pathos.
66
Stand up , young woman,” said the
queen , but in a kind tone. And, after
a few questions as to the Scottish laws,
her Majesty asked how Jeanie had
travelled up from Scotland.
DESCRIBES HER LONG WALK
JEAROM
FROM EDINBURGH TO LONDON
" Upon my foot mostly, madam ,"
was the reply .
66
What, all that immense way on
foot ? How far can you walk
day ? "
Five-and-twenty miles and a bit-
tock . ”
66
And a what ? ” said the queen ,
looking towards the Duke of Argyll.
“ And about five miles more, " replied
the duke.
“ And I thought I was a good walker,"
said the queen ; " but this shamesme.”
" May your leddyship never hae sae
weary a heart that ye canna be sensible
of the weariness of the limbs ," said Jeanie.
)
That came better off," thought the
duke. “ It's the first thing she has said
to the purpose."
Poor Jeanie, it should be explained ,
had uttered certain remarks that could
have borne a special and, for her, a
dangerous meaning, in her replies to the
queen's inquiries ; and it had been
arranged that when she trod on dan
gerous ground the duke should raise his
hand to his chin .
“ And I didna just a'thegither walk
the hail way neither, for I had whiles
the cast of a cart ; and I had the cast
of a horse from Ferrybridge and divers
other easements ,” said Jeanie, cutting
short her story, for she observed the
duke made the sign he had fixed upon .
“ With all these accommodations,"
answered the queen , you must have
had a very fatiguing journey , and, I
fear, to little purpose ; since, if the king
were to pardon your sister , in all prob
ability it would do her little good, for I
suppose your people of Edinburgh
would hang her out of spite ? "
HOOPEANLE IDEANS CAUTIOUS
FOR THE QUEEN IN, PROVED MATCH
A SPEECH
This reference was to the Porteous
Riots, with a description of which the
story opens. Captain Porteous com
manded the guard at the execution of
Wilson , the smuggler , and, fearing a
rescue after the escape of Staunton ,
ordered his men to fire on the mob .
Seventeen persons were killed or
wounded . About two months later
on June 22nd, 1736 -— Porteous was
found guilty of murder. The king being
then in Hanover, the queen granted
Porteous a reprieve. At night the mob
broke open the prison, the old Tolbooth
or
(6
Heart of Midlothian ,” as it was
called , took out the officer, and hanged
him to a post in the grass market.
“ She will sink herself now outright,”
a thought the duke . But he was wrong.
>)
She was confident,” she said ,
' that baith town and country wad
rejoice to see his Majesty taking com
passion on a poor unfriended creature . "
66
Hark, you young woman , had you
any friends engaged in the Porteous
mob ? "
“ No, madam ," answered Jeanie,
happy that the griestion was SO
Yr rueMOITOTOXITETIT COOTY
1758
 mmmmmmm
-THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
framed that she could, with a good
conscience, answer it in the negative.
)
“ But I suppose," continued the
queen , “ if you were possessed of such
a secret , you would hold it a matter of
conscience to keep it to yourself ? ”
“ I would pray to be directed and
guided what was the line of duty,
madam ," answered Jeanie.
“ Yes ; and take that which suited
your own inclinations,” was the reply.
NE WORD FROM THE KING'S MOUTH
ONHOW MUCH IT MIGHT DO
“ If it like you , madam ," said
(6
Jeanie, “ I would hae gaen to the end
of the earth to save the life of John
Porteous , or any other unhappy man
in his condition ; but I might lawfully
doubt how far I am called upon to
be the avenger of his blood , though it
may become the civil magistrate to do
So. He is dead and gane to his place,
and they that have slain him must
answer for their ain act. But my sister,
my puir sister, Effie, still lives, though
her days and hours are numbered !
" She still lives, and a word
the king's mouth might restore her to
a broken -hearted old man , that never
in his daily and nightly exercise forgot
to pray that his Majesty might be blessed
with a long and prosperous reign, and
that his throne and the throne of his
posterity might be established
righteousness.
Oh , madam , if ever ye kend what it
was to sorrow for, and with , a sinning
and a suffering creature, whose mind
is so tossed that she can be neither
ca'd fit to live or die , have some com-
passion on our misery ! Save an
honest house from dishonour, and an
unhappy girl from a dreadful death !
JE POWER AND PATHOS OF AN HONEST
THE WOMAN'S SIMPLE WORDS
Alas ! It is not when we sleep soft
and wake merrily ourselves that we
think on other people's sufferings.
Our hearts are waxed light within us
then, and we are for righting our ain
wrangs and fighting our ain battles.
But when the hour of trouble comes
to the mind or to the body—and seldom
may it visit your leddyship — and when
the hour of death comes , that comes
to high and low - lang and late may
it be yours ! Oh , my leddy, then it
isna what we have dune for oursel's,
but what we hae dune for others,
1759
000
that we think on maist pleasantly .'
And the thought that ye hae inter
vened to sparethe puir thing's life will
be sweeter in that hour, come when it
may , than if a word of your mouth
could hang the hail Porteous mob at
the tail of a tow .”
Tear followed tear down Jeanie's
checks as, her features glowing and
quivering with emotion, she pleaded
her sister's cause with a pathos which
AND was at once simple and solemn.
“ This is eloquence," said her Majesty
to the Duke of Argyll. “ Young 6
woman ,” she continued , addressing
herself to Jeanie, “ I cannot grant a
pardon to your sister ; but you shall not
want any warm intercession with his
Majesty. Take this housewife case," she
continued , putting a small embroidered
needle-case into Jeanie's hands ; " do
not open it now , but at your leisure
you will find something in it which will
remind you that you have had an
interview with Queen Caroline."
UEEN CAROLINE'S GIFT TO JEANIE AND
of QUE HOW SHE KEPT HER PROMISE
Thus ended the interview. Inside
the needle- case was the usual assort
ment of silk and needles, with scissors,
tweezers, etc. , and in the pocket was a
bank- bill for fifty pounds.
Jeanie was delighted with the case ,
in especially as it bore the queen's name ,
but was with difficulty persuaded by
the duke to retain the bank -note, as
that seemed so very large a sum of
money to the poor Scotswoman.
Queen Caroline kept her promise,
and Effie Deans was pardoned. Staunton
succeeded to his family title with Effie
as his wife. Soon afterwards, however,
he was shot by a gipsy boy, who turned
out to be his own son, who had been
carried away by Madge Wildfire, and
for whose supposed murder Effie had
almost suffered death . So that in the
death of Staunton there was a tragic
retribution .
Effie retired to a convent , and Jeanie
married Reuben Butler, the minister
who had been her faithful friend
throughout her troubles.
66
Happy in each other, in the pros
perity of their family, and the love and
honour of all who knew them , this simple
pair lived beloved , and died lamented ,"
are the last words of the author on the
devoted Jeanie and her husband, Reuben .
 ODOROLL
IN THE DAYS OF THE COVENANTERS
Being the Story of “ Old Mortality "
story5th,begins
TheMay on the morning of
66
1679, when the annual
Wapinschaw ," or weapon-show, was
beingheld in the upper ward of Clydes-
dale. This festival, which the authori.
ties favoured because it attracted
young men to military exercises and
sports, was regarded by the Presby-
terians with disfavour. At the festival
each Crown vassal was required to
appear with such muster of men and
armour as he was bound to make by
his “ fief ” —which meant a piece of land
held on condition of military service.
THREE
THESHOOTING YOUNG MEN WHO
AT THE POPINJAY
One of the sports was that of shooting
at the popinjay . In this three young
men greatly distinguished themselves.
They were Lord Evandale , a suitor of
Edith Bellenden , granddaughter of Lady
Margaret Bellenden, of the Tower of
Tillietudlum ; Henry Morton, son of
a deceased Presbyterian colonel ; and
a young man of humble rank, who
kept his face muffled in his cloak .
The issue was between Lord Evandale
and Henry Morton ,, and the latter
won , to the dissatisfaction , among
others, of Lady Margaret, whose hus-
band had fallen in one of the battles in
which Colonel Morton , of Milnwood,
had taken part before he joined the
Royalists .
Among the merry -makers at the
Wapinschaw were a sergeant and a
private of Claverhouse's Life Guards,
Bothwell and Halliwell by name. It
suited the humour of Bothwell to test
the loyalty of a stranger who was
among them . Dissatisfied by the
stranger's manner of drinking the toast
put to him , Bothwell was proceeding
to stronger measures, when Morton
intervened on the stranger's behalf.
HE STRANGER AT THE SPORTS AND HIS
The man, however, stepped forward ,
and , saying that this was his quarrel ,
asked the sergeant if he would wrestle
a fall with him . Bothwell gallantly
responded , but at the third close was
so violently thrown that he lay for an
instant stunned and senseless. The
two then shook hands, and the stranger,
> and gained the popinjay, which does not
whose name was John Balfour or
Burley, having secured Morton's com
panionship in his journey, mounted
his horse and rode off.
Shortly afterwards a cornet brought
news that the Archbishop of St.
Andrews, whose health Bothwell had
given to Burley, had been murdered .
When Bothwell heard this he recalled
the fact that when Burley had res
ponded to the toast given to him he
had used these words : “ The Arch
bishop of St. Andrews, and the place he
now worthily holds; may each prelate in
Scotland soon be as the Right Reverend
WERE James Sharp " -who was assassinated.
Bothwell now understood the reference,
and quickly identified his late opponent
with the commander of a band of
zealous Covenanters .
On their way to Milnwood, where
Morton lived with a miserly uncle, he
learned from Burley that his com
panion had once saved his father's life
in the battle of Longmarston Moor.
This news strongly affected his attitude
towards Burley's attempts to influence
him in favour of the Covenanters or
Presbyterian party.
THE STRANGER WAS PURSUED AND
HOW
ESCAPED FROM THE TROOPERS 1
Burley pursued his advantage when
they heard from an old dame that the
path which Burley had decided to take on
bidding Morton farewell had been occu
pied by troopers. Morton, who knew
nothing of the fate of the Archbishop
of St. Andrews, was induced secretly to
give Burley shelter for the night in his
uncle's house, or rather in the hay-loft
of a stable adjacent to the dwelling.
Very soon afterwards Morton was
alarmed at the halting of a body of
cavalry on the high road which wound
round the foot of the bank on which
the house of Milnwood was placed .
The officer was on the point of orderin ,
the house to be searched , when one of
his party was heard to say :
" I cannot think it at all necessary .
Milnwood is an infirm old man , who
never meddles with politics, and loves
his money -bags and bonds better than
anything else in the world . His nephew ,
I hear, was at the Wapinschaw to-day,
look like a fanatic . I should think
1760
 Canon E.
Commeramanmaraatender
-THE WAVERLEY NOVELSccomme
they are all gone to bed long since, Bellenden and his uncle's miserliness .
and an alarm at this time of night After the Wapinschaw, Lady Mar
might kill the poor old man .” garet Bellenden dismissed from her
So the cavalry passed on , and Morton, service an old woman named Mause
without exciting the alarm of the Headrigg and her son Cuddie, because
domestic , Mrs. Alison , who had been of the absence of the latter from the festi
staying up for him , was able to take val . They were recommended to Morton
refreshments to the fugitive. The two by Miss Edith Bellenden, and Cuddie
parted in the morning. Despite all who, as a matter of fact, was the third
that Burley could say , and greatly to competitor in the final shoot for the
his mortification , Morton's answer to all popinjay - entered Morton's service . But
his inducements to " gird on his sword in Mause had come under the influence of
the dear and precious cause ” of the the Covenanters, and when Morton
A RELIGIOUS SERVICE OF THE COVENANTERS ON THE LONELY MOOR

The story of " Old Mortality " describes the persecution of the Covenanters of Scotland in the time of
Charles II. and James II. , when men and women who refused to be forced by the Government into the
system of religious worship supplied by the State were hunted on the moors and in the glens of Scotland by
the soldiers of the king. The Covenanters fought and bled for their faith and the liberty to worship God
in their own simple way. For years they could not meet in their old churches, but gathered for
worship, as we see them here, on the lonely moors, with scouts posted on the look -out for the troops.
Covenant was that he was determined ,
66
confessed to Bothwell that he had given
at least , as far and as long as possible, shelter to Burley , Mause delivered such
to unite the duties of a good Christian a speech against the episcopal party
with those of a peaceful subject." that there was nothing for her and her
When Burley had ridden away. son to do but resume their travels. As
Morton had a somewhat stormy inter- for Morton, he was taken prisoner and
view with his uncle , to whom he ex- carried to the Tower of Tiilietudlum .
pressed a wish to leave the country and Bothwell, being disposed to be friendly ,
serve abroad, as his father had done allowed his prisoner to be muffled up in
before him . Morton , it should be one of the soldier's cloaks, and con
observed, was driven to this wish by sented for the time being to keep from
his apparently hopeless love for Miss mentioning his name.
Cou

17гт
I K
 -THE CHILD'S STORY
When the party had arrived at the
tower, they were given permission to
rest there till the arrival on the morrow
of Claverhouse, and provision was made
for the safe custody of the prisoner.
Miss Edith had a servant named Jennie
Dennison, and both were much con-
cerned to know the name of the prisoner.
Jennie had many suitors, one of whom
was a trooper named Tam Halliday.
HERO HAS
THEPERSECUTOR TO FACE THE DREADED
OF THE COVENANTERS
It was from Tam that she found out
Morton's identity, and it was by the
assistance of Tam that she was enabled
to secure her mistress, muffled in a plaid ,
and described as her kinswoman , an
interview with the prisoner. On learn-
ing the reason of Morton's captivity, and
that he would be brought before Claver-
house, whose intimate friend and early
patron the murdered archbishop had
been , Miss Bellenden bade her maid find
a messenger to take a missive to Major
Bellenden , her uncle, who, she thought,
could help Morton out of the trouble
into which he had unwittingly fallen .
The major was Morton's friend , and
arrived at the tower shortly before the
man in whose hands the fate of young
Morton would lie .
On the arrival of Claverhouse , it was
made known that Lord Evandale had
been despatched to disperse a corven-
ticle , or gathering, of the Covenanters,
who had become especially bold . And
just after Major Bellenden had appealed
without success to Claverhouse on
Morton's behalf, Evandale arrived with
the news that a large body of Covenanters
were in arms among the hills, and had
broken out into actual rebellion .
HAS FRIENDS IN HIS HOUR OF NEED
When Sergeant Bothwell went to
Morton to take him before Claverhouse,
he acquainted him with the news that
Miss Bellenden had sought young Lord
Evandale's helpon his behalf ; and
this caused him to arrive at the con-
clusion, not for the first time, that his
own suit had little chance of success ,
apart from his present predicament.
After a heated interview , Morton, of the Covenanters. The troops were
who questioned the soldier's right to scattered ; Bothwell, taken at a dis
arrest him without a warrant, was con- advantage in a single combat with
demned to death by Claverhouse, who Burley, was killed ; and Lord Evan
refused to listen to the appeals of the dale only just managed, with the help
major, although these were seconded by of a remnant of troopers, to save
1762
OF FAMOUS BOOKS BREAL)
Lady Margaret. It was only on Lord
Evandale's intervention that Claver
house relented . And in giving way
so far as to rescind the death sentence ,
the colonel, as he then was, warned his
young friend against letting his private
feelings stand in the way of his duty,
adding that, from Morton's manner , it
was certain that, if he should ever come
to head an army of rebels, Evandale
would have much to answer for. Whilst
Evandale was distressed at the obvious
concern for Morton's safety shown by
Miss Bellenden , Morton , who had mis
understood some words he had heard
fall from the young lady's lips, was
mortified at the thought of being
indebted for his life to his rival .
When Claverhouse set forth in pursuit
of the Covenanters, Morton and three
companions in captivity travelled in
the custody of a small body of soldi rs,
who formed the rearguard to the column
under the command of Claverhouse,
and were immediately under the charge
of Sergeant Bothwell.
INJUSTICE THAT
THESUBJECT AN ENEMY
MADE A LOYAL
OF THE KING
Morton's companions were Cuddie and
Mause Headrigg and a zealous preacher
named Gabriel Kettledrummle. The
arrest of Cuddie on account of his
mother's opinions added to Morton's
sense of what he now regarded as the
infamous and intolerable oppression of
his countrymen in a free land.
Claverhouse's column was attacked
by an overpowering number of the
enemy, who were posted on Loudon
Hill . On Evandale's suggestion it wis
decided , against the commander's owa
inclination, to parley with the rebels.
Evandale wished to be the envoy, but
Claverhouse willed it that his nephew
and heir, Cornet Grahame, the youngest
and hottest of his officers, should take
a flag of truce and a trumpeter, and
ride down to the edge of the morass
dividing the two forces, and summon
the rebels to lay down their arms and
disperse .
In the parley Cornet Grahame was
shot by Burley, who was in command
 -THE WAVERLEY NOVELS
Claverhouse, who had been surrounded . insurgents would be permitted to treat
after a desperate charge in which he'
had unhorsed Burley .
At a moment when Claverhouse and
Evandale were in full flight, a bullet
killed the horse which Evandale was
riding, and the young man , himself
wounded, was about to be struck down
by Burley, when Morton , who with his
fellow captives was near at hand,
intervened . Whilst Burley took up the
pursuit of the flying soldiers, Morton
aided Evandale to make his escape,
thus repaying his indebtedness to Evan-
dale earlier in that eventful day.
Meanwhile Major Bellenden took
active measures for the defence of
Tillietudlum (supposed to be Craig.
nethan Castle ) , which was shortly
afterwards reached by Claverhouse, who ,
before pursuing his journey, left soms
men to assist in defending the tower,
pending his return to relieve the garrison .
HENRY MORTON JOINS THE COVENANTERS
When Claverhouse had departed ,
Evandale rode up in an all but ex-
hausted condition. Then came the
news that young Henry Morton was
out with the rebels ."
The truth was that Burley had won
the young man over . Morton was
appointed a captain in the insurgent
forces . At the same time he was
repelled by the madness of the leaders
and appalled at the lack of union in
their councils. The news caused Miss
Bellen the deepes distre . This
distressdewnas increas w t ss
ed hen Lord Evan-
dale , in a sortie , the object of which was
to get prov , was made a prisoner
by Burley , iwshioonsthreate to hang him
the next morning if thenecadstle were not
surren
dered
. Tillietudlum , of which a kinsman ,
Morton once again succeeded in
saving Evandale's life, giving him his
liberty on parole on the understanding
that he would act as a mediator with
the authorities for the redress of certain
grievances which, in Morton's opinion,
justified the taking up of arms; and ,
further, that he induced the garrison of
Tillietudlum to surrender on a safe
conduct being given to the ladies, the
major, and their followers.
On the occupation of Tillietudlum it
was decided that Morton should go to
the camp of the Duke of Monmouth , in
order to discover upon what terms the
1763
...
with him , the duke being in supreme
command of the king's forces. The
duke agreed to suspend hostilities for
one hour to give the rebels an oppor
tunity to lay down their arms, an act
which he said must be the first step to
negotiations for peace.
THE PARDON OF HENRY MORTON AND
Battle ensued , in which the Coven
anters were hopelessly routed, partly
through the division in their ranks
caused by the fanaticism of their
leaders . Morton and Cuddie in their
flight came upon a lonely farmhouse.
Here a number of the most zealous of
the Covenanters , with Macbriar and
Mucklewrath , two of the ministers who
would not listen to Morton's counsel on
behalf of peace, were gathered . Morton
was made their prisoner, but Cuddie
escaped.
For a second time Morton was con
demned to death. This time he was
rescued by Claverhouse, but became a
prisoner of war. His rescue was due to
the fact that Cuddie Headrigg had
fallen in with Claverhouse's party.
Hailed before the Privy Council in
Edinburgh , Morton consented to go
abroad pending his Majesty's pleasure,
Claverhouse and Evandale entering
themselves as securities for him . Then
came the fall of the Stuarts .
T
" HE HERO'S RETURN FROM EXILE AND
THE HAPP
INESS THAT AWAITED HIM
On his retur from Holl , belie
that Miss Belnlende wasanedngagedvintgo
marry Lord Evandaln , Morton sought
out Burley with the oebject of obtainin
from him a certain docum g
e t that
would restore to her the Cnastle of
Basil Olifant , had obtained possession .
He was unsuccessful . Olifant, aware
of Evandale's devotion to the now
exiled Stuarts, sought to secure his
arrest , and , as resistance was offered ,
ordered his party to fire. Evandale
fell , mortally wounded , but a shot also
brought down Olifant, whose death was
the means of restoring Tillietudlum to
the Bellendens. Morton , who arrived
too late on the scene to save Evandale ,
was some months later married to Edith
Bellenden . As to Burley, he died
fighting, as did Claverhouse before him .
The next story of Famous Books is on 1915.
COUZI
ππιπιτπ
ταττττ
παπιπτπ
ατππττπ
τττττι
τεπι
ιπαπππε
AND PEOPLE IN SOUTH AFRICA
ταππι
πι
ππ LIFE

070

This extraordinary figure , looking Much of the hardest work in South Africa is done by the Kaffirs .
like the hideous objects some This is how the Kaffir workers in the mines live together , in a small
motorists make themselves , is a town or " compound," as it is called . These little white huts are much
native " doctor " in South Africa , more healthy than the mud buildings seen in the picture on page 1767 .

The Boers , or Dutch farmers, were the great colonisers of South Africa . Having bought a large waggon
and a team of oxen , the Boer farmer would set forth with his family across the veldt , a great grassy stretch
of country without trees , until he came to a fertile district in which to settle and build his farm .

Ceea

Here are some merry Kaffirs at play after their day's work in a This Basuto chief has his heart's desire ; he
gold-mine . The two men in the foreground are dancing, has a British uniform and a top hat, a very
having decked themselves with some odd European garments. different garb from that worn by his man.
These photographs are by Messrs. H. W. Nicholls , N. P. Edwards, and Messrs . Valentine .

1764
 The Child's Book of BE
ALL COUNTRIES

PEOPLE OF NATAL

THE BRITISH EMPIRE IN AFRICA

When
HEN you look at
the map of the CONTINUED FROM 1709
more than some little
red marks on the
world, you will generally Guinea Coast . Before
find that those parts of that the Dutch had
the earth's surface belonging to planted a colony at the Cape
the British Empire are printed of Good Hope, which is the
in red ; and you will see that country we mean when we
quite a large part of Africa is speak of “ The Cape.” But other
coloured red. Africa is rather like the European nations had taken posses
head and neck ofa rhinoceros in shape ; sion of stations on the coast only
with its horn stuck out on the east , and so that they might trade with the
the tip ofits nose down south at the natives, and make an expedition now
Cape of Good Hope. The back of and then inland. It did not seem
the neck is the coast of the Mediter- worth while to do more, because

оо
ranean Sea and the throat is the these places were terribly hot and
Guinea Coast. The Equator, the horribly unhealthy ; and people who
imaginary line which goes round the tried to go inland found it hotter
middle of the world, and is every- and more unhealthy. Besides which ,
where just the same distance from the natives were all savages, with
both the North Pole and the South whom there was not much trading to
Pole, divides Africa into a northern be done. So that very little indeed was
half and a southern half. known about Africa -except Egypt
Now, you will see that there are and the countries which lie along
some red bits on the throat of the the shores of the Mediterranean Sea .
rhinoceros, and that his whole nose But things are very different now,
is red, and a big red patch runs up for during the second half of the
north from his nose , which stops nineteenth century several bold
at some large lakes . Further north travellers, many of them Christian
there is another red patch ; and in missionaries,made exploring expedi
some maps the top of the head behind tions, and did their best to make
the horn is marked red , too . This friends with the natives, as we have
last bit is Egypt. Here, however, read in the part of our book be
we shall not talk about Egypt, ginning on page 141 . And so it
because it is not really a part of our was found out that if Europeans set
empire, although we are looking about the business in the right way
0 after the government there at present , some good might be got out of Africa
and are likely to go on doing so for after all. Therefore, the nations of
some time to come. Now, until about Europe made agreements together
a hundred years ago there would that , instead of fighting each other to
have been no red patches - nothing get the biggest share, each should
JTE GUCCI
1765
 ELELAL
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
have a settled portion , which is called elephants, which are not tamed for the
a Sphere of Influence, in which it might service of man as they are in India, but
do pretty much what it liked as long as are hunted for the sake of their tusks ;
it did not interfere in the sphere of and fierce, wild cattle, tall giraffes, and
influence of someone else, and did not ever so many different kinds of beautiful
break certain rules which everyone feels antelopes. Besides these, there are the
to be just and necessary in the treat- biggest of all birds, the ostriches, which
ment of the natives. do not fly at all , but run very fast ; and
1E THREE GREAT PARTS OF AFRICA THAT the Europeans have made a business of
THEBELONG TO THE BRITISH EMPIRE bringing them together, and keeping
So there are three divisions of those what are called ostrich farms to breed
parts of Africa which belong to the them , much as we breed sheep and cattle
British Empire. First, there are the in England , for the sake of the beautiful
little portions on the Guinea Coast , feathers which are plucked from them ,
which have been British for a long time, just as we shear wool from our sheep.
but have had more territory added to All these creatures are to be found in
them . Then there is the nose, in the the British dominions in Africa .
south , where there are a great many In all the British part of Africa,
white people ; and , thirdly , there are most of the natives are negroes with very
the lands in the interior which are in the black skins and woolly hair. In former
British sphere of influence, where there times there was one kind of trade that
are not many white people yet , and was usually profitable, and that was
perhaps never will be—at any rate, until the trade in negro slaves . People
we can find out someway of preventing somehow persuaded themselves that
them from getting diseases which are negroes had been sent into the world to
much more fatal to Europeans than to be the slaves of white people , and that
races which have lived in tropical there was nothing wrong in carrying
climates for hundreds or thousands of them off from their own country and
years . But we have been there only a selling them in other parts of the world.
very short time as yet , so that we MANY BLACK RACES THAT HAVE
may still find out ways of making it THETHEIR HOME IN AFRICA
more possible to go on living there. In that way a great number of them
Africa is so big, and there is still so were taken to America . There are a
much of it where only a very few white great many negroes in America now ;
men have ever been , that explorers still many of those who are old were slaves
go on finding new sorts of animals ; and themselves when they were children,
people who like adventures go there to and the rest are the children or
hunt
66
big game,” which means big grandchildren of slaves, whose ancestors
beasts that are dangerous. had been captured on the Guinea Coast
ANIMALS THAT ROAM WILD AND and taken away across the sea. We
THEFIERCE IN ALL PARTS OF AFRICA do not like to think now that most
It was not long ago that a Frenchman of this was done by English people, I
named Du Chaillu was laughed at for but we do like to remember that it was
saying there were huge apes very much the English who first woke up to the 1
stronger than men ; but when a few wickedness of it , and not only stopped
more people went where he had been , the trade themselves, but persuaded
they found that Du Chaillu had told the other countries to stop it too .
truth about gorillas after all. There are Now most of Africa is inhabited by
lions, too ; and in some places they are these negro races. Some of them are very
so fierce that a few years ago , when a warlike, but others are not particularly
railway was being made in the middle of fond of fighting. Two of the most war 1
Africa, two lions came and killed so like are the Zulus and the Matabele,
many of the people at work , as well as who really come from one stock ; and
cattle, that the railway building had to some others who are called Basutos
be stopped until hunters could track . are related to them . All these live in the
those lions down and put an end to southern part, in Rhodesia , or in Zulu
them . There are other big and savage land ,or Natal, or the part of Cape Colony
kinds of apes which live in herds, next to Natal . There are other warlike
called baboons ; and rhinoceroses and negroes, such as the Ashantees, who
XYLOUDY menor DUYURDLXUN TUTU
1766
 mond

cranetont
mereu THE KRAALS AND CITIES OF SOUTH AFRICA

Thethree mud huts covered with grass in this picture arethe native houses of the Kaffirs in the wilder country.
There are usually a number built together, forming what is called a kraal. Every native chief has several
wives, and each wife owns one of these huts. We see here the farmyard where the cattle are kept fenced in.
morom

This is the market square of the great town of Johannesburg, the centre of the mining district in the Transvaal .
To this square, the largest in South Africa, the Boers bringtheir bullock -waggons laden with their farm produce.
marTT

War

This is Cape Town, nestling on the seashore beneath the great Table Mountain. The town was built by the
Dutch , but the King of Holland sold it to the English. It is of great value on accountof its magnificent harbour.
கணைகணைக
1767
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
live near the Guinea Coast . But quite other people who want to get rid of the
in the south and south -west there are Chinese altogether , and soon there will
other people who arenot woolly probably not be many left , so they
haired negroes, but have much lighter- really do not count as part of the
coloured skins , who are called Hotten- African population.
tots ; and others who are lighter still , On the Gold Coast there are always
and are also very small , whereas the a few white people, and some troops
Zulus and Kathrs are often very big , who are like the Sepoys in India, except
and these are called Bushmen , or that they are black instead of brown,
Bosjesmen , as the Dutch call them . under the command of white officers ;
OW THE AFRICANS LIVE AND WHAT and there are a good many natives
Hº*THEY BELIEVE who have learned to live in a civilised
These African races are not like the
way. Along other parts of that coast
people of India , who have been civilised there are French or German territories
for thousands of years, though their too, which are very much like ours.
civilisation is different from that of the But much the most important part
peoples of Europe. The Africans have is the big southern region , which is a
hardly been civilised at all ; they have group of real colonies, where there are
not tried to make themselves skilful hundreds of thousands of white people ,
in anything except things that have all under the British flag, but governing
to do with fighting and hunting. They themselves like the other great colonies
never thought of building themselves in Canada and Australia. There are
anything better than what we should big towns, such as Cape Town and Dur
caſi huts to live in, or of making any ban and Johannesburg and Pretoria 1

but the roughest kind of tools, and even
now they have learned very little from
the Europeans. If they were left
to themselve they would wear hardly
any clothes. In those parts of the
country where they have a gocd deal to
do with Europeans, many of them have
been taught Christianity ; but most
of them are still heathen , and believe
more in what we should call witchcraft
or magic than in anything else ; and
even now, where there are no Europeans
to stop them , some of them are cannibals.
PEOPLE WHO HAVE GONE TO AFRICA
T HE
' FROM OTHER LANDS
It is only in the south , where the
climate is temperate and the air is
wholesome , that there are plenty of
Europeans, and big towns and big farms;
and even there we do not see much of
the kind of manufacturing industries
which we have in England . But while
we have coal-mines and tin and copper
mines , in Africa there are gold -mines
and diamond -fields, the discovery of
which began about forty years ago.
And that discovery drew a great many
more Europeans than before into South
Africa . And besides Europeans, the
gold -mines a few years ayo brought in a
number of people of quite another race,
the Chinese , because people thought
they would be more convenient as England was at war with France, and
labourers in the mines than either France made Holland set up a republic
Europeans or negroes. But there are and help her in the war ; so the King
and Bloemfontein and several others .
THE WHITE COLONIES TOF SOUTH AFRICA
This group of colonies is made up of
Cape Colony, which is the south part,,
and Natal , which is on the east coast,
with a range of mountains on the west
side of it called the Drakensberg ;
and across the Drakensberg are the
Orange River Colony and the Trans
vaal Colony. On the west and north of 1
these are Bechuanaland and Rhodesia ,
where at present there are not enough
white people to form a proper self
governing colony , but we can be pretty
sure that the white population will
get bigger and bigger . The Orange
River Colony has got its name from
the Orange River itself ; and the name
Transvaal, or across vaal, means 60 the
land on the other side of the Vaal River. "
And now it is time to stop describing ,
and to tell the story of these colonies.
A long while ago the Dutch came and
set up a colony, and built Cape Town
for their capital, and covered some of
the country with farms ; while some
of the Hottentots whom they found
there remained under their rule and
generally became their servants , and
others went away further inland . But
a little more than a hundred years ago
ITZULU

1768
 -THE BRITISH EMPIRE IN AFRICA GAUR IRONALUL

of Holland, when he was turned out , Trek. For in those days most of that
sold the colony to Great Britain, who part of the country was ruled over by
wanted it because Cape Town was a a Zulu king called Dingan. The Zulus,
very useful place for her Navy . like the Matabele , were great warriors,
So we went and took possession, who conquered the more peaceful tribes
and Cape Colony became a part of the and forced them to do their bidding.
British dominion, though there were But when the Boers had gone up into
only a few of our own peoplethere, and their new lands, they still wanted to be
many Dutch. The Dutch did not like able to reach the sea, so some of them
this, though there was good govern- crossed the Drakensberg Mountains,,
ment . The farmers, who were called by and sent a few of their number to ask
the Dutch name of Boers, which means Dingan to let them settle in his country.
farmers, particularly
ference with disliked theofinter
their treatment the HSWTHE BOERS WERE BETRAYED AND
HOW THEY TRIUMPHED ON DINGAN'S DAY
natives , especially the natives who were Dingan received them in a friendly
outside the colony itself ; because they way, but just as the envoys were leaving
saw that the Kaffirs, in particular, always he had them murdered , and then sent
thought that if the whites tried to be off his warriors to destroy the rest
friendly it was only because they were of the Boers who had crossed the
afraid ; and whenever the Kaffirs thought Drakensberg. But most of the Boers
the whites were afraid they made raids got warning in time, and made what is
DEUXIO

into their territory, murdering and called a laager by drawing their waggons
carrying off cattle . together round their camps so that
ETUT

When the governors took measures they could shoot from behind the
nu

to keep the Kaffirs in order, people waggons; and when the Zulus came
in England could not understand the Boers won a great victory, which is
what savages they were , and prevented remembered as " Dingan's Day.” After
the governors from doing what they that the Zulus had a new king named
knew to be right , so that the farmers
Panda , who was more friendly. But
felt that their own lives, and those of
when the Boers had settled themselves
their wives and children , were never safe .
they began to ill - treat some of the
HE GREAT TREK OF THE BOERS FROM
THE Kaffir tribes ; and then the Government
THE CAPE AND HOW IT CAME ABOUT at Cape Colony said that , after all ,
And on the top of that trouble , a the Boers were British subjects, though
very good law was made in England they were not living in British territory,
that there were to be no more slaves in and could not object to the British
British territories ; but the farmers, setting up their own government there,
who were all slave-owners, did not see which they did. But the Boers did not
how they could manage their farms want to be under British government ;
without slaves . So a number of the they went back over the Drakensberg,
Boers made up their minds that they and left Natal to the British .
would not live under British ruleany THEATRE TRIBES
THE BOERS, AND THE
longer, and went away with their
wives and families into the land on Now, the British did not want to be
the other side of the Orange River. troubled with the two Boer States
Some of them went further, and which had been set up beyond the
crossed the Vaal River. Then , when Orange River and the Vaal River.
the Matabele, who were great warriors, The Boers in the Orange River State
and had conquered that country, had a great deal of trouble with the
attacked them , they defeated them ; king of some native tribes called the
and the Matabele fled, leaving the Basutos ; and at last the British
Boers to form two republics in peace . arranged terms between the Boers and
Afterwards these two Boer Republics the Basutos , and said that the Basutos
came to be called the Orange Free must now obey the British , but the
State and the Transvaal. The going Boers were to govern themselves in the
away of these Boers out of Cape Orange Free State , still recognising
Colony is known as the Great Trek. that the British had a right to
The second British colony ,, Natal, was interfere whenever they thought that
founded partly because of the Great interference was necessary.
1769
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
And very much the same thing the British gave them back the Trans
happened in the Transvaal. It was a vaal , and allowed them to establish
few years after this that diamonds were their Republic again ; but we did not
discovered at the place which is now make them see that this was done
called Kimberley,just on the borders of because we thought it was just , and
the Orange Free State. Then the the Boers grew into the way of thinking
British said that , as it was the duty that it was done because the British
of the British to keep order all over were defeated and afraid. And later on
South Africa, they must have possession very great trouble came out of that.
of thesome
paid diamond- to, the
moneyfields for Free
whichState.
they THETHAT
UNION BETWEENONBRITONSANDBOERS
WAR
It was then that they began pushing up Gold-mines were found in the Trans
through Bechuanaland, and on into vaal, and a great many British subjects
the Matabele country beyond the went there to get gold out of the mines.
Transvaal , a great deal of which was But the President, Paul Krüger, said
the doing of Mr. Cecil Rhodes, a young that the “ Uitlanders," as they were
Englishman who was thinking of making called, must pay heavy taxes, and the
a British Empirein South Africa, as å Uitlanders said that, if they did, they
British Empire had been started in ought to have aа share in the government,
India a hundred years before . That which the Boers would not allow them .
is why so much of the country was And as President Krüger was using
given his name-Rhodesia. the money he got to buy guns and
H °WOEBRITESUR POWER BEGAN IN THE instruments of war, people began to
think that he really intended to make
But before Cecil Rhodes had set to the Boers master of all South Africa ,
work, when we had only just taken So a great war arose in 1899, and went
possession of the diamond-fields in the on for nearly three years.
south of Bechuanaland , some important Now, that war had made it clear that
events happened. The Boers in the there would never be any certainty of
Transvaal were not nearly so prosperous peace in South Africa if there were two
or so well governed as those in the independent Boer States in the middle
Orange Free State, and they had serious of the British dominions ; and the Free
quarrels with the Zulu king, Cetewayo, State and the Transvaal were made
who ruled to the north of Natal. parts of the British Empire. But
Cetewayo appeared to care_so little because we believe that people who are
about the whites, and the Transvaal so nearly akin to ourselves as the Boers
seemed so little able to defend itself, can never be ruled over as subjects, we
that the British sent an army, and resolved that they should have just the
made the Transvaal British territory, same rights as Englishmen or Scots,
But then the Boers in the Transvaal when once the country had been brought
resolved that they would not have a into order after the war. And just as
British Government, and they took up England and Scotland became a united
arms , and won a victory over the nation , and English and Scots a united
British at Majuba Hill. Then there people, after they had been fighting
were so many people in England who each other for centuries , so now Britons
said that , after all , the Boers were in the and Boers live on equal terms in all
right, and had done exactly as we should colonies, citizens of the same empire.
have done ourselves in their place , that The next story of Countries begins on 1875.

Tombor BOTURDURDEROUXILCO Trimrommar

1770
 The Child's Book of
moto WONDER
WHAT MAKES A MOTOR - CAR GO ?
00
Themmotor
ystery of the
-car is a
CONTINUED FROM 1684
mystery that has only
now dawned upon millions
of people, but it is , of course,
only the old question of using
natural forces for power . In
nearly all motor-cars it is a gas
that makes them move . In one
way or another this gas is made in
the engine of the motor-car or is
sent into it , and, as this gas is made
under pressure, its atoms fly about
in all directions , and so press upon
that part of the engine which is con-
nected with the wheels. In mostmotor-
cars petrol is burned with air, which is
admitted to the inside of the engine,
and the gases which are produced by
this burning make the motor -car move.
Petrol is really a vegetal product,
and has in it the power which poured
upon the earth from the sun ages
ago . It is really the sun , then , that
makes the motor -car move ; not the
sunlight of to -day, but the stored -up
sunlight of long ages ago.
Insteam motor-cars the power is
produced as it is in a railway engine or
a steamboat. Something is burned-
it is generally petrol - and so boils
water, and it is the water -vapour
or gas that acts on the engine in this
case , just as the gases made by the
burning of the petrol act upon the
engine in the commoner kind of
motor -cars. Electricity is used in
1771
E1
ordinary motor-cars
to set the petrol burn
ing. Each time the
spark passes, a little dose
of petrol is burned, and it is
this burning of petrol that makes
the noise that we hear , or part
of it . The motor-car is made to
go, therefore, by a very large
number of little explosions of gas.
HOW BIG IS SPACE ?
Well, how big is this question ? said
the Wise Man . It is one about which
men have been thinking ever since
men began to think . If we think
about it for ourselves, we shall see
that it is impossible for us to think of
space as anything but infinite--some
thing going on for ever. For suppose
that with a telescope we could pierce
right through space until , in all direc
tions , we came to a great wall , and
that was the end of space ; yet on the
other side of that wall there must be
more space , however far away the
wall was, and if there were another
wall beyond it , there would be more
space beyond that.. It is impossible
to think of space as anything that
stops. If there were a boundary no
further away than the wall of your
room , or a boundary so far away that
even light would take a billion years
to reach it , in either case we cannot
think that there is nothing beyond the
boundary ; there must be more space .
We often say that one telescope has so
 mammamm

Txxx

RCD

EULEO
BD
Torna
13
mo
Tin

WHAT MAKES THE MOTOR-CAR GO

INLET
PIPE

PETRÓL TANK

TCARBURETTUR
PETROL PIPE
SILENCER
SPROCKET WHEEL
PART OF
GPRING

FL
Y EL REVOLVING
WHE SHAFT

When we look inside a motor-car the works seem hopelessly puzzling , but, wonderful as they are, they do quite
a simple thing. Let us here suppose that we have cut our car right in half, from end to end, so that we may see
inside. The fly -wheel is shown facing us for the sake ofplainness ; it is really fixed the other way - the opposite way
to the ordinary wheels. Now let us look at the letters. A is the inlet valve, open ready for the gas to rush in. B is
the exhaust valve, through which the used -up gas rushes out; it is shut here. C is the sparking plug and its
electric wires, which fire the petrol gas. D is the current of air and petrol gas going up to the inlet valve. E is the
piston, which has to be forced up and down in the cylinder. The arrow on the piston shows the way the piston goes.

n
PISCTON
RO

Petrol oil is forced from the tank under the seat into what is called the carburettur, marked in the first picture.
There it is acted upon by a spray, which breaks up a drop of petrol into atoms and makes it into gas. This gasis
mixed with air. The fly -wheel isset going by turning a handle in front of the car, and as it goes it works the piston,
pulling it to the bottom of the cylinder. Asthe piston goes down, the gas causes the inletvalve to open , as in the
moN

top picture, and gas and air rush in . The piston, worked by the force of the fly -wheel, rushes back, and as it goes
up it compresses the gas into the smallest possible space, closing the inlet valve so that the gas cannotescape.
1772
I

IZUILENCIERTOOCOURO CLOU Demua EGUITOELICOPODOBO

03

WHAT THE MOTOR-CAR IS LIKE INSIDE

ELECTRIC

KINS

all

CRANES

명
At the top of the cylinder is a metal plug, connected with electric wires, and as the gas is forced to the top the
plug makes a spark in the way explained on page 684. The moment the spark flashes, the mixture of gas and
air explodes, as we see here. The force of the explosion drives the piston down. The piston forces down the
crank attached to it, and the crank makes the fly -wheel spin and carry up the piston again. The piston has now
to clear out the waste. It does this by forcing the useless, exploded gas up to the top of the cylinder, and out,
as shown in the bottom picture, through the exhaust valve, which opens at the proper time. The waste
passes down the tube to the silencer, which softens the noise, and out under the back of the car into the open
air. It is this discharge of the used -up gas that makes the smell given off by some motor- cars along the road.
RO
D

SILENCER

30
$ GEMORRELL
So the piston goes on working, compressing the gas in the cylinder, which explodes as the spark is made - in
some cars over a thousand times a minute . When one thing is going round, it is quite easyto make it carry
other things round with it, and the crank of the piston- rod, driven by the explosive gas, is fixed to the fly -wheel,
which it keeps going. With the help of chains and cog -wheels the fly -wheel turns the other wheels, and the car
goes along. It must be remembered that there are probably a thousand parts in a motor - car, and as few as possible
are shown here to make clear how the car is driven. The machinery which regulates the speed is not shown.
பாலை
1773
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
mucn space-penetrating power, that know that it travels 186,000 miles in
another has three times as much power , a second-and they call that distance
and so on . Yet , if we could make )
a light year.” Perhaps the universe
another telescope with such space- is 30,000 “ light years” across. If you
penetrating power — which really means have a big enough piece of paper, here is
the power to let us see light coming your chance for something like a sum !
from such a great distance —that the WHICH TRAVELS QUICKER- HEAT OR COLD ?
biggest telescope we have, compared One of the wisest men who ever
with it , would only let us see as far
asa worm could see that telescope lived , Francis
business of knowledge oftenthat the
Bacon, said
is not so
would be no nearer bringing us to the
end of space than the sight of the worm much to answer questions as to know
is. If a thing is infinite , you are no what questions to ask and how to ask
nearer the end of it than you were them . The great business for us , he
before, however far and fast you go . said, is " rightly to put the question to
A great man has said that this idea of Nature ." This deserves а place
infinite space sometimes impressed his among the wisest things that have
mind so much that he dared not think ever been said. It is just when we
of it . Yet there is in it nothing to make learn how to ask a question that we
usafraid,but only to makeusthoughtful. gain more knowledge, and that is
HOW BIG IS THE WORLD OF STARS ? equally true, whether we can answer
This is an utterly different question the question or not . Often men have
from the last one. Knowing that learned great things simply because
space must be infinite, men used to someone has said you cannot ask
think that the world of stars must that,” of a question which men have
also be infinite, that however far we been asking for hundreds of years.
went through space we should still Now, this question is one which we
find more and more stars. But many cannot ask , for there is no such thing
men now think that this is not so. as cold. Complete cold, if we could
It seems to be the case that when get it , would only be complete absence
we examine the world of stars - our of heat ; and what we ordinarily call
may
telescope,, aswewefind
universe that it — with
call after the cold
a time
is simply less heat than in some
thing else with which we are comparing
the stars become thinner and fewer, it . When a thing gets cold , it really
and that in many parts of the sky gets less hot. So we cannot speak of
we can , so to speak, see right through cold travelling, unless we mean that it
them , and see nothing beyond. Thus, it is a cold wind that is travelling , or
is probable that our universe of stars cold water travelling through hot water,
of which our sun is one — is not infinite, as when you run cold water into a hot
but has a limit . There may be any bath . But we can say how fast heat
number of other universes like it or un travels, if by that we mean the rays of
like it . There is no limit to space, and heat or radiant heat that we feel near
there is no limit to the power of God. a fire or a light. This kind of heat is
But our universe, or world ofstars, big really the same as light, and it travels
though it be, probably has a limit, at exactly the same speed, which you
just as the solar system has a limit . know . But cold travels at no speed,
The size of it has even been guessed at , for there is no such thing.
and it has been said that the distance WHY HAS EVERY CLOUD A SILVER LINING ?
across is perhaps the distance that The reason is simply that at its edge
light would travel across in thirty the cloud is thinner , and much more
thousand years. If you like to measure light can get through it, and that gives
the number of miles for yourself you it its silver lining. Some clouds, how
can ; but I fancy it would take most ever, are very thin , just like a sheet of
of this page to print it. When they tissue-paper in the sky, and we can

speak of these great distances, as- scarcely notice a silver lining to them .
tronomers do not speak of miles, for Of course, if we went up in a balloon ,
miles are too small to count with . above an ordinary cloud which seemed
They take th се hat light to have a silver lining to us when we
would travel across in a year - you were on the earth, we should see the
1774
 arXXARCUTE
-THE CHILD'S
whole cloud bright because the sun
would be shining upon it, and it the string shorter, and then, when the
would throw back or reflect the sun's
light to our eyes. This is true of
the darkest and blackest clouds all
through the daytime. The sun is
always shining, and the darkest cloud
has a bright side.
The trouble for us is that we see the
dark side, but we ought to know and
remember that the bright side is there.
Of course, as we see, all this may have
a meaning that applies to the troubles
of life, big and little. That is why
people remind us that every cloud has
a silver lining. But it is ever. better
than that, for every cloud has a silver the string, you will get the G an octave
LECLERCEDES
side just as bright as the other is dark. higher still. If you tie cne end of a
I think some people's minds are always
ILLUETEC
like our eyes in a balloon. They seem
to see every cloud on its silver lighted
side . These are the kind of people
that it is good to live with .
WHY DOES WATER QUENCH FIRE , IF ITS
PARTS , OXYGEN & HYDROGEN , MAKE FIRE ?
The first part of the answer is that as
the oxygen and hydrogen of water are
already burnt up with each other, they
can be burnt up no more. If you
first of all separated the oxygen and
hydrogen , and added the unburnt
mixture of them to the fire, then there
would be no doubt that they supported
combustion , though there would not
be much of you left to remember it ;
and if I thought that you had any
chance of making this dangerous ex-
periment, I would not mention it.
The second part of the answer is that
water puts out fire for two good reasons.
The reason that everyone can under-
stand is that, if a thing is covered with
water, the oxygen of the air cannot
get at it to burn it . But that is not
nearly the most important reason why
water puts out fire . It is that water
has a great capacity for heat , and can
hold a great deal of it . It takes so
much heat into itself, and so quickly,
that it lowers the hotness or temperature
of the burning thing so that it can no
longer burn .
WHY DOES A FIDDLE PLAY HIGHER WHEN
THE STRINGS ARE PRESSED DOWN ?
The shorter a string is the more
quickly does it vibrate or tremble when
it is plucked or when a bow is rubbed
across it. When you put your finger
on a violin string or stop ” it , this
MOTOROU
BOOK OF WONDER
comes to the same thing as making
string is set vibrating, it must vibrate
more quickly. But one note is higher
than another just because the air is
trembling more quickly to make it.
If you stop the string just half-way
along its length , it will give out a note
exactly an octave higher than it did
before-a high G instead of a low G ,
for instance. This is because the string
now vibrates exactly twice as fast as
it did before it was stopped, and the
note that is made when the air vibrates
twice as fast as it did before is exactly
an octave higher. If, now, you halve
piece of string and hold the other at
different distances along, you will get
just the same result as when a violin
string is stopped. The wonderful thing
is how little pressure it requires on the
string to produce the effect of shorten
ing it, and so getting a higher note .
More wonderful still is the skill of the
player who can learn to move his
fingers along so as to get exactly the
notes that he wants .
DOES LIGHT WEIGH ANYTHING ?
Sometimes I really cannot help
saying “ What a good question ! ” said
the Wise Man. If light were made of
a shower of little sparks or specks , as
Newton thought, then each of those
must weigh something. Light, how
ever, we know, is not matter at all ,
but a wave in the ether . So it has no
weight . But that is not the whole
story . Our study of light teaches us
that it ought to have the power of
pressure, which, in its results, comes
to the same thing as weight . Thus,
if you have a balance, and equal
weights on each side, and then make
a beam of light play down on one
side, it ought to press down that side
of the balance, just as if a weight had
been added .
This is what was taught by a great
Scotsman , Clerk -Maxwell, many years
ago, before this pressure of light had
been proved. He was so clever that he
foretold not only that there must be
such pressure, but how much it must
be. We can now show that pressure by
experiment , and have found that his
prediction of its amount--though he
had never seen it at all-was right.
1775
 **Meman THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
It is possible to prepare what is really course of time we shall notice the loss .
a balance delicately hung on a thread of Often people wear silver bangles or
quartz, and to see that when a ray of other silver ornaments next the skin .
light plays on one side of it , at once the Ifit happens that such a person is taking
balance turns as if you had touched sulphur as a medicine, he or she may
it with your finger, or thrown some- notice that the bangle , or whatever it is,
thing against it . This pressure, which turns black . This is because some of the
is so like weight in its results, though sulphur leaves the body through the
it is not weight , is sometimes called skin , and so tarnishes the bangle by
light pressure . But it is common not forming a film of sulphide of silver on it.
only to the light that we can see, but WHAT IS IT THAT CAUSES RUST ?
also to the other radiations or rays in In the answer to the last question
the ether which our eyes are not made we learned that sulphur compounds
so as to see . The proper name for it , act on silver but not on gold . The
therefore, by which it is now known oxygen of the air acts neither upon silver
everywhere, is not light pressure, but nor gold , which , as we know, is the
radiation pressure . reason why they are called the noble
WHY DO ANIMALS IN SNOWY COUNTRIES metals ; but it does act upon iron ,
WEAR WHITE COATS ?
especially when water is present . Some
The use of the white coat is to protect how the water helps the oxygen of the
the animal from its enemies by making it air to attack the iron. When the surface
difficult to see . If the animal keeps still of the iron is burnt or oxidised, it forms
it can scarcely be seen at all when its an oxide of iron , and that is what we
coat is the same colour as the snow. call rust. So iron is not a “ noble metal.”
But if it had a white coat in summer, But if we think further, we shall see
when the snow goes , it would be easily that just because iron can rust it is the
seen , and so often its coat changes in most noble and valuable metal in the
summer, and the fur takes other tints , world . If iron were like gold and silver
more like the colour of the ground and and could not be oxidised, or rusted,
the plants among which it lives . This we should not exist on the earth , nor
is called protective colouring, and is very would any green plant. It is risted , or
useful tomany animals, as we can under- oxidised , iron that gives all the colour
stand from the pictures on page 1777; to the good brown earth as well as to
But sometimes it happens that an animal coloured jewels, like rubies ; and it is
which lives by catching others is also this rust which gets dissolved by water,
white in winter snow , so that it can and so forms food for the plant, and gives
get near its prey without being seen. it its green colour. It is this rust also
Some insects do the same thing, and by which we get iron into our blood,
when they sit quietly among the and which gives it its red colour.
leaves of certain plants no one can tell So the life of the earth is due to rust
which is insect and which is leaf, so as well as the colour of the earth .
the birds that would eat them up We think rust a nuisance because it
cannot find them . spoils our knives ; and our forefathers
WHY DOES SILVER TARNISH AND GOLD NOT ? would not call iron a noble metal just
There is always a good deal of sulphur because it was liable to rust. But we
in the air in one form or another, and now know that because iron can rust,
this sulphur acts upon a good many because it can be acted upon by the
things that may be exposed to the air . air , it is the noblest metal in the world.
Especially we notice this where we burn John Ruskin says that the iron breathes
gas, as that adds a good deal of sulphur the air, and so gives life to all of us,
to the air. No sulphur compound has and that is a beautiful way of putting it .
any action upon gold , so gold does not WHAT BRINGS LIFE OUT OF DRIED SEEDS ?
tarnish . But several sulphur com- We may be sure that the life is there ,
pounds act upon silver, covering the or it would not come out of the seeds .
surface of it with a film of what is called The seeds are the children of plants
sulphide of silver, which is black . When that were alive before them , and part
we brighten silver, we rub this sulphide of their parents ' life is in them . But it
away ; but of course this means that we is quite true that a dried seed is very
are slowly losing the silver itself , and in different from one which is sprouting,
WETTER
1776
I

ANIMALS THAT CHANGE THEIR COATS

mem

One of the most remarkable things in nature is the way in which animals are sometimes protected from their enemies .
This picture shows us a group of animals that live on the hillside and among the heather in cold countries.
The fox , the ptarmigan, and the hare are coloured like the heather and rocks, so that they can hardly be seen .
sem moramo
mi

In this picture we see the same animals as above when the winter has come and snow is on the ground.
Their fur or feathers have turned white to match ! This happens only in very cold countries, and the pur
pose of this remarkable plan of nature is to prevent the enemies of these animals from seeing them,
Mwmmmmmmmm
um
1777
IL 32
 CADDED
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
and it is fair to say that its life is alive . In fact , this is just one of the
resting or passive or suspended for the most interesting questions that we have
time. It is alive , we know very well, failed to study sufficiently yet . The
for it can be killed by boiling it or by a importance of it is enormous, because,
poison or in many other ways, and a for instance, it might be that if
dried seed may be dead or alive, as seeds could keep alive for many years
an egg may be dead or alive . they might be carried through space
You will never be able to get a from the world where they were born,
chicken out of a dead egg, or a plant and be planted upon another world .
out of a dead seed, but you will get a This has actually been suggested by
dried seed - provided it has not been such a great man as Lord Kelvin.
killed - to sprout if you add water to it . WHY ARE SOME PLANTS ALWAYS GREEN ?
It is because it is dried that it seems Though it is the common rule
to stop living, which is not the same that green plants lose their leaves in
thing as to die. We know that it is not the winter, when there is less sun for
the same thing, for when it gets water them to use, yet we must remember
it shows us that it is not dead. The that the variety of life is infinite, and
chemical changes which are necessary that one plant has one way of living
for all active life must have water, which suits it , and another has another.
if they are to go on . The water does not Thus, some plants , which we call ever
make the life come out of the dried seed, green , develop a strong kind of leaf which
but reveals it . If you have injected a lasts all through the winter, in spite of
drop of prussic acid into the seed first, the wind and the wet , and uses the
then the water will fail to make it winter sun whenever it shines. Picb
sprout, for it is killed . ably we shall find, at any rate in some
WILL SEEDS GROW AFTER BEING KEPT of these cases, that the plant really
HUNDREDS OF YEARS ? belongs to a part of the world where
This is a very simple-looking question, there is plenty of sun in the winter, so
to which the answer ought to be yes that it is quite worth the plant's while
or no, and I think , said the Wise Man, to keep its green not
leaves
that the answer is no ; but it is really round. We must thinkall that
the ever
year
very difficult to be sure about it. green plants are necessarily cleverer
People say that they find grains of or better than those whose leaves fall
corn buried with an Egyptian mummy in the winter, for we know that the
that must have been lying there for change and the fall of the leaf is not
thousands of years, and that these really a process of decay or of death,
grains of corn , when given water, will but a living process, meant to serve
sprout. Then other people say that , the life of the plant as well as can be.
as a matter of fact, there has been HOW DOES A SOAP- BUBBLE HOLD TO
somemistake, and that thesegrains have GETHER ?
somehow got in quite lately, or that The soap-bubble is really a bubble of
there has been some fraud practised water—the soap merely helps — and the
on the trustful traveller. water is liquid water ; but , as the bubble
Some such explanation as this seems is made, the water is spread out into a
to be likely ; but we simply do not know sort of skin, and for a time, at any rate,
what the truth is. We might set some that skin holds together because the
experiments going now which would particles of which the water is made
be very interesting and valuable hun- hold on to each other and avoid the air
dreds of years after we have gone. on both sides of them . Of course, the
Only very few people will take the bubble cannot last long, for the water
trouble to start an experiment unless which makes it runs down by the force
they are to see the end of it . We know of the earth's attraction until it becomes
that a dried seed need not be a dead too thin , and then it bursts.
seed, but we do not know what is going The point for us to remember just
on in that seed ; we do not know at all now is that the soap -bubble, like the
to what extent it is breathing or taking tea and the sugar, and the balls of
in tiny quantities of water- gas from the mercury, and the water and the blotting
air ; we do not know to what extent paper— that all these are really questions
this is necessary if the seed is to keep of the ways in which the surfaces of
CU COOLULU

1778
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
things behave when they are next to
surfaces of something else. These are
all really questions of what men of
science call surface tension . Tension
simply means stretching, and so the
name hints at the forces of stretching
and holding, which are shown when the
are pulling equally towards each other.
We should almost think of the soap
bubble as made of millions and millions
of tiny little creatures, each with arms
all around it, and all these arms holding
on to the arms round them. On all
sides, then, and equally in all directions,

THE WONDERFUL WAY IN WHICH A SOAP - BUBBLE IS MADE TO HOLD TOGETHER

This picture shows us how a soap - bubble holds together. There are millions of tiny molecules of water, like
a wonderful net of beads, blown out into ball shape by the hot air inside. Of course , no microscope could show
us a bubble like this, but the picture gives us an idea of how a bubble is made. The molecules of water should
really be infinitely smaller and greater in number than they are here, and the lines between the molecules are
merely drawn to suggest the way in which cohesion draws the molecules together. There are not really any lines.
matter that makes up one surface meets there is a pull. All the little creatures, so
another. These questions are very to speak,are the same size, and have the
difficult. In the case of the sugar, or same number of arms, and pull with the
the case of the tube, for instance, we same force, as suggested in the picture.
have three surfaces to study—the tube ; Between them, they make a sort of
the air ; and the water, tea, or mercury. thing like a mattress, in the shape of a
WHY ARE SOAP- BUBBLES ROUND ? ball, but all the parts of this mattress
Soap-bubbles are round for the same are pulling on to each other. If the pull
ieason that so many other things are is uniform , the ball must be round,
round. All the parts of the soap-bubble Of course, other things are happening.
1779
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
The soap -bubble, we know, is made of colours that go to make up white
matter, for which the earth has an light . The waves that make it are
attraction, and which has an attraction quite well known, and are rather low
for the earth. This pulls the soap- down in the scale of colour, like a low
bubble out of shape, and so, if it were note on the piano ; while blue, for
possible to measure a soap-bubble very instance, is high up in the scale, like a
carefully, I do not think you would ever high note . Though we say that the
find one that was perfectly round. But sun gives white light, yet really there
if a soap -bubble could be made some- is rather too much yellow light in sun
where where there was no outside force light for the result to be quite white.
pulling, it would be quite round. WHY ARE BIRDS' EGGS OF DIFFERENT
COLOURS ?
WHY DOES A SOAP-BUBBLE RISE AND FALL ?
It isquite true that if a soap-bubble We inknow,
ences colourofdepend
courseupon
, thatthethepresence
differ
lasts long enough , and does not hurst in thevarious shellsofvariouscolouring
too soon , it will begin to come down
again after substances or pigments, and it is ever
planation of athiswouldbe
little. The to
simplest ex
remember interesting to see howa particular
kind of bird always produces the same
the case of a balloon filled with hot är:
It goes up, for a time, and then it comes kind of colour in its eggs,just as it
down again. It goesup because the hot produces a particular kind of colour in
air inside it is lighter than the air round its
theown feathers. I do not think that
particular kind of food the birds
it, and, being lighter, must rise, just as feed on , nor yet the particular surround
hydrogen would have to rise. When it
cools, then the weight of the coveringof ings itlivesin, have much to do with
the balloon brings it down again . Now, the special colour of its eggs. This
must really depend uponofthethe
a soap -bubble is really a littlehot-air chemistryofthebody particular
bird. I
balloon , for the air that fills it is warm do not mean that you cannot change
air from our lungs, and the air is so much the colour of hens' eggs, for instance ,
lighter than the air outside that itgoes by food,but you willneverget ahen
upwithforce enough to carry the weight to lay a speckled green egg. The colour
of the water that makes the skin of the
soap -bubble . But this cannot last of the shell is really as special to the
long, for water is a very good conductor particular bird as any of the things by
which we know one bird from another.
of heat, and the skin of a soap - bubble WHAT USE ARE THE DIFFERENT COLOURS
is very thin , and so the heat from our OF BIRDS' EGGS ?
breath that is inside the soap -bubble If we compare the colourings and
soon escapes, and the bubble becomes markings of a great number of birds'
as cool as the air around it . Then there eggs with the places in which they are
is nothing to hold up the water of found, we discover that in a large
the bubble, and it begins to come down. number of cases the eggs are so like their
It is interesting to know that the surroundings that they aredifficult to see
carly experiments for ballooning were at all unless we look quite closely. For
actually made with soap -bubbles. instance, a ringed plover's egg has the
WHAT CAUSES A LIGHT TO BE YELLOW ? same general colouring as the sand on
What we call white light is made up which it lies, and it is spotted over with
of a vast number of lights of different black dots which look like tiny shadows.
colours all mixed together in just such This makes it difficult to see the egg at
a proportion that our eyes call it white. all . In other cases the blotches or mark
It is almost as if every note on the ings on the eggs look like an irregular
piecebeach.
piano were played at once—with the the materiallying,
of dark Thus, perhaps, on
the eggs of the tern
difference that if this were done our
cars would call the sound unpleasant ; sometimes look like stones or spotted
whereas, when our eyes see all these pebbles, and, on the other hand, the
different kinds of light at once , the stones themselves look so like eggs as
result is pleasant. The reason why it to be easily mistaken for them at a
is pleasant is that this is the kind of slight distance ; so that the reason for
light which the sun gives, and so through the colouring of eggs is no doubt to
long ages our eyes have become suited help them to be hidden from sight. ·
to it . Now, yellow is just one of the The next Questions begin on page 1859.;
Anom TO DOUDE DOUDOUDOUTOD
1780
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
THE STORY OF A BOY'S HEROISM
OLLAND is a laod where the people have continually to keep watch on the
seaA
HOLL , as parts of the country are below the level of the water when it is high
tide. In order to keep the sea from flooding the land, great banks of sand and
other material were built in these parts of the country. These banks, or dykes - in
England a “dyke " is a ditch, but in the North Country it means a low stone wall
had to be kept in constant repair. This poem tells the true story of how , long ago,
a little boy, during a stormy night, managed, by continually pressing up handfuls
of sand and earth into a small breach made in one of the dykes, to prevent
the sea from widening the breach and flooding the land behind . The writer of
the poem was an American lady named Phoebe Carey, who was born in Ohio
in the year 1824, and was for many years a very popular poetess in America.

THE LEAK IN THE

THE DYKE
‫ܝܩܘܡܘ‬
And he felt the sunshine
dame
goodher
Thefrom looked
cottage
At the close of the
C CONTINUED FROM 1708
come and go
As Peter came and
pleasant day, went .
And cheerily called to her little son
Outside the door at play : And now, as the day was sinking,
Come, Peter, come ! I want to see And the winds began to rise,
you go , The mother looked from her door
While there is light to see , again ,
To the hut of the blind old man who lives Shading her anxious eyes ;
Across the dyke , for me ; And saw the shadows deepen ,
And take these cakes I made for him And birds to their homes come back ;
They are hot and smoking yet. And never a sign of Peter
You have time enough to go and come Along the level track.
& 6

Before the sun is set."
Then the good wife turned to her labour,
Humming a simple song ,
And thought of her husband working hard
At the sluices all day long ;
And set the turf a- blazing ,
And brought the coarse black bread ,
That he might find a fire at night,
And find the table spread.
And Peter left the brother
With whom all day he had played ,
And the sister who had watched their sports
In the willow's tender shade ;
And told them they'd see him back before
They saw a star in sight,
Though he wouldn't be afraid to go
In the very blackest night !
For he was a brave , bright fellow,
With eye and conscience clear ;
He could do whatever a boy might do,
And he had not learned to fear .
Why, he wouldn't have robbed a bird's nest,
Nor brought a stork to harm ,
Though never a law in Holland
Had stood to stay his arm !
And now, with his face all glowing,
And eyes as bright as the day
With the thoughts of his pleasant errand ,
He trudged along the way.
And soon his joyous prattle
Made glad a lonesome place
Alas ! if only the blind old man
Could have seen that happy face !
Yet he , somehow , caught the brightness
Which his voice and presence lent ;
08.02
1781
But she said : He will come at morning ,
So I need not fret or grieve
Though it isn't like my boy at all
To stay without my leave."
But where was the child delaying ?
On the homeward way was he ,
And across the dyke while the sun was up
An hour above the sea .
He was stooping now to gather flowers,
Now listening to the sound ,
As the angry waters dashed themselves
Against their narrow bound.
Ah ! well for us,” said Peter,
That the gates are good and strong,
And my father tends them carefully,
Or they would not hold you long !
You're a wicked sea , said Peter ;
“ I know why you fret and chafe :
You would like to spoil our lands and homes,
But our sluices keep you safe ! "
But hark ! Through the noise of the waters
Comes a low, clear , trickling sound ;
And the child's face pales with terror,
And his blossoms drop to the ground.
He is up the bank in a moment,
And , stealing through the sand ,
He sees a stream not yet so large
As his slender, childish hand.
' Tis a leak in the dyke ! He is but a boy,
Unused to fearful scenes ;
But, young as he is , he has learned to know
The dreadful thing that means .
A leak in the dyke ! The stoutest heart
Grows faint that cry to hear,
And the bravest man all the land
Turns white with mortal fear :
 ROS
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF
For he knows the smallest leak may grow
To a flood in a single night ;
And he knows the strength of the cruel sea
When loosed in its angry might.
And the boy ! he has seen the danger,
And , shouting a wild alarm ,
He forces back the weight of the sea
With the strength of his single arm !
He listens for the joyful sound
Of a footstep passing nigh ;
And he lays his ear to the ground to catch
The answer to his cry.
And he hears the rough wind blowing,
And the waters rise and fall ,
But never an answer came to him,
Save the echo of his call .
He sees no hope, no succour
His feeble voice is lost ;
Yet what shall he do but watch and wait,
Though he perish at his post !
So, faintly calling and crying
Till the sun is under the sea,
Crying and moaning till the stars
Come out for company .
He thinks of his brother and sister,
Asleep in their safe , warm bed ;
He thinks of his father and mother,
Of himself as dying and dead,
And of how, when the night is over,
They must come and find him at last ;
But he never thinks he can leave the place
Where duty holds him fast .
The good dame in the cottage
Is up and astir with the light,
For the thought of her little Peter
Has been with her all night.
And now she watches the pathway,
As yestereve she had done ;
But what does she see so strange and black
Against the rising sun ?
Her neighbours are bearing between them
Something straight to her door
The child is coming home , but not
As he ever came before !
“ He is dead ! ” she cries . My da ing ! ”
And the startled father hears ,
And comes and looks the way she looks,
And fears the thing she fears.
Till a glad shout from the bearers
Thrills the stricken man and wife :
Give thanks, for your son has saved our land ,
And God has saved his life ! "
So , there in the morning sunshine,
They knelt about the boy ;
And every head was bared and bent
In tearful , reverent joy.
' Tis many a year since then ; but still,
When the sea roars like a flood ,
Their boys are taught what a boy can do
Who is brave, and true, and good.
For every man in that country
Takes his son by the hand ,
And tells him of little Peter ,
Whose courage saved the land.
They have many a valiant hero,
Remembered through the years ;
But never one whose name so oft
Is named with loving tears.
And his deed shall be sung by the cradle,
And told to the child on the knee ,
So long as the dykes of Holland
Divide the land from the sea !
1782
POETRY
MY SHIPS
This poem is written by Ella Wheeler Wilcox, the American
poetess. She is a busy writer for the papers in New York,
but she has written many poems for adult readers and some
really fine verses for young folk. “ My Ships" is a charming
poem which young and old alike will much appreciate.
IF all the shipsI haveat sea
Should come a-sailing home to me,
Ah, well ! the harbour could not hold
So many sails as there would be
If all my ships came in from sea.
If half my ships came home from sea
And brought their precious freight to me,
Ah, well ! I should have wealth as great
As any king who sits in state ;
So rich the treasures that would be,
In half my ships now out at sea.
If just one ship I have at sea
Should come a -sailing home to me ,
Ah, well ! the storm - clouds then might frown ;
For if the others all went down ,
Still rich and proud and glad I'd be
If that one ship came back to me
If that one ship went down at sea,
And all the others came to me,
Weighed down with gems and wealth untold,
With glory, honours, riches, gold ,
The poorest soul on earth I'd be,
If that one ship came not to me.
O skies, be calm ! O winds, blow free
Blow all my ships safe home to me !
But if thou sendest some a -wrack ,
To never more come sailing back ,
Send any - all that skim the sea,
But bring my love-ship home to me.
THE CHARGE OF THE LIGHT BRIGADE
The charge of the Light Brigade took place at the battle
of Balaclava on October 25 , 1854, in the war with Russia.
It was the result of a mistaken order from a commanding
officer , and in twenty -five minutes more than two- thirds of
our soldiers had been killed or wounded. Lord Tennyson
in this famous poem has given deathless fame to the brave
soldiers who went forward fearlessin obedience to command,
although they knew they were going to almost certain death.
Halea league,half a league,
Half a league onward,
All in the valley of Death
Rode the six hundred .
Forward , the Light Brigade !
Charge for the guns ! ” he said ;
Into the valley of Death
Rode the six hundred .
“ Forward , the Light Brigade ! ”
Was there a man dismay'd ?
Not tho' the soldier knew
Someone had blunder'd :
Theirs not to make reply,
Theirs not to reason why,
Theirs but to do and die ;
Into the valley of Death
Rode the six hundred.
Cannon to right of them,
Cannon to left of them ,
Cannon in front of them
Volley'd and thunder'd ;
Storm'd at with shot and shell,
Boldly they rode and well,
Into the jaws of Death,
Into the mouth of Hell
Rode the six hundred .
beram
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK
Flash'd all their sabres bare,
Flash'd as they turn'd in air,
Sabring the gunners there,
Charging an army, while
All the world wonder'd :
Plunged in the battery-smoke,
Right thro' the line they broke ;
Cossack and Russian
Reel'd from the sabre-stroke ,
Shatter'd and sunder'd .
Then they rode back , but not
Not the six hundred .
Cannon to right of them,
Cannon to left of them ,
Cannon behind them
Volley'd and thunder'd ;
Storm'd at with shot and shell,
While horse and hero fell ,
They that had fought so well
Came thro' the jaws of Death,
Back from the mouth of Hell ,
All that was left of them ,
Left of six hundred.
When can their glory fade ?
O the wild charge they made !
All the world wonder'd .
Honour the charge they made !
Honour the Light Brigade,
Noble six hundred !
THE KINGDOM OF GOD
Dr. R. C. Trench, formerly Archbishop of Dublin , wrote
many wise works for scholars, also many fine poems.
This one is quite suitable for the child'S BOOK OF POETRY,
as every boy and girl should understand that God is
Love, and that to do what is pleasing in the sight of
God, to follow our daily path with Him as our guide,
is the only sure way to find real and lasting happiness.
I SAY to thee, do thou repeat
To the first man thou mayest meet
In lane, highway, or open street,
That he and we and all men move
Under a canopy of love,
As broad as the blue sky above ;
That doubt and trouble , fear and pain
And anguish all are shadows vain ;
That death itself shall not remain ;
That weary deserts we may tread,
A dreary labyrinth may thread ,
Through dark ways underground be led ;
Yet , if we will one Guide obey,
The dreariest path, the darkest way,
Shall issue out in heavenly day ;
And we, on divers shores now cast ,
Shall meet, our perilous voyage past,
All in our Father's house at last.
And ere thou leave him , say thou this,
Yet one word more- they only miss
The winning of that final bliss
Who will not count it true, that love,
Blessing , not cursing, rules above,
And that in it we live and move .
And one thing further make him know,
That to believe these things are so,
This firm faith never to forgo,
1783
OF POETRYBROOKS SEARA
Despite of all which seems at strife
With blessing, all with curses rife,
That this is blessing, this is life.
NAPOLEON AND THE YOUNG ENG
LISH SAILOR
Many are the stories told of Napoleon Bonaparte which
almost make us admire him , while we cannot help disliking
the whole nature of the man. Thomas Campbell, the author
of “ Ye Mariners of England , " has, in the following fine
poem , enshrined one of the pleasantest of these old stories,
relating to an incident that is supposed to have happened
when Napoleon was preparing, at Boulogne, for his in.
vasion of England -a threat which he never carried out.
I LOVE contemplating - apart
From all his homicidal glory
The traits that soften to our heart
Napoleon's story.
' Twas when his banners at Boulogne
Armed in our island every freeman,
His navy chanced to capture one
Poor British seaman .
They suffered him , I know not how,
Unprisoned on the shore to roain ;
And aye was bent his youthſul brow
On England's home.
His eye, methinks, pursued the flight
Of birds to Britain , half-way over,
With envy—they could reach the white
Dear cliffs of Dover.
A storiny midnight watch , he thought ,
Than this sojourn would have been dearer,
If but the storm his vessel brought
To England nearer.
At last , when care had banished sleep ,
He saw one morning , dreaming, doating,
An empty hogshead from the deep
Come shoreward floating.
He hid it in a cave, and wrought
The livelong day, laborious, lurking,
Until he launched a tiny boat,
By mighty working.
Oh, dear me ! ' Twas a thing beyond
Description ! Such a wretched wherry ,
Perhaps, ne'er ventured on a pond ,
Or crossed a ferry.
For ploughing in a salt -sea field
It would have made the boldest shudder ;
Untarred , uncompassed , and unkeeled ,
No sail -no rudder .
From neighbouring woods he interlaced
His sorry skiff with wattled willows ;
And thus equipped he would have passed
The foaming billows.
A French guard caught him on the beach,
His little Argo sorely jeering ,
Till tidings of him chanced to reach
Napoleon's hearing.
With folded arms Napoleon stood ,
Serene alike in peace and danger,
And , in his wonted attitude ,
Addressed the stranger.
 you • THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
“ Rash youth , that would'st yon Channel pass
On twigs and staves so rudely fashioned ,
Thy heart with some sweet English lass
Must be impassioned .”
“ I have no sweetheart, " said the lad ;
" But, absent years from one another,
Great was the longing that I had
To see my mother."
" And so thou shalt," Napoleon said ,
You've both my favour justly won ;
A noble mother must have bred
So brave a son .
He gave the tar a piece of gold,
And, with a flag of truce, commanded
He should be shipped to England Old,
And safely landed .
Our sailor oft could scantly shift
To find a dinner, plain and hearty,
But never changed the coin and gift
Of Bonaparté.
THE HAPPIEST LAND
The poet Longfellow has adapted the following ballad from
a German original. It illustrates the vanity of earthly joys.
THERE sat one day in quiet,
By an alehouse on the Rhine,
Four hale and hearty fellows
And drank the precious wine.
The landlord's daughter filled their cups,
Around the rustic board ;
Then sat they all so calm and still,
And spake not one rude word .
But when the maid departed ,
A Swabian raised his hand,
And cried , all hot and flushed with wine,
Long live the Swabian land !
The greatest kingdom upon earth
Cannot with that compare ;
With all the stout and hardy men ,
And the nut-brown maidens there ."
“ Ha ! ” cried a Saxon , laughing
And dashed his beard with wine
“ I had rather live in Lapland ,
Than that Swabian land of thine !
“ The goodliest land on all this earth,
It is the Saxon land !
There have I as many maidens
As fingers on this hand ! ”
Hold your tongues ! both Swabian
and Saxon ! "
A bold Bohemian cries ;
“ If there's a heaven upon this earth,
CREDINOG
MODDED
In Bohemia it lies .
LCOR
“ There the tailor blows the flute,
And the cobbler blows the horn,
And the miner blows the bugle,
Over mountain gorge and bourn .”
And then the landlord's daughter
Up to Heaven raised her hand ,
And said , “ Ye may no more contend
There lies the happiest land ! "
THE RETIRED CAT
William Cowper, the gentle and observant poet of domestic
life, though not often given to humour, has a sly touch of
that quality in this charming poem about his cat, which got
shut in a drawer, and by doing so gave its master an opportunity
to point an excellent moral not only for cats but for all of us.
A POET's cat, sedate and grave,
As poet well could wish to have,
Was much addicted to inquire
For nooks to which she might retire ,
And where, secure as mouse in chink,
She might repose, or sit and think.
Sometimes ascending, debonair,
An apple -tree, or lofty pear,
Lodged with convenience in the fork ,
She watch'd the gardener at his work ;
Sometimes her ease and solace sought
In an old empty watering-pot ;
There, wanting nothing save a fan
To seem somenymph in her sedan,
Apparell'd in exactest sort,
And ready to be borne to court.
But love of change it seems has placa
Not only in our wiser race ;
Cats also feel , as well as we,
That passion's force, and so did she.
Her climbing, she began to find ,
Exposed her too much to the wind,
And the old utensil of tin
Was cold and comfortless within .
She therefore wish'd , instead of those,
Some place of more serene repose ,
Where neither cold might come, nor air
Too rudely wanton with her hair ;
And sought it in the likeliest mode
Within her master's snug abode.
A drawer, it chanced , at bottom lined
With linen of the softest kind ,
With such as merchants introduce
From India, for the ladies' use
A drawer impending o'er the rest,
Half open , in the topmost chest,
Of depth enough , and none to spare,
Invited her to slumber there.
Puss, with delight beyond expression ,
Survey'd the scene and took possession.
Recumbent at her ease, ere long,
And lull’d by her own hum -drum song ,
She left the cares of life behind ,
And slept as she would sleep her last ;
When in came, housewifely inclined,
The chambermaid , and shut it fast,
By no malignity impelled ,
But all unconscious whom it held .
Awaken'd by the shock , cried Puss ,
“ Was ever cat attended thus !
The open drawer was left, I see,
Merely to prove a nest for me ;
For soon as I was well composed ,
Then came the maid , and it was closed .
How smooth these kerchiefs, and how
sweet !
Oh , what a delicate retreat !
I will resign myself to rest ,
Till Sol , declining in the west,
Shall call to supper, when , no doubt,
Susan will comeand let me out. "
The evening came , the sun descended ,
And Puss remain'd still unattended .
1784
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY :
The night roli'd tardily away , But mirth is turn'd to melancholy ,
(With her, indeed, ' twas never day. )
The sprightly morn her course renew'd,
: The evening grey again ensued ; Yet shall poorTom find pleasant weather,
And Puss came into mind no more When he, who all commands,
Than if entomb'd the day before. Shall give, to call life's crew together,
With hunger pinch'd , and pinch'd for
room , Thus Death, who kings and tars despatches,
She now presaged approaching doom,
Nor slept a single wink or purr’d,
Conscious of jeopardy incurr'd .
That night, by chance, the poet,
watching,
Heard an inexplicable scratching ;
His noble heart went pit- a- pat,
And to himself he said : “ What's that ? ”
He drew the curtain at his side,
And forth he peep'd , but nothing spied ;
Yet, by his ear directed, guess'd
Something imprison'd in the chest,
And, doubtful what, with prudent care
Resolved it should continue there.
At length a voice which well he knew,
A long and melancholy mew,
Saluting his poetic ears,
Consoled him and dispellid his fears.
He left his bed , he trod the floor,
And 'gan in haste the drawers explore
The lowest first, and without stop
The rest in order, to the top ;
For 'tis a truth well known to most :
That whatsoever thing is lost,
We seek it, ere it come to light,
In every cranny but the right.
-Forth skipp'd the cat , not now replete ,
As erst, with airy self-conceit ,
DA
Nor in her own fond apprehension
LORS
A theme for all the world's attention :
ELLER
LLLLS
But modest, sober, cured of all
SEDE
Her notions hyperbolical ,
And wishing for a place of rest
Anything rather than a chest.
Then stepp'd the poet into bed
With this reflection in his head :
MORAL
Beware of too sublime a sense
Of your own worth and consequence !
The man who dreams himself so great,
And his importance of such weight,
That all around, in all that's done,
Must move and act for him alone,
Will learn in school of tribulation ,
The folly of his expectation.
TOM BOWLING
This song by Charles Dibdin is the most popular of all
sea songs, and deservedly so , for its pure and simple pathos.
The sheerhulk
HERE,a crew Tom
our poor
darling of ,lies ; Bowling,
No more he'll hear the tempest howling,
For death has broach'd him to.
His form was of the manliest beauty,
His heart was kind and soft ;
Faithful , below, he did his duty ;
But now he's gone aloft.
Tom never from his word departed ,
His virtues were so rare.
His friends were many and true -hearted ,
His Poll was kind and fair :
And then he'd sing , so blithe and jolly,
Ah, many's the timeand oft !
For Tom is gone aloft.
The word to pipe “ all hands.'
In vain Tom's life has doft'd :
For though his body's under hatches,
His soul has gone aloft.
THE OFFICER'S GRAVE
Henry Francis Lyte, the author of the following poem , was
born near Kelso in 1793 and died in the South of France in 1847.
He was a clergyman and wrote many hymns sung in all the
churches, the best known of these being “ Abide with me."
THEREis in thewide, lone sea
unmark'd , but holy ;
A spotthe
For there gallant and the free
In his ocean -bed lies lowly.
Down , down, within the deep
That oft to triumph bore him ,
Hesleeps a sound and pleasant sleep.
With the salt waves dashing o'er him.
He sleeps serene and safe
From tempest or from billow ,
Where the storms that high above him
chafe
Scarce rock his peaceful pillow .
The sea and him in death,
They did not dare to sever ;
It was his home while he had breath :
'Tis now his rest for ever !
Sleep on , thou mighty dead !
A glorious tomb they've found thee ;
The broad blue sky above thee spread :
The boundless waters round thee .
O GOD OUR HELP IN AGES PAST
This beautiful hymn by Dr. Isaac Watts, first published
in his “ Psalms of David " in 1719 , is generally regarded
as the finest he has written, In its original form it
consisted of nine verses, but has since been reduced
to six . Charles Wesley , the brother of the great man
who founded the Methodist Church , altered the hymn in
several parts, and changed the first line to “ O God, our
help in ages past." This form is retained in most of
the present-day collections of hymns, and is here given.
O GOD our help
Our, hope inagespast,
for years to come,
Our shelter from the stormy blast
And our eternal home.
Beneath the shadow of Thy throne
Thy saints have dwelt secure,
Sufficient is Thine arm alone,
And our defence is sure.
Before the hills in order stood,
Or earth received her frame ,
From everlasting Thou art God ,
To endless years the same.
A thousand ages in Thy sight
Are like an evening gone :
Short as the watch that ends the night
Before the rising sun .
Time, like an ever-rolling stream ,
Bears all its sons away ;
They fly forgotten as a dream
Dies at the opening day.
O God , our help in ages past,
Our hope for years to come ,
Thou our guard while troubles last
And our eternal home.
1785
LITTLE VERSES FOR VERY LITTLE PEOPLE
The Cat's Tea -party
Five little pussy-cats, invited out to tea,
Cried, “ Mother, let us go. Oh, do ! for good we'll surely be !
We'll wear our bibs and hold our things as you have shown us how
Spoons in right paws, cups in left - and make a pretty bow ;
We'll always say, “ Yes, if you please,' and ' Only half of that !' ”
“ Then go, my darling children ," said the happy mother cat.

옳
The five little pussy - cats went out that night to tea,
Their heads were smooth and glossy, their tails were swinging free ;
They held their things as they had learned, and tried to be polite
With snowy bibs beneath their chins they were a pretty sight.

ter
cm IMG
But, alas ! for manners beautiful and coats as soft as silk,
The moment that the little kits were asked to take some milk
They dropped their spoons, forgot to bow , and—oh, what do you think ?
They put their noses in their cups, and all began to drink !
Yes, every naughty little kit set up a meow for more,
They knocked the teacups over, and scampered through the door !

똥
BAA , BLACK SHEEP
BAA, BAA,
TE

Baa, baa , black sheep , Have you any wool ? Yes, sir, yes, sir, three bags full;

One for the mas-ter, and one for the dame, And one for the lit - tle boy that cries down the lane.

THE NEXT VERSES AND NURSERY RHYMES BEGIN ON PAGE 1849

1786
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E have already learned how and why we breathe. In these pages we
WE read what happens to the air we breathe, and the best way to breathe
well and safely. We must not try to live in air containing too much carbonic
acid , or else the carbonic acid in our blood, which the burning of our bodies has
given to it, cannot get out freely, and we shall be poisoned by it. We require
fresh air by night as well as by day - even though there are still people who
think that night air is not safe to breathe. If we do not live in fresh
air we are bound to suffer, for our lungs cannot protect themselves from foul
air, which we were never meant to breathe, and children suffer even more than
grown -up people from the effects of bad ventilation. This is true oftoo many school
rooms — where they begin teaching children by poisoning their brains to start with.
FRESH AIR & HEALTHY LIVES
are apt, per should never be for.
WE haps, to think CONTINUED FROM 1638
gotten . We breathe
that the air we much more vigorously
breathe inwardly in cold weather, since
passes right to our lungs, we naturally require more heat
but that is far from true. in order to keep the warmth of
As a matter of fact, the amount the blood up to the mark, and
of air we breathe in in an breathing supplies oxygen for
ordinary breath is hardly enough to the fuel of the body.
fill the air-passage from the nose to It is very interesting to observe the
the bottom of the windpipe. Even vigour of breathing in different crea
though the nose warms and moistens tures. The small song-birds are the
the air, it does not do so nearly enough most vigorous breathers of all. This
to make the air fit to go rightinto the is not surprising if we think of the
depth of the lungs. It is thusreally enormous amount of work a bird does
only the top layer of the air in our when it is both flying and singing.
lungs that we change every time we The possibility of breathing at all
breathe, and the restis done by what depends upon the fact that there is
is called diffusion — the new air more oxygen in the air outside than
gradually soaking down into the lungs, in the blood, and that there is less
and the old air soaking up . The carbonic acid in the air outside than
difference between air breathed in and in the blood. The interchange of the
air breathed out can be easily stated. gases is only possible because this is
In the course of being breathed, air so. It is possible to measure exactly
loses oxygen , whilst, on the other the amount of carbonic acid in the
hand, it gains carbonic acid , water, air, and to say at what point that
heat, and a certain amount of waste amount becomes too high for safety.
matter from the lungs. If we attempt to breathe air con
We give off much more carbonic taining too much carbonic acid, the
acid than usual when we take exercise, carbonic acid in our blood cannot get
and also for some time after a meal ; out, or cannotget out quickly enough,
especially if there has been a good and we must die.
deal of sugar and fat in the food, for There is a cave in Italy , called the
these things are quickly burnt, pro- Cave of Dogs, where the air contains a
ducing carbonic acid. We breathe great deal of carbonic acid . Owing
less at night , and older people breathe to the fact that carbonic acid is
less than younger people. ŵe breathe heavier than the air, it lies in a layer
much more vigorously and more upon the floor, with the result that a
deeply and better in the presence of man going into the cave can breathe
light - a most important fact which there because his mouth is above the

2002
1787
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
level of the carbonic acid, while a dog
will fall down unconscious because its
nose is below the surface of the car-
bonic acid, and so it cannot breathe.
HE MISTAKEN IDEA OF THE LAW AND
THE HOW IT SHOULD BE ALTERED
Some day the law of the land will
lay down definite rules as to the quality
of the air in shops, and workshops, and
factories, and so on. Already there are
rules as to the number of feet of space
that should be allowed for each person ,
but these rules are not nearly enough.
It is no good having many cubic feet of
space for each person iſ the air in that
space is not changed. If you put a
single man in the Albert Hallin London
and could close the hall entirely so
that no air could get in or out , the time
would come and it would not be so
long as you would think - when he
would be suffocated and die. At
present the law thinks that it is only
necessary to order so many feet of
space. What it should really do is
to order so many feet of space, and then
order that the air in that space be
changedas often asis necessary; I
a man is in a room ten feet in each direc
tion, he has a thousand cubic feet of
space. The whole of the air in that
space should be changed every twenty
minutes if he is not to be injured. In
many of the most magnificent shops in
London the assistants can be seen pale
and tired, and without appetite, and a
large number of them will soon .die of
consumption, simply because the air is
not often enough changed.
GRACE DARLING
HºwSLEEPING DIED THROUGH
WITH HER WINDOW CLOSED
Many of them are doubtless them-
selves partly to blame for their care-
lessness about their own bedrooms;
or rather the State is to blame for not
having taught them the things that
matter when they were children . We
know that if a single person were put
to sleep in the largest bedroom in Eng-
land, and the air were not changed in
burning at night , and so the air in cities
it at all , except by himself, it would be
unfit to breathe long before the morn- ' contains less carbonic acid. Also, as
ing. Of course, the smaller the bedroom
the more serious it would be ; but I
want to insist that even the largest
room does not contain sufficient air to
last through a whole night without
being changed. That is why it is our
duty to keep our bedroom windows
monton
1788
open. Grace Darling, whose story is.
told on page 191 , died of consumption, 1
though during the day she breathed
the splendid sea air , because at night
she slept in a tiny little room with a
closed window . After all , we have to
spend about a third of our whole lives
asleep, and children should spend even
more than that proportion ; so it
is worth while making sure that we
breathe pure air during that time.
Everyone should sleep in a bedroom
with a window open. Rooms that have
no windows, or windows that will not
open, are not fit for people to sleep in.
The " box " beds in which some
people have to sleep in Scotland are
very bad indeed, and people sleeping
in them are very apt to get consump
tion. It is best to open the window at
the top, and the top sash should be
pulled right down-three or four inches
is not enough. This may make a
draught between the window and the
fireplace, but that does not matter at
all if the head of the bed is placed out
of the draught.
HOWS HEALTHY
CHIMNEY HELPS TO KEEP
An open chimney is very good for
helping to keep the air in a room
fresh. When it is not used, as in
summer -time, a chimney should never
be closed, for this simply prevents
the bad air from getting through it ,
and every openingof this kind to a
room should be welcome. Open win
dows at night sometimes rattle, and
people are apt to shut them then ;
but all you need is a couple of wedges to
make the sash firm so that it will not
rattle, and then you need not run the
risk of spending the night in impure air.
There is a very general belief that
night air is dangerous for us to breathe ;
but this is nonsense. Chemists have
very carefully examined the air in the
day and in the night, and now we
know that night air is purer than day
air. Fewer fires and furnaces are
there is less traffic , there is less dust in
the air at night. We know exactly
how the old belief as to night air arose,
and the history of it is very interesting.
It was noticed that people who ex
posed themselves to the night air
in certain parts of the world were very,
 BARRO
FRESH AIR AND HEALTHY LIVES
apt to get a serious disease which was
supposed to be due to the quality of the
air. So long ago this disease was called
malaria , which simply means bad air,
and the disease is known by that name
to this day. But we have lately found
that it is due to the bite of a certain
kind of insect which carries the microbes
of the disease, and this insect is a kind of
mosquito. It only bites at night .
There are no mosquitoes of this kind in
England, and there is no malaria in this
country except in the case of a few people
who have brought it from abroad ;
but they cannot give it to other people,
since the mosquito that carries the
disease does not exist here .
So far, then, as England is concerned,
night air is purer and better than day air,
and there is nothing to be said against pass into the blood from the lungs
it . Thousands of peopleare killed quite readily , the lung-cells being unable
by night air even in England, but it is
the foul night air which they have made
in their own bedrooms, and have not
escape .way,
to every
allowed in weakens
Thisand their
bodies especially somethingis wrongby the presenceof
in such a way that the microbes of
consumption can enter and destroy them.
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN WE BREATHE
AIR THAT IS NOT FRESH
It is impossible to say too much good
about fresh air, or to say too much
about the difference between breathing
fresh air and impure air. So far as
solid matter and microbes in the air
are concerned , we have a certain
amount of protection so long as we
breathe through our noses, but the
nose -filter, though it is quite sufficient
for the kind of air we ought to breathe,
is not sufficient to filter the kind of air . becoming smaller and weaker and
many of us do breathe ; and, so far as
bad gases are concerned , we have
absolutely no protection at all. If there
is too much carbonic acid in the air we
breathe—because it is air that has al-
ready been breathed by ourselves or
someone else — then the carbonic acid
from our blood cannot get out quickly
enough .
The consequence is that we are living,
or trying to live, with blood which is
overloaded with carbonic acid . Every
tissue in the body suffers, but that
which suffers soonest and most is the
brain, which needs pure blood even
more than any other part of the body.
Thus the bad ventilation of school-
rooms is one of the chief reasons why
1789
children cannot attend to their lessons,
or fall asleep during their lessons, or
fail to remember what they have
learned . It is also one of the reasons
whymanychildren do not grow properly,
for the brain presides over the growth of
the whole body, and it cannot do this
if it is fed with impure blood , such as
many unfortunatechildren have to make
the best of during the whole time they
spend indoors, whether by day or night .
Hºw BADGASES , IN THE AIR POISON
OUR BRAIN AND give US HEADACHE
As regards the other bad gases in
air, most of which have been given off
by the lungs and skin either of ourselves
or of others, the body has no means of
protection against them at all. They
to stop them at all, and then the blood
carries them to every part of the body
and distributes them to our great
injury. Sometimes we can guess that
headache or by lack ofappetite, both
of which show that the brain has been
poisoned . But often we notice nothing
at all, though the damage is being done
just the same.. Children left to grow
in impure air suffer just as plants grown
in impure air would suffer, or fishes
grown in water which is not changed
and all three for the same reason .
OW BAD AIR IS HELPING
HºYH TO WEAKEN
E BRITISH RACE
Many people talk nonsense about
this subject. They use a long word
which means that English people are
stunted ; that we have had our time
of success , and that the nation as a whole
is dying. But English babies, we know,
are as fine now as ever they were, only we
try to grow too many of them in bad
air to which no rich man would expose
his horses, and we are not wise enough
to blame ourselves when we see the
bad results. Perhaps you yourselves
will help to put an end to these things
when you grow up ; but at the very least
I hope that what we have learned about
the lungs and their importance for
our lives will teach us how to protect
ourselves from enemies , most of which
can be quite easily avoided if only we
have a little knowledge and apply it .
The next part of this is on page 1909.
THE LIGHT OF THE LANTERN FELL UPON GUY FAWKES

Nimes

MON
W

NORMANAULT
Guy Fawkes was really a brave , handsome soldier , who feared no enemy and loved a fight. He and some other
Roman Catholics in England were so angry with King James I. and his Parliament because they oppressed the
Catholics that they made a plot to blow up the Houses of Parliament on the day the king opened it in person.
The plot was betrayed and Guy Fawkes was captured, watching and waiting beside the barrels of gunpowder.
கககக Cemad e erre
1790
 The Child's -Book of
STORIES

Some of the friends of Guy Fawkes in his plot

GUY FAWKES AND HIS PLOT

Please to remember the
Fifth of November, But though we laugh
Gunpowder, treason , and
CONTINUED FROM 1693 SC at the scarecrow , and
plot. though our ancestors
Guy Fawkes, Guy ! Stick him up on called it a brute, it
high ! represents a very handsome and
Hang him to a lamp-post, and there dashing gentleman, who once
let him die ! breathed good Yorkshire air, rode
HEN the yellow fogs roll up from
WHE a horse with grace, and could swing
Father Thames, drenching area as long a sword as any soldier of his
railings, door-knockers, pillar-boxes, time. Guy Fawkes came of a good
lamp-posts, policemen , and even the old Yorkshire family, and was a soldier
muffin man with his cheerful bell ; and who feared no enemy and loved a
when the gas has to be lighted all day fight. It chanced that he once fell
long, and every other old gentleman into intimate talk with a Roman
you stumble on in the street is coughing Catholic gentleman named Catesby.
himself the colour of a lobster ; then Fawkes was a Roman Catholic too,
it is, in this dismal month of Novem- and in their talk they conversed about
ber, that dozing old ladies, with shawls the injustice which Romanists had to
over their shoulders and mittens on endure under a Protestant king.
their hands, start at their fireside to Catesby found the brave Fawkes hot
as any man of his acquaintance against
hear the fierce and murderous cry of
“ Guy Fawkes, Guy ! Stick him up the Protestants, and very soon he laid
on high ! ” bare to this gallant soldier a schenie
Every Fifth of November, in fair for getting rid of the Protestants .
weather and in foul, effigies of this Guy Parliament was to meet on the Fifth
Fawkes are borne through the streets of November. The king would be
by boys who look like fiendish demons there and all the nobility. To blow
in their pink masks and cocked hats them up with gunpowder would be to
made out of newspaper. For three get rid of Protestantism , and bring a
hundred years the Fifth of November child to the throne, who could very
has been set aside for the burning of soon be made a good Catholic. The
this scarecrow guy — this hideous and scheme was not so difficult as it
comical scarecrow , which only makes sounded . Under the Houses of Parlia
us laugh, although it once made our ment there were cellars, which mer
ancestors grind their teeth and mutter : chants rented for the storing of goods.
“ To the bonfire with him ! Burn him ! The conspirators could hire one of
Burn the brute ! ' these cellars, could roll in barrels of
Per
1791
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
gunpowder, and on the seat cay On they went, the orange light from
someone would be found bod enough their lanterns finging weird shadows
to set fire to the explosive. over the low cobwebbed ceilings, the
Guy Fawkes at once volunteered for rekir.g wais, ard the soft, dampfloors.
this post of danger. He was ready to Suddenly they came upon a cellar
sacrifice himseli for what he considered where, under piles of brushwood, could
a good cause. be seen barrels ranged side by side
Everything prospered with the idea . in great numbers. The lanterns were
A cellar was found right under the liited on high. A ray of light pierced
House of Lords. The gunpowder was to a dark corner . There, clean - cut
procured. Faggots of brushwood were against the dark wall, could be seen the
smuggled in. There was nothing to do delicate, shadowy outline of a man's
but wait for the day. But among the face ; and nearer, the thin , shining
conspirators there was a gentleman line of a long sword. In an instant
named Sir Thomas Tresham , whose the soldiers rushed forward and flung
brother- in -law was a peer, Lord Mont- themselves upon the conspirator, who,
eagle. The thought of letting his though he fought savagely, was soon
brother -in -law go unwarned to his overpowered and bound a prisoner.
death sting the conscience of Sir " Oh, would I had been quicker ! "
Thomas Tresham and would not let panted Fawkes ; “ would I had set
him rest . fire to the powder ! Death would have
Late in the month of October a been sweet had some of my enemies
man in a long cloak suddenly presented gone with me.”
himself at the supper -table of Lord He was carried to the Tower. There
Monteagle , threw down a letter, and he was put upon the rack and tortured ;
disappeared as quickly as he had come . but though his muscles snapped and his
The letter said : bones cracked, he refused to tell the
My lord , out of the love I bear to some of
names of the other conspirators. He
your friends, I have a care of your preserva was told that they had fled and had
66

tion , therefore I would advise you , as you
tender your life, to devise some excuse to
shiſt your attendance at this Parliament, for
God and man hath concurred to punish the
wickedness of this time ; and think not
slightly of this advertisement, but retire to
yourself into your country , where you may
expect the event in safety ; for though there
be no appearance of any stir, yet I say they
shall receive a terrible blow this Parliament,
and yet they shall not see who hurts them .
Lord Monteagle carried this letter to
Cecil, the statesman of King James, why hehad collected so much powder.
66
been arrested . “ Then it is useless to
name them ,” said Fawkes, “ for they
have named themselves.”
But his courage was in vain . One
after another the conspirators were
discovered , and death followed death
in rapid succession . “ How could you
bear the thought of causing my children
and so many innocentpersons to perish ?"
asked King James. "For desperate ills
there must be desperate remedies," was
the reply . A Scottish courtier asked him

and Cecil bore it to the king . They
shall receive a terrible blow this Parlia-
ment," pondered King James, who was
said to be the wisest fool in Christendom ,
" and yet they shall not see who hurts
them ." He stroked his chin and
reflected . Then a light came into his
eyes ; he looked up quickly at Cecil .
“ This smells Gunpowder” he said.
They kept their idea very dark . At
midnight on the fourth of November
a magistrate named Sir Thomas Knevett
and a squad of soldiers made their way
noiselessly through cellars under the
Houses of Parliament.
They encountered no conspirators, and
saw nothing to arouse their suspicions.
VENTUVO ITIN
1792
“ I had purposed to cause all the Scots
to be blown as far as Scotland ,"
answered Fawkes gravely.
The whole country was roused by
news of the plot .
“ Death to the Papists !" was the cry
on every side ; and if Roman Catholics
had suffered before, they suffered a
hundred times more afterwards.
Guy Fawkes—the gallant and brave
soldier, but a misled and bigoted
Catholic — was executed on February 6,
1606 . We almost forget his malign
and murderous intention in remember
ing the wonderful pleasure he has 11
1
given to all sorts and conditions of
boys for over three hundred years.
TUT
 THE FABLES OF
THE WOLF AND THE LAMB
NE very hot day, a wolf and a lamb
came at the same time to a moun
ONstr
tain eam to quench their thirst.
The wolf stood higher up the hillside
than the lamb ; but, wanting to pick
a quarrel, the wolf called out, “ What
do you mean by disturbing the water
and making it so muddy that I cannot
drink ? " The lamb answered that it
could not be so, because the water was
running downhill from the wolf to him ,
and therefore could not be disturbed
higher up the stream .
“ Never mind," answered the wolf.
“ You have behaved very badly , and
be
ÆSOP THE SLAVE
slightly , and, flying into a rage,he at once
bit the file as hard as he could . The
hard steel file cut the snake's mouth ;
but when he saw the blood he thought
it was the file that bled , and so he
Wiesen.
bit it again and again until he had
damaged his own mouth very badly .
When we try to hurt other people we are
much more likely to get hurt ourselves.
THE HORSE AND GROOM
A MAN whowasvery proud ofthehorse
he had charge of spent hours every
day brushing its coat. But the man
was not honest. He used to sell the
horse's food and keep the money , and
the animal soon began to grow thin ,
making the man angry.
“ It is no use being angry with me, ”
said the horse . " If you want me to be

CF

I am told that you were calling me

names behind my back more than a
year ago. ” The lamb exclaimed , “ But
that is impossible, for it was before I
was born !!
The wolf then flew into a great
passion and exclaimed , " If it was
not you , it must have been your father,
and it comes to the same thing."
Then he seized the poor lamb, tore
it to pieces , and ate it.
When anyone has made up his mind
to quarrel with another, it is easy enough
to find excuse
THEan SNA KE. AND THE FILE a fine horse you must give me the food
A SNAKE one day crept into a black- you are stealing from your master."
smith's shop and chanced to knock We cannot succeed well with anything
against a steel file. This hurt the snake unless we are honest.
а
1793 gmg
IM owa
 JACK THE GIANT KILLER
N the days of King Arthur there
IN Jack set out bravely, but the day
lived a farmer's son named Jack. was warm , and he had not gone very
Not far away from Jack's home was a far when, overcome by the heat, he
cave, and in the cave lived a horrible lay down under a tree and fell asleep .
giant , called Cormoran . Soon Blunderbore came along, and ,
Cormoran was three times as big as catching sight of Jack , he picked him
any other man ; his appetite was so up, flung him over his shoulder, and
enormous that the only way to get carried him to his castle.
enough food to eat was by stealing all When Jack awoke and found himself
the sheep and oxen that he could find. in the giant's castle, he was in an awful
For one meal the giant could eat as fright. Through the window he could
much as six oxen and twelve sheep, hear the cries and groans of the giant's
and Jack's father said that if this went other victims, and his teeth began to
on much longer all the farmers for chatter. 6
miles round would be ruined. “ This is dreadful," said he to him
This set Jack thinking, and, being a self. “ I must find a way out of this
brave lad, he deter place somehow ."
mined to think out Just at that moment Jack heard
a way to kill him . voices in the courtyard below , and,
So one night Jack peeping through the rails of his prison
set out for the mount window , he saw Blunderbore and
on which stood the another giant enter the castle. Looking
giant's cave . With round, he caught sight of acoil of rope
a spade he dug a which lay in a corner . He made a
deep pit and covered noose at each end of the rope, and,
it with sticks and grasping the middle firmly in his hand,
gravel, so that it he flung an end over
looked like earth . the two giants ' heads.
Then, when all was Quick as lightning,
ready, he blew a loud he swung the rope
blast on his cow-horn round a beam by the
and waited . window, and then,
The giant awoke holding on to it with
in a terrible rage, all his might , he pulled
and came stamping it tight until both
down the mount to giants were strangled .
see who had dared Jack set free all
to come so near his the knights and ladies
cave. Suddenly he The giant.rushed after Jack, but suddenly his whom Blunderbore
caught sight of Jack . foot caught in the pit, and down he came, crash ! had imprisoned in
You young rascal ! ” he cried, in his castle, and set out again upon
an awful voice. I'll kill you and eat new adventures.
you for my supper !" The next evening he found himself
He rushed after Jack, but just before at the door of a lonely castle in Wales.
he reached him his foot caughtinthe pit, He knocked, and , to his amazement,
and down he came, crash ! Up jumped the door was opened by a tremendous
Jack , and in a twinkling he drew out giant with two heads. Jack was
his axe and chopped off Cormoran's startled ; but the giant seemed so
head . friendly that when he offered him a
Jack ran all the way home, and the bed for the night Jack gladly
farmers were so delighted at being accepted.
rid of the monster that they presented Now, Jack knew that this two
the hero with a sword, and named him headed monster had four valuable
“ Jack the Giant Killer ." treasures, which he determined to
Jack was so proud ofhis success that possess — a coat that made the wearer
he determined to rid the world ofanother invisible, a cap that told him all he
monster, named Blunderbore, who lived wanted to know, a sword that could
in a castle in themidstofa lovely forest. cut anything, and shoes that could
1794
 PERDE
JACK THE GIANT KILLER
carry him as swiftly as the wind. by such a little creature as Jack , so he
Jack went to bed, and soon fell drew out his own knife, and, without
asleep. In the middle of the night he more ado, plunged it into his chest
was awakened by someone singing ; and fell down dead.
and this is what he heard : Then Jack caught up the cap and the
' Though you shall lodge with me this night, shoes and the coat and the sword, and
went on his way .
You shall not see the morning light ;
At the next castle to which he came
My club shall dash your brains out quite ." a grand ball was taking place. The
" Ho, ho ! ” cried Jack, looking knights and ladies, who had all heard of
round for a log of wood which he had Jack, made him welcome, and he was
noticed by the fireplace . Jack put the just beginning to enjoy himself when
log in his bed, and in rushed a messen
waited . Presently ger to say that a
the door opened, and hideous giant was on
in came the giant his way to the castle.
and strode up to the “ Have no fear,”
bed. Down came the cried Jack, fastening
club - crash ! again on his invisible cap.
and again . “ Leave all to me.'
66
Farewell, my He put on the
young friend ," he shoes which carried
bellowed . “ You'll him as quickly as
make me a fine din . the wind, and went
ner by and by." out .
Jack had a good Round the castle
laugh over this, and ran a moat , and when
when the giant the giant reached
had gone he crept the drawbridge that
back into bed, and stretched across it
was soon fast asleep . he sniffed the air
In the morning around, and roared
Jack walked boldly in an awful voice :
into the room where
“ Fe, fi, fo, fum,
the giant was I smell the blood of
breakfasting from a an Englishman ;
huge basin of batter Be he alive, or be he
pudding. The giant dead,
was so astonished at I'll grind his bones to
make my bread ."
seeing Jack alive that
he scarcely knew “ You must catch
what to say to him . me first,” cried Jack ;
Jack sat down , and then, throwing
and began to make a off his coat , he led
good breakfast. But Jack flung the noose over the heads of the giants the giant a fine dance
all the time he ate and held on to it with all his might and main. round the castle.
he was thinking. Suddenly a grand idea Jack ran on swiftly until he came again
came into his mind , and when the to the drawbridge. He ran across, but
giant was not looking he hid as much as he reached the other side he bent
of the pudding in his jersey as he down, and with one stroke of his magic
could possibly get. As soon as break- sword severed the bridge in two just
fast was over, Jack said : as the giant was half-way across. Down
“ You can't plunge a knife into your crashed the drawbridge, and into the
chest without hurting yourself. See moat fell the giant ; and that was the
)
me ! " end of him .
Picking up aa knife, Jack thrust it into Jack had many other adventures,
his jersey, and out fell the pudding, and when he was tired of them all he
piece by piece, upon the floor. went home again , and married a beauti
The giant did not like to be outdone ful princess whom he loved dearly.
1795
 THE LITTLE PIXIES OF LAND'S END
N the old days Land's End used to some strange ointment to rub on its eyes
be crowded with pixies, elves, and every morning.
goblins. All the sprites that were “ But don't use the ointment your
turned out of other parts of England self,” said pixy, “ or you'll be blinded.”
because of their bad ways came to But the woman was very curious, and
settle down in Land's End . None of she did use the ointment . Her eyes
them , however, ever troubled the fisher- seemed neither the better nor the worse
man and his wife who then lived there ; for it . Soon afterwards , however, she
indeed, they always rewarded the paid a visit to her sister at Penzance,
woman very handsomely whenever she and as she passed through the streets she
did any work for them. saw hundreds of pixies, elves, and goblins
“" The little people are very rich ," the stealing things out of all the shops.
woman said to her husband. “ I won- “ Oh, look at the bold little thieves !"
der how they come by all their money. she said to her sister.
Nobody ever saw them steal anything.' But her sister could not see them ;
Ah, more goes on in Cornwall than and then , as the woman ran wildly
meets the eye,” said the fisherman . about, pointing to the invisible sprites,
One night a pixy brought the woman one of the pixies blew upon her eyes,
a little baby elf to nurse, and gave her and she became blind.
THE BANK OF ENGLAND CROSSING-SWEEPER
OME time ago a crossing-sweeper who “ But I haven't any," said the sweeper.
SOME
swept the crossing between the Man- “ What ! ” said the angry goldsmith .
sion House and the Bank of England, ' Why, you came to ask me to buy
and waited there all day long for a lump as large as your head ! "
pennies, went to a goldsmith and said : You see, I sweep the crossing by
“ How much would a lump of gold the Bank of England ," said the crossing
as large as my head fetch ? " sweeper, “ and it just came into my
My dear sir, I'm just going out to "head that someone might drop a great
Come
lunch," said the goldsmith. '« lump of gold there, and I wanted to see
and have something to eat with me, and how much I should get for it.”
we can talk the matter over afterwards.” “ Be off, you rascally good- for
They went to a restaurant, and had nothing !" said the angry goldsmith .
an excellent lunch ; and then , as the “ Well, dreams don't often come true ,
crossing -sweeper was smoking a cigar they say," said the crossing -sweeper,
over a glass of wine, the goldsmith said : as he returned to his crossing, but
“ Now , my friend show me the gold .” I've got a very good meal out ofmine."
THE BIRD-GIRL WITH GOLDEN WINGS
ASs Prince Jascha was hunting one day hair, and she shrieked terribly, and the
in the Servian mountains, a lovely hill began to rock. But he did not let go.
bird with golden wings fluttered by, “ Well, what do you want , Jascha ? ”
and he followed it , and came to a high she said at last.
hill covered with white statues. As Give me the golden bird, and bring
he was about to ascend, a hermit these statues to life," said the prince.
rushed out of a cave, and said : The witch gave Jascha the bird,
“ Beware ! A witch lives on this and it was so pretty that he kissed it .
hill, and she sends out the golden bird And as he kissed it, it turned into a
to tempt travellers. If she sees you she sweet and beautiful girl. The witch
will change you into a marble statue. then breathed a blue wind towards the
But seize her hair before she spies you, statues, and changed them back into
and she will be in your power. handsome young men . After that,
Prince Jascha did not follow the Jascha let go of her hair and she dis
bird. Creeping up the hill by another appeared, and all the merry company
way , he found the witch lying with travelled to Belgrade, where the prince
her back towards him . He seized her and the bird-girl were happily married.
THE NEXT STORIES BEGIN ON PAGE 1897
TE
1796
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

By great groups, called acids, alkalies, and salts . If we understand how these
are made we have the key to most of the chemical changes that occur, and we
also learn how to understand all the chemical changes, or reactions, that are
possible. Here we learn about these three kinds of compounds. It is rather hard
and dry to read at first, but it is very important ; and no one really has any
knowledge of chemistry who has not learned what we read here. Boys and
girls who like arithmetic, and have perhaps begun algebra , will not find this
part so hard after all ; and by studying this we understand the great principles of
chemical change as it goes on for ever all over the world, and in our bodies, too.

THREE KINDS OF COMPOUNDS

THE WONDER OF ENDLESS CHANGES IN THE EARTH
HERE is no limit
THERE the element chlorine,
CONTINUED FROM 1670 about
to the number of which we
chemical compounds. already know some
Men devote their whole lives thing. Its symbol is Cl. One
to the study of only one group atom of hydrogen combines with
of them. But there are certain one atom of chlorine, forming
classes of compounds which the compound HCI. This is
we are always meeting, and to a typical acid, and is known
which most of the compounds we dis- as hydrochloric acid . Now , in a very
cover, or the new compounds we are simple way, as we shall shortly see,
learning to make, really belong. We the hydrogen of this acid can be
areall familiar with such words as acid replaced by a metal, such as sodium ,
and salt, and we may have heard the which has the symbol Na (the first
word alkali. These words have most two letters of its Latin name), and so
important chemical meanings. Com- we get a substance which has the
pounds made in a certain wayare called formula Naci, and is known as

acids, others are called alkalies or bases,
and when an acid combines with an
alkali - as happens when we mix a
o
Seidlitz powder — there is formed a salt .
We think of an acid as something
that has a particular kind of taste
like that of a lemon ; and most acids
have this kind of taste, though many,
such as prussic acid and carbonic acid,
have not. Chemists do not think at
all of the taste when they say that one
thing is an acid and another is not .
They say that an acid is always a
compound of hydrogen . That is easy
enough to begin with. But we must
add that the element or elements
with which the hydrogen is combined
must not be metals. Then we find that
the hydrogen of the acid can always be
replaced by a metal ; and then wehave
a salt. Let us look at a simple instance.
Though oxygen is not a metal, the
compound made of hydrogen and
oxygen-water-is not an acid. That
is rather an exception. But let us take
sodium chloride. This, according to
what we have said, should be a salt ;
and it is indeed the common salt we
eat every day, of which the sea is full.
' If we think of almost any other
element that is not a metal (or we
may take more elements than one)
we shall find that they form com
pounds with hydrogen , and that these
are acids. If chlorine does so, we
shall expect the other members of the
group it belongs to to do so as well,
and so they do. Thus we have
hydrofluoric acid, HF ; hydrobromic
acid, HBr ; and hydriodic acid, HI .
None of these is quite so important as
hydrochloric acid ,which we all produce
every day in our stomachs, but they
have various uses of their own. There oc
is no acd made of hydrogen and
carbon alone or nitrogen alone, but
there is one made of all three, having
the formula HCN . This is hydrocyanic
or prussic acid ; and everyone has
heard of it as a deadly poison.

1797
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH
Most acids contain oxygen as well as
hydrogen , though none of those we have
mentioned yet do so. For instance ,
there is an acid made of hydrogen ,
nitrogen , and oxygen , with the formula
HNO3, known as nitric acid.
ANEUROPE AND AMERICA DEPEND FOR FOOD
It and the salts it forms are very
important in themselves, and also
because of their services to the vegetable
world, and so to us. The whole of
The whole of
Western civilisation at this moment
depends on wheat grown with the aid
of salts of nitric acid, called nitrates,
which are added to the soil.
Similarly hydrogen, sulphur, and oxy-
gen form an acid which has the formula
H2SO, and is known as sulphuric acid ;
and just as the salts formed from nitric the nitrogen atom has either three or
acid are called nitrates, so the salts five, the oxygen atom has two, and so on .
formed from sulphuric acid are called
sulphates. They are also very im HOWTURES, " OR GRAPHIC FORMULAS
portant in many ways. These same
elements form other acids in which the
elements are combined in different imagine that I am speaking of real
proportions, such as nitrous acid, HNO2,
and sulphurous acid, H,SO3.
But the acid about which we have
heard most is carbonic acid, and espe-
cially we have heard about carbonic
acid gas, CO2. You will say at once
that there is something wrong here, for
an acid is a compound of hydrogen, and
there is no hydrogen in CO2. That is true,
but only because in CO, we have all that
is left of the acid when the atoms corre-
sponding to water have been removed
from it . If we add water to carbonic
acid gas, we get real carbonic acid, thus :
H2O + CO ., = H,CO;.
'HE DIFFERENT POWERS OF
COMING TOGETHER THE ATOMS
THIN
This H,CO, is a true acid, as we find
directly we test it . As in the case of all
acids, the hydrogen of it can be replaced
by a metal, and so we get a salt , which
is called a carbonate. For instance,
there is calcium carbonate, CaCO3 , one
of the commonest salts in the world, showing the nitrogen atom as having
which we know as chalk and marble .
Then there is sodium carbonate, Na,C03,
which is all-important in our blood.
Here are the formulas of some of the
principal acids we have mentioned :
HCI Hydrochloric HNO , Nitrous acid
acid H , SO , Sulphuric acid
HCN Hydrocyanic H SO , Sulphurous
or prussic acid acid
HNO , Nitric acid H , CO , Carbonic acid
We notice that the hydrogen of an
acid is always written first in its formula,
and we notice that none of the other
elements found in these acids is a metal .
We also see that in some of these acids
there is only one hydrogen atom to each
molecule, while in others there are two.
Then we might have mentioned phos
phoric acid, H,PO., in which there are
three hydrogen atoms to the molecule.
This difference between acids illustrates a
veryimportant fact about all compounds,
which is that the atoms of the various
elements differ in their combining power .
It is as if they had different numbers
of hands with which to hold on to other
atoms . The hydrogen atom always
has only one hand, the chlorine atom
has one hand, the carbon atom has four,
W THE CHEMIST WRITES IN “ PIC .
The formulas of these acids illustrate
this very important fact . You will not
hands, but it is as if each atom had a
certain number of hands or hooks or
whatever it is that enables it to hold on
to other atoms. Thus we can now learn
to write our formulas in the form of
little pictures, or diagrams. These are
called “ picture," or graphic, formulas.
The graphic formula of water is :
H–0–H
and shows us that each of the two
hands of the oxygen atom is holding on
to the one hand of a hydrogen atom .
Then we may write hydrochloric acid :
H - ci
each of the two atoms having just one
hand. The next acid on our list is more
of a puzzle, for we remember the number
of hands that carbon has, and that the
nitrogen atom is sometimes three
handed and sometimes five -handed, as
it were. So how do we write the graphic
formula of prussic acid ? Either like this:
C= N-H
five hands, or like this :
NECH
showing the nitrogen atom with three
hands. In each case the carbon
atom has four and the hydrogen atom
one . As to which of these formulas
really represents the way in which 1
the molecule of prussic acid is built
up, it is for chemists to find out by
1798
 -THREE KINDS OF COMPOUNDS
studying its behaviour when it is
broken up or when salts are made of it .
These acids we have named and
looked at are all very simple compared
with the extraordinary acids which
are made in and by the bodies of
living creatures. For instance, there
is citric acid, which we find in oranges
and limes and lemons ; uric acid , which
is made in our own bodies; malic acid
(meaning apple acid), which is found in
apples ; and so on . The graphic formulas
of these would almost ' fill half of
this page, so large is the number of pound ; it is not an acid. Also we
atoms in the molecule. But always
we find that the acid has no metallic hydrogen ; but we always write the
atoms, and that it has aa certain number
of atoms of hydrogen , which can be
replaced bymetallic atomsto form salts.
, H last , so as to distinguish it still more
ALKALIES , THE OPPOSITES OF ACIDS
Now we must turn to another class
of compounds which we always think
of as the opposites of acids. These are
compoundsofmetals. They may or may
not contain hydrogen, but they are
quite different in every respect from
acids. These compounds we call bases,
or alkalies ; and when we study any
liquid in chemistry we always want to
know whether it is an acid liquid or an
is neither
liquid that very
alkaline liquid, or a There
acid nor alkaline. is a easy
way of finding this out in most cases.
There is a dye called litmus, which always remembering first that K and Na are
turns red in the presence of an acid,
and always turns blue in the presence
of an alkali. We put some of this dye
into a sort of blotting-paper, cut it up
into strips, and use it for testing the
“ reaction
of liquids,
We usually have as we
both sorts call it.
of paper
blue and red . Then , if we want to find
out the reaction of a liquid, we dip fixed, just as we call certain oils fixed ,
a piece of blue litmus in ,
it, and find, because they do not give off gases, but
perhaps, that it turns bright red.
That proves that the liquid is acid-
perhaps hydrochloric acid or nitric acid.
Now, if we take that piece of reddened
paper, and dip it into a solution of such
a thing as ammonia, or even hold it
above a bottle containing a solution of
ammonia (which is really a gas), we shall
find that it quickly turns blue again,
proving that it has been exposed to an
alkali. The good milk of a cow should
give a faint acid reaction , while human
milk gives a faint alkaline reaction .
Thus, in feeding a baby on cow's milk,
are
1799
we add something to make it alkaline,
as mother's milk is. Of course, a liquid
may be neither acid nor alkaline, and
then we say that its reaction is neutral.
Neither blue nor red litmus, dipped in it ,
shows any change.
"HE WAY IN
THEMADE UP
WHICH THE ALKALIES ARE
Now we must look at the composition
of some alkalies. One of the best
known is caustic potash, and has the
formula KOH . Here we notice at once
that a metal is contained in the com
notice that it happens to contain
letter representing the metal first in
the formula of an alkali, and if there
is any hydrogen in it , we write the
completely from an acid. The name
caustic means burning, for caustic
potash feels as if it burned the skin, and,
indeed, it destroys most living tissues
very quickly. Similarly there is caustic
soda, which has the formula NaQH ;
and also slaked lime, which has the
formula Ca (OH )2. This last formula
is rather different from almost any we
have seen . You will notice the brackets,
which are used to show that the figure
following the brackets applies to allthe
letters within thebrackets. Let us write
the graphic formulas of these bases,
one-handed,while Ca is two-handed.
K–0–H (caustic potash )
Na - 0 - H (caustic soda )
Ca < 0 - H ( slaked lime).
-0 - H
AMMONIA,ANUIMPORTANT ALKALI THAT
These bases, or alkalies, are called
stay where they are. There is, however,
another very important base, or alkali,
which is a gas and flies about , and so
is called the volatile alkali, just as
we call certain oils volatile. This alkali
we already know, for it is ammonia .
And now I hope you will say that here
is an exception to what was said as
to the way in which bases, or alkalies,
are made . For we said that these are
compounds of metals, and if you
remember the formula of ammonia ,
you will see that it has no metal in it.
Its formula is NH3. If we add the
 THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTH - GONDO
formula of water to this, we get the -OH , or hydroxyl, in them , and
NH ,OH , which represents ammonia in we can easily remember that the proper
water ; and this substance is a true alkali, chemical name for them is hydroxides.
and acts like one . There is some reason And now we have to study a third
to suppose that the combination of great group of compounds, called salts ;
atoms NH, acts like a metal , and has and the reason why we have kept
something like the properties of a their study to the last is that a
metal. Anyhow, this compound gives salt is made when an acid meets an
or base. In studying the acids
an alkaline reaction to litmus paper, alkali, or
and it acts chemically in precisely the we saw that, while every acid contains
same way as the fixed alkalies, such as hydrogen , and no acid contains aa
KOH , NaOH , Ca (OH ) , and metal, yet the hydrogen of an acid
many
others which might be named. or part of it - can always be replaced
You will have noticed the way in by a metal, forming a salt. We shall
which –OH turns up again and again now see how this happens.
in the formulas of these alkalies ; and, HEN AN ACID MEETS AN ALKALI A SALT
indeed, -OH is such a common and WHEIS MADE
important combination of atoms that Suppose we take some hydrochloric
it has been given the special name of acid , HCl , and let it meet some caustic
hydroxyl. We find it in chemistry soda, NaOH . This is a very simple case .
wherever we turn . And I want to show At once a powerful reaction happens, and
you that these various bases , or alkalies, a salt is formed. Here is the equation :
really owe their –OH to the fact that HCl + NaOH = NaCl + H2O.
they are combined with water. Let us This means that we take an acid and
start with slaked lime, as that is simple. an alkali , and we get a salt-in this
case , the common salt, or sodium
WHAT HAPPENS
QUENCHES ITS
WHEN
THIRST
QUICK - LIME
chloride, that we know so well. The
There is a compound called quick- hydrogen and oxygen of the acid and the
lime, which really means live lime. alkali have combined to form water ;
It is called live lime because it acts so and we get a solution of salt in water.
powerfully on things, as you soon find Now let us take another instance . Let
out if a speck of it gets into your eye. us add slaked lime to sulphuric acid, and
It is a white powder, and its formula see what happens. We know that lime
is Cao. It is a very powerful alkali, is a compound of calcium ,and that salts
formed by heating calcium carbonate, formed from sulphuric acid are called sul
or chalk ; thus phates, so we get calcium sulphate, thus :
CaCO, = CaO + CO,. H.SO. + Ca (OH )2 = CaSO, + 2H2O.
Now, when
lime,we we add
are said waterit,toand
to slake quick
the SOMEAMIKLAR FORMS OF SALT, AND HOW
THEY MADE

product is called slaked lime; thus-
CaO + H0 = Ca ( OH )2.
This slaked lime, then, is an oxide which
has combined with water, and the same is
true of the other alkalies we have named .
For instance, there is an oxide K,O,
the oxide of potassium ; and another,
Na,0, the oxide of sodium . When water
is added to these - and, indeed, there
is no need to add water, for they take
it from the air if they are exposed to it-
the following reactions occur :
K,O + H2O = 2KOH.
Na2O + H ,0 = 2NaOH.
You will notice that these correspond
exactly to what happens when quick-
lime is “ slaked ” -thatis, when it has its
thirst satisfied - in the water ; and when
ammonia gas is added to water. So now
we understand why these alkalies have
1800
If you test this rather difficult equa
tion , you will find that it is right .
caso , is calcium sulphate, and water
is formed as in the last case . But this
time the salt is almost insoluble in
water, and so we find a white mass
of stuff, which is the salt . This salt
occurs in nature in great masses of
rock called gypsum or alabaster, and is
very much prized for its beauty.
Another form of it is called plaster of
Paris, and occurs as a powder. If water
is added to the powder it soon “ sets,"
and so we can use it for making casts, or
images, of all sorts of things.
In these instances we see the way in
which the hydrogen of an acid can always
be replaced by a metal. The method is
to bring an alkali to act upon the acid.
We see, too, that every salt consists
 -THREE KINDS OF COMPOUNDSOREO DECOCELLAN DATOREA
of two parts. It is a sort of double
thing, having one part derived from an
acid , and one part derived from an
alkali, or base. These parts are called
radicles, which means little roots. Thus
the salt Caso, consists of an alkaline
radicle and an acid radicle, as we see
when we look at it .
W A STRONG ACID WILL TURN A WEAK
Hºw
ACID OUT OF A SALT
And now we are to learn that different
acids have varying degrees of power,
and that a powerful acid will commonly
turn out from a salt the acid radicle
that goes to make it up, and will replace
it by its own acid radicle. The strongest
acids are those we began by mention-
ing - hydrochloric, sulphuric, and nitric
acids ; and among the weakest are
prussic acid and carbonic acid. We call
prussic acid weak because its salts can
always be decomposed by other acids.
Let us take an easy instance. If we
act on sodium carbonate with hydro
chloric acid, we find that the carbonate
is decomposed, and the acid radicle of
the stronger acid replaces the acid
radicle of the weaker acid , thus :
2HCl + Na,CO2 = 2NaCl + H.CO.
We get sodium chloride again, and
true carbonic acid . But instead of
H.COs, we might have written H,0 +
CO., for some of the carbonic acid gas
of the acid is given off to the air. In so
doing it forms bubbles, or it effervesces,
as we say ; and we commonly know that
we have been acting on a carbonate
when we add an acid to a salt and
find that bubbles are produced.
This will teach us that one of the
easiest ways of making an acid is to
take one of its salts and act upon it with
a stronger acid, which turns it out and
takes its place. For instance , if we
want hydriodic acid , HI , we have only to
take an iodide, such as KI , and act upon
it with hydrochloric acid, thus :
KI + HCl = KCl + HI ,
which tells us that the iodide
decomposed, potassium chloride and
hydriodic acid being formed.
AC
VARYING STRENGTHS OF ACIDS AND
THEALKALIES
There are certain salts in which only
part of the hydrogen of theacid is replaced
by a metal. For instance, there is the
perfect salt K.SO., potassium sulphate,
in which the whole of the hydrogen of
sulphuric acid has been replaced by
potassium ; but there is also the salt
KHSO., in which only one of the
hydrogen atoms has been replaced by
potassium . We call these acid salts .
Acids and alkalies vary in their
strength. If we have a salt made of
a weak acid and a strong alkali, the
salt will be reallymore alkaline than acid ;
and though it should be neutral to litmus
paper, we find that it turns red litmus
blue, just as if it were an alkali . Thus,
sodium chloride isneutralto litmus paper,
for it is composed of a very strong alkali
and a very strong acid, and these
balance one another. But if instead of
sodium chloride we take sodium car
bonate, Na CO.,, (which we usually call
washing soda ), we have a salt made of
a strong alkali and a weak acid, and this
salt turns red litmus blue . This case also
illustrates for us what was said about
cases where only half the hydrogen of
an acid is replaced by a metal .
How SODA ILLUSTRATES A
ALWAYS GOING ON IN OUR
CHANGE
BODIES
Just as we have KHSO., so we have
NaHCO3, and this is usually called
sodium bi-carbonate, or baking soda. It
is called bi-carbonate because from one
point of view it contains twice as much
carbonic acid as the carbonate ; but that
is really only another way of saying that
it contains half as much sodium . The
way to make it is to add another dose
of carbonic acid to the carbonate, thus :
Na CO , + H.CO, = 2NaHCO3.
This reaction is one of the most impor
tant in the world, and is constantly hap
pening in our blood as it runs in our
tissues, and by this means the carbonic
acid they produce is picked up and carried
to the lungs, where the equation works in
the opposite direction , CO, and H.O ( that
is, H.CO.:) being given off by the lungs ,
and Na,Co , beingre- formed in the blood
to do its work again . When a reaction ,
like this one, may work in both direc
tions, we write it in a special way, thus :
is
Na,Cos
CO3 + HỌCO : 2NaHCO3.
The arrows show us that the change
may go in either direction , or is reversible.
Of all the millions of compounds we
have only glanced at a few, but we
now know what is meant by the
words acid , alkali (or base ), and salt ,
and what are the relations between
these three kinds of compounds.
The next part of this is on page 1869.
1801
HOW THE BIRKENHEAD WENT DOWN

This powerful picture , by Thomas M. Hemy , brings before us vividly the scene on board the troopship
Birkenhead , when it crashed into a sunken rock in Simon's Bay, South Africa , on a February night in 1853.
The soldiers fell in as if on parade , and some were told off to help the sailors to assist the women
and children into the boats . Thus 184 were saved , but there was no room for more, and, sooner than
risk overcrowding the boats , 454 British soldiers and sailors stood in line and went down with the sinking
ship. “ Birkenhead " is inscribed on the flags of the regiments who thus met death so courageously.
This picture, illustrating the story on page 1804, is reproduced by permission of Messrs . Graves & Co. , the publishers
TUD NOOITTUM XUOCOU
SOLO

moon IT comun MY DOTCU

1802
ARD
By
Em The Child's Book of
GOLDEN DEEDS
STEPHEN REO
THE RACE FROM MARATHON
EJOICE , we con
“REJOquer ! ”»Gasping
CONTINUED FROM 1654
out these words as joy
fully as his parched
tongue can utter them, a poor
worn -out youth drops lifeless into
the arms of those Athenians who
have hurried out of their city to
learn his tidings. His faint whisper goes
from mouth to mouth, and is passed
on throughout an anxious city,
quickening the pulses of the citizens
until they lose themselves in an out-
burst of thanksgiving and rejoicing.
The story of this victory is one of
the most thrilling the world has ever
known. It takes us back over 2,000
years to one of thefirst decisive battles
in the world's history. Darius, the
Mede, has made himself master of
Asia, and, angry at some interference
on the part of some little Greek state,
he assembles his picked soldiers, sum-
mons the various tribes who own his
sway, and sails over the Ægean Sea
to conquer and enthrall those little
Greek states of whose skill in peace
and war reports have reached him.
Athens is the first large city in the
path of his hitherto unconquered
hosts, and the Athenians feel the need
of aid from the famous Spartans, whose
state lay 120 miles to the south across
the Isthmus of Corinth. The army of
the Medes and Persians are fast ap- Pheidippides to take the news to the
proaching, and their city will soon be
invested . How are the Spartans to
arrive in time ? The rulers of Athens,
seated in grave council on the Acro-
polis, send for Pheidippides, their
champion runner, who has won for his
1803
33
state the myrtle crown
at the famous Olympic
games held by the
Greek states every
five years. They command him
to run and urge Sparta to come
to their aid. And for two days
and two nights Phcidippides
runs, swimming therivers and climbing
the mountains in his path.
But the Spartans were envious and
mistrustful of Athens. Though brave
and fearless, they lacked intelligence ;
and, besides, they were a very super
stitious people, and so Pheidippides
was sent hurrying back with the news
that their army would come, but
could not start until the full moon.
Pheidippides races back to Athens
again . The Athenians were now
thrown on their own resources. The
Persians had landed and the Athenians
resolved to oppose them at once.
The weary but dauntless Pheidip
pides takes his long spear and his
heavy shield, and marches with the
10,000 picked men to meet the foe.
We read elsewhere of the famous
battle of Marathon and how these
10,000 Greeks drove back hundreds of
thousands of Medes and Persians; this
story is of Pheidippides.
Marathon was fought and won ,
and the victorious Greeks called to
capital. He flung down his shield,
capital.
and ran like fire the long twenty -six
miles to Athens. Then, bursting into
the city, he fell and died, gasping as he
fell the two Greek words which mean
“ Rejoice, we conquer !"
 LOL.. DRAGO
THE MEN OF THE
IT was not so very many years ago that
the steamer Birkenhead was on her
way to South Africa. On board of her
were the crew and a number of soldiers,
besides the wives and children of several
of the soldiers ; for they were not going
out to a war, but to form part of the
garrison of the country.
As the great ship steamed along the
coast of Africa, no one dreaming of danger
-it was night, and all but the sailors who
had to work the ship were sleeping
her side crashed against a sunken rock.
Everyone hurried on deck, for all knew
from the shock that some great disaster
had happened. But there was no panic.
The officers gave their orders, and the
men obeyed them as steadily as if they
had been on the parade-ground. The
soldiers were set to help the sailors,
working at the pumps to keep the ship
from sinking, and getting the horses
overboard to lighten her. That must
have been a sore task for men who
loved the poor horses, but they could
umm
not be saved. And still the water came
in , and everyone knew the Birkenhead
mu
um
must go down .
to
Then they set about launching the
boats. The sea had not been dangerous
for the big ship when she was whols,
but it was too rough for small boats.
THE SWISS GUARDS WHO DID THEIR DUTY
THE Swiss have often been noted for
brave deeds, but one of those we
like to think about most was done by
Swiss soldiers far away from their own
beautiful Lake Lucerne, in Paris, in
1792, the year of the Revolution .
The French kings had learned to
en
rely on the Swiss, and had formed a
Um
verre
er
guard of honour of trusty yeoman from
Lucerne and other cantons, and called
(
it “ Les Gardes du Roi.”
When the mob stormed the Tuileries
Palace, where the royal family were, on
August 1oth , 1792, the Swiss Guards
stood firm at their posts, defending of fidelity - officers and men who fell
with their lives King Louis XVI. not in defence of their own country,
and his queen , so that the men who were
thirsting for their blood could only
reach them over the bodies of the Swiss.
One after another the soldiers were
massacred, fighting bravely till two bat-
talions were overcome, and when the
rest fell , on September 2nd and 3rd, the years since they fell, but their memory
Swiss Guards were almost wiped out.
THE NEXT GOLDEN DEEDS BEGIN ON PAGE 1913
1804
BIRKENHEAD
One big boat and two small ones were
filled with women and children and
pushed off safely ; another was smashed
by a falling spar ; and two were swamped
before anyone could be got into them.
Then the ship herself broke in two, and
one half began to sink.
The soldiers were already drawn up
in ranks. The captain called to them
to swim for the boats ; but the colonel
saw that if they did that the boats
would be over -filled and swamped. The
men stood firm , awaiting their officer's
order. He told them that if they swam
for the boats, these would be capsized,
and the women and children drowned .
So they stood in their lines, waiting
for the ship to go down, as steady as if
they were in the drill-yard. Then the
hungry waves washed over the decks,
and the brave soldiers were plunged into
the sea . All they could hope for was
to keep afloat till the boats reached the
shore and could return to pick them up.
A very few managed to swim ashore by
themselves. A few held on to the wreck,
and these were picked up next morning
bya passing vessel which had also rescued
the people in the boats who had been un
able to reach the shore. But the greater
number perished, heroes no less than if
they had fallen on the field of battle.
The great Danish sculptor, Ther
waldsen , designed a beautiful memorial
for the Swiss Guards, which has been
sculptured out of the natural rock in the
Glacier Garden at Lucerne. It repre
sents aa wounded lion pierced by a broken
weapon , defending with its paw, as it
lies dying, a shield bearing the fleur -de
lis of France. On the rock over the
lion's head we read .“ Helvetiorum fidei
ac virtuti,” a Latin inscription which
means “ To the fidelity and courage of
the Swiss.” Then the names are given
of those who were not false to the oath
but simply in doing their duty to a
foreign king.
If you ever go to Lucerne, be sure to
see the lion , for it is a touching monument
to loyalty, carved in the Alps of the
men's native land. It is over a hundred
is still dear in the land of their birth .
 The Child's Book of %
SCHOOL LESSONS
RESORT
LOSREADING CILATER
THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF MOODS
Dº you ever watch CONTINUED FROM 1715
the birds flying
along so gracefully and
easily, the swallows skimming the sur-
face of a lake, or the crow flip -flapping
far above your head ? Have you ever
seen a hawk hovering ever so high up
-how he moves his wings just once
or twice, and then glides on a long
way with his wings quite still and
motionless ? If so, I am sure you
must have envied them, and said,
“ Oh, it would be nice to fly ! ” But
if one of the birds were to speak to
you , he would not say that , but he
would say, “ Yes, I fly very nicely ,
do I not ? ' And then he would look
quite conceited , and think himself ever
so much cleverer than you, because he
can fly right over the church steeple
while you have to walk or run on the
ground .
Now, what is the difference between
6
those two sentences : “ Oh , it would
be nice to fly ! " and " I fly very nicely " ?
I think you can see at once ( that is, if
you remember our last talk ) that the
word “ fly " in the second sentence is in
the Indicative Mood , for it simply
states a fact . You will also see that
it has the pronoun “ I ” joined with it,
( 6
making “ I fly .”
Now , in the first of those two sen-
tences there is no pronoun with the
)
word “ fly ” ; you read only ' to fly,”
not “ I fly ,” or “ He flies,” or “ The
bird fies .' So we see that some parts
of a verb are used with nouns or pro-
nouns, while other parts are used
without them (generally with the word
.
1805
RERURLATI TESTIRALEANER
to in front of them).
All the parts that have
nouns orpronouns with ))
them (as “ I walk , ” “ Fire burns,” “ Go
ye " ) are said to be Finite (that is,
limited) Moods, while the other parts
are said to be not- finite or Infinite,
because they are not limited by any
noun or pronoun . The Finite Moods
are the Indicative Mood , the Imperative
Mood, and one that you have not
learnt, the Subjunctive Mood. All the
other parts of the verb are Infinite.
This is rather hard , I know ; but
perhaps these examples will make it
casier. The words printed in capital
letters are Infinite, or in the Infinitive
Mood, as it is sometimes called :
TO WALK is easier than TO
RUN .
David used TO KEEP his father's
sheep.
Baby wants TO PLAY with my top.
I can JUMP over this gate.
Perhaps some of you will say, In
o.o
this last sentence there is a pronoun I
...
with the verb jump, and therefore it
is a finite mood .” But the pronoun
does not go with “ jump," but with
))
“ can , " and you will see it quite
clearly if we write “ I am able to
JUMPover this gate " instead . Nearly
all parts of a verb with TO in front
of them are Infinitive .
You will often hear people say, “ I
will try and do it, " but that is not
right . We ought to say, " I will try
TO DO it," for DO is really in the
infinitive mood after TRY , and the
second sentence shows it clearly.
 -THE CHILD'S - BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS... 1
Now, can you pick out the Indicative and Infinitive Moods in these
funny verses ? If you have carefully read what has gone before it should be easy.
I like to walk along the street, But when upon yourhead you stand
But you prefer to run ; You see things upside down ;
I always ask for cake to eat, The sea is washed by solid land,
While you select a bun. The river's on the town .

And when I stand upon my head
I see things downside up :
The bedclothes underneath the bed ,
The saucer on the cup
WRITING
We can't agree , ' tis sad to say ,
We seem to differ quite ,
For you prefer to sleep by day,
And I to wake by night.
VERDAS

TOM AND NORA USE SMALLER CRUTCHES

“Youhave got on so well with words
and numbers that to-day we are
going to do something new - something
you will like, I know, because if it is
well done the two letters to Cousin
Jack will be written next week ," Tom
and Nora were told by their mother,
p was short above and below the line .
His mother pointed out that none of
the small letters had loops so high as
the capital letters.
“ We will see how you remember the
height of these letters,” she said , as she
wrote for them two more sentences .

Hue Ttine
er z Atosvoy quuckły by
Muny-hundtmake light work
when next they came with their books
and pens for their writing lesson.
“ All this while,” she said , we have
been using crutches , or, as Tom calls
them , railway lines ; but now is the
time to see if we can do with closer rail
way lines . We shall have to be very
careful to keep the letters the same size,
for it would be dreadful to have to take
to wide lines again when we can walk
nicely with narrow ones if wetry.
So now we will just rule lines close
together, and write little sentences with
smaller letters. You will be able to write
them easily if you are quite careful
about the size of the letters .”
This was the first sentence which was
written for Tom and Nora to copy :
“ In these two sentences we find just
what we want to bring to mind : the
proper height of the small letters. The
loops below the line will not trouble us.
They are all equal ; it is only p that has
a short tail . We can remember that
by thinking p begins puppy , for we
expect a puppy to have a shorter tail
than a grown -up dog."
“ Mother, will you tell us how we
can remember the tails of capital
letters ? ” asked Nora presently.
“ Let us look at them ,” was the reply.
Nora turned up her pages of capitals,,
but she could only find Y , Z and Ĝ with
tails, and as they were all alike and just the
same length as those of the small letters,
Nora thought she could not forget them .

ane tika perts

Hind wordtweliko
Nora read the words, and, while dip-
They can't be vain like ( 6
the pea
ping her pen in the ink, thought it cocks, Nora,” said Tom ; " you see,
would be nice to have pearls of that kind they are all alike.”
66
to give away . A useful thing to be able to do , ”
Tom remembered when he came to 1 said their mother, " is to write figures
and k that their loops were a little longer like printed ones, because they can
than the long stroke of d , but that be made So clean, and we can

1806
SONS
WRITING
e Moods ir
e it should be easi write them on parcels, tickets, or the
covers of books . We will take the
head soustand
figures o to 9, because, as you know ,
He down: all numbers are made from these. "
- solid land,
WT.
0 1 2 34
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
“ The figures are very upright,” said
; Nora.
- by day " Yes," replied her mother ; " broad
I. and upright, and very plain and nice to
read. If we look at them carefully , we
can easily see how they are made .
Four is made with three straight strokes .
CITCHES ARITHMETICE
Chat a
HOW TO DO “ LONG
Te have now to consider division by
so bili WE numbers which are greater than 12 ,
and which cannot be split into factors
membantu as small as 12 . Let us first try to
163
divide 3266 things into 23 equal
groups.
First , the given number contains 3
ti
thousands. But there are to be 23
groups, so it is clear that we cannot
put a thousand into each group. But
3 thousands make 30 hundreds, and
these, with the 2 hundreds in the given
number, make 32 hundreds. Evi-
dently this is sufficient to enable us to
put í hundred into each group, because
that requires 23 hundreds only. We
should have 9 of the hundreds left , and
மணல
these are not enough to give us a second
hundred for each group . This is the
end of the first stage of our work .
ண்ணாm
Next, the 9 hundreds which were
left make go tens. The given number
contains 6 other tens, so that we now
have 96 tens. We have to find how
many tens we shall be able to put into
each of the 23 groups, and yet not use
more than 96 tens. A little later we
shall learn how to find this fairly
easily ; but for the present we must
be content to see that to put one ten
into each group uses 23 tens ; to put
ELLA
2 tens into each uses 2 times 23 , or 46
tens ; to put 3 tens into each uses 3
LOL
TR
ILE
AL LO
LA
times 23 , or 69 tens ; to put 4 tens
uses 4 times 23 , or 92 tens. There are
now only 4 tens left . Thus, we are
able to put 4 tens into each of the 23
groups. This is the end of the second
stage of our work.
Finally, we have 4 tens, which make
40 units, and the 6 units of the given
MUXLOER
1807
managemengancam
See how the down-stroke ofseven gets
thicker at the bottom and how eight is
in two halves. Which do you think is
the same figure as another one, but
turned upside down ? Like kitty, it
looks as though it tried to run after its
own tail.”
“ It must be six," exclaimed Nora .
" Why, yes, mother ; if it runs round
alter its tail, it does make nine !
See, Tom ! Isn't it so ? "
DIVISION "
number, making 46 units in all. By
counting a unit into each of the 23
groups, in the same way that we counted
the tens, we see that we are able to
put 2 units into each group . This is
the end of the division .
Altogether, in each group we have
put i hundred, 4 tens, and 2 units.
That is, each group contains 142 of
the given things ; so that 3266 things,
when divided into 23 equal groups,
give 142 things for each group.
Now let us see how this process can
be expressed in writing. It is usual
to place the dividend between a pair
of brackets, turned outwards. The
divisor is written in front of the first
bracket .
23) 3266 (100 +40 +2 As we have al
2300 ready seen , out of
the 32 hundreds
966 we can place one
920 hundred in each
of the 23 groups.
46 We therefore write
46 100 to the right of
the second bracket .
Then we multiply the divisor, 23, by
this 100 , which tells us that we are
using 2300 in our 23 groups. We write
this 2300 under the dividend, 3266, and
subtract. This shows that wehave now
966 of the original things left. The
second stage of our previous work
showed us that , of these 96 tens, we can
use 92 tens in putting 4 of them into
each group. Therefore, we write 4 tens,
or 40, in our answer ; multiply 23 by 40,
and after writing the result , 920, under
the again subtract , and find
we have now 46 things left .
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
The third stage of our work showed
us we could , out of these 46 units, put 2
units into each of the 23 groups. So
we now write 2 units in our answer ,
multiply 23 by 2 , giving 46 units.
The subtraction shows that we have
now nothing left , and therefore we
have used the whole 3266 things, and
have put into each group 100 things,
and 40 things, and 2 things - that is,
142 things altogether.
Now that we understand the principle
of the process , we can see that we need
not write down as many figures as
we have been doing.
First , the position of the 2 and the 3
in our first multiplication , 2300, shows
that 23 must stand for 23 hundreds.
Therefore, it is unnecessary to write
the 00 . In the same way, we need not
write the o at the end of 920, since the
position of the figures again shows their
value. Next , the three stages of our
work have consisted of dividing, first
the hundreds, then the tens, then the
units. Thus, at the second stage, say ,
we are not dealing with units, so we
need not write down the unit's figure, 6 ,
of the number of things, 966 , which
we have left at that stage. We “ bring
down ” the figure from the dividend
as we require it .
Finally, the answer " need not be
written as we wrote it at first , 100 +40
+2 , for when we divide the hundreds,
and see that we can put i hundred into
each group first , we know that we shall
then proceed to tens, and, last of all ,
to units. That is , we know that there
will be three things to put in the
VAN MUSIC Cowbaa s
Sve
A FIRST LITTLE EXERCISE
THERE is so much to learn in music
THERE
that no one book in the world can
tell it all ; and now that we are getting
on so well we must buy a little book
that will make our learning easier,
because it gives us a great deal that
there is not room for in an encyclopa dia .
There are many books that will do this,
of course, but the one we are going to
buy is called “ L'Indispensable,” pub-
lished at is. by Messrs. Ashdown, of
Hanover Square, W.
It was written some time ago by a man
called Aloy's Schmitt to help us in
trorex TUTTI
mm
1808
OF SCHOOL LESSONS
answer ," so that instead of 100 we
write i only, and the two figures which
have to follow will make this I mean
I hundred . The work will therefore be
like this :
23 )3266(
)3266 (142
142 ( 1 ) Take as many figures
23 of the dividend as will
make a larger number than
96 the divisor. In this case ,
92 two figures, 32 , make a
larger number than 23. To
46 find what figure goes in
the answer, use only the
46
first figure of each of these
numbers. Say, How many 2's in 3 ?
Evidently, i . Put I in the answer .
Multiply 23 by 1 . Write under 32 , and
subtract. The remainder is 9 ; really
9 hundreds, but we need not trouble
about that .
( 2) " Bring down " the next figure, 6 ,
from the dividend, writing it after the
remainder, 9. We have now to divide 23
into 96. Say, as before, How many 2's
in 9 ? There are 4. Put 4 in the answer,
after the I which is already there.
Multiply 23 by 4 , and write the result ,
92, under the 96. Subtract. The
remainder is 4 .
( 3) Bring down the next figure, 6,
from the dividend. This gives 46.
Say, 2 into 4 goes 2 . Put 2 in the
answer. Multiply 23 by 2. Write
the result, 46 , under the other 46.
Subtract. There is no remainder. We
have no more figures to “ bring down,"
so the division is finished .
Answers to Examples on page 1712 :
1. 26347. 2. 185786. 3. 102051
4. 820. 5. 22707. 6. 126.
getting our fingers quite ready to do
the fairies' bidding.
We begin by looking very carefully
at Exercise I. , and we will call it “ The
Fairies' Drill." They want all our
fingers to be quite free, and equally
strong - in fact , each must be as the
other. But first of all we must under
stand all about this little exercise .
We notice the little brace { , which
tells us that the fairies in the treble
and the fairies in the bass are going to
sing together, so when we have found
out what each hand must do, we shall
XXTEC
ZUXTIMET

It play them at the same time. We
the little figure known to us as Treble
Clef directing us to the notes on the
treble staff, and we see the little figure move their railings, or bar-lines, but
which we know to be the Bass Clef
showing us our way to the notes on the
bass staff.
Now we come to something we have
1 not seen before, the little sign written
2.:
like this a
It is really a broken circle, but before we may always knowsize
we can quite tell what the fairies mean
by this little C we must find out some-
thing else. If we look at the exercise
we notice little lines going straight
down through the treble and bass staves .
It is just as if the fairies wanted little
eld of sound, each field to be the
same size , and each one within its own
little railing. Yes, it is quite true that
all music to-day is written in this way.
The little lines have a name all their
own ; they are called bar-lines, and the
space between the bar- lines is called
a bar. Here is a picture of four bars—
four of the fairies' little fields.
1
3 4
These bar- lines help us very much ,
because when we are first reading one Popp equal p
of the fairies' letters we know we are to
make the first note after the bar- line
that is, the first note in each bar
a little louder than the other notes .
We shall have to press that particular
note a little more , and the fairies call
this pressure accent. We must take
still another look at this first little
exercise, and we shall find something
that looks like aa double line
a quicker,
This is to tell us that the fairies have
come to the end of this first little bit of
drill, and they call it a double bar.
what has all this to do with the little
sign we were talking about , C ? Just
1 N
MUSIC
see this. We said the fairy fields of sound
nave to be the same size. Sometimes
the fairies have a game of play, and
then they tell us they intend to do so .
Sometimes for quite a long time you will
find their railings are placed at equal
distances, and each little field is the
same size as the other. The fairies
are so thoughtful that they have signs
to guide us in every direction, so that
what
They show us the of they
each want.
little
bar by signs or figures placed at the
beginning of their letters. These letters
we call pieces or exercises. So our
little C isplaced at the very beginning
of this particular exercise to tell us how
many we must count to carry us through
the two little bars we are going to play.
It is called a time signature — that is,
the sign that will tell us the time we
are to keep .
C is called common time, the time
that is used the most in music , and it
means that each bar contains the
value of four crotchets. Now, if we
remember the game we played with
King Semibreve, the Lords Minim ,
the Masters Crotchet, and the little
quavers , we shall be able to think and
say quite quickly : One semibreve
is worth four crotchets. So in this
little exercise each bar is big enough for
King Semibreve o. Two minims are
equal to one semibreve -pp equal o.
So, if King Semibreve wishes to rest ,
each of these bars can take two minims.
Four crotchets take up the same time
as two minims or one semibreve
ppp equal o ;
therefore, in these two little bars, we
may, and do, count 1, 2, 3 , 4 .
It is quite possible for four little
crotchets to give way to eight little
quavers, er , and >
still we count 1, 2 , 3 , 4 , because for
every crotchet we have two little
quavers. So they have to trot a little
I 3
see that
es and we
equal
But equal p
p equal o
1809
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
If we look at our exercise again , we group must represent a crotchet ; so
see sixteen little black notes, and each as semi-quavers are on duty, each little
note has a double tail . This group contains four semi- quavers, be
tells us that they are even smaller cause equal l , and this is
and less important than the little how we count :
quavers. The fairies whisper, “ These
little notes with a double tail aie
semi-quavers, and it takes two semi
quavers to represent one quaver."
fo
Semi means half, and these wee notes 2 3 4
are just nothing more or less than half The fairies want us to press the very
quavers. So as our bar
quave can take
rs take eighty
a holida
quavers, if thetly havedone in thislittle first
(as they eviden
note of each bar, so that those
who hear us may knowit is the be
exercise ), and tell thelittlesemi-quavers ginning of the bar ;and when we reach
to take their place, we find ourselves with group 3 we give another gentle little
pressure, not so much as on the first
sixteen little semi- quavers, and we can note of all, but just enough to show
make our little list of notes still longer :
us we have got half-way through the
equal fairies' field - that is, that we have
reached the half of the bar, and anyone
equal
who hears us will know we are playing
il equal in common time, or four crotchets in
the bar.
p equal o
Next time we are going to think
So we see that we want four little of the notes, and how to make our
semi-quavers to make one crotchet. fairies give us the lovely tone we
There are four tiny groups. Each tiny want so much to hear.
Calpe D DRAWING POWDER
THE RIGHT WAY TO USE COLOUR
HERE was once a little girl who was
THE drawing, then she tore it up. She went
very fond of drawing. She thought homevery sad, and cried аa little in her
she would like to paint a sketch from own room ; but she was too proud to tell
Nature ; so she got anyone, or to ask
her sketch - book, for help, because she
paint - box , and was quite sure now
camp-stool, and that she would never
started out, very be able to paint.
proud of herself, and Not long after
quite sure she would this someone took
succeed . She had her to the National
not been taught Gallery, and she
anything about looked carefully at
sketching, and did the pictures of land
not know whether scapes painted by a
one subject was man named Turner ;
more difficult than and then suddenly
another, so she chose her eyes were opened
a very pretty view, as if aa fairy's wand
a blue sky, green had touched them .
fields, and waving The trees looked all
trees. She painted A green leaf and its shadow right in these pic
very happily for a tures, yet she had
long time, then suddenly she felt her always thought their trunks were black
drawing was all wrong. She looked at oi grey ; here they were all colours
the lovely country , and at her own green , yellow , red , even blue !
1859
 MARKASUDRAWIN Gwarancs
When she went into the country again
she saw all these colours for herself,
and found that green leaves some-
times looked white, or blue, or grey,
according to the light or shade in which
they were. And
so she went to all
the picture exhi
bitions she could
find, and learned
things that helped
her wonderfully,
and which she
never forgot. The
artists had shown
her how to see
things that they
had learned to see.
But it was rather
silly of the girl not
to ask older people
for help as well, An open book painted on a green background
wasn't it ? Perhaps she was wiser about
this, too, as she grew older.
Shall we try to paint something now ,
and see what some of the difficulties
arethat we have to be helped over ?
We will choose one of the things we
have learned how to draw , and make
the best drawing we can first, as no
painting looks well unless the drawing
is good too.
Shall we choose an open book - a
bright brown one, and putit on a green
background ? We must draw it first
carefully , taking care not to spoil the
surface of the paper with rubbing out.
We know how to put on a flat wash,
so we will do that first. If it is not
quite smooth , it may be because we
have not had enough practice. But
perhaps the paper is not right. Water-
colour paper, stretched as we know how
to do it, is best ; or we can use water-
colour blocks. Perhaps the brush is
not a good one ; but good brushes and
paints and paper will not make artists,
though they help them very much .
The best brushes are sable brushes,
which want careful choosing. They are
expensive, but they are nice for birth-
day presents, and we know by this time
how to choose a brush , as painting
soon teaches us the faults in our tools.
Then, perhaps, the colours seem
chalky, especially ultramarine or cobalt,
and leave little dark spots on the sur-
face, however careful we are . Cobalt
is very expensive if we buy it good ;
1811
but it is better to have a very few
colours, and to have the best, than to
have a great many mixed paints of
which we hardly use any, and now that
we can paint a little it is worth while to
get good paints. The best plan is to
buy an empty enamelled tin box, and
get the colours gradually as we can .
We must have light red and Indian
red and rose madder. This last is
better than crimson lake or carmine.
We shall also want Vandyke brown
and sepia , indigo, cobalt or ultramarine,
yellow ochre,and lemon yellow. Every
body has a different list of colours that
they like best, and it is nice to know
the paints so well that we can make a
selection that will be useful when we
have spent still more time on painting.
We learned how to put one colour
over another without spoiling it when
we did the washes, so now we can put
the shadow of the book over the back .
ground, softening the edges so that there
is no hard line ; and we can put the
shadow on the white book and soften
the edges in the same way. We must
not put one colour on another till the
underneath one is dry, and we must
not work with the colour too dry in
our brushes, or we shall get hard lines
and edges where we do not want them .
Then we might try a leaf, putting the
shadow it casts on the background
before we colour the leaf itself. Shadows
are made up of different colours ; for
instance, where the light shines through
the leaf we see a greenish or yellowish
tinge. If wewe try putting different
coloured flowers on white paper, we
shall see how different the colours
even of shadows can be.
 LITTLE PICTURE-STORIES · IN FRENCH
First line : French. Second line : English words. Third line : As we say it in English .
Il est huit heures. La chambre à coucher est noire. Nous sommes presque endormis.
It is eight hours. The room to to sleep is black. We are nearly asleep.
It is eight o'clock. The bedroom is dark. We are almost asleep.
Tout à coup il y a un bruit dans la cheminée. " Qui est là ? " dis-je.
All at blow it there has a noise in the chimney . Who is there ? ” say I.
Suddenly there is аa noise in the chimney. “Who is that ? " I say.
On ne répond pas. La bonne entre ; elle frotte une allumette et allume le gaz.
One (not) responds not. The nurse enters ; she rubs match and lights the gas.
There is no answer. Nurse comes in ; she strikes a match, and lights the gas.

O
DDUT
10.D

17

Quelque chose dégringole dans la cheminée et tombe sur le plancher.

Some thing tumbles down in the chimney and falls upon the floor.
Something slides down the chimney and falls on the floor. 1)
Jeannette crie. La bonne dit : “ Chut ! Vous allez réveiller Bébé."
Jenny cries. The nurse says : “ Hush ! You go to awaken Baby.”
Jenny screams. Nurse says : Hush ! You will waken Baby.”
C'est un petit chat, " dis-je. “ Il a peur. Puis-je lui donner du lait ? "
>> (0

“This is a little cat,” say I. " Hehas fear. May I to him to give some milk ? "
(

" It is a kitten," I say . "' He is frightened . May I give him some milk ? ”
La bonne tire la sonnette et la servante apporte du lait dans une soucoupe.
The nurse pulls the bell and the servant brings some milk in a saucer .
Nurse rings the bell, and the maid brings some milk in a saucer.

Bébé s'éveille et crie : “ Joli minet ! Puis-je l'avoir dans mon lit ? "
Baby herself awakes and cries : " Pretty pussy ! May I him to have in my bed 2
Baby wakes up and cries :“ Pretty pussy ! May I have him in my bed ? "
Mais la bonne dit : " Nous le mettrons dans cette corbeille près du feu .'
But the nurse says : “ We him will put in this basket near of the fire. "
But Nurse est
says :parti.
“ We will put him in this basket near the fire."
Le matin il Peut -être les fées l'ont emporté.
The morning he is departed. Perhaps the fairies him have carried away.
In the morning he has gone. Perhaps the fairies have taken him away.
THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS BEGIN ON PAGE 1931
1812
 THINGS TO MAKE
AND
THINGS TO DO

A SIMPLE FLYING MACHINE

Mostofus know that same corners as we have
the propeller of a CONTINUED FROM 1724 cut away in the first end ,
steamship, as it revolves, but the opposite corners.
drives the ship through Then we shall have the two
the water. This is because the slope of the ends cut away to the form of thin blades,
blades drives the water away from the ship but the slope of the one will be opposite
behind, and this pushes from that of the other,
the ship forward. A very as shown in picture 3.
simple Aying machine Our toy is almost com
can be made on the same plete.
principle, and when we We have now to fix
have made it we shall 1. Wood for the flying machine a stem firmly into the
perhaps understand centre hole. A butcher's
better how it is that a ship is driven meat skewer, if made of wood, will do for
forward by the revolution of its propellers. the stem , or a wooden penholder, or even

2. Cutting one of the wings 3. The wings after cutting

First, we get a piece of wood about a thin lead pencil. The stem may be any
5 inches long, i inch wide, and half an inch length from 6 to 9 inches. We may
thick, as illustrated in glue the stem into the
picture 1. Softwood, hole, but it is not really
such as is used for fire 4. The completed flying machine
wood, will do well enough,
so that we may simply take a piece of fire necessary. It will be
wood if we can find a piece large enough sufficient if we push it
each way. Right in the middle of it and in firmly , but not so far
on the flat sidewe bore a hole about a quarter as to split the blades.
of an inch in diameter. We can do this with When we have the stem
a gimlet, and we must do it carefully and fixed, we have only to
slowly so that we do not split the wood . The hold the toy upwards with
hole is made right through from side to side the stem between the
of the wood. Picture i indicates the position palms of the two hands,
and size of the hole. A little distance from then rub the hands to
thishole at oneside we cut away the corner gether quickly, and release
until we get it down to look like picture 2. the machine as we make
The end of the piece that we have cut will it spin. It should soar
be almost triangular in shape. Now we aloft as high as the roof
begin at the opposite corner at the same of a house if we have done
end of the wood, and cut it away also until it properly. If we have
we have one end of the wood almost up to not done it properly, we
the hole in the form of a slanting blade, may find that the toy
but very thin . Its resemblance to the blade strikes the ground at once
of a ship's propeller begins to be seen, and instead of flying. If so we
it will look something like the right end of may know that we have
picture 3. We makethe corners of the part spun it in the wrong dires
we have cut round instead of leaving them tion before releasing it,
square. This improves the appearance. and we can do better at the
That finishes one end of the blade. We do next attempt . A little prac
the same with the other end of the piece of tice will enable us to make
wood, except that we cut away, not the it soar high every time. 5. Flying the machine
0
1000
1813
 MAKING A
А SET OF DOLL'S FURNITURE
THE DINING-ROOM AND THE KITCHEN
We learned how tomakethe drawing-room by coveringa piece of card with the velvet,
house on page 1717 ; for our dining-room suite, and card .
which we aregoing to make to look like walnut The back and arms of the sofa are quite a
and crimson velvet, we want several yards of plain and square, the arms being as high as
brown silk -covered wire at one penny a yard. the back. The back is filled with onelong
This is thickerand handsomerthan theblack cushion, wadded and joined up at the end.
yet not so good for small curves . Butour suite Another cushion goes over both arms and
is massive in pattern , so this is just the thing along the seat. A piece of card the shape of
The chairs are made on the same plan as the seat is covered with velvet, witha little
those described on page 1718, except that strip of wadding to plump it up. Enough
they do not have a second band of wire velvet is left at each end to double over and
round the seat. The shape of the back of make cushions for the arms, as shown in
the small chairs is shown picture 23.
in picture 21. The angles When the cushions
should be well squared are fixed in place, the
with the pliers. A good ends of the arms should
way to protect the silk be slightly curled over,
covering of the wirefrom as in picture 24. Since
injury is to tie the tip of the sofa cushions will
the little finger of an old not take the whole
glove on to each claw of width of the velvet, it
the pliers. The easy is better to join them
chairs, made deepand The dining- room set of furniture for the doll's house turn
wide ( about 14 inches
on thethem
wrongsideand
. Where the
at the back for the seat and 142 inches sin card is, the selvedges can be drawn together
the front), have a plain square back like across it with long stitches, the same as in
picture 20, and the one with arms has the cushions.
them quite plain to match. For the The table is very simple, just like the legs
cushions we need some ribbon velvet and seat- frame of a chair, with rather longer
ih inches wide, and a little wadding or legs, a side about 3 inches, and an end
cotton -wool. 2 inches long. If the wire is soft enough
Measure from the top of your easy -chair toallow of the legs being twisted, they
back to the edge of the seat in front, and will look much better. Allow half an inch
take a piece of velvet rather more than twice extra length for this. The top is of satin
as long. Double or sateen to
the two ends match the wire,
over towards the stretched over
middle, in pro card .
portion to the The dinner
sizes of the back
and the seat.
Let the ends
meet with a
20
m 21 22
waggon begins
just like the
table — the legs
about half an
quarter of an inch high , start
inch to spare. ing with the back
Stitch the edges leg first. The
together very
neatly, with silk
to match if pos
sible, along the
selvedge of the
23 24
o end

side 2
long .
measures
14 inches, the
inches
When the legs
Plans for making the dining -room furniture for the doll's house
velvet ( or turn and sides are
and do them on the wrong side, which is done, quite firm and square, bend the
even neater) so that you have two little wire upwards for 14 inches from the
square pockets with their openings together, top of the last leg . This is a pillar to
like picture 22. support the upper shelf. Then turn sharply
Stuff a pinch or two of wadding into each at right angles again to form the side of
pocket, and hem down the spare quarter of the shelf, which must be exactly the same
an inch to keep it in. This is, of course, the length as the one below it ; then another
wrong side of your cushions. Turn them pillar, which is just like aa leg, sewn securely
over,and attach them neatly to the framework to the top of the leg underneath, and
of the easy -chair, so that the “ woodwork ” so on, till we get round a second time.
shows all round the back . Poke the velvet well A third circuit, this time with tiny " legs
into a deep creasebetween the back and the of a quarter of an inch, sticking up instead
seat. It may need a few extra stitches there. of down, to form ornamental knobs at the
Thesmall chairs will be quite easy to make four corners , finishes the framework . The
after this, as they only need a square cushion last turn of the wire is carried down the
the size of the seat. This may be made first pillar, to make it double, like all the
1814
 -MAKING A SET OF DOLL'S FURNITURE :
others, and it is then cut off, and the end coming along the side 1 % inches towards the
neatly tucked away behind the first leg. front, and making, what one may call a little
The two shelves are simply made of pieces leg, quarter of an inch long, exactly over the
of card, cut very carefully to fit the frame, front leg, to which it must be strongly stitched
and covered with brown satin or sateen . Then go along the upper edge of the front
The last room in the doll's house which
we have to furnish is the kitchen.
34 inches, and make another 4- inch lég
just over the other front leg, turn the corner,
The furniture is all made with thick brown form the upper edge of theend of the dresser,
satin wire and sateen to match . The chair and fasten the wire to the back at the proper
is made in the same way as all the other chairs distance - quarterof an inch-above the top
already described , the square-cornered back of the back leg. The dresser now looks like
being filled with bars ofbrown embroidery picture 26. The wire is at the point marked
silk set in and twisted just like the rails by the x. Now carry the wire across the
of the bedstead, as shown in picture 25. back on a level with the upper edge of the
The grandfather's armchair table part ;, and, having
is the same thing made secured it, take itadistance
larger, with a higher, wider of three-quarters of an inch
back , and square armsfilled up the back, double it (as in
with bars. The table is picture 27), making a pro
just like the dining -room jection, or horizontal " leg ,''
table, except that the top quarter of an inch long as a
is made of sateen instead support for the first shelf.
of satin . The chair -seats Carry the wire upward
are also of sateen , to look another three -quarters of
likeplain wood. an inch, and form the
The special piece of projection for the upper
furniture in the kitchen is shelf. Carry it now across
the dresser. It is the the back, and form a

most difficult thing we have The kitchen furniture forthe doll's house corresponding support for
yet attempted , and for that the upper shelf at the other
reason it has been left to the last. It side. Turn downwards to make the second
should not be started with less than two support for the lower shelf exactly opposite
yards of wire, as it is made throughout tothe first, and secure your wire at the point
without a join. marked Xx in picture 28 ( drawn larger than pic
Start on a back leg (at the point marked ture 26) . All that remains to be done is to carry
with an arrow in picture 26) , which should the wire across the back of the dresser once
be about if c..ches more, and to fasten
long. Then carry it off by turning it
the wire straight up round the back wire
to form the high just below the first
back of the dresser. support for the lower
This should be 3 shelf, and, nipping
inches beyond the 25
the end closely, to
top of the leg, and 37 sew it down upon
31 incheswide.Bring itself. The finished
the wire down to the framework of the
bottom of the oppo dresser looks like
site back leg, and picture 28. Fasten off
when this is formed at the point marked
by turning the wire X. Now cut a piece
back on itself and of card to fit the
doubling it closely back, 3 inches long
as usual, bend the and 34 inches wide,
wire towards the first 26 28 not too thick, or it
front leg, making the will be top -heavy,
side of the lower and so fold it up in a
Plans for the kitchen furniture for the doll's house
:J

edge of the table piece of sateen , 7

part of the dresser about 1 inch long. inches long and 4 inches wide, that the
When the first front leg is done, carry edges of the sateen can be turned in, and
the wire along the front of the dresser the whole sewn up entirely to cover the
31 inches to the last leg, and turn round the card, the same way as we made the top
corner and along the second side or end of of the dining -room table, and fasten it in
the table part to the point where you started. place. A top to the table part of the
You now have made what looks like the dresser, cut to fit, and a front and ends
beginning of a sofa with a very high back. must also be neatly made, and fixed in place.
Every angle and every joint must, of course, Narrow strips of card covered in the same
be firmly secured with thread of the way form the shelves resting on their
same colour as the wire. Having brought supports, and, lastly, a black -covered pot
your wire round to the point where you board (to help balance the back ) may be
began, carry it upwards parallel with the back fixed where shown by the dotted line.
for five-eighthsof an inch, and fasten it firmly . In another part of the book we learn how
Then make the upper edge of the table part, to make the doll's house itself.

1815
 A LITTLE GARDEN MONTH BY MONTH
WHAT TO DO AT THE END OF OCTOBER
All the work among the hardyperennials, that if cuttings are taken of the useful yellow
and digging, and tidying that was advised calceolarias,there is no need to take them so
in the last part may still be done if not early as was necessary for the geraniums.
already completed. The chrysanthemums, The end of October, however, is quite the
the dahlias, and the Michaelmas daisies are best time for this work. Calceolarias are
still making our plots glad and gay with almost hardy, so that they need but little
colour. When a sharp frost does come and winter protection. They may be put into a
blackens all the tops of the dahlias we need frame, and have air every day through the
not be frightened, but when thathappens the winter, except when it is frosty or wet, by
time has arrived to dig up the plants . If we raising the lights ; or we have seen them
put them into the ground in early June as brought quite safely through a severe winter
rooted cuttings, we shall be surprised to find merely planted outside in the border under
that, in the meantime, these roots have the wall of the greenhouse, and some stout
become large tubers. We take them up as boarding put in front of them and over them,
carefully aspossible so as not to injure them ; which was wholly removed during most days.
then we let the wet soil that hangs about them I think we may say that every one of our
become quite dry . It may take some few days, little plots should boast its rose -tree, one at
so that we must be careful to place them least, and another if we can spare the space for
somewhere out of reach of any night frost it. It needs to have the ground it is to occupy
thatmight betide. After this we store them . quite deeply dug ; yes , even to the depth of
for the winter ; and the best way is to put them two feet if that be possiblewithout coming to
into something and coverthem well over with the subsoil. Secondiy, it likes plenty of good
dry sand or soil. rich food ; and we supply this to a great
We may treat our gladioli in exactly the extent if we dig some well-rotted stable
same way, but we should not lift them until manure into the soil.
the tall, sword -like foliage is turning brown It is not enough simply to dig the hole
and withering, for the foliage is of use to the into which the rose is to beput, butthe soil all
plant just SO round it needs to
long as it re be dug over, so
mains green. It that the roots,
is very important wandering in
to store them search of food ,
where no winter may spread out
frost, however in all directions.
sharp, shall The soil may be
touch them , for allowed to settle
this makes them for a few days
turn soft and Chrysanthemums and dahlias while we de
decay . cide upon the
The present is an excellent time to buy names of our roses. Perhaps one or more
hardy perennial plants if we do not feel that may be chosen from the following short list :
our little gardens are sufficiently well stocked. Caroline Testout - one of the best bright
With all the summer behind us, we have had pink roses ever grown.
full time to make up our minds what are our Viscountess Folkestone- free flowering,
favourite plants, or what we have seen in pale flesh -colour.
other people's gardens that we desire for La France - a little paler than the Caroline
ourselves. We have probably found out by Testout.
this time that often there are many varieties General Jacqueminot - a bright red.
of a plant, and that it is deeply interesting to Ben Cant - a deep crimson.
grow several of these varieties. Let us take Frau Karl Druschki - a fine white rose.
the case of the Dianthus family. This includes Or it may be we should like to have a
our lovely carnations and the red and white little monthly or China rose, that is as strong
pinks, and also the sweet-williams and many and able to take care of itself as a wild hedge
others well worth growing. This relationship brier ; or, even , we mayhave a fancy for one
of plants to one another is one of the things of the dainty little Scotch roses, either white
you may well study ; and I do not think you or yellow. The Scotch rose will fower even
will do better than to turn to the pages of in a garden that gets but little sunshine ;
some good catalogue, look up the plant that whereasthe rose generally maybe regarded
you seek - say, this Dianthus — and discover as a sun-lover, and the position chosen should
for yourself what a large family party it be as free and open as possible. The hole
includes, and gradually, perhaps, you will must be dug large enough toallow of the roots
come across first one, then another. You being spread out on all sides ; no doubling
will rear this from seed, and that you will buy, of them under, or bending them round to
someone will give you a third, and so on. make them go into a hole too small. No,
The campanulas, the primroses, and the pinks indeed ! the roots must be spread out quite
all belong to large families. freely, then the soil filled in, not merely
When we arethinking of taking cuttings of thrown in loosely, but you may carefully tread
geraniums and other plants, it should be noted it firm round about the newly planted tree.
1816
FINISHING MODELTOWN RAILWAY STATION
We willnow proceed tomake thebuildings tower will look like picture 35 as it is being
for the up platform of our railway
station . We made the platform itself last time
we built. The last picture given of the plat-
form was number 24. In this case we shall
continue the numbers, and our first number
in this part will therefore be 25. Picture 25
shows the up platform complete with all its
buildings, but without the stair that descends
to it from the bridge. In the case of this
platform the buildings are erected, not on
the platform itself, but behind the platform
and close up to it. The room on theextreme
right is the porters' room, and its plan is
given half-scale in picture 26. In taking our
measurements we use scale- rule B to take
the measurements, and our full -sized rule
to make the lines on our card. After having
been cut out, and when being folded up,
the porters' room will be as seen in picture
27. We must observe that there are two levels
to the floor - the street level and the platform
level . Part of the floor is on the platform
level and part is on the street level . We
shall see the reason for this as we proceed.
Two partitions are necessary for this build-
ing, and plans of these partitions
half-scale in pictures 28 and 29.
are given
In making them we use scale-rule
B to take our measurements.
Picture 30 shows us the partitions
in place. We notice that the
longer parti
tion goesright
down to the
street level ,
and that the
shorter parti
tion goes down 25.
to the higher
level floor. The up -platform of
Modeltown Station
Picture 26
shows at a
chain line where this partition is to be placed.
When we have glued this building together,
with its partitions in place, it will appear as
seen in picture 30 .
We will now make the parcel office, the
plan of which is given half-scale in picture
31, so that again we use scale- rule B to
take our measurements . The floor for this
room is given in half-scale plan in picture 32,
which we make by using scale -rule B for the
neasurements. When bending up the walls
of the room, it will be like picture 33 ; and
when the room is completely glued up, with
the floor in position, it will be as seen in
picture 34. Put this building aside with the
porters ' room until we are ready to put all
the platform buildings together.
The main building has a clock tower
( seen in picture 48) , which we shall now
make. Its plan, half-scale , is in picture 36,
So we use scale-rule B. Notice the dotted
lines that have the small circles near each end.
We know that these have to be cut half now make. The plan is in picture 42, and is
through, not on the side of the card where actual size, so that in making it we use only
the drawing is, but upon the opposite side of the full-sized rule both for taking our
the card. After cutting out the card, the measurements from the picture and for
1817
bent up. This picture shows the round space
marked like aa clock -face, and we can easily
draw it so without any special illustration of
a clock . A clock -face should be made in
both circles, as the clock must tell the time
both to the people in the station and to the
people in the street. Observe by the markings
in picture 36 that part of the corner on each
side of both clock -faces is cut and bent
inwards so as to make this part ornamental.
Having made the clock tower, we put it aside
also until we are ready for it.
The next thing to which we give attention
is the shed, or platform shelter. Wecan see
this finished and supported on its pillars in
picture 25. Its plan is given in picture 37.
This is half-scale, so that in making it we
use scale -rule B to take our measurements
from the picture. One of the dotted lines has
a circle near each end , and this, as usual,
means that the card should be half-cut and
bent on the opposite side of the card. The
plan of the under side of the shelter is shown
in picture 38. This is also half-scale, and
we take our measurements with scalá -rule
B, paying attention to the two lines thatmust
be half - cut and
bent on the
opposite side.
There are two
ends to enable
us to attach
the top to the
bottom . We
therefore make
two drawings
of the plan in
picture 39;
The dotted
lines in one of
them we must
half - cut and
bend up on the opposite side of the card from
the drawing: . Then we glue together the
roof, under side, and ends of this shelter, and
make it into a curiously -shaped box. Picture
40 shows how the end looks as it is being
folded up. Notice the doubling over of the
card to make the front edge. Glue should
be spread thinly in the card -bend here, and
the rule should be used to press it down flat
until it is hard . This will make a neat,
strong job.
At each end of the main building, as seen
in picture 25, there is a chimney, of which a
plan is given half-scale in picture 41. Using
scale -rule B, we draw and cut out two chim
neys, noticing that some of the dotted lines
must be bent back from the opposite side.
We glue up the chimneys and put them aside,
leaving their fixing until the place is ready
for them .
In picture25 we may see under the shelter
a ticket collector's box, and this we shall
 BANUESNA

) ‫ز‬ 27. Folding the

porters' room 28. Plan of partition :
half - scale. Use rule B

28. Plan of partition : half-scale.

UseruleB
26. Plan of
porters' room :
half - scale.
Use rule B

30. Porters' room , with

partitions
0

32. Plan of parcel office

floor : half - scale. Use
rule B

34. Parcel office

completed
31. Plan of parcel office : half-scale. Use rule B

88 Bending up parcel office

lol TOI

35. Clock tower 36. Plan of clock tower : half-scale . Use rules
02

Drumm IET
1818
 39. Shelter end: half- scale,
Use rule B

40. End of shelter

ca
41. Chimney :
ball- scale .
Use rule B 42. Ticket collector's box :
actual size
o

0000
300
OD
37. Plan of shelter : half -scale. 38. Under side of
Use rule B shelter : half
scale. Use rule B

r
?

43. Plan of wall : half- scale.

Use rule B
00

45. Folding up the central hall

44. Plan of wall :
half -scale . Use
rule B

國 翻 割副
图图

47 Plan of centralhall : third - scale.

Use rule C
46. Central hall of station
1819
 THINGS TO MAKE
making our lines on the card. We bend this
up, and glue two projecting slips at the top of
the walls to the under side of the roof. Then
we put this on one side also, until we are
ready to attach it to the front of the main
building.
Before we make the centre building, we
will make the two end walls of the platform .
We can see these in picture 25. Picture 43 is
the plan of the smaller of the two - that on
the leftside of the platform as seen in picture
25. It is half-scale, so that we use scale -rule
B for the measurements. Notice that the
dotted line must be half-cut and bent on the
opposite side from the drawing. The other
wall - that at the right end of the platform in
picture 25 — is not so simple, as part of it is to
be bent over to form a footway from the
platform , and one part reaches down to the
level of the street. Picture 44 is the plan of
the wall, made half -scale, so we use scale -rule
B for the measurements. Notice the lines that
must be half -cut and bent from the
other side of the card. When this has
been made and cut out, we put it aside
with the other things that we have
made but have not yet
fixed in their final
positions.
We are now ready to
make the large central
hall of the station build
ings.
seen
It is
fin
ished in
picture 46,
which also
shows the
porters '
room and MU
the left lug
gage office
attached to
the central L TRAS
hall -
one * YANI
at each end.
Picture 47
is the plan 48. Station hall as seen from the street
of this build
ing, and gives it one-third scale, so that we
use scale -rule C to take our sizes from the
picture. Having drawn and cut this part out,
we fold it up, when from the inside it will
look like picture 45. The street-front of the
station, when completed, is seen in picture 48.
The central part and thefront of the wings
are given in plan in picture 49, which is
half-scale, so that for taking ourmeasurements
we must use scale - rule B. We must notice
that some ofthe dottedopposite
lines have to be
half -cut and bent on the side of the
card. When bent into shape this portion will
look like picture 50, or, looked at from the
back , it will be like picture 51 .
We can now glue the platform front of the
building, which we made from the plan in
picture 47, to the street-front, which we have
just made from the plan in picture 49. The
end slips of 47 are glued inside the ends of
the walls of 49, and then we shall have a frame
that begins to look like a solid building. The
folded edge slips of the roof of 49 must be
AND THINGS TO DO - RIN
glued carefully and accurately to the places
where they touch 47. We shall find that inside
the great bay at the street side there is no roof.
We therefore cut out two roof wings - one
for each side - from the plan given in picture
52, which is half-scale, so that we use scale
rule B to take the measurements. Having
cut out these parts we glue theminto place,
thereby, completing the roof, which will be
flat at the topof these parts, and notpointed
like the main front roof. The main building
now consists of the front next the platform ,
and on the street side two wings with a bay
between, in which we shall place the booking
hall.
Picture 58 is the plan of the booking -hall,
and is half-scale, so that again we take scale
rule B for measuring the sizes in thepicture.
We shall notice that the booking -hall has a
large double-door entrance and a glass roof.
On one side there is a door and a ticket
window, and on the other side two doors,
one of them leading to the general
waiting-room and the other to the
ladies' waiting -room . At the plat
form end of the hall is a square
foundation
to the collec
tor's ticket
box, and two
sets of steps
leading to
13 the two plat
form doors
which stand
on the plat
form level.
The interior
of the book
ing - hall,
looking from
the street
LIZO door, is
ULU 17
shown in
picture 53,
where we can
see most of
the details.
Picture 54 is
the hall looking from the end next the plat
form , and shows the street door ; and picture
55 shows the booking -hall from the outside
being folded up into position.
Picture 57is the plan of short stairs at the end
of the hall,
the slopes of which are seen in pic
ture 53. These slopes may be seen at each
side of the platform at the far end of the hall in
picture 53. Picture 57 is actual size. We make
and cut out two of the same size, and glue them
into position as seen in picture 53, fixing one
end to the hall floor, the two side pieces to the
wall of the hall on one side and to the side
of the small platform on the other, and bend
back and fix on the back to the back wall of
the hall. Picture 56 is a half-scale plan of the
ticket collector's box which, by using scale
rule B for the measurements, wemake and fix
on the small platform in the booking-hall, so
that it may really form an extension to the
ticket collector's box on the platform .
Now we fix the booking-hall into its place in
the space left for it, when we put the main
Com
1820
QUE

010 10

AAA
60. Street front of central hall

Pean
er
000

51. Bending up the

central hall
00

62. Roofwing :half -scale.

Use rule B

63. Inside of booking -hall

‫انزل‬
‫در‬

64. Booking -hall from

platform end

.--. - .- ...
000

000

66. Folding up the

booking -ball

49. Street side of central hall : half - scale.

Use rule B

building together. We put the end with the
steps against the platform doors. We glue
this carefully and accurately into place, and
it should look like picture 48, except that the
two side buildings - one at each end-the
clock tower, and the porch of the entrance
have not been attached.
The plan of the entrance porch is given in
picture 59. It is half-scale, so that we must
use scale - rule B for the measurements.
make it and glue it above the front entrance
asseen in picture 48.
Now we will glue on the clock tower, which
we have already made. The place where it
goes is indicated by chain lines in pictures 47
and 49, and its appearance when finished is
seen in picture 48. The next part of our task
UGAT
67. Plan of steps :
actual size
66. Ticket collector's box :
half - scale. Use rule B
will be to glue the porters' room and the left
luggage room into their proper places at the
ends of the main building Pictures 25 and 48
will help us to do this. As these buildings
have been lying waiting for us, we may. find
We that the glue may have pulled the sides a
little out of form as it has set hard. We need
not pay attention to this until we have glued
them into position against the main building,
after which we can persuade them by gentle
force to go into their right places. Wemust
see that we fix both Aush with the main
building on the platform side.
1821
 OVACLOUDS
000
58. Plan of booking -hall : half- scale.
Use rule B
60. Plan of rail : 61. Plan of fish -plate :
half-scale .
Use rule B
half -seale . Use rule B
Now we must get a large sheet of straw-
board on which to erect our railway station,
which has now little to be done to it. If the
strawboard is very thin , we may put a few
cross-pieces of thicker board , or even thin
slips of wood, underneath to give it strength .
Towards one side of the strawboard erect the
down platform , and glue it securely to the
strawboard. Place the other platform , which
is the larger or up platform , opposite the
down platiorm , the two smaller ends being
exactly opposite. Thus the up platform will
be much longer than the down platform at
the broad end. Let the edges of the two
platforms be exactly four inches apart, and
see that they are this distance apart for the
whole course of their length. In this posi-
tion, glue the up platform to the strawboard.
The under slips at the back of this platform
should be turned in before gluing , so that
they will not interfere with the buildings
when we glue them into position .
The main buildings of the up platform must
be glued to the strawboard immediately
behind the platform itself. We may note for
our guidance that the outside end of the
porters' room should be exactly opposite the
place where the platform becomes wider.
We glue the under slips of the buildings,
where there are such slips,to the strawboard,
and the front of the buildings at the bottom
1822
DOU
59. Entrance porch : half- scale. Use rule B
62. Rail and fish -plate
to the back of the platform . We must
press them gently but firmly against
the back of the platform until the glue
has set. Next we place in position
and glue the ticket collector's box on
the platform . It will be right at the
place where the small platform inthe booking
hall was fitted with the collector's box exten
sion. The shed cover or weather screen of
the platform , which has been lying ready for
us, must now be glued into position . We make
two columns or pillars to fit it, and to act as
supports. We have seen on page 981 how to
do this, and we have already made the pillars
for the stairs and for the down platform , so
we know how to do this now. Having fixed
the pillars for this platform screen , there re
mains to fix the bridge, if we have not
already done so.
We must place and glue the bottom of the
stairs to the two platforms. In doing this,
and in letting the glue set hard, we must put
something beneath the bridge to keep it in
position. When the bottom ends have set,
we proceed to fix the pillars, which must be
cut to exact length. If they are too short
they will make the stairs lean back, and if
they are too long they will make the stairs
lean forward .
The short walls at the bridge ends of the
platforms must now be glued into position , if
we have not already fixed one or both . They
must be glued both to the buildings and to
the sides of the stairs. Now there is only the
wall and footway, seen at the right-hand side
of picture 25, to be fixed into position just at
the side of the porters' room .
 > FINISHING MODELTOWN RAILWAY STATION
That is the last touch to the actual building
of the station . All we need now is the rails
themselves. Picture 60 is a half-scale plan of
alength of rail. We make, say , 24 drawings
of this, cut them out, and bend them into the
form shown in picture 62 . Notice that two
of the dotted lines in each, which have the
small circles near each end, must be half - cut
and bent on the back of the card. The rails
of a real railway are joined together by fish-
Modeltown Railway Station as made from the plans and instructions in these pages
plates, or short bars of iron or steel, one end
being fastened to one rail and the other end
fixed to the other rail. We will make a
quantity of fish -plates for our railway.
Picture 61 is the plan half-scale. Then
we shall lay our rails, gluing them to our
strawboard , in each pair making the two
rails 1 % inches apart. When two rails
join we glue on fish -plates as seen in pic-
ture 62. We put two pairs of rails from
HOW DID THEY LAY THE
Whenthe Chinese first let Europeanscome
and
into their country to open up trade
lay down railways, it was not always easy in
a large town to find a suitable place for a
railway station , especially when two or three
European Powers were all trying at the same
timeto get permission to carry a railway
into the city.
Once, Mr. Dudeney says in his
" Canterbury Puzzles, five differ
ent countries wanted to do this,
and wereclamouringfor a way D ta
through the fortifications of a
five-sided city.
The Chinese Governmentwas
in a difficulty , notknowing how
to satisfy them all, and at last
one of the Emperor's advisers
said, “ Let them all have a
station ." But it was not easy to
arrange a position foreach station inside the
walls, since it was agreed that one railway
should not cross another one .
The men who represented the European
Governmentswere so long trying to solve notobjecttoletthe lines run side by side.
1823
end to end of our strawboard, and if
they go away beyond our platforms it is
all the better. Railways are not restricted
to railway stations, or we could not go far
in a railway train .
We have only to put on the necessary paint
to make our railway station look finished.
All windows will be dark blue to imitate
glass ; the walls will be red to imitate bricks ,
the roof will be dark grey to resemble slates.
國 面 圖 目 画画 國
All woodwork , including the bridge, we shall
paint green , as well as the columns, which
are supposed to be of iron, and the rails we
shall have blue or grey to look like steel
rails. A railway station complete, and made
exactly as we have described, is shown in
the last picture, which is made from a real
photograph .
Our nexttask will be to make a large hotel,
which we shall erect near the railway station .
CHINESE RAILWAYS ?
the problem that a change in the Chinese
Government took place before they had
settled how to run the lines into the city, and
the scheme fell through altogether .
Hereis a plan showing the position agreed
on for the five stations, A, B, C, D, E, and the
places where the railways A , B , C, D , Ewere
to enter the city through the fortifica
B tions. Can you , with a pencil, trace
the route each is to take to the
station allotted to
it, railway A to
station A, railway
Trana B B to station B, and
с so on ?
Remember no
E railway must
cross over or
under another
one ; that is the
mainpoint. TheChinese Governmentthought
it did not matter how long and roundabout
the route through the city was,so long as the
station was reachedinthe end, andthey did
 AVADA CERRASSE

ANSWERS TO THE MATCH PROBLEMS ON PAGE 1723

NINE XXXVI
IV. O VI
7

H
On page 1723 appeared some problems to be attempted with matches or pins. The pictures above show how
8

these problems are solved. It will be seen that a few of them are just " catches, " but all of them are interesting.

A RAILWAY TRAIN BUILT UP FROM SQUARES

A
On page 975 we saw how to build up some queer figures from squares. Here is a train which can be made
in the same way. The little sketches below show us how to start building, with the squares as the foundation.

ANSWERS TO THE PUZZLE PICTURES ON PAGE 1716

In each of the pictures on page 1716 there is something wrong . These are the explanations.
1. Half a pound of gold and half a pound
of silver weigh twelve ounces, there being but
twelve ounces to thepound in troy weight.
2. When ice floats on water there is always
seven parts under water to one part above.
3. In the Royal Standard the lion rampant
of Scotland does notturn his back on the others.
4. The bunch of cherries shown appears
on a vine.
5. The gnomon , an upright piece of the
sundial, is placed pointing to south instead
of north.
6. A reflection is always the exactcounter
part of the original, with slight modifications
due to refraction .
7. The axis of the earth points to the Pole
Star ; which is always due north .
8. The yacht is incorrectly drawn. The
clouds, smoke, and Aag of the steamer show
THE NEXT THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO ARE ON PAGE 1921
the wind to be blowing one way, while the
sails and flag of the yacht show it blowing
the opposite way
9. With the new issue of pennies for the
Queen's Diamond Jubilee, in 1897, the light
house and ship were omitted.
10. Although shadows cast by the sun are
parallel, perspective makes them appear as if
they would meet ( if continued) in the sun.
11. The arms of the City of London with
dagger inverted.
12. An ostrich has but two toes visible on
each foot.
13. A spider has eight legs.
14. The passion flower has but five petals
and five sepals.
15. The flange of the wheels of a railway
carriage should be inside the rails.

1824
 The Child's Book of
FAMILIAR THINGS
The most wonderful bridge in the world , across the River Forth in Scotland
FOOTPATHS
To one can say who
N°
Nº
O bridge.
built the first
CONTINUED FROM
Nature her
self would no doubt be man's
first teacher. Man would find a
path across a chasm by clinging
to a twisted vine ; or he would
see a ready-made bridge consisting of
a fallen tree- trunk across a stream .
Those were the first bridges, and they
were the sort which would have to be
made for hundreds of years.
One day a genius arose , who dumped
high heaps of stone in aa line across a
stream , and on the top of these placed
slabs of slate or stone or fallen trees .
Then, a long, long while after-
wards, came bigger, real bridges. The
Romans were the first to learn how
•
1
to make these. They built splendid
bridges on arches, some of which exist
to -day.
Men had a long time to wait before
they got good bridges in England.
The twelfth century had almost ended
when the first great London Bridge
was built . There were wooden houses
and shops on it , but these were always
catching fire and damaging the bridge,
and they were all pulled down before
the bridge was destroyed.
A great reform was made in bridge-
building by John Rennie . It had
been customary to make the arches
very high, so that the roadway sloped
very sharply up on one side , and very
sharply down on the other . But
John Rennie made his arches , not
like the half of a circle , but like the
half of an egg, cut lengthwise .
Ι Ο D 22
TEXT
IN THE AIR
There still exists a
1755
famous single - arch
bridge of the old type,
the famous bridge at Ponty.
pridd, in Glamorganshire. The first
bridge there had three arches, but
the river washed them away. Then
the builder, William Edwards, put up
another in its place, but it had only
one arch , and soon fell .
Edwards discovered the cause of its
fall . There had been too much weight
on the supports, and not enough in
the centre. By being too light on top,
the crown of the bridge was forced up
and made to fall . Then he built a
third bridge, in which the haunches
were lighter and the top heavier. That
bridge still stands, after being used
for more than 150 years.
When the eighteenth century was
drawing to a close , men began to
build bridges of cast iron. But engi
neers soon found that, though cast
iron can bear great pressure, it will
not bear much pull. It cannot be
easily crushed by a weight, but it can
soon be snapped by weights which
pull at the two ends. So they then
used wrought iron, which cannot easily
be pulled apart . That served until
steel came into use in the nineteenth
century.
The first great bridge built of
wrought iron was the Britannia
Bridge, which crosses the Menai Straits
in North Wales . The builder was
Robert Stephenson, of whom we read
on page 592. He made a huge square
tube of iron - iron at the top, iron at
1825
 LUKKET ZUXORT
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF FAMILIAR THINGSa
the sides, iion at the bottom , and They had to cross two swift channels
through this tube of iron the trains pass. of water . There is an island in the
To increase the strength of the bridge middle, but on each side of it there
he made the iron at the top and bottom flows a channel of water deep and swift ,
tube-shaped, instead of solid , because it and 1,700 feetbroad. It was impossible
would better stand the pull of the weight . to sink piers in these channels, so the
HE GREAT IRON TUBES IN WHICH THE central pier was founded on the island ,
THERARCROSSES THE WATER and two others built nearer the shores .
These tubes are built on huge columns The cantilevers, of which there are
of masonry, one being founded on an three pairs, carry the bridge across
island half-way across the water, and the two wide stretches of water. They
the others on the land at the sides. are each 1.360 feet long, and the three ,
As ships were constantly passing, it stretching out towards each other,
was im ossible to put up great scaffolds leave a space of 350 feet to be covered
on which to build up the ironwork . So between the endsof the first and second,
Stephenson had the two tubes, nearly and a similar space between the ends
500 yards long, built in four sections on of the second and third . Here ordinary
shore. When all was ready the big steel girders are used . In order that
tubes were floated on many boats, and ships may pass under it , the bridge is
ferried out to the towers. made 150 feet above high tide , and its
As the tide went down the boats top parts are 361 feet above the water.
gradually sank , and the tubes, weighing The cantilever -bridge plan has since
5,000 tons each , came to rest in grooves been used for many other bridges. One
prepared for them in the masonry. on this plan crosses Niagara at a great
Then the boats were drawn away and height above the water. The canti
the enormous masses of iron were hoisted lever is used in suspension bridges also .
up to the proper height, 100 feet above Huge columns are erected on land, and
the water, by great engines. from them chains or wire ropes are
The finest of all bridges is the stretched across the gult, carrying a
great steel cantilever bridge. A canti- roadway.
lever is copied from the oldest of W KITES ROCKETS
H ° WORKBEILDANG GREAT BRIDGESUSED
simple bridges. If two trees lean over
the water from different sides of a The best suspension bridge in Eng
stream we have only to run a plank land is at Clifton . This is 702 feet
from the end of one trunk to the end across, and 31 feet wide. It is more
of the other, to make a simple canti- than 200 feet above the River Avon ,
lever bridge. That is one way of apply and it is said that the first string
ing it . The other is to consider the attached to the rope which pulled
cantilever a bracket . Secured firmly at across the cable was sent over by a kite .
one end, a bracket will bear a shelf A still stranger way was adopted for
with a heavy weight of books, and starting the great bridge across the
the steel cantilevers forming a bridge River Zambesi, in South Africa . The
are merely huge brackets. The best bridge is the highest in the world -- 400
example is the great Forth Bridge. feet above the water, and runs from
GREAT BRIDGE - BUILDER WHO DIED cliff to cliff ; so they had to fire a
A BROKEN - HEARTED rocket fastened to the end of a cord.
There had been many schemes for The rocket took the cord across, the
bridging the River Forth, and at last cord was used for hauling across a wire,
the work was begun by Sir Thomas and the wire was used to pull over a
Bouch , who had built the famous Tay small cable. On this a truck crossed
Bridge. But suddenly , one dreadful carrying the main cable of the bridge,
night in the winter of 1879, part which
of the is 200 yards long, and the greatest
Tay Bridge was blown down , carrying engineering wonder in South Africa.
with it into the river a trainload of The Tower Bridge, in London , is
people. Everybody in the train was 800 feet long. When a ship is too high
drowned, and the country was horrified . to pass under, great machines cause the
Sir Thomas Bouch died broken-hearted, roadway to open in the middle . The two
and theForth Bridge was designed bySir halves are pulled up,working on enormous
John Fowler and Sir Benjamin Baker. hinges, and the ship passes through.
Har ITULUXITYZIOTXOTIRTINT DOO
1825
 THE BEGINNING OF A GREAT BRIDGE

CW
Itrampe

bile
of water. 1

This shows us how the weight of a bridge is distributed ; it illustrateswhat bridge-builders call the cantilever
Et to becure principle. These two men are sitting on chairs, each holding two sticks. Theoutside sticks are fastened to
weights, and cannot move . The inner sticks are fixed to the chairs, and from their tops another stick is
stretched, bearing a weight of 112 pounds. Yet the men feel no weight, and they represent two pairs of cantilevers.
Here
In ordert
NH
ihtide,
ure there
Han has
nidas

del
景
員

canju

JE
DGES
st

-do

This is a caisson, like a great hollow chamber , inside which men can work to set up the foundations of a
bridge The caisson is here floated into position for the building of the Forth Bridge. The huge steel tubes
reach down to the bottom of the water, and men work inside them without danger, as if in a worksnop.

This shows the caisson in position , sinking in the water. It is about 70 feet wide at the bottom . Though
open at the top , it has water-tight floors inside, and at the bottom there is a chamber 70 feet wide and
7 feet high, lighted by electric lamps, in which the men, breathing air sent down in tubes, can work safely.
1827
 EEG ng GGG

A GREAT WORKSHOP DOWN IN A RIVER

10
PL

This shows us the inside of the caisson while the men are working in the River Forth. We can see the tubes
leading from the top down to the working chamber at the bottom . Inside one tube is a ladder by which the
diggers climb up and down. Other men bring down material, and take up the broken rock which has been dug.
Another tube brings down air for the men to breathe. If the bed of the river is muddy, the mud is forced away by
the compressed air. Water is keptout of the chamber by compressed air, which is made to press with greater
force than the water. From top to bottom the caisson is 60 feet deep, and inside it is like engineering works.
1828
 TEAU

ROUES THE FORTH BRIDGE PIECE BY PIECE

When the rock had been preparedfor the foundation ofthe Forth Bridge, strongmasonry was built from
the rock below the water up to the top . Then huge pillars of hollow steel, such as we see here, were put up
for the cantilevers, and were fastened down to the masonry with enormous steel bolts. They are 343 feet high,
but so strong that neither the weight and vibration of great trains nor the force of storms can break them .

oto
na

Thegiant pillars having been made fast, the cantilevers

degan to grow out from them . Each ofthese is
really a double cantilever. They stand like brackets back cu back. Perfectly balanced, they stood firm while
the engineers built out into the air from them , as if they were brackets fixed to the walls, bearing heavy shelves.
MOLLIT rom DOTTORIO
1829
CARRYING A TRAIN ACROSS A CHASM

The famous bridge near the Victoria Falls on the Zambesi River, in South Africa, is the highest bridge in the
world. The river here suddenly drops into a vast gorge, which winds and twists for a distance as far as
from London to Brighton. The bridge takes the trains across at the most convenient place. It is 420 feet above
the water and 650 feet long, and is an important link in the railway that is to connect Egypt wi... Cape Colony .

A cable was sent across the chasm by rocket, and work So that the men might work safely , a great net was
was begun from both sides at once. This picture shows stretched across the chasm. We see it here, under the
us how the building-out on one side of the gorge began. growing bridge, ready to catch men in case they fall.

Building out from the two sides, the men worked like After the finishing touches, the bridge was painted
The two parties met exactly in the centre,
clockwork . grey. Now , amid the flying spray, it can scarcely be
and we ser them here joining the last two girders. seer, and the glorious scenery has not been spoiled.
1830 XEZURRERIUT MIESTELI ETT BRETODOS
 anuman
CHAS INSIDE TWO OF THE GREATEST BRIDGES

Isda
UTILITIETTYYTY

We might here fancy ourselves on some strange pier, but it is the footway of Brooklyn Bridge. There are
separate roads on this bridge for foot-passengers, for trams and trains, and for other vehicles. Along this
footway even a child may safely walk from Brooklyn to New York. It is very different on the bridges of London.

We have seen the building of the Forth Bridge from the very foundations. Now we take a glance at the inside
as the engine-driver sees it. There are two sets of rails, so that two trains can pass at the same time. The
cross - beams are part of the strengthening structure. We know the force of storms, and the strength of the
bridge is greater than any storm or weight could break. Men are always painting this bridge to prevent rust.
re UM LATTUA za TTT TITTYTTY ETT TTTTT mm
MIETTI DUTTTTTTT
1831
memum

FAMOUS BRIDGES HANGING IN THE AIR

remona

EXCHANGE

TIN
Brooklyn Bridge is one of the biggest suspension bridges in the world. It crosses the East River, to connect
Brooklyn with New York: The whole length of the bridge is more than a mile , and its distance across the water
is 1,600 feet. Cables pass over the towers, and from these other cables hang down to support the roadway .

The suspensionbridge over the Avon at Clifton is the most famous of its sort in England. Part of the chains
used oncehelped to hold up Hungerford Bridge, London, before that bridge was pulled down to make room for
Charing Cross Bridge. Although the roadway of the Clifton Bridge looks level, it is really two feet higher in
themiddle than at the footof the two towers. The bridge has a span of 702 feet and connects two counties.
or ***** momxm BT commer 1832 Un om DX MOOTTT
'
 NO

A BRIDGE THAT OPENS IN TWO

The Tower Bridge is the most beautiful in London . It is aa girder bridge and a suspension bridge, and is like
the old -fashioned drawbridge which castles and fortresses had, only far stronger, of course . First we see it
with the drawbridge down, so that horses and carts and people may pass, while small steamers can go under it.
TITETmN
mantan
TTU

Small vessels can pass under the Tower Bridge, but when a big vessel comes, powerful machinery in the
towers of the bridge is set to work, the roadway opens in the middle, and the two ends are pulled up on end.
When the vessel has passed, the two halves of the road quietly descend to form one road again ,and traffic pours
over from both sides of the river. The roadway at the top is always in use, and is for foot-passengers.
மணாணாணாமமாவா
1833 BULLUXURXO BURUZKO
 CRUCIAL
an
BRIDGES ACROSS THREE GREAT RIVERS

HATSAAJA :

There have been two Tay Bridges at Dundee since 1878. The first was two miles long and 90 feet above the
water. It was not a strong bridge, and one stormy night in December, 1879, about 1,000 yards of it were blows
down while a train was passing Ninety people were drowned. The old bridge was pulled down, and this
new one was opened in 1957. The Tay carries more water to the sea than any other river in Great Britain.

A splendid steel girder bridge, ouilt in seven spans, carries trams over the Hawkesbury River in New South
Wales , Australia . It took only three years to build this bridge , which was opened in 1889. Its length is nearly
1000 yards , and it is of great importance to the big cities. Without it the railwav would be practically useless.

New

After Robert Stephenson had built the bridge across the Menai Straits the people of Montreal, Canada , built
one like it across the St. Lawrence, the great river which carries more water to the sea than any other river
except one in the world . It stood for 35 years. Then, in 1899, they built this splendid new one. It is nearly two
miles long, contains 20,000 tons of steel, is four times as strong as the old one, and is the finest bridge in Canada.
TEXTILE TYTTRINOMULUTUITION TIIEXTREMELY TEXT TEXT TETTE OUZATUTUTORETTE
1834
 CECALACE GOOGILDAANI

BRIDGES OVER MOUNTAINS AND LAKES

Canada is crossed by the great Canadian Pacific Railway, which, beginning near the shores of the Atlantic
Ocean, ends on the other side of the continent, at the Pacific. It passes on its way through wild and rugged
country, over deep ravines and swift torrents, and it is only by bridges like this one, which is at Mountain Creek,
that the railway is possible. Canada's prosperity depends upon the railway and the bridges are the chief links,

SK

This is a wooden trestle bridge near Lake Superior, in Canada. Such bridges are cheap and serviceable, but
sometimes they have caught fire and a train has rushed into the burning timber and the river be ww .
The photographs in these pages are by Messrs. G. W. Wilson & Co., Wilson Bros., Underwood & Underwood , Valentine,
Notman , and the Canadian Pacific Railway Co.
1835
கமயமான

'SINGLE SPANS AND MANY SPANS

The great bridge across the Rhine at Coblenz, Prussia, shows us the value of the form of arch which John
Rennie first adopted. Although we have only one great span here, the roadway is practically flat, not steep
as those over the old single-arch bridges were. This is because the arch is shaped like half an egg ,

The marble bridge at Pekin is famous and beautiful, New Brunswick has a copy of Clifton's suspension
but its sixteen arches interfere with traffic in the bridge. It crosses the Grand Falls at a giddy height
river, and make the roadway very steep. We can all above the water, and looks, in the distance, like a
see the difference between this and Coblenz Bridge. spider's web. Here we see a vehicle passing over it.
AMMALMERE

The Austrian Tyrol is very trying to the bridge-builder. Three chains of the Alps run through it, and terrible
gosges and chasms have to be crossed where the railways rur , as we see here at Waldi Tora. This is a fine
piece of work, in solid stone and with a single span , and harnsonises with the rugged grandeur of the scene.
The village is far below in the valley. There the natives live the oid life while the newlife passes over their heads
བ་ མ་ ས་ལ་ ས་ མ་བས་ས་བ་ བག་ཆགས་ བ༌ i836
ESTA COLOMA DAwan ng 200mm

OLD- FASHIONED PATHS IN THE AIR

This picture gives us an idea of what our bridges were like once upon aa time. Here is one built on piers made of
nothing but logs. On top there is a roadway of timber. This is the bridge at Sringar, the beautiful old capital
of Cashmere, Northern India . The houses recall the bridges ofold-time London with their shops and dwellings.

This rough -and -ready bridge serves for fishermen to Tight-rope walkers should like this bridge. It is made
pass to a rock off the coast of Antrim , Ireland It up ofthree ropes. Two of the ropes serve as handrails ;
consists only of strong ropes and staves of wood. In the third is the footpath . It crosses a river in India,
stormy weather it sways and needs courage to cross. which has many modest suspension bridges like it

E H A
T .

This is the sort ofbig bridge that we see where the single arch and cantilever are not used. It is the Iwakuni
Bridge in Japan, a bridge of wood and stone, in four spans. Only small ships can pass under it, and the road
way is as steep as a switchback ladder, and is furnished with 200 steps. Horses and carts cannot go over it,
THE NEXT PICTURES OF PAMILIAR THINGS BEGIN ON PAGE 1965
DO TTTT
immTVORE
1837
。
知
 THE KING OF THE HUNTING BIRDS

The king of the hunting birds is the eagle and the most splendid of the order is the golden eagle. In the few
places in Scotland whore it still makes its home, it nests in solitary grandeur far up the mountain -side. There
it carries birds and animals to its young ones, which are watched over by the parent bird with the tenderest care .
To

The sea-eagle eats fish as well as animals and sometimes The osprey is the great fishing hawk. It catches its
robs fishing birds less powerful than itself. It can drag prey in the sea and in the rivers and lakes. If not
a salmon from the water as easily as it can catch a hare. dieturbed, it builds year after year in thy same place.
சாலையை
183 ) Im Von ranrum
దీపము The Child's Book of
NATURE
NATURE'S WINGED HUNTSMEN
Theair has its lions
and tigers-not CONTINUED FROM 1748
real lions and tigers,
but birds which , in their way,
are as fierce and hungry as
the great four- footed animals
of the jungle and the plain.
When we study their lives, we
can see that the eagles, the falcons,
the kites , the buzzards, the vultures,
the owls, and other flesh -eating birds,
play a similar part to that played by
the flesh - eating animals. Some strike
down their prey, kill and eat it ;
others wait until the death of an
animal or a man has taken place
before they begin their meal .
First in the scale of splendour
among the hunting birds comes the
eagle , the most noble -looking of birds
that fly. It is the king of the falcon
family, which includes no fewer than
300 species of birds that hunt their
prey by day. Here for the moment we
will keep to the eagles proper, and
glance at some of themost important.
The largest are the sea -eagles. Of
these there are several species, scattered
over a great part of the world. They
are to be found in Scotland and the
northern islands, and in wild parts of
Ire and. Occasionally one may stray
into England. One was caught in
Windsor Forest in 1856, measuring
eight feet across the wings and three
feet two inches from the point of the
beak to the tip of the tail, and weigh-
ing twenty-two pounds. In the same
forest a great golden eagle was
1839
caught, and presented
to Eton College, after
being stuffed , by the
Royal Family.
Generally speaking, however,
we must go to the deer forests
and to the bare , barren hills still
farther north of Scotland to find
eagles. There the sea -eagles may be
seen in their glory ; and the splendid
golden eagle is, though not frequently
met, still seen with sufficient frequency
to remind us of the days when Scot
land was more generally the home of
wild animals and birds once common
in these islands .
The sea -eagle is so called not
because it swims in the sea, but
because,, in addition to eating birds
and animals as food, it likes fish ,
and, pouncing down into the sea,
river, or lake, it draws forth from
the water whatever may have attracted
its attention . It is not always suc
cessful, however .
Once a sea -eagle was seen to drop
from the air swiftly into the water
and plunge its talons into a fine
salmon. The salmon struggled violently
and dragged the great bird under the
water. The eagle could not release
its talons, and the salmon would not
cease struggling and swimming, and
so keen were both on their battle
that a man was able to steal up and
secure both bird and salmon . The
sea-eagle varies his diet of fish with
meals of game birds, hares, rabbits,
young lambs and kids.
 - THE CHILD'S
ULUDUDIZOLGTQG TELESU.
BOOK OF NATURE

The eagle of which Scotland is the desire for change does not end
proudest is the golden eagle, the hand- here. The eagles carry off lambs to their
somest of the family. It is the largest of nests, and they attack and kill deer.
all save the Steller sea- eagle. That great It has been told a thousand times that
bird , measuring forty-one inches from eagles carry off children ; but though
beak to tail, is never now seen in we know for a fact that they will attack
England ; but a bone of this bird has children guarding flocks which the
been found buried in the soil of Essex , eagles desire to rob, there is no proof
showing that once it had its home in that children ever have been carried
England. The golden eagle does not away by these birds.
hunt in the sea , but otherwise its habits As to their attacking deer, there is
do not differ much from the habits of theno such doubt . They set about their
sea-eagle. work with as much method and skill
WHERE THE GOLDEN EAGLE BUILDS ITS as
NEST AND MAKES ITS LARDER
if it werethey
Generally part will
of their everyday
attack life.
a young
Like most other birds of prey , deer, that being more easy to kill.
the female golden eagle is larger They drop from the sky like a flash
than the male . Her length, from the tip upon the back of the deer they mean
of beak to the end of tail, is about a to have. If they can, they drive it
yard ; while the male eagle is three from its mother. The faithful hind,
inches less. The plumage of these birds if she can keep her little one close
is rich and handsome. While the colours beside her, will fight the great eagle
may differ, the majority of these birds with splendid courage, and, striking out
have feathers of a golden -brown hue. with her front feet, may beat it off.
The golden colour occurs near the tips But if the calf can be driven away
of the feathers, and gives a golden from the hind, the hind becomes so
appearance to the whole. The bird alarmed that she seems unable to act ,
builds in high, rocky places far from the and in that case the eagle will send the
haunts of men , and the rough, strɔng little deer racing away in terror and
nest cannot be reached except by a rope kill it with its terrible talons and beak .
let down from above .
Eagles are watchful parents. They
HOWOF THEEAGLE
DEER TO WILL
CATCH TERRIFY A HERD
will fiercely attack anyone who attempts If this plan cannot be tried, the eagle
to approach the nest in which their does a still more amazing thing.
young ones are. The little eagles have It will hover over a herd and frighten
big appetites, and the parent birds them into running away. Just as they
have to maintain quite a larder for are bounding round some narrow path
them . The larder is generally a large which winds round the top of a preci
rock near the nest , so that the eaglets pice , the bird will swoop down upon the
can go to it and feed while the parent back of the deer, and drive home its
birds are away . Here on this stone great claws. The deer in terror seeks
hares and rabbits and birds are placed, to throw off its foe , and generally jumps
and these the eaglets eat at their down the precipice , so killing itself
leisure . and affording the eagle a meal without
If the little eagles need so much further trouble. That is just what the
food, what do the big eagles require ? eagle wants, and it is for that reason
They have hearty appetites to support that it makes its attack when the deer
their weight and flying powers. are in so perilous a place .
THE STORY. THAT THE EAGLECARRIES The only chance for a young deer when
OFF CHILDREN IS NOT TRUE so attacked is to bolt into a narrow
A golden eagle will eat in the course of division between the rocks. There the
a day a couple of partridges or ptarmi- eagle is practically powerless, for, seeing
gan or a hare. It can live on that, but , that its wings, when outspread, measure
like other creatures, it prefers variety from eight feet to ten feet across, of
in its food. These eagles will sometimes course it cannot fly in a little space,
willingly eat putrid flesh as a change and it will not venture in on foot. Eagles
from their ordinary diet; and men , have been seen to suffer defeat in this
knowing this, set traps and catch them way in Scottish deer forests. But they
as if they were the silliest birds. But do not, as a rule, lose their prey .
TTTTTTT
1840 UDERDAGUE
 .

THE GREAT FAMILY OF VULTURES

The strangest-looking vulture of the family is the king Griffin vultures are to be found in Europe as well as in
vulture, the flesh of whose extraordinary bare neck is the East. They build on high rocks, but sometimes
brilliantly tinted with orange, purple, and crimson. steal the nests which eagles have made and left.
BeoBU
OXUNUTRITIDODOCOLORTODONT

The Egyptian vulture was the chief scavenger of the The condor is thelargest of the vultures, and,indeed, of
land of Pharaoh. The Egyptians valued it highly, and all birds of prey . It makes its great nest in high
carved its likeness on their monuments and tombs. mountains, and flies as gracefully as a winged yacht.

MA
The lammergeier is known as the bearded vulture. It The secretary vulture kills and eats snakes in South
descends from its mountain home to eat dead animals, Africa. Its feathered head makes it look like a
clerk, with a quill pen in his ear ; hence its name.
SONY

and can carry smaller ones to its nest of young ones.

VX

1841
1 ‫ה‬
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
Sir Charles Mordaunt saw a remark- from which tho eagie had escaped .
able sight in the forest of Glen Feshie, Just before dark he heard the beating of
showing how the eagle can hunt . huge wings, and to his joy saw his eagle
While he was stalking a herd of deer, descending from the clouds. Flying high
he saw through his telescope that the above London, it had seen the chicken
animals became suddenly alarmed. He and dropped like a flash to secure it in
knew he had not caused their fright, the yard which had been its home.
for he was too far away. Suddenly a While the eagle was engaged in eating
great eagle swooped into sight and the chicken , Buckland popped a cloth
attacked one of the small stags. Its over its head and captured it . After
plan was to drive it away from the rest wards he presented it to the 20. , where
of the herd ,so that they could not help possibly it remains to this day, for
it . The bird did not attack with eagles live for from one hundred to two
beak or talons, but kept striking the hundred years. They are the longest
stag heavy blows on the back with the lived of all the birds.
middle joint of his powerful wings: ANCEACHES IN THEOFCLOUDS
EAGLE'S GAME AND
Several times it seemed as if he would
fail to get the stag away, for the bird The sight of the eagle, so keen and
kept rising into the air as if to fly away. powerful, is the gift of Nature ; but its
But each time he returned with more ability to catch things, though in
determination , and at last he did get herited, is developed by practice. An
the stag away from the rest of the herd eagle has been seen to snatch up a
and killed it. The man who had gone wounded grouse as it fell through the
out to kill a deer by the aid of a gun air after being shot. Another swooped
saw his victim taken before his eyes down and caught a hare which was
by one of the hunters of the air. being chased by hounds. The young
H °WMINSTER
ANEAGLE ESCAPED FROM WEST: eagle practises to enable it to do things
AND WAS TEMPTED HOME of this sort .
When he cannot get game or deer the One of these birds was seen to catch
eagle will eat many other things. a mountain hare in Scotland. Away it
Frank Buckland, of whom we have went with the hare, up into the sky.
already read in these stories, kept a Then , when far up, it let the hare drop
sea-eagle at Oxford , and, hearing a great from its talons. While the hare was drop
squealing in the middle of the night, ping through the air, the eagle descended
went out and found that the bird was upon it , and caught it. Then it carried
eating a hedgehog , bones, prickles and it up again, and once more let it drop,
all. Another day it tried to eat a dog, and again caught it. This it repeated
and after that nearly made a meal of several times, never once failing to catch
Buckland's pet monkey. Several cats the hare as it was falling through the
and guinea-pigs and a tame jackdaw air. The young eagle was at play, but
were not fortunate enough to escape it was practising for the serious business
the clutches of this hungry bird. of life . Very wonderful it is that a bird
When Buckland left the University he should be able to give a heavy thing
brought hiseagle to London and kept it at like a hare a good start in a fali
the house of his father, the Dean ofWest through the air towards the earth , then
One day it managed to escape. catchit up and secure it.
Love
wall, it gotonandthe wing.""
its Atwayfirsť
up ita Thea
THE WONDERFULs
WePERFUTS TRAPPEOP COMRADE
was very unsteady, but when at last it Fierce as the eagle is, it is affectionate
got clear of the houses, away it sailed to its kind. A strange example of this
in splendour. Its old strength came was afforded in a Scottish forest, where
back to it, and the eyes of all London a beautiful golden eagle was found
were turned towards the sky where the dead in a trap which had been set to
noble bird was soaring. All day it was catch a fox. The bird had espied the
absent, and anybody but Buckland bait afar off, and, going down to get it ,
would have given up hope of ever seeing had been seized by the trap and left to
it again . But he knew how wonderful die a miserable death. The strange
is the sight of the eagle. He tied a thing was that the eagle had not died of
chicken to a stick in the courtyard starvation,nor from any serious injury.
UVEX
1842
 URE NATURE'S WINGED HUNTSMEN
he eagle had any It was caught only by one claw . vulture has dirty, dusky-looking
k he heard the Apparently the knowledge that it was plumage, and its neck is bare, with the
I to hisiristensen a prisoner had killed it, for there was discoloured flesh showing plainly. The
thedous : abundant food beside it. Other eagles, lammergeier is feathered to the beak,
i had sent seeing the prisoner in the trap, had and sails with the grace of a yacht in
a tlash to ro brought it food. There , beside the dead the air.
had beto eagle, were two grouse, and a hare, still Stories are told of its attacking
las engagedin warm when the hunters came to the trap . children, but they have not been proved.
THE OSPREY THAT CATCHES FISHES,AND Its claws arenot strong enough to
enable it to carry off a child , and it
captent
it to theline The affection which the eagles show attacks only what it can eat . Sometimes
i to this reminds us of the osprey, which, though it will take a live animal , but , generally
ine as wild as the other members of its speaking, its food consists of the flesh
are the last family, displays great love for its mate of animals which have died. In India,
and children . It is a handsome bird , where it is very abundant , it haunts
OF DROPPING living entirely on fish , and for that slaughter-houses and the soldiers'
CLOLDS reason is called the fishing hawk. It quarters, on the look -out for scraps,
bile, so is only twenty-two inches in length , and particularly for bones. These it
but its fine wings measure five feet carries to a height , then drops them on
ster six inches across , and on these it the rocks to split them . It does the
sails in graceful flight over the sea same thing with tortoises .
in which its food is to be found. In The biggest of all the vultures is the
Scotland the osprey has an enemy in condor, the huge, heavy bird which
the sea -eagle, which will occasionally makes its home thousands of feet high
rob it of the fish it has caught. In in the Andes of Peru and Chile. The
TE North America the bird the osprey male bird is about four feet in length,
odda most dreads is the great white-headed and its wing -spread is from eight to
eagle, the bird which, because of its eleven feet or more . The male bird has
white crown, the Americans call the a large, fleshy wattle, which forms a
bald-headed eagle. This is a bird which crest to the head.
of fish , it nearly
willeatpretty
fond anything, .Though
is no fisherman MIGHTYABOVE
so it robs THEASLEEP CONDORTH AMOUFFEMENTCOBE
- TOPS
the osprey as it is returning to its Both male and female have powerful
nest with a fish in its talons . But the beaks, but their claws, while they help
white-headed eagle will eat dead horses in tearing their food, have not power
or other animals, and it may be seen enough to enable them to carry away
seated on such a carcase feasting and heavy bodies. Their food consists chiefly
angrily keeping off a flock of vultures of animals of the mountain -side and the
which prowl round, hungry, yet afraid, plain , which have either died a natural
like jackals creeping about an animal death or been killed by wild animals.
on which a lion is feeding . The condor has marvellous eyesight,
It is impossible to be fond of a vulture, and, though it sails high up in the air
valuable as its work often is when it so smoothly that men have believed it
plays the scavenger. It is impossible to be asleep while thus flying, hunters
not to think of the vultures on the say that it is closely watching some
battlefield , where dead and dying men animal on the plain thousands of feet
are lying. Nor can we forget that it is below, which is being killed or is near
the hideous vulture which the weary death from disease. Suddenly the bird
wayfarer, lost and dying in the great drops like a stone through the air.
desert, has to fear. Others from all quarters follow ; and
THERCULTURE THAT DROPSA TORTOISE hunters see a carcase swarming with
FROM A HEIGHT TO SPLIT ITS SHELL birds which a moment before had been
There are two kinds of vultures specks in the sky.
that are less horrid than the others . The condor has this trait in common
The splendid lammergeier, or lammer- with the other vultures-it can fast for
geyer , which soars above the Italian several days, but to make up for this it
Alps , the Caucasus, and the hills of gorges itself when it gets the chance .
Spain , is not so repulsive a creature as This accounts for the fact that cattlemen
the ordinary vulture. The average are able to catch it with ropes . It seems
1843
 romax MON THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
unlikely that they should lasso a grand Before passing from the vulture
flier like the condor, but the bird so fills family we must say a good word for
itself with food that it cannot rise into the secretary bird , which is really a
the air swiftly enough to avoid the noose vulture . It is a curious, long-legged,
which the expert cattleman throws. long-tailed bird , with a strong, hooked
beak and strong legs armed with stout
THE WINGED SCAVENGERS ARE ARMED scales, and claws admirably adapted to

But the true vultures are greedier the purpose which they have to serve.
than even the condor. One , an Egyp- Its food consists of reptiles, and among
tian vulture, has been seen to gorge itself these is included a great number of
to such an extent that it could not move , venomous serpents. The bird has no
but lay on its side and still fed . There fear of them . Some have been seen to
are many kinds of vultures , some more avoid big snakes, but possibly that was
horrid than others, but none nice. because the birds had already been well
They share with the hyenas and jackals fed. Generally it dashes at the snake,
and wild dogs the filth of the villages of and, with its wings spread out towards
the East . They eat also all the putrid the front to keep the serpent from biting
flesh of dead animals, and kill lambs it , beats it , pecks it, and stamps on it
and kids that are too feeble to defend until the snake is killed. Small snakes
themselves . it swallows whole ; larger ones it tears
They have powerful feet and claws, to pieces. This bird is found chiefly
but not such as would enable them to in South Africa, where it is so highly
carry off heavy burdens to their nests. valued as the foe of snakes that a fine
Their beaks are the great weapons of is imposed for killing it. It gets the
attack . With these the larger ones can name of secretary bird from the feathers
tear off the skin of a horse or buffalo, and which grow out from the back of its head.
tear the flesh from the bones, so that looking very much like quill pens behind
nothing but the skeleton remains. A the ear of a clerk.
gentleman in India saw a host of these SOME OF THE SMALLER MEMBERS OF
birds settle upon a dead horse. He THE FAMILY OF BIRD HUNTERS
watched the dreadful scene . There Of course, there are smaller birds
was a sound of tugging and rending, in this great family of hunters than
he says, and in a marvellously short those we have so far considered . The
time there remained of the horse buzzards, kites, and falcons, though
nothing but a clean -picked skeleton . having much the same nature as their
We have no vultures in this country larger relatives, are built on a smaller
except at the Zoo or private collections. scale . The buzzard measures from
At the London Zoo there is a king vul- twenty to twenty -two inches in length,
ture, the most famous of the family. and it has the strong beak and
Its home is in the warmest parts of sharp claws of its family, But it is
America. It is a fascinatingly ugly bird. not so active a bird as the rest. At
PHARAOH'S CHICKENS, AND THE VUL times it flies gloriously high up , in
TURE THAT EATS REPTILES great circles, with very few movements
The king vulture's naked neck of the wings which the eye can detect.
is coloured with shades of orange, As a rule, however, it prefers to get its
purple, and crimson , and it has extra- living easily, by watching and waiting,
ordinary coloured fleshy wattles all and pouncing at the rightmoment upon
round its nostrils and the root of its its victim , whether that victim be rat,
cruel-looking beak. All the vultures mouse, reptile, or bird. Parts of its
have this fact in their favour, that they plumage are very downy, so that the
are very good parents. Long ago the bird can drop down upon its astonished
Egyptians so highly regarded the vul- victim without making a sound. We
ture, which in Egypt has the name of have not much chance of watching the
Pharaoh's chickens, that they frequently buzzard in England, as the family has
included it in their drawings and carv. been practically killed off in this coun
ings as the emblem of the love of parents try ; but members of the tribe are to
for their children. In some parts of the be found in Scotland and in Ireland.
East the vulture is protected by law At one time kites were among the
because of its value as a scavenger . most plentiful of England's wild birds.
1844 TOU
E
from the SOME BIRDS THAT
THAT HUNT FOR
FOR BEASTS
sar a goodE
1. which is
curious, laste
ith a strong
is armed ris
mirably adat
her hareby
ptiles and
great
The la
bare being
possibly i
alreadybe
es atthe

tot frei

ToBit
The buzzard is one of the handsomest of the falcon tribe. It is fierce but lazy, waiting in hiding, then
mmmmm

pouncing on its prey without being heard. Its feathers are downy, and make no sound as the bird fies.
mmmmm mmm

TER
mmmmm
mmmm

The smallest falcon is the merlin, a fierce foe, Men take out the peregrine falcon to hunt, with a hood
but easy to tame and make a friend of. This is put over its head. As the game appears, the hood is
ram

"he bird which the lark Aies so high to avoid. taken off, and the falcon sees its prey and flies after it.

The strong, fast- flying sparrow- The kite has a forked tail,and looks, The goshawk catches its prey by its
hawk hunts blackbirds and thrushes, in flying , like a big swallow . Kites very swift Alight, clutches it in its tal.
young partridges, rabbits and hares. were once London's scavengers. ons and drops to the grouca with it.
an umro trou LU
1845
 COLORADO
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
When London had practically no sani. while, instead of its usual food, it is
tary system, these birds played an made to fly to a bird or a small animal,
important part in keeping the streets and catches this and returns to the wrist
healthy, by eating up the refuse cast of its master. In this way the bird is
out from the houses. Now the kite is gradually taught to hunt , and to return
very rarely seen in England. It cannot each time to its owner, who then gives
be mistaken when it is seen , for the it a good meal. It is always hungry
black and brown and reddish plumage when it starts ; then , when it is a
of the bird and its long, forked , swallow- master of its work, it is carried on a
like tail make it easily recognised . perch with the hood over its head to a
THE EVIL WORKOTHAT place where there are birds or game.
FTHE KITEAND THE The hood is slipped off, the bird sees the
The kite robs rabbit warrens, and likes game, and brings it back to its master.
game birds ; but the harm that it does Like all other falcons, the peregrine is
in this way must be more than made a magnificent hunter. It is supposed to
up by the good it works in destroying be able to fly at the rate of onehundred
rats and mice, and snakes and moles. and fifty miles an hour, yet it flies with
Next we come to the true falcons- such delicacy of direction that it can
handsome, noble -looking birds, of follow a smaller bird through mazes of
which the most famous are the branches and undergrowth , and take a
jerfalcon , the peregrine, the lanner, the bird off a bough without stopping or
saker, the Barbary falcon , the Indian touching any part of the tree.
shaheen , the hobby, and the merlin - all Hºw STUPID FARMERS SHOOT THEIR
long-winged , dark -eyed birds, which BIRD FRIENDS
rise high in the air, then descend like The merlin is another beautiful flier,
thunderbolts upon their prey and bear but its length is only from ten to
it to the ground ; then the strong, swift thirteen inches . There would never be a
goshawk and sparrow -hawk, birds with plague of birds to destroy the fruit of a
shorter wings and yellow eyes, which neighbourhood if a few of these dashing
catch their prey by flying after it in a little hawks were allowed to live about .
straight line, and overcoming it by Perhaps the kestrel might be still
greater speed and strength . more useful . This fine little hawk
These birds play the same part in kills and eats great numbers of mice.
bird life that the cheetah plays in It eats beetles, and caterpillars, and
the animal world. Like the powerful grubs, and is a really excellent friend
h
cheeta , they are by nature wild and of the farmer . Wise men have watched
fierce, but they are trained to hunt its habits, and examined the contents
for men . of its stomach, and so know its real
value , yet stupid farmers still shoot it.
HomTO THE FALCON BIRDS ARE TAUGHT
CATCH OTHER BIRDS FOR MEN The harriers, another type of falcon ,
Soft leather straps are fastened also dispose of many rats and mice and
to their legs SO that they cannot other enemies of the farmer, but as these
fly away at will . A hood is put things take birds which we want it is
over the head, leaving the beak and not surprising that the farmer, always
nostrils free for breathing, but pre- ready to shoot, has no mercy for these..
venting the bird from seeing. When Most of the hawks are very brave birds ;
the hood is removed, the bird is shown their numbers are few, and if they were
a piece of meat, and has to hop from not brave the other birds would kill them.
its perch on to the wrist of the man who Perhaps the bravest of all are the
holds the food. He has a glove on , so caracaras of South America , which
that the sharp talons of the bird will collect together to fight the eagle or
not hurt him . When the bird gets used vulture that dares to come in their way.
to this sort of treatment, it knows that We have a sort of vulture in this
by jumping to the wrist it will be fed. country, though it is not a member of
Then the distance is increased. With the eagle family. Ours is the raven ,
a light line tied to its leg, it is made to the great black bird with the huge,
fly twenty or thirty yards for its food. powerful beak, which makes its nest in
Then in time the line is removed from the wildest parts of the country, as far
the leg, and the bird flies free. After a as possible from the homes of men .
X2XXU
1846
 ILOCALIZEEE JEDI ILLO ILLETVE MEEGDEALEELELOTOTELICE UTILIJE ULEI LLLSLLORENTOgraon

THE CROW FAMILY AND THE OWLS

Doonor

Caracaras hunt together and attack The raven is valuable as an insect. The kestrel is a beautiful little hawk .
eagles or vultures which meet them . eater, but cruel, and kills little lambs. It can be easily tamed and trained .

The carrion - crow eats dead The magpie is an amusing

animals and robs other birds. talker, but a great thief.

The white-breasted croweats Rooks can be distinguished from crows by their The jackdaw cannot help
animals that die in Africa, rookery. Crows nest in solitude; rooks build hundreds taking anything bright and
where it makes its home. of nests together. Here we see a typical big rookery. pretty that catches his eye.

Ra
Here we have three fine owls. In the centre is the barn -owl with its eggs. On the right is the fierce hawk -owl.
On the left is an eagle-owl catching a hare. Powerful and savage, it hunts in the light as well as at night.
The photographs on these pages are by Lewis Medland, W. P. Dando, Oliver Pike, R. B. Lodge. A. Rudland, Messrs. Underwood &
Underwood, London, and Gambier Bolton. Those of Mr. Gainbier Bolton are published by permission of the Autotype Company , the
owners of the copyright of all the photographs by that photographer which appear in this book .
1847 UM TUULETTRODOUX
 LA COCA CLEARANCE
LECA ODLEXOXXX
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE
It will eat grubs and so forth , but its are just going to bed when the owls
favourite food is flesh . It will kill
are coming out . The owls of this country
hares and rabbits and other birds. It are purely nocturnal - night birds. One
attacks lambs, sick sheep, cattle , and or two species abroad can see quite well
deer, by pecking out their eyes . It in a bright light, but ours cannot.
it plentiful innumerous
Scotland , where sheep Their eyes are so formed that they can
and deer are . collect light from what to us is dark
Most people find it difficult to tell ness. They can see when the daylight
a crow from a rook. Many people think is not quite gone ; but in the direct
that rooks are young crows. Of course, light of the sun they are quite dazed .
that is wrong. Crows are solitary birds, The owl works and feeds when we are
and build their nests apart. Rooks asleep. It has eyes differently placed
build theirs together, so that in the from those of any other bird - close
tree -tops which form the rookery there together in front, so that it must look
may be thousands of rooks. straight ahead . To make up for this,
HE MERCILESS CROW THAT ROBS NESTS, it can turn its head with the greatest
THEAND THE JOLLY LITTLE JACKDAW ease in any direction . The power of
The carrion -crow has a nature like its eyes in the darkness is quite wonder
the vulture and the raven, but the bird ful . Most of us, if we were quite close
is smaller, and when it attacks a big to a field mouse or ratmoving stealthily
living animal it cannot do its work over a field, would do well to see it
single-handed, but advances in numbers. against the earth, like which its coat
Its habit of eating putrid flesh is, of is coloured . But the owl sees it from
course, unpleasant, but it is of im- afar through the darkness , pounces
portance to the health of the place in noiselessly down, and seizes it. It can
which the crow finds its meals . Crows catch the mouse and the mole and the
are merciless thieves. They rob other iat ; it can catch fish as they rise to the
birds' nests, killing and eating the young surface of the water.
ones , and even carrying off the un Hºw THE COURAGE OF THE OWL
hatched eggs. To do this the crop GOES IN THE DAYTIME
thrusts his strong beak through one There are about two hundred species
end of the egg, then carries the shell of owls. Some are tiny owls ; some are
and its contents away as on a spear. big eagle- owls, twenty-eight inches in
The jolly little jackdaw belongs to this length, very fierce and strong, ready
family, and can be distinguished from to attack a man who goes near, and
the others by the patch of grey on the able to kill fawns and large game birds,
head and back of the neck . It builds and to do battle with the golden
in the steeples of churches and other eagle . The courage of one of these owls
high buildings. Everybody knows its goes in the daytime, and then little
relative, the magpie, from its handsome birds,, led by a crow , may find it and
plumage of glossy black and white . mob it out into the open , and lead it a
We are all fond of this bird because of terrible dance. But when night comes,
its bright ways ; but other birds hate and the bird can see, none but a mighty
it , for it robs their nests as the crows do . eagle dare do battle with it . This owl
When tamed , it is a wonderful talker. is sometimes found in Britain .
One of the most singular of the birds The hawk- owl is one of the few owls
of prey is the shrike, or butcher bird. which work by day. It is big and
It catches small birds, mice, and so on , strong and savage. There are owls with
and fixes their bodies upon thorns; then great ear- tufts of feathers, and owls
it can easily skin and eat such as it with none at all ; some are snowy
wants, leaving the others for the time white, others are mottled . Some live
to come when it is once more hungry . in burrows with the prairie marmots ;
OWL THAT COMES OUT WHEN BOYS some make burrows for themselves.
THEAND GIRLS ARE GOING TO BED Mostly they live in hollow trees, or in
Here we must say good -bye to the church belfries or other high towers.
birds which hunt while the sun is up, Among so many owls, of course, there
and good -evening to the birds which are those which do harm , but those
fly by night--the owls. These are in this country do more good than evil .
little known to young people, for they The next stories of Birds begin on page 1951.
TYTYYTYTY VYTINT
LERIE XXXTT *
1818
 The Child's Book of
POETRY
CHRISTINA ROSSETTI'S FAMOUS POEM
HRISTINA GEORGINĂ ROSSETTI, a famous poetess and sister of the more
CHR
famous Dante Gabriel Rossetti, poet and painter, was born on December 5, 1830,
in London, and died there, December 29, 1894. “ Goblin Market,” published in 1862,
was her first long poem and many attempts have been made to explain its “ inner
meaning." But it is simply a charming fairy fancy and has no inner meaning. Among
her many books of verse there is one purely for little folk , entitled “Sing Song.
CONTINUED FROM PAGE 1786
ప na రాగారం ve S & 6380498
GOBLIN Sr.
MARKETS
MORNING and the
Maids heard evening
goblins cry One bears a plate,
" Come buy our orchard fruits One lugs a golden dish
Come buy , come buy : Of many pounds weight.
Apples and quinces , How fair the vine must grow
Lemons and oranges , Whose grapes are so luscious ;
Plump unpecked cherries, ) How warm the wind must blow
Melons and raspberries, Through those fruit bushes."
Bloom -down - cheeked peaches . " No," said Lizzie : " No, no, no ;
Swart - headed mulberries , Their offers should not charm us,
Wild free - born cranberries, Their evil gifts woulu harm us.
Crab-apples, dewberries , She thrust a dimpled finger
Pine-apples, blackberries, In each ear, shut eyes and ran :
Apricots, strawberries ; Curious Laura chose to linger
All ripe together Wondering at each merchant man.
In summer weather, One had a cat's face,
Morns that pass by , One whisked a tail,
Fair eves that fly ; One tramped at a rat's pace,
Come buy, come buy ; One crawled like a snail ,
Our grapes fresh from the vine, One like a wombat prowled obtuse and furry ,
Pomegranates full and fine, One like a ratel tumbled hurry skurry.
Dates and sharp bullaces, She heard a voice like voice of doves
Rare pears and greengages, Cooing all together :
Damsons and bilberries, They sounded kind and full of loves
Taste them and try : In the pleasant weather.
Currants and gooseberries,
Bright-fire -like barberries, Laura stretched her gleaming neck
Figs to fill your mouth, Like a rush -imbedded swan ,
Citrons from the South , Like a lily from the beck ,
Sweet to tongue and sound to eye : Like a moonlit poplar branch .
Come buy, come buy.” Like a vessel at the launch
When its last restraint is gone.
Evening by evening
Among the brookside rushes, Backwards up themossy glen
Laura bowed her head to hear, Turned and trooped the goblin men
Lizzie veiled her blushes ; With (their shrill repeated cry :
Crouching close together 4
“ Come buy, come buy."
In the cooling weather, When they reached where Laura was
With clasping arms and cautioning lips, They stood stock still upon the moss,
With tingling cheeks and finger tips. Leering at each other,
“ Lie close,” Laura said, Brother withqueer brother ;
Pricking up her golden head : Signalling each other,
“ We mustnot look at goblin men , Brother with sly brother.
We must not buy their fruits ; One set his basket down,
Who knows upon whatsoil they fed One reared his plate ;
Their
64
hungry thirsty roots ? ' One began to weave a crown
Come buy, ” call the goblins,
Of tendrils, leaves, and rough nuts brown
Hobbling down the glen. (Men sell not such in any town ) ;
“ Oh ,” cried Lizzie , “ Laura , Laura , One heaved the golden weight
You should not peep at goblin men ! ” Ofdish and fruit to offer her :
Lizzie covered up her eyes, Come buy, come buy," was still their cry.
Covered close lest they should look ; Laura stared , but did not stir , 80
Laura reared her glossy head , Longed but had no money ;
And whispered like the restless brook : The whisk-tailed merchant bade her taste
“ Look , Lizzie , look, Lizzie , In tones as smooth as honey ,
Down the glen tramp little men. The cat-faced purr'd ,
One hauls a basket
The rat -paced spoke a word
LE Sea DSG
1849
 -THE CHILD'S
Of welcome, and the snail -paced even
was heard ;
One parrot-voiced and jolly
Cried " Pretty Goblin ” still for “ Pretty
Polly ” ;
One whistled like a bird.
1
But sweet-tooth Laura spoke in histe
Good Folk , I have no coin
To take were to purloin ;
I have no copper in my purse ,
I have no silver either,
And all my gold is on 'the furze
That shakes in windy weather
Above the rusty heather.”
" You havemuch gold upon your head , "
They answered all together :
Buy from us with a golden curl.”
She clipped a precious golden lock ,
She dropped a tear more rare than pearl,
Then sucked their fruit globes fair or red :
Sweeter than honey from the rock ,
Stronger than man -rejoicing wine,
Clearer than water flowed that juice ;
She never tasted such before ,
How should it cloy with length of use ?
She sucked and sucked and sucked the more
Fruits which that unknown orchard bore .
She sucked until her lips were sore ;
Then flung the emptied rinds away,
But gathered up one kernel-stone,
And knew not was it night or day
As she turned home alone.
Lizzie met her at the gate
Full of wise upbraidings :
“ Dear, you should not stay so late ,
Twilight is not good for maidens ;
Should not loiter in the glen
In the haunts of goblin men .
Do you not remember Jeanie,
How she met them in the moonlight,
Took their gifts both choice and many,
Ate their fruits and wore their flowers
Plucked from bowers
Where summer ripens at all hours ?
But ever in the noonlight
She pined and pined away ;
Sought them by night and day,
Found them no more , but dwindled
and grew grey ;
Then fell with the first snow ,
While to this day no grass will grow
Where she lies low ;
I planted daisies there a year ago
That never blow .
You should not loiter so .”
“ Nay, hush ,” said Laura :
Nay, hush , my sister :
I ate and ate my fill ,
Yet my mouth waters still ;
To -morrow night I will
Buy more ; ” and kissed her :
“ Have done with sorrow ;
I'll bring you plums to -morrow
Fresh on their mother twigs,
Cherries worth getting ;
You cannot think what figs
My teeth have met in ,
What melons icy -cold
Piled on a dish of gold
Too huge for me to hold
1850
BOOK OF POETRY DRESURGER
What peaches with a velvet nap,
Pellucid grapes without one seed :
Odorous indeed must be the mead
Whereon they grow, and pure the wave
they drink
With lilies at the brink,
And sugar- sweet their sap .'
Golden head by golden head ,
Like two pigeons in one nest
Folded in each other's wings,
They lay down in their curtained bed':
Like two blossoms on one stem,
Like two flakes of new - fall’n snow,
Like two wands of ivory
Tipped with gold for awful kings.
Moon and stars gazed in at them,
Wind sang to them lullaby,
Lumbering owls forbore to fly,
Not a bat flapped to and fro
Round their rest :
Cheek to cheek and breast to breast
Locked together in one nest.
Early in the morning
When the first cock crowed his warning,
Neat like bees, as sweet and busy,
Laura rose with Lizzie :
Fetched in honey , milked the cows,
Aired and set to rights the house,
Kneaded cakes of whitest wheat,
Cakes for dainty mouths to eat,
Next churned butter, whipped up cream ,
Fed their poultry, sat and sewed ;
Talked as modest maidens should :
Lizzie with an open heart,
Laura in an absent dream ,
One content, one sick in part ;
One warbling for the mere bright day's
delight,
One longing for the night.
At length slow evening came :
They went with pitchers to the reedy brook ;
Lizzie mostplacid in her look,
Laura most like a leaping flame.
They drew the gurgling water from its deep ;
Lizzie plucked purple and rich golden flags,
Then turning homeward said : " The sunset
flushes
Those furthest loftiest crags ;
Come, Laura , not another maiden lags,
No wilful squirrel wags;
The beasts and birds are fast asleep.”
But Laura loitered still among the rushes
And said the bank was steep.
And said the hour was early still,
The dew not fall’n , the wind not chill ;
Listening ever, but not catching
The cus tomary cry;
“ Come buy, come buy,"
With its iterated jingle
Of sugar-baited words :
Not for all her watching
Once discerning even one goblin
Racing, whisking, tumbling,hobbling ;
Let alone the herds
That used to tramp along the glen,
In groups or single,
Of brisk fruit -merchant
men .
 -GOBLIN MARKET-LAR.RO

Till Lizzie urged : “ O Laura, come ; Beside the brook , along the glen,
I hear the fruit -call , but I dare not look ! She heard the tramp ofgoblin men ,
You should not loiter longer at this brook : The voice and stir
Come with me home . Poor Laura could not hear ;
The stars rise , the moon bends her arc, Longed to buy fruit to comfort her,
Each glowworm winks her spark, But feared to pay too dear.
Let us get home before the night grows dark ; She thought of Jeanie in her grave,
For clouds may gather Who should have been a bride ;
Though this issummer weather, But who for joy brides hope to have
Put out the lights and drench us through ; Fell sick and died
Then if we lost our way what should we do? " In her gay prime ,
In earliest winter time ,
Laura turned cold as stone With the first glazing rime,
To find her sister heard that cry alone, With the first snow-fall of crisp
That goblin cry ,
06
winter time.
Come buy our fruits , come buy." Till Laura dwindling
Must she then buy no more such dainty fruit ? Seemed knocking at Death's door :
Must she no more such succous pasture find , Then Lizzie weighed no more
Gone deaf and blind ? Better and worse ;
Her tree of life drooped from the root : But put a silver penny in her purse ,
She said not one word in her heart's sore ache ; Kissed Laura , crossed the heath with
But peering thro' the dimness , naught dis clumps of furze
cerning, At twilight , halted by the brook :
Trudged home, her pitcher dripping all the And for the first time in her life
way ; Began to listen and look .
So crept to bed , and lay
Silent till Lizzie slept ; Laughed every goblin
Then sat up in a passionate yearning, When they spied her peeping :
And gnashed her teeth for baulked desire, Came towards her hobbling,
and wept Flying, running, leaping ,
As if her heart would break . Puffing and blowing .
Chuckling, clapping, crowing,
Day after day , night after night, Clucking and gobbling ,
Laura kept watch in vain Mopping and mowing,
In sullen silence of exceeding pain. Full of airs and graces,
She never caught again the goblin cry : Pulling wry faces,
“ Come buy , come buy ; Demure grimaces,
She never spied the goblin men Cat-like and rat- like ,
Hawking their fruits along the glen : Ratel- and wombat -like ,
But when the noon waxed brigat Snail -paced in a hurry .
Her hair grew thin and grey ; Parrot- voiced and whistler,
She dwindled , as the fair full moon doth turn Helter skelter, hurry skurry,
To swift decay and burn Chattering like magpies,
Her fire away .
Fluttering like pigeons,
Gliding like fishes
One day remembering her kernel - stone Hugged her and kissed her ;
She set it by a wall that faced the south ; Squeezed and caressed her.
Dewed it with tears , hoped for a root. Stretched up their dishes,
Watched for a waxing shoot, Panniers, and plates ;
But there came none ; “ Look at our apples
It never saw the sun , Russet and dun ,
It never felt the trickling moisture run : Bob at our cherries,
While with sunk eyes and faded mouth Bite at our peaches ,
She dreamed of melons, as a traveller sees Citrons and dates ,
False waves in desert drouth Grapes for the asking,
With shade of leaf-crowned trees , Pears red with basking
And burns the thirstier in the sandful breeze. Out in the sun,
Plums on their twigs ;
She no more swept the house, Pluck them and suck them ,
Tended the fowls or cows , Pomegranates, figs.'
Fetched honey , kneaded cakes of wheat ,
Brought water from the brook ; “ Good folk , " said Lizzie,
But sat down listless in the chimney-nook Mindful of Jeanie ;
And would not eat. Give ne much and many

Tender Lizzie could not bear Held out her apron ,

To watch her sister's cankerous care Tossed them her penny.
Yet not to share. Nay, take a seat with us,
She night and morning Honour and eat with us,
Caught the goblin's cry : They answered grinning :
“ Come buy our orchard fruits ۲۳ “ Our feast is but beginning ,
Come buy , come buy : Night yet is early,
Totor
1851
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY

Warm and dew - pearly, Not leaving root or stone or shoot ;

Wakeful and starry , Some writhed into the ground,
Such fruits as these Some dived into the brook
No man can carry ; With ring and ripple ,
Half their bloom would fly, Some ssudded on the gale without a sound,
Half their dew would dry , Some vanished in the distance .
Half their flavour would pass by ,
Sit down and feast with us, In a smart, ache, tingle,
Be welcome guest with us, Lizzie went her way ;
Cheer you and rest with us.” Knew not was it night or day ;
" Thank you,” said Lizzie : “ But one Sprang up the bank, tore thro' the furze,
waits Threaded copse and dingle ,
At home alone for me. And heard her penny jingle
Bouncing in her purse
DOOOIVOTETODOCET

So without further parleying, Its bounce was music to her ear .

Ifyou will not sell me any She ran and ran
DESCUDODOCOODOODGE

of your fruits though much and many, As if she feared some goblin man
Give me back my silver penny
I tossed you for a fee . " Dogged her with gibe or curse
They began to scratch their pates, Or something worse.
But not one goblin skurried after,
DOLORE

No longer wagging , purring, Nor was she pricked by fear ;

CLB

But visibly demurring,

Grunting and snarling. The kind heart made her windy-paced
One called her proud, That urged her home quite out of breath
Cross -grained , uncivil ; with haste
Their tones waxed loud , And inward laughter.
Their looks were evil .
Lashing their tails She cried, " Laura,” up the garden ,
“ Did you miss me ?
They trod and hustled her,
Elbowed and jostled her, Come and kiss me.
Clawed with their nails , Never mind my bruises,
Barking, mewing, hissing, mocking, Hug me , kiss me, suck my juices
Tore her gown and soiled her stocking, Squeezed from goblin fruits for you,
Twitched her hair out by the roots, Goblin pulp and goblin dew.
Stamped upon her tender feet, Eat me, drink me, love me ;
Held her hands and squeezed their fruits Laura , make much of me ;
Against her mouth to make her eat. For your sake I have braved the glen
And had to do with goblin merchant men ."
White and golden Lizzie stood,
Like a lily in a flood Laura started from her chair,
Like a rock of blue-veined stone Flung her arms up in the air,
Lashed by tides obstreperously, Clutched her hair.
Like a beacon left alone “ Lizzie, Lizzie, have you tasted
In a hoary roaring sea, For my sake the fruit forbidden ?
Sending up a golden fire, Must your light like mine be hidden,
TODOS

Like a fruit- crowned orange-tree Your young life like mine be wasted ,
White with blossoms honey - sweet Undone in mine undoing,
oro

Sore beset by wasp and bee, And ruined in my ruin ,

Like a royal virgin town Thirsty,cankered ,goblin -ridden ? "
Topped with gilded dome and spire, She clung about her sister,
Close beleaguered by a fleet Kissed and kissed and kissed her :
Mad to tug her standard down. Tears once again
mormou

Refreshed her shrunken eyes,

One may lead a horse to water, Dropping like rain
Twenty cannot make him drink. After long sultry drouth ;
Though the goblins cuffed and caught hei , Shaking with anguish,fear,and pain ,
Coaxed and foughther, She kissed and kissed her with a
Bullied and besought her, hungry mouth.
Scratched her, pinched her black as ink,
Kicked and knocked her, Her lips began to scorch ,
Mauled and mocked her, That juice was wormwood
Lizzie uttered not a word ; to her tongue,
Would not open lip from lip She loathed the feast :
Lest they should cram a mouthful in ; Writhing as one possessed she leaped and
But laughed in heart to feel the drip sung,
Of juice that syruped all her face , Rent all her robe, and wrung
And lodged in dimples of her chin , Her hands in lamentable haste,
And streaked her neck, which quaked like And beat her breast.
curd. Her locks streamed like the torch
At last the evil people, Borne by a racer at full speed ,
Worn out by her resistance , Or like the mane ofhorses in their fight
Flung back her penny, kicked their fruit Or like an eagle when she stems the light
Along whichever read they took, Straight toward the sun ,
DITUZLU
1852
 -GOBLIN MARKET naturaanamaata TESQUERCULES

ot or stone Tree Or like a caged thing freed , Laura awoke as from a dream ,
Tithed into the Or likea flying flag when armies run . Laughed in the innocent old way,
je doved into Swift fire spread through her veins, Hugged Lizzie but not twice or thrice ;
With raga knocked at her heart , Her gleaming locks showed not one
gale tante2 Met the fire smouldering there thread of grey ,
ished in to 32 And overbore its lesser flame ; Her breath was sweet as May
She gorged on bitterness withouta name: And light danced in her eyes .
mart, aches, and
Ah ! fool, to choose such part
.Izzle went 2
Of soul-consuming care ! Days, weeks, months, years
Sense failed in the mortal strife ; Afterwards, when both were wives
tore throat
Like the watch- tower of a town With children of their own ;
Which an earthquake shatters down,

DOLOM
Like a lightning -stricken mast, Their mother -hearts beset with fears,
Their lives bound up in tender lives ;

DOLOR
rd her pents Like a wind -uprooted tree
Spun about , Laura would call the little ones
S MOSKVE
Like a foam -topped waterspout And tell them of her early prime ,
Cast down headlong in the sea , Those pleasant days long gone
She fell at last ; Of not -returning time,
itb giver Would talk about the haunted glen ,
Pleasure past and anguish past, The wicked ,quaint fruit -merchantmen ,
One Is it death or is it life ?
O SITE Their fruits like honey to the throat

DODTOON
But poison in the blood ;
Life out of death. (Men sell not such in any town ).
The night long Lizzie watched by her, Would tell them how her sister stood
Counted her pulse's flagging stir, In deadly peril to do her good ,
Felt for her breath , And win the fiery antidote :
Held water to her lips , and cooled her face Then joining hands to little hands
With tears and fanning leaves. Would bid them cling together,
But when the first birds chirped about “ For there is no friend like a
their eaves , sister
And early reapers plodded to the place In calm or stormy weather ;
Of golden sheaves, To cheer one on the tedious
And dew-wet grass way,
Bowed in the morning winds so brisk to pass, To fetch one if one goes astray,
And new buds with new day To lift one if one totters down ,
Opened of cup- like lilies on the stream , To strengthen whilst one stands.

Hund

SIR SIDNEY SMITH And swore he should stay , lock'd up till

This merry song about Sir Sidney Smith , one of our great
naval heroes, was written by Thomas J. Dibdin , a son of the
more famous Charles Dibdin, who wrote “ Tom Bowling. '
GENTLEFO LKS,, in my time I've made many
a rhyme
But the song I now trouble you with
Lays some claim to applause, and you'll
grant it because
The subject's Sir Sidney Smith , it is ;
The subject's Sir Sidney Smith .
We all know Sir Sidney, a man of such
kidney ,
He'd fight every foe he could meet ;
Give him one ship or two, and without more
ado ,
He'd engage if he met a whole fleet, he
would ;
He'd engage if he met a whole fleet.
Thus he took, every day , all that came in his
way ,
Till fortune, that changeable elf,
Order'd accidents so, that, while taking the
foe ,
Sir Sidney got taken himself, he did ;
Sir Sidney got taken himself.
His captors, right glad of the prize they now
had ,
Rejected each offer we bid,
1853
doomsday.
But he swore he'd be hang'd if he did , he
did ;
But he swore he'd be hang'd if he did .
So Sir Sid . got away , and his gaoler next day
Cried , “ Sacre, diable, morbleu !
Mon prisonnier 'scape, I 'ave got in von
scrape,
And I fear I must run away, too, I must ;
I fear I must run away , too.”
THE RAINBOW
John Keble, the writer of this tiny but beautiful poem , was
a celebrated poet and a clergyman. He lived from 1792
till 1860, and was professor of poetry at Oxford University,
where Keble College was erected as a memorial to him.
А FRAGMENT of a rainbow bright
Through the moist air I see,
All dark and damp on yonder height,
All bright and clear to me.
An hour ago the storm was here,
The gleam was far behind ,
So will our joys and grief appear ,
When earth has ceased to blind .
Grief will be joy if on its edge
Fall soft that holiest ray ,
Joy will be grief if no faint pledge
Be there of heavenly day.
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
BATTLE OF THE BALTIC
The battle of the Baltic was fought in April, 1801, and the
heroism of Nelson was the great feature of this famous sea.
fight. Sir Hyde Parker commanded the English fleet, and
Captain Edward Riou was killed in command of
squadron. The poem was written by Thomas Campbell.
F
Or Nelson andtheNorth,
Sing the glorious day's renown ,
When to battle fierce came forth
Denmark's crown ,
All armsof along the deep
Andthehermight proudly
shone ;
By each gun the lighted brand
In a bold determined hand ,
And the Prince of all the land
Led them on .
Like leviathans afloat
Lay their bulwarks on the brine ;
While the sign of battle flew
On the lofty British line :
It was ten of April morn by the chime :
As they drifted on their path
There was silence deep as death ;
And the boldest held his breath
For a time .
But the might of England Aush'd
To anticipate the scene ;
And her van the fleeter rush'u
O'er the deadly space between.
" Hearts of oak ” our captains cried ,
when each gun
From its adamantine lips
Spread a death -shade round the ships,
Like the hurricane eclipse
of the sun .
Again ! again ! again !
And the havoc did not slack ,
Till a feeble cheer the Dane
To our cheering sent us back ;
Their shots along the deep slowly boom :
Then ceased - and all is wail ,
As they strike the shatter'd sail ;
Or in conflagration pale
Light the gloom .
Out spoke the victor then
As he hail'd them o'er the wave,
“ Ye are brothers ! ye are men !
And we conquer but to save :
So peace instead of death let us bring :
But yield , proud foe, thy fleet
With the crews, at England's feet,
And make submission meet
To our King.”
Then Denmark blest our chief
LECLEOR
That he gave her wounds repose ;
And the sounds of joy and grief
From her people wildly rose,
SEEDEELTE
As death withdrew his shades from the
day :
TO
While the sun look'd smiling bright
O'er a wide and woeful sight,
Where the fires of funeral light
Died away
Now joy , old England , raise !
For the ridings of thy might,
By the festal cities' blaze,
Whilst the wine-cup shines in light ,
OF POETRY
Lot us think of them that sleep
Full many a fathom deep
By thy wild and stormy steep,
Elsinore !
a
Brave hearts ! to Britain's pride
Once so faithful and so true ,
On the deck of fame that died
With the gallant good Riou :
Soft sigh the winds of heaven o'er their
grave !
While the billow mournful rolls ,
And the mermaid's song condoles,
Singing, Glory to the souls
of the brave !
LUCY GRAY
In this well-known ballad by William Wordsworth the
awful sense of solitude and the terror of the dark days of
winter on the lonely moors are suggested with the most
dramatic effect, and yet in a way that is simple and direct.
OFT Ihad heard of LucyGray
And , when I cross'd the wild ,
I chanced to see at break of day
The solitary child .
No mate, no comrade Lucy knew ;
She dwelt on a wide moor,
The sweetest thing that ever grew
Beside a human door !
You yet may spy the fawn at play,
The hare upon the green ;
But the sweet face of Lucy Gray
Will never more be seen .
To-night will be a stormy night
You to the town must go ;
And take a lantern , Child , to light
Your mother through the snow .”
“ That , Father, will I ziadly do :
'Tis scarcely afternoon
The minster -clock has just struck two ,
And yonder is the moon !
At this the father raised his hook ,
And snapp'd a faggot band ;
He plied his work ; -and Lucy took
The lantern in her hand .
Not blither is the mountain rre :
With many a wanton stroke
Her feet disperse the powdery snow,
That rises up like smok ':.
The storm came or before its time :
She wander'd up ard down ;
And many a hill did Lucy climb :
But never react d the town.
The wretched parents all that night
Went shcating far and wide ;
But there, was neither sound nor sight
To serve them for a guide.
At daybreak on a hill they stood
That overlook'd the moor ;
And thence they saw the bridge of wood ,
A furlong from their door.
They wept - and, turning homeward,
cried :
“ In heaven we all shallmeet ! "
When in the snow the mother spied
The print of Lucy's feet.
1854
 2. W KAXXXTENTA -THE
Then downwards from the steep hill's
edge
They track'd the footmarks small ;
And through the broken hawthorn hedge,
And by the long stone wall :
And then an open field they cross'd :
The marks were still the same ;
They track'd them on , nor ever lost ;
And to the bridge they came.
They follow'd from the snowy bank
Those footmarks , one by one,
Into the middle of the plank ;
And further there were none !
Yet some maintain that to this day
She is a living child ;
That you may see sweet Lucy Gray
Upon the lonesome wild .
O’er rough and smooth she trips along,
And never looks behind :
And sings a solitary song,
That whistles in the wind .
THE MOUSE'S PETITION
A.L. Barhauld,
Mrs.celebrated who was born in 1743 and died in 1825,
was in her day as a poet and a writer of prose.
Many of her poems, such as this one , were intended for
young people. It is interesting to compare these verses with
those on “ The Worm by Thomas Gisborne on page 1856. ELEGY ON THE DEATH OF A MAD
OH, hear a pensive
For liberty prisoner's prayer,
that sighs ;
And never let thine heart be shut
Against the wretch's cries !
For here forlorn and sad I sit,
Within the wiry grate ;
And tremble at the approaching morn,
Which brings impending fate .
If e'er thy breast with freedom glowed
And spurned a tyrant's chain ,
Let not thy strong oppressive force
A free - born mouse detain !
Oh , do not stain with guiltless blood
Thy hospitable hearth !
Nor triumph that thy wiles betrayed
A prize so little worth .
The scattered gleanings of a feast
My frugal meals supply ;
But if thy unrelenting heart
That slender boon deny
The cheerful light, the vital air,
Are blessings widely given ;
Let Nature's commoners enjoy
The common gifts of heaven .
Beware, lest in the worm you crush ,
A brother's soul you find ;
And tremble lest thy lucklesy hand
Dislodge a kindred mind .
Or if this transient gleam of day
Be all the life we share ,
Let pity plead within thy breast,
That little all to spare .
So may thy hospitable board
With health and peace be crowned ;
And every charm of heartfelt ease
Beneath thy roof be found .
So when destruction works unseen ,
Which man , like mice, may share ,
May some kind angel clear thy path ,
And break the hidden snare.
CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
THE HAPPIEST AGE
The full title of this little poem by the Earl of Surrey , a great
scholar, poet, and unfortunate nobleman in the time of Henry
VIII. , is “ The Ageof Children Happiest, it they had Wit to
Understand it." It is wise and just in its philosophy , and
shows that the poet wrote out of the sadness of his own heart.
Laid in myquiet bedinstudy as I were
I saw within my troubled head a heap
of thoughts appear,
And every thought did show so lively in
mine eyes,
That now I sigh'd , and then I smiled, as
cause of thoughts did rise.
I saw the little boy , in thought how oft that he
Did wish of God , to ' scape the rod , a tall
young man to be ,
The young man eke that feels his bones with
pain opprest ,
How he would be a rich old man , to live and
lie at rest !
The rich old man that sees his end draw on
so sore ,
How would he be a boy again to live so much
the more !
Whereat full oft I smiled , to see how all those
three ,
to man
From boy and , from man to boy, would
chop change degree.
DOG
This amusing poem , by Oliver Goldsmith, is one of several
that occur in the course of his famous story " Ihe Vicar of
Wakefield ," and it serves to remind us that it is not always
what we think is most likely to happen that coines to pass.
Goodpeople untoofmy
Give ear all, every
songsort,
:
And if you find it wondrous short,
It cannot hold you long.
In Islington there was a Man ,
Of whom the world might say,
That still a godly race he ran
Whene'er he went to pray.
A kind and gentle heart he had ,
To comfort friends and foes ;
The naked every day he clad, -
When he put on his clothes.
And in that town a Dog was found,
As many dogs there be,
Both mongrel, puppy, whelp, and hound ,
And curs of low degree.
This Dog and Man at first were friends ;
But when a pique began,
The Dog , to gain some private ends,
Went mad, and bit the Man .
Around from all the neighbouring streets
The wondering neighbours ran ,
And swore the Dog had lost his wits,
To bite so good a Man !
The wound it seem'd both sore and sad
To every Christian eye :
And while they swore the Dog was mad ,
They swore the Man would die.
But soon a wonder came to light,
That show'd the rogues they lied ::
The Man recover'd of the bite,
The Dog it was that died |
1855
 «THE CHILD'S BOOK OF POETRY
NURSE'S SONG “ A chain of gold ye sall not lack ,
William Blake proves in this little song how closely he must Nor braid to bind yourmana
hairged
have observed ihe things he sings about so clearly . Notice Nor mettl ed houn d, nor , hawk,
the sixth line of the first verse , and look back at what we
said in the note to Wordsworth's “ Pet Lamb " on page 1703 . Nor palfrey fresh and fair ;
'HEN the voices of children are heard on And you the foremost o' them a'
WHI the green , Sall ride our forest -queen
And laughing is heard on the hill , But aye she loot the tears down fa'
My heart is at rest within my breast, For Jock of Hazeldean .
And everything else is still.
Then come home, my children , the sun is The kirk was deck'd at morning -tide,
gone down , The tapers glimmer'd fair ;
And the dews of night arise : The priest and bridegroom wait the bride,
Come, come , leave off play, and let us away And dame and knight are there :
Till the morning appears in the skies. They sought her baith by bower and ha' ;
The ladie was not seen !
' No, no , let us play , for it is yet day, She's o'er the Border, and awa'
And we cannot go to sleep ; Wi' Jock of Hazeldean.
Besides , in the sky the little birds fly, THE ARMING OF PIGWIGGEN
And the hills are all covered with sheep ." Michael Drayton was one of the many poets who lived
Well , well , go and play till the light fades in the time of Queen Elizabeth . He wrote beautiful
away , escriptions of English scenery and the life of country
And then go home to bed . places. One of his most remarkable works was a descrip
tion of “ The Court of Fairy," full of fancy and imagination .
The little ones leap'd , and shouted . and Pigwiggen was a fairy who was in love with Queen
laugh'd ; Mab, and in the following verses from Drayton's long
And all the hills echoéd . poem the arming of Pig wiggen is minutely described

THE WORM little cockle -shell

field,
He quickly arms him forhistheshield
In the simplicity of the following little piece there is the very WhichÀhe could very bravely wield ,
essence of Christian teaching, the poet who wrote it being
famous as a philosopher and preacher. His name was Yet could it not be piercid ;
Thomas Gisborne, and he was born in 1758 and died in 1846 His spear a bent both stiff and strong ,
And well near of two inches long ;
Turn,turnthyhasty footaside,
Nor crush that helpless worm ! The pile was of a horse - fly's tongue ,
The frame thy wayward looks deride Whose sharpness naught reversed .
Required a God to form . And put him on a coat of mail ,
Which was of a fish's scale .
The common lord of all that move, That when his foe should him assail,
From whom thy being flow'd , No point should be prevailing .
A portion His boundless love His rapier was a hornet's sting,
On that poor worm bestow'd . It was a very dangerous thing :
For if he chanced to hurt the king,
The sun , the moon , the stars , He made It would be long in healing
For all His creatures free ;
And spread o'er earth the grassy blade, His helmet was a beetle's head ,
Most horrible and full of dread ,
For worms as well as thee . That able was to strike one dead ,
Let them enjoy their little day, Yet it did well become him ;
Their humble bliss receive ; And for a plume a horse's hair,
O ! do nct lightly take away Which , being tossed up by the air,
The life thou canst not give ! Had force to strike his foe with fear,
And turn his weapon from him .
JOCK OF HAZELDEAN Himself he on an earwig set,
This ballad by Sir Walter Scott has long been one of the most Yet scarce he on his back could get,
popular in Scotland , and tells of a country lass who preferred
to run away with a poor man whom she loved , and to inarry So oft and high he did curvet
him rather than the rich bridegroom chosen for her. It con . Ere he himself could settle :
tains many Scotch words, but they are easy to understand , He made him turn , and stop, and bound ,
Why weep ye by the tide, ladie ? To gallop and to trot the round ,
Why weep ye by the tide ? He scarce could stand on any ground ,
I'll wed ye to my youngest son , He was so full of mettle.
And ye sall be his bride : TRUE GROWTH
And ye sall be his bride , ladie, There is much wisdom compressed into these ten short lines
Sae comely to be seen -
of verse by the great Elizabethan poet Ben Jonson. The
But aye she loot the tears down fa' last line but one might also be applied to the little poem itself.
For Jock of Hazeldean .
It isInnot growing
bulk like a tree
, doth make Man better be ;
“ Now let this wilfu ' grief be done, Or standing long an oak , three hundred year,
And dry that cheek so pale ; To fall a log at last , dry , bald, and sere :
Young Frank is chief of Errington , A lily of a day
And lord of Langley-dale ; Is fairer far in May,
His step is first in peaceful ha ' , Although it fall and die that night
His sword in battle keen " It was the plant and flower of Light !
But aye she loot the tears down fa' In small proportions we just beauties see ;
For Jock of Hazeldean . And in short measures life may perfect be
THE NEXT VERSES AND NURSERY RHYMES BEGIN ON PAGE 2003

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
1856 -
 The Old Woman Tossed in a Basket

There was an old

woman tossed
up in a basket ,
Seventeen times
as high as the
moon ;

Where she was going

I couldn't but
ask it ,
For in her hand
she carried a
broom .

+ “ Old woman , old

woman , old
woman ,” quoth
E

I.
* Where are you

going to up so
high ? ”
“ To brush the cob
webs off the
sky ! ”
“ May I go with
thee ? ”
“ Ay, by- and-by.”

1857
ΙΟ
RAINBO
THE
WONDER
OF
COLOUR
LIGHT
:T
R
A HE
WITH
DOES
WHAT
AINDRO

through
raindrops
rhey
.AisabA
sunlight
up
make
that
colours
various
,tof
space
come
rays
sun's
from
light
the
passing
by
bent
sometimes
areainbow
and
s
separated
colours
various
is
raindrop
the
into
going
on
light
white
was
what
that
,sas
,aond
air
in
are
rays
of
out
comes
really
is
rainbow
oThe
way
to
travels
light
which
in
usually
sun
from
we
of
half
one
only
appearance
,gsee
abitthe
ccoming wing
nd
iving
ow
.ircle
out
 The Child's Book of
WONDER
THE RAINBOW ?
WHAT MAKES THE
rainbbyowdropsis
Themade
CONTINUED FROM 1780
of rain ; it is due to
the reflection of sunlight
from drops of water hang
ing in the sky. As the sunlight
passes through the raindrop, and
is reflected from the inside of the
back of the raindrop, it is broken
up into its various parts, which cor-
respond to the various colours of the
rainbow .
White light , we know, is a mix-
ture of many colours. The light
waves corresponding to these colours
differ in the extent to which they
are bent by passing through such
a thing as a raindrop , and so, when
they come out of it , they are sorted
out, so to speak ; and what waswhite
light on going in , comes out as a band
of several colours. Thus, what we see
in the rainbow is really a natural
spectrum of sunlight—the light
spread out in a band of the various
colours that make it up.
WHERE DOES THE RAINBOW END ?
As we trace the rainbow down on
each side it seems to touch the earth,
and there are stories of children who
have set out to find the end of the
rainbow . But the rainbow ends
nowhere, for it is a mere appearance
in the sky, due to tiny drops of
water, and it “ ends," if we are to
use that word, simply where the drops
of water end that are so placed
as to reflect the sunlight in this way
U23 1859
IR
to our eyes. Really
no two people see ex
actly the same rain
bow. They could do so ,
unless their eyes were in
the same place. And as we move,
the bow we see moves with us.
WHY IS THE AIR FRESHER AFTER
IT HAS BEEN RAINING ?
There are several answers to this
question . For one thing, the rain
washes the air, as water will wash
anything else. If the air bias con
tained a number of smoke particles,
as it does in large cities, the rain
has reduced their numbers by carry
ing them down with it as it fell
through the air. Thus the rain helps
to rid the air of the sulphurous and
other gases which are given off by
these smoke particles. Then again,
it now seems that the falling of rain
often , or always, depends in part on
electrical charges in the air, and these
charges may help to produce small
quantities of the gas called ozone, a
sort of variety ofoxygen, which has
a fresh smell of its own . Then , rain
cleans the roads, and washes away all
sorts of things which give off smells.
We do not realise the extent to which
rain is a cleanser in cities ; and we
must remember that our noses are
usually only a few feet above the
surface of the street , so that they are
fully exposed to whatever arises from
them. A few hundred feet up, the
air would smell very differently.
 THE CHILD'S
WHY DO THE FLOWERS SMELL SWEETER
AFTER RAIN ?
Where there is any vegetation rain has
a great influence in making the air
smell fresher, for water has a special
power upon the activity of many kinds
of vegetable life that produce pleasant
scents . We say that the rain brings
out the fragrance of the flowers, and
that is true . All life requires water ,
and all the processes of living creatures
are helped by a good supply of water.
When rain falls on flowers, and on many
kinds of leaves , it sets going the chemical
changes which result in the production of
many pleasant odours which are added
to the air, and so help to make it smell
“ fresh .” We often think that rain is a
nuisance, for it interferes with many of
our pleasures, and we tell it to " go to
Spain ” and “ never come back again ” ;
but if it took our advice we should soon
have to go to Spain after it .
COULD WE LIVE WITHOUT RAIN ?
I sometimes think, said the Wise
Man, that it would be nice if all the
rain could fall at night, for it is just as
useful then , and interferes with few
people ; but, whether on holidays, or
at night when we are all in bed and
asleep, rain we certainly must have. vents the climate from getting so hot
The good of it is that it soaks into the
soil and is sucked up by the roots of
plants, which must have it if they are
to live . If there were no rain there
would be life only in the sea . In parts
of the world where there is no rain there
is no life . In this fortunate country we
have no idea, just because we are so
well off, how rain is loved and treasured
and prayed for in other countries where
there is not enough of it , or where it
falls only at certain seasons of the year.
66
We do not know when we are well
off ” in this country ; and especially
the people who live in towns, upon the
food which is made in the country by
the rain that falls there, do not know
how good rain is, and how impossible
our lives would be without it . We must
think of rain , then , as something that
cleans and washes the air, nourishes the
vegetable life upon which our own liſe
depends, and ensures a supply of fresh
water all the year round in every part
of the world where sufficient rain falls .
IS OUR CLIMATE A GOOD ONE ?
The climate of Great Britain is cer-
tainly one of the best in the whole world ,
though we are always complaining of
UUTUUDITZER
1860
BOOK OF WONDER XXXXanaz
it . For one thing, we have a splendid
supply of air -cleansing and life - giving
rain ;we can scarcely guess what a
famine of water means, or even that
there could be such a thing. And
the rain does not come all at one time
of year - which, in some parts of the
world , they call the rainy season ”
interfering with everything when it
comes, and then requiring to be stored
up very laboriously until the next rainy
season ; but it comes in fair quantities
all the year round.
IS OUR WEATHER DUE TO THE FACT
THAT WE LIVE ON AN ISLAND ?
The fine supply of rain we have in
our country is due mainly to the fact that
we live on an island , entirely surrounded
by the sea , from which the sun can
daily draw a supply of moisture to dis
tribute over all the land, perhaps at
once, perhaps a little later . The water
surrounding us not only supplies us,
through the sun's power, with the rain
we need , but its power of storing heat
keeps our climate very equable, as it is
called - or equal, as the word simply
means .
In the summer the sea takes much
heat from land and air, and so pre
that, for several hours of every day,
we should have to stop working and
stay indoors in discomfort ; and in the
winter the sea gives to air and land the
heat of the past summer, and so pre I
vents the climate from getting very
cold . There are two great kinds of
climates in the world , island or insular
climates, and continental climates. The
first are far the best , for the reasons
we have seen , and none is better than
ours . Continental climates differ just
because of the absence of the encircling
sea and what it does for the land and
air in winter and in summer .
WHY IS THE CENTRE OF A GAS-FLAME
BLUE AND THE OUTSIDE YELLOW ?
The colour of a burning or a hot
thing depends largely on the hotness
or temperature of it . A white -hot
poker is hotter than a red -hot one ;
and a white -hot star like Sirius is hotter
than a red -hot one like Aldebaran or
the sun . The outside of a flame is far
hotter than the inside, and gives out a
brighter light in consequence - like a
hot star or a hot poker. Also the metal
sodium , when hot, gives a yellow colour,
and sodium is scattered everywhere.
 maamaamini
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER mXICXCOOX
But the sodium in the gas is not hot
enough to glow except in the outer part
of the flame. If you have a carefully
arranged flame, you may hold a match
in the centre of it without the match
taking fire.
Now you will ask me why the inside
of the flame is colder than the outside,
and the answer is easy. The outside of
the flame is the part next the air-next
the oxygen — which causes the burning.
The inside of the flame has to be content
with the very small amount of oxygen
which gets to it ,, still unused, through
the outer part of the flame . Where the
burning is fastest and most complete,
there the heat is greatest , and there-
fore the outside of the flame is hottest.
WHAT IS IT THAT HAPPENS WHEN WE
GET TIRED ?
The special word for feeling tired is
fatigue, and this state of the body, as it
often is , and of the mind, as it often
is too, has been very carefully studied
during the last few years, especially
in Italy . We have learned a great
many very interesting and useful things
about it
We know that the power and energy
of the body come from our food ; and
so the first idea of the cause of tiredness
or fatigue was that it was due to the
need for more food. The tired person ,
people thought, had used up his food
and needed more ; just as a railway
engine might be said to get tired ” if
the stoker forgot to supply it with
plenty of coal. If this were true, the
6
more utterly exhausted and “ dead
beat ” a man was , the bigger the meal
that he should take in order to make
him feel fresh again .
But we have learned that this old idea
was utterly wrong. The body always
contains so large a supply of food
material or fuel that a man gets tired,
for some other reason, long before he
has nearly used it up . Also we have
learned that, in the state of fatigue, it
is not possible to digestone's food
properly, and therefore that to give
a large meal to an exhausted person
is very bad indeed for him . He is
not fit to use it , and it only upsets
him . We should eat only very slightly
and carefully, if at all, when we are
very tired . The best thing for tired-
ness is rest , and the best kind of
rest is sleep.
1861
WHY DO WE GET TIRED ?
The answer is that tiredness or fatigue
is due wholly to the poisoning of the brain
and the nerves by all sorts of things
which are produced in our bodies as the
result of work ; or perhaps sometimes,
as most children know , as the result of
too much exposure to sun and heat.
Every day's work , if it is at all hard ,
produces rather more of these poisonous
things than we can quite get rid of as
we go on working ; and these things
really help us, at night, to go to sleep .
During good sleep they are all got rid
of, and we wake refreshed .
It is easy to show that this new dis
covery about tiredness is true. We can
take a small quantity of blood from a
tired animal, such as a dog, without
hurting it , and can give this to another
dog that is not tired. The second dog
at once shows all the signs of aa dog that
has run a long way and is quite tired
out. The poisons produced in the body
of the first dog and carried in its blood
have got into the blood of the second
dog, and it , too , feels tired .
WHAT IS THE BEST CURE FOR TIREDNESS ?
The answer to the last question
guides us in answering this one . We
must not take a large meal when we
are tired , because we are not then fit to
deal with food. We may take water,
or lemonade, or oranges, because water,
LCONECTOR
in passing through the body, always
carries all sorts of poisons away with
it and helps us to get rid of them .
But, above all , we must rest, and there
is no kind of rest which can be compared
with sleep. In general, the people who
sleep best are those who work hard .
The man who works all day in the fields
usually has the best sleep in the world,
far better than some unfortunate people
who do very little or nothing, and who
may even take medicine to help them
to sleep. Nature, the best of all doctors,
has her own medicine to procure good
sleep for every healthy person who
works ; and the most beautiful thing
about tiredness, when it is the right ,
nice " tiredness that everyone should
feel when he goes to bed , is that it pro
duces in our blood just the very thing
that gives us perfect and natural sleep.
Perhaps we shall soon be able to find this
thing, and learn how to make it . Then
we shall be able to give just the right
quantities of it to make ill people well.
ROZEZNYCH LUOTYTUODOU
LILILOODI
 02x
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER
WHAT MAKES THE SHADOWS THAT 60 them very much afraid . This is the
UP AND DOWN HILLS ?
shadow of the earth itself, and it is
The shadows that we see crossing thrown upon the moon . It sometimes
the face of the hills are the shadows of happens that the earth just gets in
clouds . They can be seen passing over the way of the light from the sun which
the sea, too , or running across the would fall upon the moon if the earth
field of play when you watch a game of were not there . And so we get what
cricket. They are best seen when there we call an eclipse of the moon . As we
are small clouds quickly moving, and watch the moon, we can see a round
with well-marked edges, passing across shadow beginning to creep across it .
the sun , as it seems to us, on a bright Sometimes it passes over only part of
day. Sometimes they move more the moon ; sometimes it covers the whole
quickly than at other times . This moon for a little while , and we call that
THE SHADOW OF THE MOON BLOTTING OUT THE FACE OF THE SUN

This is one of the most impressive sights that men have ever seen - the moon passing across the face
of the sun . It happens sometimes that the moon gets directly in the way of the sunlight which would
fall upon the earth if the moon were not there, and we call this an eclipse, or covering up, of the sun .
depends partly on the wind , which a total eclipse of the moon . When we
varies very much in speed , and on the watch this shadow - one does not even
height of the clouds. Often , if you need a glass to see it with — it is easy
watch these shadows, you can see the to see that the shadow is curved . It
whole shape of a cloud that makes one, is the shadow of aa round thing, and this
and , of course , often such a shadow is one of the proofs that the earth is
passes where we are standing. really round . In olden days men used
WHAT IS THE BIGGEST SHADOW THAT WE to be very much afraid of eclipses of
CAN SEE ? the moon and of the sun . They used 1

There is one great shadow , thousands to think that it was a warning of

and thousand of times bigger than any something awful that was to happen.
other, which men have noticed at timesBut now we know that an eclipse of the
in all ages , and which has often made moon is nothing more than just the
1
UXTEXTO UZUMUOTI Mormon TOUUNITY NOU OUT LIVERZITTEN OLIE
1862
 LUE LEADIO ELLELUIDORADIO -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER AUCTANEAKEX

throwing of a great shadow upon the more neighbourly, especially through

moon's face, and that is the shadow out the whole circle of the Milky Way.

UNE
OUR
of the earth , by far the greatest shadow We cannot tell at all whether the whole
that anyone can ever see . Milky Way is moving through space,
WHAT MAKES AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN ? and we do not know whether it is
The kind of eclipse that used to moving round on itself ; but we can
frighten people most is an eclipse of study and photograph it now , and
the sun . It does not often happen long years afterwards our successors
that the sun is totally eclipsed , but may compare our photographs with
when this does happen on a bright what they then see , and may be able to
day, the effect is very wonderful. It learn about these things.
suddenly becomes dark , until it is like IS IT POSSIBLE THAT THE MILKY WAY
night ; it turns cold ; the dew falls ; WILL TURN INTO A WORLD ?
the birds go to roost ; the flowers go Look closely at the Milky Way on a
to sleep ; all this, perhaps, in the middle bright night, and you will see that it
of the day, and with not a cloud in is made of many stars , only they
the sky. Then , just as suddenly the seem so closely packed together that
daylight all comes back again . An their light is all blended, looking like
eclipse of the sun is not due to a shadow , a thin cloud or a milky streak spread
but happens when the moon gets across the sky . If you use an opera
between the earth and the sun , and we glass or a telescope, you see the separate
see the moon pass across the sun . stars more clearly, and if you take a
This happens quite often , but it is photograph through a telescope — which
not often that the moon passes across is quite an easy thing to do - you
in such a way that, for a little while, it find that the stars of the Milky Way
exactly fits over the sun , and cuts off are to be counted not in thousands,
all his light. Those are the startling or even in hundreds of thousands,
times. We know beforehand when they but actually by the million .
are to happen , and to what parts of From any one part of the earth we can
the world we must go to see them , and only see about half of the Milky Way ,
exactly how long the period of real dark- but this great streak of stars really
ness will last. Great preparations are formsa mighty circle, the different parts
made, and men go with telescopes and of which can be seen from different parts
cameras and all sorts of other instru- of the earth . The sun and the earth
ments, perhaps to Greenland , perhaps and other planets with it lie somewhere
to some tiny island in the Pacific Ocean, not very far from the centre of this
just for the sake of the forty seconds, great circle.
circle . Now, every one of these
or perhaps it may be as much as four millions of stars is a suil like ours ,
minutes, during which the moon will only some are smaller than our sun , and
exactly fit over the face of the sun . many are far bigger . Any or all of these
For we can see things and learn things suns, for all we know , may have one or
about the sun during those few seconds many planets circling round it , just
as we never can at any other time. as the earth moves round the sun . We
WHAT IS THE MILKY WAY ? cannot see these planets, for they
Students of the stars think that the must be too small, and without any
Milky Way is the boundary of our light of their own , just as the earth is .
world of stars. It is a complete closed So that if we were to allow only two or
circle where the sky is crammed with three planets to every star or sun that
stars ; yet in places there are gaps where makes up the Milky Way, that would
we can see through beyond into nothing. mean hundreds of millions of world
We can begin to measure the diameter large and small, old and young.
of this great circle. Our own sun and WHAT ARE THE STREAKS OF LIGHT THAT
his system seem to be somewhere SOMETIMES SHOOT ACROSS THE SKY ?
near the centre of it , and a very re- These are called shooting stars . Of
markable thing about the sun , and course , they are not stars, any more
therefore about us, seems to be that he than a speck of dust or a coal- scuttle
is very much alone in the world of is a star . They are quite small things,
stars. He has no near star neighbour, often just like stones, though some of
while most of the other stars are much them are made of iron . They look
** ImreTOUUNIT ORXUTRO DOTT
1863
 nemarken
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDER mraammmmmmmmmmmmmmaaaa
bright merely because, as they rush light that falls upon it , it is blue light
through the air, they get very hot . that the sea reflects.
The smaller ones , no doubt, get so hot Yet sometimes the sea is green ,
that as they pass through the air they though the sky is never green. Parts
burn all away, just as a candle does, of the sea are shallow , especially, near
and so they never reach the earth at the shore, and may be so shallow that
all. But bigger ones actually reach some of the light from the sky may
the earth , sometimes making big holes pierce the water, reach the bottom , and
where they fall . You may have seen be reflected from it to our eyes. So, of
such things in museums, and you can course , the light will be changed, partly
look upon few things more interesting according to the colour of the bottom of
if you think of their history, for in the the sea, and partly because of the greenish
beginning these things did not belong tinge of sea -water itself. Besides all
to the earth at all ; only they were rush- this, we have to remember that the same
ing through space, many parts of which part of the sea on a coast we know well
contain large numbers of things like may be of a different colour on different
pebbles, and they got caught by the air days, even though the water is the same
of the earth and the earth's gravitation. and the colour of the bottom is the
Many of these meteorites, as they are same , because the sun is in a different
called , are believed to have once been part of the sky, and so the light strikes
part of the bright things called comets. the bottom differently, or because the
Sometimes an accident seems to happen sky is clouded , and so the light which
to a comet and breaks it up , and in the reaches the sea from the sky is different .
path where this comet used to travel Thus, there are many different things
round the sun there is , instead , a great which will affect the colour of the sea,
shoal of meteorites. When the earth , and that is why its colour changes so
in her path , happens to cross the path much and is so beautiful to see.
of the meteorites, many of them will HOW CAN THEY CATCH BURGLARS BY THEIR
FINGER - MARKS ?
be caught, especially if it be just at the You have heard , perhaps, that now
istime
passing. So thickest
when the the of
we know part times shoal adays burglars wear glovesinorder to
the ofthe
avoid leaving their finger-marks on a
year and the special years when we may window -pane or anywhere else. The
expect to see a large number of streaks fact is that all men and women differ
of light in the sky at night , as seen in from each other in little things, and
the picture on page 235. The best
showers of shooting stars are usually there is nothing in which they differ
seen in November, when the earth little ridges onthan
more certainly the pattern of the
their fingers . Two
crosses the path of a shoal of meteorites patterns exactly the same from two
called the Leonids. different people have never yet been
WHY DOES THE SEA LOOK SOMETIMES
BLUE AND SOMETIMES GREEN ? found . These patterns cannot change ,
You might have added, said the Wise for they are formed by the innumerable
Man , why does it look sometimes black mouths of the tiny canals which convey
and sometimes grey ? On a black the sweat from the deep -seated sweat
night, when there is no light for the sea to glands to the surface. They can be
reflect , the sea looks black . When the destroyed , of course, but no different
sky is grey, the sea reflects the light pattern can be put in their place.
that falls upon it, and looks grey. The Thus, of all the ways of knowing who
colour we usually think of as the colour is who, this is the most certain , as well
of the sea is blue, because the sky is as much the simplest and cheapest . It
blue, or ought to be ; and if it be blue is now being more and more used . If

These are the marks of men's fingers on things they have touched. Finger -prints like these help the police
to catch burglars. No two finger-prints from different people have ever yet been found to be alike.
DULTO

1864
 xammm
ILITUM
Gram
Bm
YTD
KIZLARCOmance amonman.ACCEZENTAXEVGILERIQUILLALO CENTAURICE

THE SHADOW OF THE WORLD

HOW THE MOON THROWS ITS SHADOW ON THE EARTH , SHUTTING OFF THE LIGHT OF THE SUN

3)

HOW THE MOON COMÉS BETWEEN EARTH AND SUN , CAUSING THE SHADOW SHOWN ABOVE
Cenang
MERCE
BLUETV

ke
HOW THE EARTH THROWS ITS SHADOW ACROSS THE MOON
We have all seen our shadows on the ground, but tirere is one great shadow that not all of us have seen. That
is the shadow of the whole world. On its way through space the moon passes sometimes between the sun and
the earth, shutting off the sunlight from the earth, as shown in the top picture. The drawing in the middle shows
us that the moon does not hide the sunlight from the whole of the earth, but only from a part of it. But in the
part from which the sun is hid the moon's shadow makes day so dark that we can see the stars. We call this
an eclipse of the sun . Sometimes, too, the earth passes between the moon and the sun so as to cut off all
sunlight from the moon, as shown in the bottom picture, and the shadow thrown by the earth upon the moon is
about: 240,000 miles long - long enough to reach thirty times across the earth. We call this an eclipse of the moon.
monstramm 1001 TID TITOODETOTTIITTIMET
1865
 மாாகளமாக THE CHILD'S BOOK OF WONDERmaaremman
a man's thumb -mark is the same as the WHY DOES THE SMOKE OF A TRAIN GO
THE OTHER WAY ?
TEXT

mark on a piece of paper where a theft

was committed, the evidence against W’nen the smoke leaves the funnel of
him is very strong. A bad man who has the engine it is really moving forward ,
become known to the police may change like the engine itself, and at exactly
his clothes and the appearance of his the same rate . If we could imagine
face, he may look like a different person , that the train was moving onwards in
and have not the slightest resemblance nothing, then , since we know that
to the photograph taken of him , but moving things always move on in a
his thumb -mark will tell him at once. straight line at the same speed for ever,
WHY DO SOME FACES IN PICTURES SEEM unless something outside affects them ,
TO FOLLOW US ? the smoke would move forward with
It is clever to have noticed this, and the train , and would actually pass on in
perhaps you have also noticed that in front of it so soon as the driver slowed
other pictures there are faces which are the train . But the smoke, we know, is
not looking at us ; really poured
but no matter into the ocean of
where you walk , air through
even though it which the train
be in the direc is pushing its
tion in which way. The air
they seem to be tends to stop the
looking, you will train, as it tends
never find the to stop every
face looking at thing that moves
you. Indeed, through it , and
faces in pictures every engineer
are either looking knows how im
at us, wherever portant this air
we look at them pressure is ; but
from , or else they though it retards
are never looking the train a good
at us , wherever deal , it retards
we look at them the light , hot
from . The same smoke that is
is true of photo poured into it
graphs. far more . The
The rule is very question re
simple. If the minds us that
person who was the smoke seems
being painted or to go in the oppo
photographed These eyes seem to follow you everywhere; they look at you in site direction to
was looking at anydirection . That is because they werefixed on thepainter the train ; but
the painter or at when the portrait waspainted, as explained on this page. really it simply
the camera, then, wherever you stand, moves forward so slowly and for such a
he will seem to be looking at you. little distance that, compared with the
If he was looking on one side, then , train , it seems to go the other way .
wherever you stand, he will seem to But if a strong wind is blowing in the
be looking on that side of you . This the same direction as the train and
works very funnily if you have a perhaps this is oftenest seen in the case
group of people who were all looking of the smoke from a ship's funnel — then
at the camera when they were photo- the smoke is blown forward by the
.graphed . If you look at the photo wind far in front of the train or ship.
graph from one side, they all seem In this case and the last the same
to turn to follow you, and then to principle works, though the results
turn back if you look at it from the are so different . The principle is that
other side. But if they were not the air affects the smoke more than
looking at the camera , you can never the train or ship . In one case it holds
get them to look at you . both back, but it hoids the smoke
DOUTU
1866
 amanmara-THE CHILD'S
back most ; in the other case it blows
both forward , but the smoke most .
ARE ALL ANIMALS BORN BLIND ?
It is not quite true that all animals
are born blind, but it is quite true that
most of the mammals, when they are
newly born , do not at once begin to use
their eyes to see . The eyes themselves
are there, however, quite fully developed
and all ready to be used for seeing as
soon as they have become accustomed
to the strong light . The young of
wild animals are born in a nest or a
lair selected by the mother, and this is
generally placed in some dark and
secluded place to which very little
light gains access. There would be no
object in the young opening their eyes
widely to the full glare of the sun's
rays before they are able to move
about, because young mammals are
very helpless at birth , and have to lie
still in their nests until they have
grown strong enough to be able to
look after themselves. By that time
they have got used to a certain amount
of light. They can open and shut
their eyes, and when they begin to
move and gradually come into light,
the eyes also gradually become used
to that light. So that really they are
perfectly able to see at the time that
they require their sight either to obtain
their food or to guide their footsteps.
WHAT DOES THE HEN MAKE HER EGGS OF ?
All birds lay eggs, but what we
commonly call a hen's egg, with its
shell, consists of a good deal more than
the real egg, which is the growing part
of a chicken . In fact, most of the hen's
YYYYYYTTE
TITLE
egg is made of substance secreted by a
DOXITXURY
special organ in the body for the pur-
pose of nourishing the growing chicken
within. This nourishing material is what
we call the yolk . It is made, of course,
from the food upon which the hen feeds,
which becomes changed by digestion,
and is carried through the hen's body
by the blood. Then, in a special part of false gill, which is no doubt the remains
the body, the proper elements are taken of a real gill , but is now used for trans
from the blood and made into the yolk , mitting sounds to the internal ear.
upon which the growing chick feeds.
The whole thing is then covered with a
shell, which is also secreted from the
things upon which the hen feeds.
WHY DOES A BAD EGG FLOAT, SEEING
THAT A GOOD EGG SINKS ?
A fresh hen's egg consists of a mass
of yolk , together with what we call
TYY TOILE UUTUUUUU
1867
BOOK OF WONDERI GRELCATEL
the white of the egg, and this, being
heavier than water, will cause the egg
to sink when it is placed in water. But
in an egg which has become addled or
rotten , the yolk and white have split
up into other things, and produce gases
which cause the egg to be much lighter
than it was before. In fact , such an
egg does not weigh as much as an equal
bulk of water does, so that iſ placed in
water it will float and not sink.
WHY DOES AN OWL COME OUT ONLY AT
NIGHT ?
Quite a number of animals, and some
other birds besides owls , are nocturnal
in their habits - that is to say, they are
adapted for living their lives generally
during the hours of night. If we want
to understand why an animal comes
out at night, or why it comes out in
the daytime, we must, as a rule , ask
ourselves : What is it that makes an
animal active at one time of the day
rather than at another ? The answer
to this question is generally to be found
in the search for food . So it is in the
case of the owls. Owls feed chiefly
upon mice and other small creatures
that are active during the hours of the
night, and so the owl, with its peculiar
noiseless flight, due to the fact that its
plumage is so soft , comes out at night
in search of food . It is because of
this habit that the pupils of the owl's
eye are adapted for seeing at night,
being made to open very widely to
catch every ray of light that there may
be , and so see where other animals
would be unable to see .
CAN A FISH HEAR ?
Although fishes are like some other
animals in having no visible signs of
ears, yet they have cars which conduct
sound to the brain . Their organ of
hearing consists simply of an internal
ear placed inside a gristly capsule. In
some fishes — as, for instance, the dog .
fish- there is a fold known as the
In the wall of the capsule which con
tains the internal ear there is a thin
spot, and it is through this thin part,
corresponding with what we call the
drum of our own ear, that the sound is
conducted. Thus, we see that in the
case of some of the fishes there has
been a change of function of an organ
TUTORIUTUUDIO
 OG LCCKLI acom THE CHILD'S BOOK
which was in the first place a gill ,
but has now become part of the hear-
ing apparatus. In other words, it is a
structure at one time used for breathing;
but now used for hearing.
HOW IS IT THAT FISHES DO NOT DROWN ?
All animals and plants must get air
in some way or other in order to live ;
or, to be more strictly accurate, they
must have a supply of oxygen, which is
one of the gases in the air. Should this
supply of oxygen fail , death must come,
no matter whether it be from drowning There is, for instance , the movement of
or from any other cause . When a man
is drowned, what really happens is that,
on account of his being so long under
the water, his supply of life -giving
oxygen has run short, and as he can only
get it when he is in the air, he dies.
But this is not because there is no
oxygen to be had in the water, for,
as a matter of fact, there is quite
a large amount of this life-giving gas is lighter than cold air, and will rise , while
dissolved in water, only human beings
and animals breathing by lungs cannot
make use of it. Their organs are only
adapted for breathing air. The fishes,
on the other hand, breathe by gills,
not lungs, and the wonderful way in
which gills are made enables them to
extract the oxygen from the water.
Being able to do this, they can live
under water perfectly well. But if
anything should happen to prevent the
fish from getting oxygen from the
water, or if anything should happen
to the water to deprive it of its oxygen ,
then the fish would be drowned , as
would any other animal.
WHAT PART OF OURSELVES DO WE LOSE
WHEN WE LOSE OUR BALANCE ?
You have probably imagined that we
stand entirely with the help of our
feet, but that is quite wrong. We are
supposed to be able to balance our-
selves, when standing, largely by means
of some very complicated structures
in connection with the car . These
are three little canals which lie
in different directions, and are filled
with fluid . These canals communicate
by nerves with various parts of the
brain . It has been suggested that if
a person suddenly turns round, or spins
round, the fluid in these canals partakes
of the movement, and so gives us the
sensation of turning round even when
we stop. If this be true it would ex-
plain why we feel giddy and lose our
1868
OF WONDER mamarun
balance even though we are no longer
turning. But there are other causes that
make us feel giddy and lose our balance,
some of which men have not yet been
able to properly understand, and the
details of which are much too difficult
for us to enter upon here .
WHAT CHANGES THE WAY OF THE WIND ?
Like almost everything else , the air
is always moving, more or less, and the
changes in the direction of its move
ments are due to many different things.
the earth on itself, and also its changing
position in regard to the sun as it goes
round the sun . These movements mean
that different parts of the earth are
exposed to the sun at different times ;
and that means, of course, that different
parts of the air are exposed to the sun
at different times. When the sun shines
on the air it makes it warm , and warm air
cold air will flow in to take its place .
But there is a great deal more in it
than this. Besides the fact that the
surface of the earth is not smooth ,
but has mountains and hills that turn
the wind as the earth turns, and tracts
of water which cool hot air as it passes
over them , there are all sorts of electrical
changes always going on in the air,
and these probably affect its weight
-perhaps even the proportions of the
various gases in it -even as much as the
heat of the sun affects it . You can
scarcely ask more difficult questions
than these about wind, rain , and weather.
WHY DO THE TELEGRAPH LINES HUMP
Anything that is stretched is apt to
be thrown into vibration, or made to
tremble , by the force of the air blowing
against it . If it vibrates so fast as to
produce the air-waves that our ears can
hear, then that is what we call sound .
This is what happens to the telegraph
wires when they hum ; and if we put
our hand on the telegraph pole we shall
feel that the wires vibrate strongly
enough to set the whole pole trembling,
too . If we think of the way in which
our own voices are produced we shall
see that the telegraph lines hum in
exactly the same way as we hum our
selves. Something stretched , in each
case , is made to tremble. When the air
is quite still , you will not hear the
telegraph lines humming.
The next Questions begin on page 1985.
rue VOLYET
 The Child's Story of
THE EARTH
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E have learned about the principal compounds, and the way they are
related ; here we learn about some wonderful mixtures of metals called
W E which are as interesting and valuable as if they were really new compounds .
alloys,
Then we conclude our study of chemistry by looking at a few of the principal com
pounds of carbon, which are found everywhere in the world of life. We learn how
these compounds run in long series, so that we can foretell what they will be, and
what properties they must have , even before we find them . We learn in these pages ,
also, about the alcohols , especially the particular alcohol that people drink , about
ferments and fermentation , and about the way in which alcohol and bread are made
by ferments . After this we must leave the study of chemistry for the present , and
go on to the study of the stars. We shall see that they have their chemistry , too.
CHANGES ALWAYS GOING ON
The Chemistry of all Life and Living ion
Things
of oxidat and de
composition , and of
Thisofis the last part
our book in
CONTINUED) FROM 1801
chemical equations,
which we shall have and so on , are true everywhere ,
space to learn about chemistry , or they would not be worth dis
though in many other parts of cussing . They are true in a fire
the book we shall find that or in our bodies, true on the earth
chemistry turns up again and or in the sun - for Nature is a
loo. k Soat her
to in
aga soemeweofmust
the go ortant
impon mighty whole, and is consistent in all
compounds that are found in the her workings .
But just before we go on to this last
worHit of to
ld her alley . been dealing division of chemistry , a word must be
we ecihav
life esp
mainly with what is called inorganic said regarding some very interesting
chemistry — the chemistry that does and valuable chemical substances , not 00

not have to do with living organisms compounds , yet not elements, which 00 60
or living creatures. But in the world play a great part in modern life. We do oo

of life we find a wonderful realm of know that when we make the elements o

chemistry, which we have really only combine with each other we get new o

just begun to explore, and we find substances, very different from those we
that the compounds contained in it started with . Now , in some cases it is 0

are compounds of the familiar element sufficient merely to get certain elements o
ao
carbon , which is interesting in charcoal to mix with each other in order to get OOD

and in diamonds, and in lead pencils,
but a thousand times more interesting
in ourselves and in all living creatures.
We have already seen some com-
pounds of carbon , such as carbonic acid
and carbonate of lime. These are very
simple, but carbon forms hundreds of
thousands of other compounds, some
of them having hundreds of atoms in
the molecule , and the chemistry of the
carbon compounds is the name now
given to what used to be called
organic chemistry.
Thisand
laws chemis
new princ try has
iples as that samet
all the abou
which we have learned hitherto .
laws of atoms and molecules, the
laws of elements and compounds, and
oºo
things which differ aa good deal from any
of the elements contained in them .
The greatest instance we know of
this is, of course, steel , which is one
of the pillars of life as men live it
now, and which we get by mixing , but
not chemically combining, iron and
carbon . And here may be mentione:1
a few other mixtures which have
special names . There are, for instance ,
one or two mixtures of mercury with
other elements , such as the mixture
of sodium and mercury . The name
for these mixtures of mercury is
amalgams, and you may have seen a
The word like this ; for sometimes we say
that when , for instance, two firms or
two societies have joined together,

0
Vz

1869

LO
-THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTHacca
ZELEZIUOKELIULICE
they have amalgamated. But, apart
from the amalgams, there is a special
name for mixtures of metals which
can be mixed together when they are
melted and remain mixed when they
turn solid . These mixtures are called
alloys. When we want to say that a
thing has been very good, with nothing
to say against it , we say that it was
without alloy," or “ unalloyed .” Thus
we speak of unalloyed pleasure."
When we say this, we are really com-
paring the thing to pure gold , which
has not been alloyed with any " base "
metal, such as copper. For our gold
coins we use an alloy of eleven parts of
gold to one of copper, because the
copper makes the gold harder. And,
similarly, we use an alloy of silver and
copper for silver coins. When we say
a ring or an ornament is 15 or 18 carat
gold , we are referring to the proportion interesting to the chemist. They seem
of copper that has been alloyed with it. all to be built on certain simple models ;
But the really useful alloys are not those
of either silver or gold .
HE MIXTURES OF METALS CALLED AL .
THE
LOYS, AND THEIR GREAT USEFULNESS
Much the most generally useful alloy
is brass—an alloy of copper and zinc.
Common brass has about 70 per cent . of
copperand 30 percent. ofzinc. An alloy of
the three metals zinc, copper, and nickel
is called “ German silver.” There is no
silver in it. Tin and lead alloy to form
" solder," and when the proportion of
lead is a good deal higher, they alloy to
form “ pewter.” Tin and copper alloy to
form “ bronze ”-a
. fine substance for
casting statues in — and the words on
this page are printed with an alloy of
lead and antimony, which is called
" type-metal."
No one can yet explain why alloys
should differ in many of their properties
so markedly from the metals that make
them ; and we find in some cases that
even the tiniest proportion of some new
metal added to an alloy will increase its
strength , for instance, enormously .
Especially does this apply to steel.
Metals, such as chromium and man-
ganese, alloyed with iron, when it is
made into steel with carbon, add to its
usefulness so much that the older kinds
of steel are now made only for the
commonest purposes. This branch of
study has scarcely been more than
begun as yet, but it is plain that we
shall learn how, by means of suitable
UUTUOTTUR CODUR DATE
1870
KERALAT
alloys, to get materials which will do
almost anything we require of them , not
only in the case of steel, but in many
others. For instance, we may find an
alloy which has the strength of steel but
only a fraction of the weight of steel ,
and so may solve one of the great
difficulties in the way of making flying
machines.
THES TERPECIAL
OF INTEREST OF THE CHEM
Now we must pass from these very
curious mixtures of elements, in which
their proportions may be varied indefi
nitely, to look at the chemistry of the
carbon compounds ; and here we find
the strictest regularity in the way in
which these compounds are made. Quite
apart from their enormous importance
in the world of life, it is this regularity
of composition that makes them so
and from each of these models we find
long series of compounds formed . For
instance, there is a compound called
marsh-gas , which has the formula CH .
Then we find, derived from it, a long
series of compounds of which each has
one atom of carbon and two atoms of
hydrogen more than the one before in
the list . Thus, after CH, we have
CH., CH , C , H , C3H2
12,, and so on .
In this part of chemistry there are
dozens of series like this, where the
molecules seem to be built up of little
groups of atoms twice, thrice, and so
on repeated. And a specially interesting
thing is that all the properties of these
compounds vary in a regular way,
according to their construction. As we
pass along such a series, we find , for
instance, that each member of it boils at
a higher temperature than the last .
HE MAKING OF CHLOROFORM , WHICH HAS
THE
SAVED MILLIONS OF PEOPLE FROM PAIN
Marsh - gas, CH , is called a hydro
carbon, because it contains hydrogen
and carbon. We know any number
of these hydro -carbons which occur in
Nature, and we can make many more.
Also we can make new compounds
from them by exchanging certain of
their atoms for other atoms. A cele
brated instance of this was the making of
chloroform . We can take marsh-gas,
CH , and can substitute an atom of
chlorine, Cl, for one of the hydrogen
atoms, or two for two, three for
TIZUOXDUZETU

unArt amname
-CHANGES ALWAYS GOING ON
three , or four for four. Thus we get Chemists do not go to marshes or
compounds CH.CI, CH.C ) , CHCI , and
CEREREEDS
CCI.. The third of these, CHCI., is
ELLA
chloroform , which has saved millions
of people from the most awful pain that
can be inflicted on human beings. When
chloroform was first made by Liebig ,
three -quarters of a century ago, he
was only studying the hydro -carbons.
HOWJECON E MAN
T PRO VED BLEDY
'SA STU SSIOF A DR
NG TO Y KIN
MAN SUBD.
Many people would say this was a dry
subject , and perhaps you think it is
not worth while to know anything
about it . Yet it is always worth while
to study every part of Nature, and to
wuse
ho allstud powrers
they he faitshe ly . ers
hfulconf wase
onigtho
Lieb s ato
satisfied if, as a result of his work , he
proved that three atoms of hydrogen
in the molecule of marsh -gas could be
replaced by three atoms of chlorine.
That wasous
are preci a .chemic al fact,
He coul d notandgues
alls facts
that
this new compound would prove to
be one of the most priceless things in
s isd .a great lesson for those who
theThiworl
say that science should only study
what is useful . No one knows what
will or will not be useful ; and the
more we learn , the surer we are that
all facts , every truth of every kind,
will be useful some day. The chemist's
work with the hydro -carbons, starting
h ou
witmp
co marndsh
s -gas, and
relate to h it oth
d wit , has givbon
er car en
mankind some of the most valuable
things it possesses , and will yet give us
many more .
HOW.CHA AFFECTS EVERY MAN WHO GOES
e we
HerDOW need only study marsh -gas,
N INTO
and may leave the other hydro -carbons
out of account . Marsh -gas comes out of
marshy ground, and can quite easily
be collected in jars by stirring up the
mud at the bottom of stagnant pools.
It is also found in coal-gas, and is one
of the gases which are formed from
coal in coal-mines even before it is
burned . Miners call it " fire damp,
and when it mixes with the air of a
mine, a match will explode it . Many
miners have lost their lives in this way ;
but now they use the safety -lamp
invented by Sir Humphry Davy, and
in which the light is enclosed, and so
the men's lives are protected .
LUTBUTTON
CIU
ILA DO IZOLIA
coal-mines when they want marsh -gas,
for they can make it for themselves
quite easily from various compounds.
It cannot be made directly , for carbon
will not directly combine with hydro
gen . It is a gas without colour or odour
-unfortunately for coal -miners - and
when it is burned it forms carbonic acid ,
CO,, and water , H.O. We have already
learned how it is possible sometimes to
write the formula of a compound in a
graphic way, and if we remember what
was said there about the number of
<<
hands ” that the carbon atom has,
and the number that the hydrogen
we shall see that the
gr apmhic has,
formula of marsh -gas must be
H
H–C-H
1
H
From the hydro -carbons we get a
large number of series of other com
pounds. For instance, we can make
one of the hydrogen atoms be re
placed by the group of atoms --OH ,
which we called hydroxyl. If we
do this to marsh -gas, we get a sub
stance with the formula CH ,OH . If
we do it to the next hydro -carbon ,
CH, we get a substance CHOH ,
and so on through the whole series .
THE TERRIBLE POISONTHAALC OHODUCWEICH
T IT
Thus we get a new series of substances
which are exceedingly important chemi
cally , and in many other ways . They are
called alcohols . The second alcohol,
C ,H ,OH , is the liquid we usually Card
alcohol - as if there were no others — and
it is at least as important in its effect on
human life as any compound known
to chemistry. All the alcohols are
poisonous. The first , CH ,OH , is called
methyl -alcohol, and as it is very dis
agreeable, it isadded to ordinary alcohol,
so that this may be used for burning,
and for many other purposes, without
people drinking it . The mixture is
called methylated spirits, and everyone
knows it well . The second alcohol is
the alcohol . This is more poisonous
than the first , and has been proved to
injure the life of every form of living
creature , animal or plant, that has been
exposed to it . Further on in the series
of alcohols they become still more
1871
 CORO THE CHILD'S STORY OF THE EARTHanuscra
IZTEILE

poisonous than either methyl-alcohol all noticed for ourselves that alcohol is
or ordinary alcohol, of which the real formed from sugar. We have all tasted
name is ethyl-alcohol. One of these jam that had turned to have a curious
other alcohols is very apt to occur in taste which we probably did not
whisky ; in fact , it always occurs in much like . The sugar in the jam had
raw whisky. begun to turn into alcohol - the jam
ALCOHOL IS ONE OF THE GREATEST had begun to ferment .
WHYCURSES IN THE WORLD When sugar is decomposed by what
And, as almost anyone may sell raw we call fermentation , it always produces
whisky if he finds people foolish two things - alcohol and carbonic acid .
enough to buy it, we can often Bread is made to rise in this way. The
see the effects of this alcohol upon dough contains a lot of starch , which
human beings. When whisky is kept is aa carbo -hydrate, and that is changed
for some time, this alcohol, which is into another carbo -hydrate, really very
often known as fusel oil , disappears, much the same chemically, which is
and so matured whisky is less quickly sugar. The yeast is the ferment which
and seriously poisonous than raw acts on the sugar, producing alcohol
whisky. But the best whisky, or and carbonic acid. Thealcoholevaporates
“ spirits ” of any kind , contains a large away. The carbonic acid forms in
quantity of ethyl-alcohol, which has a little bubbles, which raise the dough and
particular effect on the brain that make the bread . In “ aerated bread "
makes people like it . Ethyl-alcohol, in no yeast is used , but carbonic acid is
this and other forms, is the principal forced into the bread from outside.
curse of our civilisation to -day, and IE WAY IN WHICH SUGAR AND STARCH
as people are allowed to sell raw THE
AND POTATOES ARE MADE INTO ALCOHOL
whisky to the primitive people we call This fermentation of sugar to form
savages ,” who are very easily hurt alcohol and carbonic acid is always
by it, it is now the principal curse of occurring. When the sugar is in grapes
them as well . We call them savages , the result is wine. Grapes are the fruit
but which of the two are really savages of the vine, and we should really
is another question. Alcohol is a very pronounce vine as if the v were w ;
valuable liquid in some ways, as for the two words are the same . But
cleaning purposes and for burning. alcohol can be made and is made from
It will probably soon be more valuable many things which do not contain
still, for very likely we shall learn to sugar, so long as they contain starch ;
use it for running all kinds of machinery, and as most plants contain starch ,
when the world's supply of petrol which is a sort of reserve food supply
comes to an end. for them , it is easy to make alcohol.
OW THE SUGAR IN
TURN TO ALCOHOL
THE JAM MAY Barley is largely used for this purpose,
and while we have to pay other
Among the series of carbon com countries for our wheat or die of
pounds we find a large number which starvation, large areas of England,
contain carbon combined with hydrogen where wheat might be growing, are now
and oxygen in the proportions in which growing barley to turn into whisky
they occur in water ; for instance, which also has to be paid for in several
CH ,,03, C2H01, and so on . All ways by women and children and babies
these are called carbo -hydrates. We as well as those who drink it . Also
must try not to be confused between potatoes are mostly starch , and so
the two words hydro -carbons and alcohol can readily be got from potatoes.
carbohydrates. Before we learn any- Several of the native races of Africa
thing more about the carbo-hydrates are now being rapidly wiped out by
(which you and I are very fond of, for potato spirit sent to them from Ger
sugar is a carbo -hydrate ), I want to many and other countries.
tell you that they, or some of them , But for the chemist the most interest
are the sources of alcohol. This has ing thing is the way in which the fer
been known to mankind for at least mentation of starch and sugar into
ten thousand years , as has been proved alcohol is brought about. We must
by recent study of the remote past in find out what yeast is, and how it
Egypt . As a matter of fact , we have does its work. Of course, the power
1872
 mus
-CHANGES ALWAYS GOING ON
OURO
of yeast had been known for a long valuable , like chloroform , because
time, but it was not until eighty years people who breathe it cannot feel pain .
ago that the astonishing discovery was Then there is another series called
made that yeast is a living creature . aldehydes, and this is equally long
and closely related to the others.
ES AND WORKS
AND Aldehyde is a short way of saying
WDIst
HOYea ES STMAno
Y,EAINwe LIV
KIw
NG kn
ALow isL a minute alcohol-de-hydrogen, and it tells us that
CO, HO
a the aldehydes are alcohols which have
plant, and its natural food is sugar. In ir hydrogen .
lost some of thehy
feeding on this sugar it turns it into The first alde de is very useful, and is
alcohol and carbonic acid . If the alcohol usually known as formalin , and is very
isthe
alyea to nt
lowestdpla get die s , ngjusert an
stro asdany
stroliv ing, deadly to microbes, and is largely used
nger
creature dies if it is surrounded with the to preserve things ; but it is a poison ,
and its use to preserve food is very
waste products of its own life ; and wrong , and should not be allowed .
s Another aldehyde, called paralde
alcoho
it l , in preparing alcoholic liquor ,
therefore
forssmed
is ofastenit isnece ary, orto the menta-
ferve
remo the hyde, is one of the very best of all
the medicines used to make people
then pla
tio wilnt thapt, ma
l sto askethe oholit kil
s it,alcas willsl they are ill .
sleep ewhen mul
Th for a of formalin is CH,O ,
kill any living creature iſ taken in large and this is very interesting . We know
that plants make the carbo -hydrates,
enough doses . We know
We have since learned that the yeast such as starch and sugar .
plant ferments alcohol by a special that these carbo-hydrates have in
en and oxgyen
the m car bon , and hyd rog
substance ment
, a fer ch it produces
, whi in the same proportions as in water.
within its living cells ; this substance We know , too , that plants get the car
can be separated , and even then will bon from the carbonic acid of the air
ferment sugar . We have also learned by their leaves , and the water from
that all the processes of living creatures the soil by their roots . Now , the simplest
are carried on by means of ferments, combination of water and carbon that
and the chemistry of fermentation we can imagine is CH,O, and we only
promises to be the most important d to multiply that, say, by six ,
part of the chemistry of the future, nee to get sugar, CH 0. So botanists
al
as it will deal with the chemic pro expect soon to prove that the first
cess es
grenatwhi
The upo faccht life t lfa dep
abouitse ents. is thing the plant forms—--just for aa
fermend
t
tha it set gois ng che mic al changes moment – in making sugar from water
without being changed itself . Thus there and carbon is formalin , CHO .
F
OUR Y OF
BRIE STUD
OF
is no limit to the amount of workt END
y qu
that even aIntinoth ty
eranti
en
ofala fe rm THECHEM ISTRY
chemic changes Many books have been devoted solely
the thing that starts the change is used to the hydro -carbons, the alcohols ,
can do.
up. We can make only a fixed quantity the aldehydes, and the acids which cor
of salt out of hydrochloric acid and respond to and are made from them .
soda, and they are used up in the We know that alcoholic drinks often
process ; but a ferment acts on the turn sour , and the cause is that the
substances round it without being acted alcohol has turned into vinegar, or
upon itself. Here we have only men- acetic acid . Here we cannot go farther .
tioned alcoholic fermentation , which Only we must conclude this brief ac
is the one that has been longest known , count of chemistry by saying that
and is much the most important we another department of it , of no less
know yet ; but this is only one example importance, deals with the compound
called benzene, CoHi, and with the
out of hun dreds. thomusandsy of com pounds - many of
EHYDES S
ALD
SUBSTANCE THE
, ANDCAL LEDWOR
ETHKERS
THEYAND
DO the ver valuable, such as carbolic
E ely related to the alcohols there
THClos acid - which are derived from it . But
is a long series of substances called don't mix up carbonic acid and car
ethers . One of them — the one that bolic acid , as I used to do at school !
corresponds to ethyl -alcohol - is very The next story of the Earth begins on 1939.
UITUUTTUU

TUZTULT
1873
Kominov
Betmem
POTUIT
in
BITIbo
WT)

WEST
EMPIRE

PEOPLE

,
EAST

AND

When Columbus landed in what he called the West Indies, the people he found there were the Caribs, but these
people have nearly all died out now. The West Indies to-day are largely peopled by descendants of the African
negroes who were taken there as slaves. The ancestors of such a family as this were, no doubt, slaves.

Further India is made up ofwhat was once the Burmese Empire and part of the Malay Peninsula. The people,
like millions of other Asiatics, live chiefly on rice, which we see them here preparing by threshing the stalks.
τσαχταπακτο பயனாவைணாயா
MIUI
1874
 The Child's Book of DE
ALL COUNTRIES
WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US
E have read the stories of India, of the great colonial states on the continents
WE of Africa, North America, and Australia ; and of the smaller colonies on those
continents, as well as the big islands which lie close to them. But there is still a
O
great deal more of this wonderful empire of ours. There is a big territory in Asia,
east of India, sometimes called Further India ; and the large island of Ceylon, at the
southern tip of India itself. Besides this, we have all been told that “ Britannia rules
the waves ! ” and that means that there are far more British ships and British sailors
on every part of the ocean than any other nation can show ; and there are also an
immense number of islands, scattered all over the ocean, big and little, fruitful and
barren, which have become little bits of the British Empire ; and here and there are
little spots --- on the coast of Spain , and in Arabia , and in China-where the British
flc g flies. We read of these places here, completin nur story of the British Empire.
OUTPOSTS OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE
Someareofthese places CONTINCED FROM 1770
flies there to this day.
real colonies, There are two islands
where our own people have in the Mediterranean which
made themselves homes, or must come into this story,
live in order to carry on trade ; one of them belonging to the
and others we keep because the empire, while the other really
Queen of the Seas must have belongs to Turkey, although we
fortified harbours of her own have the right to use it. The
all over the world for her fleets to first of these is Malta .
repair to, and ports from which they Hundreds of years before England
can get the stores they need when began to have a history, this island of
they want to remain a long time at sea . Malta was used by the great trading
Now, there is no sheet ofwater where nations of the countries around, and
it is more important for usto keep a they have left their images, pottery ,
0
strong fleet than the Mediterranean and tombs to mark their presence .
0
0 Sea. We found that out when Oliver About the time that the Romans came

O
Cromwell was Protector of England, to conquer Britain , in the first century
and Robert Blakethatwastimehiswegreat after Christ, St. Paulwas shipwrecked
admiral. But at had on the island . Later came dark times
no posts on the continent of Europe, of pirates and Arabs, who were driven
since Calais had been lost a hundred out about the times when the Nor
years before. It was not till Crom- mans were making the New Forest to
well had been dead for nearly fifty hunt in , and the Domesday Book to
years that Admiral Rooke captured show who owned the land. The native
the Rock of Gibraltar from Spain ; people of Malta still speak the language
and for two hundred years it has of the Arabs of a thousand years ago.
remained in British hands, guarding The name of the chief town of
the entrance to the Mediterranean Malta, Valetta, recalls a hero, one
and sheltering the fleets that keep of the Knights of St. John, a sort
watch and ward in those seas . of brotherhood banded together to
It is only a little bit of barren rock defend the sacred city of Jerusalem ,
thrusting itself out into the sea, but and to resist the Turks in every
it is of priceless value for all that. possible way. These knights did
o
Once for three long years the French much for the island , making fine
and the Spaniards besieged it, just at fortifications and bringing shiploads
the time when we were fighting with of earth from Sicily, the better to
our own colonists in America ; but grow food on this sun -smitten , rocky
the garrison held out grimly, and island. It was in 1565 that Valette ,
when the war ended the British flag the Grand Master of the knights, de
was still flying over the Rock , and fended the island with splendid

GTC FUTURE
IS D 23 1875
 COLECCIONI
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIESXXXXXXXXXX
courage against the Turks, and the
new city that arose on the ruins of the
old one was called after him .
Over two centuries later the island
fell into the hands of Napoleon , and
later Nelson blockaded it . In the end
it passed to the British , who greatly
desired the island for its fine harbour,
and for its value as a storehouse and
a headquarters for the Mediterraniean
Fleet . Like Gibraltar, Malta has
become doubly valuable since the
opening of the Suez Canal.
THE MEDITERRANEAN AND THE RED SEA
The second island in the Mediterranean
is Cyprus. Great Britain pays Turkey a
sort of rent for it , and attends to the trade
and the management of the island ,
finding it useful as a watch -tower from
which to observe what is going on at
that far end of the Mediterranean
near the entrance of the Suez Canal ,
through which ships now pass on the
way to and
When youfrom India
have .
passedthroug the
h T'EOCUARUSFISFAIRY- LIKE ISLANDSLANDED
canal and sailed down the Red Sea, you
come to another spot marked red . This
is Aden , a strongly fortified harbour and
coaling station in Arabia, which guards
the mouth of the Red Sea, as Gibraltar
guards the mouth of the Mediterranean .
Here are batteries of heavy guns placed
on the hard, dry rocks surrounding
the town , which is a centre for trade in
coffee, feathers, hides, and skins. Perim,
a bare little island at the entrance of
the Red Sea, is a coaling station ;
and Socotra is a larger island in the
Indian Ocean , with mountains of
granite and a bare soil . Arabs live on
the island of Socotra, and it is valuable
to us only because of its position on
the most important road to India .
LONELY ISLAND
BED OF THE
PEAKS RISING FROM THE
OCEANS
Far down the Indian Ocean are the
islands of the Mauritius, which used to
belong to France ; but the French
ships there were so troublesome that
we seized the islands when we were at
war with Napoleon ; so that is another
of the places which we keep for our
own protection in time of war .
Two lonely mountain peaks, 800
miles apart, once active volcanoes ,
rise from the bed of the Atlantic, away
on the western side of Africa , and
form the islands of Ascension and
1876
St. Helena . During the years when
the British and Dutch were busy trying
to sweep each other off the seas, the
British managed to capture St. Helena,
about a third the size of the Isle of
Wight. One of its chief points of interest
is that , when the great Napoleon was
defeated at Waterloo, he was taken to
this lonely island and kept there in
exile till he died, so that he should not
again upset the peace of Europe.
Ascension Island, about half the size
of St. Helena, was taken possession of
after Waterloo, and is often spoken of
as a fixed store ship . Little grows on
the island, and sea -turtles are the only
article of trade . These, too, are outposts,
convenient for the ships which have to
remain for a long time on the high seas.
These two islands are in what you
may call the African part of the Atlantic
Ocean — they are nearer to Africa than
to America . But most of the islands in
the Atlantic are nearer to America .
WHERE
Look well at the great semi- circle
of islands that stretch from Florida in
North America to the mouths of the
Orinoco River in South America .
They are the highest parts of a moun
tain chain whose lowest slopes are at
the bottom of the deep , deep sea .
The smaller islands are often only the
very tops of the submarine mountains,
but the larger islands rise high enough
above the sea to have mountains upon
them much higher than any mountains
in the United Kingdom . Quite a number
of these belong to the British Empire.
This curious ridge of islands reminds
us of the way in which the islands
lie grouped to the eas ' of Australia .
also in or near the Tropics, the hottest
belt of the earth ; and here, also , in
the warm seas of the West , we find
the same little builders without hands,
forming coral barriers and reefs and
countless beautiful fairy -like islands,
very little raised above the surface of
the crystal clear sea .
It was on one of these coral islands,
in the group called the Bahamas, that
Columbus is supposed to have first
landed . This is how he wrote of
them : “ It seemed to me that I could
never leave so enchanting a spot, and
as if a thousand tongues would fail to
describe it.”
 -OUTPOSTS OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE
CALERO LECULLUES
Travellers of to -day agree with him .
Many invalids go from the United States
and elsewhere to enjoy its beauty and
its healthy winter climate, with no
frost ; and they never tire of the lovely
walks in the flower - covered woods, or
of boating in the clear waters of the
beautiful bays . Oranges, bananas,
pines, all grow in this chain of 500 high cliff, and from it , when further
islands, which stretches for nearly
800 miles. Only twenty of the islands desperately, one after the other, into the
have people living on them.
INDIA, AND CALLED THE WEST INDIES
The Bahamas, of which our ancestors
took possession about a hundred and
fity years ago , look on the map as if
they were a sort of fringe to the row
of big islands which lie next to the
south of them - Cuba, which is like a
cigar (and a great many cigars come from
it ) ; and Hayti, which is sometimes
called San Domin go , and sometimes
Hispan
and
iola
, which
Porto Rico meansareLittle
. These not Spain
part of;
our empire; but close to these there is
a fourth big island, Jamaica , which is
British . And then to the east there is a
long string of
all the
smaller islands, stretching British settlements on the west of the
from Porto Rico to the coast Atlantic until we go still farther north
way
of South America, nearly all of which
belong now either to France or to Great
Britain. The whole of the sea which is THELARGEST ISLAND
girdled by all these islands is called
the Caribbean Sea ; and all the islands
together are spoken of as the West
India Islands, or the West Indies.
Those names were given because
the first Europeans who set foot on those
lands were the sailors of Christopher
Columbus. Now , when Columbus sailed
across the Atlantic, what he expected
to reach was not a new continent, but
India ; and so he, and the adventurers
who followed after him , called all the
native tribes of this new world
“ Indians,” both in South America
and in North America .
THEHOW
LASTTHEY
STAND OF THE CARIBS , AND
LEAPT INTO THE SEA
But the particular tribes who were
found in these islands were called Caribs ,
which is the origin of the word cannibal,
as it was the habit of some Caribs to eat
the prisoners whom they took in war.
The Caribs were the “ Indians,” the
natives of these regions ; some mild
and peaceable, others fierce and war-
like. Their fate has been very hard.
DITUZ
1877
ZEE
ULTIMA
Many were killed in wars and disputes he
with the newcomers ; many perished
when compelled to toil in the mines on
the mainland, for which they were un
fitted . There is a thrilling story told
about a last stand made by some of the
Caribs in Grenada, one of the Lesser
Antilles . The fight was on the top of a
resistance was useless, they leaped
sea far below. There are but few natives
left in the islands now , though there are
many on the mainland .
Next , if we look at the west end of
the Caribbean Sea, we find on the main
land , at the beginning of the isthmus
which joins North and South America ,
one red patch a little bigger than
Jamaica, which is British Honduras .
And again, eastwards , just to the
south -east of the last of these islands,
on South America itself, there is another
red
And patch, which
last , if we go upisstraigh
British Guian
t north a
over.
the ocean , we find another tiny group
of islands belonging to us called the
Bermudas . And these make up all the
and reach Nova Scotia and Canada and
Newfoundland.
SOME OF BRITISHISLANDS
LWEST
Jamaica , the “ land of wood and
water,” in the tongue of the old Caribs,
is the largest of the islands belonging to
Great Britain-about twice as large as
Norfolk . There are at least thirty good
harbours. Ships homeward bound from
them bring us many West India pro
ducts, especially sugar and bananas.
When the weather is too hot and
damp round the coast, all Europeans
who can do so go up to the beautiful
country in the Blue Hills, where the
air is fresh and the woods cool and shady.
A great many of the smaller islands in
the curved chain between Porto Rico
and Trinidad are volcanic peaks, with
very fertile soil, growing all the pro
ductions that need heat. The scenery
is very picturesque with the jagged
peaks, beautiful woods, and in many
cases fields like rich gardens. Limes
grow in Monserrat, from which a
refreshing drink is made. St. Kitts and
Nevis send us sugar ; Antigua sends us
pineapples. There is a fine harbour in
SLEUTTIT UUTINE
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
St. Lucia , and another in Grenada, Tyne," and towed across the Atlantic
whence comes much of our cocoa . to the Bermuda dockyard. There is a
Barbados, about the size of the Isle cable from Nova Scotia, which passes
of Wight, has a large and industrious by Bermuda to Jamaica, and from these
population and a healthy climate. on to the rest of our West India islands.
There are good schools, and a university British Honduras, about the size of
at Bridgetown, which is a real tropical Wales, is the only British possession in
garden city." Central America. Most of its people
HE BEAUTIFUL ISLAND OF TRINIDAD, are negroes and Indians, and there is
THEWHICH SENDS ASPHALT FOR OUR ROADS every hope that it may become one of
Trinidad , twice the size of Warwick the most valuable of our “ tropical
shire, is also a beautiful and fertile gardens."
island in which grows almostevery BritishKingdom
United Guiana,,is
nearly as large
our only as the
possession
tropical crop. When Sir Walter Raleigh in South America . There is a low,
visited the island he filled up the seams swampy plain near the sea , producing
of his ship
natural lake, the
pitch with pitch
one of from the
thewonders chiefly sugar, the best kind of which is
known as Demerara. The mountains
of the island. It also supplies material behind are covered with forests. These
for asphalting paths and roads in our mountains catch the winds laden with
own country. In parts the black mass
is hot , and bubbles up, reminding us of moisture, and the heaviest rainfall in
one of the great features of the West the world gives magnificent full rivers,
Indies — the numbers of points of com which dash over the tremendous cliffs,
munication that it has with the hot one of them over 800 feet high.
inside of the earth. Often there are THETHESTORY OF THESE ISLANDS BEFORE
LANDING OF COLUMBUS
serious earthquakes ; the old capital of Now , of all these places history has
Jamaica was overwhelmed by one not nothing to tell us before the time when
long ago .
As for volcanoes, perhaps there Christopher Columbus saw theBahamas
is no part of the world , except and landed on San Domingo ; and then ,
Java, where there are more gathered if any people inhabited these islands,
together than round the Caribbean Sea. they were the Caribs . And for many a
Every now and then , through the cen year after none but Spaniards tried to
settle there, for that people claimed
turies , one or another of these chimneys that all the New World belonged to
of the mighty furnace below bursts into
active eruption. Quite lately this hap them . But if on any of these islands
the Spaniards had hope of getting
pened in the French island of Martinique. wealth with little labour, they settled
WHAT HAPPENED IN TWO MINUTES ON
THE ISLAND OF MARTINIQUE
there, and the Caribs for the most part
were slain or carried off to be slaves,
At ten minutes to eight one morn- and so died out, and the labour was done
ing a thick, dark cloud was noticed for the Spaniards chiefly by negro
above the head of Mont Pelee. At eight slaves from Africa.
minutes to eight the town clock of St. However, in some of these island
Pierre stopped. It had only taken two harbours, sea-rovers and pirates known
minutes for the black cloud to roll down as buccaneers found shelter. And
the sides of the mountain , a vivid fash though English seamen went and fought
leaped from it, and in a moment flames the Spaniards and took their treasure
burst out in every direction . The ships, they made no settlements for a
beautiful woods on Mont Pelee were while . Almost the first islands we
left mere blackened stumps, and 32,000 seized were the Bermudas, where there
people lay dead under the ruins and were no inhabitants, which Shakespeare
ashes of St. Pierre. called the “ still -vexed Bermoothes,”
The group of Bermuda Islands are because of the stormy seas, in his play
small in size, and produce chiefly of “ The Tempest,” which was written
vegetables and arrowroot , but their at that very time. But just before
great value is in their splendid harbours that we took possession of the island of
for shipping. Lately a large dock for Barbados, where many planters settled ;
repairing ships was built on the “ Coaly and there , too , the work was done
1878 mm
 TEAL nuran
OUTPOSTS OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE.
XL

: TIEDE ILUZ
chiefly by negro slaves , but also in part for when the trade of the Indian scas
aro

by offenders against the law in England, was opened , a little more than three
who were sent thither as bondsmen for hundred years since , our merchants
a term of years , and after that became sought the Indian trade , while the
free men . And then in Cromwell's time , Dutch took to what were called the
when we were at war with Spain, we took Spice Islands because of the spices which
Jamaica from her. And in the eighteenth
century , when we were so often at war
with France, and sometimes with Spain ,
too , many islands were captured and
recaptured by one or the other, though
in the end many of the French islands,
and some that were Spanish , like Trini
dad , had fallen to us because our Navy
was the stronger. But because Spaniards
and French and British all alike em
ployed so much slave labour in those
tropical lands , the most part of the
population to this day is made up of the
descendants of negro slaves , mingled
with something of the Caribs .
In the Pacific Ocean , too, there are
many lovely islands , and some that are
not lovely , which we own , having settled
there at some time since Captain Cook
made those voyages about one hundred
and thirty years since , of which we

The Spanish officers and soldiers marching out of Gib

raltar after its capture by the British and Dutch fleet .
ause the trade in
w there . s But becle
rose
gtho region is valuab , we have bought
some lands from native rulers, and
obtained others from the Dutch by ex
change, such as Malacca and Singapore .
On the north of China there is a
spot calied Wei -hai wei , which we
persuaded the Chinese to give up to us
VA ! a few years ago for the use of our ships in
case there should be trouble with Russia.
And on the south coast of China is the
little island of Hong Kong, which we got
from the Chinese about seventy years
ago for a port, partly for the sake of
trade with China, and partly for our
warships , and here the people are
e . Kong has prospered so greatly
nesng
ChiHo
since it became a British possession
The surrender of the island of Malta to the British that now there are nearly thirty -five
troops in the last year of the eighteenth century
times as many inhabitants as there were
have read . Here , too, the natives are seventy years ago . The Chinese Govern
dark skinned , and still not far from ment wanted to prevent foreigners from
being savages, as Captain Cook found trading , and would not protect them ;
them . And then we come to Australia , but they promised to let their
and to the Malay Archipelago , where own people come to Hong Kong to
the Dutch were beforehand with us ; buy and sell, and so merchants from

1879
 CGAIM Amma
THE CHILD'S BOOK OF COUNTRIES
all parts of the world come there to years ago the emperor threatened to
trade with the Chinese . That is how
the place has grown so greatly.
BRITISH DOMINIONS OF FURTHER
THENDIA AND CEYLON
Last of all , we come to the British
dominions which are outside of India ,
but still are very closely connected with
it - Ceylon , the big island, and what
is called Further India . Ceylon is
governed quite separately from India
itself. It used to be in the hands of the
Dutch, but when Holland had to take
sides with Napoleon against us, we took
it away from thein and kept possession.
The natives there are near akin to the
very early races who lived in India
before the Aryans came there ; and
most of them are of the Buddhist reli
gion, which began in India, but after
wards almost disappeared from there,
though it spread beyond the Indian
borders all over the east of Asia . For
a long time a great deal of our coffee
came from Ceylon, but about fifty years
ago a great deal of tea began to be
grown instead of coffee ; and the great
tea estates of Ceylon are famous. Ceylon
has a great harbour called Colombo.
Further India is made up of the
different parts of what was once the
empire of Burmah and part of the Malay
Peninsula . The peoples are made up
of a mixture of the yellow -skinned
Malays, who are often called Lascars,
and Singhalese , like the people of Ceylon ,
and others who are more nearly related
to the Chinese, with round , brown, flat
faces and black hair. Most of the Bur-
mese are Buddhists , and the country iş
covered with those queer-shaped tem-
ples which are called paycdis. The
Burmese emperor used to be called the
Lord of the White Elephant, because of
the white elephants which were, so to
speak, sacred to him . Nearly a hundred
The Rock of Gibraltar, on which the British Aag flies at the entrance to the Mediterranean Sea.
DOUDOUNETTONTTITOR
1880
make war on the British in India , and
became so troublesome that we had to
make war on him, and take away some
parts of his territory which lay on the
coast. And just before the Indian
Mutiny we had to make war on him
again , and take more territory ; and
at last , in the time when Lord Dufferin
was Viceroy of India, the King of
Burmah, Theebaw, was so troublesome
and governed so badly that Lord
Dufferin saw there was nothing to be
done but to put an end to Theebaw's
rule altogether and annex all Burmah
that is, to bring it under British rule and
treat it as a part of India . So that
Burmah is now a part of India.
AIM
THEPARTS OF BRITISH RULE IN ALL
OF THE WORLD
All the other places about which we
have been reading are either military
stations under a military governor or
what are called Crown Colonies ; that
is, they do not govern themselves by
means of Parliaments and Ministers
chosen by the people, but have gover
nors appointed over them. For self
government is only possible where there
is a large enough white population to
make sure that the natives would not
get the upper hand in the Parliaments
and use their power to destroy the
British rule . But the great thing we
have to remember is that the aim of
British rule has always been to main
tain justice and order, and to help the
peoples over whom we rule to be pros
perous. And so long as this continues
the British Empire will be something
to be proud of. But if ever we forget
this, and turn to oppressing the subject
peoples for our own advantage, the
British Empire will vanish away like
the great empires of the ancient world .
The next story of Countries is on page 2015 .
ZOUTDOOR OUDOTI DOO
 The Child's Book of
Bible Stories

Cast TCE

Eljah running belore Ahab into Jezreel

TLE 1
ELIJAH AND KING AHAB
THERE appeared one CONTINUED FROM 1735
false god feasting
day at the palace 0,80
every day at the
of Ahab, King of Israel, queen's table, but he,
a strange, stern man with flowing the heir of David, allowed the
hair and bearded face , dressed in prophets of the true God to
a robe made of camel's or goat's be driven away and persecuted
hair, with a leathern girdle about as though they were wicked men . The
the loins. His presence created first sin of Ahab lay in this, that he did not
excitement and then uneasiness at realise the enormous importance of
the luxurious court of the king. The religion . He thought one god was as
courtiers were startled. Something in good as another ; that one religion
the old man's resolute gaze held them was very like another religion ; he
like a spell. The two men , monarch thought that a nation should be
and thinker, looked into each other's hospitable to all the gods people chose
eyes. to worship. He was flippant, tolerant,
Ahab's sin , which is said to be the thoughtless.
greatest sin committed by all the kings The strange, stern man who had
of Israel, arose from his weakness. come from the loneliness of the wooded
His wife, Queen Jezebel, was a foreign hills to the sumptuous palace of this
princess. She came from theproud and easy-going king was Elijah the Tish
rich country of Tyre, where people wor- bite, a man little known then , but the
shipped a god named Baal . " The people greatest man that had walked the earth
of Tyre laughed at Israel's idea of a God. since the days of Moses — a Thinker.
The young queen's haughty nature In the loneliness of the hills, study
would not let her be satisfied with a ing the wonders and the power of
few Tyrian worshippers of Baal at the creation, this old, hard -thinking and
court of her husband. She claimed that silent man had come to feel the voice
Baal should have equal rights with the of God close to his soul. He knew
God of Israel. If the God of Israel that there was but one God, the
had temples, Baal must have temples invisible and eternal Power who had
too . If the God of Israel had priests made the heavens and the earth, and
and prophets, so must Baal . She he knew that this invisible Power
could not allow her religion to be made one demand of man -- that he
treated lightly. Ahab yielded to should be his best , not his lowest .
the Tyrian princess. Not only did Elijah was not simply jealous of
he see the temple raised to Baal, another nation's god, as was the
and hundreds of the prophets of this queen of Ahab. No; he saw the

1881
 FOR RENRULLER

ELIJAH FED BY THE RAVENS

Elijah , we read in the Bible, " went and dwelt by the brook Cherith, that is before Jordan ; and the ravens
brought him bread and flesh in the morning, and bread and flesh in the evening , and he drank of the brook ."
This picture is published by permission of the artist M. G. Roussin , and that on page 188 1 by permission of Mr. A. C. Gow , R.A., the artist.
மாணாயாணாணாணாயாகாவாகயான 1882
 KERTOOTEEK
· ELIJAH AND KING AHAB LETUL
awful truth of the contrast - that while
God demanded righteousness , Baal en-
couraged men and women to live like
animals, without a conscience . Jezebel
had set up a god in Israel who taught
men and women to be beast -like. The
God of Jacob,who had patiently educated from this brook, and ravens had brought
Israel to desire purity more than vice, him food in the morning and evening:
and holiness more than luxury, was set
on one side for a false and lying god
whose worship was the worship of sin .
God demanded righteousness. Baal sug
gested sin . A nation seeking righteous-
ness is a strong nation . An immoral
nation is weak and diseased, falling to
ruin and death . This is what Elijah
knew . This is what lonely contemplation
in the wild hills had taught him . He
knew that God demands righteousness.
Remember, then, that Elijah did not
hate Baal as a foreign rival of Israel's
God , but that he hated Jezebel's religion
as a disease that would injure the people
of God , and destroy humanity. Hehated
Baal even as God hates sin .
This is what had brought him to
Ahab . The brave and fearless old
thinker from the hills stood before the
royal throne, and, in the presence of the
glittering court, uttered a prophecy.
LIJAH'S PROPHECY IN THE GLITTERING
EL COURT OF PROUD KING AHAB
The prophecy touched nothing of the
pomp and might and splendour of the
king. He threatened no defeat of his
armies, no shadow of death upon his
walls. The prophecy concerned such a
simple, common thing as rain . But the
deep voice of the old man left the king
pale and frightened, and struck a The widow trusted in God , but in the
sharp terror through the whole court.
“ As the Lord God of Israel liveth ,
before whom I stand,” cried Elijah,
)
“ there shall not be dew nor rain these
years , but according to my word.”
That was all he said . That was the
message he had come to utter. It was
not a little thing for an old and friend
less man to confront the proud king of
a great nation, and threaten him . But
Elijah was heroic of soul. From the
midst of the startled and terrified court,
the stern old man of the true God
departed and made his lonely way to
a brook called Cherith .
He knew God's will . Israel was to
be humbled through Nature. Elijah blazing
ing landsky
foringreen grass, looking at the
believed that the God of Nature was to
show a wicked nation His power.
UTEUZITTEX UTEUITUTETTULOY
1883
ZOEZELELE UKCE
The land burned under aa blazing sun .
Rivers dried up. The herb withered
and bronzed and died. The earth
cracked into crumbling fissures. Even
the brook of Cherith was drunk up by
the fierce sun . Elijah had taken water
When the brook dried , he departed
to a place called Zarephath . The sun
scorched him as he went .
THE HE POOR WIDOW GATHERING STICKS , AND
THE FOOD THAT FAILED NOT FOR HER BOY
As he approached this village, he saw
a poor widow gathering a few sticks.
She had an only son , and the famine had
brought them to beggary. She had a
little oil left in a cruse, and a handful
of meal in a barrel . She was gathering
the sticks to make a last meal for her
boy before they both laid down to await
death by starvation .
Elijah asked food at her hands in the
name of the God of Israel, and promised
that the cruse of oil should not fail, nor
the barrel of meal waste, till rain came
upon the earth . The widow believed,
and for a year Elijah lived with her,
a year of pitiless sunshine. Then the
only son began to sicken , and was
brought to the point of death . The
widow, in the agony of her grief, laid
this calamity at the door of Elijah.
The old prophet bade her trust God ,
and took the child in his arms, and
prayed mightily that the child's life
might return ; and it was done to
him as he prayed. God was with him
in the hour of visitation .
hosts of Israel there was nothing but
anguish and despair. The faithful said
the drought was a punishment. The
false said that it was merely an accident
of Nature, Baal worship continued .
Jezebel, in her palace, watched the skies,
and said that soon rain would return .
"HE SECOND
THE MEETING BETWEEN KING
AHAB AND ELIJAH THE THINKER
But the cattle were dying like flies,
and Ahab, in the face of ruin , sent
hither and thither searching for pasture.
He himself went with one party , and
the chief officer of his household ,
Obadiah , went at the head of another.
They searched every corner of the burn
hope of a cloud . While
Obadiah was thus engaged, he came
DOTTITELYY KOZMETIDOT
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF BIBLE STORIES
FEEDEDELCEL ETEE
suddenly face to face with the mighty
man of God , who bade him go and tell
Ahab that Elijah was returned . It was a wonderful meeting - a single
The second meeting between the king old man pitting his power of prayer
and the Thinker was dramatic. Not
humbly came Ahab, but with a darken-
ing brow . “ Art thou he that troubleth
Israel ? ” demanded the angry king.
“ I have not troubled Israel,”
answered Elijah, “ but thou and thy
father's house, in that ye have forsaken
the commandments of the Lord , and
thou hast followed Baal.”
The king was silent .
STORY OF THE GATHERING
THEOF BIBLE
THE PRIESTS ON MOUNT CARMEL
Then Elijah bade Ahab summon to
the mountain of Carmel the children of
Israel and the prophets of Baal who ate
at Jezebel's table, and promised that he
would meet them before the world .
The hour had come for a trial of
strength . The solitary prophet of God
was to pit his faith against the priests
of Baal and the priests of Astarte.
This congress stands out in history
as a mighty event. We see in this story,
as it is recorded in the Bible, a picture
of the eternal battle between good and
evil. On the eastern ridge of the
beautiful hill called Carmel, in the clear
light of the dawn, were gathered together ascended, drowning the quiet murmur
nearly a thousand false prophets, in
theirmagnificent raiment, and a great
host of the debased and brutalised
Israelitish people . And there, too,
magnificent in his roughness, and
solitary in his faith , was the Thinker in
his robe of camel's hair.
On one side stood a host who served
Baal ; on the other side a single old
man who worshipped the Invisible God .
Before them was assembled the nation ,
with its king. The prophets of Baal
stood for sin ; Elijah stood for righteous-
ness . The two forces fronted each other
on Mount Carmel, with the noise of the
Great Sea in their ears, as they front
themselves in the soul of every man
that is born upon the earth .
This story, however we read it , means
that in a final appeal victory must always
go to the one and only Power in the
universe — the Power of Righteousness.
CRYING
THEPRIESTS AND WAILING OF THE
TO BAAL
Elijah stood before the people.
How long," he cried , halt ye
between two opinions ? If the Lord
1884
be God , follow Him ; but if Baal, they
follow him ."
against all the forces of evil .
At Elijah's challenge two bullocks
were slain, one by the priests of Baal,
who laid the flesh upon an altar ; then
at the old man's suggestion the priests
were invited to call upon their god to
send fire for the altar. The priests of
Baal obeyed. They believed in Baal.
They actually believed in a god who
commanded sin and desired iniquity .
That is to say, they believed that there
is no goodness in the universe, no need
for men and women to try and be better.
Earnestly did they pray. Surely the
gods who had made the world would
send a little fire upon the altar. They
raised their arms and lifted their voices .
“ O Baal, hear us ! ” The air was
filled with the chanting cry of the
priests. “ O Baal , hear us ! ' The
host of Israel , who half believed that
there was no need to try and be good,
and yet half feared the true God ,
looked on and wondered . It seemed a
small miracle , a little fue for an altar ;
Baal would answer by and by . “ O
Baal, hear us ! ” The wail of the priests
of the moving sea . But no fire came.
They leapt upon the altar, stretching
out their arms. “ ( Baal, hear us !
Elijah marked them till it was noon .
What must he have thought ?
HOYWTHERE
ISRAEL CAME TO REALISE
IS NO GOD OF EVIL
THAT
Then the old man lifted up his head
and called to the priests :
“ Cry aloud ; for he is a god : either
he is talking, or he is pursuing, or he
is in a journey, or peradventure he
sleepeth , and must be awaked . ”
These words of rough mockery mad
dened the elegant and refined priests of
the false gods. They cried louder and
louder ; they cut themselves with knives
and lancets; they prostrated themselves .
“ O Baal, hear us ! O Baal , hear us."
Why was there no answer ? Because
there is no power which can answer evil
prayer. There is no god of evil. Evil
is man's own invention ; it means living
without God . A man who does evil
departs farther and farther from God .
Then Elijah cried in a great voice
to the people of Israel : “ Come near
LEVITRO OLLUTEE
 murangmanana
-ELIJAH AND KING AHABmamunnuarmarammarm
unto me.” He took stones and He was seeking God's blessing for Israel.
repaired the broken altar of the true
God ; and took more stones and built a
fresh altar to the true God. On this
altar he laid the flesh of the second
bullock . Then he made a trench round
the altar, and sent for water and poured
it upon the flesh of the bullock , so that
all the altar was drenched, and the
water ran off and filled the trench .
When this was done, in the solemn
silence of the sunset hour, the sea
crooning at the foot of the mountain ,
Elijah lifted up his voice and prayed :
" Lord God of Abraham , Isaac, and
of Israel , let it be known this day that
Thou art God in Israel , and that I am
Thy servant , and that I have done all
these things at Thy word. Hear me,
O Lord, hear me, that this people may
know that Thou art the Lord and that
Thou hast turned their heart back
again ."
As this simple prayer, with its beau-
tiful pathos of appeal to the memory of
Israel, died away from the lips of the
old man , fire burst from the sticks upon
the altar and the air was red with flame .
THE SEA , LIKE A MAN'S HAND OF
Israel bowed itself to the dust . A
cry arose from all that host : “ Jehovah !
He is the God ! ” The cry of praise
was music in the prophet's ears. God
was praised in Israel again !
Then Elijah ' commanded that the
wicked priests of Baal and Astarte
should be taken down from the hill
and slain . They were a danger to the
human race . He himself and his servant
ascended higher up the mountain .
They went up and on till the noise
of the multitude was lost to them .
Then , in the solitude of the hill-top,
Elijah sent his servant to look towards
the sea and bowed himself in prayer.
TOMTOM
DOM
MOUNT CARMEL , WHERE ELIJAH STOOD TO MEET THE PROPHETS OF BAAL
1885
Six times the servant returned, saying
saw nothing. But the seventh
time he brought news. “ Behold , there
ariseth a little cloud out of the sea, like
a man's hand.” Then said Elijah,
66
Go up , say unto Ahab, Prepare thy
chariot and get> ) thee down that the rain
stop thee not." And Elijah ran before
Ahab into the city of Jezreel .
AMAR MAKESHASTE HOMEIN
LEST BE HIS CHARIOT
What gracious news for Ahab ! To
be afraid of rain ! To hurry his
chariot for fear of rain ! Rain for
which the land was dying ; blessed,
saving, life-preserving rain ! Black be
came the heavens ; a wind arose, and
down through the darkening air des
cended the floods of the clouds. Oh ,
how sweet smelt the earth !
But the end was not yet for Elijah .
His task was not yet accomplished .
And while he waited to finish it, the
furious Queen Jezebel sent him word
that she would do to him what he had
done to her priests of Baal. She
threatened him with death on the fol
lowing day. His victory seemed undone.
Elijah made his way to the wilderness ;
and when he was spent with the long
journey he sank down under a juniper
tree , and was very sorrowful .
His work, so it seemed to him , had
failed . Jezebel ruled Ahab, and through
her Israel was bound in the chains of
sin . His battle on Mount Carmel had
come to naught . Good had conquered ,
but evil flourished . Things remained as
they were. He had demonstrated the
power of God ; but he had not filled
Israel with enthusiasm for righteousness .
(6
“ It is enough ! ” cried the old man .
Now, O Lord , take away my life ;
for I am not better than my fathers.”
The next Bible Stories begin on page 2011 .
THE HAPPY DAYS OF CHARLES THE FIRST
1

CHARLES THE FIRST AND H.S HOUSEHOLD ON THE RIVER

he

THE CHILDREN OF CHARLES THE FIRST : CHARLES, JAMES, AND MARY

These two pictures were painted during the happy days of Charles I. , when he lived with his children around him ,
before he yielded to the evil counsels of others and set himself against the people. There is a beautiful story of
these days which tells us that while Charles was hunted up and down the land the leaders of the Parliamentary
army would sometimes visit his children, whom they held captive. They were all, it is said , courteous to these
innocent children of an unhappy father ; but there was only one who knelt to them in loyalty, and that was
Cromwell. We can imagine the picture of the stern Cromwell , who was to hunt Charles Stuart to his doos ,
kneeling to the king's little son James, who was to become king and to be himself driven from his throne.
ISSO
 SMAKE
The Child's Book of
PEARE MEN E WOMEN MIL
TON

WHAT THIS STORY TELLS US

"HIS is the story of the men of the Great Rebellion that took place 250
THIS
years ago between the English people and their king. Charles I. was
a man who made many men love him. But it was his evil fortune to be a

ARUBENS
king, and he believed that God sent kings to rule as they liked , even if they
had to act unjustly and to break solemn promises. Therefore from the beginning
he insisted on going his own way, often against the laws. But the Parlia
ment men held that the king had no right to set aside the laws, and therefore
the king and the Parliament soon found themselves quarrelling. Parliament said
that the king might not force the people to give him money, or to worship God
in any way other than they pleased, and because the king insisted on these
things men refused to obey him, and Charles had them put into prison. We
read here of men who fought in the war that these quarrels brought about.

NAP
MEN OF THE GREAT REBELLION WEL
OLE LIW
ON
Oliver Cromwell and Charles Stuart GTON

E was called undignified as he ;

THHERE
ERpainter a great CONTINTED FROM
Van Dyck, who made
many portraits of King
Charles. If you have ever seen one
of them , it is easy for ou to under
stand why, with all his faults and
his follies, men loved him with a
passionate devotion , and how he still
casts a spell over men's n :inds.
There is aa dignity, a majesty, in the
grave, delicate face, a charm in the
haunting, melancholy eyes, a kingly
air in the pose , which make you feel
that this was a man for whose sake
FAR
1732
perhaps that is one
reason why Charles bore
himself always with such
dignity . But James gave the
prince for a companion a young
gentleman who was very hand DAR
VIN
some, very brave, very proud,
and very worthless ; whom he made
a lord , and who became famous as
the Duke of Buckingham . Bucking
ham utterly won the heart of Charles,
and taught him to think that princes
and their favourites are altogether
above the law . Moreover, it was due

many would die gladly. And yet to Buckingham that Charles married
AD

we can see that it is not the face of
a man wise in counsel or strong in
action . Grace and graciousness are
there, but no jot of power.
Now , if you look on the face of
Oliver, it is as though it had
been hewn roughly out of solid
STEPHENS
the pretty French princess Henrietta
Maria , who proved, in her turn , a
counsellor fully as bad as Buckingham
himself, after the duke had been
slain by a crazed assassin . So that
the two people whom Charles loved
best in the world were the worst

granite, grim and massiveand hard ; advisers he could have found, yet it
STONE
DOING

there is power in every line, but of
grace or graciousness no whit. This
man is a born fighter and a born
leader. The other is born for defeat.
During the first years of King
Charles's life he was not the heir to given and lightly broken ; and this,
the throne ; he became heir on the
death of his elder brother, Henry.
From his youth, the prince had
evil counsellors. His father, King
CLAT
STO
James I. , was very clever, but we
read on page 892 how the shrewd
NE
King of France, Henry IV . , described
him as “ the wisest fool in Christen-
dom .” Never was a monarch so
PJULIUS CÆSAR.
1887
was their advice he always followed.
But of all the ill counsel that he
got from these two, or from his
father, the worst was their teaching
that the word of a king may be lightly
more than aught else , brought Charles
to his ruin . For although the people
were wroth with him before he signed
the promises in the Petition of Right,
they were far more angry afterwards ; RUS
KIN
because, although he may have made
himself believe that he broke no
pledges, yet he knew well enough what
all men supposed that he meant by
HERBERT SPENCCAS
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
ULICA
the promises he had given ; and the
people felt that he had played them
false. And, again, when he gave up
Strafford to his doom , all knew that
he had broken his word ; and when the
Parliament resolved to fight, it was
because they would not trust his faith.
And at the last , when Cromwell and
his party resolved that the king must
die , it was because they had lost all
hope that he would keep the promises
he made if he were allowed to live .
HE EVIL TEACHING OF HIS BOYHOOD THAT
THE
COST KING CHARLES HIS CROWN
So that evil doctrine not only brought
upon England the countless woes of
civil war, but it brought upon Charles
himself the loss of his crown and his life.
Yet Charles really believed that he
was in the right, except when he sur-
rendered Strafford . For he held that
the king is appointed by God , and should
rule his people not as the people think
good for themselves, but as the king
thinks good for them , and that,
whether he rules ill or well, none can
call him to account save the King of
kings ; therefore, if his people are
disobedient, he may compel them to
his will, regardless of law. Besides
that, he saw that the Parliament was
now demanding rights which it had
never claimed before, so that if he gave
way there would remain to the king
no power at all. And it was this which
made some Parliament men , like Hyde
and Falkland , go over to the king's side.
Now , after the king had most openly
broken the law by entering the House
of Commons, seeking there to arrest
the five men who were the chiefs of the
party that opposed him , he went away
from London, and there was little enough command and stay their hands from
hope that war could be avoided . And
some months later Charles unfurled
his standard at Nottingham , having
gathered troops round him ; and this
was the beginning of the great civil war.
OLTERCROMWELL, So , at Marston Moor and Naseby
THEMAN WHO WAS fight
CONQUER , the Ironsides smote and shattered
Let us see , now , what manner of life
had been lived by the man who was to
conquer the king. Oliver Cromwell
had farmed his lands in Huntingdon-
shire, seeking to make no stir in the
world . Once, indeed , he had come
forward in his own part of the country
as champion of the people's rights
in the matter of certain lands of which
1888
they were being robbed. But for the
rest he was known chiefly as a very
religious man, who for his religion's sake
had been willing to leave his own home
and seek a new one in America , but
that he and his company were
stayed by the king's order when they
were about to depart. However,
when that Parliament met with which
the king declared war, Cromwell was
one of the members - a rough, uncouth
figure, unskilled and confused of speech ,
yet a man of mark by reason of his
deadly earnestness. Among the clever
men there, practised in the arts of
debate , it did not seem that he was
a mightier man than any of them .
Then the war broke out , and the tide
of it ran in favour of the Cavaliers
and against the army of the Parliament.
And it was Cromwell who saw how
the tide must be turned . For he saw
that what made Rupert's soldiers so
irresistible was the proud sense of honour
which made them fear nothing but
disgrace, and that these men must
win unless they were fought by soldiers
who feared death as little as they for
the burning love of a great cause ;
and then the victory would fall to those
whose discipline was best .
THE MEN OF THE GREAT PURITAN ARMY
THEWHO GATHERED ABOUT OLIVER
Therefore, Cromwell went down to the
Eastern Counties, and gathered troops of
men picked out for their zeal in religion,
but also for their strength and valour
and horsemanship. And these men he
trained in utter obedience, so that when
they came to the shock of battle these
Ironsides swept all before them , vet
were ready to rally to their chief's
needless pursuit and plunder ; godly
men after their stern fashion, who
believed with their whole souls that
their cause was the cause of freedom
and righteousness.
the gallants whom none before had been
able to resist . But after the rout of
Naseby the king's cause was lost ,
and Charles gave himself up to the Scots,
who were in arms to aid the English
Parliament ; and after a time the
Scots gave him up to the Parliament,
For what the Scots desired was that
the king should accept their Covenant,
13
. DRAXXXXXX
-MEN OF THE GREAT REBELLION.mmmucara
and should replace the form of worship
of the English Church by Presby-
terianism , as most of the English
Parliament desired likewise.
although Charles might easily have
won back his crown and most of his
power by consenting thereto, this was a
thing which he would in no wise do,
being as loyal to what he held to be
the true religion as any Puritan.
CROMWELL
WHYSOLVED AND THE ARMY RE-
THAT THE KING MUST DIE
So the Parliament chiefs sent the
king under guard to Holmby House.
But now Cromwell and the soldiers were
ill content with the Parliament, seeing
that it was willing to make terms with
the king which would not have secured
the liberty of religion , which was the
thing they most cared about. Therefore,
they sent a troop of soldiers under
command of Cornet Joyce to bring the
king away from Holmby House and
keep him under charge of the Army
itself . And then , because the Army,
and the Parliament, and the Scots
were in disagreement, the king tried
privately to treatwith each of them , and
to make them the more obstinate in
their disagreements with each other ,
hoping that thereby he might yet
triumph over them all .
But when he tried to escape from
the country, and was stopped in
the Isle of Wight and held prisoner
at Carisbrooke Castle, the Royalists
rose
in insurrection , and Cromwell
saw that the king had been only
making pretences. And so he and all
the Army were resolved that when the
insurrection was put down there could
be no peace in the land unless the king's firmly or boldly than that of Oliver
life were ended and the will of the Army
were made to prevail.
HE STRANGE SPECTACLE THAT ENGLAND
THESHOWED THE WORLD
Then England showed the world a
strange spectacle. For they who had
risen in arms against their king in the
name of the law , which is higher than
the king, now set up a tribunal to
judge the king which was itself without
rights from any law . So that now it was
the king who stood for the law, and his
judges who stood for arbitrary power,
which means power that is not restrained
by law . And the Army, having this
power, cut off the head of the king in
the name of the people of England, as an outcast state when she had put
TUTTU
un
though all knew that the chief part of
the people of England shrank in horror
from the deed .
But, Thus , in the last days of his life, the
king who had wrought so much ill to the
land became a martyr, and throughout
those days he acted with a most royal
dignity and showed great tenderness
and courage . He would make no defence
before judges who had no right to try
him . In his prison he remained calm
and collected, mindful of his friends
and his children , but with his thoughts
bent upon eternity. And when the
last hour came , and he stepped through
the window of Whitehall on to the
scaffold , and looked on the crowds that
had gathered to see how a king can die,
He nothing common did nor mean
Upon that memorable scene ,
But bowed his stately head
Down as upon a bed .
And when the executioner struck off
his head and raised it , with the words ,
66
This is the head of a traitor,” the
crowd answered with groans and tears.
OF MAN THAT OLIVER
THECROMWELL
MANNER WAS
Let us turn now to the man who , more
than any other, had brought about this
terrible deed . Cromwell had striven his
hardest to make terms with Charles, and
to restrain the Army, which would
willingly have made away with him
long before. But at last he had judged
that there was no way left but the
terrible way he took . When his
mind was made up, he never fal
tered . On the king's death warrant
there is no signature
written more
Cromwell.
For no man could be more utterly
merciless than he, if it seemed to him
that the need arose for firmness, as he
showed when he slew and spared not at
the taking of Drogheda and Wexford in
Ireland . Yet he had no love for blood
shed ; his mercilessness was the more
terrible because he loved mercy. He
made himself king of England in all but
the name, just as he slew King Charles
because he could see no other way of
restoring order in the land .
He established order and made
the country prosperous. The foreign
nations, which at first treated England
EZTETETTE UIT ETUICOLI turto
1889
 AcroIEGATURI.namedTiduti

Monromato
BORNEO
BORSE
OLIVER CROMWELL, THE MAN OF IRON

In the great struggle between the English king and the English people, it was Cromwell who led the people's side.
He raised a great army of men true to him, true to the nation, and true to the cause of freedom ; and this army was
neverbeaten. After the war was over, King Charles was beheaded as a traitor and his crownwas offered to Crom
well. But Cromwellwould not be king. Heruled England as Protector. This picture, by Ford Madox Brown,shows
Cromwell riding on his farm , and we see in his face, calm and hard as if hewn out ofgranite, the power that is missing
from the faceof Charles, as we see in Charles's face the grace that is missing from the face of Cromwell. In the
whole story of our land there has not been known a stronger man, a braver man, a truer man , than Oliver Cromwell.
1890
 homme

CHARLES STUART, THE FAITHLESS KING

It is easy in looking at this picture, painted from life by Van Dyck , to see why, with all his faults and all his follies,
men loved King Charles with a passionate devotion. There is a dignity in the delicate face, a charm in the
haunting , melancholy eye, a kingly ease in the pose, which make us feel that this was a man for whose sake men
1
would die. Yet this lovable and much-loved man set the people of England at war against themselves by his
yielding to unwise counsels,and his strong feeling that he was sent by God to rule people as he chose, even
though hehad to act unjustly and to break solemn promises. In the end theking was driven from the throne, tried
for his life, and put to death asa traitor ; and there is not, in all the story of our land, a more pitiful tale than his.
Trends
20 1891
IT
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
her king to death, became eager for have had so feeble a son as Richard ,
Cromwell's friendship and feared his whom men called “ Tumble -down Dick , "
hostility. At his bidding the French about whom we read on page 896 .
stopped persecuting the Protestant But with all his massive, uncouth force,
Vaudois. Since the days of Elizabeth , Oliver was tender of heart . It is plea
the foreign nations had cared nothing sant to think how , when the grim sol lier
for England's will or wishes, till Crom- had become the greatest man in the
well trained his army, and Blake proved land, he brought his old mother up to
himself a match for Van Tromp on the live in his house ; and because the poor
seas . And Cromwell did this when the old soul lived ever in fear that his foes
country had just been rent with a great would kill him , he made aa rule to show
civil war , and when one half of it was himself to her every evening, so that she
thirsting to overthrow his government. might go to sleep knowing he was safe.
OLIVER'S STORMY LIFE ENDS IN A STORM Cromwell had taken up the task of
ON HIS GREAT DAY OF TRIUMPH fighting the king, of killing the king, and
Perhaps it is not easy to love a man of ruling the country, because he saw
so rugged and ungainly ; it was easy to things that must be done , and no other
hate him . His enemies hated him so was fit or able to do them
much that during the last years of his “ God knows," he said, speaking sober
life he always wore mail under his truth , " I would have been glad to have
dress, lest he should be slain by an lived under my woodside , and to have
assassin . They hated him so that, when kept a flock of sheep, rather than to have
Charles II . was called back to the throne, undertaken this government.”
Cromwell's body was torn from the grave He was willing enough to lay the task
to be hanged in chains like a felon's. down.
Yet this was a man whom the great poet My work is done,” he said, as he lay
dying ;; " yet God will be with His
John Milton held in the highest honour, dying
they two being well known to each people.” '
other, and of one mind in affairs of He lived a stormy life ; it was fitting
State ; for Milton , of whom we read in that a great storm was raging when the
TXT

another part of this book , gave much hand of Death laid hold upon him . On
mm

thought to such matters, though his
greatest fame comes from his poetry.
It is odd that so strong a man should spirit of the great Protector passed away.
THE MEN OF THE TWO ARMIES
Leaders who Gathered about Cromwell and the King
ATI first there were three men who
stood up in Parliament against the
king--Sir John Eliot , John Pym , and
Thomas Wentworth . Of these three, the
first died, as men say, a martyr to his
cause . The Parliament, headed by
these three, made the king sign a
declaration, which was called the Peti-
tion of Right, that it was not lawful for
him to make the people pay taxes with-
out consent of Parliament, or to put
people in prison unless they were brought
to trial, and it was proved that they had
broken the law . But he had hardly
signed it when he began to demand
certain taxes, which , as he said , had
nothing to do with what he had signed,
and to put people in prison if they
refused to pay. But when Parliament
came together, Eliot made the great
speech about which we read on page
the anniversary of two of his great
victories, Dunbar and Worcester, the
894-a speech which made everyone
more resolute than ever to resist the
king's unlawful demands. This made
Charles so angry that he had Eliot
thrown into prison, and kept in close
confinement, so that he became very
ill ; and still Charles would not make
the imprisonment any the less severe,
so that after two years Sir John died.
And men loved his memory, for he had
been a very noble gentleman, caring
nothing for his own ease, but ready to
endure all things if so he might help
to keep England a free nation .
WENTWORTH . WHO DESERTED
THHOMAS
ON
THE PEOPLE'S SIDE & TOOK THE KING'S
Very different was Wentworth , who
had been Eliot's friend ; for, just after
Charles had signed the declaration,
Wentworth went over to the king's side ,
so that the other side , of which he had
DOTTI

1892
 RALES
-MEN OF THE GREAT REBELLION
been a chief, gave him the name of the
a So he was slain, and the king gave
Apostate, which means a man who has
deserted a great cause. But from that
time there was no man who wrought so
shrewdly or so sternly to make the king
all-powerful as Thomas Wentworth ;
either because, having seen that there
was no hope of king and Parliament
ruling in agreement , he thought the rulo
of the king would be better than the
rule of Parliament; or, as a great poet
has thought, because he loved the king
and hoped thus to save him from des-
truction ; or for some other reason .
At any rate, this Wentworth , with the
grim face and the fathomless, unsmiling
eyes, was sent first to rule the North of
England and then Ireland. With an
iron hand he ruled, careless of law, but
careless, too, whether the foes he
crushed were strong or weak ; and all
had to obey his will ; while for eleven
years he ruled without any Parliament.
But a time came when Charles needed
more money than he dared demand
without Parliament's consent ; and when
the Parliament met , seeing how strong
and clever a servant Charles had
in Wentworth, who was now Lord
Strafford, and that if Strafford lived
he might make the king too strong for
Parliament, they charged him with
treason before the House of Lords.
OW THE MAN WHO DESERTED A GREAT
Hºw
CAUSE WAS DESERTED BY THE KING
Yet Strafford stood up and defended
himself against every charge SO
shrewdly and skilfully that they saw
the Lords must let him free .
Then they resolved to pass a special
Act of Parliament, declaring that
Strafford was dangerous to the State,
and must be beheaded - since they
could not prove that he had broken
the laws which would have made
him guilty of treason . And all the
people called for the blood of Strafford ;
yet he could not lawfully die unless
the king consented to his death .
At last , fearing the wrath of the
people, and that if Strafford were not
slain they would clamour for the life of
the queen , whom they hated no less,
Charles yielded his consent, even
though he had promised Strafford that
not a hair of his head should be harmed .
Can we wonder at Strafford's bitter ex-
clamation when he heard of the betrayal
_ " Put not your trust in princes ! ”
1893
up to death his most faithful servant.
And now there was none left who could
save him from his own doom.
Yet because Strafford fell before his
work was completed, he could not
prevent the rebellion, and what he had
done only made the Parliament the
more afraid of what the king might do
unless his power were bridled. So that,
although Strafford did not live to see
the rebellion himself, yet he was in great
part the cause of it.
ARCHBISHOP WHO HELPED TO
THEABOUT BRING
THE REVOLUTION
Another man whose doings went far
to rouse the anger of the people against
the king and his ways was William
Laud , who was Bishop of London and
then became Archbishop of Canterbury.
Very many of the people at that time,
throughout the country as well as in
Parliament, were Puritans ; that is ,
they were Protestants who had a
great fear and hatred for the Roman
Catholic Church, and were very ready
to think that the clergy, and especially
the bishops, meant to bring the country
back to what they called Popery ; and
this they feared all the more because
the king had married a French wife
who was a Roman Catholic. But when
they saw men like Laud set at the head
of the clergy, they were the more
angry and alarmed ; because there
were many practices and doctrines of
the Roman Church which Laud taught
and copied in the English Church ,
holding that this was what the English
Church was meant to teach .
THE TWO FRIENDS WHO RULED ENGLAND
THESTERNLY AND WERE PUT TO DEATH
And, being archbishop , Laud forced
the clergy, many of whom were willing
enough , to follow these ideas, trying to
make everyone gojust in the way that he
thought best , although there were many
people whose consciences would not
suffer them to do these things. And in
these things the king gave him counten
ance, while both he and the clergy who
agreed with him taught that the king
ought to be obeyed in all things. So
that the Puritans became very angry,
and began to think that the governing
of the English Church ought to be
taken away from the bishops, and
another plan followed which is called
Presbyterianism ; while others thought
TO
 TERROUILOO
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
the congregation of each church ought
to have the right of choosing its own
ministers and managing its own affairs.
And when they charged Strafford with
treason , they charged Laud also ; and
him, too, they put to death, though not
till some years later. Strafford and
Laud had been great friends, and it
was they two who gave the name of
' Thorough ” to the way of governing
that they had practised . The picture
on the next page shows us how , when
Strafford wason his way to be executed ,
he passed by the window of Laud's
prison , and kneeled down to receive
the old archbishop's blessing.
HN PYM , WHO ROSE AGAINST THE MAN
JowWHO HAD BEEN HIS FRIEND
We have seen how brave Sir John
Eliot died in prison, and how Went- remained in London to direct the
worth changed sides ; now let us look counsels of the Parliament, being
at the third of those men who had
done most to force King Charles to
sign the Petition of Right. This was
John Pym, a country gentleman who
was also a lawyer. Now he, being a
friend of both Eliot and of Wentworth ,
knew that when Wentworth joined the
king's party he must thenceforth be
reckoned the most dangerous
deadly foe of freedom . Therefore,
when the Parliament met again after
so long a time, as we have seen, it was
John Pym who first ventured to rise up
and attack the king, and who did every-
thing in his power to bring about the
destruction of the man who had once
been his friend . It was Pym who
most roused the people in the country,
and whose words carried most weight
in Parliament . He was the boldest as
well as the shrewdest of all the Parlia-
ment men, and now there stood beside
him one who was not, indeed, so
skilled an orator, but who was not less
honoured for the nobility of his
character, John Hampden.
PYM AND JOHN HAMPDEN
JOHA
THE NATION AGAINST THE KINO
Now, these two had some ado both
to give heart to those who feared the evils
of a civil war more than they hated
tyranny, and to restrain those who
were too hasty to take thought quietly
how best liberty might be secured.
But so great was Pym's influence, so
mightily were men swayed by his
words, that he came to be called King
Pym by his opponents, in mockery, but
in admiration by his friends. And
those two, more than any others, the
king himself sought to overthrow , so
that one day he came suddenly down
to the House of Parliament, where the
Commons were sitting, having with
him a band of soldiers, and willing there
to arrest them with three others even
in the Parliament itself. But they,
having warning, had gone down the
Thames by boat into the city of Lon
don, where they were too well loved for
the king to dare attempt their capture.
So Charles retired in dudgeon , and
after that it was but a few months
before there was open war between
the army of the king and the army of
the Parliament .
Now, when the war began , John Pym
already near sixty years old ; and this
he did with great wisdom and shrewd
ness until he died, about a year and a
half after the war began . But John
Hampden went at the head of a troop
of horse which he had raised at his own
cost , to be one of the leaders of the
army of the Parliament in battle .
and
BRAV E JOHN HAMPDEN IS STRUCK
BY A BULLET IN BATTLE
DOWN
This was that John Hampden , of
whom we have read on page 894, who,
when the king, ruling without Parlia .
ment , put an unlawful tax upon the
people , refused to pay it , and was
punished by the judges, who were afraid
to give judgment against the king's will.
He was a man who tried always to
do what he counted right, at whatever
cost , so that even his foes honoured
him ; and once it was said that it was
only his coolness and wisdom which
had restrained the king's party and
the Parliament party within the House
of Commons from falling upon each
other even in the House itself. There
LEAD fore all men were grieved, even the
king's men, who were now called
Royalists or Cavaliers, when John
Hampden was struck down by a
bullet in the fight of Chalgrove Field ;
for they knew that when he died the
chance was less than it had been that
the two sides might yet find some way
of agreement .
At the outset of the war, the greater
part of the Parliament armies were made
up of townsmen, who were brave
1894
 KILOMETER CEX
-MEN OF THE GREAT REBELLION Mannara
. QUO TELO

enough, but lacked skill in fighting ; and slaying, or stopping to plunder.

and their leaders were noblemen , who
would have been willing enough to
make peace with the king and their own
friends who were fighting on his side.
But on the king's side were most of the
corintry gentry and their tenants,
practised swordsmen and horsemen .
And on that side the leader of the
cavalry was Prince Rupert of the
Rhine, son of the king's sister who had
been wedded to the Elector Palatine .
ARCHBISHOP LAUD GIVING HIS LAST BLESSING TO STRAFFORD FROM HIS PRISON WINDOW
So that it happened many times that ,
when they gotback to the field of battle ,
the rest of the “ Roundhead ” army, as
the Parliament army came to be called,
had beaten off the rest of the Royalists.
But it was not till Oliver Cromwell had
trained the troopers , who were called
the Ironsides, that Rupert ſairly met his
match ; for they charged each other in
the great fight of Marston Moor, and Ru
pert's gallants were driven off the field .

The Earl of Strafford and Archbishop Laud were great friends in their private lives, and colleagues in the
government of England ; and they ruled the people as with an iron hand. In the early days of Charles the
First, when the voice of the people began to be heard, Charles, while he was still king, suffered them both
to be charged with treason and put to death. Strafford died first , and this picture shows him on his way
to be executed, passing by the window of Laud's prison, kneeling down to receive the old archbishop's blessing.
It was Rupert's nephew who, many But then Cromwell halted his men,
years afterwards, became our King and drew them together and came back,
George I. In many ways Rupert was a and fell upon the other part of the
good soldier of a great courage ; and Royalist army which was pressing the
when he led a charge of the Cavaliers, Roundheads hard, andso won the first
they were wont to be irresistible, great victory for the Parliament . Yet
sweeping all before them . But then the after that, at Naseby fight, Rupert
fiery Rupert often forgot that , when he made his old mistake of charging on,
had routed the ranks in front of him , it after breaking the opposing line; and
was time to halt his men and turn them when he came back at last he found the
gainst other of the enemy's troops; whole of the Cavalier army scattered
and his men would go on pursuing in utter rout . Afterwards Rupert
BrodUmumi
1895
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF MEN AND WOMEN
tried his hand as a sailor, and showed himself
not less daring, and he also showed himself
a keen student of science. He discovered a
way of making drawings on metal by means
of chemicals, so that a number of copies
could be printed off, which is called mezzo
tint ; and he is remembered for that , as well
as for his fame as a dashing leader of cavalry.
But now let us look at two more PYM
MammooDUmma

STRAFFORD
Cavaliers. First see Lucius Carey, Lord Falk
land . When first the Parliament met which
was called the Long Parliament , he stood on
the same side as Pym and Hampden , hoping
that the king and the Parliament might both
learn wisdom and come to agreement. But
when he saw them growing month by month
more bitterly at enmity, till the Parliament
Uomo

LAUD seemed to be grasping at the whole power, he IRETON

went over to the king's side, fearing the
tyranny of Parliament more than the tyranny
of the king. He strove, however, to bring
about peace between the two, though in that
great crash of opposing wills there were none
who would listen to counsels of gentleness.
Therefore, in sadness of soul, Falkland chose
loyalty before liberty ; and when he was slain
inbattle, men said that he had died willingly .
RUPERT The other is the hero of the Royalist cause HAMPDEN
in Scotland, James Graham of Montrose, whom
men called the Great Marquess. Now he, like
Falkland, was at the first on the side of the
people against the king, but presently came to
think that the leaders of the people would
prove the more tyrannous of the two.
While in England the country was split in
twain , in Scotland it seemed at first as if the
CAREY king's cause were hopeless. Yet Montrose suc ELIOT
ceeded in gathering together some Highland
clansmen ; and so swiftly did he lead them from
place to place , and so fierce was the onset of
his men , that he won victory after victory over
larger forces, and none could guess where he
would strike his next blow . But at Philip
haugh his little army was shattered by a
larger one under a skilful general, and so the
Royalist cause was lost .
MONTROSE Nevertheless, when King Charles had BRAUSHAW
been killed, Montrose made one more
effort to win Scotland for Charles II .
Once more, however, the odds against
him were too great, and, wandering
alone, he fell into the handsof an enemy
whom he had counted a friend, and
was tried for treason , and condemned
to be hanged. But in all the war there
was no leader more loved by his
followers than the Great Marquess.
The next stories of Men and Women
CHARLES THE FIRST Degin on page 1995. OLIVER CROMWELL
Tommt
1896
 The Child's Book of
STORIES
THE LORDS OF THE GREY & WHITE CASTLES
This story is another ofthe stories told by “ Granny's Wonderful Chair ,” described on page 1013.
NCE upon a time
ONCI there lived two
CONTINUED FROM 1795
noble lords in the east
country . In the midst of
his land each lord had a stately
castle ; one was built of the white
freestone , the other of the grey
granite. So the one was called Lord
of the White Castle, and the other
Lord of the Grey.
The Lord of the Grey Castle had a
little son , and the Lord of the White
a little daughter ; and when they
feasted in each other's halls, it was
their custom to say : “ When our
children growup they will marry, and
have our castles and our lands.”
So the lords and their little children
and tenants lived happily till one
Michaelmas night , as they were all
feasting in the hall of the White
Castle, there came a traveller to the
gate. He had seen many strange
sights and countries, and , like most
people, he liked to tell his travels. So
the Lord of the White Castle said :
66
Good stranger, what was the
greatest wonder you ever saw in all
your travels ? "
““ The most wonderful sight that
ever I saw ," replied the traveller,
was at the end of yonder forest,
where in an ancient wooden house
there sits an old woman weaving her children missed their fathers ; the ten
own hair into grey cloth on an old
crazy loom . When she wants more
yarn she cuts off her own grey hair,
and it grows so quickly that though
I saw it cut in the morning , it filled
1897
the room before noon ."
When the traveller
had gone on his way ,
the Lord of the White
Castle could neither eat nor sleep
for wishing to see the old woman
that wove her own hair. At length
he made up his mind to explore the
forest in search of her ancient house,
and told the Lord of the Grey Castle
his intention .
So the two agreed to set out
privately, lest the other lords of the
land might laugh at them. The Lord
of the White Castle had a steward
who had served him many years, and
his name was Reckoning Robin. To
him he said :
“ I am going on a long journey
with my friend. Be careful of my
goods, and, above all things, be kind
to my little daughter Loveleaves till
my return .”
The Lord of the Grey Castle also
had a steward who had served him
many years, and his name was Wary
Will. To him he said :
“ I am going on a journey with my
friend . Be careful of my goods, and,
above all things, be kind to my little
son Woodwender till my return ."
So these lords kissed their children
while they slept, and set out. The
ants missed their lords. None but the
stewards could tell what had become
of them ; but seven months wore away
and they did not come back . The
lords had thought their stewards
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
faithful, because they served so well they looked handsome as ever, while
under their eyes ; but, instead of that , “ Hardhold and Drypenny grew crosser
both were proud and crafty, and, and uglier every day.
thinking that some evil had happened The crafty stewards did not like this.
to their masters, they set themselves to They thought their children ought to
be lords in their place. look genteel, and Woodwender and
Reckoning Robin had a son called Loveleaves like young swineherds ;
Hardhold , and Wary Will a daughter so they sent them to a wilder pasture,
called Drypenny. Their fathers re- still nearer the forest, and gave them
solved to make a young lord and lady two great black hogs, more unruly than
of them ; so they took the silk clothes all the rest , to keep.
which Woodwender and Loveleaves used One sultry day, about midsummer,
to wear to dress them , clothing the Woodwender and Loveleaves sat down
in the shadow of a mossy
rock . Woodwender saw that
the two great hogs were
missing. Thinking they must
have gone to the forest, the
poor children ran to search
for them , but , though they
searched for hours , no trace
of the
see
favourite hogs could
be n.
At last they saw a lady
coming along the path. In
her right hand she carried a
holly -branch , and the most
remarkable part of her dress
N. was a pair of long sleeves , as
green as the very grass.
“ Who are you ? she
said. And the children told
her their story, and how
they had lost the hogs.
" Well," said the lady,
" you are the fairest pig
keepers that ever came this
way . Choose whether you
will go home and keep pigs
for Reckoning Robin and
Wary Will , or live in the
free forest with me."
“ We will stay with you ,"
said the children, " for we
One moonlight night in walked a great bear. " Good -evening, bear ! "
6 do not like keeping pigs !
said Lady Greensleeves. “ What is the news in yourneighbourhood ? "
While they spoke , the
lords’ children in rags. The stewards' lady slipped her holly -branch through
children sat at the chief tables, and the ivy, as if it had been a key .
slept in the best chambers, while Presently a door opened in the oak ,
Woodwender and Loveleaves were sent and there was a fair house . When they
to mind the pigs and sleep on straw in stepped in , the lady said :
the granary . A hundred years I have lived here,
The poor children had no one to take and my name is Lady Greensleeves. I
their part . Every morning at sunrise have no friend or servant except my
they were sent out to watch a great herd dwarf Corner, who comes to me at the
of pigs on a wide, unfenced pasture hard end of harvest."
by the forest . Still , Woodwender and By this time the children saw how
Loveleaves comforted each other, saying welcome they were. Lady Greensleeves
their fathers would come back ; so gave them deer's milk and cakes
Preranno MDGTIE trgoTUOTT VOULE XXIIXTULURUOKDALIZKLOrn
1898
 -THE LORDS OF THE GREY AND WHITE CASTLES.....
nut -flour, and soft green moss to sleep someone makes them pause in their
on ; and they forgot all their troubles. work before the sun sets .”'
All that summer Woodwender and In the morning the children went
Loveleaves lived with her in the great to Lady Greensleeves and said :
6
vak- tree ; and the children would have “ We have heard what the raven
been happy, but that they could hear told last night , and we know the two
no tidings of their fathers. At last the lords are our fathers ; tell us how the
)
leaves began to fade, and the flowers to spell may be broken ! '
fall. ; Lady Greensleeves said that “ I fear the king of the forest fairies,"
(
Corner was coming ; and one moon- said Lady Greensleeves ; “ but I will
light night she set her door open, saying tell you what you may do. At the
she expected some old friends to tell her end of the path which leads from this
the news of the forest . Then in walked dell turn your faces to the north,
a great brown bear.
Good -evening, lady ! "
said the bear .
" Good- evening, bear ! "
said Lady Greensleeves .
“ What is the news in your
neighbourhood ? "
Not much , " said the
bear ; " only the fawns are
growing very cunning - one
can't catch above three in
a day.”
(6 9)
That's bad news, ” said
Lady Greensleeves ; and in m
flew a great black raven.
“ Good - evening, lady ! ”
-

said the raven .

" Good -evening, raven ! ”
said LadyGreensleeves.
“ What is the news in your
neighbourhood ? "
" Not much ," said the
raven ; " only in a hundred
years or so we shall be very
private—the trees will be so
thick .”
“ How IS that ? " said
Lady Greensleeves.
6
“ Oh ! ” said the raven , White
' have you not heard how R.MILAR..2
the king of the forest fairies
laid a spell on two noble lords Ina great opening where the oaks grew thinnest, Loveleaves and
whowere travelling through Woodwender saw their own fathers busy digging and planting acorns.
his dominions to see the old woman that and you will find a narrow way sprinkled
weaves her own hair ? They had thinned over with black feathers - keep that
his oaks every year, cutting firewood for path, and it will lead you straight to
the poor ; so the king met them in the the ravens' neighbourhood, where you
likeness of a hunter, and asked them to will find your fathers planting acorns
drink out of his oaken goblet , because under the forest trees. Watch till
the day was warm ; and when the the sun is near setting, and tell them the
two lords drank they forgot their most wonderful things you know to
lands and their children, and thought make them forget their work ; but be
of nothing in all this world but the sure that you tell nothing but truth ,
planting of acorns, which they now and drink nothing but running water,
do day and night in the heart of the or you will certainly fall into the
forest, anů will never cease till power of the fairy king."
1899
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
The children thanked her for this may do for woodcutters, but not for
good counsel ; and they soon found the such fair children as you . Were you
narrow way sprinkled over with black not reared in palaces ?" But the boy
feathers. On the evening of the seventh and girl answered him : “ No ; we were
:

day they came into theravens' neigh- reared in castles, and are the children
bourhood, and in a great opening where of yonder lords ; tell us how the spell
the oaks grew thinnest , the children saw that is upon them may be broken !
their own fathers busy digging and And immediately the hunter turned
planting acorns. The children called from them with an angry look, poured
them by their names, and ran to kiss out the milk upon the ground, and went
them , each saying : “ Dear father, come away with his empty goblet.
back to your castle and your people ! ” When the sun grew warm at noon ,
But the lords replied :
66
they went again to drink at the running
We know of no castles and no stream . Then there came through the
people. There is nothing in all this oaks another hunter, and in his hand he
world but oak-trees and acorns." carried an oaken goblet , filled with mead
Loveleaves and Woodwender sat to the brim. This hunter also asked
down, and ate some food in great them to drink , told them the stream
sorrow . When they had finished, was full of frogs, and asked them if
both went to a stream hard by and they were not a young prince and
began to drink the clear water ; and as princess. But when Woodwender and
they drank there came through the Loveleaves answered as before : “ We
oaks a gay young hunter, and in his have promised to drink only running
hand he carried a huge oaken goblet. It water, and are the children of yonder
was filled with milk up to the brim . lords ; tell us how the spell may be
And as the hunter came near he said : broken ! ” he turned from them with
“ Fair children, leave that muddy an angry look , poured out the mead,
water, and come and drink with me . and wenthis way.
But Woodwender and Loveleaves All that afternoon the children
answered : " Thanks, good hunter ; but worked beside their fathers, planting
we have promised to drink nothing but acorns with the withered branches ;
running water." but the lords would take no notice of
Still the hunter came nearer with his them or of their words. When the
goblet , saying : “ That water is foul ; it evening drew near , they were very
பணணவனை

The hunter turned from Woodwender and Loveleaves with an angry look, and poured the wine on the grass.
1900
 GLEDER
THE LORDS OF THE GREY AND WHITE CASTLES ...
hungry ; so the children divided their When you see them listening, catch up
last cake , and when no persuasion would their wooden spades, and keep them , if
make the lords eat with them , they you can , till the sun goes down . ”
went to the banks of the stream and Woodwender and Loveleaves thanked
began to eat and drink. the raven , and, running to the lords,
The ravens were coming home to began to tell as they were bid. As the
their nests in the high trees ; but one, children related how they had been
that seemed old
andweary ,alighted
near them to drink
at the stream . As
they ate the ravens
lingered , and
picked up the small
crumbs that fell .
“ Brother," said
Loveleaves, “ this
raven is surely
hungry ; let us
give it a little bit ,
though it is our
last cake ."
Woodwender
agreed , and each
gave a bit to the
raven ; but its LH.R. MILLAR
great bill finished Woodwender, catching up his father's spade, ran to the stream and threw it in.
the morsels in a Loveleaves did the same for the Lord of the White Castle. The spell was then broken .
moment, and, hopping nearer, it looked made to sleep on straw , how they had
them in the face by turns. been sent to mind pigs, the acorn
“ The poor raven is still hungry,” planting grew slower, and at last the
said Woodwender, and he gave it lords dropped their spades. Then Wood
another bit. When that was gobbled, wender, catching up his father's spade,
it came to Loveleaves, who gave it aa bit ran to the stream and threw it in . Love
too , and so on till the raven had eaten leaves did the same for the Lord of the
the whole of their last cake .
66
White Castle. That moment the sun
" Well,” said Woodwender, “ at disappeared behind the western oaks,
least we can have a drink.” But as and the lords stood up , looking, like
they stooped to the water, there came men newly awake, on the forest , on the
through the oaks another hunter, and sky, and on their children.
in his hand he carried a huge oaken Woodwender and Loveleaves went
goblet , filled to the brim with wine. home rejoicing with their fathers. The
He also said : silk clothes and the best chambers
“ Leave this muddy water, and drink
)
were taken from Hardhold and Dry
with me.” penny and given to the lords' children
But the children said : again ; and the wicked stewards, with
“ We will drink nothing but this their cross boy and girl, were sent to
water, and yonder lords are our fathers ; mind pigs.
tell us how the spell may be broken ! As for Woodwender and Loveleaves ,
The hunter turned from them with they met with no more misfortunes,
an angry look, poured out the wine on but grew up, and were married , and
the grass, and went his way. When he inherited the two castles and the lands
was gone, the old raven looked up into of their fathers. Nor did they forget
their faces, and said : the lonely Lady Greensleeves, for it
“ I have eaten your last cake, and was known in the east country that she
will tell you how the spell may be and her dwarf Corner always came to
broken . Before the sun sets, go to the feast with them at Christmas -time, and
lords , and tell them how their stewards at midsummer they always went to live
used you, and made you mind pigs. with her in the great oak in the forest.
ombor
1901
 CLOU ZULCE CULDA COLORE

THE KING'S DAUGHTER IN THE MOUNTAIN

THE STORY OF CUPID AND PSYCHE
IN the ancient days there lived in Greece of mating you to a monster, married you
a king who had three daughters. myself in secret. Farewell ! ”
Psyche, the youngest daughter, was of And , spreading out his wings, he flew
remarkable beauty. away. In the morning Psyche bravely
When she passed through the streets set out to follow him , and, after sadly
people threw down flowers for her to wandering over the world, she came to
walk on. They worshipped her. But the palace of Queen Venus . There she
when the time came for her to marry , remained as a servant, in the hope of see
the king was commanded by a mys. ing Cupid. But Venus recognised her,
terious voice to take her to a wild and, being more angry with her than
mountain, and leave her there. before, she set her on dangerous tasks
Alas !” cried the people. Our in order to bring about her death .
lovely Psyche is about to be sacrificed ! ” Psyche , however, was so gentle and
And so, indeed, she was. The people lonely and sorrowful that everything on
had said that Psyche was more beauti- earth took her part and helped her.
ful than Venus herself. Now, Venus Then Venus laid a plot against her.
was the Spirit of Beauty, and, though “ Take the Golden Casket to the
what the people said was true , Venus Queen of the Dead ,” she said, “ and ask
was very angry. She had a son named her to fill it with the magic Ointment of
Cupid, who was the Spirit of Love, and Beauty."
she bade him marry Psyche to the Psyche knew that no mortal had ever
ugliest creature on earth. returned from the Land of the Dead , and
So when Psyche was placed on the in her despair she climbed a tower to
mountain, a wind fairy came and carried throw herself down and die . But the
her to a strange palace. There the very stones took pity upon her, and said :
maiden was waited on by unseen spirits , Do not despair. You will find a
who played sweet music and served her way to the Land of the Dead on Mount
with delicious food . But in the dark Tartarus . Go there, and take two
night someone came and spoke tenderly copper coins in your mouth and two
to her ,and she fell in love with him , and honey -cakes in your hands.”
consented to be his wife . Then he said : Psyche gladly did so. She came to
Psyche, you may do what you will the Land of the Dead , and a ghostly
in this palace which I have built for you . ferry-man ferried her over the River of
But one thing you must not do. You)
Death, and took one of her copper coins.
must not try to see my face . ” Then a horrible dog with three heads
He was very sweet and kind to her, sprang at her, but she fed him with a
but as he came only in the night-time, honey-cake, and he let her pass. The
Psyche felt very lonely in the day-time . Queen of the Dead filled the Golden
One day the wind fairy brought her Časket, and by means of the last honey
sisters to see her, and they made her cake and the last copper coin Psyche
very unhappy. They told her that, by returned to the green, brightearth .
command of Venus, Cupid had married She then opened the casket to see
her to a monster. what was inside . Alas, this was just
“ That's what your husband is ! ” what Venus had expected she would
they said. “ And that's why he will do ! The casket was full of poisonous
not let you see his face ! ” vapour. This vapour rushed up into
The next night Psyche lighted a lamp, Psyche's face and overcame her, and she
and looked at her sleeping bedfellow . fell down on the grass . But Cupid had
He was Cupid , the winged and radiant been watching her in all her trials , and
Spirit of Love ! In her joy, Psyche he now flew to her aid , and wiped the
tilted the lamp, and a drop of hot oil vapour from her face. Then , taking
fell on his shoulder, and aroused him . her in his arms, he spread out his wings,
' Ah , Psyche ! ” he cried . “ We and carried her up to the Land of Im
must part. My mother will now know mortality. And there they still live
that I fell in love with you, and instead together in unending joy.
1902
 SPREADING OUT HIS WINGS CUPID FLEW AWAY

NTPEDDIE

Psyche was so beautiful that Venus, the Spirit of Beauty , hated her, and sent Cupid to marry her to the ugliest
creature on earth. But Cupid fell in love with her and married her in the dark, forbidding her to gaze on his face.
One night, however, Psyche lighted a lamp , and when a drop of oil fell on Cupid and awakened him , he fled.
20 1903 *** BRERODROU
BR
 THE WISHING TABLE
A COUNTRY tailorhadagoat,andhis
three sons used to take the goat
out to feed in turn .
One day the eldest son took her to a
churchyard, where she ate her fill of
sweet grass. On the way home again he
asked her :
My goat, have you had enough to
eat ? ' And she answered :
" Not a blade could I touch ,
I have eaten so much . ">
When she was safely back in the
stable and the old tailor asked his son if
she had had plenty to eat, he replied :
" Not a blade could she touch , she
has eaten so much ."
The tailor, however, feeling a little
uncertain , went to the stable and asked
the goat if she had really had enough
to eat . To his great amazement, the
goat answered :
6
' How can I but hungry feel ,
As round the little graves I steal
And fail to get a proper meal ? "
The tailor was furiously angry, and,
running to his son , he exclaimed :
“ You have told me a lie in saying
that the goat had plenty to eat , while
all the time she is hungry ! "
Then he seized his yard measure,
and beat his son out of the house .
The next day the second son took
the goat out to pasture, and exactly
the same thing happened , with the
result that the angry father drove him
also out of doors. On the third day the
remaining son took the goat out, and
the samething happened again.
The old tailor was now left alone,
and had to take the goat out himself.
He watched , and saw that she ate well,
and towards evening he asked her :
“ Have you had milough to eat,
goat ? ” And the goat replied :
“ Not a blade could I touch,
I have eaten so much . "
Then the tailor took her home and
tied her up in the stable ; but before
leaving her he said :
“ Are you quite sure that you have
had enough to eat for once ? ”
Then , to his utter amazement, the
goat gave the usual answer :
“ How can I but hungry feel ,
As round the little graves I steal
And fail to get a proper meal? ”
ITTYYTY
1904
The tailor almost fell to the ground
***************
with astonishment, and he saw how
unjustly he had treated his three sons .
He decided to punish the goat , and did
this in a very odd way , for he lathered
the goat's head all over, and then shaved
off all the hair. He next fetched his
whip and drove the animal away.
In the meantime the eldest son went
to a joiner's shop and spent many
months in learning his trade. At the
end of his apprenticeship his master,
who was pleased with him , gave him a
table which, though nothing extra
ordinary to look at, yet had one very
curious quality. If anyone said to it ,
“ Serve up a meal, table ,” it was
instantly covered with a white cloth ,
with knives and forks, and dishes con
taining all kinds of nice food .
The young man now saw that he
would never want for something to eat,
and soon afterwards he decided to go
back to his father to see if his anger
had passed away. On his way home
he had to stay one night at an inn
where there were many guests. They
invited him to share their supper, but
he replied :
" I will give you a supper instead .”
Then he set down his table in the
middle of the room and said , “ Serve
up a meal, table ,” when it at once was
covered with dishes of delicious food .
All the guests sat down and enjoyed
themselves greatly ; whtle the landlord ,
in a corner of the room , said to himself :
“ I could make good use of such a
table as that.”
After the young man and his friends
had gone to bed, the landlord changed
the table for another of the same size
that he happened to possess ; and in
the morning the joiner went merrily off,
never suspecting that he was carrying
the wrong table.
When he reached home his father
greeted him with great joy, and asked
what that old table meant that he was
carrying on his back. The son ex
plained that it was a wishing table ,
and asked his father to invite a number
of his friends, so that they might have
proof of the table's power.
As soon as the guests had assembled ,
the son ordered the table to serve up
a meal; but, to his amazement, nothing
 THE WISHING TABLE
whatever happened. He then saw that then call out ‘ Bricklebrit, when a
the table had been changed , and he was shower of sovereigns will fall out of his
so greatly ashamed of having appeared mouth .” The young miller then decided
to deceive his father that he ran away . to go back to his father, as he saw his
Meantime the second of the tailor's way to be a rich man all the rest of his
sons entered a mill to learn the business. life. On the way he had also to spend
At the end of his apprenticeship the a night at the inn where his brother's
table had been stolen .
After supper , he
asked for his bill, and
AME on feeling in his pocket
discovered that he had
RE spent all his money.
So he asked the land
lord to wait a minute

.
while he went to fetch
Lumina

some . He then started

for the stable, carrying
a tablecloth with him .
The landlord, being
an inquisitive man,
slipped out quietly
after him , and watched
through the keyhole of
thestable door. There
he saw his visitor
spread the tablecloth
on the ground , make
the donkey stand on
"S

it, and at the magic

word “ Bricklebrit ” a
shower of sovereigns
fell from the animal's
mouth . The landlord
then went quietly back
into the house , where
his guest presently
joined him and paid
his bill . During the
night the wicked inn
keeper got up , led the
golden donkey out of
the stable, and put
another one in its place.
On reaching home
his father welcomed
him warmly, but was
by no means pleased
to see the donkey. On
hearing , however ,
what a wonderful
As soon as the invited guests had all assembled, the eldest son ordered the animal this one was,
table to serve up a meal; but, to his amazement, nothing whatever happened. he ran out and called
miller made him a present of a donkey, his neighbours and friends together
remarking that it was a curious animal , to see the donkey that could make
for it would neither carry burdens nor money. The young miller then spread
goin harness. “ But,” added themiller, a cloth on the floor, led the donkey
this donkey yields gold . You have into the room , and called out “ Brickle
only to make it stand on a cloth and - brit.” No gold, however, appeared,
1905
 Em Am
-THE CHILD'S BOOK OF STORIES
)

and the poor young miller at once saw exclaimed, “ Out of the bag, club ! '
what a trick had been played upon him. and in a moment the stick was out and
He, in his turn , like his elder brother, was soundly thrashing the landlord .
was so ashamed that he went away. The young man sat laughing at him ,
But what had become of the younger and presently said :
son ? He had apprenticed himself to The club will never stop beating
a turner, and had worked hard to learn you until you give me the wishing table
the trade . His brothers had written to and the golden donkey."
him , and so he knew about their misfor- The landlord was so exhausted with
tunes with the table and the donkey. pain that he was glad enough to give
At the end of his apprenticeship his up the stolen goods.
master gave him a bag, saying : The next day the young man went
“ You will find a thick club inside it , home to his father, sent for his two
and if anybody treats you badly, brothers, and gave them back their
you have only to cry Out of the property. Showers of sovereigns fell
bag, club !' when it will jump out from the golden ass's mouth , and the
and keep beating your enemy until you wishing table was no sooner placed
say ‘ Back into the bag, club ! ' ” in the room than it was seen to be
Soon afterwards this young man , in covered with a splendid meal. The
his turn , decided to go home. He also poor old tailor had no more need to
stayed at the inn where his brothers work , and he and his three sons lived
had lost their property, and, knowing in luxury and happiness ever after.
what had happened, he was determined The goat who had caused all the trouble
to punish the innkeeper. So at supper- was so ashamed of her shaven head that
time he put the bag on the table, and ,
> she crept into a fox's hole. When the
without opening it, said that he had a fox returned he was alarmed at the sight
treasure in it worth more than all the of this bald-headed creature with two
wishing tables and golden donkeys in horns, and ran off to his neighbour, the
the world . The covetous landlord , think- bear . The bear said that he would soon
ing that the bag must be full of fetch it out , whatever it was ; but one
diamonds, decided to get hold of them. sight of the fiery eyes of the goat
By and by the young man went to made him take to his heels. Just then
bed, and put the bag under his head for a bee came along, and , hearing that some
a pillow . When the landlord thought terrible creature was sitting in the fox's
he was asleep, he crept softly into the hole, he undertook to drive it out . So,
room and began gently pulling at the settling on the shaven head of the goat,
bag. The young turner, who was really he stung her so violently that she fled
wide awake all the time, suddenly away, and has not been heard of since.
THE TREASURE OF RHAMPSINITUS
ONNCE upon a time there was a king in
Egypt whose name was Rhampsini-
there. One night one of the brothers was
caught in the trap. So he said to the
tus, who hadso much money that he was other : The king will certainly put me
afraid itwould get stolen ; so he sent for a to death, and you cannot save me.
clever mason and made him build a very But if you will cut my head off and
strong room to hold all the treasure . take it away, no one will know who I
But he did not know that the mason am , and you will be safe.” So the
had put one stone in the wall which he other brother cut his head off, and took
knew how to take out quite easily. it away, and buried it . But he very
Now , when the mason died he told his much wanted to bury the body, too,
because the Egyptians cared very much
sons about the stone, and so they used
to come by night and carry off as about burying their dead properly . '
much money as they wanted, putting Now. Rhampsinitus guessed that some
the stone back . one would try to get the body, and he
King Rhampsinitus was very angry , hoped by that to find out who it was
when he found that there was less that had helped the dead man to rob
money every time he went to the him . So he had the body hung up in
treasure-house ; so he put a trap chains, and set some soldiers to watch .
1906 ‫ܕܡܪܬܗ‬
 - THE TREASURE
Then the other brother brought a
do nkey past the place with two wine-
bottles on its back , which were made of
skins, in the Egyptian fashion . Just as he
was passing, he opened one of the skins,
so that the winebegan to run out , and he
set up a great outcry. Then the senti-
nels came to help him , and he pretended
to be very grateful , and gave them the
other wine-skin . But the wine in that
was drugged, and the sentinels were very
soon asleep ; whereupon he carried off
the body. But the soldiers were afraid
to say that they had gone to sleep, and
so they declared that the body must
have been carried off by magic .
King Rhampsinitus was puzzled, but
he hit upon what he thought was a clever
idea . Hemade a proclamation that his
daughter had made up her mind to
marry the man who could give the
best answer tosome questions ; but the
suitors must all come to talk to her in the
dark , so as to make sure that she made
her choice without knowing who they
were .
But he told the princess that
she was to make each suitor tell her
the cleverest thing he had ever done.
PUNCH AND JUDY
IT was all the fault of Toby. You know
Toby, of course - Toby, the wicked
little dog belonging to Mr. Scaramouch ,
the showman . Punch one morning was
in a very merry humour. He had got
up early, and put on his scarlet and
yellow dress and his peaked hat with
tassels at the corners , and he was singing
and dancing to himself upstairs as he
waited for his wife Judy and the baby,
to take them out for a walk . Toby,
however , ran up into the room where
Punch was dancing , and Punch tried to
stroke him , saying :
' Hallo, Toby ! How do you do, Mr.
Toby ? Hope you are well, Mr. Toby ? "
But the wicked little dog jumped up
and bit poor Punch's long nose. This
made Punch very cross , and he seized
Toby and threw him out of the window
just as Scaramouch, the showman , was
passing by. Scaramouch rushed into
the house , with a long stick in his hand,
and said to Punch :
“ Hallo ! Hallo ! Hallo ! What have
you been doing to my dog ? Do you
want to learn how to play the fiddle ?
Yes ," said Punch , getting over his
1907
I U
OF RHAMPSINITUS GEXEOLEOGAN
Of course , the mason's son wanted
to try his hand, but he expected that
there was a trap of some sort.
So he made himself a dummy hand
which felt just like a real hand if you
took hold of it , and went to try his luck
with the princess. Of course , when
she asked her question, he said the
cleverest thing he had done was tricking
the guards. Now , this was just what
Rhampsinitus had wanted .
“ Dear me," said the princess, “ that
was clever ! I shall choose you ; give
> >
me your hand.”
But the mason's son suspected her
becaus : of the way she said it , and in
the dark he gave her the dummy hand ,
and slipped out before she knew what
had happened . Then Rhampsinitus
saw that the robber was such a very
clever person that he made another
proclamation to say that he should
not only have a free pardon, but
should really and truly marry the
princess .
And the story says that the mason's
son did marry the princess, and they
lived happily to a good old age.
bad temper in an instant. “ I should
ike to know how to play the fiddle .”
“ Well, isn't that sweet music ? "
said Scaramouch . And he gave poor
Punch a hard, ringing blow on the
back . But , just as he was going to
strike again , Punch wrested the big
stick from his hand , and hit him a
terrific whack , and knocked his head
clean off his shoulders , and then threw
him out of the window .
Punch then became a very dreadful
person . I rather think that the dog
was mad when it bit his nose, and that
Punch caught the madness. When
Judy brought him the baby to mind,
he at first rocked it softly on his knee
and sang to it, but as soon as it began to
cry he threw it out of the window .
I'll teach you to throw the baby
out of the window ! ” cried Judy, hitting
him with the big stick .
" Oh ! Oh ! ” squealed Punch. “ I
don't like such teaching. But perhaps
you do .”
And he seized the stick and thumped
Judy unmercifully, and threw her also
out of the window .
 THE CHILD'S
" Now all the house is quiet at last,"
said Punch . “ I'll go for a ride on my
horse Hector."
But Hector was a very savage horse,
and it threw Punch on the ground ; and
a doctor ran up to give help.
66
Have you had a fall , or are you
taking a nap on the grass ? ” said the
doctor.
“ I'm dead ! dead ! dead ! ” shouted
Punch . “ Or, if I'm not dead, I'm
speechless ."
“ You are shamming ," said the doc-
tor. “ This is the sort of physic you
want. The more you take the better
you'll feel."
And he began to belabour Punch
with the big stick . But , by a desperate
PUNCH
effort, Punch got up, and wrestled
fiercely with the doctor, and got the
stick from
66
him , saying :
What's good for the patient ought
to be good for the doctor. It is now
your turn to take physic.”
And Punch killed the doctor with
one tremendous blow, and set off home,
saying to himself :
* Doctors always die when they take
their own physic ."
On the road home a footman and a
blind man got in his way, and Punch
felled them to the earth with his big
mm
stick . But when he opened the door
of his house there was a policeman
waiting for him .
“ I didn't send for you ,” said Punch .
THE NEXT STORIES BEGIN ON PAGE 1973
TOITOU 10
BOOK OF STORIES
) 6
“ No, I'm sent for you," said the
policeman.
But I don't want a policeman ,” said
Punch .
But a policeman wants you ,” was
the reply. “ You've been murdering
people in a frightful way.”
66 (
Yes," said Punch . This is how
I do it .”
And he knocked the policeman down
with the big stick . An officer then
entered , and after the officer came Jack
Ketch , the hangman .
“ I'm come to take you up,” said the
officer.
(
“ And I'm come to take you
down ," said Punch , knocking the hang
man over , with a great shout of laughter.
AND JUDY
“ But I'm Jack Ketch ," said the
hangman, in an awful, hollow voice.
“ Well,ketch that,then !" cried Punch .
And down Jack Ketch tumbled by the
side of the officer and the policeman .
At last , however, Punch was taken
to prison to be hanged, and the hang
man got the fatal noose ready
66
How shall I put my head into that
thing ? ” said Punch .
" Like this," said the hangman ,
thrusting his neck into the noose .
Punch at once pulled hard at the rope,
and so hanged the hangman , and in
the excitement Punch gotout of prison ;
and you can still see the old rascal
wandering about at the present day with
Scaramouch, the showman , and Toby.
1908
 The Child's Book of
Its Own Life
3 SWEAT CHANNEL
CAPILLARIES
sie
SWEAT
GLAND
True Skin
This is what our skin is like; if we cut a finger where it is marked with a cross, this is how the cut would
look if greatly magnified. The surface of the skin , on the right, shows the ridges greatly enlarged.
THE SKIN AND ITS
SOMEthinkof, usperhaps
may
, CONTINUED FROM 1789
that the skin is not a 200
very interesting part
of the body, but that is very far
from being the case . Even if we
were only to think of the skin as
a material, and were to compare
Be it with silk or indiarubber or paper
or cloth, we should find that it is far
more wonderful than any of these,
and that nothing which human beings
o can make is equal to it . But it is
indeed far more than a material ,
for it is alive, and besides being the
covering of our bodies, it is one of the
instruments by which the brain is made
acquainted with the outer world.
We know that if we do not have
enough light, growth is interfered with,
and the blood becomes pale . Also,
we breathe more deeply under the
influence of light ; and it has been
proved that in a fixed time animals
take in more oxygen and give out
more carbonic acid in the light than
they do in the darkness. This is due
to the effect of the light on the brain ;
but it is not a direct effect, for the
brain itself lives in darkness. It is
due to the way in which certain nerves
running to the brain are affected by
light .
These are the nerves of the eyes
and the nerves of the skin in general .
For instance , an animal does not
breathe so well or deeply if its eyes are
bandaged. But the eyes are not alone
responsible for helping the brain .
1909
23
PORES
OF THE
Outer Skin
SKIN
USES
The skin , also, has
something to do with
200 it , and this is true
even though we can
see by the eyes and not by the
skin . It is good, then , to
expose our faces and our hands
to the light ; and sometimes,
when people are ill, they are helped
to get well again by taking what are
called sun baths, when they take off
their clothes and expose the skin to
the light . It is the action of the light
on the skin that also helps to make
bathing in the open air so pleasant
and healthful. It is probably rather
a drawback to us that we cover up
nearly the whole of our bodies so that
light cannot play upon the skin ; but
it is, at least , well that we should live
in the light as much as possible, and
let our faces and hands be exposed to it .
We must particularly remember
that it is sunlight or daylight to
which , through long ages, our bodies
have become adapted. It is a great
pity wedo not use all the daylight we
can . We suffer in health and strength
through getting up many hours after
the sun , and living by artificial light
after the sun has set . Our bodies
were certainly meant to live in the
open air and in the light of day.
Even the best ventilated building is not
as good as open air, and the best kind
of artificial light is not as good as
daylight .
Now we may pass on to look at the
way in which the skin is made, and
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE -
we may notice some facts about it
which we can all see for ourselves
without special means. In the first
place, the skin is perfectly elastic . If
this were not so we could not move
our bodies ; for every time we move,
the skin is stretched somewhere, and
then , by its elasticity, returns to its
first position. Anyone can see this for
himself by pushing the skin on the back
of his hand into folds, and seeing how
perfectly it comes back again . One
or two cases have been described where
people had skin which had lost its
elasticity, and they found it as difficult
to move as if they had been cased in
stiff armour with no joints.
OW IT IS THAT OUR FACES TELL SOME-
HOW
THING ABOUT OUR CHARACTERS
Even the most elastic thing in the
world , however, has limits to its
power, and this is true of the skin .
We notice that as the years pass the skin
of the face begins to show lines and
folds according to the way in which it
has been moved . This depends upon
our feelings. The bright and happy
person shows his feelings by moving the
skin of his face in a particular way ;
so does the person who is always think-
ing ; so does the person who is gloomy
time lasting worries.
and always marks are in the THE OUTER SKINTHATS
thecourseof
In made
skin of the face , telling us something The outside of the skin , indeed,
about the character of the person . The is made of very much the same
best kind of beauty of the skin lasts material as the nails are made of, or
all one's life, and depends upon the
kind of life we have lived. Age makes
it only more beautiful .
One of the marks of age in the skin
is that it loses its elasticity. Often,
also, it becomes very thin . In ex-
tremely old people the wrinkles that quite distinctly be divided into two
used to be present in the face often
disappear, and the skin becomes thin
and smooth . But we must pass to other
features of this wonderful material.
WATERPROOF MATERIAL IN THE WORLD
The skin has a very beautiful texture.
This has been compared to velvet,to the
skin of a peach, and so on ; but there is
nothing else which has all the qualities
DILO
of the surface of the skin when it is well
cared for and has not been too much
exposed to rough weather . We are so
made that this gives us pleasure.
Everyone likes to rub his finger against
the cheek of a child , for there is
1910
nothing else that feels quite so nice
Another most important feature of
this material is that it is waterproof,
but in one direction only. By means
of certain special arrangements in the
skin , it is able to take water from the
blood and allow it to escape ; but
water cannot enter through the skin ,
not even through the little channels
by which the sweat, or perspiration ,
comes out . It is , of course , most
important that the skin should be
waterproof, and yet it is also most
important that it should be able to
remove water from the blood, as we
shall see. It would be hard to find
any other material allowing water to
pass through it in one direction, while
being perfectly waterproof in the other
direction .
The first use of the skin that occurs
to anyone is, of course, that it protects
all the tissues underneath it from dirt .
If the outside of the skin were itself
alive, it would be bound to suffer
very seriously from the dirt which it
so often encounters ; but almost the
most remarkable thing about the skin
is that, though it is a product of life,
yet the outside of it is not really alive,
just as the tip of aa nail is not really alive.
THAT IS ALIVE
INNER SKIN "SHNOTS
the hoofs of a horse, or various kinds
of horns. Every time we wash - in
deed, every time the skin is rubbed at
all —a great deal of its outer layer is
rubbed off. When we come to study
the skin closely we find that it may
layers, an outer and an inner layer.
The Latin name for the skin is dermis ,
and the inner layer of the skin is called
the dermis, or true skin. It is really
alive ; it bleeds when it is pricked,
and it hurts when it is touched. The
layer that lies outside it is called the
epidermis - epi simply meaning upon.
This epidermis is made by the dermis,
and is being constantly renewed from
moment to moment as it is rubbed off.
It has no feeling in it, for there are no
nerves in it , and it can be rubbed off,
or can even have a needle passed through
it without bleeding, for it has no blood.
vessels in it. You know that it is
 -THE SKIN AND ITS USES
quite easy to pass a needle through the surface of the skin. This tube is
the skin at the tip of a finger without lined with cells, and outside them is
feeling anything, and without drawing a rich supply of capillary blood-vessels.
any blood. The epidermis is very In every part of the skin we find these
thick there, and you simply pass the sweat- glands, and they are working
needle through that. It is the epi- nearly all the time. We must not
dermis that grows over the base of the think that we sweat, or perspire, only
nails. If you are reading very care- when we can see visible drops standing
fully, you will say that anything on the skin. That only happens when
which grows must be alive, and we the sweat-glands are very actively
have just said that the epidermis is at work. But even during an ordinary
not alive. That is perfectly true. day, when you have never noticed at
The thin skin that grows on the all that you are perspiring, the skin
base of the nail is not alive, and does discharges about 25 ounces of sweat.
not grow itself. It is really pushed If we desire to examine sweat to
CELOKUU
TURITEERILID

from behind by the new cells which find what it is made of, we must go
the true skin is forming behind it. to some part of the skin where there
W THE SKIN IS EVER CHANGING & THE is no hair, for hairs have little glands
ELITE

HOWLIVING CELLS PUSH UPWARDS AND DIE

of their own which are of a different
The whole skin is made of cells— kind. You will guess for yourself,
both the true skin and the outer skin,
or epidermis. The cells of the true
skin are alive, and when they grow to
a certain point they divide into two,
and make new cells. This goes on
always. It is in the deeper layers of
the skin that it goes on ; and so it
happens that the cells which have been
already made are pushed upwards and
outwardscells
young towardsthe surface by
formed beneath the.
them
After a time the old cells die ; they
become thin and flat and horny, and
it is they that form the epidermis, or
outer skin . They protect the true skin ,
and the whole of the rest of the body .
A great deal of dirt from outside
soaks into them , but soon they are
rubbed away, and other cells take their
places. In this way we are able to
keep the surface of the body clean changed into something else that is
from day to day. The true skin con- unpleasant. This is one of the chief
tains much more in it besides the cells
which grow and divide and make the
epidermis, but the epidermis itself
has no other structures in it , and
nothing more need be said about it .
TUBES THAT CARRY OFF
THEHELITTLE
'WAFER FROM OUR BODIES
Any part of the body which has the
business of making special fluids is
called a gland ; glands in the stomach,
for instance, make the digestive juices.
Now , we find that the true skin contains
a large number of glands which have a
special purpose ; they are called sweat-
glands, and consist simply of a long
coiled tube, the end of which passes
through the epidermis, and opens on
then, that the place to go to is the
palm of the hand or the sole of the foot ,
where no hair is to be found in any
body. When we examine the sweat
thus obtained, we find that it is 99 per
cent. water ; the remaining i per cent.
is made up of a number of things,
including common salt. Sweat is
slightly acid when it is produced.
STREAMTHROUGH
THEFLOWING OF WATER CONSTANTLY
THE BODY
In course of time the watery part of
sweat passes into the air as water
vapour, but the solid part is left upon
the skin , as the salts of sea-water are
left in the sea when the water passes
into the air . Even the cleanest skin
contains many microbes, and some of
these act upon the solids that are
left from the sweat, so that they are
reasons for keeping the skin clean .
The production of sweat is one of
the most useful things that the skin
does . Some of the solids of sweat are
poisonous substances that the body
needs to be rid of, so that the skin ,
through its sweat-glands, is one of the
channels, like the lungs, by which we
dispose of the waste products of our
lives. But we must not think that
there is no use in the 99 per cent.
of water that is found in sweat . For
one thing, it is good in itself that
there should be a constant stream of
water through the body, because water
helps most chemical actions, and also
because it helps to dissolve and carry
YTULTITLE

1911
 THE CHILD'S BOOK OF ITS OWN LIFE
LEERLINGO
away things we do not want. But the
water in the sweat has a special use
which is of great importance .
It is necessary for the health of all
the higher animals, and specially
necessary for our health , that the tem-
perature of the body should be kept
at a fixed point, no matter whether it
is summer or winter, day or night .
w OUR BODIES ARE
How KEPT COOL IN
SUMMER AND WARM IN WINTER
There must be some way, then , of
regulating the temperature, and this
is done mainly by means of the sweat.
In very hot weather it is necessary for
us to keep cool. The body must lose
much heat somehow or its tempera-
ture will rise above the fixed point There must be some centre which orders
necessary for our health. So we pro- them to act as they are needed. This
duce a great deal of sweat, as everyone
knows, and when the water in it leaves
the skin it takes away a great deal of
heat from our bodies. The same thing
happens even if we put water on the
skin from the outside. If, next time
you wash your hands, you dry only one
of them , you will very soon find that
what we call the evaporation of the
water from the wet hand makes it
much cooler than the other. Then ,
on a very cold day, when we need to
keep all the heat we can , we perspire
only very slightly. Thus, the figure
quoted above -- 23 ounces per day-is
only an average figure . The amount of
sweat produced depends chiefly upon
the body's need for heat.
You must have noticed a dog lying
panting, with its mouth wide open ,
on a very hot day. The dog has
sweat-glands only on the skin of the
pads of its feet , and so it practically
cannot use our method of keeping
cool on a hot day. That is why it
suffers so much from the heat, and has
to breathe quickly so as to get rid of as
much water as possible by its lungs.
T HAPPENS
WHAWHAT WHEN THE WEATHER IS
WE CALL “ CLOSE "
Then, again, you must have noticed
how uncomfortably hot you become
when the weather is whatwe call “ close ."
On another day the sun may be as
hot or hotter, yet we do not feel
oppressed at all. The reason is that
on the days which we call close, or
muggy, there is a great deal of water
already in the air. Now , the more
water there is in the air, the more
1912
slowly can it take up any extra water.
Indeed, sometimes the air may be so
full of water that it will practically take
up no more. This means that the sweat
cannot evaporate from the skin , and so
we cannot become cool in this way . We
are as badly off for the time as the dog,
which can scarcely sweat at all . But
on other days, though the heat of the
sun may be intense, and though the
air around us may be just as hot, yet
it may happen to contain only a little
moisture, and so our sweat evaporates
quickly, and keeps us cool, and we do
not find the heat oppressive at all.
Now , there must be some way in
which the sweat-glands are controlled.
is so . The sweat-centre lies in the
lower part of the brain, and from it
nerves proceed which carry its orders
to the millions of sweat -glands in the
skin .Then , when the blood becomes
too hot, the sweat -centre in the brain
which has the hot blood passing through
it gives an order, and the sweat-glands
are set in vigorous action . There are
various other ways in which the sweat
centre may be disturbed ; for instance,
a person may sweat in great fear, even
though he is quite cold .
DRUES THAT ACT ON THE TINY SWEAT
CENTRE IN THE
But sometimes the sweat - centre is
poisoned and does not act properly.
For instance, during fever, the blood
is too hot, and it is very desirable that
we should sweat ; yet the skin is both
hot and dry. There are many drugs
known which prevent sweating, and some
which produce sweating. The most re
markable of these comes from an African
plant, and a mere fraction of a grain of
it will make the skin simply run with
perspiration. Then there is another drug
which comes from the plant called the
deadly nightshade, and a still smaller
dose of that will prevent all.sweating
for many hours. In both cases these
doses are so very tiny that they could
not possibly act as they do if they had
to be spread out over all the sweat-glands.
But they act on the tiny sweat -centre in
the brain, and that is why so little of them
can produce such powerful results . A little
whisper in the king's ear may do more
than much shouting in the streets !
The next part of this is on page 1961.
Goen Sony The Child's Book ofGOLDEN
3°

TALES OF THE INDIAN MUTINY

In the great, Indian CONTINUED FROM 1804
powder magazine,
Mutiny which where there was a

took place just over huge store of gun

fifty years ago, many heroes per. powder and ammunition. The
formed brave deeds. He re are mutineers were certain to seize
two splendid acts of deliberate this at the first chance , and to
self-sacrifice, both of them done make deadly use of the powder.
at the beginning of the outbreak . The place was very strong. Even
The mutinybegan at Meerut nine men—there were no more
on May 10, 1857 , when, after mur- might hold it for some hours ; help
dering their British officers, a number might come . But if not —well , it was
of sepoy regiments marched to the better that the magazine should be
great city of Delhi, the old capital blown up and its defenders perish
the Mogul Empire. than that it should fall into the hands
In the morning the mounted troops of the mutineers.
were seen approaching Delhi. The So those gallant men placed the
rumour was quickly flying from mouth guns they had where they could be
to mouth that the army had risen used with best effect, and laid a
against the British , and that the white train of powder from the magazine
man's rule in India was at an end . itself to the courtyard where they
The troops poured in ; the mob was must fight. One , named Scully, was
soon raging through the streets seeking in charge, with orders to fire the train
for Englishmen to kill . if he received the signal . Soon the
In the telegraph -office was a young mutineers were swarming round ; but
clerk. He made no attempt to escape, the defenders paid no heed to a de
but stood coolly by his instrument , mand for surrender. Ladders were
flashing his warning along the wires to planted against the walls, yet the
other parts ofthe Punjab. The words little band within poured so hot a fire
of his message show his coolness : " The on the assailants that they were beaten
sepoys have come in from Meerut, off again and again .
and are burning everything . Mr. But the ranks of the enemy grew
Todd is dead , and, we hear, several thicker and thicker. No help came.
Europeans. We must shut up." The And now the enemy were crowding up
wires had hardly carried their message the ladders ; in a few moments they
when the mutineers broke in and cut must force their way in . Then sud
him down . denly there was a terrific roar, and a
Another deed worthy to be re- huge column of smoke spouted up to
membered here is that of Lieutenant the sky. The signal had been given ;
Willoughby and his eight gallant com- Scully had fired the train . The maga
rades, who were in charge of the great zine and its assailants had been blown

τ9Ι3
 THE CHILD'S BOOK
to fragments. Scully died where he fell .
The only wonder is that the rest of the
defenders survived , and five of them re-
ceived the Victoria Cross ; Willoughby,
their gallant leader, was wounded, and
died soon afterwards in Meerut .
Another brave man was Golab Khan ,
a servant of Mr. Greathed , the Commis-
sioner at Meerut. When the mutineers family to escape, though he himself
attacked Mr. Greathed's house, the would certainly have been murdered if
family were in great danger. Then , to
save them , Golab Khan risked his own
THE SLAVE WHO SAVED HIS MASTER
ABBOUT the time of the French Revo-
lution there were uprisings of the
people in other countries besides France ,
attempts to overthrow governments
and to get equal rights for every man .
The spirit of revolution touched the
beautiful island of St. Domingo , in the
West Indies, where dwelt French
creoles and their slaves who worked
in the coffee, sugar, and other planta-
tions on the island ; for a decree ar-
rived from the National Convention
in Paris that there should be equality
of blacks and whites on the island .
This the French creoles refused ; but
the slaves rose to claim their rights,
and much bloodshed followed , until,
in the end , the negroes got power over
the island .
In the dreadful story of that struggle
a name that is remembered with honour
is that of Eustache , a negro on a sugar
plantation. Though an ignorant, un-
taught man , he was by nature very in-
telligent, simple -minded , and good, with
a high standard of duty.
When the slaves rose against their
masters, and massacred them , he saved
the lives of quite four hundred white
people, yet did not betray his fellow-
negroes . He helped his own master,
Monsieur Belin , on board aa vessel sailing
to the United States, so that he might
escape from the island , and, regarding
himself as still his slave , he also boarded
the vessel . An English ship captured
the boat , and though the sailors were a
rough lot , they let the negro have his
liberty. Eustache took advantage of
this to amuse them and divert their
attention while he freed and armed the
prisoners, who then put their captors
under hatches , and sailed for Baltimore.
There Eustache got work , but gave
what he earned to white refugees from
1914
OF GOLDEN DEEDSZKOLE
life , for he went out to the mutineers
and said that if they would come with
him he could show them where the
sahibs, as the natives called the white
people, had hidden themselves. And by
thus tricking the mob , and leading them
from the house , he made it possible
for the British Commissioner and his
the mutineers had found out that he
was leading them astray.
native island . Then , when his
his
master , thinking all safe, ventured
back to the island , Eustache went with
him . But the lives of the French
were still in danger, and Monsieur Belin
had to flee to the shore again . Eus
tache lost sight of him , but managed
to hide some of his property ; and
when he did discover his master, he got
both property and master safely on
board a vessel which also happened to
be sailing for Baltimore.
One of other numerous acts which
show the negro's devotion to that same
master is his learning to read . Was
ever a more generous motive for it
than this ? Finding his master was
troubled by weakening eyesight, Eus
tache got someone to give him lessons
in reading, secretly, at four o'clock each
morning, so that later he was able to
interest and amuse his old master by
reading to him .
It need hardly be said that Eustache's
grateful master freed him , and left
him money, which Eustache well knew
how to use to help people in distress,
though he himself, that he might have
the more to give, lived on his earnings
as a cook .
There were many people who found
а real friend in the good -hearted
negro. He would buy tools for poor
negro.
workmen , apprentice penniless boys
to trades, and find women to nurse and
take care of little children . The fact
that a man , woman, or child was in
trouble was enough to rouse the beau
tiful spirit of benevolence and un
selfishness in this man , a spirit that
was inspired by the service of God ;
for when praised for his deeds, all that he
could reply was that he was not doing
them for man , but for the Master.
The next Golden Deeds are on page 2001.
IDO
 圈 The Child's Story of
FAMOUS BOOKS
A BOOK LIKE “ ROBINSON CRUSOE "
THE Swiss Family Robinson” is not so fine a book as “ Robinson Crusoe,”
“ THEbut it is interesting to young people none the less. The author was a
professor at Bern, the capital town of Switzerland. His name was Johann Rudolf
Wyss, and he was born in 1781, and died in 1830. His story, which is an imitation
of " Robinson Crusoe, ” was first published in German in 1812, and was translated
into English in 1820, since when numberless editions have been published
throughout the English -speaking world . “ The Swiss Family Robinson ” is both
interesting as a narrative of adventure and stimulating to all young readers who
desire to use their brains to the best advantage and to cultivate quickness of decision
and action when in difficulty. Although the author makes many statements about
animals, plants, and vegetables which are quite incorrect and impossible, that does
not detract from the charm of the story. It is a real “ children's book . "

THE SWISS FAMILY ROBINSON

ThesFamily
tory oftheSwiss “ All being ready,
Robinson CONTINUED FROM 1763 we cast off, and moved
opens with a shipwreck away from the wreck. My

somewhere in the South
ern Seas. For many days the
vessel in which the narrator
and his family were voyaging had
been tempest-tossed. Eventually
it was driven completely out of its
course . The crew lost heart , and at
last the captain was heard calling
out : “ Lower away the boats ! We
are lost ! "
The passengers were all below at
this time, and , hastily comforting his
family, the narrator hurried on deck
to see what might be done for their
safety.
“ What was my horror," he says, endeavouring to guide the boat, with
“ when through the foam and spray its precious burden, to a safe landing
I beheld the only remaining boat
leave the ship, the last of the seamen
spring into her and push off, regard-
less of my cries and entreaties that
we might be allowed to share their
slender chance of preserving our lives.
My voice was drowned in the howling
of the blast , and, even had the crew
wished it , the return of the boat was
impossible ."
The stern ofthe ship was jammed
between two high rocks ; the fore-
part was breaking to pieces. The quickly to the shore.
storm still raged . The next morning
the gale moderated, and the survivors
set about finding means of reaching
the land. A kind of boat was speedily
made of rough planks nailed together
and casks sawn in half, and launched .
LIDLA
good, brave wife — who
had been persuaded to put on a
midshipman's dress - left the ship
first. Next her was Franz, a fine
little boy, nearly eight years old.
Then came Fritz — a handsome, spirited
young fellow of fifteen ."
Then a place was found for the pro
visions gathered together, with various
utensils .
“ Then came our bold, thoughtless
Jack ; next him , Ernest, my second
son-intelligent,, well-informed , and
son-intelligent
rather indolent . I myself — the anxious,
loving father - stood in the stern,
place . ”
As yet no special provision could be
made for the animals who were still
alive on board the wreck . These in
cluled two large mastiffs, Turk and
Juno ; a cow, a donkey, two goats,
six sheep, a ram , and a fine sow.
Ten hens and a couple of cocks were
placed on the boat. A number of
ducks and geese were set at liberty.
They took to the water at once, while
several pigeons, also released, flew
The two dogs,
after first setting up a piteous howl
at their apparent desertion,sprang into
the sea, andswam ashore. The landing
was an exciting one in every way.
“ The dogs," the story goes on to
say, had scrambled on shore before

Emericaa HIFUPA
OBRUK
1915
 -THI CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKSunce
us. They received us with loud barking shells being used for drinking the soup,
and the wildest demonstrations ofdelight. instead of spoons.
The geese and ducks kept up an incessant On the following morning, the father,
din , added to which was the screaming with Fritz, proceeded to explore the
and croaking of flamingoes and pen- country. The narrative describes how
guins, whose dominions we were in- they found calabash and cocoa -nut
vading. trees, palm - trees, and sugar-canes, and
ning, but far how the dog Turk , who went with them ,
" The noise was deafening,
from unwelcome to me, as I thought of killed a monkey, and was afterwards
the good dinners the birds might furnish ." made to carry the monkey's little one
W THE FAMILY SPENT THEIR FIRST on his back . Thus they returned to the
HOW
DAY ON THE ISLAND little encampment, which that night was
“ As soon as
we could gather our surprised by jackals. These marauders
children around us on dry land, we knelt were beaten off by the dogs and shot.
to offer thanks and praise for our merciful A visit was next paid by Fritz and his
escape, and with full hearts we com- father to the wreck .
mended ourselves to God's good keeping “ The ship had sailed for the purpose
for the time to come.” of supplying a young colony. She had ,
The feeling of thankfulness increased therefore, on board , in addition to the
when the survivors surveyed their animals before-mentioned, every con
possessions. ceivable article we could desire in our
“ The poultry we left at liberty to present situation. A large quantity of
forage for themselves, and we set about powder and shot we first secured, and as
finding a suitable place to erect a tent Fritz considered that we could not have
in which to pass the night. This we too many weapons, we added three
speedily did. " Thrusting a long spar excellent guns, and a whole armful of
into a hole in the rock , and supporting swords, daggers, and knives. We re
the other end by a pole firmly planted membered that knives and forks were
in the ground, we formed a framework, necessary, and we therefore laid in a
over which we stretched the sailcloth large stock of them , with kitchen
we had brought. Besides fastening this utensils of all kinds.
down with pegs, we placed our heavy THE 1E SPLENDID STORES OF PROVISIONS AND
chest and boxes on the border of the USEFUL THINGS FOUND IN THE WRECK
canvas, and arranged hooks so as to be Exploring the captain's cabin , we
able to close up the entrance at night. discovered a service of silver plate
When this was done, the boys ran and a cellaret of good old wine. We
to collect moss and grass, to spread it in then went over the stores and supplied
the tent for our beds, while I arranged ourselves with potted meats , portable
a fireplace with some large fat stones soups, Westphalian hams, sausages, aa
near the brook which flowed close by. bag of maize and wheat, and
Dry twigs and seaweed were soon in a quantity of other seeds and vegetables .
blaze on the hearth . I filled the iron I then added a barrel of sulphur for
pot with water, and, giving my wife matches, and as much cordage as I
several cakes of the portable soup, she could find.this, with nails, tools,
established herself as our cook , with “ All and
little Franz to help her ." agricultural implements, completed our
THE. .CAMP IS VISITED AT NIGHT BY cargo , and sank our vessel so low that I
PROWLING JACKALS should have been obliged to lighten her
While the father next tried to rescue had not the sea been calm ."
some of the casks that were floating All the time the loading of the craft
near the shore, Jack caught a lobster, was proceeding, communication was
or, rather, the lobster caught him by the kept up with those on shore by means of
leg, and had to be released ; Ernest signals. That night Fritz and his father
reported the discovery of some oysters slept in their boat. The next morning
and salt in the crevices of the rocks ; the fate of the animals still on board the
and Fritz captured an animal which had wreck was debated. Fritz suggested
all the appearance of a sucking- pig. The that, if they could not make a raft for
oysters were opened for the sake of their the animals, swimming -belts might be
shells, as well as for themselves, the made for them .
XXXXXXX
1916
 LEROKEE
THE SWISS FAMILY ROBINSON
“ Really, my boy ,” said his father, to leave the ship. She kicked,struggled ,
that idea is worth having. We may and squealed so violently that I really
get every one of the animals ashore in thought we should be obliged to abandon
that way.” her. At length , however, we succeeded
The first experiment was made with in sending her out of the port with the
a fine sheep others ; and when once in the water,
" I first' fastened a broad piece of such was the old lady's energy, she
linen round it, and to this attached quickly outdistanced them, and was
some corks and empty tins. Then, the first to reach the shore."
with Fritz's help, I fung the animal To the horns or neck of each animal
into the sea. It sank , but a moment a cord with a float was fastened , and
after it rose
and floated HOW THE FAMILY REACHED THE ISLAND as Fritz and
his father
famously . sailed for the
“ Hurrah ! shore, they
exclaimed gathered up
Fritz . “ We the floats and
will treat dragged the
them all like herd after
that . ' We them . On
then rapidly their way a
caught the shark ap
other animals peared , but
and provided was shot by
them , one Fritz . The
after the land was
other, with a safelyreached.
similar contri That night
vance . The the party en
cow ass
and joyed a splen
gave us more did supper of
trouble than soup , ome
did the others, lette , ham and
because we turtles' eggs,
required for Dutch cheese ,
them some butter, bis
thing more cuits, and a
buoyant than bottle of wine .
the mere cork . While Fritz
We at last and his father
found some were away on
empty casks the wreck, his
and fastened mother said to
two to each herself that it
animal by The Swiss Family Robinson escaped from a wreck,which had been would be im
thongs passed deserted by the crew, by making a rough boat of planksnailed possible to live
under it . This together, and sawing half a number of casks, which, being fixed much longer in
done , the in the centre of the rude craft, helped to make the whole sea -worthy. a tent on the
whole herd was ready to start, and rocky shore with the sun beating down
we brought the ass to one of the ports burningly the livelong day. A pretty
to be the first to be launched . little wood in the distance attracted
“ After some manæuvring we got her notice, and thither she directed her
him in a convenient position , and then course with the others who were with
as
a sudden heave sent him plunging into her, leaving all things as secure
the sea. He sank , and then , buoyed up possible in the camping -place.
by the casks, emerged head and back “ At length ," said she, describing
from the water. The cow , sheep, and her adventure, " we approached my
goats followed him , till the sow alone pretty wood . Numbers of birds fluttered
remained . She seemed determined not and sang among the high branches, but I
MOTEUTTA DEITZENDERE
1917
 MODO
THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
did not encourage the boys in their wish “ A scheme occurred to me for con
to shoot any of the happy little creatures. veying one end of a plank across the
We were lost in admiration of the trees water, and I set about it in this way.
of this grove, and I cannot describe to There were, fortunately, one or two
you how wonderful they are, nor can you trees close to the stream on either side .
form the least idea of their enormous I attached a rope near one end of a
size without seeing them yourself.” She beam , and slung it loosely to the tree
simply could not describe their size. beside us. Then , fastening a long rope
He MOTHER'S HAPPY IDEA OF BUILD- to the other end, I crossed with it by
THEING A HOUSE IN THE TREES means of broken rocks and stones , and ,
What we had been calling a wood having a pulley and block, I soon
proved to be a group of about a dozen arranged the rope on a strong limb of
trees only, and, what was strange, the the opposite tree , again returning with
roots sustained the massive trunks the end to our own side .
exalted in the air, forming strong arches, “ Now putting my idea to the proof,
and props and stays around each I brought the ass and the cow , and,
individual stem , which was firmly fastening this rope to the harness I had
rooted in the centre . previously made for them , I drove them
" I gave Jack some twine, and, steadily away from the bank. To my
scrambling up one of the curious open- great satisfaction, and the surprise and
air roots, he succeeded in measuring delight of the boys, the end of the
round the trunk itself, and made it out plank, which had been laid alongside the
to be eighteen yards. I saw no sort of stream , began gently to move, rose higher,
fruit ; but the foliage is thick and turned, and soon projecting over the
abundant, throwing delicious shade on water, continued to advance until ,
the ground beneath, which is carpeted having described the segment of a
with soft green herbage, and entirely free circle , it reached the opposite bank .
from thorns, briars, or bushes of any I stopped my team , the plank rested on
kind . It is the most charming resting the ground, and the bridge was made !
place that ever was seen , and I and the THE FAMILY REMOVE ACROSS THE BRIDGE
boys enjoyed our midday meal im- TO THEIR " NEST " IN THE TREES
mensely in this glorious palace of the “ So, at least, thought Fritz and Jack ,
woods,so grateful to our senses after the who in a moment were lightly running
glare and heat of our journey thither. across the narrow way, shouting
“ If we could but manage to live in joyfully as they sprang to the other side.
some sort of dwelling up among the A second and third plank were laid
branches of those grand, noble trees, beside the first, and when these were
I should feel perfectly safe and happy. carefully secured to the ground, and
We should be safe up there from the to the trees on each side, we very
jackals ' visits during the night." quickly placed short boards side by side
The idea was adopted. Another visit across the beams, the boys nailing them
was paid to the wreck for planks, so lightly down as I sawed them in lengths.
that a bridge could be made across the When this was done, our bridge was
stream that flowed into the sea near pronounced complete.”
the landing-place. The distance over A vivid account is given of the
the stream was measured by first tying removal of the little party to the new
COUSALA
CUCINA

a stone to a string, throwing the stone place of residence, and of the building
LEA
LLC
KLED

across, and then measuring the line. of the “ nest” among the trees. The
This was Ernest's happy suggestion . new home, which was built in the
W THE BOYS AND THEIR FATHER BUILT branches, and reached by means of a
HºwA BRIDGE ACROSS A RIVER rope ladder, was called Falconhurst.
“‘ Adopting it,” says his father, " we The old spot on the seashore, where the
speedily ascertained the distance across family found a safe place to store their
to be eighteen feet . Then, allowing gunpowder, they named Tentholm .
three feet more at each side, I calculated As the days wore on , each was made
twenty - four feet as the necessary memorable by the discovery of some
length of the boards. The question as new animal or bird or vegetable or
to how the planks were to be laid across fruit, the uses of which , or the habits of
was a very difficult one to solve. which , gave them much to talk about.
CENY
1918
 -THE SWISS FAMILY ROBINSON - mamanM
To enable the journey between Tent- it exploded, it should blow out the
holm and Falconhurst to be made with side of the vessel next which the
comfort, especially when stores were pinnace lay.
being transferred , a sledge was made, “ Then , securing it with chains, that
and to this the cow and the ass were the recoil might do no damage, I told
harnessed. Repeated visits were made the boys I was going ashore earlier than
to the wreck , usual , and
THE WAY THEY GOT THE PINNACE OUT
whence fur calmly desired
ther invalu them to get
able stores of into the boat .
all kinds were Then , lighting
landed a match I had
A great prepared ,
discovery was which would
a pinnace , burn some
which they time before
found in reaching the
parts, with powder . I
rigging and hastened after
fittings com them with a
plete, even to beating heart,
a couple of and we made
small brass for the land .
guns. They " We brought
put the pin the raft we
nace together had built close
in the hold of in shore, and
thewreck . “ It began to un
seemed as load it . The
though the other boat I
graceful vessel did not haul
had awakened up, but kept
from sleep , her ready to
and was long put off at a
ing to spring moment's
into the free , notice . My
blue sea , and anxiety was
spread her unobserved by
wings to the anyone , as I
breeze I could The happiest find in the hold of the wreck was a splendid pinnace, or listened with
not,” says the small sailing boat, which had been packed away in parts to be put s trained
narrator , re- together ashore. The father and his sons soon fitted it together in nerves for the
ferring to the
completion thehold
of done ofthewreck,butfora
at last timewerebafiled
by blowing away the to getit
sideof the bigship without. Thiswas e xpected
gunpowder. sou n d . It
the building of the pinnace , “ bear to camera flash - a mighty roar — a grand
think thatour success, so far, should burst of smoke ! My wife and children ,
be followed by failure and disappoint- terror-stricken , turned their eyes to
ment. Yet no possible means of setting ward the sea, whence the startling noise
her free could I conceive , and I was came, and then, in fear and wonder,
almost in despair, when an idea occurred looked to me for some explanation .
to me which , if I could carry it out , " Perhaps ,' said the mother, as I did
would effect her release without further not speak — perhaps you have left a light
labour or delay . burning near some of the gunpowder,
Without explaining my purpose , I and an explosion has taken place .'
got a large cast-iron mortar, filled it “ Not at all unlikely,' replied I
with gunpowder, secured a block of oak quietly. ' We had a fire below when
to the top, through which I pierced a we were caulking the seams of the pin
hole for the insertion of the match , and nace. I shall go off at once and see what
this great petard I so placed that , when has happened . Will anyone come ? '
LOOTUIT
1919
 -THE CHILD'S STORY OF FAMOUS BOOKS
“ The boys needed no second invita- mother and little Franz had not
tion, but sprang into the boat, whilst been idle .
I lingered to reassure my wife by " "We don't frighten people by firing
salutes in honour of our performances,
whispering a few words of explanation.
Then , joining them , we pulled for the
said the mother, although, by and by ,
wreck at a more rapid rate than we I , too , shall want a fire in a peaceable
ever had done before . form .'»
HOW THE PINNACE LAY UNHARMED AMID
TSCENE OF RUIN Life proceeded very happily . Sunday's
were carefully observed . The boy's
“ No alteration had taken place in up the
were encouraged to keepNo practice
the side at which we usually boarded of athletic exercises . man , " in
her, and we pulled round to the further the father's opinion, “ can be really
side, where a marvellous sight awaited courageous and self-reliant without a
us . A huge rent appeared, the decks consciousness of physical power and
and bulwarks were torn open, the water capability .”
was covered with floating wreckage The family learnt to provide them
all seemed in ruins . selves with things to wear. By degrees
“ The compartment where thepinnace they led water to Falconhurst from the
rested was fully revealed to view . stream . They learnt to make candles
There sat the little beauty, to all ap- from beeswax and berries. For winter
pearance uninjured, and the boys, quarters a cave was fitted up. A cottage
whose attention was taken up with the was also built. A stranded whale
melancholy scene of ruin and confusion afforded additional diversion and profit .
around them , were astonished to hear Among the books taken from the wreck
me shout in enthusiastic delight :
were several grammars, so that various
· Hurrah ! She is ours ! The lovely languages were studied.
pinnace is won. We shall be able to
launch her easily after all ! ' ” WHYHFRITZ LEFT THE ISLAND WHILE
THE OTHERS STAYED THERE
The pinnace was not injured at all,
and by means of rollers, levers, and At the end of ten years much know
pulleys was successfully launched .' The ledge of thecountry and its wild animals
father and sons, having secured the prize, had ben gained , and the family possessed
went back to Tentholm , and accounted farmsand farmyards. One day, aa memor
for the explosion, saying that, having able day, Fritz made his way to an is
blown away one side of the ship , they land , where he found the daughter of a
would be able to obtain the rest of its British officer, who had been wrecked ,
contents with a very few days' more work. and who had lived there for three years.
FTTI NG OUT THE PINNACE FOR ITS Her name was Jenny Montrose .
VOYAGES ROUND THE ISLAND Some time after the family was joined
66
These days were devoted to com- by Miss Montrose, an English brig
leting the rigging, the mounting of was seen , and visited in the pinnace,
her two little brass guns, and all and it transpired that the captain had
necessary arrangements about the pin- been cruising in search of possible sur
nace. It was wonderful what marvellous vivors of the vessel in which Miss
ardour was awakened by the possession Montrose had been a passenger , and
of a vessel armed with two real guns. survivors from which had reached
The boys chatted incessantly about Sydney. In the end the father, mother,,
savages, fleets of canoes, attack , defence, Ernest, Jack , and Franz decided to
and final annihilation of the invaders. remain in the colony they had founded ,
I assured them that , brilliant as their where all had been so happy, and which
they named New Switzerland .
victories would doubtless be, we should
have good cause to thank God if their Fritz elected to go to England with
fighting powers and new -born valour Miss Montrose, to whom he was engaged
were never put to the test. to be married. And to Fritz the father
“ Great was the surprise and delight entrusted his journal wherein was set
of the mother when the beautiful little down the story of which only an outline
vessel was taken round to the shore, a has been given here.
salute being fired from the guns as the The next stories of Famous Books begin
bay was entered . Meanwhile, the on page 2025 .
WEYTTETTAZITTO VITTI AUTOZEIRO EM TERMOIZITKYUTLU TUTTOMIZ
1920
 THNGS TO MAKE
THINGS TO DO

PAINTING WITH STENCILS

HOW TO MAKE A BEAUTIFUL TABLECLOTH
It is possible, of course, out all detail . It will look
to ornament a table CONTINUED FROM 1824 something like picture i ,
cover with all sorts of and be about four inches
beautiful work , but one long from top to bottom .
of the simplest and most effective ways is Now go round the outline of each leaf and
to stencil a pattern to form a border. petal , as is shown in picture 2, enclosing
Stencilling is a type each portion of leaf and
of decorative painting. petal in a separate
It is used upon walls space . When we have
and ceilings as well as done this, and made all
upon smaller things, the lines between the
such as curtains, book spaces quite even in
covers , dresses , width , we must shade
cushions, and so on . in each space with
Many big buildings, pencil - lines - picture 3
like concert-halls and shows us how-as a
churches, are decorated guide to the next step .
inside entirely by sten 1 2 3 Next, get a sharp pen
cilling, but it is also knife ; lay the paper on
quite easy to make sim Preparing the stencil place a sheet of glass and
ple little patterns for carefully cut out each
borders , and with them to decorate little shaded -in piece, going round the outline
things of our own . But how is it done ? with the point of the knife , and keeping
First of all we must understand what the paper pressed firmly on the glass.
is meant by a stencil plate." It is simply Be very careful not to cut beyond the
? piece of stiff paper with a pattern cut shaded portion .
out of it . The pattern is so arranged When each little piece is cut out, we
that , when the plate " is laid on any have made our first stencil plate. But
piece of material, colours can be painted before we can use it we must get a penny
through the holes righton to the material, worth of knotting " varnish from the
in the exact shape of the cut-out pattern. oil-shop and paint over both sides of the
There are three great advantages in this plate. " The varnish will harden and pre
method of painting : The outline of the Stencil vent paint soaking into the plate and
pattern is always very neat ; the pattern brush rotting it. When both sides are varnished
itself can be re we must hang it up
peated any number to dry, either near
of times (or on any the window or in
other material) the open air. Sus
from the same pend it by a thin
plate ; and beauti string loop. put
ful shaded effects through a pinhole
can be obtained
very easily.
Now weare going
to see how to make
a stencilled border.
SE in one corner, and
see that it does not
touch anything, for
it is now rather
sticky. We must
Choose a simple not use it till it is
flower - say, a tulip dry and hard .
—and draw it care- Festoon of apples and leavesused to decorate a lamp-shade brushes
The tokind of
use are
fully on a piece of
rather stout cartridge paper. Draw it as short, round , stumpy ones of soft hog-hair ;
simply and severely as possible, leaving they cost ad. each, and can be bought
оо

19951
1921
 umrerCOLTELLE ICOG
-THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO CONCOURS
the plate, replace it over one ofthe guide
at any oil-shop. Use ordinary artist's
water-colour paints in pans. These also marks, and continue to paint. Probably we
cost ad. each. shall find that about nine tulips will space out
Now we must begin to think about the well in a yard length — four on each side of the
table-cover which we are going to make. centre one. When we have done the other
Buy a piece of casement cotton, which will sides and hemmed the edge, our cloth will
cost about 672d . a yard at be finished, and look very
a “ furnishing draper's.” charming, well worth a
Choose a soft green great deal more than 6 %2d.
colour, and cut it into a If we keep our plate
yard square. Straighten carefully pressed between
out one edge, and with the leaves of an old book ,
drawing-pins fix it to a some other time we shall
drawing-board or a fat Laurel-leaf curtain border be able to use the design
table. Find the middle for something else , per
of the side (that is, 18 inches from the haps a border of tulips round a bedroom
corner ); on that point, and about 3 inches wall , or a single one to decorate a plain
away from the edge of the cotton, lay the holland book -cover. Of course it will be
stencil plate quite straight. The stalk should better to begin by using our plate on an
point towards the edge and the flower in- old piece of stuff, or on a piece of paper,
wards. Fix the plate in position at the top before actually working on the table -cover ;
with two drawing -pins. Slightly then we shall learn how wet the
moisten the paint in the pan, and - paint should be, and how to dab
rub the brush on it , then with properly. We might also ex
a dabbing action go over all periment with a little shading
the holes forming the design. from dark to light tones of
Choose another colour (and colour.
another brush) for the leaves We must notice the stencil
and stem , and do those in the ling used in any buildings
same way. Then from the which we visit, and have a
bottom gently lift the good look at it ; weshall
plate a little way and soon learn to detect it
peep underneath . We by the separateness of
shall be able to see how each little bit formed
it looks , and whether by the cutting out. Of
we have got our colours How to make use of the veining in a leaf for “ ties " course, if each little
deep enough. piece were not separate
Here are some things that we must try to the design would not hold together in the
remember : plate. The pieces which are left between
1. Be careful not to get the paint too wet. the cut-out portions are called “ ties." We
Never dip the brush in water, but always must always pay great attention to them
moisten the paint itself, then rub the brush when we make a new pattern .
on the paint. There are many ways of using stencils and
2. Always paint with a succession of dabs. making elaborate and beautiful patterns with
Do not use the brush as an ordinary house- them . Sometimes one is used over ancther,
painter does, or the very big ones
you will make a being made of tin
smear and spoil or sheet copper.
the edge of the But these are very
pattern. difficult to make,
3. Obtain the for they require
shaded effect by the skill of an
dabbing more at artist. Neverthe
the base of the less, if we follow
tulip petals than these directions
at the tips. we shall soon be
In choosing col able to make
our, a deep yel many useful and
low ( almost an beautiful little
orange) shadinge patterns for our
into pale primros selves, which will
for the flowers , come in useful just
and a dark green now when we are
tipped with brown beginning to think
for the leaves, about the making
will look well . of our Christmas
Now we have to The stencilled tablecloth presents .
decide how close When once the
we want the next tulip to be, and make a small principles have been grasped, it is no more
pencil-mark on our cotton, the necessary dis- difficult to decorate a wall with many impres
tance away. Space the remainder, along the sions of a plate, arranged as a frieze, than to
side,with tiny pencil-marks as a guide. Unpin make one impression on a book -cover.
Huuuuuuu OUDOLUDILOTU OD LUXUDIO
1922
A PICTURE-FRAME THAT A BOY CAN MAKE
It isbutnota
the difficultmatter to frameapicture,
work requires care and accuracy. length,
the butthe
upper one. lower
The one
sizesa are
littleunimportant.
wider than
The wood of a picture -frame is called the Through the narrowest piece saw-cuts are
picture-frame moulding. This moulding is made to guide the saw as shown in the
picture. Two of these are at an angle of 45
sold in lengths of 6 feet, or longer.
If you look at the end of a piece of picture- degrees, sloping opposite ways. The middle
frame moulding, you will find that, whatever one is square across, for square cutting.
may be the shape of the ornamental surface The moulding rests on the lower part of the
which will be visible when the picture is block , and is pressed against the edge of the
framed, there is at the back of it what is upper narrower piece while it is being sawn.
called a rebate, but what we may describe A mitre-block may be purchased at a tool
as a sunken edge all along one side. When shop or one may be made. It should be
the picture is framed this sunken edge is put made of hard wood, such as beech,
on the inside next the picture, so that it forms The sizes for the four pieces of moulding
a regular depression all round in which the are, of course, taken from the picture itself.
picture and the glass lie. Picture i shows a The inside or rebate edge of the moulding is
piece of moulding cut at the ends to the about a quarter of an inch shorter than the
shape required for making a frame, and side of the picture where it is to touch,
illustrates the rebate. This allows the extreme edge of the picture to
In an ordinary picture-frame the moulding go into the rebate. This length of the inside
is in four pieces,the top and bottom pieces edge of a piece of moulding is called the
being exactly alike in length , and the two sight measurement, because upon this
sides being exactly alike in length. The depends the size of the picture that will show
ends of the different pieces are not cut square within the frame.
across, but are cut to an angle of 45 degrees. The mitres when sawn are not accurate
Although most people know what an angle enough to fit each other as perfectly as is
of 45 degrees means, it may be well to necessary for neat appearance, and there
explain it . The corner of a square is a right fore a plane should be used after a saw. To
angle. If from one M do this properly,
E I
corner of a square to R is MEASUREMENT
T another special ap
T SIGHT R pliance, called a
the opposite corner M
I E
of the same square REBATE mitre -shoot, is re
we draw a straight quired, Picture 4
line, we divide the shows how it is used.
right angle into two The plane is slid on
equal parts, and each 1. Picture -frame moulding cut to shape its side, and the
half is an angle of moulding bears
45 degrees. Builders of Modeltown have against a piece of wood put on at the angle of
had explained to them on page 217 how to 45 degrees. This ensures the mitred ends
make angles of different sizes, and by being planed to the correct angle, and if the
following the instructions given there it will plane-iron is set carefully it will cut square
be easy to draw an angle of 45 degrees in the vertical direction . Without a mitre
when we wish to cut the picture moulding shoot it is quite possible to plane or pare the
into the necessary lengths . The carpenter mitres accurately, but it is not easy, and
who wishes to mark wood to an angle uses a there is risk of injury to the edges of the
bevel , such as is seen in picture 2. moulding. Plain moulding that can be
A neat turned
picture
frame
over on

S
its face
E on the
depends R
E
upon the ; E
G mitre
ne at : D shoot
ness of m а у
the mi h a v e
tres or both its
corners , ends
and the planed
ends 2. Using the bevel
in the
must be 8. Using the mitre - block
position
sawn very exactly and put together very shown in picture 4, but generally , it is
exactly. If the moulding is plain with a necessary to turn the shoot round and work
surface that is flat or nearly flat, it may be the plane with the left hand for one end.
possible to cut the corners to the proper Mitre -cutting machines are useful , but are too
angles ; but if the moulding is irregular or expensive for anyone who is not constantly
ornamental,this may not be possible without framing pictures.
using whatis called a nitre-block, such as is Frames are held together by glue and
shown in picture 3. nails at their corners, and also by paper,
A plain mitre- block consists of two pieces which is generally glued either round the
of wood nailed together, both of the same edges or all over the back to keep out dust
1923
1 X D 31
 THINGS TO MAKE
and strengthen the frame. After the mitres
are cut, the four pieces should be placed in
position, to be sure that all the corners fit
properly . There are then two different ways
in which the gluing and nailing maybe done. 6, however, is easy and satisfactory for
Of course, if corner-cramps or an entire frame- ordinary work of moderate size. A loop is
cramp is to be used, that will simplify the
work ; but we will suppose the frame is to be
put together without
these appliances. The
simplest, quickest, and
roughest way is shown
in picture 5. One piece
of "moulding is gripped
in a vice tightly enough
to resist the force of
hammering the nails into
its end,and then the glue 4. Using the mitre- shoot
is applied and the next
piece of moulding held in position and nailed
to it. The best vice for the purpose is an
iron one, but a piece of wood or cardboard
should always be put between the iron jaw
and the outer edge of the moulding in order
not to injure thelatter. On the inner edge
the vice- jaw gripsin the rebate where marks
of the vice on the wood will not matter.
Fine wire nails should be
used, and holes bored for
them with a bradawl through
mitred
the firstinto piece, and
slightly the end. grain of
the second. As the hammer
ing is likely to cause the ,
first mitred piece to slip
inward a little at the joint,
the nailing should begin
with the first piece too far
out. A side and end of the
frame are joined in this
way , and then the other side
6. Joining the corners
and end similarly. After
this the two remaining corners may be done
without the vice, if preferred, but to avoid
risk of injury to the joints already secured it
is safest to continue with the vice.
The other way of putting a frame together
is first to glue the parts and then cramp
them together , leaving them for a few hours
until the glue has set before putting in the nails.
This is slow , and
some means of
cramping is neces
sary, but a neat
result is more cer
tain, for by the other
method the parts
are liable to shift
outof exact position
while the nails are
being driven .
Without special
cramps the simplest 6. Binding the picture -frame
way to bind the
frame together while the glue is setting is
to make four blocks to fit the corners,
and to tie string round the outside as
shown in picture 6. A flat surface is
cleared to lay the frame on ; glue is applied
to all the mitres ; they are quickly placed
together with the blocks outside, and then
AND THINGS TO DO
the string is tied round as tightlyas possible.
Sometimes it is not tied very tightly at first,
but means are provided for straining it after.
The method of tightening shown in picture
formed at one end of the string, and the
other end is pulled through this ,so that it
can be strained tightly
simply by pulling. It is
then necessary to secure
the end of the string to
prevent it from loosening
again . This can be done
by winding it a few times
round nails in one of the
corner -blocks as shown.
If glass is used it
must fit easily into the
rebate. The picture is placed face down on
the glass, and generally a sheet of clean
brown paper is placed on the back of the
picture. Then the backboard, which is a
thin piece of wood of the same size as the
glass, is put in and secured by driving fine
wire nails horizontally into the moulding,
leaving their heads standing out a little way,
so that they keep the back
board pressedagainst the
picture-back. Brown paper
is generally pasted either
over the joints only or over
the entire backboard and
frame.
Unmounted pictures — that
is, pictures on thin paper not
mounted on cardboard - are
liable to become wrinkled ,
and will not lie evenly
against the glass if they
are put in dry. Therefore,
the " backs of such are
always damped, and allowed a few
minutes in which to stretch before the
backboard is put in. This should press
firmly on the picture, and as the latter
driesit becomes strained and always remains
quite flat
It is much easier to make a frame if
metal corner -cramps are used . These
hold the corners
more securely than
the wood blocks
in picture 6, and
the nails can be
driven without
waiting for the glue
to dry. By the
method shown in
picture 5 there is
no waiting, but it
is not easy to nail
the frame together
accurately in that
way. A very useful appliance is a combined
mitre-block and corner -cramp. With this ,
and a fine saw, the corners can be fitted
without the use of a plane or chisel.
Professional picture-framemakers use a form
of cramp which grips all four corners of the
frame at once, and ensures its being square.
1924
 WHAT TO DO WITH A PIECE OF PAPER
A HAT,, A BOAT, AND
Haveyouevertriedhowmanytoys can be Turn up the corners e, one on the one side
made out of a sheet of paper With a
little practice and skill we can convert a plain
sheet of paper into any one ofquite a number
of delightful little toys. Shall we begin with
the simplest of all, and learn to make a paper
hat like that which you see in picture 3 ?
Take a sheet of paper - either plain or
coloured, or even newspaper will do-about
nineteen inches long and fourteen inches
wide ; fold it in half to look like picture 1 ;
turn up the corners AA until they meet
below B as in picture 2 ; turn down the top
pieces marked B, one on the one side of the
A PARACHUTE
and the other on the other side, to meet point
c, so that we again form a triangle. Once
more hold the sides of the triangle and pull
out to form a square as in picture6. Finally,
hold corners GG with thumb and first finger
of each hand and gently pull out right and left
until the boat is complete, as in picture 7:
Another very simple toy to make is a
paper parachute. Take a smooth, square
piece of tissue-paper and fold it from corner
to corner, making a triangle as in picture 8.
Fold corner c to B ; again fold in the same
way froni corner to corner and fold in half as

8
AA

8 С

MAKAMU

7. 10 11

How to fold the paper for making the hat shown in picture 3, the boat in picture 7, and parachute in picture 11
triangle and the other on the other side. in picture 9. Take a pencil and mark curved
Arrange the corners that stick out neatly by line as shown by the dotted line in picture 9 ;
tucking one inside the other, and the hat is then , with a pair of sharp scissors cut through
complete. all thicknesses of the paper round this line.
To make a cockade for our hat, cut a Bore a hole at D with a stiletto ; open out the
strip of paper as shown in picture 4, fold it paper, when it will look like picture 1o.
in three, and push it in between the folds Wemust now get sixteen threads of cotton
as in picture 3. of equal length ; fasten one through each
A paper boat is built up from a paper hat. hole in the paper, bringing the loose ends
When the hat is complete, we hold each together below . Fasten these together and
side of the triangle in the middle with the attach a small piece of cardboard or stiff
thumb and first finger of each hand, and folded paper as ballast. Our parachute isnow
carefully pull out until the figure becomes complete, and if taken out of doors on a windy
square (double, of course), as in picture 5. day it will sail up a considerable height.
HOW TO MAKE A LAVENDER BOTTLE
If youwant to make alavenderbottleyou whole length of the cotton -wool, and tie them
must buy a bunch of the sweet-smelling firmly at the end of this, keeping them about
lavender -- that is, if you are not fortunate the same distance apart round the centre.
enough to have a bush of it in your garden . Next you must take a piece of “ baby ”
Cut off the heads of the lavender sticks and ribbon of any pretty colour, about two yards
place them in a small piece of cotton-wool about long, and, with the help of a bodkin , thread it
four inches long. Roll in and out the sticks-
up the cotton -wool, under one and over
and tie it tightly round the next, round and
with a piece of cotton , round from top to
keeping the top and bottom until the
bottom tighter than whole of the cotton
the centre. This is the foundation of the wool is completely covered. Be very careful
bottle. Then take an uneven number of the not to get the ribbon twisted or the effect
lavender sticks, 9, 11 , or 13, and cut them to will be spoilt. Finish off the ribbon firmly
exactly the same length . Place the ends of the at each end with a needle and cotton, and
sticks round the rolled -up piece of cotton- cover it with a little ribbon bow of the same
wool, about half an inch down, and tie them colour. Tie a piece of ribbon round the ends
very firmly round with cotton. Then bend of the sticks, about a couple of inches from the
the long ends which are left back over the bottom , and your lavender bottle is finished.
1925
 THE WANDERING HALFPENNY
There is a littleroundbox, known in the direction the coin has no room to move, and
toyshops as the “ halfpenny box, ” which
has the power to make a halfpenny placed
within it disappear at command, coming back
again when we desire that it shall do so.
This box, neatly turned in polished boxwood,
can be bought for sixpence ; but, if we prefer
g
it , we can make a box to answer the
samepurpose forourselves — in fact,
it will need very little making.
To start with, we must get a
pill-box of wood or cardboard, as
seen in picture 1 , and of such size
that a halfpenny lying flat inside
it will exactly coverthebottom ; 1. The halfpenny box open
If the box is of cardboard it will
serve as it is, but if it is of wood we must
line it insideat the bottom with paper, pasted
down smoothly. For the sake of uniformity
it is as well to line the inside of the lid in
the same way. We must then take a half-
penny, and cover one side of it with the same
sort of paper, trimming it nicely round the
edges. The coin thus treated will on one
side look like an ordinary half
penny, but on the other like a
mere round of paper or card
board .
To show the trick , we borrow
a halfpenny. After it has been
handed to us, we say that some 2. The tin tube
one may like to see the box, and
we hand it round for inspection. While the
general attention is thus occupied , we secretly
exchange the borrowed coin for the prepared
one . This we must have concealed before-
hand in the right hand, held, by bending the
fingers slightly, against the lower joints of
the second and third fingers. We lay the
prepared coin, papered side downwards, on
the table, where all can see it.
The borrowed halfpenny we
deposit secretly somewhere
just out of sight, but where we
can instantly get at it again
when we wantit - say, behind
a book or other object that
ME
lies handy. It is surprising
how small an object will serve
to screen a coin, provided
that the table is between our
selves and the company, as it
always should be when we
areconjuring.
Having got so far, we take
the open box in the left hand ,
and the prepared halfpenny
between the forefinger and
thumb of the right, keeping
the uncovered side towards
the company, and place it in 3. The ball of wool with tubeexchanged the halfpenny as
the box, but in doing so we
tilt it so that this side shall fall forward. It box has been examined, we say, “ Now I
will therefore lie with the papered side upper- should like you also to see whether you find
most. We close the box, and shake it up
and down, when the coin rattles within,
proving that it is still there . “ Halfpenny,
go ! ” we say. Again we shake the box,
but this time from side to side, in which
1926
therefore cannot rattle. “ It is gone ! ”11 we
say, and, opening the box, we aliow anyone
to look into it. Seeing the paper side of
the coin, they take this to be the bottom
of the box, whic therefore they naturally
believe to be empty .
“ Now ," we say, " I will bring
the halipenny back again ." We
close the box, saying, “ Come !”
Again we shake it, this time up
and down. The coin is once more
heard to rattle, having apparently(
returned from its wanderings. “ It
hascome back and
the box, ,youturn
seethe
! ". We
half
penny quickly , out into our hand, into
which it will fall with the papered side
downwards. All present take it for granted
that it is the borrowed halfpenny, for which
we must again exchange it, gaining oppor
tunity to do so by once more inviting the
spectators to examine the box , which , as
you know, can tell no tales.
This is a very good trick as it
stands ; but we can produce a
still greater effect with it by
apparently conjuring away the
halfpenny from the box alto
gether, and reproducing it some
where else. One very good way
is to produce the real borrowed
halfpenny, marked so as to prove that it is the
same, from the very middle of a ball of wool.
For this purpose we will need another little
piece of apparatus, which again we can
manufacture for ourselves. To do so , we
take a piece of tin 3 inches long by 24 inches
wide, and fold down its longer edges so as to
form a sort of flat tube, just large enough to
let a halfpenny slip easily
through it. " Theedges will be
a little apart, as in picture 2.
On one end of this tube we
must wind Berlin wool so as
to form a ball, the opposite
end of the tube sticking out
an inch or so , as in picture 3.
The wool should be of the
heavy kind that ladies make
antimacassars of, and wound
lightly . This ball, which
should be about 3 inches in
diameter, we put in one of
our side-pockets, or, if we
find it more convenient, we
may have it in a bagon the
table or in a drawer behind it.
Now for its use in the trick.
When we have borrowed and
already described, and the
anything suspicious about this ball of wool.”
As we say this, we put the right hand, con
taining the borrowed halfpenny, into the
pocket or the bag or drawer in which we
have concealed the ball , drop the halfpenny
 THE WANDERING HALFPENNY
down the tube, and draw out the tube. It handled, for the coin cannot escape till the
will need a little practice to do this with one wool is again fully unwound from the middle.
hand ; but if we have taken care to wind the When we work the trick in this way,
wool lightly we will soon be able to manage instead of making the halfpenny reappear in
it. As we take out the ball , we give it a the box , we order it to pass into the ball of
squeeze to close up the opening left by the wool , which we then hand to someone to
tube. The ball in this condition may be freely wind off, say, round aa book or slate.

MEASURING THE HEIGHT OF A TREE

THERE is a veryeasy way to measurethe and perhaps find that it is 6 feet long. Now
height of a wall , or a tree, or a church we multiply the length of the tree's shadow
spire, that any boy or girl can use if he or she (41 feet)by the length of the stick (3 feet),
can do a sum in simple proportion. It is and divide by the length of the stick's shadow
necessary that the sun should be shining at (6 feet) . The answer we get is 202 , and
the time that is all. Suppose that we have we know that the tree is 2012 feet high .
a tree, and the sun is shining, then the shadow If we get odd inches in our measurements ,
of the tree is cast on the ground. We must we can work the sum out in inches instead of
measure thedistance from the extreme point in feet. We can also get the answer — though
of the shadow not quite so cor
to the place rectly - by
right under the seeing how
top of the tree. many steps it
If the top point takes to go from
of the tree is the edge of the
right above the shadow to the
middle of the tree, being care
trunk, then we ful to make our
must calculate steps as nearly
half the dia uniform as we
meter of the can. Then , by
trunk in making measuring the
our measure length of one
ments . Suppose step, we can
that the dis multiply its
tance from the length by the
point of the number of steps ,
shadow to the and find the dis
trunk of the The height of a tree shown by its shadow tance, But in
tree is 40 feet, and that the tree is 2 feet any measurement, whether it be a tree, or a
thick, then the totaldistance is 41 feet (40 feet church, or a wall, we must make sure that
plus half the diameter of the tree ). Now we we take the distance to a point immediately
take a stick, of which we know the exact under the highest point, so that if it be a
length. Suppose that it is 3 feet long. We church spire , for instance , we must make
hold this upright with one end on the ground allowance for the distance between the wall
and notice how far its shadow extends. Then up to which we measure and the centre
we measure the length of the stick's shadow , of the church tower.

HOW THE CHINESE LAID THE RAILWAY

the diagram on page 1823 it will be seen
IN that Railway A takes a short route, passing round
a

the stations of the five railways are the outside of station E and entering it in the
placed near each of the five angles in the five- west. Railway B follows alongside it, but
walled Chinese city . passes round the east and south of station a ,
Now , all the railways come from one and then through the heart of the city to its
direction, and pass into the city station in the north. Railway c runs close
side by side through one of the to railway B until they have both passed
five walls. It will be remem station A ; then it goes north of station D , and ,
bered that they must run making a curved s, enters station c in the
to the stations allotted east. Thus it lias the
to them , which are also USB
longest route of all , for
IE
their terminuses, without it has to go far out of
crossing each other in I wanna A its way to avoid cross
any way, so that there Bing railway D, but the
can be no interference T C grumbling of the com
with each other's rights
or any dispute about WAUA DE pany that runs it cannot
be helped Railway D
bridges. follows much the same
If you look carefully route, but ends at station
at the picture on this page , you will see D. Lastly, railway E has the shortest route
how the railway lines could be taken into of all, for it just runs inside the other lines to
the city. The meth very simple. sta E, and enters in west.
COLLT

1927
 THE GAME OF FOOTBALL
MANLYboys
do in the ought
world tofind betterlooking
than to stand things to
at opposing half-back if the player kicksor
throws it into touch . The forwards line out
a football match ; and thousands of people at right angles to the touch-line, the side
waste precious time in this way. But as a opposing that of the thrower-in being careful
game to play football is thrilling and fine. to mark their opponents. Should the ball
As cricket is the king of summer games , so not be thrown in straight, a scrimmage is
is football the king of winter games, whether formed five yards from the touch -line.
in its Rugby or Association form . Both these A scrimmage is also formed for the break
games call for many things in common , ing of the rule that the ball must not be
such as bodily strength and agility, speed and thrown forward or if a player knocks the
staying power in running, quickness both of ball forward with his handin trying to catch it.
eye and mind, pluck and dogged perse- Another important rule is that players must
verance, and unselfishness and good temper. always keep behind the ball, and if they find
THE RUGBY GAME
themselves, through a big kick from any
player in their rear, near where the ball falls,
The distinguishing feature of Rugby is the or near the opposing players who pick it up,
handling of the ball, which is of an ovalshape. they must do nothinguntil the kicker or any
In this game, too, there are more players one behind him has run up and got in front
than in Association --fifteen on each side. of them . The penalty for breaking this rule
The fifteen players are allotted different
positions and have different duties. There
is Here
a free are
kickthe
for chief
the opposing side.
points to be aimed at.
are usually eight forwards, two half-backs, The
four three- quarter-backs, and onefull-back.
full-back has todefend the goal-line.
He must be able to catch the ball or pick
The object of the game is to place the ball it up as cleanly as a cricket-ball, to kick
on the ground behind the opponents' goal-line, equally well with both his feet either standing
getting it there by carrying it or kicking it still orrunningfull speed, and to make certain
behind, and then follow of collaring his foe,going
ing it up and pressing it for him low . The three
on the ground with a quarters must be very
touch of the hand . The speedy, especially the
opposing side endea two outsides ; they must
vours to prevent this by learn to run together and
collaring the man with be able to catch a pass
the ball, and holding him when going at full speed.
and the ball as well. The half -back needs the
The player must then same qualities, and also
place the ball on the has to be very nimble
ground at his feet and and quick at picking the
dribble it along if he can, ball off the ground. He
but if the forwards on throws the ball into the
both sides have come scrimmage and watches
quickly round him a it, ready to pick it up if
scrimmage is formed in it is heeled out by his
this way. The eight forwards link themselves side, or to collar the opposing half if he gets it
together, put their heads down, and push before he can pass the ball to his brother half or
against the eight opposing forwards, three three-quarter. If itis dribbled by the forwards,
being in each of the two front rows and two he must fall on it if he cannot pick it up.
in the back row of each , this being the most The forwards have, perhaps, most of the
effective formation. The ball is rolled into the hard work, and they, too, must be speedy in
centre of the scrimmage by one of the half- the open game as played to -day. They must
backs, and the front row of each side try to be always close to the ball, dribbling when
hook it with their feet among their eight, who there is no chance of picking up the ball,
usually heel it out to the half-backs behind marking the opposing forwards in the throw
the scrimmage. These, in turn , pass it out to out from touch , and pushing in the
the three-quarter-backs extended a little to scrimmages with all their might. The front
the rear across the field, and these players at row must endeavour to hook the ball when
once race with it towards the goal , endeavour- thrown into the scrimmage , but must be
ing to dodge the opposing three -quarters. careful not to put their feet up too soon.
Should the play be near the goal they are There is one other valuable help to
defending, the forwards often keep the ball getting towards the opponents' goal, and that
in their half and push their opponents back- is kicking down the field into touch. Every
wards, or try to break through, or wheel player should practise kicking the ball accu
rately with both feet. The gameis won by the
round, dribbling the ball in front of them.
The two sides of the field of play are side that gains most points. When a player
called touch-lines, and when the ball is carried, gets the ball across the line it is a try, scoring
thrown, or kicked by a player across one of three, and the ball is taken out into the field,
these it is out of play, and must be thrown in parallel with the touch -line, and placed on
straight by one of the half-backs, the one the ground for a player to try to kick it
representing his own side if a player runs over the goal-posts. If he succeeds, his side
into touch carrying the ball, but by the scores two. A penalty goal scores three.
AUDU
1928
 -THE GAME
ASSOCIATION FOOTBALL
A proper side in Association football must
number eleven players, these being a goal
keeper, two backs, three half -backs, and five
forwards. A game should last about an
hour and a half, and a change of ends be
made at half-time, so that the opposing sides
may have a fair and equal chance should
wind, sun, a slope in the pitch, or any other
such condition give an advantage.
The object of each side is to work the ball
through their opponents goal, but to do this
fairly the ball must on no account be pro-
pelled or purposely touched by hand, nor
must any player use his hands to hold or
impede another player. The only players in
the game who may catch, throw , or strikethe
ball while it is in play are the goalkeepers.
It is very important to observe this rule
against handlingeither ball or opponent, as,
apart from the free kick given against the
side whose player uses his hands, nothing
tends more to spoil the enjoyment of football
than frequent stoppages for these “ fouls,"
as they are termed .
In playing, every effort should be made to
keep the ball within the boundary lines, for
should a player kick the ball over the line at
the side of the playing-pitch, the opposing
side are awarded a throw -in. The player - it
is customary for a half- back to do it — who
throws in the ball must use both hands,
holding the ball above his head, and must
keep both feet firmly down on the ground
with the heels together,
In the case of a player putting the ball
over the line that runs from his own side's
goal out to the corner flag, he places his
side in danger of losing a goal by reason
of the free kick from the corner given to
HOW WAS ROBINSON CRUSOE'S TABLE MADE ?
A PASSAGE in the diary of Robinson Crusoe, And since, during the long time that Friday
which is little known and does not had now been with me, I was not wanting to
appear in the published editions of his story,
is of interest because it
shows how he was able
to turn to account
something which would
be regarded as useless
by anyone who had
not learned the use of a
piece of board on a
desert island.
the passage :
washed up from the
wreck
that
Here is
“ The third day in
the morning, the wind
having abated during
the night, I went down
to the shore, hoping
to find a table and livier
other useful things
theship,
fellofin my way but all
a piece of timber with
some holes in it. My
was
‫ܠ‬ Robinson Crusoe's Table
man Friday had many times said that we stood
sadly in need of a square table for our after-
noon tea, and I bethought me how this piece
of wood might be used for that purpose.
1929
OF FOOTBALL
his opponents as a result of his mis-kick.
On the other hand, by kicking the ball
across the lines running out from the
opposite side's goal
)
to the corner flags, it
becomes " dead," or " in touch ," and the
side defending that end becomes entitled to a
free kick .
In an Association football side the half
backs are the most important players, and
on their cleverness largely depends the
success of the team as a whole. Not only
must the half-backs be ever on the alert to
break up any movement on the part of the
opposing forward line, but their own forwards
will look to them to pass on the ball whenever
possible, and on the accurate passing and
placing of the ball to the forwards to a great
extent depend the side's chances of scoring.
Apart from the actual rules of Association
football, there are certain points well worth
cultivating by the boy who wishes to become
a really useful and capable player. In the
first place it is unwise and unprofitable to
one's side to be selfish with the ball. To
play in harmony with the other members of
the side is a more certain way to command
success .
Learn to keepthe ball low when passing and
placing , as kicking the ball high wastes time
and gives the opponents a better chance of
seeing where it is going. Besides, when a
breezy daycomes along,much more progress
can be made by the side that haspractised
keeping the ball near theground. The ability,
too, to use the head as well as the feet is
most useful, and should be practised, as goals
are many a time saved and often scored by
players who can accurately direct the ball by
their heads when , owing to the ball's position ,
it could not be reachedby the foot.
lay a foundation of useful knowledge in his
mind , I told him that
it was my wish to make
the table from the tim
ber I had found, without
there being any holes
in the top thereof.
“ Friday was sadly put
to it to say how this
might be, more espe
cially as I said it should
consist of no more than
two pieces joined to
gether ; bué I taught
him how it could be
done in such aа way that
the table might be as
large as was possible. "
This is the extract
from Crusoe's diary
given byMr.Dudeney in
his “ Canterbury Puzz
les," and the picture
here given shows he piece of wood with its
fifteen holes. How could the square table-top
be cut out of it in two pieces so that the table
should have not a single hole in the top ?
 A LITTLE GARDEN
WHAT TO DO IN THE
There issome delightfulgardeningwork
that may be reserved for this late season
of the year. Already inthis part of ourbook
we have spoken ofthe pleasure ofgrowing
Alpines, or mountain plants. There is a
wonderful charm in making a fitting home
for these little plants that love the high
ground and the cold of the bitter Arctic
regions, where for months they lie buried
under the snow, and then , as soon as it has
left them uncovered, make rapid growth and
burst into masses of Powers.
Of course, we understand that in the
far northern Arctic regions, and also on the
bleak mountain-sides, the winds and
weather are sometimes terrific. That is a
point to notice, and as a result of it, through
long, long ages, it will be found that for the
most part these plants are very dwarf, so
that the winds cannot break and destroy
them. Many of them are beautiful creeping
things that lie along the soil and grip it tight
with sturdy and numerous roots ,for only thus
could they exist. Therefore, when we make
our rock garden, or garden of Alpines, we
shall expect masses ofdwarf plants that make
dense patches of bright
and beautiful colour.
Another point to think
of before we come to the
practical making of our
rock garden is to realise
that plants that love to
grow on the steep sides
of a mountain will be
plants that like good
drainage of moisture from
them , and certainly
should not be asked to
grow in low, moist, water
logged spots. You can
understand that if you
stand and water a hillock An autumn rock garden
some of the water runs away down the
sides, Now, though we must not have
drainage as sharp as that, or our plants
will be burnt up in summer, yet we should
try to raise the position somewhat above the
level, and we may use pieces of stone or
clinker to help us to make a fitting home for
the plants. The stone or clinker is useful in
many ways—it helps to make a beautiful sit.
ting for our plants ; it helps to keep the soil
cool and moist for them in summer, as they
get their roots well under it where it is cool
and comfortable ; and not least is it useful
for those plants that like to cling to the
stone and gradually creep and cover it.
And now, with these words to introduce
so interesting a subject as the making of a
little bit of rock garden, we will consider a
few important practical matters.
We will suppose you wish to devote a
third portion of your little plot to this purpose,
and unless it be very small it is always pic-
turesque to have a pathway running through
the rock garden, so that you have your
plants growing on both sides of you as you
THE NEXT THINGS TO MAKE AND THINGS TO DO ARE ON PAGE 2031
1930 were
MONTH BY MONTH
MIDDLE OF NOVEMBER
walk along. If you like, the pathway can be
dug out, and this may have very decided
advantages,because the soil you thus throw
up, as longas it is good enough, will helpto
give you a raised slope on either side of your
pathway. You need not dig it all to the same
depth, so that, if you wish it, you could make a
step ortwo ; these are always pretty additions.
Alpine plants, although so dwarf above
the soil, often have curiously deep rooting
habits, so that you will see this additional
soil is useful in giving them depth of root
run . When it comes to putting the stone or
clinker into place, you must bear in mind
that it must not merely be laid on the surface,
but embedded in the soil for a few inches.
Just as far as possible you want to make the
rock --that is to say, the stone, or, if that is
not to be obtained , the clinker, which is much
cheaper - appear as if it were really in masses
under the soil, showing through here and
there, to give it quite a natural look .
When you place your stone or other
material, always begin at the bottom of your
slope, and work upwards. Never make too
steep a face to the slope ; throw it back in
ledges, as, though the
plants do not like cold ,
wet positions for winter,
they require plenty of
water during the summer
months, and if the face
of the slope be too steep
very little reaches them
as it runs off, as we have
already seen .
You need not wholly
finish the making of your
rock garden before you
begin planting. Often it
is more convenient to
plant as you go along.
Especially is this the case
with plants that youwant to establish between
two stones placed fairly close together.
You should take a stick' and ram the soil
quite firmly around plants that are to be
planted in these fissures, as they are called,
because the soil settles down, and if it is not
around the roots in ample quantity, of course,
the roots are left bare in this settling process,
and when a dry time comes the plant will die.
These may seem unimportant matters, but
it is in the little things that success is to be
obtained. No detail is too small to heed.
There are a few questions we do well to
ask ourselves at the time we are establishing
our plants : Am I giving this plant a position
in which it has a sufficient depth of earth to
root in ? Am I placing it so that nothing
overhangs, and it is able to benefit by the
refreshing showers of rain ? For of course it is
most important to know that the moisture does
not run off through some opening between
the stones. Another point to remember is
never to work at the making of a rock garden
when the soil is so wet that it sticks together
in lumps and hangs to the tools .
mm
 The Child's Book of
SCHOOL LESSONS

கான

IS READINGCHO

WHAT AN ADVERB IS
I THINK we have had
CONTINUED FROM 1812
A great many ad
enough of verbs, so verbs are formed by
we will leave them . adding the two letters
And now I want to ask you a ques-
6
LY to adjectives, in this way :
tion . “ Are you able to read аa little for
)) Adjective. Adverb.
yourself by this time ? " I hope each BAD BADLY
one of you can answer, “ Yes, thank GLAD GLADLY
you. I can read NICELY ! ” At any WISE WISELY
rate we will suppose that each of you GRAND GRANDLY
has given that answer. Now, look AWFUI AWFULLY
at that word printed in big letters, FINE FINELY
NICELY. You know another word RICH RICHLY
something like it , don't you ? NICE.
There is not very much difference And just one more, so that you can
between the two, but you never say you have learnt one of the longest
use one where the other ought to words in the English language :
be used . How silly it would be if IN -STAN - TAN - E -OUS
you said, Father has given me a IN -STAN - TAN - E -OUS -LY
NICELY book ” ; or, *This ball If you can manage that last word,
bounces NICE .” I think you can manage anything.
What is the difference between them ? Try to make some more up for your
The word NICE tells us something selves.
about a thing. In the sentence “ Father But adverbs are not bound to end
has given me a NICE book ," it tells in LY. Any word that tells us some
us something about the thing called thing about a verb is an adverb. Look
a book, and therefore it is an adjective at these examples carefully :
(look back at page 1173). But The horse gallops FURIOUSLY . SLY.
NICELY tells us how something The fire burns BRIGHTLY.
(6

happens or is done. “ This ball bounces
NICELY ” tells us how the
bounces. The word NICELY belongs
)
to the verb “ bounces,” and so it is
called " belonging to averb," or an
AD - VERB ( the word AD is the Latin
for TO).
So we get this rule, which we must
not forget : Adjectives tell us some-
thing about nouns ; Adverbs tell us
something about verbs.
How do you feel ? I feel very WELL.
ball David fought the giant BRAVELY.
Moses lay SAFELY in the ark of
bulrushes.
We cheered the King HEARTILY.
Run QUICKLY, and you will SOON
be THỂRE .
The shades of night were falling
FAST .
Britons NEVER, NEVER shall be
slaves.

1931
 -THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
If you will ask yourself the question
How , When , or Where " in connection
will each of those sentences , you will
see that the adverb gives the answer.
How does the horse gallop ?
FURIOUSLY.
When shall Britons be slaves ? NEVER .
If you run quickly, where win you
soon be ? THERE . 0
Here are some “ Adverb Verses "
about a boy who has been seen by a
farmer up one of his trees, stealing
apples. You must imagine that the
farmer is waiting at the foot of the
tree for the boy to come down . Each
line, you will find, ends with an adverb.
20
TOM AND NORA
WHE HEN the day came for writing to
Cousin Jack, the children got out
the almanac, and they found on count-
ing the days the letters would take to
go across the Atlantic, and right across
America, they would reach Jack in
time for his birthday.
“ I have been looking at the letters
you wrote to us, mother," said Nora,
and Tom and I have been thinking
what to say in our letters, so that we
can start now ."
“ That's right, Nora," said
mother ; that is sensible. There are
SO many girls and boys who try
to write letters, and all the
keep asking : What shall
shall I say ?
Now , what shall I say next ? until
all the letter has to be made up
for them .”
First Tom and Nora ruled three
short lines in the right top corner of a
sheet of notepaper, two for the address
and one for the date. Then to the
left, lower down, three-quarters of aa line
for “ Dear Cousin Jack ” ; a short line
to the right below that, across the rest
of the page, to begin the letter on.
After that they ruled lines at regular
intervals till near the end of the fourth
page. There they made three shorter
lines, one for " I am ," another for
“ Your loving cousin ,” and the third
for their names .
They were very busy for the next
twenty minutes, only stopping to ask
their mother how to spell the long
words . Tom's little hand began to
ache, but he would not give up, and
He looked at me so CURIOUSLY ,
((
And said, “ What do you HERE ?
But by and by he " FURIOUSLY
Cried out, " Come down from THERE. "
And when I smiled so PLACIDLY
And sat as calm as EVER ,
He grunted, saying ACIDLY,
"Well, I'm not beaten , NEVER. ”
So I waited on COMPLACENTLY,
Though feeling rather ILL,
For the farmer (who ADJACENTLY SILY
Was waiting, waiting STILL)
To go away INGLORIOUSLY ;
But I'm still wondering HOW
To get away VICTORIOUSLY ,
For here we are till NOW.
WRITING
WRITE THEIR LETTERS
tried hard not to make a single blot or
smudge. The letter that Nora wrote
is on page 1933 . This is the letter
that Tom wrote :
3 , Ferndale Avenue,
Upper Norwood, S.E. ,
DEAR JACK , August 5, 1908.
I am writing to wish you many happy
returns of your birthday.
Father gave me a kite on my birthday.
We are going to fly it on Saturday if there is
a nice wind.
Can you write letters ? We do hope you
her can write to us. Your loving cousin ,
Том.
When the letters were finished,
time the children's mother showed them
how to fold the paper neatly and evenly
by doubling it up from the bottom to
lie edge over edge, holding these down
with the left hand while the right
thumb made the crease in the middle .
Then she gave them envelopes, and
told them how to address them, writing
first the name, then the name of the
house, then the town, and then the
country, in four lines going down like
steps from left to right. They addressed
the envelopes to Cousin Jack like this :
Master Jack Osborne,
32, Boston Avenue,
Marysville,
California, U.S.A.
Their mother said it was very im
portant that the envelope should be
clearly addressed, because if the name
was badly written or the number of a
house wrong, the postman would have a
great deal of trouble to find the person
for whom the letter was meant.
1932
 OG XOALIT

erndate dame
Heppur Horwood de
flugust 57908
Duur Cousin Jack
Mother fuas ten
showing and Aww towritu, sto Romund
Sure sending you these lettert.
Hehope they willteach you. Z

in time to wistóyout many happy

zeturns of the day
Do you like Cutifornia ?!Itmust
te muice to fuck oranges. Hey will
Ꭴ

Tzot_GOULUN Den gaurdum . Som T

und Jhave yurdtent,unityron

muiynonette und suutepient:
#hum are you coming to
England ? Wewant to see you .
Doplausewite me u letter a

Joon .

Your loving ToU SİZ E

Nort
1933 20
 SARITHMETICE
MORE ABOUT LONG DIVISION
INIn example
our last lesson we worked a simple
in “ long ” division . We
be the figure for the answer we should
always, before proceeding with our sum,
shall now work another example in multiply the divisor by this figure and
order to explain one or two little diffi- see that the result is not too large. If it
culties which may arise . is, we must try the next smaller number.
Divide 18113 by 59. If still too large, the next smaller than
59 ) 18113 (307 As before, we first that, until we get at the right one.
177 take as many figures of Finally, remember that the remainder
the dividend as will at any stage can never be as large as the
413 make a number bigger divisor. If we ever get such a result, it
413 than the divisor. Here means that the figure we have just used
we require three figures, in the answer is not large enough.
181 . Our first difficulty is to find how EXAMPLES. Divide :
many times it goes .” If 181 had no I. 67961 by 31.
figures following it , it would stand for 2. 36278 by 17.
eighteen tens and aa unit. The point we 3. 1257130 by 65 .
have to notice is that it contains 18 tens. 4. 93744 by 93
Our divisor contains 5 tens. Try, then , 5. 1386641 by 47.
how many times 5 can be got from 18 . 6. 4013753 by 79.
Say, 5 into 18 goes 3. On page 1501 we saw how to take
On multiplying 59 by 3 we get 177, away 5 times 133 from 850 without
which is a smaller number than 181. We
can therefore subtract the 177 from making two sums ” of it — that is, we
181. Remainder, 4. This 4, from did not first do the multiplication of 133
position underthehundred's figure its
of by 5, andthen subtract665from 850.
the dividend , means 4 hundreds ; but, We combined the two processes and
as we have seen , this need cause no obtained the result with less trouble.
trouble : we can treat it as simply 4. Now, by using the same method for our
6
The next thing is to " bring down " long division sums, we shall shorten our
the next figure, 1, of the dividend. This work very much : we shall have fewer
gives 41 ( forty-one tens). Now comes figures to write, and less work to do
our second difficulty. The number 41 mentally. It is therefore very well
is less than our divisor, 59. Still, there worth our while to learn this shorter
is not much difficulty after all ; for it method. After a very few examples,
simply means that with only 41 tens at the process becomes quite as simple to
our disposal we cannot put a ten into us as the method shown on page 1807. In
each of 59 groups. That is, there are fact, this was done for the sake of ex
no tens in our answer . We must there. planation of division, and now that we
fore write o in the answer . do understand division, it will certainly
Remember that after bringing down be wise to use a method which gives so
much less labour.
a figure from the dividend we must always
put a figure in the answer . Divide 80172 by 34.
Having put o in the answer , we bring 34)80172(2358 As before, take as
down the next figure, 3, from the divi many figures as make
dend , giving us 413 . To find the I21 a bigger number than
figure for the answer, we remember that 34 that is, take the
413 contains 41 tens, and our divisor 197 first two . Draw a line
contains 5 tens. Five into 41 goes 8. under them . We see
Thus, 8 appears to be the figure for the 272 that the first figure of
answer. But if we multiply 59 by 8 = the answer is 2. We
we get 472 , which is bigger than 413. have therefore to multiply 34 by 2 and
Evidently, we cannot put as many as take the result from 80. To do this in
8 things into the 59 groups. We try one operation, we say, as on page 1501 :
7 instead. Seven times 59 make 413, so Twice 4 , 8, and 2 make 10. (Put
that 7 is the figure we want. down 2, carry 1. )
This last little difficulty shows us that Twice 3 , 6, and 1 , 7, and 1 make 8.
when we have found what appears to ( Put down 1. )
mmmm
1934
 ARITHMETIC-
Bring down the next figure, I. By
trial, we find that 34 into 121 will go 3 .
To take away 3 times 34 from 121, we
say :
Three 4's, 12, and 9 make 21. (Put
down 9, carry 2. )
Three 3's , 9, and 2 , 11 , and 1 make 12.
(Put down 1. )
Bring down 7. 34 into 197 goes 5. Say :
Five 4's, 20, and 7 make 27. (Put
down 7, carry 2. )
QO
MUSIC CO
THE SPACES BETWEEN THE
ow we are going to think of the notes
Now contained in our little exercise.
We want to see what the fairies are
doing, for they never want us to play word tone much better than step.
without thinking. If they are to give
us their best, we must give them all
our thoughts . Whenever we begin to
learn a little piece, or even a finger exer
cise, we must see how it is made, how it
is built. This little exercise, which we
have named “ The Fairies' Drill,” is
really a musical walk from C to G.
Fairy C's centralhome is the starting;
point, and Fairy G's home on the second
line is the landmark which must be
reached , and the turning-point on the
return journey to our starting- point, C.
Therefore, the two notes to really think
about are C and G.
We will first look at the little steps we
have to take between these two notes .
C and D are not quite close together,
for a little goblin lives between them-
Fairy D's kind friend D flat.
That funny little sign placed before
Fairy D's house w is called a natural.
It is the fairy's way of saying, “ Thank
you , kind goblin , for singing for me.
Now I am at home again , and able to
answer the door for myself.”. This
being so, we press Fairy D's note,
instead of going to the little goblin's
1935
Camera
Five 3's, 15 , and 2 , 17, and 2 make
19. (Put down 2. )
Bring down 2. 34 into 272 goes 8.
Say :
Eight 4's, 32, and 0 make 32. (Carry
3. )
Eight 3's, 24 , and 3 , 27.
In our next lesson , in which we shall
learn more about division, we shall
always use this shorter method for
working out our examples.
NOTES
house. From C to D flat is a very small
step, so small the fairies call it a semi
tone, or half a tone . They like the
SEMI- TONE
al
From D flat to D is another semi- tone ,
SEMI- TONE
65
and as two halves make one whole , two
semi or half tones must make one whole
tone. Therefore, from C to D we have
one big step - one whole tone--because,
though we do not have to play D flat in
(6
The Fairies' Drill,” the fact remains
that his house is there, and we thus
get two semi-tones between C and D.
ONE WHOLE TONE
15
Now we will play those two notes, first
c. then D , and listen very carefully,
after which we will sing them . This
step of two semi-tones is called a major
second, because, first, it contains two
letters, following one another as they
do in the alphabet, C and D ; and,
second, it also contains two semi-tones.
There is a third reason , but we will hear
about that a little later on . Major
means greater, and there is a smaller
second, called a minor or lesser second ,
to which we shall soon come .
The next step is D to E.
 - THE CHILD'S BOOK OF SCHOOL LESSONS
If we really listen we shall hear that difference of one semi-tone ; we have
there is just the same distance between
these two notes as between C and D. So
we have another major second, because
it contains two letters, D, E, and two
semi- tones .
6 16
From D to E flat is one semi-tone, from
E flat to E is another semi-tone ; there
fore the two rules are kept-( 1 ) two
letters, ( 2 ) two semi-tones.
So again we have a major second to
play and sing.ONE
WHOLE TONE
See, we have something quite different
now !
Fairy E and Fairy F live quite clase
together, no little goblin comes between
them, so there is only one little step
one semi-tone between E and F.
makes a great difference when we have
one semi-tone instead of two. We will
play them very carefully , and listen .
The distance from E to F seems much
smaller than from C to D, or from
D to E, does it not ? There is the
PLANDRAWING ARMP3 @
THE WAY TO
ASs a door is a difficult thing to draw ,
we will sketch it first in charcoal,
on white or brown paper, or we can use
white chalk and a blackboard , if we
have one . The best plan of all is to go
out of doors and find a very plain
garden door, from which we can sit a
good distance away and yet see it well.
We will sit exactly opposite the
framework and open the door about
one -third for our first drawing ; and we
will begin by getting the right propor
tion of the doorway, or framework,
first. We learned how to find the
proportion of things by holding the
pencil at arm's length some time ago
in our drawing lessons, and we must
use this way now to see how many
one semi- tone instead of two, so we call
it a minor second -- that is, a lesser, a
smaller second, for minor is one little
step less than major. We still keep
two letters, E, F , therefore a minor
second has two letters following one
another, just as they do in the alphabet,
and it contains only one semi-tone.
Now, once more we will play this :
ONE SEMI- TONE
Listen very carefully, and sing it .
We next have to think about F and G.
We see quite easily by this time that
F to G is a major second, for it contains
two letters succeeding one another in
alphabetical order ; it also contains
two semi-tones. Little Goblin F sharp
comes between F and G
It
so F to F sharp is one semi-tone. F
sharp to G is another semi-tone, there
fore the second F to G has two letters,
and two semi-tones, and has conse
quently every right to its title, a
major second.”
S:
DRAW A DOOR
times the width of the doorway is less
than its height. When this is done
wemust see where the eye-level is.
The drawings on the next page will help
you to find your eye-level, perhaps, but
they willnot show you exactly where
yours will be on your own drawing.
Grown -ups and children do not ever
see things exactly the same.
If the door opens out towards us,
as it does in a room , the side of the door
where the handle is will be the longest
side of all, because it is nearer than the
other side.
It will look higher than the frame
work and lower, too , though we know
it must be even a little smaller, or the
door would not shut.
1936
 - DRAWING

It seems strange that we see things made will show near the hinges
quite differently from what they really instead of near the handle.
are, but it is very interesting and When we have made charcoal sketches
pretty to see things getting smaller or enough to feel we understand howto draw
larger as we move nearer or further the door, we can try to do it in pencil.
from them. Can you imagine big In charcoal drawing we must not use
ships looking quite as large out on the indiarubber. A clean piece of rag used
horizon as to dust off
they do the wrong
when we see parts is
them in the best ; but
docks ? the paper
We can must not be
find out how rubbed . It
much of the is some
door must t i m e s
be drawn enough to
above the blow lightly
framework , on the
and how wrong part
much below , or to tap
by using the the paper
pencil at und er .
Door opening inwards, in charcoal Door opening outwards, in pen & ink neath . We
arm's length
to measure must buy some
with. We must stuff called
make all our " Fixitif ” if we
measurements make charcoal
this way now , Y
drawings good
to correct our enough to keep ;
drawings, but it is blown on
we must always to the paper
remember that through alittle
we do not mea tube, and we
sure for the size must draw on
of the things, " charcoal”
but only to see • paper. We ask
EYE LEVEL
how much EYE LEVEL for “ Michalet ”
bigger or paper at the
smaller one part shop.
is than another . Or, if we like
The lines above it better, we can
the eye - level use a paper
slant down called " Char
wards. If the pas," which has
eye -level is not only to be held
in the middle near the steam
of the doorway of a kettle, and
the lines will not any drawing
slant equally. made upon it
If the eye The finished door, in charcoal or
level is above drawn in pencil chalk is fixed so
the middle of the door, which will that it cannot be rubbed off.
slant most — the top of the door, or If our door looks well we will try to
the bottom ? put something else into the sketch to
If the door opens outwards, away make a picture - a man or a woman
from us, the side where the handle is coming through it, or something easy
will be the shorter, and the thickness like a bucket or a watering-can, or flower
of the wood of which the door is pots near the door -post.
1937
 Creare

LITTLE PICTURE -STORIES IN FRENCH

First line : French. Second line : English words. Third line ; As we say it in English .
(
Un jour Maman nous fait venir et dit : " Nous allons demeurer un an à Paris.” >

One day M amma us makes to come and says : “ We go to dwell a year at Paris.”
One day Mamma calls us, and says : “ We are going to live in Paris for a year .'
" Pourquoi ? " dit Jeannette. " Papa a des affaires ici. Etes-vous contents ? ”
(0
Why ? ” says Jenny. “Papa has some business here. Are you content ? "
6
“ Why ? ” says Jenny . Papa has business here. Are you pleased ? "
)
Oui . Nous n'aurons pas de leçons.” “ Mais oui ! Une institutrice viendra.”
or Yes . We ( not) shall have not any lessons.” But yes ! An instructress will come.”
“ Yes. We shall have no lessons." "“ Oh , yes , you will ! A governess is coming."

" Comment s'appelle-t-elle ? Est-elle Anglaise ? ” “ Malle. Loué est Française." 6

“ How herself calls she ? Is she English ? ” “ Miss Loué is French ." 66
“ What is her name ? Is she English ? " Mademoiselle Loué is French."
“ L'aimerons nous ? " " Oui ; elle vous enseignera beaucoup de nouveaux jeux."
“ Her shall like we ? ” “ Yes ; she you will teach many of new games.”
“ Shall we like her ? " Yes; she will teach you lots of new games .”
A trois heures nous allons à la gare . Nous cherchons Mademoiselle .
At three hours we go to the station . We search for Miss .
At three o'clock we go to the station . We look out for Mademoiselle.
Enfin Maman dit : Venez, mes enfants ! Voici Mademoiselle ! ”
At last Mamma says : Come, my children ! Here is Miss. ”
At last Mamma says : Come, children ! Here is Mademoiselle ! "

“
Maman dit : "Louis portera votre paquet.” “" Per
Permettez-moi," dis-je.
Mamma says : “ Louis will carry your parcel.”. mit me, say 1 .
Mamma says :: “ Louis will carry your parcel.” “ Allow me," I say.
Dans le paquet il y a une poupée pour Jeannette et une boite à outils .
In the parcel it there has a doll for Jenny and a box of tools.
In the parcel there is a doll for Jenny and a box of tools.
“ Vous êtes très bonne,” crions-nous. J'aime Mademoiselle beaucoup beaucoup.
“ You are very good, ' cry we . I love Miss much much .
You are very kind,” we cry. I like Mademoiselle very much indeed.
THE NEXT SCHOOL LESSONS BEGIN ON PAGE 2043

1938
1
Eng Zht 200 X)
거